IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


k 


A 


// 


^ 


,^ 


A^ 


K<i^ 


%^l^ 

^       f^' 

k    ^ 
%^.^» 


^ 


I , 


IX) 

1.25 


"IB  |M 

!![   U£    |2.0 

1.4    11.6 


.Sciences 
Corporalion 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTIR.N.Y.  MSIO 

(71«)i73-4S03 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Instituta  for  Historical  IVIicroraproductiona  /  Inatitut  Canadian  da  microraproductions  historiquas 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notaa/Notas  tachniquaa  at  bibliographiquaa 


Tha  c< 
totha 


Tha  Inatituta  hat  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibliographically  uniqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction,  or  which  may  aignificantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathod  of  filming,  ara  chacicad  balow. 


D 


D 


D 
D 


D 


Colourad  covara/ 
Couvartura  da  coulaur 


I     I   Covara  damagad/ 


Couvartura  andommagAa 

Covara  raatorad  and/or  laminatad/ 
Couvartura  raatauria  at/ou  paliiculAa 


T~~^   Covar  titia  miaaing/ 


La  titra  da  couvartura  manqua 

Colourad  mapa/ 

Cartaa  gAographiquaa  an  coulaur 

Colourad  irk  (i.a.  othar  than  blua  or  black)/ 
Encra  da  coulaur  (i.a.  autra  qua  blaua  ou  noira) 

Colourad  plataa  and/or  iiluatrationa/ 
Planchaa  at/ou  iiluatrationa  an  coulaur 


D 


Bound  with  othar  matarial/ 
Rail*  avac  d'autraa  documanta 

Tight  binding  may  cauaa  ahadovva  or  diatortion 
along  intarior  margin/ 

La  tB  liura  aarria  paut  cauaar  da  I'ombra  ou  da  la 
diatortion  la  long  da  la  marga  IntAriaura 

Blank  laavaa  addad  during  raatoration  may 
appaar  within  tha  taxt.  Whanavar  poaaibla.  thaaa 
hava  baan  omittad  from  filming/ 
II  aa  paut  qua  cartainaa  pagaa  blanohaa  aJoutAaa 
lora  d'una  raatauration  apparalaaant  dana  la  toxta, 
mala,  loraqua  cala  Atalt  poaaibla,  caa  pagaa  n'ont 
paa  4t«  fiimAaa. 

Additional  commanta:/ 
Commantairaa  aupplAmantairaa: 


L'Inatitut  a  microfilm^  la  maillaur  axamplaira 
qu'il  lui  a  AtA  poaaibla  da  aa  procurer.  Laa  dAtaila 
da  cat  axamplaira  qui  aont  paut-Atra  uniquaa  du 
point  da  vua  bibliographiqua,  qui  pauvant  modifiar 
una  imaga  raproduita.  ou  qui  pauvant  axigar  una 
modification  dana  la  mAthoda  normala  da  filmaga 
aont  indiquAa  ci-daaaoua. 


D 
D 
D 
0 
D 
0 
D 
D 
D 
0 


Colourad  pagaa/ 
Pagaa  da  coulaur 

Pagaa  damagad/ 
Pagaa  andommagAaa 

Pagaa  raatorad  and/or  laminatad/ 
Pagaa  raataurAaa  at/ou  palliculAaa 

Pagaa  diacolourad,  atainad  or  foxad/ 
Pagaa  dAcolorAaa,  tachatAaa  ou  piquAaa 

Pagaa  datachad/ 
Pagaa  dAtachAaa 

Showthrough/ 
Tranaparanca 

Quality  of  print  variaa/ 
QualltA  InAgala  da  I'lmpraaaion 

Includaa  aupplamantary  material/ 
Comprand  du  matArial  aupplAmantaira 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Adition  diaponibia 

Pagaa  wholly  or  partially  obacurad  by  errata 
alipa,  tiaauee,  etc.,  have  been  ref limed  to 
enaure  the  beat  poaaibla  image/ 
Lea  pagee  totalament  ou  partiallement 
obacurciea  par  un  feuillet  d'erreta,  una  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  AtA  fllmAea  A  nouveeu  de  fafon  A 
obtenir  le  mellleure  Imaga  poaaibla. 


Tha  in 
poaaita 
of  the 
filmin 


Origin 
begini 
the  iai 
aion, 
othar 
first  p 
aion. 
or  Mlui 


Tha  la 
shall  c 
TINUE 
which 

Maps, 
differs 
entirel 
beginr 
rights 
requin 
metho 


Thia  Item  la  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  doeument  eat  filmA  au  taux  da  rAduotlon  indlquA  oi'daeaoua. 


10X 

14X 

1IX 

22X 

26X 

30X 

1 

V 

"j 

11X 


16X 


aox 


lAX 


2IX 


The  copy  filmad  h«r«  has  bMn  r«produc«d  thankt 
to  th«  gonorotity  of: 

Library  of  the  Public 
Archivea  of  Canada 


L'exemplaire  filmA  fut  reproduit  grflce  A  la 
gAnAroeIti  de: 

La  bibliothdque  des  Archives 
publiques  du  Canada 


The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contrect  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  Illustrated  Impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  ere  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  Illustrated  Impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  Impression. 


Les  images  suh^antes  ont  AtA  reprodultes  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetA  de  l'exemplaire  fllmA,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
fllmaga. 

Les  exemplalres  orlginaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  ImprimAe  sent  fiimAs  en  commen^ant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  termlnant  soit  par  la 
dernlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impresslon  ou  d'lllustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  salon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplalres 
orlginaux  sont  filmAs  en  commen^ant  par  la 
premlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impresslon  ou  d'lllustratlon  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernlAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  -^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  ▼  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboles  sulvants  apparaftra  sur  la 
dernlAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  salon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  — ►  signlfie  "A  SUIVRE".  le 
symbols  y  signlfie  "FIN". 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  In  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  In  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartas,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
fllmte  k  des  taux  de  reduction  diff Arents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  ttre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichA,  II  est  filmA  A  partir 
de  i'angle  supArieur  gauche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  nAcessalre.  Les  diagrammes  sulvants 
iilustrent  la  mAthode. 


1 

2 

3 

1 

2 

3 

4 

8 

6 

ETHNOLOGICAL   RESEARCHES, 


RESFECTINQ 


THE  EED  MAN   OF   AMERICA. 


€ 


^    i 


Sii!..-k,.'v,Ji(..«.pW» 


— -Jr- 


'1 1'l J'  0 'li M A'l^'lU 'S>! 


HKSI-Kl   TINC,    TIIK 


HISTORY  CONDITION  AND  PROSPECTS 


D  '^'  'J.'  II  "i: 


I  >'  i)  I  A  >v  ^r  iM  h  ii 


'o  (^r  iii(>  I'  A' rr  m  d  .^n'Ai'  ii 


I V ) 


/>  /ArAv/  >'/////  /'/r/'t//;//  ////,///■   ///, 


•111"'  lion  -.1   ihr    BUREAU  or  INDIAN  AFFAIRS 

ii  y  iJ  £  j^-j  ;i  y  ii .  c  i;  u  d  d  i  c  ii  >\  /  t 


|tci'  acl   nl'  Cuinilc 


i.U. 


Illiisliiih'd  liv 
S    KASTM  AN  ,  (   APT.  IS,  AUMV. 


I'lll'lisln'll   liv    .Mlllinlily   III    (' 

I'.Ml    II. 


nl|i>i(>ss. 


I'Mii.Aiii:  i.imiia: 


II  I'i'iN'"  rr.i.iiAMiic)  ,\  to. 


lesi^' 


INFOKMATION 


BESPEOTINO     THE 


HISTORY,  CONDITION   AND  PROSPECTS 


n  F   T  II  r. 


INDIAN  TKIBES  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES: 


COLLECTED  AND  PREPARED  UNDER  TUB  DIRECTION 


or  TnE 


BUREAU  OF  INDIAN  AFFAIRS, 


PER  ACT  OP  CONGRESS  OF  MARCH  3d,  184  7, 


BY  HENRY   R.  SCHOOLCRAFT,   LL.  D. 


ILLDSTRATED  By  8.  EASTMAN,  CAPT.  U.  8.  A. 


I^uhlisfieb  bij  liit[ioritij  of  Congress. 


PART  II. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
LIPPINCOTT,    GRAM  BO   &    COMPANY, 

(SUCCESSORS  TO  GRiaO,  ELLIOT  &   CO.) 

1852. 


ruQtod  \y  T.  Ji.  t  1'.  U.  CoUmi. 


TO 


MILLARD    FFLLMORK, 

PKKSIDKNT  OI-'TIIK    ITNITKI)  .STATKS, 

Tin:  (iUKAT  FATiiKR  OF  Till]  im:i)  max. 


Tins  VOLCMK  IS  UKSl'KCTFl'LLY  INS(JKI|{KIJ 


liY  THE 


COMMISSIOXEIl  OK  INDIAN  AFFAIRS. 


NOVEMHKU   12,    1851, 


M^. 


INTRODUCTORY    DOCUMENT. 


Washington,  Augnst  14///,  1851. 
Hon.  Luke  Lea, 

Comminsloner  of  Indian  Affairs. 

Di'iKvtment  of  the  Interior. 
Siu : 

I  linvo  the  honor  to  submit  for  your  consideration,  tlio  (Second  Part  of  my 
investigations  respecting  the  statistics  and  condition  of  the  Indian  tribes  of  the  United 
States,  made  in  conformity  with  the  provisions  of  an  Act  of  Congivss  of  the  3d  of 
March,  1847. 

The  statistical  tables,  to  which  I  invite  your  attention,  taken  in  connexion  with 
those  heretofore  published,  indicate  some  facts  of  leading  imiiortance  to  tlie  welfare  of 
the  Indian  tribes.  The  principles  of  the  census,  wherever  thej-  liave  been  a|)i)liod, 
denote,  that  a  huntor-population  does  not  reproduce  itself  at  a  ratio,  which  can  be, 
even  in  the  most  favorable  circumstances,  accurately  appreciated  and  relied  on  ;  wliile 
it  is  subject  to  sudden  fluctuations,  such  as  do  not  pertain  to  a  fixed  conuinniity. 
The  rate  of  reproduction  is  so  small,  and  the  causes  of  depopulation  so  great,  that, 
initil  the  period  of  their  colonization,  neither  to  increase,  nor  decrease,  but  barely  to 
keep  up  their  numlwrs,  is  the  most  favorable  view  that  can  be  presented.  In  a  survey 
of  two  hundred  years,  so  far  as  facts  can  be  gleaned,  many  of  the  bauds  and  siib- 
tribes  have  most  rapidly  declined,  and  yet  a  greater  number  of  them  have  become 
entirely  extinct.  The  policy  of  pursuing  the  chose  is  so  destructive  to  human  life  — 
so  subversive  of  every  principle  of  increase  and  prosiwrity,  that  it  is  amazing  that 
the  Indians  themselves  have  not  peroeived  it.  But  when  this  fatal  delusion  is 
coupled  with  the  policy  of  petty,  predatory,  tribal  warfare,  as  it  has  been  for  all 

(  vll ) 


viii 


INTRODUCTORY   DOCUMENT. 


the  period  that  wi>  have  been  in  proximity  to  them,  it  is  only  wonJorfnl,  that  of  the 
trilx'H  who  were  in  North  America  in  IGOO,  theiv  i.s  a  descendant  left  to  recoJUit 
their  history. 

The  republic  of  the  United  States  has  had  charjio  of  these  people  three  (piarters  of 
a  century,  (dating  from  177G.)  During  this  jx'riod,  it  is  demonstrated,  that  the 
estimates  of  numbers  for  the  old  area  of  the  Confederation  have  Ix-en  either  greatly 
exaggerated,  or  the  decline  of  the  tribes  in  immediate  contact  with  civilization,  has 
been  extraordinary.  In  most  cases  which  have  been  examined,  both  causes  have 
manifestly  o|ierated.  But  as  these  seventy-five  years  constitute  the  era  of  their  greatest 
disturbance  from  frontier  wars,  and  as  the  details  from  wliieh  we  nuist  judge,  are  still 
very  imperfect,  the  statistical  facts  cannot  1x5  thrown  into  ivgular  periods  with  tlie 
exactitude  of  inference  which  is  demanded. 

In  17G4,  when  the  efficient  Cohmel  Bouquet  crossed  the  Alleghanies  with  an  army, 
which  brought  the  hostile  tribes  of  the  Ohio  Valley  to  tenns,  he  estimated  the  strength 
of  the  Indian  triljcs  of  tlie  British  Colonies  of  North  America  at  fifty-six  thousand  five 
hundred  fighting  men.  Estimating  five  souls  to  each  warrior,  which  is  found  to  be  a 
reliable  ratio,  tlie  entire  Indian  population  within  British  jurisdiction,  at  that  day, 
was  two  hundred  and  eighty-three  thousand  souls.  No  fiart  of  the  tribes  of  Texas, 
New  Mexico,  California,  Oregon,  or  Utah,  was  included  in  his  estimates;  but  it 
embraced  Hither  Louisiana  and  the  remote  tribes  north  and  west  of  the  Mississipjii, 
known  to  the  French  and  English  tradcr.s,  as  is  perceived  by  the  details  of  the 
schedule.  The  preliminary  estimates,  including  partial  returns  of  the  aboriginal 
census,  begun  in  1847,  submitted  in  my  first  re[)ort,  (Part  I.,  p.  528,)  denote  the 
entire  population  of  the  trilx's,  at  this  day,  in  the  present  enlarged  area  of  the  Union, 
to  be  about  four  hundred  thousand.  From  this  aggregate,  it  is  essential,  for  the 
puriHise  of  comparison,  to  deduct  twenty-four  thousand  one  hundred  for  the  accpiisitioii 
of  Texas  —  ninety-two  thousand  one  hundred  and  thirty  for  New  Mexico  —  thirty- 
two  thousand  one  hundred  IVir  California  —  twenty-two  thousand  seven  hundred  and 
thirty-three  for  Oregon,  and  eleven  thousand  five  hundred  for  Utah ;  making  an 
oggregate,  for  the  newly  acquired  territories,  of  one  hundred  and  eighty-two  thousand 
fi\e  hundred  and  ninety-four.  These  numlx>rs  deducted  fiiim  the  gross  estimates  of 
1850,  before  referred  to,  give  a  population  of  two  hundred  and  five  thousand  six 
hundred  and  thirty-five,  for  the  same  area  embraced  by  Bouquet,  —  denoting  the 
number  of  deaths  in  the  trilx's  to  exceed  the  births  by  seventy-seven  thousand  three 
hundre'd  and  sixty-five,  in  a  period  of  eighty-seven  years :  —  a  ratio  of  decline,  which, 
if  it  could  Ix*  taken  as  absolutely  reliable,  and  continued  to  be  equally  depopulating, 
would  extinguish  the  entire  Indian  population  of  the  United  States  in  about  two 
hundred  years.  These  figures  are  but  approximations  to  the  actual  state  of  decline 
in  the  hunter-life,  and  may  be  adduced  to  show  the  importance  of  statistical  data. 

The  permanent  causes  of  Indian  decline  cannot,  however,  lie  mistaken.      Their 


I 


I;    I 


INTRODUCTORY    DOC  UM  E N  T. 


IX 


' 


progiTss  of  detorioration  ih  (soimi  to  have  liceii  linked,  sis  by  an  indissoliildi-  iliaiii.  willi 
tlieir  scanty  means  of  subsistence  and  non-industrial  habits  and  character,  whtivver 
they  have  been  h)cated,  and  however  they  have  wandered. 

Tiie  cultivated  field,  the  jdough,  and  the  bow,  lire  not  more  luunistakeably  ninrkid, 
iis  tyjies  of  habit  and  condition,  in  the  Indian  than  the  Euroi)ean  races.  And  these 
causes  are  .seen  to  be  fundamental.  They  exist  so  stroiifrly  in  the  minds  of  the  Indian 
triJK^s  generally,  as  to  have  led  them  to  llee  lx>fore  tiie  ai)[)roaches  of  civili/ation, 
as  if  it  were  a  pestilence.  On  the  contrary,  the  influences  of  agriculture  and  fixity 
have  Ik'cu,  in  a  marked  manner,  suited  to  promote  the  growth  of  those  bands  wiiich 
have  iK'taken  themselves  to  tliem  —  to  foster  the  Ix'st  capacities  of  the  man,  and 
to  protect  him  against  the  arts  of  cupidity  and  the  allurements  of  indulgence.  Aljove 
all,  it  has  been  a  ixjlicy  from  the  foundation  of  the  government,  tiiroiigii  the  eras 
of  thirteen  Presidents,  beginning  witli  Washington,  to  demonstrate  to  the  tril)es  the 
folly  of  their  internal  and  external  wars,  as  well  as  the  waste  of  their  energies  in  the 
chase;  and  to  preserve  jieace  on  the  frontiers.  The  first  twelve  sections  of  "the 
Intercourse  Act,"  may  lie  singled  o>it,  in  an  esi)ecial  manner,  as  designed  to  protect 
their  rights  and  interests  again.st  the  whites  on  the  frontier;  and  the  colonial  history 
of  the  most  humane  nations  does  not  furnish  a  body  of  treaties,  laws,  and  public  acts. 
to  protect  an  aboriginal  people,  which  have  been  pursued,  through  every  adverse 
mutation,  .so  perseveringly  and  successfully.  Fixity  of  haltits  and  industry  have  at 
length  crowned  the.se  efforts  with  the  elements  of  success,  so  far  as  i-espects  the  mon; 
immediate  tribes  operated  on,  who  have  been  removed  to  positions  favoring  the 
practice  of  agriculture,  letters,  and  morals.  This  is,  it  may  Ije  afllrmed,  the  position 
of  the  colonized  tril)es,  the  first  steps  to  the  policy  of  which  were  taken  in  1S*J4.  It 
was  a  result  not  to  be  compas.sed  in  a  short  period,  and  it  is  a  iH)int  deserving  the 
attention  of  the  nation;  and  he  must  shut  his  eyes  to  the  evidences  of  the  benign 
eflects  of  civilization  upon  aboriginal  barbarism,  who  does  not  see  in  this  policy,  that 
it  has  been,  to  the  e.xtent  stated,  successful.  The  Cherokees,  the  Chootaws,  the 
Chickasaws,  and  the  Mu.scogees  or  Creeks,  are  the  living  monuments  of  rescued  nations, 
who  are  destined  to  take  their  places  in  the  family  of  man.  The  statistics  which 
belong  to  this  subject,  have  been  sought  with  diligence,  and  notwithstanding  obstacles 
yet  existing,  ai"e  in  the  process  of  successful  collection,  and  will  be  in  due  time  laid 
before  you.     Thus  far  of  the  colonized  tribes. 

With  res]iect  to  the  wild  hunter-trilK's  of  the  forests  and  prairies,  additional  inform- 
ation is  presented  in  section  V.  B.  The  first  part  of  this  relates  to  the  predatory  and 
mounted  trilx;  of  the  Co.manciikes  or  Niiiine  —  a  tribe  which,  by  the  vocaladary  printed 
in  section  IX.  A.,  is  perceived  to  belong  to  the  wide-spi-eading  Shoshonee  stock  —  a 
group  of  tril)es  whose  home  appears,  at  least  from  the  sources  of  the  Mi.s8ouri,'  to  have 


licw'iB  and  CInrkc, 


Pr.  II.  — I 


tf 


u 


\f 


X  INTRODUCTORY    DOCUMENT. 

been,  from  an  early  tiino,  the  Rocky  Mountains.  It  is  perceived,  that  it  embraces  the 
tk'gradod  Bonacks  or  Root-diggers  of  Utah  and  the  Snakes  and  Shoshonces  of  Oregon, 
s[)reading  also  through  parts  of  Texas,  New  Mexico,  and  California.  It  is  probable 
tliat  the  cognate  dialects  of  this  language  cover  a  larger  area,  though  much  of  it  is 
barren  and  mountainous,  than  any  other  stock  of  tribes  in  the  United  States. 

The  second  part  of  the  information  now  submitted  relates  to  the  large  and  widely- 
spread  tribe  of  the  Ojibwas  or  Chipjxjwas,  of  the  Algonquin  group  of  our  history,  and 
secondly,  to  the  great  Prairie  group  of  the  Dacotas  west  of  the  Mississippi.  These  two 
important  groups  of  tribes  have,  from  an  early  epoch,  occupied  much  of  the  central 
and  up[)er  parts  of  the  Mississippi  Valley ;  and  the  former  have  furnished,  by  cession, 
a  large  part  of  the  territorial  area  of  the  Western  States,  as  will  fully  appear  from 
statement  A.  in  part  III.  of  section  XII.  of  Statistics  and  Population,  B.,  herewith 
submitted.  The  Sioux,  or  Dacotas  proper,  have  but  just  (1851)  entered  into  general 
treaties  with  the  United  States,  ceding  an  imjxjrtant  area  in  Minnesota,  which  must 
become  the  theatre  of  several  new  States. 

That  the  hunter  and  non-industrial  tribes  still  cling  with  great  tenacity  to  their 
native  forests  and  native  habits  —  that  they  view  with  distrust,  and  even  contempt, 
the  promises  of  labor  and  letters  —  that  they  glory  in  a  wild  independence  and 
i'reedom  from  restraint,  and  are  fascinated  with  all  the  i'allacious  allurements  of  the 
chase,  your  recent  journey  to  Minnesota  must  have  given  30U  abundant  means  to 
observe ;  and  the  fact  of  their  attachment  to  forest-lifo  is  not  surprising  to  the  mind 
that  contemplates  human  history  with  enlarged  views,  nor  does  it  ofl'er  ground  for 
discouragement.  We  are  but  required  to  persevere  in  our  eflbrta,  and  to  make  them 
broader  and  fuller.  Years  will  be  demanded  to  reach,  with  practical  inlluenccs,  the 
roving  bands,  who  arc  still  strongly  fascinated  with  the  wilderness,  and  who  now  hover 
fitfully  around  the  broad  bases  of  both  sides  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  the  high  table- 
lands of  New  Mexico,  and  the  Sierra  Nevada.  Many  of  these  tribes  will  probably 
perish  ;  but  the  question  of  time,  which  must  develop  results,  cannot  alter  our  duties  as 
a  nation  entrusted  with  the  highest  tjpe  of  civilization,  to  collect  the  data  of  their 
vital  statistics  and  condition,  and  to  spread  them  before  the  people  of  the  country 
and  the  world. 

The  subject  is  one  that  requires  to  be  viewed  from  exalted  points,  and  with 
expansive  feelings.  Facts  before  us  denote  that  the  Indian  ran  be  reclaimed.  No 
new  principles  arc  necessary  to  be  eliminated  —  no  old  ones  to  be  obliterated.  lie  is 
alike  amenable  to  that  law,  which  governs  the  races  of  white  and  of  red  men,  and  of 
whoni  we  have  the  divine  sanction  for  saying,  "  In  the  sweat  of  thy  face,  thou  shalt 
eat  bread."  The  sound  and  practical  experiment  of  one  noble  man,  in  1740,  were 
there  no  other  on  record,  would  demonstrate  this.' 

Fiscal  and  vital  statistics  denote  that  it  is  not  the  curtailment  of  their  territory  that 

'  Hraiiionl.     Works  of  .Toiintlian  EJwnrds,  Vol.  X. 


II 


INTRODUCTORY   DOCUMENT. 


xi 


has  led  to  Indian  depopulation.  It  is  the  ruinous  policy  of  the  trilx\s  of  keepin<i  large 
area  untouched  by  the  plou<rli  and  in  a  desert  state,  that  these  territories  may- 
produce  wild  animals.  Tliey  have,  therelt)re,  perished  rather  from  the  rcjilttiou 
than  the  diminution  of  territory;  and  from  the  excess  of  indulgence,  resulting  from 
mal-application  of  their  large  fiscal  means.  If  any  fact  is  beyond  dispute,  it  is  tiiis. 
It  is  the  standard  by  which,  like  the  fluctuations  of  the  thermometer,  the  momentum 
of  Indian  pi-osperity  or  depopulation  may  Imj  measuix'd.  By  the  statistics  published, 
it  is  shown  that  the  payment  of  heavy  annuities  in  coin  to  the  non-industrial  tril)Os 
has  been  detrimental.  The  small  tribes,  with  large  annuities,  have  constantly 
declined,  as  is  witnessed  in  the  Miamies;  while  large  tribes,  wiiose  funds  are  invested, 
or  tribes  of  equal  ninnbers,  with  minll,  or  no  aiinitificn  at  all,  wlio  have  not  ielt  the 
depressing  eflects  of  the  jwriodical  atUuence  of  these  payments,  have  kejjt  uj)  or 
increased  in  their  nnmlx'rs:  for,  of  all  things  hurtful  to  our  hunter-tril)es,  read^- 
money  is  seen  to  bo  by  far  the  greatest  —  as  if  invested  by  it,  with  the  iK)isoned  shirt 
of  Nessus,  they  seem  tormented  mitil  relieved  from  it. 

Next  to  the  want  of  industrial  habits,  in  the  inter-forest  and  prairie  tribes,  nothing 
has  had  so  great  an  influence,  in  keeping  them  at  the  zero  of  human  society,  as  the 
neglect  or  non-appreciation  of  education.  The  statistics  of  sciiools,  including  the 
facts  embraced  in  the  Annual  Reports  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Aflairs,  are  too 
incomplete  and  fragmentary  to  permit  the  details  to  be  as  jet  submitted;  but  the 
importance  of  the  subject  may  be  deemed  a  sufficient  reason  for  referring  to  some 
of  the  results  indicated.  Indian  education  is,  perhaps  necessarih',  expensive.  If  my 
data  are  correct,  the  average  expense,  owing  to  the  want  of  avidity  for  knowledge, 
which  causes  a  thin  attendance  on  the  schiwls,  exceeds  very  greatly  that  ol'  tiie  same 
kind  of  instruction  in  civil  life.  From  the  number  of  pupils  taught,  in  the  boiirding- 
schools,  compared  with  the  sums  expended,  it  is  perceived  that  the  average  amount 
per  scholar  has  nearly  equalled,  in  some  cases,  that  required  annually  to  carry  our 
students  through  an  academic  course. 

The  statistics  of  occupation  embraced  in  my  first  report  denote  few  natives  as 
having  embraced  any  of  tiie  learned  professions,  or  as  teachers  of  prinniry  schools,  or 
mechanics:  but  we  cannot  decide  that  this  ratio  will  not  increase,  nor  that  tho 
elofiuence  which  has  connnanded  admiration  for  centuries,  in  their  primitive  convoca- 
tions, is  not  destined  to  make  itself  felt  in  the  forum  and  the  pidpit.  The  highest 
talents,  united  to  decision  and  jjractical  energy  of  character,  are  doubtless  required, 
on  every  ground,  in  the  superintendents  of  academies  and  beneficiary  institutions 
located  in  the  Indian  country ;  but  it  would  promise  more  fiivorable  rcsidts  from 
these  nurseries  of  labo\u"  and  letters,  if  we  could  see  tiie  red  man  himself  entering 
more  fully  than  he  does,  into  all  the  departments  of  mental  action  essential  to  the 
reformation  and  reconstruction  of  Indian  society.  What  the  triljes  most  retpiire  is, 
steady  personal  exertions  and  a  deep  personal  interest  in  the  great  probk'm  of  their 


XII 


INTRODUCTORY    DOCUMENT. 


i! 


reclamation.  No  tribes  can  be  substitutionally  taught  the  arts  of  life.  Individuals 
from  amongst  themselves  must  not  only  take  the  ferule,  and  occupy  tlie  de.sk,  but 
they  are  required  to  take  hold  of  the  plough  and  hammer.  It  is  perceived,  in  those 
ti'ibes  which  have  taken  the  lead  in  civilization,  and  who  hold  a  high  pre-eminence 
over,  and  ofl'er  a  noble  example  to  the  rest,  that  these  results,  so  far  as  we  have  Ix-en 
able  to  procure  the  facts,  are  unmistakeable,  and  worthy  of  all  commendation ;  while 
nt  the  same  time,  it  is  lamentable  to  contrast  them  with  the  state  of  the  erratic  and 
hunter-tril)e.'»,  who  raise  no  grain,  and  keep  no  cattle,  but  continue  to  waste  their  time 
and  energies  in  the  precarious  toils  of  the  chase  and  in  plans  of  ferocious  warfare  — 
struggling  without  substantial  recompen.se,  and  pa-ssing  throngh  life  without  a  rational 
object. 

Other  facts  relative  to  the  present  condition,  prospects,  and  history  of  the  triljes,  are 
herewitli  jHVsented.  Tliey  are  suggestive,  in  some  cases,  of  tlie  remedy  for  admitted 
(It'leots.  Often  the  c[uostions  rocpiirc  wisdom  to  adjust;  and  there  are  points  respecting 
wliicli,  indeed,  it  would  i)erliai)s  be  premature  to  form  plans,  until  the  body  of  infor- 
mation to  l)e  SK'ted  on,  has  assumed  greater  nuiturity  and  been  rendered  more  full, 
conipreliensive,  and  complete.  The  character  and  idio.syncracies  of  the  Indian  tribes 
aie  required  to  be  better  understood  and  appreciated.  Modes  of  thought  and  action 
on  their  part,  wiiich  have  Ik'ch  the  growth  of  centuries,  with  the  habits  under  which 
they  were  superinduced,  require  to  Ix)  overthrown;  —  and  we  err,  doubtless,  in  our 
estimate  of  the  period  in  wiiich  a  nation  of  high  progress  can  practically  accomplish 
reforms  in  the  minds  of  a  barbarous  people,  so  peculiar  in  all  their  moral  and 
intellectual  organization  and  forest-training  as  the  Indian  race. 

My  former  report  indicates  the  utter  fallacy  of  Indian  tradition  on  almost  every 
concrete  point  of  their  history,  which  aspires  to  anti(juity,  except  that  emliodied  in 
the  picture-writing  of  Mexico.  Among  the  United  States  triljes,  the  period  is  almost 
entirely  hypothetical  beyond  a  few  hundred  years.  As  a  proof  of  which,  it  may  1h> 
mentioned,  that  tiie  exi)edition  of  De  Soto,  whitih  was,  by  its  striking  incidents, 
.'io  well  suited  to  impress  the  Indian  mind,  has  wholly  perished  from  the  traditions 
of  tiie  large  Appalachian  group  of  tribes  —  a  stock  of  people,  who  are  shown  to  have 
ever  possessed  a<'tive,  energetic  minds,  and  determined  courage.  Their  cranial  develo|)- 
nients,  as  denoted  by  a  memoir  on  the  physical  type  of  the  Indians,  herewith  i)ublished, 
(vide  section  VIII.  A.,)  ai'e  demonstrated,  by  the  most  careful  admeasurements  made 
by  the  late  Dr.  Sanuiel  George  Morton,  to  l>e  suiMjrior  to  those  of  the  Toltecs,  Aztecs, 
or  Peruvians.  The  same  conclusion  of  intellectual  vigor  is  sustained  by  their  powers 
of  numeration,  which  are  introduced  in  the  section  on  Intellectual  Capacity,  (vide 
section  VI.  IJ.) 

In  order  to  construct  the  ancient  history  of  our  triljes,  and  thereby  to  arrive  at  some 
determinate  tiiecjry  of  their  origin,  it  is  deemed  essential  to  arrange  them  into  generic 
groups  of  iamili((s,  between  whom  analogies  of  words  and  syntax  nuiy  be  pointed  out. 


!HIP 


INTRODUCTORY    DOCUMENT. 


nil 


Tliis  six?cics  of  research  lias  coinniantled  my  deoiicst  attention  for  a  loiiji  periiKl,  anil 
a  coinnicncenicnt  of  the  publication  of  the  materials  collected  on  the  sulyect  is  made 
in  section  IX.  A. 

In  submitting  the  tables  of  Statistics  and  Population  (vide  section  XII.  B.)  one 
remark  on  the  expanding  iniluence  and  fi.scal  imiwrtance  of  our  Indian  system  may  Iw 
oflercd.  It  is,  the  striking  progress  of  it,  shown  by  the  number  of  tribes  with  whom 
the  intercourse  is  held;  the  (juantity  of  lands  which  have  Ix't'ii  acquired  by  treaties; 
the  amounts  paid  to  them,  and  the  gross  amount  of  departmental  expenditures. 
For  the  purpose  of  comparing  the  expenditures  of  the  oflice,  the  year  liSlid  has  been 
selected.  In  this  year,  the  amount  of  annuities  paid  to  the  tribes,  according  to  a 
statement  of  the  Secretar}'  of  the  Treasury,  (Period  II.,  Statistics  IJ.,  p.  54-"».)  was  one 
hundred  and  fifty-two  thousand  five  hundred  and  seventy-five  dollars  per  annum ; 
and  the  whole  sum  i)aid  for  pulilie  lands,  from  the  Declaratitm  of  Iiidi'peiidence,  is 
shown  to  have  1x;en  twenty-four  millions  two  hundred  and  twenty-seven  thousand 
dollars.  Taking  a  period  of  thirty  years,  sul)se(iueiit  to  this  time,  as  tiie  era  of 
compari.sou,  which  brings  us  to  18-j(),  it  is  shown,  that  the  natural  growth  of  tiie 
country  and  its  demand  for  new  cessions  from  tiie  tribes,  had  so  increased,  (vide 
Period  I.,  Statistics,  p.  503)  that  the  regular  Indian  annuities  for  the  fiscal  year 
ending  30th  June,  1851,  reached  tiie  large  amount  of  eight  hundred  and  sixty-nine 
thousand  four  hundred  and  forty-five  dollars,  besides  special  estimates,  asked  of  Congress 
to  comiilete  the  payment  of  treaty  obligations  of  prior  periods,  amounting  to  two  millions 
four  hundred  and  twenty  thousand  seven  hundred  and  twenty-two  dollars  and  sixty-six 
cents.  The  sum  vested  for  Indian  account  is  shown  to  be  two  milliims  two  hundred 
fifty-one  thousand  one  hundred  and  fifty-nine  dollars  and  eighty-eight  cents. 

In  the  tables  of  Period  III.  (Statistics,  p.  GOl)  attention  is  called  to  the  quantity  of 
land  which  has  been  purchased  from  the  aborigines  since  the  establishment  of  the 
government;  the  several  tribes  from  whom  purchases  have  l)een  made,  and  tiie 
compensation  awarded.  It  is  shown,  that  from  1780,  when  the  present  ccmstitution 
was  formed,  and  when,  indeed,  the  demand  for  Indian  lands,  other  than  such  as  had 
been  po.sscssed  by  the  British  colonies,  commenced,  there  has  been  purchased,  up  to 
the  year  1840,  where  the  tables  stop,  four  hundred  and  f<n'ty-two  millions  eight 
hundred  and  sixty-six  thousand  three  hundred  and  seventy  acres;  for  wliicli  tlie 
aggregate  sum  of  eighty-five  millions  eighty-eight  thousand  eight  hundred  and  three 
dollars  was  paid. 

The  twelve  years  that  have  passed  since  these  returns  were  submitted,  have  added 
largely  to  the  amount  of  the  cessions  and  the  pa\ineiits  for  the  fee  of  wild  lands 
purchased,  stretching,  as  they  do,  widely  into  the  area  of  the  West ;  and  they  have, 
probably,  somewhat  increased  the  projmrtloii  of  funds  vested  to  those  paid  to  the 
tribes.  But  taking  the  years  1840  and  iS-'iO  as  the  respective  epochs  of  comparison, 
j_lie  proportion  of  money  vested  to  the  amount  received,  is  (omitting  fractions  of 


Ji  i 


XIV 


INTRODUCTORY   DOCUMENT. 


inilliuns)  as  two  are  to  eighty-five  —  denoting  but  little  forecast  in  the  Indian  race,  or 
disposition  to  hoard  their  means.  Even  this  ia  far  more  favoral)le  than  at  any 
other  period,  and  the  majority  of  the  funds  belong  to  colonized  tril)es. 

In  directing  my  investigations  to  the  subject  of  impulation,  attention  is  given  to  its 
varying  phases,  under  the  plan  of  colonization  west  of  the  States  and  Territories, 
commenced  in  1824,  and  to  the  interesting  problem  of  the  ancient  state  of  Indian 
population  in  America  at  the  earliest  periods. 

The  whole  body  of  facts  and  researches  brought  together,  in  the  papers  now 
submitted,  are  commended  to  your  attention  and  examination.  In  preparing  tiiem, 
the  introiluction  of  full  Roman  figures  and  letters,  at  the  heads  of  the  several  primary 
sections,  into  which  the  work  is  divided,  will  denote  the  serial  and  general  j)lan 
which  connects  the  whole,  and  ensures  the  preservation  of  the  order  of  discussion. 

It  is  designed  to  submit  an  authentic  body  of  materials,  illustrative  of  the  history, 
manners  and  customs,  languages,  and  intellectual  capacity  and  character  of  the  whole 
number  of  tribes  now  within  the  territorial  lx)undaries  of  the  United  States;  with 
their  numbers,  means,  condition,  and  prospects.  It  is  intended  to  form  them  into  great 
family  and  ethnological  groups,  on  the  basis  of  their  languages  and  grammars.  Order 
is  thus  sought  to  be  restored,  in  an  enlarged  sense,  where  there  has  heretofore  been 
little  but  confusion ;  and  the  grouping  of  these  generic  stocks  will  impart  a  degree  of 
unity  to  the  subject  which  is,  on  all  hands,  very  desirable.  The  idea  of  covering  the 
United  States,  and  indeed,  the  whole  continent,  with  an  endless  multiplicity  of  diverse 
languages,  which  has  been  advanced,  is  one  which  has  served  to  obscure,  rather  than 
to  elucidate  their  history;  and  is  not  sanctioned  by  the  philosopliy  of  history. 
Already,  it  is  perceived,  that  a  few  stocks  have  originally  overeprcad  the  entire 
range  of  the  Atlantic  coast,  —  the  elevations  of  the  Appalachian  and  Alleghany 
moiuitains,  —  the  great  Lake  basin.s,  —  the  Mississippi  Valley,  —  and  the  vast  prairies 
extending  to  the  foot  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  the  plains  of  Texas,  and  the  banks 
of  the  Rio  del  Norte. 

I  am,  sir. 

Very  respectfully. 

Your  ob't  serv't, 

IIeNUY    R.    SrilOOLCRAtT, 

Agent  Statistics,  JfC.  of  the  Indian  Tribes  of  t/te  United  States. 


i 

I 

l( 

Hi 

i 

CONTENTS. 


1.     GENERAL    HISTORY. 


SYNOPSIS. 

A.  Track  of  Migration rAOE  10 

B.  DisTRiniTioN  OF  Tribes 33 

1.  Appalftcliians 33 

2.  Aclialaqucs 3") 

3.  Cliicorciin  Group  3-, 

4.  Algonquins 3(j 

5.  Iroquois 3(j 

6.  Dacotas 37 

7.  Shoshonccs 37 

C.  Physical  Traits 38 

II.     MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 

A.  Generic  View 44 

1.  Barbarism  a  lapsed  state  of  Man 44 

2.  Definition  of  the  term  Race 44 

3.  Antique  IJeas  of  the  Barbaric  State 45 

4.  Hebrew  Idea  of  it 4;^ 

5.  Noaohian  Epoch ^r^ 

0.  Ideas  of  Historians  and  Travellers  on  this  Subject 45 

7.  Purport  of  this  Review  of  Opinions 4t^, 

8.  Era  of  Decline 4,j 

9.  Influence  of  the  Continent  on  the  Aborigines 41] 

10.  Unity  of  Manners,  Customs,  and  Opinions 47 

B.  The  Constitution  of  the  Indian  Family 43 

1.  Marriage  —  the  Family  Group 4sj 

2.  Tics  of  Consanguinity 4^ 

3.  Totem  —  its  Uses 4,, 

(JV) 


i' 


\\ 


x\i  CONTENTS. 

4.  Goncal();ty  —  AflV-ction  for  Cliiltlivn  4!> 

/).  Self-sacrifice  of  ISiunswah 41* 

t>.  Transitive  Character  of  Names .OO 

C.  FoREfT  Teachings .10 

7.  ChiKlrcn  Early  Instructed  in  the  Arts  of  Hunting  anil  Fishing .lO 

8.  Instance  of  the  Early  Use  of  the  Snare oD 

0.  Hunting  at  large .W 

10.  Spearing  the  Muskrat  (Plate) .11 

11.  Fishing  through  the  lee  (Plate)  .11 

12.  Setting  Nets  through  the  Ice  al 

1;?.  Fish-ilams  of  Poles .'>-2 

14.  Niimi-kow-a-guns,  or  Stone  Dams .12 

l'».  Fishing  with  Scoop-nets ,12 

10.  Shooting  of  Fish  (Plate).     Ilook-fishing .12 

D.  Art  of  Huxtino ,1.S 

17.  Knowledge  of  the  Habits  of  Quadrupeds .LS 

18.  Doer-hunting ,1.3 

10.  Fur-hunting ,V\ 

20.  Ingenuity  of  Tracking .14 

21.  Success  of  Noka  in  One  Day ,14 

22.  Fight  with  a  Moose ,14 

23.  Strength  of  lawba  in  the  Chase 54 

24.  Encounter  with  a  Grizzly  Bear 5.1 

E.  Sioar-Makixo fi,1 

25.  Sugar-making  a  Carniv.il  5,1 

26.  Average  Product  of  each  Wigwam 55 

27.  A  Time  of  Hilarity  and  Enjoyment 50 

F.  War  and  its  Incidents 50 

28.  Its  Fundamental  Importance  to  the  Barbaric  State 50 

20.  Popular  Opinion  directed  to  this  End ,17 

30.  Scalping  (Plate) .17 

31.  Preparation  and  Dancing  of  the  Scalp  (Plate) 57 

32.  Feather  of  Honor  (Plate) 57 

3,3.  Scale  of  Merit  in  its  awards 57 

84.  Trait  of  Wisdom  in  Excusing  Acts  of  Want  of  Courage 58 

35.  Bands  on  the  Frontiers  brought  to  a  High  State  of  Courage  by  Appeals  and  Ad- 
dresses   58 

,30.  War  Parties  are  Volunteers 50 

37.  How  Enlisted.     Strong  Appeals  to  Military  Glory 50 

38.  Character  of  the  Addresses ,10 

•!0.  War-Sungs  actually  employed 60 


CONTENTS. 


G.     The  Wigwam  and  its  Mates 03 

40.  How  Order  is  Preserved  in  its  Circle <'>;$ 

41.  The  Bride  and  her  Husband l>3 

42.  Division  of  Labor *>;$ 

43.  Domestic  Character  of  the  Man 04 

II.    Birth  and  its  Incidents 65 

44.  Lightness  of  Parturition 0.5 

45.  The  Bestowal  of  Names 05 

46.  Infancy  in  the  Wigwam  (Plate) 00 

I.    Death  and  its  Incidents 67 

47.  Pictographic  Memorials  of  Adults 67 

48.  Eulogy  of  the  Dead 67 

4S>.  Dressing  the  Corpse 08 

.50.  Belief  in  Immortality 08 

51.  Address  to  the  Dead 68 

.52.  Indian  Burial-places 68 

.53.  Barrows  and  Heaps  of  Stones 09 

54.  Former  Custom  of  Burial  among  the  Mississippi  Valley  Tribes 69 

55.  Burial  among  the  Prairie  Tribes 70 

50.  Veneration  for  the  Dead 70 

57.  Forests  and  Valleys  favorable  to  Civilization 70 

58.  Horrid  Instance  of  Sepulture  among  the  Chinooks 71 

K.    Games  of  Chance 71 

59.  Kun-ta-soo,  or  the  Game  of  Plumb-stones 71 

60.  Pugasaing,  or  the  Game  of  the  Bowl 72 

L.     The  Indian  on  his  Huntino-qround 74 

61.  The  Social  State  of  the  Hunter 74 

62.  Potriarchal  State  of  the  Chiefs  and  Heads  of  Families 74 

63.  Feasting 75 

64.  Topics  of  Kemark  at  Meals 75 

65.  Modest  and  Moral  Conduct  of  Females 76 

66.  Feasts  for  the  Young 7(3 

67.  Severity  and  Suffering  in  Winter  in  High  Northern  Latitudes,  and  Hard  Condition 

of  Women 70 

68.  Mother's  Care  for  her  Children 77 

69.  E.\trerae  Wretchedness  produced  by  Hunger 77 

70.  Attachment  to  the  Habit  of  Smoking 77 

71.  Trust  in  Providence 77 

Pt.  TI— 2 


xviii  CONTKNTS. 

M.     MiscELLASEoi  s  Traits "S 

72.  Ball-playing T*^ 

73.  Moving  Camp 7!> 

74.  Dog-dance 7!) 

III.     ANTIQUITIES. 

1.  Floridian  Tcocalli,  or  Elevated  Platform  Rcsidcncca  of  the  Native  Rulers  and  PrieAts. . . .     83 

2.  Antiquities  of  Lake  Eric Rr> 

A.  Ancient  Eriea 85 

B.  Antiquities  of  Cunningham's  Island 8() 

C.  Sculptured  Rock  or  Eric  Inscription 87 

3.  Archivological  Articles  from  South  Carolina  (Plate) 88 

4.  Archneological  Relics  from  Western  New  York  (Plate) 00 

5.  Antique   Aboriginal   Embankments   and    Excavations   at   Lake  Vicux   Desert,   on   tho 

Boundary  of  Wisconsin  and  Northern  Michigan  (Plate) 91 

IV.     PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 

1.  Notices  of  the  Natural  Caves  in  the  Sioux  Country,  on  the  Left  Bank  of  tho  Upper 

Mississippi  River.     By  N.J.Nicollet 95 

2.  Physical    Data   respecting   tho    Southern   Part  of  California   incluiled   in   tho   Lino   of 

Boundary  between  San  Diego  and  the  Mouth  of  the  River  Gila;  with  Incidental 
Notices  of  the  Diegunos  and  Yuma  Indian  Tribes.  By  Lieutenant  Whipple, 
U.  S.  A 99 

V.     TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION,    HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 

1.  The  Naiini  or  Comanches  of  Texas.     (One  Plate) 125 

2.  Oral  Traditions  respecting  the  History  of  the  Ojibwa  Nation.     (Two  Plates) 135 

3.  Contributions   to   the   History,   Customs,  and   Opinions,  of  the   Dacota   Tribes.     (Six 

Plates) 108 

VI.     INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY   AND    CHARACTER. 
A.    Numeration 204 

1.  Choctow 204 

2.  Dacota 206 

3.  Cherokee 209 

4.  Ojibwa  of  Chegoimegon 211 

5.  Winnebago 214 

6.  Chippewa 21(1 

7.  Wyandot 218 

8.  Hitchittee 220 

9.  Cumanche 221 

10.  Cuchan  or  Yuma 221 


CONTENTS. 


xiz 


B.  Art  of  Recordino  Ideas 222 

1.  Pi(i..i;raphy 222 

a.  ludian  Census  Roll 222 

h.  Magic  Song 223 

c.  Mrilii'ine  Animal  of  tho  Winnebagoes 223 

d.  Ilaokah  — a  Pacota  God 224 

e.  Indian  Signatures 22G 

/.  Mnemonic  Symbols  for  Music 226 

2.  Alphabetical  Notation 22« 

a.  Cherokee  Syllabical  Alphabet 228 

C.  Oral  Imaginative  legends 221> 

1.  Transformation  of  a  Hunter  Lad 220 

2.  Origin  of  the  Zea  Maize 2:50 

3.  The  Wolf  Brother 232 

4.  Sayadio 235 

VII.    TOPICAL    HISTORY. 

1.  Mandans 239 

2.  Pontiac  Manuscript :  Journal  of  the  Events  of  the  Siege  of  Detroit  by  the  confi'doratoJ 

Indians,  in  17G3 240 

3.  Anacoana,  Queen  of  the  Caribs 309 

VIII.     PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE    AMERICAN    INDIANS. 

I.    Physical  Characteristics 31C 

a.  Osteological  Character 316 

h.  Facial  Angle 317 

c.  Stature 317 

d.  Fossil  Remains  cf  the  American  Race 319 

e.  Complexion 320 

/.  Hair .321 

g.  Eyes ..  323 

A.  Artificial  Modifications  of  the  Skull 323 

1.  Tho  Natchez 324 

2.  The  Choctaws 324 

3.  The  Waxsaws 324 

4.  The  Muscogecs,  or  Creeks 325 

5.  The  Catawbas 325 

6.  Attacapas 325 

7.  Nootka- Columbians ,325 

8.  Peruvians 326 


1     I 


I    < 


i\  ^ 


zx  CONTENTS. 

I.  Volume  of  the  Brain 828 

1.  Mexicans 329 

2.  'ihe  Barbarous  Tribes 830 

II.    Admeasurements  of  the  Crania  op  thb  Principal  Groups  of  Indians  of  the 

United  States.    By  Mr.  J.  S.  Phillips 331 

Iroquois 335 

Algonquin 335 

Appalachian 335 

Dacota 335 

Shoshonee 335 

Oregonian 335 

IX.     LANGUAGE. 

I.  Indian  Languages  op  the  United  States.    By  H.  R.  Schoolcraft 840 

II.  Plan  of  Thought  of  the  American  Languages.    ByDr.FRANCis  Lieber 346 

III.  Essay  on  the  Grammatical  Structure  op  the  Algonquin  Language.    By  II.  R. 

Schoolcraft 351 

IV.  Remarks   on   the  Principles   of  the  Cherokee  Language.     By  Rev.   S.  N. 

Worcester 443 

VI.    Vocabularies 457 

I.  Algonquin  Group 458 

Ojibwa  of  Sault  Ste  Marie 458 

Ojibwa  of  Grand  Traverse  Bay 458 

Ojibwa  of  Saginaw 458 

Ojibwa  of  Michilimackinac 458 

Miami 470 

Menomonee 470 

Shawnee 470 

Delaware 470 

II.  Iroquois  Group 482 

Mohawk 482 

Oneida 482 

Onondaga 482 

Cayuga 482 

Miscellaneous  Vocabularies 404 

Comanchce 494 

Satsika  or  Blackfeet 494 

Cushna  (California) 494 

Costanos  (California)... 494 


CONTENTS.  XXI 

X.     STATE   OF   INDIAN   ART. 

II.  Modern  Art 511 

a.  Existing  Handicraft  Skill 511 

1.  Pipe  Sculpture 511 

2.  Ornamented  Pipe-stems 512 

8.  Canoes  of  Bark 512 

4.  War-clubs  and  Hatchets 513 

5.  Cradle 513 

6.  Musical  Instruments 514 

7.  Various  Domestic  Arts 514 

8.  Apccun  515 

9.  Muskrat  Spear 515 

10.  Dressing  Skins 515 

11.  Forest  Embroidered  Sheaths  and  Cases 515 

12.  Wooden  Implements:  Ball  Sticks 516 

XI.     FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 

I.    Importance  of  the  Pastoral  State  on  Races  of  Men.     By  II.  R.  Schoolcraft 519 

II.     Means  of  Melioration.     By  John  Johnston,  Esq 522 

III.  Moral  Questions  relative  to  Practical  Plans  for  Educating  and  Civilizing  the  Abori- 

gines.    By  Rev.  D.  Lowry 52G 

IV.  Present   Geographical   Position,   Number,   and   Means,   of  the   Iroquois.     By  W.  P. 

Angel,  Esq 538 

XII.     STATISTICS   AND    POPULATION. 

I.  Period  of  1850.    Official  Report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  for 

1850 547 

A.  Statement  of  the  Amount  of  Investments  for  the  Indian  Tribes  in  Stocks  drawing 

Interest 501 

B.  Statement  of  Interest  appropriated  by  Congress  for  the  several  Tribes,  of  which 

the  Government  is  trustee,  in  lieu  of  Investments 504 

C.  Estimate  of  the  Current  Expenses  of  the  Indian  Bureau  at  the  Seat  of  Govern- 

ment   504 

D.  Estimate  of  the  Funds  required  during  the  Fiscal  Year  (1st  July,  1851,  to  30th 

June,  1852)  for  the  Payment  of  Annuities  and  Fulfilling  Treaty  Stiiulations 
with  the  Indian  Tribes 5G5 

E.  Estimate  for  Sums  required  during  the  present  Year  (to  Juno  30th,  1851)  for  the 

Service  of  tho  Department 570 

II.  Period  of  1820.    Letter  op  Hon.  W.  II.  Crawford,  Secretary  op  the  Treasury, 

1820 581 

A.     Annuities  due  to  Indian  Tribes  in  1820 584 


i 


rl 


1 


I", 


xxii  CONTENTS. 

B.    Appropriations  and  Expenditures  for  the  Survey  and  Sale  of  Public  Lands 590 

0.     Schedule  of  Sales  before  the  Organization  of  Public  Land  OflSces 590 

D.  Statement  of  the  Amount  of  Sales  iVom  the  Opening  of  the  Land  Offices  to  the 

30th  September,  1819 591 

E.  Estimate  of  the  Number  of  Acres  of  Public  Lands  which  have  been  Surveyed  and 

Sold,  and  the  Number  which  remained  Unsold  30th  September,  1819 592 

F.  Estimate  of  the  Quantity  of  Land  purchased  from  the  Indians,  to  15th  October, 

1820 593 

in.    Topic  of  Lands  Purchased  from  the  Indians 596 

A.  Statement  of  Purchases  of  Land  made  from  each  Tribe  since  the  Establishment 

of  the  present  Federal  Government,  chronologically  arranged 598 

B.  List  of  Tribes,  alphabetically  arranged,  who  have  ceded  Territory  since  the  Estab- 

lishment of  the  present  Government 602 

C.  Aggregates  of  Lands,  Compensations,  Exchanges,  and  Names  of  Tribes,  from  the 

Origin  of  the  Government  to  1840 605 

Appendix  to  Statistics.  —  Population  of  the  United  States,  —  Tenth  Census 607 


M) 


,1 

i 


LIST    OF    PLATES. 


<M/vvww^/v^/^AAAl^/' . 


1.  Landing  in  Virginia.     1584 Page  22 

2.  Interview  of  Ilendrick  Hudson  with  the  Indians.     1609 24 

3.  Interview  of  Massasoit  with  the  Pilgrims.     1620 20 

4.  Ethnographical  Map 28 

5.  Spearing  Muskrats  in  Winter 51 

6.  Spearing  Fish  in  Winter 53 

7.  Shooting  Fish 55 

8.  Spearing  Fish  from  a  Canoe 57 

9.  Indian  Sugar  Camp 59 

10.  The  Death  Whoop 61 

11.  Scalps  Dressed  for  the  Dance 63 

12.  Scalp-dance 63 

13.  Feathers  of  Honor 65 

14.  Indian  Woman  dressing  a  Buffalo  Skin 67 

15.  Indian  Cradles 69 

16.  Indian  Burial 71 

17.  Game  of  the  Bowl 73 

18.  Indian  Woman  playing  the  Game  of  the  Bowl 73 

19.  Ball-play  on  the  Ice 75 

20.  Ball-play  on  the  Prairie 75 

21.  Indian  Travelling 77 

22.  Dog-dance  of  the  Dacota  Indians 80 

23.  Winnebago  Wigwams 80 

24.  Valley  of  the  St.  Peters 174 

25.  Transporting  the  Wounded 180 

26.  Indian  Woman  procuring  Fuel 183 

27.  Indian  Council 185 

28.  Dacota  Encampment 190 

29.  Dacota  Village 102 

31.  Map  of  the  Dacota,  Ojibwa,  Menomonee,  ond  Winnebago  Country 137 

82.  Combat  between  the  Ojibwas  and  the  Sacs  and  Foxes 142 

33.  Emigrants  attacked  by  the  Comanches 133 

34.  Map  of  Cunningham's  Island 84 

36.  Earth  Works  on  south  side  of  Cunningham's  Island 84 

36.  Earth  Works  on  north  side  of  Cunningham's  Island 84 

(  Lxiii ) 


u 


i   ' 


xxiv  LIST    OF    PLATES. 

;t7.  Antiquities  from  Cunningham's  Island 8t> 

88.  Antiquities  from  Cunningham's  Island 86 

30.  Antiquities  from  Cunningham's  Island 86 

40.  Inscription  on  Rock  north  side  of  Cunningham's  Island 88 

41.  Inscription  on  Rock  south  side  of  Cunningham's  Island 88 

42.  View  of  Inscription  Rock  south  side  of  Cunningham's  Island 88 

43.  Antique  Clay  Pipes 90 

44.  Antiquities  from  South  Carolina 90 

4o.  Antiquities  from  New  York  and  South  Carolina 90 

46.  Antiquities  from  South  Carolina 90 

47.  Antiquities  from  New  York 90 

48.  Antiquities  from  New  York 91 

40.  Antiquities  from  New  York 91 

50.  Antiquities  from  New  York 91 

51.  French  Antiquities  from  Western  New  York 91 

.52.  Earth  Works  on  Vieux  Desert  Island 91 

.'■)3.  Ruins  of  Old  Fort  Mackinac  of  1763 242 

54.  Census  of  a  Mille-Lac  Band  of  Ojibwas 222 

55.  Magic  Music,  Medicine  Animal  of  the  Winncbagoes,  and  Ilaokah 224 

50.  Indian  Signatures 226 

57.  Dacota  Written  Music 228 

58.  Indian  Burial-ground 97 

50.  Skull  of  a  Chinook  (side  view) 318 

60.  Skull  of  a  Chinook  (front  view) 320 

61.  Skull  of  a  Chinook 322 

62.  Skull  of  a  Winnebago 324 

63.  Skull  from  Columbia  River 326 

64.  Skull  from  Columbia  River 328 

65.  Skull  from  Columbia  River 330 

GH.  Skull  of  a  Flathead  (side  view) 332 

67,  Skull  of  a  Flathead  (back  view) 334 

68.  Skull  of  a  Californian 335 

60.  Dacota  Pipes 512 

70.  Pipes 512 

71.  Pipo-stcms 512 

72.  Canoes 512 

73.  War-clubs 514 

74.  War-clubs 514 

75.  Musical  Instruments 514 

76.  Fish  Spears,  Hair  Adze,  Skin  Dressers,  Ice  Cutter,  and  Burden  Strap  ;  616 

77.  Implements 616 

78.  Implements 510 

A.  Cherokee  Alphabet 228 

B.  Specimen  of  its  Application 228 


n 
I' 


I.   GENERAL  HISTORY.   B. 


Pt.  II.  — 3 


(17) 


I 


'hi 

s 


'H) 


Ij 


Hi 


i;'t 


I  l! 


GENERAL  HISTORY.    B. 


A.    TRACK  OP  MIGRATION. 

1.  WiiKN  St'bastian  Calwt  rcachod  the  North  American  coasts  in  1497,  the  Indian 
Race  was  spread  through  the  present  area  of  the  United  States  whercver  he  touclied. 

That  intrepid  navigator  made  the  land  in  hititude  5G°,  and  ran  down  the  coast  to 
about  the  latitude  of  Albemarle  sound,  3G°,  where  the  crew  mutinied.'  lie  thus  con- 
nected the  field  of  oceanic  discovery, generally,  with  the  primary  track  of  Columbus 
five  yeai"s  earlier.  Cabot  did  not  land  frequently,  but  his  discoveries  had  the  eflect  to 
make  known  to  Europe  the  development  of  the  continent  in  the  North  Atlantic,  as 
that  of  his  contemjwrary,  Americus,  did  in  the  south.* 

Those  who  followed  him,  in  the  career  of  discovery,  found  the  race  of  Red  men  to  l)o 
divided  into  an  infinity  of  tribes ;  living  in  disunion,  speaking  ostensibly  difl'crent 
languages  and  dialects,  and,  so  far  as  there  was  anything  like  government,  acting  on 
the  maxim,  "  Let  him  take  who  has  the  power,  and  him  keep  who  can." 

2.  The  sctircaptains  of  a  bold  maritime  age,  finding  that  the  newly-discovered  race 
seated  along  the  North  Atlantic  were  wild  men,  without  laws,  l>olity,  or  arts,  and 
degraded  to  the  level  of  the  lowest  hunter  state,  treated  them  as  mere  animals  on  two 
legs,  and  irritated  them  exceedingly,  and  oflended  their  native  sense  of  justice  at  almost 
every  point  of  their  first  landing,  by  capturing  and  carrying  off  persons.  A  flagrant 
instance  of  this  kind  hajjpened  on  the  New  England  coasts  six  years  before  their  settle- 
ment.    John  Smith  (of  Virginia  notoriety)  had  been  sent  out  in  1014  to  those  coasts 


'  Memoir  of  Richard  Biddlo,  p.  80-80. 

"  Americus  Vcspucius  discovered  the  coast  of  Paria  the  same  year.  Ten  years  afterwards,  namely,  in  IflOT, 
tliis  skilful  navigator  first  publisbed  at  Vieenza,  in  Italy,  his  collected  voyages,  under  tho  title  of  "  The  Now 
World,  and  Countries  newly  Discovered."  It  was  never  disputed  that  he  had  made  the  voyages  and  discoveries 
recorded  by  him,  and  his  name  was  applied  by  readers  as  a  generic  to  tho  now  continent  to  which,  generally,  he 
thus  called  public  attention. 

(19) 


fr 


ii 


ii 


(* 


a 


lit 


.  I',  ' 

If.     ' 


h 


1  f 

h 

h 

u 

•20  GENERAL    HISTOIIY. 

by  tlie  English  comi»;uiy  fur  establiMliiii};;  a  settleiiu'iit  iiii<l  trailo.  On  returning  to 
KuroiK",  he  k-tl  one  of  his  voswls  in  connnand  of  one  Kent,  an  Englishman,  a  man  of 
a  half  buccaneer  ciiaracter,  who,  after  procuring  a  cargo  of  fish,  set  sail  to  disixjse  of 
it  in  the  Mediterranean,  whither  he  took  twenty  Indians,  who  had  been  decoyed  on 
board  his  vessel,  and  sold  them  a.s  slaves.  "  This  avaricious  and  jKU-nicions  I'elony," 
says  Cotton  Mather,  "  laid  the  foundation  of  grievous  annoyances  to  all  English  endear 
vors  of  settlements,  especially  in  the  northern  parts  of  the  land,  for  several  years 
ensuing.  The  Indians  would  never  forget  or  forgive  this  injur}-,  but  when  the  English 
aftenvards  came  ui^n  this  coast  in  their  fishing  voyages  they  were  still  assaulted  in  an 
hostile  manner,  to  the  killing  and  wounding  of  many  poor  men  by  the  angiy  natives 
in  revenge  for  the  wrong  that  had  been  done  them ;  and  some  intended  plantations 
were  thereby  entirely  nipjied  in  the  bud." '  This  mistaken  jxjlicy  was  proiluctive  of 
hatred  on  the  part  of  the  Indians,  and  served  to  inciva.se  their  natural  distrust  and 
suspicion  when  the  country  came  to  Ix'  colonized.  A  still  more  hoiTil)lc  act  of  kidnaj)- 
ping  was  jx^qietrated  by  Vasquez  on  the  coast  of  Chicorea,  now  South  Carolina,  who, 
having  traded  amicably  with  the  natives  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Cambahee,  at  last 
invited  them  to  view  his  two  vessels,  and  when  the  holds  were  filled,  ordered  the 
hatches  closed  and  sailed  for  San  Domingo.  One  of  the  vessels  foundeix»d  on  the  way ; 
the  natives  in  the  other  were  taken  to  work  the  mines,  but  were  sullen  and  gloomy, 
refused  food,  and  most  of  them  died  of  despair  or  voluntary  starvation.' 

3.  England,  it  appeal's,  had  no  thought  of  availing  lier.«elf  of  Caljot's  discoveries  for 
nearly  a  century  afterwards.  Meantime,  Spain  founded  lier  vice-royal  empire 
throughout  South  America,  with  Portugal,  France,  and  Holland  only  as  rivals  for  part 
of  the  continent,  and  for  the  Caribbean  group  of  islands.  The  rage  for  the  precious 
metals,  and  for  the  discovering  of  an  open  passage  to  the  East  Indies — the  original 
thought  of  Columbus — had  setP]urope  in  a  blaze,  and  animated  every  adventure  fitted 
out  for  the  New  World.' 

Not  only  the  equinoctial  and  torrid  zones  were  left  by  England  to  the  intlucnce  of 
this  type  of  civilization,  bat  North  America  seemed  destined  to  Ijc  thus  exclusively 
colonized.  Mexico  was  invaded  in  1519,  and  finally  conquered  in  1521 ;  and  the 
Floridian  coasts,  which  were  known  in  1512,  became  the  object  of  two  notable  expedi- 
tions of  discovery,  both  of  which  eventuated  in  discomfiture.  The  first  of  these,  led 
by  Pamphilo  de  Narvaez  in  1527,  resulted  most  disastrously  to  him  and  his  followers. 

'  Magnalia  Chriati  Americana.  B.  I.  ch.  2.     Fol.  cd.,  London,  1702. 

'  De  la  Vega. 

'  Tlie  French,  when  they  first  get  out  from  the  bead  of  Montreal  Island  to  explore  the  St.  Lawrence  and  tho 
interior  westward,  were  animated  with  the  hope  of  reaching  Cliina,  and  have  left  a  testimonial  of  that  opinion  in 
the  name  they  bestowed  on  "  La  Chine,"  their  parting  encampment,  which  it  still  bears. 


GEN  K  II  A  L    11  I  S  r  0  R  Y  , 


21 


TIic  osciiix'  of  De  Viica  witli  tluve  or  four  companions,  ami  tlioir  wanilcrinjrs  west  tor 
eight  years  across  tiie  whole  con  >nl,  till  they  reached  the  (Jiilfof  Californiii.  furnishes 
one  of  the  most  adventurous  of  inrratives.'  His  account  denotes  a  reniarkahle  ajrree- 
ment  in  the  character  and  customs  of  the  North  American  Indians,  till  he  came  anionji 
the  trihes  of  the  present  area  of  New  Mexico,  to  whom  he  applies  the  nanu'  of 
"Jumanos."     Among  these  he  observed  the  "cotton  blanket,"  and  found  "houses."' 

In  luo'J,  De  Soto  reixnited  the  attempt  to  exploiv  Florida,  with  more  ample  means. 
His  exploring  army  had  not  only  every  ap^Hjintment  to  ensui-e  success,  but  was  animated 
by  the  highest  spirit  of  chivalry,  heightened  by  the  thirst  of  conrpiest,  Avealth,  and 
glory,  which  had  made  Cortez  and  Pizarro  the  prominent  heroes  of  Mexico  and  Peru. 
He  had,  himself,  been  one  of  the  most  celebrated  captains  of  the  latter.  But  the  ex- 
pedition melted  away,  month  after  month,  amidst  the  dense  and  tangled  forests  of 
Florida,  and  along  the  magniliceut  rivers  and  mountain  peaks  of  Georgia,  Alabama, 
South  Carolina,  Mississippi,  and  Tennessee.  It  wended  its  way,  with  giant  strides, 
irom  river  to  river,  leaving  relics  which  are  symbolized  by  vague  tradition.  The 
Indians  did  not  rally  in  bodies  to  oppose  De  Soto  by  pitched  battles,  but  glided  aside 
with  iwlicy,  to  let  the  "monster  jxiwer"  ])ass.  It  weakened  itself,  as  there  is  sufficient 
evidence  to  show,  by  detaching  sub-exploring  parties,  who  penetrated  to  surprising 
lengths,  and  i)erformed  herculean  laljors;  and  this  vaunted  expedition,  which  struck 
the  tribes  with  fear  and  amazement,  after  suflering  all  the  evils  of  a  defeat  at 
Mauvila,  finally  reached  the  Mississippi  river,  alwut  the  present  site  of  the  town  of 
Memphis.  Such  an  expedition,  in  its  amount  of  sntVerings,  feats  of  daring,  and  wan- 
derings, America,  and  perhaps  the  world,  had  never  seen,  and  it  has  prol)al)ly  furnished 
food  for  some  of  the  most  striking  imaginative  tales  of  our  tribes,  who  have  veiled  the 
appearance  of  mail-clad  men  under  the  name  of  the  "  Stone  Giants  "' 

4.  There  are  archaeological  evidences  that  the  death  of  De  Soto  did  not  cpiench  the 
daring  spirit  of  discovery  which  had  animated  his  extraonlinary  descent  into  Florida, 
under  its  ancient  limits ;  and  that  the  country  northwardly  was  extensively  ransacked, 
at  subsequent  dates,  in  the  delusive  hope  of  finding  gold  and  silver  mines,  both  by 
the  channels  of  the  Mississippi  and  its  tributaries,  and  along  the  open  Atlantic  coasts, 
as  far,  at  least,  as  north  latitude  42°.  It  is  these  archaeological  evidences,  mingled  in 
some  antiquarian  fields  of  the  true  aboriginal  antique,  and,  in  a  few  instances,  with  an 
apparently  chler  epoch  of  it,  that  have  served  to  puzzle  antiquarians,  and  to  generate 
theories  of  civilization  hi  these  latitudes,  which  there  are  no  sound  reaMins  for  supposing 
to  have  existed.     They  are,  if  attentively  scrutinized,  found  to  be  the  vestiges  of  an 


'  The  "Narrative  of  Abar  Nunez  Cabaca  do  Vnca"  hjis  just  (1851)  been  given  to  the  public,  in  a  translation 
by  Mr.  Buckingbam  Smith,  through  the  enlightened  liberality  of  Geo.  W.  Kiggs,  Jun.,  of  Washington,  D.  C,  iu 
a  handsome  quarto  volume,  with  plates. 

•  Notes  on  the  Iroquois. 


^1 


22 


tJENEKAL    HISTORY. 


I'xtraiiCDUrt  era  of  arts,  not  hoinogcnwms  or  t<ui-goiuTis  with  tlio-so  of  the  true  aiitliiiiu 
aboriginal  ixn'ujd. 

5.  The  first  iH^ici'ablc  interview  of  tlie  French  with  the  North  American  tribes  took 
place  in  1535,  on  the  waters  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  under  the  same  tiiple  thii-st  for  con- 
quest, tlie  discovery  of  the  precious  metals,  and  a  false  belief  in  a  western  pa.ssage  to 
China  and  India.  This  was  four  years  prior  to  the  descent  of  De  St)to  on  the  coasts 
of  Florida ;  but  although  twenty  degives  further  t<j  the  north,  it  did  not  exhibit  triU'S 
at  all  inferior,  but  rather  suiK'rior,  to  the  native  Floridians  in  energy,  expertness, 
courage,  and  forest  arts.  And  the  two  exiK'ditions  of  Jacques  Cartier  to  these  northern 
watens,  though  crowned  with  no  golden  discoveries,  had  the  effect  to  make  Francis  I.  a 
rival  of  Charles  V.  for  the  division  of  the  new  continent,  and  laid  the  foundation  of  the 
future  viceroyalty  of  New  France. 

6.  It  was  not  till  1584,  when  ninet}-ono  years  had  elapsed  from  CaJJot's  discovery, 
and  forty-five  years  after  the  expedition  of  De  Soto,  l/it  England,  under  the  grant  to 
Raleigh,  visited  and  named  Virginia,  and  thus  a.ssert.ii  lier  title,  by  right  of  discovery, 
to  the  present  area  of  the  United  States.  Sir  Francis  Drake  was,  a  year  or  two  later, 
engaged  in  his  haU-frcel)ooting  operations  on  the  Pacific :  the  banks  of  Newfoundland 
were  also,  at  this  era,  well  known  to  the  maritime  states  of  Euroiw,  and  freely  visited 
by  adventurous  fishermen.  Laudonniere  had,  in  15C4,  debarked  in  Florida,  on  his 
celebrated  plan  of  colonization,  and,  by  these  and  other  means,  North  American  dis- 
covery had  reached  a  ixjint  at  which  several  other  nations  jjegan  earnestly  to  put  forth 
plana  of  colonization. 

The  landing  in  Virginia  (Plate  1)  took  place  at  the  Island  of  Wococon,  in  July, 
1584.  The  emigrants  aftcr^vards  took  possession  of,  and  founded  their  infant  colony  on 
Roanoke  Island.  The  Indians,  who,  from  fear  of  kidnapping,  had  fled  away,  kept 
aloof  for  three  days,  at  the  end  of  which,  three  persons  in  a  canoe  ventured  furtively 
near,  and  suffered  themselves  to  be  taken.  They  were  treated  kindly,  loaded  with 
presents,  and  permitted  to  depart.  The  next  day  brought  many  Iwats,  with  forty  or 
fifty  men,  among  whom  was  Granganimo,  "  the  king's  brother."  Leaving  his  canoe  at 
a  distance,  he  came  with  his  train  to  the  first  interview  with  captiiins  Amidas  and 
Barlow.  His  attendants  spread  a  mat  on  the  ground,  npon  which  he  fearlessly  seated 
himself,  and  evinced  perfect  self-ixjssession,  though  the  Englishmen  were  completely 
armed.  He  made  gesticulations  of  friendship  by  stroking  his  head  and  breast  with  his 
hand,  and  repeating  this  ceremony  on  his  visitors.'     He  then  arose  and  addressed  them 

'  Hackluyt. 

'  This  custom  of  passing  the  hand  on  the  face  and  breast  was  noticed  by  Do  Vaca  in  tribes  west  of  Arkansas, 
about  1536.  To  rub  the  band  on  an  admired  surface,  as  is  done  on  fine  cloth,  is  a  generic  trait.  Jacques  Cartier 
also  found  this  custom,  in  1534,  in  the  tribes  who  visited  his  ships  in  tho  St.  Lawrence. 


'fo*, 


I 


.i 


il 


i; 


V 


w 


I 


1^    1 


-?. 


m 


I* 


'% 


'■■i 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


23 


in  a  "long  speech,"  all  Iuh  .ittendants  standing  in  silence.  Presents  were  now  laid 
before  him,  and  beftire  tour  other  persons  who  appeaivd  to  Ir^  oflicials,  which,  at  tlie 
close  of  the  interview,  he  diircted  to  be  taken  away,  as  uU  belonging  to  himself. 

An  Englisli  artist,  named  John  Wyth,  accompanied  the  exijcdition,  by  direction  of 
Queen  Elizabeth,  to  draw  the  to^wgraphy,  dress,  and  customs  of  the  natives ;  from 
whose  pencil  we  have  the  earliest  designs  on  the  subject.  De  Bry,  of  Frankfort-on-tlie- 
Main,  who  was,  aljout  this  time,  preparing  the  celebrated  work  which  he  began  to 
publish  in  1590,  went  to  London  in  1587,  and  procured  copies  of  Wyth's  drawings. 
How  truthl'ul  these  are  to  the  forms  of  the  Lidians  it  would  be  diflicult  now  to  inquire. 
There  is  a  fulness  of  muscle  and  development  of  limb  in  tlie  figures  which  are  not 
characteristic  of  the  present  race  north  and  west,  but  really  existed  in  the  southern 
tril)es ;  and,  with  one  exception,  namely,  the  woman  eating,  tlie  iM>stures  conform  to 
present  ui^'^ge,  wliile  the  articles  of  dress,  arts,  and  employments,  leave  no  reastni  to 
suppose  that  they  are  not  entirely  faithfid  transcripts  frem  scenes  pre\sentcd  on  the 
first  interview  with  the  Virginia  Indians. 

In  the  latitude  of  Roanolce  Island,  and  during  the  month  of  July,  the  Indians  were 
nearly  nude.  The  men  of  most  note  wore  moccasins  and  leggins,  the  azean,  shell  neck- 
laces, copper  ear-rings,  and  a  head-<lress  of  some  sort.  A  robe  of  skins,  the  nnittatos 
of  the  Algontpiins,  was  thrown  alH)ut  the  chiefs.  The  wome.i  are  drawn  without 
imx-casins  or  leggins,  and  depicted  with  a  not  ungraeelul  leather-fringed  kirtle  or 
matchicota  which  I'eaches  half-tliigh.  Tlie  hair  is  left  to  How  untied  ilown  the  neck, 
(a  doubtful  point)  with  a  head-band  areund  the  forehead,  and  a  necklace  of  sliells. 


7.  Twenty-live  years  later,  namely,  in  UlOll,  the  United  States  of  Holland  determined 
to  share  in  the  sovereignty  of  the  new  continent,  by  despatching  a  single  ship  of  dis- 
covery, uniler  llendriek  Hudson,  to  the  new  field  of  enterprise.  This  vessel  entered 
the  noble  river  now  bearing  his  name,  sailed  through  the  Highlands,  and  is  thought  to 
have  reached,  and  made  her  final  anchorage,  alK)ve  tlie  present  city  of  Hudson,  and  in 
plain  view  of  the  magnificent  Catskill  range.     (Plate  2.) 

The  natives  had  manifested  very  marked  hostility  on  the  lower  i>arts  of  the  river, 
particularly  the  Manhattanese,  who  kille<l  one  of  the  seamen  with  an  arrow ;  conse- 
quently, Hudson  could  not  land  on  that  island.  Ihit  tlie  people  encountered  aliovc  the 
Highlands,  were  of  a  diflerent  temper,  and  an  amicalile  interecmrse  ensued.  Hudson 
hud  no  s(M)ner  cast  anclior  in  this  part  of  the  river,  and  landed  fi-om  his  Iniat,  than  he 
held  a  friendly  conference  with  the  natives  on  shore.  (Plate  2.)  According  to  the 
notions  of  the  hospitality  of  his  times,  he  ofleivd  them  a  [xitation  of  ardent  spirits ; 
which  produced  a  stare  of  iistimishment.  To  show  them  that  he  diil  not  intend  to  give 
them  what  he  would  not  taste  himself,  he  drank  oil"  a  cup  of  the  litpior,  and  it  was 
then  filled  and  passed  round  to  the  Indians;  but  tiiey  merely  smelled  of  it,  and  passed 
it  on.     It  liad  nearly  gone  round  tiie  circle  untasted,  when  one  of  the  chiefs,  Inilder 


f 


i 


24  GENERAL    HISTORY. 

than  the  rest,  made  a  short  harangue,  saying  it  would  be  disresiwctful  to  return  it 
nntastcd,  and  declaring  his  intention  to  drink  the  jxition,  even  if  he  should  l)e  killed 
in  the  attempt,  he  drank  it  off.  Dizziness  and  stujwr  innnodiatelv  ensued :  lie  sank 
down  and  fell  into  a  sleep — tlie  sleep  of  death,  as  his  companions  thought — hut  in  due 
time  he  awoke,  declared  the  happiness  he  had  exiun-ienced  from  its  effects,  asked  again 
for  the  cup,  and  tlie  whole  assembly  followed  his  example.  Thus  tlie  physical  powers 
of  *he  mighty  chiefs  of  the  wilderness  were  at  first  prostrated  by  an  element  truly 
fascinating,  a.s  it  led  them  into  hallucinations  so  consonant  to  their  own  mythology, — 
the  Indian  Elysium  —  the  land  of  dreams.' 

8.  Eleven  years  after  this  exploratory  trip,  the  English  Pilgrims  set  sail  from  Hol- 
land, and  reached  the  coast  in  one  of  the  involutions  of  Massachusetts  Hay,  to  which 
they  gave  the  name  of  Plymouth,  nt  a  sjwt  which,  if  there  be  truth  in  Icelandic 
Sagas,  that  nation  of  lx)ld  mariners  had  visited  some  centuries  l)efore.' 

The  landing  took  place  on  the  22d  of  December,  1()20,  in  a  severe  season,  when  snow 
coveivd  the  shore,  when  the  forests  were  leailess  and  divar,  and  sickness,  which  had 
swept  with  gR>at  mortality  among  the  natives,  so<m  carried  off  many  of  the  colonists. 


.ft. 


I',     I 

1 


9.  No  colonists  had  heretofore  reached  the  shores  fnnn  Europe  with  the  views  that 
actuated  this  people.  Cortez,  Narvaez,  and  De  Vaca,  De  Soto,  Laudonniere,  and  Cart  ier, 
had  exhibited  to  the  Indian  race  what  may  1k^  called  the  Romaic  element  of  European 
civilization.  Tiiey  were  now  to  iK'hold  the  English  tyjK'  of  civilization  as  seen  in  the 
cognate  colonists  at  Roanoivc,  Plymoutii,  and  Manhattan  —  to  encounter,  indeed,  the 
old  Gothic,  under  the  sterner  stamina  of  which  Rome  itself  had  fallen.  The  minds 
of  the  pilgrims  had  been  Ibrmed  in  tlu^  s<'hool  of  adversity.  Poverty  had  sharjiened 
wit,  and  suffering  made  tlie  tyrainiy  of  royalty  hatefid.  They  were,  in  trutli,  the 
unsubdued  residuum  of  the  connnonwealth  under  CroniweH.  They  had  fled  from  the 
religious  intolerance  of  the  Stuarts,  to  take  slielter  in  the  forests  of  the  New  World. 
It  was  a  crusade  on  nobler  principles  than  that  preached  »ip  by  Peter  the  Hermit. 
They  were  cemented  together  by  the  closest  principles  of  Bible  obligation. 

With  the  notions  of  English  liberty  which  were  the  result  «)f  tlio  Avoi'kings  of  the 
British  government  through  centuries,  with  such  examples  in  patriotic  energy  as 
Hampden,  with  the  current  literature  of  England,  in  which  the  names  of  Bacon  and 
Boyle,  Newton,  Shaksjiearc,  and  Milton  were  household  wonls,  they  set  up  the  frame- 
work of  a  political  scheme,  founded  on  strict  i^rsonal  morals  and  ascetic  mannei's, 
which  offers  a  striking  and  instructive  phenomenon  in  the  history  of  colonies. 

'  This  tradition  of  the  Mohcgans  hnit  been  miHplaccd  nnd  postdated  by  Mr.  Hcckcvcldor,  who,  from  Indinn 
tradition,  rclutcs  tho  drinking  scene  an  having  tukon  pinco  on  the  inlnnd  of  Manhnttnn.  It  was  not  until  the  noxt 
voyngo  that  tho  Dutch  gained  u  footing  there.     Hist,  and  Lit.  Com.  Phil.  Trans.,  Vol.  1.     I'iiil.  IHIO. 

'  Antiquitatcs  Americana. 


; 

11 

t      ' 

1; 

ll 

!    1 

1 

1 

I 


■Mf'. 


■"Wjf'l'  •- 


-ILifc^ii  'i'in''ji-..- 


i;j.;it.-atvji,ii=^s^.W,j4iL^j.^-,A^JK^:.,.'-Atja£^^ 


GENERAL  HISTORY. 


25 


Unlike  the  cuIoiul's  of  Liljya,  Carthage,  and  Rome,  it  was  not  based  on  a  hive  of  the 
fine  arts,  or  the  reliiiements  of  philosophy  and  manners.  Instead  of  tiiis,  the  columns 
which  tliese  persecuted  colonists  desired  to  erect  were  those  of  faith,  hope,  and  charity. 
Their  principles  of  government  were  not  those  recognized  by  Herodotus,  Livy,  smd 
Tacitus,  but  those  of  Moses  and  the  prophets  —  Paul  and  the  apostles.  They  were 
careful  to  cultivate  a  just  and  friendly  ixilicy  with  the  Red  race,  who  received  them 
kindly.' 

The  first  meeting  took  place  a  few  days  after  their  arrival,  near  the  spot  of  landing. 
(Plate  3.)  Massasoit,  the  celebrated  chief  of  the  Pokanokets,  came  to  visit  them. 
He  was  received  by  Governor  Carver  and  his  retinue  with  every  attention.  There  was 
military  music  and  a  salute  of  nnisketry ;  mutual  embraces  followed.  They  then  sat 
down  side  by  side;  "ajwt  of  strong  water"  was  brought  forward,  from  which  both 
drank.  The  chief,  not  knowing  how  to  graduate  his  draught  from  ignorance  of  its 
strength,  was  thrown  into  a  violent  perspiration,  which  lasted  during  the  interview. 

These  initial  ix)inta  of  landing  among  a  pecidiar  variety  of  the  race  of  men  who 
were  destined  to  be  our  neighlx)urs,  and  one  of  the  chief  objects  of  our  humanitarian 
exertions  for  centuries,  have  been  described  for  the  purpose  of  calling  attention  to  the 
character,  affinities,  and  subdivisions  of  that  race,  as  they  then  existed.  The  two 
hundred  and  fifty  years  which  have  elapsed  at  the  date  of  writing  these  sketches,  have 
nniltiplied  in  an  almost  infinitismal  degree  the  number  of  the  interviews  and  occasions 
of  conference  with  the  new  race  found  by  Cabot,  by  which  our  knowledge  of  them 
has  been  determined.  Grecian  and  Roman  history  has  told  us  nothing  resjiect  ng 
their  breaking  ofl"  froni  the  old  races  of  men.  We  have  examined  the  few  and  incon- 
clusive points  of  their  own  traditionary  evidence  on  this  head  in  the  prior  pages  (Part 
I.  p.  19.)  They  are  dim  and  shadowy;  abounding  in  the  necromantic  and  grotes<iue, 
and  often  bearing  the  unmistakeable  impress  of  the  symlwlic.  Their  mytholog}',  unlike 
that  of  what  we  may  call  the  Japhetic  type,  too  often  contents  itself  with  the  droll, 
and  never  holds  its  gods  responsible  for  higher  principles  of  truth,  honor,  and  humanity, 
than  mere  men. 

11.  Regarded  as  a  Race  sjiread  through  the  United  States,  the  ethnological  tie  which 
binds  the  Vctpcric^  tribes  together  jiossesses  a  singular  unity.     An  Indian  on  the  Gulf 


'  In  a  sermon  proiielicd  soon  uftcr  tbc  landing  by  the  Ilcv.  Mr.  Cuslinian,  he  says,  "  The  Indians  are  said  to  be 
most  cruel  and  treacherous  in  these  parts,  even  like  lions,  but  to  us  they  have  been  like  lambs ;  so  kind,  so  sub- 
missive and  trusty,  as  a  man  may  truly  say,  many  Christians  are  not  so  kind  or  sincere."  Boudinot's  Star  in 
the  West. 

"  The  want  of  a  more  precise  yet  generic  term  to  employ  when  it  is  necessary  to  speak  of  a  division  less  than 
America  is  severely  felt.     Amc-ica  and  Americans  have  indeed,  from  early  times,  been  used  to  moan,  par  excel- 
lence, the  territory  and  people  of  the  Republic  of  the  United  States;  but  the  term  becomes  imprecise  in  pursuing 
chains  of  investigation  like  this.     P]ven  the  term  of  North  Americans  cannot  be  adopted  without  the  strict 
I'T  II.  — 4 


fi 


\-Ml 


m 


(f 


w 


' 


.  t 


i 

r 


f 


n 


26  GENERAL    HISTORY. 

shores  of  Florida,  as  depicted  by  De  Vnca,  in  1527,  and  on  the  Gulf  of  the  St.  Law- 
rence, as  he  apiJcars  in  the  narratives  of  Cartier,  in  ir):}4,  agree  so  completely  in  their 
leading  traits,  that  there  can  be  no  hesitation  as  to  their  general  afKnities  as  a  liace, 
though  they  are  separated  by  two  thousand  miles  of  forests,  lakes,  and  mountains. 
p]\amine  the  man,  as  seen  on  the  coasts  of  Virginia  in  1584,  on  the  l)anks  of  the  Hudson 
river  in  IGO!),  or  on  the  shores  of  New  England,  as  found  by  the  pilgrims  in  1020,  and 
in  what  generic  trait  do  tliey  differ,  save  variations  of  languages,  which  av"  however, 
generally  dialectic,  or  in  jwiuts  of  minor  customs,  ofTten  purely  geographical?  Tlie  zea 
maize,  a  tropical  plant,  was  raised  incidentally  throughout  all  this  distance — cotton,  in 
no  part  of  it.  A  wigwam  of  poles,  with  sheathing  of  mats  or  barks,  characterized  the 
whole  area.  The  Ikjw  and  arrow,  and  the  spear  and  club,  were  the  arms ;  and  canoes 
of  wood  or  bark  furnished  the  means  of  navigation.  It  was  not  till  reaching  the  broad 
table-lands  and  mountain  valleys  of  New  Mexico,  that  De  Vaca  found  houses  of  stone, 
and  the  cotton  blanket.  Tliis  forms  a  strong  line  of  demarkation  between  tiie  hunter 
and  semi-agricultural  stocks  —  between  the  cotton-growing  Toltec  and  the  skin-clad 
Vcsperic  genera. 

12.  The  tribes  seated  along  the  Atlantic,  and  spreading  across  the  Alleghanies,  at 
the  respective  dates  of  the  settlement  of  Virginia,  Nova  Belgica,  and  New  England, 
were  found  to  be  identical  in  their  general  cli.  " -er,  and  their  low  state  of  arts,  in 
their  notions  of  government,  and  in  their  means  of  subsistence.  They  were  small 
independent  chieftaincies,  raising  a  little  Indian  corn,  hunting  the  deer  and  other 
animals,  at  war  continually  with  each  other,  and  having,  as  a  general  fact,  in  their 
vital  statistics,  just  births  enough  to  replace  those  annually  lost  in  battle  and  by  natural 
death:  occasionally  ri.sing  and  falling  a  little  in  numbei*s,  but  their  stationary  population 
forms  one  of  the  peculiarities  of  their  history.  Proud,  cunning,  (rather  than  brave,)  idle, 
generous  to  their  friends,  and  cruel  and  perfidious  to  their  enemies :  a  celebrated  divine 
of  the  early  settlement  of  New  England,  calls  them — "the  veriest  ruins  of  mankind."' 

Here,  then,  is  a  great  truth,  a  starting  point  which  links  them  to  the  stocks  of  the 
Old  World,  and  which  imparts  to  the  problem  of  their  condition,  history,  and  improve- 
ment, all  its  vitality.  Low  as  they  were  in  the  scale  of  mankind,  they  were  still  men ; 
they  had  hopes  and  fears ;  they  were  subject,  in  most  things,  to  like  passions  with  our- 
selves, and  they  present  an  object  for  the  noblest  humanitarian  exertions. 

13.  The  centres  of  general  migration  from  which  the  North  American  tribes  pro- 
ceeded to  the  places  occupied  by  them  about  the  close  of  the  fifteenth  century  appear 

liability  to  include  the  tribes  of  Panama,  Mexico,  &c.  Poetry  has  relieved  herself  by  adopting  the  words 
Columbia  and  Hcsperia ;  but  history  and  ethnology  are  likely  to  be  left,  as  at  this  day,  to  the  toils  of  circum- 
locution. 

'  Cotton  Mather. 


.  I 


f  r* 


I 


.1 


(f 


GENERAL    HISTORY.  ST 

plain.  Those  tribes  who  penetrated  the  northern  conUllern  of  the  Rocky  Mountain.^ 
]>y  the  Unjiga  nnd  other  passe.**,  reaching  quite  to  the  terniination  of  this  chain  in  tlie 
Arctic  Ocean,  in  hititudo  70°,  to  whom  tlie  generic  apiK'lhition  of  Atiiapa.xcas  has  In-en 
applied  by  Mr.  Gallatin,'  migrated  continually  from  their  starting  i)oints  on  the  Pacilic 
towai-ds  the  east  and  south-east  (Plate  4.)  On  the  settlement  of  New  France,  and 
particularly  on  the  new  vigor  which  geographical  discovery  assumed  after  the  lull  of 
Queljec,  when  the  fur  trade  began  to  be  pushed  north,  they  had  reached  the  jlividing 
grounds  or  water-shed  (Wiuiser-c/iieil)  separating  the  rcmotest  tributaries  of  the  Arctic 
Sea  from  those  of  Hudson's  Bay.  The  Missinipi,  Great-water,  or  Churchill  river,  (not 
to  be  confounded  with  the  Mississippi,)  is  stated,  by  Sir  Alexander  Mackenzie,'  to  bo 
their  ultimate  eastern  limit,  where  they  were  met  by  an  opposing  wave  of  migration, 
namely,  the  Crees  or  Kenistcnos,  the  van  of  the  Algonquins,  who  had  a  widely  different 
starting  point. 

14.  The  different  tribes  who  compose  this  northern  genus  or  family  of  triljes  (Atlia- 
pascas),  speak  cognate  dialects  (all  except  the  band  of  Loo-choos,  or  Quarrelers).  The 
most  nviraerous  trilxj  occupying  the  denuded  and  sterile  plains  luitween  lat.  G0°  to  G5° 
and  loug.  100°  to  110°,  are  known  by  the  Algonquin  name  of  Chepix'wyans  (not  to  be 
mistaken  for  the  radically  different  trilx;  of  Chippewas),  but  who  call  themselves,  with 
a  more  correct  allusion  to  their  geography,  Sii-cKf«ii(-i}i)iHch,  or  Ea-stmeii.  Next  in 
numerical  importance  rank  the  Dogribs,  the  Coppermine  Indians,  the  Beaver  and  Roi'ky 
Mountain  Indians,  of  Peace  River,  and  the  Tacullies  and  their  congeners,  of  New  Cale- 
donia. Numbers  of  the  minor  tribes  are  very  small,  not  exceeding  forty  or  fifty  men, 
or  about  200  to  250  souls.  They  raise  nothing,  and  depend  solely  for  subsistence 
and  protection  on  the  bow  and  arrow,  the  snare  and  net,  the  gun  and  trap.  They  are 
stimulated  to  glean  these  vast  solitudes  for  the  small  fur-bearing  animals,  which  are 
exchanged  for  European  fiibrics  by  the  tradera.  They  do  not,  from  the  best  data  we 
have,  number,  north  of  the  Churchill  River,  more  than  2500  huntci-s,  or  about  13,000 
souls,  exclusive  of  the  Esquimaux,  and  cannot  be  said  to  average,  probably,  one  soul  to 
fifty  square  miles. 


ESTIMATES,    DKAWN    CHIEFLY    FROM    MACKENZIE. 

Men. 


Chcppcwyans 800 

Coppermine  Indians 139 

Dogribs 200 

Edchautawoot,  Strong-bows 70 

Mountain  Indians 40  , 


Souls. 

4,000 
695 

1,000 
350 
200 


'  American  Ethnological  Transactions,  Vol.  I. 

'  Voyages  from  Montreal,  through  the  Continent  of  North  America. 


28 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


n 


Blen. 

Ambatawwoot 40 

Kancbo,  or  Hare 50 

Deagothcc  Loochoo,  or  Quarrelers 70 

Nobaunics 40 

Tsillawadoot,  or  Bnisbwood 60 

Beaver  and  Kocky  Mountain  Indians 150 

TacuUics 

Sieaunies 

Nateotctains,  and  all  the  tribes  of  New  Caledonia  west  of  tbc  Roeky 
Mountains 


■   1,000 


8ou]<. 


1,300 


750 


5,000 


2,659 


13,295 


15.  The  Esquimaux,  who  constitute  the  extreme  northeastern  and  northwestern 
group  of  British  America,  ofler  the  singuhir  problem  of  the  migration  across  the  arctic 
fringe  of  the  continent  from  east  to  west.  They  are  traced  from  Baffin's  Bay,  Labrador, 
and  even  Greenhmd,  to  Behring's  Straits  and  the  continent  of  Asia,  where  the  sedentary 
Tchuktchi  are  found  to  s^x'ak  a  dialect  of  their  language.  But  this  language  is  not 
traced  farther  among  the  Asiatic  tribes  of  that  coast.  This  group,  whose  motle  of 
sul)sistcnce,  stature,  and  customs,  constitute  the  minimum  point  of  depression  of  the 
Indian  race,  and  who  offer  the  most  extreme  example  of  the  effects  of  latitude  and 
longitude  on  manners  and  the  physical  type,  is  confined  to  a  Ijelt  of  Home  hundred 
miles  wide,  on  the  arctic  coasts ;  and  they  have  their  extreme  southern  point  of  location 
within  the  Straits  of  Belle  Isle,  on  tb.o  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  lat.  about  50°.  Tiiey 
are  doubtless  the  Skra'Uings,  or  dwarfs,  observed  on  the  contiguous  Island  of  New- 
foundland, the  ancient  Ilellueland,  by  the  Scandinavians. 

16.  A  very  different  starting-jwint  must  be  assigned  to  the  migrations  of  the  multi- 
tude of  comparatively  populous  tribes  to  whom  we  have  applied  the  generic  terra 
of  Vesperic  or  United  States  Indians.  This  large  genus  of  the  race  who  exist  in  sepa- 
rate groups  of  languages,  but  who  are  assimilated  liy  a  peculiar  syntax  and  a  coinci- 
dence of  mental  and  physical  t^i)e  which  very  unequivocally  marks  them  as  a  homo- 
geneous race,  occupy  the  entire  area  of  the  United  States  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains, 
and  east  of  the  tribes  of  New  Mexico,  to  whom  De  Vaca  applies  the  term  "  Jumanos." 
(Ilumanos.)  These  latter  inhabit  the  outer  northern  edge  of  the  circle  of  the  semi- 
civilized  tribes  of  New  Mexico.  They  retained  at  that  era,  (about  1530,)  and  continue 
to  retain  at  the  present  day,  the  two  striking  elements  of  that  tyjw  (the  Toltec  type) 
of  civilization :  namely,  the  zea  maize  and  the  cottf)n  plant.  We  have  no  knowledge 
how  the  latter  was  fabricated.  There  was  no  indication  then,  nor  is  there  now,  that  the 
distaff"  (one  of  the  most  ancient  implements  of  mankind)  was  employed  to  form  the  thread. 
It  is  only  said  that  they  possessed  blankets  of  cotton,  and  that  they  cultivated  fields 


ilti- 
ji'in 
'po- 
Inci- 
nio- 
ins, 


lOH. 


>mi- 

IllllO 
|l)0) 

I  the 
?ad. 


I'.    I 


o 

(B 

4 

■g 

s 

t< 

t 

Cl 

i 

a 

o 

,1 

1 ' 

-1 

J, 

q 

1 

<; 

s 

■: 

in 

K- 

(I 


i 


I 

i 


I 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


29 


of  "corn."  Some  amelioration  of  manners  and  customs  was  the  consequence  of  this 
fixity  of  pursuits ;  and  we  find  that  De  Vaca  was  escorted  on  his  way  to  the  Pacific 
without  the  rude,  savage  manners  that  he  had  encountered  in  Florida  and  Arkansas, 
and  was  uniformly  attended  by  a  retinue.  Both  the  condition  and  position  of  the 
modern  Navahoes  and  Moquies  concur  in  favoring  the  sujiposition  that  they  ai-e 
descended  from  the  ancient  Jumanoos. 

17.  A  limit,  rather  than  a  startlng-iK)int,  is  thus  furnished  for  the  wild  hunter  tribes 
whom  both  De  Vaca  and  De  Soto  found  in  the  Mississippi  Valley,  and  in  the  present 
area  of  Florida,  Alabama,  Louisiana,  Mississippi,  and  Arkansas.  The  evidence  of  these 
tribes  coming  from  the  southwest  is  found  in  their  ^wssessing  the  zea  maize,  which  they 
carried  with  them,  and  cultivated  to  some  extent  wherever  they  went ;  and  it  con- 
stitutes one  of  the  best  evidences  of  the  track  of  migration.  Like  confluent  rivers 
pouring  from  the  west,  the  stream  of  migration  which  passed  into  and  across  the  Mis- 
sissippi may  have  rcceived,  at  successive  eras,  new  and  fresh  accessions  by  way  of  the 
several  passes  of  the  Rocky  Mountainr.  south  of  latituue  42°,  and  extending  to  30°,  or 
even  25° ;  but  it  is  by  no  means  probable  that  in  any  such  migrations  the  zea  maize 
was  brought  over  the  bleak  pass  of  42°,  where  the  plant  was  not  raised ;  nor  from  the 
banks  of  the  Columbia,  where  neither  Capt.  Grey,  Lewis  and  Clarke,  Ross  Coxe,  or  the 
agents  of  John  Jacob  Astor,  found  a  kernel  of  it  as  the  product  of  aboriginal  industry. 

Li  1527,  De  Vaca  found  the  zea  maize  in  very  limited  quantities  in  Florida,  after  he 
had  got  away  from  the  mere  Gulf  bands,  who  lived  mainly  on  fish,  moUusca,  wild  fruits, 
and  nuts.  De  Soto,  who  struck  deeper  into  the  country  in  his  march  twelve  yeai-s 
later,  found  it  abundantly  among  the  ancestors  of  the  present  Muscogees,  Cliactaws, 
Chickasaws,  and  Cherokces.  In  1702,  Avhen  Bienville  was  put  to  straits  in  sustaining 
the  infant  colony  of  Louisiana,  this  grain  was  so  abundant  among  the  Chactaws,  who 
were  the  original  occupants  of  the  country,  that  the  governor  quartered  the  soldiers  for 
months  on  that  tribe.' 

18.  The  Virginia  tribes  literally  sustained  the  colony  planted  at  Jamestown  with 
supplies  of  Indian-corn  from  their  own  fields,  and  one  of  the  prominent  services  which 
Capt.  John  Smith  mentioned  in  his  letter  to  Queen  Anne,  in  recounting  the  friendliness 
of  Pocahontas,  was  her  leading  these  "conductas"  of  grain  herself  to  the  suflbring 
colonists,  without  which  they  nuist  have  perished.  Tiie  track  of  its  spreading  among 
the  tribes  along  the  Atlantic  coast  is  clearly  traced  along  the  shores  of  the  Atlantic 
into  Massachusetts  and  all  New  England,  where  they  raised  the  small  and  nutritious 
variety  of  white  and  yellow  flint  corn,  and  where  their  no-kio-ldk  constituted  the 
sustaining  food  of  their  v,  arriora. 


'  Oiiyurrc's  Louisiana.     Wc  quote  this  bonk  for  nn  isolutcd  fiict. 


80 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


I 

1;  > 


t ; 


! 


^  I 


19.  The  Gulf  of  the  St.  Lawrence  may  be  named  as  the  most  northerly  latitude  to 
which  the  Indians  had  carried  this  plant ;  but  there  is  no  evidence,  that  I  have  seen, 
of  its  having  been  cultivated,  at  an  early  date,  on  or  near  its  shores.  Cartier,  in  his 
voyages  in  1534  and  1535,  found  none. 

20.  On  ascending  the  St.  Lawrence,  by  its  rapids,  into  Lake  Ontario,  and  penetrating 
into  the  country  of  the  Iroquois,  about  IGIO,  the  cultivation  of  the  zea  maize  wa« 
found,  by  the  French,  to  be  practised  in  all  the  cantons ;  and  the  reliance  placed  on  it 
is  one  of  the  unniistakeable  causes  of  the  progress  to  political  power,  made  by  this 
celebrated  group  of  tribes.  By  means  of  it,  they  could  sustain  a  more  heavy  popu- 
lation, and  live  in  larger  villages. 

21.  On  proceeding  to  the  ultra-montane  regions  west  of  the  Alleghanies,  this  native 
cereal  was  found,  by  the  earliest  French  and  English  explorers,  in  possession  of  all  the 
tribes.  It  was  cultivated,  in  small  quantities,  by  the  hunter  communities  of  the  Ohio, 
the  Wabash,  the  Miami,  and  the  Illinois ;  and  by  the  nations  along  both  banks  of  the 
Mississippi ;  for  this  river,  in  its  descent  from  the  Wisconsin  and  Illinois,  where  Mar- 
gucttc  had  reached  it,  was  the  reflex  course  of  discovery  to  the  respective  points  Avherc 
De  Vaca  and  De  Soto  had  first  found  it.  La  Salle  and  Tonti  followed  it  quite  to  the 
point  in  its  delta  where  the  level  of  the  arable  alluvial  land  sinks  beneath  the  dominion 
of  the  waters  on  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 

22.  It  is  quite  evident  that  the  cultivation  of  the  zea  maize  gave  the  ancient  mound- 
builders  the  capacity  of  concentrating  their  numbers,  and  living  tt)gether  in  large  towns, 
which  at  once  created  a  necessity  for,  and  enabled  them  to  construct  and  defend  those 
antique  works,  the  remains  of  which  are  still  found  in  many  places  in  the  West. 
Nothing  is  clearer  (if  we  admit  some  intrusive  antiquities  due  to  civilized  sources  before 
the  fifteenth  century)  than  that  this  ancient  development  of  increased  numbers  and 
power  had  produced  no  very  fixed  general  confederacies,  or  led  to  consolidated  dynasties, 
like  those  of  the  Olmecs,  the  Toltecs,  the  Aztecs,  and  the  Auricanians ;  that  the  tribes 
lived  in  continual  political  discord ;  that  no  high  advanced  state  of  civilization,  mannera, 
and  iiolicy  had  been  reached ;  and  that  the  failure  of  their  partial  and  verbal  compacts 
threw  them  back  into  the  type  of  barbarism,  leaving  the  remains  spoken  of,  not  only 
as  monuments  of  the  conflicts  of  opposing  tribes,  but  of  the  state  of  mid  discord  that 
prevailed  among  them.  If  European  or  Asiatic  science  and  art  had  furnished  elements 
in  this,  they  gave  way  to  barbaric  power.  He  must,  we  think,  be  an  observer  of  a  very 
imaginative  temperament  who  perceives  in  these  archax)logical  remains  a  more  exalted 
origin  than  has  been  denoted.  We  cannot  say  that  the  Syrian,  the  Carthaginian,  the 
Scandinavian,  or  even  the  Cimbrian  or  Jew,  were  not  here.  Tliere  arc  rather  vestiges 
than   proofs  of  such  a  population ;   but  it  appears  alike  to  have  lost  its   arts  and 


GENERAL    HISTORY,  31 

its  religion.  Look  where  we  will  between  the  bunks  of  Lake  Snperior  and  the  Gulf 
of  Mexico,  there  are  few  traces  of  the  origin  of  the  arts  which  denote  a  high  civiliza- 
tion. There  are  no  indications  of  the  use  of  the  iron  hammer,  the  art  of  soldering, 
the  use  of  the  lathe,  the  jwtter's  wheel,  the  art  of  glazing,  or  the  distaff.  The  carving 
of  pipes,  from  generally  soft  minerals  and  stones,  was  carried  to  considerable  iK'rfection, 
but  will  not,  for  an  instant,  bear  comparison  with  the  supix)sed  contemi^raneous  arts 
of  the  Roman  and  Grecian,  or  even  the  Egyptian  chisel.  The  greatest  evidence  of 
combined  lalwr  was  not  in  the  numlier  of  cubic  feet  of  earth  piled  up  in  the  western 
tumuli,  and  in  evidences  of  corn-culture,  but  in  the  attempts  at  mining  in  the  basin  of 
Lake  Superior,  wb'ch  have  been  developed  since  1844.  But  even  here,  the  hammers 
used  were  mMi>  A'  stone,  and  the  power  of  artificial  disintegration  was  the  alternate 
application  of  nio  and  water  to  the  surface  of  the  rock.  The  mechanical  i)owers  of  the 
wedge  and  the  lever  were,  it  is  true,  to  some  extent  employed,  and  tlie  operation  of 
cutting  masses  of  native  copper  was  effected  by  means  of  chisels  of  the  same  material, 
hardened  by  an  admixture  of  tin,'  or  in  some  way  not  exactly  apparent.  Pieces  of 
native  copjier,  in  a  state  of  rude  manufivcture,  were  scattered,  at  very  early  periods,  in 
tumuli  and  graves,  not  only  throughout  the  basins  of  the  upper  lakes  and  the  valley 
of  the  Mississippi,  from  this  prolific  source,  but  over  more  than  half  of  North  America.* 
These  ancient  labors  were  manifestly  due  to  the  predecessors  of  the  Vesperic  trilies, 
whose  vestiges  are  scattered  in  the  Valley  of  the  Mississippi.  But  even  here,  the 
element  of  the  zea  maize,  and  perhaps  a  sjwcies  of  bean,'  must  have  lx?en  relied  on  to 
a  considerable  extent,  as  an  article  transported  from  contiguous  southern  latitudes.  It 
was  less  than  an  hundred  and  fifty  geographical  miles,  in  aline  south  from  the  Michigan 
antique  copper-beds  referred  to,  to  the  Fox  river  valley  of  Green  Bay,  where  the  zea 
maize  is  known  to  have  been  cultivated  by  the  natives  from  the  earliest  arrival  of  the 
French. 

This  cereal  was  rai.scd  on  the  ancient  Winnebago  fields,  on  the  inner  shores  of  Green 
Bay,  and  perhaps  extended  to  the  banks  of  the  Menomonie  river.  The  plant  was  not 
carried  in  that  longitude,  in  its  northern  distribution,  beyond  the  latitude  of  Wakanuk- 
kizzie,  or  the  point  called  L'arbre  croche  by  the  French,  on  the  eastern  shores  of  Lake 
Michigan.  In  the  valley  of  the  upper  Mississippi,  its  geographical  dissemination  was 
higher;  and  in  proportion  as  that  river  was  ascended  westward  in  its  discovery,  at 
considerable  distances  above  the  Falls  of  St.  Anthony,  the  climate  favored  its  growth. 
I  found  this  grain  at  Cass  Lake,  on  the  sources  of  the  river,  in  1832,  and  it  was  the 
current  tradition  of  red  and  white  men,  that  it  had  been  rai.sed,  and  came  to  perfection, 
so  as  to  preserve  seed,  from  a  very  early  period,  at  Red  Lake,  near  latitude  49°,  and  in 


'  It  is  confosscd,  we  have  no  locality  of  tin  iu  the  United  States,  unless  it  bo  in  the  valley  of  the  Kansas, 
referred  to  in  Part  I.,  p.  157. 

*  Vide  Part  I.,  p.  95,  where  a  general  view  of  this  question  is  given.  '  Part  I.,  p.  54. 


82 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


II  ■< 


I 


I 


i  f 


B^ 


the  valley  of  Reil  River  of  the  North.  To  these  remote  points  it  had  Ix^en  carried  in 
the  migrations  northwestwardly  of  the  Ojibways,  the  Kenistenos,  and  the  Assinaboines ; 
and  in  these  latitudes  it  ceases.  The  great  Athapasca  family,  starting  from  an  opposite 
centre  of  migration,  did  not  possess  it. 

20.  If  the  family  of  the  widely  diffused  United  States  or  Vesperic  tribes,  whose 
track  of  migration  hius  now  been  sketched  by  the  imi^rtant  element  of  the  zea  maize, 
be  compared  by  general  manners  and  customs,  modes  of  living,  and  principles  of  syntax, 
there  will  l)e  found  a  striking  and  close  resemblance.  Food  and  climate  have  created 
developments  in  the  southern  and  western  tribes  which  were  rare,  or  comparatively 
unknown,  in  the  extreme  northciastem  and  nortliwestem  stocks.  The  tribes  who 
chased  the  buffalo,  and  lived  almost  exclusively  on  animal  diet,  were  of  a  more  vigorous 
physical  and  mental  character  than  those  bands  which  were  confined  along  the  northern 
searcoasts  to  fish.'  Ilence  it  was  that  the  interior  tribes  everywhere  defended  them- 
selves more  valiantly  than  those  on  the  coasts.  Even  in  Florida,  where  the  natives 
stood  courageously  by  their  arms,  on  the  first  invasion  by  the  Spaniards,  under  De  Soto, 
in  1539,  they  had  not  proceeded  thirty  leagues  before  they  encountered  expert  lx)wmen, 
who  could  drive  an  arrow  nearly  to  its  head  through  the  breast  of  a  horse.' 

The  brave  inhabitants  of  Aidiazea  and  Copafi,  who  were  clearly  of  the  extended 
family  of  the  Muscogee  group  of  tribes,'  were  possessed  of  a  muscular  jjower  which  made 
them  to  be  feared  by  the  most  brave  and  chivalric  cavaliers.  These  tril)es,  as  the 
narrator  observes,  only  killed  deer  enough  to  answer  their  puqioses  as  food ;  but  they, 
at  the  same  time,  raised  the  zea  nuiize  in  such  quantities,  that  Dc  Soto's  army,  on  one 
occasion,  marched  through  fields  of  maize  for  the  distance  of  two  leagues. 


'  Morton's  Crania  Americana. 

•  Vide  De  Vega,  as  quoted  in  Theodore  Irving's  Conquest  of  Florida. 

'  Mr.  Albert  James  Pickett,  in  bis  newly-publisbed  (1851)  History  of  Alabama,  states,  in  a  note  (p.  22, 
Vol.  I.)  tbat  the  Muscogecs  migrated  from  SIcxico  into  Alabama,  &c.,  after  the  invasion  of  Do  Soto;  and 
that  they  conquered  the  Alabamas,  Ockmulgees,  Oconecs,  and  Alachces.  By  reference  to  the  traditions  of 
Se-ko-pe-chi,  an  aged  Muscogee,  now  in  the  Creek  nation,  west  of  the  Mississippi,  which  is  recorded  in  "The 
History,  Condition,  and  Prospects  of  the  Indian  Tribes  of  the  United  States,"  Vol.  I.  p.  266,  it  is  perceived 
that  the  Muscogecs  formerly  called  themselves  "  Alabaniians,"  and  were  called  by  other  tribes  "Okechoyatte." 

The  Uchecs,  like  the  Natchez,  have  ever  been  deemed  as  speaking  a  language  radically  distinct  from  the 
Muscogee ;  and  there  is  an  admission,  in  a  fact  mentioned  by  Se-ko-pe-chi,  tliat  the  Creek  nationality  is  not  very 
ancient.  Wo  have  no  Ockmulgce  or  Oconee  vocabulary,  and  cannot,  therefore,  speak  authoritatively;  but  the 
names  thcmsehes,  and  certainly  those  of  the  surrounding  country,  bear  evidence  of  Muscogee  origin. 


GENERAL   HISTORY. 


33 


B.     DlSTRIBUTIOxN    OF    TRIBES. 

At  the  close  of  the  fifteenth  century,  the  Indian  trilx^s  of  the  present  area  of  the 
United  States  were  spread  out,  chiefly,  in  seven  principal  groups  or  generic  families  of 
trihes;  each  of  which  consisted  of  numerous  sul)-tril)es,  hands,  or  large  toteniic  circles. 
Each  of  these  .subordinate  tribes  spoke  a  language  or  dialect  differing,  in  some  respects, 
from  the  others,  and  sometimes  having  a  vocabulary  entirely  at  \  ariance.  Each  circle 
had  also  some  tribal  peculiarities  in  customs  or  manners,  which  might  be  noticed  by 
other  trilje.s,  or  by  European.s  living  among  them,  who  had  paid  particular  attention  to 
these  minutia,',  but  which  would  pass  unnoticed  Ijy  tlic  general  ob.^erver. 

These  groups,  in  the  order  of  discovery,  froni  south  to  north,  and  from  east  to  west, 
were  the  Appalachian,  Achalaque,  Chicorean,  Algon:^uin,  Iroquois,  Dacota,  and 
Shoshonee.  There  appear  to  have  been  some  fragmentary  tribes,  as  the  Natchez  and 
Uchees  in  the  south,  and  the  Chyennes,  &c.  in  the  west  and  northwest,  who  cannot, 
perhaps,  be  arranged  under  these  genera;  but  the  present  state  of  our  aboriginal 
researches  will  not  permit  us  to  include  them  in  either  of  the  seven  groups.  There  is, 
possiblv,  a  Toltecan  element  in  the  Api)alachian  group:  nor  are  we  entirely  prepared, 
at  the  distance  of  nearly  three  centuries  from  the  time  stated,  and  with  the  imperfect 
information  and  vocabularies  now  possessed,  to  determine,  at  that  ej)och,  the  exact 
ethnological  relations  and  boundaries  of  the  tribes  of  Texas,  Oregon,  New  Mexico, 
California,  and  Utah  —  countries  respecting  which,  it  is  hoped,  the  progress  of  this 
work  wdl  hereafter  enable  us  to  piosent  a  chart  to  bear  the  date  of  1800. 

1.  Ai'1'Ai..vciiiANS.  —  The  several  groups  are  placed,  on  the  subjoined  map,  in  the 
order  of  their  discovery.  The  Spanish,  who  discovered  the  peninsula  of  Florida,  were 
not  backward  in  their  attempts  to  explore  it.  It  would  not  appear  that  the  Gulf  of 
Florida  is  of  a  breadth  and  character  to  have  prevented  the  natives  from  passing  to 
Cuba,  either  by  a  bold  traver.se  in  the  halcyon  montlis,  or  by  the  way  of  the  Bahama 
Islands ;  and  such  an  origin  has  been  conjectured,  by  some  early  voyagers,'  for  the 
Carrihean  tribes,  but  without  physiological  jtroofs.  On  the  contrary,  the  Spaniards  of 
Cuba,  when  they  landed  in  Florida,  found  their  island  interpreters  entirely  at  fault : 
they  could  not  understand  a  word  of  tlie  language;  and  Pamphilio  de  Narvaez,  who 
landed  in  1527,  old  style,  at  what  is  now  called  Tampa  Bay,  was  obliged  to  employ  the 
vague  language  of  signs.  This  want  of  an  interpreter  w  ,.s,  it  is  believed,  at  the  bottom 
of  all  his  misfortunes,  lie  perpetually  misunderstood  the  Indian.s,  and  they  him. 
The  next  error,  was  the  then  prevalent  notion,  that  no  terms  were  to  be  kept  with 


]'T.  II. 


Davis. 


il 


111 

i'il 


I      f  1 

I 


sir 


34 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


heathens, —  who  worshipped  the  sun  and  moon;  who  wore  under  the  guartlianship  of 
demons ;  and  who  recognized  a  Gotl  in  ahuost  every  natural  phenomenon.  A  fit 
eommentary  on  this  notion,  which  freed  him  from  moral  accountabiUty,  and  even  the 
laws  of  humanity,  was  his  tearing  to  pieces,  l)y  blood-hounds,  the  mother  of  the  chief 
Hirriliigua,  whoso  implacable  resentment  to  the  whole  Spanish  race  no  future  eflbrts 
of  either  this  vain  and  vaunting  cavalier,  or  of  Do  St)to,  who  followed  his  track  ten  or 
eleven  years  after,  could  ever  apiK'ase. 

These  several  landings  were  in  the  wide-spreading  circle  of  what  we  denominate  the 
Appalachian  group,  of  which  the  Creek  or  Muscogee,  the  Choctaw,  and  Chickasaw, 
form  the  tlirec  leading  trilxs.  Tlie  names  of  places  recorded,  though  often  imprecise, 
and  always  aft«r  the  old  scholastic  system  of  Spanish  orthography,  render  them 
demonstral)le.  There  appears  evidence  also,  wliile  the  main  trilies  were  homogeneous, 
in  the  name  of  the  friendly  and  placid  chief  "  Mocoso,"  (Little  Bear)  of  the  existence 
of  the  Shawnee  dialect  of  the  Algonquin  element  of  language,  at  this  time,  in  the 
Floridian  peninsula ;  and  tlieir  present  tribal  name  (Southerners)  and  recorded  traditions 
ivceive  8upix)rt  from  this  coincidence. 

De  Soto  was  enabled,  with  the  aid  of  the  interpretership  of  Juan  Ortiz,  a  soldier  left 
by  Narvaez  who  had  learned  the  Appalache  language,  to  carry  on  his  communications 
with  the  several  tribes  until  he  reached  and  crossed  the  banks  of  the  Mississippi.  This 
appears  evitlent,  for  it  is  said  although  the  languages  diftered,  this  difference  was  not 
radical,  so  that  ho  coidd  communicate  with  them.  The  Appalaches  evidently  spoke 
the  Muscogee,  but  it  is  evident  that,  in  the  wild  search  after  gold-mines,  De  Soto 
crossed  his  own  track.  After  his  return  from  Cofatcliique,  a  Creek  name,  he  crossed 
a  part  of  the  Cherokee  country,  again  entered  the  territory  of  the  Creeks,  and  after- 
wards of  the  Choct.aws,  (called  Mavilians,  or  Mobilians,)  and,  at  his  highest  point  on 
the  Mississippi,  the  Chickasaws. 

The  names  of  Alibamo,  Cosa,  Talise,  Chicaza,  and  Tascaluza,  are  scarcely  distin- 
guishable, in  their  i^pular  pronunciation,  from  the  mmlern  words,  Alabama,  Coosa, 
Tallisee,  Chickasaw,  and  Tuscaloosa;  the  latter  of  which  is  pure  Choctaw,  meaning 
lilack  Warrior.' 

After  crossing  the  Mississippi,  one  of  the  gi-oatest  perplexities  which  De  Soto  felt 
arose  fnnn  the  want  of  interpreters.  lie  here  encountered  a  totally  different  stock  of 
languages,  of  which  Ortez  was  wholly  ignorant.  The  words  had  to  go  through  eight 
or  ten  voices  after  passing  from  them  before  an  answer  was  returned,  and  this  could 
not  1)0  I'elied  on.  Judging  that  the  same  class  of  tribes  have  continued  to  occupy  the 
right  bank  of  the  Mississippi,  he  was  now  among  what  is  denominated  the  Dacota,  or 
wild  prairie  trilx^s.  It  is  difficult,  in  this  part  of  the  narrative  of  Garcillisco  de  la 
Vega,  U>  recognize  existing  names,  or  our  vocabularies  of  the  most  ancient  native 


'  Tufca,  warrior,  and  loosa,  black. 


GENERAL   HISTORY. 


35 


terms  liiivt-  not  lieen  sufficiently  scrutinized.  The  bold  adventurer  Imd  no  idea  that 
the  Kooky  Moiuitains  divided  him,  by  a  breadth  of  at  leaot  2000  miie.s,  from  the  "  South 
Sea" — a  word  continually  u.sed  for  the  Pacific.  He  was  evidently  at  his  most  westerly 
point,  in  the  range  of  the  Quappas,  the  Kansas,  and  the  Osajros,  or  Waslibashas. 
lie  pursued  his  way  westward  to  the  hill  country  running  north  and  south  from  the 
Merrimack  and  Giusconade  to  the  Wa.shita,  which  is  significantly  called  the  Ozark 
Mountains.  He  reached  the  saline  formations,  and  after  his  death  Muscoso,  his 
successor,  in  proceeding  to  the  province  of  Le  Vasqueros  and  coming  in  sight  of  the 
mountains,  had  evidently  reached  the  buffalo  plains  of  the  far  West.  There  is  some 
evidence  of  the  intrusion  of  the  Illinois  into  the  northern  limits  of  De  Soto's  marches, 
and,  consequently,  of  the  Algonquin  group  west  of  the  Mississippi ;  between  whom  and 
neighlwring  Indians  a  violent  feud  existed. 

2.  AriiALAQUES.  —  In  the  march  of  De  Soto  westward (1540)froinCutifachiqiii,  which 
is  thought  by  Mr.  Pickett'  to  have  been  on  the  Savannah  river,  he  passed  through  the 
southern  portion  of  the  territory  of  the  Achalaques  —  the  Cherokecs  of  our  day ;  a 
region  which  is  branded  as  "barren."  He  was  now  among  the  foot-hills  of  the  Appa- 
lachian range.  The  name  of  Achalaque  represents,  indeed,  the  sounds  of  the  term  for 
this  group  more  fully  than  the  English  term  of  Cherokee.  It  is  known  that  the  sound 
of  r  is  wanting  in  this  language.  David  Brown,  the  brother  of  Catherine,^  a  native 
(Jherokee,  calls  it  "  the  sweet  language  of  Tsallake."  The  boundary  of  the  territory 
posses.sed  by  this  tribe  appeare  to  have  been  less  subject  to  variation  than  that  of  any 
other  tribe  with  whom  we  have  been  in  intercourse ;  not  excepting  the  Iroc^uois,  whose 
domains  grew,  however,  by  accessions  from  conquest. 

3.  CiiicouKAX  Group. — The  genera  of  triljos  to  which  we  apply  this  name  claim  the 
States  of  South  and  North  Carolina  as  the  peculiar  theatre  of  their  occupancy-,  at  the 
earliest  era.  We  first  hear  of  them  about  1510.  The  credulous  governor  of  Porto 
Rico,  Ponce  de  Leon,  rendered  himself  memorable  by  his  early  discovery  of,  and 
adventures  in  Florida,  which  he  named  :  but  he  was  mortally  wounded  in  a  conflict 
with  the  natives.  An  adventurer  by  the  name  of  Diego  Meruelo,  being  aftenvards 
driven  on  the  coast,  received  a  small  quantity  of  the  precious  metals.  This  inllamed 
the  golden  hopes  of  a  company  engaged  in  mining  at  San  Domingo,  who  fitted  out  three 
ships  for  a  voyage  thither.  The  leader  was  Lucas  Vasques  de  Ayllon,  whose  object 
was  kidnapping  of  Indians  to  work  in  the  mines.  In  this  nefarious  olyect  he  was 
driven  eastwardly  along  the  coasts  of  what  is  now  called  South  Carolina.  At  Combaliee 
river,  he  traded  with  the  Indians,  (Yamasees)  and  after  completing  his  trailic,  invited 


'Hist.  Alabama;  Clinrlcston,  1851. 


"Life  of  Catherine  Brown,  by  Rev.  R.  Anderson. 


It 

w 

I* 


86 


(J  E  N  E  11 A  L    HIS  T  U  U  Y 


them  on  iMjanl  of  liis  vi'ssols,  iiiid  wlioii  a  siilTlcii'iit  iiiiiiiluT  luul  goiio  into  the  liohk  of 
his  sliips,  lie  eloseil  the  liiitehes,  and  -sailed  liaek  to  San  Doniin}!,o. 

The  Vamasees  spiead  along  the  sea-coasts  of  South  Carolina.  Tlic  midland  and 
interior  portions  were  coveivd  hy  the  Catahas  and  Cheraws,  artful  and  valiant  races, 
who  extended  into  North  Carolina,  and  who  have  signalized  their  liistory  hy  their 
friendslii|)  for  the  whites.  The  Catahas  were  not  an  indigenous  pettple  in  S)nth 
Carolina,  having  Ix-on  driven  from  the  north  hy  the  Iroquois,  who  continued  to  Ix;  their 
deadly  enemies.'  The  mountain  region  and  uplands  were  dehateahle  ground,  which 
was  made  notorious  hy  the  contending  Cherokecs  and  Inxjuois.  The  hitter,  in  the 
Tuscarora  hranch,  spread  across  North  Caiolina,  and  prcsei'\ed  a  point  of  approach  for 
their  kindred  in  western  New  York,  and  the  lakes.  They  maintained  a  war  of 
extniordinarv  violence  against  the  Cherokce.s  and  Catahas,  which  was  conducted, 
generally,  l)v  small  parties.  There  is  rea.son  to  sujjposo,  that  the  Cherokees  were  the 
"Tallagewy"  of  the  Lenapcs,"  who  were  defeated  in  the  north,  smd  driven  down  the 
Ohio  hy  that  ancient  trihe  in  alliance  w  ith  the  Inxpiois.  This  group  ahsorhs  the  small 
sea-coast  trihes  of  North  Carolina.  It  extends  into  southern  Virginia,  south  of 
^AllxMnarle  Sound. 


4.  Ai.GOXQriN'^=- — We  meet  with  scnue  traces  of  this  language  in  ancient  Florida.  It 
fii'st  assumes  importance  in  the  sulvgenus  of  the  Powhattanese  circle  in  Virginia.  It 
i,s  afterwards  found  in  the  Nauticokes ;  assumes  a  very  decided  type  in  the  Iamuu 
Lenapces,  or  Delawnres;  and  i.-!  afterwards  traced,  in  various  dialects,  in  the  valleys  of 
the  Hudson  and  Cimnccticut,  and  throughout  the  whole  -cngnipliical  area  of  New 
England,  New  Brunswick,  and  Nova  Scotia. 

The  term  apjK^ars  to  have  heeu  first  employed,  as  a  generic  word,  hy  the  French  for 
the  old  Nipercinians,  Attnwr.s,  Montagnies,  and  their  congeners  in  the  Valley  of  the 
St.  Lawrence.  It  is  applied  to  the  Salteurs  of  St.  Mary,  the  ^Faskigoes  of  Canada,  and, 
as  shown  hy  a  recent  vocabulary,  the  Blackfect  of  the  upper  Missouri,  the  Saskatchewine, 
the  Pillagers  of  the  upper  Mississippi,  and  the  Crees  or  Kenistenoes  of  Hudson's  Bay. 
Retuniing  from  these  I'cmote  ix)ints,  where  this  hroad  migratory  column  was  met  hy 
the  Atlmpasca  group,  the  term  includes  the  Miamis,  Weea.s,  Piankashaws,  the 
Shawnecs,  Pottawatomies,  Sacs  and  Foxes,  Kickapoos,  and  Illinois,  and  their  varieties, 
the  Ka,ska.skias,  &c.,  to  the  junction  of  the  Ohio  aiul  Mississippi. 


5.  Iroqt'Ois. — Within  this  widely  spread  groii])  the  Five  and  afterwards  Six  Nations 
(called  Iroquois)  planted  themselves  in  western  New  York,  and  on  the  shores  of  lakes 
Ontario  and  Erie,  at  a  point  where  they  would  appear  to  have  l)een  in  danger  of  Ix'ing 
crushed  hy  the  surrounding  nations ;  but  they  had  the  wisdom  to  see  that  the  small 


'  MSS.  from  the  Sec.  of  State's  Office,  S.  C. 


'  Trans.  Hist.  fom.  I'liil.  Soc,  Vol.  I. 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


37 


lii.liaii  tiilK\s  (lestroyoil  themselves  by  discord,  and  they  organized  tliemselve«  inU)  a 
confederacy,  in  which  the  principles  of  military  glory  and  union  were  carried  to  the 
acme  of  the  hunter  man.  They  conquered,  and  then  made  allies  of  the  Mohican  and 
Hudson  river  trik's,  reaching  to  Ijong  Island.  They  suWued,  in  a  similar  way,  the 
Mon.seos,  and  the  Lenapi  themselves,  who  had  long  occupied  a  central  prominence  in 
Pennsylvania,  and  also  extended  their  conquests  ea«t  and  west,  and  north  and  south. 
Thev  drove  away  the  AUegewy,  in  alliance  with  the  Delawares,  k-foro  the  end  of  the 
fifteenth  century,  and  kept  o\m\  a  road  of  conquest,  in  the  direction  of  the  Alleghany, 
to  South  Carolina.  The  Wyandots  are  of  tliis  stock.  It  is  clear,  from  Lc  Jeune,  that 
this  trilx!  was  located  on  the  island  of  Montreal  when  the  French  first  settled  in  Canada ; 
but,  owing  to  their  alliance  with  the  French  and  the  Algoiuiuins,  they  were  exixdled 
from  that  valley  alwut  the  middle  of  the  si.vteenth  century. 

G.  Dacotas. — Th'  Misrissippi  river  .Drmed  a  line  of  demarcation,  at  the  earliest 
dates,  between  the  .''  ppalaci;ian  an  t  the  Algonquin,  and  the  Dacota  tril)e.s.  De  St)to, 
when  he  crossed  it  in  l.j41,!ii  latit'.ce  alwut  o2°,  landed  among  a  class  of  tribes,  one  of 
whom,  namely,  the  Quai)pas,  (GiMuana,)  is  clearly  n.imed.  De  Vaca,  ten  years  earlier, 
mentions  the  Aouas  (lowas).  I  use  the  t'  m  Dacoia  in  a  generic  sense,  for  a  stock  of 
languages,  and  not  as  designating  the  Si'  rv  only,  as  it  embraces  a  very  large  number  of 
tril)es  west  of  the  Mississippi.  Such  an  the  Quapp  \  Ka.«as,  lowas,  Osagcs,  Pawnees, 
Otoes,  Missourias,  Omahaws,  A'  .  n  ■  ..rees,  Minnitare  .  Mandans,  Winnebagoes,  and  many 
others,  who  fdl  the  wide  spa  e  b<;!'.veen  the  foot  of  the  Eix-ky  Mountains  and  the 
Mississipiii :  they  are  lords  of  the  prairies.  It  is  not  conteri'.'  -  that  the.se  ten  trilx>s 
can  converse  understandingly  together;  but  that  they  are  coiniected  by  one  ethnological 
chain,  which  i.s  distinctly  traced,  sc  far  as  it  has  been  compared  by  vocabularies.  From 
this  large  family  of  tribes  there  arc  to  be  abstracted  tiie  elements  of  one,  if  not  two, 
additional  groups,  which  we  ar^;  iu  hopes  satisfactorily  to  designate  in  the  progress  of 
the  investigations  which  wo  are  now  making. 

The  course  of  the  tide  of  migration  of  the  Dacotas  appears  to  have  been  north, 
until  the  advanced  tribes  reached  the  sources  of  the  Mississippi,  and  the  western  shores 
of  Lake  Superior.  The  Winnebagoes  had,  at  the  time  the  French  first  entered  the 
country,  reached  Green  Ba\-,  and  the  Sioux  of  the  Miiniesota  t'M'ritory  were  tluu 
already  on  their  >'  tn  .^rade  nuurh  back  on  their  track.  Tra<'<'^  of  their  ancient  villages 
and  hieroglyphics  liave  been  noticed  at  Leecii  Lake,  at  Mille  Lac,  and  other  interior 
positions  intermediate  between  Lake  Superior  and  the  east  bank  of  the  Mississippi. 
They  had  b'.  yun  to  retreat  before  the  northwestern  rush  of  the  Algonquins,  who  appear, 
from  remcie  dates,'  to  have  been  most  expert  woodsmen. 


7.  SnosHOXEES.  —  This    genus    of    triljcs   pos.>iess    the    Rocky    Mountajns.      They 
appear,  as  far  as  history  extends,  to  have  held  its  Iieights  and  pas.ses  from  the  sources 


'  ColJeD. 


38 


GENERAL    HISTORY. 


of  the  Missouri,  in  latitude  about  44°,  to  the  southern  rim  of  the  Great  Salt  Basin. 
Their  own  traditions  represent  them  to  have  lived  in  the  valley  of  the  Siustatehewine, 
from  which  they  were  driven  by  the  Blackfeet.  They  occupy  the  Lewis  fork  of  the 
Columbia  river,  as  far  down  as  latitude  about  44°  '60'.  It  is  clearly  appnn'ut,  that 
they  were  situated  on  the  summit  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  —  in  the  territory  of 
Utah,  —  and  in  the  plains  and  hill-country  of  Texas ;  but  it  can,  by  no  means,  be 
affirmed  that  these  tribes  had  their  present  [wsitions  at  the  date  we  assign  to  our  chart, 
tla-ee  centuries  ago ;  while  the  consideration  of  this  subject  is  connected,  and  would 
inevitably  require  the  classification  of  the  newly-annexed  tribes  of  the  United  States  on 
its  southern  and  western  boundary.  It  appears,  from  vocabularies,  that  they  are  the 
same  iwople  as  the  Comanches  of  Texas.  West  of  the  Sierra  Nevada,  a  tribe  of  them, 
called  Bonacks,  or  Root-diggers,  extends  into  California.  Their  track  of  migration 
appears  to  have  been  south,  branching  into  California,  and  southeast  into  Texas. 

The  geographical  position  of  these  American  tribes  at  large,  and  their  diifu-sion  over 
the  present  area  of  the  United  States  and  of  the  British  jiossessions  north  of  it, 
extending  to  the  Arctic  Oceai:,  as  they  werc  found  at  the  commencement  of  the 
sixteenth  century,  when  North  America  began  to  Ije  settled  along  its  Atlantic  borders, 
is  denoted  by  the  subjoined  Ethnological  Map.     (Plate  4.) 


C.    PHYSICAL  TRAITS. 


The  physiology  of  the  United  States  Indian  tribes  is  fully  descril)cd  in  a  subsequent 
paiwr,  (No.  VIII.,)  by  the  late  Dr.  Samuel  George  Morton.  This  is  the  last  literary 
labour  of  his  pen,  and  presents  the  subject  in  its  most  profound  and  philosophical 
asjH'cts. 

The  observatioi's  which  have  now  been  ofleivd  on  the  general  history  of  the  tribes, 
will  prepare  the  way  for  our  taking  up  t!ie  topic,  understandiiigly,  in  its  details 
lesjwcting  the  several  stocks  of  the  race  who  have  occupied  the  colonies  and  states  from 
tlie. .  earliest  planting ;  a  task  which  will  Ixj  urged  forward  in  the  subsequent  volumes  of 
tliese  investigations,  with  every  [M)ssible  degree  of  speed  consistent  with  its  pro^jcr 
consideration. 


11.  MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS.   A, 


(30) 


,i 


II 

V 

ilff 

h 

'   H 

i;| 

■   1 

Im 

1? 

I' 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS.    A. 


SYNOPSIS. 

A.     GENERIC    VIEW. 

1.  Barbarism  a  lapsed  state  of  Man. 

2.  Definition  of  the  term  Race. 

3.  Antique  Ideas  of  the  Barbaric  state. 

4.  Hebrew  Idea  of  it. 

5.  Noachian  epoch. 

6.  Ideas  of  Historians  and  Travellers  on  this  Subject. 

7.  Purport  of  this  Review  of  Opinions. 

8.  Era  of  Decline. 

9.  Influence  of  the  Continent  on  the  Aborigines. 
10.  Unity  of  Manners,  Customs,  and  Opinions. 


B.    THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  THE   INDIAN  FAMILY. 

1.  Marriage  —  the  Family  Group. 

2.  Ties  of  Consanguinity. 

3.  Totem  —  its  Uses. 

4.  Genealogy — Affection  for  Children. 

5.  Self-sacrifice  of  Bianswah. 

6.  Transitive  Character  of  Names. 


C.    FOREST  TEACHINGS. 

7.  Children  Early  Instructed  in  the  Arts  of  Hunting  and  Fishing. 

8.  Instance  of  the  Early  Use  of  the  Snare. 

9.  Hunting  at  large. 

Pt.  II.  — C  («) 


■1 1.1 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


10.  Spearing  the  Musk-rat.     (Plate.) 

11.  Fishing  through  the  Ice.    (Plate.) 

12.  Setting  Nets  through  the  Ice. 

13.  Fish-dams  of  Poles. 

14.  l^ami-kow-a-guns,  or  Stone  Dams. 

15.  Fishing  with  Scoop-nets. 

16.  Shooting  of  Fish.    (Plate.)    Hook-fishing. 


D.    ART   OF  HUNTING. 

17.  Knowledge  of  the  Habits  of  Quadrupeds. 

18.  Deer-hunting. 

19.  Fire-hunting. 

20.  Ingenuity  of  Tracking. 

21.  Success  of  Noka  in  One  Day. 

22.  Fight  with  a  Moose. 

23.  Strength  of  lawba  in  the  Chase. 

24.  Encounter  with  a  Grizzly  Bear. 


E.    SUGAR-MAKING. 


25.  Sugar-making  a  Carnival. 

26.  Average  Product  of  each  Wigwam. 

27.  A  Time  of  Hilarity  and  Enjoyment. 


F.    WAR  AND  ITS  INCIDENTS. 

28.  Its  Fundamental  Importance  to  the  Barbaric  State. 

29.  Popular  Opinion  directed  to  this  End. 

30.  Scalping.     (Plate.) 

31.  Preparation  and  Dancing  of  the  Scalp.     (Plate.) 

32.  Feather  of  Honor.     (Plate.) 

33.  Scale  of  Merit  in  its  Awards. 

34.  Trait  of  Wisdom  in  Excusing  Acts  of  Want  of  Courage. 

35.  Bands   on   the   Frontiers   brought   to   a  High   State  of  Courage  by  Appeals 

and  Addresses. 

36.  War  Parties  are  Volunteers.  ' 

87.  How  Enlisted.     Strong  Appeals  to  Military  Glory. 

88.  Character  of  the  Addresses. 
39.  War-songs  actually  Employed. 


1 


MANNERS  AfJD  CUSTOMS. 


48 


G.-THE  WIGWAM  AND  ITS  MATES. 

40.  How  Order  is  Preserved  in  its  Circle. 

41.  The  Bride  and  her  Husband. 

42.  Division  of  Labour. 

43.  Domestic  Character  of  the  Man. 


H.    BIRTH  AND  ITS  INCIDENTS. 

44.  Lightness  of  Parturition. 

45.  The  Bestowal  of  Names. 

46.  Infancy  in  the  Wigwam.     (Plate.) 


I.    DEATH  AND  ITS  INCIDENTS. 

47.  Pictographic  Memorials  of  Adults. 

48.  Eulogy  of  the  Dead. 

49.  Dressing  the  Corpse. 

50.  Belief  in  Immortality. 

51.  Address  to  the  Dead. 

52.  Indian  Burial-places. 

53.  Barrows  and  Heaps  of  Stones. 

54.  Former  Custom  of  Burial  among  the  Mississippi  Valley  Tribes. 

55.  Burial  among  the  Prairie  Tribes. 
66.  Veneration  for  the  Dead. 

57.  Forests  and  Valleys  Favorable  to  Civilization. 

58.  Horrid  Instance  of  Sepulture  among  the  Chinooks. 


K.     GAMES  OF  CHANCE. 

59.  Kun-ta-800,  or  the  Game  of  Plumb-stones. 
GO.  Pugasaing,  or  the  Game  of  the  Bowl. 


L.    THE  INDIAN  ON   HIS   HUNTING-GROUND. 

61,  The  Social  State  of  the  Hunter. 

62.  Patriarchal  State  of  the  Chiefs  and  Heads  of  Families. 
68.  Feosting. 

64.  Topics  of  Remark  at  Meals. 


i'1 

Wk 

'i 

ii 

H 

iSfll 

)  ■! 

iffiH 

MH 

'i  nira 

j^^BVEf  iC 

|nA 

V^Htn' 

1 

mM 

44 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 

65.  Modest  an<l  Moral  Conduct  of  Females. 

66.  Feasts  for  the  Young. 

67.  Severity   and  Suffering   in   Winter  in    High   Northern   Latitudes,    and   Hard 

Condition  of  Women. 

68.  Mother's  Care  for  her  Children. 

61).  Extreme  Wretchedness  produced  by  Hunger. 

70.  Attachment  to  the  Habit  of  Smoking. 

71.  Trust  in  Providence. 


M.    MISCELLANEOUS  TRAITS. 


72.  Ball-playing. 

73.  Moving  Camp. 

74.  Dog-dance. 


A.     GENERIC    VIEW. 

1.  HiSTOUY,  as  viewed  in  the  earliest  and  most  autlientic  record,  namely,  the 
Pentateuch,  represents  m.an  as  having  been  created,  not  in  the  savage,  but  in  the 
industrial  or  civilized  state.  It  lays  down  the  fact  of  this  creation  and  of  the  unity  of 
the  species  as  a  grand  moral  truth,  upon  which  all  its  subsequent  history  is  based,  and 
without  which,  it  would  fail  of  its  great  aim,  namely,  to  teach  the  world  what  it  did 
not  before  know,  or  had  forgotten,  that  the  Creation  was  of  divine  origin. 

Commencing  his  career  aa  a  horticulturist,  the  highest  form  of  the  agricultural 
type,  he  is  next  presented  to  our  view  as  a  shepherd  and  grain-grower,  or  a  "  tiller  of 
the  ground."  If  these  views  are  correct — and  we  jjresent  them  with  the  full  conscious- 
ness of  their  being  so,  and,  at  the  same  time,  of  their  running  counter  to  the  philosophical 
theories  of  tlie  origin  of  the  human  race,  of  Greece  and  Rome,  so  long  the  enchantresses 
of  ancient  history — then  it  ir-iy  be  declared,  that  the  huntc-r  state  is  a  declension  from 
the  industrial,  and  that  barbarism  assumes  its  character,  not  only  as  the  antagonistical 
point  to  civilization,  but  as  a  falling  from  it,  and  a  direct  consequence  as  the  neglect  of 
its  higher  and  sublime  principles.  God  did  not  surely  send  a  man,  in  the  person  of 
vvn  (interpreted  Moses,)  to  tell  mankind  a  falsehood. 


2.  By  Race,  when  employed  in  its  generic  sense,  is  meant  the  entire  human  species  ; 
but  the  first  family  of  man  had  not  passed  its  primary  ordeal,  when  it  is  .seen  that 
separate  types,  such  aa  are  regarded  by  physiologists  and  theologians  as  essential  moral 
and  physical  races,  arose.  At  any  rate,  for  sixteen  centuries  and  a  half,  there  is  the 
most  careful  and  exact  genealogical  distinction  kept  up  in  the  narration  l)etween  the  two 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


45 


primary  Alcanic '  and  Alscthic '  types ;  and  it  is  from  the  latter,  so  fur,  at  least,  as  the 
male  line  is  concerned,  that  the  new  or  Noachian  ty[)es  are  derived. 

3.  It  is  also  perceived,  from  the  same  record,  that  agriculture  and  fixed  industry  was 
the  state  of  the  Noachian  or  diluvian  epoch ;  and  it  is  not  till  a  century  later,  agreeably 
to  sound  chronologists,  that  we  hear  of  the  hunter  state,  and  of  the  general  dispersion  of 
mankind.  How  soon  any  of  the  sub-races  or  re-developed  types  declined  (after  departing 
from  the  unity  of  language)  into  barbarism,  we  know  not.  Grecian  history  calls  all 
tribes  and  nations  "  barbarians"  below  their  type  of  civilization. 

4.  Hebrew  history  regards  as  such,  under  the  cognomen  of  "Gentiles,"  all  who  did 
not  possess  the  Hebraic  moral  type  of  knowledge.  Not  to  be,  genealogically,  a  direct 
descendant  of  the  Abrahamic  head  is  deemed,  by  the  sacred  penmen,  to  have  been 
bom  out  of  the  physical  and  moral  pale  of  tlie  type ;  and  it  is  not  till  Anno  Domini  1, 
when  the  foretold  Shiloh  came,  that  we  perceive,  that,  from  the  beginning,  all  the  types, 
races  and  families  of  men  were  comprehended,  for  the  purposes  of  this  advent,  as 
a  perfect  rtnity  in  dicersity, — without  respect  to  the  differences  of  nations,  civil  condition, 
languages,  lineage,  or  physical  character,  but  with  a  sole  view,  which  is  repeated  line 
upon  line,  to  the  moral  character  and  elevation  of  man.     This  Avas  Shiloh's  office. 

5.  It  is  unquestionably  to  the  Noachian  epoch  that  the  ethnologist  is  to  look  for 
those  primordial  types  of  race  which  are  regarded  as  having  furnished  the  original 
progenitors  of  the  present  species.  The  different  stocks  are  to  be  viewed  as  having 
received  physiological  and  intellectual  laws  of  development,  which  gave  them,  at  once, 
the  capacity  to  reproduce  their  ethnological  likes  during  ages. 


lies ; 
that 
loral 
the 
I  two 


C.  The  endurance  of  physical  tjpe,  as  observed  in  the  features,  manners,  and  customs 
of  different  nations,  is,  indeed,  one  of  the  most  striking  characteristics  of  the  human 
raee.  Observers  have  manifestly,  from  the  very  earliest  ages,  thought  so ;  for  if  there 
be  not  supposed  to  be  some  generic  traits  to  look  for  in  different  races,  what  reason  can 
the  philosophic  traveller  or  historian  assign  for  at  all  noticing  them.  Physiology  has 
ceased  to  regard  these  generic  differences  as  the  mere  effect  of  climate,  and  is  disposed 
to  speak  of  certain  developments  as  generally  fixed  in  this  or  that  type ;  we  do  not 
examine  a  North  American  Indian  to  discover  a  Grecian,  a  Celtic,  or  a  Gothic 
physiognomy,  nor  refer  to  a  German,  who,  at  this  day,  has  exactly  the  traits  described 
by  Tacitus,  for  the  coarse  straight  black  hair  of  an  Iroquois  or  an  Algonquin.  These  are 
not  the  types  of  Race  in  which  to  seek  for  resemblances ;  the  admitted  theory  of  type 
drives  us  elsewhere. 


From  Cain. 


'  From  Seth. 


46 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


7.  Those  observations  will  not  be  mii^apprehcndetl  in  proceeding  to  make  some 
remarks  on  the  manners  and  cnstoms  of  the  North  American  Indians,  who  have  been, 
more  or  less,  the  object  of  historical  investigation  and  knowledge  for  throe  centuries 
and  a  half:  for  it  seemed  like  covering  up,  or  leaving  out  of  view,  a  great  fact,  to  speak 
of  a  race  of  very  marked  savages  as  if  the  erratic  and  hunter  life  was  not  the  natural 
result  of  neglecting  a  fixed  agricultural  state ;  and  as  if  mankind  had  not  been  origi- 
nally created  in  the  highest  and  noblest  type — the  type  of  labor.  In  other  words, 
that  it  did  not,  originally,  include  all  races  and  kindreds  and  tongues,  who  may  imite, 
on  the  Shilonic  principle,  however  diverse  at  this  era,  and  who  are  yet,  at  all  ages,  and 
in  all  places,  spoken  of  and  described,  in  the  Hebrew  oracles,  as  Iwing  derived  from  one 
creation  and  one  original  race. 

It  was  thought  best  to  moot  this  question  directly,  in  an  age  of  much  moral 
shullling ;  and  there  seemed  to  Ix;  the  le.ss  excuse  for  not  making  the  appeal,  when  the 
testimony  is  not  only  the  most  ani;ient  known  to  the  learned  world,  but  is  of  a  character 
iuid  dignity  the  most  noljle  and  irn'fragable.  Viewed  in  this  light,  the  Indian  tribes 
are  entitled  to  the  most  exalted  moral  sympathies. 

Archbishop  Usher  represents  the  Babylonic  disi^rsion  of  mankind  to  have  taken  place 
in  the  fifty-seventh  3  ear  of  the  eighteenth  century,  anno  mundi,  and  exactly  one  hundred 
3  ears  after  the  debarkation  of  Noah. 

8.  We  advert  to  this  era  of  the  general  dispersion,  as  exhibiting  the  true  historical 
and  philosophical  eix)ch,  not  only  of  the  rise  of  diverse  powers  and  languages,  (in  which 
mankind  were  still  left,  as  at  the  beginning,  to  the  exercise  of  a  free  choice  and 
will,)  but  also  as  the  true  and  most  antique  point,  in  the  rise  and  history  of  barbarism, 
with  its  concomitants,  previously  developed,  namely,  idolatry  and  the  worship  of 
■prlnvlplca,  elements,  and  men.  From  this  era,  which  is  presented  to  us  as  a  bold, 
striking,  and  genuine  one,  in  tlie  Hebrew  chronicles,  we  drop  down  the  lapse  of  actual 
history,  casting  out  Asia,  Africa,  and  EuroiKi  from  our  horoscope,  to  the  year  anno 
Domini  1492,  a  period  of  3725  years.  During  this  long  vista  of  time,  authentic 
admitted  history  is  silent  as  to  all  actual  knowledge  of  the  American  tribes.  We  do 
not  purposely  advert  to  the  possibility,  nny,  probability,  of  the  continent  being  visited, 
at  an  earlier  date,  by  one  or  more  European  nations ;  that  is  a  question  of  our  archaeology 
which  is  not  here  under  discussion ;  nor  to  ask,  with  what  elements  of  the  Old  World's 
knowledge,  if  any,  they  landed  on  the  coasts  ?  nor,  at  what  epoch  of  our  history  ?  These 
are  also  questions  of  our  archajology,  which  are  just  beginning  to  be  discussed  on  broad 
principles. 

9.  Whatever  those  eras  of  landing  on  the  coasts  were,  or  the  type  of  knowledge  or 
barbari.sm  they  possessed,  the  continent  itself  presented  features  Avhich  were  calcu- 
lated to  lead  the  mind  from  the  intellectual,  the  mechanical,  and  the  industrial,  to  the 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


47 


erratic,  physical,  and  gross.  Wandering  in  the  attractive  scenes  of  the  temperntc  and 
tropic  zones,  the  very  vastness  of  its  rivers,  lakes,  and  mountains,  must  have  proved 
a  iwwerful  stimulus  to  erratic  and  barbaric  notions.  If  we  as.sign  but  three  thousand 
years  for  its  occupancy,  and  this  is  not  too  long  a  period,  it  would  appear  to  have 
produced  a  greater  diversity  of  every  kind  than  we  actually  oJjserve.  A  tribe  that  is 
separated  by  territory  soon  insists  on  dialectic  difl'erences.  Where  there  are  no  books 
to  fix  the  standards  of  pronunciation,  there  cannot  be,  for  a  long  time,  absolute  identity. 
The  vowel  sounds  melt  into  eacli  other,  and  it  is  chiefly  the  harsher  and  guttural 
consonants,  (and  some  of  these  are  known  to  be  interchangeablcs,)  that  stand  out, 
like  headlands,  to  resist  the  ocean  of  change  in  articulate  sound.  The  plan  of  thought 
is  not,  however,  so  easily  encroached  on,  and  we  accordingly  find  that,  even  where  the 
vocabulary  is  entirely  different,  the  synthesis  and  syntax  are  still  essentially  preserved 
for  immense  periods. 

10.  Their  manners  and  customs,  their  opinions  and  mental  habits,  had,  Avherever 
they  were  inquired  into,  at  the  earliest  dates,  much  in  conunon.  Their  modes  of  war 
and  worship,  hunting  and  anuisements,  were  very  similar.  In  the  sacrifice  of  prisoners 
taken  in  war;  in  the  laws  of  rctaliation ;  in  the  sacred  character  at t.iched  to  public 
transactions  solemnized  by  smoking  the  pipe;  in  tlie  adoption  of  persons  taken  in  war, 
in  families ;  in  the  exhibition  of  daJices  on  almost  every  occasion  that  can  enlist  human 
sympatliy;  in  tlie  meagre  and  inartiricial  style  of  music;  in  the  totemic  tie  that  binds 
i-elationships  together,  and  in  the  system  of  symlxils  and  figures  cut  and  marked  on 
tlieir  grave-posts,  on  trees,  and  sometimes  on  rocks,  there  is  a  perfect  identity  of 
principles,  arts,  and  opinions.  Tlie  mere  act  of  wandering  and  petty  warfare  kept 
them  in  a  savage  state,  though  they  had  the  element  of  civilization  with  them  in  the 
zea  maize. 


It  is  remarkable,  that  the  open  seiircoasts  of  America  were  adverse  to  civilization. 
On  the  contrary,  remote  interior  positions,  surrounded  )jy  mountains,  as  the  Valley  of 
Anahuac,  or  the  basin  of  Titacaca,  favored  the  germs  of  Indian  civilization.  This  was 
not  successfully  developed,  it  is  true,  without  bloody  wars,  and  the  effects  of  extravagant 
and  dreadful  superstitions,leading  to  dynasties  in  which  the  liberty  of  the  individual  was 
lost.  It  was,  however,  less  these  acts  of  power  than  the  stationary  habits  of  the  people  — 
those  habits  that  permitted  la))or  to  be  applied  in  local  districts — that  mainly  fostered, 
it  is  conceived,  the  true  germs  of  civilization. 

The  tendency  to  a  central  power  was  also  developed  among  the  Iroquois,  at  a  remote 
jwint  from  the  sea-board,  and  they  were  surrounded  by  hostile  tribes,  against  whom 
they  maintained  the  most  bloody  wars.  But  it  was  also  on  elevated  and  advantageous 
table-lands,  which  poured  their  surplus  waters,  down  large  and  prominent  rivers,  to 
the  distant  sea.     They  had,  also,  the  element  of  the  zea  maize,  all  which,  however, 


48 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


might  have  proved  inefTectual  to  their  rise,  hud  they  not  fallen  on  the  policy  of  tribal 
confederation. 

If  tlie  United  States  tribes  be  compared  with  one  another,  there  is  found  a  coinci- 
dence of  a  striking  character.  Take  a  Muscogee  from  tlie  plains  of  Red  Kiver  or 
Arkansas,  an  Algonquin  from  the  hanks  of  Lake  Sujierior,  and  a  Dacota  or  Iowa  from 
the  plains  of  the  Missouri  or  the  Mississippi,  and  it  will  require  an  interpreter  to  make 
tlicm  understand  each  other:  but  regard  their  leading  features  and  expressions; 
ascertain  their  thoughts  and  modes  of  acti(m  in  war  and  peace;  their  customs  of 
hunting,  war  dances,  and  ceremonials;  strive  to  get  at  the  texture  and  philosophy  of 
their  minds,  and  the  coincidences  are  so  striking  that  they  must  impress  every 
beholder, — there  is  a  character,  sui-genoris,  which  nolxjdy  can  mistake. 

"  Not  Iliniloo,  Afgnn,  Cutliito,  or  Pcrsoe ; 
Tlie  Indian  his  own  prototype  must  be." 


B.     CONSTITUTION    OF    THE    INDIAN    FAMILY. 

1.  One  of  the  most  striking,  universal,  and  jK'rmanent  customs  which  distinguishes 
the  American  triljos,  and,  more  than  all,  commends  them  to  our  hmnanities,  is  that 
which  exists  in  connexion  witli  the  family  tie.  It  is  tliis  trait,  indeed,  that  di.sarms 
barbarism  of  half  its  ropulsiveness,  and  gives  to  this  erratic  and  l)enighted  branch  of 
the  si^cies,  their  Ix^st  claims  to  our  symi)athies  and  benevolence.  Without  this  tie, 
society  would  degenerate  into  utter  confusion,  and  lea\e  l)ut  a  step  between  man  ana 
the  brute  creation.  Species  woidd  Ije  dismissed  with  the  maturity  of  the  season;  and 
with  its  close,  all  parentage  be  forgotten,  and  all  aflinities  of  blood  Im  obliterated. 

Sunk  as  some  of  the  more  northerly  and  high  Pacific  coast  tribes  may  Ije,  (and  they 
are  depicted  as  "  excessively  low,")  we  have  in  this  institution,  supported,  as  it  is,  by 
a  tenacious  memory  of  the  tie  of  lineage,  a  basis  for  connnencing  our  investigations 
and  comparisons;  and  a  pi"oof,  indeed,  that  the  obligations  of  the  tie  itself,  or  the 
family  relation,  are  inherent  in  the  nature  of  human  society,  and  were  implanted  in 
the  breast  of  man  to  uphold  the  laws  of  purity  and  virtue. 


2.  Ages  of  wandering,  and  deep  degeneracy  of  manners,  and  habits  of  the  darkest 
dye,  have  done  little,  in  fact,  to  shake  the  laws  of  consanguinity.  The  niarital 
rite  is  nothing  more,  among  our  tribes,  than  the  pei-sonal  consent  of  the  parties, 
without  requiring  any  concurrent  act  of  a  priesthood,  a  magistracy,  or  witnesses,  the 
act  is  assumed  by  the  parties,  without  the  necessity  of  any  other  extraneous  sanction, 
except  parental  consent ;  presents  are,  however,  often  made,  if  the  parties  l)e  al)le.  It 
is  also  disannulled,  and  the  wife  dismissed  from  the  wigwam,  whenever  the  husband 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


49 


pleases,  or  the  marital  state  is  c""tinued  under  the  evils  of  discord  or  a  state  of 
jK)lygamy :  the  latter  is,  however,  the  usual  method  among  the  hunter  and  prairie  trilwa. 
But  the  ties  of  consanguinity  are  still  strictly  acknowledged ;  children  become  possessed 
of  all  their  natural  rights,  and  family  tradition  traces  these  ties  to  their  remotest  links. 

3.  At  this  point,  the  institution  of  the  totem  comes  in  to  strengthen  and  confirm 
domestic  tradition ;  for  this  is  acknowledged  as  proof,  even  where  family  tradition  fails. 
The  totem  is  a  symbol  of  the  name  of  the  progenitor, — generally  some  quadruped,  or 
bird,  or  other  object  in  the  animal  kingdom,  which  stands,  if  we  may  so  express  it,  aa 
the  surname  of  the  family.  It  is  always  some  animated  object,  and  seldom  or  never 
derived  from  the  inanimate  class  of  nature.  Its  significant  importance  is  derived  from 
the  fact,  that  individuals  unhesitatingly  trace  their  lineage  from  it.  By  whatever  names 
they  may  be  called  during  their  life-time,  it  is  the  totem,  and  not  their  personal  name, 
that  is  recorded  on  the  toTub  or  ailjedatitj  that  marks  tlie  place  of  burial.  Families 
are  thus  traced  when  expanded  into  bands  or  tribes,  the  multiidication  of  which,  in 
North  America,  has  been  very  great,  and  has  increased,  in  like  ratio,  the  labors  of  the 
ethnologist.  The  Turtle,  the  Bear,  and  the  Wolf,  appear  to  have  been  primary  and 
honored  totems  in  most  of  the  tribes,  and  bear  a  significant  rank  in  the  traditions  of 
the  Irwpiois,  and  Lenapls,  or  Delawares ;  and  they  are  believed  to  have  more  or  less 
prominency  in  the  genealogies  of  all  the  tribes  who  are  organized  on  the  totemic  principle. 

4.  This  point,  therefore,  namely,  the  sacred  tie  of  families,  is  the  great  fulcrum  ujwn 
which  the  lever  of  hope,  in  doing  anything  to  raise  this  people  from  barbarism,  rests.  No 
savage  tribes  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  so  far  as  geographical  discovery  extends,  are  more 
tenacious  of  their  relationships.  No  earthly  calamity  causes  such  deep  grief  to  them  as 
the  loss  of  a  promising  son,  at  his  entrance  into  life.  Instances  have  been  known  where 
the  father  has  redeemed  his  son  from  the  stake,  and  actually  been  burnt  in  his  stead. 


5.  A  notable  instance  of  this  kind  occun-ed  in  the  history  of  the  war  in  the  17th 
century,  between  the  Chipiiewas  and  the  Foxes,  after  the  latter  had  allied  themselves, 
in  the  west,  to  the  Sioux.  In  this  war,  the  Foxes  captured  the  son  of  a  celebrated  and 
aged  chief  of  the  Chippewas,  named  BUms-ivali,  while  the  father  was  absent  from  his 
wigwam.  On  reaching  his  home,  the  old  man  heard  the  heart-rending  news,  and 
knowing  what  the  fate  of  his  sou  would  be,  he  followed  on  the  trail  of  the  enemy 
alone,  and  reached  the  Fo.x  village  while  they  were  in  the  act  of  kindling  the  fire  to 
roast  him  alive.  He  stepped  boldly  into  the  arena,  and  offered  to  take  his  son's  place : 
"  My  son,"  said  he,  "  has  seen  but  a  few  winters ;  his  feet  have  never  trod  the  war- 
path :  but  the  hairs  of  my  head  are  white ;  I  have  hung  many  scalps  over  the  graves 
of  my  relatives,  which  I  have  taken  from  the  heads  of  your  Avarriors :  kindle  the  fire 
about  me,  and  send  my  son  home  to  my  lodge."  The  offer  was  accepted,  and  the  old 
Pt.  II.  — 7 


60 


MANNERS   AND    CUS'tOMS. 


man,  without  deigning  to  utter  a  groan,  was   '    - 
severities  of  Bavage  warfare,  amidst  which  the  fan,  ' 
which  haa  no  panillel  in  civilized  life. 


;  at  the  .stake.     Such  are  the 
.«;  ;<  maintained  with  a  heroism 


6.  But  whatever  were  the  plans  of  separation  which  the  original  families  and  clans 
adopted  to  preserve  the  lineage,  they  are  all  found  to  have  distinct  and  appropriate 
names  for  the  different  degrees  of  relationship.  In  one  respect,  these  names  have  a 
peculiarity,  —  they  denote,  by  their  orthography,  whether  the  person  be  an  elder  or 
younger  brother  or  sister,  an  aunt  by  the  father's  or  mother's  side,  or  some  other  like 
distinctions,  which  apjwar  to  have  their  origin  in  the  very  transitive  nature  of  the 
language.' 


C.    FOREST-TEACHINGS. 

7.  Hunting  and  war  divide  the  cares  of  the  man.  The  arts  of  both  are  carefully 
taught  to  the  young,  and  enforced,  and  daily  applied,  by  constantly  repeated  influence 
of  precept  and  example.  The  male  children  are  early  instructed  in  the  arts  of  the 
chase.  It  begins  as  soon  as  they  arc  capable  of  Avalking  and  running  about.  A  tiny 
bow  and  arrow  is  given  to  the  little  a-b^n-o-jce '  as  a  plaything :  as  soon  as  he  acquires 
strength,  he  is  encouraged  to  fire  at  small  birds  or  squin-els.  The  first  evidence  of 
success  is  extravagantly  praised,  and  the  object  killed,  however  small,  is  prepared  by 
the  females  for  a  feast,  to  which  the  chiefs  and  warriors  are  ceremoniously  invited. 

8.  Sometimes  the  triumph  that  attends  the  initial  success,  in  learning  the  hunter's 
art,  is  gained  by  the  snare  that  children  set  to  catch  little  animals.  An  instance  of  this 
kind  came  to  my  notice  in  the  basin  of  Lake  Superior.  A  hunter  having  observed  the 
snare  of  one  of  the  younger  members  of  his  family,  secretly  put  a  rabbit  into  the 
noose.  The  next  morning,  as  usual,  the  youngster  went  out  to  the  spot,  and  his  joy 
was  perfectly  unbounded  at  his  success  in  catching  a  rabbit.  A  feast  of  soup  waa 
prepared  with  very  great  ceremony,  in  honor  of  the  youthful  Nimrod,  to  which  old 
and  young  were  invited ;  and  their  applauses  resounded  throughout  the  lodge.  The 
facetious  Indian  who  had  played  the  trick  kept  his  secret,  and  only  revealed  it  after 
many  years  had  passed  away. 

9.  Skill  in  killing  large  quadrupeds  is  the  result  of  years  of  effort,  but  the  art  so 
acquired  is  as  carefully  taught,  and  its  principles  as  anxiously  impressed  on  the  rising 
generation,  as  are  the  elements  of  reading,  writing,  and  arithmetic,  in  civilized  society. 

'  It  is  not  sabstantiTes  and  verbs  only  whicb  ezbibit  this  character,  but  pronoons  and  other  parts  of  speech. 
'  Child. 


i 


f        f 


M 


»(  ' 


S^*■ 


%: 


C' 


-^ 


■'■IS 


! 


r 


h     i 


I'  f  1 


m 


'.'ii'. 


'1^ 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


m 


The  T  idian  youth,  r.a  he  advances  in  the  principles  of  the  hunter's  art,  is  instructed  by 
the  :  (tivo  priesthood  to  believe  that  this  art  can  be  facilitated  by  unseen  spiritual 
agency;  and  a  subtle  system  of  medical  magic,  which  is  exhibited  in  connexion  with 
devices  and  figures  of  the  principal  animals  hunted,  is  drawn  on  bark.  To  these  great 
attention  is  paid ;  and  the  secrets  respecting  them  are  treasured  up,  and  its  knowledge 
cultivated  by  an  association  called  the  Meda,  whose  rites  and  ceremonies  are  scrupu- 
lously guarded  and  respected. 

10.  Winter,  in  all  the  northern  latitudes,  brings  with  it  the  necessity  of  a  peculiar 
kind  of  hunting,  which  is  perfonncd  through  the  ice.  When  the  ponds  and  rivers, 
where  the  musk-rat  harbours  are  found,  their  houses  are  perforated  with  a  strong  and 
peculiarly  shaped  spear,  (Plate  7G,  Figs.  1  and  2,)  by  which  the  victim  is  transpierced, 
and  the  animal  brought  out  upon  its  point.  Tiiis  act  is  perforaied  while  the  scenery 
is  covered  with  the  garb  peculiar  to  the  winter  solstice,  and  is  represented  in  the  ac- 
companying sketch,  (Plate  5.) 

11.  In  a  region  abounding  in  lakes  and  streams,  fishing  also  becomes  an  art,  taught 
to  the  young.  There  are  some  modes  of  fishing  through  the  ice  which  are  very  inge- 
nious; one  of  the  most  conmion  is,  to  play  a  decoy  through  holes  perforated  in  the 
ice,  by  an  instrument  which  is  called  uhhhin,  by  the  Algonquin  tribes.  It  consists 
of  a  species  of  stout  cliisel  of  iron,  attached  firmly  to  a  pole.  (Fig.  11,  Plate  70.)  The 
decoy  is  generally  the  image  of  a  small  fish.  The  Indian,  placing  himself  Hat  on  his 
stomach,  covers  his  head  with  his  blanket,  supported  by  branches,  in  order  to  exclude 
the  light.  By  excluding  the  extraneous  glare,  the  vision  is  extended  into  the  waters 
below,  luid  the  watcher  stands  ready  with  his  spear  to  dart  the  point  into  his  victim, 
as  soon  as  it  approaches  to  seize  the  l)ait.  In  this  manner,  which  is  depicted  in  Plate 
6,  the  Indian  is  able  to  supply  his  family  with  food,  at  the  most  inclement  and  pinching 
seasons. 

12.  Another  mode  of  taking  fish  in  the  winter,  is  by  making  a  series  of  orifices, 
through  the  ice,  in  a  direct  line.  A  gill-net  is  then  pushed,  by  its  head-lines,  from  one 
orifice  to  another,  until  its  entire  length  is  displayed.  Buoys  and  sinkers  are  attached 
to  it,  and  it  is  then  let  down  into  deep  Avater,  where  white  fish,  and  other  larger  species, 
iv.sort  at  this  season.  The  ne.xt  morning  the  net  is  drawn  up,  the  fisheniuin  secures 
Ills  prey,  and  again  sets  his  net  as  before.  By  this  mode,  which  is  very  common 
throughout  the  lakes  where  deep  water  aljounds,  these  si)ecie8  are  captured  at  the 
greatest  depths,  while  sheltering  themselves  in  their  deepest  winter  recesses. 

Fish  are  sometimes  brought  up  in  the  inunediate  vicinity  of  Michillinuickinac,  from 
',  depth  of  eighty  fathoms. 

The  Indiiuis'  ingenuity  in  capturing  the  finny  tribes  during  the  prevalence  of  the 
severities  of  winter,  may  be  quoted  as  an  evidence  of  ^heir  resources,  in  sustouiing 


52 


MANNERS  AND   CUSTOMS. 


themselves.  But  this  ingenuity  and  resource  has  its  fullest  development  in  the  open 
season  of  summer,  when  the  streams  are  freed  from  the  ice,  and  the  forest  is  clothed 
with  verdure,  to  shelter  and  conceal  its  various  species. 

1 3.  The  streams  whicli  traverse  the  Indian  country  are  often  barred  near  their  out- 
lets with  stakes  securely  bound  together,  with  transverse  poles  extending  from  bank 
to  l)ank.  Tiijse  poles  are  so  close  as  to  prevent  sturgeon  and  all  the  larger  species 
from  ascending  except  by  a  single  aperture  Avhich  is  purposely  left.  Through  this  the 
fish  ascend  in  their  frequent  attempts  to  force  their  Wcay  up  stream  for  the  purpose  of 
depositing  their  spawn ;  but  in  descending  they  are  arrested  by  the  poles  of  the  dam, 
and  forced  against  them.  The  Indian  walking  on  the  transverse  poles,  with  a  hook  at 
the  end  of  a  pole,  which  is  placed  on  the  upper  side  of  the  dam,  sees  and  feels  the 
pressure  of  the  descending  fish,  and,  by  a  quick  jerk,  brings  up  his  victim. 


14.  During  the  low  waters  of  the  summer  solstice,  lines  of  stones  are  placed  from 
each  bank,  where  the  river  has  a  marked  descent  pointing  downwards  at  an  acute 
angle,  until  they  meet,  within  three  or  four  feet.  Tliis  space  is  filled  with  stones  of  a 
less  height,  over  which  the  pent-up  and  dammed  water  rushes  and  falls  on  a  platform 
of  poles.  This  platform,  which  performs  the  purpose  of  a  gross  longitudinal  sieve,  lets 
through  the  water,  leaving  the  fish  to  flounder  and  be  picked  up  —  ad  libitum.  This 
contrivance  is  sometimes  called  tiamehrncagan,  or  sturgeon's  yoke. 


•if 


15.  At  the  foot  of  rai)ids  and  falls,  the  lish  are  followed  up  in  their  continued  strug- 
gle to  ascend,  l)y  fishermen  in  a  canoe,  who  provide  themselves  with  a  scoop-net  attached 
to  the  end  of  a  long  pole,  and  they  then  capture  their  victims  by  a  dexterous  swoop 
of  the  implement.  This  act  requires  great  care,  activity,  and  exei'tion,  as  the  canoe, 
being  made  of  bark,  and  almost  as  light  as  an  egg-shell,  is  liable,  the  moment  ho 
stands  on  tiie  gunwales,  to  Ik;  tipped  over  into  the  boiling,  foaming  waters.  In  order 
to  prevent  it  from  shooting  from  under  liim,  a  man  sits  at  the  stern  with  liis  paddle  to 
keep  the  boat  headed,  and  the  fisherman  stands  watching  his  opportunity  as  the  school 
of  fish  pass  ]^\ ;  then  babmcing  himself  with  the  manoouvering  and  consummate  skiU 
of  a  wire-dancer,  he  lifts  his  prey  into  the  canoe. 

This  species  of  fishing  may  be  seen  to  be  practised,  in  the  most  striking  manner, 
during  the  fishing  seasons,  at  the  falls  of  St.  Mary's,  on  the  straits  between  lakes  Huron 
and  Superior,  which  have  long  been  noted  for  the  abundance  and  fine  flavor  of  the 
white  fish. 


Iv. 


IG.  Sometimes  fish  are  shot  with  an  arrow,  by  a  watcher  sitting  on  the  banks  of  the 
river,  when  tlie  fish  approacb.  the  land  in  their  vernal  track  of  migration.   (Plate  7.) 
The  fish-hook  is  employed  chiefly  in  deep  waters,  and  is  intended  for  the  larger  spe- 


neT" 


T;^ 


^'*'"-*^'^^i«v^.^^^„, 


^■'-V>-   ■^*»S^4.V*'^ 


■  ■^^■TSBsaEftarawiisfc-.- 


r 


m 


!     :1' 


vli* 


:'l-  -  i 


I, 


44 


St 


i 


I 


i 


1 

11 

' 

III 

MANNEKS  AND   CUSTOMS. 


53 


ciea.  The  white  fish,  so  common  to  the  Avhole  line  of  hikes,  never  hitea  at  a  hook,  and 
is  captured  solely  hy  nets  or  spears.  Tlie  ordinary  trout  and  cod  hook  has  Ix-en 
supplied  by  commerce  since  the  discovery  of  America ;  but  the  ancient  Indian  hook 
of  bone  was  shaped  much  like  it,  and  its  use  was  every  way  similar,  as  is  seen  by  an 
antique  bone-hook,  found  in  the  mounds  on  Cunningham's  Island,  Lake  Erie.    (Plate  38, 

Fig.  4.) 

Fish  are  also  speared  from  a  canoe,  usually  in  the  morning,  when  they  are  close 
in-shore,  lying  under  the  leaves  and  rushes  that  grow  on  the  banks  of  streams.  An 
Indian  woman  or  boy  paddles  the  canoe  gently  along  the  shore,  while  the  man  stands 
up  in  the  bow  or  on  the  gunwales  of  the  canoe,  holding  his  spear  ready  to  strike  the 
fish  when  seen.  The  spear  or  gig  is  represented  in  Plate  7G,  Figs.  3  and  4.  The  mode 
of  operating  is  represented  in  Plate  8. 


D.    ART   OF   HUNTING. 

17.  This  ingenuity  in  the  taking  of  fish  evinces  a  degree  of  skill  which  challenges 
admiration.  But  it  is  far  inferior  to  that  art  which  is  demanded  for  the  hunter  in  his 
nobler  pursuit  of  game  on  the  land.  To  him  are  known  the  habits,  ranges,  and  food 
of  all  the  quadrupeds  which  constitute  objects  of  the  chase.  Not  only  is  it  essential  that 
he  should  know  the  species  of  food  which  each  quadruped  covets,  but  also  the  time 
most  favorable  to  his  sallying  out  of  his  coverts  to  obtain  it,  together  with  the  various 
precautions  necessary,  in  order  to  elude  the  quick  ear  and  instincts  of  his  victims. 

18.  The  simplest  of  all  species  of  hunting  is  perhaps  the  art  of  hunting  the  deer. 
This  animal,  it  is  known,  is  endowed  with  the  fatal  curiosity  of  stopping  in  its  flight, 
to  turn  round,  and  look  at  the  object  that  disturlsed  it ;  and  as  this  is  generally  done 
within  rifle-range,  the  habit  is  indulged  at  the  cost  of  its  life ;  whereas,  if  it  trusted 
unwaveringly  to  it.s  heels,  it  would  escape. 


19.  One  of  the  most  ingenious  modes  of  hunting  the  deer  is  that  oi  fire-linntbig, 
which  is  doi!e  by  descending  a  stream  in  a  canoe  at  night  with  a  flambeau.  The  habit 
of  this  animal  of  resorting  to  streams  at  night  has  been  mentioned.  In  the  latter  part 
of  spring  and  summer,  the  Indian  hunters  on  the  small  interior  rivers  take  the  bark 
of  the  elm  or  cedar,  peeling  it  off"  whole,  for  five  or  six  feet  in  length,  and  turning  it 
inside  out,  paint  the  outer  surface  black  with  charcoal.     It  is  then  pierced  with  an 

'lice  to  fit  it,  on  the  bow  of  the  canoe,  so  as  to  hide  the  sitter;  then  a  light  or  torch 
is  made  by  small  rolls  two  or  three  feet  long,  of  twisted  birch-bark,  (which  is  very  in- 
flammable,) and  this  is  placed  on  the  extreme  bow  of  the  boat,  a  little  in  front  of  the 
bark  screen,  in  which  position  it  throws  its  rays  strongly  forward,  leaving  all  behind  in 


M 


MANNERS   AND  CUSTOMS. 


darkness.   The  deer,  whose  eyes  are  fixed  on  tlie  light  ns  it  floats  down,  is  thus  brought 
within  range  of  the  gun.     Swans  are  hunted  in  the  same  way. 

20.  Tlie  mazes  of  the  forest  are,  however,  the  Indian  hunter's  peculiar  field  of  action. 
No  foot-print  can  be  impressed  there,  with  which  he  is  not  familiar.  In  his  temporary 
journeys  in  the  search  after  game,  he  generally  ciicamps  early,  and  sallies  out  at  the 
first  peep  of  day,  on  his  hunting  tour.  If  he  is  in  a  forest  cou-try,  he  chooses  his  am- 
bush in  valleys,  for  the  plain  reason  that  all  animals,  as  night  approaches,  come  into 
the  valleys.  In  ascending  these,  he  is  very  careful  to  take  that  side  of  a  stream  which 
throws  the  shadow  from  it,  so  that  he  may  have  a  clear  view  of  all  that  passes  on  the 
opposite  side,  while  he  is  himself  screened  by  the  shadow.  But  he  is  particularly  on 
the  alert  to  take  this  precaution,  if  he  is  apprehensive  of  lurking  foes.  The  tracks  of 
an  animal  are  the  subject  of  the  minutest  observation ;  they  tell  him  at  a  glance,  the 
species  of  animal  that  has  passed ;  the  time  that  has  elapsed ;  and  the  course  it  has 
pursued.  If  the  surface  of  the  earth  be  moist,  the  indications  are  plain ;  if  it  be  hard 
or  rocky,  they  are  drawn  from  less  palpable  but  scarcely  less  umnistakeable  signs. 

21.  One  of  the  largest  and  most  varied  day's  hunt,  of  which  we  are  apprised,  was 
by  a  noted  Chippewa  hunter,  named  Nokay,  on  the  upper  Mississippi ;  who,  tradition 
asserts,  in  one  day,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Crow-Wing  river,  killed  sixteen  elk,  four 
bufliiloes,  five  deer,  three  bears,  one  lynx,  and  a  porcupine.  This  feat  has  doubtless 
been  exceeded  in  the  bufliilo  ranges  of  the  south-west,  where  the  bow  and  arrow  is 
known  to  have  been  so  dexterously  and  rapidly  a})plied  in  respect  to  that  animal ;  but 
it  is  seldom  that  the  chase  in  forest  districts  is  as  successful  as  in  this  instance. 


.1 


<\^ll< 


\^ 


22  On  one  occasion  the  celebrated  chief  Wabojeeg  went  out  early  in  the  morning, 
near  the  hanks  of  Lake  Superior,  to  set  martin  traps.  He  hatl  set  about  forty,  and 
waa  returning  to  his  wigwam,  armed  with  his  hatchet  and  knife  only,  when  he 
encountered  a  buck  moose.  He  sheltered  himself  behind  trees,  retreating ;  but,  as  the 
animal  pursued,  he  picked  up  a  pole,  and,  unfastening  his  moccasin-strings,  tied  the 
knife  firmly  to  the  jx)le.  He  then  took  a  favourable  position  behind  a  tree  and 
stabbed  the  animal  several  times  in  the  throat  and  breast.  At  length  it  fell,  and  he 
cut  out  and  carried  home  the  tongue  as  a  trophy  of  his  prowess. 

23.  In  1808,  Gitshe  lawba,  of  Kewywenon,  Lake  Superior,  killed  a  three  years  old 
moose  of  three  hundred  pounds  weight.  It  was  in  the  month  of  February,  and  the 
snow  was  so  soft,  from  a  partial  thaw,  that  the  agim,  or  snow-shoes,  sank  deep  at  every 
step.  After  cutting  up  the  animal  and  drawing  out  the  Ijlood,  he  wrapped  the  flesh  in 
the  skin,  and,  putting  himself  under  it,  rose  up  erect.  Finding  he  could  bear  the 
weight,  he  then  took  a  litter  of  nine  pups,  in  a  blai  ket,  upon  his  right  arm,  threw  his 


' 


111^ 


■■'I 


I\ 


^ 

.^^s^. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


U&IM    |25 
■u  Itt    |22 

:^  ii°  12.0 


u& 


IIIL25  |||.4    11.6 

^ 

6"     

► 

PhotDgraphic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


33  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WHSTIR.N.Y.  U5M 

(7l6)«7a-4S03 


h^i^ 


.**• 


-  4^1^ 


I 


> 


«     » 


.  L 


..     1 

♦r. 

( 

%.^(^ 


',.      '•:>« 


■ ''  «'- 


1.  .J 


■tf 


I'- .    r-v       I ;  tv 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


65 


wallet  on  the  tq)  of  his  head,  and,  putting  his  gun  over  his  left  shoulder,  walked  six 
milea  to  his  wigwam.  Thia  was  the  atrongest  man  that  has  appeared  in  the  Chippewa 
natitm  in  modem  times. 

24.  In  1827,  Annimikens,  of  Bed  Biver  of  the  North,  was  one  day  quite  engrossed 
in  looking  out  a  path  for  his  camp  to  pass,  when  he  was  startled  by  the  sharp  snorting 
of  a  grizzly  bear.  lie  immediately  presented  his  gun  and  attempted  to  fire ;  but,  the 
priming  not  igniting,  he  was  knocked  by  the  animal,  the  next  instant,  several  steps 
backward,  and  his  gun  driven  full  fifteen  feet  through  the  air.  The  bear  then  struck 
him  un  one  cheek,  and  tore  away  a  part  of  it.  The  little  consciousness  he  had  left 
told  him  to  be  passive,  and  manifest  no  signs  of  life.  Fortunately,  the  beast  had 
satiated  his  appetite  on  the  carcase  of  a  buflalo  near  by.  Having  clawed  his  victim  at 
pleasure,  he  then  took  him  by  the  neck,  dragged  him  into  the  bushes,  and  there  left 
him.  Yet  from  such  a  wound  the  Indian  recovered,  though  a  disfigured  man,  and 
lived  to  tell  me  the  story  with  his  own  lips. 

Relations  of  such  hunting  exploits  and  adventures  are  vividly  repeated  in  the  Indian 
country,  and  constitute  a  species  of  renown  which  is  eagerly  sought  by  the  young. 


I 


E.    SUOAR-MAKINO. 

As  the  spring  season  approaches,  and  the  sap  begins  to  ascend  the  still  leafless 
trunks  of  the  acer  saccharinum,  or  sugar  maple,  the  Indian  families,  throughout  all 
the  northern  and  middle  latitudes,  repair  to  their  sugar^amps,  and  engage  in  preparing 
that,  to  them,  favorite  luxury.  The  sap  is  carried  in  bark  buckets,  and  boiled  down 
in  kettles  of  iron  or  tin.  This  labor,  which  devolves  chiefly  on  the  females^  is  shown 
in  the  accompanying  sketch.     (Plate  9.) 

25.  It  forms  a  sort  of  Indian  carnival.  The  article  is  profusely  eaten  by  all  of 
every  age,  and  a  quantity  is  put  up  for  sale  in  a  species  of  boxes  made  from  the  white 
birch  bark,  which  are  called  mococks,  or  mokuks.  These  sugar-boxes  are  in  the  shape 
of  the  lower  section  of  a  quadrangular  pyramid.  They  are  of  a  light  brown  color,  or, 
if  new,  a  nankeen-yellow. 

26.  While  the  oaref\il  and  industrious  wife  prepares  and  fills  these  boxes  for  sale, 
the  children  and  youth  carry  sap  from  the  trees,  and  have  a  grand  fW>Iio  among 
themselves ;  boiling  candy  and  pouring  it  out  on  the  snow  to  cool,  and  gambolling 
about  on  the  fVozen  surface  with  the  wildest  delight.  Their  mothers  supply  them,  too, 
with  miniature  mokuks,  filled  with  sugar  flnm  the  first  runnings  of  the  sap,  which 
makes  the  choicest  sugar.    These  little  mokuks  are  ornamented  with  dyed  porcupine 


t:  1 
11 


M  MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 

quills,  BkilfuUy  wrought  in  the  shape  of  flowers  and  figures.  The  boxes  designed  for 
sale  are  of  all  siies;  from  twenty  to  seventy  pounds  weight.  They  are  sold  to  the 
merchants  at  six  cents  per  pound,  payable  in  merchandize.  The  number  made  in  a 
single  season,  by  an  industrious  and  strong-handed  family,  is  known  to  be  from  thirty 
to  forty,  in  addition  to  all  the  sugar  that  has  been  consumed.  It  is  seldom  less  than 
a  dozen  or  twenty  boxes  to  the  family ;  and  the  average  yield,  comprising  the  extremes 
of  careless  and  extravagant,  and  of  the  most  thrifty  wigwams,  may  be  put  between 
twenty-five  and  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars  in  trade. 

27.  The  heyday  iscenes  of  the  Seenatbaukwut,  or  sugar-making,  crowns  the  labors  of 
the  spring.  The  pelt  of  animals  is  now  out  of  season,  winter  has  ended  with  all  its 
rigors,  and  the  introduction  of  warm  weather  prepares  the  Indian  mind  for  a  season 
of  hilarity  and  feasting,  for  which  the  sale  of  his  "golden  mokuks"  gives  him  some 
means. 

It  is  now  that  religious  observances  are  in  order.  The  Medawin,  the  Jesukawin, 
and  the  Wabeno  societies  assemble.  Feasts  are  given  as  long  as  their  means  last.  The 
drum  and  the  rattle  are  heard  to  echo  through  their  villages.  The  streams,  now 
loosened  from  their  icy  fetters,  pour  a  deeper  murmur ;  the  forests  are  decked  with 
their  leafy  clothing,  which  fit  them  for  concealment,  and  the  Indian  mind  prepares 
itself  for  renewing  its  darling  schemes  of  war :  for,  whatever  other  cares  and  employ- 
ments may  demand  his  attention,  it  is  to  success  in  the  war-path  that  the  Indian  looks 
for  his  prime  and  crowning  glories. 


F.     WAR,   AND   ITS   INCIDENTS. 


28.  Success  in  war  is  to  the  Indian  the  acm^  of  glory,  and  to  learn  its  arts  the 
object  of  hia  highest  attainment.  The  boys  and  youth  acquire  the  accomplishment  at 
an  early  period  of  dancing  the  war-dance ;  and  although  they  are  not  permitted  to  join 
its  fascinating  cirole  till  they  assume  the  envied  rank  of  actual  warriors,  still  their 
early  sports  and  mimic  pastimes  are  imitations  of  its  various  movements  and  postures. 
The  envied  eagle's  feather  is  the  prize.  For  this,  the  Indian's  talent,  subtlety, 
endurance,  bravery,  persevering  fasts,  and  what  may  be  called  religious  penances  and 
observances,  are  made. 

.  The  war-path  is  taken  by  youths  at  an  early  age.  That  age  may  be  stated,  for 
general  comparison,  to  be  sixteen :  but  without  respect  to  exact  time,  it  is  always  after 
the  primary  fast,  during  which  the  youth  chooses  his  personal  guardian  or  monedo,  — 
an  age  when  he  first  assumes  the  duties  of  manhood.  It  is  the  period  of  the  assumption 
of  the  three-pointed  blanket,  the  true  toga  of  the  North  American  Indian. 


the 
at 


aeir 


lety, 
and 


for 
I  after 


Iption 


l(s«jt-»i»i»s»mvr^ 


m 


»i    ■ 


; 


I 


3 
n 


I 


■, 

Mi 

iM^^v  bH 

111 

iBiifti 

iHh 

i ' 

i|H) 

t 

4  HR| 

ill 

t  ' 


•1 


^iPl 


■■'I 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


57 


29.  The  whole  force  of  public  opinion,  in  our  Indian  communities,  in  concontrntcd 
on  this  point,  its  early  lodge  teochingn,  (such  as  the  recital  of  adventures  of  brnverj',) 
its  dances,  its  religious  rites,  the  harangues  of  prominent  actors,  mode  at  public 
assemblages,  (such  as  is  called  "  striking  the  post,")  all,  in  fact,  that  serves  to  awaken 
and  fire  ambition  in  the  mind  of  the  savage,  is  clustered  about  the  idea  of  future 
distinction  in  war. 

30.  Civilization  has  many  points  of  ambitious  attainment,  —  the  rewards  of  letters, 
triumphs  in  the  forum  and  the  legislative  hall,  the  diplomatic  bureau,  the  honors  of 
the  academician,  the  sculptor's  chisel,  the  painter's  brush,  the  architect's  design.  The 
Indian  has  but  one  prime  honor  to  grasp ;  it  is  triumph  in  the  war-path ;  it  is  rushing 
upon  his  enemy,  tearing  the  scalp  reeking  from  his  head,  and  then  uttering  his  terrific 
e(i-earkuon,  (death-whoop).  For  this  crowning  act  (Plate  10)  he  is  permitted  to  mount 
the  honored  feather  of  the  war-eagle,  —  the  king  of  carnivorous  birds.  By  this  mark 
he  is  publicly  known,  and  his  honors  recognized  by  all  his  tribe,  and  by  the  surrounding 
tribes  whose  customs  assimilate. 

31.  When  the  scalp  of  an  enemy  has  been  won,  very  great  pains  are  taken  to  exhibit 
it.  For  this  purpoet;,  it  is  stretched  on  a  hoop  and  mounted  on  a  pole.  (Plate  11.) 
The  inner  part  is  painted  red,  and  the  hair  adjusted  to  hang  in  its  natural  manner. 
If  it  be  the  scalp  of  a  male,  eagles'  feathers  are  attached  to  denote  that  fact.  If  a 
female,  a  comb  or  scissors  is  hung  on  the  frame.  In  this  condition,  it  is  placed  in  the 
hands  of  an  old  woman,  who  beors  it  about  in  the  scalp  dance,  (Plate  12,)  while 
opprobrious  epithets  are  uttered  against  the  tribe  from  whom  it  was  taken.  Amidst 
these  wild  rejoicings  the  war-cry  is  vociferated,  and  the  general  sentiment  with  old  and 
young  is,  "  Thus  shall  it  be  done  to  our  enemies." 


32.  The  feather  of  the  eagle  is  the  highest  honor  that  a  warrior  can  wear,  and  a 
very  extravagant  sum  is  sometimes  given  to  procure  one.  The  value  of  a  horse  has 
been  known  to  be  paid.  The  mode  in  which  a  feather  is  to  be  cut  and  worn  ia 
important  to  be  noticed. 

33.  The  scale  of  honor,  with  the  several  tribes,  may  vary,  but  the  essential  features 
are  the  same.  Among  the  Dacota  tribes,  an  eagle's  feather  with  a  red  spot  (Plate  13, 
Fig.  1)  denotes  that  the  wearer  has  killed  an  enemy,  a  notch  cut  in  it  and  edges  of  the 
feather  (Fig.  2)  painted  red,  indicates  that  the  throat  of  an  enemy  has  been  cut. 
Small  consecutive  notches  on  the  front  side  of  the  feather,  (Fig.  3,)  without  paint, 
denote  that  the  wearer  is  the  third  person  that  has  touched  the  dead  body.  Both 
edges  notched,  (Fig.  4,)  that  he  is  the  fourth  person  that  has  touched  it;  and  the 
feather  partly  denuded,  (Fig.  5,)  that  he  is  the  fifth  person  that  has  touched  the  slain. 

Pt.  II.  — 8 


I.l 


11 


,'l 


r  » 


68 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


Fi}^.  G  »lom)U'.s  tliat  tlie  woaivr  htiH  rccoivwl  Hcnrs  fnnn  the  Iiniiil  of  an  enomy.  The 
foatlior  cli|)|)i-il  oil",  ami  the  edj^os  painted  red,  are  alw)  iiidieative  of  tlie  cutting  of  an 
eneniVH  throat. 

Fig.  14.  On  the  blanket  or  bufl'alo  nilnj  worn  by  tlio  Dacota  Intlian  a  red  or  black 
hand  is  often  wen  painted.  The  red  hand  (Fig.  15)  indicates  that  the  wearer  has  k-on 
wounded  by  his  eneni}-;  the  black  hand,  (Fig.  1(5,)  that  he  has  slain  his  enemy.  Fig. 
8  indicates  a  male  prisoner,  and  Fig.  10  a  female  prisoner,  both  captured  by  Fig.  9. 
P'ig.  11,  a  female  killetl.  Fig.  12,  a  male  killed.  Fig.  13,  a  girl  killed;  and  Fig.  14, 
a  boy  killed. 

Fig.  17  is  a  representation  of  the  thunder-bird,  and  is  frequently  seen  worked  with 
porcupine  quills,  as  an  ornament,  on  piiie  stems,  knife  sheatli!*,  belts,  and  other  articles. 

(Such  arc  the  oistoms  of  the  Dacotus  who  dwell  on  the  St.  Peter's,  and  alwut  the 
Falls  of  St.  Anthimy.  The  warlike  triljc  of  Chipixjwas  on  the  sources  of  the 
Mississippi,  who,  fmm  a  national  act  in  their  history,  bear  the  distinctive  name  of 
Pillagers,  award  a  successful  warrior,  who  shoots  <lown  and  scalps  his  enemy,  three 
feathoi-s;  and  ii)r  the  still  more  dangerous  act  of  taking  a  wounded  pris«mer  on  the 
field,  five,  —  for  they  conceive  that  a  wounded  enemy  is  desjR'rate,  and  will  generally 
reserve  his  fire  for  a  la.st  act  of  vengeance,  if  he  died  the  moment  after.  Those  of  the 
war-party  who  come  up  immediately  and  strike  the  enemy,  so  ns  to  get  marks  of  blood 
on  their  weajwns,  receive  two  feathers ;  for  it  is  customary  for  as  many  as  can  to 
jK-rfonn  this  act.  It  is  considered  a  proof  of  braver}',  and  it  enables  them,  in  their 
future  assem)>lics  for  the  purpasc  of  ^'striking  thepoai"  to  allude  to  it.  All  wlio  can 
rise  in  such  assemblies,  and  declare  the  performance  of  such  a  deed,  in  the  presence 
of  the  warriors,  are  ranked  as  brave  men. 

They  go  one  step  farther  in  the  formation  of  military  character.  Those  who  have 
been  of  the  war-party,  and  merely  see  the  fight,  although  they  may  have  no  blood 
marks  of  which  to  boast  as  honors,  and  may  even  have  lacked  promptness  in  following 
the  leader  closely,  are  yet  allowed  to  mount  oiie  feather.  These  honors  are  publicly 
awarded ;  no  one  dares  to  assume  them  without  authority,  and  there  are  instances 
where  the  feathers  falsely  assumed  have  been  pulled  violently  from  their  heads  in  a 
public  assemblage  of  the  Indians. 

34.  They  never,  however,  blame  each  other  for  personal  acts  denoting  cowardice  or 
any  species  of  timidity  while  on  the  war-path,  hoping,  by  this  elevated  course,  to 
encourage  the  young  men  to  do  better  on  another  occasion. 

35.  Their  war  and  civil  chiefs  use  the  most  careful  and  studied  expressions  on  the 
topic  at  all  times, — the  principle  of  warlike  deeds  being  apix?aled  to;  and  the  tone 
and  temper  of  a  band  on  an  exposed  frontier  i)osition,  subject  to  l)e  constantly  attacked, 
and,  in  turn,  to  attack  their  enemies,  is  thus  broiight  to  a  high  state  of  personal  daring 


^m 


[•my.     The 
ttiiii'  of  nn 


cd  or  black 
er  linn  In'on 
einy.  Fig. 
by  Fig.  9. 
nd  Fig.  14, 

•orkod  with 
lier  iirticloH. 

I  alxjiit  the 
rcca  of  the 
'c  name  of 
noniy,  three 
mer  on  the 

II  geneniUy 
riiose  of  the 
rks  of  blood 
y  as  can  to 
em,  in  their 
A.11  who  can 
he  presence 


® 


sc  who  have 
ve  no  blood 
in  following 
arc  publicly 
re  instances 
■  heads  in  a 


cowardice  or 
d  course,  to 


ssions  on  the 
md  the  tone 
itly  attacked, 
rwjnal  daring 


!| 


I  ! 

t- 


Sl 


»  I 


'B  ^ 


d"1   %  ' 


-.    i 


"K  ■'.■*^. 


.f;^.*-fi-     .,;  f 


,.1  ■  ;l. 


...   '-J.  \  \ 


t?.  ' 


}{ 


r 


N 


(I 


■  1 

1 

1 

m 

1 

111 

ill 

^HfllBtt 

'  1 

i 

i  n 


1,* 


MANNERS   AND    CUSTOMS. 


69 


and  heroic  courage.  Such  is  the  present  position  of  the  Mukundua  or  Pillagers  just 
referred  to,  —  a  band  who  form  the  military  advance  westward  of  the  great  Algonquin 
family.  Before  their  high  state  of  warlike  skill  the  Sioux  tribes  have  been  forced  to 
abandon  the  western  shores  of  Lake  Superior  and  the  sources  of  the  Mississippi,  and 
this  tribe  ventures  with  fear  even  twenty  miles  north  of  the  Minnesota  River. 

36.  All  war-parties  consist  of  volunteers.  The  leader,  or  war-captain,  who  attempts 
to  raise  one,  must  have  some  reputation  to  start  on.  His  appeals,  at  the  assemblages 
for  dancing  the  preliminary  war-dance,  are  to  the  principles  of  bravery  and  nationality. 
They  are  brief  and  to  the  point.  He  is  careful  to  be  thought  to  act  under  the  guidance 
of  the  Great  Spirit,  of  whose  secret  will  he  affects  to  be  apprized  in  dreams,  or  by  some 
rites. 

37.  The  principle  of  enlistment  is  sufficiently  well  preserved.  For  this  purpose,  the 
leader  who  pro^wses  to  raise  a  war-party  takes  the  war-club  in  his  hands,  smeared  with 
vermilion,  to  symbolize  blood,  and  begins  his  war-.song.  I  have  witnessed  several 
such  scenes.  The  songs  are  brief,  wild  repetitions  of  sentiments  of  heroic  deeds,  or 
incitements  to  patriotic  or  military  ardor.  They  are  accompanied  by  the  drum  and 
rattle,  and  by  the  voice  of  one  or  more  choristei-s.  They  are  repeated  slowly, 
sentcntiously,  and  with  a  measured  cadence,  to  which  the  most  exact  time  is  kept. 
The  warrior  stamps  the  ground  as  if  he  could  shake  the  universe.  His  language  is 
often  highly  figurative,  and  he  deals  with  the  machinery  of  clouds,  the  flight  of 
carnivorous  birds,  and  the  influence  of  spiritual  agencies,  as  if  the  region  of  space  were 
at  his  command.  He  imagines  his  voice  to  be  heaiHl  in  the  clouds ;  and  while  he 
stamps  the  ground  with  well-feigned  fury,  he  fancies  himself  to  take  hold  of  the 
"circle  of  the  sky"  with  his  hands.  Every  few  moments  he  stops  abruptly  in  his 
circular  path,  and  utters  the  piercing  war-cry. 

38.  He  must  be  a  cold  listener  Avho  can  sit  unmoved  by  these  appeals.  The  ideas 
thrown  out  succeed  each  other  with  the  impetuosity  of  a  torrent.     They  are  suggestive 

of  heroic  frames  of  mind,  of  strong  will,  of  high  courage,  of  burning  sentiment. 

'-♦^ 

Hear  my  voice,  ye  warlike  biixls!  , 

I  prepare  a  feast  for  you  to  batten  on; 

I  see  you  cross  the  enemy's  lines; 

Like  you  I  shall  go. 

I  wish  the  swiftness  of  your  wings ; 

I  wish  the  vengeance  of  your  claws ; 

I  muster  my  friends; 

I  follow  your  flight. 

Ho,  yo  young  men,  that  are  warriors, 

Look  with  wrath  on  the  battle-field. 


If 


p. 
I** 


H 


Wd 


'i 


60 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


Each  warrior  that  rises  and  joins  the  war-dance,  thereby  becomes  a  volunteer  for  the 
trip.  He  arms  and  equips  himself;  he  provides  his  own  sustenance ;  und  when  he  steps 
out  into  the  ring  and  dances,  he  chants  his  own  song,  and  is  greeted  with  redoubling 
yells.  These  ceremonies  are  tantamount  to  "  enlistment,"  and  no  j'oung  man  who  thus 
comes  forward  can  honorably  withdraw. 

39.  Whoever  has  heard  an  Indian  war-song,  and  witnessed  an  Indian  war-dance, 
must  be  satisfied  that  the  occasion  wakes  up  all  the  fire  and  energy  of  the  Indian's 
soul.  His  flashing  eye,  his  muscular  energy,  aa  he  begins  the  dance,  his  violent  gesti- 
culation as  he  raises  his  war-cry ;  the  whole  frame  and  expression  of  the  man,  demon- 
strate this.  And  long  before  it  comes  to  his  turn  to  utter  his  stave  or  part  of  the  chant, 
his  mind  has  been  worked  up  to  the  most  intense  point  of  excitement.  His  imagina- 
tion has  pictured  the  enemy,  the  ambush  and  the  onset,  the  victory  and  the  bleeding 
victim,  writhing  under  his  prowess.  In  thought,  he  has  already  stamped  him  under- 
foot, and  toni  off  his  reeking  scalp.  He  has  seen  the  eagles  hovering  in  the  air,  ready 
to  pounce  on  the  dead  carcass  as  soon  as  the  combatants  quit  the  field. 

It  would  require  strong  and  graphic  language  to  give  descriptive  utterance,  in  the 
shape  of  a  song,  to  all  he  has  fancied,  and  sees  and  feels  on  the  subject.  Physical 
excitement  has  absorbed  his  energies.  He  is  in  no  mood  for  calm  and  collected  descrip- 
tions of  battle-scenes.  He  has  no  stores  of  measured  rhymes  to  fall  back  on.  All  he 
can  do  is  to  utter  brief  and  often  highly  symbolic  expressions  of  courage,  of  defiance, 
of  indomitable  rage.  His  feet  stamp  the  ground  as  if  he  would  shake  it  to  its  centre. 
The  inspiring  drum  and  mystic  rattle  communicate  now  energy  to  every  step,  while 
they  serve,  by  the  observance  of  the  most  exact  time,  to  concentrate  his  energy.  His 
very  looks  depict  the  spirit  of  rage :  and  his  yells,  uttered  quick,  sharp,  and  cut  off  by 
the  application  of  the  hand  to  the  mouth,  are  startling  and  horrific. 

Under  such  circumstances,  a  few  short  and  broken  sentences  are  enough  to  keep 
alive  the  theme  in  his  mind ;  and  he  is  not,  probably,  conscious  of  the  fact,  that  there 
is  not  enough  said,  in  the  theme  of  his  song,  to  give  much  coherence  to  it.  Such  a 
song  is,  indeed,  under  the  best  auspices,  a  mere  wild  rhapsody  of  martial  thought, 
poured  out,  from  time  to  time,  in  detached  sentences,  which  are,  so  to  say,  cemented 
into  lines  by  a  flexible  chorus  and  known  tunes. 

The  sentiments  of  the  following  song  were  uttered  by  the  celebrated  Wacbojeeg,  aa 
the  leader  of  the  Chippewas,  after  a  victory  over  the  combined  Sioux  and  Sauks  and 
Foxes,  at  the  falls  of  St.  Croix,  during  the  latter  part  of  the  seventeenth  century. 

I. 

Hear  my  voice,  ye  heroes! 

On  that  day  when  our  warriors  sprang 

With  shouts  on  the  dastardly  foe, 


•^wMMfeirMMiafi 


!cr  for  the 
n  he  steps 
•edoubling 
who  thus 

ivar-dance, 
e  Indian's 
)lcnt  gesti- 
m,  demon- 
the  chant, 
is  imaginor 
18  bleeding 
lim  under- 
:  air,  ready 

nee,  in  the 
Physical 
;ed  descrip- 
in.  All  he 
)f  defiance, 
>  its  centre, 
step,  while 
lergy.  His 
i  cut  off  by 

igh  to  keep 
,  that  there 
it.  Such  a 
al  thought, 
Y,  cemented 


IUB0JEE6,  aa 
i  Sauks  and 
entury. 


; 


.  ;.i. 


ii 


■I 


I 


'J5 


t 


il       ■ 

;  i 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS.  61 

Just  vengeance  my  lieart  burned  to  take 
On  the  cruel  and  treacherous  breed, 
The  Bwoin' — the  Fox — the  Sauk. 

n. 

And  here,  on  my  breast,  have  I  bled! 
See — see!  my  battle-scars! 
Ye  mountains,  tremble  at  my  yell! 
I  strike  for  life. 

ni. 

But  who  are  my  foes?    They  shall  die, 
They  shall  fly  o'er  the  plains  like  a  fox; 
They  shall  shake  like  a  leaf  in  the  storm. 
Perfidious  dogs!  they  roast  our  sons  with  fire! 

IV. 

Five  winters  in  hunting  we'll  spend, 
While  mourning  our  warriors  slain, 
Till  our  youth  grown  to  men 
For  the  battle-path  trained, 
Our  days  like  our  fathers  we'll  end. 

V. 

Ye  are  dead,  noble  men!  ye  are  gone, 

My  brother — my  fellow — my  friend! 

On  the  death-path  where  brave  men  must  go, 

But  we  live  to  revenge  you!     We  haste 

To  die  08  our  forefathers  died. 

In  1824,  Bwoinais,  a  Chippewa  warrior  of  lake  Superior,  repeated  to  me,  with  the 
appropriate  tunes,  the  following  war-songs,  which  had  been  uttered  during  the  existing 
war  between  that  nation  and  the  Dacotas. 

I. 

Oshawanung  undossewug 

Penasewug  ka  baimwaidungig. 

From  the  south — they  come,  the  warlike  birds — 

Hark!  to  their  passing  screams. 


'  A  Sioux. 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 

n. 

Todotobi  penaise 

Ka  (low  wiawwiaun. 

I  wish  to  have  the  body  of  the  fiercest  bird, 

As  swift — as  cruel — as  strong. 

m. 

Ne  wawaibena,  neowai 

Kagait  ue  minwaindum 

Nebunaikuinig  tshebaibcwishcnaun. 

I  east  away  my  bod}-  to  the  chance  of  battle. 

Full  happy  am  I,  to  lie  on  the  field — 

On  the  field  over  the  enemy's  line. 


The  following  stanzas  embrace  detached  sentiments  of  other  chaunts  from  several 
sources. 


The  eagles  scream  on  high, 
They  whet  their  forked  beaks; 
Raise — raise  the  battle-cry, 
'Tis  fame  our  leader  seeks. 

n. 

The  battle-birds  swoop  from  the  sky. 
They  thirst  for  the  warrior's  heart; 
They  look  from  their  circles  on  high, 
And  scorn  every  flesh  but  the  brave. 

DEATH    SONG. 

m. 

I  fall — but  my  body  shall  lie 

A  name  for  the  gallant  to  tell; 

The  Gods  shall  repeat  it  on  high, 

And  young  men  grow  brave  at  the  sound. 


f.l 


,»  .1 


I  several 


'i    I 


r,  A  It 


Ha/e 


:.(i\J.li->^   divss.-d  Foi-  H 


u>  if'VASiKlij 


::-\ 


u 


i 


% 


it 


I 


MANNERS   AND    CUSTOMS. 


68 


G.    THE  WIGWAM  AND  ITS  MATES. 

40.  It  has  often  been  mode  a  question  how  order  is  obtained  in  so  confii^ed  a  space 
as  an  Indian  wig>vam,  where  so  many  persons  seem  +0  the  looker-on  to  be  huddled 
together  in  confusion.  We  have  had  occasion  to  make  particular  inquiries  into  this 
subject.  Domestic  order  and  domestic  rights  are  of  such  a  character,  that  they  would 
seem,  in  savage  as  in  civilized  life,  to  demand  rules  that  all  should  know  and  respect. 

The  wife  of  the  hunter  has  the  entire  control  of  the  wigwam  and  all  its  tempo- 
ralities. To  each  person  who  is  a  member  of  the  lodge-family  is  assigned  a  fixed  seat, 
or  habitual  abiding-place,  which  is  called  Abbinos.  To  the  master  and  mistress  of 
the  lodge  belongs  the  chief  location.  To  each  of  the  adult  and  grown  children  is 
also  assigned  their  particular  abbinos.  The  very  infant,  or  abbinojee,  soon  learns  to 
know  its  place,  and  hastens  to  the  mother's  abbinos.  Indeed,  the  term  for  a 
child — abbinoje — appears  to  be  derived  from  this  radix:  the  termination  o/ee,  which 
is  affixed  to  it,  is  a  diminutive  word  of  endearment ;  as  we  observe  it  in  their  terms 
for  a  fly,  oj'ee;  wa-wa'begunrojee,  &c. 


41.  If  the  son  is  married  and  brings  his  bride  home,  (one  of  the  commonest  modes 
of  assembling  the  lodge-circle,)  the  mother  assigns  the  bride  her  abhinoa.  This  is 
prepared  by  spreading  one  of  the  finest  skins  for  her  seat,  and  no  one  besides  her 
husband  ever  sits  there,  A  visitor  who  is  a  neighbor  is  welcomed  to  the  highest  seat 
temporarily.  Inmates  of  the  lodge  have  their  bed,  mokuk,  wallet,  &c.,  placed  behind 
their  own  abbinos,  and  generally  war-clubs  and  arms,  if  he  be  a  warrior,  are  placed 
within  reach.  In  thin  manner  the  personal  rights  of  each  individual  are  guarded. 
The  female  is  punctilious  as  to  her  own,  so  that  perfect  order  is  maintained ;  and  it 
would  be  as  much  a  violation  of  their  etiquette  for  an  inmate  to  take  possession  of 
another's  abbinos  at  night,  as,  in  civilized  life,  to  intrude  into  a  private  bed-chamber. 
By  these  known  rules  of  the  wig\vam  an  Indian's  notions  of  propriety  are  quite  satis- 
fied; while,  to  the  European  stranger,  who  casually  lifts  up  the  lodge  door  (a  bit  of 
cloth  or  skin)  and  peeps  in,  its  interior  appears  to  be  appropriated  with  as  indiscri- 
minate a  "communism"  as  if  it  were  occupied  by  so  many  pigs,  sheep,  or  bears. 

42.  The  division  of  labour  between  the  man  and  wife  in  Indian  life  is  not  so  unequal 
while  they  live  in  the  pure  hunter  state  as  many  suppose.  The  large  part  of  a  hunter's 
time  which  is  spent  in  seeking  game  leaves  t^e  wife  in  the  wigwam,  with  a  great  deal 
of  time  on  her  hands.  For  it  must  be  remembered  that  there  is  no  spinning,  weaving, 
or  preparing  children  for  school ;  no  butter  or  cheese  making,  or  a  thousand  other 
cares  which  are  inseparable  from  the  agricultural  state,  to  occupy  her  skill  and 
industry.     Even  the  art  of  the  seamstivss  is  only  practised  by  the  Indian  woman  on 


IsUfi 


64 


MANNERS   AND    CUSTOMS. 


a  few  things.  She  devotes  much  of  her  time  to  making  moccasins  and  quill-work. 
Her  husband's  leggins  are  carefully  ornamented  with  beads.  His  shot-pouch  and  knife- 
sheath  are  worked  with  quills.  The  hunting-cap  is  garnished  with  ribbons.  His 
garters  of  cloth  are  adorned  with  a  profusion  of  small,  white  beads,  and  colored  worsted 
toasels  are  prepared  for  his  leggins. 

In  the  spring  the  corn-field  is  planted  by  her  and  the  youngsters  in  a  vein  of 
gaiety  and  frolic.  It  is  done  in  a  few  hours,  and  taken  care  of  in  the  same  spirit.  It 
is  perfectly  voluntary  labor,  and  she  would  not  be  scolded  for  omitting  it;  for  all 
labor  with  Indians  is  voluntary. 

The  dressing  and  preparation  of  skins  for  certain  parts  of  clothing  is  carried  on  at 
seasons  of  convenience.  It  is  done  by  removing  the  hair  and  fleshy  integuments  with 
implementa  of  stone  or  iron.  (Plate  7G,  Figs.  6,  7,  and  8.)  The  skin  is  fastened  for 
this  purpose  to  two  stakes,  as  shown  in  the  drawing,  (Plate  14,)  where  it  undergoes  a 
species  of  currying.  The  present  state  of  the  Indian  trade  nders  it  more  thrifty  for 
the  hunter  to  purchase  his  coat,  shirt,  aziaun,'  and  leggins  of  cioth,  and  employ  his  time 
in  hunting  the  small  furred  animals  to  pay  for  them ;  making  a  change  in  the  condition 
of  the  Indian  female  which  relieves  her,  in  a  great  measure,  from  the  dressing  of 
skins;  which  was  formerly  quite  a  labor. 

43.  The  character  of  the  man  in  domestic  life  has  some  redeeming  traits.  His 
experience  of  hardship  and  suffering  appears  to  have  made  him  forbearing.  He  is  not 
easily  vexed,  but  almost  habitually  passive.  He  does  not  scold  old  or  young.  The 
spirit  of  endurance,  self-respect,  and  a  species  of  forest  stoicism,  have  given  him  a 
philosophy  far  above  it.  When  he  returns  from  the  chase  with  a  load  of  meats  and 
throws  it  down  at  the  door  of  the  wigwam,  not  a  word  is  said  to  the  wife ;  or  if  but 
a  tongue  of  the  animal  killed  be  brought  to  testify  to  his  success,  he  is  nearly  aa 
taciturn.  She  comprehends  at  once  her  part  of  the  duty  in  both  cases ;  and  whatever 
that  duty  is,  he  never  states  or  alludes  to  it.  He  is  not  a  fault-finder  at  his  meals,  but 
eats  whatever  is  placed  before  him. 

Roasting  and  boiling  are  simple  operations  with  the  Indian.  There  is  no  condiment 
to  be  used;  no  salt,  no  pepper.  Soups  are  their  great  resource;  particularly  in 
seasons  of  want,  or  where  the  food  would  not  admit  of  division  by  any  other  method. 
A  squirrel,  or  a  small  bird,  will  answer  to  season  or  qualify  a  gallon  of  soup.  And  when 
there  are  many  stomachs  to  satisfy,  there  would  not  appear  to  be  any  other  method  so 
well  suited  to  answer  the  purpose  of  division.  In  times  of  great  straits  a  few  old 
bones  will  serve  to  flavor  the  liquor,  and  the  ingenuity  of  the  wife  is  constantly  on  the 
stretch  to  provide  a  meal.  When  there  is  absolutely  nothing,  and  the  severities  of  the 
season  have,  for  a  time,  cut  off  every  resource,  there  is  a  dignified  endurance  in  the 
Indian's  mind  that  rises  above  complaint.     Th': .  ■■;  '"\  no  one  to  blame,  in  his  belief, 


lirccch-cluth. 


Liill-work. 
ind  knife- 
9n8.  His 
d  worsted 

a  vein  of 
spirit.  It 
it;  for  all 

rried  on  at 
mentfl  with 
fafitened  for 
indergoes  a 
;  thrifty  for 
loy  his  time 
le  condition 
dressing  of 


'M 


*>■ 


■S-' 


W^ 


:S'. 


:&'■■ 


traits.    His 
;.    He  is  not 
young.    The 
given  him  a 
if  meats  and 
fe ;  or  if  hut 
is  nearly  as 
,nd  whatever 
is  meals,  but 

lo  condiment 
irticularly  in 
Ither  method. 
Ip.  And  when 
Jier  method  so 
lits  a  few  old 
^tantly  on  the 
irerities  of  the 
irance  in  the 
in  his  belief, 


'-^; 


II 


W  V 
1!«.  *' 


4i 


m 


^f  ■?:■ 


^-. 


/•J" 


K 


Jjrit  nt     •'     I  'irf  ."  t-;  /ft-nt*    .  '  .;       hiity    ,r\.n>    '/>• 


«. 


m 


MANNERS  AND   CUSTO> 


65 


unless  it  be  the  Great  Spirit ;  and  he  is  far  from  impnt  blame  1»  rtim.  He  has 
exerted  his  art,  but  without  success.  The  next  day  in;  ljrti,r  him  relief,  and  he 
consoles  himself  in  this  hope.  The  children  are  sometimes  put  to  sleep  by  telling  them 
tales  to  stop  their  crying  for  hunger.  If  there  be  but  a  morsel  in  the  wigwam,  it  is 
given  to  them ;  and  the  father  of  the  lodge  shows  the  strength  of  his  affection  and  the 
quality  of  his  endurance  by  rigid  abstinence  from  food,  and  by  uncomplaining  silence. 
He  indulges  himself  in  the  use  of  the  pipe  and  native  weed,  or  kinnikinic,  which  is 
attended  with  some  sort  of  stimulus  to  the  nerves  that  keeps  them  in  a  state  of 
equilibrium.  Such  is  the  North  American  Indian,  whom  I  have  observed  in  the  forest 
countries  of  the  great  lakes  and  great  valleys  of  the  Upper  Mississippi. 


H.    BIRTH  AND  ITS  INCIDENTS. 

44.  Parturition,  with  the  Indian  female,  is  seldom  attended  with  severe  or  long-con- 
tinued suffering ;  it  is  generally  very  much  the  contrary,  and  leads  to  but  a  slight 
interruption  to  her  ordinary  pursuits.  To  linger  back  a  few  hours  on  a  journey  in  the 
forest,  is  often  the  whole  time  required  by  the  confinement ;  and  there  appears  in  most 
cases  to  be  but  little,  if  any  premonition.  A  wife  has  been  known  to  sally  into  the 
adjoining  forest  in  quest  of  dry  limbs  for  fire-wood,  and  to  return  to  the  wigwam  with 
her  new-bom  child,  placed  carefully  on  the  back-load.  (See  Plate  26.)  The  wife  of 
Saganosh  was  passing  with  her  husband  and  family  in  a  canoe,  along  the  precipitous 
sand-cliffs  of  Lake  Superior,  which  are  called  Orandea  Subles.  There  is,  in  general, 
but  a  strip  of  beach  between  the  precipices  and  the  water,  and  the  scene  is  nearly 
as  denuded  of  trees  or  bushes  as  the  deserts  of  Arabia.  But  she  landed  in  haste,  and 
descried  a  few  bushes  in  a  depressed  spot,  which  sufficed  for  her  accouchement  cham- 
ber, and  in  a  few  hours  was  in  her  canoe  again  with  the  new-boni  babe. 

Their  exemption  from  the  usual  sufferings  of  child-birth  may  be  said  to  be  the 
general  condition  of  the  hunter  state,  and  one  of  the  few  advantages  of  it  which  the 
female  enjoys  above  her  civilized  sister.  But  it  will  be  seen  to  be  the  simple  result  in 
obstetrics  of  the  continued  exercise  in  the  open  air  of  the  Indian  woman,  and  her 
consequent  hardihood. 


45.  Names  are  generally  bestowed  by  the  mindemoia,  or  nocomiss,  of  the  family ; 
that  is,  by  the  matron,  or  the  aged  grandmother,  who  generally  connects  the  event 
with  some  dream.  If  the  child  be  a  male,  the  name  is  generally  taken  from  some 
object  or  phenomenon  in  the  visible  heavens.  The  returning  cloud,  (kewanoquot,)  the  sun 
in  contact  with  a  cloud,  {kortche-toah,)  the  bright  cloud,  (na-geezhig,)  the  little  thun- 
derer,  (an-^e^na-kem,)  a  bird  in  continued  flight  in  the  higher  air,  (ka-ga-osh,)  are 
common  names.  If  it  be  a  female,  the  imagery  is  generally  drawn  from  the  surface 
Pt.  II.— 9 


V    i 


!! 


J 


M 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


of  the  earth,  the  vegetable  kingdom,  or  the  waters.  The  woman  of  the  passing  Htream, 
the  woman  of  the  green  valley,  the  woman  of  the  rock,  are  not  uncommon  names. 
The  tlexible  character  of  tlie  language  renders  these  compound  terms  practicable.  In 
this  respect,  the  syntax  of  the  language  bears  a  strong  resemblance  to  that  of  the 
Hebrew — that  is,  in  making  fragments  of  words  stand  for  whole  words  in  these  amal- 
gamated derivations.  But  the  Indian  languages  are  without  that  frequent  fragment  in 
the  Hebrew  of  el,  which  conveys  the  whole  meaning  of  Alohim,  Emanuel,  or  some 
other  descriptive  t«rm  for  the  deity.  The  Indian  deity  docs  not  at  all  appear  to  enter 
into  such  compound  names.  Instead  of  this,  the  distinctive  fragmentary  elements  are 
taken  from  the  radices  for  sun,  sky,  air,  wind,  sound,  &o.  There  is  no  rite  of  any  kind 
analogous  to  baptism,  nor  a  thought  of  it;  but  the  name  thus  given  is  considered 
secret — it  is  indeed  deemed  sacred,  for  it  is  not  generally  revealed,  and  it  is  one  of 
the  hardest  things  to  induce  an  Indian  to  tell  his  real  name.  Instead  of  this,  and  in 
order,  it  would  seem,  the  better  to  conceal  it,  men  are  called  by  some  common  nick- 
name, as  little  fox,  wolf,  red-head,  bail  boy,  bird,  and  such  like  soubriquets,  which  are 
generally  given  by  the  mothers  to  infants,  as  terms  of  endearment.'  It  is  these 
secondary  names,  which  continue  to  be  borne  in  adult  life,  that  we  constantly  hear, 
and  the  real  name  is  studiously  concealed,  and  frequently  not  even  revealed  by  the 
Ajedatic,  or  grave-post ;  for  upon  this,  the  totem  of  the  family  is  deemed  to  be  sufficient. 
The  true  cause  of  the  concealment  of  names  must  be  ascribed  to  their  religious  and 
superstitious  dogmas,  which  will  be  hereafter  described. 

46.  Children  are,  immediately  after  their  birth,  tied  with  feminine  care  on  a  flat 
piece  of  carved  wood,  or  structure,  called  Tikkinagmi,  which  has  a  small  hoop  to 
protect  the  head,  and  a  little  footrpiece  to  rest  on.  ( Fig.  1,  Plate  15.)  Moss  is  placed 
between  the  heels  of  female  infants,  which  makes  them  in-toed ;  in  males,  the  adjust- 
ment of  the  moss  is  designed  to  produce  a  perfectly  straight  position  of  the  foot.  The 
"  one-point"  blanket  of  trade  wraps  it,  and  a  bandage  of  cloth,  if  the  mother  be  able 
to  get  it,  is  bound  around  the  whole  person,  giving  it  some  resemblance  to  a  small 
mummy. 

It  is  the  pride  of  the  mother  to  garnish  this  cradle  band  with  ribbons  and  beads. 
From  the  hoop  some  little  jingling  ornament  is  generally  suspended  to  attract  the 
child's  notice.  (Fig.  2,  Plate  15.)  An  apekun  or  carrying-strap  is  securely  fastened 
near  the  head  of  the  infant,  by  which  the  mother  can  swing  it  to  her  back  and  carry 
it  without  injury  throughout  the  forest  (Plate  15.)     Indeed,  she  can  hang  it  up  by  the 

■The  perfect  identity  of  opinion  entertained  on  this  sabject  by  the  Indians  of  the  present  day  (1851)  with 
those  held  by  the  Virginia  Indians  in  1584,  is  shown  in  the  double  name  of  Pocahontas.  "  Her  true  name," 
says  Furcbas,  "  was  Matokes,  which  they  concealed  from  the  English,  in  a  superstitious  fear  of  hurt  by  the 
English,  if  her  name  was  known."  — Pilorimb,  Part  V.,  Book  8,  Chap.  5. 


11 


•i,'«        • .       'p 


if    ■*"     »' 


iili  VV.!'i'fii*f^:-i  ititir'*-vrv!ii!i!M'  :>-i  .tiii 


-4\'tui 


t:>    TiiMihi 


it  ft 


41 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


67 


strap  on  the  limb  of  a  tree,  or  in  the  lodge,  and  the  fixtures  are  so  ingeniously 
contrived  that,  even  if  it  falls  down,  the  child  cannot  be  hurt.  Meantime,  the  little 
abinojee  itself  seems  perfectly  contented,  and  rarely  if  ever  cries ;  and  in  this  confine- 
ment it  learns  its  first  lesson  in  endurance. 


I.    DEATH    AND   ITS    INCIDENTS. 

47.  The  character  of  the  devices  which  are  placed  on  the  grave-post  of  the  Indian 
has  been  described  under  the  head  of  Pictography,  Part  I.,  p.  .354.  Such  devices  are 
appropriate  for  adults  who  have  trod  the  war-path,  and  made  themselves  conspicuous 
for  bravery  or  heroism. 

Children  and  youth  generally  pass  away  from  the  scenes  of  Indian  life  without  any 
such  memorials ;  but  their  loss  is  often  bewailed  by  mothers  with  inconsolable  grief 
and  bitterness.  It  is  the  intensity  of  this  grief  which  lies  at  the  foundation  of  the 
practice  of  adopting  white  children  stolen  from  the  settlements  on  the  frontiers.  Such 
cases  are  generally,  if  not  in  every  instance,  traceable  to  a  request  of  the  Indian 
mother  to  replace  the  child  of  Avhich  she  has  been  bereaved  by  death.  A  grief  that  is 
indulged  under  the  hopeless  darkness  of  the  aboriginal  mind  may  be  supposed  to  have 
no  more  natural  or  reasonable  mode  of  assuagement.  But  v  is  grief,  when  the  object 
is  a  son,  is  often  deeply  partaken  of  by  the  father,  especially  if  the  lad  be  grown,  and 
lias  develojied  forensic  talents  to  succeed  him  in  the  chieftainship  of  the  band.  We 
have  mentioned  the  noble  sacrifice  of  Bianswah  under  these  circumstances. 


(,      : 


48.  The  son  of  Gel  Plat,  a  noted  chief  of  the  Pillagers  at  Leech  Lake,  on  the 
sources  of  the  Mississippi,  was  killed  on  the  enemy's  border,  west  of  that  point,  while 
lie  was  bathing  in  a  lake  with  a  companion.  The  father,  who  was  about  sixty,  and 
contemplated  leaving  this  son  as  his  successor  in  that  large  and  warlike  band,  laid  the 
Ions  deeply  to  heart,  and  dwelt  ujwn  the  hardness  of  his  fate  many  years.  He  then 
turned  his  hojies  on  a  younger  son  whom  he  desired  to  instal  in  his  place  with  this 
band ;  and  in  order  to  let  them  know  his  wishes  on  the  subject,  he  sent  out  formally 
an  invitation  to  all  the  band  to  attend  a  feast.  He  prepared  for  this,  by  employing 
hunters  who  brought  him  the  carcasses  of  many  animals ;  and  he  staked  his  utmost 
means  with  the  traders  to  purchase  such  articles  of  food  as  the  forests  in  that  quarter 
did  not  fumisli.  There  were  eigliteen  kettles  of  eatables  prepared.  He  then  brought 
out  his  young  son,  dressed  in  the  best  manner,  with  fine  clothes,  and  bearing  five  silver 
medals  hung  with  ribbons  around  his  neck,  being  all  his  regalia.  He  then  arose  and 
uttered  his  lost  son's  eulogy,  speaking,  in  glowing  terms,  of  his  capacities  for  the 
hunter  life  and  the  war-path,  and  ended  by  presenting  to  their  notice  the  tiny  candidate 
for  their  future  chief. 


fl    ■ 


■  i 


Ml 

^i  f 


w 


li 


i- ' 


68 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


49.  Black  is  the  universal  sign  for  mourning ;  it  is  the  symbol  for  death,  and  is  taken 
from  night.  In  their  pictography,  the  image  of  the  sun  is  represented  to  stand  for,  or 
symbolize  night,  for  Avhich  purpose  it  is  crossed  and  blackened. 

The  face  of  the  mourner  is  smeared  with  some  simple  black  mixture  that  will  not 
readily  rub  off.  On  occasions  of  deep  affliction,  the  arms  and  legs  are  cut  or  scarified, 
an  oriental  custom  with  many  nations.  The  corpse  is  dressed  in  its  best  clothes.  It 
is  wrapped  in  a  new  blanket,  and  new  moccasins  and  leggins  put  on.  The  crown- 
band,  head-dress  or  frontlet,  and  feathers,  are  also  put  on.  His  war-club,  gun,  and 
pipe,  are  placed  beside  him,  together  with  a  small  quantity  of  vermilion.  The  corpse 
is  laid  in  public,  where  all  can  gather  around  it,  when  an  address  is  made,  partly  to 
the  spectators,  describing  the  character  of  the  deceased,  and  partly  to  the  deceased 
himself,  speaking  to  him  as  if  the  Ocliicliag  or  soul  was  still  present,  and  giving 
directions  as  to  the  path  he  is  supposed  to  be  about  to  tread  in  a  future  state. 

If  it  is  a  female  that  is  about  to  be  interred,  she  is  provided  with  a  paddle,  a  kettle, 
an  apekun  or  carrying  strap  for  the  head,  and  other  feminine  implements.  The 
Pawnees,  and  other  prairie  tribes,  kill  the  warrior's  horse  upon  his  grave,  that  he 
may  be  ready  to  mount  in  a  future  state,  and  proceed  to  the  appointed  scene  of  rest. 
Th^  mode  of  burial  is  represented  in  Plate  16. 

50.  The  idea  of  immortality  is  strongly  dwelt  uix)n.  It  is  not  spoken  of  as  a 
supposition  or  a  mere  belief,  not  fi.\ed.  It  is  regarded  as  an  actuality,  —  as  something 
known  and  approved  by  the  judgmtnit  of  the  nation.  During  the  whole  period  of 
my  residence  and  travels  in  the  Indian  country,  I  never  knew  and  never  heard  of  an 
Indian  who  did  not  believe  in  it,  and  in  the  reappearance  of  the  body  in  a  future  state. 
However  mistaken  they  are  on  the  subject  of  accountabilities  for  acts  done  in  the 
present  life,  no  small  part  of  their  entire  mythology,  and  the  belief  that  sustains  the 
man  in  his  vicissitudes  and  wanderings  here,  arises  from  the  anticipation  of  ease  and 
enjoyment  in  a  future  condition,  after  tlic  soul  has  left  the  body.  The  resignation, 
nay,  the  alacrity,  with  which  an  Indian  frequently  lies  down  and  surrenders  life, 
is  to  be  ascribed  to  this  prevalent  belief  He  does  not  fear  to  go  to  a  land  which,  all 
his  life  long,  he  has  heard  abounds  in  rewards  without  punishments. 

51.  I  was  present  with  an  interpreter  in  upper  Michigan  in  1822,  when  the  inter- 
ment of  a  warrior  and  hunter  took  place,  at  which  the  corpse  was  carefully  dressed,  as 
above  described,  and  after  it  was  brought  to  the  grave,  and  before  the  lid  was  nailed 
to  the  coffin,  an  address  was  made  by  an  Indian  to  the  corpse.  The  substance  of  it 
relating  to  this  belief  waa  this :  —  "  You  are  about  to  go  to  that  land  where  our  forefar 
thers  have  gone — you  have  finished  your  journey  here,  before  us.  We  shall  follow 
you,  and  rejoin  the  happy  groups  which  you  will  meet." 

52.  When  the  speaking  and  ceremonies  were  concluded,  the  coffm  was  lowered  into 
the  trench  prepared  to  receive  it,  and  thus  "  buried  out  of  sight."     This  mode  of  inter- 


"^lHM«<t>iMMMM«ianMMH*MMM»N 


}f 


^mP^* 


-fttt  >.;     /'     •       Ir'M, 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


69 


ment  is  common  to  the  forest  tribes  of  the  north,  and  appears  to  have  been  practised 
by  them  from  the  earliest  periods.  They  choose  dry  and  elevated  places  for  burial, 
which  are  completely  out  of  the  reach  of  floods  or  standing  water.  Often  these  spots 
selected  for  the  burial  of  the  dead  are  sightly  and  picturesque  points,  which  command 
extensive  views.  They  bury  east  and  west.  They  are  without  proper  tools,  and  do 
not  dig  deep,  but  generally  make  the  place  of  interment  secure  from  the  depredations 
of  wild  beasts,  by  arranging  the  trunks  of  small  trees  in  the  form  of  a  parallelogram 
notched  at  the  angles,  around  it,  or  by  stakes  driven  in  the  ground.  In  other  instances 
a  bark  roof  is  constructed,  which  will  shed  the  rains.  Such  is  the  mode  of  the  various 
Algonquin  and  Appalachian  tribes. 

53.  The  raising  of  "  heaps"  of  earth  over  the  grave,  in  the  form  of  small  mounds  or 
barrows,  appears  to  have  been  a  practice  in  ancient  periods  as  a  mark  of  distinction  for 
eminent  persons.  But  whatever  was  its  prevalence  at  other  epochs,  while  they  were 
in  the  west  and  south-west,  and  before  they  crossed  the  Alleghanies,  it  fell  into  almost 
entire  disuse  in  the  Atlantic  and  Lake  tribes.  There  are  some  traces  of  it  in  Virginia, 
Pennsylvania,  and  Western  New  York.  Rarely  the  resting-places  of  Indian  heroes 
were  marked  by  heaps  of  stones.  In  Georgia,  Alabama,  and  Mississippi,  this  species 
of  tumuli,  fonned  of  earth,  is  found  to  be  common ;  and  the  tradition  of  the  Mnscogees 
respecting  the  custom  is  well  preserved.'  But  by  far  the  most  striking  theatre  of  this 
rude  mode  of  .sepulture  is  the  Mississippi  Valley,  whose  plains  and  alluvions  have  been 
literally  sown  with  the  dead.    Vide  tumuli  proper,  or  sepulchral  mounds.  Part  I.,  p.  49. 

54.  The  tribes  of  the  Mississippi  Valley,  where  the  population  was  more  dense,  and 
the  means  of  subsistence  more  abundant,  were  not  satisfied  that  their  great  warriors 
and  orators  should  be  so  quickly  "  buried  out  of  sight."  And  the  small  sepulchral 
mound,  as  well  as  the  more  lofty  village  or  public  tumulus,  were,  at  the  epoch  of  the 
maximum  of  their  power,  frequently  erected.  They  also,  by  dwelling  in  large  commu- 
nities, had  occasion  for  the  altar  mound,  and  the  redoubt  mound,  the  latter  of  which 
was  used  exclusively  to  defend  the  entrance  or  gates,  through  walls  and  picketings, 
which  enclosed  an  entire  village.  We  have  called  attention  to  this  point  in  Part  I.,  p. 
49,  and  endeavored  to  show  that  there  is  no  mystery  in  the  origin  and  present  appear- 
ance of  these  ruins  or  remains ;  that  the  various  species  of  mounds  and  defences  were 
perfectly  adapted  to  the  former  condition  and  populousness  of  the  tribes ;  that  their 
pipe  sculpture,  and  other  evidences  of  art,  are  not  typical  of  a  higher  degree  of  civili- 
zation, or  social  condition,  and  that  their  manifestations  of  incipient  skill,  power, 
and  civilization,  resulted  from  the  flush  of  barbaric  success  and  ample  compensative 
means,  which  marked  the  ancient  Indian  confederacies  of  this  valley,  before  later  and 
fiercer  hunter  hordes  drove  them  from  their  seats,  and  scattered  them.     We  have  also 

'  History  of  Aliibama,  Georgia,  and  Mississippi,  by  Albert  James  Pickett,  1851.     Vol.  I.,  p.  164. 


m 


if   i 


■ 


70 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


withdrawn  from  this  consideration  those  apparently  intrusive  evidences  of  "  old  world 
art,"  which  are  anomalous,  and  can  by  no  means  be  deemed  as  elements  of  ancient 
Indian  civilization.  We  should  not  consider  it  extraordinary  that  the  ancient  trilx's 
who  dwelt  on  the  fertile  bottom-lands  of  the  Mississippi  and  the  Ohio,  should  have 
erected  the  rude  defences,  mounds  and  tumuli,  which  are  now  found  to  be  overgrown 
by  the  forest  in  various  places.  Tliousands  of  persons  of  these  tribes,  who  raised  the  zea 
maize,  and  hunted  the  deer,  elk,  and  buffalo,  to  fill  the  wig^vams  with  signs  of  gladness, 
could  live  and  flourish  at  a  single  village  or  location ;  and  when  their  chief  died,  two 
or  three  hundred  hands  could  Ix;  employed  to  carry  sacks  of  earth  for  a  sepulchral 
"  heap"  or  mound.  It  was  not  so  among  the  northern  bands,  who  shivered  in  cold  and 
storms  half  the  year,  and  could  raix>ly  sustain  themselves  if  numbering  more  than 
twenty  heads  of  families  at  a  place. 

55.  Burial  among  the  wild  hordes  of  the  prairies  assumes  a  feature  that  marks  it 
as  a  peculiar  habit  of  the  tribes.  They  scaffold  their  dead  on  eminences  where  they 
may  be  descried  afar  of!'.  The  corpse,  after  it  has  received  its  wrappings,  is  placed  in  a 
rude  cofhn,  which  is  generally  garnished  with  red  pigments,  and  rendered  picturesque 
to  the  eye  by  offerings  to  the  dead,  hung  on  poles;  and,  if  it  can  be  got,  a  flag. 
(Plate  59.)     Burials,  or  deposits  of  the  body  in  caves,  were  often  resorted  to. 

56.  No  trait  has  commended  the  forest  tribes  of  the  old  area  of  the  United  States 
more  to  the  respt  t  and  adminition  of  beholders  than  the  scrupulous  regard  with  which 
they  are  found  to  remonilx?r  the  burial-grounds  of  their  ancestors ;  the  veneration  and 
piety  they  exhibit  in  visiting,  at  all  jwriods,  these  sjwts;  and  the  anguish  of  their  minds 
at  any  marks  of  disrespect  and  disturbance  of  the  bones  of  their  ancestors.  Gifts  are 
made  at  graves  so  long  as  it  is  supposed  there  is  any  part  of  the  perishable  matter 
remaining;  aiid  oblations  are  poured  out  to  the  spirits  of  the  departed  after  other  rites 
are  discontinued 

57.  These  sepulchral  and  the  defensive  ruins  of  more  populous  and  advanced  tribes 
are  found  alone  in  the  forest  country.  The  prairie  tribes,  west  of  the  Mississippi  river, 
erected  no  tun  uli  or  works  of  defence.  They  never  remained  in  one  location  long 
enough  to  surround  themselves  with  the  feelings  and  cireumstances  of  a  home ;  and 
when  the  Spaniards  introduced  the  horse,  an  element  was  prepared  which  operated  as 
fuel  to  their  erratic  habits,  and  confinned  tliem  in  their  Indo-Arabic  traits  of  roving. 
The  forays  by  which  this  animal  was  first  obtained  of  the  Mexican  Indians  by  the 
prairie  tribes,  constitute  a  new  feature  in  their  history.  A  coterminous  country  extends 
from  the  plains  of  Texas  and  New  Mexico,  east  of  the  foot  of  the  Rocky  mountains, 
till  the  prairie  country  embraces  both  banks  of  the  Missouri,  and  reaches  to  the  plains 
of  Red  river,  and  the  Saskatchawine,  west  of  the  sources  of  the  Mississippi  river.  No 
tumuli  occur  in  this  region ;  no  remains  of  ancient  ditches,  or  attempts  at  rude  casira- 
metation.     The  latter  are,  in  all  the  region  of  North  America,  north  of  the  Gulf  of 


.  \ 


h' 


-i!. ..'.■' 


t" 


.--.^ 


\ 


IS'l-   M.'IIK. 


''\1f^ 


m 


•■;| 


i- ' 


MANNERS   AND    CUSTOMS. 


71 


Mexico,  the  disclosures  of  forests  and  valleys ;  and  it  is  hence  that  it  becomes  manifest 
that  forests  and  valleys  are  most  conducive  to  arts,  agriculture,  and  civilization. 

58.  The  prairie,  by  its  extent  and  desolateness,  appears  to  exert  a  deleterious  influ- 
ence on  the  savage  mind.  Some  of  the  grosser  and  more  revolting  customs  of  the 
prairie  Indians  respecting  interments,  are  no  doubt  traceable  to  their  wild  and  lawless 
habits.  Nothing  that  I  have  observed  respecting  burials  among  them  reaches  so  abso- 
lutely a  revolting  point,  as  a  custom  which  has  been  noticed  among  certain  of  the 
Oregon  tribes,  and  Avhich  is  perhaps  not  general.  An  eye-witness,  writing  from  the 
mouth  of  the  Columbia,  describes  it  as  follows : — "  I  have  just  returned  from  a  visit  to  the 
Chinook  Indian  countiy,  where  I  witnessed  a  most  revolting  ceremony,  that  of  burying 
the  living  with  the  dead.  One  of  the  chiefs  lost  a  daughter,  a  fine-looking  woman, 
about  twenty  years  of  age.  She  was  wrapped  up  in  a  rush  mat,  together  with  all  her 
trinkets,  and  placed  in  a  canoe.  The  father  had  an  Indian  slave  bound  hand  and 
foot,  and  fastened  to  the  body  of  the  deceased,  and  enclosed  the  two  in  another  mat, 
leaving  out  the  head  of  the  living  one.  The  Indians  then  took  the  canoe,  (which  was 
employed  in  lieu  of  a  coffin,)  and  carried  it  to  a  high  rock  and  left  it  there.  Their 
custom  is  to  let  the  slave  live  for  three  days;  then  another  slave  is  compelled  to 
strangle  the  victim  by  a  cord  drawn  around  the  neck.  They  also  kill  the  horse  that 
may  have  been  a  favorite  of  the  deceased,  and  bury  it  at  the  head  of  the  canoe.  I 
was  desirous  of  interfering  and  saving  the  life  of  the  poor  victim ;  but  Mr.  Hirris, 
the  gentleman  Avith  me,  and  the  two  Indians,  our  companions,  assured  me  that  I 
should  only  get  myself  into  serious  trouble ;  and  as  we  were  at  a  great  distance  from 
the  settlements,  and  our  party  so  small,  self-preservation  dictated  a  different  course 
from  the  inclinations  of  our  hearts." 


K.    GAMES   OF    CHANCE. 

59.  One  of  the  principal  amusements  of  a  sedentary  character,  which  our  tribes 
practise,  is  that  of  various  games,  success  in  which  depends  on  the  luck  of  numbers. 
Those  games,  to  which  both  the  prairie  and  forest  tribes  are  addicted,  assume  the 
fascination  and  intensity  of  interest  of  gambling ;  and  the  most  valued  articles  are 
often  staked  on  tha  luck  of  a  throw.  For  this  purpose,  the  prairie  tribes  commonly 
use  the  stone  of  the  wild  plum,  or  some  analogous  fruit,  upon  which  various  devices 
indicating  their  arithmetical  value,  are  burned  in,  or  engraved  and  colored,  so  as  at  a 
glance  to  reveal  the  character  of  the  pieces.  Among  the  Dacota  tribes,  this  is  known 
by  a  term  which  is  translated  "  the  game  of  the  plum-stones."  [KuN-TAit-soo.] 

In  order  to  show  the  scope  of  this  game,  five  sets  of  stones  are  represented,  in  Plate 
17,  luider  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F.     Each  set  consists  exactly  of  eight  pieces. 


\ 


'l 


Ella 


72 


MANNERS   AND   CUSTOMS. 


In  set  A,  numbers  1  and  2  represent  sparrow-hawks  with  forked  tails,  or  the  forked- 
tail  eagle — falco  furcatus.  This  is  the  so-called  war-eagle.  Numbers  3  and  4  are  the 
turtle ;  which  typifies,  generally,  the  earth.  If  1  and  2  fall  upwards,  the  game  is  won. 
If  but  one  of  these  figures  falls  upwards,  and,  at  the  same  time,  3  and  4  are  up,  the 
game  is  also  won.     The  other  numbers,  5,  6,  7,  and  8,  are  all  blanks. 

B  denotes  the  reversed  sides  of  A,  which  are  all  blanks. 

Set  C  shows  different  characters  with  a  single  chief  figure,  (5,)  which  represents  the 
falco  furcatus.  This  throw  indicates  half  a  game,  and  entitles  the  thrower  to  repeat 
it.  If  the  same  figure  (5)  turns  up,  the  game  is  won.  If  no  success  attends  it  by 
turning  up  the  chief  figure,  the  throw  passes  to  other  hands. 

D  is  the  reverse  of  set  C,  and  is  a  blank  throw. 

In  set  E,  No.  5  represents  a  muskrat.  The  three  dots  (7)  indicate  two-thirds  of  a 
throw,  and  the  thrower  can  throw  again ;  but  if  he  gets  blanks  the  second  time,  the 
dish  passes  on  to  the  next  thrower. 

Set  F  is  invested  with  different  powers.  No.  1  represents  a  buffalo,  and  2  and  3 
denote  chicken-hawks,  fluttering  horizontally  in  the  air.  The  chief  pieces  (5,  6,  7) 
have  the  same  powers  and  modifications  of  value  as  A. 

To  play  this  game,  a  little  orifice  is  made  in  the  ground  and  a  skin  put  in  it.  Often 
it  is,  also  played  on  a  robe. 

The  women  and  young  men  play  this  game.  The  bowl  is  lifted  with  one  hand  abou'u 
three  or  four  inches,  and  pushed  suddenly  down  to  its  place.  The  plum-stones  fly 
over  several  times.  The  stake  is  first  put  up  by  all  who  wish  to  play.  A  dozen  can 
play  at  once,  if  it  be  desirable.     Plate  18  exhibits  a  view  of  this  fascinating  game. 

60.  A  more  complicated  mode  of  reliance  on  the  luck  of  numbers  is  found  in  the 
Chippewa  game  of  the  Bowl,  called  Puggesaing.  It  is  played  with  thirteen  pieces ; 
nine  of  which  are  formed  of  bone,  and  four  of  brass,  all  of  circular  shape.  (Plate  18, 
compartment  G.)  The  right  side  of  the  eight  pieces  of  bone  arc  stained  red,  with 
edges  and  dots  burned  black  with  a  hot  iron ;  the  reverse  is  left  white.  The  brass  pieces 
have  the  right  side  convex  and  the  reverse  concave.  The  convex  surface  is  bright,  the 
concave  dark,  or  dull. 

The  first  piece,  (fig.  1,)  called  inbieea,  or  ogima,  represents  a  ruler.  Number  2 
typifies  an  amphibious  monster,  and  is  called  gikhy  kindbik,  or  the  great  serpent. 
Number  3  represents  the  war-club.  Number  4  is  a  fish  {kenozlia.)  Number  5  are 
small  discs  of  brass,  and  number  6  a  duck  (shceaJiecb.) 

The  game  is  won  by  the  red  pieces ;  the  arithmetical  value  of  each  of  which  is  fixed ; 
and  the  count,  aa  in  all  games  of  chance,  is  advanced  or  retarded  by  the  luck  of  the 
throw.  Any  number  of  players  may  play.  Nothing  is  required  but  a  wooden  bowl, 
which  is  curiously  carved  and  ornamented,  (the  owner  relying  somewhat  on  magic 
influence,)  and  having  a  plain,  smooth  surface. 


he  forkcd- 
i  4  are  the 
lie  is  won. 
ire  up,  the 


:;-.¥ 


resents  the 
r  to  repeat 
Bnds  it  by 


thirds  of  a 
d  time,  the 

id  2  and  3 

es  (5,  6,  7) 


'? 


1  it.    Often 

hand  abou'„ 
n-stonea  fly 
.  dozen  can 
g  game. 

)und  in  the 
een  pieces; 
(Plate  18, 
d  red,  with 
brass  pieces 
s  bright,  the 


'f^^ 


■'%. 


'--i* 


'-% 


Number  2 
eat  serpent, 
mber  6  are 


ich  is  fixed ; 
luck  of  the 
rooden  bowl, 
at  on  magic 


'%'^:^ 


|l 


I;    i! 


II '' 


^9m&<^ 

i 

m 

w 

,jjP|r|P 

JHftllnl 

Iv 

^HHii 

y  ' 

, 

Hft 

1  ' 

1 

i 

\ 

r    '* 


mUI 


i.lt.'  1,^ 


# 


• 


^  JO 


\ 


\^^ 


11 


■■^' 


,i- 


t — , 


J 


I'l'Wi    II    .4      1.-       :i,iii«l'    U\    '"..rt  .■    1'..,  iiii.. 


A  IVJ 


y  yiA    L  -J  y/  L 


'tiMi.i.inr.ii   !i, 


1  r'l         1H.\MI1;/     S      ''J      ,■    111    \i 


■I    5 


f    { 


w. 


I  '.l     ill 


i? 


,!;  .  ! 


m\ 


'i  !•■ 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


73 


Ist  lucky  throw.  When  all  the  pieces  turn  up  red,  and  number  1  stands  upright  on 
one  of  the  brass  disc's  bright  side,  the  count  is  158.  This  is  the  highest  possible 
throw. 

2d  lucky  throw.  When  the  bone  pieces  turn  up  red,  and  the  gitchy  kindbik, 
number  2,  stands  on  one  of  the  brass  disc's  bright  side,  the  count  is  138. 

3d  lucky  throw.  When  all  the  bone  pieces  turn  up  red  and  lie  smooth,  the  count 
is  58,  whether  the  brass  discs  lie  bright  or  dull  side  up. 

4th  lucky  throw.  When  number  1,  both  pieces,  and  number  2,  both  pieces,  and 
numbers  3,  4,  and  5,  turn  up  white,  the  count  is  also  58,  without  respect  to  the  brass 
pieces. 

5th  lucky  throw.  Where  all  the  bone  pieces  turn  up  white,  it  counts  38,  irrespective 
of  the  position  of  the  braas  pieces. 

Cth  lucky  throw.  When  the  ogimas  (1)  and  Gitchy  kinabik  (2)  turn  up  red,  and 
3,  4,  and  6,  white,  the  count  is  also  38,  irrespective  of  the  metallic  pieces. 

7th  lucky  throw.  When  one  of  the  pieces,  No.  1,  stands  up,  the  count  is  50,  without 
regard  to  the  position  of  the  pieces  on  tlie  board. 

8th  lucky  throw.  When  either  of  No.  2  stands  upright,  and  the  other  pieces  lay 
flat,  no  matter  which  side  up,  the  count  is  40. 

9  th  lucky  throw.  When  all  the  bone  pieces  turn  up  white  but  a  single  one,  and 
the  brass  discs  turn  up  on  the  reverse,  tlie  count  is  20. 

10th  lucky  throw.  When  all  the  bone  pieces  come  up  red  but  one,  and  the  brass 
pawns  are  bright  side  up,  the  count  is  15. 

11th  lucky  throw.  When  all  the  men  turn  up  white  but  one,  and  the  pieces 
numbered  5  are  bright,  the  count  is  10. 

At  this  stage  of  the  game,  the  throws  sink  below  the  decimal  point. 

12th  throw.  If  the  brass  pawns  turn  up  reversed,  and  No.  1  and  two  pieces  of  No. 
2  red,  the  count  is  8. 

13th  throw.  The  same  condition  of  the  pieces  exactly,  but  the  brass  discs  bright 
instead  of  dark,  the  count  sinks  to  6. 

14  th  throw.  When  all  the  bone  pieces  turn  up  red  but  one,  and  the  brass  come  up 
dark,  the  count  is  5. 

15th  throw.  When  one  of  the  pieces  No.  2  and  one  of  No.  1  are  turned  up  red, 
and  the  Iwass  discs  show  the  convex  side,  the  count  is  but  4. 

16th  throw.  When  all  the  pieces,  Gitchy  kinabiks,  sheesheebs,  &c.,  but  one  of  the 
Ogimaus,  turn  up  red,  and  the  brass  discs  dark,  the  count  sinks  to  2.  All  throws 
below  this  are  blanks. 

In  this  game,  hours  are  passed  by  the  players  with  the  utmost  fixity  and  intensity 
of  interest.  If  the  game  be  but  fixed  at  300,  (and  this  is  a  point  of  mutual  agree- 
ment,) it  will  be  perceived  that  the  strife  to  reach  it  may  not  only  be  verj-  prolonged, 
but  become  most  intense  and  exciting.  The  stakes  are  always  put  up,  and  the  winner 
Pt.  II.— 10 


i 


u 


i 


i-'i 


If  H 


I  m 


T4 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


carries  away  hia  prizes.  It  is  often  so  fascinating  that  a  player  will  stake  any  thing 
of  value ;  and  the  spirit  of  gambling  becomes  as  demoralizing  in  savage  as  it  is  in 
civilized  life. 


L.     THE    INDIAN    ON    HIS   HUNTING    GROUNDS. 

61.  The  social  state  of  the  Indians,  when  viewed  by  the  eye  of  unprejudiced  candor 
and  benevolence,  is  far  from  being  as  revolting  as  it  has  sometimes  been  represented. 
In  situations  where  they  have  good  means  of  hunting,  trapping,  and  fishing,  and  where 
the  pressure  of  the  expanding  settlements  and  frontier  views  of  antagonistical  race  do 
not  strongly  and  immediately  press  on  them,  their  simple  institutions  of  the  forests 
insure  them  means  of  social  enjoyment  on  which,  in  their  condition  of  hunters,  they 
set  a  high  value. 

When  the  season  of  hunting  returns,  and  they  have  reached  their  wintering  grounds 
and  placed  a  wide  margin  between  the  frontier  towns  and  themselves,  the  tense 
cautious  reserve  and  suspicion  of  harm  which  marked  the  man  while  in  the  settle- 
ments, trafficking  off  his  furs,  and  gliding  with  easy  steps  through  the,  to  him,  mazes 
of  strange  civilized  society,  is  relaxed.  He  softens  into  something  like  assurance  to 
find  himself  iigain  surrounded  exclusively  by  his  own  peojilo;  and  he  sinks  back  to 
the  natural  state  of  the  Indian  sociability,  and  it  is  not  often  that  the  most  prudent 
and  reflecting  elders  do  so  without  recounting  the  scaiths  and  losses  that  they  have 
encountered  on  the  frontiers.  The  conflicts  of  the  savage  and  civilized  state  are, 
indeed,  in  a  moral  sense,  terrible.  He  has  parted  with  the  avails  of  his  la«t  year's 
hunts,  and  received  his  exchanges  on  such  terms  as  he  had  not  the  means  of 
prescribing,  and  he  generally  feels  under  obligations  to  those  who  have  transacted  his 
commercial  matters,  and  who  are  his  most  sympathizing  white  friends ;  but  he  feels, 
under  the  best  state  of  things,  as  if  he  had  been  plundered.  If  his  family  and 
himself  have  completely  escaped  the  perils  of  debauchery  and  other  frontier  vices,  he 
is  happy :  it  is  more  than  he  can  generally  expect ;  and  his  best  resolve  for  the  future 
seems  to  be,  that  another  season  he  will  stay  a  shorter  time  about  the  towns,  and  try 
to  come  back  with  less  cause  of  reproach  to  himself. 

62.  The  circle  of  wild  foresters,  to  which  he  has  again  returned,  look  up  to  him  with 
the  utmost  respect  and  trust.  They  hang  upon  his  words  as  the  maxims  of  wisdom. 
He  counsels  and  he  feasts  them,  and  is  regarded  as  their  oracle  and  guide. 

In  this  periodical  reunion  of  aboriginal  society  the  most  perfect  sincerity  and 
cheerfulness  prevail,  and  their  intercourse  is  marked  with  the  broadest  principles  of 
charity  and  neighborly  feeling.     The  restrained  and  ever-watchful  suspicion  which 


my  thing 
,8  it  is  in 


S. 

ed  candor 
)resented. 
md  where 
al  race  do 
he  forests 
iters,  they 

ig  grounds 
the  tense 
the  settle- 
lim,  mazes 
surance  to 
is  back  to 
at  prudent 
they  have 

state  are, 
last  year's 

means  of 
isacted  his 
it  he  feels, 
iamily  and 
!r  vices,  he 

the  future 
ns,  and  try 


0  him  with 
of  wisdom. 


icerity  and 
rinciples  of 
cion  which 


-1 


1 


Mi: 


I 


if,' 


'M 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


75 


they  evince  at  the  post  on  the  lines,  or  in  other  situiitions  exposed  to  the  scrutiny  and 
cupidity  of  white  men,  is  thrown  aside,  and  gives  way  to  ease,  sociability,  and 
pleasantry.  They  feel  a  security  unknown  to  their  breast  in  any  other  situation.  The 
strife  seems  to  be,  who  shall  e.\cel  in  offices  of  friendship  or  charity,  or  in  spreading 
the  festive  board. 


G3.  If  one  is  more  fortunate  than  the  other  in  taking  fish  with  the  net  or  spear,  or 
killing  a  deer,  or  any  other  animal,  the  spoil  is  set  aside  for  a  feast,  to  which  all  the 
adults,  without  distinction,  are  invited.  When  the  time  arrives,  each  one,  according 
to  ancient  custom,  takes  his  dish  and  spoon,  and  proceeds  to  the  entertainer's  lodge. 
The  victuals  are  served  up  with  scrupulous  attention  that  each  receives  a  portion  of 
the  best  parts,  according  to  his  standing  and  rank  in  the  village. 

While  at  the  meal,  which  is  prolonged  by  cheerful  conversation,  anecdotes,  and  little 
narratives  of  personal  adventure,  the  females  are  generally  among  the  listeners ;  and 
no  female,  excej)t  the  aged,  ever  obtrudes  a  remark.  The  young  women  and  girls 
show  that  they  partake  in  the  festivity  by  smiles ;  and  are  scrupulous  to  evince  their 
attention  to  the  elder  part  of  the  company.  Conversation  is  chiefly  engrossed  by  the 
old  men,  chiefs,  and  middle-aged  men.  Young  men  who  are  desirous  to  acquire  a 
standing  seldom  offer  a  remark ;  and  when  they  do,  it  is  with  modesty. 

64.  The  topics  discussed  at  these  public  meals  relate,  generally,  to  the  chase,  to  the 
news  they  have  hoard,  to  personal  occurrences  about  the  camp  or  village,  or  to  deeds, 
real  or  fabulous,  of  "  auld  lang  sync."  But  these  matters  are  discussed  in  a  lively, 
and  not  in  grave  style.  Business — if  we  may  be  allowed  that  term  for  what  concerns 
their  trade  and  intercoui-se  with  white  men — is  never  introduced,  except  in  formal 
councils,  specially  convened  and  opened  by  smoking  the  pipe.  It  seems  to  be  the  drift 
and  object  of  conversation  in  these  sotej-  festivities  (for  it  must  be  recollected  that  we 
are  speaking  of  the  Indians  on  their  wintering-grounds,  and  beyond  the  reach — 
certainly  beyond  the  free  or  ordinary  use  of  whiskey)  to  extract  from  their  hunts  and 
adventures  whatever  will  admit  of  a  pleasing  turn  or  joke,  or  excite  a  laugh.  Eidicu- 
lous  misadventures  or  comical  situations  arc  sure  to  be  applauded  in  the  recital. 
Whatever  is  anti-social  or  untoward  is  passed  over ;  or,  if  referred  to  by  one  of  the 
company,  is  parried  off  by  some  allusion  to  the  scenes  before  them.  Religion,  (we 
use  the  term  for  what  concerns  the  Great  Spirit  and  the  medawin,)  like  business,  is 
reserved  for  its  proper  occasion.  It  does  not,  as  with  us,  form  a  free  topic  of  remark, 
at  least,  among  those  who  are  connected  with  their  medicine  societies,  or  entertain  a 
proper  veneration  for  what  the  Indians  call  "  the  master  of  life." 

Thus  they  cheat  away  the  hours  in  pleasantry, — in  free,  but  not  tumultuous  mirth; 
and  are  as  ardently  bent  on  the  enjoyment  of  the  present  moment,  as  if  the  Royal 
Preacher  of  old  were  present,  to  urge  a  proper  use  of  God's  gifts,  and  to  exclaim,  "  Eat, 
drink,  and  )»  merry." 


■m 


111 


m 


i.ii 


lUr^MflMu    iii HI 


W'l 


J\\ 


H 


II 

H  . 

will 

I 

rlHBM 

II 

f; 

■ 

I  : 


F 


76 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


65.  When  the  feast  is  over,  the  women  retire  to  their  lodges  and  leave  tlie  men  to 
smoke.  On  reaching  home,  they  commence  a  conversation  on  what  they  have  heard 
the  men  advance,  and  thus  amuse  tliemselves  till  their  husbands  return.  The  end  of 
all  is  generally  some  good  advice  to  the  children. 

In  the  feasts  we  have  described,  the  company  is  as  general,  with  regard  to  the  rank, 
age,  or  standing  of  the  guests,  as  the  most  unlimited  equality  of  rights  and  the  broadest 
principles  of  good  feeling  can  make  it. 

66.  There  is  a  feast  instituted  at  certain  times  during  the  season,  to  which  young 
persons  only  are  invited,  except  the  entertainer's  wife,  and  generally  two  other  aged 
persons,  who  preside  at  the  feast  and  sidminister  its  rites.  The  object  of  this  juvenile 
feast  seems  to  be  instruction,  to  which  the  young  and  thoughtless  are  induced  to  listen 
for  the  anticipated  pleasure  of  the  feast.  When  the  meats  are  ready,  the  entertainer, 
if  he  be  fluent  in  speech,  and  if  not,  some  person  whom  he  has  invited  for  that 
purpose,  gets  up  and  addresses  the  youth  of  both  sexes  on  the  subject  of  their  course 
through  life.  He  admonishes  them  to  be  attentive  and  respectful  to  the  aged,  and 
adhere  to  their  counsel;  to  oliey  their  parents;  never  to  scoff  at  the  decrepid  or 
deformed ;  to  be  modest  in  their  conduct ;  to  l)e  charitable  and  hospitable ;  and  to  fear 
and  love  the  Great  Spirit,  Avho  is  the  giver  of  life  and  of  every  good  gift.  The  precepts 
are  dwelt  upon  at  great  length,  and  generally  enforced  by  exanplos  of  a  good  man  and 
woman  and  a  bad  man  and  woman,  and  after  depicting  the  latter,  it  is  customary,  by 
way  of  admonition,  to  say,  "  You  will  be  like  one  of  these."  At  the  end  of  every 
sentence,  the  listeners  make  a  general  response  of  Itaa.  When  the  advice  is  finished, 
an  address  to  the  Great  Spirit  is  made,  in  which  lie  is  thanked  for  the  food  before 
them,  and  for  the  continuance  of  life.  The  siwakcr  then  says,  turning  to  the  guests, 
"  Thus  the  Great  Spirit  supplies  us  with  food ;  let  your  course  through  life  be  always 
right,  and  you  Avill  ever  be  thus  bountifully  supplied." 

The  feast  then  commences,  and  the  elders  relax  their  manners  a  little  and  mix  with 
the  rest;  but  are  still  careful  to  preserve  order  and  a  decent  respectful  behiuiox". 

67.  Let  it  not  be  supposed,  however,  that  the  Indian's  life,  while  on  his  wintering 
ground,  is  a  round  of  feasting ;  quite  the  contrary.  Their  feasts  are  often  followed  by 
long  and  painful  fasts ;  and  the  severity  of  the  season^,  and  scarcity  of  game  and  fish, 
often  reduce  the  Indian  and  his  family  to  starvation  and  even  death. 

When  the  failure  of  game,  or  any  causes,  induce  the  hunter  to  remove  to  a  new 
circle  of  country,  the  labor  of  the  removal  falls  upon  the  female  part  of  the  family. 
The  lodge  utensils  and  fixtures  of  every  kind  are  borne  upon  the  women's  backs, 
sustained  by  a  leather  strap,  called  A-pe-kun,  around  the  forehead.  On  reaching  the 
intended  place  of  encampment,  the  snoAV  is  cleared  away,  the  lodge  set  up,  cedar 
boughs  brought  and  spread  for  a  floor,  the  moveables  stowed  away,  wood  collected,  and 


•Svi-: 


'i^ 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


77 


a  fire  built ;  and  then,  and  not  until  then,  can  the  females  sit  down  and  warm  their 
teet  and  dry  their  moccasins.  If  there  be  any  provisions,  a  supper  is  cooi<ed ;  if  there 
be  none,  all  studiously  strive  to  conceal  the  exhibition  of  the  least  concern  on  this 
account,  and  seek  to  divert  their  thoughts  by  conversation  quite  foreign  to  the  subject. 

08.  The  little  children  are  the  only  part  of  the  family  who  complain  and  who  are 
privileged  to  complain ;  but  even  they  are  taught  at  an  early  age  to  suffer  and  be  silent. 
Generally,  something  is  reserved  by  the  mother,  when  food  becomes  scarce,  to  satisfy 
their  clamors,  and  they  arc  satisfied  with  little.  On  such  occasions,  if  the  family  have 
gone  supperless  to  rest,  the  father  and  elder  sons  rise  early  in  search  of  game.  If  one 
has  the  luck  to  kill  even  a  partridge  or  squirrel,  it  is  immediately  carried  to  the  lodge, 
cooked,  and  divided  into  as  many  parts  as  there  are  members  of  the  family.  In  such 
emergencies,  the  elder  ones  often  make  a  merit  of  relinquishing  their  portion  to  the 
women  and  children. 

69.  If  nothing  rewards  the  search,  the  whole  day  is  spent  by  the  father  upon  his 
snow-shoes,  with  his  gun  in  his  hands,  and  he  returns  at  night  fatigued  to  his  couch 
of  cedar  branches  or  rush  mats,  but  he  does  not  complain  either  of  his  fatigue  or  want 
of  success.  On  the  following  morning  the  same  routine  is  observed,  and  days  and 
weeks  are  often  thus  consumed  without  bringing  food  sufficient  to  keep  the  body 
in  a  vigorous  or  healthy  state.  Instances  have  been  perfectly  well  authenticated 
where  this  state  of  wretchedness  has  liecn  endured  by  the  head  of  a  family  until  he 
has  become  so  weak  as  to  fall  in  his  hunting  path,  and  freeze  to  death. 

When  all  other  means  of  sustaining  life  are  gone,  the  skins  the  hunter  has  collected 
to  pay  his  credits,  or  purchase  new  supplies  of  clothing  and  ammunition,  are  eaten. 
They  are  prepared  by  removing  the  pelt  and  roasting  the  skin  until  it  acquires  a  certain 
degree  of  crispness. 

70.  Under  all  his  suffering,  the  pipe  of  the  hunter  is  his  chief  solace,  and  it  is  a 
solace  very  often  repeated.  Smoking  parties  are  sometimes  formed,  when  there  exists 
a  scarcity  of  food,  —  the  Avant  of  provisions  not  tending,  as  might  be  supposed,  to 
destroy  social  feeling  and  render  the  temper  sour.  On  these  occasions,  the  person 
soliciting  company  sends  a  message  to  this  effect :  "  My  friend,  come  and  smoke  with 
me ;  I  have  no  food,  but  I  have  tobacco,  and  we  can  pass  the  evening  very  well  with 
this." 

71.  All  acknowledge  their  lives  to  be  in  the  hands  of  the  Great  Spirit,  feel  a 
conviction  that  nil  things  come  from  Him,  that  He  loves  them,  and  that,  although  He 
allows  them  to  suffer,  ho  will  again  supply  them.  This  tends  to  quiet  their  apprehen- 
sions.    Fatalists  as  to  good  and  ill,  they  submit  patiently  and  silently  to  what  they 


e 


1i 


!i, 


* 


iil* 


II! 


If 


Wi 


(' 


78 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


believe  their  destiny.  When  hiniger  and  misery  are  past,  they  are  soon  forgotten ;  and 
their  minds  are  too  eagerly  intent  on  the  enjoyment  of  the  present  good,  to  feel  any 
depression  of  spirits  from  the  recollection  of  misery  past,  or  the  anticipation  of  misery 
to  come.  No  people  are  more  easy  or  less  clamorous  under  suffering  of  the  deejxjst 
dye,  and  none  are  more  happy,  or  more  prone  to  evince  their  happiness,  when 
prosjjerous  in  their  affairs. 


M.     MISCELLANEOUS   TRAITS. 

72.  Ball-playing. — This  game  is  played  by  the  north  western  Indians  in  the  wnter 
season,  after  the  winter  hunts  are  over,  and  during  summer,  when,  the  game  being 
unfit  to  kill,  they  amuse  themselves  with  athletic  sports,  games  of  chance,  dances, 
and  war.  The  game  is  played  by  two  jiarties,  not  necessarily  equally  divided  by 
numl)ers,  but  usually  one  village  against  another,  or  one  large  village  may  challenge 
two  or  tliree  smaller  ones  to  the  combat.  When  a  challenge  is  accepted,  a  day  is 
appointed  to  pl.ay  the  game ;  ball-bats  are  made,  and  each  party  assembles  its  whole 
force  of  old  men,  young  men,  and  Iwys.  The  women  never  play  in  the  same  {i,ame 
with  the  men.  Heavy  bets  are  made  by  individuals  of  the  opposite  sides.  Horses, 
guns,  bliukets,  buffalo-robes,  kettles,  and  trinkets,  are  freely  staked  on  the  result  of 
the  game.  When  the  parties  are  assembled  on  the  ground,  two  stakes  are  placed 
about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  apart,  and  the  game  commences  midway  between  them ;  the 
object  of  each  party  being  to  get  the  ball  beyond  the  limits  of  its  opponents.  The 
game  commences  by  one  of  the  old  men  throwing  the  ball  in  the  air,  when  all  rush 
forward  to  catch  it  in  their  ball-bats  before  or  after  it  falls  to  the  ground.  The  one 
who  catches  it  throws  it  in  the  direction  of  the  goal  of  the  opiwsing  party,  when,  if  it 
be  caught  by  one  of  tlie  same  side,  it  is  continued  in  that  direction,  and  so  on  until  it 
is  thrown  l)eyond  the  limits ;  but  if  caught  by  an  opponent,  it  is  thrown  back  in  the 
opiJosite  direction.  In  this  way,  the  ball  is  often  kept  all  day  lictween  the  two 
boundaries,  neither  party  being  able  to  get  it  beyond  the  limit  of  the  other.  When 
one  has  caught  the  ball,  he  has  the  right,  Ijefore  throwing  it,  to  run  towards  the  limits 
until  he  is  overtaken  by  the  other  party,  when,  being  compelled  to  throw  it,  he 
endeavors  to  send  it  in  the  direction  of  some  of  his  own  party,  to  be  caught  by  some 
one  of  them,  who  continues  sending  it  in  the  same  direction. 

Pl.nte  19  represents  a  ball  play  on  the  ice.  The  young  man  has  the  ball  in  his  ball- 
bat,  and  is  running  with  it  toward  the  limits  of  the  other  side,  pursued  by  all  the 
players. 

Plate  20  represents  a  ball  play  on  the  prairies  in  summer.  The  ball  is  on  the  ground 
and  all  are  rushing  forward  to  catch  it  with  their  ball-bats,  not  being  allowed  to  touch 
it  with  their  hands. 


MANNERS    AND    CUSTOMS. 


79 


The  ball  is  carved  from  a  knot,  or  made  of  baked  clay  covered  v,ith  raw  hide  of  the 
deer.  The  ball-bat,  Fig.  10,  Plate  78,  is  from  three  to  four  feet  long ;  one  end  bent 
up  in  a  circular  form  of  about  four  inches  in  diameter,  in  which  is  a  net-work  made  of 
raw  hide  or  sinews  of  the  deer  or  buffalo. 

73.  Moving  Camp. — The  hunter  life  is  one  of  almost  perpetual  travel  from  spot  to 
spot.  This  results  from  the  plan  of  periodical  change  from  the  summer  to  winter  encamj)- 
ments ;  sometimes  from  superstitious  notions,  an  unhealthy  location,  the  migration  of 
animals,  or  mere  whim.  To  Indian  minds,  a  change  of  location  is  pleasant ;  it  infuses 
new  life  into  the  whole  family  group,  for  there  is  always  an  expectation  that  a  new 
location  Avill  furnish  game  and  other  means  of  subsistence  in  greater  abundance,  or 
some  advantage  of  living  which  is  often  indefinite :  for  tlie  far  off  and  the  unknown  in 
space  is  the  perpetual  theme  of  an  Indian's  hope,  and  he  is  ever  fond  of  the  changing 
adventures  of  travel.  The  following  sketch  (Plate  21)  exhibits  a  scene  of  tliis  sort  in 
the  region  of  the  up^ier  Mississippi,  where  the  horse  has  been,  to  some  extent,  intro- 
duced. It  shows  the  labor  to  devolve,  as  in  all  changes  of  camp,  essentially  on  the 
women  and  horses. 

74.  DoG-rMNCE  OF  THE  Dacota  Indians. — This  dance  is  peculiar  to  the  Dacota  tribe, 
and  takes  its  name  from  the  fact  that  the  raw  liver  of  the  dog  is  eaten  by  the  per- 
formers. It  is  not  often  performed,  and  only  on  some  extraordinary  occasion.  The 
performers  are  usually  the  bravest  warriors  of  the  tribe,  and  those  having  stomachs 
strong  enough  to  digest  raw  food. 

When  a  dog-dance  is  to  be  given,  the  warriora  who  are  to  take  part  in  it,  and  all 
others  who  desire  to  witness  it,  assemble  at  some  stated  time  and  place.  After  talking 
and  smoking  for  awhile,  the  dance  commences.  A  dog,  with  his  legs  pinioned,  is 
thrown  into  the  group  of  dancers  by  any  one  of  the  spectators.  This  is  despatched  by 
one  of  the  medicine-men,  or  jugglers,  with  a  war-club  or  tomahawk.  The  side  of  the 
animal  is  then  cut  open  and  the  liver  taken  out.  This  is  then  cut  into  strips  and  liung 
on  a  pole  about  four  or  five  feet  in  length.  The  performers  then  commence  dancing 
around  it;  smacking  their  lips  and  making  all  sorts  of  grimaces;  showing  a  great 
desire  to  get  a  taste  of  the  delicious  morsel.  After  performing  these  antics  for  awhile, 
some  one  of  t'lem  will  make  a  grab  at  the  liver,  biting  oft'  a  piece,  and  then  hopping 
off,  chewing  and  swallowing  it  as  he  goes.  His  example  is  followed  by  each  and  all 
the  other  warriors,  until  every  morsel  of  the  liver  is  eaten.  Should  any  particles  of 
it  fall  to  the  ground,  it  is  collected,  by  a  medicine-man  in  the  palm  of  his  hand,  who 
carries  it  round  to  the  dancers  to  be  eaten  and  his  hands  well  licked. 

After  disposing  of  the  first  dog,  they  all  sit  down  in  a  circle,  and  chat  and  smoke 
awhile  until  another  dog  is  thrown  in,  when  the  same  ceremonies  are  repeated,  and 
continued  so  long  as  any  one  is  disposed  to  present  them  with  a  dog.     They  are 


:Ji 


V\ 


80 


MANNERS  AND  CUSTOMS. 


required  to  eat  the  liver,  raw  and  warm,  of  every  dog  that  is  presented  to  them ; 
and  while  they  are  eating  it,  none  but  the  medicinc-mcn  must  toueh  it  with  their 
hands.     Women  do  not  join  in  this  dance. 

The  object  of  this  ceremony  is,  they  say,  that  those  who  eat  the  liver  of  the  dog 
while  it  is  raw  and  warm,  mil  become  possessed  of  the  sagacity  and  bravery  of 
the  dog. 

The  Ojibwas,  the  inhc  bordering  on  the  Docotas,  and  their  hereditary  enemies,  look 
with  disgust  on  this  ceremony.     (Plate  22.) 

Plate  23  is  a  representation  of  the  wigwams  of  the  Ojibwas  and  Winnebagoes. 
These  tribes  make  their  huts  of  birch-bark,  or  mats  made  of  grass.  Saplings  are  lirst 
stuck  in  the  ground,  somewhat  of  a  circular  form  —  the  tops  bent  over  to  the  centre 
and  tied ;  the  bark  or  mats  are  then  thrown  over  these,  leaving  a  small  hole  for  the 
smoke  to  escape.     The  fire  is  made  on  the  ground,  in  the  centre  of  the  hut. 


iatttim 


■.:) 


-■  !>. 


-mmsR^ss:  r  m  mmtU'^ 


ii^ii£X£Si;^j^^:' 


.  -^wJM«BWKV.'ii'i*.'W  - 


^ltiGL\21Lr.^;StlJ£^?''«E9R'-'.- 


HDH-- 


lt«.'T,€wi^<.-...v:i 


I 


■A  ; 


il 


I'- 


'^.l^ 


?-^lf 


f      ! 


*M  iij.i  iii.inmn." 


III.   ANTIQUITIES.   B. 


Pt.  II.  — 11 


(81) 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


^  J,\ 


Y 


Kf 


//       vV 


1.0 


1.1 


m  I2ii  g2.2 
m    12.0 


L2I II  u  116 


I 


Sciences 
Corporalion 


&^ 


\ 


;\ 


23  WBT  MAIN  STRHT 

WeUTn,N.Y.  MSM 

(7U)l7a-4S01 


;\ 


\ 


«^ 


% 


pic 


RS 


ANTIQUITIES. 


SYNOPSIS. 


1.  Floridian  Tcocalli,  or  Elevated  Platform-residences  of  the  Native  Rulers  and  Priests. 

2.  Antiquities  of  Lake  Erie. 

A.  Ancient  Erics. 

B.  Antiquities  of  Cunningham's  Island. 

C.  Sculptured  Rock,  or  Erie  Inscription. 

3.  Archajological  Articles  from  South  Carolina.     (Plate.) 

4.  Archaeological  Relics  from  Western  New  York.     (Plate.) 

6.  Anti(iue  Aboriginal  Embankments  and  Excavations  at  Lake  Vieux  Desert,  on  the  Boundary 
of  AVisconsin  and  Northern  Michigan.     (Plate.) 


t'l 


1.  FLORIDIAN    TEOCALLI,    OR    PLATFORM-RESIDENCES 
OF    THE    NATIVE    RULERS    AND    PRIESTS. 

The  record  from  which  American  archaeology  is  to  lie  judged,  is  continually  being 
enlarged,  and  it  would  be  premature  to  indulge  in  generalization,  while  the  field  of 
observation  is  so  rapidly  expanding,  and  the  facts  so  steadily  accumulating. 

Garcillttsso  de  la  Vega  informs  us,  that  the  dwelling-houses  of  the  caciques  or  chiefs 
of  Florida,  in  1540,  during  De  Soto's  march  through  the  pa>sent  area  of  Florida, 
Georgia,  Alabama  and  Mississippi,  were  generally  erected  on  large  artificial  mounds, 
or  a  8i)ecie8  of  teocalli.  These  artificial  platforms  were  sometimes  eighteen  hundred  feet 
in  circumference  at  the  base,  and  from  twenty  to  fifty  feet  high.  They  were  capable 
of  furnishing  space  for  the  houses  of  the  chief  and  his  family  and  their  attendants. 
The  sides  were  steep,  and  ascended  by  steps  cut  in  the  earth,  and  cosed  with  wood. 
This  structure  for  the  micco  or  chief  is  stated  to  have  constituted  the  centre  of  every 
newly  laid  out  village  or  town.     Around  it  was  drawn  a  large  square,  where  the  prin- 

(8») 


M 


ANTIQUITIES. 


cipal  and  subordinate  persons  and  commonality  hod  their  residences.  It  was  the  first 
object  erected  on  the  selection  of  a  town-site  —  the  earth  was  brought  to  the  spot. 
The  chief  and  his  priest,  who  were  often  one  in  their  functions,  were  thus  not  only 
placed  in  a  position  of  greater  security,  but  one  from  which  they  could  overlook  the 
whole  town.' 

It  is  perceived  from  Mr.  Pickett's  History  of  Alabama,'  that  remains  of  such  struc- 
tures are  found  in  many  places  in  the  extensive  area  of  the  United  States  denoted  by 
de  la  Vega.  They  are  clearly  distinguished  from  the  mass  of  remains  called,  indis- 
criminately, tumuli  and  mounds,  by  being  flat  at  top,  sometimes  square,  and  assuming 
the  character  of  precipitous  raised  plains  or  platforms,  while  the  tumuli  proper  are 
conical,  often  acutely  so,  and  carried  up  sometimes  to  the  height  of  ninety  feet.'  When 
they  are  not  terminated  in  a  cone,  the  horizontal  area  is  small,  and  appears  by  its 
reduced  size  to  have  been  rather  suited  to  the  temple-wigwam  than  the  micco's 
residence. 

These  remarks  appear  to  be  dcser\'ing  of  attention.  At  an  age  of  our  Indian  popu- 
lation, when  every  few  hundred  men  constituted  a  separate  nation,  who  lived  in  con- 
stant hostility,  such  platforms  of  elevated  earth  afforded  vantage  ground,  not  only  for 
residence,  but  for  a  battle;  and  it  wa-i  quite  natural  that  afterwards,  when  they  com- 
bined into  confederacies,  as  the  large  Muscogee  stock  is  known  to  have  done,  the 
use  of  these  select  places  for  the  rulers  should  have  been  forgotten  in  the  lapse  of 
centuries,  or  concealed  from  the  curiosity  of  inquirers. 

The  observation  of  these  ancient  plateaux  throws  light  on  this  class  of  our  antiqui- 
ties. It  is  not  only  the  earliest  light  we  have  on  the  subject  north  of  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico,  but  it  reveals  one  of  the  purposes  of  these  antique  tumuli  which  are  scattered 
so  profusely  over  portions  of  tlie  ancient  area  of  the  western  and  southern  parts  of 
the  United  States. 

The  Muscogees,  under  several  cognate  names,  trace  their  origin  to  the  Mexican 
empire ;  *  and  these  plateaux  appear  to  have  had  their  prototype  in  the  more  imposing 
Mexican  teocalli ;  and  thus  we  may  perceive  that  the  United  States,  and  indeed  all 
North  America,  was  overspread  in  its  native  population  by  religious  rites  and  notions, 
which  became,  indeed,  fainter  and  fainter,  as  they  spread  northward,  and  escaped  from 
a  species  of  sacerdotal  tyranny,  but  were  yet  of  the  same  general  character. 

It  is  something  in  all  archaeological  investigation,  to  reach  a  period  where  wonder 
and  speculation  end,  and  reality  begins.  It  is  perceived  that  in  the  extension  of  these 
artificial  heaps  of  honored  earth,  from  the  Gulf  northward,  they  became  teocalli  or 
platform  pyramids  of  less  area  and  greater  acuteness ;  but  they  were  in  all  instances 
of  this  kind,  truncated,  or  had  a  level  area  at  their  tops.  We  allude  here  exclusively 
to  the  "  tumuli  proper,"  and  not  to  the  "  redoubt  mounds"  or  "  the  barrows,"  or  to  small 


■  De  Ii  Vega. 


•  P.  104,  Vol.  I. 


'  Ibid. 


«  Pickett's  Ala.,  Vol.  I.,  p.  78. 


H  ~ 


t«^ 


!    p. 


^r 


a: 

;-. 

w 

■\, 

H 

^     — 

^ 

.s  .•  _T 

3r*    - 

^  i  f:i 

i     •- 

=5  •  -> 

Ji^ 

-s  >  g 

■   ■       i' 

^-^^ 

,^  r 

^  ,  -^ 

<i  \  a 

t' 

M     <Z 

^ 

■V 

?: 

=» 

;-■ 

u 

ANTIQUITIES. 


85 


"  altars  of  sacrifice."  Yet  this  summit  plateau  was  fully  developed  in  the  chief  mounds 
of  the  Mississippi  Valley  and  its  tributaries,  as  at  Cahokia  in  Illinois,  which  has  a  base 
of  six  hundred  and  sixty-six  feet;  and  at  Grave  Creek  flats;  Miamisburg,  and  other 
noted  pointa  of  central  antique  native  power  in  the  West,  at  all  of  which  places  the 
priest  had  room  amply  sufficient  for  his  residence  and  official  functions  on  the  summit. 


2.    ANTIQUITIES   OP    LAKE    ERIE. 
A.    Ancient  Eries. 

The  occupation  of  the  shores  and  islands  of  this  lake  by  the  ancient  and  extinct 
tribe  of  the  Eries,  who  were  once  the  acknowledged  pacificators  of  the  neighboring 
Indians,  and  who  preceded  the  Iroquois  in  warlike  and  civic  power  within  that  basin, 
^ves  a  melancholy  interest  to  whatever,  in  the  existing  archoiological  remains  of  the 
country,  serves  to  restore  the  memory  of  their  power. 

The  recent  discovery  of  ancient  earthworks,  and  two  inscriptions  in  the  pictographic 
character,  on  Cunningham's  Island,  in  the  archipelago  of  islands  in  the  western  port 
of  this  lake,  gives  birth  to  the  idea  that  these  islands  were  one  of  the  strongholds  of 
that  tribe  when  attacked  by  the  Iroquois.  They  appear  to  have  been  in  all  the 
plenitude  of  their  power  and  barbaric  boast  of  strength  and  influence,  at  the  period 
of  the  first  discoveries  of  the  French,  in  the  beginning  of  the  seventeenth  century. 
The  Wyandots,  who  afterwards  were  kno>vn  to  have  exercised  a  controlling  influence 
on  the  contiguous  waters  of  Sandusky  Bay  and  the  Straits  of  Detroit,  had  not  yet 
been  disturbed  from  their  ancient  seats  in  the  Valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence.  Le  Jeune, 
who  published  the  first  account  of  the  Iroquois,  in  Paris,  in  1G58,  mentions  the  angry 
negotiations  carried  on  at  Hochelago,  the  site  of  Montreal,  by  which  the  Iroquois 
attempted  to  control  that  tribe ;  and  during  which  they  commanded  them,  on  pain  of 
their  highest  vengeance,  to  break  their  league  with  the  French :  and  when  this  threat 
was  put  into  execution  in  a  few  years,  and  the  Wyandots  were  defeated  in  the  St. 
Lawrence  Valley,  they  fled  west  through  the  country  of  the  friendly  Algonquins,  into 
the  basin  of  Lake  Huron,  where  they  first  located  and  lived ;  and  not  till  a  later 
period  to  the  basin  of  Lake  Erie,  where  the  canoes  of  the  vengeful  Iroquois  were 
already  prowling  in  their  adventurous  thirst  for  military  renown. 

The  Eries  present  one  claim  to  remembrance  which  cannot  be  urged  by  any  other 
American  tribe,  namely,  as  the  ancient  kindlera  of  the  council-fire  of  peace  for  all  the 
tribes  prior  to  the  rise  and  destruction  of  this  institution,  and  before  the  origin  of  the 
Iroquois  confederacy. 

There  can  be  no  question,  from  the  early  accounts  of  the  French  missionaries,  that 
they  were  at  the  head  of  that  singular  confederation  of  tribes  called  the  Neutral 


86 


ANTIQUITIES. 


I 


Niitiun,  which  cxtt'iidt'tl  from  the  extreme  went  to  the  extreme  eoxtem  »hore8  of  this 
hike,  including  the  Niagara  V^iUey,  and  of  whom  the  Kaiikwnx,  of  Seneca  tnidition, 
were  manifeutly  only  one  of  the  i)owen<.  We  muHt  modify  Indian  tradition  by  Indian 
tradition. 

The  Jiistory  of  this  people,  —  their  rine,  their  spread,  and  final  foil,  is  involved  in  a 
degree  of  obscurity  which  is  the  more  stimulating  to  curiosity  fnmi  the  few  gleams  of 
light  which  tradition  gives.  There  is  no  doubt  that  an  instituti(m  which  must  always 
have  been  subject  to  a  very  delicate  exercise  of,  and  often  a  fluctuating  jiower,  woa 
fiiudly  overthrown  for  some  indiscreet  act.  The  power  to  light  this  pacific  fire  is 
represented  as  having  been  held  by  female  hands,  before  its  final  extinction  in  the 
area  of  western  New  York.'  It  is  equally  clear  that,  after  it  began  to  flicker,  it  was 
finally  put  out  in  blood  by  the  increasing  Iroquois,  who  appear  to  have  conquered  some 
of  the  bands  in  battle,  and  driven  others,  or  the  remnants  of  others,  away. 

The  present  state  of  our  traditions  on  this  sultject  is  interesting,  and  adds  new 
motives  to  research.  It  is  afTirmed  by  traditions  recently  received  from  the  Catawbas, 
that  this  trilx;  originated  in  the  extreme  north,  in  the  an>a  of  the  lakes,  whence  they 
wci-e  violently  expelled.  This  supplies  a  hint  for  research,  which,  it  must  be  confessed, 
is  thus  far  without  fruits.  The  Catawba  language  has  no  resemldances  to  the 
vocabulary  of  either  dialect  of  the  Iro«|uois,  or  to  the  Algonquin ;  while  it  differs  tut 
much  from  those  of  all  the  Appalachian  tribes,  and  it  must  lx>  reganled  in  the  present 
state  of  our  knowledge,  as  being  jK'culiar. 

While,  therefoiv,  the  search  for  the  history  of  this  triln?  in  the  lake  basins  api)ears 
to  be  blocked  up,  the  fact  of  the  expulsion  or  extirpation  of  the  Eries,  by  the  Innpiois, 
reninins  well  attested ;  and  the  prolonged  war  kept  up  against  the  Catawbas  and  their 
confederates  the  Chcrokecs,  by  that  confederacy,  favors  the  i<lea  of  an  ancient,  as  it  is 
ct)nfessed  to  have  been,  a  very  extraordinary  and  bUxMly  feud.  At  least  the  announce- 
ment of  the  fact  of  the  Catawba  tradition,  throws  a  renewed  interest  around  the 
history  of  that  struggle  of  the  Eries  with  the  predominating  Iroquois  power,  and  it 
gives  a  new  impulse  to  inquiry  to  find  archosological  traces  like  those  disclosed  on 
Cunningham's  Island,  which  appear  to  attest  the  former  Erican  power. 


B.    Antiquities  of  Cunningham's  Island. 


These  remains  have  been  accurately  surveyed,  and  are  illustrated  in  the  several 
maps  and  sketches  from  the  pencil  of  Captain  Eastman,  U.  S.  A.,  herewith  furnished. 

In  Plate  34,  the  island  is  topographically  depicted,  with  the  Irwalities  of  several 
antiquarian  objects.   It  consists  of  a  basis  of  horizontal  limestone  of  the  species  common 

'  Cnsic. 


H 


\i 


h 


s 

i 

( 


n 


II, .mi'    I'v    ■■..1,1    ~  /;„,/„,.„,     /■    ^     (,, 


Airnni)n\L"j   \^ C  Ui^JiNJj^)'J,>JAjVJ"  j     \;.LA'Ai.    £/lJ£. 


I  \ 


ill  .1..^  ti   liv     I  ,<nl 


mil  I  i;ii  h    jiv    i,ii'i'i\>'ci '  1     (.i;\yi;i'  h  i  n  I'liii  Aii' 


ANTIQUITIES. 


87 


to  that  lake,  rising  about  fifteen  feet  above  the  water-level.  The  surface  where  it  is 
exposed  discloses  the  polish  created  by  former  diluvial  or  glacial  action — a  trait  which 
is  so  remarkable  on  the  rocks  of  the  adjoining  shores  at  Sandusky.  This  is  covered 
with  a  fertile  limestone  soil,  and  at  the  earliest  periods  all  except  the  old  fields  bore  a 
heavy  growth  of  hard  wood  timber.  Much  of  it  is  still  covered  by  this  ancient  forest, 
in  which  it  is  probable  future  discoveries  of  an  archaeological  character  will  continue  to 
be  made.  The  inland  is  now  readily, accessible  by  a  steamboat  wharf,  which  has  been 
erected  on  its  southern  shore  by  Mr.  Kelly,  the  present  proprietor. 

Plate  35,  denotes  a  crescentrshaped  and  irregular  earth-work,  on  the  south  side  of 
the  island,  which  has  the  general  appearance  of  an  embankment,  or  circumvallation 
intended  to  enclose  and  defend  a  village.  The  gates,  or  sally-ix>rts,  which  were 
probably  constructed  of  wood,  occupy  the  east  side  and  the  extreme  north-western 
angle.  The  embankment  is  twelve  hundred  and  forty-six  feet  around  the  crescent- 
shaped  part,  and  about  four  hundred  feet  on  the  rock-brink  of  the  island. 

Plate  36,  represents  a  second  enclosure,  marked  by  a  circumvallation,  situated  at  a 
short  distance  west  of  the  former,  fronting  like  it,  on  the  rocky  and  precipitous  margin 
of  the  lake.  This  front  line  is  G14  feet.  The  embankment,  which  is  wholly  without 
gate  or  sally-port,  is  1243  feet  around. 

Within  these  enclosures  have  been  found  stone  axes,  Figs.  1,  2,  and  3,  Plate  37,  and 
Figs.  2  and  .S,  Plate  38 ;  pipes.  Figs.  5  and  6,  Plate  38 ;  perforators,  Fig.  1,  Plate  38 ; 
bone  fish-hooks.  Fig.  4,  Plate  38 ;  fragments  of  iwttery,  Figs.  7  and  8,  Plate  38 ;  arrow- 
heads, vide  group.  Fig.  1,  Plate  39 ;  netrsinkers.  Fig.  2,  Plate  39 ;  and  fragments  of 
human  bones.  The  arrow-heads  were  found  in  a  fissure  of  the  rock  in  large  quantity, 
and  were  apparently  new,  and  had  been  concealed  in  this  kind  of  rude  armory.  With 
them  was  found  the  largest  species  of  axe,  figured,  which  has  also  apparently  been 
unused.  These  vestiges  of  art  correspond  entirely  with  the  general  state  of  knowledge 
and  wants  of  the  surrounding  aborigines. 

Five  small  mounds  on  the  southern  and  western  part  of  the  island,  (Plate  34,)  are 
of  the  kind  denominated  barrows,  (vide  definition.  Part  I.,  p.  49.)  On  a  bay  on  the  north 
shore  of  the  island  there  is  a  brief  pictographic  inscription,  on  a  limestone  boulder, 
which  has  been  reversed  by  the  action  of  tempests  on  that  shore.  This  is  depicted  in 
Plate  40. 


C.    Sculptured   Rock — Erie   Inscription. 


The  interest  arising  from  these  evidences  of  former  occupancy  in  tne  aboriginal 
period,  is  inferior  however  to  that  excited  by  a  sculptured  rock  lying  on  the  south 
shore  of  the  island,  about  two  hundred  feet  from  the  west  angle  of  the  enclosure. 
(Plate  35.)     This  rock  is  thirty-two  feet  in  its  greatest  length,  by  twenty-one  feet  in 


i 


88  ANTIQUITIES. 

its  greatest  breadth.  It  is  a  part  of  the  same  stratification  as  the  island  from  which  it 
has  been  separated  by  lake  action.  The  top  presents  a  smooth  and  polished  surface, 
like  all  the  limestone  of  this  quarter  when  the  soil  is  removed,  suggesting  the  idea  that 
this  polish  is  due  to  glazial  attrition.  Upon  this  the  inscription  (Plate  41)  is  cut.  This 
cutting  is  peculiar.  The  figures  and  devices  are  deeply  sunk  in  the  rock,  and  yet 
present  all  its  smoothness  of  surface,  as  if  they  had  been  exposed  to  the  polishing  or 
wearing  influence  of  water.  Yet  this  influence,  if  from  water,  could  not  have  been 
rapid,  as  the  surface  of  the  rock  is  elevated  eleven  feet  above  the  water-level.  Its  base 
has  but  a  few  inches  of  water  around  it. 

Plate  42,  exhibits  a  perspective  view  of  the  relative  position  of  this  natural  monu- 
ment; also  of  the  lake  itself,  and  of  the  quiet  picturesque  beauty  of  the  adjacent 
shores ;  and  the  entire  scene  is  characteristic  of  Lake  Erie  in  its  summer  phase.  The 
sculpture  itself  has  been  referred,  for  interpretation,  to  the  same  aboriginal  pictographist 
who  interpreted  the  inscription  of  the  Dighton  Bock,  Part  I.,  page  112.  It  would  be 
premature,  therefore,  to  attempt  its  reading  in  the  present  state  of  the  question.  Of 
one  thing,  however,  a  definite  opinion  may  be  expressed.  It  is  by  far  the  most  exten- 
sive and  well  sculptured  and  well  preserved  inscription  of  the  antiquarian  period  ever 
found  in  America.  Being  on  an  islet  separated  from  the  shore,  with  precipitous  sides,  it 
has  remained  undiscovered  till  within  late  years.  It  is  in  the  pictographic  character 
of  the  natives.  Its  leading  symbols  are  readily  interpreted.  The  human  figures  — 
the  pipes;  smoking  groups;  the  presents;  and  other  figures,  denote  tribes,  negotiations, 
crimes,  turmoils,  which  tell  a  story  of  thrilling  interest,  in  which  the  white  man  or 
European,  plays  a  part.  There  are  many  subordinate  figures  which  require  study. 
There  are  some  in  which  the  effects  of  atmospheric  and  lake  action  have  destroyed  the 
connexion,  and  others  of  an  anomalous  character.  The  whole  inscription  is  manifestly 
one  connected  with  the  occupation  of  the  basin  of  this  lake  by  the  Eries — of  the 
coming  of  the  Wyandots  —  of  the  final  triumph  of  the  Iroquois,  and  the  flight  of  the 
people  who  have  left  their  name  on  the  lake. 


? 


3.  ARCH^OLOGICAL  INDIAN  REMAINS  IN  SOUTH  CAROLINA. 


V  ! 


The  vestiges  of  aboriginal  occupancy  in  South  Carolina  have  not  been  examined  in 
the  field — or,  but  cursorily  and  incidentally. 

If  the  investigations  of  a  recent  observer  in  Alabama '  be  correct  in  the  opinions  he 
expresses  of  the  eccentric  line  of  march  of  the  expedition  of  De  Soto,  the  site  of  the 
ancient  "  Cofitchiqui "  was  on  the  South  Carolina  banks  of  the  Savannah  River.    It 


■  Mr.  Pickett.    Hiit.  Al*.,  lit  vol. 


•>  \ 


il 


^ 


y  .ij 


nr; 


1 

i 

i    : 

1 

i              '\ 

■i 

1 

! 

1 

1        '^ 

li 

I 

■•-I 


a 
a- 


*-, 


f  11 


If 


l! 


if 


•■(i'v 


I'n 


""m 


.^iiilf    ■.:    ?2   feet   to    i   met 

Siiill'l  iiri'il   uiMiTi|il  inn    nn  a    rmk- .  Sniilli    niilr  nf  ('iniiiiiK^liaiii'.-;  Is.l,.iki'  {•',vu-. 

I.ippiucou,  Granilio  &  C'?  Fhila. 


-^ 


i^4 


V> 


1 

1 

-: 

r         1 

ki. 

1i    ^ 

?    ) 

n    ■ 

4 

,'( 

"» 

■ 

1  - 
j  .i 

1          i 

!  ■■■ 

-         1 

i% 


.1  ■  J 


1 

J 

i 

^^1  '.V 

y 


i 


■BfiM 


ANTIQUITIES. 


89 


was  here  that  a  dagger  and  several  coats  of  mail  were  found,  in  1540,  by  that  adventu- 
rous discoverer,  which  were  believed  to  have  been  brought  from  the  sea-coasts  of 
Carolina,  where  the  Signor  Ayllon  had  lost  his  life  in  a  prior  period  of  Spanish 
adventure. 

Nor  is  it  unworthy  of  our  archaeological  records  in  this  state,  to  notice,  in  connexion 
with  its  aboriginal  remains,  the  ruins  which  we  apprehend  exist  of  the  fort  first  erected 
by  France,  in  her  attempts  to  found  a  Protestant  colony  in  Carolina,  near  the  ancient 
town  of  Beaufort.  The  head-waters  of  the  Broad  river  and  its  tributaries  appear  to 
have  been  the  residence  of  a  heavy  Indian  population,  who  found  a  reliable  means  of 
subsistence  at  all  seasons  in  its  fish  and  Crustacea.  The  antique  mounds  of  oyster- 
shells,  which  line  the  banks  of  the  principal  streams,  tell  this  story  in  a  manner  not 
to  be  mistaken.  The  raising  of  cotton  on  these  rich  alluvial  lands  for  so  many  years 
has  not  been  sufficient  to  obliterate  this  species  of  aboriginal  monument  of  occupation. 

Upon  the  waters  of  the  Pocotaligo  there  are  known  to  be  seated  a  number  of 
mounds  of  earth  of  a  form  and  dimensions  which  appear  to  commend  them  to  a  minute 
archaeological  survey.  Indeed,  the  entire  seaboard  of  the  State,  with  the  valleys  of  its 
principal  rivers,  demand  examination,  and  appear  to  promise  the  development  of  facts 
important  to  a  correct  understanding  of  its  Indian  history.  This  it  is  intended  to 
make  in  season  to  have  the  results  incorporated  in  a  subsequent  part  of  this  work. 
In  the  mean  time,  the  following  notices  of  objects  of  antiquarian  value  from  this  State 
are  given,  from  an  examination  of  the  cabinet  of  the  late  Samuel  George  Morton,  of 
Philadelphia : 

Plate  43,  Figs.  1  and  2,  are  drawings,  of  the  full  size,  of  a  species  of  clay  pipes  found  at 
Kershaw  with  the  remains  of  Indian  sculpture.  Figs.  1  and  2,  Plate  44,  exhibit  pipes 
sculptured  from  stone,  from  Camden.  Fig.  3,  Plate  44,  represents  the  stone  crescent- 
shaped  blade  of  an  antique  battle-axe,  from  the  same  district.  It  has  an  eye  for 
fastening  a  wooden  handle.  Fig.  4,  Plate  45,  is,  apparently,  the  partially  mutilated 
part  of  an  idol-pipe,  curiously  sculptured  Ccom  green  serpentine  rock.  Fig.  5,  Plate 
46,  is  a  stone  mortar  and  pestle ;  not  unlike  a  similar  instrument  used  by  the  Toltecs 
and  Aztecs  for  making  tortillas. 

Vases  of  pottery  were  made  by  the  tribes  of  this  State  with  a  degree  of  skill  equal 
to  the  best  specimens  obtained  from  the  countries  of  the  ancient  Appalachians.  These 
are  exhibited  in  some  entire  vessels,  marked  1  and  2,  Plate  46,  from  Camden.  It  is  a 
compact  terracotta  figure ;  one  having  a  handle  formed  of  the  head  of  an  animal  which 
represents,  apparently,  a  cat.  Fig.  3  of  the  same  plate  depicts  a  vase  from  Alabama, 
and  shows  conclusively  a  parity  in  this  art  among  the  southern  tribes  extensively. 
Fig.  4  represents  e  stone  amulet  found  at  Camden,  South  Carolina. 

Pt.  II.  — 12 


^J 


I 


wy 


ANTIQUITIES. 


4.    ARCHAEOLOGICAL  RELICS  FROM  WESTERN  NEW  YORK. 


r 


' 


Toe  ensuing  descriptions  relate  to  articles  deposited  in  the  State  Collection  at 
Albany : 

Fig.  1,  Plate  45,  from  Washington  County,  is,  apparently,  a  sacrificial,  or  a  flaying 
knife.  It  is  carved  from  a  compact  piece  of  green  serpentine — a  material  analogous, 
in  every  respect,  to  the  idol-pii)e  from  Camden,  So.  Ca.,  Fig.  3,  same  Plate. 

The  several  articles  grouped  in  Plate  47,  Figs.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  from  Ellisburgh, 
Jefferson  County,  exhibit  the  same  ready  tact  in  moulding  images  of  the  human  face 
and  the  distinctive  heads  of  animals  on  the  plastic  basis  of  clay  pipes,  which  is  found 
extensively  in  that  area ;  and  in  the  Iragments  of  vases.  Figs.  5  and  6,  the  ornaments 
are  of  the  same  description  Avhich  characterizes  'q  entire  vase-pottery  of  this  state 
of  the  Indian  period. 

Plate  48,  Figs.  1  and  2,  exhibits  stone  axes,  Avrought,  apparently,  from  silicious  slate, 
with  great  exactitude.  This  has  Ijeen  also  employed  for  all  the  antique  stone  crescent- 
shai)ed  tomahawks  which  have  been  examined  over  a  wide  surface  of  territory. 

Plate  49,  Fig.  1,  is  labelled,  in  the  State  Collection  at  Albany,  "war-club."  This 
is  believed  to  be  correct,  although  it  has  the  general  character  of  the  stone  net^sinker. 
Fig.  2  is  regarded  as  a  pipe  amulet;  it  impresses  the  obser\'er  strongly,  as  being 
analogous  in  its  use  to  the  anomal">us  instrument  Fig.  1,  Plate  50.  Fig.  4  represents 
an  im])lement  found  in  Lc  Roy,  Gi^iesee  County.  The  fragment  of  a  tube  (Fig.  5) 
of  the  material  of  the  ancient  lapis  oUaris  is  taken  from  an  antique  tumulus  in  Ohio. 
Tlie  moccasin  needle,  Fig.  3,  Plate  49,  was  commonly  made,  as  is  here  depicted,  of  the 
tibia  of  quadrupeds  or  other  species  of  bone.  The  chief  interest  is  however  excited  by 
the  articles  figured  on  Plate  50.  It  seems  difficult  to  account  for  the  nse  of  the 
octagonal  stone  implement  with  an  orifice  and  cover,  Figs.  1  and  2,  without  supposing 
it  to  be  some  implement  or  contrivance  used  in  the  sacerdotal  function.  Equally 
anomalous  are  Figs.  3  and  4,  unless  we  may  conjecture  that  their  uses  were 
.scmpstresscal,  and  that  they  were  designed  for  smoothing  down  seams  of  buckskin. 
In  Figs.  5  and  G  we  behold  very  clearly  the  mutilated  blade  of  a  battle-axe  of  silicious 
slate,  Avliich  was  perforated  through  its  head  to  admit  a  handle.  It  is,  Avith  imprecision, 
labelled  "a  pipe." 

To  these  notices  we  subjoin  the  articles  of  antiquarian  interest  of  Plate  51,  in  the 
"  i^wsse.ssion  of  Mr.  Keeler  of  Jamesville,  Onondaga,  all  being  of  the  periofl  of  the  French 
attempt  at  colonization  in  that  section  of  the  coimtry,  about  1GG6.  De  Moyen  had,  in 
1G53,  visited  the  Onondaga  country,  and  it  appears  in  ten  years  afterwards  the  .Jesuits 
were  permitted  to  establish  themselves  in  the  country.  After  the  close  of  the 
Revolution,  which  threw  open  this  r-j^iou  as  a  military  grant,  Mr.  Keeler  came  into 


,«.! 


h  ■  r  I: 


m 
Si 


i 


i! 


4  I 


} : 


4 


ki^i 


Airj'jgux    CLAY    hj;JK .'J 


if     L 


»I1 


*-'  ''•''■"'  yj 


F.  #'x, 


A ;■;  1 1  <^/  u  1 "/  ;  ''■:  o  ?■  a  c m  iM  K  vY  'YD  ]{ K  ;\i^!  u  ■';  <j  ij  ;■  I 


^1 


:) 


P=-^„iwiWTP"r.-a:.Tsm«7!qps' 


A  r.'  -r  J  V^  I J  J  -/  J   K     •        P  I',  r;  ,VJ      .'I  r  ,  IJ  -j-  ;.j      .^  ;^  j^  rj  L  J  J\'  A 


;AiN7'.!  I,  U  I   n  K  ■•;     n:.<  m     l'"!  K  V!     V  '    I,  K 


Mtiii*. 


p 


I 


I 

•I 


l\ 


il 


.1-;  ■:: .,  m  rrjA  j     ■■  h'  ■•■:    \-i  ■■■:  '■■. 


'  H 


*-•»,«*«  !-«i!j;,s, 


L 


/  /  /  r^Sdl 


>\fi'rjy'!J::"r.i!'-';  ■fn-tr.  i\y:y,'   y  ,  .n  w 


T  i.i.'.mk;     iiv    in  t  i-;  ■    I'l  ,    :!  ^M: 


1 1 


*t 


; 

■■■ 


I 


It 


i\ 


..of 


(\yauiu      6  i4nL"a  tou^ 


y 


;#f 


■'v^: 


.'^M.    ;v     .1    -i.        I  !,'tr.-:!   .  1..- 


A  I"!  ■  f  I  (;  U  J  r  J  S  -■)    r  fA  r)  ,)|    ,M  :.;  sy     y  rj  ;,(  « 


h 


I 


I 


li 

I 


ft 


\i 


n 


! 


(( 


kuimsM- 


\ 


J! 


///    II 


K1 


I; 


■  fi 

:  I': 


!  . 


^1 


p 


1  t 

■ 

i 

i; 

.  \ 

!■- 

li 

1 

:. 

'( 

' 

i    1 

\''l.^  '.'. 


'!  ^  'ii'l/i'i/-! 

i  I  I  <  I  '  I  h  ,  ,    I .  ■ 


>\^,\\v,Vi\\ 

\  \  \  N"'-  v'^    - 

\  ^.     '^  \  ■.       .." 


ir 


; 


ANTIQUITIES. 


91 


possession  of  the  subdivision  which  contained  the  ruins  of  the  old  fort,  that  had  once 
covered  this  premature  attempt  at  colonization.  Figs.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  depict  a  brass 
pocket<;ompass,  the  broken  nonus  of  a  dial-plate,  and  an  iron  horse-shoe,  which  were, 
together  with  other  articles,  ploughed  up  by  him  at  various  times.  The  period  which 
had  elapsed  after  this  event  had  not  completely  covered  the  original  site  of  the  fort 
with  a  forest,  but  it  had  allowed  these  intrusive  relics  to  be  mingled  with  those  of  the 
true  Indian  period,  and  they  excited  wonder  while  the  historical  fact  of  the  antique 
French  colony  remained  unknown. 


5.  ANTIQUE  ABORIGINAL  EMBANKMENTS  AND  EXCA- 
VATIONS AT  LAKE  VIEUX  DESERT,  IN  WISCONSIN, 
AND    NORTHERN    MICHIGAN. 


The  remote  position  of  Lake  Vieux  Desert,  its  giving  rise  to  the  Wisconsin  river, 
and  its  having  a  large  island  in  its  centre,  which  fits  it  for  the  cultivation  practised  by 
the  Indians,  appear  to  have  early  pointed  it  out,  as  a  retreat  and  stronghold  of  the 
interior  Indians. 

No  enemy  could  approach  it  except  by  water,  and  its  natural  capacities  of  defence 
were  strengthened  by  an  elliptical  embankment  in  its  centre,  whicli  appears  to  have 
served  as  the  basis  of  pickets.  There  were  small  mounds  or  barrows  Avithin  the 
enclosure,  together  with  some  cross  embankments,  and  two  large  excavations  without 
the  embankment,  all  which  are  shoAvn  in  Plate  52.  It  appears  to  have  been  the  most 
northwestwardly  point  fortified  east  of  the  Mississippi  River.  The  boundary  which 
separates  Wisconsin  from  Michigan  cuts  the  island  into  nearly  equal  parts. 


■iil 


r 


i'l 


■^ 


IV.  PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY.  B. 


(M) 


!     I 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Notices  of  the  Natural  Caves  in   the  Sioux  Country,  on   the  Left   Banks  of  the  Upper 

Mississippi  River.     By  N.  J.  Nicollet. 

2.  Physical  Data  respecting  the  Southern  Part  of  California  included  in  the  Line  of  Boundary 

between  San  Diego  and  the  Mouth  of  the  River  Gila ;  with  Incidental  Notices  of 
the  Diegunos  and  Yuma  Indian  Tribes.     By  Lieutenant  Whipple,  U.  S.  A. 


1.  NOTICES  OP  THE  NATURAL  CAVES  IN  THE  SIOUX 
COUNTRY,  ON  THE  LEFT  BANKS  OF  THE  UPPER 
MISSISSIPPI    RIVER.     BY  N.  J.   NICOLLET. 


,^l 


CoijONTir.  John  J.  Abert,  chief  of  the  Topographical  Bureau,  luis  kindly  put  into  my 
hands,  with  the  privilege  of  selection,  the  posthumous  papers  of  Mr.  Nicollet,  resulting 
from  his  reconnoissances,  in  the  service  of  the  government,  among  the  Indian  trihes  of 
the  West,  from  which  it  may  be  found  expedient  to  make  further  selections  in  future 
portions  of  this  work.  The  following  remarks  embrace  notices  of  a  former  custom  of 
burial,  in  connexion  with  the  cavernous  rooks  of  the  Upper  Mississippi,  near  St. 
Anthony's  Falls.  The  disturbances  and  disunion  which  the  approach  of  civilization 
and  the  introduction  of  the  fur  trade  produced ;  the  disuse  into  which  the  custom  of 
general  burial  fell,  and  the  great  decline  in  their  population  caused  by  the  temptations 
of  commerce  and  the  introduction  of  ardent  spirits,  commend  them  to  attention. 

Tlie  reminiscences  of  the  old  Dacota  sachems,  to  whom  Mr.  Nicollet  refers,  appear 
also  to  have  affected  in  some,  but  a  lesser  degree,  their  forest  neighbors — the  Chippcwas 
of  the  sources  of  the  Mississippi,  among  Avhom  these  baneful  influences  are  being 
daily  developed. 


It 


, .       --•ftriTTjfii -#lflTnaTi- I'^T 


96 


PUYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 


It  is  appreliondcd  that  this  observer's  deductions,  made  in  local  districts,  where  two 
hunter  and  antagonistical  tribes,  still  exist  in  very  much  their  aboriginal  state  of 
aversion  to  all  fixed  industry  and  arts,  and  who  are  wedded  by  the  customs  of  ages  to 
the  fallacies  of  the  erratic  hunter  state,  only  require  to  be  extended  to  other  portions 
of  the  vast  interior  of  North  America,  lying  beyond  the  Mississippi  River,  to  render 
these  remarks  equally  applicable  to  by  far  the  larger  number  of  the  unreclaimed  tribes. 

H.  R.  S. 


NOTICES. 


The  first  cave  is  four  miles  below  the  St.  Peters.  On  descending  the  river,  one 
sees  on  the  loft,  at  about  the  termination  of  the  four  miles,  a  beautiful  rivulet  passing 
out  of  a  deep  ravine :  pursuing  its  wanderings  a  short  distance,  you  encounter  a 
beautiful  vault,  hollowed  out  of  the  free-stone  from  which  issues  the  rivulet  spoken  of. 
The  water  is  pure,  transparent,  and  cool  in  summer,  in  comparison  with  that  of  the 
Mississippi. 

On  descending  the  Mississippi  to  arrive  at  this  cave,  it  will  be  observed  that  the 
calcareous  beds  which  rest  upon  the  free-stone,  and  which  characterize  the  geological 
formation  of  the  country,  gradually  diminish  in  thickness,  showing  themselves  only  in 
fragments,  and  then  totally  disappearing.  Alxjve  the  vault  of  the  cave  there  are  no 
longer  any  traces  of  the  calcareous  formation,  and  there  is  seen  only  deposits  of  sand 
and  of  pebbles.  If  the  prairie  is  examined  for  about  a  mile  towards  the  north,  one 
will  find  depressions  in  the  soil,  forming  those  marshes  and  morasses  so  frequent  in 
this  region,  and  which  are  the  receptacles  of  the  surroiuiding  waters,  and  of  aquatic 
vegetation,  here  so  abundant  and  vigorous.  It  is  these  Avaters  which  have  made  a 
passage  through  the  friable  free-stone  of  the  formation,  and  which  issue  in  a  stream 
from  the  vault  which  they  have  formed.  The  stream  therefore  is  not  long,  nor 
probably  deep,  as  it  runs  over  a  bed  ujion  the  general  level  of  the  affluents  of  the 
river. 

The  second  cave  is  four  miles  lower  down,  and  on  the  same  side  of  the  Mississippi, 
that  is  to  say,  about  eight  miles  below  the  St.  Peters.  It  is  half-way  up  the  hill 
which  borders  the  stream.  It  is  however  closed  by  the  crumbling  down  of  the  upper 
beds  of  friable  calcaire,  in  which  it  is  hollowed.  Carver  visited  and  described  this 
cave,  and  gave  it  celebrity  by  attaching  to  it  the  description  of  a  custom  of  the  Sioux 
of  his  time,  who  at  certain  periods  of  the  yeor,  carried  their  dead  thither  with  great 
solemnity. 

According  to  information  which  I  gathered  from  the  oldest  living  men  of  the 
nation,  who  had  not  merely  seen  these  ceremonies,  but  had  also  borne  a  part  in  them, 
the  cave  itself  formed  no  essential  feature  of  the  ceremonies ;  and  its  picturesque  and 


! 


i , 

m 

1    ; 

^^Rb  ^(H' 

( 

Hi 

i 

\\ 

^Hik 

u 

i 

s 


•J 


^ 


I 


r; 


PHYSICAL  GEUiiRAPIIY. 


97 


Bentimontiil  effect  U)  the  eyes  of  the  whites,  was  with  them  purely  accidental,  and  did 
not  enter  into  the  idea  upon  which  the  custom  was  founded. 

Formerly,  and  even  during  the  first  years  of  the  present  century,  the  Sioux,  who 
constituted  the  tribe  of  lake  people,  the  Mendewahantons,  were  united  in  three  large 
and  populous  villages.  The  first  village,  the  principal  one  of  the  tribe,  and  which 
gave  them  their  name,  was  situated  east  of  the  Mississippi,  and  some  four  miles  from 
the  St.  Peters,  upon  the  borders  and  environs  of  a  large  and  beautiful  lake,  not  as  yet 
found  on  our  maps,  and  of  which  the  name  was,  and  still  is,  Mendewacanton.  The 
second  village  was  the  village  of  the  Grand  Marais,  tahohantauha,  and  was  situated 
upon  the  river  a  short  way  \x\o\v  the  cave  in  question.  The  third  village  was  upon 
both  sides  of  the  river  St.  Peters  (the  Minnisota),  six  miles  from  its  mouth,  and 
where  there  is  at  this  day  the  small  village  of  Psnishon.  A  number  of  living  persons, 
as  well  among  the  Sioux  as  among  the  mixed  races,  and  also  old  traders,  remember 
these  three  villages,  and  speak  of  the  third  as  having  been  during  their  time  very 
flourishing  and  populous ;  the  cabins  of  the  Indians  extending  in  several  lines  on  both 
sides  of  the  St.  Peters,  on  a  height  of  from  one  to  two  miles.  The  common  intersection 
of  the  roads  of  communication  between  these  villages,  was  precisely  on  the  spot  of 
the  cave  described  by  Carver.  The  low  grounds  and  the  marshes  are  near  the  site 
where  the  sugar  maple  and  the  wild  rice  grow  in  abundance.  It  was  upon  this  large 
flat  where  the  inhabitants  of  the  three  villages  met  in  spring  to  make  sugar,  and  in 
autumn  for  the  wild  rice  harvest.  It  is  well  known,  that  among  all  the  Indian 
nations,  these  causes  of  reunion  gave  rise  to  the  obser\aiice  of  feasts,  ceremonies,  and 
practices  founded  upon  their  ideas  and  customs.  It  is  known  also  that  these  nations 
place  their  graves  in  places  most  obtrusive,  and  exposed  to  the  veneration  of  their 
people,  and  that  at  the  same  time  these  graves  or  tombs  must  be  so  near  families,  that 
they  can  watch  over  their  preservation,  and  continue  the  attentions  they  owe  to  the 
dead ;  such  as  to  make  offerings  to  them ;  to  give  them  something  to  eat,  to  smoke, 
and  to  talk  with  them  from  time  to  time.  Under  these'  considerations,  no  place  could 
better  meet  the  sentiments  of  the  Mendewakantons,  than  that  of  the  plateau,  or  level, 
or  flat,  above  the  cave.  (Plate  58.)  Therefore  it  was  that  the  three  villages  carried 
thither  their  dead,  placing  them  upon  scaffolds  constructed  at  an  elevation  out  of  reach 
of  the  wolves,  and  of  profanation  from  animals.  But  they  never  placed  their  dead  in 
the  cave,  which  was  merely  esteemed  a  place  for  the  sports  of  their  children,  and  in 
which  they  could  display  their  courage  by  daring  each  other,  as  to  who  would 
penetrate  the  farthest  into  it,  which  would  never  have  been  permitted  if  the  bones  of 
a  single  person  had  ever  been  placed  there. 

The  cave  is  long,  and  without  water.     The  crumbliug  of  the  vault  has  closed  the 
entrance  of  it  many  years  since.     If  this  accident  had  had  the  least  influence  upon 
their  sentiments  of  respect  and  of  recollection  of  the  dead,  it  is  not  to  be  believed  that 
Pt.  II.  — 13 


( L 


i..y.,.J'.-.^.J.^:u^iE«salS*4tS-t.>r'^-iiL. 


tj^^jgltfiiif^/ntK^f^iii^ 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


they  would  have  remained  ns  indifferent  to  it  as  tliey  liave ;  for  they  have  not 
attempted  to  reoix'n  it,  no.  have  they  taken  any  note  in  tlieir  memory  of  tlie  event. 

More  recently,  when  the  \>i\T  Wtween  England  and  the  United  States,  and  circum- 
stances of  the  fur  trade,  had  involved  the  Sioux  in  their  disastrous  consequences,  the 
grand  tribe  of  Mendewakuntons  lost  peace,  hannony,  and  independence.  Policy,  com- 
merce, spirituous  liquors,  and  the  vices  and  crimes  of  civilization,  not  only  broke  the 
ties  which  united  the  different  trilx's  of  the  same  nation  of  powerful  people  animated 
by  the  same  spirit,  but  their  consequences  tended  to  increase  the  hatred  so  apt  to  Ix) 
generated  between  savage  nations,  associated  them  with  interests  not  properly  their 
own,  and  involved  them  iii  wars  with  each  other. 

Then  the  wars  between  the  Mendewakantons  and  the  Chippewas,  east  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi, became  more  frequent.  Then  the  traders,  who  had  for  a  long  time  held  their 
factories  at  the  grand  village  of  the  lake,  were  obliged  for  greater  security  to  establish 
themselves  at  the  St.  Peters ;  and  the  Indians,  whose  condition  had  Iwcome  dependent 
on  the  traders,  were  themselves  also  obliged  to  change  their  habitation. 

The  tribe  became  disunited.  Each  family  recovered  the  bones  of  their  ancestors, 
and  went  off  to  establish  themselves  elsewhere.  The  three  large  villages  disapiwared, 
and  the  grand  cemetery  common  to  all  disappeared  also.  The  triljc  of  Mendewakan- 
tons, once  so  celebrated  for  its  hospitality,  its  fine  population,  and  its  strength,  exists 
now  only  in  increments,  and  presents  itself  only  in  fragments,  collected  in  small  and 
poor  villages,  scattered  uixm  the  Mississippi,  the  St.  Peters,  and  the  lakes  in  the 
environs  of  the  falls  of  St.  Anthony.  Governed  by  inferior  cliiefs,  ambitious  that  the 
traders  should  second  their  interests — but  witli  wiioni,  except  in  the  regrets  and 
profound  grief  of  the  old  men,  there  is  no  longer  any  notion  of  n-spoet  for  the  character 
of  the  nation,  or  any  recollection  of  the  traditions  which  established  its  union,  its 
strength,  its  cutjtorus,  and  its  glory.  Some  of  these  old  men  have  often  communicated 
to  me  their  bitter  reflections  at  the  present  degiaded  condition  of  their  people.  They 
said  that  there  were  no  longer  as  many  old  men  iis  formerly,  and  the  few  who  remained 
were  without  consideration  or  moral  influence ;  that  they  often  conversed  with  each 
other  on  these  sad  subjects ;  and  when  they  turned  their  recollections  to  times  not  far 
removed,  they  were  utterly  confounded  at  the  diminution  of  their  population,  the 
destruction  of  their  institutions,  and  the  loss  of  all  their  ancient  national  virtues. 

The  Chippewas  of  the  lakes  of  the  sources  of  the  Mississippi,  who  have  not  yet 
had  immediate  contact  with  the  whites,  and  upon  whom  the  effects  of  the  civilization 
which  is  approaching  them  have  been  felt  only  at  a  distance,  make  the  same  remarks 
in  reference  to  their  nation.  Flat  Mouth,  in  the  evenings  which  I  have  passed  with 
him,  has  frequently  exhibited  his  anxiety  on  this  subject. 

The  old  men  of  other  nations  are  equally  afflicted  in  reference  to  their  condition. 
It  is  a  singular  fact  that  all  the  Indians  with  whom  I  have  had  occasion  to  converse 
on  the  vast  decline  of  their  people,  and  on  the  grand  facts  of  the  humanity  of  the 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY.  M 

present  nge,  have  iiMiuired  if  I  could  explain  to  them  the  causes  of  their  degeneracy  ? 
My  answer  was  as  aftlicting  to  them  a»  it  would  lie  useless  to  modern  iH)liey  and 
modern  Christianity. 

Of  the  two  caves,  formerly  accessible,  these  remarks  demonstrate  that  there  remains 
but  one  practicable  to  the  curious,  the  one  about  four  miles  below  the  Saint  Peter. 
Since  the  one  descrilx^d  by  Carver  has  Ijeen  closed,  it  has  l>een  lost  sight  of;  and  when 
travellers  arrive,  and  desire  to  visit  the  cave  which  they  have  heard  so  much  spoken 
of,  they  arc  carried  to  the  small  cave,  which  does  not  in  the  least  degree  meet  tlie 
marvellous  accounts  which  they  have  previously  received. 

Featherstonhaugh,  in  his  Geological  RejKjrt  of  18.3G,  says,  in  8i)eaking  of  his  visit 
to  this  small  cave :  "  I  followed  this  ravine  alx)ut  two  hundred  paces,  and  found  that 
it  led  to  the  cave  which  Carver  had  so  acvitnikli/  descriUd."  There  is  but  a  small 
difliculty  to  explain  here.  Carver  never  saw  or  had  any  knowledge  of  this  cave ;  how 
then  could  lu  so  accurately  give  a  description  of  it?  The  description  which  he  gave 
l/clongs  to  this  closed  cave.  Featherstonhaugh,  in  his  rejiort,  frequently  refers  to  the 
li'ithor'*}'  of  Carver,  and  nearly  always  as  happily  as  in  the  pre'sent  instance.  There 
was  jnuch  negligence  in  Featherstoidiaugh,  in  not  having  taken  more  pains  to  establish 
a  juugment  ui  '-i  facts  which  more  recent  works  and  pei^wms  on  the  spot  could  have 
furnished  ev^^r)  u. -sired  explanation  of  All  the  old  re'sidents  of  St.  Peters  could  have 
cleared  up  i',\t  matter  n*"  Carver's  cave. 


PHYSICAL  DATA  RESPECTING  THAT  PART  OF  SOUTH- 
ERN C  ALT  FORN  I A  LYING  ON  THE  LINE  OF  BOUNDARY 
BETWEEN  ST.  DIEGO  AND  THE  MOUTH  OF  THE 
RIVER  GILA,  WITH  INCIDENTAL  DESCRIPTIONS 
OF   THE   DIEGUNOS  AND  YUMAS   INDIAN   TRIBES. 


The  following  diary  of  Lieuteiuint  Wliipple's  survey  of  the  line  of  lx)undary 
between  San  Diego  and  the  jwint  opjMJsite  the  junction  of  the  Gila  with  the  Colorado 
River,  which  was  executed  under  the  orders  of  Major  Emory,  lias  l)eeu  cominuiiicated 
for  this  work  by  Colonel  J.  J.  Ai>»  rt,  chief  of  the  Toix)graphical  Bureau,  U.  S.   V 

Its  notices  of  the  topograpliical  features,  latitudes.  temi)erature,  heights,  and 
distances,  and  the  general  physical  g"ography  of  that  hitherto  unexplored  section  of 
the  country,  are  of  high  value.  The  incidental  notiix.>s  given  of  the  Diegunos  and 
other  Indian  tribes  of  that  part  of  California,  their  manners  and  customs,  and  some 
specimens  of  their  languages,  arc  the  most  recent  and  authentic  v.nich  we  posso^ 

The  languages  being  the  true  key  to  their  history,  the  printed  formula  of  words  aud 


100 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY, 


i 


numerals  has  been  distributed  extensively  among  gentlemen  having  military  duties  to 
execute  on  those  distant  frontiers ;  and  promises  have  been  made,  both  by  the  head  of 
the  Bureau,  and  several  of  the  subordinate  officers  who  are  favorably  situated  to 
pursue  these  inquiries,  which  lead  me  to  hope  that  I  shall  be  placed  in  a  position  to 
acknowledge  future  favors  from  this  source. 

H.  B.  S. 

PHYSICAL   DATA. 

Br    LT.   WHIPPLE,    D.  9.  A. 

Having  engaged  Tomaso  as  guide  and  Indian  interpreter,  on  the  11th  day  of 
September,  1849,  we  started  from  the  mission  of  San  Diego  for  the  junction  of  the 
Rio  Gila  with  the  Colorado.  Tomaso  is  chief  of  the  tribe  of  Indians  called  Lligunos, 
or  Diegunos ;  whether  this  was  their  original  appellation,  or  they  were  so  named  by 
the  Franciscans  from  San  Diego,  the  principal  mission  among  them,  I  could  not  learn. 
According  to  Tomaso,  hi;;  tribe  numbers  alxjut  8,800  persons ;  all  sjicaking  the  same 
language,  and  occupying  tiie  territory  from  San  Luis  Rey  to  Aqua  Caliente.  They 
possess  no  arms,  and  are  very  peaceable.  Crimes,  he  says,  are  punished — theft  and 
bigamy  by  whipping,  and  mu.'der  by  death.  They  profess  the  greatest  reverenci)  for 
the  Church  of  Rome,  and,  glorying  in  a  Christian  name,  look  with  disdain  upon  their 
Indian  neighbors  of  the  desert  and  the  Rio  Colorado,  calling  them  miserable  Gentiles. 

The  Mission  of  San  Diego,  about  five  miles  from  the  town,  and  two  from  the  Plaza 
of  San  Diego,  is  a  large  pile  of  adolie  buildings,  now  deserted,  and  partly  in  ruins. 
There  remains  an  old  Latin  library,  and  the  chapel  walls  are  yet  covered  with  oil 
paintings,  some  of  which  possess  considerable  merit.  In  I'ront  there  is  a  large  vineyard, 
where  i^ot  only  delicious  grapes,  but  olives,  figs,  and  otlier  fruits,  are  produced 
abundantly.  In  the  days  of  their  prosperity,  for  many  miles  around  the  valleys  and 
plains  were  covered  with  cattle  and  horses  be"u);iging  to  this  mission ;  and  the  padres 
boasted  that  their  yearly  increase  was  greater  than  the  Indians  could  possibly  steal. 
But  in  California  the  sun  of  their  glory  is  set  for  ever.  Near  by  stand  the  thatched 
huts  of  the  Indians — formerly  serfs,  or  peons;  now  the  sole  occupants  of  the  mission 
grounds.  They  are  indolent  and  filthy,  with  more  of  the  vices  acquired  from  the 
whites,  than  of  the  virtues  supposed  to  belong  to  their  race.  Some  of  them  live  to  a 
great  age ;  and  one  old  woman,  said  to  be  far  advanced  in  her  second  century,  looks 
like  a  shrivelled  piece  of  parchment,  and  is  visited  as  a  curiosit}'. 

Many  of  their  Indians,  men,  women,  and  children,  assembled  on  the  bank  of  the 
stream,  apparently  to  witness  the  novelty  of  a  military  procession ;  but  a  pack  of  cards 
Avas  produced,  and,  seating  themselves  upon  the  ground  to  a  game  of  nionte,  they  were 
80  absorbed  in  the  amusement  as  to  seem  unconscious  of  our  departure. 

Our  route  leads  o\or  steep  hills,  uncultivated  and  barren,  excepting  a  few  fields  of 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY- 


101 


wild  oats  —  no  trees,  no  water  in  sight  from  the  time  of  leaving  the  mission,  imtil 
we  again  strike  the  valley  of  the  river  of  San  Diego,  half  a  league  from  Santa  Monica, 
the  rancharia  of  Don  Miguel  de  Pedoriva,  now  occupied  by  his  father-in-law  the 
prefect  of  San  Diego,  Don  Jose  Antonio  Estedillo.  The  hill-tops  are  white  with  a 
coarse  quartzose  granite ;  but  as  we  approach  the  rancho  of  Don  Miguel,  the  foliage 
of  the  trees  that  fringe  the  banks  of  Rio  San  Diego  formed  an  agreeable  relief  to  the 
landscape.  Here  the  river  contains  a  little  running  water,  but  before  reaching  the 
mission  it  disappears  from  the  surface,  and  at  San  Diego  is  two  feet  below  the  bed  of 
shining  micaceous  sand.  Maize,  wheat,  barley,  vegetables,  melons,  grapes,  and  other 
fruits  are  now  produced  upon  this  ranch  in  abundance :  with  irrigation,  the  soil  and 
climate  are  suitable  for  the  cultivation  of  most  of  the  productions  of  the  glolje.  But 
the  mansion-houses  of  such  great  estates  in  California  are  wretched  dwellings,  with 
mud  walls  and  thatched  roofs.  The  well-trodden  earth  fonns  the  floor,  and  although 
wealth  abounds  with  many  luxuries,  few  of  the  conveniences  and  comforts  of  life  seem 
known.  From  fifty  to  one  hundred  Indians  are  employed  on  this  ranch,  in  cultivating 
the  soil,  doing  the  menial  household  service,  and  attending  to  the  flocks  and  herds. 
Their  pay  is  a  mere  trifle,  and  Sundays  are  allowed  to  them  for  holiday  amu.sements, 
attending  mass,  riding,  gaming,  drinking. 

Sejif.  12th.  —  From  Santa  Monica  to  Santa  Maria,  five  and  a  half  leagues,  the  steep 
hill-sides  .showed  scarcely  the  vestige  of  a  road,  and  night  overtook  us  mid-way.  For 
the  first  league  we  follow  a  cafiada,  through  which  extends  a  row  of  live-oaks,  with 
here  and  there  a  pool  of  water.  We  cro.ss  a  range  of  barren  hills,  and  pass  a  ravine 
with  magnificent  oaks,  a  little  grass,  and  indications  of  water.  Another  ridge  brings 
us  into  a  valley,  rendered  beautiful  by  a  liberal  growth  of  wide-spreading  oaks ;  and  a 
long,  winding,  and  gradual  descent  leads  to  a  wooded  glen,  »vhere  the  thick  foliage  of 
intertwining  branches  throws  a  shade  over  a  spring  of  limpid  water,  and  seems 
inclined  to  shield  from  mortal  eyes  a  treasure  sacred  to  the  sylvan  deity.  But  here 
the  road  was  bad,  and  as  we  cut  the  trees  to  mend  the  way,  it  seemed  like  sacrilege. 
Another  league,  with  here  and  therc  a  tree,  brings  us  to  Santa  Maria.  This  is  the 
rancho  of  the  hospitable  Don  Jose  Maria  Martin  Ortega.  It  lies  in  a  fertile  basin, 
many  miles  in  extent,  and  contains  an  excellent  mineral  spring.  The  mountains 
surrounding  are  covered  Avith  bleached  masses  of  coarse  granite,  and  the  principal 
ranges  have  a  general  direction  from  N.  W.  to  S.  W. 


Rancho  de  Santa  Maria,  Sejit.  15//*,  1849. 

O"  A.  M.  12"  M.  3"  P.  M.              C  P.  M. 

Green's  Syphon  Barometer 28.715  in 2H.719  in 28.G81  in 28.033  in. 

Fttlironheit's  Attached  Tliernionietcr 80° 8(i°.00r) 83°.005 07°.05 

Fahrenheit's  Detached  Thorinometer 82° 8(5°.005 84° C7°.05 

Magnetic  inclination  ns  determined  by  observations  with  Fox's  Magiictio  DipK;ircle. 
Magnetic  intensity,  58°  42'. 


102 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


)" 


Si'2)t-  l&th.  —  The  preceding  night  has  been  very  cool,  and  the  thermometer  at 
sunrise  stands  at  50°.05,  Falirenheit.  Finding  the  spring  water  warm,  the  thermometer 
was  immersed,  and  immediately  rose  TC.S,  twenty  degrees  higher  than  the  temperature 
of  the  surrounding  atmosphere.  The  water  is  highly  impregnated  with  sulphur,  but 
clear  and  delicious  to  the  taste.  Large  bubbles  of  gas  are  constantly  rolling  to  the 
surface  of  the  spring  from  the  moving  sand  below. 

Pursuing  our  journey,  we  were  surprised  to  find  pools  of  water  standing  in  the 
road,  although  there  had  been  no  rain  probably  for  months.  The  road  crosses  the 
basin,  and  for  several  leagues  scoops  along  pretty  little  valleys,  with  patches  of  grass 
and  trees.  This  day  brought  to  view  the  cotton-wood  or  alamo.  It  so  much 
resembles  the  Lombardy  poplar,  as  at  first  to  be  mistaken  for  it.  Found  much 
feldspar,  containing  crystals  of  garnet  and  tourmaline.  As  we  approach  Santa  Isabel, 
which  is  seven  and  a  half  leagues  from  Santa  Maria,  a  change  comes  on  the  face  of 
the  country.  Nature  apfiears  more  smiling,  the  valleys  teem  with  grass,  and  the  oaks, 
though  small,  are  creeping  from  the  canadas  to  the  hill-sides. 

Santa  Isaljel  is  a  charming  sjMjt,  surrounded  by  gentle  hills,  and  watered  by  a  rapid 
and  never-failing  mountain  stream.  It  was  a  flourishing  place  during  the  prosperity 
of  Catholic  missions  in  California.  There  still  remain  the  ruins  of  a  church,  and  mud 
walls  of  other  dilapidated  houses.  A  collection  of  miserable  straw  huts  serves  as  a 
home  for  about  three  hundred  Indians,  who,  from  having  Ijcen  the  slaves  of  the  priests, 
appear  to  have  succeeded  to  the  inheritance. 

They  irrigate  their  fields,  and  cultivate  maize,  wheat,  and  barUn'.  Their  vineyard 
is  very  flourishing.  The  most  delicious  grains  are  in  great  abundance.  Peaches,  figs, 
and  apples,  are  beginning  to  riiwn,  while  we  feast  uiwn  melons  and  pears.  Many  of 
the  Indians  are  shrewd,  and  evidently  not  wanting  in  natural  capacity ;  but  they  are 
in  that  stage  of  civilization  in  which  man  seems  most  degraded.  They  have  acquired 
a  knowledge  of,  and  a  taste  for,  the  vices  of  the  oppressors  of  their  race,  but  know 
nothing  of  the  virtues  which  might  serve  as  an  antidote.  Now  that  they  are  freed 
from  bondage  to  the  Franciscans,  and  from  the  equally  exacting  Spaniards,  it  remains 
for  the  United  States  to  render  that  freedom  a  true  blessing,  by  establishing  among 
them  schools  where  they  may  be  taught  their  duties  as  Christians  and  as  men.  Their 
ideas  ujion  religion  are  few  and  simple.  There  is  a  God  in  heaven.  Their  tribe,  and 
all  who  have  been  marked  with  the  sign  of  the  cross,  are  (.'hristians,  and  when  they 
die  they  will  go  to  the  happy  regions.  All  others  are  Gentiles  and  outcasts  from 
heaven. 

The  geological  formation  here  consists  of  quartzose  granite,  mica,  schist,  and  talcose 
schist,  with  tourmaline  and  hornblende.  Some  indications  of  metal.  Silver  is  said  to 
e.xist  in  this  vicinity ;  but  where,  the  Indians  do  not  pretend  to  know. 

Dr.  Parry  thinks  he  felt  the  shock  of  an  earthquake  this  evening. 


i 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


103 


Santa  Isabel,  Sept.  11th,  1849  — 

9'  A.  M.         12'  M.         S"  P.  M.         C  P.  M. 

Orecn's  Syphon  Barometer,  No.  222 27.232  in 27.250  in 27.253  in. .  .27.189  in. 

Attached  Thermometer,  4 70''.5 84°.5 80° 71°.5 

Dctaclicd  thermometer,  4 74° 81° 8C° 71° 


On  the  morning  of  Septemljcr  18th  we  took  an  early  start,  and  as  the  short  cut  of 
sixteen  miles  to  San  Felipe  is  not  passable  for  Avagons,  we  proceeded  in  a  northerly 
direction  toward  Warner's  ranch.  The  valleys  throngh  which  onr  route  leads  are 
really  charming  for  California.  The  groves  of  oaks  are  filled  with  birds  of  song,  and 
morning  is  made  joyous  with  the  music  of  the  lark  and  blackbird. 

Having  traversed  the  long  valley  of  Warner's  ranch,  eight  miles  from  Santa  Isabel, 
we  struck  the  much-travelled  emigrant  road  leading  from  the  Colorado  to  El  Puebla  de 
los  Angelos.  In  a  ravine  of  superb  oaks  we  stopped  to  gather  grapes ;  for  here  is  an 
Indian  village,  a  mountain  stream,  and  a  vineyard. 

Upon  entering  San  Felipe,  twenty  miles  from  Santa  Isabel,  we  found  several  parties 
of  emigrants,  some  of  them  destitute  of  provisions.  They  tell  us  that,  \\\>on  the 
desert,  we  shall  find  many  in  a  condition  bordering  upon  starvation.  They  also 
confirm  the  rejwrts  of  the  emigrants  at  San  Diego  concerning  the  hostilities  committed 
by  the  Indians  at  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Gila.  One  party  pretended  to  have  had  a 
pitched  battle  with  them,  and  showed  an  arrow  with  which  one  man  had  been 
wounded.  The  number  of  the  Yumas  at  the  mouth  of  the  Gila  was  estimated  at  five 
thousand,  and  it  was  feared  that  they  would  utterly  destroy  the  emigrant  parties  in 
their  rear. 

The  village  at  this  place  contains  probably  fifty  Indians,  part  of  whom  are  Diegunos, 
and  acknowledge  the  authority  of  Toraaso ;  the  rest  belong  to  the  tribe  of  the  desert 
called  Como-yei  or  Quemeya,  speaking  a  different  language,  and  totally  ignorant  of 
Spanish.  To  my  surprise,  the  women  Avere  neatly  dressed  in  calico  frocks,  and,  not- 
withstanding the  streaks  of  tar  with  which  they  paint  their  fiices,  some  were  quite 
good-looking.  Their  Zandias  were  all  "  verde,"  and  they  had  nothing  else  to  sell.  As 
at  this  place  we  take  leave  of  the  Lligunos,  it  may  be  well  to  record  such  words  of 
their  language  as  have  been  gathered  from  Tomaso,  their  chief,  and  others  of  their 
tribe. 


"IfS'""*'  GnglUh. 

mo-quuc,  or  hut horse 

ah-hut,  or  moolt  mule 

ay-cootcht xavn 

s"" woman 

nile father 

'"e mother 


Dlfgunoi.  Ingllih. 

hainato body 

cstur head 

wa face 

lioo nose 

n-ycn  eyes 

a  wuo eyes 


104 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 


I>ieguno«.  KnglUh. 

ah mouth 

gclh'l hand 

a  sac'l fingers 

cuwis arms 

cwith'l leg 

toon kneo 

ha-uiul-yay foot 

hil-c-tar hair 

el-mam boy 

en  yat'l to-day 

mat-in-yat'l to-morrow 

hoon night 

han,  or  hanna good 

a-wah house 

tay  hutb,  or  cuchao blanket 

a  pl-eu hat 

hind ono 

ha-wuc two 

ha-mook three 

cha-pop four 

suap' five 

coo-quit  hue money 

iris  eoquit'l  hue 

poot  wurris  eoquit'l  hue he  wants  money 

n'yah I 


Dlei!uno«. 


CnglUh. 

.ho 
.am 
.here 


poo 

twa 

peo 

n'ya-pcc-tawa I  am  here 

poo-cc-pa-a he  was  there 

ach-a-ma-cba fruit 

aha water 

me-yut'l bread 

as-a-o to  eat 

ay-sail to  drink 

ha-niat'l  car 

n'ya-aha  a  say I  drink  water 

n'ya-coquago  asaho I  cat  meat 

quarquue brandy 

asu-muaye    to  be  drunk 

n'ya  quar-quao  asu I  drink  rum 

omuc'l,  or  omaho nothing 

ho yes 

n'ya  hub  n'yay  pilyay I  have  a  home 

{I  had  a  horse 
yesterday 

y'ayo 

C I  shall  have  a 

n'y'a  hut  mcton  yri,'l  ninia i  horse    to-mor- 

(_row 


n'ya-hut  pour  yayo 


Sept.  19. — Left  Sail  Felipe  at  8  A.  M.  Trees  and  grass  gave  place  to  rocks  and  sand. 
About  two  and  a  half  leagues  from  San  Felipe  we  entered  the  dry  bed  of  an  anoyo 
which  traversed  for  nearly  a  league  a  winding  ravine  produced  by  a  fault  in  the 
mountains. 

The  wid*h  in  some  places  was  barely  sufficient  to  admit  the  passage  of  our  wagons, 
while  the  perpendicular  height  of  the  rock  on  either  side  was  at  least  fifteen  feet.  The 
rock,  at  first  coarse  granite,  with  tumuli  of  Pedrigal,  passed  into  an  indurated  shale, 
talcose  or  mica  slate.     Veins  of  quartz  were  still  numerous. 

Encamped  at  El  Puerto.  Three  and  a  half  leagues  from  San  Felipe,  we  found 
springs  of  water,  a  little  grass,  but  no  wood.  Here  were  many  emigrants,  who  gave 
the  same  dreary  account  of  the  desert  as  was  told  us  last  night ;  much  sand  and  no 
grass.  One  of  the  men  showed  me  a  piece  of  lead-ore,  apparently  containing  silver, 
found  at  this  place. 


'  According  to  Tomaso,  the  Dicgunos  have  but  five  numerals,  although  others  of  the  tribe  gave  me,  hesitatingly, 
ten :  viz.,  huic,  hawoe,  bamook,  chaypop,  shucklcakayo,  sumhook,  suap  sahook,  (hiphook,  and  yainat,  apparently 
arroneously  taken  from  the  Yumas.) 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPIIV. 


105 


Left  El  Puerto  at  8  A.  M.,  Sept.  20tli,  crossed  a  steep  hill,  and  entered  the  basin  of 
Vallieito.  Here  abounded  cacti,  maguey,  fonguiera  spinosa,  and  wild  sage,  but  not  a 
blade  of  grass.  Wading  the  sand  for  a  league,  the  hills  close  in,  to  form  a  narrow 
valley  where  we  find  grass  and  excellent  springs  of  water  impregnated  with  sulphur. 
Here  we  encamp ;  near  us  are  the  ruins  of  adobe  huts,  indicating  the  decline  of  the 
Indians.  There  remain  a  few  naked  and  miserable  wrct«lie.s  who  have  a  garden  of 
green  melons,  but  nothing  to  eat  except  the  roots  of  wild  maguey. 

This  day  we  first  met  with  the  mizquite  bean,  upon  which  the  prosperity  of  our 
horses  and  mules,  and  the  success  of  our  expedition,  are  expected  to  dejwnd.  The 
accompanying  sketch  represents  a  branch  of  the  mizquite  screw-bean.'  These  screw- 
like pods  grow  in  clusters  of  eight  or  ten  upon  the  same  stem.  Both  the  screw  and 
the  pod  of  the  mizquite  contain  much  saccharine  matter,  and  are  very  nutritious. 
They  ripen  at  difl'erent  seasons  of  the  year,  and  are  very  abundant,  each  tree  producing 
many  bushels. 

Vallicito,  Sept.  20th. 

1     M.  3"  P.  M.  6"  P.  M. 

Green's  Syphon  Barometer,    28.511  in 28.492  in.      28.439  in. 

Detached  Thermometer, 99°.50 96°.05 96°.05 

Detached  Thermometer, 99" 99° 98" 

Vallicito,  Sept.  2lsf. 

6-  A.  M.  9"  A.  M.  12"  M.  3"  P.  M. 

Green's  Syphon  Barometer,  28.400  in 28.461  in 28.484  in 28.443  in. 

Detached  Thermometer,  . .  61°.05 96° 100°.05 ^".05 

Detached  Thermometer,  . .  62° 101° 99° 99°. 

Sejit.  21s/.  —  The  day  was  so  warm  that  we  were  compelled  to  lie  by  at  Vallicito 
until  about  5i  P.  M.,  when  we  pursued  our  route  down  the  valley  which  soon  stretched 
out  into  a  plain.  The  road  followed  a  bed  of  sand,  in  which  the  feet  of  our  horses 
sunk  below  the  fetlock  at  every  step.  Six  miles  from  the  springs  of  Vallicito,  a  semi- 
spherical  hill  in  the  midst  of  the  valley  separated  two  roads,  the  right-hand  one 
leading  directly  to  Cariw  Creek,  the  left  by  a  circuit  of  half  a  mile,  taking  you  by  the 
way  of  a  mineral  spring  of  drinkable  water.  T!  '■  .-jcener}'  here  by  moonlight  was 
beautiful.  The  hills  in  the  back  ground,  with  angles  sharp  and  sides  perpendicular, 
were  singular  in  the  extreme.  By  the  dim  light  it  was  hard  to  believe  that  they  were 
not  ruins  of  ancient  works  of  art.  One  hod  been  a  temple  to  the  gods ;  another  a 
regularly  bastioned  fort.  The  fine  large  trees  which  mark  the  course  of  the  run  have 
furnished  the  name  by  which  it  is  known,  "  Palmetto  Spring." 

Vegetation  in  the  valley  remains  unchanged.  Cacti,  maguey,  kreosote  lurrea 
Mexicana,  dwarf  cedar,  and  the  fonguiera  spinosa,  are  abinidant. 

'  This  sketch,  and  those  alluded  to  in  pages  107  and  108,  did  not  accompany  the  manuscript. 

Pt.  II.  — 14 


106 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


H 


Many  meteors  are  seen  shooting  from  the  zenith  to  the  S.  W.  A  cloud  arose  in  the 
East,  with  frequent  flaslies  of  lightning,  hut  the  night  passed  without  rain. 

Arrived  at  Cariso  Creek,  fifteen  miles  from  Vallecito,  eight  from  Palmetto  Spring,  at 
midnight.  Found  the  water  of  the  creek  quite  brackish.  Mules  and  horses  would 
scarcely  taste  it,  thirsty  as  they  were;  of  food  for  them,  there  was  none.  The 
emigrants  had  consumed  every  blade  of  grass,  and  every  stick  of  cane,  so  that  our 
sorrowful  animals  are  tied  in  groups  to  the  wagons  to  ponder  their  fate  upon  the  desert. 

Saturday,  Si'pt.  22(1. — The  sun  was  perhaps  half  an  hour  high,  when  our  hungry 
animals  were  again  put  in  harness.  At  camp,  the  creek  appears  fifty  feet  wide  and 
nearly  a  foot  in  depth ;  but  a  mile  or  two  below,  it  is  entirely  lost  in  the  thirsty  sand. 

Our  route  was  through  the  valley  of  the  Carazul.  Its  banks  are  of  clay,  worn  by 
rain  into  fantastic  shapes,  and  occasionally  mountains  appear  beyond. 

Tlie  road  is  strewn  with  emigrants  winding  their  way  to  the  "  placers."  No  rocks 
were  visible  cave  masses  of  iwdrigal,  stately  in  structure,  and  containing  large 
ferruginous  nodules.  Two  leagues  from  camp  we  passed  a  steep  ridge,  seemingly 
formed  of  g3'psuni  clear  as  glass. 

Noon.  —  We  are  now  fairly  upon  the  desert;  sandy  hills  behind,  a  dreary,  desolate 
plain  before  us,  far  as  the  eye  can  reach.  An  undulating  surface  of  sand,  with  pebbles 
of  j.osper,  is  sprinkled  with  small  green  clumps  of  Laurea  Mexicana. 

Thermometer  108°,  Fahrenheit,  in  the  shade.  S""  P.  M.  Twelve  miles  from  Cariso 
Creek;  stopped  to  dig  for  water,  but  in  vain.     Thermometer  100°  in  the  shade. 

There  appeared  in  the  east  a  cloud,  which  soon  assumed  that  jjcculiar  appearance 
which  often  precedes  a  violent  storm.  A  dark  mass  approached ;  a  hurricane  was 
upon  us,  and  we  were  enveloped  in  a  cloud  of  sand.  The  mules  were  driven  from 
their  path,  the  canva.ss  covers  were  torn  to  shreds,  and  the  wagons  themselves  in  danger 
of  being  upset.  For  fifteen  minutes  we  were  blinded,  when  a  torrent  of  rain  quieted 
the  dust ;  a  shower  of  hail  succeeded,  and  the  men,  throwing  themselves  upon  the 
ground,  hid  their  faces  in  the  sand  for  jjrotection.  There  was  neither  flash  nor  reimrt 
of  lightning  for  an  hour.  It  came,  at  length,  as  night  was  closing  in,  to  add  sublimity 
to  the  scene.  P<h)1s  and  streams  of  water  appeared  in  every  direction ;  and  spots  uixm 
the  parched  desert  which,  two  hours  before,  seemed  never  to  have  been  kissed  even  by 
a  gentle  dew,  now  aflbrdod  buckets-full  of  water  for  the  thirsty  mules.  It  was  dark 
when  one  of  the  party  returned,  sayijig  that  the  road  led  into  a  lake  which  he  had  Iwen 
unable  to  find  his  way  across.  Our  destination  for  the  night  was  what  the  emigrants 
call  New  Lake ;  the  nearest  point  at  which  we  expected  to  find  water.  But  now  we 
had  letl  the  sandy  soil  of  the  upper  desert,  and  were  traversing  a  lower  plateau  whose 
clayey  bed  retained  the  copious  shower  like  a  cup.  At  this  time  our  parties  were 
greatly  scattered;  some  far  in  advance,  others  far  behind.  With  us  were  neither  tents 
nor  provisions ;  to  encamp  was,  hence,  impossible.  Thinking  that  the  extent  of  the 
inundation  could  not  be  great,  we  entered  the  water  and  puslied  onward.     For  a  mile, 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 


lOT 


at  least,  we  traversed  this  lake-like  sheet  of  water ;  the  mules  wading  to  their  knees 
at  every  step,  and  still  the  chains  of  lightning  that  seemed  to  encircle  us  showed,  far 
as  the  eye  could  reach,  nothing  but  water.  Yes,  there  was  one  spot  of  land  visible — 
Signal  Mountain,  about  five  miles  distant — and,  after  a  brief  consultation,  we  turned 
towards  it.  Wandering  about  at  night  in  an  unheard-of  lake,  not  knowing  into  Avhat 
gulf  the  next  step  might  plunge  us,  would  have  been  sufficiently  romantic,  without 
the  storm,  which  still  raged  unabated,  the  lightning,  which  blinded,  and  the  thunder, 
which  stunned  us.  At  length  the  camp-fire  of  the  advanced  party  was  discovered,  and 
served  as  a  beacon  to  lead  us  safely  into  port.  The  tired  mules  loudly  expressed  their 
gladness  at  reaching  terra  firma,  and  finding,  twenty-five  miles  from  Cariso  Creek,  a 
resting-place  at  camp.  Tliere  is  no  grass  here,  but  a  rank  growth  of  what  is  called 
careless  weed  is  very  abundant.  This  affords  little  n  'triment.  The  hungry  animals, 
however,  prefer  weeds  to  nothing.  At  11  P.  M.  the  stars  were  shining  brightly,  and 
scarcely  a  cloud  was  to  be  seen.  Lieutenant  Coiuis,  commander  of  the  escort,  thinks 
that  during  the  storm  he  felt  an  carth(piakc. 

Morning,  SejU.  23(/,  showed  our  encampment  to  be  upon  the  banks  of  a  lx?autiful 
little  sheet  of  water,  called,  by  the  emigrants,  "  New  Lake."  Kearney's  route,  Cooke's 
and  Grahcam's  trails,  must  all  have  been  north  of  this  lake,  or  this  body  of  water  would 
have  been  seen.  The  water  is  fresh,  but  in  position  it  is  far  from  the  Salt  Lake  laid 
down  upon  Emory's  map. 

The  prominent  mountain  lying  .about  four  miles  south  and  ten  degrees  east  from 
camp,  and  apparently  two  thousand  feet  in  height,  must  serve  as  a  beacon  to  travellers 
crossing  the  Colorado,  and  may  probably  be  found  a  convenient  point  from  which  to 
flash  gunpowder  for  the  detennination  of  the  difference  of  longitude  l)etween  San 
Diego  and  the  mouth  of  Rio  Gila.  Hence  it  may  be  called  "  Signal  Mountain,"  and 
this  lake  so  near  its  fort,  " Signal  Lake."  The  accompanying  hasty  sketches  give 
rough  views  of  both  lake  and  nioimtain.'  The  former  is  aljout  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in 
length,  and  a  hundred  yards  wide,  depth  not  ascertained.  Mud-hens  were  the  only 
navigators  visible.  The  southern  bank  is  high,  and  sprinkled  with  mizquite  trees. 
Upon  the  north  is  marsh,  with  careless  weed.  At  its  eastern  extremity,  the  lake 
communicates  with  a  little  bayou,  the  course  of  which  is  distinctly  marked  toward  the 
southeast  Avith  mizquite.  This  is  a  portion  of  the  stream  which  has  been  termed  by 
the  emigrants  "  New  River." 

Left  Signal  Lake  at  8  A.  M.,  hoping  to  find  grass  at  our  next  stopping-place.  There 
is  a  trail  ufron  each  bank  of  the  bayou.  Proceeding  in  a  general  E.  S.  E.  course,  we 
crossed  the  stream  at  a  distance  of  five  or  six  miles  from  the  lake.  At  this  point,  the 
banks  were  steep,  the  bed  of  the  stream  from  ten  to  twenty  feet  in  width,  and  ten  feet 
below  the  surface  of  the  surrounding  plateau.  The  depth  of  the  water  was  less  than 
a  foot;  and  there  was  no  current,  for,  in  many  spots  above,  the  channel  was  dry,     A 


Viilo  note,  p.  105. 


108 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


J     .1 


I''     M 


few  miles  beyond  tlie  bayou,  we  struck  the  Ijorder  of  a  large  grove  of  niizquite,  where 
we  found  great  quantities  of  beans.  Here  were  first  found  shells  of  the  fresh-water 
muscle.  Hares  and  many  partridges  were  seen.  The  deep  channel  of  New  River 
again  appeared  with  more  water  than  before.  Twelve  miles  from  Signal  Lake,  we 
again  struck  an  angle  of  the  river,  where  the  banks  were  low  and  the  stream  nearly 
fifty  yards  wide.  The  water  was  sweet,  apparently  deep,  and  silvery  fish,  as  large  as 
l^erch,  were  seen  in  it.  The  scene  from  this  place  is  roughly  represented  in  the 
accompanying  sketch.'  As  we  approached  our  destination  for  the  night,  the  sands  of 
the  desert  ga^e  place  to  green  patches  of  grass.  At  sunset,  we  encamix-d  about 
eighteen  miles  from  Signal  Lake,  at  a  jwint  on  this  river  called,  par  excellence,  New 
River,  the  oasis  of  the  desert,  where  sweet  water  and  excellent  grass  are  abundant. 

Monday,  Sept.  2\tli,  half  an  hour  after  sunrise.  Thermometer,  72°,  Barometer, 
30.119  inches.  The  grass  here  is  good,  and  so  abundant  that  we  will  be  enabled  to 
wait  here  for  our  remaining  trains,  and  recruit  the  weary  animals.  We  are  now  in 
the  midst  of  the  desert,  and  at  the  recruiting  place  of  all  travellers.  The  white  tents 
of  the  numerous  emigrants  give  the  place  quite  the  air  of  a  village.  The  grass  upon 
the  plains  is  short,  green,  and  tender.  Upon  the  banks  of  the  stream  it  grows  tall  and 
thick.  Dr.  PeiTy,  the  Iwtanist,  thinks  the  grass  a  new  species,  which  he  proposes  to 
call  "  Chrondrosium  Desutorum."  Although  the  river  bears  no  marks  of  being  new — 
as  its  name  implies,  the  grass  which  grows  in  its  vicinity  has  probably  but  lately  made 
its  appearance  upon  the  desert.  A  change  seems  passing  over  this  region,  rain  becomes 
more  abundant,  niizquite  grows,  nnd  careless  weed  springs  up,  soon  to  give  place  to 
more  tender  herbage. 


New  RivKR  Jokn-ada,  Sei^t.  2^)fli,  1849  — 

G"  A.  M.        9"  A.  M. 
Green's  Syphon  Barometer,  No.  222.  .  .29.935  in.. .  .30.014  in. 

Attached  thermometer 68°..5 94°.5 

Detached  Thermometer 09° 98" 


]2''M.  .'J"  P.M.         CP.M. 

.30.000  in. . .  .29.908  in. . .  .29.880  in. 

lOO'.S 104°.5 95° 

,104° 108° 98° 


(Observed  with  Fox's  Dip  Circle  for  Magnetic  Inclination  and  Intensity.) 

Sept.  2Qtk.  A  sunri.se.  Thermometer,  75° ;  barometer,  29.880  inches.  This  day 
made  a  reconnoissance  in  the  vicinity  of  New  River.  Three  and  a  half  miles  S.  S.  E. 
from  camp,  crossed  the  bed  of  New  River  upon  dry  ground.  Careless  weed  and  grass 
very  luxuriant.  The  bank  of  the  mizquite  grove  was  gay  with  the  songs  of  small 
birds.  South,  the  mountain  range,  patches  of  green  grass,  with  here  and  there  a 
kreosote  plant,  appeared.  All  else  was  hard  clay,  baked  and  cracked  in  the  sun  to 
appear  like  a  pavement  of  wood.  Every  where,  near  the  banks  of  the  stream,  the 
Planorbus  and  other  fresh-water  shells  have  been  found  in  abundance ;  and  here  small 
volutes  covered  the  ground,  and  in  some  places  were  heaped  up  in  such  quantities  as 
to  appear  like  snow.     The  heat  was  intense.     An  astonishing  mirage  often  presented 

'  Vide  note,  p.  105. 


il 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 


109 


to  view  the  appearance  of  water ;  as  we  api)roache(l,  there  seemed  to  be  a  bank  of 
trees  reflected  distinctly  from  the  smooth  surfiice  below.  The  illusion  faded  away  as 
we  drew  near,  to  reapiiear  in  the  distance.  Eight  miles  from  camp,  the  river  inii^ded 
further  progress,  being  fifty  yards  wide,  and  apparently  deep.  Mud-hens  were  swim- 
ming on  its  surface,  and  herons  with  their  long  bills  were  dipping  for  fish. 

Dr.  Parry  went  to  the  mountains  tonlay,  by  taking  a  course  nearly  S.  W.  lie 
crossed  no  streams  except  the  one  at  camp.  The  foot  of  the  hills  was  .sprinkled  with 
locust  trees,  but  the  mountains  seemed  destitute  of  vegetation. 

St'pt.  21th,  at  sunrise.  — Thermometer  70°,  Barometer  29.814  in.  At  Sf'  P.  M. 
recommenced  our  journey.  Two  miles  from  New  River  our  route  lay  over  a  level 
plain,  green  with  the  characteristic  grass,  and  the  Laurea  Mexicana.  Grass  by 
degrees  gave  way  to  drifting  sand ;  and  buttes  covered  with  green  shrubs  alone  broke 
the  monotony  of  the  desert.  Five  miles  from  camp  we  crossed  the  dry  bed  of  an 
ancient  stream,  with  steep  banks,  and  a  sandy  level  bed  ten  feet  below  the  surface  of 
the  desert,  and  one  hundi-ed  and  eighty  feet  wide.  Mizquite  lined  its  banks,  while 
kreosote  and  wild-sage  s[)rinkled  the  valley. 

Eight  miles  from  New  River  we  encamped  at  the  "  Lagoon,"  where  we  found  water, 
but  no  grass  or  beans  for  the  animals. 

Si'j^t.  2St/i.  —  Left  the  "  Lagoon"  at  4''  A.  M.,  and  by  the  aid  of  Venus,  whose  light 
was  so  strong  as  to  cast  a  decided  shadow,  we  ascended  a  bank  to  the  upi)er  desert, 
leaving  in  the  valley  upon  our  right,  one  and  a  half  miles  from  camp,  the  "  Second 
Wells."  We  moved  on  east  over  the  desert,  covered  with  pebbles  of  jasjjer  or  deei>- 
drifting  sand,  and  without  g'wells ;  with  no  green  thing  to  relieve  the  eye  save  the 
Laurea  Mexicana,  which  covets  solitude.  Twenty  miles  brought  us  again  uiwn  the 
steep  sand-banks  which  long  hatl  bounded  our  horizon.  We  descended  eighty  to  one 
hundred  feet,  into  a  muzquite-covered  cafiada,  or  valley,  extending  from  this  jwint  about 
twenty  miles  in  width  to  the  Rio  Colorado.  Upon  this  lower  plain,  where  were  found 
the  same  fresh-water  shells  as  distinguished  the  region  of  New  River,  we  pursued  a 
N.  E.  course,  parallel  to  the  bank  which  bounds  the  desert  proper,  for  seven  miles, 
to  the  three  "  Wells."  Here  we  encamped,  twentj-seven  miles  from  the  Lagoon. 
The  wells  are  dug  ten  feet  deep,  at  the  bottom  of  a  small  natural  basin,  which  seems 
scooped  from  the  plain. 

At  the  camp  of  the  "  Three  Wells,"  twelve  miles  west  from  the  crossing  of  the  Rio 
Colorado,  1849,  September  28th,  at  S^  l-j""  P.  M.,  there  occurred  an  earthquake.  The 
oscillatory  motion  was  from  east  to  west.  It  shook  the  tents,  spilled  water  from  a 
nearly  full  bucket,  awoke  those  who  were  a.Hleep,  and  frightened  many  of  those  who 
were  awake.     The  rocking  motion  continued  about  two  minutes. 

Se2)t.  20 th.  — At  5i^  A.  M.,  left  "Three  Wells,"  and  kept  along  the  foot  of  the 
sand-banks,  a  little  N.  of  east,  for  eight  miles.  Met  many  emigrants  with  women  and 
children,  facing  the  desert  with  cheerful  looks.     Frank  says  "  that  the  happiest  set  of 


110 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY, 


fellows  he  lias  ever  seen  uix)n  the  desert,  was  that  encamped  at  '  The  Wells'  last  night 
with  their  wives  and  children." 

At  the  fork  of  the  road  we  were  met  by  our  old  guide  Tomaso,  who  had  l)ecn 
despatched  to  warn  the  Indians  of  our  approach.  He  was  accompanied  by  Santiago, 
chief,  and  the  principal  men  of  the  band  of  Yumas,  which  occupies  the  village  at  the 
lower  crossing  of  the  Colorado.  Santiago  wore  a  blue  great-coat,  and  a  fancy  cotton 
handkerchief  bound  his  head.  His  legs  and  feet  were  bare ;  otiiers  were  clad  in  the 
simple  breech-cloth.  All  weix»  mounted  on  spirited  horses.  The  road  up  to  the  bank 
to  the  left,  is  the  emigrant  trail  over  the  dceiMlrifting  sands  of  the  desert.  Taking 
the  more  circuitous  route  to  the  right,  we  were  escorted  by  the  Indians  a  short 
distance,  to  their  village  in  the  cauada,  luxuriant  with  maize  and  melons.  We  were 
at  once  surrounded  by  great  numljers  of  Indian  men  and  women,  evincing  friendliness, 
curiosity,  and  intelligence.  The  women  are  generally  fat,  and  their  dress  consists  of  a 
fringe  made  of  strips  of  bark  bound  around  the  hips,  and  hanging  loosely  to  the 
middle  of  tlie  thighs.  The  men  are  large,  muscular,  and  well-formed.  Tiieir 
countenances  are  pleasing,  and  seem  lighted  by  intelligence.  I  doulit  whether 
America  can  boast  of  a  finer  race  of  Indians.  Their  warriors  wear  the  white  breech- 
cloth,  and  their  hair  hanging  in  plaits  to  the  middle  of  their  backs,  is  adorned  with 
eagle -feathers  and  the  rattle  of  a  rattlesnake.  They  are  excjuisite  horsemen,  and 
carry  their  Ijow  and  lance  with  inimitable  grace.  A  dozen  of  these  warriors  conducted 
us  beyond  their  village  three  miles,  through  fields  of  maize,  and  groves  of  alamo  and 
willow  to  the  Rio  Colorado,  where  we  encamped ;  twelve  miles  Ir'Iow  where  the  Rio 
Gila  unites  its  "sea-green  waters"  with  the  rigiitly-named  Colorado. 

Until  October  1st  we  remained  at  the  lower  crossing  of  the  Colorado,  waiting  for  a 
road  to  be  cut  upon  the  right  bank,  five  miles  to  the  emigrant  crossing.  Our  Indian 
neighbors  were  very  sociable,  bringing  us  grass,  Ix'ans,  melons,  and  scpiashes;  for 
which  they  received  in  return,  tobacco  or  money.  Old  Santiago,  their  chief,  could  not 
speak  Spanish,  and  so  our  guide  Tonuiso  was  made  interpreter.  There  were  also  here 
a  few  of  the  Co-mo-ya  Indians  from  the  desert  or  San  Felipe,  and  they  could 
converse  with  us.  Santiago  and  his  people  professed  great  friendship  for  Americans 
in  general,  and  us  in  particular.  They  had  never  stolen  from  the  emigrants,  nor 
maltreated  them  in  any  way ;  but  the  Indians  higher  up,  near  the  mouth  of  the  Gila, 
they  represented  as  being  a  desperate  set  of  rascals.  They  plundered  the  emigrants 
of  what  they  could  not  steal.  The  day  before,  a  German  had  been  decoyed  away  from 
his  part}^  and  murdered.  They  had  even  come  to  oiwn  hostility  with  some  parties  of 
the  emigrants,  and  fouglit  pitched  battles ;  and,  as  they  numbered  from  five  to  ten 
thousand  people,  they  were  always  victorious.  These  accounts  seemed  the  more 
probable,  as  they  agreed  with  those  given  by  the  emigrants  themselves.  Santiago 
concluded  by  requesting  us  to  remain  Avith  him,  as  we  were,  as  he  said,  too  few  and 
too  weak  to  cope  with  those  at  the  mouth  of  the  Gila. 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 


Ill 


The  ja«i.s  of  our  road  along  the  bank  of  the  Colorado,  was  an  Indian  foot-path, 
which  Avoiind  around  every  tree  that  time  had  thrown  across  its  ancient  track, 
doubling  the  true  distance. 

Piuising  through  a  ft)rest  of  cotton-wood  and  willow,  we  came  to  the  foot  of  "  Pilot 
Knob,"  and  having  crossed  a  spur  which  extends  to  the  river,  found  ourselves  ui)on 
the  bank  at  the  emigrant  crossing.  Here  we  encamjied.  Pilot  Knob  is  an  isolated 
mountain,  and  rises  nl)ove  ns  to  the  height  of  about  fifteen  hundred  feet.  We  ascend 
the  highest  peak  to  fire  rockets,  and  watch  for  signals  from  the  Sierra  beyond  the 
desert. 

Tuesday,  Od.  2il,  1849.  — Left  the  foot  of  Pilot  Knob,  and  travelled  on  through 
groves  of  miz([uite,  upon  the  banks  of  the  Colorado ;  not  an  Indian  had  we  seen  since 
leaving  the  village  of  Siintiago;  but  Tomas^o,  with  some  alarm,  pointed  out  fresh  foot- 
prints in  the  path  we  followed.  We  emerged  up<jn  the  river.  The  branching  paths 
were  soon  after  li)st.  A  densely-wootled  ravine  rendercd  it  imjwssiljle  to  follow  the 
immediate  bank  of  the  ri\er.  In  search  of  the  way,  I  soon  found  myself  separated 
from  the  escort,  and  alone  following  a  well-trodden  path.  Eager  to  reach  my 
destination,  I  pushed  on  for  an  Indian  guide.  At  length  the  winding  path  led  me  into 
a  village  of  the  Yumas.  As  I  rode  to  the  principal  hut,  without  an  interpreter,  I  felt 
it  was  imprudent  thus  to  throw  my.self  into  the  power  of  these  savages.  They  at  once 
surrounded  me.  One,  with  an  emerald  iwndant  from  his  nose,  held  the  bridle  of  my 
mule,  some  placed  with  my  pistols,  others  handled  my  sword.  Seeming  to  put 
perfect  confidence  in  their  honesty,  I  nevertheless  watched  them  narrowly,  while  I 
endeavored  to  explain,  in  Spanish,  the  object  of  my  visit.  Ilim  with  the  jewelled 
nose  I  found  to  be  Anton,  a  petty  chief,  or  captain  of  his  village.  lie  understood  but 
little  of  Spanish.  Soon  there  rode  up  upon  a  .spirited  horse,  an  Indian,  whom  I  found 
to  be  a  Comoya  from  San  Felipe,  called  "  Mai  Anton,"  and  with  him  I  could  conver.se. 
They  having  consented  to  guide  me  to  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Gila,  I  shook  off  the 
curious  men,  women,  and  children  that  nearly  buried  my  mule,  and  rode  on ;  I  passed 
through  large  patches  of  maize,  melons,  zandias,  and  squashes,  leaving  villages  to  the 
left  and  to  the  right.  Lost  in  the  maze  of  paths,  and  being  unable  to  elicit  a  Avord 
from  the  grim-looking  Indians  I  met,  I  turned  for  my  guides.  Soon  they  appeared, 
coming  at  full  run ;  the  chief  in  advance,  armed  with  a  musket,  and  Mai  Anton 
followed  upon  his  wild  pony,  gracefully  swinging  over  his  head  the  noose  of  his  lariat. 
The  chief  then  led  the  way,  while  the  other  followed  me  through  deep  ravines  and 
rude  plantations.  At  length,  having  no  fancy  for  sharing  the  fate  of  my  namesake  in 
Mexico,  I  ordered  Mai  Anton  with  his  lariat  in  advance.  "  Tuirc  v  un  bon 
Corazon  ?"  he  inquired  as  he  passed.  I  assured  him  of  protection  as  long  as  Americans 
werc  well-treated  by  them.  They  led  me  two  miles,  to  the  junction  of  the  Rio  Gila 
with  the  Colorado,  where  I  found  a  hill,  excellent  for  an  astronomical  ob.icrvatory. 
Eating  a  melon  Anton  hatl  gathered  for  me,  I  returned  and  conductetl  the  whole  party 


112 


PIIYSU' 


KOrrllAI'll  Y. 


\ 


i 


liithor;  i'iK'niii|X'»l,  pliunl  tlio  transit  .^  "c  i.u'ridiaii  u|M)n  a  ti'inpornrv  stand  of  stone, 
and  ohsorved  tlie  same  ni^lit  tlio  passiigu  uf  lx>tl>  limbs  of  tlie  m<"  " ,  and  several 
mcKin  culniinatin<;  stars. 

Wednesday,  ()ft.  Hd. — To-<lay  came  Pablo,  grand  chief  of  the  Yumas,  with  his 
pcarlet  coat  trimmed  with  {fold  lace,  his  ejianlettes  of  silver  wire,  and,  to  crown  all, 
green  goggles.  His  legs  and  feet  wen*  bui-e.  but  he  did  not  allow  that  to  detract  from 
the  dignity  of  his  manner.  Tomaso  nshered  him  in  and  acted  as  interpreter,  translating 
my  Spanish  into  Indian  for  him,  and  his  Indian  into  Spanish  for  mc.  I  explained  to 
him,  that  their  territory  now  la-longed  to  the  United  States;  that  the  government  took 
nn  interest  in  the  welfare  of  the  Indians  who  were  honest  and  well-disjiosed ;  that  we 
were  disfjosed  to  live  in  amity  with  them,  but  were  ])repared  to  chastise  those  who 
were  inclined  to  evil.  He  promised  that  his  jK'ople  should  not  steal  from,  or  otherwise 
hijure  Americans,  and  I  gave  him  those  j)resents  that  I  had  prepared.  Having  taken 
a  gliiss  of  agna-ardiente,  his  tongue  was  loosed,  his  dignity  was  overcome,  and  he  no 
longer  needed  an  interpreter.     Pablo  spoke  Spanish  better,  by  far,  than  I  could. 

Oi't.  4t/i,  1841). — Many  Indians  in  camp;  all,  as  I  ever  expected  to  find  them,  most 
peaceably  disposed.  Bows,  and  arrows  pointed  with  jasper,  guns  and  pistols,  (mostly 
broken  and  diseanled  by  the  emigrants,)  are  constantly  brought  into  camp.  There  is, 
however,  perfect  confidence  among  all  parties. 

Friday,  OrL  iitli,  1849.  To-day  the  Indians  of  the  Yuma  tril)e  held  a  grand  council 
in  honor  of  our  arrival ;  and  as  Pablo  Coelum,  the  great  chief  in  epaulettes  and  green 
goggles,  had  been  chosen  under  the  Mexican  reign,  they  determined  to  show  their 
adherence  to  the  United  States  by  deposing  their  old  chief,  and,  in  a  republican 
manner,  electing  a  new  one.  The  successful  candidate  was  our  old  friend  Santiago, 
captain  of  the  band  of  Cuclmns  at  the  lower  crossing.  He  seems  a  good  old  man,  and 
worthy  of  his  honors.  Upon  his  election,  he  was  escorted  to  my  tent  for  the  customary 
presents,  and  promised  good  faith  towards  all  Americans. 

Tomaso  soon  returned  with  three  minor  chiefs,  or  "Captaines  de  los  Cuchancs," 
Anastasio,  Anton,  and  Pasqual.  The  band  of  Anton  lives  eight  or  ten  miles  alx)ve  us, 
and  is  famed  for  theft,  robbery,  and  murder.  Anton  is  one  of  their  orators,  and 
replied  to  me  in  a  sjwech  of  half  an  hour's  length :  but  Tomaso  pretended  that  he  did 
not  understand  the  Cuchan  language,  and  would  not  translate  it. 

Oct.  1th,  1849. — Took  a  walk  into  the  villages  to  see  how  the  Indians  live.  They 
all  knew  mc,  and  received  me  kindly  enough  into  their  family  circles,  composed  of 
about  a  dozen  men,  women,  and  children,  sitting  or  lying  upon  the  ground,  under  the 
shade  of  a  flat  roof  of  branches  of  trees  supported  by  posts  at  the  four  comers.  The 
women,  dressed  in  girdles  of  bark  stripiwd  into  thongs,  and,  partially  braided,  hanging 
in  a  fringe  to  the  thighs,  and  ornamented  with  many  strings  of  shell  or  glass  beads, 
were  making  a  mush  of  zandias,  (water-melons,)  or  grinding  grass  seed  into  flour. 

The  men,  with  breech-cloths,  or  jxjrhaps  a  shirt  cast  off"  by  the  emigrants,  were 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


113 


ornamented  with  rings  in  their  noses  and  eagles'  feathers  in  their  hair.  Tlie  children 
wore  no  covering  except  what  nature  gave  them,  but  were  decked  witli  loads  of  heads 
upon  their  necks,  and  small  strings  of  the  same  were  inserted  through  their  cars. 

The  lalxjrious  part  of  their  toilet,  that  in  which  all  their  taste  and  skill  are  put  in 
requisition,  consists  in  painting.  Warriors  dye  their  faces  jet  black,  with  a  strip  of  red 
from  the  forehead,  down  the  nose,  and  across  the  chin.  Women  and  young  men 
usually  paint  with  red,  and  onuunent  their  chins  with  dots  or  stripes  of  blue  or  black. 
Around  their  eyes  are  circles  of  black.  Their  bodies  are  generally  of  a  dark  ix'd,  and 
IKjlished  with  an  oily  substance,  so  as  to  resemble  well-cleaned  mahogany.  The  fiico 
and  bo«ly  are  sometimes  fancifully  striix'd  with  bhick.  Of  their  hair  they  are  quite 
proud,  and  take  great  care  in  dressing  and  trimming  it.  It  falls  naturally  from  the 
crown  of  the  head,  and  is  neatly  and  squarely  trimmed  in  front  to  reach  to  the  eye- 
brows. The  rest  is  nuitted  into  plaits,  and  falls  upon  the  back,  reaching  nearly  to  the 
ground. 

Strings  of  broken  shells  called  "pook,"  are  highly  valued  among  them.  These 
consist  of  circular  pieces  of  sco-shell,  with  holes  very  nicely  driven  in  the  centre. 
They  are  very  ancient,  and  were  formerly  used  as  money.  A  string  is  now  worth  a 
horse.  An  Indian  dandy  is  never  dressed  without  them,  and  the  nnmlwr  of  strings 
worn  indicates  the  wealth  of  the  iwssessor.  Tlie  figure  of  the  young  dandy,  though 
large,  is  so  faultless  in  its  proportions,  that,  when  I  have  seen  him  dressed  in  his  clean 
white  breech-cloth,  with  no  other  covering  to  his  carefully  p.aintcd  person,  except  the 
graceful  plume  upon  his  head,  and  the  wide  bracelet  of  leather,  with  buckskin  fringe, 
and  bright  brass  buttons,  which  serve  as  mirrors,  upon  his  left  ami,  I  could  but 
applaud  the  scorn  with  which  he  looked  upon  European  dress,  and  the  resolute  firmness 
with  which  he  refused  the  profiered  gift  of  pants. 

The  Yumas,  or  as  those  near  the  mouth  of  the  Gila  call  themselves,  Cuchans,  api)car 
to  be  skilled  in  none  of  the  arts.  They  have  neither  sheep,  cattle,  nor  poultry.  Horses 
and  a  few  pet  lap-dogs,  are  the  only  domestic  animals  found  at  their  ranches.  The 
men  are  warriors,  and  occasionally  fish  and  hunt.  The  women  not  only  attend  to  their 
household  duties,  but  .also  cultivate  fields  of  maize  and  melons,  and  collect  grass-seed, 
which  they  pound  to  flour  for  bread. 

Returning  to  camp,  I  found  the  deposed  chief  Pablo  Coelum,  and  his  friend.  Captain 
Anton,  loaded  with  presents  of  melons,  for  whicl'  in  return  was  expected  tobacco,  red 
flannel,  &c. 

Learned  from  Pablo  many  words  of  the  Yuma  language.  Rio  Colorado  is  in  their 
tongue  "  Hahwith-e-charwhut,"  meaning  as  in  Spanish,  red  river.  Rio  Gila  they  call 
"  Hah-quorsu-ethel,"  meaning  salt  river.  The  water  is  indeed  brackish,  and  salt-water 
plants  grow  upon  its  banks. 

Oct.  12th,  1849. — To-day  large  numbers  of  Yumas  have  started  upon  an  expedition 
against  the  Mar-i-co-pas.    They  are  mounted  on  good  horses,  which  they  stride  without 

pt.  n.— 15 


114 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRArilY, 


a  saddle,  and  manage  with  a  lialter.  Their  coal-bhick  faces,  and  striped  liodies  and 
legs,  give  them  a  fierce  aspect.  Their  hair  is  no  longer  suffered  to  hang  l(X)sely,  hut  is 
bound  with  strips  of  scarlet  woollen  cloth,  with  long  ends  streaming  behind.  They 
are  led  by  their  famous  war-chief,  "  Caballo-en-Pilo,"  and,  with  bow  in  hand,  and 
quiver  of  arrows  at  their  back,  they  look  quite  formidable. 

Monday,  Oct.  Ibth.  —  Arrived  Colonel  Collyer,  Collector  of  the  jiort  of  San  Francisco, 
escorted  l)y  Captain  Thorne,  with  thirty  dragoons.  Under  their  protection  is  also  a 
party  of  emigrants  comnumded  by  Mr.  Audulxm  the  youuger,  naturalist,  and  Lieutenant 
Browning  of  the  Navy. 

Mr.  Langdon  Haven,  and  a  son  of  Commodore  Sloat,  were  with  this  party,  which 
Avas  suffering  for  the  want  of  provisions. 

Oct.  \f>tli. — This  evening  has  furni.shed  a  sad  occurrence.  Brevet  Captain  Thorne, 
son  of  Mr.  Herman  Tliorne  of  New  York,  while  superintending  the  transportation  of 
his  party  across  the  Rio  Colorado,  just  below  the  junction  of  the  Rio  Gila,  was  thrown 
into  the  river  l)y  the  upsetting  of  hii'.  heavily-laden  boat,  and  was  drowned.  The 
current  of  the  river  was  so  rapid,  that  all  exertions,  even  those  of  tlie  Yuma  Indians, 
the  best  swinuners  in  the  world,  were  unavailing.  Captain  Thorne  was  succeeded  in 
the  connnand  of  the  escort  by  Lieutenant  Beckwith. 

Oct.  Vdtli.  —  Mr.  Ingraham  has  just  informed  me  that  the  wtwden  1x)X  in  which  is 
kept  Chronometer  No.  710,  cracked  into  pieces  last  night  wliile  used  in  keeping  time. 
This  is  another  proof  of  the  exceeding  dryness  of  this  climate,  and  I  regret  that  I 
have  no  hygrometer  to  determine  it.  All  the  lH)xes  in  which  the  instruments  were 
packed  are  being  destroyed.  The  nicely-seasoned  and  well-finislied  cashes  made  in 
England  many  years  since  for  instruments  of  Troughtou  and  Simms,  have  shrunk  so 
as  not  to  admit  tiie  original  contents. 

A  few  nights  since,  while  I  was  reading  the  micrometer  of  the  zenith  sector,  the 
horn  with  which  my  reading  lens  was  incased  suapj)ed,  and  flew  from  my  fingers  in 
thi-ee  pieces.  The  peculiar  state  of  the  atmosphere  was  the  only  cause  assignable  for 
such  an  occurrence. 

Oct.  2t)(h. — C«)ntinued  the  survey  at  the  junction  of  the  two  rivers.  The  Rio 
Gila,  a  short  distance  from  its  mouth,  is  so  shallow  tliat  the  Indians  wade  across  it. 
Tlie  Colorado  at  the  ferry,  a  short  distance  below  the  junction,  is  about  twelve  feet 
deep.  Tlie  waters  of  the  Colorado  are  almost  opaque  with  cliiy  tinctured  with  the  red 
oxide  of  iron.  But  the  water  is  sweet,  and  when  allowed  to  rest,  liecomes  limpid. 
The  waters  of  the  Gila  are  covered  with  a' sediment  nearly  black,  and  have  a  bracltisli 
taste;  making  oppropriate  the  Yuma  name  for  it — Tlarfjunrsiul  —  meaning  "salt 
water."'  Both  rivei-s  are  rapid,  and  their  junction  forms  a  distinctly  marked  luid 
nearly  straight  line,  leading  from  the  east  bank  of  the  Gila  to  the  channel  of  the 
Colorado.     They  unite,  and,  singularly  enough,  contract  to  one-fiftii  the  width  of  the 


Oct.  7tli,  p.  1 1.1,  lliis  river  is  ciiUrd  "  nuli-qmi-BU-ctlicl."  —  II.  11.  S. 


w.;<'^ 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


UL 


Colorado,  above,  in  order  to  leap  through  a  narrow  gorge,  which  some  convulsion  of 
nature  htis  torn  through  an  isolated  Iiill.  Upon  this  hill,  eighty  feet  jierpendicularly 
almost  al)ove  the  water,  stands  our  observatory. 

Ckt.  27//*. — Pasqual,  one  of  the  war-chiefs,  and  Captain  Anton,  tell  me  that  thoy 
are  in  daily  expectation  of  an  attack  from  the  Maricopas.  The  Yumas  deserve  chastise- 
ment; for,  in  their  late  expedition,  they  surprised  their  enemies  and  brought  ofl' captive 
two  Indian  boys,  wliom  they  afterwards  sold  as  slaves  to  the  Mexicans. 

Oct.  28th. — Thronged,  as  usual,  with  Indian  visiters.  Tiiey  say  that  tlie  Maricopas 
came  in  sight  of  camp  yesterday ;  but,  seeuig  United  States  ti\)ops,  dared  not  attack 
the  Yumas. 

Oft.  SOt/i. — This  morning  at  about  four  o'cl<x;k  there  was  great  alarm  among  the 
Ouchans  (Yumas)  who  live  up  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Colorado.  Our  whole  camp  was 
aroused  l)y  their  siiouting  and  firing.  By  daylight  they  were  swinuning  the  river  in 
crowds;  men  witii  their  horses,  and  women  with  their  <'hildivn  ;  all  crying  out  lustily 
"Maricope  —  Mar-i-<'ope ! "  Every  hill-top  was  crowded  with  armed  warriors,  and 
others  were  riding  hither  and  thither;  why  or  wherefore,  nono  seemed  to  know.  At 
length,  Anton  told  me  that  nnmy  Maricopes  had  attacked  them,  and  killed  one  Yuma. 
By  ten  o'clock  A.  M.  our  camp  was  deserted  by  the  Indians,  and  for  the  rest  of  the 
day  not  one  has  Iteeu  seen. 

The  soUliers  tiiiuk  the  whole  story  of  Maricopes  a  ruse,  and  apprehended  an  attack 
t(Hiiglit.     Dr.  Coutts  has  increased  the  number  of  sentinels  for  tiie  night. 

Oct.  3l.s/. — Indians  have  been  to-day  sociable  as  formerly ;  each  chief  Itringing 
preseuts  of  excellent  melons.  Among  them  <'aiiie,  for  the  first  time,  the  great 
war-chief,  "  Cabelliven-Pilo."  I  made  him  a  small  present,  which  secured  his 
friendship. 

Nov.  2d. — Among  my  early  Indian  visiters  this  morning,  is  one;  whom  the  whole 
trilH!  calls  an  hermaphrodite.  She  is  gigantic  in  size,  nuiscular,  and  well-i)ro|)ortioned. 
Her  bivasts  are  not  developed  like  tiiose  of  a  woman,  but  she  dresses  like  one  of  the 
gentler  sex,  and  it  is  said  she  coiialiits  witii  a  man.  Slie  is  in  dispositiou  mild,  and 
otlen  hangs  her  head  with  a  mental  l)lush  at  tlie  jokes  ol'  iier  companions. 

From  Pablo  Coelam,  l,y  birth  a  Comogei,  but  formerly  chief  oi"  the  Vinnas,  or 
Cuchans;  from  Jose  Antonia,  whose  father  was  a  Mexican,  l)ut  born  of  a  Yuma 
mother,  and  always  living  with  the  tribe;  ironi  Tonuiso,  chief  of  the  Diegunos;  from 
Antonia  and  Mai-Antonio,  intelligent  Indians  from  San  Felipe;  and  I'roni  otiier  Indians 
with  whom  I  could  conver  e,  I  have  collected  all  information  possible  ivgarding  the 
tribes  of  which  they  \new. 

The  term  "Yuma"  signifies  ''sons  of  the  river."  anil  is  a])plie(l  oidy  to  those  born 
upcm  the  banks  of  the  Uio  Colorado.  Tlie  Yumas  are  diviih'd  into  live  lesser  trilies  or 
bunds :  namely, 

1st.,  Cnvltaiifi ;  numljering  about  fivv  thousand  persons,  and  living  in  villages  upon 


116 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY, 


i;}  '/ 


if  III 


both  banks  of  the  Rio  Colorado,  witliin  about  twenty  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Rio  Gila.     They  are  a  noble  race ;  well  formed,  active,  and  intelligent. 

2d.,  Mah-horos.  They  are  a  great  nation,  and  live  upon  the  right  bank  higher 
up  the  Colorado,  seven  days'  journey  from  the  mouth  of  the  Rio  Gila.  Being  very 
poor,  they  wear  only  the  breech-cloth.  They  are  warriors,  and  well  armed  with  bows, 
arrows,  and  lances. 

3d.,  Hah-ical-coes.  This  great  nation  possesses  the  left  (east)  bank  of  the  Colorado, 
eight  days'  journey  above  the  junction  of  the  Rio  Gila.  I  have  been  shown  to-day, 
by  an  Indian,  a  very  good  blanket,  black  and  white  checked,  said  to  have  been  made 
by  the  Ilah-wal-coes. 

Atli.  Yiim-paio  is  the  name  of  the  tribe  which  occupies  the  left  bank  of  the 
Colorado,  six  days'  journey  above  the  junction  with  the  Rio  Gila. 

These  four  nations  speak  the  same  language,  differing  from  the  Cuchan,  and  Pablo 
says  he  can  understand  none  of  them,  except  the  Mah-haros.  They  are,  notwithstanding, 
firm  friends  and  allies  of  the  Cuchai  .'ways  assisting  them  when  at  war  with  their 
perpetual  enemies,  the  Maricopas.  ±n  hese  wars,  captives  are  made  slaves,  and  are 
for  ever  degraded.  The  mother  will  not  own  her  son  after  such  a  misfortune  has  once 
befallen  him. 

At  the  mouth  of  the  Colorado,  aljout  eighty  miles  IjoIow  the  junction  of  the  Gila,  is 
the  tribe  called  '■  Co-co-pah."  According  to  the  previous  definition,  these  also  must  be 
Yumas ;  but  they  are  enemies  of  the  Cuchans,  and  no  intercourse  exists  between  them. 
The  Gila  Indians  call  it  but  three  da}  s'  journey  to  the  country  of  the  Co-co-pahs,  and 
yet  tliey  seem  to  know  them  less,  and  fear  them  more,  than  any  other  Indians. 

There  are  upon  the  desert  west  of  the  Colorado  two  tribes  of  Indians,  called 
Cah-wec-os,  and  Co-nio-yah  or  Co-mo-yei.  Tiie  Co-mo-yahs  occupy  the  banks  of  the 
New  River,  near  the  Salt  Lake,  and  the  Cah-wec-os  live  farther  north,  ujwn  the  head- 
waters of  the  same  stream.  Pablo  himself  is  a  Co-nio-yah ;  he  was  born  upon  the 
banks  of  New  River  ("  Hah-withl-high")  of  the  desert,  emigrated  hither  twenty-five 
years  ago,  and  when  I  arrived  he  was  Captain  General  of  the  Cuchan  tribe.  Several 
Co-mo-yahs  are  here,  and  they  can  generally  Ije  distinguished  fiom  the  Cuchans  by  an 
oval  contour  of  the  face. 

Pablo  says  that  New  River  was  formerly  a  running  stream ;  that  it  rose  north  of  the 
country  of  the  Cah-wee-os,  and  flowed  into  the  Colorado  one  day's  journey  below  the 
lower  crossing  of  the  village  of  Captain  Santiago:  but,  for  some  twenty  or  t''"rty  years, 
the  wat/'r  in  it  was  merely  in  pools,  until  the  past  season,  Avhen  abundant  rains  restored 
its  former  dimensions,  and  again  water  flowed  from  the  salt  lakes  to  the  Colorado. 

One  month  lias  now  elapsed  since  my  arrival  at  this  place,  and  I  have  spent  all  my 
leisure  moments  in  studying  the  character  of  the  Indians.  I  have  visited  their 
ranchos,  and  have  daily  admitted  tliem  freely  into  my  ti'iit.  Upon  the  table  are 
always   many  little   things  curious  and  valuable  to  them,  and  men,  women,  and 


\  ill  1^' 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


117 


VtA 


children,  arc  permitted  to  examine  and  pass  them  from  hand  to  hand  without  being 
watched,  and  never,  to  my  knowledge,  have  I  lost  the  value  of  a  penny.  With  men 
shrewd  as  are  the  Cuchans,  this  might  result  from  policy;  but  if  thieving  were 
tolerated  among  them,  it  seems  strange  that  children  should  not  be  tempted  by  the 
many  curious  things  they  hau„.'ed  to  recur  to  the  habit. 

Sunday,  Xov.  ISl/i. — The  day  was  exceedingly  pleasant,  like  our  Indian  summer. 
Thermometer,  at  three  o'clock  P.  M .,  82°.  For  a  long  time,  I  have  endeavored  to 
a.scertain  what  were  the  superstitions  of  the  Cuchans ;  what  was  their  substitute  for 
religion ;  what  their  modes  and  oljjects  of  worship.  All  the  reply  I  could  get  from 
Tomaso,  and  other  Indians  who  glory  in  the  name  of  Christians,  was  "  EUos-saben- 
nadiiruada,"  (They  know  nothing  at  all ;)  and  when  I  made  them  interpret  for  me, 
with  the  pure  Yumas  that  knew  no  Spanish,  the  reply  was  still  "  nada."  "  The  Yumas 
had  no  god,  they  worshipped  nothing,  and  went  no  where  after  death."  At  length,  a 
woman  appeared  with  a  brass  medal  bearing  the  image  of  the  Virgin  Mary,  wlieu 
some  one  knelt  to  it  with  clasped  hands ;  all  looked  on  in  silence  and  apparent  awe, 
and  afterwards  expressed  their  approbation  by  saying  "  ah-hote-kah"  (good). 

To-day,  chief  Anastasio  took  up  a  French  prayer-book,  and  listened  evidently  with 
reverence  at  hearing  it  read.  lie  then  made  a  long  dissertation  in  his  own  language, 
of  which  I  understood  little,  except  that  after  death  the  body  of  a  Yuma  is  buried,  and 
his  ashes  ascend  to  heaven  ;  that  he  himself  had  a  good  heart,  and  hence  was  worth 
any  Christian. 

Thursday,  Xoc.  22(1. — The  rising  sun  dispelled  the  clouds  and  brought  a  charming 
day.  At  12  M.,  the  barometer,  by  a  sudden  fall  of  about  an  half  inch,  indicated  the 
approach  of  one  of  our  periodical  storms,  which  soon  swept  over  us.  The  wind,  as  is 
usual  at  such  times,  nearly  precipitated  our  tents  from  the  cliff  into  the  river  Inflow. 
However,  at  sunset  the  wind  moderated,  the  moon  ])eeped  from  the  clouds,  and  we 
obtained  good  lunar  observations, 

Friday,  Xar.  2mI — Having  been  employed  so  steadily  in  observing  at  night,  and 
computing  all  day,  my  health  begins  to  suffer,  and  last  nigiit  I  was  too  nervous  to 
sleep;  hence  the  wail  of  the  poor  dog,  that  nightly  howls  the  requiem  of  liia 
drowned  master,  seemed  morc  sad  to  me  tiian  ever.  When  Captain  Thorne  was  lost 
in  the  Colorado  some  weeks  since,  a  Mexican  l)oy  shared  the  same  fate.  He  left  a 
faithful  dog,  wlio  has  declined  the  alluring  invitations  of  emigrants  and  soldiers, 
preferring  rather  to  lick  the  gi-oiuid  his  nuister  last  trod,  than  accept  the  daintiest  fare 
from  a  stranger's  hand. 

Saturday,  Z)ec'.  ht,  1849. —  Having  determined,  witii  all  the  accuracy  which  two 
months'  time  could  admit,  the  latitude  (;52°.4:]'..'U".  (i.  N.)  and  longitude  (lll°.3;i'. 
04".  W.  of  Greenwich)  of  the  monument  near  the  junction  of  the  Rio  Gila  witii  (lie 
Colorado,  and  from  thence  measured  8o°.;54'.10".  2  W.  of  S.,  the  azinmth  of  the 
line  of  iwundary  leadi:  .•  to  the  Pacific  Ocean;    and   also  having  settled  with   the 


'«.; 


118 


PHYSICAL  GEOGRAPHY. 


Mexican  commission,  which  arrived  yesterday,  all  questions  relating  to  the  boundary 
at  this  point,  from  which  any  difficulty  could  be  apprehended,  we  left  the  Mexican 
gentlemen  in  charge  of  our  fixtures,  and  turned  towards  San  Diego. 

Of  late  my  time  has  been  so  much  occupied  with  professional  pui-suits,  that  I  have 
had  less  intercourse  with  the  Indians  than  formerly,  but  my  opinions  of  them  are 
little  changed  from  those  previously  expressed.  I  will  merely  add,  that  to  this  day, 
among  the  Yumas,  I  have  never  seen  anger  expressed  by  word  or  action,  or  known 
one  of  their  women  to  be  harshly  treated.  They  are  sprightly,  full  of  life,  of  gaiety 
and  good  humour. 

I  will  add  a  vocabulary  of  the  Yuma  (or  rather  Cuchan)  language.  Great  pains 
have  been  taken  to  render  it  correct.  We  endeavored,  and  some  of  us  succeeded  to  a 
certain  extent,  to  con\ersc  with  the  Indians  in  their  native  tongue. 

In  the  words  of  the  vocabulary  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  are  as  follows,  viz : 

a,  like  ah. 

e,  as  in  mc,  and  e,  as  in  met,  and  h  like  a  in  fate. 

i,  as  in  pine,  and  I,  as  in  pin. 

o,  as  in  note,  and  6,  as  in  not. 

u,  as  in  flute. 

The  syllable  over  which  the  accent  is  placed  should  be  very  strongly  pronounced. 

The  language  of  the  Yumas  seems  wanting  in  none  of  the  sounds  we  have  in 
English,  and  they  pronounce,  with  great  ease  and  distinctness,  any  English  or  Spanish 
word  which  they  hear  spoken. 


H 


VOCABULARY    OF    ABOUT    TWO    HUNDRED    AND    FIFTY 
WORDS    iN    YUMA    AND    ENGLISH. 


YiiDia  (Cuchan.)  EukUhIi. 

i-patch  (oi)  (J-pah inau. 

8CCD-}'ack     woman. 

o-sliurcbe,  or  o-so* wife. 

n'a-v^rc husband. 

L^r-uial* boy, 

me-str-b(ii* girl. 

huil-pit infant. 

lotli-uio-cul fatbcr. 

n'taiu* motbcr. 

niet-v-pdic'*' Indian. 

e-cout-such-O-rutV-o bead. 

oom-wbeltbo* bead. 

<M!6u-o* bair. 


Yuma  (Cuchau.)  Englivh. 

c-etebc bair. 

enlutcbe fuce 

ec-yA* t'.tce. 

0fc-yuK!al6cjue*  forebead. 

Hmytb'I (or) esiin-ilc    car. 

ho-iu4ic* son. 

m'-chaic* daugliter. 

Bocbe*    brother. 

am  yfick* sister. 

B-tuc-8i'ib-o,  or  oc-a-tuc-HUche chin. 

o-pulche,  or  oo-p«ilche   tongue. 

are-di5ciie teeth. 

yab-bo-iueh    beard. 


\f 


PHYSICAL    GEOGRAPHY. 


119 


Yuma  (Cuchan.)  English. 

n'3'etb'l    neck. 

ce'-8cth'l  (or)  e-seel arm. 

ce-\r(!e slioulder. 

cc-ealcho hand. 

co-salclio  a^rap fingers. 

ce-salche-calla-botohe finger-nails. 

ee-nii'it«;ho body. 

ta-wa-wiim* b<xly. 

inee-sith'l big. 

^vmetob-slip-a-slap-yab foot. 

6-inetcli  scrap toes. 

e-mce-oas-sas* toes. 

a-tan* back. 

a-pcc-arpe* bat. 

ce-6ie* bcart. 

a-w'but* blood. 

be-paitb-la'-o* town-village. 

ce-pa'b-ban ricb  man. 

co-hdte chief. 

i>-dotcbo-6o eye. 

ce-yu-suno-yd-o* eye. 

ii-bdtebe  (or)  ee-bcSs nose. 

ce-yu-qua-6fe* nioutb. 

n'yec-pab-ey-.sah-bo arrow  of  wood. 

a-ta-ciirte*    hatcbet. 

nV'-nia-ro*    knife. 

^-cal-b(ir* canoe. 

ba-witb'l,  or  ba-wdel river. 

ho-wccl-cba-wboot    Rio  Colorado. 

ba-qua-si-oel Rjo  Gila. 

n'hum-an-6cbo sboes. 

a^rbe tobacco. 

nra-ni"' sky-heaven. 

n'yattb sun. 

t'l-rup    wliLskey. 

li;ith'I-ya  (or)  hull-yi^r moon. 

klu,n-wa-taio  (or)  ImtKibar star. 

no-ma-sup (J.^y. 

n'yc-as-cup night. 

ii'yat-a-so-arpe midnight. 

mc't-n'-yiini    ligbt. 

n'yat-col-sC-o  darkness. 

esta-no-sup morning. 

n'yat-an-naie evening. 

buo-n'a-pin noon. 

"o^'ic spring. 

o-mo-ca-ehe-pile summer. 


Yuma  (Cuchan.)  EnglUh. 

ha-ti-ol autumn. 

con-niee* warrior. 

hon-o-wai*  parents. 

n'yet'l* friend. 

matro-bab<5e-6* compadre. 

n'ye-valyay bouse. 

een-ou-wa* bouse. 

ecn-ou-niiit* hut. 

ar-tim* bow. 

o-tees-a bfiw. 

n'yc-piVh arrow. 

n'yee-pah-tdb arrow  of  reed. 

sho-kine ice. 

o-mut bind. 

a-ha-tblou-o   sea. 

ha-sba-cut lake. 

ha-mut-ma-tiirre valley. 

wee-fiua-taie  (or)  ba-beo bill  or  mountain. 

ha-mut-raa-tarre  quel  marm island. 

o-wee stone. 

e'-sith'l salt. 

n'ycr-ma-ro iron. 

e'-cesh tree. 

e-ee  or  e-cetcb .' wood. 

ee-atcb-a-berrbccrrch   leaf. 

ta-soii-o    meat. 

huts horse. 

lioo-w<;e dog. 

n'ya-pin   winter. 

mit-bar wind. 

mit-har-c'o-no thunder. 

n'yiv-col-see   lightning. 

way-mah-coutcbe breceh-cloth. 

mu-b(e rain. 

ha-lilp    snow. 

n'awo-crfpo   bail. 

d-d-w6    fire. 

a-ha  , water. 

n'yat I. 

manto tbou. 

ba-britzk ho. 

co-bar-ro  (or)  cobarque no. 

ah-fih  (or)  oh yes. 

epallquo much. 

lueel-yoh    to-day. 

tcn-igh yesterday. 

qnal-n-yoquc to-morrow. 


120 


niYSICAL  GEOGRAniY. 


M'^^' 

'i'*)^^ 


] 


#. 


Vumn  (Cuchun.) 

Bin  (or)  asii'Utio 

ha-niuk  (or)  ha-vick 

lia-niook 

cha-p<tp 

Bc-mp 


huiu-linok 

puth-cnyc   

L'hip-liook    

Iium.ha-inouk 

sah-hook 

a-licr-iiiah , 

(''s-patch 

sor-tiu'h 

sab-with'l 

a-cliee 

liaur-arlk 

fiuin-cle  (or)  n'yiilk 

n-olia-whut 

lia-woo-surchc    .... 


at-so-woo-surcbe 


a-qiu'cque 

o-tair|Ui>   

o-n()e-6rj  lie   

a  li6*';-kali  (or)  a-liotk 

lia  loolk 

c-liauo  (or)  o-hrm-ac 

co-pall    

Inits-uclc 

op-colk 

<HU'-iliqfie  (koriloek)  or  n'yuc-a-yuc  . 

a-woo-noorch    

n-woo-s6rclic,  or  n'you-a-nik'k    

alKite'k 

a-ah-ochc    ...    

n'yo-piko   

as-a-o  (or)  atcli-a-m;Vm 

n-SL>o  (or)  ha-siie    

ro-nii    

n-licae  (or)  cheo-ninfl 

>t-  11118 

n  yats-lipr-sailk     

ateli-ar-scc-vii) '  i.    

a-acc-niah 

a-cc-p6re   

(jucr-quAr,  (or)  akh  ali-qucrck 


Kngllsh. 

one. 

two. 

tliree. 

four. 

fi\'e. 

sis. 

seven. 

eight. 

nine. 

ten.' 

bird. 

eagle. 

eagles'  feathers. 

feutiiers. 

fish. 

white. 

black. 

red. 

Hue. 

green  (same  as 
blueO 

yellow. 

,   great. 

,   small. 

,   good. 

,   bad. 

,  handsome. 

•  ugly- 

,  cold. 

,  warm. 

,  to  come. 

,  to  desire. 

,  very  bad. 

.  good. 

.  a  light. 

,  I  have  none. 

,  to  cat. 

,  to  drink. 

.  to  run. 

.  to  dance. 

.  to  wash. 

.  I  wi.sh. 

.  to  sing. 

.  to  sleep. 

.  to  be  sleepy. 

.  -to  speak. 


Yumn  (Cuelmn.) 

0-dok 

a-moo-hun 

au-ou-oiic 

au-uiic 

a-botlck 

n'ycc-moom  (or)  aUco-bdr-quie . 

mauiirke    

ac-cotirt 

ac-court-n'ya-mooma  . . 


a-ho-mak  (or)  marrico-tah 


-1 


fiui-yay-vay-may-deek 

yam-a-barquo  ? 

mc-cham-pau-cc-ka 

cc-yah  (ce-yaht.'i,  plural) ■! 

ho-wo-ddwk   

cs-m<''-deek 

(i-pailque-n'ya-mdok 

ehi-nict-a-quis    

ehe-mct-a-han    

ch6-met-ou-ya < 

ehe-met-toh   j 

nee-ca-cbain 

as-ce-puo    

ac-corquc 

a-b(Ue'k-a-hau-ac    

b.a-lulk-a-hau-ac 

ehiui-^n-yuch 

c'yoem-cot-a-bar-bah    

ba-bec-co-hd 

ha-bce-co-aK;his    

ha-beo-to-ciio 

ha-be-co-U 

que-you-so-win-a  and  ha-bee-quou- ) 

yeera J 

At-co-ben-fiui6-n  'yc-val-yay-yce-    ") 

mooni J 

niel-ec-k(!ot-iV 

n'yc-moom 

e-eesso  ] 

mc-tuc-a-dcck 

Bcen-yac-n'yc-hau-ao    . . , 


■•{ 


Engllnb. 

to  see. 

to  love. 

to  kill. 

to  sit. 

to  stand. 

to  go. 

paper. 

shortly. 

I  go  shortly. 

beans,  (small) 
with  black 
spots. 

how  do  you  do  ? 

who  comes  there? 

I  am  hungry. 

mezquitc  long- 
bean. 

you  have  some. 

who  knows. 

very  great. 

musk-melon. 

good  melon. 

water-melon, 
(zandia.) 

water  melon  or 
zuudia. 

cigar. 

to  smoke. 

far  off. 

very  good. 

very  bad. 

scissors. 

river's  bank. 

Kmory's  bill. 

Pyramid  hill. 

capital  dome  hill. 

I'ilot  knob. 

Pilot  range. 

lam  going  home. 

chimney  rock. 

I  am  going. 

mezquitc  screw- 
bean. 

lam  /joingabovo. 

the  woman  is 
baudsomo. 


In  counting  above  ten  tliey  have  no  now  terms,  but  combinations  of  the  decade  are  used. 


PHYSICAL   GEOGRAPHY. 


121 


at-co-bcrquie-n  'ya-ral-yay-me-moom- 
ak-bote'k 


{"l 


Tuma  (Cachan.)  EnglLili. 

ce-pih-n'''i-a-iii^o    the  man  is  ugly. 

is  well  that 
I    am  going 
home, 
n'ya-hap    California. 

n'y&-hap-m^ye-moom |    ^  ^™,if^°j,"^  *" 

cobarrque he  is  not  here. 

mas-tam-h($re devil. 

coo-coo-mdh-at God. 

en-carque give  me. 

o-oobe-<'ncarque give  me  tobacco. 

sa-cool beads. 

roezqueeno stingy. 


Tuma  (Cuchan.)  EnglUh. 

marikiue  (mareck) white  beans. 

t^r.ditch maize. 

no-py-am  ? have  you  none  ? 

n'yo-pcke I  have  none. 

HeMoh Mexicans. 

Pain-gotc-sah Americans. 

ac-o-tdie 


pook  , 


beads  made  of 
small  pieces  of 
sea-shells  with 
holes  in  centre 
and  strung 

que-diquo  (ker-d^k) come  here. 


$&"  The  words  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  were  learned  from  Pablo ;  some  of  them  were  found  to  be  of  his 
native  tongue,  Comoyei,  and  probably  nearly  all  are.  Those  not  marked  have  been  tested  by  a  reference  to  the 
native  Cuchans.  The  phrases  given  were  in  daily  use  among  us,  and  were  well  understood  to  convey  the  mean- 
ing given. 


Pt.  TI.  — 1G 


i  •'! 


:fH: 


f- 


i 

t 

1 

V.   TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION,  HISTORY, 
AND  GOVERNMENT.   B. 


(128) 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION,    HISTORY, 
AND    GOVERNMENT. 


SYNOPSIS. 

1.  The  Naiini  or  Comanches  of  Texas.     (One  Plate.) 

2.  Oral  Traditions  respecting  the  History  of  the  Ojibwa  Nation.     (Two  Plates.) 

3.  Contributions  to  the  History,  Customs,  anil  Opinions  of  the  Dacota  Tribes.     (Six  Plates.) 


1.  THE  NA-iJ-NI,  OR  COMANCHES  OF  TEXAS;  THEIR 
TRAITS  AND  BELIEFS,  AND  THEIR  DIVISIONS  AND 
INTERTRIBAL    RELATIONS. 


i'l 


BY    ROBERT    S.    NEIGHBORS,    ESQ. 


Sir: 


I  HAVE  given  the  subject-matters  contained  in  your  book  of  inquiries 
respecting  the  several  tribes  of  Indians  of  the  United  States,  as  much  attention  as 
circumstances  would  admit,  and  have  the  honor  to  enclose  for  your  consideration,  this 
sketch  of  the  Comanches,  which  was  obtained  from  the  best  sources  of  information 
we  have  in  regard  to  them. 

Owing  to  the  difficulty  in  finding  time  to  give  this  subject  the  attention  it  requires, 
this  sketch  is  very  imperfect,  but  in  the  general  questions  answered,  I  have  obtained 
all  the  information  I  could  get. 

Our  intercourse  with  this  tribe  is  .so  limited,  and  they  have  so  little  confidence  as 
yet  in  the  whites,  together  with  the  great  difficidty  in  finding  interpreters  who  fully 
understand  their  language,  has  rendered  it  impossible  for  me  to  obtain  more 
information  on  the  subjects  referred  to,  than  this  slight  sketch.     I  have  had  no  leisure 

(l-'5) 


^ 

^^,^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


>tt  lii   |22 
Z   Uo    12.0 


Iffl^^B 


1  —  IIIIIM  ^ 

^ 

6"     

► 

Fhobgraidiic 

Sdences 

Corporatton 


23  WBT  MAIN  STMIT 

WnSTH.N.Y.  14SM 

(716)  •72-4503 


i; 


I 


■<l  J! 


Nil 


*^ 


126 


TRIBAL    OllGANIZATION, 


to  o1)tain  information  from  any  trilw  but  the  Comanches,  l>ut  would  respectfully  refer 
the  Commissioner  to  a  coinmunication  of  the  lion.  David  G.  Burnet,'  to  the  Com- 
missioner of  Indian  afTaii-s,  which  is  a  very  jK^-fect  sketch  of  the  condition  of  the  small 
tribes  of  Texas  Indians. 

I  liave  the  honor  to  he  Ik", 

Very  ivs|Kvtfully,  your  oltedient  Servant, 

Houkht  S.  NKiriiinous,  Hjienul  Agent. 

The  Comanches  know  nothing  positively  of  tiieir  origin,  and  their  traditions  on  this 
point  are  very  vague  and  unsatisfactory.  They  iK'lieve  they  have  always  lived  near 
the  .same  country  they  now  occupy,  and  they  know  of  hut  one  migration  of  tlieir  tribes; 
this  took  place  many  ycai"s  since,  when  they  travelled  from  the  west,  and  met  with 
what  they  term  the  '■Mountain  Spaniaiils"  in  the  mountains  of  New  Mexico.  They 
lived  with  tiiem  nuiny  years,  and  intermarried  with  each  otiier.  The  first  chief  they 
recollect  was  named  *'  Ish-shu-ku,"  (Wolf-hou.>'e) ;  he  was  a  groat  and  wise  chief.  At 
the  time  he  lived,  they  still  resided  in  Mexico.  Fiwn  thence  they  visited  the  prairies 
for  the  purjiose  of  hunting,  and  intennarried  with  the  other  tril)es  inhabiting  tiiose 
i-egions.  These  were  the  Wncos.  Tah-wac-car-ros.  Toriuash.  and  branches  of  the 
Pawnee  tnl)es. 

They  call  themselves  "  Na-iini,"  which  signifies  —  first  alive,  or  live  people.  The}- 
are  called  Comanche  by  the  Mexicans,  Nar-ii-tah,  by  tiie  Wacos,  Tah-wac-car-ros,  &c., 
Par-to(vku  by  the  Osages,  and  Sow-a-to  by  the  Catldoes.  When  they  came  from  the 
west,  there  were  no  people  living  on  the  lands  they  now  occupy.  The  first  white 
people  they  saw  were  on  the  west  side  of  the  Kio  Grande  or  Del  Norte.  They  lived 
there  at  tiiat  time,  and  nn\de  a  treaty  with  tlie  white  traders  that  they  met.  The  first 
guns  they  ever  saw  they  got  fi"om  tiie  Spaniards;  they  were  common  shot-guns.  The 
first  ritle.  they  saw  with  American  traders.  Tiie  first  cloth  or  dry  goods  was  bought 
from  the  French  "  many  years  since."  They  had  never  heard  of  it  until  that  time. 
They  got  the  first  tobacco  from  the  Wacos,  who  raised  it  themselves ;  but  they  are 
ignorant  at  what  time  this  took  place.  Afterwanls,  they  Itought  from  the  French  who 
traded  them,  the  cloth,  &c. 

They  have  an  imperfect  tradition  that  another  race  of  people  inhabited  this  coimtry 
before  them,  and  that  there  was  a  great  flood  of  waters  which  covered  the  whole  earth, 
and  that  the  inhabitants,  who  they  suppose  were  white  and  civilized,  were  metamor- 
phosed into  "  white  bii-ds"  and  flew  away ;  by  which  means  they  saved  themselves 
from  being  destroyed.  After  this,  they  believe  the  Great  Spirit  made  the  Comanches 
on  this  continent. 

They  have  never  heard  of  any  animals  except  those  which  are  generally  known  in 
this  region ;  neither  are  they  aware  of  anything  connected  with  crossing  the  large 

'  Vide  PBrt  I.,  p.  229. 


•^ 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 


127 


waters.  The  first  war  they  recollect  was  with  the  Lipnns,  a  branch  of  the  Apaches. 
They  believe  in  and  venerate  several  deities.  They  worship  one  Supreme  Being,  who 
they  think  inhabits  a  country  above  the  sun.  The  Sun,  Moon,  and  Earth  are  their 
principal  objects  of  worship  —  the  Sun,  as  the  primary  cause  of  all  living  things ;  the 
Moon  as  the  God  of  night,  and  the  Earth  as  our  common  mother. 

They  believe  that  the  will  of  the  Great  Spirit  is  supreme ;  that  he  dispenses  good 
and  evil  at  his  will,  also  life  and  death.  They  think  if  they  lie  to  the  Great  Spirit,  he 
will  cause  them  to  die ;  and  many  other  punishments  are  inflicted  if  they  displease 
him.  All  their  success  in  war  or  hunting  is  derived  from  Him  whom  they  worship : 
it  is  called  "making  medicine." 

They  use  many  charms,  and  are  very  superstitious.  All  charms  are  supposed  to  be 
derived  from  the  Great  Spirit,  which  they  buy  from  their  "  medicine  men."  They 
offer  Him  many  sacrifices.  The  first  puff  of  smoke  is  offered  to  the  Supreme,  the 
second  to  the  Sun,  the  third  to  the  Earth,  and  after  these,  to  whatever  they  venerate. 
The  first  morsel  of  what  they  intend  to  eat  is  presented  to  the  Great  Spirit,  and  then 
buried  in  the  ground.  All  their  implements  of  war  are  made  by,  or  undergo  charms 
from,  their  priests  or  magicians,  who  practise  charms  for  the  purpose.  Their  shields 
are  made  in  imitation  of  the  sun,  and  before  going  to  war  they  are  stuck  upon  their 
lances,  facing  the  rising  sun ;  and  no  i^Mii'son  is  permitted  to  handle  or  touch  them 
except  their  ownei-s.  They  believe  that  they  were  made  by  a  secondary  spirit,  who 
was  sent  down  to  the  earth  by  the  Supreme.  When  he  first  made  them,  they  were 
imperfect.  The  spirit  returned  to  the  Supreme,  and  told  what  he  had  made.  He  was 
then  directed  to  return  and  complete  his  work  by  giving  the  beings  he  had  created 
sense,  and  instruct  them  how  to  live.  He  taught  them  how  to  mckc  bows  and 
arrows,  and  gave  them  horses,  &c.  &c. 

They  have  no  name  for  the  country  they  inhabit,  or  for  the  whole  continent.  They 
know  of  no  great  changes  in  their  tribe,  but  they  have  increased  greatly  in  numbers 
since  they  left  Mexico,  by  their  connexion  with  other  small  prairie  bands,  and  the 
numerous  captives  taken  in  their  wars — principally  from  Mexico. 

They  are  at  present  divided  into  eight  distinct  bands,  each  ruled  by  their  own 
chiefs,  and  appear  to  have  a  strong  connecting  link  in  the  similarity  of  habits  and 
language,  and  frequently  they  unite  in  war  or  council ;  occasionally  one  band  is  at  war 
with  a  nation,  and  the  others  at  peace.  The  eight  divisions  of  the  tribe  are  classed 
and  named  by  themselves  as  follows : 

Ist.  Ho-is,  or  Timber  people,  because  they  live  in  a  timbered  country.  They  are 
also  called  "  Pine-takers"  or  honey-eaters,  being  fond  of  honey. 

2d.  "  No-ko-nies,"  because  they  always  live  and  travel  in  a  cirele ;  their  country 
that  they  claim  being  cireular. 

8d.  "  Teu-a-wish,"  or  Liver-eaten,  because  they  eat  the  liver  of  all  game  they  kill 
in  its  raw  state. 


v> 


■#i 


'I 


r 


^■1 


hi 


128 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


4th.  "  No-nnrum,"  because  they  live  in  the  high  prairie  where  there  is  no  timber  or 
running  water,  and  never  leave  that  kind  of  country. 

5th.  "  It<:hit-a-bud-ah."  Cold  people,  or  the  northern  band,  because  they  live  in  a 
cold  country. 

6th.  "  Hai-ne-na-une,"  or  Corn-eaters,  being  fond  of  com. 

7th.  "  Koo-che-ta-kers,"  or  Buffalo-caters. 

8th.  "  Par-kee-narum,"  or  Water-people ;  because  they  always  camp  as  near  the 
waters  of  lakes  or  creeks  as  they  can  get. 

A  large  number  of  them  speak  Spanish  imperfectly,  and  some  few  understand  a 
little  English.  All  their  business  is  transacted  in  their  own  language,  for  which  an 
interpreter  is  sufficient.  There  are  at  the  present  time  very  few  pure-blooded  Coman- 
ches,  having  intermarried  as  previously  stated.  They  have  not  changed  their  location 
since  their  emigration,  and  tlieir  territory  in  Texas  has  diminished  by  the  continued 
encroachments  of  the  whites.  The  principal  chiefs  that  are  known  are  "  Pa-ha-yu-ca," 
or  one  who  ha.s  connexion  with  his  uncle's  wife;  " Mo-po-cho-co-pie,"  or  Old  owl; 
"  Pochan-arquarhiep,"  or  Bull-hump,  commonly  known  as  Buffalo-hump ;  "  Santa  Anna;" 
"  Sali-vi-artee,"  or  Small  Wolf;  "  Tuna-cio-quasha,"  or  Bear's  Tail ;  "  Moora-ke-toph," 
or  Mule-dung — Hois  chiefs — " Po-hu-ca-wa-kit,"  or  Medicine-hunter;  " O-harWOrkit," 
or  Yellow-hunter,  Ten-a-wish  chiefs ;  "  Chip-es-se-ah,"  or  Growing-chief,  Koo-chi-ta-ku ; 
"Oho-is,"  or  Naked-head,  No-ko-nie.  They  assume  the  pre-eminence  of  all  prairie 
Indians ;  but  this  is  only  allowed  by  the  small  tribes,  who  live  on  the  borders  of  their 
country.  Tlioy  have  no  proof,  by  monuments,  &c.,  of  any  other  race  having  existed 
where  they  at  present  live,  previous  to  themselves ;  and  the  few  traditions  preserved 
by  the  old  men  are  very  imperfect.  They  believe  that  the  earth  is  a  plain  or  flat 
surface. 

The  principal  rivers  in  their  country  are  the  head-waters  of  the  Brazos,  Colorado, 
and  Red  Rivers ;  all  emptying  into  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.  There  are  no  lakes  known, 
but  there  are  large  spiings,  affording  great  water-power  on  the  heads  of  the  principal 
rivers.  The  surface  of  the  country  is  generally  hilly,  which  is  sterile ;  but  there  are 
many  beautiful  valleys,  abounding  in  vegetation,  and  susceptible  of  the  highest  culti- 
vation. Wotnl  is  scarce,  but  a  sufficiency  for  future  settlers.  The  prairies  are  covered 
with  a  species  of  grass,  called,  by  the  whites  and  Mexicans,  "  musquite,"  which  is 
highly  nutritious. 

The  constant  firing  of  the  prairies  checks  the  increase  of  timber,  and  visibly  impo- 
verishes the  soil.  There  are  no  marshes  or  swamps  of  any  extent  in  the  country,  and 
the  only  obstacle  to  roads  is  the  rocks,  through  which  passes  can  be  found  with  little 
difficulty.  No  volcanic  eruptions  exist  at  the  present  time,  and  no  signs  of  any  at  a 
former  period,  as  far  as  ha«  yet  been  discovered. 

The  climate  is  usually  very  dry.  The  heat  of  the  weather  varies  greatly ;  changing 
with  a  rapidity  unknown  in  any  other  latitude,  the  thermometer  frequently  descending 


It 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


129 


from  05°  to  45°  in  tlio  space  of  a  few  niiniites.  Tliis  is  in  consoqiu'nco  of  ii  wind 
BUtldenly  iiriMinjr,  termed,  \ty  the  Texians,  "  Xortliers."  Tlio  sontli  and  .southwest 
winds  ftenerally  pixnail.  Tiie  (ioiintry  i.s  sultject  toseveixi  tlinnder-stonns,  accompanied 
by  violent  rains,  whicli  (ill  tlic  stri'ams  to  overflowing.  Tliere  are  several  valiialde 
salt  springs,  from  wliicli  salt  can  Ik;  easily  maiuifactnred.  Tliere  aix'  evidences  of 
stone-coal  and  many  vahmble  mineral  pr(Mlnctit)ns,  lint  hitherto,  the  country  Ix'ing 
dangi'rons  of  access,  no  white  person  is  acquainted  with  the  exact  localities  or  the 
probable  richness  of  the  mines.  Some  silver  and  lead  mines,  snp{)o.si>d  to  be 
exceedingly  valuable,  have  lately  Ixvn  discovered.  There  are  no  Indian  traditions  or 
evidences  of  larger  animals  having  previously  lived  in  the  world.  Their  old  men  are 
ignorant,  except  from  their  imiH'rfect  traditions,  of  everything  that  transpired  previous 
to  their  own  generation.  They  cannot  recollect  how  long  since  they  used  utensils  of 
stone,  or,  if  they  ever  did,  what  was  their  sha|H'  or  use.  There  are  none  remaining 
among  them  at  present.  They  iK'lievc  the  earth  is  stationary,  and  that  the  stars  are 
inhabited,  but  have  no  idea  of  their  movements.  When  an  eclip.se  occurs,  they 
suppose  that  some  planet  has  intervened  Ix-tween  the  earth  and  the  sun.  They  have 
no  computation  of  time  beyond  the  seasons.  They  coimt  them  by  the  rising  height  of 
the  grass,  the  falling  of  the  leaves,  and  the  cold  and  hot  season.  They  very  seldom 
count  by  new  nuKms.  One  sun  is  one  day,  and  they  denote  the  time  of  day  by 
pointing  to  the  |)osition  the  sun  has  attained  in  the  heavens. 

They  Ixlieve  the  Indian  Paradise  to  be  beyond  the  sun,  where  the  Great  Spirit  sita 
and  rules. 

Ninncnifion.  —  They  count  by  decimals,  from  one  to  one  thousand,  as  I  am  informed 
by  the  principal  ('hiefs,  but  they  now  frequently  count  by  the  Caddo  mode — from  one 
to  ten,  and  by  tens  to  one  hundred,  &c. 


Pt.  II 


COXANCUE    NU.MEnATION. 

One Si>m-mus. 

Two Wa-ha. 

Three Pa-hu. 

Four Ila-yar-ooli-wtt. 

Five Mo-warka. 

Six ......  Nah-wa. 

Seven Tah-a-cho-te. 

Kight Nah-wa-wa-tdio-te. 

Nine   .         .         .         .         .         ,  Sem-mo-man-ce. 

Ten Shur-num. 

Eleven Shuin-me-ma-to-e-cut. 

Twelve Warho-ta-ma-to-e-cut. 

Thirteen Tiv-hu-ma-to-e-cut. 

—  17 


180 


TRIBAL    OIIUANIZATION, 


\'\\ 


Fourtoen . 
Fifteen 
Sixteen  . 
Seventeen 
Eigltteon  . 
Nineteen 
Twenty  . 
Tliirty 


Iln-yiir-ook-wa-niarto-e-cut. 
Moo- w  link  nrina-t(M;-cu  t. 
Nah-wa-nio-to-e-out. 
Tali-ii-eli()-te-nm-to-e-cut. 
Nah-wnrwii-elio-te-nia-t(HMMit. 
Suu-nio-w  nsh-t  a-ma-to-e-cut. 
Warliiirmarniu-nia-tcMMJUt. 
Pa-ha-ma-mn,  &c. 


They  have  no  accounts ;  all  their  business  transactions  are  simple  trade  and  barter. 
They  are  ignorant  of  the  elements  of  figures;  even  of  a  i)erix'udicular  stroke  for  1, 
11,  &c.  They  make  no  gmve-iH)st8  or  monuments  indicating  the  rank  of  a  deceased 
jHirson.  There  is  little  known  of  their  medicines.  So  far  as  has  been  discovered,  they 
aiv  confined  to  simple  roots  and  hcibs.  They  trust  more  to  incantations  made  by  the 
medicine-men.  who  also  l)leed  in  fevew  by  scarification  on  the  part  afl'ected,  and  not  in 
the  veins.  Their  principal  treatment  in  di.seases  is  starvation.  They  do  not  understand 
amputation,  but  bind  up  a  broken  limb  with  splints.  Their  litters  for  conveying  the 
wounded  or  sick  are  comiM)sed  of  simply  two  poles,  with  skins  stretched  across  them, 
and  long  enough  to  Ije  suppcjrted  by  a  horse  in  I'ront  and  rear. 

The  ix)sition  of  a  chief  is  not  hereditary,  but  the  result  of  his  own  sujierior  cunning, 
knowledge,  or  success  in  war,  or  some  act  or  acts  that  rank  him  according  to  his  merits. 
The  subjects  mider  discussion  in  council  are  at  all  times  open  to  popular  opinion,  and 
the  chiefs  are  the  main  exponents  of  it.  The  democratic  principle  is  stnnigly  implanted 
in  them.  They  considt,  principally,  the  warrior  class,  and  the  weaker  minds  are 
wholly  inlhienccd  by  popular  oi)inion.  Pkch  man  endeavors  to  obtain  as  high  a 
])osition  a.s  their  merits  allow.  War  chiefs  commit  hostilities  without  consulting  the 
other  tribes.  Any  pi-oixjsiticm  or  treaties  proposed  by  the  whites  are  (li.»<cu.'<sed  privately, 
and  the  answer  given  by  the  chief  as  the  unanimous  voice  of  the  tribe.  In  deliljcrar 
tions  in  coinicil,  they  consult  each  other,  and  one  addresses  the  meeting.  The  council 
is  ojiened  by  passing  the  council  pii)e  from  one  to  the  t)ther,  and  invoking  the  Deity  to 
pre-side.  It  is  conducted  with  great  prepriety,  and  cbwcd  in  the  same  manner.  There 
is  one  appointed  as  crier  or  messenger,  whose  duty  it  is  to  fill  the  ])ipe,  &c.  Questions, 
especially  of  imiwrtance,  are  deliberately  considered,  and  considerable  time  frequently 
elapses  Iwfore  they  are  answered ;  but  they  are  all  decided  on  the  principle  of  apparent 
unanimity.  Capital  punishments  are  rare;  each  party  acting  generally  for  hinuself, 
and  avenging  his  own  injuries.  Each  chief  is  ranked  acconling  to  his  popularity,  and 
his  rank  is  maintained  on  the  same  principle. 

He  is  deprived  of  his  ofllce  by  any  mislbrtune,  such  as  loss  of  many  men  in  battle, 
or  even  a  signal  defeat,  or  being  taken  prisoner,  but  never  for  any  private  act  uncon- 
nected with  the  welfare  of  the  whole  trilje.     They  have  no  medals  except  those  lately 


HISTORY,   AND  GOVERNMENT. 


131 


given  them,  wliieh  are  worn  more  as  symbols  of  iK*ace  than  as  marks  of  distinction 
among  themselves.  Eaeh  tril)e  has  no  definite  numlxr  of  chiefs,  every  one  being 
ranked  according  to  his  followers.  The  i»riesthood  appear  to  exercise  no  influence  in 
their  general  government,  but,  on  war  being  declared,  they  exert  their  intluencu  with 
the  Deity.  The  females  have  no  voiin-  or  even  influence  in  their  councils.  Any 
principal  chief  has  a  right  to  call  a  general  council  of  his  own  trilx',  and  a  council  of 
all  the  trilHJS  is  called  by  the  separate  chiefs  of  each  tribe.  They  acknowledge  no 
legal  summons  from  the  whites  to  council  on  any  subject,  except  it  coincides  with  their 
own  views;  and  always  inquire  into  the  subject  of  consultation  Ix'fore  attending. 

There  are  no  sulxlivisions  of  land  acknowledged  in  their  territory,  and  no  ex(!lusivo 
right  of  game.  lie  who  kills  the  game  retains  the  skin,  and  the  meat  is  divided 
according  to  the  necessity  of  the  party,  always  without  contention,  as  each  individual 
shares  his  footl  with  every  memlx'r  of  the  tribe,  or  with  strangers  who  visit  them.  No 
dispute  ever  arises  Ixjtween  tribes  with  regard  to  their  hunting  grounds,  the  whole 
Ijeing  held  in  commtm. 

The  intercourse  laws  of  the  United  States  Indians,  never  having  been  extended 
over  tiiose  in  the  state  of  Texas,  no  conclusions  can  Ix;  drawn  fnnn  their  cflect. 
Negotiations  can  be  carried  (m  with  Ix'tter  results  in  their  own  cotnitry  than  at  the 
scat  of  govenunent,  as  absent  chiefs  do  not  place  much  reliance  in  what  they  are  told 
by  others,  but  at  the  same  time,  an  actual  intercoui'se  with  tlie  head  of  the  government 
gives  the  tribe  a  decidedly  Ix'tter  view  of  its  character  and  influence.  The  principal 
chiefs  have  shown  every  disix)sition  to  advance  in  civilization,  and  only  require  the 
co-operation  of  the  Americans,  to  influence  their  followers  in  the  same  course. 

No  individual  action  is  consideretl  as  a  crime,  but  every  man  acts  for  himself 
according  to  his  own  judgment,  unless  some  superior  power,  for  instance,  that  of  a 
popular  chief,  shoidd  exercise  authority  over  him.  They  believe  that  when  they  were 
created,  the  Great  Spirit  gave  them  the  privilege  of  a  free  and  unconstrained  use  of 
their  individual  faculties.  They  do  not  worship  any  Evil  Spirit,  and  are  not  aware 
of  its  existence,  attril)utiiig  every  thing  to  arise  fix)m  the  Great  Spirit,  whether  of  good 
or  evil.  They  use  fire  in  all  their  religious  observances  and  dances,  or  Medicine- 
making,  but  I  am  unacquainted  with  the  estimatitm  in  which  it  is  held. 

They  Ixdieve  in  the  immortality  of  the  soul,  in  their  happy  hunting-grounds,  but 
have  no  definite  idea  of  its  transit  from  this  life  to  another,  or  in  what  manner  they 
will  i-e-appear  hereafter.  The  ties  of  consanguity  are  very  strong,  not  only  with 
regard  to  their  blixMl  relations,  but  extends  itself  to  relations  by  marriage,  &c.,  who  are 
considered  as,  and  generally  called  "  brothers " — all  ofl'ences  committed  against  any 
memlx.>r,  are  avenged  by  all,  or  any  memlxT  connected  with  the  family.  In  this 
nation  a  hunter  will  generally  sujjply  a  sufficiency  of  fcxxl  and  clothing  for  a  family. 
The  marriage  state  only  continues  during  the  pleasure  of  the  parties,  as  a  man  claims 
the  right  to  divorce  himself  whenever  lie  chooses.     Polygamy  is  practised  to  a  great 


^s^saii^iiMt 


189 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


fl 


'|i' 


I  \ 


m 


i . 


T    ■ 


(   '  '< 


extent  —  some  chiefs  having  more  than  ten  wives,  but  inconstancy  is  the  natural 
result  of  it,  which  is  frequently  punished  by  cutting  off  the  nose  of  the  transgressor, 
and  sometimes  even  by  death ;  but  more  frequently  the  woman  escapes  unpunished, 
and  the  seducer  is  deprived  of  all  his  available  projwrty,  which  is  yielded  to  the 
injured  partv,  by  custom,  without  resistance.  The  women  jierform  all  manual  labour, 
war  and  hunting  being  all  the  occupation  of  the  men.  Jealousy  is  fixHiuently  a  great 
cause  of  discord,  but  tlie  husband  exercises  unbounded  authority  over  the  person  of  his 
wife.  Their  lodges  are  generally  neat,  and  on  the  entrance  of  a  stranger,  the  owner 
of  a  lotlge  designates  the  i-oute  he  shall  pass,  and  the  seat  he  shall  occupy.  Any 
infringement  of  this  rule  is  liable  to  give  offence. 

They  are  formal  and  suspicious  to  strangers,  but  hospitable  and  social  to  those  they 
consider  their  friends.  They  have  no  regular  meals,  but  eat  when  they  feel  hungry, 
each  party  helping  himself,  and  joining  in  the  meal  without  invitation  or  ceremony. 
The  parents  exercise  full  control  in  giving  their  daughtei-s  in  marriage,  they  being 
generally  purchased  at  a  stipulated  price  by  their  suitors.  There  is  no  marriage 
ceremony  of  any  description  —  they  enter  the  marriage  state  at  a  very  early  age, 
frequently  before  the  age  of  puberty.  The  children  are  named  from  some  circumstance 
in  tender  years,  which  is  fivquently  changed  in  after  life  by  some  act  of  greater 
imixjrtance.  Whatever  chililren  are  stolen  from  their  enemies,  are  incorporated  in  the 
family  to  whom  they  belong,  and  treated  as  their  own  children,  without  distinction  of 
color  or  nation.  There  is  considerable  respect  shown  by  the  younger  branches  of  the 
community  to  iue  patriarchal  chiefs  of  the  tril)e. 

When  they  make  a  sacred  })ledge  or  promise,  they  call  ui)on  the  givat  spirit  as  their 
father,  and  the  earth  as  their  mother,  to  testify  to  the  truth  of  their  asseverations. 
Their  talk  in  council  is  short,  and  their  oratorical  powere  consideix'd  of  little  value ; 
but  good  judgment  is  held  in  high  estimation.  The  childix'n  arc  practised  at  a  very 
early  age  to  the  use  of  the  l)0\v  and  arrow,  but  the  chiefs  and  principal  braves  are  now 
accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  shot-gun  and  rille,  without  disjwnsing  with  the  bow  and 
arrow,  which  are  always  carried  rind  used  in  war.  When  a  chieftain  wishes  to  go  to 
war,  he  declares  his  intentions,  and  the  preliminaries  are  discussed  at  a  war-dance. 
When  the  affair  is  agreed  uiron,  a  certain  place  is  designated  near  the  {Mint  of  action, 
where  to  congregate  at  a  specified  time,  to  which  place  the  chiefs  repair,  the  warriors 
proceeding  separately  in  small  bands  by  various  routes,  in  onler,  if  discovered,  to 
deceive  the  enemy  as  to  the  point  of  attack,  and  to  procure  subsistence,  each  party 
living  on  the  produce  of  the  chase ;  no  provisions  being  carried  for  public  use.  They 
fight  on  horseback  with  whatever  arms  they  can  procure ;  but  their  principal  reliance 
is  on  the  bow  and  arrow. 

They  are  the  most  expert  riders  in  the  world.  Men  are  never  taken  prisoners  by 
them  in  battle,  but  killed  and  scalped  in  all  cases.  The  women  are  sometimes  made 
prisoners,  in  which  case  their  chastity  is  uniformly  not  respected. 


si 


r .' 


:i 


'•t-', 


>■■  ; 


■>\} 


J-    U 


HISTORY,    AND    OOVEIINMENT. 


133 


They  have  dnncos  of  viirious  dosoriptioiiM,  iiIwnyH  cliiiriicti'iistii'  of  tlio  swl>joft. 
Fi'inulo.x  aiv  fit'<jut'iitly  iidinitU'd  to  the  dance,  hut  tliewe  daiicoH  aiv  entirely  dintinet 
fnun  tliose  of  the  men.  Tliey  liave  contests  in  racinjr,  and  several  >.'aiues  of  chance. 
Their  principal  jranie  is  tlie  .same  as  all  tlie  northern  hantis,  called  "  l)nllet,"  "  hutton." 
&c.,  which  consists  in  changing  a  hnllet  rapidly  from  one  hand  to  the  other,  accompanied 
hy  a  song  to  which  they  keep  time  with  the  motion  of  their  arms,  and  the  op|N)site  party, 
guessing  which  hand  it  is  in.     Tlu'y  sometimes  stake  all  they  jxis.se.ss  on  a  single  game. 

When  pressed  hy  hunger  from  scarcity  of  game,  they  subsist  on  their  young  horses 
and  mides.     The  lle.sh  of  the  young  wild-horse  is  consideivd  a  delicacy. 

Their  common  dress  is  the  l)R'ech-cloth  and  moccasins,  with  a  hufl'alo  roln'  flinig 
Icxwely  over  the  shoiddei"s ;  hut  wmie  have  now  la-gun  to  imitate  the  more  civili/.ed 
trilK's.  They  have  a  gtx'at  variety  of  ornaments,  numy  of  which  are  of  pure  silver, 
principally  fa.shioned  into  large  hnnH-hes.  Their  decorations  aix!  derived  fiiim  birds 
and  shells  which  are  bartered  to  them  by  the  traders.  The  hawk  and  eagle  feathers 
ttiv  the  most  esteemed  of  the  bird.  They  use  several  native  dyes,  ])nMlnced  from  roots, 
but  I  am  ignorant  of  the  names  or  the  i)nK-e,ss  of  nuiiud'acture.  Vermilion,  indigo,  and 
venligris,  ari'  sold  them  by  the  tradei-s.  They  also  paint  with  white  and  ivd  clay  on 
particular  cK'casions.  They  are  of  a  light  character,  with  a  gay  ca.st  of  nund,  and 
rather  fervid  temiK>rament.  Fiimi  observation  I  am  induced  to  lu'lieve  that  their 
minds  aiv  susceptible  of  a  considerable  tlegree  of  cultivation.  Christianity  has  nevi'r 
lK>en  introduced  anumg  them.  This  tril)e  is  subject  to  many  tresi)assers,  not  only  from 
the  whites,  but  also  fittm  the  neighl)oring  trilx's  of  Indians,  who  hunt  through  i)ortions 
of  their  country,  destniying  givat  quantities  of  game. 

The  scarcity  of  fire-arms,  and  their  incctmplete  knowledge  of  that  weai)on,  renders 
them  iniecpial  to  c(»ntend  with  the  fnnitier  trilms,  who  have  ttbtained  e.\i)erience  from 
contact  with  the  whites.  Their  burials  aiv  strictly  private.  AVhen  a  man  dies,  his 
hoi"ses  aiv  generally  killed  and  buried,  and  idl  liis  principal  efl'eets  biu'ut.  The  first  to 
carry  him  to  his  paradise,  and  the  latter  for  his  use  on  his  arrival.  They  formerly 
also  killed  their  favorite  wife,  hut  this  custom  has  Iktm  done  away  with,  from 
interconr.se  with  the  nutre  civili/ed  Fudians. 

The  death  of  a  chief  can.ses  givat  tribulation  to  the  trilx;  —  on  such  occasions  they 
a.ssemhle  without  distinction,  and  bewail  his  death  with  extreme  lamentation,  until 
they  receive  from  the  relatives  of  the  deceastnl,  suflieient  presents  to  cause  them  to 
stop;  for  instance,  if  a  man  wants  a  favorite  horse  Udonging  to  the  bmther  of  the 
decea.sed,  he  continues  crying  till  he  obtains  it.  When  they  are  killed  in  battle,  it  is 
a  cause  of  nuich  greater  lamentation  than  fi-om  a  natural  death,  and  a  much  greater 
number  of  nunirners  Ix'wail  the  loss.  The  presents  given  hy  relatives  aro  also 
much  more  valuable.  The  deceased  is  packed  ujuju  a  hoi-se  as  sotin  as  he  expires,  and 
taken  t©  the  highest  hill  in  the  neighlx)rho«wl,  and  buried  privately,  without  any 
monument  to  note  the  place,  as  far  as  has  been  discovered.    The  wives  of  the  deceased, 


134 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION,  ETC. 


I'  k"'    111 


after  he  is  buried,  assemble  around  the  dead  horses,  with  a  knife  in  one  hand,  and 
whet-stone  in  the  other,  and  with  great  hunentations,  cut  their  arms,  legs,  and  body  in 
ga.shes,  until  they  are  exhausted  by  the  loss  of  blood,  and  frequently  commit  suicide 
from  extreme  grief  on  the  occasion. 

from  the  liberality  with  which  they  disjwse  of  their  eflects  on  all  occasions  of  the 
kind,  it  would  induce  the  belief  that  tliey  acquire  proiicrty  merely  for  the  yuriiose  of 
giving  it  to  othere." 


Plate  33  is  an  illustration  of  the  mode  of  attack  by  the  Comanches  on  the  emigrants, 
when  crossing  the  western  prairies,  en  route  for  Now  Mexico,  Utah,  Oregon,  and 
California. 

When  tlie  emigrants  are  suddenly  attacked  by  these  tril)os,  (all  of  whom  are 
mounted)  they  drive  their  wagons  together,  forming  a  circle,  with  the  heads  of  the 
aninials  towards  the  centre,  and  the  fore-wheel  of  one  wagon  locking  in  with  the  hind- 
Avheel  of  the  next,  thus  forming  a  compact  and  strong  enclosure,  from  which  they  are 
enabled  to  defend  tliemselves  with  eduiency  and  safety  to  themselves  and  animals. 
If  a  growth  of  wood  be  near,  the  wagons  are  driven  into  it,  and  the  wheels  locked 
against  the  trees,  thus  preventing  the  animals  from  running  off  with  the  wagons. 
The  attack  is  made  without  much  order,  but  every  effort  is  made  to  frighten  the 
animals,  by  whooping,  hallooing,  and  wounding  them  with  their  arrows,  so  as  to  produce 
as  much  confusion  as  i^ssible  among  the  emigrants.  Often  the  animals  l)ecome  so 
furious,  that  thty  break  away  from  their  teams,  and  are  then  captured  by  the  Indians. 

For  their  language,  which  is  found  to  lie  cognate  with  the  Shoshonee  group,  refer- 
ence is  made  to  the  article  Language,  No.  IX.  Tliis  vt)cabulary  is  derived  from  Mr. 
Neighlxturs. 

Their  numeral  tenns,  to  thirty,  have  been  given  in  the  preceding  pages. 

II.  R.  S. 


2.     ORAL    TRADITIONS    RESPECTING    THE    HISTORY    OF 

THE    OJIBWA    NATION. 


BY    WILMAM    H*.    WARREN. 


[The  following  traditions  arc  given,  ns  being  entitled  to  the  highest  rospi'ct,  hut 
without  cndoifing  the  opinions  incidentally  expre-s.sed,  or  the  particular  arehaH)logical 
dates.  Mr.  Warivn  is  himself  the  descendant,  by  the  maternal  side,  of  one  of  the 
most  n'siK'ctable  Indian  families  of  the  ancient  capital  of  this  nation,  to  which  he 
refers;  and  his  sources  of  oral  information  are  the  best.  He  is  a  graduate,  I  think,  of 
Union  Theological  Seminary,  N.  Y.,  and  is  well  ver.sed  in  the  Djibwa  language,  as 
well  as  with  the  traditions  and  manners  and  customs  of  this  imj)ortant  and  far-stretch- 
ing tribe  of  the  Algonquin  group.  —  II.  R.  S.] 

The  ancient  history  of  the  Ojibwas  consists  in  oral  traditions,  which  partake 
mostly,  if  not  altogether,  of  the  marvellous  and  supermitural ;  and  the  writer  is  not 
prepared,  at  this  early  stage  of  his  inquiries  and  studies,  to  give  a  decided  opinion, 
deduce<l  fi-om  these  fabulous  triulitions,  of  their  origin  and  history  prior  to  the  landing 
of  the  Pale-faces  in  America. 

He  is,  however,  collecting  every  tradition  that  p-^vtains  to,  or  can  throw  any  light 
on  this  subject ;  and  he  hojies,  at  some  future  da}-,  to  Im  able  to  place  the  fniits  of  his 
inquiries  in  abler  hands,  who  are  better  qualified  to  handle  the  subject. 

Through  a  close  acquaintance  with  their  religious  rites  and  beliefs,  I  have  formed 
an  opinion  which  I  will  offer  at  this  time,  leaving  it  to  those  who  have  studied  the 
Red  Race,  their  rites  and  traditions,  much  more  closely  than  myself,  either  to  nyect  or 
more  fully  carry  out  the  idea.  The  Ojibwa  believes  that  his  soul  or  shadow,  after 
the  death  of  the  hotly,  follows  a  wide  beaten  path  which  leads  toAvanls  the  west,  and 
that  it  goes  to  a  country  abounding  in  every  thing  that  the  Indian  covets  on  earth  — 
game  in  abundance,  dancing,  and  ivjoicing.  The  soul  enters  a  long  lodge,  in  which  all 
his  relatives,  for  generations  past,  arc  congregated,  and  they  welcome  him  with  gladness. 
To  ix^ach  this  land  of  joy  and  bliss,  he  crosses  a  deep  and  rapid  water,  &c.  From  this 
universal  belief  I  am  led  to  think,  that  formerly,  ages  past,  these  Indians  lived  in  a 
land  of  plenty — "a  land  flowing  with  milk  and  honey" — towai-ds  the  west;  that  they 
have,  by  coercion  or  otherwise,  emigrated  east,  till  the  broad  Atlantic  arn'sted  their 
further  progi-css,  and  the  white  man  has  turned  the  faces  of  trilx»s  and  i-emnants  of 

(18fl) 


13G 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


tribes  again  in  the  direction  whence  they  originally  came.  It  is  natnral  that  this 
event  in  their  ancient  history  should,  in  the  course  of  ages,  have  merged  into  the 
present  belief  of  a  Mcstern  home  of  spirits. 

It  is  believed  by  some  eminent  men  and  writers,  that  the  Red  Race  of  America  aixj 
the  descendants  of  the  lost  tribes  of  Israel.  I  mention  this  belief  here  to  say,  that  I 
have  noted  much,  iii  the  course  of  my  inquiries,  that  would  induce  me  to  fall  into  the 
same  belief,  besides  the  general  reasons  that  are  adduced  to  prove  the  fact.  I  have 
noticed  that  in  all  their  principal  and  oldest  trailitions  and  lodge  tales,  twelve  brothera 
are  sjwken  of:  they  are  the  sons  of  Ge-tulMi,  a  name  nearly  similar  to  Jacob.  The 
oldest  of  these  brothers  is  called  Miijclictc'w,  and  the  youngest  Wa-jccg-e-wa-hon-ay, 
named  after  his  emit  of  fishor's  skins,  with  which  he  resisted  the  machinations  of  evil 
spirits.  He  was  the  Moved  of  his  father  and  the  Great  Spirit ;  the  wisest  and  most 
powerful  of  his  twelve  brothers. 

Tlie  tradition  also  in  which  originated  the  Ke-na-hiij-tcttsl;  or  snake-i-oot,  which  forms 
one  of  the  four  main  branches  of  the  Me-da-win,  is  similar  in  character  to  the  brazen 
serpent  of  Mo.ses,  that  saved  the  lives  of  the  unbelieving  Israelites.  In  the  Indian 
tradition,  the  seqient  is  made  to  show  to  man  a  root,  which  saved  the  lives  of  a  great 
town,  which  was  being  depopulated  by  pestilence. 

Not  only  in  these  instances  is  the  similarity  of  the  Ojibwa  oral  traditions,  and  the 
written  history  of  the  Hebrews,  evident  and  most  striking.  It  is  out  of  place  herc,  to 
particularize  further,  as  I  consider  this  a  subject  deser\nng  separate  attention,  and 
closer  investigation  than  ever  it  has  received.  Of  late  years  the  Ojibwas  have  been 
progressing  westward,  and  from  their  traditions,  it  is  evident  they  had  com- 
menced it  before  the  white  man  landed  in  America.  They  were  probably  driven 
from  the  east  by  more  powerful  triljcs,  till  they  made  their  final  stand,  above  two 
centuries  and  a  half  ago,  on  Lake  Superior,  and  made  their  central  town  on  an  island 
in  the  lake  (Lapointe),  where  the}-  were  found  by  the  first  whites,  who  visited  them  in 
tlie  attitude  of  an  encroaching  and  invading  trilx?,  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  enemies, 
whom  they  denominate  Nodowaig,  or  Iroquois,  Odugameeg,  or  Foxes,  Alx)inug,  or 
Sicjux,  and  Omameeg. 

They  date  with  certainty  their  first  acquaintance  with  the  whites,  eight  generations 
ago,  and  for  a  long  time  before  this,  they  agree  in  stating  that  MoningAvunakaun 
(Lajwinte)  had  formed  their  central  seat  and  town.  Many  of  the  chiefs,  and  less 
thinking  old  men,  even  affirm  and  believe,  that  this  is  the  spot  in  which  their  ancestors 
have  lived  since  "  the  world  was  new."  It  is  only  by  a  study  of  their  varied  and 
numerous  fable-like  traditions,  that  I  can  trace  them  as  coming  from  an  easterly 
direction,  prior  to  their  residence  on  the  island  of  Lapointe.  From  these  traditions  we 
learn  that  they  once  were  familiar  with  the  great  salt  ocean  —  again,  that  they  once 
lived  on  a  great  river,  —  again,  on  a  great  lake,  where  they  exterminated  a  powerful 
tribe  they  call  the  Mundau ;  at  last  we  find  them  on  Lake  Superior,  from  which  place 


'--r: 


I 


11    '  i 

i 

i  i  1 

■1     '■'>  mf  '■ 

1        f 

l(; 


%. 


\ 


I 


1  ,! 

i  1 


^1 


o 

o 

n 

<? 

E 

Ml 

<? 

T. 

?-> 

i^l 

■c 

^ 

^ 

= 

35 

>s 

: 

a 

— 

^*T 

=^  =  , 

1-^1 

ri 

-a  '  :§ 

?^  ^ 

1^1 

o  - 

Kl 

5!  H.  -- 

?3 

^ 

■! 

1-, 

1^1 

5 

;^ 

^-1 

^ 

■r. 

-s- 

Vi 

35 

o 

SI 

« 

<r 

q 

1 

■r^ 

I     :    ' 

1 

.Id 


I 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


137 


they  have  still  pressed  westward  for  the  past  two  ccnturicr.  till  they  occupy  all  the 
country  about  tlie  head-waters  of  the  Mississippi ;  and  stand,  one  foot  on  the  edge  of 
the  vast  western  prairies,  and  the  other  in  the  dense  forests  of  Eastern  America. 
(Plate  31.) 

With  the  same  progressive  advance  they  have  been  making  for  two  hundred  years 
pa.«t,  it  has  taken  this  trilx;  eiglit  hundred  years,  fnnn  the  time  they  left  the  eastern 
sea-board  of  the  Atlantic,  to  assume  their  present  local  i)osition  on  this  continent. 
Tliis  time  and  pix)gress,  however,  are  only  assumed,  as  they  may  have  been  driven  west 
to  Lake  Superior,  with  much  more  celerity  than  they  have  advanced,  since  our 
acquaintance  with  them  as  a  trilx\ 

In  the  inipiiries  set  on  foot  by  the  Indian  Department  of  our  Government,  respecting 
the  history  of  the  Indian  tribi'S,  facts  only  are  sought ;  for  tliis  reason  we  do  not 
introduce  fabulous  traditions  that  pertain  to  tlieir  histor\-,  but  will  connnence  from  the 
time  they  relate  events  with  any  truth  and  certainty,  and  tliis  is  from  the  time  they 
first  became  acquainted  with  the  white  nu\n.  For  a  long  time  prior  to  this  event,  the 
Ojibwa  branch  of  the  Algoniiuin  stock,  of  the  aboriginal  race  of  America,  had  been 
living  on  Lake  Superior;  their  principal  town  was  on  the  island  of  Mo-ning-wun-a- 
kan-ing,  and  covered  a  space  of  ground  more  than  three  miles  in  length,  and  two  miles 
wide,  judging  from  the  vestiges  still  plainly  visible — especially  to  be  seen  in  the  small 
growth  of  trees  now  covering  tlio  spot,  compared  to  trees  growing  on  other  parts  of  the 
island ;  and  also  in  deei)-l)eaten  paths,  that  a  few  yeai-s  since  were  still  visible  in 
different  parts  of  the  island. 

Besides  the  main  body  on  the  island,  bands  lived  on  different  points  of  the  lake 
shore,  at  the  bays  of  SlM(i-v'aum-e-1con(j,  Kulc-e-tca-on-aiin,  Ka-jmk-ica-e-kd,  and  other 
places ;  but  it  was  in  fear  and  trembling,  for  in  those  days  the  Ojibwas  had  many 
enemies  that  sought  to  exterminate  them. 

They  practised  the  arts  of  agriculture,  and  raised  on  the  island  large  quantities  of 
corn  and  potatoes.  They  lived  also  by  hunting.  The  main  land  opposite  their  village 
abounded  in  moose,  bear,  elk,  deer ;  and  the  buffalo,  in  those  days,  ranged  in  herds 
within  half  a  da^'s  journey  from  the  lake  shore.  Every  stream  that  flowed  into  the 
lake  al)ounded  in  beaver,  otter,  and  muskrat.  The  waters  of  the  lake  also  afforded 
them  fish  of  numy  kinds.  The  trout,  sisquoet,  white  fish,  and  sturgeon,  which,  in 
spawning  time,  would  fill  their  rivet's,  where,  making  racks  across  the  stream,  they 
would  spear  and  hook  up  great  quantities  as  the  fish  came  down  after  spawning.  They 
made  nets  of  cedar  and  basswood  bark,  and  from  the  sinews  of  animals. 

The  ribs  of  the  moose  and  buffalo  made  materials  for  their  knives ;  a  stone  tied  to 
the  end  of  a  stick,  with  which  they  broke  sticks  and  branches,  answered  the  purpose 
of  an  axe ;  the  thigh-lHMie  of  a  muskrat  made  their  awls,  clay  their  kettles,  and  bows 
of  wood,  stone-headed  arrows,  and  spear  heads  made  of  bone,  formed  their  implements 
of  hunting  and  war. 
1>T.  1I._18 


188 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


:i! 


in 

I 

-'  t 


4 


IV 


I 


'I 


\ 


(I 


Fire  was  iniulc  from  the  friction  of  two  stirks.  Their  shirts  and  leggins  were  made 
of  finely  dressed  skins.  Bhmkets  of  beuver-skins,  eight  of  which  sewed  together 
formed  the  robe  of  a  man. 

It  is  a  fact  worthy  of  reconl,  that  copjKM',  though  abounding  in  their  country  on  the 
lake  shore,  they  never  used  or  formed  into  implements  for  use.  They  considered  it, 
and  still  do,  at  the  present  day,  in  the  light  of  a  sacred  article,  and  never  used  it  but 
OS  ornaments  to  their  medicine-bags. 

If  ancient  tools  have  Ix'en  found,  and  marks  are  discovered  showing  that  cop|x*r  was 
worked  on  Lake  Sui)erior  ages  ago,  it  is  not  at  all  probable,  on  this  account,  that  the 
race  now  living  there  were  the  workers  of  it. 

At  this  era,  there  was  maintained  at  Mi>-mng-icunHV-1caii-'niij,  the  central  town  and 
power  of  tlie  Ojibwas,  a  continual  fire  as  a  symliol  of  their  nationality.'  They  main- 
tained also  a  civil  lM)lity,  which,  however,  was  much  mixed  up  with  their  religious  and 
medicinal  beliefs. 

The  totem  of  the  Ah-dic-tca '  ruled  over  them,  and  Muk-wali,  or  Bear  Totem,  led 
them  to  war. 

The  rites  of  the  Me-da-tve-wln,  or  their  mode  of  worshipping  the  one  Great  Spirit, 
and  the  lesser  spirits,  that  fill  earth,  sky,  and  water,  was  prsK'tised  in  those  days  in  its 
purest  and  most  original  fomis. 

They  say  that  a  large  wigwam  was  erected  on  the  Island,  which  they  called  Me-da- 
wig-wam,  and  in  which  all  the  holier  rites  of  their  religion  were  practised.  Though 
probably  rude  in  its  structure  and  build,  and  not  lasting  in  its  materials,  yet  it  was 
the  temple  t)f  these  primitive  sons  of  the  forest.  And  in  their  religious  phraseology, 
the  island  of  their  ancient  temple  is  known  to  this  day  as  Mc-da-w'uj-tcam,  or  Me-do- 
we-lodge. 

In  tho.se  days  their  native  and  prin>itive  customs  were  in  full  force  and  rigidly 
adhered  to.  Neither  man  nor  woman  ever  passed  the  age  of  puberty  without  severe 
and  protracted  fasts.  Besides  the  one  great  and  overruling  spirit,  each  person  sought 
in  dreams  and  fasts  his  particular  guardian,  or  dream-spirit. 

Many  more  iMjrsons  are  said  to  have  lived  the  full  temi  of  life  allotted  to  mankind 
than  do  at  the  present  day. 

When  a  person  fell  sick,  a  small-jjox  lodge  was  immediately  made,  purposely  for  him, 
and  a  medicine-man  called  to  attend  and  cure.  Only  this  jwrsonage  had  any 
intercourse  with  the  sick. 

If  a  person  died  of  a  severe  or  violent  disea.se,  his  clothing,  the  Itarks,  and  even  the 
poles  that  formed  his  lodge,  were  burned  by  fire.  Thus  did  they  of  old  guard  against 
pestilence ;  and  sickness  appears  to  have  been  more  rare  than  at  the  present  day. 

'  This  opinion  agrees  with  a  tradition  mentioned  in  the  Notes  to  Ontwa,  an  Indian  poem,  published  about  1822. 
'  Ah-aw-wa,  Mo-awh-wauk,  and  Mong,  arc  nearly  synonymous,  and  mean  the  Loon,  which  is  the  totem  of  the 
royal  Ojibwa  family. 


>« 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


139 


The  old  men  all  agree  in  saving  that  before  the  white  man  found  and  n\<sided  among 
them,  there  were  fewer  nuirilers,  tliefts,  and  lying;  more  fear  and  devotion  to  the 
Great  Spirit;  more  obedience  to  their  pairnts,  re.si)ect  for  old  age,  and  eha«tity  in  man 
and  woman,  than  exists  among  them  now.  The  council  of  the  Mi-ila-ice  initiators 
partook,  and  partakes  still,  of  the  spirit  of  the  ten  commandments,  that  was  given  to 
the  children  hy  the  great  Jthuvuh,  amid  the  lightnings  and  thnnderings  of  Mount 
Sinai. 

In  thase  days  the  ties  of  blood  were  stronger  among  them.  Tliere  was  more 
good-will,  hospitality,  and  charity,  practised  towards  one  anotlier;  and  the  widow  and 
orphan  were  never  allowed  to  live  in  poverty  and  want. 

In  the  traditionary  emigration  of  the  tribe  from  the  east,  a  portion  of  them  moved 
in  the  direction  of  the  North  of  Lake  Sujx'rior,  and  are  now  known  as  the  Muskegoos 
and  Sinj-imHn-<Iiii)-uh-win4i)e-wug,  or  "Thick  Wooilsmen."  Other  portions  of  the  trilje 
stopped  at  Sault  Ste-Marie,  which  has  also  been  one  of  the  oldest  towns  they  now 
tell  of 

In  the  Straits  of  ^^ Mc-sJw-ni-mirk-uMitik-oiig,"'  or  "Great  Turtle,"  they  parted  from 
their  relations,  the  Ottawa  and  I\Mla-waud-um-ee(j.^  Witli  these  two  trilx-s,  together 
with  the  0<li«h-(pi(uj-um-€e(j,^  or  Algoncpiius,  they  to  tliis  day  claim  the  closest 
allinity. 

The  confederation  of  the  six  nations,  whom  they  denominate  Xod-o-waij-fic-wiKj,* 
from  Nod-o-icuji,  "  The  Adder,"  appears  to  have  Ix'cn  their  most  inveterate  foes,  and 
who,  having  been  first  discovered  by  the  whites,  and  armed  with  guns,  succeeded  in 
driving  west  the  remnant  of  these  Ojibwa  tribes,  that  had  remained  Ix'hind  their 
main  body,  who  were  at  this  era  already  living  on  Lake  Superior.  With  them  went 
the  Wy-iin-dot,  Po-tla-wand-um-ee,   Ottawa,  and  0-tlislwpiag-umee. 

The  old  men  of  the  Ojibways  claim,  that  before  this  event  happened,  the  main  IkmIv 
of  their  tribe  had  already  found  their  way  to  Lake  Superior,  and  were  living  at 
Lapointe.  With  the  jwrtion  of  the  tribe  stopping  at  St.  Marie,  Saganaw,  and  the 
Muskegoes,  I  claim  no  close  acquaintance,  and  will  mention  them  only  as  they  are 
connected  with  the  general  history  of  the  tribes.  That  portion  of  the  trilie  that  made 
their  town  at  Lapointe,  as  it  were,  formed  the  advance  guard,  or  van  of  the  Algic 
stock.  They  now  numl)er  eight  thousand  souls,  spread  over  a  large  extent  of  country. 
At  the  time  they  were  hemmed  in  by  their  enemies  at  Lapointe,  they  say  that  they 
numbered  more  :  and  it  is  natural  to  suppose,  that  their  bloody,  exterminating  wars, 
in  connexion  with  pestilence,  that  has  twice  visited  them  within  the  past  hundred 


'  The  original  Ojibwa  name  for  tho  Islaud  of  Mackinaw. 

'  Pottawattouiies. 

'  Broad  Waters;  i.  e.,  Lake  of  the  Two  Mountains,  Canada. 

*  liy  tliis  name  they  Bomctiincs  call  the  Sioux,  (meaning  enemy.) 


140 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


Ml 


<  >i 


Ih 


<'■< 


I 


l<: 


nii 


I 


years,  would  greatly  losson  their  mimborH ;  it  is  therefore  within  bouiuls  to  estimate 
the  trilie  living  at  Laix)inte  and  different  jKirtions  of  the  lake,  eight  generations  ago,  at 
alx)ut  twenty  thousand.  The  marks  they  have  left,  alone,  on  tiie  island,  in  space 
would  accommodate  nearly  that  numlx^r. 

Their  extennination  of  the  Minuliia  trihe  is  a  traditionary  event,  ivlated  to  me  hy 
the  Sandy  Lake  chief,  and  others,  and  which  I  liave  thought  proper  to  introduce  here, 
as  an  answer  in  part  to  the  query  resjK'cting  the  lost  trila»  of  Eries,  and  as  an  event 
happening  many  hundred  years  ago.  Tiiere  was  at  one  time,  living  on  the  shores  of 
a  large  lake,  a  grand  and  powerful  tril)e  of  (leople  called  Munduas.  They  wei"o 
congregated  in  one  single  town,  which  was  so  large,  that  one  standing  on  a  hill  in  the 
centre,  could  not  see  the  limits  of  it.  Tiiis  tril)e  werc  fierce  and  warlike;  tlieir  hand 
was  against  every  other  tril)e.  Tiieir  prisonei-s  tiiey  burned  witli  fire,  as  offerings  to 
their  spirits.  All  tlie  surrounding  trilx's  live<l  in  great  fear  of  them,  till  their  Ojii)wa 
brother  called  them  to  council,  and  sent  the  wampum  of  war  to  collect  the  "arriors  of 
many  tribes  together.  A  war-party  was  raised,  wiu>.«e  line  of  warriors  extended  as  far 
as  the  eye  could  reach.  They  marched  against  tiie  great  town  of  the  Mundua,  and 
attacked  it  on  all  sides  that  it  could  be  approaclied  by  land.  Though  the  numlKn-s  of 
their  assailants  was  overwhelming,  the  Mundua  had  such  full  confidence  in  their  own 
prowess  aiul  numerical  strength,  that  the  first  day  of  attack  they  sent  only  their  l)oys 
to  repel  the  invaders.  The  lioys  being  driven  in,  they  on  the  second  day  tunied  out 
their  young  men  to  fight  their  foes,  while  the  rest  of  the  town  were  leii.sting  and 
dancing.  Still,  however,  the  Ojibwas  and  their  allies  gradually  Ijeat  them  back,  till 
on  the  eve  of  the  second  day's  fight,  they  found  themselves  in  ixjsse.«sion  of  half  of  the 
great  town.  The  third  day  dawned,  and  the  Mundua  bt»ginning  to  think  it  a  serious 
business,  their  old  and  tried  warriore,  "  mighty  men  of  valor,"  sang  their  war- 
song,  put  on  their  paints  and  ornaments  of  war,  and  sallied  out  to  drive  back  their 
invaders. 

Tiiis  day,  the  fight  was  hfind  to  hand  and  fierce  as  fire.  There  is  nothing  in  their 
traditionary  accounts  to  equal  the  violence  of  the  struggle  in  this  battle ;  the  bravest 
warriors  in  America  hud  met :  one  fighting  for  vengeance,  glory,  and  renown ;  the 
other  for  every  thing  that  is  dear  to  man,  even  their  very  existence.  The  Mundua 
were  o1)liged  at  last  to  give  way,  and,  hotly  pressed  by  their  foes,  men,  women,  and 
children,  threw  themselves  into  the  lake.  At  this  juncture  their  aged  chief,  (who  was 
also  a  medicine-man,)  seeing  the  dead  bodies  of  his  bravest  warriors  covering  the 
ground,  called  with  a  loud  voice  for  the  assistance  of  the  Great  Spirit,  but  no  answer 
being  made  to  his  prayer,  he  called  on  the  evil  spirits  of  earth  and  water,  and  suddenly 
there  arose  fi-om  the  lK)som  of  the  lake  a  dark  and  heavy  fog,  and  covered  in  folds  of 
darkness  the  scene  of  the  bloody  fight. 

The  old  chief  gathered  together  the  remnants  of  his  slaughtered  tribe,  and,  under 
cover  of  the  evil  spirits'  fog,  they  left  their  town  for  ever.     For  a  day  and  a  night, 


HISTORY,   AND    GOVERNMENT. 


Ill 


tlioy  travflk'd  onwanl,  ami  woro  coiijrratiilatiii}^  theinsdves  on  their  escaiio,  when  a 
gale  of  wind  that  the  inoclieiiio-Tiicn  of  tlio  Ojibwa.s  had  caiisod  tlie  Oirat  Spirit  to 
raiso,  di^iKTrwd  the  evil  fog,  and  the  Murpri.xe  of  tlie  Mundiia  waa  astoiniding  to  fmd 
tlieniselves  .standing  on  a  hill  back  of  their  devoted  town,  and  in  full  view  of  their 
enemies.  ''  It  is  the  will  of  the  Gri'at  y|)irit  that  we  ishould  ix>riHh,"  exclaimed  the 
aged  ciiief,  and  once  more  they  dragged  tlieir  weary  limbs  in  lligiit.  They  tied  into  a 
forest,  where  they  buried  their  women  and  children  in  the  ground,  leaving  them  but  a 
bix-athing  hole.  The  men  then  returned,  and  beguiled  the  pursuers  by  leading  them 
in  a  diflerent  direction.  A  few  escai)ed,  who  afterwards  returned  and  dug  up  their 
women  and  children.  This  .small  renuiant  of  the  once  iK>werful  Mundua  was  the  ne.\t 
}ear  attacked  by  an  Ojibwa  war-party,  taken  prisoners,  and  were  incorfwrated  into 
tliis  tril)e.  Individuals  are  pointed  out,  to  this  day,  as  descended  from  them,  and  have 
the  marten  totem. 

We  will  now  relate  events  hapj)ening  a  few  years  prior  to  their  acquaintance  with 
the  whites.     The  exact  time,  however,  is  uncertain. 

One  prominent  reason  why  the  Ojibwas  chose  to  live  on  an  island,  is  evident ;  and 
that  was,  for  more  security  IVom  their  numerous  foes.  The  Nmlowa  war-parties  did 
not  hei-e  wach  them,  as  they  came  no  farther  than  the  Sault  at  the  foot  of  the  lake. 
But  they  had  as  powerful  and  inveterate  enemies  in  the  Odugaumeeg  and  Alxiinug, 
into  whose  country  they  were  encroaching. 

The  OiJiiij-diiiiKeij  occupied  a  country  towards  the  southwest,  about  the  waters  of 
Wisconsin,  on  Ton-a-gun  and  Chippewiiy  Rivers. 

The  Sioux  lived  alx»ut  the  waters  of  St.  Croix,  Mississippi,  and  St.  Louis  Rivers. 
Sandy  Lake,  Mille  Lac,  and  Yellow  Lake,  being  then  the  sites  of  their  principal  towns. 

A  tribe  also,  called  0-man-ee,  is  told  of  as  their  earliest  enemies.  They  are  spoken 
of  as  living  at  Mille  Lac  in  earthern  houses,  and  were  in  a  general  battle  exterminated 
or  driven  oil". 

The  Ojibwas  were  most  harassed  by  the  Odug-aum-eeg  and  A-boin-ug,  or  Sioux  and 
Foxes. 

The  lake  shores  of  Superior  were  familiar  to  the  war-parties  of  these  tAvo  warlike 
tribes. 

At  one  time,  a  war-party  of  Sioux  found  their  way  from  the  nearest  ]M)int  of  the  main, 
to  the  island  of  La  Pointe,  and  during  the  night  two  of  their  warriors  crossed  on  a 
log,  a  distance  of  two  miles,  and  returned  in  a  canoe,  with  four  scalps  they  had  taken 
on  the  i,sland. 

On  another  occasion,  a  large  party  of  Foxes  floated  down  the  Ontonagun  in  their 
small  inland  bark  canoes.  They  landed  in  the  night  on  the  island  of  their  foes,  and 
early  in  the  morrung  captured  four  women  that  had  gone  to  gather  wood ;  the  spot  is 
still  pointed  out. 

The  revenge  of  the  Ojibwas  was  quick  and  complete ;   as  the  Foxes,  by  their 


142 


TRIBAL    OIUiANIZATION, 


n 


exultant  voUs,  discoviTiHl  to  tlu-ir  I'lu'inii-H  the  course  of  their  lliglit,  and  liunilretls  of 
tlie  Ojihwii  waniora  euihaiked  hastily  in  their  large  lake  canoes  in  jmrsiiit.  A  dense 
fog  covered  the  lake,  and,  deia'nding  on  this  for  eventual  eseajK',  and  confident  in  their 
numbers,  the  Foxes,  intoxicated  with  their  success,  kept  up  a  continual  yelling  and 
singing.  Thus  guided,  the  Ojihwas.  silently  and  swiftly  jiursued  them,  keeping 
puriKtsely  in  tiieir  wake,  till  they  arrived  opjMtsite  a  line  of  steep  nnky  coast,  a  mile 
alx)ve  the  mouth  of  Montreal  Kiver  and  eight  leagues  fi-oni  La  l\»inte ;  hen'  they  fell 
on  the  Foxes  with  great  fury,  —  fighting  in  large  canoes  which  sat  (Irndy  in  the  water, 
they  nearly  desti-oyed  to  a  nuin  the  party  of  four  hundred  Foxes,  who,  Ix'ing  in  snudl 
canoes,  weiv  upset,  and  most  of  them  drowned  and  dispatched  in  the  water  (IMate  •\'2). 
This  is  the  only  naval  engagement  the  old  men  of  this  trilw  tell  of 

Soon  after  the  alH)ve  occurrence,  a  party  of  Foxes  fell  on  a  camp  of  Ojibwas  at 
Kah-puk-wa-ka,  while  the  men  were  out  himting.  They  cajjtured  two  youths,  having 
driven  them  into  lK)ggy  ground.  One  of  these  prisoners  was  the  son  of  a  principal 
Ojihwa  chief  named  BUinx-irnli,  and  ludonging  to  the  A/i-iiir/i-intii/i  family. 

A  tale  was  told  me  by  a  direct  descendant  of  this  Ah-<iirh-imiik  family  connected 
with  the  eajtturc  of  this  youth,  which  deserves  a  place  in  the  R'conls  of  the  tribe. 
At  the  time  the  capture  was  made,  the  father  of  the  young  man  was  out  on  a  hunt. 
Ketuniing  home,  he  heard  the  heart-rending  news,  anil  know  ing  that  his  .«on's  fate 
Avould  Ix;  the  stake,  lie  immediately  pui-suetl  the  returning  captoi^s  singly  and  alone. 
Following  in  their  trail,  he  arrived  at  one  of  their  principal  villages  while  the  Foxea 
were  in  the  act  of  burning  his  son  with  fire.  He  stepjK'd  boldly  int»)  the  midst  of  his 
enemies,  and  offered  to  take  the  jdace  of  his  son.  "  My  .sm,"  said  he,  "  has  seen  but 
a  few  winters ;  his  feet  have  never  trod  the  war-path  :  but  the  hairs  of  my  head  are 
white,  and  over  the  graves  of  my  relatives  I  have  hung  numy  .scalps  that  I  have  taken 
from  the  he.ids  of  your  warriors."  The  old  chief's  oiler  was  accepted  by  the  Foxes, — 
his  son  released,  and  him.self  burnt  at  the  stake  with  all  the  tortures  that  savage 
ingenuity  could  invent.  The  .«on  i-eturned  to  his  jH-ople,  and  was  aftenvards  known 
by  his  father's  name.  He  Ijecame  a  noted  man  in  his  trilx\  and,  in  the  course  of  his 
history,  we  will  have  occasion  to  notice  his  deeds  in  after  life. 

The  act  related  aljove  was  terril>ly  avenged  by  the  Ojibwa  trilx*.  A  large  war- 
party  was  collected  and  nuirched  against  the  towns  of  the  Fo.xes,  on  the  Chippewa 
river ;  and  they  returned  not  until  six  villages  of  their  enemies  had  l)een  laid  waste, 
and  their  inhabitants  destroyed.  After  this  event  the  Fox  tribe  retired  fmm  the 
country  lx)rdering  on  Lake  Superior,  and  fell  back  on  the  Mississippi. 

The  war  between  the  two  tribes  wa.s  bloody  in  the  extreme,  and  carried  cm  with  all 
the  cruelty  of  savage  warfare.  Captives  wei-e  taken  and  burnt  by  fire.  This  custom 
originated  in  the  following  manner. 

A  noted  warrior  of  the  Ojibwas  was  once  taken  captive  by  his  own  nephew,  son  to 
his  sister,  who  had  been  captured  and  married  among  the  Foxes.     The  nephew,  to 


Ill 


■  l 

i 

f 

w 

Wi 

u 

ml 

III 

WbM    ^\ 

■. 

1 

lf|n 

1 

I'LP      ^1 

ill     '^ 

i'l 

HI 

; 

I  !i  l| 

, 

ft:        '.| 

rrtfl 

1 

II 

^ 


f  ''  i 


\ 


•% 


♦  >f 


'  If 

■  i 

11 

■  i^K. 

'i 

'  1 V 

il 

Jfl 

HISTORY,   AND   GOVET  NMENT. 


143 


show  his  people  his  utter  disrcganl  to  any  tie  of  relationship  M-ith  the  Ojibwas, 
planted  two  stakes  in  the  grountl,  and  taking  his  captive  by  the  arm,  tied  his  feet  and 
hands  to  the  stakes,  remarking  "  that  he  wished  to  warm  his  uncle  by  a  good  fire,"  he 
then  built  up  a  large  fire,  and  after  roasting  one  side  of  his  victim,  he  turned  the  other 
to  the  blaze ;  when  the  naked  lx)dy  had  Ijeen  bnnit  to  a  blister,  he  untied  him,  and 
letting  him  loose,  told  him  "  to  go  home,  and  tell  the  Ojibwas  how  the  Foxes  treated 
tlieir  uncles."  The  micle  recovered  from  his  fire-wounds,  and  in  a  future  excursion 
succeeded  in  capturing  his  nephew.  He  ttK)k  him  to  the  village  of  the  Ojibwas, 
whore  he  tied  him  to  a  stake,  and  taking  a  fresh  elk-skin,  on  which  a  layer  of  fat  had 
purposely  been  left,  he  placed  it  over  a  fire,  until  it  became  one  immense  blaze,  and 
then  thi-owing  it  over  the  naked  shoulders  of  his  nephew,  remarked,  "  Nepliew,  when  I 
was  in  your  village,  you  warmed  me  before  a  good  fire ;  now  I,  in  return,  give  yon  a 
mantle  to  warm  jour  back."  The  elk-skin,  covered  with  fat,  burnt  furiously,  and 
crisping,  lighted  aroinid  the  body  of  his  nephew  a  dreadful  mantle,  that  soon 
consumed  him.  This  act  was  again  retaliated  by  the  Foxes,  and  death  by  fire  soon 
became  customary  with  both  tribes. 

Soon  after  their  lake  fight  with  this  tribe,  a  war-party  of  Sioux,  numbering  one 
hundred  and  fifty  men,  found  their  way  to  the  extreme  }K)int  of  Shitg-uh-xcaum-Uc, 
directly  opjwsite  the  town  of  Lapointe,  one  mile  distant,  llere  they  laid  in  wait,  and 
one  morning  attacked  two  joung  men  who  hiul  gone  to  the  point  to  look  for  ducks. 
The  spot  being  in  those  days  covered  with  numerous  sand-hills,  they  defended 
themselves  till  the  village  opposite  Ijecame  alarmed,  and  the  Ojibwa  warriors,  <piickly 
collecting,  ran  to  the  southern  extremity  of  their  town,  and  at  Gooseberry  creek 
embarked  in  their  canoes,  and  paddled  straight  across  to  the  little  portage,  a  place 
where  Shag-ah-waum-ik  is  but  a  few  rods  wide  —  once  in  possession  of  this  spot,  the 
Sioux  were  entirely  cut  off  from  retreat.  The  van  of  iKjth  parties  arrived  there  at  the 
same  moment,  and  a  severe  fight  for  egress  was  maintained  by  the  Sioux ;  they  were 
however  driven  back,  and  being  caught  as  it  were  in  a  trap,  were  to  a  man  killed, 
except  two  who  swam  into  the  lake,  and  as  their  Iwdies  were  not  found,  it  was 
supposed  that  they  had  performed  the  almost  superhuman  act  of  swinuuing  three  or 
four  miles  in  fresh  water. 

Tlie  particles  of  bones  still  strewn  over  the  whole  point  are  said  to  be  the  remains 
of  the  slain  warriors. 

An  anecdote  is  told  of  a  warrior  of  the  Crane  family,  Avho,  being  left  l)y  his  fellows 
in  the  hurry  of  embarking,  laslied  his  bow  and  cpiiver  of  arrows  to  his  back,  and  swam 
to  Shag-ah-waumick,  over  a  mile  distant ;  so  eager  was  he  for  the  fight.  lie  arrived 
after  the  battle  was  over,  and  was  so  enraged  by  disappointment,  that  he  struck, 
indiscriminately,  his  fellows,  for  having  left  him  iR'hind. 

The  encoimters  which  I  have  briefly  mentioned  are  related  by  the  old  men  with 
great  minuteness,  and  interspersed  with  anecdotes.    Happening  before  their  intercourse 


144 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


m 


with  the  whites,  they  fought  with  their  priinitivo  weapons;  spears,  hows  and  arrows, 
and  war-chibs. 

We  now  come  to  the  period  wlien  the  white  man  first  became  known  to  them.  The 
tradition  of  this  important  era  in  their  liistory  is  briefly  as  follows: 

A  principal  man  of  the  Mc-ila-irc-wlii,  named  Mase-ioa-pc-ga,  dreamed  a  dream,  in 
which  he  beheld  spirits  in  the  shape  of  men,  but  having  Avhitc  skins,  and  their  heada 
were  covered.  They  appro.ached  him  with  a  smile  on  the  face,  and  the  hands 
extended. 

This  dream  he  told  to  the  principal  men  of  his  tribe,  in  a  council,  and  over  a  feast 
to  his  dream-spirit.  lie  informed  them  that  the  spirits  he  had  seen  in  his  drcam 
resided  in  the  east,  and  that  he  would  go  and  find  them. 

For  one  year  Mi(-sc-wa-j>c-ya  prepared  for  liis  journey.  He  made  a  strong  canoe,  and 
dried  meat  for  his  wappo,  and,  with  only  his  wife  as  a  companion,  he  left  Lapointe  to 
go  and  find  the  spirits  he  had  seen  in  his  dream.'  He  went  down  the  dreat  Lake, 
and  entered  into  a  river  that  flowed  towards  the  rising  of  the  sun.  He  passed  through 
tribes  of  the  red  man  that  spoke  difleivnt  languages. 

At  last,  when  the  river  had  become  wide,  and  like  a  lake,  he  found  on  the  banks 
one  night,  as  he  encamped,  a  hut  built  of  logs,  and  the  stumps  of  large  trees  tiiat  had 
been  cut  by  other  and  sharper  instruments  than  their  rude  axes. 

The  signs  thus  discovered  were  apparently  two  winters  t)ld. 

Much  encom'aged,  Ma-nc-wa-pe-ya  continued  his  course  down  stream,  and  the  next 
day  again  came  to  another  deserted  log  hut. 

The  third  day  he  saw  another  log  hut,  from  the  chinmey  of  which  arose  a  smoke. 
It  was  occupied  by  the  white  spirits  of  his  dream,  who  came  out  and  cordially 
welcomed  him  with  a  shake  of  the  hand. 

When  he  returned  to  his  jieople,  he  brougiit  tiie  presents  he  had  received  of  an  axe, 
a  knife,  beads,  and  some  .scarlet  doth,  which  he  had  carefully  secured  in  his  medicine- 
bag,  and  brought  safely  to  M<j-}tu)gicim-a-kaun-w<j. 

Collecting  his  people  to  council,  he  showed  them  the  sacred  presents  of  the  white 
spirits. 

The  next  season  numbers  followed  Mase-wa-pe-fja  on  his  second  visit  to  the  whites. 
They  carried  with  them  many  beaver-skins,  and  returned  with  the  fire-arms  that  from 
this  time  made  them  the  terror  of  their  enemies. 

From  this  time  the  dispersion  of  the  tribe  from  La  Pointe  can  be  dated.  The 
Indians  say,  eight  generations  or  "  string  of  lives"  ago,  which,  estimating  an  Indian 
generation  at  thirty-five  years,  would  make  two  hundred  and  eighty  years  ago. 

One  cause  has  been  given  to  me,  in  the  course  of  my  inquiries,  by  persons  of  tho 
tribe,  which  is  said  to  have  led  to  their  dispersion  from  the  island. 


Even  in  the  prcBcnt  day  the  Indiuns  have  nearly  the  same  belief  in  their  fust  dreams  as  the  Hebrews  of  old. 


% 


HISTORY,  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


146 


Poisoning,  in  those  days,  was  a  common  mode  of  revenging  an  injury  These 
Indians,  on  a  small  scale,  have  had  their  ages  of  Medicis,  Borgias  and  poisons,  as  well 
as  the  whites ;  and  it  is  t<}ld  that  it  required  hut  the  slightest  cause  for  a  person  to 
draw  down  uiwn  himself  the  displeasure  of  a  medicine-man,  and  die  of  his  poison. 
Instances  occurred,  where  the  [wisoners  are  known  to  have  dug  up  their  victims,  and 
invite  the  relatives  to  a  feast  on  the  body. 

This  horrid  ceremony  was  got  up  in  utter  darkness,  and  not  till  the  friends  of  the 
deceased  had  received  their  share  of  the  feast  were  torches  suddenly  lighted,  and  they 
became  aware  of  the  nature  of  the  banquet.  Fear  of  the  poisoner's  power  and 
vengeance  would  constrain  them  to  eat  what  was  placed  before  them.  This  was  a 
usual  sacrificial  feast  to  the  spirit  of  the  jTOi-son. 

At  this  period,  the  tribe  lived  in  great  awe  of  one  another,  and  especially  of  their 
medicine-men :  the  fear  of  whom  has  not  yet  quite  died  away,  and  which  is  the  secret 
of  the  power  of  this  body  among  them. 

At  this  period,  it  is  also  affirmed  tliat  it  was  customary  to  offer  to  their  different 
Me-dorwe  spirits,  human  sacrifices  of  one  another,  and  of  their  children.  This  sacrifice 
is  said  to  have  been  made  at  the  roots  of  a  huge  pine-tree  that  stood  somewhere  in 
the  centre  of  the  island,  which  reaivd  its  branches  far  above  other  trees. 

The  virgin  feast  of  human  flesh,  which  we  sometimes  hear  spoken  of,  and  read  of, 
was  also  in  full  practice ;  and  there  was  an  old  woman  alive  at  La  Pointe  a  few  years 
since,  who  could  tell  tales  on  tliis  head  (her  own  experience)  that  would  make  the 
bbxHl  run  cold. 

To  such  an  extent  were  these  evil  practices  carried,  that  at  last  fear  fell  on  the 
inhabitants  of  La  Pointe;  the  weeping  and  wailing  o^  je-bi-ug  or  ghosts  were  heard 
nightly  ivsounding  through  their  town,  till  at  last  they  fled,  and  a  general  dispersion 
took  place,  which  left  their  island  entirely  deserted. 

I  liave  asked  old  Bc-fihe-ke  and  Ttitj-imug-aun-ay,  chiefs  at  La  Pointe,  and  old  men 
of  other  bands,  for  corroboration  of  this  tale  I  have  here  related ;  and  though  not 
denying  it  altogether,  they  are  unwilling  to  acknowledge  the  fact,  which  is  but  natural 
they  should,  from  respect  to  the  memory  of  their  ancestors. 

My  information  was  derived  from  old  half-breeds  of  the  Cadotte  family,  who  were 
informed  of  the  above  facts  by  very  old  Indians,  who,  thirty  or  forty  years  since,  were 
still  living  at  La  Pointe,  some  of  them  over  a  century  old,  and  who  could  remember 
the  tales  their  immediate  fathers  related  to  them. 

It  is  a  fact  also  worthy  of  mention,  that  before  traders  came  and  made  their 
residence  on  the  island,  no  Indian,  it  is  said,  dare  sleep  over-night  on  the  site  of  their 
old  town,  for  fear  of  the  Je-hi-wj. 

The  first  traders  that  built  on  the  island,  during  the  old  French  domination,  found 
their  gardens  overgrown  with  many  years'  growth  of  trees,  and  it  is  comparatively 
Pt.  IL  — 19 


Vi' 


146 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


i\ 


lately,  that  the  hand  living  on  the  opposite  hay  of  Sha<j-ah-\caum-lk,  returned  to  live 
on  the  island. 

Being  hard  pressed  by  their  enemies,  or  in  time  of  great  famine,  such  a  thing  as 
eating  human  Hesh  might  have  been  adopted  to  save  life — as  even  at  the  present  time 
it  often  happens  among  the  Indians  north  of  Lake  Suiwrior.  This,  together  with  the 
fact  of  their  poisoning  one  another,  might  have  given  rise  to  the  above  story,  and  might 
have  conduced  in  some  measure  to  their  dispersion,  wliich  I  am  inclined  to  believe  took 
place  naturally,  as  they  prevailed  against  their  enemies,  and  became  possessed  of  a 
larger  extent  of  country. 

After  this,  Ix'ing  aware  of  the  white  man's  presence  on  the  continent,  the  next 
occurrence  of  importance  was  the  taking  of  the  Sioux  village  of  Sandy  Lake,  on  the 
Mississippi. 

Bi-ans-tmh,  the  young  man  whose  father  had  died  for  him  at  the  stake,  became, 
after  this  occurrence,  a  fierce  and  inveterate  enemy  of  the  Sioux  and  Foxes,  taking 
every  opiwrtunity,  and  indeed  making  it  the  business  of  his  life,  to  revenge  the  death 
of  his  brave  father. 

With  a  large  Ijand  of  his  tribe,  he  pushed  on  up  the  lake,  and  made  a  stand  at  Fond 
du  Lac,  Wi-tt-qmih-he-che-ijiim-e.  At  this  point  Di-itns-uaU  collected  a  large  war-party, 
from  the  different  villages  of  the  Ojibwas  on  the  lake  shore,  at  the  head  of  which  he 
proceeded  in  canoes  up  the  St.  Louis,  and  attacked  with  great  success  the  then  large 
Sioux  town  of  Sandy  Lake.  They  destroyed  numljers  of  their  enemies,  and  drove 
them  forever  from  the  lake.  Here  Bi-ans-wah,  with  his  band,  eventually  made  thei 
abiding-place  and  village.  It  is  at  this  point  that  the  Ojibwas,  in  t)\eir  western 
conquests,  first  came  on  to  the  Jussissippi.  They  made  this  tlieir  central  point  and 
rallying-place,  where  parties  collected,  who  marched  against  and  wrested  from  the  Sioux 
Leech,  Cass,  Winnipeg,  Mille  Lac,  and  Red  lakes.  It  is  from  this  point  that  the 
different  bands,  now  living  on  and  over  the  head-waters  of  the  Mississippi,  radiated. 

Bi-ans-iDiih,  besides  his  deeds  in  war,  is  also  noted  as  having  put  a  stop  to  the 
inhuman  custom  of  burning  prisoners  by  fire.  This  he  effected  by  a  treaty  of  peace 
with  the  Sioux,  and  though  the  peace  was  soon  after  broken,  yet  both  parties  mutually 
refrained  from  the  above  practice.  From  this  time  prisoners  Avere  seldom  taken,  and 
if  taken  never  burnt. 

Besides  the  large  band  tliat  pushed  their  way  to  the  head-waters  of  the  great  river, 
other  bands  left  the  lake  shore,  and  made  their  towns  at  Courtoreille,  Lac  du  Flamljcau, 
and  on  the  St.  Croix  river ;  conquering,  at  the  expense  of  much  blood,  the  country 
as  they  advanced. 

One  morning  a  party  of  young  men  going  out  from  the  Bny  of  Sliag-d-wdum-ik  to 
spear  fish  through  the  ice  in  the  fore  part  of  the  winter,  discovered  a  .smoke  arising 
from  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  then  unfrequented  island  of  tlieir  old  town. 
La  Pointe.    They  proceeded  thither,  and  found,  in  a  rude  cabin  made  of  logs,  two  white 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 


147 


men  in  the  last  stages  of  starvation.  They  had  evidently  been  driven  on  the  island 
by  ice,  late  in  the  fall,  where  they  \im\  remained  for  some  time,  suffering  the  pangs  of 
hunger.  At  the  time  denoted,  they  had  been  reduced  to  the  extremity  of  roasting 
their  cloth  and  blankets  over  the  coals,  and  thus  eating  them  as  a  last  means  of 
sustaining  life. 

The  Indians  carefully  conveyed  them  to  their  village,  and  fed  them  with  judicious 
kindness.  But  one,  however,  survived ;  who,  after  remaining  with  them  through  the 
winter,  returned  to  Quebec,  where  he  came  from. 

The  above  story  is  invariably  given  by  the  old  men  of  Laiwinte  on  being  asked  the 
question,  "  Who  was  the  first  white  man  that  found  the  Indians  at  Lajwinte  after  they 
were  known  to  be  on  the  continent?" 

The  events  narrated  happened  seven  string  of  lives  ago. 

Of  Fathers  Marquette  and  Alloez,  whom  Mr.  Bancroft  states  as  having,  one  hundred 
and  eighty-two  years  ago,  found  their  way  to  the  Bay  of  Shtg-ii-tcdum-ik,  and  there 
opened  a  mission  among  a  large  band  of  Indians,  I  cannot  obtain  from  them 
corroborative  testimony  sullicient  to  invalidate  the  fact  that  they  were  the  jjccple  thus 
visited. 

Unless  tliey  were  the  white  men  found  as  the  above  story  relates,  the  Indians  have 
no  knowledge  or  account  of  them. 

An  old  antique  silver  crucifix  was,  in  1847,  found  by  an  old  woman  in  her  garden, 
near  Lapointe,  after  its  having  been  ploughed  up.  This  circumstance  would  go  to 
prove  that  the  fearless  and  enterprising  Jesuits  had  lx!en  of  old  about  the  spot. 

The  first  white  men  that  made  a  permanent  residence  among  them  were  traders. 
During  the  old  French  domination,  a  jwst  was  built  on  the  Island  of  La  Pointe,  at  the 
mouth  of  a  creek  or  slough  lietween  the  present  site  of  the  American  Fur  Company's 
post  and  the  Prcsbyterian  mission. 

The  buildings  wei-e  surrounded  by  palisades  of  cedar,  and  cannon  are  said  to  have 
been  mounted  on  guard. 

A  tragedy  happened  here  which  is  minutely  spoken  of  by  the  Indians,  and  which 
caused  the  dismantling  and  evacuation  of  the  post. 

The  trader  in  charge,  whose  name  was  Joseph ,  was  murdered,  with  his  wife 

and  two  children,  in  cold  blood,  by  his  hircd  man.  Two  causes  are  given  for  this 
outrage :  fii-st,  the  man,  l)eing  discovered  pilfering  goods  from  his  master,  was  afraid 
to  be  denounced  and  punished  in  the  spring,  on  the  arrival  of  the  master,  or  governor, 
and  for  this  rea.son  he  determined  on  his  death ;  and  second,  he  had  become  enamoured 
with  his  master's  wife,  and  wished  to  get  possession  of  her.  After  killing  her  husband 
he  tried  t«>  force  her  to  his  wishes,  but  she  defended  herself  in  such  a  manner  with  an 
Indian  spear,  that  he  Avas  obliged,  in  self-tlefenco,  to  despatch  her,  and  afterwards  her 
two  children.  lie  buried  the  Ijodies  in  a  pile  of  chips  and  shavings  heaped  up  in  one 
corner  of  the  fort. 


148 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION, 


"if 


This  act  was  jierpetrated  in  the  spring,  while  the  Indians  were  all  camped  in  their 
sugar  bushes  on  the  main  shore,  and  the  ice  was  become  weak  and  rotten. 

The  murderer  told  the  Indians  who  inquired  for  their  trader,  the  plausible  story  that 
his  master  had  gone  witli  his  family  on  a  dog  train,  to  visit  them  at  their  sugar  camps. 
The  ice  being  bad,  all  sujjposcd  that  he  had  broken  in,  and  drowned  in  the  lake.  A  few 
dajs  after,  when  the  bay  Ix'came  free  of  ice,  the  Indians  turned  out  to  hunt  for  the  bodies 
of  their  trader  and  family  along  the  shores  of  the  island  and  main,  but  without  success. 

In  the  course  of  the  spring,  a  light  canoe  arrived  from  Quebec  with  a  partner  of  the 
trading  company  that  owned  the  iwst.  At  first,  the  story  of  the  murderer  was 
believed,  but  spots  of  blood,  afterwards  discovered  on  the  door  and  walls  of  the  apart- 
ment where  he  had  nuirdered  the  trader's  wife,  led  to  suspicion,  and  the  man  was 
ordered  to  Ik?  bound  and  confined.  A  day  or  two  after  this,  the  partner,  walking  round 
the  place  endeavoring  to  find  further  traces  of  the  supposed  murder,  stuck  his  swoi-d 
into  the  pile  of  rubbish  lying  in  the  corner  of  the  fort.  The  stench  arising  from  the 
point  of  his  cane  told,  that  there  the  Iwdies  were  concealed.  They  were  immediately 
dug  up  in  presence  of  the  murderer,  who  thereupon  confessed  his  crime. 

The  fort  was  razed  to  the  ground,  and  the  cannon  and  iron  works  thrown  into  the  adja- 
cent pond,  where,  the  bottom  Ix'ing  deep  and  miry,  the}'  have  never  been  discovered. 

The  culprit  was  taken  to  Quelx?c  for  punishment,  but,  as  some  have  it,  escaped  on 
the  way,  and  was  afterwards  tomahawked  by  an  Indian  warrior,  while  boasting  of  his 
deed  of  blood  at  the  red  pole,  where  warriors  were  telling  of  their  feats  in  war. 

It  had  become  customary,  during  the  French  domination,  for  the  Ojibwas  of  Lake 
Superior  to  visit  jearly  Mackinac,  Montreal,  and  even  Quebec.  They  were  well 
treated  by  the  French,  who  had,  at  this  time,  already  intermarried  with  them,  and 
thus  formed  a  link  that  made  them,  ever  after,  their  fast  friends. 

In  their  wars  with  the  British,  the  Ojibwas  took  active  part  with  the  French,  and 
numbers  of  their  warriors,  headed  by  their  chief,  Ma-mo7ig-e-«;-iJa,  were  present  at  the 
battle  and  fall  of  Queltec,  where  the  two  great  captains,  Wolfe  and  Montcalm,  fell. 

The  Ojibwas  also  joined  the  league  of  their  rclative,  the  great  Ottowa  chief,  Pontiac, 
and  were  mainly  instrumental  at  the  taking  of  Fort  Mackinac,  through  the  stratagem 
of  playing  ball  for  the  amusement  of  the  fated  garrison. 

After  the  conquest  of  Canada  by  the  British,  the  different  French  trading-posts  were 
dismantled,  and  but  a  few  of  the  old  French  traders  and  voyagers  remained  in  Lake 
Superior.  Among  these,  they  mention  Ke-chcsuh-ud-tse,  or  John  Baptist  (^adotte,  who 
was  in  the  vicinity  at  the  taking  of  Fort  Mackinac,  and  massacre  of  the  garrison  by 
the  Ojibwas  and  Ottowas.  It  was  this  man's  Indian  wife  who  is  said  to  have  saved 
the  life  of  Alexander  Henry,  the  only  Englishman  that  survived  the  massacre.' 

['Besides  Henry,  two  Knglisliiiien,  named  Solomons  and  Clark,  escaped.  One  crept  up  a  chimney;  the  other 
hid  himself  under  a  heap  of  corn.  Vide  my  Personal  Memoirs.  Two  officers  and  ten  men  were  also  saved. 
Vide  Parkman's  I'ontiac,  p.  r)9C.  —  II,  H.  S.] 


HISTORY,  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


149 


Cadotto,  in  partnership  with  Henry,  were  the  first  traders  "^er  the  fall  of  the 
Frcncli,  who  came  into  the  coinitry  of  the  Ojilnvas.  They  w-.tei-cd  two  years  at 
Nii-(wfi-i/>-lk-o»(j,  a  point  of  sand-rock  in  the  bay  of  Slmg-a-waum-il;  and  for  two  years 
are  said  to  liave  worked  tlie  mines  of  C()i)per  on  tlie  Ontanagun  river. 

Cadotte  was  the  first  permanent  white  settler  on  the  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  where  he 
died  at  an  advanced  age,  leaving  a  family  of  children  and  grand-children,  half- 
breeds,  spread  over  the  whole  Ojibwa  country. 

It  is  alK)iit  the  pcriotl  of  the  taking  of  Fort  Mackinac,  that  the  last  fight  Iwtwecn 
the  Ojibwas  and  Iro^iuois  is  told  of,  as  having  happened.  The  St.  Marie  Indians 
know  probably  this  circumstance  Iwtter  than  old  Besheke  of  Lapointe,  from  whom  I 
obtained  it.  As  the  story  goes,  a  war-party  of  Ojibwas  were  collected  to  march  into 
the  X<j<I-o->ra  country-,  in  search  of  scalps.  When  arrived  a  short  distance  Ixilow  the 
rapids  of  Ste.  Marie,  on  encamping,  they  heard  yelling,  singing,  and  much  noise  on  the 
river  below  them,  and  sending  out  scouts,  they  soon  learned  that  it  was  a  party  of 
Notl-o-tcay^,  Ijound  on  a  war-excursion  into  their  country.  The  enemy  had  also 
encamped,  and  were  making  merry  on  licpior,  stolon,  probably,  fmm  white  traders. 

The  Ojibwa,i,  waiting  until  they  had  drunk  themselves  asleep,  fell  on  them,  and 
nearly  destroyed  the  whole  party. 

The  spot  from  this  circumstance  was  named  Point  Iroquois.  This  is  the  last  war- 
party  that  the  Nodowas  are  said  to  have  sent  against  the  Lake  Superior  Ojibwas. 

Some  years  after  this  occurred,  a  man  aro.'*e  among  the  Ojibwas  of  La  Pointe,  who 
became  a  renowned  war-leader,  and  toiik  up  with  great  success  the  quarrels  of  his 
tribe  with  the  Sioux  and  Foxes.  Waub-o-jeeg,  or  White  Fisher  of  the  Reindeer, 
Totem,  was  the  son  of  Mu-montj-esc-da,  the  chief  that  led  the  Ojibwa  warriors  under 
Montcalm,  at  the  taking  of  Quebec.  He  was  by  blood  partly  of  Sioux  extraction,  being 
related  to  old  Waljashaw,  chief  of  a  band  of  Mcn-da-%vdk<tn-ton,  Sioux,  living  at  the 
foot  of  Lake  Pepin. 

When  arrived  at  the  full  age  of  maturity,  he  collected  a  war-party  of  three  hundred 
warriors,  and  floated  down  the  St.  Croi.x  river  at  their  head,  into  the  country  of  their 
enemies. 

At  the  mouth  of  Snake  river  they  were  to  meet  a  party  collected  fi'om  Mille-Lac 
and  Sandy  Lake,  to  join  them  on  their-war  excursion.  Not  finding  the  party  as 
expected,  and  confident  in  his  numbers,  WaulM)-jeeg  pursued  his  way  down  stream, 
leaving  marks,  however,  by  which  the  other  party  would  be  guided. 

Arriving  early  in  the  morning  at  the  head  of  the  portag"  that  leads  around  the  falls 
of  St.  Croix,  the  men  had  already  lifted  their  light  canoes  on  their  heads,  to  carry 
across  the  fwrtage,  when  the  scouts  came  in  with  the  news,  that  a  large  lx)dy  of  Sioux 
and  Foxes  were  landing  at  the  foot  of  the  portage.  The  Ojibwas  put  on  their  war- 
paints and  ornaments,  and  in  the  middle  of  the  portage  they  met  their  enemies,  who 
Avere   bound   on   the   same  errand   as   themselves.     The   combined  Sioux  and  Fox 


r 


150 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


warriors  were  much  iiion»  nunierons  than  the  Ojibwas,  so  much  so,  that  it  is  said  that 
the  Foxes,  confident  in  their  nmnlxTs,  recjuested  the  Sioux  to  stand  hy,  and  see  how 
easily  they  could  rout  the  Ojibwas.  The  Sioux  therefore  stood,  or  sat  on  the  n)eks  at 
a  distance,  quietly  smoking  their  pipes. 

The  fight  is  said  to  have  J)een  fierce  and  hardly  contested.  About  noon,  the  Foxes 
commenced  to  give  grounil,  having  lost  some  of  their  leading  men.  At  last  they 
turned  and  fairly  Hed,  the  Ojil)\vas  after  them.  They  would  probably  have  l»een  killed 
to  a  man,  and  driven  into  the  water,  had  not,  at  this  moment,  the  Sioux,  eager  and 
fresh  for  a  fight,  raised  their  war-whoop,  and  rushed  to  the  rescue  of  their  defeated 
allies. 

The  Ojibwas  resisted  their  new  enemies  manfully,  and  it  was  not  till  their  ammuni- 
titm  had  failed,  that  tliev,  in  turn,  showed  their  backs  in  Hight. 

But  few  would  have  escaped  to  tell  the  sad  tale  of  their  defeat,  had  not,  at  this 
juncture,  the  party  from  Sandy  Lake,  who  were  to  have  met  them  at  Snake  River, 
arrived  at  the  head  of  the  portage,  and,  seeing  their  friends  driven  over  tlie  rocks  into 
the  water,  they  jumjjed  out  of  their  canoes,  and  sixty  warriors,  fresh  for  the  contest, 
withstood  the  onset  of  the  Sioux  and  Foxes  till  their  friends  rallied  again  to  the  fight. 

The  allied  Sioux  and  Foxes,  being  out  of  annnunition,  are  said  to  have,  in  turn, 
fled,  and  their  slaughter  to  have  been  great.  Many  were  driven  over  the  steep  rocks 
into  the  boiling  rapids  below;  and  every  crevice  in  the  ix)cks  contained  a  dead  or 
wounded  enemy. 

From  this  time,  the  Foxes  retiivd  south,  and  gave  up  the  contest  with  their 
victorious  enemies. 

Wau-bo-jeeg,  who  led  the  Lake  Superior  bauds  in  this  battle,  often  aftc  '.tards  led 
his  warriors  with  great  success  against  the  Sioux,  and  became  noted  for  his  bravery 
and  wisdom.  He  swayed  the  influence  of  a  nuister-spirit  o^•er  his  whole  tribe.  He  ia 
one  of  those  that  the  Ojibwa  of  the  jjresent  day  speak  of  with  pride. 

Bi-ans-wah  and  Wau-bo-jceg  fought  for  their  people  and  for  conquests ;  Ma-movg-cse-iJa 
for  the  French,  and  An-diuj-irmn,  another  chief,  cotemiwraneous  with  Waub-o-jeeg,  was 
justly  noted  for  his  peaceable  disposition,  and  unwavering  friendship  for  the  whites. 
He  was  a  chief  of  the  Ah-itiiJi-tcmtk  stock,  and  had  great  influence  with  his  people, 
who  were,  in  those  da3s,  wild  and  untameable,  and  required  a  strong  hand  to  check  a 
propensity  for  pillaging  from  white  traders,  to  whom  An-ihnj-iccos  was  as  a  guardian 
spirit.     He  was  the  grandfather  of  the  present  old  chief  Bc-nhc-lr  of  La  Pointe. 

We  will  now  return  to  the  northern  wing  of  the  trilie,  who,  under  their  chief 
Bi-nns-w<ih,  had  pushed  their  way  t<j  Sandy  Lake.  From  this  place  we  have  said  that 
they  harassed  the  Sioux  till  they  drove  them  from  Leech,  Cass,  Winnipeg,  Red,  and 
Mille  Lakes,  which  last  Avas  a  large  and  favorite  village  of  their  enemies.  These 
lakes,  in  ever}-  way  adapted  to  their  mode  of  living  —  abounding  in  game,  wild  rice, 
fish,  maple  to  make  sugar,  and  birch  bark  for  canoes,  were  occupied  by  detached  bands 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 


Ifi' 


of  the  Ojibwas.    Tlu-y  lived  in  fear  iiiid  ti-einbling,  and,  for  more  safety,  at  first  I(m':i1 
on  islands  in  the  dilTeivnt  lakes. 

From  the  time,  now  over  a  eentnry  ago,  wlien  they  first  eonquered  these  places,  nut 
n  year  has  passed  but  their  bUKxl  has  Ix'en  spilled  in  their  defence;  and  man}-,  very 
many,  have  lost  their  lives :  notwithstanding  which,  they  have  hung  on,  uii}  iehling 
and  tenacious,  till  they  have  eom[H'lled  their  enemies  to  retire  west  of  the  St.  Peters, 
and  Red  Kiver  of  the  North ;  and  south,  to  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Petei-s. 

Their  hunts  are  made  altogether  on  the  hunting  grounds  of  the  Siou.v,  and  it  was  a 
common  Iwast  of  their  late  war-chief  Iloli-lii-thc-ihii/,  liiKjon-ii-h-c-shiii,  that  had  not  the 
white  man  interfered,  and  at  the  treaty  of  I'niirie-ihi-Cfiun  drawn  the  lines  l)etween 
tlu'Ui,  his  people  would  now  be  dwelling  at  St.  Peters. 

The  bands  now  living  on  and  over  the  head-waters  of  the  Mi.ssissippi,  now  live  over 
a  country  embraced  within  the  area  of  four  hundred  miles  north  and  south,  and  two 
hundred  east  and  west,  from  Mille-Lac  to  Pembina,  and  from  Sandy  Lake  to  the  Red 
River  of  the  North. 

They  numlwr  between  three  and  (bur  thousand  .souls. 

On  the  tract  of  country  they  (x;cupy,  many  spots  are  pointed  out  where  the  warriors 
of  these  two  contending  trik's  have  met  in  battle,  and  their  blood  flowed  freely.  More 
fights,  massacres,  and  surprises  are  told  of,  than  would,  if  detiiiled,  fill  a  large  lxx)k. 
In  this  condensed  account,  however,  we  shall  only  notice  their  principal  battles. 

A  few  years  after  the  smoke  of  the  Ojibwa  lodges  had  first  arisen  from  Sandy  Lake, 
one  of  their  war-parties  met  a  party  of  their  enemies  the  Sioux,  on  a  point  in  Lake 
Winnipeg,  where  a  considerable  fight  ensued,  the  consequence  of  which  was  the 
eventual  evacuation  of  the  lake  by  the  Siou.v. 

The  Ojibwa.s  note  this  fight,  as  having  killed  in  it  a  one-footed  Sioux,  the  other 
having  lx;en  either  cut  or  froze  off. 

About  ninety  years  ago,  as  near  as  we  can  compute  from  Indian  time,  a  party  of 
about  three  hundred  Sioux  warriors  ascended  the  Mississippi  in  their  canoes,  went  up 
the  Crow-wing,  made  portages  across  to  Leech  Lake,  and  floated  down  the  Mississippi 
through  Lake  Winnipeg,  capturing  and  killing  straggling  Ojibwas  as  they  went.  They 
arrived  at  Sandy  Lake,  and  attacked  the  village  of  the  Ojibwas.  The  men  being  away 
on  a  war-excursion,  the  Sioux  with  ea.se  killed  and  captured  their  women  and  children. 
The  Ojibwa  warriors  had  left  their  fated  village,  to  the  number  of  sixty  warriors.  On 
arriving  at  the  confluence  of  the  Mississippi,  they  discovered  the  traces  of  their 
enemies,  who  had  gone  up  the  Crow-wing.  Too  late  to  return  to  the  defence  of  their 
village,  they  laid  in  wait  a  short  distance  below  the  mouth  of  the  Crow-wing,  for  the 
descent  of  their  enemies. 

The}'  dug  hiding-holes  on  the  high  eastern  bank  of  the  Mississippi,  where  the  river 
nuikes  a  sudden  curve,  and  the  whole  force  of  the  current  flows  under  the  bank.  They 
hod  not  waited  long  before  the  Sioux  came  floating  in  triumph,  with  many  scalps  and 


f 


ll^  ^ 


152  TIII15AL    OKU  ANIZATIUN, 

pristmers.  Tlu'v  lumk'tl  ()i)|M)sitt'  tlio  iipiRT  mouth  of  tlio  Crow-wiiifr,  to  o«M)k  tlii-ir 
nioiiiiiig  iiK'iil  lit'iv,  ill  plain  vii'W  of  tliiir  aiiilju!<lic'il  enemy.  Tliey  beat  tlie  drum, 
u!i«l  (liineed  the  seuliwhinie. 

The  Ojihwas,  jierfeetly  ennified  at  tlie  si^dit,  impatiently  waited  till  tiieir  more 
numerous  Uh's  had  again  embarked,  and  came  lioating  down  within  a  few  feet  of  and 
inider  them.  In  the  can<K'»  of  their  enemie.s  they  recognised  their  wives  and  children, 
tiiat  had  Ix'en  taken  captive,  and  it  was  with  a  ix'rfect  phrcnsy  of  rage  that  they  let 
ily  their  bullets  and  arn»ws  with  unerring  aim,  picking  out  the  n>ost  prominent  figures 
and  plumed  heads  of  the  Sioux.  In  the  suri)riso  and  excitement  which  ensued,  the 
prisoners  purposely  tripjted  over  the  canoes  of  their  captors,  and  many  escaju'd  to  the 
shore,  from  which  their  husbands  were,  with  dreadful  yells,  dealing  out  the  death- 
winged  bullet  and  arrow  among  their  enemies.  Many  Sioux  were  killed  while  they 
were  within  range  of  the  Ojibwa  missiles,  and  some  were  drowned  in  the  deep  current. 
The  ifmainder,  still  more  than  doubly  outnumlxring  their  enemies,  landed  about  half 
a  mile  below,  and  returned  l)ravely  to  give  battle  to  the  Ojibwas,  and  revenge  the 
warriors  they  had  lost.     They  fust  tied  their  remaining  captives  to  trees. 

The  fight  is  said  to  have  lasted  three  days  with  great  fierceness.  The  Ojibwas  were 
only  saved  from  annihilation  from  their  more  numerous  foes  by  being  posted  on  a  hill 
where  they  had  dug  holes,  from  which,  entirely  concealed  themselves,  they  let  fly  their 
bullets  and  arrows  on  their  less  hidden  enemies. 

The  ammunition  of  both  parties  is  said  to  have  failed  in  the  earlier  part  of  the 
fight,  and  the  Sioux  digging  counter  holes,  they  fought  with  stones,  knives,  and  war- 
clubs. 

The  Sioux  were  the  first  to  retreat,  taking  with  them  their  remaining  prisoners. 

This  occurrence  nearly  deiwpulated  the  then  flourishing  village  of  Sandy  Lake. 
Their  numlx'rs  were,  however,  gradually  increased  by  families  from  the  Great  Lake ; 
and  forty  years  after,  they  had  regained  their  fonner  numbers  and  consequence.  At 
this  time,  they  were  again  almost  cut  ofi"  to  n  man. 

Headed  by  their  chief,  this  band  would,  in  the  fall  of  the  year,  move  their  camps 
about  Mille  Lac  and  Crow-wing  river  to  hunt  the  deer,  l)ear,  buflalo,  and  elk,  that 
alx)unded  in  these  regions.  While  thus  encamjwd  in  force,  the  Sioux  never  dared  to 
attack  them,  though  straggling  parties  and  hunters  were  often  set  upon  and  never 
returned. 

One  season,  however,  the  Sioux  mustered  their  warriors  in  force,  and  with  four 
hundred  men,  they  followed  the  return  trail  of  the  Ojibwa  camp,  as  they  returned  to 
their  village  in  March,  to  camp  in  their  sugar  bushes. 

The  Ojibwas  were  encamped,  when  attacked,  at  Sii-sub-a-gum-<t,  or  Cross  Lake, 
alwut  thirty  miles  northeast  from  the  mouth  of  Crow-wing  river. 

A  day  before  the  attack,  a  part  of  the  camp  had  separated  from  the  main  body  and 
moved  ofl"  towards  Mille  Lac ;  and  early  in  the  morning,  before  the  attack  was  Ijegun,  a 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


IM 


number  of  women  had  gone  on  ahead  witli  loads  to  leave  at  the  next  t'uniping  ground  : 
the  lives  of  all  these  were  saved. 

Till-  camp  numlx^red  alK)ut  twenty  lodges,  eight  of  which  wore  long,  and  averaged 
twenty  jHisons  in  a  ItRlge;  the  whole  numljer  probably  between  two  and  three 
hundred,  men,  women,  and  children. 

The  eamp  was  located  on  a  long  point  of  land  running  out  into  the  lake,  and  was 
approachable  only  by  the  ice  on  the  lake.  The  scouts  of  the  Sioux  were  discovered 
early  in  the  morning,  and  the  ()jibwas  gained  a  short  time  to  prepare  for  defence.  The 
attack  was  bravely  made  by  the  Sioux,  in  o|)en  day,  and  in  a  long  line  on  the  ice. 
The  Ojibwas,  on  seeing  their  enemies  thus  advance,  dancing  and  yelling,  straight 
against  their  lodges,  two  of  their  bravest  warriors  (Bednd  and  Shesheeh)  sallied  forth, 
and,  meeting  their  foes  on  the  open  ice,  commenced  the  engagement.  Their  fellows 
following  their  example,  the  Ojil)wa  warriors  formed  a  barrier  of  their  bodies  on  the 
ice,  for  the  shelter  of  their  women  and  children.  They  sustained  the  unequal  fight  for 
a  long  time  ;  many  lives  were  lost,  for  they  had  no  shelter  to  protect  them.  The  snow 
on  the  ice  is  said  to  have  melted  with  the  blood  of  the  slain  and  wounded. 

The  remnant  of  the  Ojibwa  warriors  at  last  retreated  to  their  lodges,  where  they 
maintained  the  conflict  a  long  time  in  defence  of  their  helpless  families ;  not  a  lodge 
pole,  or  shrub,  or  tree,  but  what  was  perforated  with  bullets,  in  the  area  where  they 
made  this  last  stand. 

To  make  our  story  short,  when  the  Sioux  had  silenced  the  last  yell  and  gun  of  their 
enemies,  they  killed  the  women  and  children,  taking  a  few  captive. 

Some  of  these  captives  i-eturned,  and  are  still  living  —  others,  among  whom  was  a 
grandson  of  the  famous  Bi-ans-icah,  is  said  to  be  still  living ;  now,  an  aged  man  among 
the  Sioux. 

Soon  after  the  second  almost  entire  annihilation  of  the  Sandy  Lake  band  at  Cross 
Lake,  the  Pillagers  received  a  severe  blow  in  the  loss  of  a  number  of  their  bravest 
warriors,  in  a  hard  fight  with  the  north,  or  Sisseton  Sioux. 

This  band  of  Ojibwas  had  fearlessly  pushed  their  way  westward  from  Sandy  Lake, 
in  the  footsteps  of  their  retreating  foe,  till  they  came  to  Leech  Lake,  which  place, 
finding  that  it  was  adapted  to  their  mode  of  life,  and  defence  against  the  war-parties 
of  the  Sioux,  they  made  the  site  of  their  permanent  rallying-point  or  village. 

The  name  of  the  Pillagers,  or  Mitk-un-chiarwin-!»-e-u-ti(/,  pillage-men,  was  given  to 
them  by  their  fellow  Ojibwas  and  whites,  on  account  of  their  having  taken  away  the 
goods  of  a  trader,  about  eighty  years  ago,  at  the  mouth  of  a  creek  still  known  as  Pillage 
creek,  emptying  into  the  Crow-wing  inver. 

The  band  is  also  noted  for  their  wilduess,  and  as  having  on  several  later  occasions 
acted  to  the  letter  of  their  name  in  their  dealings  with  traders  and  missionaries. 

Out  of  the  numberless  occasions  of  bloodshed,  in  which  this  band  have  been  engaged 
with  the  Sioux,  I  will  relate  a  fight  wherein  they  lost  many  of  their  bravest  warriors ; 
Pt.  IL  — 20 


(     •! 


I 


m 


154 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


lii 


/^  1 


T' 


sal 


1 

n, 


li 


ii 


their  conduct  on  tliis  occasion  is  but  a  fair  sample  of  the  fearless  fool-hardy  spirit,  with 
which  they  are  possessed,  and  which  they  retain  to  this  day. 

A  party  of  forty  of  their  best  warriors  left  Leech  Lake  on  an  excursion  against  the 
Sioux.  Arriving  in  the  vicinity  of  Jjcaf  Lake,  the  head-waters  of  Jjcaf  river,  which 
empties  in  the  Crow-wing,  they  heard  the  occasional  report  of  guns  in  the  direction 
of  a  distant  hill ;  early  in  the  morning  they  approached  the  place  where  they  expected 
to  find  the  enemy.  The  Sioux  had  just  decamped,  leaving  their  fiivs  still  buniing. 
Their  trail  led  in  the  direction  of  Leaf  Lake,  and  though  appaivntly  numerous,  the 
Ojibwas  recklessly  followed  them. 

In  a  wide,  open  prairie,  they  discovered  three  of  their  enemies  ahead  of  them,  and 
though  still  a  quarter  of  a  mile  off,  one  of  their  numlier  urging  on  the  rest,  the  Pillagers 
commenced  the  chase.  The  Sioux  instantly  jwrceiving  them  to  l»e  enemies,  ran  for 
their  lives,  and  kept  their  distance  ahead,  occasionally  stopping  on  a  hill  for  a  moment, 
and  throwing  up  their  blankets,  in  order  to  lurc  their  pursuers  on.  In  this  manner 
the  chase  was  followed  up  a  long  distance  at  full  speed,  when  they  at  last  came  on  to 
Leaf  Lake.  The  Pillagers  were  strung  along  for  over  a  mile,  the  fleetest  of  foot 
keeping  ahead.  The  Sioux  still  led  the  chase  around  the  sandy  beach  of  the  lake,  till 
they  at  last  disappeared  into  a  ravine,  thickly  wooded.  Fearless  of  consequences,  the 
foremost  Pillagers  rushed  after  them ;  on  running  up  a  hill,  a  sight  burst  on  them,  that, 
for  the  first  time,  made  them  think  of  turning  back. 

On  a  smooth  prairie,  there  stood  a  camp  of  over  three  hundred  Sioux  lodges ;  the 
inmates  had  been  alarmed  by  the  pursued,  and  figures  were  running  to  and  fro  in  wild 
disorder,  and  warriors  were  collecting  at  the  beat  of  the  dvum.  The  poor  Pillagers, 
viewing  all  this  from  a  distance,  turned  back,  out  of  bivath,  and  in  the  centre  of  their 
enemies,  who  were  supplied  with  horses ;  they  covdd  do  nothing  but  sell  their  lives  as 
dearly  as  possible ;  this  they  detennined  to  do,  and  when  half  of  their  number  had 
collected,  they  laid  an  ambush  for  the  coming  of  their  foes. 

On  the  shores  of  the  lake,  near  a  ravine  which  led  to  the  Sioux  camp,  was  a  low 
narrow  piece  of  ground,  covered  witli  high  grass :  cm  one  side  -was  the  lake,  and  on  the 
other,  a  watery  marsh,  which  extended  some  distance  inland.  This  pass  the  Ojibwas 
occupied,  hiding  in  the  tall  grass ;  while  their  numbers  kept  increasing  from  the 
stragglers  behind,  till  nearly  their  whole  party  was  thus  collected. 

The  Sioux  had,  by  this  time,  gathered  their  warriors  and  put  on  their  war-ornaments, 
and  appeared  from  the  ravine  in  a  dense  body  of  painted  warriors,  whooping  and 
yelling.  At  their  head  ran  backwards  ond  forwards  a  prominent  figure,  who  held  in 
his  hand  the  war-flag  of  feathers,  and  on  his  breast  shone  a  large  white  medal.  IIo 
wore  a  blue  garnished  coat,  and  being  a  prominent  mark,  at  the  first  fire  of  the 
ambushed  Ojibwas  he  fell  dead. 

At  the  fall  of  their  leader  the  Sioux,  reganlless  of  the  usual  Indian  mode  of  fighting, 
of  dodging  up  and  down,  and  behind  trees,  rushed  on  in  a  body  to  over\vhelm  at  one 


HISTORY,  AND   GOVERNMENT. 


155 


blow  their  enemies.  The  bullets  of  the  Pillagei's  mowed  them  down  in  numbers,  yet, 
utterly  regardless,  tliey  grappled  with  them,  and  silenced,  b}-  main  foree,  tlie  firing  and 
yelling.  Some  of  the  Pillagers  threw  tliemselves  into  the  marsh,  where  they  lax-ame 
a  mark  for  their  enemies'  bullets ;  others  retired  from  the  pass  into  the  wot)ds,  and,  from 
behmd  trees,  kept  up  the  unequal  fight.  The  whole  of  their  party  had  now  arrived, 
and  the  last  one  was  he  who  had  urged  them  on  to  the  mad  pui*suit  of  the  thive  Sioux. 
On  arriving  at  tlu>  scene  of  the  fight,  he  had  heard  the  reproaches  of  his  remaining 
comrades  in  silence ;  and  now,  telling  those  that  could  to  save  themselves  by  fiight,  he 
rushed  forward  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  Sioux,  in  order  to  give  his  friends  a 
chance  for  escaiw.  The  few  that  thus  got  oft",  for  a  long  time  heard  the  ivpcated  volle\  s 
fired  at  their  devoted  comrade,  which  were  answered  by  his  single  gun  and  solitary 
Stis-aiik-uxiy,  as  lie  for  a  time  maintained  *^he  unequal  fight.  At  last,  the  loud  and 
exultant  yells  of  the  Sioux  told  that  they  had  killed  their  brave  foe. 

Not  ono-thiixl  of  those  forty  warriors  ever  returned  to  Leech  Lake.  A  few  years 
since,  the  leaders,  KnkumJiaiciHln  and  Wcnotuja;/,  were  still  alive,  and  it  was  the  Ijoast 
of  the  latter,  when  he  struck  the  war-pole  to  relate  his  exploits,  that  in  this  fight  he 
shot  down  seven  Sioux,  and  brought  home  their  scalps.  At  this  I'ate,  the  slaughter 
among  the  Sesseton  ranks  must  have  been  great. 

In  relating  the  aljove  fight,  I  have  gone  ahead  of  my  narration,  as  some  important 
battles  happened  prior  to  this  time. 

From  the  best  Indian  information,  I  have  calculated  scvent}-five  years  as  the  time 
since  the  Ojibwas  first  visited  the  St.  Peters  River. 

This  was  on  an  occa.sion  when  a  large  war-party  was  collected  by  the  Ojibwas  to 
revenge  the  sacking  of  Sandy  Lake,  and  the  fight  at  Crow-wing.  In  imitation  of  the 
Sioux,  they  pierced  into  the  heart  of  their  enemies'  country,  and  attacked  a  village 
a  short  distance  above  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Peters.  This  daring  party  was  led  by 
N(t-kaif,  a  celebrated  warrior  in  his  time,  and  grandfather  of  the  present  noted  chief 
WmdMhjceg. 

From  this  time,  the  Ojibwas  on  and  over  the  head-waters  of  the  Mi-ssissippi,  made 
the  broad  current  of  this  river  their  chief  war-trail.  They  found  it  an  easy  matter  to 
embark  in  their  canoes,  and  float  down  to  the  vicinity  of  their  enemies'  villages; 
where,  after  securing  one  or  more  scalps,  they  returned  home  by  land. 

This  practice  they  have  kept  up  to  the  present  day  with  great  success,  and  it  is  only 
the  interference  of  the  whites,  and  the  rapid  increase  of  civilized  ixijiulation  about  St. 
Peters,  that  has  saved  the  Men-ila-imk-au-Um  (Sioux)  from  being  driven  oft'  or 
annihilated. 

The  course  of  the  streams,  the  head-waters  of  which  the  Ojibwas  have  secured  by 
conquest,  flowing  down  to  the  haunts  and  villages  of  their  enemies,  has  given  tliem  an 
advantage,  which,  in  searching  ibr  the  causes  that  have  conduced  to  their  grenit 
success  against  the  warlike  and  numerous  Sioux,  should  not  be  forgotten. 


M 


til 


(     .' 


V  i    ffi 


; 


H 


156 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


The  Ojibwas  innately  respect  the  bravery  of  the  Da-lco-tas,  and  call  them  strong- 
hearted  men.  It  is  only  by  hard,  unremitted  fighting,  and  much  loss  of  life  and 
blood,  that  the  Ojibwa  holds  the  position  he  now  does,  as  the  conquering  tribe. 

Shortly  after  their  first  incursion  to  St.  Peters,'  under  No-kay,  the  Ojibwas  again 
collected  a  war-party  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  men,  and  embarking  in  their  canoes, 
floated  down  the  Mississippi. 

In  floating  down  a  river  on  a  war-party,  one  canoe  is  always  sent  in  advance,  and 
scouts  are  sometimes  sent  ahead  by  land.  This  is  to  guard  against  ambush  on  the 
river  banks,  which,  in  their  warfai-e,  has  been  much  practised. 

On  this  occasion,  when  the  party  had  arrived  near  the  mouth  of  Elk  river,  the 
scouts  in  the  foremost  canoe,  as  they  were  silently  floating  down,  close  to  the  eastern 
bank  of  the  Mississippi,  heai'd  Sioux  talking  and  laughing  on  the  bank  immediately 
above  them. 

Instantly  turning  their  canoe  up  stream,  they  stole  along  the  bank,  and  escaped 
behind  a  point,  unseen  by  their  enemies.  Here  meeting  the  foremost  canoes  of  their 
friends,  the  alarm  was  quickly  but  silently  spread  from  canoe  to  canoe,  which  were 
strung  along  for  half  a  mile.  They  happened  to  be  opposite  an  extensive  bottom, 
thickly  wooded.  Tlie  Ojibwas  sprang  to  land,  and  pulling  their  canoes  after  them, 
rushed  through  the  woods  to  attack  their  enemies. 

Emerging  from  the  wood  on  to  the  open  prairie,  they  saw  a  long  line  of  their 
enemies,  equal  in  number  to  themselves.  They  were  leisurely  walking  along,  bent  on 
a  war-excursion ;  Ijeing  out  of  bullet  range  from  tlio  wood,  the  Ojibwa  warriors  rushed 
on  as  if  to  a  feast,  "  fii-st  come,  best  served."  Their  war-yell  was  answered  by  the 
Sioux,  and  bullet  and  arrow  were  returned  for  bullet  and  arrow. 

For  a  short  time  the  Sioux  stood  the  eager  on.set  of  their  enemies,  when  seeing 
warrior  after  warrior  emerge  from  the  woods,  on  a  line  of  half  a  mile,  the  idea  must 
have  seized  them,  that  their  enemies  many  times  outnumliered  them.  Under  this 
impression  tliey  turned  and  fled,  occasionally  turning  and  firing  at  their  pursuers;  thus 
a  running  fight  was  kept  up  for  upwards  of  three  miles,  when  the  Sioux,  at  the  mouth 
of  Elk  river,  met  a  large  party  of  their  fellows,  who  had  come  across  the  country  from 
the  St.  Peters  river,  to  join  the  war-party.  With  this  addition,  they  outnumbered  the 
Ojibwas  nearly  double,  and  the  chase  was  turned  the  other  way.  The  Ojibwas  ran  up 
and  along  the  banks  of  Elk  river,  and  when  tired  of  their  long  run,  they  stopped  in  a 
fine  grove  of  oak  trees,  determined  to  make  a  stand.' 

Here  the  fight  was  sustained  for  some  time, —  the  Ojibwas  firing  from  the  shelter  of 


'  In  the  Ojibwa  tongue  this  river  ia  called  Osh-ke-bug-e-se-be,  (New  Leaf  River.) 

'  Through  this  place  the  main  road  up  to  the  Missisciippi  now  passes.     The  holes  in  the  ground  are  still 
visible,  and  some  contain  particles  of  bones. 


HISTORY,  AND    GOVERNMENT. 


15T 


trees,  and  the  Sioux  digging  holes  in  the  ground,  and  in  this  manner  graduidly 
approaching  the  covert  of  their  enennes. 

Wlion  all  hopes  of  dislodging  the  Ojibwa  force  had  failed,  the  Sioux  set  fire  to  the 
dry  prairie  grass,  and  the  wind  blowing  against  them,  the  Ojibwas  were  effectually 
made  to  run.  Their  foes,  making  their  approach  in  the  smoke  of  the  fire,  again 
renewed  the  chase.  They  were  at  last  driven  on  to  an  island,  where  the  Sioux  not 
daring  to  molest  them,  the  fight  ended. 

The  Ojibwas  lost  eight  killed,  and  many  wounded.  Among  the  killed  was  a  bravo 
warrior,  Ke<hc-wauh-ish-asli .     Three  of  their  numlx'r  were  burnt  by  the  fire. 

The  Sioux  are  said  to  have  suffered  a  greater  loss ;  as  they  themselves  concede  that 
the  Ojibwas  in  battle  are  better  shots  than  they  are. 

The  following  summer,  after  the  above  engagement,  another  fight  took  place  at  this 
point,  by  the  adverse  parties  again  accidentally  meeting.  The  place  of  these  figlits 
is  now  known  as  Me-yaud-c-w'm-ing,  or  the  battle-ground. 

The  Sioux  never  advanced  far  within  the  lines  of  country  occupied  by  the  Ojibwas, 
after  the  noted  fight  at  Crow-wing '  river. 

Short  intervals  of  peace  have  occasionally  happened  in  the  course  of  the  bloody  feud 
between  these  two  tribes. 

One  peace  is  mentioned  as  having  occurred  during  the  lifetime  of  the  great-grand- 
fathers of  the  present  generation. 

It  was  brought  about  by  the  chief  Bi-ans-tcah,  who  in  this  place  proposed  to  the 
Sioux  the  discarding  of  their  old  custom  of  burning  captives  by  fire.  This  peace  was 
broken  by  the  Sioux  again,  about  fifty  years  ago,  and  another  short  peace  was  effected 
between  the  two  tribes  in  the  following  manner: 

A  large  war-party  of  Sioux  was  discovered  by  the  scouts  of  an  Ojibwa  camp  on 
Platte  river.  The  Ojibwas,  on  account  of  their  women  and  children,  fearing  the 
result  of  an  attack,  determined  on  a  bold  manauivre,  which,  should  it  fail,  they  were 
to  fight  to  the  last. 

A  flag  was  attached  to  a  pole,  and  a  brave  warrior  sallied  out  singly  to  meet  the 
Sioux.  lie  discovered  them  as  they  were  stealing  along  to  attack  their  camp.  He 
shouted  to  them,  and,  as  the  whole  party  were  preparing  to  rush  towards  him,  he  threw 
down  his  gun,  and  with  his  flag  he  fearlessly  ran  into  their  midst,  when  he  was  caught 
in  the  arms  of  two  stalwart  warriors ;  many  blows  were  aimed  at  him  with  war-clubs 
and  knives,  and  he  expected  every  moment  to  sufler  death  ;  but  a  tall  Sioux  took  his 
part,  and  defended  him,  warding  off  the  blows  that  were  aimed  at  his  head.  After 
the  excitement  in  the  Sioux  ranks  had  in  a  measure  subsided,  one  of  their  warriors 
stepped  up,  and  taking  hold  of  the  Ojibwa,  offered  to  wrestle  with  him.    lie  was  easily 


'  The  Ojibwa  naino  for  thia  stream  is  Kag-any-e-we-gieon,  mcaniug  Crate's  Feather.    This  is  also  the  naiuo 
of  their  bravest  warrior  now  living. 


«r 


158 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


1/       1 


thrown ;  gottiug  up,  he  again  took  hold  of  his  opponent,  and  was  again  prostrated :  on 
this,  the  discomfited  Sioux  lighted  his  pipe  and  smoked  with  him  (the  sign  of  peace.) 
He  gave  him  also,  as  presents,  his  pipe,  gun,  and  clothing.  On  this,  the  brave  Ojibwa 
led  the  party  to  his  camp,  where  the  two  hostile  tribes  saluted  one  another  with  firing 
of  guns,  &c.  The  pipe  of  peace  was  smoked ;  the  pipe-dance  danced ;  and  they  eat 
out  of  the  same  dish. 

The  war-club  for  a  little  time  was  buried. 

During  this  peace,  a  party  of  thirty  Ojibwas,  headed  by  Kuh-ihi-wauh-e-ila,  or  Broken 
Tooth,  chief  of  Sandy  Lake,  and  grandson  of  BUma-wah,  made  a  peace  visit  to  St. 
Peters.  They  floated  down  the  Mississippi,  and  arrived  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Peters 
river,  as  the  Sioux  were  preparing  a  war-party  against  the  Ojibwas,  intending  to 
surprise  them  during  the  lull  of  iwace. 

The  British  flag,  that  hung  over  the  prow  of  the  Ojibwa  chief's  canoe,  was  pierced 
with  biilk't-hole.s,  as  the  Sioux  saluted  their  landing.  There  was  great  excitement 
among  the  Sioux  ranks  —  chiefs  ran  to  and  fro  to  prevent  their  warriors  from 
murdering  the  small  peace  party.  Their  trader  also  i-cmonstrated  with  them,  and  they 
were  at  last  prevailed  upon  to  welcome  the  Ojibwas  in  peace. 

Shortly  after  the  return  of  this  par*  '  in  safety  to  their  homes,  the  Sioux  broke  the 
peace,  as  it  has  ever  been  their  prtu^tice  to  do. 

The  injuries  that  the  Ojibwas  have  heaped  on  them,  in  conquering  the  lauds  of  their 
fathers,  are  such,  that  they  never  have  rested  in  peace  for  any  length  of  time.  Tiie 
Sioux  constantly  brooded  over  their  injuries,  and  frecpiently  the  Ojibwas,  lulled  into 
security  by  peace,  have  been  surprised  by  them  when  they  were  unprepared  for 
resistance. 

Even  within  the  last  few  years,  the  Sioux,  caring  little  for  the  interference  of  the 
whites,  in  an  outrageous  manner  have  broken  their  faith,  and  sullied  the  soil  of  their 
Great  Father  with  tlie  blood  of  helpless  women  and  children,  and  in  a  time  of 
profound  peace.  The  fourteen  Ojibwas  thus  killed  on  Apple  river,  furnish  but  a 
sample  of  Sioux  faith  for  the  past  two  centuries,  with  their  enemies. 

On  the  occasion  of  the  peace  mentioned  alxive  that  was  broken,  the  Sioux  reached 
Gull  Lake  on  a  war-party,  and  at  the  entry  of  Gull  river  killed  an  Ojibwa.  The  body 
was  much  mangled,  and  a  war-club  was  left  sticking  in  the  body — a  fit  token  that  war 
was  again  declared. 

The  Ojibwas  of  the  Mississippi,  under  their  chief  Bn-bc-8e-f)Ui.Jih^x,  quickly 
collecting,  and  floating  down  the  Mississippi,  arrived  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Peters 
nearly  as  soon  as  their  returning  enemy.  On  the  low  point  beneath  the  clifl",  upon 
which  Fort  Snelling  now  stands,  the  Ojibwas  hid  their  canoes  and  laid  in  Avait. 
Towards  evening  a  long  can<xj  load  of  young  women,  dressed  and  painted  in  their  liest 
style,  floated  down  the  Minnesota,  on  their  way  to  join  the  scalp-dance  that  was  being 
danced  every  night  (at  Little  Crow's  village  Ix'low,)  over  the  Ojibwa  scalp  recently 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


159 


taken.  As  they  came  merrily  laughing  and  padiUing  clown  utreamj  close  to  the  point 
M'here  their  enemy  lay  concealed,  a  volley  was  fired  into  them,  and  their  long  flowing 
locks  were  made  to  dangle  in  the  belt  of  the  Ojibwa. 

The  war-club  which  the  Sioux  had  left  sticking  in  the  mutilated  body  of  the  Ojibwii 
they  had  killed  at  Gull  Lake,  was  now  left  sticking,  Avith  peculiar  marks,  in  the  body 
of  one  of  the  Sioux  women,  to  teach  them  that  the  vengeance  of  the  Ojibwa  was  (juick 
and  sure. 

It  is  needless  to  notice  every  engagement  of  the  kind  that  happened  Ix'tween  these 
two  tribes :  we  have  mentioned  enough  to  give  a  sample  of  the  deadly  feud  that  has 
existed  between  them  for  the  past  two  centuries. 

The  actors  in  the  fights  I  have  thus  far  related  have  all  now  passed  away. 

The  few  old  men  of  the  trilxj  still  living  have  also  passed  through  the  same  dangers 
and  the  same  fire,  and  their  blood  has  flowed  as  freely  as  did  that  of  their  fathers. 

The  men  of  middle  age  also  now  living  can  boast  of  having  extended  the  conquests 
of  their  ancestors.  Their  heads  are  decked  with  eagle  plumes,  which  have  Ijcen  won 
in  many  a  hard-contested  struggle. 

If  possession  gives  a  right,  nearly  all  the  country  north  and  east  of  the  Minnesota 
river  belongs  to  them. 

About  fifty  years  ago,  bands  of  the  Ojibwas  from  Sandy  Lake,  Leech,  and  Mille 
Lakes,  commenced  to  reside  permanently  on  the  Lower  Mississippi  at  Gull  Lake,  Crow- 
wing  river,  and  down  as  far  as  Little  Rock. 

These  bands  soon  formed  under  one  chief,  and  became  known  as  the  "Great  River 
men."     Their  chief  was  Ke-cJic  Hi-h'se-ffiin-iUb-a,  or  Big  Curly -head. 

About  this  time,  an  event  of  importance  in  their  history  happened,  viz.,  the  fight  at 
Long  Prairie ;  some  of  the  actors  in  which,  though  old  men,  are  still  li\  ing. 

This  fight  occurred  in  the  fidl  of  the  year,  between  forty  and  fifty  years  ago.  A 
party  of  one  hundred  and  sixty  warriors  was  collected  by  BuJjese-ffuu-iUlHj,  chief  of 
the  Mississippi  men,  and  Esh-ke-btuj-e-cmh,  or   Flat-mouth,  chief  of  the  Pillagers. 

At  the  head  of  their  warriors  they  marched  against  the  Sioux.  In  passing  through 
Long  Prairie,  (which  was  then  Sioux  countrj-,)  they  fell  on  a  large  trail  of  their 
enemies ;  following  it  up,  they  discovered  a  camp  of  about  forty  of  their  lodges,  a  short 
distance  below  the  Pine  Bend.  Early  in  the  morning,  this  large  camp,  situated  on 
Long  Prairie  river,  was  attacked  by  the  Ojibwas.  The  whole  party  repeatedly  fired 
Into  the  lodges  from  a  short  distance,  and  Ix'fore  the  Sioux  warriors  had  prepared  to 
resist,  many  must  have  been  killed.  They  at  last  sallied  out  to  the  number  of  sixty- 
six  men,  and  resisted  manfully.  The  battle  lasted  the  whole  day,  and  but  seven  of  the 
Sioux  were  seen  to  continue  the  fight,  and  they  were  apparently  determined  to  die  on 
the  spot.  Miraculously,  they  escaped  the  numy  missiles  aimed  at  them,  till  the 
Ojibwas,  being  entirely  out  of  ammunition,  and  fearing  their  foes  Avould  be  reinforced 
from  neighboring  camps,  retreated. 


f 


I 

'hit 


II 


l  i 


160 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


The  losa  of  the  Sioux  in  this  attack  was  great,  and  probaM^'  equalled  the  loss  they 
inflicted  on  the  Ojibwas  on  a  former  occasion,  at  Cross  Lake.  From  this  time,  the 
Sioux  fell  back  from  the  woods  on  to  their  western  prairies,  and  after  receiving  reiieated 
blows  from  the  late  Btuj-on<i-lie-fihiij,  iSo»g-uI,--um-ig,  and  others,  they  eventually 
altogether  evacuated  that  jwrtion  of  their  fonner  country  lying  north  of  Sac  river  and 
south  and  east  of  Leaf  river  to  the  Mississippi. 

The  attack  on  Long  Prairie  was  made  by  the  Ojibwas,  in  reven-e  of  the  massacre 
of  two  of  their  bravest  warriors  and  their  families,  while  camped  out  huntin;g.  These 
were  Wauh-o-jeeg,  namesake  of  the  noted  chief  of  that  name,  and  SliesJtcvb.  These 
two  men  had  fought  side  by  side  at  Cross  Lake,  and  other  fights.  When  attacked, 
Waulho-jccff  was  killed  at  the  fii-st  fire,  but  She-ahech  fired  one  shot,  killing  one  enemy 
and  wounding  another.  Wauh-o-jeeg  was  a  head  man,  and  much  loved  by  his  tribe; 
his  death  was  therefore  a  common  grief,  and  quickly  revenged.  His  relics  were 
scattered  on  the  bloody  battle-ground  of  Long  Prairie,  and  his  ammunition  served  to 
kill  his  murderers. 

Long  Prairie  is  noted  as  having  been  on  four  different  occasions  wetted  with  the 
blood  of  the  two  hostile  tribes  —  Crow-wing  three  times,  Elk  river  three  times,  Gull 
Lake  twice,  Sandy  Lake  thrice,  Mille-Lac,  and  indeed  every  place  of  any  note  on  the 
present  border  of  the  two  tribes  between  Selkirk's  settlement  and  Wisconsin  river,  has 
been  freely  baptized  in  blood. 

We  have  now  pursued  the  different  events  of  imiwrtance  connected  with  their  wars 
in  the  history  of  the  upper  Mississippi  branch  or  wing  of  the  Ojibwa  trilje,  to  the  time 
of  men  still  living ;  or  would  be  living,  had  the  Great  Spirit  allotted  them  the  full 
term  of  life. 

Before  we  come  to  relate  events  happening  in  the  days  of  Strong  Ground,  or  Siiiig- 
uh-um-eg,  and  Ilole-in-the-ahj,  or  Bug-on-a-ke-ahi'g,'  who  but  lately,  still  in  their  prime, 
departed  for  the  land  of  spirits.  We  will  mention  a  few  names  that  have  been  noted 
in  the  history  of  this  important  jiortlon  of  their  tribe. 

Birans-imh,  as  I  have  mentioned,  may  be  called  their  pioneer  to  these  regions. 
Here  he  laid  the  foundation  of  a  dynasty  or  chleftaindom,  which  has  descended  to  his 
children,  and  the  benefits  of  which  they  are  reaping  after  him.  His  grandson,  Aa- 
ihi-wd-be-ila,  became  a  noted  chief  of  the  Sandy  Lake  bands — not  so  much  for  prowesa 
in  war,  as  for  the  great  influence  he  exerted  over  his  bands ;  to  whom  he  was  truly  a 
father.  He  was  a  warm  friend  to  the  whites,  and  the  traders  of  the  country  loved 
him.  These  were  of  the  old  North- West,  Astor,  and  other  minor  companies,  that  at 
different  times  in  his  day,  sent  clerks  with  goods  to  Sandy  Lake  and  the  Mississippi. 
Their  presents  to  the  hunters  were  given  through  the  hands  of  Ka-da-wdrbe-da.     He 

'  Bug-on-a-ke-shig  literally  means,  Holc-in-tlic-sky.  The  war-aong  of  this  chief  was  addressed  to  his  guardian 
ppirit,  seen  through  a  hulc  in  the  sky. 


t        i 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 


161 


was  noted  for  the  spaciousness  and  neatness  of  his  wigwam.  On  his  mat  table  he 
used  the  knives,  forks,  and  dishes  of  the  whites.  He  also  kept  his  liquor-case,  which 
was  ever  well  supplied,  and  from  which  he  indulged  but  sparingly;  occasionally 
enjoying  with  his  friends  a  "good  comfortable  smoke."  On  his  death-bed,  at  an 
advanced  age,  he  requested  that  liis  body  should  not  be  buried  in  the  ground,  but 
hung  up  in  the  air  on  a  scaflblding.  His  wishes  being  complied  with,  it  became  a 
custom  of  his  family  thus  to  dispo.se  of  their  dead.  His  totem  wa.s  the  royal  Ah-auh- 
loauk.  He  left  four  sons  and  four  daughters.  One  of  his  sons,  Mong-o-zul,  or 
Loon's-foot,  is  a  well-kno\/n  chief  of  the  Lake  Superior  Indians,  and  resides  at  Fond  du 
Lac.     He  has  one  of  his  father's  original  medals  (English)  and  two  of  his  own. 

Another  of  his  sons  was  taken  prisoner  by  the  Sioux  at  Cross  Lake  when  a  child, 
and  is  n?siding  still  amongst  them.  His  thii*d  son,  Kah-tcin-flum-a-toiuso,  is  present 
chief  of  the  Sandy  Lake  band.  Of  his  four  daughters,  one  married  Captain  Charles 
Ermitinger,  a  noted  Canadian  gentleman :  he  took  his  wife  to  Montreal,  where  she 
died.  Another  daughter  married  Samuel  Ashmun,  E.sq.,  one  of  the  most  respectable 
citizens  of  Ste.  Marie.  She  is  the  mother  of  a  fine  family  of  men  and  women  grown. 
The  other  daughters,  one  was  wife  to  the  celebrated  chief  and  warrior,  IIole-in-(/ic-sky, 
and  became  the  mother  of  the  present  first  chief  of  the  Mississippi  bands.  This 
family  are  thus  interlocked  by  the  strong  ties  of  blood  with  the  Siixon  race. 

Another  noted  chief  of  tlie  Mi.ssis.sippi  bands  flourished  contemiwraneously  with 
K(ih-do-icauh-c-i1a.  His  name  was  Ke-<:lie-ki-bc-xe-<jnn-dib-a,  (Big  Curly-Head,)  and  was 
chief  of  the  lower  and  more  hardy  bands,  who  followed  clo.se  in  the  retreating 
footsteps  of  the  Sioux  on  the  Mississijjpi.  This  chief  is  aptly  spoken  of,  as  the 
vanguard  or  bulwark  of  his  tribe.  His  is  a  name  that  will  long  be  cherished  in  the 
memory  of  the  Ojibwas.  In  the  words  of  one  of  their  principal  men,  "  He  wa^  a 
father  to  our  fathers,  who  looked  on  him  a.s  a  parent :  his  lightest  wish  was  quickly 
obeyed :  his  lodge  was  ever  hung  with  meat ;  and  the  traders  vied  with  each  other 
who  should  treat  him  best :  his  hand  was  oi^n,  and  when  he  had  plenty,  our  fathers 
wanted  not."  He  was  noted  not  only  for  his  charity  and  goodness  of  heart,  but  also 
for  the  strength  of  it  for  bravery. 

Three  times  he  led  his  warriors  with  success  against  their  enen)ies.  Each  time  he 
returned  with  them  with  bloody  knives  and  reeking  scalps.  At  Long  Prairie  figlu,  he 
led  on  the  warriors  of  the  Mississippi,  Mille  Lac,  and  Sandy  Lake;  while  Flat-mouth 
led  on  the  Pillagers.  He  was  leader  of  the  party  that  so  quickly  took  back  the  war- 
club  that  the  Sioux  had  left  sticking  in  the  body  of  one  of  their  men  at  Gull  Lake. 

Twice  the  brave  chief  was  attacked  in  his  hunting  camp  by  Sioux  war-parties,  and 
both  times  he,  with  his  warriors,  repulsed  them. 

Strong  Ground  and  Holc-'m-the<l(vj '  were  in  their  youth  his  pijie-bearers,  and  waited 
on  him  till  the  day  of  his  death. 


Pt.  IL— 21 


'  Called  Biig-on-a-ge-zhig. 


' 


162 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION, 


He  died  on  the  road,  returning  from  Prairie-du-chien  to  his  own  country,  after  the 
great  council  of  Indian  trilwa  convened  at  that  place  by  the  United  States  Government, 
to  the  end  that  lines  dividing  their  several  countries  might  be  marked  out,  and  that 
peace  miglit  reign  between  them. 

In  this  coimcil  or  treaty,  Jii-hese-fjini-dib-a  almost  singly  represented  the  great  body 
of  his  tribe,  living  on  and  over  the  head-waters  of  the  Mississippi. 

The  firm,  unyielding  front  which  he  presented  to  the  Sioux,  and  the  force  of  his 
deeds  and  reputation,  gained  for  these  bands  the  advantageous  lines  that,  for  their 
trilje,  were  drawn. 

lie  may  well  be  said  to  have  secured,  by  a  lasting  ti-eaty,  the  concjuests  of  his 
people.  Had  he  ))een  aided  by  the  presence  and  voice  of  his  cotemporary  chiefs, 
Flat-mouth  and  Kah-ilo-waiih-e-ihi,^  probably  much  more  might  have  been  done. 

Not  being  used  to  a  southern  climate,  many  of  the  Ojibwas  present  at  this  treaty 
died  from  sickness. 

A  number  of  their  best  chiefs  Avere  among  the  victims.  Bci-he-sc-fjtni-cJ lb-ay  was  of 
the  number ;  who  died  much  lamented  by  the  triJje  in  general,  and  all  those  that  had 
known  the  many  gootl  qualities  of  this  native-bred  chieftain. 

Strong  Ground  and  Ilole-in-theski/  attended  him  to  Prairic-du-chien,  and  assiduously 
cared  for  his  wants  during  his  last  illness. 

Just  before  he  expired,  he  called  these  two  young  men  to  his  bed-side,  and  counselled 
them  on  their  future  course  of  life.  He  left  in  their  charge  his  Mississippi  bands,  and 
this  circumstance  laid  the  foundation  of  the  chieftainship  of  these  after\vards  noted 
men. 

Ri-he-se-gnn-dil)-a  had    l)een  three  times  given  a  medal. 

He  loft  no  childi'cn  to  reap  the  fruits  of  his  name  and  actions,  and  indeed  there  is 
none  now  living  on  the  great  river,  of  close  aflinity  to  the  deceased  chieftain. 

His  totem  was  a  crane,  one  of  the  oldest  families  in  the  tribe  now  residing  mostly  at 
Lake  Suiwrior. 

N()-1m  was  a  noted  warrior,  and  flourished  in  his  prime  alniut  eighty  years  ago. 

In  revenge  for  the  great  Sioux  excursion  to  Leech,  Winnipeg,  and  Sandy  Lakes, 
(which  resulted  in  the  three  days'  fight  at  Crow-wing,)  he  collected  a  war-party,  which 
was  the  first  to  penetrate  to  the  St.  Peters  river :  a  little  above  the  mouth  of  which 
river,  they  attacked  a  camp  of  Sioux  with  great  slaughter. 

He,  at  another  time  also,  with  a  small  party  of  fearless  spirits,  penetrated  into  the 
very  heart  ot'  the  Sioux  country. 

This  party  returned  from  the  Pipe-stone  river,  which  runs  into  the  great  Pn-go-no 
or  Missouri. 

No-ka  was  noted  as  l»ing  in  all  the  fights  of  any  consequence  during  his  lifetime  on 
the  Mississippi  liorder. 

'  Ka-dc-wau-be-da  tens  present.     Vide  Treoty  Prairic-du-cliien,  1825. 


I 


r'  • 


HISTOllY,    AND   GOVERNMENT. 


163 


lit'  wiiH  also  noted  as  a  hunter,  and  the  fruits  of  one  day's  hunt  is  wortli  mentioning, 
as  well  to  show  the  abundance  of  game  in  those  days,  as  his  jjrowess  in  tlie  chase. 

Starting  from  his  lodge  at  the  mouth  of  Crow-w  ing,  he  in  one  day  killed,  on  the  first 
snow,  si.xteen  elk,  four  buflUlo,  five  deer,  three  bears,  one  porcupine,  and  one  lyn.\. 

The  fruits  of  this  day's  hunt  he  gave  to  his  trader,  who  was  wintering  at  this  place. 

A  story  is  also  told  of  this  hunter ;  that  he  fought  a  mad  bufl'alo  bull  (in  rutting 
time,)  for  half  a  day,  with  only  his  tomahawk-pipe ;  he  used  a  small  pine-tree  for 
shelter. 

The  Noka  river  is  said  to  have  been  named  after  this  man,  who  used  to  live  much 
about  the  lake  from  which  it  takes  its  rise. 

Punk  river,  emptying  from  the  west  into  the  Mississippi,  is  named,  in  like  manner, 
after  Sng-ut-aug-itn,  father  of  the  present  chief  Ka-diirwaulMxh,  who  hunted  in  the 
vicinity,  and  on  the  said  river,  during  his  lifetime. 

No-ka  left  a  son,  named  Ik<liul,  who  distinguished  himself  in  the  feud  of  his  tribe 
with  the  Sioux.  JIc  with  She-tiheeh  (another  brave  character,  who  was  killed  at 
Mille  Lac  with  Wauh-o-jeeij,)  were  the  two  who  went  out  at  Cross  Lake,  on  the  open 
ice,  to  meet  four  hundred  Sioux  warriors  as  they  were  advancing  to  attack  their  village. 
Their  brave  example  instigated  their  fellows  to  follow  tliem ;  and  one  of  the  most 
bk)ody  fights  told  of  in  their  history  was  here  fought. 

This  man  was  in  ten  different  fights,  where  blood  flowed  freely.  He  was  ever  in 
the  van,  —  the  wadding  of  the  Sioux's  guns  often  burning  his  clothes. 

It  was  his  lioast,  that  he  had  passed  the  ordeal  of  over  one  bag  of  bullets  aimed  at 
him  during  his  lifetime. 

He  is  buried  at  Tj<mg  Lake,  near  the  Mississippi. 

His  son,  the  third  Wauho-jccg,  is  now  a  noted  chief  of  the  Mississippi  bands,  fully 
sustaining  the  name  of  his  two  ancestors  and  two  illustrious  tmmesnlccs,  though  he  has 
turned  his  attention  more  to  peace  than  war. 

Through  an  intimacy  with  the  Sioux  in  his  early  days,  he  talks  their  language 
freely.  He  has  passed  through  many  hairbreadth  escapes  during  his  lifetime,  and 
will  bear  to  the  grave  nine  wounds  inflicted  by  the  Sioux.  By  their  hands  he  has  lost 
two  favorite  children  and  five  brothers  and  sisters.  His  biograpliy,  however,  more 
properly  comes  under  a  more  modem  era  in  the  history  of  the  tribe. 

Another  noted  character,  in  his  day,  lived  cotemporary  with  Be<hid,  and  equalled 
him  in  bravery  and  note. 

Wush-uah-lcocon  (Muskrat's  liver)  was  the  chief  in  his  time  of  the  Mille  Lac  band, 
under  Rx-hc-fte-gun-tHb-a. 

The  numerous  fights  and  hairbreadth  escajies,  wlierein  this  man  earned  a  name  and 
rank  among  liis  fellows,  would  fill  a  took  as  they  are  related  by  the  present  gene- 
ration. 

Ne-gan-e-kcshig,  (Day-ahead,)  had  he  lived  the  full  tenn  of  human  existence,  was  a 


ft    ! 


U  4 


I    f 


164 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


man  who  would  have  become  a  noted  and  remarkable  character.  Even  during  hia 
Hhort  lifetime,  on  two  remarkable  occasions,  he  earned  the  name  of  the  ''bravest  of 
the  brave"  among  his  fellow  Indians. 

On  one  occasion  he  singly  followed  the  trail  of  a  large  Sioux  war-jjarty,  who  had 
been  to  Gull  Lake  and  killed  an  Ojibwa.  The  party  encamped  at  the  mouth  of 
Noka  river,  and  early  in  the  morning  the  first  riser  in  their  camp  received  the  bullet 
of  Xe-ff(in-e-hsfii(j.  The  Sioux,  suspecting  an  ambush  of  their  enemies,  did  not  chase 
him  far.  A  day  or  two  after  he  pursued  the  same  party  to  the  St.  Peters  river,  and 
was  one  of  those  that  killed  the  women,  at  the  mouth  of  that  river,  within  the  hearing 
of  the  drums  of  a  large  Sioux  village. 

On  the  occasion  of  his  death,  he  had  left  Gull  Lake  (where  he  usually  resided)  to 
go  to  the  mouth  of  the  Crow-wing  to  hunt  deer  by  torch-light. 

There  he  found  Wush-UHh-kofMn  and  another  Indian.  They  encamped  a  short 
distance  above  the  entry  of  the  river.  After  dark,  Ne-yan-e-lce-ahiij,  with  his  wife  to 
steer  his  canoe,  started  on  his  hunt.  The  current  brought  them  silently  to  the  island 
that  lies  at  the  mouth  of  the  Crow-wing,  causing  it  to  divide  into  two  mouths  or 
entries. 

Ilei-e  he  discovered  the  prow  of  a  wooden  canoe,  that  had  lx?en  drawn  partly  ashore. 
On  .searching,  he  discovered  that  he  had  fallen  on  the  camp  of  a  Sioux  war-party.  lie 
blew  out  his  torch,  and  stept  noi.-'elessly  ashore  to  reconnoitre.  In  a  few  moments  he 
returned,  and  requested  his  wife  to  make  the  Ix'si  of  her  way  to  their  friends  at  Gull 
Lake,  (fifteen  miles  distant,)  telling  her  that  he  intended,  after  giving  her  sufficient 
time  to  make  her  escaiw,  to  stab  as  many  Sioux  as  he  could,  in  their  sleep,  with  his 
knife,  and  when  discovered,  to  fight  them  wiUi  his  gun,  calculating  in  the  darkness  to 
be  able  to  make  his  escape  by  jumping  into  the  river. 

His  wife,  whom  he  hiid  but  lately  married,  refused  to  leave  him,  and  used  every 
endearing  epithet  to  induce  him  to  forego  his  mad  intent.  He  was  at  last,  through  her 
tears  and  entreaties,  prevailed  upon  to  embark  and  return  to  his  camp ;  telling  his 
wife,  however,  that  now  he  would  rim  into  more  danger  than  if  she  had  allowed  him 
to  have  his  own  will — for  he  intended  to  fight  tie  Sioux  in  open  day,  to  jirevent  their 
further  advance  into  the  country. 

Sending  his  wife  early  in  the  morning  to  Gull  Lake,  Ne-gan-c-l-esliij,  Wush-ush-lo- 
Icon,  and  their  comrade,  laid  in  wait  on  the  east  bank  of  the  Mississippi,  opiwsite  a 
sudden  bend  in  the  river.  The  Sioux  betimes  embarked  in  their  canoes,  and  com- 
menced their  course  up  the  river.  They  numbered  about  one  hundred  canoes,  averaging 
three  in  each  canoe. 

The  three  Ojibwa  warriors  allowed  the  main  IxKJy  to  pass  their  ambush,  and  picking 
out  their  victims  in  warriors,  whose  heads  were  most  Ijcdeckcd  with  plumes,  they  shot 
down  three  as  they  passed  within  a  few  steps  of  their  hiding-place.  After  their  first 
fire  they  jumjwd  up,  and  ran  on  to  the  hill  in  their  rear.     Here  We^an-e-keshlg  stopped, 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT, 


165 


while  Ilia  comrade  ran  on;  he  loaded  hia  gun,  yelled  his  war-whoop,  and  returned  his 
single  bullet  for  the  hundreds  that  were  now  flying  past  him.  lie  stood  his  ground 
till  all  hope  of  escape  was  cut  oft"  by  his  being  surrounded  and  wounded  in  the  foot. 
He  fought  to  the  death. 

His  companions,  who  narrowly  escaped,  said,  that  for  a  long  time  his  single  yell 
and  report  of  his  gun  was  heard,  before  silenced  by  the  repeated  AoUeys  of  the  Sioux. 

His  enemies,  out  of  resixjct  for  his  bravery,  did  not  scalp  or  mutilate  the  body,  but 
left  it  in  a  sitting  jwsture,  decked  with  plumes — all  the  honors  of  Indian  warfare. 

From  this  sjwt  the  war-party  returned,  and  the  object  for  which  Ne-gan-e-ke-ahiij 
died  was  thus  fulfilled. 

This  man  waa  father  to  the  Little  Curly  IJeail,  chief  of  the  Gull  Lake  band,  which 
numbered  during  his  lifetime  three  hundred  souls.  He  was  killed  during  a  time  of 
peace  by  the  Sioux  four  years  ago,  and  has  been  succeeded  by  hia  half-brother,  Que- 
wesansish,  or  Bad  Boy. 

We-non-ga  (Turkey-Buzzard)  distinguished  himself  at  Leaf  Lake  and  Long  Prairie 
fights,  and  also  at  the  late  massacre  on  Lake  St.  Croix.  When  he  was  an  old  man,  he 
was  at  last  scalped  by  his  enemies.  Besides  the  above,  he  was  prfjsent  at  three  minor 
engagements.     He  was  the  principal  or  head-warrior  of  the  chief  Big  Curly  Head. 

Ke<Jie-v7att1j-ish-a8Ji  (Big  Marten)  was  also  a  noted  brave.  At  Ntch-o-je-wun-ong,  a 
few  miles  below  the  mouth  of  Rabbit  river,  on  the  Mississippi,  he  singly  fought  and 
n^^lled  an  attacking  party  of  Sioux,  or  Sissetons.  They  often  joined  the  Kit'tH-ten-o 
and  Assineljoins  in  their  excursions.  They  boast  among  their  brave  warriors  of  old 
Muk-uiUi-chib,  or  Black  Duck.  This  man,  with  forty  braves,  attacked  a  Si.sseton 
camp,  and  killed  great  numljcrs.  Being  warned  by  a  friendly  Assineljoin  from  the 
camp,  that  three  hundred  Sioux  warriors  were  coming  to  the  rescue  from  an  adjacent 
village,  the  Ojibwas  retreated ;  but  on  a  wide  open  prairie  their  enemies  (all  mounted) 
caught  up  with  and  surrounded  them,  i  liey  kept  them  at  a  distance  as  long  as  their 
ammunition  lasted;  and  w'len  this  failed,  the  Sioux  closed  in  with  them,  and  the 
battle  was  hand  to  hand.  But  one  of  this  band  of  forty  heroes  ever  returned  to  tell 
the  sad  tale  of  their  fate. 

The  above  hapiiened  alx)ut  forty  or  fifty  years  ago. 

Aissance  (Little  Clam)  is  the  name  of  one  of  their  noted  chiefs  and  braves,  who  was 
killed  at  Spirit  Lake  about  forty  years  ago ;  and  the  Red  Lake  band  have  still  living 
some  warriors  who  have  distinguished  themselves  by  noted  acts  of  great  bravery. 

Of  the  Pillagers :  Avhcn  you  ask  them,  who  were  their  most  noted  warriors  and 
men  ?  the  answer  is  —  "  They  all  fought  alike ;  not  one  of  our  fathers  passed  through 
life  without  seeing  the  shedding  of  blood." 

As  a  war-leader,  Mons-o-mo  was  distinguished ;  —  and  the  names  of  Muk-ud-a-wmin- 
(hquwl  (Black  Cloud)  and  Sha-wa-lceshlg,  as  warriors,  ought  to  be  recorded  in  the 
annals  of  their  history. 


l(i(i 


TUIUAL    OIIGANIZATION, 


f  J1 


■• 


It  cca.xc-s  to  Ih.-  a  matter  of  Hiir|>riso,  tliat  a  ])lialanx  of  nikIi  inoti  ooiilil  coiuiuor  and 
hold  the  eouiitry  they  have  Iteqiieathetl  to  their  oUspriiifr. 

We  now  eoiiie,  in  tlie  course  of  our  hintory,  to  tlie  noted  eluiracterw  and  events  in 
the  days  of  a  generation  not  yet  passed  away.  Tliese  events  (so  far  as  their  relations 
with  the  whites  arc  concerned)  arc  within  the  rcach  of  all  who  arc  curious  to  know. 
1  will,  thercfore,  hut  cursorily-  s|H'ak  of  the  »lifl'erent  treaties,  in  which  they  have  sold 
the  iK'st  jjortions  of  tlieir  hlood-i'arned  country. 

The  first  treaty  was  at  St.  Peters,  in  1837;  again,  at  La  Pointe,  in  1842,  and  at 
Fond  du  Lac  and  Leech  Lake,  in  1847. 

To  give  an  idea  of  the  condition  of  the  Mississii)|)i  hands  for  the  past  thirty-five 
yeai-s,  it  will  he  necessary  to  mention  hrietly  the  noted  characters  that  figured  at 
their  head. 

The  deeds  and  life  of  Song-ulc-um-ifi,  of  Biiij-ou-kcsJi!;/,  litrbc-fte-ijnn-iliJt-nncc,  Ki-<'he, 
SIkkj-o-Ihi ,  J'^Ji-ki'-f>iir/-(-rmh(',  and  of  Waiilt-o-Jir;/,  recpiirc  in  telling  much  more  space 
and  time  than  is  permitted  me  in  this  present  account. 

Siiiif-iili-uiii-ii/  and  his  younger  Ijrother,  Biiij-on-it-h'-nh'i<j,  were  the  piiK>-l»earcrs  and 
warriors  of  tlie  chief,  lii<j  Curly  Hnul,  who,  on  his  death-l)ed,  left  to  them  his  chief- 
tainship and  bands. 

They  distinguished  themselves  in  the  warfare  of  tlieir  trilte  with  the  Sioux ;  and  by 
their  deeds  olitained  an  iniluence  over  their  fellows  of  the  Mississippi. 

During  their  short  career,  they  earned  a  name  that  will  lie  long  rememlx>red. 

Sonfj-uk'Um-iij  Avas  as  fine  a  specimen  of  an  Indian  as  ever  proudly  trod  the  soil 
of  America.  He  was  one  of  those  honor-loving  chiefs,  not  only  by  name,  'at  by 
naturc  also.  He  was  noted  for  his  untlinching  bravery,  generesity,  and  solidity  or 
firmness;  the  last  of  which  is  a  rare  ((uality  in  the  Indian,  among  whom  but  one  out 
of  ten  is  possessed  of  any  firmness  of  character. 

As  an  instance  of  his  daring,  on  one  occasion,  he  fought  singly,  by  the  side  of  a 
mounted  comrade,  with  seven  Sioux,  and  drove  them  off  with  loss. 

His  first  fight  was,  when  a  mere  Ijov,  at  Long  Prairie  battle.  Aga'ii,  he  was 
present  on  an  attack  of  a  Sioux  camp  at  Poplar  Grove,  on  Long  Prairie,  where  they 
killed  many  of  their  foes.     Again,  he  led  a  night  attack  on  a  camp  at  Crow  river. 

At  Round  Prairie,  also,  he  with  an  Ottowa  cut  off,  from  a  large  Sioux  camp,  three 
boys  Avhile  they  were  sliding  on  the  ice,  in  plain'  view  of  their  friends. 

At  Fort  Snelling,  he  was  the  one  who  fearlessly  wont  into  the  guard-house,  and  led 
out  four  Sioux  prisoners,  armed  with  their  knives,  who  had  shot  into  their  camp,  (as 
usual  in  time  of  peace,)  and  killed  four  Ojibwas.  These  prisoners  Song-iik-uni-nj  took 
out  of  the  fort,  and  in  jiresence  of  the  officers  and  garrison  of  the  fort '  and  a  large 
assembly  of  Sioux;  he  bade  them  run  for  their  lives  from  the  bullets  of  the  Ojibwas, 
whose  relatives  they  had  killed. 


'This  was  done  by  order  of  Col.  Snelling. —  H.  R.  S. 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


167 


J 


lie  wn.**  present  on  many  other  occasions  tlmt  tried  the  nmn's  heart.  He  ilied  hut  a 
few  years  since,  at  alwnt  the  age  of  forty-<Mjriit. 

liiHj-oiHi-b-*ihS<j,  his  younj,'er  hrother,  was  ecjiially  l)rave  at  the  moment  of  trial,  hut 
8ome  of  hia  cotemporary  warriors  say  of  liim,  that  his  extreme  hravery  did  ?iot  hist. 
"  At  the  moment  of  e.xcitement  he  could  have  thrown  liimself  into  the  fire."  Ti;esc 
ai"e  the  words  of  one  of  liis  noted  hraves  who  often  foufiht  at  liis  side.  He  had  not  the 
firmness  of  liis  brother  S>»<j-iik-tiii'-iij,  but  was  more  cunninjr,  and  soon  came  to  under- 
stand the  policy  of  the  whites  perfectly.  He  was  ambitious,  and,  thi-ough  his  cunninjr, 
stepjKxl  alx)ve  his  more  straight-forward  brother,  and  became  head  chief  He  was  a 
proud  and  domineering  spirit,  and  loved  to  be  implicitly  obeyed.  He  had  a  (piick  and 
impatient  temiK-r.  A  spirit  like  this  is  little  calculated  to  Ijc  loved  and  obeyed  by  the 
free  wild  sons  of  the  forest,  who  U)ve  liljerty  tiw  well  to  become  the  slaves  of  any  man. 
liii(j-on-a-h-Kh!(j  was  more  feared  than  loved  by  his  bands,  and  had  it  not  been  for  the 
stron}?  supiH)rt  of  his  more  intlucntial  brother,  he  could  never  have  been  really  chief 
over  his  bands. 

On  one  occasion,  he  turned  out  and  dispersed  a  whole  camp  of  his  fellows  with  a 
wooden  paddle.  The  Indians  were  drinking  licpior,  and  fighting  among  theni.sclve.", 
after  Bnijon-n-kc-nhiij  had  twice  loudly  ordeird  them  to  drink  in  quiet.  He  struck  with 
his  paddle  promiscuously,  and  on  this  single  occasion  mortally  ofl'ended  some  of  his 
best  warriors. 

Notwithstanding  his  harsh  and  haughty  temiK'r,  therc  was  in  the  breast  of  this  man 
much  of  the  milk  of  human  kindness ;  and  he  had  that  way  alx»ut  him  that  induced 
the  few  who  really  loved  him  to  Ijc  willing  even  to  die  for  him. 

During  his  lifetime,  he  distingui.shod  himself  in  eight  different  fights,  where  blood 
was  lively  shed.  At  St.  Peters,  he  was  almost  mortally  wounded  —  a  bullet  passing 
through  his  right  breast  and  coming  out  near  the  spine.  On  this  occasicm,  his  daughter 
was  killed ;  and  from  this  time  can  be  dated  the  bloodthirstiness  with  which  he  ever 
afterwards  pursued  his  enemies. 

Ilis  bravery  was  fully  proved  by  his  crossing  the  Mississippi,  and  witli  but  two  brave 
comrades,  firing  on  the  large  Siou.x  village  of  Jui-jxj-aia  below  the  mouth  of  the  St. 
Peters.  They  narrowly  escaped  the  general  chase  that  was  made  for  them  by  many 
Sioux  warrioi-s,  crossing  the  Mississippi  under  a  shower  of  bullets.  There  is  nothing 
in  modern  Indian  warfare  to  equal  this  hardy  exploit. 


■flf^ 


3.     CONTRIBUTIONS    TO    THE    HISTORY,    CUSTOMS,    AND 
OPINIONS   OF    THE    DACOTA    TRIBE. 

BY    PUILANDER    PRESCOTT. 
TRANSMITTED     FROM     THE     ST.     PETERS     A  O  G  N  C  Y. 

[The  following  responses  to  interrogatories  drawn  up  by  the  Indian  Bureau  of  the 
United  States  in  1847,  are  from  Mr.  Philander  Prescott,  U.  S.  Interpreter  at  St.  Peters. 
Tlie  respondent  is  himself  allied  to  the  Sioux  tribe;  of  whom  he  records  the 
customs  and  trsiditions,  speaks  their  language  fluently,  and  has  lived  many  years 
among  them  in  various  situations  and  positions.  His  means  of  personal  observation 
have,  therefore,  been  ample ;  he  is,  moi-eover,  a  man  of  entire  integrity  of  character, 
and  unimpeachable  veracity.  A  plain  man,  without  pretence  to  education,  he  records 
simply  what  he  has  seen  and  heard.  There  is  no  attempt  to  assimilate  the  native 
words  he  employs  to  any  plan  of  orthography.  It  has  been  deemed  better,  in  all 
respects,  to  leave  his  paper  in  its  original  garb.  The  testiuioiiy  it  bears  to  the  actual 
state  of  Indian  opinion  and  tradition  is  important ;  and  its  manifest  truthfulness 
commends  it  to  respect.  The  question  of  the  jwpular  division  of  the  Sioux  trioe  into 
six  or  seven  bands,  he  discusses  himself,  more  at  length,  in  a  note.  Tlieir  numbers, 
according  to  the  most  recent  count,  oh  given  by  him,  will  be  found  under  the 
statistic  d  head.  — H.  R.  S.] 


Answer  to  Memorandum    of  Topics    from    the  Government   op 

THE    United    States:    1847. 

2.  "  By  what  name  are  they  called  among  themselves ;  and  by  what  name,  or 
names,  are  they  known  among  other  tribes;  and  what  is  the  meaning  of  these 
resjwctive  names?' 

Dacota  is  the  word  generally  used  for  the  Sioux  nation,  but  they  have  different 
names  for  separate  bands  or  villages. 


Mendawahkanton     . 
Wahkj)at«ns 
Wahkpacoota  . 
Sussetonwah 


People  of  sacred  or  spirit  lakes. 

"         the  loaves. 

"    who  shoot  in  the  leaves. 
« 

(1B8) 


Eyank-ton-wah 
Tetons ' 


HISTOllY,   AND   GOVERNMENT.  169 

People  of  sacred  or  spirit  lakes. 


'  These  bands  having  been  usually  represented  to  be  seven,  vhoreas  the  writer  states  them  to  bo  but  siz,  this 
point  was  ngiiin  referred  to  him.     Ho  discusses  it,  as  follows: 

Saint  Pktkhs  Sub-Agencv,  February  2ilh,  1851. 

Sir,  —  Yours  of  the  25th  January  came  to  hand  seven  days  since.'  Since  that  time  I  have  been  collecting 
what  iiiforniatiun  I  could  in  reference  to  the  grand  divisions  of  the  Sioux. 

I  will  give  you  Little  Crow's  definition  of  the  term  Seven  Fires,  which  language  is  often  used  among  the 
Sioux.  Seven  Fires  or  Seven  Divisions,  Little  Crow  says,  means  seven  difTorent  nations  of  Indians,  ns  follows,  viz.: 

The  Sioux,  1st;  the  Indians  west  of  them,  2d;  Chippewas,  3d;  Winnebagoes,  4th;  Menomonccs,  5th;  Fox 
and  Sauks,  6th ;  lowas,  7th. 

This  is  Little  Crow's  interpretation  of  the  Seven  Fires  or  Seven  Divisions.  Singular  as  this  appears,  yet 
there  may  be  much  sense  in  it. 

Bad  Hail  says  he  has  often  heard  the  Indians  talking  of  the  Seven  Fires  or  Divisions,  but  he  could  not  make 
out  but  six,  viz.  : 

Mcndawakantons,  Ist;  Wahkpatons,  2d;  Wahkpacootas,  3d;  Sussetons,  4th;  Yanktons,  5th;  Tetons,  6th. 

The  Seventh  he  did  not  know  where  to  find,  nor  who. 

The  Bad  Hail  says  there  are  divisions  amongst  the  Yanktons ;  but  still  they  arc  one  people  as  much  as 
the  Mondawakauton  Sioux  arc ;  they  are  one  division,  yet  there  are  several  bands  of  tlicni,  and  so  it  is  with 
the  Yanktons. 

Mock-pu-wc-cliastah  is  the  next  one  that  I  called  on  for  information.  He  says  that  Wabushaw,  the  first 
acknowledged  chief  by  the  English,  went  to  Quebec,  and  when  he  (Wabushaw)  was  about  to  start  back  for 
home,  the  governor  asked  him  how  many  large  medals  he  wanted,  and  he  says  Wabushaw  told  him  seven, — 
wanting  one  large  medal  for  each  chief  or  village  that  were  his  friends.  Here  is  where  the  Seven  Fires  or 
Divisions  took  its  rise  from,  according  to  Mock-pu-wc-clia.itah  ;  and  the  fullowitig,  he  believes,  are  the  bands 
which  Wabushaw  called  Seven  Fires,  for  which  he  wanted  seven  medals,  viz.  : 

Wabushaw,  Ist;  Red  Wing,  2d;  Little  Crow,  3d;  Little  Six,  4th;*  Good  Road,  6th ;  Little  Rapids,  Cth ; 
Traverse  de  Sioux,  "th. 

This  is  Mock-pu-wc-chastah's  interpretation  of  the  Seven  Fires  or  Divisions. 

Tom-o-haw  sjiys  the  Yanktons  are  divided  into  bands  for  the  purpose  of  hunting,  but  they  arc  all  one  people ; 
one  parly  is  c.ilted  the  South,  and  the  other  party,  the  North  Vauktons ;  but  there  is  no  difierence  in  dialect, 
and  he  considers  them  all  as  one  people  or  division. 

The  next  and  most  reliable  iuformatiou  is  Mr.  Ilazeu  Moocr's  Indian  form  for  Blackdog's  band  of 
Mcndawakanton  Sioux. 

Mr.  IMoocr  says  ho  has  lived  in  the  Yankton  ?'nintry  sixteen  years ;  he  says  the  following  are  the  bands  that 
he  always  considered  to  bo  one  division  of  the  Yanktons,  viz.  : 

Ku-ux-aws,  1st;  Pah-bax-ahs,  2d;  Wah-zu-cootas,  3d;  Ilcn-ta-pah-tus,  4lh,  or  Yank-ton-us,  or  South 
Yanktons. 

The  three  first  named  bands  roam  and  hunt  over  the  country  from  Lake  Traveise  to  the  Devil's  Lake  and  tho 
Missouri.  Tho  Ilen-tee-pah-tecs,  or  Yank-ton<!es,  roam  and  hunt  south  of  the  Coutoau  de  I'rairic ;  but  in 
chasing  the  buffalo  these  different  bands  meet  together;  and  art  nearly  relatcil  to  each  other;  and  he  considers 
them  all  one  division. 

Mr,  Moocr  says  that  if  ho  was  a  going  to  make  a  severth  division,  he  should  call  the  ^ssinaboins  the  seventh. 
Ho  says  ho  believes  they  speak  the  original  Sioux  dialect. 

The  Assinaboins  probably  are  a  band  of  tho  Yanktons,  b'lt  they  have  become  entirely  alienated  from  tlicni, 
and  are  at  war  with  the  Sioux ;  therefore,  they  cannot  now  be  considered  a  division  of  the  Sioux,  notwithstanding 
they  speak  a  similar  dialect.  So  after  all,  I  believe  I  am  right  in  making  only  six  grand  divisions  of  tho  Sioux 
nation.  —  If  any  thing  more  should  bo  wanting,  lot  mo  know,  and  I  will  answer  as  far  as  I  can. 

Hoping  this  will  satisfy  you,  I  remain  your  most  obedient  and  humble  scrv't, 

P.  Phescott. 

*  Good  Roid  should  be  btfort  Llttl*  Six,  tad  ihould  lie  4th,  and  Little  Six  5th. 


Pt.  II.— 22 


170 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


.     ;-'l 


Supposed  to  bo  eiglit  thousand  inhabiting  the  Mississippi,  St.  Peters,  Shiane,  and 
Devil's  Lake.  These  are  the  great  divisions;  but  the  tribe  is  still  separated  into 
smaller  bands  and  villages,  numbering  from  fifty  to  one  thousand  soids. 

Of  the  eight  thousand  Dacotas  inhabiting  the  Mississippi  and  St.  Peters  country, 
also  Shiane  and  Devil's  Lake,  we  will  say  two  thousand  are  men,  who  hunt  more  or 
less ;  and  we  should  average  them  at  one  fourth  of  a  pack  each,  of  furs  and  peltries. 
This  would  make  five  hundred  packs,  which  I  think  is  a  full  average  for  several  years. 
Some  seasons  they  come  short  of  this  average,  and  at  others  overrun  it.  Last  year, 
1847,  there  were  over  five  hundred  packs  taken  from  the  Sioux  country. 

Some  of  the  Sioux  interpreters  interpret  the  word  Dacota  to  mean  confederacy  or  a 
nation  united,  which  no  doubt  is  correct. 

The  word  Sioux  is  given  by  old  French  traders ;  what  it  was  taken  from,  no  person 
knows.  The  Indians  know  not  what  it  originated  from.  If  you  talk  about  Sioux, 
among  those  Indians  who  are  not  acquainted  with  the  whites,  they  will  not  understand 
you;  but  the  moment  you  mention  Da-co-taa,  the  whole  nation  know  who  you 
mean. 


9.  "Does  the  tribe  speak  one  or  more  dialects,  or  are  there  parts  of  several 
languages  spoken,  or  incorporated  in  it,  requiring  more  than  one  interpreter  in 
transacting  business  Avith  them?" 

The  Men-da-workan-ton  —  Eyankton  (Yanktons) — differ  somewhat  in  dialect;  but 
they  are  readily  understood  by  the  other  bands.  No  separate  interpreter  is  wanted 
for  a  Da-co-ta  to  pass  through  and  converse  with  the  whole  nation. 


1 1)3 


10.  "  What  rank  and  relationship  does  the  tribe  bear  to  others  ?" 
Each  nation  thinks  or  considers  itself  superior  to  other  nations  of  Indians. 
The  traditions  of  other  trilies  or  nations  do  not  admit  that  any  nation  of  Indians 
is  superior  or  more  humane  than  their  own.     The  mode  to  settle  discordant  preten- 
sions to  original  rank,  &c.,  is,  to  give  them  law,  and  a  protection  of  rights  and 
property. 


11.  "Are  there  belts  of  wampum,  quippas,  or  monuments  of  any  kind,  such  as 
heaps  of  stone,  &c.,  to  prove  the  former  existence  of  alliances,  leagues,  or  treaties 
among  the  tribes?" 

The  Dacotas  rear  no  monuments,  &c. ;  all  the  proof  that  I  can  find  is  tradition. 

12.  "What  is  the  totemic  system  of  the  tribe;  or,  if  it  consist  of  separate  clans  or 
primary  families,  what  is  the  number  of  these  clans,  and  what  is  the  bodge  of  each  ? 
And,  do  these  totems  or  badges  denote  the  rank  or  relationship  which  is  sought  to 
be  established  by  these  queries?" 


/     i 


HISTORY,  AND   GOVERNMENT. 


171 


The  bodge  or  name  of  a  village  is  generally  taken  from  the  position  or  place  in  which 
it  is  situated,  as  in  the  following  instances,  viz. :  Wi-atfa-clie-clutfi,  or  Bad ;  Ohnh-liam- 
hih,  situated  on  a  long  reach  of  the  river;  Ilaminc-cJuiii,  from  the  mountain  of  rocks 
above  Lake  Pepin;  Wahk-pafoiis,  from  their  being  settled  where  there  is  a  large 
quantity  of  foliage;  Kah-po-sia,  from  the  Indians  having  gone  on  a  hunting  tour. 
Some  of  them  took  up  their  burdens,  which  were  said  to  Ikj  heavy,  and  walked  oflf 
lightly,  and  made  long  marches,  which  gave  rise  to  the  name  Kah-po-sia,  which  means 
light. 

As  for  clans,  there  are  many,  and  there  are  secret  badges.  All  that  can  be  noticed, 
as  to  clans,  is,  that  all  those  that  use  the  same  roots  for  medicines  constitute  a  clan. 
These  clans  are  secretly  formed.  It  is  through  the  great  medicine-dance,  that  a  man 
or  a  woman  gets  initiated  into  these  clans.  Although  they  all  join  in  one  general 
dance,  still  the  use,  properties,  &c.,  of  the  medicine  that  each  clan  uses  is  kept  entirely 
secret  from  each  other.  They  use  many  roots  of  which  they  know  not  the  properties 
themselves;  and  many  of  them  have  little  if  any  medicinal  properties  in  them. 
These  clans  keep  up  constant  feuds  with  each  other ;  for  each  clan  supposes  that  the 
other  possesses  supernatural  powers,  .vnd  can  cause  the  death  of  any  person,  although 
he  may  be  living  at  a  remote  distance  from  it.  These  clans  have  been  kept  up  from 
time  immemorial,  and  are  the  cause  of  most  of  the  blood  shed  among  the  Sioux.     If  a 

s(  .1  uies.  it  is  laid  on  some  one  of  a  different  clan ;  and  from  that  time,  rcvenge  is 
si  T  t  by  the  relations  of  the  deceased,  and  all  the  supernatural  powers  are  set  to  work 
to  destroy  the  supposed  offender.  If  this  fails,  then  medicine  is  tried ;  and  if  that 
does  not  succeed,  then  the  more  destructive  weapons,  such  as  the  knife,  axe,  or  gun, 
are  made  use  of,  and  often  prove  effectual.  When  the  Indians  are  drinking  strong  or 
spirituous  liquors,  and  are  intoxicated,  revenge  is  sought  after  with  avidity.  After  an 
Indian  has  succeeded  in  killing  a  supposed  murderer,  the  relatives  of  the  deceased  seek 
to  retaliate ;  and  so  their  troubles  arc  kept  up  from  one  generation  to  another.  It  is 
as  much  an  impossibility  to  get  one  of  the  members  of  these  clans  to  divulge  any  of 
their  secrets,  as  it  is  to  get  a  freemason  to  disclose  those  of  his  lodge.  They  pretend 
to  have  the  power  to  heal  as  well  as  to  kill ;  and  if  a  conjurer  cannot  heal  a  sick 
person,  he  says  at  once,  some  one  of  another  clan  is  opposing  him ;  and  the  nation 
never  will  have  peace  and  happiness  until  these  superstitions  and  juggleries  are 
broken  up  by  civilization  and  by  sending  physicians  among  them. 


13.  "Have  geographical  feature's,  within  the  memory  of  tradition,  or  the  abundance 
or  scarcity  of  game,  had  any  thing  to  do  with  the  division  and  multiplication  of  trilies 
and  dialects,  either  among  the  Atlantic  or  Western  States  ?  Are  there  any  remcmlx'red 
feuds,  family  discords,  or  striking  rivalries  among  chiefs  or  tribes,  which  have  led  to 
such  separations,  and  great  multiplication  of  dialects?" 

Tradition  informs  us  that  the  Ducota  or  Sioux  were  much  more  numerous  ou  the 


Hi 


i' 


"I 


1  i^U' 


172 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION, 


lower  part  of  the  St.  Peters  river  than  at  present ;  that  after  the  traders  came  into 
the  country,  and  purchased  furs  and  peltries,  &c.,  the  wild  animals  began  to  recede, 
and  a  large  number  of  the  Sioux  kept  pace  with  the  game ;  that  they  were  in  the 
habit  of  killing  for  food,  and  for  the  peltries.  The  territory  now  claimed  by  the  Sioux 
nation  is  about  nine  hundred  miles  in  length,  and  from  two  to  five  hundred  miles  in 
breadth. 

The  Sioux  have  suffered  much  for  w.ant  of  food,  and  have  been  compelled  to  divide 
into  small  parties,  to  enable  them  to  embrace  a  larger  circuit  of  country  to  find  food. 
Notwithstanding,  they  have  been  compelled  to  eat  those  that  had  died  of  starvation 
and  cold.  The  different  villages  and  bands  have  arisen  mostly  from  feuds  amongst 
the  clans. 

14.  "  What  great  geographical  features,  if  any,  in  North  America,  such  as  the 
Mississippi  River,  Alleghany  Mountains,  &c.,  are  alluded  to  in  their  traditions  of  the 
original  rank  and  movements  of  the  tribe ;  and  was  the  general  track  of  their  migra- 
tion from  or  towards  the  North  or  the  East?" 

The  Sioux  migrate,  at  this  time,  from  the  North  to  South-west.  Tradition  informs 
us  that  they  once  inhabited  the  head-waters  of  the  Mississippi.  They  used  to  go 
to  war  to  the  Lake  of  the  Woods  and  Lake  Suijerior ;  and  when  they  went  on  long 
hunting  excursions,  they  came  down  the  Mississippi  to  hunt.  At  that  time  there  were 
different  nations  of  Indians  on  the  St.  Peters  and  Mississippi,  below  its  mouth. 

16.  "  What  are  the  chief  rivers  in  the  territory  or  district  occupied  by  the  tribe  ?" 
The  principal  river  is  St.  Peters,  which  is  three  hundred  miles  in  length,  navigable 

for  steamboats,  in  high  water,  about  one  hundred  and  twenty  miles,  to  Traverse  de 
Sioux.  There  is  one  rapid  aliout  thirty  miles  above  Fort  Snelling,  which  is  not 
perceived  in  high  water.  The  St.  Peters  takes  its  rise  in  the  Coteau  de  Prairie.  The 
Chiane  river  is  a  large  stream  ;  it  empties  into  the  Red  river  of  the  North.  Goods  are 
landed  at  Traverse  de  Sioux  from  Mackinac  boats  and  small  durhams,  and  from  these 
taken  to  all  parts  of  the  Sioux  country  in  carts. 

17.  "Are  there  any  large  springs  or  lakes  in  tlie  district,  and  what  is  their 
character,  size,  and  average  depth ;  and  into  what  streams  have  they  outlets  ?" 

There  are  large  springs  at  the  commencement  of  the  Big  Wood  on  the  St.  Peters, 
the  largest  of  which  can  be  seen  only  at  low  water.  At  this  place  there  is  an  Indian 
village,  the  chief  of  which  told  me  he  hod  found  mineral  of  a  yellow  colour.  Thero 
was  also  a  spring  which  possessed  medicinal  properties.  There  are  many  lakes  in  the 
Sioux  country,  varying  from  one  mile  to  ten  in  length,  and  from  half  a  mile  to  two 
miles  in  width.  The  valley  of  St.  Peters  river  alx)unds  with  springs  of  the  finest 
water  in  the  world.     Many  of  the  streams  have  good  water-power. 


HISTORY,  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


173 


18.  "  What  is  the  general  character  of  the  surface  of  the  country  occupied  by  the 
tribe  ?  Is  it  hilly  or  level,  fertile  or  sterile ;  abundant  or  scanty  in  wood  and  water ; 
abounding  or  restricted  in  the  extent  of  its  natural  meadows  or  prairies  ?" 

The  Dacota  country  is  generally  level,  and  very  fertile ;  scanty  in  wood ;  abounds 
with  water.  There  are  a  great  many  natural  meadows.  The  Indians  raise  small 
quantities  of  com.  The  agricultural  advantages  are  good  throughout  the  Dacota 
country. 

19.  "Are  cattle  and  stock  easily  raised?  Do  the  prairies  and  woods  afford  an 
abundant  supply  of  herbage  spontaneously  ?  Are  wells  of  water  to  be  had  at  moderate 
depths,  where  the  surface  denies  springs  or  streams ;  and  is  there  a  practicable  market 
for  the  surplus  grain  and  stock?" 

Cattle  and  stock  are  easily  raised  by  cutting  wild  grass  for  the  winter's  hay.  The 
prairies  and  woods  furnish  a  spontaneous  growth  of  herbage  that  millions  of  cattle  can 
graze  upon.     There  is  no  market  for  any  great  quantity  of  produce  at  present. ' 

20.  "  Has  the  old  practice  of  the  Indians,  of  burning  the  prairies  to  facilitate  hunt- 
ing, had  the  effect  to  injure  the  surface  of  the  soil,  or  to  circumscribe,  to  any  extent, 
the  native  forests?" 

The  practice  of  firing  the  prairies  is  generally  condemned  by  the  Indians;  and 
many  of  them  will  not  do  it.  They  say  the  fires  destroyed  a  large  amount  of  game. 
The  fire  does  much  injury  to  the  soil,  and  destroys  large  quantities  of  timber,  particu- 
larly pine. 

21.  "Are  there  extensive  ban-ens  or  deserts,  marshes  or  swamps,  reclaimable  or 
irreclaimable,  and  what  effect  do  they  produce  on  the  liealth  of  the  country ;  and  do 
they  offer  any  serious  obstacles  to  the  construction  of  roads  ?" 

There  are  but  few  barrens  in  the  Dacota  country.  There  arc  many  marshes  and 
swamps,  some  reclaimable  and  others  not.  Some  seasons,  particularly  when  the  water 
is  low,  the  Indians  are  more  or  less  sickly.  The  summer  of  184G  and  1847,  they 
suffered  severely  from  sickness.  Some  of  the  swamps  will  be  serious  obstacles  to  the 
construction  of  roads. 

22.  "  Is  the  quantity  of  arable  land  diminished  by  large  areas  of  arid  mountain,  or 
of  volcanic  tracts  of  country,  with  plains  of  sand  and  cactus  ?" 

There  are  no  visible  signs  of  volcanic  tracts  in  the  Dacota  country. 

23.  "  Is  the  climate  generally  dry  or  humid  ?  Does  tlie  heat  of  the  weather  vary 
greatly,  oris  it  distributed  through  the  different  seasons  with  regularity  and  equability  ? 
What  winds  prevail  ?     Is  it  much  subject  to  storms  of  rain,  with  heavy  thunder,  or 


Ma 


H 


'  [The  subsequent  incorporation  of  Minnesota  Territory  from  the  Sioux  country,  and  the  ascent  of  steainboiits 
to  that  point,  on  the  Upper  Mississippi,  must  soon  render  this  remark  no  longer  applicable.  —  II.  R.  S.] 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 

tornadoes,  and  do  these  tempests  of  rain  swell  the  streams  so  as  to  overflow  their  banks 
and  destroy  fences,  and  injure  the  crops?" 

The  climate  is  generally  dry.  The  heat  varies,  in  summer,  from  temperate  to  rising 
of  90°  Fahrenheit,  in  two  or  three  days,  and  then  falls  a^  much  in  the  same  time. 
The  winds  are  about  equal  from  all  points  of  the  compass.  Southeast,  east,  and  north- 
east, are  the  prevailing  winds  for  rain  and  snow.  Some  winters,  we  have  not  more 
than  two  inches  of  snow  at  a  time,  and  no  sleighing  at  all  by  land  during  the  whole 
season ;  and  then  again,  the  snow  is  a  foot  and  a  half  in  depth.  The  thermometer 
ranges  from  freezing  to  40°  below  zero.  However,  the  intense  cold  does  not  last  but  a 
few  days  at  a  time.  Very  heavy  rain  storms  are  not  frequent,  neither  are  very  heavy 
peals  of  thunder  common.  Tornadoes  are  seldom  heard  of.  The  low  grounds  of  the 
St.  Peters  sometimes  overflow  in  the  spring  freshets  and  injure  the  Indian  corn.  The 
valley  of  the  St.  Peters  is  from  one  to  two  miles  wide.  This  is  the  only  part  that 
overflows.  The  prairies  are  from  fifty  to  one  Innidred  and  fifty  feet  above  the  valley 
of  the  St.  Peters.  (Plate  24.)  Tlie  Indians  say  "  that  a  number  of  years  since  there 
came  a  great  freshet  in  July,  tluit  destn>ycd  all  the  corn  in  the  Mississippi  and  St. 
Peters  valley. 

24.  "  Does  the  district  produce  any  salt-springs  of  value,  any  caves  yielding  saltpetre 
earth,  or  any  beds  of  gypsum,  or  plaster  of  paris ;  or  of  marl,  suitable  for  agricultural 
purposes  ?" 

The  Eyankton  (Yankton)  country  in  the  neighborhood  of  Devil's  Lake  abounds 
with  salt  lakes. ' 

25.  "Has  the  country  any  known  beds  of  stone-coal,  iron,  lead,  copper-ore:'  or  any 
other  valuable  de^Kisites  of  useful  metals  or  minerals?" 

The  country  in  the  vicinity  of  Lake  Pepin  is  said  to  contain  lead-ore  on  the  half- 
breed  tract  and  Indian  lands.  I  once  saw  a  lump  of  lead-ore  that  a  Sioux  Indian  said 
he  found  near  Lake  Pepin,  but  never  could  be  persuaded  to  show  the  place  where  he 
found  it,  on  account  of  a  superstitious  notion  that  some  persons  of  his  family  would 
die  if  he  should  cause  a  mine  to  be  opened  on  their  lands.  There  is  said  to  be  copper- 
ore  on  Rum  river,  that  enters  into  the  Mississippi,  above  the  falls  of  St.  Anthony. 
Something  like  slate  is  found  on  Red-wood  river  by  the  Indians.  It  possibly  may  be 
coal ;  if  so,  it  will  be  of  great  value,  as  wood  is  scarce. 

2C.  "  What  is  the  general  character  and  value  of  the  aninud  productions  of  the 
district  ?     What  species  of  quadrupeds  most  abound  ?" 

There  are  deer,  but  this  animal  is  now  scarce;  bears,  beavers,  raccoons,  otters, 
minks,  muskrats,  weasels,  wolves,  (large  and  small,)  foxes,  (gray  and  cross,)  red  fox, 
lynx,  badger,  ground-hog,  (wood-chuck,)  porcupine,  red  squirrel,  three  kinds  of  striped 

'  [TLis  fact  may  prove  one  of  high  importance  in  the  future  history  of  that  remote,  high,  and  arable  tract 
of  country.  —  II.  11.  S.] 


..-^        -   -        ■,■■,   -...— ^.-i-k:,-^.- 


^3 


li 


) 


■L, 


^ 


n 


S 


>, 


t 


HISTORY,  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


175 


1 


squirrel  tliat  burrow  in  the  f^round,  no  gray  or  blntik  wjuirrel,  some  rabbits  or  conies. 
Of  all  these  animals  the  niuskrat  is  the  most  numerous ;  bufl'alo,  elks,  and  deer,  arc 
next  in  quantity.  Tradition  says  tliat  most  of  the  above  mentioned  animals  were 
very  numerous  before  the  fur-traders  came  into  the  country;  but  they  iK'giui  to 
diminish  as  soon  as  traps  and  fire-arms  began  to  be  used  to  collect  furs  and  jR'ltries  for 
the  traders.  I  have  heard  old  hunters  say  that  there  are  thousands  of  bufl'alo  killed 
for  the  hide  and  tongue.  The  liear,  the  Indians  say,  Ixjgan  to  decrease  fn-st,  and  then 
the  buffalo. 

27.  "  Do  the  Indian  traditions  make  any  mention  of  larger  or  gigantic  animals  in 
former  periods?" 

The  Indians  say  that  large  animals  had  existed  once  in  that  country',  of  which  they 
have  pieces  of  bones  that  tliey  use  for  medicine.  They  lussert  that  formerly  there  was 
a  giant  who  could  stride  o\er  the  largest  rivers  and  the  tallest  pines  with  ease,  but  he 
was  pacific  in  his  natiu"e,  lived  on  the  fat  of  animals,  and  carried  a  large  bow  and 
arrow.  The  Indians  have  a  tune  tliat  they  sing  to  the  giant,  particularly  when  they 
have  done  something  they  wish  to  boast  of  There  arc  still  giants  of  great  jxiwer,  it 
is  believed,  l)ut  where  they  are  they  cannot  tell ;  but  they  are  sure  these  giants  can 
destroy  the  thunder,  and  hill  all  Iciiuh  of  aninnds  hy  a  look  of  the  eye. 

29.  "  Have  they  any  peculiar  opinions  or  striking  traditions  respecting  the  serjwnt, 
wolf,  turtle,  grizzly  Ijear,  or  eagle,  whose  devices  are  used  as  symbols  on  their  arms  or 
dwellings,  and  how  do  such  opinions  influence  their  acts  on  meeting  these  species  in 
the  forests?" 

These  animals  are  held  in  great  veneration  by  some  of  the  Indians,  owing  to  the 
clan-system  spoken  of  in  No.  12.  The  men,  when  initiated  into  the  great  medicine- 
dance  and  clan,  have  some  animate  object  of  veneration,  which  they  hold  to,  as  sacred 
through  life.  Whatever  it  may  be,  they  cannot,  or  dare  not  kill  it,  or  eat  any  part 
of  the  flesh  thereof  Some  fix  on  a  wolf,  some  a  bear,  some  a  deer,  a  bufl'alo,  an  otter; 
others  different  kinds  of  birds,  or  different  parts  of  animals ;  some  will  not  eat  the 
tail  or  rumi>picc(!,  others  the  head,  the  liver,  and  so  on.  Some  will  not  eat  the  right 
wing,  some  the  left,  of  a  bird ;  the  women  also  are  prohibited  from  eating  many  of  the 
parts  of  the  animal  that  are  forbidden.  When  they  enter  into  the  clan,  any  person 
that  breaks  any  of  these  rules,  by  eating  any  thing  forbidden,  brings  upon  himself 
trouble  of  some  kind,  llie  offence  is  the  same,  even  if  accidentally  committed.  If 
an  Indian  has  bad  luck  in  hunting,  he  at  once  says  some  one  has  been  breaking  their 
laws,  either  by  eating  some  parts  of  the  animal  forbidden,  or  they  have  stepped  over 
it,  or  on  it,  particularly  a  woman ;  if  she  steps  over  any  of  the  things  held  sacred,  a 
great  trouble  is  soon  expected  in  the  family ;  therefore  precaution  is  taken,  as  soon  as 
possible  to  appease  the  animal  held  in  veneration,  for  they  think  that  diseases  arise 
from  some  animal  entering  in  spirit  into  their  system,  which  kills  them. 


I 


m 


^muiiiui 


:£ii. 


176 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


'I -i 


«  ;'  » 


I 


il 


31.  "Are  Muy  exiK-rt  in  dniwiiig  maps  or  charts  of  the  rivers,  or  Bcctions  of 
country  which  they  inliiibit  ?" 

Their  capacity  is  very  limited.  All  their  drawings  or  figures  are  very  inaccurate. 
They  have  no  knowledge  of  the  rules  of  proiHjrtion. 

33.  "What  is  generally  thought,  by  men  of  reflection,  to  Iw  the  probable  origin  and 
])ur|M)sc  of  the  western  mounds?" 

Mounds  are  not  common  in  the  Dacota  country.  There  arc  a  few  about  seven 
miles  west  of  Fort  .'-duelling,  in  which  human  Ixnies  are  found.  The  Indians  say  the 
lowas  once  inhabited  this  c(mntry,  and  that  it  is  very  probable  the.se  mounds  were 
made  by  them.  The  mounds  are  in  the  vicinity  of  St.  Peters  river ;  there  arc  some 
also  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Croix  river,  but  they  are  low,  running  east  ond  west. 
The  oldest  Indians  know  nothing  alxjut  the  structuiv,  neither  have  they  been  ojiened 
to  sec  what  they  contain.  They  are  some  fifteen  or  twenty  in  number,  round  in  form, 
and  from  ten  to  twenty  feet  in  diameter.  I  am  informed  there  are  more  mounds  in 
the  Sioux  country.' 

40.  "  If  pii)es  are  found,  what  is  the  material;  is  it  stone,  steatite,  or  clay  —  how 
arc  they  formed  —  to  admit  a  stem,  or  to  be  smoked  without,  and  what  are  their 
shapes,  m.QH,  and  ornaments?" 

Pijw-stone  is  found  at  the  Coteau  des  Prairie,  of  a  deep  and  pale  red  colour.  It  is 
similar  to  slate  in  substance.  It  is  imbedded  between  two  strata  of  sand  and  lime- 
Tovk,  from  five  to  ten  feet  deep.  It  is  suri)rising  to  see  what  work  the  Indians  have 
performed  to  got  this  stone :  the}'  make  with  their  knives  beautiful  pipes  from  it. 
The  stone  is  quarried  with  axes  and  lioes.  There  arc  no  forests  here.  The  Indians 
have  to  carry  wood  from  twelve  to  twenty  miles  to  cook  with,  wlule  quarrying.  The 
pi[X!-8tone  quarry  is  about  twelve  miles  from  Big  Sioux  river,  its  nearest  point.  Mr. 
Catlin  claims  to  be  the  first  white  man  tliat  visited  the  pipe-stone,  but  this  is  not  so. 
In  18.30  I  found  a  Gib.  cannon-ball  there. 

41.  "How  many  kinds  of  cooking  utensils  were  there?     Describe  them." 
Tradition  informs  us  that  the  Dacotas  once  used  the  skin  of  the  animals  they  killed 

to  cook  in.  This  was  done  by  putting  four  stakes  in  the  groinid,  and  fastening  the 
four  corners  of  the  skin  to  the  stakes,  so  as  to  leave  a  hollow  in  the  centre,  into  which 
was  poured  water  —  from  one  to  two  gallons.  Then  a  quantity  of  meat  was  cut  very 
fine,  and  put  in  with  tlic  Avatcr.  Then  stones  were  heated  and  thrown  in.  They  say 
three  or  lour  stones,  the  size  of  a  six-pound  shot,  cooked  the  meat  and  made  a  good 
dish  of  soup. 

42.  "  What  was  the  process  of  manipulation  of  their  darts  ?" 


'  [These  small  tumuli  have  heen  the  subject  of  fanciful  description.    The  larger  piles  have  been  pronounced 
geological  by  Mr.  R.  D.  Owen.  —  H.  R.  S.] 


in 


f    i 


HISTORY,   AND  GOVERNMENT. 


177 


The  dartH,  in  former  times,  were  worn  down  on  a  coarse  snn<lstone.  This  stone  is 
very  iianl  in  its  natural  state,  hut  they  bum  it,  which  softens  it,  and  makes  a  very 
sharp  grit,  which  will  wear  away  iron  very  fast  l)y  constant  rubbing.  In  this  way,  the 
arrow-iK)ints  were  made,  and  some  few  are  still  manufactured  in  the  same  way  of  iron. 
The  arrow  used  for  hunting  is  differently  shaped  from  that  they  use  for  war.  The 
arrow-heads  arc  fmm  two  to  four  inches  in  length,  formerly  made  of  bone,  and  deer 
and  elk  horn,  and  sinews  from  the  necks  of  buffalo. 

44.  "How  many  kinds  of  wampum  were  there?  What  shells  were  employed? 
What  was  the  value  of  each  kind  ?     IIow  was  it  estimated  ?" 

Wampum  has  been  in  use  only  since  the  whites  commenced  trade  with  the  Indian 
tribes,  and  is  valued  as  white  people  value  })i'oper.  •.  Wampimi  is  manufactured  by 
people  on  the  searcoast,  from  shells  found  in  the  '.jean.  Traders  foruierly  sold  from 
two  to  five  strings  for  an  otter.  At  the  present  tiwie,  ten  to  twesity  strings  are  given 
for  an  otter's  skin. 

48.  "  Have  they  any  idea  of  the  universe,  or  other  creations  in  the  f  'd  of  space, 
which  have,  in  their  belief,  been  made  by  the  Groat  Spirit?" 

The  Dacotas  believe  the  Great  Spirit  made  all  things  except  rice  and  thunder. 

52.  "How  many  moons  or  months  compose  the  Indian  yes  i",  &c. \" 

The  Dacotas  count  time  by  seasons — spring,  summer,  autumn,  and  winter,  which  is 
counted  one  year.  Twenty-eight  days  or  nights  are  counted  one  moon.  They  can 
tell,  pretty  well,  about  what  time  the  new  moon  will  appear. 

53.  "  Do  they  notice  the  length  of  the  summer  and  winter  solstices,  and  of  the  vernal 
and  autumnal  equinoxes?" 

The  Dacotas  count  three  months  for  spring,  three  for  summer,  three  for  fall,  and 
three  for  winter,  and  each  month  or  moon  has  a  name,  viz.,  January,  the  seven^  or 
hard  moon,  February,  the  moon  in  which  raccoons  run,  March,  the  moon  of  sore  eyes. 
April,  the  moon  that  the  geese  lay.  May,  the  moon  for  planting,  June,  the  moon  for 
strawberries  and  hoeing  com,  July,  midsummer,  .tn  .iist,  the  moon  that  corn  is  gathered, 
Septeml)er,  the  mc'on  that  they  make  wild  rice,  Octolx>r  and  November,  running  of  the 
does,  December,  the  moon  when  the  deer  shed  their  horns. 

55.  "  Have  they  any  name  for  the  y^av,  as  contra-distinguished  from  a  winter?" 
No. 


Hi' 


56.  "Have  they  names  for  any  considerable  number  of  the  stars?" 
The  Dacotas  have  a  few  names  for  stars. 
Pt.  II.  — 23 


^*#^?'$S«'r 


W8 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


60.  "  In  what  part  of  the  heavens  or  the  phmetary  system  do  the  Indians  locate 
their  paradise,  or  their  happy  hunting  grounds  and  land  of  souls  ?" 

The  Ducotas  have  no  particular  place  in  the  heavens  for  their  departed  souls. 
They  say  there  are  large  cities  somewhere  in  the  heavens,  where  they  will  go  to,  but 
ptill  be  in  a  state  of  war  with  their  former  enemies,  and  have  a  plenty  of  game. 

61.  "Docs  the  tribe  count  by  decimals?" 

The  Dacotas'  count  commences  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 10.  Then  they  commence 
again  and  double  the  count,  by  saying  ten  and  one,  ten  and  two,  ten  and  three,  ten 
and  four,  and  so  on  to  two  tens ;  then  it  is  two  tens  and  one,  two  tens  and  two,  two 
tens  and  three,  and  so  on  to  three  tens,  or  thirty.  They  keep  on  counting  tens,  until 
they  arrive  at  ten  times  ten,  which  is  a  hundred.  Some  can  count  a  thousand  very 
readily.  Others  can  count  ten  million,  but  they  cannot  understand  anything  about 
the  quantity,  without  saying  it." 

63.  "How  wore  accounts  formerly  kept?" 

Accounts  were  formerly  kept  in  skins.  A  buck-skin  was  the  standard  currency. 
After  the  beaver  failed,  five  to  ten  bucks  was  the  price  of  blankets  of  different 
qualities.  Five  muskrat-skins  were  valued  as  equal  to  one  buck-skin.  A  beaver  or 
an  otter  was  called  a  plue,  the  French  for  furs.  Buffalo-robes  are  taken  so  many  for  a 
blanket,  from  two  to  five  at  this  time.  Where  Indians  receive  annuities,  their 
accounts  are  kept  in  dollars  and  cents  by  the  traders.  The  Indian  mode  of  trading 
among  themselves  is  merely  an  exchange  of  articles ;  for  instance,  an  Indian  wants  a 
horse,  a  lodge,  or  a  canoe ;  he  will  take  what  he  thinks  is  the  value  of  the  articles 
wanted,  and  carry  it  to  some  person  that  he  believes  most  likely  to  strike  a  bargain 
with  him.  He  then  tells  him  what  he  wants,  and  although  what  he  brings  may  not 
be  sufficient  in  the  estimation  of  the  other,  to  purcho^  what  he  wants,  still  the  offer 
or  price  is  not  refused;  because  it  is  understood  tliut  such  refusal  might  cause  his 
horse  to  be  killed,  or  his  lo<lge  to  be  cut,  or  his  canoe  broken,  or  some  kind  of  mischief 
might  happen  to  him. 

05.  "  Did  a  single  perpendicular  stroke  stand  for  one,  and  each  additional  stroke 
mark  the  additional  numlxr  ?"  &c.  &c. 

Their  count  is  by  one  single  stroke.  For  a  hundred  they  make  one  hundred  marks. 
Their  ages  are  not  accurately  known.  Some  of  their  grave-posts  are  marked  by 
characters  of  the  number  of  persons  killed.  Although  an  Indian  may  never  have 
actually  killed  one  of  his  enemies,  he  may  count  with  tliose  that  do  kill.  After  an 
enemy  is  killed,  or  shot  down,  four  of  the  first  persons  of  the  war-party  count  it  an 
honor,  or  can  wear  an  eagle's  feather,  and  lie  entitled  to  as  much  honor  as  the  man 
that  shot  the  enemy.'    Therefore  there  is  great  strife  amongst  the  warriors  to  see  who 


■[See  Dacota  Numeration,  §  VI.  B.] 


'  [See  Manners  and  Customs,  ante,  §  II.  A.] 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT. 


179 


shall  touch  the  body  first,  to  gain  a  feather,  which  is  a  great  distinction,  or  mark  of 
bravery.  Sometimes,  however,  they  are  sadly  disappointed ;  as  if  the  enemy  is  not 
dead,  the  first  one  that  approaches  is  apt  to  get  shot,  and  then  a  pair  of  them  die 
together. 

66.  "What  is  the  general  character  of  their  medical  practice?" 

Their  sick  are  attended  as  well  as  could  be  expected  by  a  people  so  ignorant  and 
superstitious.  Children  and  youth  are  better  nursed  than  the  old  and  decrepid.  The 
Indians  say  that  many  years  ago,  the  E-yankton  of  the  plains  had  an  old  man  that 
could  scarcely  walk,  and  his  sons  and  relations  got  tired  of  handing  him  about,  and 
therefore  told  the  old  man  they  were  going  to  leave  him,  but  not  to  suffer  a  lingering 
death ;  that  they  would  give  him  a  gun,  and  put  him  out  on  the  plain  to  be  shot  at  by 
the  young  warriors,  that  he  might  defend  himself  the  best  way  he  could,  and  that  if 
he  succeeded  in  killing  any  one  of  them,  it  would  be  an  honor  he  could  take  with  him 
to  the  land  of  spirits.  The  young  warriors,  however,  wei-e  quite  too  active  for  the  old 
man,  who  could  not  hit  one  of  them,  before  he  himself  was  shot. 

67.  "  Have  their  professed  doctors  and  practitioners  of  medicine  any  exact  know- 
ledge of  anatojny,  of  the  theory  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  or  the  pathology  of 
diseases  ?" 

None. 

68.  "  How  do  they  treat  fevers,  pleurisy,  consumption  of  the  lungs,  obstructions  of 
the  liver,  deranged  or  impeded  functions  of  the  stomach,  constipation,  or  any  of  the 
leading  complaints  ?" 

By  charming,  or  singing  over  the  sick,  and  shaking  a  gourd-shell  over  them.  (Plato 
46,  Part  1st.)  The  gourd-shell  has  beads  in  it,  to  make  it  rattle.  They  also  stuft'  the 
patient  with  meat  and  strong  soup. 

69.  What  species  of  plants  or  other  roots  are  employed  as  emetics  or  cathartics  ?" 
They  have  many  plants  and  roots  that  they  use,  but  know  not  the  properties  of  but 

few  of  them.  Some  of  them  use  old  bones  of  a  large  animal  that  they  say  once  existed 
in  the  country,  and  others  use  pieces  of  stone  for  medicine.  They  dig  the  roots  and 
dry  them,  to  preserve  them,  and  then  pound  them  when  they  want  to  use  them. 
They  have  one  root  that  is  very  powerful,  and  used  as  a  cathartic;  but  it  often 
operates  as  an  emetic  also. 

70.  "  Do  they  bleed  in  fevers  ?  and  what  are  the  general  principles  of  the  application 
of  the  Indian  lancet  ?  Is  the  kind  of  cupping  which  they  perform  with  the  hom  of 
the  deer  efficacious,  and  in  what  manner  do  they  produce  a  vacuum?" 


I  'i 


ai««l<«MB««-»*>^.»aifUl>.a»»SS 


'M 


.;  i 


180 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


The  Indians  bleed  in  the  arm,  but  not  when  they  are  very  sick.  When  they  bleed, 
it  is  generally  before  they  get  very  low.  They  cup  sometimes  for  the  headache.  The 
Indian's  knife  or  lancet,  in  these  cases,  is  a  piece  of  flint.  A  scale  of  the  common  flint 
is  knocked  off",  generally  with  the  fire-steel,  which  is  very  sharp,  and  a  piece  of  this  is 
used  for  scarifying  and  fof  cupping.  Sometimes  they  tie  a  small  piece  of  wood,  six 
or  eight  inches  long,  to  the  flint,  and  use  it  like  a  phlegm.  The  point  of  the  flint  is 
laid  on  the  vein,  and  struck  a  light  tap  with  a  small  stick ;  the  blood  then  runs  very 
freely.     They  most  generally  use  the  tip-end  of  a  buffalo  horn  for  cupping. 

71.  "Have  they  any  good  styptics,  or  healing  or  drawing  plasters?" 

They  have  some  roots  that  heal  new  Avounds  very  easily.  Bandages  and  lint  are 
not  skilfully  applied,  nor  removed  in  time. 

72.  "  Is  the  known  success  with  which  they  treat  gun-shot  wounds,  cuts,  or  stabs, 
the  result  of  the  particular  mode  of  treatment,  or  of  the  assiduity  and  care  of  the 
physicians  ?" 

The  healing-art  of  gun-shot  wounds  is  mostly  in  nature  itself. 

73.  "Do  they  ever  amputate  a  limb,  and  how,  and  with  what  success?  Are 
the  arteries  previously  compressed?" 

They  seldom  amputate  a  limb.  They  have  no  surgical  instruments.  They  are  not 
skilful  in  splints.  If  a  limb  is  broken,  it  is  almost  sure  to  be  crooked  afterwards. 
The  mode  of  carrying  the  sick  or  wounded  is  in  a  litter  on  two  poles  lashed  together, 
and  a  blanket  fastened  on  to  it.  (Plate  25.)  Two  men  carry  it,  one  at  each  end  of  the 
litter,  by  his  head-strap,  v/hich  he  fastens  to  each  side  of  the  litter,  then  brings  the 
strap  over  his  neck.  It  is  wonderful  to  see  how  far  two  Indians  will  carry  a  heavy 
man  in  this  way. 

74.  "What  is  the  state  of  the  Indian  Materia  Medica?" 

They  have  some  medicine,  that  is,  roots  and  plants.  They  iiave  no  metallic 
medicine.  Their  compound  decoctions  are  simple,  but  no  reliance  can  be  placed  on 
them.  They  have  some  roots  that  are  healing  to  wounds.  They  all  use  one  kind  of 
medicine  for  cathartics.  They  have  also  medicine  for  injections ;  but  the  principal 
catholicon  for  all  diseases  is  the  gourd-shell,  or  a  shell  mode  of  birch-bark,  by  which 
they  charm  away  sickness  and  pain.  Tliey  say  the  sick  person  has  been  afflicted  by 
some  quadruped,  biped,  or  amphibious  animal.  The  remedy  to  remove  the  animal 
from  the  body  of  the  sick  is  for  the  doctor  or  conjurer  to  get  the  shape  of  the  animal 
cut  out  of  bark,  which  is  placed  outside  of  the  lodge  near  the  door,  in  a  small  bowl  of 
water  with  some  red  earth  mixed  in  it.  The  juggler  is  inside  of  the  lodge,  where  the 
sick  person  is,  making  all  sorts  of  noises,  shaking  his  shell,  ond  gesticulating  in  every 


■->*i 


[\ 


i        4 


ni 


i  *  ■  jT  '. 


.4.  f- 


'.     ilf^-  ^  ^ 


"t  ■  ,»•=    * 


■»■     t  '     .     t    S^T*. 


'■V   -    },'■<    A    ^/* 


-?l  ,       ,t». 


■<!:iRi 


*"  .  hji  <'e^  ■/>!    v»> 


'\:^.. 


*  '' >  V'r»  ■[•r<rt*'^(. 


«V*j.i,.-.. 


i  .--w    -§6 


•MfiO  «l 


■.«?,' •^' 


.  ^■\). 


•"^t!'! 


n 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT, 


181 


way.  The  animal  made  of  bark  in  the  vessel  outside  is  to  be  shot :  two  or  three 
Indians  are  in  waiting,  standing  near  the  bowl  with  guns  loaded  with  powder  and 
wad,  to  shoot  the  animal  when  the  conjurer  makes  his  apiwarance  out  of  the  lodge. 
But  to  be  sure  that  the  conjuring  shall  have  the  desired  effect,  a  woman  must  stand 
astride  of  the  bowl,  when  the  men  fire  into  it,  with  her  dress  raised  as  high  as  the 
knees.  The  men  are  instructed  how  to  act  by  the  conjurer,  and  as  soon  as  he  makes 
his  apjjearance  out  of  doors,  they  all  fire  into  the  bowl,  and  blow  the  little  bark  animal 
to  pieces.  The  woman  steps  aside,  and  the  juggler  makes  a  jump  at  the  bowl  upon 
his  hands  and  knees,  and  commences  blubljering  in  the  water,  and  singing,  and  making 
all  manner  of  noises.  While  this  is  going  on,  the  woman  has  to  jump  on  the  juggler's 
back,  and  stand  there  a  moment ;  then  she  gets  off,  and  as  soon  as  he  has  finished  his 
incantations,  the  woman  takes  him  by  the  hair  of  his  head,  and  pulls  him  along  into 
the  lodge  from  whence  he  emerged.  If  there  are  any  fragments  found  of  the  animal 
that  has  been  shot,  they  are  carefully  buried,  and  then  the  ceremony  is  over  for  the 
present. 

If  this  does  not  cure  the  sick,  a  similar  ceremony  is  performed,  but  some  other  kind 
of  an  animal  is  shajied  out  and  shot  at. 

75.  "  IIow  do  they  treat  imijosthumes  and  eruptions  of  the  skin  ?  Do  men  evei 
interpose  their  skill  in  difficult  ca.ses  of  parturition ;  and  what  is  the  general  character 
of  the  medical  ti-eatment  of  mothers  and  children?  Do  they  employ  vapor-baths 
efficaciously  for  the  health  of  their  patients?" 

There  is  aot  much  done  for  eruptions  of  tlie  skin  except  greasing  it  with  such  soft 
fat  meat  as  they  can  get.  Small-pox  is  a  disease  they  know  nothing  about  the  treat- 
ment of;  and  in  fact  any  diseases  that  are  dangerous  and  difficult  they  have  no  idea 
of  a  remedy  for.  In  cases  of  parturition  the  men  seldom,  if  ever,  are  called  upon  to 
assist ;  but  if  a  man  and  his  wife  should  be  on  a  hunting  excursion,  and  such  a  thing 
should  happen,  then  of  course  he  is  forced  to  do  what  he  can  to  assist  her.  The 
women  crack  many  jokes  at  the  men  for  their  unskilfulness  in  such  matters. 

It  is  seldom  they  have  a  difficult  case  in  parturition,  owing,  I  suppose,  to  the  women 
being  accustomed  to  hanlships.  There  have  been  instances  known  of  women  going 
out  after  a  load  of  wood,  and  returning  in  a  short  time  with  the  wood  on  their  backs 
and  a  new-ljorn  babe  on  tiie  top  of  the  load.  (Plate  20.)  There  is  seldom  any  thing 
done  to  the  mother  in  these  ca.ses,  as  she  is  generally  well  enough  in  one  or  two  days 
to  do  any  ordinary  work.  The  child  is  wrapi>ed  in  a  new  blanket,  and  kept  very 
warm  a  few  days.  Then  they  begin  to  lash  it  on  the  cradle  for  carrying  about  on  the 
back,  by  a  strap  attached  to  each  side  of  the  cradle,  and  then  brought  over  the 
forehead.  (Fig.  2,  Plate  15.)  In  this  way  they  will  carry  a  child  half  a  day,  and 
Bometiines  a  wliole  day,  and  the  child  appears  perfectly  at  ease. 

They  have   no   ta'atment  for  paralysis  but  shaking  the  shell  and  singing,  and 


it 


I  M 


I     J,  J 


182 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION, 


shooting  the  animnla  that  the  jugglers  think  have  caused  the  disease.  Vapor-baths 
are  used  by  them,  but  not  frequently.  The  manner  of  preparing  this  bath  is  to  set 
four  sticks  in  the  ground,  and  bend  them  oil  inward,  which  makes  them  cross,  and 
become  round  on  the  top.  This  enclosure  is  three  or  four  feet  in  diameter,  and  about 
three  or  four  feet  high,  with  two  or  three  blankets  thrown  over,  which  excludes  the  air 
all  round.  In  the  centre  of  this  is  placed  a  red-hot  stone,  that  would  weigh  from  six 
to  eight  pounds.  The  patient's  posture  is  half-sitting  or  stooping  over  the  stone. 
Another  Indian  is  inside,  and  pours  water  over  the  stone.  The  steam  arising  from  it 
is  very  oppressively  hot,  and  causes  great  perspiration  in  a  short  time.  After  the 
patient  has  endured  it  as  long  as  he  can,  he  goes  with  the  other  man,  and  they  both 
plunge  into  the  water,  which  ends  the  vapor-bath. 

76.  "  Does  the  tribe  consist  of  one  or  more  clans  or  subdivisions,  &c.  ?" 
See  No.  12,  for  clans.     See  No.  2,  of  this  book. 

78.  "  Were  the  chiefs  originally  hereditary  or  elective  ?  If  hereditary,  is  the  descent 
in  the  male  or  female  line,  &c.?" 

Tlie  chieftainship  is  of  motlern  date ;  that  is,  since  the  Indians  first  became  acquainted 
with  the  whites.  Tradition  says,  they  knew  of  no  chiefs  until  the  white  people  began 
to  make  distinctions.  The  first  Sioux  that  was  ever  made  a  chief  among  the  Dacotas, 
was  Wah-barshaw,  and  this  was  done  by  the  British.  Since  that  time,  chieftainship 
has  been  hereditary.  There  are  small  bands  existing  that  have  no  recognized  chiefs. 
The  females  have  nothing  to  do  with,  nor  any  rights  in  the  chieftainship.  There  is  no 
particular  ceremony  to  instal  a  man  chief,  only  the  father,  before  he  dies,  may  tell  the 
band  that  he  leaves  his  son  to  take  his  place.  The  son  generally  presents  himself  to 
the  Indian  agent,  the  principal  soldier  speaking  for  him,  saying  to  the  agent,  "  Our 
former  chief  has  left  this  his  son  to  be  our  chief."    This  is  about  all  of  the  ceremony. 

79.  "  To  what  extent  is  an  Indian  Council  a  representative  assembly  of  the  tribe, 
and  how  far  are  the  chiefs  invested  with  authority  to  act  for  the  mass  of  th^» 
tribe,  &c.?" 

The  chiefs  have  but  little  power.  If  au  Indian  wishes  to  do  mischief,  the  only  wi  y 
a  chief  can  influence  him  is  to  give  him  something,  or  pay  him  to  desist  from  his  e\  il 
intentions.  The  chief  has  no  authority  to  act  for  the  tribe,  and  dare  not  do  it.  If 
he  does,  he  will  be  severely  beaten,  or  killed  at  some  future  time.  Their  office  is  not 
of  much  consequence  as  chief,  for  they  have  no  salary,  and  are  obliged  to  seek  a 
livelihood  in  the  same  way  that  a  common  Indian  docs ;  that  is,  by  hunting.  A  chief 
is  not  better  dressed  than  the  rest  of  the  Indians,  and  often  not  so  well.  The  chief  is 
sustained  by  relationship.  The  band  of  which  au  Indian  is  chief  is  almost  always  of 
a  kin  totem,  which  helps  to  sustain  him. 


1 

^    i 
K  in 

i.  ■» 

1  :» 

t      r 

m 

f^jif     -'    1*!#<I 


f**:^  '•i'«;i;.mj»t('' 


fi^t^V"' 


■.jr>,>- 


'7S--J     •»■ 


.Mt   ^.i'-r." 


.%--   iVr 


|><-«-l 


;-„< 


«";  ■'HiHl    -li    .«    "t. 


->ri»        A''»^--  11 


•r.^fif    ;:'.«:■ 


hi'  ftiw  "''its 


>  »f< .  =«     l> 


«i-»    '  SOH'   tM^*'f 


1 1»«     ■.■  I  ■  I'i     •<•" 


^ 


u;r-i"»s'i 


■^  »     .  •  ■     V  -r . 


,  c-  s      -I  I  '« 't 


:,7.^.-     ' 


'        .11 


•^* 


;yiA?  '  **!  v-".        I'f-; 


•  iL-i  i^ -^    ' 


i*  Jfc- 


"^ 


*  I'i-' 


•>•■•   kj-.     rt*.-i- 


l/? 


..-  ,..  -    •■  ■  ->•»  v 


% 


s  ■'  >.»   -mi 


■■r  oV 


■Cwjiii'  t .  ;»i  ■((. 


J.iMilX",'      v^ 


1*1 


l-.'|i.,  .■»!. 


(')i";i;i:i''li;if;'  i". 


1 

1 

Jl 

Pl 

i» 


I   t,^ 


1}  i^ 


■    ) 


HISTORY,    AND    GOVEUNMENT, 


183 


81.  "Do  the  chiofi*,  in  public  coiinci],  Hpesik  tlio  opinions  ai.:.  wiitiiiioiits  c»f  the 
warrior  claws,  previously  expressed  by  the  latter  in  their  separate  or  home  councils ;  or 
«lo  they  particularly  consult  the  old  men,  priests,  warriors,  and  young  men  comixising 
the  tribe,  Ac?" 

The  democratic  principle  is  implanted  a  little  too  deep  in  the  Indians  in  general. 
They  all  wish  to  govern  and  not  to  ])c  governed.  Every  Indian  thinks  he  has  a  right 
to  do  as  he  pleases,  and  that  no  one  is  better  than  himself;  and  he  will  fight  before  he 
will  give  up  what  he  thinks  right.  No  votes  are  cast.  All  business  is  done  by  the 
majority  of  the  band  assembling  and  consulting  each  other.  Some  one  will  set  up  for 
or  against  a  motion ;  and  the  one  that  apiwars  the  best  is  adopted  by  general  consent. 
The  voice  of  the  chief  is  not  considered  decisive  until  a  majority  of  the  band  have 
had  a  voice,  and  then  the  chief  has  to  be  governed  according  to  tliat  voice  or  opinion 
of  the  tribe. 

82.  "In  what  manner  are  the  deliberations  opened,  conducted  and  closed,  &c.?" 
Councils  are  generally  oixined  by  some  chief.     When  the  subject-matter  concerns 

the  soldiers  or  "  braves,"  the  first  or  principal  soldier  is  authorized  to  speak  or  act  as 
orator  for  the  party  a-ssembled.  There  is  most  generally  some  remark  made  about 
the  weather,  as  an  omen  that  the  Great  Spirit  accords  with  or  opposes  their  wishes. 
Questions  of  a  grave  character,  that  is,  with  the  white  people,  are  deliberated  upon  by 
all  interested ;  and  cases  of  revenge  octed  on  precipitately.     (Plate  27.) 


1*1 


83.  "  Are  decisions  made  by  single  chiefs,  or  by  a  body  of  chiefs  in  council,  carried 
implicitly  into  effect,  &c.?" 

Decisions  made  by  a  delegation  are  considered  lawful  and  binding,  but  the  acts  of  a 
single  chief  are  binding  only  upon  his  own  village.  In  cases  of  murder,  the  parties 
aggrieved  generally  seek  revenge  themselves,  although  there  are  some  instances  w!iere 
a  murderer  is  put  to  death  by  the  authority  of  the  council.  An  instance  of  this  kind 
happened  near  this  place  in  1846,  at  Little  Crow's  village. 

An  old  chief  had  three  wives,  and  also  had  children  by  each  of  the  three,  who  were 
always  wrangling  with  each  other,  although  the  father  had  taken  great  pains  to  bring 
them  up  to  be  good  men.  After  the  old  chief's  death,  the  eldest  son  of  each  of  these 
three  sets  of  children,  set  up  claims  to  the  chieftainship,  although  their  father  had 
previously  given  it  to  his  first  son.  The  younger  brothers  were  very  jealous,  and 
made  an  attempt  to  kill  him,  and  very  nearly  succeeded.  They  shot  him  with  ball 
and  shot;  both  his  arms  were  broken,  and  he  was  also  wounded  in  the  face  and  breast. 
After  this  heinous  act,  the  young  men  mode  their  escap?,  and  a  month  after^vards 
returned  home  again,  got  drunk,  and  threatened  to  kill  other  persons.  The  village 
called  a  council,  and  resolved  to  put  the  young  men  to  death.  One  of  them  had  fallen 
asleep,  the  other  was  awake.     The  three  appointed  to  kill  them,  one  of  whom  was  a 


i   (■ 


fff 

'*- 

-l 

%   1 

%  ^  ^ 

;      Ii 

\  \  1 

184 


TRIBAL  ORGANIZATION, 


half-brother,  went  to  the  lodge  where  they  had  been  drunk,  and  shot  them.  No 
notice,  or  time,  or  place,  was  given  them.  The  executioner  seeks  the  most  favorable 
opportunity  be  can  find  to  kill  the  man.  Guns  are  generally  used  for  this  business, 
although  the  tonuihawk  or  clubs  sometimes  are  preferred.  Messengers  are  sent  out  for 
the  restoration  of  property.  Tlie  most  of  the  pilfering  among  themselves  is  done  by 
women  and  children.  The  men  say  it  is  too  low  a  practice  for  them  to  live  by. 
Stealing  horses,  however,  from  an  enemy,  the  men  regard  as  an  act  of  bravery  and 
right.  The  women  have  severe  and  bloody  fights  on  account  of  stealing  from  each 
other.  The  men  scarcely  ever  interfere  in  tiiese  quarrels.  Polygamy  also  generates 
bloody  battles  among  the  women,  and  the  strongest  generally  keeps  the  lodge.  The 
men  attend  to  their  own  difficulties,  and  let  the  women  settle  theirs. 

84.  "  Is  the  succession  of  a  chief  to  tin  office  vacated  by  death,  or  otherwise  debated 
and  decided  in  council,  or  may  a  person  legally  in  the  right  line  of  descent,  forthwith 
assume  the  functions  of  office?" 

At  the  death  of  a  chief,  the  one  nearest  of  kin,  in  a  right  line,  has  a  right  to  set 
himself  up  as  chief  If  there  are  no  relatives,  a  chief  is  made  by  a  council  of  the 
band.  It  seldom  Jiappens  that  a  chief  is  dejwsed.  There  is  but  one  chief  in  each 
band  or  village.  Some  villages  have  a  second  chief,  but  his  functions  are  very  limited. 
The  custom  of  wearing  medals  is  modern,  and  from  the  whites. 

85.  "  Wliat  is  the  power  of  the  priesthood  as  an  element  in  the  decision  of  political 
questions,  &c.  ?" 

The  power  of  the  priesthood  is  very  great.  The  priests  or  jugglers  sit  in  council,  and 
have  a  voice  in  all  national  aiTairs.  They  are  the  per::ons  that  make  war,  and  they 
also  have  a  voice  in  tlie  sale  or  ctssicm  of  lands. 


86.  "  Define  the  power  of  the  war-chiefs." 

The  ix)wer  of  a  civil  and  the  power  of  a  war  chief  is  distinct ;  the  civil  chiefs  scarcely 
ever  make  a  war-party.  The  war  chiefs  often  get  some  of  the  priests  or  jugglers  to 
make  war  for  them.  In  fact,  any  of  the  jugglers  can  make  a  war-party  when  they 
choobo.  The  war  chiefs  are  generally  distinguished  from  the  other  officers  of  the  band. 
The  young  men  often  sit  in  councils,  but  seldom  speak  before  they  are  twenty-five  or 
thirty  years  old.  Matrons  never  appear  in  council,  but  the  women  express  their  opinion 
at  home ;  in  fact,  I  liave  seen  cases  where  the  wishes  of  women  have  been  carried. 


8C.  "  State  what  is  the  law  of  retaliation,  or  the  private  right  to  take  life." 
Any  one,  two,  or  three,  may  revenge  the  death  of  a  relative,  and  it  sometimes 
happens  that  two  or  three  are  killed  for  one.     A  compromise  is  frequently  made  by 
the  offending  party  giving  large  presents.     Fleeing,  too,  from  justice  has  saved  the 


ill 


HISTORY,  AND   GOVERNMENT. 


185 


life  of  a  murtlercr  for  years,  and  lie  sometimes  escapes  altogether,  and  dies  a  natural 
death.  Other  murderers  are  killed  years  after  the  offence;  when  they  think  all  is 
forgotten,  revenge  is  taken  in  a  moment,  and  they  are  killed.  They  have  no  particular 
place  of  escape,  as  the  people  of  old  had.  In  feuds  arising  from  jx)lygamy,  if  a  death 
occurs,  the  rtslatives  of  the  deceased  almost  always  seek  revenge. 

90.  "  What  are  the  game  laws,  or  rights  of  the  chase,  &c.  ?" 

Each  village  has  a  certain  district  of  country  they  hunt  in,  but  do  not  object  to 
ftimilies  of  other  villages  hunting  with  them.  Among  the  Dacotas,  I  never  knew  an 
instance  of  blood  being  shed  in  any  disputes  or  difficulties  on  the  hunting  grounds. 
The  Seseiona  and  Yanktons  have  sometimes  objected  to  the  Mendawahhantons  hunting 
on  their  lands,  but  they  can  obtain  pcnuission  to  do  so  by  giving  some  small  presents. 

91.  "  Are  furs  surreptitiously  hunted  on  another  man's  limits  subject  to  be  seized  by 
the  party  aggrieved,  &c.  ?" 

All  furs  and  game  are  held  in  conmion.  Tlie  person  that  finds  and  kills  game  is 
the  rightful  owner.  Tlicre  are  instances  of  great  contention  over  the  carcase  of  an 
animal,  and  some  get  severely  cut ;  but  this  only  occurs  when  the  Indians  are  starving. 
The  furs  they  seldom  quarrel  about,  unless  it  is  from  stealing  from  each  other  which  is 
the  cause  of  quarrels  among  some  of  them.  The  chief  I'arely  meddles  in  these 
contentions. 


m 


92.  "  Are  warnings  of  local  intrusions  frequently  given  ?  or  is  injury  to  property 
redressed  privately,  like  injury  to  life?" 

Injury  to  proi)erty  is  sometimes  privately  revenged  by  destroying  other  property  in 
place  theraof.     Indians  sometimes  kill  each  other  for  killing  horses. 

93.  "If  hunting  parties  or  companions  agree  to  hunt  together  for  a  special  time,  or 
for  the  season,  what  arc  the  usuiil  laws  or  cuf-toms  regulating  the  hunt?" 

The  rules  of  the  hunters  are,  to  divide  the  meat  of  the  animal  they  kill.  There  are 
many  instances  where  an  Indian  kills  u  deev,  luui  reserves  ohly  the  hide  and  the  very 
.miallest  portion  for  himself  If  four  or  five  otheix  sliould  come  up  while  he  is  dressing 
the  deer,  they  must  all  get  a  piece.  As  soon  as  a  deer  is  killed,  the  Indians  kindle  a 
fire  and  commence  roasting  bits  of  it,  so  that  they  generally  make  a  good  meal  in  a 
few  minutes.  While  the  deer  is  being  dressed  iind  divided  out,  if  an  Indian  wounds 
another  deer,  and  it  runs  a  considerable  distance,  and  then  another  Indian  kills  it,  he 
claims  the  animal  and  gets  the  hide,  but  the  first  man,  if  he  conies  up  in  time,  will 
get  a  part  of  the  meat.  Stealing  from  each  other's  traps  is  a  *'requent  occurrence. 
The  loser  satisfies  himself  by  doing  the  same  thing  to  the  oue  that  he  suspects,  or 
some  one  else. 

Pt.  II.  — 24 


!i : 


186 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


Li  ^i  .J 


m 


i    ■ 


94.  "If  a  tribe  or  band  pass  over  the  lines,  and  hunt  on  the  lands  of  another  tribe, 
and  kill  game  there,  is  it  deemed  a  jiist  cause  of  war?" 
Yes,  but  they  remonstrate  first  with  each  other. 

i  95.  "Has  commercial  intercourse  promoted  the  general  cause  of  Indian  civilization?" 
We  Ijelieve  that  commerce  has  done  nothing  towards  civilizing  the  Indians,  but 
rather  retarded  it,  and  many  of  the  traders  oppose  civilization,  because  they  say  it 
will  stop  the  Indians  from  hunting,  and  the  trade  will  decrease  on  that  account.  The 
traffic  in  furs  and  skins  is  carried  on  by  companies,  and  by  individuals.  The  goods, 
most  of  them,  come  from  England  to  New  York,  then  are  re-shipped,  with  a  pii)fitaljle 
tariff,  west  to  Mackinac  and  St.  Louis.  At  these  places  the  traders  assemble  once  a 
yeai",  and  take  their  outfit.*',  with  another  tarilf  put  upon  the  g(K)ds.  These  outfits  are 
taken  into  tLo  iiidiiui  countrj',  and  petty  traders  and  voyagers  are  furnished  or 
outfitted  iiiiain  ^o  it  is  tariff  upon  tariff,  and  when  the  goods  get  into  the  Lands  of 
the  Indians,  tli  ■  blankets  coft  from  eight  to  fifteen  dollars  a  pair,  and  somotinies  that 
mo.  II  i'nr  single  Mankets.  The  risk  in  trade  is  considerable;  first,  failures  in  hunting-. 
aiHi  secoiid,  ir.'.'iiular  iirices  in  furs.  A  trader  in  the  wilderness  is  guided  l)y  his  last 
ye.  .rV=  pricos,  and  pays  the  Indians  accordingly.  Being  so  far  from  market,  he  docs 
no;  l<;aru  lu  tliK'tiiations,  and  then  when  he  makes  his  return  of  furs,  he  \A\\  probably 
finci  i.hat  tbf  y  ^  re  not  Avorth  half  as  much  as  the  jciiv  before.  So  the  Indians  are 
benefited  by  the  high  price,  and  the  actual  trader  'uis  to  Ije  the  loser;  while  the 
equippcrs  at  New  York  hoard  up  immense  fortune>=.  Look  at  John  J.  Astor,  for 
instance,  as  equipper. 


t     •  I 


9G.  "Are  the  chiefs  and  hunters  shrewd,  cautious,  and  exact  in  their  dealings, 
making  the  purchases  wuth  judgment,  and  pa\  ing  up  their  debts  fiuthfully  ?"  &c. 

The  chiefs  and  hunters  are  shrewd  enough  in  dealing  and  bartering.  Many  people 
say  the  jxjor  Indians  are  impo.'^ed  uiwn,  but  it  is  a  rare  cu.se  that  the  trader  gets  the 
advantage.  Competition  is  so  groat,  that  an  Indian  can  go  from  one  trader  to  another 
until  he  gets  a  fair  price  lor  ills  lurs.  In  fact  I  iuive  known  iistances  where  an  Indian 
has  got  one-third  more  for  his  furs  than  they  were  worth.  TJiey  rely  on  memory  to 
keep  their  accounts,  but  sometimes  an  Indian  notches  on  his  pipe-stem,  to  keep  an 
account  of  the  amount  '..e  gets  on  credit.  Some  Indians  are  punctual  in  paying  their 
debts,  but  many  of  t''om  fail.  I  have  known  some  of  tliein  to  fall  short  four  and  five 
hundred  dollars,  Aviuch  amounts  stand  on  tb^'  traoi"  s  books  until  the  next  year.  But 
the  trader  does  not  often  get  any  of  the  old  debt  paid;  for  ?!>o  I.idians,  owing  to  their 
improvidence,  are  alike  every  year  needy,  consecpiently  the  trader  is  compelled  to  give 
as  much  credit  the  following  year,  and  the  old  del)t  stands  unpaid  for  jears,  and 
probably  never  is  paid  at  all.  Furs  diminish  sometimes,  owing  to  low  water  or  drought, 
and  only  a  snudl  quantity  of  snow,  so  that  the  ponds  and  lakes  freeze  to  the  bottom. 


li 


HISTORY,  AND    GOVERNMENT, 


187 


and  all  the  animals  perish  in  the  ice.     The  Indians  seldom  make  any  opposition  to 
having  the  old  debts  charged,  but  seldom  pay  the  amounts,  or  any  part  of  them. 

97.  "  Is  it  necessary  for  the  trader  to  send  runners  to  the  Indian  hunters'  camps,  or 
private  lodges,  to  collect  their  debts,  &c.  ?" 

It  is  frequently  necessary  to  send  runners  after  debtors,  because  some  other  trader 
might  come  along  and  purchase  the  furs,  or  a  part  of  them,  and  so  the  proper  claimant 
lose  his  debt.  The  runners  are  generally  Canadians,  emplojed  by  companies  or  indi- 
viduals. Floods  do  not  affect  the  animals  only  for  the  better.  Seasons  of  abundant 
rain  and  higli  water  are  considered  good  years  for  furs,  but  dry  seasons  are  always  the 
contrary. 

98.  "  Is  the  tariff  of  exchanges  such  as  generally  to  protect  the  trader  from  loss?" 
The   tariff  of  the   traders  would   protect  them  from  loss   if  the  Indians  would 

punctually  p.ay.  but  many  of  the  traders  make  shipwreck  in  Indian  trade,  owing  to 
the  many  bad  debts.  Those  debts  are  hardly  ever  thought  of  by  the  Indians  after  the 
first  year,  .and  the  .actual  Indian  trader  becomes  bankrupt,  of  which  there  are  many 
instances.  It  is  customary  for  the  trader  to  give  large  quantities  of  provisions  to 
hungry  Indians,  particularly  to  the  D.ocotas,  who  are  always  hungr3^  The  sick  also 
got  a  considerable  quantity  of  necessaries.  These  are  seldom  paid  for :  in  fact,  the 
Indian  thinks  the  white  man  ought  to  give  him  all  he  asks  for,  because  they  have  an 
idea  that  a  white  man  has  only  to  ask  in  order  to  get  what  he  Avants  at  the  very 
lowest  rates.  The  trader  seldom  makes  a  charge  of  provisions,  unless  an  Indian  wants 
a  large  quantity.  Three  and  four,  and  sometimes  as  many  as  ten,  arrive  at  a  trader's 
house,  with  furs  to  sell  or  to  pay  a  debt.  They  .all  get  supper  and  breakfast,  and  even 
sometimes  stay  two  or  throe  days,  without  any  charge  being  made.  I  think  a  small 
trader  gives  away  as  many  as  a  thousand  meals  a  year  in  this  way,  and,  in  many 
instances,  saves  families  from  sufl'oring  by  such  liberality. 

99.  "  Iiave  the  purposes  of  connuerce,  since  the  discover}'  of  the  continent,  had  the 
effect  to  stimulate  the  hunters  to  increased  exertions,  and  thus  to  hasten  the  diminution 
or  destructiou  of  the  races  of  animals  wliose  furs  arc  sought  ?" 

The  iutroduotion  of  fire-arms,  and  traps,  and  commerce,  has  caused  all  kinds  of 
animals,  whose  furs  and  peltries  are  souglit  by  the  white  people,  to  decrease. 

100.  "  What  animals  flee  first,  or  diminish  in  the  highest  ratio,  on  the  opening  of  a 
new  district  of  the  remote  forest  to  trade  ?  Is  the  buftalo  first  to  flee  ?  is  the  beaver 
next  ?" 

It  is  difficult  to  tell  wliicli  diminishes  first,  the  bufialo  or  the  beaver.  The  bufl'alo  is 
more  abundant  in  the  Dacota  country  than  the  beaver,  at  the  present  time. 


t1 


n 


I* 


ir 


mji 


188 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


101.  "  Are  the  lands,  when  denuded  of  furs,  of  comparatively  little  value  to  the 
Indians  while  they  remain  in  the  hunter  gtate  ?  Is  not  the  sale  of  such  hunted  lands 
beneficial  to  them  ?" 

An  Indian's  land,  without  game,  is  of  little  value  to  him,  for  he  cultivates  but  a 
small  part  of  it  —  say  from  onivfourth  to  two  acres  is  about  the  extent  of  the  farm  of 
any  one  family ;  and  Indians  drawing  an  annuity  of  fifteen  to  thirty  dollars  jjer  capita, 
is  more  than  most  of  them  make  by  hunting  at  pi'csent,  or  for  many  years  past. 

102.  '•  What  quantity  of  territory  is  required  to  be  kept  in  its  wilderness  state,  in 
order  to  aftbrd  a  sufficient  number  of  wild  animals  to  sustain  an  Indian  family?" 

The  territory  required  to  .sustain  an  Indian  family  would  be  two  thousand  and  two 
hundred  acres  of  land,  or  thereabouts. 

103.  '"  What  are  tlie  ultimate  effects  of  the  failure  of  game  on  the  race?  Does  it 
not  benefit  by  leading  the  native  tribes  to  tuni  to  industry  and  agriculture  ?  And  is 
not  the  pressure  of  conmierce  on  the  boundaries  of  hunting  a  cause  of  Indian  civiliza- 
tion? Has  not  the  introduction  of  heavy  .and  coarse  woollen  goods,  in  place  of  valual)le 
furs  and  skins,  as  articles  of  clothing,  increased  the  means  of  subsistence  of  the  native 
tribes?" 

Tlie  faiku'e  of  wild  animals  has,  in  some  instances,  led  the  Indians  to  believe  in 
planting  corn  as  a  safeguard  against  want ;  but  tlie  greatest  obstacle  to  the  success  of 
agncultural  life  among  them  is  the  untpialified  laziness  of  the  men  and  the  boys,  who 
will  not  work.  They  have  a  haughty  spirit  of  pride,  and  I  dare  say  you  would  as 
soon  see  a  president  or  a  king  working  with  the  hoe,  as  a  young  man  of  the  Indian 
race.  The  men  hunt  a  little  in  siunmer,  go  to  war,  kill  an  enemy,  dance,  lounge, 
sleep,  and  smoke.  The  women  do  e\ory  thing  —  nur.se,  diop  wood,  and  carry  it  on 
their  backs  from  a  half  to  a  wh(ik>  mile;  lioe  the  ground  for  planting,  plant,  hoe  the 
corn,  gather  wiki  fruit,  carry  the  lodge,  and  in  winter  cut  and  carry  tlio  poles  to  pitch 
it  with ;  clear  off  tlie  snow,  kc,  &c. ;  and  tlie  men  often  sit  and  look  on.  Commerce, 
I  Ijelieve,  does  little  towards  tlie  civilizatiim  of  the  Indians.  I  have  resided  among 
them  twenty  odd  years,  and  I  do  believe  they  are  more  filthy  and  degraded  than  when 
I  first  came.  I  cannot  observe  that  the  introdu-tion  of  woollen  goods  increases  civiliza- 
tion in  the  least,  or  aids  tliem  inaterialh'  in  subsisttMice. 


104.  "  What  are  the  moral  consequences  of  civilized  intercourse,  &c.,  &c.  ?  Has  not 
the  introductiim  of  ardent  spirits  been  by  far  the  most  fruitful,  general,  and  appalling 
cause  of  the  de})opulation  of  the  tribes?" 

The  evil  cHects  of  whiskey-traders  is  immense,  but  the  moral  effects  of  Indian  trade 
by  lawful  traders  in  the  Indian  country  lias  not  been  detrimental,  especially  when 
carried  on  In  tlie  American  pc()[)le.    The  Indians  complain  bitterly  of  the  white  people 


V 


HISTORY,  AND  GOVERNMENT. 


189 


Bettling  down  on  the  lines  with  hirge  quiintities  of  wliiskoy.  They  say  they  believe  it 
is  done  on  ])urpose  to  ruin  them,  and  they  have  often  in  eouncil  called  the  attention 
of  the  President  to  this  faet,  and  hoped  their  great  fatiier  would  take  i)ity  on  them, 
and  stop  the  white  peoi>le  from  bringing  the  spirit-water  so  near  their  settlements. 
Some  of  these  whiskey-shops  are  within  a  half  mile  of  Indian  camps ;  in  fact,  all  they 
hiive  to  do  is  to  cross  the  Mississippi,  and  they  can  get  it  by  barrels  full.  The  intro- 
duction t)f  fire-arms  does  not  ajJiKMir  to  have  ch.inged  their  condition,  only  by  making 
the  game  more  scarce.  As  to  their  moral  character,  fire-arms  do  not  appear  to  have 
changed  them  any.  The  war-spirit,  one  hundred  years  ago,  was  as  great  as  at  present. 
They  make  peace  and  smoke  and  eat  together,  but  break  the  peace  the  first  opportunity 
they  can  get  of  surprising  one  or  two  persons  alone.  The  prominent  cause  of  discord 
and  war,  from  time  immemorial,  is  aggressions  upon  the  rights  of  their  hunting  grounds. 
Trade  and  commerce  has  had  but  little  to  do  with  the  Indian  wars.  Its  influence  has 
been  exerted  to  try  and  make  the  nations  live  in  peace  with  each  other;  for  these  wars 
are  ver}'  injurious  to  trade  and  eoiinnerce,  and  therefore  it  is  to  the  interest  of  the 
traders  that  there  should  be  peace  among  the  Indians. 


105.  "  Arc  there  any  serious  or  valid  objections  on  the  part  of  the  Indians  to  the 
introduction  of  schools,  agriculture,  the  mechanic  arts,  or  Christianity?" 

The  Indians  think  all  people  are  bad  except  themselves,  and  they  have  no  fiiitli  in 
the  whites.  They  say  the  white  people  cannot  l»e  irusted;  that  if  tliey  make  a  treat}' 
with  them  for  land,  the  stipulations  are  not  fulfilled ;  and  that  Indians  are  always 
imposed  on  l)y  the  white  people,  (which  is  not  the  case.)  The  Indians  make  strong 
opposition  to  schools,  but  the  money  is  the  cause  of  this.  The  traders  want  the  money, 
and  they  encijurage  tlie  Indians  to  oppose  schools,  by  telling  them  that  the  school-fund 
would  be  paid  over  to  them  if  there  were  no  schools,  and  that  the  money  would  do  them 
much  more  good  than  the  schools  ever  would.  The  Indian,  fond  of  idleness,  would 
like  to  drink  and  smoke  away  the  remainder  of  iiis  days,  and  let  his  family  look  out 
for  themselves. 

Our  government  ought  not  to  listen  to  the  Indians,  but  go  on  and  establi.sh  good 
schools;  and  then,  when  the  traders  find  the  funds  are  appropriated,  and  there  is  no 
chance  of  getting  hold  of  the  money,  the  op|)osition  will  cease.  Agricultur(>  is  an  art 
that  tlie  Indians  are  as  fond  of  the  proceeds  of,  as  any  human  being.  The  most  of 
them  are  tiie  greatest  gormandizers  that  ever  lived.  The  only  way  to  nnike  tiiem  till 
the  soil,  and  become  civilized,  is  to  take  from  them  all  their  war-implements,  and  stop 
their  jugglers,  aid  give  then'  -'.y.sicians  in  the  place  thereof.  The  jugglers  or  Indian 
doctors  are  a  curse  to  the  nation,  and  help  them  on  to  ruin  as  fast  as  any  thing  else 
can.  They  o,iposo  the  schools  on  account  of  this  system.  The  jugglers  say  schools 
will  break  up  the  system  after  a  time,  and  cause  their  ruin.    Christianity  they  acknow- 


190 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


I 


a  H 


ledge  to  be  good  for  wliitc  jK'ople ;  1)ut  tliej  say  they  cannot  resist  temptation  like 
white  people,  therefore  it  is  useless  for  them  to  adopt  tlie  system,  as  they  would  soon 
break  the  commandments,  and  Iw  worse  than  ever.  They  also  say  many  of  the  white 
men  are  worse  than  they  are.  As  much  as  Indians  are  opposed  to  religion,  I  never 
heard  them  scoffing  or  making  a  mock  of  Christianity. 

lOG.  "Are  the  existing  intercourse  'aws  of  the  United  States,  as  last  revised, 
efficient  in  removing  causes  of  discord,  and  preserving  peace  between  the  advanced 
bodies  of  emigrants  or  settlers  on  the  frontiers  and  the  Indian  tribes?" 

The  existing  laws  have  very  little  practical  efl'ect  on  the  Indians  or  the  white  people. 
All  that  keeps  the  Indians  in  subjection  is  the  troops  stationed  in  the  Indian  country. 
I  have  heard  them  say,  "If  it  was  not  for  the  stone  walls  at  Fort  Snelling,  they  would 
have  fine  times."  The  laws  now  existing  have  no  influence  between  tribe  and  tribe. 
The  Iiulians  set  all  laws  at  defiance,  and  go  to  war,  and  murder  or  kill  whenever  they 
clioo.'c.  They  say  the  white  people  nuike  war  when  they  please,  and  they  will  do  the 
same.  It  is  of  no  use  to  make  laws  for  Indiiins,  ludess  they  are  carried  out.  It  only 
makes  the  matter  worse.  The  late  law  respecting  the  whiske3-trade  the  Indians  say 
is  all  a  humbug,  and  can  avail  nothing.  The  most  contemptible  of  the  whiskey-traders 
laugh  at  the  law,  and  sell  as  much,  if  not  more,  than  if  there  was  no  law  on  the 
sul)ject;  because  there  is  no  one  to  enforce  it.  The  late  law  of  making  Indian 
testimony  lawful  in  the  Indian  country,  is  also  of  no  eftect  at  all,  l)ecause  the  Indians 
go  to  the  ceded  land  for  the  whiskey.  The  whiskey  traders  are  very  careful  about 
crossing  the  Mississippi  with  whiskey;  when  they  do  so,  it  is  at  a  time  when  no 
per.son  can  see  them.  In  fact,  it  is  almost  impossible  to  get  any  testimony  against 
them,  under  the  now  existing  laws.  The  Indians  came  and  reported  the  white  people 
for  .selling  whiskey  to  Indians  on  the  ceded  lands,  and  they  were  told  that  their 
testimimy  was  good  only  in  their  own  country.  They  laughed,  and  said  such  laws 
were  of  no  use. 

107.  "  From  whence  do  causes  of  difficulties  and  war  usually  arise,  and  how  are 
they  best  prevented?" 

The  sources  of  discord  have  existed  from  time  immemorial.  One  of  the  causes  is, 
that  the  different  nations  canr.ot  understand  each  other ;  another  is  revenge ;  and 
another  the  evil  and  wicked  propensities  of  the  heart.  The  only  way  to  prevent, 
Indian  wars,  is  to  liang  the  guilty.  It  would  require  only  a  few  examples  to  put  a 
stop  to  them,  within  any  reasonable  distance  of  a  military  force.  Some  might  say 
this  would  be  hard  usage,  but  by  hanging  a  few  guilty  ones,  you  may  save  the  lives  of 
many  of  the  iiniocent,  and  establish  a  i)ermanent  peace  amongst  the  tribes  and  the 
nations. 


(- 


^1 


% 


tsa 


\    : 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


U£  Itt    ■2.2 

Sf  l£&   12.0 


u^ 


L25  i  1.4 


illM  I 


1.6 


Fhotographic 

Sciences 

Corporalion 


33  WIST  MAIN  STRHT 

WkUTU.N.Y.  MSM 

(71*)  ■73-4303 


A%^ 


M 


^ 


1; 


M  1 

f  ! 

Hh'  1  ' 

,f 

m  I 

i 

iiiM  - 

f( 


'41 

-J 

1 

i    1 

.'» 

1«  . 

kl 


tt 


I" 

'I 


?     BM 


IIISTOUY,    AND    GOVEllNMENT. 


191 


108.  "  What  provisions  of  oxistiiig  laws  apijoar  siisccptihk',  in  yowv  opinion,  of 
anicMKlniont,  in  onler  to  socuro  more  oflectnally  the  rights  or  wt'lfan«  of  the  Iiulians?" 

Tlie  e.\istin<r  laws  protect  the  Indians  from  the  intrusion  of  white  people  niK)ii  their 
rights,  and  also  keep  the  white  ix>ople  from  entering  their  country  or  purchasing  their 
land.  Of  course  the  white  man  can  take  no  advantage,  unless  sanctioned  by  the 
government.  In  order  to  secure  moi-c  eflectually  the  rights  of  Indians  among 
themselves,  give  them  law,  and  help  them  to  enforce  it,  until  they  are  capable  of 
doing  it  themselves.  Give  to  each  family  or  individual  a  tract  of  land,  to  Ije  held  for 
life,  and  then  for  the  heirs  to  inherit  in  succession,  but  never  allow  them  to  sell  it. 
This  would  give  them  a  permanent  home  and  protection  of  i)roperty,  and  would  lead 
them  to  industry ;  but  as  it  now  is,  the  Indians  are  in  villages  of  from  two  to  five 
liundivd  souls.  The  children  steal  every  thing  in  the  vegetable  line  Itefore  it  is  half- 
grown,  and  the  owner  seeing  the  fruits  of  his  or  her  lalxmr  taken  away  from  him  in 
this  way,  feels  discouraged  fmm  planting  —  when  if  they  were  scattered,  say  a  half 
mile  or  a  mile  apart,  it  would  Ix*  a  great  preventive  against  pilfering  children. 


100.  "Could  imixirtant  objects  be  secured  by  the  introducticm  of  any  modifications 
of  the  provisions  respecting  the  payment  or  distributi(m  of  annuities,  the  subsistence 
of  assembled  bodies  of  Indians,  or  the  investment  or  applieatiim  ot  trer  ty  funds?" 

We  perceive  that  annuities  facilitate  the  means  of  the  Indians  getting  whiskey, 
particularly  the  money  part.  If  the  Covernment  would  give  the  Indians  goods  in  lieu 
of  money,  the  whiski'y-<lealers  would  have  but  a  small  inducement  to  give  as  much 
liqimr  to  the  Indians.  Their  annuities  could  then  Ixi  applied  to  lietter  purposes,  for 
farming  and  houses,  and  stock,  and  schooling;  but  Government  would  have  to  control 
the  whole  business  for  several  years ;  but  this  might  Iw  done  at  the  expense  of  the 
Indians.  The  investment  of  the  treaty  fund  could  Ije  advantageously  employed  by 
laying  ofl'  farms  for  the  Indians,  and  employing  farmers  to  instruct  them  by  families, 
say  one  farmer  for  four  families,  and  keep  them  at  least  half  a  mile  apart,  and  have 
g(H)d  plain  warm  houses  built  for  them,  for  they  sufTer  very  much  in  the  winter  from 
cold  in  their  o])eu  lodges. 

The  Docotas  have  two  kinds  of  huts  or  wigwams;  one  of  a  conical  fonn,  made  of 
dre.ssed  buflalo-skins,  which  are  easily  transjiorted.  This  kind  of  wig^vam  is  used  in 
the  winter  season,  and  when  on  their  hunting  excursions.  To  erect  one  of  them,  it  is 
only  necessary  to  cut  a  few  saplings  about  fifteen  feet  in  length,  place  the  large  ends 
on  the  ground  in  a  circle,  letting  the  tops  meet,  thus  forming  a  cone.  The  bufliilo- 
skins,  sewed  together  in  the  form  of  a  cape,  are  then  thrown  over  them,  and  fiistened 
together  with  a  few  Bplints.  The  fire  is  made  on  the  ground,  in  the  centre  of  the 
wigwam,  and  the  smoke  escapes  through  an  aperture  at  the  top.  These  wigwams  are 
warm  and  comfortable.     (Plate  28.) 

The  other  kind  of  hut  is  made  of  bark,  usually  that  of  the  elm.     A  frame-work  for 


i^t 


I 


I,  !] 


192 


TRIBAL  OUGANIZATION, 


the  walls  and  rixif  is  first  inudo  of  saplings,  fastoni'd  tofrothor  liy  witlu's,  or  sinews  of 
the  buflalo.  On  this  frame  the  hark  is  laid,  wiiich  is  kept  in  its  place  hy  saplings  laid 
over  it,  and  fastened  to  the  nnder  frame.  There  aiv  ojx'nings  for  entrance  left  at 
each  end.  The  fire  is  made  on  the  ground,  apertuivs  Ijeing  left  in  the  roof  for  the 
smoke  to  escajjc.  These  huts  are  used  in  the  sinnmer  season,  when  they  are  raising 
corn,  and  forms  their  }K'nnanent  villages.     (Plate  29.)  —  E. 

110.  '*  Is  there  any  feature  in  the  present  laws  which  could  be  adapted  more  exactly 
to  their  present  location,  or  to  tl>''  advanced  or  altered  state  of  society  at  present 
existing  in  the  trilx;?" 

Keep  up  the  intercourse  law,  or  else  forl)id  the  Indians  from  pa.s.'<ing  over  into  the 
ceded  country,  and  he  sure  to  punish  any  of  tiiem  who  pa.ss  over  the  boundary.  Give 
them  tradei-s  who  will  supply  their  wants  as  far  as  their  money  will  go,  and  ensure  the 
trader  or  traders  their  payment.  In  this  way  the  Indians  will  have  no  excuse  for 
crossing  into  the  ceded  territory  for  goods. 


J  .iv 


*  h 


111.  "What  provisitms  would  tend  more  efii'ctually  to  shield  the  triljes  from  the 
introihiction  of  ardent  spirits  into  their  territories,  and  fnmi  the  pressure  of  lawless  or 
illicit  trafiic?" 

There  is  but  a  small  quantity  of  alcoholic  drink  carried  into  the  Indian  country  by 
white  men.  It  is  done  mostly  by  the  Indians  themselves.  Stmie  of  the  Indians  travel 
as  many  as  four  hundred  miles,  and  come  into  the  ceded  territory  where  the  whiskey- 
traders  arc,  and  get  whole  barrels  of  whiskey,  and  carry  it  off  to  the  8is.setou  country. 


'     fl: 


112.  "Is  there  any  feature  in  the  present  system  of  negotiati(m  with  the  tribes 
susceptible  of  amendment  and  improvement  ?" 

The  chiefs  prefer  going  to  Washington  to  treat,  but  the  Indians,  in  general,  would 
prefer  tre^ating  in  their  own  country.  It  would  lx>  easier  to  treat  with  the  Dacotas  at 
Washington  than  in  their  own  country,  on  account  of  the  influence  of  the  traders  and 
their  relatives.  The  exixMises  would  Ik?  alx)ut  the  same  either  way.  The  Indians 
often  speak  of  the  President,  and  say  his  views  or  orders  are  not  carried  out ;  that  they 
l)elievc  their  great  father  wishes  to  do  them  justice,  but  his  officers  will  not  do  as  he 
tells  them. 


II  ) 


113.  "Are  the  game,  and  wood,  and  timl)er  of  the  tribes  subject  to  unnecessary  or 
injurious  curtailment,  or  trespass  from  the  intrusion  of  emigrating  bands,  abiding  for 
long  periods  on  their  territor'.ts  ?" 

The  principal  complaint  is  against  other  nations  destroying  their  game.  Chipiiewas 
and  British  half-breeds  are  the  ones  they  complain  of  most. 


of 
aid 

at 
tliu 


snt 

tlie 
ive 
the 
for 


lie 
or 

K?S 

lid 
at 
11(1 
im 

<T 
lie 


or 
or 


as 


i.  h 


1 

^ 

'>  Ki 

> 
i  i  ■ 

V 

j.    '  » 

iLj 

L'ii*  I 

^H 

ibLLik 

iv 


in 

HI 

Fi 

I  '  f 

.  V  t 

1       i  - 

Uu'ti 

■ill 

I   i, 

T  1 

'"    i  ' 

•I--.  ■ 

• 

1 

11 

! 

U'\ 

h 

■.    1 

i 

i-  wm 

-4^1 

w 

i\'i 

ll 

4  • 

K  ^ 

1  ^' 

HISTORY,    AND    GOVERNMENT.  193 

114.  "Are  any  of  the  trilx'H  Muffieiently  advanced  in  your  district  to  liave  their  funds 
paid  to  a  treasurer  of  tlie  tribe,  to  be  kept  by  him  and  disbursed,  agreeably  tu  the  laws 
of  their  local  legislature  ?" 

No;  there  is  none. 


115.  "  Are  payments  of  annuities  to  chiefs,  or  to  separate  heads  of  families,  most 
beneficial  ?  Should  the  principal  of  an  Indian  fund  be  paid  in  annuities  to  the  Indians 
at  the  present  iwriotl,  under  any  circumstances,  and  are  members  of  the  trilx;  generally 
capable  of  the  wise  or  prudent  application  of  money  ?" 

It  is  best  to  pay  aiuuiities  to  separate  heads  of  families;  and  it  is  far  more  beneficial 
to  the  Indians  to  receive  only  the  interest  of  the  principal.  A  large  number  of  tho 
Indians  sjiend  their  money  for  the  Ixjnefit  of  their  families. 

lie.  "IIow  is  the  elective  franchise  expressed  and  guarded,  &c.  &c. ?" 
In  giving  a  vote,  no  (pialifications  an;  irquired,  no  individual  rights  are  surrendered. 
Murder,  and  the  otiier  crimes,  are  sometimes  punished  by  council ;  and,  frequently, 
individual  murderers  stand  as  high  in  oilice  as  the  Ix?st  of  them.     No  lioon  is  ofl'ered 
as  security  for  life. 

117.  "Have  original  defects  ])een  remedied  by  adapting  them  more  exactly  to  the 
genius  and  character  of  tlie  people  than  they  were,  apparently,  iu  the  first  rough 
drafts?" 

This  is  what  is  very  much  wanted,  but  it  has  never  been  tried  by  this  jK'ople. 

118.  "  Have  the  legislative  assemblies  adopted  a  practical  system  of  laws  for  the 
enforcement  of  public  oi"der,  the  trial  of  public  offences,  the  collection  of  delits,  the 
raising  of  revenue,  the  erection  of  public  buildings,  and  ferries,  and  school-houses,  and 
churches ;  or  the  promotion  of  education,  the  8upix)rt  of  Christianity,  and  the  general 
advance  of  virtue,  tennierance,  and  the  public  welfare,  &c.  &c.  ?" 

No ;  but  could  such  a  system  as  this  Ije  established,  it  would,  no  doubt,  save  this 
nation  from  ruin. 


I 


119.  "What  ideas  have  the  Indians  of  property?  IIow  do  they  believe  private 
rights  accrued  ?     Have  they  any  true  views  of  the  legal  idea  of  pniixjrty,  &c.  &c.  ?" 

Private  rights  are  held  and  respected  by  this  people.  Purchase,  conquest,  or  labor, 
give  private  or  national  rights  as  k)ng  as  life  lasts.  The  starting  of  a  deer,  and 
pursuing  it,  gives  no  right  if  another  Indian  kills  it ;  but  if  the  man  that  first  started 
the  deer  wounds  it,  he  naturally  claims  it,  even  if  another  should  kill  it,  but  they 
generally  divide  the  meat,  the  skin  going  to  the  first  shot.  The  fact  of  an  Indian 
going  and  planting  on  another  [H-Tson's  field  gives  him  no  right  to  the  land.  Instances 
Pr.  II.— 25 


194 


TRIBAL    ORtJANIZATION, 


i    * 


of  tliix  kiiul  liiivc  taken  |ilii<-(>;  miini'tiiiK'M  tlu>  liiml  Ih  ^iv«>ii  up  with  ii  little  r(>iii|H'nr<a- 
tidii  fur  iiM'  niid  IuImii-;  nt  iillur  tiiiii>?<,  tlir  rni|i  Iiii«  In-cii  ili>iilf<l.  'I'lic  Iniliiiim 
iiiiil('r!«tan<l  wliat  i^*  ri^'lit  ami  \vi-i)ii<;  aiiioii^'  tli<-in^-ivf<<.  as  mcII  a."  wliitc  |n-ii|iIi>  liti. 
Am  to  till'  ri^riits  of  ilclitor  and  t-rctlitor,  the  follow  in);  is  a  Muninarv  f\  iilcnce. 

Two  hmtlicrs  weiv  Indian  traders.  One  was  tradinf!  with  the  Daootas,  the  other 
with  the  ('hi|i|H-was.  The  del)tors  of  the  Diu'ota  trader  went  to  war.  and  killed  one 
of  the  (U-litors  of  the  ('lii|i|H-wa  trader,  (who  was  hunting  and  stealing  on  th«>  Dacota 
hiintin}^  gn>un<ls.)  and  tiMik  his  furs  that  he  had  <'oilected,  and  hrou^ht  them  to  the 
Dacota  trailer  in  pavinent  of  his  deht«<.  The  ('hi|)|M-wa  trader  elaiined  the  Inn*,  and 
applied  to  his  lirother.  the  Dacota  trader.  t<>r  theni,  hut  his  hrother  refused  to  jrive 
them  up.  on  the  frround  that  he  eanie  lawfully  l>y  them.  The  Indians  highly  approved 
of  the  decision,  as  they  wen'  taken  li\  concpiest,  and  the  ('hip|N'wa  had  Iteeii  stealing 
uflf  of  the   Dacnta    hnntinff  ^niiund. 


120.  ••  Was  the  rijrht  of  a  nation  to  the  tract  of  coinitry  ori^dnally  ih»ss«'sso<1  hy  it, 
acipiired  hy  its  m-cupancy  of  it  hy  them,  to  the  exclusion  of  all  others.  &c.  ki'.t" 

They  helieve  the  (irt'at  Spirit  ^'ave  them  their  land,  and  that  iio  other  nation  has  n 
right  to  hunt  within  the  circle  or  territory  that  they  <Mrupy  fiimi  time  to  time.  They 
have  no  idea  in  w hat  way  they  came  in  |M>s.s»'ssion  of  the  land  they  formerly  |M)s.s«'ss«'d. 
Each  nation  thinks  it  is  doin<r  itself  justice  in  taking  from  the  enemy's  land  all  the 
game  it  can  kill.  The  Indians  <lo  not  pi-«'t«>nd  to  own  or  claim  any  ciMnitrv  hut  that 
they  occupy  in  huntinjr.  As  to  the  rights  of  invasion  of  territory,  the  Indians  acknow- 
ledge the  claims  of  each  nation  to  the  country  they  travel  over  in  hunting;  ami  the 
munlorous  war  w Inch  is  carried  on  they  say  is  right,  Itecanse  oacli  nation  should  stay 
within  their  hunting  iHxnidaries. 

121.  *•  I.s  the  descent  of  pro|H'rty  lixe«l?  Is  the  eldest  son  entitle<l  to  any  gri'ater 
rights  or  larger  share  of  pi*o|K'rty  than  the  other  children  ?  D(K's  a  jmri'iit  expn'ss  his 
will  or  wishes  )x>fore  death,  a.s  the  descendant  of  Unciut  did,  how  his  pntiH-rty  slioidd 
be  disposed  of,  &c.  &c.  V" 

As  to  projR'rty  among  the  Dacotas,  there  is  raivly  any  thing  <if  any  consiHpience 
left  at  the  death  of  n  paivnt.  All  the  proiR'rty  is  most  generally  used  up  in  employing 
jugglers  to  .*ing,  or  charm,  or  drive  away  the  disease  hy  magic. 

Orphan  childivn  among  the  Indians  are  veiy  miserahle,  although  th«>ir  relations  do 
all  they  can  for  them.  The  eldest  son  of  the  chief  in  entitled  to  his  father's  olFice. 
Sometimes  a  chief  is  suddenly  killed  in  war,  or  hy  accident,  cm  which  «H'cttsion  the 
Ijand  or  village  make  his  eldest  mn  chief.  The  general  usage,  when  a  parent  dies,  in 
that  the  other  Indians  step  in  and  take  what  little  pro|>erty  is  let)  without  any  sort  of 
ceremony,  and  the  childivn  consetpiently  an>  tlm>wn  ujKm  their  ivlotions,  to  get  a 


i    ^a 


IIKSTOUY,   AND    (JOVERNMEXT. 


19f 


living  the  U-nt  way  tlwy  rnii.     Am  to  lii'irHliip  in  pnifHTly.  tlii-y  fwiii  l<>  know  iiotliing 
lit  all  iilioiit  it,  or  if  tlii'V  ilo,  IJu-y  hiivo  no  rlinnri*  to  K-iivc  it  to  tlu'ii  cliilUivn. 


TJ'J.  "  What  an*  tlir  olilivation*  li'il  hy  tlio  Imliaiis  |4>  jmy  lUlit?  I)<hs  time  ^rrfatiy 
•  liiiiiniMli,  ill  tlifir  view.  tlicMf  olili;:iitioiiM,  and  liow  ?  IKn-s  the  Imliaii  liiiun  that  ill 
hick  ill  iiitiitin^  is  a  <li'«|N-n;<atioii  rniiii  the  (iifat  S|iirit,  and  that  lie  is  cxoiii'iatcd 
tlicn>hy  t'nini  tlic>  ohlipition  of  |myinfr  his  dchtH,  &c.?" 

Tiiiu'  d<K'H  diiiiinisji,  in  thfir  \iv\v,  the  oMifralion  to  pay  n  ik'bt,  Ijocauso  they  »ny 
lh«'  whiti-  iH'o|ilt'  can  p-t  jroo<is  hy  iiH-i-cIy  ;.'oinf;  artcr  thcin.  or  writinjr  for  thi-ni.  and 
that  when  a  trader  ohtjiins  a  new  sii|i|ily  of  ^(knIs,  lii>  is  not  in  want  of  tin*  dcbtn 
dii«>  liini,  and  that  the  Indian  is  in  greater  need  of  the  anionnt  than  the  trader  is. 
Thcn'lon'  they  ofti'ii  cheat  the  trader  l»\-  sellin;r  his  furs  to  wiine  jhtsoii  they  do 
not  owe. 

If  an  Indian  has  had  hick  in  hnntin;!.  he  says  it  is  cans4-d  hy  the  iniscoiidiict  of 
Hotnc  of  his  family,  or  hy  some  enemy;  that  is.  his  family  have  not  pro|HM'ly  adhered 
t4»  the  laws  of  honoring;  the  spirits  of  the  dead,  or  some  one  owes  him  a  spite,  and  by 
sii|M>riiatnral  powei*s  has  caused  his  lia<l  success  and  misery,  for  which  he  will  take 
ivveiijre  on  the  immnoii  he  sus|K'cts  the  lii'st  tiiii"  an  opportunity  otleis. 

The  Indians  an*,  many  of  them.  ]iunctual  in  payin<r  their  debts  as  far  as  lies  in  their 
|M»wer.  Then-  is.  I  think,  a  freneral  inclination  to  pay  their  national  debts,  which  are, 
by  Indian  nile.  individual  delits  of  such  loii^  standing:,  that  they  cannot  pay  them 
within  themsi'lves.  They  know  they  all  owe  their  traders,  and  they  an-  willing  to 
make   it  a  national  business  to  ]my  them. 

Am  to  the  value  of  pro|H'rty  in  skins  ami  fuii».  they  always  over-estiinalo  it.  Indeed 
any  kind  of  pro|M'rty  that  they  ai-e  judge)*  of.  is  valued  too  high,  and  they  often  snlTer 
by  so  doing.  There  aiv  ea«e»  where  Indians  have  sold  the  same  article  twice,  but  this 
rarely  hapin-ns. 


1 


i 


12.*^.  "What  constitutes  crime?  Mas  man  a  right  to  take  his  fellow's  blood  ?  Is 
the  taking  of  life  an  oflence  to  the  individual  murdered,  or  to  the  Cireat  Spirit,  who 
gave  him  his  life.  &«•.  &c.?" 

The  Indians  say  it  is  lawful  to  take  revenge,  but  otherwise,  it  is  not  right  to  take 
their  fellow's  bl<HMl ;  they  consider  it  a  gi-eat  crime.  When  murder  is  committed,  they 
ri'gard  the  victim  iw  injnretl,  and  not  the  Great  Spirit,  Ijecau.se  all  have  a  right  to  live. 
They  have  very  little  notion  of  punishment  for  crime  hereafter  in  eternity :  indeed, 
they  know  very  little  aliout  whether  the  Great  Spirit  has  any  thing  to  do  with  their 
affairs,  present  or  future.  All  the  fear  they  have  is  of  the  spirit  of  the  departed. 
They  stand  in  great  nwe  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead,  l)ecau.se  they  think  it  is  iu  the 
power  of  the  departed  spirits  to  injure  them  in  any  way  they  please ;  this  superstition 
bos,  in  some  measun*.  a  salutary  effect.     It  operates  on  them  just  as  strong  as  our  laws 


■\  f 


\    i 


U  • 


-  H 


t 


ii    '[ 


196 


TRIBAL   ORGANIZATION, 


of  hanging  for  murder.     Iiulecd,  fear  of  punisshinont  from  the  departed  npirits  keeps 
them  in  greater  awe  than  the  white  jwople  have  of  being  hung. 

124.  "  Can  the  Deity  be  offended  ?  Is  a  man  under  high  obligations,  by  the  I'act  of 
his  creation,  to  worship  the  Great  Spirit?" 

The  Deity,  they  my,  is  always  offended  with  them.  They  do  not  know  by  what 
means  they  were  created ;  and  when  any  calamity  befalls  them,  they  do  not  understand 
why.  They  worship,  it  is  true,  but  what? — they  hardly  know  themselves.  Large 
stones  are  painted  and  woixhipiied ;  these  stones  they  call  their  grandfathers.'  For  the 
expiation  of  sins  or  crimes,  a  sacrifice  is  made  of  some  kind  of  an  animal.  Some- 
times, the  skin  of  an  animal  dressed,  sometimes,  ra-  i  pieces  of  white  cotton  and  new 
blankets,  are  made  use  of  for  sacrifices,  all  of  which  are  susjiended  in  the  air. 

125.  "Is  falsehood  a  moral  offence,  because  the  Great  Spirit  abhors  it,  or  because 
injuries  may  result  to  man,  &c.  &c.?" 

The  practice  of  lying,  among  the  Indians,  is  considered  very  bad.  In  this  respect, 
every  one  sees  the  mote  in  his  brother's  eye,  but  does  not  discover  the  beam  that  is 
in  his  own.  They  often  would  like  to  see  falsehood  punished,  but  have  not  the 
moral  stamina  to  speak  truth  themselves.  Many  even  desire  to  reward  truth,  but 
have  not  the  ability  to  do  so,  often. 

126.  "Is  want  of  veneration  a  crime  among  the  Indians?  Is  an  Indian  priest  or  a 
chief  more  venerated  than  a  commtm  man,  &c.  &c.?" 

Veneration  is  very  gi'cat  in  some  Indians  for  old  age,  and  they  all  feel  it  for  the 
dead.  Their  priests  or  jugglers,  also,  are  very  much  venerated,  but  it  is  fi-om  fear,  as 
much  as  any  thing  else,  of  some  sujiernatural  punishment.  The  Indians  ai-e  very 
remarkable  for  their  fear  of  uttering  certain  names.  The  father-in-law  must  not  cidl 
the  son-in-law  by  name ;  neither  must  the  mother-in-law :  and  the  son-in-law  must  not 
call  his  father-in-law  or  mother-in-law  by  name.  There  are  also  many  others,  in  the 
line  of  relationship,  who  cannot  call  each  other  by  name.  I  have  heard  of  instances 
where  the  forbidden  name  has  been  called,  and  the  offender  was  punished  by  having 
all  of  his  or  her  clothes  cut  off  of  their  backs  and  thrown  away.  An  Indian  priest  or 
juggler  is  fully  as  much  venerated  as  a  father  or  mother,  but  it  is  from  superstitious 
fear.  Indian  children  sometimes,  but  very  rarely,  strike  their  parents  :  the  punishment 
is  generally  a  blow  in  return.  We  have  no  accounts  of  Indians  having  been  stoned  to 
death.  I  have  known  Indians  killed,  however,  in  a  drunken  riot,  both  with  stones 
and  clubs. 

127.  "What  can  the  sages  and  wise  men  of  the  triliL^  say,  in  defence  of  the  Indian 
code  of  doing  like  for  like?" 

•  See  Vol.  I.  p.  129. 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


197 


There  are  ciises  where  the  Indians  say  retaliation  is  wrong,  and  they  try  to  prevent 
it,  and  Hometimes  succeed  in  pacifyinjr  tlie  parties.  If  a  bad  deed  is  done,  and  the 
offender  is  punisiied  in  some  way,  they  say  he  has  got  what  he  gave.  A  jHTson  of 
bad  character  among  the  Indians,  is  scorned  by  them ;  but  from  fear  of  his  cutting 
their  lodges,  killing  their  horses,  or  doing  some  mischief,  they  are  obliged  to  invite  him 
to  their  feasts.  A  bad  man  often  runs  at  large  amongst  the  Indians  for  years,  cm 
account  of  the  alwvc  named  fears.  Tliey  even  are  obliged  to  let  him  join  in  their  ga>at 
medicine-dance.  The  chastity  of  the  women  is  much  more  attended  to  than  many 
]>eople  would  supiHwo.  There  are  but  few  lewd,  loose  women  among  them,  and  only  a 
few  will  drink  ardent  spirits. 


i 


I 


128.  "  Do  they  Ixdieve  that  there  is  a  Deity  iwrvading  the  Universe,  wiio  is  the 
maker  of  all  things.     What  ideas  do  tliey  jxissess  of  the  Gi-eat  Spirit?"  &c.  &c. 

The  Indians  believe  there  is  a  Great  Spirit;  his  powers  they  do  not  comprehend, 
nor  by  what  means  man  was  created,  or  for  what  puiiiose.  They  believe  the  Deity 
consists  of  two  persons,  or  as  they  themselves  express  it,  "  The  Great  Spirit  and  his 
wife."  How  man  became  possessed  of  the  jwwer  he  now  possesses  over  the  animal 
creation  the}-  cannot  account  for.  Tiiey  have  no  knowledge  of  GikVs  having  given 
any  laws  for  the  Indians  to  follow,  and  they  do  not  know  or  believe  that  they  will 
have  to  give  an  account  of  their  deeds  in  another  world. 

129.  "IIow  docs  the  Great  Spirit  manifest  his  presence  on  the  earth,  or  in  the  sky? 
In  what  forms  is  he  recognized?  Is  thunder  considei-ed  his  voice?  Are  storms 
regarded  as  his  acts?     Are  cataracts  evidences  of  his  ix)wer?" 

The  Indians  say  thei-e  is  t  Gixmt  Spirit,  but  where  he  is  they  know  not.  They  say 
the  Great  Si)irit  did  not  make  the  wild-rice,  it  came  by  chance.  All  things  else  the 
Great  Spirit  made.  There  are  instances  where  the  Indians  charge  the  Deities  with 
being  angry  with  them,  in  cases  of  heavy  storms ;  and  tliey  even  go  so  far  as  to  say 
the  Deity  is  bad,  for  sending  storms  to  give  them  misery. 


l.SO.  "Is  death  the  act  of  the  Great  Spirit?  Do  war  and  peace  happen  according 
to  his  will?"&c.  &c. 

Some  of  the  Indians  say  that  death  is  caused  by  the  Great  Spirit;  others,  that  it 
is  caused  by  the  supernatural  power  of  individuals.  All  evil,  they  say,  comes  from 
the  heart ;  but  who  or  what  implanted  it  there,  they  know  not.  The  Indians  know 
nothing  of  the  Devil,  except  what  the  white  people  have  told  them.  All  the 
punishment  they  expect  to  receive  is  in  this  world. 

They  fear  the  iicrsons  they  have  offended,  and  the  spirits  of  the  dead  more  than 
any  thing  else. 


i       !^ 


\  t 


198 


TRIBAL    ORGANIZATION, 


l.Tl.  "  lK)\v  iiiv  tliey  oxcusetl  from  offences  ngiiiiist  the  Great  Spirit?" 

The  Indians  make  sacrifices  to  apiwasc  tiie  spirits,  but  they  hardly  know  what  kind 

oF  spirits  sacrifices  are  made  to.     All  of  their  sacrifices  are  made  uixm  supposition. 

Thev  often  say  after  a  violent  storm,  and  when  nuich  injury  has  been  done  by  it, 

''  Now  that  the  storm  luus  done  so  and  so,  it  will  stop." 

1.32.  "  Have  they  any  idea  whatever  of  atonement,  or  a  belief  or  expectation  that 
some  great  personage  was  to  come  on  earth  and  answer  for  them  to  the  Great  Spirit?" 

They  have  no  idea  of  atonement,  nor  do  they  show  in  any  of  their  religious  cere- 
monies any  signs  of  Christianity.  The  sacrifice  of  animals  is  to  appease  something 
that  they  suppose  is  offended  with  them.  We  never  heanl  of  but  one  human  sacrifice, 
aad  that  was  a  father  who  offeivd  up  his  infant  child,  but  for  what  cause  we  never 
could  learn.     The  bad  treatment  of  pri.soners  is  from  revenge. 


li)il.  "  Wiuit  is  the  moral  character  of  the  Priesthood?  Do  they  Iwar  any  badge  of 
office,  &c.?" 

Tlie  Indian  Priesthood  is  made  up  of  the  very  worst  cliiss.  They  have  no  badge  of 
the  office.  There  is  but  one  kind  or  class.  The  priest  is  Ijoth  prophet  and  doctor. 
Any  person  Ijelonging  to  the  great  medicine-dance  has  a  right  to  perfonn  its  rites  and 
cerenuMiios.  The  office  of  the  priests  is  not  hereditary-.  Women  take  part  in  the 
ceremonies;  they  pretend  to  foretell  events,  and  also  to  find  lost  articles.  I  once  lost 
my  watch,  and  told  an  Indian  juggler  that  I  wanted  him  to  find  it.  lie  said  yes,  but 
I  must  first  give  him  a  looking-glass  to  look  through.  I  gave  him  a  small  glass,  and 
he  looked  into  it  for  some  time,  when  he  asked  for  a  black  silk  handkerchief,  which  I 
also  gave  him,  together  with  some  other  little  things.  And  when  he  wanted  to  know 
if  I  could  show  him  pretty  near  the  place  where  I  had  lost  the  watch,  I  told  him  I 
thought  I  had  lost  it  in  a  certain  foot-path.  He  asked  me  to  go  along  with  him  there, 
so  I  went.  Every  now  and  then  he  would  look  in  his  glass,  and  keep  on  walking,  and 
at  last  nearly  stept  on  the  watch,  but  did  not  see  it  either  with  his  glass  or  the  naked 
eye;  so  I  foimd  it  myself,  and  showed  it  to  him.  He  did  not  appear  to  care  any  thing 
about  it,  as  he  had  already  got  possession  of  the  glass,  the  black  silk  handkerchief,  and 
some  other  little  things,  and  he  walked  off.  There  is  a  class  of  Indians  that  say  they 
can  bring  blessings  or  curses  by  their  own  power.  This  class  is  called  We-chas-tah- 
wah-kan,  or  spiritual  men.  They  attend  the  sick,  and  doctor  them,  when  well  paid 
f«)r  it.  If  an  Indian  is  taken  sick,  some  of  the  family  will  go  to  the  lotlge  of  the 
juggler,  carrying  with  him  a  gun,  a  new  blanket,  or  some  other  article;  sometimes  a 
horse.  With  a  j)ipe  filled  with  tobacco,  this  messenger  ap|)roaches  the  juggler,  pipe 
and  payment  in  hand.  The  pipe  is  lighted,  and  the  messenger  presents  the  stem  to 
him.  Sometimes  the  messenger  nnikes  great  lamentations  while  the  doctor  or  juggler 
is  smoking.     He  then  takes  the  pa}inent,  puts  it  aside,  and  goes  to  see  the  sick  man, 


HISTORY,   AND   GOVERNMENT. 


199 


but  seldom  takes  any  medicine  witli  liim.  When  he  arrives  at  the  loclji;e  lie  wall<a  in, 
and  sits  down  a  little  distance  fnmi  the  sick.  lie  never  touches  his  pulse  to  see  what 
state  he  is  in,  but  calls  for  a  rattle,  (which  is  made  of  a  gourd-shell,  cleaned  out,  with 
beads  put  inside.)  Sometimes  birch-bark  is  used  for  a  rattle,  when  gourds  cannot  Ix; 
had.  The  doctor  then  strips  himself  naked,  except  the  cloth  around  the  loins;  the 
leggins  and  moccasins  are  also  kept  on.  In  this  state  of  nudity  the  doctor  or  juggler 
commences  to  sing,  and  shake  his  rattle  to  charm  away  the  disease.  The  words  of 
the  song  are,  hi,  le,  li,  lah — hi,  le,  li,  lab  —  hi,  le,  li,  lab,  uttered  in  quick  succession 
for  half  a  minute;  then  a  chorus  commences,  ha — ha — ha — harha-ha-ha.  This  is 
gone  over  three  or  four  times,  and  then  the  juggler  stops  to  smoke ;  after  which,  he 
sings  and  rattles  again,  and  conunences  to  suck  the  parts  supixjsed  to  be  diseased. 
After  he  sucks  and  draws  for  half  a  minute,  shaking  the  shell  all  the  time,  he  rises 
half-way  up  from  his  seat,  apparently  almost  suffocated,  hawking  and  gagging,  and 
thrusts  his  face  into  a  little  IjowI  of  water,  gurgling  and  making  all  sorts  of  gestures 
and  noises.  This  water  is  used  to  wash  his  mouth  with,  and  cleanse  it  from  the 
disea.se  that  he  has  drawn  from  the  sick  person.  Tliey  pretend  that  they  can  draw 
bile  from  a  sick  penson  in  this  way ;  l)ut  a  disease  that  has  Ix^en  brought  on  by  super- 
natural powei-s  must  be  treated  in  another  manner.  (See  No.  74.)  Many  of  the 
Indians  have  faith  in  this  mode  of  doctoring;  but  it  had  not  the  desired  effect  in  the 
summer  of  1847,  when  about  one  hundred  and  fifty  of  them  died  of  bilious  and  other 
fevers,  which  they  were  compelled  to  confess.  Some  Indians  punctually  attend 
funerals,  and  in  many  instances  appropriate  addresses  are  made;  the  habits  of  tlie 
deceased  are  narrated ;  adxice  is  given ;  the  customs  of  their  forefathers  they  are 
admonished  to  keep,  &c.  Any  of  his  relations  nuiy  draw  devices  on  the  grave-post  of 
the  deceased.  The  only  device  I  ever  saw  on  a  grave-post  was  the  numlx'r  of  persons 
he  had  killed  or  taken  prisonei's  of  his  enemies,  men,  women,  and  children.  For  a 
person  killed,  it  was  represented  without  a  head;  for  a  pris(mer,  a  full  (igui"e  with  tlie 
hands  tied ;  for  a  female,  a  woman's  dress  was  on  it. 

134.  "What  general  beliefs  and  superstitions  prevail?  Are  there  some  pt)ints  in 
which  all  agree?  Do  they  believe  in  angels  or  special  messengers  of  the  Great 
Spirit,  &c.  &c.?" 

Sui)erstition  piwails  throughout  the  Indian  tribes.  Tiiey  believe  in  spirits,  and 
also  that  if  tlie  Indians  do  not  live  up  to  the  laws  or  customs  of  their  forefathers,  the 
spirits  will  punish  them  for  their  misconduct,  particularly  if  they  omit  to  make  feasts 
for  the  dead.  They  suppose  these  spirits  have  power  to  send  the  spirit  of  some  animal 
to  enter  their  botlies,  and  make  them  sick.     (See  No.  74.) 


i 


■VVVi 


lyi  ;    ' 


)l^ 


y 


h\\ 


i 


11' 


1 

1 

; 

■'■' 

W 

: 

4i  .!"'■ 

VI.  INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY  AND 
CHARACTER.   B. 


(201) 


Pt.  II.— 26 


■•  i 


h 


l' 


INTELLECTUAL   CAPACITY   AND   CHARACTER. 


SYNOPSIS. 


We  place  on  record  the  following  additional  facts  on  this  topic,  and  shall  continue 
to  present,  in  succeeding  parts,  the  accumulating  materials,  from  the  consideration  of 
which,  the  inductive  and  inventive  faculties  of  the  race  may  be  judged. 

A.    NUMERATION. 

1.  Choctaw. 

2.  Dacotas. 

3.  Cherokee. 

4.  Ojibwa  of  Chegoimegon. 

5.  Winnebago. 

6.  Chippewa. 

7.  Wyandot. 

8.  Ilitchittee. 

9.  Cumanchc. 

10.  Cuchan  or  Yuma. 

B.    ART  OF  RECORDING  IDEAS. 

1.    PlCTOGKAPHY. 

1.  Indian  Census  Roll. 

2.  Magic  Song. 

3.  Medicine  Animal  of  the  Winnehagoes. 

4.  HaOkah  —  a  Dacota  God. 

5.  Indian  Signatures. 

6.  Mnemonic  Symbols  for  Music. 

2.  Alphabetical    Notation. 
1.  Cherokee  Syllabical  Alphabet. 

C.    ORAL  IMAGINATIVE  LEGENDS. 

1.  Transformation  of  a  Hunter  Lad. 

2.  Origin  of  the  Zea  Maize. 


I 


3.  The  Wolf  Brother. 

4.  Sayadio. 


(208) 


! )  f,' 


204 


INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY 


A.    NUMERATION. 

1.  Choctaw. 

2.  Dacota. 

3.  Cherokee. 

4.  Ojibwa  of  Chegoimegon. 

5.  Winnebago. 

6.  Chippewa  of  the  Upper  Mississippi. 

7.  Wyandot. 

8.  Hitchittee  or  Chellokce. 

9.  Comanche. 

10.  Cuchan  or  Yuma. 


't)(^ 


1.    CHOCTAW. 

TRANSHITTED  BY  JOHN  DRENNIN,  KSQ.,   V.  8.  IQINT. 

1.  One Chuffa 

2.  Two Tuk  lo 

3.  Three Tu  chi  na 

4.  Four Ush  ta 

5.  Five Tath  la  pi 

6.  Six Han  a  li 

7.  Seven Un  tuk  lo 

8.  Eight Un  tu  chi  na 

9.  Nine. Chak  ka  li 

10.  Ten Po  ko  li 

11.  Eleven An  ah  chuffa 

12.  Twelve An  ah  tuk  lo 

13.  Thirteen An  ah  tu  chi  na 

14.  Fourteen An  ah  ush  ta 

15.  Fifteen An  ah  tath  la  pi 

16.  Sixteen An  ah  han  a  li 

17.  Seventeen An  ah  un  ttkk  lo 

18.  Eighteen An  ah  un  tu  chi  na 

19.  Nineteen Abi  cha  ka  li 

20.  Twenty Po  ko  li  tuk  lo 

21.  Twenty-one Po  ko  li  tuk  lo  a^ku  «ha  chuffa 

22.  Twenty-two "  "  "       tuklo 


II              (1 

li 

ush  ta 

«             <i 

<i 

tath  la  pi 

<t              li 

11 

han  a  li 

«               « 

it 

un  tuk  lo 

i<              It 

<i 

un  tu  chi  na 

a              i( 

II 

chak  ka  U 

(0  li  tu  chi 

na 

CO  li  uah  ta 

AND    CHARACTER. 

23.  Twenty-three Po  ko  li  tuk  lo  a  ku  cha  tu  chi  na 

24.  Twenty-four 

25.  Twenty-five 

26.  Twenty-six 

27.  Twenty-seven 

28.  Twenty-eight 

29.  Twenty-nine 

80.  Thirty Po  ko 

40.  Forty Po  ko 

60.  Fifty  Po  ko  li  tath  la  pi 

60.  Sixty Po  ko  li  han  a  li 

70.  Seventy Po  ko  li  un  tuk  lo 

80.  Eighty Po  ko  li  un  tu  chi  na 

90.  Ninety Po  ko  li  chuk  a  li 

100.  One  hundred Tath  Ic  pa  chuiTa 

101.  One  hundred  and  one 

102.  One  hundred  and  two 

103.  One  hundred  and  three 

104.  One  hundred  and  four 

105.  One  hundred  and  five 

106.  One  hundred  and  six 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven.... 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight .... 

109.  One  hundred  and  nine 

110.  One  hundred  and  ton 

120.  One  hundred  and  twenty... 
130.  One  hundred  and  thirty ... 

140.  One  hundred  and  forty 

150.  One  hundred  and  fifty 

160.  One  hundred  and  sixty 

170.  One  hundred  and  seventy.. 
180.  One  hundred  and  eighty... 
190.  One  hundred  and  ninety... 

200.  Two  hundred Tath  le  pa  tuk  lo 

300.  Three  hundred Tath  le  pa  tu  chi  na 

400.  Four  hundred Tath  le  pa  ush  ta 

500.  Five  hundred Tath  le  pa  tath  la  pi 

600.  Six  hundred Tath  le  pa  han  a  li 

700.  Seven  hundred Tath  le  pa  un  tuk  lo 

800.  Eight  hundred Tath  le  pa  un  tu  chi  na 

900.  Nine  hundred Tath  le  pa  chak  a  li 

1,000.  One  thousand Tath  le  pa  si  pok  ni  chufiift 

2,000.  Two  thousand Tath  le  pa  si  pok  ni  tuk  lo 

8,000.  Three  thousand Tath  le  pa  si  pok  ni  tu  chi  na 


205 


chufiu  aiana 

tuk  lo       " 

tu  chi  na  " 

ush  ta      " 

tath  la  pi " 

han  a  li  " 

un  tuk  lo  " 

un  tu  chi  na  aiana 

chak  a  li         " 

po  ko  li  " 

po  ko  li  tuk  lo  " 

po  ko  li  tu  chi  na  aiana 

po  ko  li  ush  ta  " 

po  ko  li  tath  la  pi     " 

po  ko  li  han  a  li        " 

po  ko  li  un  tuk  lo      " 

po  ko  li  un  tu  chi  na    " 

po  ko  li  chak  a  li      " 


i; 


,) 


sod 


INTELLECTUAL    CATACITY 


4,000.  Four  thousand Tath  lo  pa  si  pok  ni  ush  ta 

5,000.  Five  thousand Tath  Ic  pa  si  pok  ni  tath  la  pi 

6,000.  Six  thousand Tath  lo  pa  si  pok  ni  han  a  li 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Tath  Ic  pa  si  pok  ni  un  tuk  lo 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Tath  Ic  pa  si  pok  ni  un  tu  chi  na 

0,000.  Nine  thousand Tath  le  pa  si  pok  ni  chak  a  li 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Tath  le  pa  si  pok  ni  po  ko  li 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand Tath  lo  pa  si  pok  ni  tath  lo  pa  chufia 

1,000,000.  One  million Mil  yan  chuffa 

2,000,000.  Two  million Mil  yan  tuk  lo 

8,000,000.  Three  million Mil  yan  tu  chi  na 

10,000,000.  Ten  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li 

20,000,000.  Twenty  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  tuk  lo 

30,000,000.  Thirty  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  tu  chi  na 

40,000,000.  Forty  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  ush  ta 

50,000,000.  Fifty  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  tath  la  pi 

60,000,000.  Sixty  million Mil  yan  ^o  ko  li  han  a  li 

70,000,000.  Seventy  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  un  tuk  lo 

80,000,000.  Eighty  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  un  tu  chi  na 

90,000,000.  Ninety  million Mil  yan  po  ko  li  chak  a  li 

100,000,000.  One  hundred  million Mil  yan  tath  le  pa  chuffa 

200,000,000.  Two  hundred  million Mil  yan  tath  le  pa  tuk  lo 

800,000,000.  Three  hundred  million,  &c..Mil  yan  tath  le  pa  tu  chi  na 
1,000,000,000.  One  billion Bil  yan  chuffa 


li-' 


DACOTA. 


.?    •. 


BY    rUILANDER    PRE3C0TT, 

Transmitted  by  Nathasiel  McLaix,  Esq.,  V.  8.  Aoeht. 

1.  One Wan  chah,  or  Wa  je  tab 

2.  Two Nom  pah 

3.  Three Yah  mo  nee 

4.  Four To  pah 

5.  Five Zah  pe  tab 

6.  Six Shack  coope 

7.  Seven Shack  o 

8.  Eight Shoh  en  do 

9-  Nine Nep  e  chu  wink  ah 

10.  Ten Wick  o  chimen  ec 

11.  Eleven Akka  wah  ju  (ten  and  one) 

12.  Twelve Akka  nom  pa  (ten  and  two) 


k: 


AND    CHARACTER.  207 

13.  Thirteen Ahka  yah  rao  nco  (ten  and  three) 

14.  Fourteen Ahka  to  pah  (ten  and  four,  and  so  on  to  20) 

15.  Fifteen Ahka  zah  pe  tah 

16.  Sixteen Ahka  shack  coopo 

17.  Seventeen Ahka  shack  o 

18.  Eighteen Ahka  shah  en  do 

19.  Nineteen Alika  ncp  o  chu  wink  ah 

20.  Twenty Wick  chim  no  no  pah  (20,  or  two  tens  and  one,  up  to 

30,  when  they  say  three  tens  ond  one,  up  to  40; 
80  they  keep  adding  by  saying  sampah  wah  je  tah, 
which  means,  beyond  or  one  more  than  10,  or  20, 
or  30,  as  the  case  may  be) 

21.  Twenty-one Wick  a  chimen  ne  nopah  sam  pah  wah  jc  tah 

22.  Twenty-two Wick  a  chimen  ne  nopah  sam  pah  nom  pah 

23.  Twcnty-tlircc Wick  a  chimen  nc  nopah  sam  pah  yah  mo  neo 

24.  Twenty-four Wick  a  chimen  no  nopah  sam  pah  to  pah 

25.  Twenty-five Wick  a  chimen  ne  nopah  sam  pah  zah  pe  tah 

26.  Twenty-six Wick  a  chimen  ne  nopah  sam  pah  shack  coopo 

27.  Twenty-seven Wick  a  chimen  ne  nompah  sam  pah  shack  ko 

28.  Twenty-eight Wick  a  chimen  nc  nompah  sam  pah  shah  en  do 

29.  Twenty-nine Wick  a  chimen  ne  nompah  sam  puh  ncp  c  chu  wink  ah 

30.  Thirty Wick  a  chimen  nc  yah  rao  nee  (three  tens) 

40.  Forty Wick  a  chimen  no  to  pah  (four  tens) 

50.  Fifty  Wick  a  chimen  nc  zah  pc  tah  (five  tens) 

60.  Sixty Wick  a  chimen  ne  shack  coopc  (six  tens) 

70.  Seventy Wick  a  chimen  no  shack  ko  (seven  tens) 

80.  Eighty Wick  a  chimen  ne  shah  en  do  (eight  tens) 

90.  Ninety Wick  a  chimen  ne  ncp  c  chu  wink  ah  (nine  tens) 

100.  One  hundred Opong  wa 

101.  One  hundred  and  one Opong  wa  sam  pah  wah  je  tah 

102.  One  hundred  and  two Opong  wa  sam  pah  nom  pah 

103.  One  hundred  and  three Opong  wa  sam  pah  yah  mo  nee 

104.  One  hundred  and  four Opong  wa  sam  pah  to  pah 

105.  One  hundred  and  five Opong  wa  sam  pah  zah  pe  tah 

106.  One  hundred  and  six Opong  wa  sam  pah  shack  coopo 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven.... Opong  wa  sam  pah  shack  ko 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight  ....Opong  wa  sam  pah  shah  en  do 

109.  One  hundred  and  nine Opong  wa  sam  pah  nop  e  chu  wink  ah 

110.  One  hundred  and  ten Opong  wa  som  pah  wick  a  chimen  ne 

120.  One  hundred  and  twenty.. .Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  nc  no  pah 
130.  One  hundred  and  thirty  ...Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  ne  yah  mo  nee 

140.  One  hundred  and  forty Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  ne  to  pah 

150.  One  hundred  and  fifty Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  ne  zah  pe  tah 

160.  One  hundred  and  sixty Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  nc  shack  coope 


r 

I 


,;  t 


!  t 


!  I 


:^ 

[         1 

fefe 

208  INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 

170.  One  bunilrcd  and  seventy. .Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimcn  nc  shack  ko 
180.  One  hnndreil  and  eight j...Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  ne  shah  en  do 
190.  One  hundred  and  ninety.. .Opong  wa  sam  pah  wick  a  chimen  no  nep  e  chu  wink  ah 

200.  Two  hundred Opong  wa  no  pah 

800.  Three  hundred Opong  wa  yah  mo  nee 

400.  Four  hundred Opong  wa  to  pah 

600.  Five  hundred Opong  wa  wh  pe  tah 

600.  Six  hundred Opong  wa  shack  coope 

700.  Seven  hundred Opong  wo  shuck  ko 

800.  Eight  hundred Opong  wa  shah  en  do 

900.  Nine  hundred Opong  wu  nop  e  chu  wink  ah 

1,000.  One  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  wah  je  tah 

2,000.  Two  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  nom  pah 

8,000.  Three  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  yah  mo  nee 

4,000.  Four  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  to  pah 

.'i,000.  Five  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  zah  pe  tah 

6,000.  Six  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  shack  o  pee 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  shack  ko 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  shah  en  do 

9,000.  Nine  thousand Kick  ta  opong  wa  nep  chu  wink  ah 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Kick  ta  wick  a  chincm  nah 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand  ...Kick  ta  opong  wa  opong  wa  wah  je  tah  . 

1,000,000.  One  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  (big  thousand) 

2,000,000.  Two  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  nom  pah 

8,000,000.  Three  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  yah  mo  nee 

10,000,000.  Ten  million Kick  ta  opong  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne 

20,000,000.  Twenty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  a  chimen  ne  nom  pah 

30,000,000.  Thirty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  a  chimen  ne  yah  mo  nee 

40,000,000.  Forty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  to  pah 

50,000,000.  Fifty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  zah  pe  tah 

60,000,000.  Sixty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  shack  coope 

70,000,000.  Seventy  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  shack  ko 

80,000,000.  Eighty  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  shah  en  do 

90,000,000.  Ninety  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  wick  chimen  ne  nep  e  chu  wink  ah 

100,000,000.  One  hundred  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  opong  wa  wah  je  tah 

200,000,000.  Two  hundred  million Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  opong  wa  no  pah 

300,000,000.  Three  hundred  million,  &c.Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  opong  wa  yah  mo  nee 
1,000,000,000.  One  billion Kick  ta  opong  wa  tunkah  opong  wa  wick  e  chimen  ne 

The  Indians  themselves  have  no  kind  of  an  idea  what  these  amounts  are ;  the  only  way  they 
could  form  any  kind  of  an  idea  would  be  to  let  them  see  the  amount  counted  out.  One  thousand 
is  more  than  or  a  higher  number  than  some  of  them  can  count.  We  hear  some  of  them  talk 
about  thousands,  and  sometimes  a  million,  but  still  they  can  give  no  correct  idea  how  much  of 
a  bulk  it  would  make;  and  I  believe  if  a  Sioux  Indian  was  told  he  could  have  a  million  of 
dollars  if  he  would  count  it  correctly,  he  could  not  do  it.  P.  Prescott. 


AND  CllAUACTER. 


•iO!» 


8.    CHEROKEE. 

TIANSMITTID   Br   Mri.l.lAM   Bl'TLER,   ESQ.,   V.  t.  AUINT. 
Jt   9AI    STCr.    (Nt'KIERAL*). 

1.  One Sar  quoh 

'-'.  Two Tar  li-o 

'•\.  Three Chaw  ie 

4.  Four Nor  kce 

•">.  Five Ilisk  skec 

<).  Six Su  tah  Ice 

7.  Seven Gar  le  quoh  kce 

f<.  Eight Choo  na  lah 

!♦.  Nine Law  na  lah 

10.  Ten Ar  sko  hee 

11.  Eleven Lar  too 

12.  Twelve Tul  too 

l;3.  Thirteen Chaw  i  gar  too 

14.  Fourteen Nee  gar  too 

15.  Fifteen Skee  gar  too 

IG.  Sixteen Dar  lah  too 

17.  Seventeen Gar  le  quah  too 

18.  Eighteen Nai  lar  too 

19.  Nineteen So  na  lah  too 

20.  Twenty Tah  lar  sko  kee 

21.  Twenty-one So  i  chaw  na 

22.  Twenty-two Tah  le  chaw  na 

2-3.  Twenty-three Chaw  i  chaw  na 

24.  Twenty-four Ner  kee  chaw  na 

2r).  Twenty-five Ilisk  ku  chaw  na 

26.  Twenty-six Su  tah  lu  chaw  na 

27.  Twenty-seven Gar  le  quoh  ku  chaw  na 

28.  Twenty-eight Nai  lar  chaw  na 

29.  Twenty-nine Lo  nai  lar  chaw  na 

30.  Thirty Chaw  ar  sko  hee 

40.  Forty Ner  gar  sko  hee 

50.  Fifty Hisk  skar  sko  hee 

60.  Sixty Su  dar  lee  sko  hee 

70.  Seventy Gar  lee  quah  sko  hee 

80.  Eighty Na  lah  sko  hee 

90.  Ninety Lo  nah  lah  sko  hee 

Pt.  II.  — 27 


r 

I 


'h 


•-(*^ 


il.); 


H 


210  INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY 

100.  One  hundred Ar  sko  hee  choo  que 

101.  One  hundred  a.id  one....Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  ear  quoh 

102.  One  hundred  and  two....Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  tar  lee 

103.  One  hundred  and  three.. .Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  chaw  ie 

104.  One  hundred  and  four  ...Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  ner  kee 

105.  One  hundred  and  five....Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  hisk  kee 

106.  One  hundred  and  six Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  su  tah  lee 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven. .Ar  sko  hco  choo  que  gar  le  quoh  kee 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight... Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  choo  na  lah 

109.  One  hundred  and  ninc.Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  saw  na  hth 

110.  One  hundred  and  tcn....Ar  sko  hee  choo  quo  ar  sko  hee 
120.  One  hundred  and  twenty.. Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  tar  lar  sko  heo 
130.  One  hundred  and  thirty  ...Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  chaw  ar  sko  hee 
140.  One  hundred  and  forty.. ..Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  nor  gar  sko  hee 
150.  One  hundred  and  fifty  ...Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  hisk  skar  sko  hee 
160.  One  liundred  and  sixty. ..Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  su  dar  lee  sko  hee 
170.  One  hundred  and  seventy.. .Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  gar  le  quoh  sko  ho 
180.  One  hundred  and  eighty.. .Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  saw  na  lah  sko  hee 
190.  One  hundred  and  ninety.. .Ar  sko  hee  choo  que  saw  na  lah  sko  hee 
200.  Two  hundred Tar  le  choo  quo 

300.  Three  hundred Chaw  ie  choo  quo 

400.  Four  hundred Ner  kee  choo  que 

500.  Five  hundred llisk  skee  choo  .que 

600.  Six  hundred Su  dar  lee  choo  que 

700.  Seven  hundred Gar  le  quoh  ke  choo  que 

800.  Eight  hundred Nai  lar  choo  que 

900.  Nine  hundred Saw  nai  lar  choo  quo 

1,000.  One  thousand Sar  quoh  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

2,000.  Two  thousand Tar  lee  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

3,000.  Three  thousand Chaw  ie  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

4,000.  Four  thousand Ner  ko  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

5,000.  Five  thousand Ilisk  kee  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

6,000.  Six  thousand Su  dar  le  e  yar  gar  yer  Ice 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Gar  le  quoh  ke  e  yar  gar  yer  le 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Choo  nai  lah  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

9,000.  Nine  thousand Saw  nai  lah  o  yar  gar  yer  lee 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Ar  sko  ho  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand  ...Ar  sko  he  choo  que  e  yar  gar  yer  leo 

200,000.  Two  hundred  thousand  ...Tar  le  choo  que  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

300,000.  Three  hundred  thousand.. .Chaw  ie  choo  quo  e  yar  gar  yer  loo 

400,000.  Four  hundred  thousand.... Ner  kee  choo  que  e  yar  gar  yer  lee 

1,000,000.  One  million Sar  quoh  e  you  quah  te  ner  ter 

2,000,000.  Two  million Tar  le  e  juu  qiiah  te  ner  ter 

8,000,000.  Three  million Chaw  ie  e  you  quah  te  .ler  ter 


AND    CHARACTER. 

10,000,000.  Ten  million Ar  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

20,000,000.  Twenty  million Tar  lah  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

30,000,000.  Thirty  million Cliaw  ie  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

40,000,000.  Forty  million Ner  gar  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

50,000,000.  Fifty  million Ilisk  skar  sko  hee  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

60,000,000.  Sixty  million Su  de  le  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

70,000,000.  Seventy  million Gar  le  quoh  sko  he  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

80,000,000.  Eighty  million Nai  lar  sko  ho  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

90,000,000.  Ninety  million Saw  nai  le  sko  ho  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

100,000,000.  One  hundred  million Ar  sko  he  choo  que  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

200,000,000.  Tivo  hundred  million Tar  le  choo  que  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 

800,000,000.  Three  hunilred  million,  &c.Cliaw  ie  choo  que  e  yew  quah  te  ner  ter 


211 


t 


-  H 


4,     OJIBWA  OF   CIIEGOIMEGON. 


DV    WILLIAM    W.    WARREN. 


1.  One Ba  shik 

2.  Two Neensh 

3.  Three Nis  we 

4.  Four Ne  win 

6.  Five Nii  nun 

6.  Six Nin  god  was  we 

7.  Seven  Ninsh  was  we 

8.  Eight Slious  we 

9.  Nine Shang  as  we 

10.  Ten Me  das  we 

11.  Eleven Me  das  we  asho 

12.  Twelve Me  das  we  ashe 

13.  Thirteen Me  das  we  ashe 

14.  Fourteen Me  d;is  we  ashe 

15.  Fifteen Me  das  we  ashe 

16.  Sixteen Me  das  we  ashe 

17.  Seventeen  Me  diis  we  ashe 

18.  Eighteen Me  das  we  ashe 

19.  Nineteen Me  das  we  ashe 

20.  Twenty Nish  tun  d 

21.  Twenty-one Nish  tun  li  ashe 

22.  Twenty-two Nish  tun  n  ashe 

23.  Twenty-three Nish  tun  d  ashe 

24.  Twenty-four Nish  tun  d  ashe 


ba  shig 

neensh 

nis  we 

ne  win 

na  nun 

nin  god  was  e 

ninsh  was  we 

shous  we 

shang  as  we 

ba  shig 
neensh 
nis  we 
ne  win 


u.      rl 


'   ; . 


212  INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 

25.  Twenty-fire NisU  tun  ti  ashe  na  nun 

26.  Twenty-six Nish  tun  u  nshe  nin  god  was  we 

27.  Twenty-seven Nish  tun  (i  ashe  ninsh  was  we 

28.  Twenty-eight Nish  tun  d  ashe  shous  we 

29.  Twenty-nine Nish  tun  d  ashe  shang  as  we 

30.  Thirty Nis  c  me  dun  d 

40.  Forty Ne  me  dun  d 

50.  Fifty Nun  im  e  dun  d 

60.  Sixty Nin  god  waus  im  e  dun  d 

70.  Seventy Ninsh  was  im  e  dun  d 

80.  Eighty Shous  im  e  dun  d 

90.  Ninety Shang  as  im  c  dun  d 

100.  One  hundred Nin  god  wuc 

101.  One  hundred  and  one. ...Nin  god  wdc  ashe  ba  shig 

102.  One  hundred  and  two.... Nin  god  wac  ashe  necnsh 

103.  One  hundred  and  three.. .Nin  god  wac  ashe  nis  we 

104.  One  hundred  and  four  ...Nin  god  wuc  ashe  ni  win 

105.  One  hundred  and  five.... Nin  god  wac  ashe  na  nun 

106.  One  hundred  and  six Nin  god  wuc  ashe  nin  god  was  we 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven. ..Nin  god  wdc  ashe  ninsh  was  we 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight.. .Nin  god  wdc  ashe  shous  we 

109.  One  hundred  and  nine. ..Nin  god  wac  ashe  shang  us  we 

110.  One  hundred  and  ten Nin  god  wac  ashe  me  das  we 

120.  One  hundred  and  twenty.. Nin  god  wuc  ashe  nish  tun  a 
130.  One  hundred  and  thirty. ..Nin  god  wac  ashe  nis  e  me  dun  a 
140.  One  hundred  and  forty. ..Nin  god  Wi'fc  ashe  nim  e  dun  u 
150.  One  hundred  and  fifty  ...Nin  god  wuc  ashe  naun  e  me  dun  u 

160.  One  hundred  and  sixty... Nin  god  wdc  ashe  nin  god  was  e  mo  dun  d 

170.  One  hundred  and  seventy.. Nin  god  wdc  ashe  ninsh  was  im  o  dun  d 

180.  One  hundred  and  eighty.. .Nin  god  wdc  ashe  shous  im  e  dun  d 

190.  One  hundred  and  ninety.. .Nin  god  wdc  ashe  shung  us  im  e  dun  a 

200.  Two  hundred Necnsh  wuc 

300.  Three  hundred Nis  wdc 

400.  Four  hundred Ne  wdc 

500.  Five  hundred Naun  wdc 

600.  Six  hundred Nin  god  wds  wdc 

700.  Seven  hundred Ninsh  was  wdc 

800.  Eight  hundred Shous  wao 

900.  Nine  hundred Shang  us  wuo 

1,000.  One  thousand Mo  dds  wdc 

2,000.  Two  thousand Ninsh  ing  mo  das  wao  or  Nish  tun  oo 

8,000.  Three  thousand Nis  sing  mo  dds  wdc  or  Nis  e  mo  dun  do 

4,000.  Four  thousand Ne  wing  me  dds  wac  or  Ne  me  dun  uc 

5,000.  Five  thousand Nun  ing  mo  das  wao  or  Naun  im  e  dun  do 


;  hf 


f, 


1 1 


AND   CHARA';      'R.  213 

6,000.  Six  thousand Nin  god  wa-.     '■•  ing  mc  das  wac 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Ninsh  wautcL  ing  me  diis  wac 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Shoutch  ing  me  das  wac 

9,000.  Nine  thousand Shang  utch  ing  me  das  wac 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Mc  datch  me  das  wac 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand  ...Nin  god  wac  da  ching  me  das  wac 

1,000,000.  One  million Me  das  wac  da  sing  me  das  wac 

2,000,000.  Two  million Ninsh  ing  me  diis  wac  da  sing  me  das  wiic 

3,000,000.  Three  million Nis  ira  e  dun  lic  me  das  wac 

10,000,000.  Ten  million Me  dutch  ing  me  das  wac  me  diis  wiic 

20,000,000.  Twenty  million Nish  tun  ing  me  das  wac  me  das  wiJC 

30,000,000.  Thirty  million Nis  im  id  un  ing  me  das  wiic  me  das  wac 

40,000,000.  Forty  million Nim  id  un  ing  me  das  wac  me  das  wac 

50,000,000.  Fifty  million  Naun  im  id  un  ing  me  das  wac  me  das  wac 

60,000,000.  Sixty  million Nin  god  was  im  id  un  ing  me  das  wac  me  das  wac 

70,000,000.  Seventy  million Ninsh  wiis  im  id  un  ing  me  das  wac  mc  das  wac 

80,000,000.  Eighty  million Shous  im  id  un  ing  mc  das  wac  me  das  wac 

90,000,000.  Ninety  million Shang  us  im  id  un  ing  me  diis  wac  me  das  wac 

100,000,000.  One  hundred  million Nin  god  wac  me  das  wac  me  das  wac 

200,000,000.  Two  hundred  million Ninsh  wac  me  das  wac  me  das  wac 

300,000,000.  Three  hundred  million,  &c.Nis  sing  me  das  wac  mc  das  wac 
1,000,000,000.  One  billion Me  das  wac  me  das  wac  as  he  me  das  wac 

One  million  is  also  called  Ke  che  med  as  wac,  which  would  abbreviate  a  great  deal  in  counting. 
There  is  no  more  limit  (in  thus  counting)  in  the  Ojibwa  than  there  is  in  the  English  lang\iage. 

W.  Warren. 


OJIBWA   COUNTING. 

There  is  another  mode  of  counting  the  decimals,  which  is  more  commonly  used  by  the  Pillagers 
and  northern  Ojibwas,  as  follows : 

1.  One Nin  god  juiih 

2.  Two Ninsh  wii 

3.  Three  Nis  wa 

4.  Four Ne  wii 

5.  Five N:in  wa 

6.  Six Nin  god  was  we 

7.  Seven  Nin  shous  we 

8.  Eight ....Shous  we. 

9.  Nine Shiing 

10.  Ten Quetch 

From  this  point,  the  counting  is  as  interpreted  in  the  printed  form. — W.  W. 


me 


M 


-■   "-  i'riiiaiiirtitiiiiiiMtiitifmnini[i!ipi&p| 


214 


INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY 


5.    WINNEBAGO. 


I   •  S 


ml  \ 


BY    MISS    ELIZADETn    I.OWRY, 
Transuitted  by  J.  E.  Fletchkr,  Esq.,  U.  S.  Aoert. 

1.  One He  zun  ke  ra 

2.  Two Noomp 

3.  Three Taun 

4.  Four Jope 

C>.  Yive Sarch 

6.  Six Ila  ka  wa 

7.  Seven Slia  ko  we 

8.  Eight Ila  roo  wunk 

9.  Nine Tie  zun  ke  choo  shkoo  no 

10.  Ten Ka  ra  pa  ne  za 

11.  Eleven Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  he  zun  ke  ra  shun  na 

12.  Twelve Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  noompa  shun  na 

13.  Thirteen Ka  ra  pa  nc  za  nuka  tan  e  a  shun  na 

14.  Fourteen ...Ka  ra  pa  nc  za  nuka  jope  a  shun  na 

li).  Fifteen Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  sarch  a  shun  na 

IG.  Sixteen Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  ha  ka  wa  a  shun  na 

17.  Seventeen Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  sha  ko  we  a  shun  na 

18.  Eighteen Ka  ra  pa  ne  za  nuka  ha  roo  wunk  a  shun  na 

19.  Nineteen Ka  ra  pa  nc  za  nuka  he  zun  ke  choo  shkoon  a  shun  na 

20.  Twenty Ka  ra  pa  ne  noomp 

21.  Twenty-one Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  he  zun  ke  ra  shun  na 

22.  Twenty-two Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  noomp  a  shun  na 

23.  Twenty-three Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  tan  e  a  shun  na 

24.  Twenty-four Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  jope  a  shun  na 

2.').  Twenty-five Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  sarch  a  shun  na 

2G.  Twenty -six Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  ha  ka  wa  a  shun  na 

27.  Twenty-seven Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  sha  ko  we  a  shun  na 

28.  Twenty-eight Ka  ra  pa  nc  noompa  nuka  ha  roo  wunk  a  shun  na 

29.  Twenty-nine Ka  ra  pa  ne  noompa  nuka  he  zun  ke  choo   shkoon   a 

shun  na 

30.  Thirty Ka  ra  pa  ne  taun 

40.  Forty Ka  ra  pa  ne  jope 

.')0.  Fifty Ka  ra  pa  ne  sarch 

GO.  Sixty Ka  ra  pa  ne  ha  ka  wa 

70.  Seventy Ka  ra  pa  no  sha  ko  we 

80.  Eighty Ka  ra  pa  ne  ha  roo  wunk 


90. 
100. 
101. 
102. 
103. 
104. 
105. 
106. 
107. 
108. 
109. 
110. 
120. 
130. 
140. 
150. 
160. 
170. 
180. 
190. 

200. 

300. 

400. 

500. 

600. 

700. 

800. 

900. 

1,000. 

2,000. 

3,000. 

4,000. 

5,000. 

6,000. 

7,000. 

8,000. 

9,000. 

10,000. 

100,000. 

1,000,000. 

2,000,000. 

3,000,000. 

10,000,000. 


AND    CHARACTER.  215 

Ninety Ka  ra  pa  iie  lie  zun  ke  clioo  slikoon  c 

One  hundred IIo  ko  he  za 

One  hundred  and  one.... IIo  ke  he  za  nuka  he  zun  kc  ra  nhun  na 
One  hundred  and  two.... Ho  ke  he  za  nuka  noomp  a  shun  nu 
One  hundred  and  three.. .Ho  ko  he  za  nuka  tan  e  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  four  ...Ho  kc  he  za  nuka  jope  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  five. ...Ho  kc  he  za  nuka  sarch  u  siiun  na 

One  hundred  and  six Ho  ko  he  za  nuka  ha  ka  via.  a  sliun  na 

One  hundred  and  seven. .Ho  ke  lie  za  nuka  sha  ko  wc  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  eight.. .Ho  kc  he  za  nuka  ha  roo  wunk  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  nine... Ho  ke  he  za  nuka  he  zun  kc  clioo  shkoon  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  ten.... IIo  ke  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  twenty.. Ho  kc  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  ne  noomp  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  thirty  ...Ho  ke  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  ne  tan  e  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  forty.... IIo  ke  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  jope  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  fifty  ...Ho  ke  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  sarch  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  sixty... IIo  kc  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  ha  ka  wa  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  seventy. ..Ho  kc  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  ne  sha  ko  we  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  eighty.. .Ho  ke  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  ha  roo  wunk  a  shun  na 
One  hundred  and  ninety.. .Ho  ko  he  za  nuka  ka  ra  pa  nc  he  zun  kc  choo  shkoon 

a  shun  na 

Two  hundred Ho  kc  he  noomp 

Tiiree  hundred Ho  ke  he  taun 

Four  hundred Ho  ke  he  jope 

Five  hundred Ho  ke  he  sarch 

Six  liundrcd IIo  ke  he  ha  ka  wa 

Seven  hundred IIo  ke  he  sha  ko  wa 

Eight  hundred IIo  ke  he  ha  roo  wunk 

Nine  hundred IIo  ke  he  zun  ke  choo  shoon  o 

One  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutaza 

Two  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  noomp 

Three  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  taun 

Four  thousand IIo  ko  he  hhutara  jope 

Five  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  sarch 

Six  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  ha  ka  wa 

Seven  thousand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  sha  ko  wo 

Eight  thousand IIo  kc  lie  hhutara  ha  roo  wunk 

Nine  thousand Ho  ko  he  hhutara  he  zun  kc  choo  shkoon  e 

Ten  thou.sand IIo  ke  he  hhutara  ka  ra  pa  nc  za 

One  hundred  thousand  ...IIo  kc  he  hhuta  ro  kc  he  za 

One  million IIo  kc  he  "'huta  hhu  chen  za 

Two  million IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  noomp 

Three  million IIo  ke  ho  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  taun 

Ten  million IIo  ke  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  ka  ra  pa  nc  za 


H#, 


I]  I 


I 


'^trr^. 


■\\ 


216 

20,000,000. 
30,000,000. 
40,000,000. 
50,000,000. 
60,000,000. 
70,000,000. 
80,000,000. 
00,000,000. 

100,000,000. 

200,000,000. 

300,000,000. 

1,000,000,000. 


INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 

Twenty  million IIo  ke  ho  hhuta  hhu  clicn  a  ka  ra  pa  ne  nootnp 

Thirty  million Ho  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chcii  a  ka  ra  pa  no  taun 

Forty  million IIo  ko  he  hhuta  hhu  chcn  a  ka  ra  pa  no  jope 

Fifty  million IIo  ke  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  ka  ra  pa  ne  sarch 

Sixty  million IIo  ke  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  ka  ra  pa  ne  ha  ka  wa 

Seventy  million IIo  ke  he  hhuta  hhu  chon  a  ka  ra  pa  no  sha  ko  tre 

Eighty  million IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chcn  a  ka  ra  pa  no  ha  roo  wunk 

Ninety  million IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chcn  a  ka  ra  pa  ne  zun  ko  choo 

shkoon  e 

One  hundred  million IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chcn  a  ho  ke  ho  za 

Two  hundred  million IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  ho  ke  he  noomp 

Three  hundred  million,  &c.  IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chcn  a  ho  ke  he  tnun 

One  billion IIo  kc  he  hhuta  hhu  chen  a  ho  ke  he  ka  ra  pa  ne  za 


6.     CIIirPEWA  (OJIBWA)  of   tue  UPPER  MISSISSIPPI. 


BY   SIR.   F.VIKDANK8. 


■'  y> 


1.  One Ba  shick 

2.  Two Nizh 

3.  Three Niss  wi 

4.  Four Ni  win 

5.  Five Na  nun 

6.  Six Ning  o  dwa  swi 

7.  Seven Nizh  was  swi 

8.  Eight Nish  was  swi 

9.  Nine Shong  gas  swi 

10.  Ten Mi  das  swi 

11.  Eleven Mi  d&s  swi  a  shi  ba  shick  or  ba  jig 

12.  Twelve Mi  das  swi  a  shi  nizh 

13.  Thirteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  nis  swi 

14.  Fourteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  ni  win 

15.  Fifteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  na  nun 

16.  Sixteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  ning  o  dwa  swi 

17.  Seventeen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  nizh  wa  swi 

18.  Eighteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  nish  was  swi 

19.  Nineteen Mi  das  swi  a  shi  shong  gas  swi 

20.  Twenty Nizh  ta  na 

21.  Twenty-one Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  pa  shick 

22.  Twenty-two Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  nizh 

23.  Twenty-three Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  nis  swi 


% 


AND  CHARACTER. 

24.  Twenty-four Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  ni  win 

25.  Twenty-fire Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  na  nun 

26.  Twenty-six Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  ning  o  dwas  swi 

27.  Twenty-seven Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  neczh  was  swi 

28.  Twenty-eight Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  nis  was  swi 

29.  Twenty-nine Nizh  ta  na  a  shi  shong  gas  swi 

30.  Thirty Nis  si  mo  da  na 

40.  Forty Ne  me  da  na 

50.  Fifty Na  ni  me  da  na 

60.  Sixty Ning  o  dwas  si  me  da  na 

70.  Seventy Nizh  was  si  me  da  na 

80.  Eighty Nish  was  si  me  da  na 

90.  Ninety Shong  gas  si  me  da  na 

100.  One  hundred Ning  o  dwac  or  Ning  od  wac 

101.  One  hundred  and  one. ...Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ba  jij  or  ba  shick 

102.  One  hundred  and  two. ...Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nizh 

103.  One  hundred  and  three.. .Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nis  swi 

104.  One  hundred  and  four. ..Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ni  win 

105.  One  hundred  and  five.... Ning  od  wac  a  shi  na  nun 

106.  One  hundred  and  six Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ning  o  dwas  swi 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven.. .Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nizh  was  swi 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight.. .Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nish  was  swi 

110.  One  hundred  and  ten Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ba  shicic  o  me  da  na 

120.  One  hundred  and  twenty.. Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nizh  ta  na 

130.  One  hundred  and  thirty. ..Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nis  si  me  da  na 

140.  One  hundred  and  forty. ..Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ne  me  da  na 

150.  One  hundred  and  fifty  ...TTing  od  wac  a  shi  na  ni  me  da  na 

160.  One  hundred  and  sixty... Ning  od  wac  a  shi  ning  od  was  si  me  da  na 

170.  One  hundred  and  seventy.. Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nizh  was  si  me  da  na 

180.  One  hundred  and  eighty.. .Ning  od  wac  a  shi  nish  was  si  me  da  na 

190.  One  hundred  and  ninety.. .Ning  od  wac  a  shi  shong  gas  si  mo  da  na 

200.  Two  hundred Nizh  wao 

300.  Thi-ee  hundred Nis  wao 

400.  Four  hundred Ni  wac 

500.  Five  hundred Na  wac 

600.  Six  hundred Ning  od  was  wac 

700.  Seven  hundred Nizh  was  wac 

800.  Eight  hundred Nish  was  wac 

900.  Nine  hundred Shong  gas  wac 

1,000.  One  thousand Mi  das  was  wac 

2,000.  Two  thousand Nizh  ta  nock 

3,000.  Three  thousand Nis  si  mo  da  nock 

4,000.  Four  thousand Ni  me  da  na  nock 

5,000.  Five  thousand Na  ni  me  da  nock 

Pt.  II.— 28 


217 


\     \ 


%       'I 


Mtf  . 


ih 


n\  I] 


i)    L:i 


218 


INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY 

6,000.  Six  thousand Ning  od  was  si  me  da  nock 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Ncezh  was  si  me  da  nock 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Nish  was  si  me  da  nock 

9,000.  Nine  thousand Shong  gas  si  me  da  nock 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Ke  che  me  das  wac 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand  ...Ning  od  wac  me  das  wac 


7.    WYANDOT. 


Br    WILLIAM    WALKER. 


Tra!isiiiitid  bt  D.  D.  Mitcokli,,  Esq.,  Supermtiiidiiit  or  tbk  IxniAii  Dipahtment,  St.  Iioun. 


1. 

2. 

8. 

4. 

6. 

6, 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 


One Skot 

Two Tcndeo 

Three Schenk 

Four N'dauhk 

Five Oo  weehsh 

Six Wau  zhau 

Seven Tsoo  tau  rdb 

Eight Au  a  ta  r^h 

Nine Eh  en  tr6oh 

Ten Auh  seh 


Eleven 

Twelve 

Thirteen... 
Fourteen... 

Fifteen 

Sixteen .... 
Seventeen  , 
Eighteen... 
Nineteen.. 


scot  e  skau  reh' 
ten  dec  ta  skau  reh 
schenk  e  skau  reh 
n'dauhk  e  skau  reh 
00  weehsh  o  skau  reh 
wau  zhau  e  skau  reh 
tsoo  tau  reh  e  skau  reh 
au  a  ta  reh  e  skau  reh 
eh  en  trooh  e  skau  reh 


Twenty Ten  dee  ta  w^u  seh 

Twenty-one "  " 

Twenty-two "  " 

Twenty-three "  " 

Twenty-four "  «« 

Twenty-five "  " 

Twenty-six "  " 

Twenty-seven "  " 

Twenty-eight "  " 


scot  e  skau  reh 
ten  dee  ta  skau  reh 
schenk  e  skau  reh 
n'dauhk  e  skau  reh 
00  weehsh  e  skau  reh 
wau  zhau  e  skau  reh 
tsoo  tau  reh  e  skau  reh 
au  a  ta  reh  e  skau  reh 


'  Ten  and  one  over,  ten  and  two  over,  and  bo  on  to  twenty. 


AND    CHARACTER. 


219 


29.  Twenty-nine Ten  dee  ta  wau  seh  eh  en  trooh  e  skau  reh 

30.  Thirty Schf  '    e  wdu  seh 

40.  Forty N'dau    .  e  wauh  seh 

50.  Fifty Oo  wechsh  e  wauh  seh 

60.  Sixty Wau  zhau  e  wauh  seh 

70.  Seventy Tsoo  tau  reh  e  wauh  seh 

80.  Eighty Au  a  ta  reh  e  wauh  seh 

90.  Ninety Eh  en  trooh  e  wauh  seh 

100.  One  hundred Scot  ta  ma  en  gau  a  wee 

101.  One  hundred  and  one....         "        "        " 

102.  One  hundred  and  two....         «        "        " 

103.  One  hundred  and  three...         "         "         " 

104.  One  hundred  and  four  ...         "         "         " 

105.  One  hundred  and  five....         "         "         " 

106.  One  hundred  and  six "         "         " 

107.  One  hundred  and  seven..        "        "        " 

108.  One  hundred  and  eight...         "         "         " 

109.  One  hundred  and  nine...         "         "         " 

110.  One  hundred  and  ten....  "  «*  " 
120.  One  hundred  and  twenty..  "  "  " 
130.  One  hundred  and  thirty ...  "  "  » 
140.  One  hundred  and  forty....  "  "  " 
150.  One  hundred  and  fifty  ...  »  «  « 
160.  One  hundred  and  sixty...  "  "  " 
170.  One  hundred  and  seventy...  "  "  " 
180.  One  hundred  and  eighty...  "  "  " 
190.  One  hundred  and  ninety...        "        "        " 

200.  Two  hundred Ten  dee  ta  ma  en 

300.  Three  hundred Schenk 

400.  Four  hundred N'dauhk 

500.  Five  hundred Oo  weehsh 

600.  Six  hundred Wau  zhau 

700.  Seven  hundred Tsoo  tau  reh 

800.  Eight  hundred Au  a  tau  reh 

900.  Nine  hundred Eh  en  trooh 

1,000.  One  thousand Son  gwot 

2,000.  Two  thousand Ta  hon  gwo  ych 

3,000.  Three  thousand Schenk  hon  gwo  yeh 

4,000.  Four  thousand N'dauhk  hon  gwo  yeh 

5,000.  Five  thousand Oo  weehsh  hon  gwo  yeh 

6,000.  Six  thousand Wau  zhau  hon  gwo  yeh 

7,000.  Seven  thousand Tsoo  tau  reh  hon  gwo  yeh 

8,000.  Eight  thousand Au  a  tau  reh  hon  gwo  yeh 


gau 


scot  c  skau  reh 
ten  dee  ta  skau  reh 
schenk  e  skau  reh 
n'dauhk  c  skau  reh 
00  weehsh  e  skau  reh 
wau  zhau  e  skau  reh 
tsoo  tau  reh  e  skau  reh 
au  ta  reh  e  skau  reh 
eh  en  trooh  c  skau  reh 
auh  seh  o  skau  reh 
ten  de  ta  wau  seh 
schenk  wau  seh 
n'dauhk  wau  seh 
00  wechsh  wau  seh 
wau  zhau  wau  seh 
tsoo  tau  reh  wau  seh 
au  a  ta  reh  wau  seh 
eh  en  trooh  wau  seh 
wee 


»«', 


...:iii«.  "  "mmki 


INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 

9,000.  Nine  thousand Eh  en  trooh  hon  gwo  yeh 

10,000.  Ten  thousand Au  seh  hon  gwo  yeh 

100,000.  One  hundred  thousand  ...Scot  ta  ma  en  gua  a  wee  hon  gwo  yeh 

1,000,000.  One  million Auh  seh  ta  ma  en  gau  a  wee  hon  gwo  yeh 

2,000,000.  Two  million Ten  dee  auh  seh  ta  ma  en  gau  a  wee  hon  gwo  yeh 

8,000,000.  Three  million Schenk  auh  seh  ta  ma  en  gau  a  wee  hon  gwo  yeh 

Beyond  this  the  Wyandots  cannot  go.  —  W.  W. 


8.     HITCHITTEE   or  CIIELL-0-KEE   DIALECT. 


\h 


ii 


flPOKEV   BY  SEVERAL  TRIBES  Or  THE  GREAT  MVSKOKEE   RACE. 
Br  Captai.i  J.  C.  Caskv,  U.  S.  A.,  Florida. 

1.  One Thlah'  hai 

2.  Two To  kai 

3.  Three To  chay 

4.  Four See  tah 

5.  Five Chah'  kee 

G.  Six Ee  pah 

7.  Seven Ko  la  pah 

8.  Eight Tos  nap  pah 

9.  Nine Os  ta  pah 

10.  Ten Po  ko  lin 

11.  Eleven Po  ko  lin  thla! '    .vai  kan 

12.  Twelve "         tok  la  wai  Isan 

13.  Thirteen "         to  che  na  wai  kan 

14.  Fourteen "        see  tah  wai  kan 

15.  Fifteen "        chah'  kee  pa  wai  knn 

16.  Sixteen "        ee  pah  wai  kan 

17.  Seventeen "        ko  la  pah  wai  kan 

18.  Eighteen "        tos  na  pah  wai  kan 

19.  Nineteen "        os  ta  pah  wai  kan 

20.  Twenty Po  ko  to  ko  lin 

30.  Thirty Po  ko  to  che  nin  or  to  chay  nin 

40.  Forty Po  ko  see  tah  kin 

50.  Fifty Po  ko  chah'  kee  bin 

60.  Sixty Po  ko  lee  pah  kin 

70.  Seventy Po  ko  ko  lo  pah  kin 

80.  Eighty Po  ko  tos  na  pah  kin 

90.  Ninety Po  ko  los  ta  pah  kin 

100.  One  hundred Chok  pee  thlah'  min 


m 


AND       JIARA'JT     R.  Mi 

200.  Two  hundred Chok  pe  to  ka  Ian 

300.  Three  hundred "  to  chay  nin 

400.  Four  hundred "  se  tah  kin 

500.  Five  hundred "  chah  kee  pan 

600.  Six  hundred "  ce  pah  kin 

700.  Seven  hundred "  ko  la  pah  kin 

800.  Eight  hundred "  tos  na  pah  kin 

900.  Nine  hundred "  os  ta  pah  kin 

1,000.  One  thousand "  chok  thlah  min 

Note.  — a  always  as  in  father;  ai  like  long  i  in  fine;  ay  like  a  in  famous;  a/i  like  long  a 
in  master;  ah  the  same  and  guttural,  the  h  being  sounded  like  ch  in  the  Scotch  word  hch. 

J.  C.  C. 

9 .    COMANCHE.    (Vide  p.  129.) 
10.    CUCIIAN  OR  YUMA.    (Vide  p.  119.) 


" 


:n 


B.    ART    OF    RECORDING    IDEAS. 


PiCTOGKAPnT. 

This  mode  of  recortling  ideoH  is  found  to  have  been  very  generally  practised  by  tlie 
American  tribes,  from  the  earliest  period.  From  the  accumulating  mass  of  materials 
on  that  head,  the  following  topics  are  here  intixxluced. 


Indian  Census-Roll. 


t     M> 


TRANSMITTED    BY    J.   C.   FLETCHER,   ESQ. 

(Plate  54.) 

The  subjoined  census  of  an  Indian  band  at  Mille  Lac,  in  the  territory  of  Minnesota, 
in  symbolic  characters,  was  drawn  and  given  in  to  the  agent  by  Nago-nalx",  a  Chippewa 
Indian,  during  the  progress  of  the  annuity  payments  in  1849.  It  represents,  by 
pictographic  characters,  each  family  of  the  ban<l,  by  its  name  and  its  numbers. 

There  is  no  particular  key  to  it,  but  it  manifests  the  off-hand  ingenuity  of  the 
author  of  it,  in  adapting  general  pictographic  symbols  to  a  particular  purpo.se.  The 
Indians  generally  designate  their  family  names  by  their  particular  totem ;  but  in  this 
case,  as  the  band  are  nearly  all  of  one  totem,  he  has  designated  each  particular  family 
by  some  symbol  denoting  their  common,  or  current  name.  Thus  Fig.  2  denotes  a 
valley,  the  name  of  the  master  of  the  wig^vam :  Fig.  4  denotes  a  man  shooting  at  a 
mark :  No.  5  a  cat-fish  :  No.  8  a  beaver-skin  :  No.  9  the  sun  :  No.  1.3  an  eagle ;  No.  14 
a  snake;  No.  18  the  earth  cros.sed:  No.  22  a  buffalo:  No.  34  an  axe.  All  of  which 
are  respectively  the  tribal,  but  not  the  totemic  names  of  the  individuals. 

Although  the  regular  system  is  thus  departed  from,  those  intimately  acquainted  with 
the  band  and  the  individuals,  can  readily  read  it.  No.  .35  is  easily  recogni.sed  as  the 
chief  possessing  sacerdotal  authority.  These  are  the  distinctions  preserved  of  thirty- 
four  families,  numbering  108  souls.  Mr.  Fletcher,  the  Government  Agent,  transmits 
it  as  denoting  the  aptitude  of  Nago-nabe,  the  head  of  the  band,  for  this  species  of 
writing,  and  his  close  attention  in  regarding  the  interests  of  each  family  composing 
his  village. 

The  marks  in  each  division  indicate  the  number  of  persons  in  each  family. 

(222) 


LV;iMniBM'*******^MM?:iijjjy|^£pi||||n^^ 


vr 


ii  i 


a  I    I 

1 

8   1  '  i 
1  1^1 

L 


I   I   1  • 


%-.. 


/ 


jy 


/  o  o 


i 


f*  • 


"'   \     I 


/ 


m 


c A T'l ■'5  iJ  "i  (:;f  A  ivj  Jj.i,''  i.A<^  !*Ani)  or  cw  r;':PA'WA'i 


l'lflU,l.;-.-iU'.lJ    BY    l.ll-tl".(i'i"r.  'HI,\MiHi  ,t-  <'!     l,ia..M-^ 


INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY,  ETC. 


223 


b.    Magic  Song. 

TBANSMITTED    WITH    THE    PRECEDINO. 

(Plate  55.) 

Fig.  1.     A  Lynx.     The  meda  sings  — 

Nail  me  ba  o  sa  yaun 

Neen  a  ne  mail  je  o  sa  yaun  neen 

I  walk  about  in  the  niglit. 

I  tliat  walk  along — 'tis  I. 
Fig.  2.     A  human  figure,  denoting  bad  siiceches  from  a  medicine-man, 

Neen  none  daun  ke  tone 

Ma  ne  do  we  aun. 

I  hear  your  mouth. 

You  that  are  a  spirit. 
Fig.  3.     A  Lynx.     He  is  represented  as  just  having  emerged  from  the  ground. 
The  bar  across  the  neck  denotes  this.     This  lynx  is  a  symbol  of  a  first-rate  Meda- 
man  —  one  deeply  versed  in  the  medical  mysteries. 

Shi  equah  mo  mo  ke  aun  e 

Nin  bishue 

I  ah  ne  aun  e. 

Now  I  come  out  of  the  ground, 

I  that  am  a  lynx. 
Fig.  4.     The  Lynx  —  a  symbol  of  the  Meda. 

Ben  ah,  neen  bishue 

Ah  nah  ke  me  nuah  bum  e  nak  ? 

See !  I  am  a  lynx ; 

Do  you  like  my  looks? 

c.    Medicine  Animal  of  the  Winnebagoes. 


TRANSMITTED    WITH    THE    PRECEDINO. 


(Fig.  7.    Plate  55.) 

The  idea  of  a  medical  panacea  for  human  diseases,  appears  to  be  deeply  implanted 
in  the  Indian  mind.  Equally  deep  and  general  is  the  expression,  that  this  remedy  is 
to  be  exhibited  in  connexion  with  a  supernatural,  magical,  or  necromantic  power,  of 
which  the  professors  of  the  medical  art  are  the  depositories.  These  professors,  in  their 
supposed  order,  are  the  meda«s,  or  higher  proficients  of  Indian  occult  knowledge. 

The  Joasekeed  or  seer,  or  what  is  denominated  the  prophet  or  foreteller  of  future 


224 


INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 


'( 


events,  must  be  classified  as  a  meda,  for  he  is  ever  supposed  by  the  Indians  to  be 
conversant  with  the  highest  arts.  2.  The  Mada-ivuirinee,  or  doctor,  practises  his  arts 
of  curing  on  personal  experience  or  knowledge,  relying  on  the  material  virtues  of  his 
simples. 

Sorcerers,  wizards,  and  tricksters,  or  Wabcnos,  arise  from  one  or  the  other  of  these 
classes,  the  boundaries  between  whose  arcana  of  knowledge  are  of  course  not  very 
accurately  defined. 

As  a  general  belief,  animals,  to  the  hunting  of  which  so  much  of  the  lives  of  the 
Indians  is  devoted,  are  associated  with  the  exhibition  of  magic  medicines;  and 
individuals,  in  all  portions  of  the  Indian  country,  acquire  a  local  celebrity  for  their 
skill  in  this  department  of  Indian  traditionary  knowledge. 

The  annexed  Fig.  7,  Plate  55,  was  drawn  by  Little  Hill,  a  Winnebago  chief  of  the 
upper  Mississippi,  west.  He  represents  it  as  their  medicine  animal.  He  says  that  this 
animal  is  but  seldom  seen  —  that  it  is  only  seen  by  medicine-men  after  severe  fasting. 
He  has  a  piece  of  bone,  which  he  asserts  was  taken  from  this  animal.  He  considers  it 
a  potent  medicine,  and  uses  it  by  filing  a  small  piece  in  water.  He  has  also  a  small 
piece  of  native  copper,  which  he  u.ses  in  the  same  manner,  and  entertains  like  notiona 
of  its  sovereign  virtues. 


:,  a 


il.    Haokaii  —  A  Dacota  God. 

(Plate  55.) 

To  the  Indian  mind,  many  of  the  phenomena  of  nature,  which  are  familiar  to 
persons  of  even  the  lowest  grade  of  information  in  civilized  life,  are  invested  with  the 
attributes  and  functions  of  a  god.  Whatever,  in  fact,  is  mysterious,  abstruse,  or 
unknown  in  nature  or  art,  is  referred  to  the  power  of  a  deity.  It  is  with  him  the 
short  cut  to  solve  every  question  beyond  his  depth.  Superstition  is  exceedingly  acute 
in  observing  phenomena,  in  the  great  area  of  the  forest.  Not  a  sound  escapes  his  ever 
quick  ear,  and  if  there  be  any  thing  in  the  attending  circumstances  in  which  he  is 
placed,  to  raise  a  suspicion,  it  is  immediately  set  down  as  of  superhuman  influence. 

It  is  one  of  the  notions  of  the  ancient  poets,'  that  the  spirit  of  a  man  might 
inhabit  a  tree,  injuries  to  which  were,  in  such  cases  of  transition,  to  be  regarded  as 
shocking  cruelties.  It  is  not  conceived  by  the  Indians,  that  a  mere  man  could  be 
thus  transformed,  without,  at  the  same  time,  possessing  the  attributes  of  a  god.  The 
evidence  of  the  enchantment  or  transformation  is  to  be  drawn  from  the  senses. 

If  a  tempest  sweeps  the  forest,  producing  a  tumult  of  sounds,  there  is  no  cause  for 
wonder.  It  is  an  ordinary  event.  But  should  a  tree  emit  from  its  hollow  trunk  or 
branches  a  sound  during  a  calm  state  of  the  atmosphere ;  or  what  is  more  probable, 

'  Virgil.     Tasso. 


I   \i 


I 


I    ! 


i..  11 


'^f 


.)) 


^ 


■x^ 


h 


wf^ 


:m. 


m 


m 


# 


■/./     ■,'.*.;,■/       //.A     .  /. 


.     (     .  I.    I  4    ■  t         f 


.^<V: 


I  %    !■ 


ll 


'i'- 1 


AND   CHARACTER. 


225 


should  an  excited  niiiid,  anxioiiH  to  accuinulute  the  iuinil)er  of  facts  iiiwii  which  the 
nuperMtitious  reverence  of  the  jjcople  relies  in  their  estimate  of  him,  fuiicy  an  emission 
of  such  sounds,  the  tree  would  at  once  l)c  reported,  and  soon  come  to  be  regarded,  as 
the  residence  of  some  local  god. 

Should  he  find  in  peramhulating  the  prairies,  or  crossing  the  table-lands,  elevated 
alx)ve  the  present  level  of  the  waters,  or  resting  among  the  Ixudders  and  drift,  still 
accumulated  along  the  shores  of  existing  lakes  and  rivers,  a  mass  of  drift  in  some 
imitative  form,  it  is  in  either  case  regarded  as  something  out  of  the  common  course, 
and  regarded  as  the  residence,  or  material  form,  or  exuvia)  of  some  local  god.  In  this 
manner  the  Indian  country  is  found  to  reveal  many  jjoints  of  local  allusion  by  the 
natives,  where  the  geologist  or  the  meteorologist  would  find  nothing  strange  to  remark. 
The  Indian  mind  creates,  in  truth,  the  intellectual  atmosphere  within  which  it 
dwells ;  and  in  our  endeavors  to  account  for  its  modes  of  action,  we  are  not  authorized 
by  a  summary  philosophy,  to  sweep  away  his  theories. 

It  is  seldom,  however,  in  their  deification  of  geologic  and  organic  monuments,  that 
we  behold  the  pictographic  symbols  of  these  gods  of  the  imagination,  such  as  is 
presented  in  the  accompanying  figurative  device  of  Ilaokah.  This  god  is  presented 
under  the  form  of  a  giant.  The  following  is  a  complete  key  of  the  .separate  symbols, 
as  taken  from  the  lips  of  a  Dacota.* 
Fig.  8.  The  giant. 

9.  A  frog  that  he  uses  for  an  arrow-point. 
10  and  11.  Birds  that  he  has  kept  within  his  court. 
12  and  13.  Ornaments  that  he  keeps  over  his  door. 
14  and  15.  His  court-yard,  ornamented  with  red  down. 

16.  A  deer  living  in  his  court. 

17.  A  bear        "        "        " 

18.  An  elk        "         "         " 

19.  A  buffalo     "         "         " 
20  and  21.  Incense  offerings. 

22.  A  rattle  of  deers'  hoofs,  used  in  singing. 

23.  A  long  flute  or  whistle. 

24.  25,  20,  and  27,  are  meteors  that  he  sends  ont  for  defence,  or  to  protect  him 

from  invasion. 
28,  29,  30,  and  31.  Lightning  which  surrounds  his  house,  with  which  he  kills 
all  kinds  of  animals. 

32.  A  large  fungus  that  grows  on  trees. 

33.  Touchwood.     Nos.  32  and  33,  are  eaten  by  animals  that  enter  his  court, 

causing  immediate  death. 


'  By  Captain  S.  Eastman,  U.  S.  A. 


Pt.  II.  — 29 


220 


INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY 


34.  Lightnings  from  the  giant's  cap. 

35.  Tiic  giant's  cap. 

36.  His  bow  and  ari-ows. 


e.    Indian  Signatures. 


f, 


(Plate  56.) 

The  subjoined  signatures  arc  copied  from  an  invoice  of  Indian  goods,  delivered  by 
General  William  Hull  to  tlie  Indian  tribes  at  Di'troit,  in  1809.  It  embraces  some  of 
the  distinguished  alxn'iginal  actors  of  the  time.  What  is  particularly  entitled  to  notice 
is  tlie  fact,  which  is  however  in  accordance  with  popular  observation,  that  the  totems 
of  the  signers  are  not  generally  the  common  names  of  the  individuals.  Thus  No.  1, 
Kimi-ke-chawgon,  or  Big  Nose,  makes  the  totem  of  the  bear;  No.  4,  Aix!che-caw- 
Iwway,  or  the  front-standing  man,  the  totem  of  the  wolf,  apparently ;  No.  6,  Skaw-o- 
mut,  or  Black  Chief,  a  tree ;  No.  16,  Macconce,  or  Little  Bear,  a  turtle,  &c.  &c.  The 
latter  signs  or  sjmbols,  standing  in  each  case  for  the  clans  or  generic  names  of  the 
families  of  the  individuals,  and  not  what  we  should  denominate  their  Christian  or 
common  names. 

The  exceptions,  such  as  Siginoc,  a  grain-eating  bird ;  and  No.  7,  Miezay,  an  insect 
that  walks  on  the  water,  are  to  be  regarded  as  men  who  had  acquired  a  noted  reputation 
under  their  common  names,  and  departed  from  a  rule  by  employing  symbols  for 
their  popular  or  common  names. 

Such  notoi'iety,  tradition  affirms,  attached  to  the  names  of  the  chiefs  No.  3  and 
No.  7,  namely,  Siginoc  of  Michilimackinac,  and  Walk-in-the-water  of  Detroit. 


!h':l 


,  y  i 


m 


/.    Mnemonic    Symbols   for    Music. 
(Plate  57.) 

Examples  of  the  capacity  of  the  Indian  medas  for  singing  their  songs  and  incanta- 
tions by  means  of  signs  depicting  the  chief  objects  of  stanzas  committed  to  memory, 
have  been  given  in  detail  in  Plates  51  and  52,  Part  I.  The  application  of  this  rude 
system  of  musical  annotation  to  magical  hunting  8ong.«i,  has  also  been  depicted  in 
Plate  53,  Part  I. ;  and  to  the  leading  and  most  ambitious  subject  of  the  Indian  mind, 
namely,  war-songs,  in  Plate  56,  Part  I. 

A  new  phase  in  the  philosophy  of  the  human  mind  in  its  hunter  state,  is  thus 
exhibited.  Further  evidence  of  this  trait  of  the  Indian  mind  is  given  in  the 
accompanying  symbols,  Plate  57.     This  pictographic  record,  copied  from  a  scroll  of 


A/////    Af   /'/ifiifi/(/ii 


hi/r/if'    /f/i.\    (///>'//)■//// n      '. 


4=^ 


, ")'///////// 


////'/■///'    If/If   /'I'if/ti 


'I    I  II    I      I    I  II! 


///•/>/'     i/ifi/ir/if     f'f/ii/t'/i/f 


•  VAf/if     f    ////// 

•I    |:l-i  k    'lii-l 


.  l/if'/ni/ 

m      W.l'll':     III     I  lie     Will  "I:: 


^ 


/I'ff//    1/  ■  hf'/t 


///.■ 


1)1 1      //////ni' 


'^ 


/'l/r/r     r     .    ],'■/,/;'  /i 


~-~\ 


('///■  Af/ir  i/r/t'  ////// 


/'////,■   y//^/    /'//ii'/"'iiyn/   /'. 


■  '^Wif'//     ///'      If///     /. 


I///////    //'    i///f///i/,      II 

■<Y       l.ltll..       "...ImI- 


S/i      IIY-     /////■/     /. 


]/i/rit'//t/'  //'■ 

r    !.i:il.'    i;,-,i: 


J  I'J   ij  J  A  J^l     .3  J  a  j^l  >\  -/   IJ   !i 
l,i}-l,Uj^'ort.Gi-:n.ulni  &■  I'V  Fcil;'. 


*ra?T- iU.<wn>L>ji '■'.'• 


AND  CHARACTER. 


8ST 


birch-bark,  is  depoHitcd  in  the  miuccUaneous  cabinet  of  the  New  Yurk  Ilintorical 
Six'iety. 

It  is  remarkable  that  the  system  of  pictography  of  the  North  American  Indiana 
becomes  universal  to  the  cof^nate  triljes,  at  the  moment  that  its  symbols  are  committed 
to  record.  Bark,  skin,  tal)ular  pieces  of  wood,  or  ;'m<x>th  faces,  or  angles  of  standing 
rock,  or  l)()ulders,  may  constitute  the  material  chosen  kr  inscription.  This  is  a  matter 
of  pure  caprice,  choice,  or  convenience.  Its  interpretation  is  not  a  question  of 
distinctive  symlwl  language.  The  system  is  one  of  recording  —  not  words,  but 
concrete  idea.s,  and  this  is  done  by  the  jxjwer  of  association.  The  picture  of  a  iK'ar 
recalls  the  ideas,  not  simply  of  a  particular  kind  of  quadrujied,  but  of  a  strong, 
black,  clumsy,  cunning  animal,  with  powerful  claws,  whose  flesh  is  deeply  coated 
with  a  tender  kind  of  white  fat;  whose  skin  is  suitable  for  particular  purposes. 
These  are  but  jjarts  of  the  ideas  recalled  by  the  synilM)l.  The  animal  is  fcmd  of  sweet 
fruits  and  berries,  loves  certain  precincts,  and  is  to  be  hunted  in  a  certain  way.  To 
capture  him,  and  to  foil  his  natural  sagacity,  is  a  prime  achievement. 

To  ent'ure  success  in  this,  tJie  Indian  seeks  necromantic  knowledge.  lie  draws  the 
figure  of  the  animal,  depicting  its  heart,  with  a  line  leading  to  it  from  the  moutli.  Sec 
Figs.  4.  8,  13,  .37,  47,  Plate  57.  By  uttering  a  certain  incantation  of  charmed  words, 
he  conceives  himself  to  get  a  necromantic  power  over  this  heart.  He  believes  he  can 
control  its  motions  and  desires.  He  believes  this  firmly.  He  raises  his  song  in 
confidence.  Already  he  sees  his  victim  in  his  power.  He  draws  him  from  his  lair. 
He  leads  him  into  his  own  path  in  the  forest.  He  exults  in  an  imaginary 
triumph. 

With  such  views  this  scroll  is  inscribed.  It  is  a  Sioux,  (Dacota.)  It  resem))les  in 
some  resjiects  Plate  54,  1st  Part.  The  chief  figure.  No.  1,  is  a  man  named  Catfish. 
He  is  represented  as  completely  armed.  He  begins  to  recite  his  arts  and  exploits. 
The  leading  ideas  of  the  song,  dismissing  charms,  and  some  verbiage,  may  be 
concentrated  thus : 

1.  Hear  my  power  (alluding  to  voice,  or  drum.) 

2.  My  swiftness  and  vengeance  are  the  eagle's. 

3.  I  hear  the  world  over. 

4.  The  bear  must  obey  the  medicine  of  my  lodge. 

5.  My  secret  lodge  is  double;  (two  divining-stones.) 

6.  Fear  then,  man. 

7.  A  snake  shall  enter  thy  vitals. 

8.  Can  a  bear  escape  my  arrow  ? 

9.  A  river  —  ha!  —  ha! 

10.  Can  a  bear  fly  from  my  magic. 

11.  My  medicine  is  strong. 


228 


INTELLECTUAL    CAPACITY,  ETC. 


•?1 

If 

I 

# 

[ 

u 

\i 

!l 

I 

1      1 

S( 

1 

1m  ^ 

III 

L 

These  boastings  of  secret  supernatural  skill  and  power,  are  curiously  symbolized. 
The  words  may  be  greatly  varied,  so  that  they  convey  the  chief  symbol. 

In  No.  2,  the  beak  of  a  bird  is  put  for  the  head  of  a  man,  to  denote  vengeance.  In 
No.  3,  the  capacity  of  hearing  is  symbolized  b}'  an  extension  from  the  ears.  In  Nos.  4 
and  5,  is  expressed  the  magic  power  that  is  given  over  the  movements  of  the  bear  by 
means  of  the  medicine  lodge  and  its  arts.  The  ideas  excited  by  each  symbol  are 
concrete. 


2,    Alphabetical  Notation. 
Cherokee  Alphabet. 

The  aged  and  venerable  missionary,  Mr.  Butrick,  whose  death  has  just  (1851)  been 
announced,  is  believed  to  have  been  the  earliest  teacher  in  the  Cherokee  country, 
being  employed  under  the  society  of  United  Moravian  Brethren.  The  first  school 
established  by  the  American  Board  of  Couuuissioners  for  Foreign  Missions,  was  in 
1817.  Tliese  efforts  appear,  in  their  development,  to  have  stinuilafed  the  vital  spark 
of  inventive  thought,  which  led  a  native  Cherokee  to  give  his  people  an  original 
alphabet.  Sequoia,  or  Guess,  appears  to  have  been  some  time  engaged  in  perfecting 
his  invention.  About  1824  it  was  definitely  annouuced,  and  examined  by  the 
missionaries,  who  found  it  to  be  a  syllabieal  sj  stem,  and  pronounced  it  well  adapted 
to  teach  the  Cherokee  population.  It  seemed  particularly  suited  to  the  adults,  who 
immediately  embraced  it,  and  it  lias  since  Ijeeii  taught  to  all  classes,  conjointly  with 
the  English.  Two  of  the  characters  being  found  honiophanous,  have  been  abolished  in 
practice.  The  alphabet,  in  its  most  perfect  form,  is  given  on  the  subjoined  plate. 
It  will  be  perceived,  tliat  the  Indian  mind,  accustomed  to  view  and  express  objects 
in  the  gross  or  combined  form,  has  fallen  on  this  plan  for  an  alphabet.  Nearly  all 
the  words  of  the  vocabulary  end  in  a  vowel.  Each  vowel  is  preceded  by  thirteen 
combinations  of  the  consonant,  making  sixty-four  syllables.  To  this  scheme  there 
are  added  twelve  characters,  to  represent  double  consonants.  No  other  American 
language,  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  could  be  written  l)y  such  a  simple  scheme. 
It  cannot  be  applied  to  any  dialect  of  the  Algonquin,'  the  Iroquois,  the  Dacota, 
the  Appalachian,  or  the  Shoshonee.  Consequently  its  applicatiim  is  limited.  It 
provides  for  the  e.xprcssicm  only  of  such  sounds  as  occur  in  the  Cherokee  language. 
Still,  its  utility  in  that  language  has  been  highly  appreciated,  and  it  ivniains 
a  striking   phenomenon   in  the   history  of  American   pliilology.      (Plate  A.)' 

A  s|)ecimen  of  the  application  of  this  alphabet  is  added  in  a  version  of  the  lesson 
of  the  Prodigal  Son.     (Plate  B.) 


'  ArcliiBi)logia  Aiuericmm,  Vol.  II. 

'  By  reference  to  the  Rubsci|ueiit  pngen,  IX.  Langungn,  A.,  p.  ^50,  it  will  be  perceived  llmt  the  number 
of  Algonquin  syllables  in  2'i"). 


M 


I- 


a      i'-i 


•^Ipljitkt. 

D 

T/ 

o\. 

(^. 

• 
I./' 

ffc^/  0/y/ 

ITf//' 

•7///' 

A/A. 

tly// 

Jiuv 

^/u, 

T/fr 

J^A/ 

v///' 

V//// 

Cllriiv 

W. 

e,- 

11- 

Q>/o 

M/. 

^iv 

^J///// 

vl  ////' 

IL, 

\j//t/> 

V 

T7///// 

\l////7    tf//w\j////// 

1 

lly// 

k  A  m 

^1 

■  //// 

Qv 

\AA//ffo 

^,/ffr 

TP 

^4/l/L 

^f/t/f> 

Oqiiv 

U.»y/  ii)j- 

l^JV' 

bf/ 

^.vo 

Cjv/ 

Ksv 

b////  Vi4/ 

Jl///^'  V)/.,' 

•J[///il// 

\../„ 

S^/5i' 

^,. 

(W^//// 1  i  //</ 

MJ//r 

\j//t 

"j/Zv 

^{R., 

Fiv 

G/)y/ 

%r 

\Ktsf 

K.V, 

ij/Sff 

Vt^Isv 

vi//-// 

S,rr 

©,. 

C 

^,r„ 

6«T 

• 

U^rr 

vaf/v'" 

fi(» 

Bn 

Soiiiuls   i'i>|)n 

•stMilcd  hv  Vowels. 

a  f/.v  /I  ill  /ii//itT  />/•  .r//f> 

//  //.I'  //  ///  /'/r^// 

'''',  //.r  //H  ///  /i/ji'  ///'  .\'/////'/  //s  ft /// 

'//>/ 

/'  f/s  fi  //I    /i(f/r.  f/r  .v/if't 

/  f/s  /_•  w  //uV 

//    //,i     /I/'  ///  //t///  ///*  .v/////'/    //s  //  ///  y 

ij»// 

f  .  as  t  /'//  /j/^tlf.  tv  Xiit' 

rf    in  /'///  ///'/ 

/■  //.v    /y    /•//   /i/i/.  ////.r////'ir/-/ 

('OIIKOIIIIII 

1        Sounds 

//  iiri//(i   fi.v  //I  A'//'///.r// ,  /// 

//  /i///j/f/f/t  ■///////  / 

fi  /■._  //  //ff/f/i    f/.y  t/t  /;'//y//.t//  />///  ///// 

*/f/////f///// 

/f/ /!.  // A////.//!/,  y/ii  1  .  f/.\  /// 

A  '//////'.i/i .    Si  ■/////)/ 

'/',>■  /'iv/iMl/f/f/  ii///f  f/  rvf/yi/ .y //i/ii'.y,//// 

/  •//'/// f '.V  ///f 

/i/tiiir  ///'A..I.VQ'  ifff  .vot/ii'i 

'////f'.y    xttffftf/fi/  // 

/  ///   //,    //////  Sv//f/^'/''.f   irri///'//  11//// 

//a'/v"/////S' 

.\y////f////// 

•s  1 ///-I  /// ///■ 

i 


III 


'ti  ; 


if 


C.    ORAL    IMAGINATIVE    LEGENDS. 


1.  Transformation  of  a  Hunter  Lad. 

2.  Origin  of  Zca  Maize. 
8.  The  Wolf-Brother. 

4.  Sayadio. 


An  Allegory  of  Ovev-fasting. 


Three  of  the  following  tales  were  ohtahied  from  the  oral  traditions  of  the  Chippewa, 
during  my  residence  between  A.  D.  1822  and  1832,  at  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  at  the  foot  of 
Lake  Superior.  The  fourth  legend  is  derived  from  the  Wyandots,  and  the  narrative 
will  be  seen  to  be  essentially  the  same  as  that  given  by  Breboef,  the  first  Catholic 
missionary  among  the  Wyandots,  who  were  living,  at  the  period,  north  of  the  great 
lake-chain  between  the  head  of  Lake  Erie  and  the  eastern  shores  of  Lake  Huron. 


1.     Transformation  of  a  Hunter's  Son  into  a  Bird. 


AN   ALLEGORY  OF  OVER-FASTING. 


i^^ 


An  ambitious  hunter  had  an  only  son,  who  now  approached  that  age  when  it  is 
proper  to  fast,  in  order  to  choose  his  guardian  or  personal  spirit ;  and  he  was  very 
ambitious  that  his  son  should  show  great  capacity  of  endurance  in  this  fast,  that  he 
might  obtain  a  powerful  spirit. 

For  this  purpose  he  gave  him  every  instruction,  and  when  the  time  arrived,  bid  him 
be  courageous,  and  acquit  himself  like  a  man. 

The  young  lad  first  went  into  the  sweating  lodge,  and  having  heated  himself 
thoroughly,  plunged  into  cold  water.  This  he  repeated.  He  then  went  into  a  separate 
lodge,  which  had  been  prepared  for  him  at  a  short  distance  in  the  forest,  and  laid 
himself  down  on  a  new  mat  made  of  rushes,  woven  by  his  mother.  To  this  place  his 
father  accompanied  him,  and  told  him  he  must  fast  twelve  days,  and  that  he  would 
come  to  see  him  once  a  day,  every  morning.  The  young  man  then  covered  his  face, 
and  his  father  left  him.  He  laid  still  until  the  next  morning,  when  his  father  visited 
him  to  encourage  him  to  persevere  in  his  fast. 

This  he  did,  and  the  same  visits  were  renewed  for  eight  days,  when  his  strength 
had  failed  so  much  that  he  could  not  rise,  and  the  youth  lay  with  nearly  the  com- 
posure and  rigidity  of  one  without  life.  On  the  ninth  day,  he  spoke  to  his  father  as 
follows : 


280 


INTELLECTUAL   CAPACITY 


;  ( V 


"  My  father,  my  dreams  are  not  good.  The  spirit  who  visits  me  is  not  favorable  in 
the  way  you  wixh.  Let  me  break  my  fast  now,  and  at  another  time  I  '11  try  again.  I 
have  no  strength  to  endure  any  longer." 

"  My  son,"  he  replied,  "  if  you  give  up  now,  all  will  be  lost.  You  have  persevered 
in  your  fust  eight  days.  You  have  overcome  the  hardest  trials.  Only  a  little  time 
now  remains.     Some  other  spirit  will  come  to  you.     Strive  a  little  longer." 

The  lad  covered  himself  clo.ser,  and  lay  still,  never  moving  or  saying  a  word  till  the 
eleventh  day,  when  he  faintly  ivpeated  his  n'<nK'st.  '•  To-morrow,"  answered  the  old 
man,  "  I  will  come  early  in  the  morning,  and  bring  you  fixjd." 

Silence  and  o1x?dience  were  all  that  remained.  The  young  man  made  no  reply.  lie 
seemed  as  one  dead.  No  one  would  have  known  that  life  was  not  fled,  but  by  watching 
the  gentle  heaving  of  his  breast.     Day  and  night  appeared  to  be  alike  to  him. 

The  next  morning  the  father  came  with  tlie  promi.sed  repast  in  a  little  kettle.  But 
on  drawing  near  to  the  wigwam,  he  heard  sounds  from  within,  as  if  from  some  one 
talking.  Stooping  to  l<Mjk  through  a  small  opening,  he  was  surprised  to  see  his  son 
painted,  sitting  up,  and  in  the  act  of  laying  the  paint  on  his  .shoulders,  as  far  as  his 
hands  could  reach,  and  nuittering  at  the  same  time  to  himself,  "  My  father  has  destroyed 
me.  lie  would  not  listen  to  my  requests.  I  shall  be  for  ever  happy,  for  I  have  been 
obedient  to  my  parent,  e\en  beyond  my  strength.  My  spirit  is  not  the  one  I  sought, 
but  he  is  just  and  pitiful,  and  has  given  me  another  shape." 

At  this  moment  the  old  man  broke  in,  exclaiming,  "  Ningwis !  Ningwis ! "  (my  son, 
my  son.)  leave  me  not — leave  me  not."  But  the  lad,  with  the  nimbleness  of  a  bird, 
had  flown  to  the  top  of  the  lodge,  and  perched  himself  on  the  highest  outer  pole, 
liaving  assumed  the  shape  of  a  beiuitiful  robin-red-breast.  He  looked  down  on  his 
father,  and  said,  "  Mourn  not  my  change.  I  shall  be  hajjpier  in  my  present  state  than 
I  could  have  l)cen  as  a  man.  I  shall  always  be  the  friend  of  men,  and  keep  near  their 
dwellings.  I  could  not  gratify  your  pride  as  a  warrior,  but  I  will  cheer  you  by  my 
songs,  and  strive  to  produce  in  you  the  lightsomeness  I  feel.  I  am  now  free  from 
cares  and  pains.  My  food  is  furnished  by  the  fields  and  mountains,  and  my  path  is  m 
the  bright  air."     So  saying,  he  flew  away  to  the  woods. 


f 


2.      MONDAMIN,    OR    THE    OrIGIN    OF    THE    ZeA    MAIZE. 
A    CHIPPEWA    ALLEGORY. 


A  POOR  Indian  was  living  with  his  wife  and  children  in  a  beautiful  part  of  the 
country.  His  children  were  too  young  to  give  him  any  assistance  in  hunting;  and  he 
had  but  ill  luck  himself  Bui  he  was  thankful  for  all  he  received  from  the  forest,  and 
although  he  was  very  poor,  he  was  very  contented. 


AND    CHARACTER. 


281 


His  elder  win  inherited  the  same  dispoaition,  and  had  ever  been  olxdient  to  bis 
parents.  He  Iiiid  now  readied  the  age  at  which  it  is  proper  to  make  the  initial  fast, 
which  the  Indian  lads  all  do  at  about  fourteen  or  fifteen.  As  soon  as  the  spring 
arrived,  his  mother  built  him  a  little  fa.sting-l(Klge  in  a  retired  s[K)t,  where  he  would 
not  be  disturlx'd;  and  when  it  was  finished  he  went  in  and  txi-gan  his  fast.  He 
amused  him.self  for  a  few  mornings  l)y  rambling  alx)ut  in  the  vicinity,  looking  at  the 
shruljs  and  wild-Howei-s,  (for  he  had  a  taste  for  such  things,)  and  brought  great  bunches 
of  them  along  in  his  hands,  which  led  him  often  to  think  on  the  goodness  of  the  Great 
Spirit  in  providing  all  kinds  of  fruits  and  herbs  for  the  use  of  man.  This  idea  quite 
took  possession  of  his  mind,  and  he  earnestly  i)rayed  that  he  might  dream  of  some- 
thing to  benefit  his  people ;  for  he  had  often  seen  them  suflering  for  the  want  of  fcwd. 

On  the  third  day  he  became  too  weak  and  faint  to  walk  about,  and  kept  his  bed. 
He  fancied,  while  thus  l^iug  in  a  dreamy  state,  that  he  saw  a  handsome  young  man, 
drest  in  green  robes,  and  with  green  plumes  on  his  head,  advancing  towards  him. 
The  visitor  said :  "  I  am  sent  to  ^oii,  my  friend,  by  the  Great  Spirit,  who  made  all 
things.  He  has  observed  you.  He  sees  that  you  desire  to  procure  a  benefit  to  your 
jK'ople.  Listen  to  my  words,  and  follow  my  instructions."  He  then  told  the  ^oung 
man  to  rise  and  wrestle  with  him.  Weak  as  he  was,  lie  tottered  to  bis  feet  and  began, 
but  after  a  long  trial,  the  handsome  stranger  said,  "  My  friend,  it  is  enough  lor  once ; 
I  will  come  again."     He  then  vanished. 

On  the  next  day  the  celestial  visitor  reappeared,  and  renewed  the  trial.  The  young 
man  knew  that  his  physical  strength  was  even  less  than  the  day  Ix^fore ;  but  as  this 
declined,  he  felt  that  his  mind  became  stronger  and  clearer.  Perceiving  this,  the 
stranger  in  plumes  again  spoke  to  liim.  "  To-morrow,"  he  said,  "  will  be  your  last 
trial.  Be  strong  and  courageous ;  it  is  the  only  way  in  which  you  can  obtain  the  boon 
you  seek."     He  then  departed. 

On  the  third  day,  as  the  young  faster  lay  on  his  pallet  weak  and  exhausted,  the 
pleasing  visitor  returned ;  and  as  he  renewed  the  contest,  he  looked  more  beautiful 
than  ever.  The  young  man  grasped  him,  and  .seemed  to  feel  new  strength  imparted 
to  his  body,  while  that  of  his  antagonist  grew  weaker. 

At  length  the  stranger  cried  out,  "  It  is  enough — I  am  beaten.  You  will  win  your 
desire  from  the  Great  Spirit.  To-morrow  will  be  the  scventli  day  of  your  last,  and 
the  last  of  your  trials.  Your  father  will  bring  you  food,  which  will  recruit  you.  I 
shall  then  visit  jou  for  the  last  time,  and  I  foresee  that  you  are  destined  to  prevail. 
As  soon  as  you  have  thrown  me  down,  strip  off  my  garments,  and  bury  me  on  the 
spot.  Visit  the  place,  and  keep  the  earth  clean  and  soft.  Let  no  weeds  grow  there. 
I  shall  soon  come  to  life,  and  reappear  with  all  the  wrappings  of  my  garments  and  my 
waving  plumes.  Once  a  month  cover  my  roots  with  fresh  earth ;  and  by  following 
these  directions  your  triumph  will  be  complete."     He  then  disappeared. 

Next  morning  the  youth's  father  came  with  food,  but  he  asked  him  to  set  it  by,  for 


232 


INTELLECTUAL  CAPACITY 


a  pftrticular  ri'ason,  till  the  nun  went  down.  Mi'iintiiiie  the  Hky-vi^<ito^  ciiiiio  for  liis 
iiniil  trial,  and  although  the  young  man  had  not  partaken  of  hifl  fathers  ofl'er  of  food, 
he  engaged  in  the  combat  with  hiw  visitor  with  a  feeling  of  HU{)eniatural  ntrength.  lie 
threw  him  down.  lie  then  »tripiK'd  off  his  gannents  and  plumes.  He  buried  his 
body  in  the  earth,  carefully  preparing  the  gniund,  and  removing  every  weed ;  and 
then  returned  to  his  fatiier's  lodge.  lie  kept  every  thing  to  himself,  revealing  nothing 
to  denote  his  vision  or  trials.  He  partook  sparingly  of  food,  and  soon  recovered  his 
perfect  strength.  But  he  never  for  a  moment  forgot  the  burial-place  of  his  friend. 
He  carefully  visited  it,  and  would  not  let  even  a  wild-flower  gmw  there.  Soon  he  saw 
the  tops  of  the  green  plumes  coming  out  of  the  ground,  at  flrst  in  spiral  jMjints,  then 
expanding  into  broad  leaves,  and  rising  in  green  stalks ;  and  finally  a.tsuming  their 
silken  fringes  and  yellow  tassels. 

The  spring  and  sunnner  had  now  passed ;  when  one  day,  towards  evening,  ho 
requested  his  father  to  visit  the  lonely  sjxit  where  he  had  fasted.  The  old  man  stood 
in  amazement.  The  lodge  was  gone,  and  in  its  place  stood  a  tall,  graceful,  and 
majestic  plant,  Avaving  its  taper  leaves,  and  displaying  its  bright-coloured  plumes  and 
tassels.  But  what  most  attracted  his  admiration  was  its  cluster  of  golden  ears.  "  It  is 
the  friend  of  my  dreams  and  visions,"  said  the  youth.  "  It  is  Mon-da-mhi,  it  is  the 
spirit's  grain,"  said  the  father.     And  this  is  the  origin  of  the  Indian  corn. 


3.    The  Woi.f-Brotiier. 


An  Indian  stood  on  the  borders  of  a  solitary  forest,  one  morning  early,  during  the 
summer  sea-son.  A  deep  silence  reigned  around,  and  there  was  nothing  to  break  the 
stillness  and  solitude  of  the  scene  but  the  wigAvam  that  stood  near  l>y,  in  which  the 
hand  of  death  was  about  to  be  laid  upon  the  master  of  the  hxlge  —  his  father.  Ho 
was  now  prostrated  by  sickness,  and  as  the  barks  that  covered  its  sides  were  lifted  up 
to  admit  the  air,  the  low  breathings  of  the  dying  man  could  be  heard,  mingled  with 
the  suppressed  moans  of  the  poor  disconsolate  wife,  and  thi'ce  children.  Two  of  the 
latter,  a  son  and  daughter,  were  almost  grown  up ;  the  other,  a  boy,  was  yet  a  mere 
child. 

These  were  the  only  human  beings  near  the  couch  of  the  lonely  and  fast-sinking 
hunter.  As  the  breeze  came  in  from  a  neighlwring  lake,  he  felt  a  momentary  return 
of  strength,  and  raising  himself  a  little  on  his  elbow,  addressed  his  jwor  and 
disconsolate  family. 

"I  leave  you — you,  who  have  been  my  partner  in  life,  but  you  will  not  stay  long 
behind  me.  You  shall  soon  join  me  in  the  happy  land  of  spirits.  Therefore  you  have 
not  long  to  suffer  in  this  world.     But  oh  !  my  children,  you  have  just  commenced  life, 


AND    CHARACTER. 


288 


and  mark  ine,  unkiiulnesH,  ingratitude,  and  every  wickedneHs  is  in  the  scene  before 
you.  I  left  my  kindred  and  my  tribe  to  come  to  thiH  unfrequented  place ;  because  of 
the  evils  of  which  I  have  just  warned  you.  I  have  contented  myself  with  tlio 
company  of  your  mother  and  yourselves,  and  you  will  find  that  my  motives  in  leaving 
the  haunts  of  men,  were  solicitude  to  keep  you  from  bad  examples,  which  you  would 
inevital)ly  have  followed. 

"  But  1  shall  die  contented,  if  you,  my  children,  promise  to  cherish  each  other,  and 
on  no  account  to  forsake  your  youngest  brother.  Of  him  I  give  you  particular 
charge." 

Exhausted  by  the  eflbrt,  he  took  breath  a  little,  and  then,  taking  the  hand  of  each 
of  his  elder  children,  continued  :  "  My  daughter,  never  forsake  your  little  brother ;  my 
son,  never  forsake  your  little  bmther."  "  Never !  never !"  responded  both ;  and  the 
father  sunk  back  on  lis  pallet,  and  soon  e*  pired.  His  wife,  agreeably  to  his  predictions, 
followed  him  to  the  '<,nive  after  the  briel  lapse  of  five  months.  In  her  last  moments, 
she  reminded  her  children  ol  the  pledges  made  to  their  departed  father,  and  pressed  its 
fulfilment.     They  readily  n.i  owed  their  promise. 

A  winter  pas.sed  awii '.  The  ^'r\,  being  ^he  eld>'st,  dictated  to  her  brothers,  and 
seemed  to  feel  a  tender  and  sisterly  aflec  n,  particularly  for  the  younger,  who  was 
sickly  and  delicate.  The  other  boy  -•>»•  showed  symptoms  of  restlessness,  and 
addressed  the  sister  as  follows  • 

"  My  sister,  are  we  always  '.o  i:  e  aa  if  there  w>..e  no  other  beings  in  the  world? 
Must  I  deprive  myself  of  the  ^  leasuro  of  associating  with  my  nwn  kind?  I  shall  seek 
the  villages  of  men.  I  have  determined,  and  you  cannot  ,y  .vent  me."  The  girl 
replied,  "  My  brother,  I  do  not  sav  no  to  what  you  desire.  We  are  not  prohibited  the 
society  of  our  fellow-men ;  but  we  were  told  to  cherish  each  other,  that  we  should  not 
act  separately  and  independent!  v.  and  that  neither  pleasure  nor  pain  ought  to  draw  us 
from  our  licli)les8  little  brother.  If  we  follow  our  own  gratification,  we  shall  surely 
forget  him,  whom  we  are  alike  bound  to  support. ' 

The  young  man  made  no  answer,  but,  taking  his  bow  and  arrows,  left  the  lodge  and  - 
never  more  returned. 

Many  moons  had  come  and  gone  after  his  deparTurc,  during  which  the  girl 
administered  t<  the  wants  of  the  younger  brother.  At  length,  she  found  solitude 
irksome,  and  b..\';>"  :o  desire  society;  but,  in  meditating  a  1  inge  of  life,  she  thought 
only  of  herself,  and  took  measures  to  abandon  her  little  brother,  as  her  elder  brother 
had  done. 

One  dn/y ,  after  she  had  collected  all  the  provisions  she  could  in  the  wigwam,  and 

proi  Id'  J  a  quantity  of  wood  for  making  fire,  she  said  to  her  little  brother,  "  My 

brother,  you  must  not  stray  from  the  lodge ;  I  am  going  to  seek  our  brother,  and  shall 

soon  return ;"  then,  taking  her  bundle,  she  set  out  in  search  of  habitations.     She  soon 

Pt.  II.  — .30 


234 


INTELLECTUAL   CAPACITY 


t  ' 


>iu   ( 


fuiiiid  thcin,  and  was  m  uinch  taken  up  witli  the  pleasiiros  anil  taniusenients  of  society, 
that  hei*  little  brotlier  in  the  l«)nesome  forest  was  entirely  forgotten. 

She  finally  acee[)ted  a  proixjsal  of  marriage;  and,  after  this,  dismissed  all 
remembrance  of  the  helpless  being  she  had  abandoned.  Her  elder  brother  had  also 
taken  a  wife,  and  entered  so  deeply  into  the  cares  and  business  of  life,  that  he  had  no 
thoughts  alwut  the  distant  home  where  he  had  drawn  his  first  breath,  and  where  the 
object  of  a  pledge  made  to  a  dying  father,  was  left  to  his  fate. 

As  stK)n  as  the  little  boy  had  eaten  all  the  food  collected  by  his  sister,  he  went  into 
the  woods  and  picked  berries,  and  dug  up  i-oots,  which  satisfied  his  hunger  as  long  as 
the  weather  was  mild.     But  as  tl\e  winter  drew  on,  he  was  obliged  to  quit  the  lodge, 
and  wander  about  in  very  great  distress.     He  often  passed  his  nights  in  the  clefts  and 
hollows  of  old  trees,  and  was  glad  to  eat  the  refuse  meals  of  the  wolves.     The  latter 
soon  became  his  only  resource,  and  he  mms  so  fearless  of  these  animals,  that  he 
would  si*  ''lose  by  them  while  the}'  devoured  their  prey ;  and  the  animals  themselves 
seemed  to  pity  his  condition,  and  would  always  leave  stmiething.     Thus  he  lived,  as  it 
were,  on  the  lK)unty  of  fierce  wolves,  imtil  spring  came  on,  and  began  to  enliven  the 
forest.     As  soon  as  the  ice  melted  in  the  big  lake,  and  left  it  free,  he  followed  his  new- 
found friends  and  companions  to  its  open  shores.     It  happened  that  his  elder  brother 
was  fishing  in  his  canoe  in  the  lake,  a  considerable  distance  from  shore,  when  he 
thought  he  heard  the  cry  of  a  child,  and  wondered  how  any  could  exist  on  so  bleak  a 
part  of  the  ct)ast.     He  listened  more  attentively,  and  heard  the  cry  refieatcd.     He 
made  for  the  shore  as  quickly  as  possible,  and  when  he  reached  the  land,  saAV  at  a 
distance  his  little  brotlier.     He  heard  him  singing  in  a  plaintive  voice  these  lines : 
Nesia,  Nesia,  shieg  wuh,  gushuh ! 
Ne  mien  gun-iew!     Ne  mien  gun-iew! 
My  brother,  my  brother, 
I  am  turning  into  a  wolf, 
I  am  turning  into  a  wolf. 
At  the  termination  of  his  song,  he  howled  like  a  wolf;  and  the  elder  brother  was 
s*-ll  more  astonh  "led  as  he  came  nearer,  to  see  his  little  broth»r  half  turned  into  a 
wolf.     He,  however,  leajwd  forward,  and  strove  to  catch  him  in  his  arms,  crying  out, 
"My  brother,  my  brother,  come  to  me."     But  the  boy  eluded  his  grasp  and  tied,  still 
singing,  "  I  am  turning  into  a  wolf,'"  and  howling  in  the  intervals. 

The  elder  brother,  conscience-struck,  felt  his  affections  returning  Avith  redoubled 
force,  and  therefore  continued  to  exclaim  in  great  anguish,  "  My  brother,  my  brother, 
come  to  me."  But  the  more  eagerly  he  approached,  the  more  rapidly  the  child  fled 
away,  and  the  change  in  his  body  went  on  until  the  transformation  was  complete.  At 
last  he  said,  "  I  am  a  wolf,"  and  bounded  out  of  sight. 

The  young  man,  and  his  sister  when  siie  heaiil  it,  felt  the  deepest  remorse,  and  both 
upbriiided  themselves  as  long  as  they  lived,  for  tiieir  cruelty  to  the  little  Iwy. 


AND   CHARACTER. 


2SC 


S  A  V  A  D  I  O . 


A   WYANIM)T   I.KfiEND. 


Sayadio  mourned  for  his  sistor,  for  she  had  died  .young  and  handsome.  At  length, 
he  resolved  to  go  to  the  land  of  souls  and  bring  her  back.  His  journey  was  long  and 
full  of  adventures,  but  it  would  h;.ve  proxed  of  no  advantage,  if  he  had  not  met  an 
old  man  just  as  he  was  on  the  point  of  giving  up  in  despair.  Tliis  old  man  gave  him 
a  magic  calabiish,  with  which  he  might  dip  up  the  spirit  of  his  sister,  should  he  succeed 
in  finding  her.  He  also  gave  him  the  young  damsel's  brains,  which  he  had  carefully 
kept ;  for  it  turned  out  that  this  old  man  was  the  keeper  of  that  part  of  the  si)irit-land 
to  which  he  was  journeying. 

Sayadio  now  went  on  with  a  light  heart,  but  was  astonished,  when  he  reached  tlie 
land  of  spirits,  that  they  all  lied  from  him.  In  this  perplexing  exigency'  Tarenyawago, 
the  master  of  ceremonies,  kindly  aided  him.  It  so  happened  that  all  the  souls  were 
at  this  time  gathered  for  a  dance,  according  to  the  custom  of  the  place. 

The  young  man  soon  recogniz-ed  his  sister  floating  through  the  dance,  and  rushed 
forward  to  embrace  her,  but  she  vanished  like  a  di-eam  of  the  night. 

Tarenyawago  furnished  him  with  a  mystical  rattle  of  great  power  to  bring  her  back. 
At  the  same  time,  the  deep-sounding  Taiwaiegun,  or  spirit-drum,  was  Jx'at  for  i>  ivnewal 
of  the  choral  dance,  and  the  Indian  flute  poured  forth  its  softest  notes. 

The  effect  of  the  music  was  instantaneous,  and  the  throng  of  spirits  became  innu- 
merable. Among  the  niunljer,  he  again  saw  his  sister.  Quick  as  thought,  Sayadio 
dipiwd  up  the  entranced  spirit  with  his  calabash,  and  securely  fastened  it,  in  spite  of 
all  the  efforts  of  the  captivated  soul  to  regain  its  liberty.  He  then  retraced  his  steps 
back  to  earth,  and  safely  reached  liis  lodge  with  his  precious  charge. 

His  own  and  his  sister's  friends  were  immediately  summoned,  and  the  l)ody  of  the 
maiden  brought  from  its  burial-place  to  be  reanimated  with  its  spirit.  Every  thing 
was  ready  for  the  ceremonies  of  the  resurrection,  when  the  thoughtless  curiosity  of  one 
of  the  female  friends  frustrated  all.  She  must  needs  peep  into  the  calabash  to  see  how 
the  disembodied  soul  looked,  upon  which  the  imprisoned  spirit  flew  out. 

Sayadio  gazed  with  both  his  eyes,  but  could  sec  nothing.  Her  flight  could  not  be 
traced  in  the  air,  and  he  sat  with  his  head  down  in  his  lodge,  moaning  and  lamenting 
that,  through  the  idle  curiosity  of  one  person,  all  the  trials  and  i^rplexities  of  his 
journey  to  the  land  of  spirits  had  come  to  naught. 


TTi'T~niiM 


^i 


w 


JM'^ 


f'i^ii  .iiiiiiia^-A^ 


VII.   TOPICAL   HISTORY.    A. 


(237) 


.  i 


11 


n 


mmmtmnmim 


■II  Liiiinii 


mi 


n 


■f 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Mnndans. 

2.  Pontiac  Manuscript :  Journal  of  the  events  of  the  Siege  of  Detroit  by  the 

confederated  Indians  in  1763. 

3.  Anacoana,  Queen  of  the  Caribs. 


1.     MANDANS. 


In  a  prior  paper,  (Vol.  T.,  p.  257,)  we  noticed  the  depopulation  caused  by  the  ravages 
of  the  sniall-pox  among  the  Indian  tribes  of  the  Valley  of  tlie  Missouri  in  1837,  and 
its  particular  severity  on  the  Mandans.  In  the  e.vcitement  of  the  moment,  this  tribe 
was  rept)rted  to  have  been  nearly  or  quite  exterminated.  Inquiry,  however,  denoted 
that  a  remnant  survived,  who  fled  from  their  villages  to  their  nearest  neighljors  and 
friends,  the  Minnetaries,  with  whom  they  resided  till  their  population  began  to  recover. 
Their  existing  population  was  estimated  in  our  last  tables,  (Vol.  I.,  p.  023,)  at  800. 

In  February  last,  the  attention  of  the  Superintendent  of  Indian  Affairs  at  St.  Louis, 
(D.  D.  Mitchell,  Esq.,)  was  called  to  the  subject.  lie  remarked  that  he  was  on  the 
Missouri  at  the  period  of  their  calamities  in  lb37,  and  was  conversant  with  the  facts. 
They  were  reduced  by  small-^wx  to  aljout  145  souls,  who  fled  from  the  scenes  o''  '!icir 
disaster  to  the  Minnetaries.  They  subsequently  returned  to  their  old  villages,  where 
he  estimates  their  present  ninnbers  at  about  500. 

He  describes  them  as  having  some  peculiarities  of  character.  They  formerly  dwelt 
iji  five  villages,  on  a  small  territory  which  does  not  exceed  twenty  miles  square,  and 
thinks  there  are  archaeological  indications  of  their  having  formerly  had  a  considerable 
jiopulation.  Their  numbers  have  been  thiimed  by  the  Sioux,  their  inveterate  enemies. 
He  thinks  they  do  not  speak  a  language  cognate  with  that  stock ;  a  conclusion  in 
which  he  is  not  sustained  by  the  researches  of  the  late  Mr.  Gallatin.  Vide  Synopsis 
of  the  Indian  Tribes  of  tiie  United  States. 

(280) 


'I  i 


240 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


Wliile  arraii^i'iiii'iits  aiv  on  fiKit  for  obtaining  a  complete  vwabulary  of  tlie  tribe, 
and  its  claims  to  distinct  historical  notice,  these  details  are  submitted  to  gratify  the 
inquiries  of  the  philoh'^ist  and  antiquarian. 


2.    PoNTiAc    Manuscript. 

The  fall  of  Canada  effected  one  of  the  most  important  changes  which,  so  far  as  is 
known,  has  ever  occurred  in  the  political  condition  and  intxjmational  relations  of  the 
Indian  tribes. 

For  one  hundred  and  fifty  years,  dating  from  the  reputed  colonization  of  Canada  in 
1G08,  to  this  celebrated  era,  consummated  by  the  heroic  enterprise  of  General  Wolfe, 
and  the  chivalric  death  of  Montcalm,  two  rival  sovereign  powers  had  been  held  up  to 
the  Indian  tribes  for  their  preference.  To  them,  each  of  these  powers  had  been 
represented  by  opposing  sides,  as  eml  "xcing  every  element  of  exaltation,  splendor,  and 
munificence,  that  could  dignify  a  human  ruler. 

Each  power  was  depicted  to  their  ever-wavering  minds  as  governed  by  higher 
dictates  of  love  and  justice,  in  the  adoption  and  regulation  of  their  Indian  policy,  than 
the  other ;  and  the  fitful  and  uncertain  periotls  of  peace  that  existed  between  the  two 
shining  crowns  of  England  and  Franco,  were  employed  by  the  local  oflicials  of  each 
power  in  strengthening  the  rival  claims  of  each  to  the  respect,  preference,  and  fealty 
of  the  tribes. 

This  struggle  for  the  supremacy  in  the  Indian  mind  and  policy  was  suddenly  termi- 
nated by  the  lowering  of  the  French  flag  on  the  castle  of  St.  Louis,  and  the  consequent 
cession  of  all  New  France,  save  Louisiana,  to  her  old  and  constant  rival. 

Only  one  sovereignty  was  henceforth  destined  to  sway  the  aboriginal  councils 
throughout  all  the  colonies,  from  the  confines  of  Georgia,  the  Spanish  colony  of  Florida, 
and  the  French  po.ssessions  of  Louisiana,  to  the  Arctic  Ocean. 

The  northern  and  western  tribes,  who  had  been  long  accustomed  to  march  into  the 
colonies  on  their  bloody  forays  under  the  sanction  of  the  French  power,  often  led  by 
its  miliUiry  officers,  and  always  havinf  their  natural  ferocity  whetted  by  the  hope  of 
plunder  and  the  rewards  of  cruelty,  did  not  hear  this  intelligence  with  pleasure.  It 
was  i-eceived  by  them  as  the  news  of  a  defeat.  They  believed  the  war  would  be 
resumed.  To  them  the  French  monarch  had  been  depicted  as  the  first  and  most 
glorious  of  human  sovereigns ;  unbounded  in  wisdom,  power,  benevolence,  and  love  for 
them.  If  fleets  and  armies  were  subdued  when  he  sent  them  against  the  English,  he 
had  at  will,  they  had  been  told,  new  fleets  and  armies  to  send. 

That  such  a  iwwer,  so  long  held  up  as  the  acme  of  human  greatness  and  govern- 
mental authority,  should  have  dropt  for  ever  the  truncheon  of  dominion — or,  to 
assimilate  the  term  to  their  phraseology — the  war-club  in  the  Canadas,  was  to  them 
incredible  and  inconceivable. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


241 


Foremost  among  those  bold  ami  original  men,  who  iK'lievcd  not  in  this  reiK)rt,  was 
Pontiac,  the  leader  of  the  united  Algom[uin  and  Wyandot  trilK's  in  Canada  and 
Michigan.  lie  saw  clearly  that  the  fall  of  the  French  in  Caimda  would  Imj  the  fall  of 
the  Indian  supremacy ;  that  Canada  had  Ix'en  sustained,  in  a  great  measure,  from  an 
early  day,  by  the  Indian  power;  and  that  the  defeat  of  the  one  would  be  the  defeat 
of  the  other.  lie  resisted,  by  every  art,  their  crossing  the  Alleghany  Mountains.  lie 
had  eloquence  as  well  as  foresight.  To  the  tribes,  whom  he  addressed  in  their  native 
tongue,  he  made  the  most  popular  and  persuasive  harangues.  He  appealed  to  their 
ancient  prejudices.  He  told  them  he  wa.s  under  a  divine  influence.  He  related  to 
them,  on  a  fonnal  occasion,  the  dream  of  a  visit  of  a  Delaware  prophet  to  Paiadi.se,  in 
a  manner  to  secure  the  Ixdief  of  his  hearers.  He  exhorted  them  to  adhere  to  their 
ancient  customs,  arms,  and  arts.  "  Rely,"  said  he,  ''  on  yonr  native  re.><ources,  and 
drive  tluwe  i)0<;s  in  keo  ri-OTUiXd  into  tlie  .sea."  To  Major  Rogers,  whom  he  met  on 
his  way  as  he  marched  a  detachment  destined  for  the  English  garrison  at  Detroit,  he 
exclaimed  in  a  proud  tone,  "  I  stand  in  the  path." 

He  and  his  Indian  allies  had  adroitly  carried  eleven  out  of  the  twelve  military  iM)sts 
which  the  English  jKJssessed  west  of  the  AUeghanies,  and  in  the  area  of  the  lakes. 
The  most  noted  of  these  Indian  conquests  was  the  old  fort  of  Michilimackinac,  which 
was  carried  on  the  4th  June,  17G3,  by  the  masque  of  ;>  ball-play;  and  the  garrison 
massacred  on  the  spot.'  Detroit,  the  twelfth  post,  and  the  l)est  garrisoned  of  all,  alone 
held  out;  and  he  had  reserved  the  conipiest  of  this  as  his  own  work.  He  assembled  a 
large  body  of  the  Indian  tribes  near  and  around  it,  with  all  their  forest-arms,  and  at 
first  concealed  his  design  under  the  guise  of  friendly  negotiation,  and  attempted  to 
take  the  fort  by  a  coup-de-nuiin.  lieing  foiled  in  this,  thnnigh  the  revelations  of 
an  Indian  l)elle,  he  besieged  the  fort  with  great  strictness.  He  fiix'd  burning  arrows 
into  the  ixwfs  of  the  houses.  He  captured  a  brigade  of  boats,  sent  up  the  river  Iron) 
Niagara  with  supplies.     He  sent  down  a  burning  raft  to  destroy  a  public  vessel. 

He  afterwards  defeated,  at  Bloody  Bridge,  a  large  and  well-appointed  party ;  which, 
muler  Captain  Dalzell,  aid  to  Sir  Jell'rey  Andieivt,  sallied  out  at  midnight  to  attack  his 
canq),  and  drove  them  in  with  a  sanguinary  slaughter,  in  which  the  connnander  fell. 
Tiie  garrison,  at  one  period,  wiis  driven  to  the  utmost  straits.  P]very  resource  was  cut 
off.  Not  a  soul  could  venture  beyond  the  walls  with  impunity.  They  talked  of  a 
surrender.  His  auxiliaries  committed  some  great  atrocities  during  the  siege,  among 
which  wius  the  murder  of  Major  Campbell,  who  went  to  his  camp  with  a  flag  of  truce : 
but  this  act  was  decried  by  Pontiac  as  being  without  his  knowledge  or  sanction.  The 
fort  received  succour  that  year,  after  a  tln-ee  months'  siege.' 


'  For  a  vivid  and  truthful  description  of  this  massacre,  by  an  eye-witness,  soo  Henry's  Travels  and  Adventures 
in  the  Indian  Territories,  A.  D.  1760  to  1770.     Now  York,  1  vol.  8vo.  p)).  330.     1809. 

'  History  of  the  late  war  in  North  America  and  tho  islands  of  the  West  Indies.  By  Thomas  Mantc, 
Assistant  Kngineer,  &e.,  and  Major  of  a  Brigade,  kc.     London,  177i,  1  vol.  4to,  552  pp. 

Pt.  II.  — 31 


1  i   . 


' :  j 


242 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


N 


The  following  journal,  detailing  the  operations  of  this  siege,  was  kept  in  French,  by 
an  inmate  of  the  fort,  who  was  conversant  with  the  daily  transactions  and  rumours. 
It  is  translated  literally  from  the  ill-composed  original,  its  historical  value  consisting 
entirely  in  its  authenticity.' 


Journal   of   the    Siege   op    Fort  Detroit,  by  the  coxfederate 
Indian    Nations,   acting    under    Pontiac. 

Detroit,  May  1th,  17G3. 

Pontiac,  head-chief  of  all  the  Ottawas,  Santeurs,  Poux,  and  all  the  nations  of  the 
lakes  and  rivers  of  the  north ;  a  proud,  vindictive,  warlike,  and  irritable  man ;  under 
pretence  of  some  insult  which  he  thought  he  had  received  from  Mr.  Gladwin, 
commander  of  the  fort;  fancied  that,  being  great  chief  of  all  the  nations  of  the  north, 
none  but  he  and  his  nation  had  a  right  to  inhabit  that  part  of  the  earth  :  (the  French, 
for  the  facility  of  trade,  had  had  a  post  there  for  above  sixty  years,  and  owing  to  their 
conquest  of  Canada,  the  English  had  governed  it  about  three  years.)'  This  chief  of  a 
nation  (whose  bravery  consists  in  treachery,  and  who  had  acquired  liis  influence  by  his 
handsome  appearance,)  resolved,  within  himself,  the  entire  destruction  of  the  English 
and  Canadian  nations.  To  succeed  in  his  project,  which  he  had  not  yet  imparted  to 
any  of  his  Ottawas,  he  engaged  them  in  his  pai*y  by  a  speech.  Being  naturally 
inclined  to  evil,  they  did  not  hesitate  to  obey  him,  but  as  they  were  not  sufficiently 
numerous  for  that  enterprise,  the  chief  tried,  in  a  council,  to  draw  into  his  party  the 
Poux  (Pottowattomie — S.)  nation.  This  nation  was  governed  by  a  chief  named  Minivoa, 
a  weak,  irresolute  man ;  who,  recognising  Pontiac  for  his  principal  chief,  and  knowing 
him  to  be  of  a  ferocious  disposition,  joined  him  with  all  his  band.  The  two  nations 
were  composed  of  about  four  hundred  men.  The  number  not  being  sufficient,  Pontiac 
tried  to  bring  over  the  Huron  nation,  then  divided  into  two  bands,  and  govemod  by 
two  separate  chiefs  of  very  different  dispositions ;  (they  were  nevertheless  directed  by 
Mr.  Potico,  a  father  Jesuit.)  One  of  the  chiefs  of  that  nation,  Yaka  resembled 
Pontiac  in  his  disposition;  the  other  a  man  of  great  circumspection,  consummate 
prudence,  not  naturally  inclined  to  evil,  and  not  easily  persuaded,  would  not  listen  to 
Pontiac's  deputies,  and  sent  them  back  as  they  had  come.'     The  deputies  sent  to  that 


'  Thip  MS.  hag  been  aptly  quoted  by  Mr.  Francis  Parkman,  in  his  interesting  and  comprehensive  "  History 
of  the  Conspiracy  of  Pontiac,"  just  published.  By  placing  the  original  amongst  the  materials  which  are 
designed  to  illustrate  our  general  Indian  History,  it  is  made  accessible  to  all. 

'  From  this,  the  date,  which  is  partly  obliterated  in  the  original,  may  be  inferred. 

*  Without  answer. 


^m 


■*r  t-*^ 'Ti^.r"  •"" 


Jlf^ 


(    ! 


'■','.. 


._-    .vA. 


:ir 


t 


I 


■•^•. 


^1 


o 


^-1 

-I, 


— I 

o 


O 

-1 
Q 

Q 


=) 


m 

^^HG^B  h. 

^BRJ 

■■! 

Ill 

TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


248 


part  of  the  same  nation  under  Yakiv,  were  heard,  and  the  war-neckhices '  (wampum- 
belt«)  sent  by  Pontiac  and  Minivoa,  chiefs  of  tlie  Ottawas  and  Poux,  were  received. 
They  resolved  ujion »  *  *  *  *  (a  customary  mode  among  the  Indians,)  that  a 
council  should  take  place  on  the  twenty-seventh  of  April,  at  the  river  Ecorces ;  to  tix 
the  day  and  hour  of  the  attack,  and  to  resolve  upon  the  precautions  necessary  to 
prevent  a  discovery  of  their  treason.  According  their  usual  mode  of  counting,  the 
Indians  decided,  as  I  mentioned  above,  that  the  council  should  take  place  on  the  15th 
day  of  the  moon ;  i.  e.  Wednesday,  27th  of  April. 

On  the  day  fixed  for  the  council,  the  Poux,  conducted  by  Minivoa,  and  the  Hurons 
by  Yaka,  repaired  to  tiie  rendezvous  on  the  river  Ecorces,  four  leagues  below  the  fort, 
towards  the  S.  W.  This  place  had  been  selected  by  Pontiac  for  his  camp,  on  leaving 
his  winter  quarters,  that  he  might  not  be  troubled  in  his  projects ;  this  step  produced 
some  surprise  among  the  French,  who  could  not  find  the  cause  of  it,  and  attributed  it 
to  the  whimsical  temper  common  to  the  Indians. 

The  council  was  held  between  the  three  following  nations ;  the  Ottawas,  the  Poux, 
(Pottowattomies,)  and  the  wicked  band  of  Ilurons.  Pontiac,  as  head-chief  of  all 
the  nations  of  the  north,  presided.  He  exposed  as  a  reason  for  liis  actions, 
supposed  necklaces,  (wampum-belts)  which  he  said  he  had  received  from  the  Great 
Father,  the  King  of  France,  to  fall  upon  the  English.  He  mentioned  several 
imaginary  insults  which  he  and  his  people  had  received  from  the  English  commander 
and  officers,  as  also  a  blow  given  by  a  sentinel  to  one  of  his  Indians,  who  was 
following  his  cousin.  The  Indians  listened  to  him  as  their  chief,  and  to  flatter  his 
vanity  and  increase  his  pride,  they  promised  to  be  guided  by  him.  This  cunning 
man,  glad  to  see  in  those  three  nations  (in  all  450  men)  so  much  submission,  took 
advantage  of  their  weakness  to  obtain  a  complete  sway  over  them.  To  accomplish 
this,  he  related  in  the  council  the  story  of  a  Loup  Indian,  (Lenape)  who  had 
made  a  journey  to  heaven,  and  spoken  to  the  master  of  life.  This  story  he  related 
with  so  much  eloquence,  that  it  made  on  them  all  the  effect  he  expected.  The 
story  deserves  a  place  here,  it  being  as  the  principal  of  the  blackest  of  crimes 
against  the  English  nation,  and  perhaps  against  the  French,  had  not  God  in  his  grace 
ordered  it  other\vise.  It  was  thus.  An  Indian  of  the  Loup  tribe,  anxious  to  know 
the  master  of  life,  (the  name  given  to  God  by  the  Indians,)  resolved,  without 
mentioning  his  design  to  any  one,  to  undertake  a  journey  to  Paradise,  which  he 
knew  to  be  God's  residence.  But  to  succeed  in  his  project,  it  was  necessary-  to  know 
the  way  to  the  celestial  regions.  Not  knowing  any  person  who,  having  been  there, 
might  aid  him  in  finding  the  road,  he  commenced  juggling,  in  the  hope  of  drawing  a 
good  augury  from  his  dream.  The  Indians,  even  those  converted  to  the  Christian 
religion,  are  very  superstitions,  and  place  much  faith  in  dreams.  It  is  very  difficult  to 
cure  them  of  that  superstition.     This  story  is  a  proof  of  what  I  advance. 


I 


I  ! 


'  In  the  text  is  tbo  word  collier,  a  necklace. 


'  Des  branches  de  porcelaine. 


1il 


i. 


iH 


.^1 


244 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


The  Loup  Indian  in  hi.s  dream  imagined  that  it  sufficed  to  commence  his  jonmey, 
and  that  by  continuing  his  walk  he  would  arrive  at  the  celestial  al)ode.     The  next 
morning  very  early,  he  equips  himself  as  a  hunter,'  *  *  *  *  ammunition,  and  a  boiler 
to  cook,  *  *  *  *  to  perform  the  jouniey  to  *  *  *  *.    The  commencement  of  his  journey 
was  pretty  favorable ;  he  walked  a  long  time  without  being  discouraged ;  having  always 
a  firm  (conviction)  that  he  would  attain  his  aim.     Eight  days  had  already  elapsed 
without  his  meeting  any  one  to  oppose  his  desires.     On  the  evening  of  the  eighth  day 
at  sunset,  he  stopped  as  usual,  on  the  banks  of  a  stream  at  the  entrance  of  a  little 
prairie,  a  place  he  thought  favorable  for  his  night  encampment.     As  he  was  preparing 
his  lodging,  he  ^xirceived  at  the  other  end  of  the  prairie  three  very  wide  and  well- 
beaten  paths ;  he  thought  this  somewhat  singular ;  he  however  continued  to  prepare 
his  retreat,  that  1.2  might  slielter  himself  from  the  weather;  he  also  lighted  a  fire. 
Whilst  cooking,  he  fancied  he  })crceived  that  the  darker  it  grew  by  the  disappearance' 
of  the  sun,  the  more  distinct  were   those  paths.     This  surprised  him ;   nay,  even 
frightened  him;  he  hesitated  a  few  moments.     Was  it  bettev  for  him  to  remain  in  his 
camp,  or  seek  another  at  some  distance  ?     While  in  this  incertitude  he  remembers  his 
juggling,  or  rather  his  dream.     He  thought  that  his  only  aim  in  undertaking  this 
journey  hiul  been  to  see  the  master  of  life.     This  restored  him  to  his  senses,  in  the 
belief  that  one  of  those  three  roads  was  the  one  leading  to  the  place  which  he  wished 
to  visit.    He  therefore  resolved  upon  remaining  in  his  camp  until  the  morrow,  when  ho 
would  at  random  take  one  of  these  three  roads.     His  curiosity,  however,  .scarcely 
allowed  him  time  to  take  his  meal ;  he  left  his  encampment  and  fire,  and  t(K)k  the 
widest  of  the  paths.     He  followed  until  the  middle  of  the  d.ay,  without  seeing  any 
thing  to  impede  his  progress ;  but  as  he  was  resting  a  little  to  take  breath,  he  saw 
suddenly  a  large  fire  coming  from  under  ground.     It  e.xcited  his  curiosity ;  lie  went 
towards  it,  to  see  what  it  might  be ;  but  as  the  fire  appeared  to  increase  as  he  drew 
nearer,  he  was  so  overcome  with  fear  that  he  turned  back  and  t(x»k  t!ie  widest  of  the 
other  two  paths.     Having  followed  it  for  the  same  space  of  time  as  he  had  the  first, 
he  perceived  a  similar  spectacle.     His  fright,  which  had  been  lulled  by  the  change  of 
road,  awoke,  and  he  was  obliged  to  take  the  third  path,  in  which  he  walked  a  whole 
day  without  discovering  any  thing.     All  at  (mce  a  mountain  of  marvellous  whiteness 
burst   uiK)u   his   sight;   this   filled   him  with   astonishment.     Nevertiieloss,  he  took 
courage,  and  advanced  to  see  what  the  mountain  might  be.     Having  arrived  at  the 
foot,  he  saw  no  signs  of  a  road;  he  became  very  sad,  not  knowing  how  to  continue  his 
way.     In  this  conjuncture  he  looked  on  all  sides,  and  saw  a  female  .seated  up(m  tlie 
mountain ;  lier  beauty  was  dazzling,  and  the  whiteness  of  her  garments  surpassed  that 
of  snow.     This  woman  sp.id  to  him,  in  his  own  language,  "  You  apjiear  sur[)rised  to 
find  no  longer  a  path  to  reach  your  wishes.     I  know  that  you  have  for  a  long  time 


'  The  stai-a  indicate  places  destroyed  or  totally  obliterated  in  tLe  original. 


'  Text,  oloignmcut. 


H  t 
R  1 

It 

i 

SbLj. 

■i" 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


245 


longed  to  see  and  speak  to  the  master  of  life,  and  that  you  have  undertaken  this 
journey  purposely  to  see  him.  The  way  which  leads  to  his  abode  is  ujxtn  this 
mountain.  To  ascend  it  you  must  undress  yourself  completely,  and  leave  all  your 
iiccoutrements  and  clothing  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain.  No  person  shall  injure  them. 
You  will  then  go  and  wash  yourself  in  the  river  which  I  am  showing  you,  and  after- 
w.ard  ascend  tlie  mountain." 

The  Loup  Indian  oljeyed  punctually  the  woman's  words ;  but  one  difficulty  remained. 
How  could  he  arrive  at  the  top  of  the  mountain,  it  being  steep,  without  a  path,  and 
as  smooth  as  glass  ?  He  questioned  the  woman  on  the  way  to  accomplish  this.  She 
replied,  that  if  he  really  wished  to  see  the  master  of  life,  he  must  ii?  mounting  oidy 
use  his  left  hand  and  foot.  Tliis  appeared  almost  impossible  to  the  Indian.  Encouraged 
however,  by  the  female,  he  commenced  ascending,  and  succeeded  after  much  trouble. 
When  at  the  top,  he  was  astonished  to  see  no  person,  the  woman  having  disappeared. 
He  found  himself  alone  and  without  guide.  Three  unknown  villages  were  in  sight; 
they  appeared  to  him  constructed  on  a  different  pl.an  from  his  own,  much  handsomer, 
and  more  regular.  After  a  few  moments'  reflection,  he  took  the  way  towards  the 
handsomest  in  his  ci/cs.'  When  al)out  half-way  from  the  top  of  the  mountain,  he 
recollected  he  was  naked,  and  feared  to  advance ;  but  a  voice  told  him  to  proceed,  and 
to  have  no  apprehensions ;  thfit  having  washed  himself,  (as  he  had  done,)  he  nn'glit 
walk  in  confidence,  lie  proceeded  without  hesitation  to  a  place  which  appeared  to  be 
the  gate  of  the  village,  and  stopped  until  it  might  be  opened.  While  he  was  consitlering 
the  beauty  of  the  exterior  of  the  village,  the  gate  opened ;  he  saw  coming  towards 
him  a  handsome  nuui,  dressed  all  in  white,  who  tooic  him  by  the  hand,  telling  him 
that  he  v>as  going  to  satisf^y  his  wishes,  by  leading  him  to  the  presence  of  the  nuister 
of  life.  The  Indian  sufl'ered  himself  to  be  conducted,  and  tliey  arrived  at  a  place  of 
unequalled  btuiuty.  The  Indian  was  lost  in  admiration.  He  then  saw  the  master  of 
life,  who  took  him  by  the  hand,  and  gave  him  for  a  seat  a  hat  bordered  with  gold. 
The  Indian,  afraid  of  spoiling  the  hat,  hesitated  to  sit  down ;  but,  being  ordered  to  do 
so,  he  obeyed  without  rejd}-. 

The  Indian  being  seated,  God  said  to  him:  "I  am  the  master  of  life  whom  thou 
wishest  to  see,  and  to  whom  thou  wishest  to  speak.  Listen  to  that  which  1  will  tell 
thee,  for  thyself  and  for  all  the  Indians.  I  am  the  maker  of  the  heaven  and  the  earth, 
the  trees,  laKes,  rivers,  men,  and  all  that  thou  seest  or  hast  seen  on  the  earth 
*  *  *  *.  And  because  I  love  you,  you  must  do  my  will,  you  must  also  avoid  that 
which  I  hale.  I  dislike  you  to  drink,  as  you  do,  until  you  lose  your  reason ;  I  wish 
you  not  to  fight  one  another.  You  take  two  wives,  c:  run  after  other  people's  wives ; 
you  do  wrong;  I  hate  such  conduct;  you  should  have  but  one  wife,  and  keep  her  until 
death.     When  you  go  to  war,  you  juggle,  you  sing  the  medicine-song,  thinking  you 


M 


u) 


i 


t\ 


i'ili 


i\ 


'ruward.s  timt  whicli  appeared  to  liim  tbc  Imiidsomcst. 


246 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


I 


;i  i; 


speak  to  me,  you  deceive  yourselves ;  it  is  to  the  Manito  that  you  speak ;  he  is  a 
wicked  spirit  who  induces  you  to  evil,  and  to  whom  you  listen  for  want  of  knowing 
me.  The  land  on  which  you  are  I  have  made  for  you,  not  for  others.  Wherefore  do 
you  suffer  the  whites  to  dwell  upon  your  lands  ?  Can  you  not  do  Avithout  them  ?  I 
know  that  those  whom  you  call  the  children  of  the  Great  Father,  supply  your  wants ; 
but  were  you  not  wicked  as  you  are,  you  would  not  need  them.  You  might  live  as 
you  did  before  you  knew  them.  Before  those  whom  you  call  your  brothers  had 
arrived,  did  not  your  bow  and  arrow  maintain  you  ?  You  needed  neither  gun,  powder, 
nor  an}'  other  object.  The  flesh  of  animals  was  your  food,  their  skins  your  raiment. 
But  when  I  saw  you  inclined  to  evil,  I  removed  the  animals  into  the  depths  of  the 
forest,  that  you  might  depend  on  your  brothers  for  your  necessaries,  for  your  clothing. 
Again  become  good,  and  do  my  will,  I  will  send  animals  for  your  sustenance.  I  do 
not,  however,  forbid  suflering  among  you,  your  fathers'  children ;  I  love  them,  they 
know  me,  thev  pray  to  mo.  I  supply  their  own  wants,  and  give  them  that  which  they 
bring  to  you.  Not  so  with  those  who  are  come  to  trouble  your  possessions.  Drive 
them  away,  wage  war  again:*t  them;  I  love  them  not,  they  '  .  •  me  not,  they  are 
my  enemies,  they  are  your  brotlier's  enemies.  Send  them  back  .o  the  laud  I  have 
made  for  them ;  let  them  remain  there. 

Here  is  a  written  prayer  which  I  give  thee,  learn  it  b}  heart,  and  teach  it  to  the 
Indians  and  children.  (The  Indian  observing  here  that  he  could  not  re.id,  the  master 
of  life  told  him,  that  when  he  returned  upon  earth,  he  should  give  it  to  the  chief  of 
the  village,  who  would  read  it  and  teach  it  to  him,  as  also  to  all  the  Indians.)  It 
must  be  repeated,  said  he,  morning  and  evening.  Do  all  that  I  have  told  thee,  and 
announce  it  to  all  tlie  Indians,  as  from  the  master  of  life.  Let  them  drink  but  one 
draught  or  two  at  most,  in  one  day.  Let  them  have  but  one  wife,  and  discontinue 
running  after  other  jwople's  wives  and  daughters.  Let  them  not  fight  between 
them.selves.  Let  them  not  sing  the  medicine-song,  but  pray ;  for  in  singing  the 
medicino-.song,  they  speak  to  the  Evil  Spirit.  Drive  from  ^our  lands,  added  the  master 
of  life,  these  dogs  in  red  clothing,  they  are  only  an  injury  to  you.  When  you  want 
any  thing,  apply  to  me,  as  your  brothers  do,  and  I  will  give  to  both.  Do  not  sell  to 
your  brothers  that  which  I  have  placed  on  earth  as  food.  In  short.  Income  good  and 
you  shall  want  notl'ing.  When  you  meet  one  another,  bow,  and  only  give  one 
another  the  *  *  *  *  hand  of  the  heart.  Abo\e  all,  I  commend  thee  to  repeat, 
morning  and  evening,  the  prayer  which  I  have  given  thee." 

The  Loup  promised  to  do  the  will  of  the  master  of  life,  and  also  to  recommend  it 
strongly  to  the  Indians;  adding,  that  the  master  of  life  should  Ijc  satisfied  witn  them.l 

Tlie  man  who  had  brought  him  in,  then  came  and  conducted  him  to  the  foot  of  thel 
mountain,  and  told  him  to  take  his  garments  and  return  to  his  village,  which  was 
immediately  done  by  the  Indian. 

Hia  return  much  surprised  the  inhabitants  of  his  village,  who  did  not  know  what 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


247 


liac  licome  of  him.  They  asked  him  wheiice  he  came,  but,  as  lie  had  been  enjoined 
to  spc  ik  to  no  one,  until  he  saw  the  chief  of  the  village,  he  motioned  to  them  with 
his  lu  nd,  that  he  came  from  alx)ve.  Having  entered  the  village,  he  went  innnediately 
to  th(;  chief's  wigwam,  and  delivered  to  him  the  2)rayer  and  laws  entrusted  to  his  care 
by  the  master  of  life. 

This  adventure  was  soon  spread  among  the  inhabitants  of  the  village.  They  came 
to  hear  the  word  of  the  master  of  life.  The  report  soon  reached  the  neighboring 
villages.  Crowds  came  to  see  the  pretended  traveller,  and  carried  their  news  from 
village  to  village;  until  it  reached  Pontiac.  This  chief,  believing  it  as  we  do  an  article 
of  faith,  fixed  it  to  the  minds  of  all  the  council,  who  listened  to  him  as  to  an  oracle. 
They  told  him  that  he  had  only  to  speak,  for  thoy  were  ready  to  do  ivhatever  he 
required  of  them. 

Pontiac,  glad  of  the  success  of  his  speech,  told  the  Ilurons  and  Poux  (Pottawatto- 
mies)  to  return  to  their  villages,  that  in  four  days  he  and  the  young  men  of  his  village 
would  go  to  the  fort,  and  dance  the  pipe-dance ; '  and  during  the  dance,  other  young 
men  would  go  about  the  fort  to  examine  every  thing;  —  the  number  of  the  English 
garrison,  that  of  the  traders,  and  the  hou.ses  they  inhabited.  This  design  he  carried 
into  execution. 

On  Sunday,  1st  '>f  May,  about  three  in  the  afternoon,  (the  French  then  returning 
from  vespers,)  Pontiac,  with  forty  chosen  men,  appeared  at  the  gate,  but  the 
commander,  who  hi.d  learnt  .something  of  the  conduct  of  the  Indian.^  hud  ordered  the 
sentinels  to  prevent  the  entrance  of  any  of  them.  This  surprised  Pontiac  and  his 
troop,  as  they  expected  to  be  admitted  as  usual.  They  sent  Mr.  La  Butte,  their 
interpreter,  to  tell  tiie  commander  that  they  came  to  amuse  him,  and  to  dance 
the  pii)e-daiice.  15y  M.  La  IJutte's  desire,  their  request  was  granted,  and  thirty 
of  them  repaired  before  Mr.  Caiiipbell's  Louse,  (tlie  second  commander.)  They 
commenced  dancing  and  striking  the  post,  showing  Ibrth  tiieir  warlike  exploits. 
From  time  to  time  they  gave  *  ''"  *  ''"  to  the  commander  and  the  ofTicers  who 
were  present.  Tiie  Indians  said  to  tiicni.  to  brave  tlieiii.  that  tiiey  had  several 
times  struck  the  English,  and  would  do  so  again,  anil  linishing  their  di.scour.se, 
they  asked  for  bread,  toliacco,  and  beer,  wlii'li  were  given  tliem.  They  remained 
long  enough  to  give  their  companions  time  to  examine  eveiy  thing  in  the  fort. 
Neither  English  nor  French  mistrusted  them,  it  b(!ing  customary  for  the  Lidians 
to  wander  every  where  without  any  opposition.  The  latter,  after  having  gone 
round  the  fort  and  well  examined  every  thing,  came  to  the  dancers,  who,  witliout 
taking  any  notice,  accompanied  them  to  their  village,  then  situated  a  little 
al)ove  the  fort,  (ui  the  other  side  of  the  river,  about  E.  N.  E.  To  this  place,  according 
to  Pontiac's  orders,  all  the  Indians  had  repaired  on  the  preceding  Friday. 


,  hi' 


Culuinct. 


248 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


On  their  rotuni  to  the  vilhige,  the  spies  rehvted  minutely  to  their  chief  all  they  had 
seen,  the  movements  of  the  English,  and  the  probable  number  of  the  garrison.  After 
this  report,  Pontiac  sent  deputies  to  the  Ilurons  and  Poux,  (Pottawattomies,)  that  they 
might  know,  through  the  wampum-belts,  what  was  taking  place  in  the  fort. 
Mackatepelioit,  second  chief  of  the  Ottawas,  and  another  Indian  of  note  among  them, 
were  sent  to  Yaka,  chief  of  the  wicked  band  of  Ilurons.  Two  others,  also  of  note, 
M'ere  sent  to  Minivoa,  chief  of  the  Poux,  (Pottawattomies.)  who  received  them  joyfully, 
and  promised  that  he  and  his  tribe  should  be  ready  at  the  first  warning  of  their  head- 
chief. 

Pontiac,  ever  occupied  with  his  project,  and  who  nourished  in  his  bosom  a  poison 
which  was  to  prove  fatal  to  tlie  English,  and  perhaps  to  the  French;  sent  on  the 
following  da\',  May  the  2d,  messengers  to  each  village,  Huron  and  Poux,  with  orders 
to  examine  every  thing  among  those  tribes ;  for  he  feared  opposition  in  his  designs. 
Ilis  messengers  Mere  ordered  to  tell  those  trilx's,  that  on  Thursday,  the  5th  day  of 
May,  at  midday,  hIiouW  he  held  a  great  council  at  the  Poux  village,  situated  half  a 
league  below  the  fort  at  the  south-west.  Tliat  the  three  nations  nuist  be  there.  No 
women  were  to  be  admitted  for  fear  of  a  discovery.  On  tin  day  appointed,  all  the 
Ottawas,  headed  by  Pontiac,  and  the  Ilurons  by  their  cliiif  Yaka,  repaired  to  the 
village  of  the  Poux,  where  the  council  was  to  take  place.  They  tcok  care  to  send 
away  the  women,  that  they  miglit  not  know  the  result  of  their  deliberations.  To 
prevent  interruption,  Pontiac  caused  sentinels  to  be  placed  around  the  village.  These 
precautions  having  been  taken,  the  Indians  sat  do\\  n,  forming  a  circle,  each  one  being 
placed  according  to  his  rank,  and  Pontiac,  as  chief  of  the  league,  spoke  to  them  aa 
follows : 

It  is  important,  my  brothers,  tliat  we  should  exterminate  that  nation  which  only 
seeks  our  death.  You  know  as  Avell  as  I  do,  that  our  wants  are  no  longer  supplied  as 
they  were  with  our  brothers,  the  French.  Those  Englishmen  sell  us  their  goods  twice 
as  dear  as  the  French  did,  and  their  merchandise  is  good  for  nothing ;  scared}'  have  we 
bought  a  blanket,  or  any  other  covering,  than  we  must  think  of  getting  another;  when 
we  wish  to  go  to  our  winter-cjuarter;<,  they  will  not  give  us  credit  as  the  French  did. 
When  I  go  and  see  the  Englisli  cliief,  and  tell  l.im  of  the  death  of  our  friend.s,  instead 
of  weeping  as  did  the  French,  he  laughs  at  me  and  you.  If  I  ask  him  for  any  thing 
for  our  sick  people,  he  refuses,  and  tells  me  that  he  has  no  need  of  us.  You  may  Avell 
see  that  he  seeks  our  death.  Brothers,  let  us  unite  to  vow  their  destruction,  we  must 
wait  no  longer,  there  is  no  obstacle,  their  nundxT  is  small,  we  can  manage  them  ;  all 
our  friendly  tribes  are  their  enemies,  and  wage  war  against  them,  wherefuie  do  we  not? 
Are  we  n-'t  men  as  well  as  they?  Have  I  !iOt  shown  you  the  wampum-belts  I  have 
received  fnnn  our  Great  Fathers,  the  French,  to  induce  us  to  fall  on  tlicm  ?  Why  do 
we  not  listen  to  his  word?  What  do  we  fear?  Do  we  fear  that  our  brothers  the 
French,  who  reside  here,  may  prevent  us?     They  are  unac<puiinted  with  our  designs, 


'    ?  ., 


f 


ToriCAL    HISTORY. 


249 


and  did  thoy  know  them,  they  could  not  do  it  if  they  wished.  Yon  know  all,  as  well 
as  I  do,  tliat  when  the  English  came  on  our  lands,  to  drive  away  our  father  Bellester, 
they  took  from  the  French  their  guns,  and  that  they  have  no  arms  to  defend 
themselves.  The  time  is  come,  let  us  strike.  If  some  of  the  French  join  them,  make 
war  to  them,  as  if  they  were  English.  Recollect  what  the  master  of  life  said  to  our 
brother  the  Lenape  Indian,  that  concerns  us  as  much  as  it  does  that  tribe.  I  have  sent 
wampum-L^'lts  and  messages  to  our  brothers  the  Santeur  (Chippewas)  of  Saginaw,  to 
our  brothers  the  Ottawas  of  Michilimackinac ;  to  those  of  the  river  a  la  Franche,  to 
induce  them  to  join  us.  They  will  be  here  ere  long.  Before  they  come,  let  us  strike. 
No  time  is  to  be  lost.  When  we  have  defeated  the  English,  we  shall  see  what  is  to  be 
done.     We  shall  prevent  their  returning  on  our  lands. 

This  speech,  pronounced  by  Pontiac  with  much  energy,  had  on  the  council  all  the 
effect  he  expected.     Tliey  all  vowed  the  entire  destruction  of  the  English. 

They  agreed,  at  the  end  of  the  council,  that  Pontiac,  at  the  head  of  sixty  men 
should  go  to  the  fort  to  ask  the  commander  for  a  grand  council ;  that  he  and  his  men 
should  have  arms  concealed  under  their  blankets,  and  that  the  remainder  of  the  tribe 
should  follow,  armed  witli  clubs,  poniards,  and  knives,  also  concealed ;  and  should  also 
enter  the  fort  as  if  they  were  walking,  that  they  might  not  be  suspected ;  while  the 
others  were  holding  a  council  with  the  commander.  The  Ottawa  women  were  also  to 
be  provided  with  short  guns  and  other  offensive  arms,  hidden  in  their  blankets,  and  to 
go  in  the  street  behind  the  fort,  there  to  wait  the  signal,  which  was  to  be  a  war-cry 
from  the  great  chief,  when  all  were  to  fall  on  the  English.  They  were  to  take  great 
care  not  to  injure  the  French  who  dwelt  in  the  fort.  The  Hurons  and  the  Poux  were  to 
form  two  bands,  one  of  which  was  to  go  to  the  lower  part  of  the  ricer  to  stop  all  comers, 
and  the  other  was  to  surround  the  fort  at  a  distance,  to  kill  those  who  were  working 
out  of  it.  Each  tribe  was  to  sing  the  war-song  in  their  village  that  same  day. 
Every  measure  being  agreed  upon,  each  tribe  withdrew  to  its  village,  determined 
on  executing  the  orders  of  the  great  chief.  But,  however  careful  they  were  to 
prevent  discovery,  God  did  not  permit  their  designs  to  remain  concealed,  as  /  am 
yoiiHj  to  rd'ite. 

All  Ottawa  Indian,  called  Mahigan,  who  had  entered  but  reluctantly  into  the 
con.'^piracy,  and  wlio  felt  disphasod  with  the  steps  his  people  were  about  taking,  came 
on  the  Friday  night  without  the  knowledge  of  the  other  Indians,  to  the  gate  of  the 
fort,  and  asked  to  be  admitted  to  the  presence  of  the  commander,  saying  that  he  had 
something  of  importance  to  tell  him.  The  gates  having  been  opened,  they  conducted 
him  to  Mr.  Campbell,  second  commander,  who  sent  word  to  Mr.  Gladv.in  his  chief. 
They  wished  to  send  for  the  interpreter,  Mr.  Labutte,  to  which  the  Indian  objected, 
saying  that  he  (the  Indian)  spoke  French  well  enough  to  be  understood  by  Mr. 
Campbell,  He  unfolded  to  those  two  commanders  the  conspiracy  of  the  Indians, 
making  known  their  bad  intentions,  how  they  had  sworn  the  loss  of  the  English,  how 
I>T.  II.  — :!li 


b  ' 


t^  J 


250 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


in  the  course  of  the  next  day  they  were  to  fall  on  them.  He  advised  them  to  be  on 
their  guard,  he  afterwards  begged  the  commander  not  to  mention  any  thing  of  his 
communication  with  them,  either  to  the  French  or  the  English,  fearing  it  would  sooner 
or  later  come  to  the  ears  of  the  other  Indians,  who,  on  being  told  of  it,  would  not  Itiil 
to  put  him  to  death,  enraged  as  they  would  be  at  their  being  disappointed.  The 
commander  thanked  him,  and  wished  to  make  him  some  presents.  The  Indian  refused 
them,  desiring  the  commander  not  to  betray  him.  They  gave  him  a  promise  to  that 
effect,  and  kept  it. 

The  commanders,  on  that  reiwrt,  which  they  saw  no  reason  to  doubt,  without  how- 
ever imparting  any  thing  of  what  they  knew,  ordered  that  at  daybreak  the  guard 
should  be  doubled ;  that  there  should  be  two  sentinels  at  each  large  gate ;  and  that 
the  two  smaller  ones  should  be  stopped  up,  which  was  immediately  executed.  They 
ordered  the  officers  to  examine  the  arms  of  their  soldiers,  and  have  them  ready  to 
appear  at  the  first  sound  of  the  drum.  They  also  ordered  that  all  should  be  done 
quietly ;  that  the  Indians,  on  coming  into  the  fori,  should  not  know  that  they  wore 
discovered.  These  ordera  were  so  well  executed  that  the  French  perceived  nothing 
new. 

The  day  which  might  have  proved  fatal  to  the  English,  and  perhaps  to  the  French, 
having  arrived,  (it  being  the  7th  of  May  and  the  20th  of  the  moon  as  the  Indians  are 
wont  to  reckon,)  Pontiac,  who  still  thought  his  design  undiscovered,  ordered  in  the 
morning  his  people  to  sing  the  wi!i-song  in  his  \  iUage,  and  desiring  *  *  *  *  and  *  *  *  * 
to  put  down  feathers  upon  hi-^  head,  the  dross  used  by  Indians  going  to  war.  P]ach 
was  to  be  provided  with  the  necessary  weapons,  and  thus  equipped  to  come  alwut  ten 
in  the  forenoon,  and  ask  for  a  council.  All  his  people,  sixty  in  number,  prepared  for 
the  council,  entered  the  house  occupied  by  Mr.  Campbell,  second  conmiander,  where 
they  found  the  comma mler-iiv<hief,  Mr.  Gladwin,  with  part  of  the  officers,  whom  he 
had  acquainted  with  tlie  rash  design  of  Pontiac.  They  liad  arms  concealed  in  their 
pockets.  The  officers  were  preparing  the  troops  to  appear  in  the  case  of  need.  All 
this  was  done  so  well,  that  tlie  Indians  had  not  the  least  suspicion.  The  council  took 
place,  and  'aieanwhile  all  the  other  Ottawas  entered,  and  each  took  the  place  which 
had  beo>i  previously  assigned  to  bin  . 

Pon  iac,  in  the  council,  thinking  the  tiiiiC  had  come  for  his  people  to  be  in  the  fort, 
and  ivady  to  commence  the  attack,  went  out  to  see  if  all  were  ready,  and  also  to  gi\e 
{;.e  signal  which  was  to  be,  as  I  have  mentioned  above,  a  war-cry.  He  perceived  that 
some  movement  was  attracting  the  attention  of  his  people  towards  the  square.  lie 
wished  to  see  what  it  vas,  ;ti,(  jwrceivcd  the  soldiers  under  arms  and  exercising.  This 
forbode  no  good  for  )>".  >  design.  lie  S!. ','  that  he  was  discovered,  and  that  his  intention 
was  defeated.  ThI.!  disconcerted  him,  and  obliged  him  to  re-enter  the  council-room, 
where  his  people  were  waiting  for  him  to  give  the  signal  to  commence  the  attack. 
They  were  much  surprised  on  seeing  him  return.     They  mintntsteil  that  being  disco- 


•    l'I 


fy-'^'^bkt' 


!  ' 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


251 


vered,  and  not  being  able  to  succeed  on  tbe  present  occasion,  they  must  then  go  and 
defer  their  intention  till  another  da^'  Tliey  spoke  some  time  among  themselves,  and 
without  bidding  any  one  adieu,  or  uttering  a  word,  they  went  to  their  village  to  take 
other  steps  not  to  be  discovered,  and  try  their  success  again. 

On  arriving  at  the  village,  Pontiac  was  agitated  by  different  passions ;  anger,  fury, 
rage,  he  resembled  a  lion  which  has  lost  its  young.  IIo  assembled  his  young  people, 
and  inquired  of  them  if  they  knew  who  had  betrayed  him.  I  see,  said  he,  that  the 
English  have  been  warned.  lie  ordered  them  to  make  inquiries  and  endeavor  to 
discover  the  traitor,  as  his  death  was  necessary. 

Their  inquiries,  however,  proved  fruitless.  lie  who  had  Ijetrayed  them  had  taken 
care  to  prevent  tlieir  discovering  him.  However,  about  four  in  the  afternoon,  a  false 
rumor  was  spread  in  the  village,  that  a  (Sauteuse)  woman  had  betrayed  them,  and 
that  she  was  in  the  Poux  (Pottowattomio)  vill.igc.  Pontiac  immediately  ordered  four 
of  his  warriors  to  fetch  her.  Those  jjeoplc,  naturally  fond  of  disorder,  were  not  slow 
in  executing  the  order  of  their  chief;  they  crossed  the  river  .and  passed  into  the  fort, 
with  no  other  things  tiian  their  land  and  /mires  in  their  hands,  exclaiming  as  they 
went  along,  that  they  were  disappointed.  This  made  the  Fivncli  inhabitants  of  the 
(Viiat/f,  who  were  unacquainted  with  their  designs,  think  they  had  some  bad  intention 
either  towards  tliem  or  the  English.  They  arrived  at  the  Poux  village,  and  effectually 
found  the  woman,  who  was  not  thiuJiiiig  of  (hem.  They  took  her,  and  making  her 
walk  before  them,  uttered  cries  of  joy,  as  if  they  had  a  victim  to  satisfy  their  cruelty. 
They  brought  her  to  the  fort,  and  led  her  before  the  commander,  to  learn  if  it  was  not 
from  her  that  he  had  found  out  their  design.  But  all  this  was  to  no  purpose.  They 
obtained  of  the  commander  bread  and  beer  for  the  woman  and  themselves,  and  took 
her  before  their  chief,  in  the  village.  The  question  now  was,  in  the  village,  to  invent 
some  now  trick  to  mask  their  treason,  and  execute  their  bad  designs.  Pontiac,  whose 
genius  always  provided  him  with  new  resources,  said  that  he  had  prepared  another 
plan,  which  would  be  more  successful  than  the  first.  That  on  the  ensuing  day  he 
would  eonnnence  on  it,  and  would  go  and  speak  to  the  commander,  and  try  to 
persuade  him  that  the  information  he  had  received  was  false,  and  that  he  would 
nuuuige  HO  well  in  proving  what  he  said,  that  the  English,  falling  insensibly  into  his 
snare,  could  not  fail  to  be  defeated. 

But,  fortunately,  the  connnauder  and  officers  who  had  escaped  the  danger  which 
threatened  them,  but  who  were  secure  no  hniger  than  when  they  were  upon  their 
guard,  were  not  men  to  suffer  themselves  to  be  surprised  by  tlie  flattering  speeches  of 
a  traitor.  So  that  all  that  the  cunning  of  Pontiac  might  make  him  assert  was  sure  to 
prove  useless.  lie,  nevertheless,  feeling  confident  of  success,  came  to  the  fort  on 
Sunday,  the  8th  of  May,  about  one,  acconi[)aiiii'd  liy  Mackapocelite,  Breton,  and 
Sliawawnon,  chiefs  of  tlio  same  Ottawa  tribe.  Tliey  brought  with  them  a  cuhimet, 
(called  among  them  the  calumet  of  peace,)  and  asked  to  lie  admitted.    The  commander 


l:^  I 


If  ( 

I 
II 


;i, ! 


Ill 


252 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


■  I 


;(i  f] 


■-■i' 


gave  them  a  hearing ;  and  they  endeavored  by  their  speeches  to  deceive  him,  and 
draw  him  and  his  troops  into  the  snares  they  had  prepared  for  them.  The  commander, 
who  liad  received  a  recent  warning,  pretended  to  Mieve  them,  notwithstanding  what 
he  had  been  told.     He,  however,  was  on  his  guard. 

Pontiac  told  him,  as  a  proof  of  his  having  no  bad  design,  that  he  had  brought  the 
calumet  of  peace,  for  them  all  to  smoke,  as  a  sign  of  union  and  confidence;  and  that 
he  intended  to  leave  it  in  their  hands,  as  a  mark  of  his  uprightness ;  and  that  so  long 
as  the  commander  had  it,  he  should  fear  nothing  from  them.  The  connnander 
accepted  the  calumet,  knowing  it,  however,  to  be  but  a  small  guarantee  against  the 
bad  faith  of  an  Indian.  After  the  commander  had  received  it,  Pontiac  and  his 
chiefs  went  away,  highly  pleased ;  believing  they  had  succeeded  in  drawing  the 
English  into  the  snares  prepared  by  his  treachery;  but  he  was  deceived  in  his 
expectations. 

They  returned  to  their  village,  as  glad  as  if  their  whole  enterprise  had  succeeded ; 
they  told,  in  a  few  words,  their  young  people  of  their  negotiation,  and  sent  deputies 
to  the  wicked  band  of  the  Ilurons,  to  tell  tliem  of  wliat  had  passed ;  as  aho  that  the 
next  day  was  to  decide  the  fate  of  the  English,  and  that  they  nuist  lie  ready  at  the 
first  warning. 

Pontiac,  the  better  to  play  his  part,  and  show  that  he  Inid  abandoned  all  thoughts 
of  his  bad  designs,  invited,  about  four  in  the  aftenuwn,  all  the  Ilurons  and  the  Poux 
to  come  and  play  at  ball  with  the  young  people;  many  French  from  l)oth  sides  of  the 
river  came  to  play  also,  and  were  well  received  by  the  three  nations.  The  play  lasted 
until  seven,  and  being  ended,  every  one  thought  of  returning  home.  The  French 
who  lived  on  the  other  side  of  the  river,  to  return  home,  were  obliged  to  cross  the 
river,  and  in  entering  their  canoes,  they  uttered  cries  and  saw-saw-quas,  (war-whoop,) 
as  is  done  commonly  by  the  Indians  who  conquer  in  the  plays. 

The  commander,  all  the  time  on  watch,  thought  ])v  those  cries  that  the  Indians 
were  crossing  the  river,  and  coming  to  the  fort  to  murder  them.  They  ordered  the 
gates  to  te  shut,  and  the  soldiers  and  merchants  to  repair  to  the  ramparts,  to  defend 
them  in  case  of  attack.  But  it  was  only  a  false  alarm,  caused  by  the  imprudence  of 
the  young  French  people,  who  knew  no  better. 

Pontiac,  who  had  no  thought  of  their  coming  to  the  fort,  was  at  that  time  occupied 
with  the  Ilurons  and  Poux,  who  had  remained  in  the  village,  when  the  game  was 
over.  He  mentioned  to  them  all  the  circumstances  of  tlie  negotiation  between  the 
commanders  and  himself,  (with  his  chiefs,)  telling  them  that,  a.s  he  had  agreed  with 
those  gentlemen,  he  was  to  return  on  the  ensuing  day  to  .smoke  the  calumet  of  peace, 
(or  ratiier  of  treason,)  and  that  he  hoped  to  succeed.  But  he  was  reckoning  without 
his  host. 

On  the  moon  day,  (9th  of  May,)  the  first  day  of  Rogations,  according  to  the  custom, 
the  curate   and  all  the  clergy  made  a  procession  out  of  the  fort,  \'ery  peaceably. 


m 


^ 


h 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


2S8 


The  mass  was  celebrated  in  the  same  manner.  Every  one  went  home,  wondering 
what  the  day  would  bring  forth,  well  knowing  that  Pontiac  would  make  some  new 
attempt.  Tlie  well-inclined  people  secretly  Ijewailed  the  sad  fate  which  threatened 
the  English,  whose  garrison  only  consisted  of  about  one  hundred  and  forty  men, 
including  the  oflicers,  eight  in  numlier,  and  about  forty  merchants,  or  men  in  their 
service.  Tliey  had  also  Ijoats  of  diflerent  sizes,  placed  opposite  the  fort,  to  defend  it 
on  the  side  of  the  river.  Tliis  was  little,  if,  unfortunately,  the  Indians  had  been  good 
soldiers. 

Pontiac,  who  concealed  in  his  heart  the  murderous  htife,  which  was  to  cut  the 
thread  of  the  life  of  the  English,  prepared  (as  he  had  the  day  Ixsfore  mentioned  to 
the  Hurons  and  Poux)  to  come  to  the  fort  with  fifty  men  of  his  tribe.  The  remainder 
were  to  act  in  the  same  way  as  on  the  preceding  Saturday.  He  came  to  the  gates 
with  his  people,  about  eleven,  but  entrance  was  refused  him,  according  to  the  orders 
of  the  conunander.  He  insisted  on  being  admitted  to  the  presence  of  the  commander, 
saying  that  he  and  his  chiefs  came  only  to  smoke  the  calumet  of  peace,  as  had  been 
promised  by  the  commander.  The  answer  was,  that  he  was  welcome  to  come  in,  but 
only  with  twelve  or  fifteen  of  his  principal  people,  and  no  more.  He  replied,  that  all 
his  people  wished  to  smell  the  .smoke  of  the  calumet,  and  that  if  his  people  were  not 
admitted,  he  would  not  come  in.  This  was  refused,  and  he  was  obliged  to  return  to 
his  village  much  displeased."     The  English,  however,  cared  but  little  for  that. 

Pontiac,  enraged  at  the  failure  of  this  last  stratagem,  and  that  of  all  his  projects, 
on  entering  his  village,  took  a  war-club  and  sang  the  war-song,  saying,  that  since 
he  could  not  destroy  the  English  who  were  in  the  fort,  he  would  kill  those  who  were 
out  of  it.  He  ordered  that  all  his  jxiople,  men,  women,  and  children,  shoidd  cross  the 
river  to  the  same  side  as  the  fort,  in  order  the  better  to  harass  the  inhabitants,  and 
his  camp  should  be  placed  on  the  ricer  lelow  Mr.  Riptide  Meloches,"^  half  a  league 
above  the  fort.  This  was  done  exactly.  He  divided  his  people  into  several  bands, 
to  strike  in  diflferent  places.  One  baiul  went  twelve  leagues  from  the  fort,  where 
dwelt  an  old  English  woman  with  her  two  boys,  who  cultivated  about  seven  or  eiglit 
acres  of  their  own  land,  and  who  had  many  horned  cattle,  such  as  oxen  and  cows. 
These  poor  people  came  to  their  death  very  unexpectedly ;  they  were  scalped,  their 
furniture  plundered,  their  house  burnt.  One  would  have  thought,  to  behold  this 
terrible  .spectacle,  that  fire  teas  on  the  s'uh- of  thr  Finl'uDis;  for  the  bodies  were  more 
than  half  burnt  in  the  house.  The  Indians  killed  a  part  of  the  cattle,  and  drove  oil" 
the  remainder ;  some  of  which  escaped,  and  were  picked  up  by  the  inhabitants  of  the 
coast. 

While  the  first  band  were  committing  those  murders,  the  other  band  went  to  Hog 
Island,  where  dwelt  one  Fisher,  a  sergeant  of  the  English  troops.     This  man  and 

'  The  chief  desired  the  French  to  stay  in  their  dwellings.     Two  came  in  and  went  out  again. 
'  Original. 


III! 


If  i! 


'', 


254 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


family,  composed  of  five  or  six  individuals,  were  tilling  "  on  halves"  a  farm  which  the 
English  had  appropriated  to  themselves.  Those  poor  people,  who  were  then  thinking 
of  nothing  but  their  labor,  became,  when  they  least  thought  of  it,  the  sad  victims  of 
the  fury  of  the  Indians,  who  first  killed  the  man  and  scaljxjd  him.  They  wished 
to  make  a  prisoner  of  the  woman,  because  she  was  pr'  tty.  She  wovdd  not  follow* 
them,  saying,  that  since  her  husband  was  dead,  she  wi-'ted  to  die  fil.so.  They 
killed  her,  as  also  the  servant,  and  took  the  two  little  children  to  make  slaves  of 
them. 

A  Frenchman  called  Goslin,  who  was  in  the  island  hewing  building-timber,  and  who 
knew  nothing  of  what  was  to  happen  to  Fislier,  hearing  the  cries  uttered  by  the 
Indians  as  thi-y  were  landing  on  the  island,  wished  to  secure  himself  from  the  danger 
which  he  thought  threatened  him  as  well  as  the  English ;  he  was,  however,  stopijed  on 
the  Nmk  by  the  Indians,  who  placed  him  in  a  canoe ;  they  told  him  to  stay  there ; 
that  he  had  nothing  to  fear ;  that  they  would  not  hurt  him.  He  was  incredulous,  and 
would  not  stay  where  the  Indians  had  placed  him ;  his  incredulity  cost  him  dear ;  for 
.as  he  was  running  into  the  middle  of  the  island,  the  Indians,  taking  him  for  an 
Englishman,  ran  after  him,  and  killed  him ;  and  as  they  were  going  to  scalp  him,  they 
knew  him  to  be  French,  took  his  body  in  their  canoes,  and  gave  it  to  the  French,  who 
buried  it  in  the  church-yard.  Alx»ut  four  in  the  afternoon,  an  inhabitant  of  the  east 
coast,  named  Deonoyers,  who  came  from  the  pinery  twenty-five  leagues  a)x)ve  the  fort, 
where  he  had  been  cutting  building-timber,  came  back  in  company  with  the  Sauteura 
of  Saginaw,  who  conveyed  him.  They  learnt  through  him  the  death  of  two  officers; 
one  Mr.  Robinson,  captain  of  the  boats,  and  the  other  Sir  *  *  *  *,  a  colonel  in  the 
militia."  Those  gLUtlemen  had  been  ordered  by  the  commander  to  go  with  six  soldiers 
and  sound  the  cliannels,  to  find  out  if  the  water  was  deep  enough  to  pass  with  a  barge, 
if  wanted.  Tlio.se  gentlemen,  who,  in  leaving  the  fort,  had  heard  nothing  of  the  bad 
design  of  tiie  Indians,  went  on  quietly,  believing  themselves  perfectly  secure.  As  they 
were  passing  by  the  |)inery,  the  French,  who  were  working  there,  and  who  knew  the 
bad  intentions  of  the  Indians  against  the  English,  called  them  to  give  them  a  warning 
of  it.  Those  gentlemen  went  to  them,  but  would  not  believe  what  the  French  said, 
observing  that  when  they  left  the  fort  every  thing  was  quiet.  The  French  warned 
them  again,  advising  them  to  go  no  further,  for  the  Indians  would  attack  them,  and 
their  best  plan  was  to  return  to  the  fort.  They  would  not  listen  to  these  warnings, 
and  went  on ;  they  met  with  some  Indians  camped  on  a  point  close  to  the  river. 
These  seeing  them,  showed  them  meat  and  other  food  to  induce  them  to  come;  but 
those  gentlemen  would  not  go  to  them.  This  vexed  the  Indians,  who  pursued  and 
killed  them  all,  except  a  young  man  of  fifteen  or  sixteen,  and  a  slave,  wliom  they 
kept  as  slaves. 


'  Thoy  were  killed  on  the  Thursday  preceding. 


>^  r 


TOPICAL  HISTORY. 


S.IS 


The  two  bands  of  Indians,  (Ottawa,)  who  had  been,  according  to  Pont  lac's  orders, 
to  the  two  j)hiccs  mentioned  above,  returned  to  the  camp  and  related  with  emphank 
all  the  circumstances  of  their  cruel  exiwditions ;  among  others  the  death  of  Goslin, 
whom  they  had  killed  by  mistake,  and  wliich  caused  them  a  few  moments'  sorrow. 

Pontine,  after  having  heard  his  young  people,  assembled  all  his  warriors  to  consult 
with  them  aljout  approaching  the  fort  and  attacking  it  without  running  any  risk. 
This  was  not  very  dillicult,  as  there  were  several  barns  and  stables  built  alx)ut  thirty 
yards  behind  the  fort,  the  property  of  individuals  who  dwelt  within.  On  the  north- 
east side  of  the  fort,  alx)ut  fifteen  yards  distance  to  the  right  side  of  the  gate,  was  a 
large  garden  with  the  gardener's  house,  belonging  to  the  interpreter,  M.  La  Butte. 
All  these  buildings  were  as  many  intrcnelunents,  sheltered  by  wlii'^h  the  Indians 
might  approach  the  fort  without  incurring  any  danger.  Tln-y  had  )ool;ed  well  at  all 
this,  and  intended  to  take  advantage  of  it  for  some  tih.  to  harass  the  garrison. 
Having  made  their  arrangements,  the  Indians  went  to  rest,  waiting  for  the  mon-ow  to 
commenc '  i. 

While  tuc  Indians  were  making  the  prepsirations  to  trouble  the  fort,  the  commander 
ordered  the  two  end  gates  to  l)e  closed  and  fastened,  not  to  be  reopened  until  the  end 
of  the  war.  However,  that  on  the  south-west  end  was  opened  twice  to  admit  cows 
belonging  to  some  inhabitants  of  the  fort.  It  was  not  opened  afterwards.  The  gate 
opposite  the  river  was  opened  from  time  to  time  for  the  public  wants,  it  being  guarded 
by  the  barges  which  the  Indians  feared  much.  About  six  in  the  evening,  M.  La  Butte, 
by  the  order  of  the  commander,  went  out  several  times  to  ajipease  the  Indians,  and 
try  to  extract  from  them  their  secrets.  But  these,  and  above  all,  Pontiac  getting 
weary  of  his  going  and  coming,  told  him  to  withdraw  and  not  to  retuni,  as  if  he  did 
they  would  all  fall  upon  him.  Not  being  able  to  do  any  thing  with  them,  lie  with- 
drew to  the  fort,  telling  the  commander  that  he  hoped  that  the  Indians  would  be  more 
accessible  on  the  morrow.  The  commander  in  the  evening  ordered  the  English  who 
were  in  the  fort,  traders  and  soldiers,  to  watch  by  turns  on  the  rampart,  in  order  not 
to  be  taken  by  surprise  at  the  break  of  dity,  which  is  an  hour  generally  chosen  for  an 
attack  by  the  Indians  when  at  war.  The  commander  gave  the  example,  spending  the 
night  on  the  watch  (on  the  battery)  in  company  with  his  oflicers. 

Tuesday,  10th  of  May,  according  to  the  commander's  orders,  the  gates  remained 
shut.  The  Ottawas,  who  thought  that  on  their  attacking  the  fort,  the  English  would 
surrender  at  discretion,  came  about  four  in  the  morning  and  fired ;  violently  running 
around  the  fort,  as  if  they  were  going  to  storm  it.  This  rather  intimidated  the  English, 
who  were  not  yet  accustomed  to  the  manners  of  the  Indians,  and  who  had  not  time 
to  make  any  preparations  for  their  defence.  There  were,  however,  in  the  fort,  two  six- 
pounders  and  one  three-pounder,  and  a  grenade  mortar,  which  was  placed  about  the 
gate  as  a  useless  article.  The  three-pounder  was  on  the  battery  behind  the  fort, 
opposite  the  woods,  and  almost  concealed  by  buildings.     The  other  two  cannons  were 


;'!'!!! 


n 


.t!i 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


■JO  ^^~     H^H 

^  122    121 
iM    12.0 


lit 


M 


|i.25|,.4    1^ 

^ 

6"     

► 

9kt 


'/, 


'/ 


/A 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

COTporation 


23  WKT  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTU.N.Y.  USM 

(716)172-4303 


1 

! 


i 


256 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


on  the  military  square,  and  useless,  there  heing  no  proper  place  to  fix  them.     The 
larger  only  fired ;  but,  however,  those  only  protected  the  rivor-side,  which  the  Indiana 
took  great  care  not  to  approach,  keeping  themselves  always  behind  the  fort,  where  the 
buildings  sheltorcd  them ;  or  beyond  the  hill  Avhich  overlooked  the  fort,  and  at  the  fof)t 
'of  which  it  was  built.     So  that   'tfie  place  wu»  rnther  defended  bi/  the  courage  and 
intrepidity  of  the  besieged,  than  attacked  by  the  hemegerit,  who  continued  the  violence  of 
their  firing  until  ten ;  only  firing  allcnvards  from  time  to  time,  not  having  much 
ammunition,  intending  to  recommence  the  charge  after  having  obtained  more.     The 
commander,  seeing  that  the  firing  of  the  Indians  wa«  nearly  over,  ordered  M.  La  Butte 
to  go  out  and  si>eak  to  them.     M.  Chapoton,  a  resident  of  the  fort,  joined  M.  La  Butte 
to  go  to  the  Indian  camp.     Several  residents  of  the  fort,  with  the  approbation  of  the 
commander,  took  this  opiwrtunity  of  going  out  to  dwell  with  the  settlers  on  the  coasts, 
not  to  be  present  at  the  death  of  the  Phiglish,  which  they  thought  would  take  place. 
Messrs.  La  Butte  and  Chapoton  went  on,  and  took  with  them  M.  Jacques  Godfrey,  who 
willingly  joined  them,  aa  they  were  endeavoring  to  pnmiote  public  tranquillity,  hoping 
also  that  three  iiersons,  who  were  known  and  loved  by  the  Indians,  would  with  less  diffi- 
culty api)ease  them.    The  two  gentlemen  mentioned  la*  t,  spoke  to  the  Indians  without 
letting  them  know  that  they  wished  to  favor  the  English.     The  Indians  api^arcd  to 
give  them  a  favorable  hearing ;  this  made  M.  La  Butte  think  that  every  thing  would 
go  on  well,  and  leaving  Messrs.  Chaiwton  and  Gotlfi-oy  with  the  Indians,  he  returned 
to  the  fort,  and  told  the  commander  that  his  affairs  with  the  Indians  were  in  a  fair 
way,  that  he  had  left  Messrs.  Godfroy  and  Clmiwton  to  continue  to  sjieak,  and  that  he 
hojied  the  end  of  it  would  be  in  a  few  presents  from  the  English.     M.  La  Butte, 
trusting  in  his  knowledge  of  Indian  character,  expected  no  disap]K)intment,  as  the 
Indiana   concealed    their    designs    under  fair  words.      Mr.   Campbell,   the    second 
commander,  wishing  for  nothing  but  peace  and  harmony,  desired  him,  in  the  name  of 
the  commander,  Mr.  Gladwin,  to  i-eturu  to  Pontioc's  camp,  to  aid  Messrs.  Godfroy  and 
Chapoton  to  complete  their  work ;  stifling  the  fire  of  sedition,  and  replacing  peace 
between  Ixith  parties.     M.  La  Butte  promised  to  do  all  in  his  j^wer,  and  returned  to 
the  camp,  where  he  found  Messrs.  Chai)oton  and  Godfroy,  who  had  not  left  Pontiac, 
and  were  endeavoring  to  bring  him  over  to  their  views.     M.  La  Butte  joined  them, 
according  to  the  desire  of  the  commanders.     The  cunning  Pontiac  dissembled,  and 
appeared  to  consent  to  all  the  wishes  of  those  gentlemen,  and  to  convince  them  that 
he  wished  for  peace  and  union,  he  sent  M.  La  Butte  with  some  Indians  to  speak  on  his 
part  to  the  commander.     lie  did  this  to  get  rid  of  M.  La  Butte,  whom  he  lK?gan  to 
suspect.     Six  or  seven  Indians  entered  the  fort  with  M.  La  Butte,  and  went  to  greet 
the  commander  and  oflieers,  who  ivceived  them  well,  and  shook  hands  with  them. 
The  Indians  sjKtke  in  the  name  of  their  chief,  and  apjK'ared  themselves  to  listen  to 


'  The  obciourity  of  tliiii  Honlcnoe  exiHto  iu  the  original. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


257 


what  tlio  conniiaiuU'i'  (Iwiri'd  M.  La  IJiittc  to  tell  tliciii.  Aftor  a  few  inonu-iitM' 
nniviTsatioii,  tlioy  awkod  fur  bivad,  and  rt'ceived  as  iiiiich  a«  tln'j  coidd  carry  away. 
Wliilu  tlif  Indians  wore  in  the  lort,  tl»e  Knjilich  cxiiibited  a  nowspniH'r,  statinj;  that 
(-oloni'l  lliK|not  was  coniiii<;  with  two  thon.sind  soldici.i.  On  hearing  this  fal(<e 
statoniont,  the  Indians  wished  to  go  out  and  carry  the  news  to  their  ohiel".  The  gate 
lM.'ing  ojiened,  tiiey  returned  hy  theni.selves  to  tlie  camp,  and  related  this  news  to 
Pontiac,  who,  without  showing  astonislnnent,  said  at  once  that  it  was  false,  and  that 
the  Knglish  spi-ead  the  rejMjrt  to  frighten  them.  He  desiix'd  Messrs.  Godfroy  and 
(Jha|N)ton  to  leave  the  camp  for  a  short  time,  saying  that  he  would  call  them  again, 
when  he  had  mentioned  to  his  people  what  tiiey  had  told  him.  This  he  did  only  to 
have  leisure  to  think  of  some  hail  design.  Altout  five  in  the  afternoon,  he  sent  for 
Messi"s.  Godfroy  and  ('iiapoton,  as  also  lor  .several  other  French  settlers,  and  told  them 
that  he  had  appeased  his  young  people,  that  they  consented  to  make  jM-ace.  hut  to 
concluile  it  effectually,  he  would  l»e  glad  to  speak  to  Mr.  Canipln'M,  second  connnander, 
in  his  camp,  as  he  had  known  him  three  years,  (tlu"  time  he  had  conniianded  the  fort,) 
anil  he  and  his  peojde  l«K»ked  on  him  as  on  their  l)ii)ther.  IJut  the  barbarian  concealed 
in  his  l)osom  a  dagger  which  was  to  Ik'  fatal  to  that  worthy  man. 

The  French,  from  whom  he  concealed  his  designs,  believing  he  sjMjke  with  frankness, 
told  him  they  willingly  engaged  to  bring  Mr.  Caniplu'll,  if  he  would  pronuse  to  let 
him  return  witliout  molestation  after  the  interview.  lie  promised  it,  (pnnnises  cost 
him  no  trouble.)  and  the  Ix'tter  to  cover  his  malice,  he  gave  them  the  calumet  of  peace, 
OS  a  certain  proof  of  his  jteople's  woi"d  and  his  own.  The  Fivnch,  esjK-cially  Messrs. 
Gmlfroy  and  Chapoton,  fell  into  the  snare  which  Pontiac  had  laid  for  them  and  the 
English.  While  the  Indians  were  preparing  this  new  intrigue,  a  Frenchman  called 
Gouin,  who  by  chance  had  seen  through  the  Indian.s'  designs,  and  who,  in  several 
conversations  he  had  had  with  Pontiac,  had  seen  no  favorable  symptom  towards  the 
English,  and  who  had  had  some  presentiment  of  what  was  going  to  happen  to  Mr. 
('ampliell;  desiivil  a  Frenclnnan,  who  was  passing  Ix'foro  his  house  on  his  way  to  the 
fort,  to  warn  Mr.  Campbell  of  what  was  going  on  in  the  camp,  entreating  him  not  to 
leave  the  ibrt,  and  not  to  trust  the  word  of  a  badly-inclined  Indian. 

However,  the  French  took  their  way  to  the  fort,  thinking  that  the  mere  presence  of 
Mr.  Cainpl»ell  would  Ik.'  sufficient  to  apjK'ase  the  Indians.  M.  Gouin,  who  saw  them 
coming  at  a  distance,  and  who  fearod  that  one  warning  was  not  sutlicient,  begged  M. 
Morau,  to  whom  he  mentioned  in  a  few  words  the  matter  in  question,  to  run  to  the  fort, 
and  again  caution  the  gentlemen  ogainst  going  out.  This  was  done  by  M.  Morau,  who 
came  at  full  sjK'cd  to  rolate  word  for  wonl  to  the  officei-s  M.  Gouin's  information.  He 
desired,  with  tears  in  his  eyes,  Mr.  C'amp))ell  not  to  leave  the  fort,  adding,  that  if  ho 
went  to  the  camp,  he  would  never  return.  In  the  mean  time  Messrs.  Godfroy  and 
Chapoton,  with  several  of  the  FixMich,  arrived  at  the  tort,  related  to  the  English  the 
fair  words  ol"  Pontiac,  and  showed  there  the  calumet  of  jwaee  which  they  had  brought. 
Pr.  11.  —  :;.} 


\i4 


268 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


y 


The  cnlumot  niul  fine  wonls  lijul  all  the  effect  on  the  En}jliwli  that  Pontiac  exiK>ete(1, 
and  M.  GotiinV  two  warnings  were  useles<s.  Aftenvartls,  when  it  wiw  too  late,  the 
English  M-ished  they  had  listened  to  him  instead  of  the  others.  Mr.  CanijilK'H,  »r//<we 
toniMr  winked  for  nothing  but  union  and  concord,  thought  that  it  was  in  his  jiower,  hy 
going  tt)  the  camp,  to  api)ea.se  the  Indians,  and  that  his  jjix'sence  for  a  single  moment 
would  more  than  suffice  to  i-estore  pence  In'tween  the  two  jiarties.  This,  joined  to  the 
inrxirtunities  of  Messrs.  ri(Mlfn)y  and  Cha]N)t(m,  who  said  they  would  ventuiv  their  life 
for  his,  decided  him  to  go  to  the  camp.  He  went  out,  accompanied  hy  Mr.  M'Dougal, 
an  officer,  by  M.  La  Butte  and  a  gn-at  numlKM*  of  the  French  iidiabitants  of  the  fort, 
who  thought  that  in  fact  the  ])resence  of  this  worth}-  man  would  put  an  end  to  this 
cahtl,  ami  after  his  return,  which  was  (it  was  said,)  to  take  place  inunediately,  they 
would  Ix?  free  to  see  to  their  ^iffairs.  IJut  they  weix;  disapi)ointed  in  this 
exjK'ctation. 

Mr.  CamplK?ll  arrived  at  the  camp.  The  Indians,  seeing  him  arrive,  uttei-ed  the 
most  frightful  cries.  It  recpiiivd  all  the  authority  of  Pontiac  to  make  them  keep 
silence.  Pontiac  went  and  met  Mr.  Campltell,  t<M)k  him  by  the  hand  to  conceal 
his  felonious  designs;  nuide  him  sit  on  tli'  same  .seat  with  himself,  telling  him  that 
he  was  glad  to  see  him,  as  he  considered  him  as  a  Fivnchman ;  that  he  ami  ids  people 
weiv  going  to  s[)eak  on  business.  Mr.  Campbell  ri'mained  a  full  hour,  without  the 
Indians  saying  a  word  to  him.  Mr.  Camplx-U  drew  a  bad  augury  fivm  this.  He 
connnunicated  his  thoughts  to  the  French  who  had  brought  him ;  they  told  him  that 
acconling  to  Pontiac's  promi.se  he  might  leave  when  he  pleased.  He  wished  to  do  so. 
As  he  began  to  grow  a  little  uneasy,  he  sent  woiil  to  Pontiac,  that  as  he  had  nothing 
to  say,  he  was  going  away.  P(mtiac,  who  feared  that  such  a  valuable  prey  might 
escajKi  him,  and  who  thought  that  by  detaining  these  two  officers  in  his  camp,  the 
others  would  accede  to  his  wishes,  amiounced  that  after  they  had  slept  two  nights 
with  him,  he  would  send  them  back  to  the  fort.  Thus  tho.se  gentlemen  found 
themselves  of  their  own  accord  prisoners  of  the  Indians.  The  French  who  had 
accompanied  them  ivturned  more  sad  than  when  they  had  left,  judging  that  it  was 
a  stratagem,  by  which  Pontine  hoiied  to  hold  the  officers  of  the  fort  in  check.  On 
their  arrival  at  the  fort,  they  related  to  the  cimimnnder,  Mr.  Gladwin,  all  that  had 
pas.scd  in  the  camp,  and  the  detention  of  his  officers.  This  gave  him  room  to  think 
that  he  would  have  done  iK'tter  to  lK>lieve  M.  Gouin,  in  preference  to  all  the  others. 
The  Pou.v  (Pottawattomies)  who,  as  I  have  said,  had,  in  concert  with  the  Ottowas, 
vowed  the  death  of  the  English,  and  who  had  not  yet  apijcarod  much  around  the  fort, 
went,  according  to  Pontiac's  onler,  in  the  woods  at  a  distance,  on  the  shores  of  the 
lake  and  river,  to  stop  all  the  English  who  might  Ix;  on  their  way  to  the  fort,  and 
made  two  prisoners.  They  were  two  men,  whom  the  commander  of  St.  Joseph  had 
BCMt  from  his  fort  to  bring  letters  here,  to  Mr.  Gladwin.  They  were  taken  and  brought 
to  Pontiac's  camp,  who  caused  his  people  to  put  them  to  death.     AlM)iit  eight  in  the 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


259 


evening,  Pontine  sent  messengers  to  the  Ilnrons  of  the  wicked  band,  and  to  the  Ponx, 
to  let  them  know  wliat  had  just  happened  in  his  camp,  as  also  his  having  detained 
the  two  oflieei-s.  lie  sent  them  word  that  on  tlic  next  morning,  very  early,  he  and 
f<mr  of  his  chiefs  would  walk  along  the  coast  before  the  fort,  to  give  new  orders  and 
obtain  ammunition.  lie  gave  notice  to  Ninivoan,  (Ninivois,)  chief  of  the  Potix,  to 
place  twenty  of  his  jieople  in  an  ambuscade  near  the  fort,  that  no  Englishman  might 
go  out  without  l)eing  taken. 

11th  May.  Wednesdtiy,  the  11th  day  of  May,  Pontiae,  as  a  gmul  general,  ordered 
thirty  of  his  young  people  to  conceal  themselves  near  the  fort,  and  take  all  the 
English  who  might  go  out,  as  also  to  fiiv  from  time  to  time  on  the  little  boat;  while 
he  and  his  chiefs  went  on  the  other  side,  to  give  orders  for  the  attack  of  the  fort. 
His  ]H'0|)le  did  as  the}-  had  l)een  desiivd,  and  came  to  this  effect  atid  placed  themselves 
in  the  sul)in'b.  which  wa.s  built  nortiieast  from  the  fort,  at  a  distance  of  alnuit  four 
hundred  feet;  this  was  a  good  intrenchment  for  them.  However,  Pontiae,  followed  by 
four  chiefs,  who  were  Macapacelite,  Hreton,  Shawawnon  (Chavoinon)  and  his  nephew, 
went  through  the  W(K)d  behind  the  fort  to  the  coast  on  the  southwest  of  the  fort; 
a  little  1k'U)w;  they  entered  the  houses  of  all  the  settlers,  esiK'ciall}'  those  who  traded, 
and  desired  them,  in  a  siwech,  to  give  them  jwwder  and  balls,  adding  ^hat  if  they 
would  not  give  any,  they  would  plunder  their  g<K)ds  and  all  their  jwssessions  ;  j.  iving 
them  as  a  (jixvl  reason,  that  they  had  nothing  moiv  to  fear  on  the  part  of  the  English, 
who  weixj  unable  to  injure  them.  They  also  gave  them  to  understand  that  all  the 
trila's,  among  whom  the  English  had  tradei"s  or  garrisons,  woiUd  kill  them  (the 
English.)  That  the  Sauteux  of  Saginaw  and  Grand  river  were  coming  to  join  them. 
That  when  all  were  assembled,  they  would  close  the  way,  st>  that  no  more  English 
mif^nt  come  and  live  m\  their  lands.  The  traders,  fdved  \\y  their  fair  wcn'ds  an<l 
threats,  were  obliged,  to  obtain  peace,  to  give  the  Indians  that  which  the}'  demanded ; 
and  by  thus  giving  part  of  their  powder  and  balls,  they  ])resorveJ  their  goods,  houses, 
and  families.  The  Poux,  who,  in  accordance  with  Pontiac's  ordei-s,  liad  l)een  to  the 
rendezvous,  had  their  share;  after  which  they  separated,  to  return  to  the  camp,  and 
distribute  the  ammunition  to  the  warriors,  and  take  nieas\ires  for  the  attack  intended 
for  the  next  day.  During  all  the  day  the  officers  were  very  cpiiet  in  the  fort,  not 
Ixnng  troubled  by  the  Indians.  This  induced  many  inmates  of  the  fort  to  nsk  the 
commander's  leave  to  go  out ;  this  was  granted,  and  they  went  to  the  coasts,  to  stay 
with  the  settleix,  leaving  their  houses  and  part  of  their  g(M)ds,  hoping  that  this  tmyiml 
ecent  woulil  only  last  a  few  days. 

In  the  afternoon,  Pontiae  crossed  the  river  with  four  chiefs,  and  went  to  hold  a 
council  with  the  Ilurons,  to  induce  the  good  band  to  join  him;  if  they  would  not,  he 
was  detennined  to  fall  on  them.  These  Indians,  who  had  not  hitherto  left  their 
cottages,  and  who  <lisliked  all  that  was  going  on,  being  thus  threatened  and  pressed 
closely,  and  being  liesides  so  few  in  number,  were  obliged  to  do  what  the  others 


tli 


260 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


required.  They  promisoil  that  the  next  day  after  mass  they  woidd  join  the  Poiix  in 
the  enterprise,  but  they  eouhl  not  eonie  s»H>ner,  it  iK'iiig  a  gn-at  festival,  and  tliey 
couhl  not  tiiink  of  gtnnjr  to  liglit  witlnait  hearing  nuiss.  Pontiac  agived  to  wait  until 
then,  and  onleR'd  the  attaek  to  be  put  oil'  until  the  arrival  of  the  Iluixnis. 

I'Jtli  May.  Tluu-sday,  the  twelfth  of  May,  it  Iwing  the  festival  of  the  aseension  of 
our  Loi-d,  Pontiae,  who  regai-ded  neither  festivals  nor  Sundays,  who  thought  all  days 
alike,  pntfessing  no  religion,  oixleretl  in  the  morning  all  his  young  jn'ople  to  U*  ready 
by  the  time  the  Ilui-ons  came,  in  order  to  go  all  together  to  the  attaek ;  and  fearing 
that  the  Huhhis  might  not  keep  their  woi-d,  he  sent  to  them  one  of  his  ehiefs  with 
several  young  |)eople,  to  tell  them  not  to  fail,  its  soon  as  their  missionary  had  finished, 
to  come  to  the  Poux,  a.s  they  weix>  waiting  their  arrival  to  commenee  the  attaek.  The 
llumns  gave  their  wonl  and  kept  it.  Although  Pontiac  waited  for  the  llurons  to 
commence  the  atttick  of  the  fort,  he  had  however  desired  his  iKH)ple  to  take  their 
stations  lx>hind  the  barns  and  stables,  in  order  that  all  might  be  ready  at  the  fnxt 
signal,  and  also  that  they  might  i)revent  the  l)esieged  fi-oni  leaving  the  fort. 

Peatan  and  Baby,  lK)th  chiefs  of  the  g(KKl  band  of  Hui-ons,  who  had  hitherto 
remained  neutral,  and  would  have  wished  longer  to  ivmain  so,  seeing  tluMuselves  thus 
thivatened,  a.s^embled  their  band,  which  consisted  of  alxiut  sixty  men,  anil  said  to 
them,  "  Brothei-s,  you  see  as  well  as  we  do  the  situation  of  afl'airs ;  our  only  alternative 
is  to  join  our  lirothers  the  Ottawa  and  Poux,  or  to  abandon  our  lauds  and  llee  with 
our  wives  and  children,  a  thing  not  easily  ed'coted.  Hardly  shall  we  have  commenced 
the  llight  when  the  (Htawas,  Poux,  and  our  own  llurons,  will  fall  on  us  and  kill  our 
wives  and  children,  and  then  oblige  us  to  do  as  they  do.  Wherea.s,  if  we  do  it  now, 
we  are  assuix'd  of  the  safety  of  our  wives  and  childiXMi  in  our  village.  We  know  not 
the  wishes  of  the  master  of  lile;  ju'rhaps  it  is  lie  who  ins[)iivs  this  war  to  our  bixithers 
the  Ottawas.  If  lie  do  not  order  it,  He  will  let  us  know  His  will,  and  we  shall  at 
any  time  lie  able  to  withdraw  without  spilling  the  l)liH)d  of  the  English.  Let  us  do 
what  our  brothei-s  ix'nuire  of  us.  lA't  us  not  spaix>  oui"selves."  Immediately  after  this 
sj)eech  they  took  a  war-clulj,  and  sang  the  war-simg,  and  invited  their  jK'ople  to  do  the 
same,  while  waiting  for  the  mass  which  their  wives  sang,  and  which  they  heiuxl  very 
devoutly.  The  mass  I)eing  over,  every  one  went  to  his  cabin  to  take  the  necessary 
arms.  They  crossed  the  river  in  twelve  caniK's,  and  went  to  the  Poux,  who  utten'd 
cries  of  joy  on  seeing  their  arrival.  These  cries  warned  Pontiac  of  the  arrival  of  the 
Hurons,  who  Iwcamc  more  ol)stiuate  in  firing  than  all  the  other  Indians  put  tiMfct/ier. 

Ninivoan  at  the  head  of  the  Poux,  Takay  and  Peatan  at  the  head  of  the  llurons, 
went,  although  without  onlei"s,  and  invested  the  fort  on  one  side.  Pontiac,  heading 
his  people,  did  the  same  on  the  other  side;  end  all  at  the  same  time  commenced 
attacking  the  fort  and  barges.  They  kept  up  a  very  sharp  fire  until  seven  in  the 
evening,  ivmaining  all  this  time  shelteivd  by  the  buildings,  to  avoid  the  fii-e  of  the 
fort,  which  could  not  do  them  much  injury,  as  they  had  but  one  cannon  fit  for  use. 


i«,fi 


TOPICAL    HISTOllY. 


261 


This  \vii8  hut  Uttlo  sii|)iM)rtod  hy  tlii'  fiiv  of  tho  fiarrison.  All  tliin  firiiifi  roultl  have 
l)ut  little  I'll'wt  oil  tilt'  oiifsiili'.  Tiit;  olliivrs  iH'iriMvi'il  it  in  tiiiio.  To  ri'iiii'ily  thin, 
ami  ffivo  more  ellect  to  the  f^uii-halis,  they  fastened  tojretiier  witii  wiiv  several  lK)ltH 
which  they  made  ivd-hot  and  placed  in  the  eaniioii  «)f  the  hattery,  and  sent  this  on 
two  harns  which  were  full  and  thatched ;  they  were  hiirnt  up  in  less  than  half  an  hour. 
This  cause<l  the  Indians  to  remove  and  take  shelter  Ix'hind  the  hill,  to  he  ahle  to 
continue  their  liriiig  without  niniiin;;  any  risk.  The  two  har<res,  during  all  this,  were 
not  s|mriii<r  of  tiieir  trouhle  aii<l  powder,  tiring  with  inucli  ellect  alHive  and  on  iNith 
sides  of  the  lint,  ojiposito  which  they  were  nuxired.  There  were  in  this  action  two 
Indians  kilted  and  two  wounded ;  one  of  them  had  his  thigh  and  the  other  his  arm 
bniken  hy  the  same  shot  iK'hind  the  fort.  With  regard  to  the  Knglish,  they  took  care 
to  conceal  their  dead,  for  fear  the  Indians  would  come  to  know  it.  Notwithstanding 
their  precautions  it  was  known  that  several  weiv  killed  in  the  large  harge,  and  many 
wounded  in  the  harges  and  fort.     This  was  s«'en  hy  all  the  inhahitants. 

Ahoiit  seven  in  the  evening,  the  lire  of  the  Indians  having  ahated  a  little,  tho 
comniander  tearing  lest  the  Indians  might  he  favored  hy  the  night,  make  some  attempt 
to  storm  the  fort  or  set  it  on  lire,  ordered  two  things  to  lie  done;  first,  that  tiilis  and 
harivis  should  he  placed  at  the  liiiir  corneiN  of  the  fort,  in  the  streets  and  on  tho 
ramparts,  and  that  the  French  who  had  voluntarily  remained  in  the  fort  (tw«'iity  in 
numlK'r)  should  draw  water  from  the  wells  to  till  those  vessels  —  secondly,  as  they 
were  few  in  iininher,  and  there  was  no  prohahility  that  the  exja'cted  succor  might 
very  soon  arrive,  and  the  lack  of  jieoiile,  aminuuition  and  provisions,  would  lueveiit 
their  standing  out.  Having  first  «)ixlered  the  French  to  withdraw  to  their  hou.ses  at 
curfci"  and  put  out  their  fires,  they  directed  the  soldiei-s  to  carry  from  the  fort  to  the 
harges  the  baggage  of  the  ollicers,  their  own,  and  that  of  the  traders;  and  that  every 
one  should  he  ready  to  start  for  Niagara  at  the  first  signal. 

Nothing  happened  during  the  night;  this  made  the  Knglish  think  that  they  might 
keep  the  fort  longer  than  they  had  hoped.  They  came  a  little  to  their  nviinci  to  sustain 
the  attack  which  t(M)k  place  on  the  next  day. 

IStli  May.  Almost  all  the  Indians  who  inhahit  these  regions  are  like  the  wind, 
going  only  hy  pufl's.  If  they  knew  they  should  lo.se  some  of  their  warriors  in  going 
to  war,  they  would  not  go.  This  often  makes  them  end  a  war  almost  when  tlu'V 
commence  it.  Sonietiines,  however,  it  only  excites  them  more.  These  Indians,  as  I 
have  said,  had  some  people  killed  and  wounded;  this  induced  them  to  juggle  to  find 
out  how  they  could  manage  to  lose  no  more  warriors,  and  to  obtain  the  fort,  which 
they  said  must  sooner  or  later  come  into  their  hands,  consiilering  the  reinforcement 
which,  according  to  their  account,  was  coming  in  a  short  time. 

The  Indians,  in  the  preceding  day,  had  Ix'cii  so  active  that  when  evening  came, 
they  were  overcome  with  fatigue.  They  went  to  rest,  and  slept  all  the  night  and 
aluioMt  tiie  whole  of  the  morning.     The  commander,  who  with  the  dawn  of  day 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


''^ 


expected  an  attack,  and  wlio,  with  liis  oflTicers,  had  watched  all  the  nif^ht  on  the 
rampart,  to  give  onlers  and  pix'vent  surprise,  seeiiifj;  the  Indians  so  quiet,  ordered  that 
the  intrenehinents  of  the  Indians  should  proniptl}-  be  destroyed  hy  fire.  To  eflect 
this,  Mr.  Hopkins,  captain  of  a  iJew  company  and  a  good  oflicer,  went  out  at  the  head 
of  forty  volunteers  eonii)letely  arnietl,  and  set  fire  to  the  suburbs,  which  was  soon 
burnt  up,  except  two  houses  which  tiie  fire  could  not  reach.  They  innnodiatcly 
returned  to  the  fort,  to  give  tinie  to  another  olTicer  to  go  on  a  similar  exiK-dition  on 
another  »lde.  This  was  done  by  Mr.  Hays,  a  lieutenant  in  the  American  troops, 
who  sallied  out  with  thirty  men,  and  set  fu-e  to  two  bams  and  stables  behind  the  fort, 
and  irametliately  returned,  thinking  that  Pontiac  and  his  Indians,  seeing  these  fires  at 
a  distance,  might  try  to  prevent  their  u'treat;  but,  fortunately,  some  other  thing 
occupied  him  all  the  morning.  There  were,  however,  a  few  on  the  watch,  but 
so  few  in  innnl)er,  that  they  did  not  dare  show  themselves,  or  fire,  for  fear  that  if 
they  were  discovered  they  might  be  fired  at.  Thus  both  parties  feare'd  each 
other. 

While  the  Jlnglisli  ollicei-s,  with  part  of  their  troops,  were  endeavoring  to  render 
the  vicinity  of  the  fort  free  and  clear,  all  the  Indians  in  Pontiac's  camp  held  a  council, 
to  Avhich  the  oldest  French  iidiabitants  of  the  coasts  had  been  called.  The  Indians 
tried  by  fair  words  to  induce  these  to  join  tiiem,  to  uiufnai  tiiem  in  opening  a  trench, 
which  the  French  did  not  wish  to  do;  besides,  the  gre'atest  part  of  them  knew  not 
the  way,  and  those  who  did,  took  g»xKl  care  not  to  say  any  thing  about  it ;  on  the 
contrary,  they  said  they  were  unactpiainted  with  such  work.  Pontiac,  seeing  he  could 
make  no  impression  uimhi  them,  and  who  did  not  as  yet  wish  to  obtain  by  force  what 
he'  hoi)ed  they  would  grant  by  their  own  free  will,  (I  mean  tlieir  lalx>r,)  attempted  a 
new  trick.  He  desired  Mr.  La  IJutte  to  tell  Mr.  Campbell  to  write  to  the  connnandcr 
what  he  was  aJx)ut  dictating,  in  presence  of  all  his  brothers,  the  French.  Mr. 
Camplwll,  who  did  not  wish  to  displease  a  man  Avhose  wickedness  he  began  to 
discover,  oljeyed.  This  letter  mentioned  that  Pontiac  granted  the  commander  liberty 
to  withdraw  with  all  his  jK'ople,  taking  oidy  what  they  actually  had  about  their 
persons,  as  had  been  the  ca.se  with  Mr.  Hellertre ;  and  that  the  remainder  of  their 
proi)crty  and  that  of  the  traders  should  remain  for  him.  He  thought  that  granting 
their  lives  was  doing  nnich.  He  promise  I,  that  iiimself  and  his  people  should  do 
them  no  harm,  and  tluit  he  would  answer  for  the  other  nations ;  and,  if  the 
connnandcr  did  not  consent  to  their  conditions,  he  would  recommence  the  attack  and 
storm  the  fort,  and  if  he  took  him  alive,  he  would  tre'at  him  as  the  Indians  treat  their 
prisoners;  and  that  he  nujst  have  a  sjwedy  answer. 

This  letter  was  brought  to  the  commander  by  a  Frenchman.  He  read  it,  and, 
without  caring  nuich  for  an  Indian  speech,  replied,  that  neither  he  nor  his  officers  had 
any  wish  to  fair  off  their  uoscs  to  please  the  Indians,  as  by  leaving  the  fort  he  ran 
the  risk  of  losing  his  life  in  his  own  country;   and,  as  the  king  had  sent  him  to 


I 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


263 


cominiiml  the  fort,  he  would  remain  there  until  death ;  addiiiijr,  that  he  cai-ed  very 
little  for  iiis  tha'iitfl  and  tho.se  of  the  other  Indians. 

Poutiae,  who  luul  flattered  himself  with  the  idea  of  intiinidatiiig  the  eomniander  hy 
this  letter,  and  who  was  in  hopes  of  plundering  the  nierehandi,se  of  the  traders,  was 
mueh  disappointed  in  receiving  so  dry  an  answer.  He  learnt,  at  the  same  time,  the 
sallies  made  hy  the  English  and  the  destruction  of  liis  intrenchments.  lie  was  ready 
to  hurtit  tcilh  xptk.  He  ordered  his  people  to  return  to  the  fort,  and  recommence  the 
attack.  Tliis  they  did  with  as  mucli  spirit  as  on  tlie  preceding  day ;  hut  they  did  not 
come  so  near,  having  only  two  huildings  to  conceal  them,  tliey  coidd  not  all  stand 
Itehind  them.  Some  were  farther  ofl',  firing  from  beliind  the  hillock  ;  their  halls  often 
jtas.sed  alwve  the  fort.  Nevertheless,  the  sharpness  of  the  fire  rendered  the  English 
iuR'a.sy,  fearing  all  the  time  an  as.iault.  They  were  as  uiM)n  thorns,  and  hesitated, 
whether  they  should  remain  or  escajie  hy  water.  What  i"eassureil  them  a  little,  was  a 
Frenchman,  who  had  fm'  a  long  time  dwelt  among  the  Erie  Indians,  and  had  also  gone 
to  war  with  tliem.  He  explained  to  the  English  the  manner  of  Indian  warfare, 
assuring  them,  on  his  life,  that  the  Indians  would  never  attempt  to  storm  the  fort. 
This  ass\irance,  coming  from  a  man  disinterested,  aequainted  with  the  ways  of  the 
Indians,  witli  their  manner  of  nuiking  war,  (which  he  explained  to  the  connnander 
and  officers,)  ivndered  their  minds  easy.  Tiie  firing  of  the  Indians  only  lasted  until 
seven  in  the  evening,  after  which  they  only  fired  at  long  intervals.  However,  the 
commander  and  officers  spent  this  night  like  the  last,  that  they  might  not  be 
Hurpnxcd. 

The  Ilnrons  knew  nothing  of  what  was  taking  place  in  Pontiac's  camp,  not  having 
been  warned  to  c<mie  to  tlie  council.  Thinking  that  no  attack  would  take  place,  they 
did  not  come  to  hara.ss  the  l)esieged.  Having  heard  the  a|)pn)ach  of  a  trader,  witli 
barges  loaded  with  g(X)ds  fin*  themselves  and  the  traders  of  the  fort,  as  also  with 
rfifreKhmcnts  for  the  officei-s,  they  went  and  waited  for  him  down  the  river.  The 
traders,  not  aware  of  what  was  going  to  hapi»en,  seeing  the  Indians  on  the  shore 
calling  them,  tiiought  they  wanted  to  exchai>.cre  venison,  as  they  sometimes  do,  and 
went  to  tliem.  Tlie  Indians  took  and  tie-t  l.em  with  Ik'Us,  and  sent  away  all  the 
French  who  were  in  the  Jiarges,  without  hurt:  :g  tliem.  They  t(X)k  the  barges,  with 
the  English  traders  and  tlieir  assistants,  to  their  village,  where,  on  their  arrival,  they 
slew  a  part  of  their  prisoners,  and  adopted  the  others. 

One  Jackman,  who  acted  as  conductor  of  a  barge,  was  given  by  the  Hurons  to  the 
Poux,  who  accepted  and  kept  him  among  them.  Tiie  goo<ls  re'mained  in  the  pos.session 
of  the  Hurons,  and  occupied  them  so  nnich  that  they  forgot  the  fort.  Among  the 
goods  were  liquors.  The  Huron  women,  fearing  that  liquor  would  cause  their  husbands 
to  commit  greater  fooleries  than  those  they  had  counnenced,  threw  them.selves  on  the 
barrels,  burst  them  o[X!n,  and  spilt  the  contents,  except  a  barrel  of  thirty-two  quarts, 
which  one  Indian  took  from  the  women  and  concealed  in  the  woods.     It  was  divided 


2ti4 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


between  tliom  ami  the  Poiix.  Very  li-w  of  tliein  liowever  (IriiiiU  iiiiv,  for  fear  it  iniglit 
cuntaiii  poir«oii.     Tlie^'  had  Ih-oii  told  that  tlie  Kii^liKli  wishi'd  to  ik)!."!)!!  them. 

14tli  May.  Saturday,  14tli,  tlie  Indian.",  who  had  undergone  nuu-li  fatigue  in  firing 
at  the  fort,  ^<U'|>t,  waiting  for  tlie  time  of  iveonnnencing  hontilities,  which  was  al)out 
ten  in  the  morning.  The  conunander  onlered  his  jK'ople  to  inijjrove  the  respite,  by 
fniishing  the  work  whieh  had  In-en  eommeiiced  on  the  preeeding  day.  This  was  done 
by  a  ."ergeant,  who  went  out  iit  the  head  of  twenty  men  (volunteers)  and  burnt  two 
barns  which  had  escaped  fire  the  jjivcetling  day  througli  the  ap])roach  of  the  Indians. 
This  done,  the  incendiaries  came  back,  and  the  vicinity  of  the  fort  was  free.  They 
could  then  see  every  thing  from  the  posts  of  euch>sure  to  the  top  of  the  hilbn-k.  Tliis 
was  doing  great  injury  to  the  Indians,  who,  j»erceiving  this  exi)edition,  eame  to  prevent 
it,  thinking  they  would  arrive  .soon  enough.  Tlie\'  weix'  di.sap]iointed,  and  foiuid 
nothing  to  shelter  them  from  the  fii-e  except  the  liilhH'k,  iK'hind  whieh  they  placed 
themselves,  and  connnenced  the  same  game  as  on  the  pivceding  days.  The  English, 
who  expected  it,  were  not  suri>ri.'<ed  to  see  the  attack  ivconnnenced,  as  they  were 
Ijcginning  to  be  accustomed  to  it.  They  however  dreaded  an  a.ssault,  as  in  tlie  night 
they  had  been  advised  by  a  Fivnchman  that  the  Indians  were  going  to  storm  it ;  and 
the  steps  taken  by  the  latter  this  day,  more  than  the  j)receding,  showed  their  intention 
to  be  such.  The  t)nly  resource  of  the  Knglish  in  such  an  emergency  was  to  go  into 
tlieir  barges,  whei"e  their  baggage  liiul  Ix-en  ever  since  the  fn-st  day,  and  then  to  sail 
for  Niagara.  This  did  not  come  to  pa.ss.  They  weix'  a.ssnix'd  that  if  the  Indians  did 
not  storm  the  fort  this  day,  they  would  never  do  it,  as  they  knew  well  that  in  so  doing 
they  would  lose  some  of  their  people,  and  this  they  dreaded  too  much. 

i<\ither  Potier,  a  Jesuit  missionary  of  the  Ilurons,  who,  in  the  (piality  anil  by  the 
jiower  that  he  had  over  them,  had  brought  part  of  them,  particularly  the  giKxl  band, 
within  the  Ixanids  of  tranquillity  by  refusing  them  the  sacrament ;  and  who,  to  finish 
bringing  them  all  to  onler,  needed  aid,  desiird  Mr.  Lal)oi.se,  an  inhabitant  of  the  fort, 
who  had  then  l)een  for  some  time  at  home,  to  cross  the  river,  t«>  go  and  entreat  in  his 
name  the  oldest  and  most  sensible  iidiabitants,  those  whom  he  knew  to  1k>  loved  and 
respected  by  the  Indian.s,  to  come  and  join  him  to  stop  the  storm,  which  in  threatening 
the  English  appeaix'd  to  thivaten  the  French.  M.  Laboise  did  as  he  was  desired. 
The  French,  who  knew  and  respected  the  Father  Jesuit  as  a  worthy  ecelesia.stic,  and 
considered  him  as  a  saint  upon  earth,  went  willingly  to  his  residence.  They  concerted 
together  the  means  to  be  u-oed  to  soften  Pontiac,  and  the  argnments  to  be  used  to 
induce  him  to  discontinue  this  intestine  war. 

The  French,  after  this  delil)erati(m,  Avent,  twelve  in  number,  (the  most  respectable,) 
to  Pontiac's  camp,  who  was  much  surprised  to  see  them,  and  asked  them  the  cause  of 
tlieir  visit.  The  deputies,  seeing  him  so  ea.sy  of  access,  flattered  themselves  with  a 
good  success,  and  told  him  they  came  for  go«)d  afiiiirs ;  whereniKm,  Pontiac  t<M)k  them 
to  M.  Baptiste  Melodies'  hou.se,  where  they  found  Messrs.  CamplK-ll  and  M'Dougal,  his 


TO  PICA  I-    IIISTOUY. 


265 


two  |tris(nu'is.  n»'  calli'd  his  (-liivrs  to  (••mic  ami  lit-ar  tin-  pmkI  words  of  tlioir  hnttliiTs 
llif  Fifiu-li.  WIk'm  tlu'V  liuil  all  arrivi-d,  tlio  oldt-st  oi"  tUv  Fiviich  .s|)okf  in  tlio  iianu' 
of  all  till'  M'ttlors,  and  asknl  I'onliac  what  wtiv  his  intentions  in  this  war.  IK'  rt'iiliod 
that  his  intention  was  to  drive  the  Kn<rlish  tVotn  tlie  fort  and  tVoni  their  lands,  to  nuikc 
ro«Mn  for  the  French  coinniander,  who  he  had  In-en  told  was  to  arrive  soon. 

'I'lie  Fi-ench  tolil  him,  that  since  he  so  soon  e.\|K'cted  a  Fix'iieh  eoininander,  he  had 
iH'tter  remain  quiet  on  his  nnit.  that  it  would  1h'  time  en<m<rh  to  attaek  the  fort  on  hi.t 
arrival.  In  vain  di<l  they  tell  him  that  this  war  mined  them,  and  prevented  their 
attending  to  their  afl'aiiv,  usinp  the  most  touehinff  Indian  expressions  to  show  him  their 
distress.  Pontiae  jK'rsistin;;  in  the  same  sentiment.s,  and  moved  by  nothing,  replied, 
that  to  Ik?  s<M)uer  five,  they  had  iM'tter  join  him  in  driviiifr  away  the  English,  and  that 
afterwanls  they  would  return  to  their  lanils,  waiting  for  the  Freneh  who  were  coming. 
The  French  ivplied  that  this  was  im|M)ssil»le,  as  they  had  promised  to  l»e  faithful  to 
the  Kngli.sh.  Thus,  nothing  Ixsing  gained  on  either  side,  the  French  were  obliged  to 
iTturn  to  Father  Potier,  who  made  them  an  exhortation  on  their  |)ivsent  calamity, 
desiring  them  to  pray  with  fervor,  that  heaven  might  witliilraw  this  war  which 
injured  them.  This  they  pi"oniised,  and  each  returned  to  his  hoii.xe,  more  fatigued  with 
this  useless  step,  than  pleased  with  his  enterpri.^e. 

lijth  May.  Sumlay,  l"»th  May,  the  Indiaii.s  who  had  s|M'nt  usele.x.x|y  the  three 
])receding  days,  resolved  on  remaining  still,  awaiting  the  reinforcement  which  they 
exiH.'(ted  from  the  Saulteui-s  of  (Inuid  river,  who,  they  said,  would  shortly  arrive, 
hoping  that  with  their  help  they  would  more  easily  achieve  their  ftxjlish  enterprise. 
The  English,  who  had  pas.sed  a  ver}-  (piiet  night,  and  saw  no  movement  on  the  part  of 
the  Indians  in  the  morning,  hoped  that  things,  with  ri'gard  to  tlie  Indians,  woidd  take 
a  Ix'tter  asjK'ct  than  it  was  at  fwst  anticipated.  The  commander,  who,  although 
somewhat  unea.sy,  had  never  lost  courage,  ordered  that  during  the  inaction  they  should 
destroy  M.  La  Butte's  garden.  This  was  executed  by  the  officers  at  the  head  of  forty 
volunteers;  they  destroyed  the  garden,  of  which  the  enclosure  was  made  of  cedar  {wsts 
ten  feet  high.  It  contained  a  quantity  of  fruit-tives  and  the  gardener's  house,  which 
the  Indians  had  found  of  givat  service.  The  jx^sts  were  torn  up,  the  house  burnt,  and 
the  trees  cut  down  and  thrown  into  the  river.  This  was  done  in  a  very  short  time, 
and  the  men  returned  to  the  fort  without  molestation.  The  Indians,  however,  saw 
them,  but,  fnuling  themselves  that  it  was  too  late  to  prevent  the  destruction  of  their 
retreat,  they  renniined  quiet  until  one  in  the  afternoon,  when  they  fired  a  few  shots  at 
the  little  barge,  but  this  was  a  mere  waste  of  jwwder  on  their  part. 

The  English,  who  hitherto  luul  scarcely  had  time  to  breathe,  seeing,  that  to  all 
apiKJarances  they  would  not  Ixs  harassed  that  day,  caused  some  of  their  men  to  take 
repose  until  the  evening.  The  others  lalxired  to  render  the  two  cannons  of  some  use. 
They  had  until  now  Ix'en  of  no  service  for  want  of  a  place.  The  commander  ordered 
that  on  each  side  of  the  large  gate  of  the  fort,  which  faced  the  highway  on  the  south- 
Pi.  II.  — 34 


flB6 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


west  side,  should  be  made  one  port-hole  to  place  the  eannoiiH,  one  of  which  was  to 
Hwe<>p  the  liighwny,  and  the  other  to  |x>int  towanlH  the  dwelling  of  M.  JiicijiueH  St. 
Martin  on  the  mime  aide. 

Ifith  May.  Monday,  IGth  May,  the  commander,  who  had  learnt  that  the  goo<l 
band  of  HiironH  had  witiidrawn  fmm  the  rahitl,  liy  the  mediation  of  Father  Potier 
their  nii.s«ionttry,  and  that,  in  order  to  have  no  mol^'  to  do  with  it,  they  had  gone  into 
anotlier  district,  rei^olved  to  give  tlie  wicked  band  room  to  re|KMit  their  f(K)li(*lineH8  in 
sending  the  large  barge  to  ravage  their  village  with  cannon,  and  burn  it  up  if  iH)ssible. 
They  were  also  on  the  way  to  tlo  the  same  with  the  Poux.  Captain  Hopkins  had  the 
command  of  this  e.\i)edition  ;  Officer  Hay,  ten  soldiers,  and  one  trader  went  on  lM)anl 
the  large  barge.  The  wind,  which  hml  turned  to  the  cast,  appoari'd  to  favor  them  in 
their  exjiedition.  They  took  up  their  anchor  to  go  down  to  the  right  of  the  two 
villages,  but  had  not  gone  one  eighth  of  a  league,  when  the  wind  tunied  to  the  south 
and  increased.  The  wind  was  then  almost  in  front  of  them,  and  they  were  obliged 
to  ttu'k  al)out  to  an'ive  at  their  destination ;  tiiis  tliey  did.  Most  of  the  inhabitants 
of  Ihe  coasts,  unac(|uaiuted  with  their  manoetivre,  were  afraid,  thinking  the  Knglish 
were  going  to  lire  at  them,  and  that  the  barge  merely  came  down  to  ravage  the  coasts, 
and  burn  the  houses,  a  thing  which  they  could  not  do,  having  no  forge  on  board. 
kSome  of  the  settlers,  however,  went  and  concealed  tiieir  gcKhls  in  ditches  in  the  middle 
of  their  farms,  and  some  in  the  wimkIs.  Other  French  inhabitants,  who  were 
acquainted  with  the  movements  of  the  barge,  came  and  quieted  them,  showing  them 
that  their  fears  were  groundless.  An  event  which  most  tended  to  tranquillize  them, 
was  what  ImpiK'ned  to  the  barge,  and  which  would  have  caused  its  entire  destruction 
hod  any  Indians  been  near.  The  wind,  which  went  on  increasing,  was  against  the 
barge.  The  English,  who  wished  by  all  means  to  go  to  the  Indian  villages,  sailed 
against  the  wind  from  one  coast  to  the  other.  As  they  wished  to  tack,  there  came  a 
puff  of  wind  which  took  the  sails  in  every  direction,  and  stranded  the  barge  about 
twenty  feet  from  the  land,  and  a  quarter  of  a  league  from  the  fort ;  the  barge  for 
about  a  quarter  of  an  hour  was  nearly  on  its  side ;  they  were  obliged,  at  all  hazards, 
to  go  and  cost  anchor  alx)ut  sixty  yards  off  the  land,  to  free  the  barge ;  by  dint  of 
labor  they  succeeded,  and  returned  dripping  wet  to  the  fort,  very  glad  to  have  escaiwd 
the  claw8  of  the  Indians ;  for  certainly,  in  the  situation  in  which  the  barge  was  placed, 
ten  Indians  would  have  done  their  affiiira  without  their  being  able  to  defend  themselves, 
and  they  would  have  paid  dearly  for  their  imprudence.  Some  Indians,  it  is  true,  saw 
them  from  a  distance,  and  came  to  fall  on  them,  but  they  were  too  late,  and  might 
have  repeated  the  proverb,  "  While  the  dog  is  eating  the  wolf  escapes."  They  were 
so  vexed  to  have  so  favorable  an  opportunity,  that  they  fired  at  the  fort  from  two  till 
six  in  the  evening,  without  killing  a  fly.  During  that  time,  the  French  who  had 
remained  in  the  fort,  were  drawing  water  from  the  wells  and  carrying  it  into  the 
vessels  destined  to  receive  it. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


m 


17th  May.  On  TucHdny.  Mny  ITtli,  Poiitiiir,  who  in  romnionoiiip  thin  war  lind  nut 
tnkon  euro  to  rolU'ct  ])rovisions,  was  ol)li;.'i'il  to  I'lnjiloy  ciiniiin^  to  obtain  s<>'h>.  He 
ami  four  ofiiis  chiefs  wont  to  tho  inhabitants  of  tho  coasts  to  ask  for  provisions,  wliich 
they  were  detonninod  to  obtain  witli  or  without  their  consent,  tlireatening  to  kill  tlio 
cattU>.  Tliis  tliey  lind  indeed  connnenced  doing,  althonph  many  of  the  wttU'rH  fed 
even  thirty  of  tliein.  which  did  not  prevent  their  doinji  (hiniafre.  The  setth'rs,  who 
dreaded  K'st  the  Indians  niijrht  turn  airainst  tlieui.  ^rranted  the  <h>nian(ls  of  tlie  ciiiefs, 
and  every  settU'r  contriluited  in  furnishinj^  fo<Ml  to  those  Indians  who  dwelt  on  his  side 
of  the  river;  so  that  Pontiac  and  his  jieoplo  had  their  sustenance  from  the  north 
coast.  Ninivona  and  triU-  had  theirs  from  the  southwest  coast,  and  the  Ilunms  from 
the  east  and  south.  Alntut  ten  o'cl<M'k.  when  each  nation  was  ])r()vided  with  finxl,  the 
chiefs  assembled  in  Pontiac's  camp,  and  decided  in  a  council  amon<r  themselves,  that  no 
Frenchman  residinj?  out  of  the  fort  shoidd  jio  theix\  and  that  no  inhabitant  of  it 
should  go  out.  For,  said  they,  those  wlio  ri'side  within  mention  all  that  hap|K'nH 
there,  and  those  who  reside  outside  mention  all  that  takes  ])lace  in  the  camj);  and  the 
effect  of  all  that  is  bad.  Tlu-ir  reasons  were  gocnl  enough,  for  in  effect  some  of  the 
Fivnch.  under  the  pretext  of  restoring  harmony  l)etween  the  parties,  sowed  dissension. 
They  agreed  to  place  at  each  end  of  the  tort  a  guard  of  twenty  fnmi  each  nation. 
They  were  to  prevent  all  intercourse,  and  fire  on  those  who  attempted  to  pass.  This 
was  said  and  done.  S>me  of  the  French  who  tried  to  pass,  very  nearly,  were  the 
thipcH  of  their  attempt.  In  the  course  of  the  afternoon,  a  few  shots  were  e.\changcd 
without  injury. 

18th  May.  On  Wedne,sday,  May  IStli,  the  Indians  la-ing  engaged  with  a  design 
they  had  conceived  a  few  days  iK'fore.  of  sending  to  M.  de  Ijcon  in  Illinois,  forgot  the 
fort  during  the  whole  of  this  day.  Pontiac  as.sembled  the  chiefs  and  most  resjH'cted 
of  each  nation  to  hold  a  council ;  he  sent  messengers  to  the  oldest  French  to  invite 
them  to  the  council,  where  they  admitted  the  two  officers,  their  prisoners.  All  luiving 
arrived,  Ptmtiac  took  a  wur-iranifnim  helt,{^)  and  said,  addressing  himself  to  all, 
"You  are  accpiainted  with  the  reasons  wliich  nuiki  me  act  as  I  do;  I  have  neglected 
no  opjwrtunity  of  showing  my  wishes;  but,  a.-  I  fear  our  Father  may  not  arrive  soon 
enough  to  take  possession  of  the  fort,  when  I  have  exiK'Ued  or  killed  the  Engli.sh,  and 
that  the  French  having  no  commander,  my  brothei-s,  the  Indians,  may  insult  them : 
I  have  determined,  to  obviate  this  difficulty,  to  send  to  Illinois  mes.sengers  from  our 
brothers,  the  French,  and  ourselves,  to  carry  our  wampum  belts  and  our  words  t«>  our 
Father,  M.  dc  Leon  ;  to  desire  him  to  .send  us  a  French  commander  to  guide  us,  and 
take  the  place  from  the  English.  You,  my  brothers,  will  please  me  by  writing  to 
your  Father  on  the  subject,  joining  your  words  to  mine."  lie  sent  for  a  writer,  in 
presence  of  his  two  prisoners,  and  desired  him  to  write  to  M.  de  Ij«5on  the  reasons  of 
his  actions,  as  I  have  mentioned  them  in  the  commencement  of  this  writing.  lie 
joined   to  this   a  letter  from   the   French,  who  earnestly  bescechcd  M.  de  Leon, 


;:68 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


considering  the  circuiiistiinces,  to  (iiiiet  the  nations.  All  those  writings  being  finished, 
Pontine,  who  directed  every  thing,  named  the  two  Frenchmen  and  the  two  Indians 
whom  he  wisiied  to  carry  the  letters  and  woiils,  desiring  them  to  get  ready  to  start 
the  next  morning;  and  that  those  of  the  French  and  Indians  who  wished  to  go  might 
speak ;  that  he  wouhl  not  prevent  them,  but  would  make  the  inhabitants  give  them 
all  they  needed  for  the  journey. 

19th  May.  On  Monday  the  VJth,  Pontiac,  who  thought  that  M.  de  Leon  would, 
agreeably  to  his  wishes,  .send  a  commander,  hastened  in  the  morning  to  provide  for 
the  wants  of  his  messengers.  lie  made  them  go  on  Iwani  a  canoe,  and  told  them  to 
go  and  wait  for  him  Iwlow  the  fort,  at  the  mill ;  that  he  was  going  along  the  coast  to 
get  them  provisions.  He  went  from  house  to  house,  to  ask  of  every  one,  according  to 
his  means,  provisions  and  ammunition  for  his  couriers,  in  onler  idat  they  might 
quietly  depart.  The  travellers,  having  ivceived  the  necessary  things,  departed,  about 
ten,  for  Illinois.  The  mes.fengers  being  gone,  Pontiac  returned  to  his  camp,  and 
ordered  his  yoimg  jieople  to  go  and  amuse  themselves  by  firing  at  the  barges,  menly 
to  hnra.ss  them,  knowing  very  well  they  could  not  injure  them.  They  contiiuied  this 
until  five  in  the  afterntMJU,  when,  weary  of  firing,  tliey  returned  to  the  camp  to 
repose,  after  the  fatigue  they  had  incurred  so  uselessly. 

20tli  May.  Friday,  May  the  20th,  the  connnander,  who  intended  to  send  one  of  the 
barges  to  Niagara,  and  who  wished  to  hastea  tiie  arrival  of  the  succor  he  had  daily 
expected  for  a  considerable  time,  orderetl  Mr.  Legrand,  who  was  ap|)ointed  judge 
instead  of  Mr.  St.  Cosme,  to  desire  the  French  who  dwelt  in  the  fort  to  pick  up  the 
stones  which  were  in  the  streets,  and  carry  them  to  the  banks  of  the  river,  to  serve  as 
ballast  for  the  barge  which  was  to  go.  They  changed  [)laces  with  the  barges,  and  the 
soldiers  took  the  stones  to  the  .smallest.  This  day  passed  without  any  ho.stility  on 
either  side. 

21st  May.  Saturday,  May  21st,  at  eleven  A.  M.,  the  barge  left  its  station  opposite 
the  fort,  to  go  to  the  head  of  Lake  Erie  tcj  discover  if  the  reinforcement  expected  by 
the  English  was  coming.  The  crdw  were  ordereil  to  renniin  statiomiry  eight  days,  to 
favor  the  arrival  of  the  reinforcement,  and  at  the  end  of  that  time  to  pi-oceed  to 
Niagara.  The  Indians,  either  through  laziness  or  contempt,  neither  fired  at  the  fort 
nor  at  the  barge.  About  five  in  the  evening  they  knew  in  the  fort  of  a  Frenchman 
who  had  gone  out  of  the  fort,  that  Cekaas,  great  chief  of  the  Saulteurs  of  Grand  river 
had  arrived,  accoixiing  to  Pontiac's  request,  with  one  hundred  and  twenty  men  of  his 
tribe. 

22d  May.  Sunday,  May  22d,  it  being  Pentecost-day,  a  most  impetuous  wind  and 
heavy  rain  obliged  both  parties  to  remain  quiet. 

23d.  The  weather  in  the  morning  (May  23d,  Monday)  somewhat  resembling  that 
of  the  day  preceding,  kept  the  Indians  quiet.  The  conunander,  who  mistrusted  them, 
and  foresaw  they  would  not  longer  remain  still,  and  who  wished  to  use  every  means 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


2C9 


of  defence  against  any  attempts  which  might  he  made,  ordered  that  all  the  iron  and 
steel  which  were  in  the  waivlionse  shonld  be  converted  into  war-clubs,  swords,  lances, 
and  hooks,  to  arm  his  soldiers  and  provide  against  an  assault,  in  case  the  Indians 
should  attempt  to  storm  tiie  fort.  This  was  done  hy  two  French  blacksmiths  who 
were  in  tiie  fi)rt.  AlnHit  four  in  the  afternoon  it  was  rei)orted  in  the  fort  tiiat  tiie 
Indians  were  going  to  set  the  fort  on  lire,  the  posts  of  the  enclosure,  and  the  houses 
inside ;  this  was  to  Ik;  done  with  ignited  arrows.  This,  however,  they  could  not  do, 
jw  luckily  they  had  not  the  necessary  things.  But  as  a  measuiv  of  precaution,  and  to 
prevent  surprise,  they  put  on  the  royal  storehouse,  and  on  the  houses,  ladders,  at  tlu^ 
fot)t  of  which  were  tul)s  full  of  water,  to  Ije  used  if  wanted.  The  conunander  ordered 
the  French  inhabitants  of  the  fort  to  watch  during  the  whole  night,  and  that  three  or 
four  should  collect  in  every  house,  tliat  they  might  be  ready  at  the  Hrst  warning. 
About  two  in  the  arternoon  the  weather  became  fair.  They  expected  then  that  the 
Indians  would  make  some  liiciirnlnn  ;  this  however  did  not  come  to  pass,  and  the 
renminder  of  the  day  elapsed  as  in  the  morning. 

May  24th.  Tuesday,  May  24th,  tlie  Indians,  who  had  been  idle  the  day  before, 
remained  so  tliis  day  initil  four,  wlien  shaking  off  tiieir  .«lothfulness,  they  reconnnenced 
tiring  at  the  fort,  and  did  not  stop  until  midniglit.  Tiieir  firing  had  )io  more  cllect 
than  if  they  had  remained  quiet,  having  merely  wasted  powder  and  balls. 

The  conunander,  who  foresaw  that  this  traylral  scene  might  not  end  very  quickly, 
and  that  it  might  not  1k>  ea.sy  to  obtain  provisions  from  the  outside,  fearing  also  a 
scarcity  of  provisions  before  the  return  of  the  barge  and  the  arrival  of  the  convoy 
which  he  daily  expected,  ordered,  that  to  obviate  this,  they  should  make  a  search  in 
all  the  French  houses,  to  take  from  them  every  superthious  article  they  might  have,  in 
order  to  ecnuomUe  them  for  the  sustenance  of  his  people.  Tiiis  was  done  by  ollicer 
Hay,  the  connnissioner  of  the  victualling:,  and  the  judge,  who  went  to  every  house 
collecting  wheat.  Hour,  peas,  as  also  some  niaiz.e  In'longing  to  the  Indians,  and  of  which 
the  French  had  the  care,  and  which  the_\  had  neglected  to  take  away  before  com- 
mencing their  foolish  undertaking.  They  also  collected  oil,  tallow,  and  every  artich' 
of  food,  nniking  a  list  of  all,  stating  every  sejjarate  thing,  and  the  names  of  the  owners, 
to  whom  they  gave  bills.  The  Indian  corn  Itelonging  to  tiie  Indians  was  alone  con- 
fiscated. All  the  provisi«nis  weiv  carried  to  the  pulilic  storehouse,  and  were  taken  care 
of  against  the  scarcity  with  which  the  English  were  thivatened. 

May  2")th.  Wednesday,  May  2r)th,  the  Indians,  who,  during  part  of  the  pivceding 
night,  had  fatigued  themselves  with  using  ammunitiini  to  no  purpose,  resfed  until  five 
in  the  afternocm,  when  they  recommenced  as  the  day  before.  The  chiefs  and  old  men 
did  not  fiiv,  but  while  the  others  were  sleeping,  walked  alnint  to  examine  every  thing, 
that  there  might  be  no  surprise.     They  weiv  all  the  time  mistrustful  of  the  Piiiglish. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  coasts  were  divided  by  diflerent  sentiments.  Some,  the  truly 
worthy  iieojile,  jienetrated  with  sentiments  of  Innnanity  and  religion,  bewailed  the 


270 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


foolish  enterprise  of  the  ludinns,  and  would  willingly  have  given  all  their  possesHions 
to  stop  the  nations,  and  restore  jHiace.  Othoiv,  governed  by  an  ill-founded  sentiment 
of  antipatliy,  and  over  whom  submission  and  i-esiwct  had  no  jwwer,  would  willingly 
have  taken  the  part  of  the  Indians,  had  they  not  been  afraid  of  incurring  general 
contempt.  Some  were  undecided,  not  knowing  what  part  to  take.  All  were  weary 
of  the  war  and  of  the  presence  of  the  Indians,  and  had  as.xeinbled  several  times  at 
the  houses  of  the  oldest  inhabitants  to  concert  some  plan  of  stopping  the  nations. 
They  resolved  to  go  to  Pontiac's  camp  and  ask  him  for  a  council,  and  to  try  to  find 
out  his  views  res^K>cting  the  war.  To  efl'ect  this,  fifteen  of  the  most  resjiected,  being 
known  and  liked  by  the  Indians,  went  to  the  camp  and  asked  for  a  council.  Pontiac, 
who  had  not  been  warned  of  this  visit,  wius  surprised,  and  began  to  susjject  there  was 
some  hidden  meaning  in  it  which  he  could  not  find  out.  He  however  received  them 
well,  and  asked  what  brought  them,  for  his  curiosity  did  not  allow  him  to  wait  until 
they  should  mention  it  of  their  own  accord.  They  all  replied  that  they  came  to  si)eak 
on  business,  aiul  tjjat  tliey  would  be  glad  if  all  the  chiefs  could  hear  them.  Pontiac, 
who  longed  to  know  what  brought  them,  .sent  messengers  to  the  Pou.x  and  the  Ilurons 
of  the  wicked  baud,  who  came  in  a  short  time.  When  all  had  arrived,  the  most 
respected  of  the  French,  taking  Pontiiu;  by  his  hand,  said,  addressing  himself  to  all : 

My  brothers,  you  appear  surprised  to  see  us,  but  we  only  come  heix;  to  ri'new  the 
alliance  formed  between  our  ancestors  and  ^ours,  which  you  now  destro}-  in  destroying 
us.  When  you  connuenced  your  attack  uiH)n  the  English,  you  gave  us  to  understand  that 
you  would  do  us  neither  harm  nor  injury;  it  is  true  that  you  have  not  hurt  our  person.s, 
but  in  killing  our  cattle  do  you  not  injure  us?  When  you  have  killed  them  all,  Iiow 
can  we  plough  our  lands,  to  save  them  and  nmke  bread  for  you?  Even  if  IciUiiuj  them 
you  did  not  waste  half  of  them,  they  would  last  you  longer,  and  we  should  not  lose 
so  many.  When  you  enter  our  houses,  ^ou  do  .so  with  uplifted  war-clubs,  as  if  you 
wished  to  kill  us  while  asking  us  for  food.  Did  we  ever  refuse  you  food  when  you 
asked  for  it  ?  You  no  longer  speak  as  our  brothei-s,  but  lus  our  masters,  1)ut  you  treat 
us  as  slaves.  How  long  have  you  known  the  Indians  command  the  Fi"ench  ?  Is  this 
the  promise  you  gave  your  father  Bellestre  on  his  departure,  that  you  would  love  and 
support  the  Fi-ench  ?  Avenge  the  insults  you  have  received,  we  do  not  oppose  this, 
but  remember  that  you  and  we  arc  brothers  and  childrcn  of  your  Givat  Father  the 
King  of  France.  You  exjK'ct  him,  say  you,  when  he  comes  and  brings  you  necessaries 
as  he  used  to  do,  and  finds  that  you  have  killed  us  and  taken  all  that  we  kept  for  him, 
what  will  he  say  to  you ?  Do  jou  think  that  he  will  make  you  presents  to  cover  the 
evil  you  have  done  us?  No!  he  will  consider  you  as  rebellious  children,  as  traitors. 
And  far  from  caressing  you,  he  will  wage  war  against  you.  Then  shall  you  have  two 
nations  against  you,  the  French  and  English.  See  then  whether  you  wish  to  have 
two  enemies,  or  live  with  us  as  brothers  should  live. 

Pontiac,  who  had  not  lost  one  word  of  all  this,  spoke  now  in  his  turn  in  the  name  of 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


271 


all  the  chiefs  addressing  the  French  :  My  brothers,  it  has  never  lieen  our  intention  to 
do  you  either  hurt  or  wrong,  nor  have  we  ever  wished  either  to  be  done  to  you,  but 
there  are  among  my  young  jx>ople,  as  among  yours,  some  who,  notwithstanding  all  the 
care  which  may  be  taken,  always  commit  some  injury.  Besides,  it  is  not  for  more 
revenge  that  I  make  war  against  the  English.  It  is  on  your  account,  brothers,  as  well 
as  ours.  When  the  English,  in  the  councils  we  liave  held  with  them,  have  insulted 
us,  they  have  insulted  you  without  your  knowing  it,  and  do  I  not  know  as  well  as  my 
brothers,  that  the  Englisli  have  taken  from  you  all  means  of  revenge,  in  disarming 
you,  and  making  you  write  on  a  paj)er  which  they  sent  into  their  country.  This  they 
could  not  nuike  us  do.  TheiflbiX'  do  I  wish  to  revenge  you  as  well  as  ourselves,  and  I 
swear  their  death,  as  long  as  they  remain  on  our  lands.  Kesidcs,  you  do  not  know  all 
the  rea.sons  I  have  for  acting  as  I  do.  I  have  merely  told  jou  what  regards  you,  you 
shall  learn  all  witii  time.  1  know  well,  bn)tli<'rs,  that  many  of  you  think  me  f(K)lish, 
but  the  fiituiv  will  show  what  I  am,  and  wiietlier  I  am  wrong. 

I  know  also,  brothers,  that  some  of  you  take  the  part  of  the  English,  to  make  war 
against  us.  But  I  am  only  sorry  on  their  account,  and  when  our  CJreat  Fatiier  ivturns, 
I  will  name  and  \nm\t  them  out  to  him,  then  will  they  see  which  will  be  the  most 
satisfied. 

I  know,  my  lirothers,  that  jou  must  l)e  weary  of  the  war,  on  account  of  the 
movements  of  my  brothers,  who  are  at  all  times  going  to  and  coming  from  your 
houses.  I  am  sorry  for  it ;  but  I  do  not  l)elieve,  my  l)rotbers,  that  I  am  the  cause  of 
the  injury  which  is  done  you,  I  am  not.  Oidy  remember  the  war  with  the  Fox 
Indians,  and  the  manner  1  Ix'haved  towards  you.  It  is  now  seventeen  jears  since  the 
Saidteiu's  and  Ottawas  of  Michilimackinac,  and  all  the  nations  of  the  north  came  with 
the  Sac  and  Fo.v  Indians  to  destrov  you.  Who  defended  vou?  Did  I  not?  Did  not 
my  people?  When  Mekinak,  gi-eat  chief  of  all  those  nations,  said  in  his  council  that 
he  wished  to  carry  to  his  village  the  head  of  your  commander,  eat  his  heart,  and  drink 
his  blood,  did  I  not  take  your  part,  by  telling  him  in  his  own  camp,  that  if  he 
wished  to  kill  the  French,  he  must  Ix^gin  by  killing  me  and  my  people?  Did  I  not 
a.ssist  you  in  defeating  them  and  driving  them  away?  Could  I  now,  my  brothers,  turn 
my  arms  against  you?  no.  my  Itrotliers,  I  am  the  same  French  Pontiac,  who,  seventccu 
years  ago,  gave  you  his  iiiind.  I  am  Freiu-h,  and  I  will  die  a  Frenchman.  I  rei)eat  it, 
I  avenge  your  intea'sts  in  avenging  mine.  lA't  me  go  on ;  1  do  not  ask  yon  to  join 
me,  as  I  know  that  you  cannot  do  so,  I  mei-ely  ask  you  provisions  for  myself  and 
people.  Should  you,  however,  wish  to  aid  me,  I  would  not  ivfuse  your  assistance,  it 
would  alTord  me  plea.surc>,  and  you  would  s(M)ner  Ix*  free ;  la'cause  I  promise  30U,  that 
a.s  soon  as  the  English  are  killed  or  exiK>lled,  we  will  withdraw  to  our  villages,  according 
to  our  custom,  and  there  await  the  arrival  of  our  Cln'at  Father.  These,  my  brothers, 
are  my  sentiments.  Be  easy,  I  .shall  watch  and  see  that  you  receive  no  moi-e  injury 
from  my  people.     I  hope  you  will  allow  oin-  wives  to  mw  irhrat,  (plant  corn,)  on  your 


I 


272 


TOPICAL    IIISTUUY. 


lands  and  on  your  cloiiringH;  we  shall  foci  oltligod  to  you  for  it.  All  the  F'rcnch 
replied  that  they  were  willing.  The  council  heiiig  over,  the  French  returned  to  their 
houses,  pleased  with  their  interview  with  Pontiac.  In  the  same  day,  the  squaws 
coninienced  to  sow  the  wheat,  (plant  the  corn,)  and  several  of  the  settlers  ploughed 
the  land  for  them.  Pontiac,  in  the  afternoon,  went  and  gave  his  orders  throughout 
the  coasts  for  the  sustenance  of  all  the  Indians,  and  also  to  prevent  their  taking  any 
thing  by  *orcc  from  the  French. 

The  commander,  who,  since  the  departure  of  the  barge,  had  perceived  that  the  Poux 
Indians,  whose  camp  was  to  the  south-west  of  the  fort,  came  along  the  river  sheltered 
by  a  rise  of  gi-oimd  which  runs  parallel  with  it.  There  were  in  it  two  lime-kilns,  in 
which  the  Indians  hid  themselves  to  firc  ujwn  the  soldiers  who  were  obliged  to  go  to 
the  river.  He  orden?d,  to  prevent  the  Indians  from  harassing  them  on  that  side,  that 
a  platform  should  \x  made  and  placed  on  the  bank,  to  giuvrd  and  defend  the  liorder  of 
the  river,  in  order  that  free  access  might  be  had  to  it.  To  effect  this,  two  carpenters 
and  several  persons  acquainted  with  the  use  of  the  axe,  commenced  working  at  this 
etlijice  on  the  military  square ;  and  a.s  there  was  in  the  fort  no  framing-timber  fit  for 
this  work,  the  workmen  t<x)k  the  causeway  from  the  front  of  the  houses,  and  used  it 
for  this  building,  which  was  ready  to  be  raised  about  five  in  the  evening.  To  carry  it 
to  its  destinati(m,  it  Ix'came  necessary  to  take  it  out  of  the  fort  jiiece  by  piece.  All 
the  French  who  were  in  the  fort,  and  some  soldiers  who  were  in  the  garrison,  were 
oixlered  to  do  so,  and  all  took  out  the  wood  by  a  port-hole  on  the  side  of  the  river. 
All  the  timlxjr  having  Iwen  carried  out,  they  put  the  work  together  and  framed  it ;  it 
was  then  to  be  raised,  which  could  not  bo  done  easily  on  account  of  the  weight.  But, 
every  one  willing  to  be  of  service  to  the  oflicei"s,  they  attempted  to  overcome  this 
difficulty.  The  work  Ijcing  put  together,  they  attempted  to  erect  it,  but  it  was  in  vain, 
for  two  reasons ;  first,  there  were  not  men  enough ;  the  second  and  strongest  obstacle 
was,  that  the  Indians,  who  were  watching  in  a  ditch  at  a  distance  of  two  hundred 
yards,  had  seen  some  English  among  the  French,  and  who  also  foresaw  that  the 
building  was  going  to  be  an  obstacle  for  to  them,  made  several  discharges  at  them. 
This  caused  them  to  leave  the  work  on  the  ground  and  to  put  off  the  raising  mitil  the 
next  morning  at  day-break. 

May  20th.  Thursday,  May  2Gtli,  at  dawn,  the  French  and  some  soldiers  were 
ordered  to  raise  the  platform  which  they  hod  Ix'cn  obliged  to  leave  on  account  of  the 
Indians.  These  being  now  asleep  in  their  camp,  gave  time  to  raise  it  more  early. 
This  was  done  with  all  possible  vt'yihiwe,  and  as  they  finished  and  were  preparing  to 
re-enter  the  fort,  a  Frenchman  wished  to  take  a  walk  towards  the  lime-kilns ;  he  came 
very  near  Iwing  wounded  by  an  Indian  concealed  in  one  of  the  kilns,  who,  as  soon  as 
he  had  fired,  went  and  hid  himself  with  some  others  who  were  further  off  in  a  ditch. 
The  Frenchman,  mistrusting  that  more  of  them  were  concealed,  withdrew  quickly  and 
re-entered  the  fort  with  the  othei-s.     During  this  time,  a  French  inhabitant  of  the  fort, 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


273 


M.  Labros,>*o,  wlio,  on  the  preceding  day,  witli  the  commander's  leave,  had  gone  out  on 
business,  came  back  an''  brought  news  of  the  taking  of  Sandusky  by  the  Indians, 
Ilurons  of  the  wicked  band,  who  in  fact  had  tlie  day  before  passed  on  the  other  side 
of  the  river,  in  a  canoe  witli  a  red  Hag  on  the  stern.  Tliis  had  been  noticed  by  several 
per.sons,  who  not  being  able  to  find  out  what  it  was,  could  only  suspect  that  the  Indians 
had  made  some  new  prize.  This  was  verified  by  the  reiwrt  of  that  man,  who  said 
tliat  he  had  seen  the  conunander  of  the  capturcd  place ;  that  the  garrison  had  been 
slain,  the  fort  burnt,  and  the  baggage  of  the  troops  and  goods  of  the  traders  plundered. 
The  commander  would  believe  nothing  of  it  until  he  saw  a  letter  from  that  officer, 
who  was  then  a  prisoner  among  the  Ottawas,  to  whom  the  Ilurons  had  braught  him. 
This  poor  gentleman,  on  his  arrival,  was  very  ill  treated  by  the  Indians,  who,  on  his 
landing,  struck  him  witli  sticks,  and  made  liini  sing  until  he  arrived  at  their  camp, 
lie  was  immediately  taken  by  a  scjuaw  who  had  lost  her  husband,  and  who,  having 
pity  on  liim,  took  him  for  her  second  husband,  .and  thus  he  was  saved. 

Pontiuc  and  the  Ottawas,  having  learned  from  the  llurons  that  on  their  return  the 
little  barge  was  still  at  the  moutli  of  the  river,  formed  the  design  of  taking  it.  They 
went  accordingly  early  in  the  morning  to  the  village  of  the  Poux,  to  whom  they 
communicated  their  project.  The  latter  joined  them  joyfully  as  if  they  had  already 
succeeded.  Tlie  former  had  brought  with  them  Mr.  Campbell,  and  his  interpreter,  M. 
La  Butte,  ho[)ing  that  the  pix»sence  of  that  officer  would  cause  the  jieople  to  surrender 
into  their  power.  They  were  greatly  mistaken ;  the  jieople  of  the  barge  would  not 
listen  to  their  proiH)suls,  and  only  replied  with  gun  and  cannon-shots.  This  made  the 
Indians  wait  until  night,  thinking  that  they  would  then  succeed  better  in  the  dark. 
But  the  crew  of  the  barge,  who  became  every  day  more  and  more  acquainted  with 
their  mananivre.s,  thinking  that  during  the  night  the  Indians  would  make  some  new 
attempt  to  capture  them,  and  knowing  that  their  number  wa.s  too  small  to  resist  a  long 
time  two  hundred  men,  resolved  to  sail  at  large,  thus  to  fon?stall  the  liopes  of  the 
Indians,  and  to  save  themselves  and  barge  from  the  talons  of  the  Indians.  They 
raised  their  anchor  during  the  night,  and  went  into  the  lake  towards  Niagara, 
according  to  the  orders  they  had  received  from  the  conunander  on  their  leaving  the 
fort. 

27th  May.  Friday,  May  27th,  the  Indians,  who  had  undergone  much  useless 
fatigue  in  their  attempt  to  take  the  barge,  having,  fortunately  for  the  crew  and  barge, 
failed,  returned  to  the  camp,  with  Mr.  Campbell  and  the  interpreter,  and  rested  all 
the  day. 

28th  May.  Sunday,  May  28th,  the  Indians  remained  inactive  the  whole  day,  as 
they  were  exi^cting  news  from  the  reinforcement  which,  according  to  the  report  of  an 
Indian  messenger  who  hail  arrived  in  the  night,  was  to  come  during  the  day.  This 
pri'vented  their  trouliling  the  fort.  But  they  broke  the  promise  they  had  made  to  the 
French,  and  recommenced  killing  and  taking  away  cattle.  About  five  in  the 
Pt.  II.  — 35 


ST4 


TOPICAL    IIISTOllY. 


afternoon,  there  were  seen  in  the  woods  behind  the  fort  a  great  number  of  Indians, 
who  were  returning  from  the  hike,  and  going  to  the  camp;  they  carried  scali)s. 
They  uttered  twenty  death-cries,  and  then  twenty  cries  of  joy,  to  announce  their 
having  struck  in  some  place.  They  were  the  remains  of  tliose  who  had  taken  Fort 
Sandusky.  In  tlie  mean  while  there  came  a  report  into  the  fort,  which  stated  that 
all  the  French  who  had  been  engaged  by  Indian  traders  to  go  to  Michilimackinac  had 
been  killed  by  the  Saulteure  and  Ottawas  who  dwelt  there.  But  this  was  afterwards 
found  to  be  false. 

The  commiindcr,  seeing  that  the  Indians  were  quiet,  ordered  Mr.  Officer  Hay  to  go 
out  with  twenty  men,  and  destroy  an  intrenchment  which  the  Indians  had  erected 
during  the  night,  southwest  of  the  fort,  opposite  the  door,  one  hundred  and  twenty 
yards  from  it.  The  Poux  and  Hurons  had  come  in  the  darkest  part  of  the  night, 
without  making  any  noise,  to  M.  St.  Martin's  enclosure,  and  had  arranged  some  hewn 
timber  (nearly  twenty  feet  long)  one  piece  \\\)o\\  another ;  they  had  made  two  rows 
of  them  breastrhigh,  and  had  driven  stakes  on  l)otli  sides,  to  keep  them  up ;  so  that, 
being  concealed  behind  the  timber,  they  did  not  fear  the  shots  of  the  cannon  which 
were  opposite.  This  having  been  seen  in  the  morning  by  the  sentinels,  they 
immediately  informed  the  commander  of  it.  It  was  immediately  destroyed  by  the 
twenty  soldiers,  who  burnt  the  enclosure,  and  placed  the  timlx?r  against  the  fort ;  and 
the  field  remained  clear,  so  that  no  one  could  approach  the  fort  without  being 
seen. 

29tli  May.  Sunday,  May  29th,  the  weather  was  unsettled  all  the  day,  and  this 
gave  rest  to  both  parties. 

SOtli  May.  Monday,  May  30th.  —  The  officers  had  a  seine,  which  had  not  been 
used  since  the  commencement  of  the  fatal  scene.  Several  French  young  men  asked 
the  loan  of  it,  saying  they  would  bring  them  part  of  the  fish  which  they  caught.  It 
was  lent  to  them.  Two  soldiers,  who  knew  how  to  manage  it,  were  also  sent.  But 
they  had  no  time  to  catch  a  single  fish,  nor  even  could  they  throw  the  seine  into  the 
river.  The  Indians,  who  were  concealed  in  a  ditch  sixty  rods  from  the  fort,  and  who 
saw  them  without  being  seen,  and  who  knew  that  the  French  did  not  use  a  seine  for 
fishing,  thought  that  the  fish  was  to  be  jiartly  for  the  officers,  and  fired  several  times 
at  the  barge  and  fishermen,  who  quickly  went  towards  the  shore,  and  re-entered  the 
fort  as  they  had  left.  it.  They  brought  back  the  seiiie,  which  has  not  been  used  since 
that  time. 

About  nine  in  the  morning,  a  soldier  walking  the  rounds  with  the  sentinel,  in  the 
bastion  opposite  the  river,  and  talking  with  him,  perceived,  at  Montreal  point,  on  the 
side  of  the  Huron  village,  some  crafts,  which  appeared  to  be  barges  containing  people. 
This  soldier,  who,  as  well  as  his  comrades,  knew  that  the  convoy  wiw  hourly  exjxjcted, 
and  that  it  was  to  contain  troops  and  provisions,  ran  quickly  and  mentioned  the 
discovery  to  the  officer  on   guard.     The  officer  lost   no  time  in  acquainting  the 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


275 


commander  with  it.  The  latter,  witli  his  officers  and  soldiers,  as  also  the  traders, 
came  ujion  the  small  bastion,  to  verily  by  them.»*olves  the  report  of  the  soldier.x,  and 
find  out  exactly  what  it  might  be.  They  saw,  by  means  of  a  telescojw,  that  it  was 
indeed  the  long-e.\pected  convoy.  This  caused  a  great  joy ;  all  Ix'ing  in  hopes  that, 
on  its  arrival  at  the  fort,  it  woidd  intimidate  the  Indians.  But  this  joy  was  short, 
and  stifled  at  its  birth  by  a  number  of  death-cries,  which  were  heard  from  the  place 
where  the  barges  were.  This  produced  sadness,  ai  they  all  thought  that  the-  Indians 
had  discovered  the  barges,  and  taken  them,  after  having  killed  the  crew;  and  this 
proved  to  be  the  case. 

The  Ilurons  of  the  wicked  band  and  the  Poux,  who  Lad  a  few  da^s  before  heard 
that  the  sergeant,  who  in  the  preceding  April  had  gone  to  Niagara,  was  returning 
with  provisions  and  troops  for  the  fort,  resolved  to  destroy  all.  To  this  effect,  they 
went  and  concealed  themselves  on  the  lake-shore.  The  sergeant,  who  was  unacquainted 
with  what  was  taking  place  in  the  fort,  and  who  did  not  mistrust  the  Indians,  was 
sailing  peaceably  and  fearlessly  on  the  lake,  until  he  came  to  the  point,  eighteen 
leagues  fmm  Detroit,  Avhere  he  encamiwd  in  the  evening,  according  to  the  custom  of 
voyagers,  to  cook  his  provisions  for  the  next  day.  The  Iiulians,  who  were  concealed 
among  the  bushes  and  thick  brush  in  the  same  place,  suffered  them  to  land  and 
aiTange  their  camp.  They  even  left  them  unmolested  during  the  night.  The 
convoy,  thinking  themselves  perfectly  secure,  merely  placed  a  guard  over  the  barges, 
for  fear  that  the  wind  during  the  night  might  send  them  adrift ;  the  remainder  slept 
quietly. 

The  Indians,  intending  to  fall  on  them,  took  no  sleep  that  night,  for  fear  that  their 
prey  might  escape.  At  break  of  day,  they  attacked  our  travellers,  without  giving  them 
time  to  awake,  killed  several,  and  made  the  othei-s  prisoners,  except  thirty-five  men 
and  an  officer,  who,  almost  naked,  threw  themselves  into  the  barges,  and  crossed  the 
lake  at  all  hazards  towards  Sandusky,  without  knowing  whither  to  go.  The 
remainder  of  the  barges,  eighteen  in  number,  with  from  twenty  to  thirty  men, 
remained  in  the  hands  of  the  Indians,  who  took  them  and  brought  them  to  the 
river,  to  convey  them  to  Pontiac's  camp.  They  took  them  in  a  file,  on  the  other  side 
of  the  river.  In  the  first  were  four  English  soldiers  and  three  Indians,  and  in  the 
same  proportion  in  the  other  barges.  The  number  was  about  even  on  both  sides. 
Other  Indians  followed  the  barges  by  land,  uttering  death-cries,  and  cries  of  joy,  from 
time  to  time.  The  four  P]nglishmen  who  were  in  the  first  barge,  finding  themselves 
opposite  the  large  barge  which  wa.s  before  the  fort  to  guard  it,  undertook,  in  spite  of 
the  Indians  who  were  with  them,  to  run  away,  without  considering  the  risk  they 
incurred ;  they  hoped  that  the  barge,  seeing  their  danger,  would  favor  them.  It  was 
80  indeed.  The  English  soldiers  turned  the  barge  towards  the  large  one.  The 
Indians,  seeing  the  danger  of  losing  their  prisoners,  fell  on  them  to  make  them  take 
another  route ;  but  the  English  pursued  the  same  way,  crying  out  to  the  barge,  from 


2T8 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


which  there  came  a  cannon-ball  on  the  Indians  who  were  on  tlie  shore,  who  were 
firing  on  the  English  in  the  barge;  and  another  with  grape-shot,  on  the  back 
part  of  the  bark,  where  the  Indians  were  placed.  These  two  shots  had  the 
desired  effect.  The  ball  put  the  Indians  to  flight  on  the  shore,  and  the  grape- 
shot  caused  those  Indians  in  the  barge  to  leave  it  and  throw  themselves  into  the 
water;  one  of  the  three,  in  leaping  out  of  the  barge,  drew  with  him  one  of  the 
soldiers,  and  both  were  drowned.  The  others  went  to  the  shore,  and  taking  guns 
from  the  other  Indians,  fired  on  the  run-away  barge,  and  slightly  Avounded  one 
of  the  soldiers  in  the  right  arm.  The  l)arge  then  fired  two  cannon-shots  at  the 
Indians,  who  disappeared  from  the  shore,  and  the  barge  and  three  soldiers  went 
to  the  shore  with  difliculty.  They  took  with  them  several  barrels  of  flour  and  five 
of  pork. 

The  other  Indians,  who  had  remained  behind  and  had  seen  that  in  spite  of  their 
friends,  the  first  barge  and  soldiers  had  escajwd,  and  fearing  the  others  might  escape 
in  the  same  manner,  took  other  means  to  reach  the  camp.  Making  the  prisoners  land, 
they  bound  them ;  and  they  were  conducted  in  this  state  to  the  Ottawa  village.  They 
then  took  them  in  their  canoes,  which  had  been  brought  by  their  wives,  to  Pontiac's 
camp.  On  their  arrival,  and  in  pursuance  with  his  orders,  they  butchered  them  in  a 
most  dreadful  manner.  The  recital  of  it  makes  one  shudder.  As  soon  as  the  canoes 
had  arrived  opposite  the  camp,  these  barbarians  caused  them  to  land,  one  after 
another,  and  undressed  them  completely,  and  shot  arrows  into  every  part  of  their 
bodies.  Sometimes  these  poor  creatures  wished  to  turn,  or  throw  themselves  on  the 
ground,  to  avoid  some  arrows ;  the  Indians,  who  were  by  their  side,  made  them  arise, 
striking  them  with  sticks  or  with  their  fists.  It  was  necessary  to  content  these  tigers, 
eager  for  human  blood,  that  these  poor  patients  should  stand  until  they  fell  dead,  after 
which  those  who  had  not  shot  fell  on  the  dead  bodies,  and  cut  them  in  pieces,  cooked 
them,  and  fed  on  them.  On  some  others  they  exerci.sed  other  cruelties,  cutting  them 
when  alive  with  flints,  and  striking  them  with  lances.  They  cut  off  their  feet,  and 
left  them,  bathed  in  their  own  blood,  to  die  in  suffering.  Others  were  tied  to  stakes, 
and  burnt  by  children,  with  a  slow  fire.  No  cruel  invention  of  barbarity  was  left 
untried  on  those  unfortunate  men.  To  see  this  terrible  spectacle,  one  would  have 
thought  that  the  furies  were  let  loose  on  these  poor  people.  Each  one  vied  to  make 
them  suffer.  To  crown  their  tyranny,  they  left  the  dead  bodies  on  the  highway, 
without  burying  them.  Others  threw  them  into  the  river,  which  thus  became  the 
sad  heir  of  their  rage. 

The  squaws  even  assisted  their  husbands  in  feeding  on  the  blood  of  these  sad 
victims,  and  inflicted  on  them  a  thousand  cruelties ;  some  stabbing  them  with  knives, 
as  we  do  when  we  lard  beef.  Others  cut  from  them  that  which  forms  man.  I  should 
never  end,  were  I  to  describe  minutely  the  cruel  sacrifice  and  the  sorrowful  end  of 
these  unfortunate  men.     Some,  however,  were  spared,  being  saved  to  serve  as  slaves 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


277 


in  the  Indian  camp.     Thus  they  became  spectators  of  the  tyrannical  end  of  their 
luifortunatc  fellow-citizens. 

The  lliirons,  who  had  given  up  their  prisoners  to  the  Ottawas,  had  returned  to  those 
who  took  care  of  the  barges.  They  took  them  to  their  village,  Avith  the  sergeant 
whom  they  had  kept,  that  they  might  treat  him  as  the  Ottawas  had  treated  the 
others,  and  waited  until  dark  to  take  the  barges  unto  Pontiac,  their  head-chief,  and  to 
divide  their  prize  with  him  and  his  band. 

Their  barges  were  laden  with  powder  and  bar-lead :  this  was  a  good  thing  for  the 
Indians,  who  had  nearly  used  all  they  had.  They  also  contained  Hour  and  j)ork  in 
barrels,  each  barge  contained  eight  barrels  of  flour  or  pork.  There  were  also  liquore 
and  refreshments  for  the  officers  of  the  fort.  These  liquors  caused  a  great  disorder  in 
the  Indian  camp ;  they  got  intoxicated,  and  fought  among  themselves,  reproaching  one 
another.  These  reproaches  caused,  the  next  day,  the  death  of  two  of  their  foolish 
young  men. 

The  Indian  squaws,  who  were  acquainted  with  the  customs  of  the  Indians  when 
inebriated,  concealed  all  their  offensive  arms,  for  fear  they  might  kill  one  another,  and 
also  fearing  danger  for  their  atlopted  prisoners,  they  placed  them  out  of  the  sight  of 
tlieir  husbands.  The  chiefs  alone  remained  solxjr,  and  ix;rceiving  the  disorder  caused 
in  their  camp  by  liquor,  they  broke  open  the  remainder  of  the  barrels,  and  spilt  the 
liquor,  thus  restoring  harmony  among  them. 

Pontiac,  who  did  not  lose  sight  of  the  two  prisoners  whom  he  made  by  his  cunning, 
caused  them  to  be  taken  to  a  distance,  in  the  houses  of  the  French  settlers ;  that  no 
harm  might  hapiien  to  them,  he  committed  them  to  the  charge  of  ten  Indians  of  note. 

May  31.  Tuesday,  May  Slst;  notwithstanding  the  precautions  taken  by  Pontiac 
to  prevent  disorder  among  his  people,  some  of  them  had  filled  kettles  with  brandy,  and 
had  gone  into  the  woods  to  drink  more  at  their  ease  during  the  night.  Being  tipsy, 
they  began  to  quarrel  with  the  young  jxiople,  reproaching  them  with  wanting  the 
courage  which  ought  to  belong  to  a  warrior.  The  latter,  who  were  a  little  into.xicated, 
were  so  ve.xed,  and  their  pride  M'as  so  touched,  that,  to  prove  their  courage,  they 
imprudently  came  to  seek  their  death  at  the  foot  of  the  fort,  running  as  if  they,  (two 
in  number,)  wished  to  take  it  by  storm.  The  .sentinels  placed  alwve  the  northeast  gate, 
seeing  them  coming  at  full  speed,  and  mistrusting  some  bad  design  on  their  part,  fired, 
and  wounded  them  mortally,  one  received  a  ball  through  his  head,  it  had  entered  by 
the  right  eye,  and  came  out  above  the  jaw ;  he  had  also  small  shots  through  his  body. 
This  caused  him  to  fall  on  the  sjwt.  He  was  picked  up  by  the  soldiei-s  of  the  garrison, 
and  brought  into  the  fort,  where  he  was  exposed  to  the  sight  of  the  public  until  he 
died  of  his  wounds.  He  was  then  buried  in  a  corner  of  the  small  bastion.  The  other 
Indian  had  two  balls  through  his  body,  and  went  and  died  five  arpcnts  from  the  fort, 
where  he  was  taken  up  by  the  other  Indians,  and  buried  near  the  camp.   The  Indians  in 


trs 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


the  camp  being  nick  witli  the  drink  they  had  taken  on  the  preceding  day,  rested  all 
tliirt  da}-,  and  did  not  come  and  fire  on  the  fort. 

A  Fi-enchman,  who  liad  remained  in  the  fort  to  take  care  of  a  private  honse,  and 
who  did  not  like  thus  to  be  Hlnit  up,  sought  every  means  of  going  out,  but  did  not 
know  how  to  bring  it  almut.  As  he  knew  that  the  commander  was  necking  for  a 
trusty  man  to  be  sent  to  Niagara  by  land,  to  impart  to  the  commander  of  that  place 
what  wa.s  taking  place  heix>,  he  resolved  to  apixjar  to  wish  to  serve  the  English 
in  this,  under  pretence  that  he  could  sjxjak  a  little  English,  hoping  by  this  means  to 
be  able  to  go  out.  To  effect  this,  he  wished  to  employ  the  means  of  an  English  trader, 
to  whom  he  mentioned  all  that  the  other  French  said  amongst  themselves.  This 
trader  having  couvci-sed  with  him  several  times,  and  seeing  through  him,  knowing  him 
for  a  kuave,  and  a  traitor  to  his  country,  would  not  present  him  to  the  commander. 
Lamaiv,  (thus  was  the  man  called,)  finding  he  could  not  succeed  by  means  of  this 
trader,  resolved  to  employ  the  credit  of  a  lady  well-acquainted  with  the  English 
commander.  This  lad}'.  Mile,  des  Rivieres,  proi)osed  him  to  the  commander,  and 
praised  his  talents,  saying  he  could  speak  Englisli.  The  commander  wi.shed  to  see 
him,  and  without  much  examination,  deiwnding  on  the  lady's  recommendation,  he  was 
received  for  the  message  which  the  commander  wished  to  send.  He  was  provided 
with  all  that  could  be  necessary  for  his  journey,  and  his  days  were  reckoned  from  that 
time  at  six  livres  each,  to  be  paid  on  his  return ;  and  on  the  evening  he  received 
letters  for  Niagara,  and  was  taken  across  the  river  by  soldiers.  This  rascal,  instead 
of  taking  his  way  for  Niagara,  as  he  had  promised  the  officers,  remained  in  the  east 
coast  during  the  whole  day,  divulging  all  that  was  taking  place  in  the  fort ;  he  then 
went  to  the  south  coast,  slandering  the  English,  and  telling  all  manner  of  nonsense 
about  the  French  who  were  in  the  fort.  Several  persons,  perceiving  that  he  was  a 
villain,  threatened  to  take  him  and  carry  him  to  the  fort,  to  have  him  punished. 
Fearing  they  would  make  their  threats  good,  he  went  towards  Illinois,  and  has  not 
returned  herealwuts  since  that  time. 

The  commander  having  learnt  from  the  same  lady  that  the  Frenchman  had 
repeatedly  offered  himself,  and  had  endeavored  to  gain  access  by  means  of  the  traders, 
reprimanded  the  trader  for  not  having  mentioned  it  to  him.  The  latter  excused 
himself  on  his  not  being  acquainted  with  the  man,  and  his  not  being  willing  to  present 
him  without  knowing  him  well,  trusty  and  faithful  men  being  needed  for  similar 
errands.  As  soon  as  the  commander  had  learnt  the  villany  of  the  Frenchman,  he 
praised  the  conduct  of  the  trader,  and  blamed  the  indiscreet  zeal  of  the  lady,  who 
was,  if  we  may  so  sj^ak,  looked  upon  with  contempt.  This  is  the  reward  she  received 
for  her  labor. 

June  Ist.  Wednesday,  June  1st,  about  two  in  the  morning,  two  soldiers  and  a 
trader,  who  had  been  taken  and  adopted  by  the  Indians,  escaped  from  the  camp  and 
entered  the  fort.    They  learnt  from  them  that  Owasson,  great  chief  of  the  Saulteurs  of 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


S70 


Saginaw,  hail  arrived  on  the  preceding  day  with  two  hundred  men  of  his  hand ;  and 
on  ]m  arrival  at  Pontiac'a  camp,  they  had  decided  in  a  council  to  harass  tiie  fort  no 
more  until  the  paHsagCH  were  harred,  in  order  that  the  English  might  receive  no  more 
assistance;  and  to  effect  this,  the  Ottawas,  Ilurons,  and  Poux,  were  to  start  tliat  day 
and  go  about  the  hike  and  take  all  the  English  they  would  find.  What  confirmed  the 
reiMjrt  of  the  escaped  prisoners  was  the  siglit  of  alwut  three  lunidred  men  who  passed 
through  the  woods  Ijehind  the  fort,  and  who  went  down  to  join  the  Ilunms  and  Poux, 
whose  camp  was  half  a  league  Ik'Iow  the  fort.  They  wished  to  go  all  together  and 
cruise  on  the  lake.  The  chiefs  of  each  nation  remained  in  the  camp  to  give  orders  to 
the  young  people  who  remained  with  them,  and  to  guanl  the  environs  of  the  fort,  for 
fear  the  English  might  go  about  the  coasts,  a  thing  that  the  latter  did  not  wish  to  do, 
knowing  well  that  it  was  no  place  for  them. 

The  same  day  the  judge  and  commissioners  made  their  third  visit  in  the  French 
houses  to  obtain  food  to  last  until  the  arrival  of  the  barge,  which  was  shortly 
expected. 

June  2d.  Thursday,  2d  of  June,  it  being  Trinity-day,  a  few  shots  were  fired  by 
the  Indians  who  were  guarding  the  neighlwrhood  of  the  fort.  But  this  was  so  trifling 
that  the  English  did  not  return  them,  knowing  well  it  would  be  using  powder  to  no 
purpose.  During  the  night,  an  English  trader's  assistant  who  was  among  the  Ottawas, 
ran  away  rpiitc  naked,  and  came  to  the  fort,  bringing  a  letter  sent  by  Mr.  Cainplx'll,  a 
prisoner  in  the  camp,  to  Mr.  Gladwin.  Tliis  letter  had  Ix'en  foinid  by  the  Ilurona 
among  the  spoils  of  the  conductoi-s  of  the  barges.  Tiiese  brought  it  to  Pontiac,  who 
desired  Mr.  Campljell  to  read  it,  and  M.  La  Butte,  his  interpreter,  to  explain  it.  Mr. 
Campbell,  to  send  this  letter  to  Mr.  Gladwin,  assisted  the  prisoner  in  his  escaix*.  The 
letter  was  from  an  officer  of  Niagara  to  his  friend,  commander  at  Miami.  lie  men- 
tioned in  it  the  conclusion  of  jwace,  with  every  circumstance.  This  caused  in  the 
evening  a  concert  of  instruments  as  a  mark  of  joy  for  the  gootl  news. 

June  3d.  Friday,  June  3d,  the  Indians  were  quiet  all  the  day,  with  the  exception 
of  the  guard  around  the  fort,  who  behaved  as  usual.  The  judge  was  ordered  by  the 
commander  to  assemble  all  the  French  who  were  in  the  fort,  that  he  might  read 
the  letter,  which  he  had  received  on  the  day  preceding  l)y  the  prisoner.  This  letter 
had  been  translated  into  French  by  a  trader  who  spoke  French  well.  It  stated  that 
peace  was  concluded  between  England  and  France,  and  that  by  an  agreement  made 
between  the  two  powers,  Canada  and  Illinois  remained  in  the  power  of  the  English. 

June  4th.  Saturday,  June  4th.  The  Indians  behaved  on  this  day  as  they  had 
done  on  the  preceding  day.  About  four  there  were  heard  death-cries  from  the  Indians, 
who  were  returning  from  the  lake  by  land  on  the  other  side  of  the  river.  They  did 
not  exactly  know  the  meaning  of  those  cries,  but  suspected  that  the  Indians  had  made 
some  prize  on  the  lakes. 

June  5th.     Sunday,  5th  of  June,  the  Indians  fired  a  few  shots  at  tlie  fort,  to  let  the 


280 


TOPICAL   IlISTOUY. 


lx>sio<rc(l  know  the}  Iiiul  not  till  gone  to  tho  lake,  and  tliiit  tlu>v  liad  not  given  n])  tiieir 
rtM)liMh  enterpt'iise.  Their  tihuttf  wero  ho  few  that  the  Engli.sli  paid  no  attention  tu 
tliem. 

Alwut  two  in  the  afternoon,  there  were  heard,  as  on  tlie  preeeding  day,  death-cries 
on  tlie  other  witle  of  tlie  river.  Tliese  cries  were  uttered  hy  Indians.  Si'veral  ix-'raons 
went  on  tlie  ramparts  to  find  out  what  those  eries  meant.  Tliey  saw  a  nuniher  of 
Indians  on  shoiv,  some  on  foot,  othei-s  on  horseback,  making  saw-saw-tpiaa  and  cries  of 
jo}'.  Other  Indians  were  bringing  two  barges  laden  with  merchandise,  witli  traders 
that  they  had  taken.  They  wen-  going  up  the  river  on  the  other  side.  The  crew  of 
the  barge,  hoping  to  make  them  leave  their  prize,  sent  them  several  shots,  Imt  they 
were  fired  tiw  higli  or  t<K)  low.  The  Indians  laughed  at  this,  and  continued  their  way 
to  Pontiac's  camp  with  their  prizes. 

June  Gth.  Monday,  June  Gth,  the  weather  being  gloomy,  and  even  a  little  rainy, 
the  Indians  merely  watched  in  the  neighlx)rhood  of  the  fort,  without  firing  a  shot. 
Others  went  to  the  settlers  to  ask  for  provisions,  which  they  gave  willingly.  This  did 
not  prevent  the  Indians  doing  them  some  damage  all  the  time,  killing  sometimes  their 
oxen,  cows,  hogs,  destroying  their  wheat  and  coming  through  it,  as  they  did  not  dare 
to  walk  on  the  highway  on  account  of  the  large  barge  from  which  shots  came  whenever 
they  were  in  sight. 

June  7th.  Tuesday,  June  7th,  the  Indian.'^,  who  had  not  fired  for  two  or  three 
days,  Ijecoming  weary  of  not  using  gunixjwder,  came  about  ten  in  the  morning  to  fire 
on  the  fort,  and  continued  this  until  alwut  seven  in  the  evening;  as  they  had  neither 
barn  nor  any  other  building  to  conceal  them,  they  fired  from  behind  the  hillock,  and 
often  IVom  the  wo<xl,  a  distance  of  ten  arpents  fix)m  the  fort;  Ix'sidcs,  this  place  was 
overlooked  by  the  hillock,  so  that  their  shot  passed  above  the  fort.  Other  Indians 
were  farther  off,  concealed  by  the  enclosure  of  the  farms,  or  in  barns  at  a  distance, 
often  out  of  reach  of  the  shots  of  the  .sentinels,  as  they  were  afraid  of  the  cannons 
which  were  on  the  three  principal  sides  of  the  fort.  About  seven  they  went  away,  as 
well  satisfied  as  when  they  commenced. 

June  8th.  Wednesday,  June  8th.  The  Indians  came  about  eight  in  the  morning; 
it  appeared  from  their  preparations  that  they  intended  to  fire  a  long  time,  but  a  small 
rain  made  them  change  their  minds,  and  obliged  them  to  retire  to  their  camp.  The 
guard  remained,  according  to  their  custom,  to  prevent  any  one  going  in,  or  coming 
from  the  fort.  However,  some  one  was  always  going  or  coming.  Those  being  liked 
by  the  Indians  were  not  mistrusted. 

In  the  afternoon,  the  officers  were  told  by  on  inhabitant  of  the  fort,  that  the 
Indians  intended  to  storm  it  the  next  night,  as  the  weather  was  bad.  The  officers, 
who  were  getting  acquainted  with  the  ways  of  the  Indians,  answered  that  they  were 
ready  for  them,  thinking  that  the  intended  enterprise  woidd  end  as  had  already  been 
the  case.     But  as  prudence  is  the  mother  of  safety,  they  were  on  their  guard  during  the 


'f\< 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


Ill 


whole  ni){lil,  witli  tlioir  Holdieiv,  to  avoid  Ix'ing  ml^I)^i^^t•»l ;  but  the  nijilit  olapwd  qiiu'tly. 
At  Miiisot  theiv  wore  lieanl,  in  tlic  direction  of  the  Huron  vilhige.  tiiree  denth-oricK, 
tiie  nieaninr-'  of  whiili  wh"  unknown. 

June  !)th.  I'huifdny,  June  Otii.  Second  Trinity-<lii_v,  tlu*  Indinns.  wlio  only  ncted 
by  Ills,  \  i-re  (juiet  all  diiy.  A)H)ut  three  in  tiie  artern(H>u,  the  Indians  utten-d,  on  tlie 
other  side  <>('  tiu-  river,  tliiitecii  death-ericH;  tiiis  excited  tlio  curioxity  of  many 
En^^lish  and  Fri'uch  jH-oph',  wlu)  got  \i\nrt\  the  ])ali(*ndes  of  tlie  fort  to  find  out  the 
meaning  of  tliose  cries.  Tiiey  pen'eived  a  great  nunil>er  of  Indiani>  on  fiH)t  and 
liorsehack,  running  and  uttering  cries  of  joy,  and  rei^ating  their  death-cries  in  firing 
on  the  hirge  barge  which  was  la-fore  the  fort.  Other  Indians  wore  on  the  water  along 
the  shore  with  three  barges,  and  prisoners  taken  on  the  lake.  As  they  were  passing 
opjiosite  the  large  barge,  the  latter  sent  them  five  cannon-shots,  with  ball  and  grape- 
shot.  These  wounded  several  of  the  Indians,  Avithout  /jiIh)/  ahh  to  prevent  their 
pursuing  their  way.  In  tlie  evening  of  the  same  day.  they  learnt  from  a  Frenchman 
that  the  remainder  of  the  band  of  Sekakos,  chief  of  the  Saulteurs  of  the  river  a  la 
Tranche,  arrived  during  the  preceding  night,  forty-five  in  number.  The  number  of 
the  Indians,  including  this  last  band,  was  eight  hundred  and  fifty  in  the  camp  and  on 
the  lake.  Tliey  Indongcd  to  diflea-nt  nations,  and  were  governed  by  dift'erent  chiefs. 
Two  hundred  and  fifty  Ottawas.  conunanded  by  Pontiac;  one  hundred  and  fifty  Poux 
by  Minivoa;  fifty  Ilurons  by  Takug;  two  hundred  and  fifty  Saulteurs  byOwasson; 
and  one  hundred  and  .seventy  other  Saulteui-s  commanded  by  Sekos.  All  were  under 
the  authority  of  Pontiac,  their  great  chief,  and  quite  ready  for  mischief. 

Jime  10th.  Friday,  June  10th.  The  Indians,  who  had  remained  in  the  camp, 
having  heard  on  the  preceding  day  from  a  Huron  hunter  just  returned  from  the  woods 
behind  Little  Sandusky  lake,  that  the  officer  who  had  escaped  with  his  thirty-five  men 
was  with  them  in  Sandusky  islands ;  Pontiac  said  they  must  Ix;  taken,  to  prevent  their 
carrying  the  news  to  Niagara.  He  sent  fifty  men  (these  passed  l)ehind  the  fort,)  to 
menti(m  it  to  the  three  hundred  who  had  Jwen  sent  on  the  first  day  of  this  month. 
Fortunately,  Ixjfore  their  departure,  the  oflicer  and  party  had  left  the  islands,  and 
taken  his  way  to  Niagara  on  the  south  side  of  the  lake. 

The  Poux  of  St.  Joseph  had  attacked  the  English  and  taken  the  fort,  after^vards 
killed  a  part  of  the  garrison,  and  made  prisoners  of  the  remainder.  They  gave  the 
fort  to  the  French  who  had  settled  there.  They  came  with  their  prisoners,  seven  in 
number,  to  join  the  Poux  at  Detroit,  and  arrived  at  their  village  during  the  preceding 
night.  Having  heard  that  the  English  had  two  prisoners  of  their  nation  in  the  fort, 
they  came  about  four  in  the  afternoon,  with  one  M.  Gammelin,  to  treat  with  the 
commander  of  the  foi't,  and  exchange  the  commander  of  St.  Joseph  for  the  two  Indians 
who  were  in  the  fort.  This  did  not  suit  the  commander,  who  wished  the  Poux  to  give 
them  seven  persons  for  the  two  Indians.  They  would  not  agree  to  this,  and  went 
away,  putting  off  the  conclusion  of  their  exchange  to  the  next  day. 
Pt.  II.  — 36 


•     B 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


fy 


June  11th.  Saturday,  June  11th.  As  there  still  remained  in  the  suburbs  a  house 
and  workshop  which  the  fire  had  not  reached,  on  account  of  their  being  situated  at  a 
little  distance  from  the  other  buildings ;  these  places  served  as  retreats  for  the  Indians. 
An  officer  and  twenty  men  were  sent  to  bum  them  and  clear  the  plain.  As  they 
returned  from  this  expedition,  the  officer  and  his  people  emptied  and  freed  the  boats 
and  barges  which  were  a.shore  before  the  fort,  and  rendered  them  fit  for  service,  as 
they  might  be  needed  in  case  the  barge  which  had  been  sent  to  Niagara  did  not  return, 
and  the  garrison  were  obliged  to  leave  the  fort.  In  such  a  case,  these  crafts  and  t!ie 
large  barge  might  have  been  used  to  transport  them  to  Niagara.  The  Indians  did  not 
fire  this  day. 

This  day  Mr.  Laselle,  junior,  arrived  from  Montreal,  with  two  canoes  full  of  goods 
and  liquors,  which  he  took  to  Widow  Gurvain's  house,  to  conceal  them  from  the 
Indians ;  but  he  wa.s  lx?trayed.  The  Poux  came  and  asked  him  for  some,  threatening 
to  plunder  his  goods,  if  he  did  not  grant  their  demands.  To  get  rid  of  them,  he  gave 
two  barrels  of  wine.  Pontiac,  who  learnt  his  arrival  almost  as  soon  as  the  Poux,  and 
who  heard  that  these  liad  obtained  liquor,  fearing  not  to  have  his  share,  he  and  his 
chiefs  crossed  the  river,  went  to  La.selle,  made  him  go  with  his  liquor  to  M.  Jacques 
Compan's,  near  the  camp.  His  goods  were  taken  safely  to  Mr.  Labadie,  uncle  to  Mr. 
Laselle.  Pontiac,  on  making  Mr.  Laselle  change  his  quarters,  gave  him  to  understand 
that  in  the  vicinity  of  his  camp  he  should  not  be  troubled  for  drink,  on  the  part  of  his 
people.  However,  to  purchase  quietness,  he  gave  them  five  barrels,  and  the  Indians 
did  not  trouble  him. 

The  Poux,  who  on  the  preceding  day  had  come  to  exchange  prisoners,  came  this 
day  about  four,  but  to  no  purpose,  as  they  could  not  bring  the  exchange  to  a 
conclusion. 

June  12th.  Sunday,  June  12th.  This  day  passed  quietly  on  both  sides.  About 
ten  in  the  forenoon,  Mr.  Lavallee  arrived  at  Widow  Gurvain's  with  canoes  laden  with 
wines  and  goods.  He  said  that  abundance  reigned  at  Montreal,  goods  and  provisions 
being  very  cheap.  About  three  in  the  afternoon,  the  guardians  of  the  barge  brought 
on  shore  several  of  the  bodies  of  those  who  had  been  massacred  by  the  Indians  on  the 
preceding  day.     They  were  buried  on  the  shore  opposite  the  fort. 

June  13th.  Monday,  June  13th.  The  weather  being  rainy,  nothing  was  done 
on  either  side. 

June  14th.  Tuesday,  June  14th.  This  day  resembled  the  preceding,  until  four  in 
the  afternoon,  when  the  Indians  fired  a  few  shots,  which  were  not  noticed  by  the 
English.  On  this  day  the  Indians  went  to  Mr.  Lavall^e's  to  obtain  drink,  which  he 
refused  to  give.  The  Indians,  enraged  against  him,  plundered  his  liquors,  goods,  and 
even  his  provisions,  which  he  had  brought  for  his  return,  thinking  he  could  purchase 
them  at  a  cheajjer  rate  in  Montreal  than  here. 
June  15th.     Wednesday,  June  15th.     The  Indians,  wl  o  are  geneivJly  careless  of 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


283 


things  when  they  obtain  them  without  trouble,  having  consumed  all  the  provisions 
they  had  taken  in  the  barges  of  the  convoy  they  had  defeated,  were  obliged  to  have 
recourse  to  the  settlers  until  they  could  obtain  more  provisions.  Besides  receiving 
food  from  the  settlers,  they  killed  their  cattle.  About  ten  in  the  forenoon,  the  Poux 
came  for  the  third  time  to  exchange  prisoners,  and  offered  the  commander  of  St. 
Joseph  for  one  of  the  Indian  prisoners  who  were  in  the  fort.  They  were  deceived  in 
their  exchange ;  they  wanted  one  called  Large  Ears,  who  was  much  respected  among 
them ;  but  they  received,  instead  of  him,  one  No-kan-ong,  who  passed  among  them  for 
a  great  rogue.  But  No-kan-ong  was  the  cause  of  this  trick:  he  sent  word  to  the 
commander  not  to  give  the  Poux  the  one  they  wanted,  but  to  give  him  in  place  of  the 
other;  because  the  Poux  did  not  care  for  him,  and  as  the  other  enjoyed  much 
consideration  among  the  tribes,  by  keeping  him,  they  would  obtain  fmni  the  Poux  in 
exchange  all  the  other  prisoners.  Although  the  advice  came  from  an  Indian,  it  was 
followed,  and  Nokanong  was  given  in  exchange,  and  Large  Ears  kept,  that  other 
prisoners  might  be  obtained  for  him.  The  Pou.x  went  away  displeased  and 
disappointed. 

June  IGth.  Thursday,  June  IGth.  The  Indians  were  very  quiet  all  this  day.  It 
is  usual,  ill  places  besieged  and  blockaded,  to  observe  silence,  and  not  on  any  account 
to  ring  the  bells  of  the  churches,  in  order  that  the  enemy  might  not  know  the  time 
that  people  go  to  church.  The  bell  of  the  French  church  of  the  place  had  not  been 
rung  since  the  commencement  of  the  siege.  The  commander,  having  inqiiired  of  the 
curate  why  the  bell  was  not  rung,  permitted  it  to  be  rung ;  and  it  commenced  its 
function  by  ringing  the  Angelas. 

About  three  in  the  afternoon,  the  chiefs  of  the  good  band  of  Ilurons,  who,  since 
Father  Potier,  in  order  to  stop  them,  had  denied  the  sacraments,  had  not  annoyed  the 
English,  came  and  asked  for  an  interview.  They  entered  the  fort,  and  asked  the 
commander  for  peace,  making  many  excuses  about  what  they  had  done.  The 
commander  heard  tliem,  and  gave  them  a  flag,  which  they  accepted  as  a  sign  of 
union.     They  then  went  home. 

June  17th.  Friday,  June  17tli.  Nothing  was  done  on  either  side,  although  in 
the  council,  which  had  taken  place  on  the  seventeenth  day  of  the  preceding  month, 
it  had  been  decided  to  suffer  no  communication  between  the  inhabitants  of  the  fort. 
Some,  however,  were  favored  and  allowed  egress  and  ingress  when  they  wished 
to  attend  to  their  affairs.  Through  one  of  the  persons,  the  commander  learnt  that 
the  barge  was  in  the  lake,  at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  having  been  seen  by  one 
Repus,  while  he  was  hunting  in  that  neighborhood.  The  commander,  on  the 
departure  of  the  barge,  had  told  the  one  who  had  charge  of  it,  that  as  soon  as 
its  approach  was  known  to  the  fort  several  camion-shots  should  be  fired,  that  the 
crew  might  know  that  the  English  were  still  possessed  of  the  fort.  The  signal 
was   therefore   ordered  to  be   fired,  consisting  of  two  cannon-shots  at  sunset,  that 


in 


,if 


I 


284 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


the  barge  might  know  the  way  was  clear,  and  the  commander  master  of  the  fort 
and  its  neighborhood. 

June  18th.  Saturday,  June  18th,  a  resident  of  the  east  coast  opirosite  the  fort, 
crossed  the  river  about  two  in  the  morning,  to  give  the  commander  positive  information 
about  the  barge.  Whereupon,  the  commander  ordered  that  the  cannon  placed  upon 
the  side  of  the  southeast  gate  should  be  fired  twice,  at  intervals ;  this  was  done  about 
five  in  the  morning.  On  the  same  day,  Father  du  Jonais,  a  Jesuit  missionary  of  the 
Ottawas  of  Michilimackinac,  arrived  with  seven  Indians  of  that  tribe,  and  eight 
Saulteurs  from  the  same  place,  commanded  by  one  Kinochamek,  son  of  the  principal 
chief  of  those  tribes.  They  brought  the  news  of  the  defeat  of  the  English  of  that 
post  by  the  Saulteurs,  on  the  2d  day  of  this  month.  The  Father  Jesuit  went  and  took 
his  abode  with  his  brother,  the  missionary  of  the  Ilurons. 

June  19tli.  Sunday-,  June  19th,  the  fort  was  not  attacked.  The  arrival  of  the  son 
of  the  great  chief  caused  a  truce  between  the  Jlnglish  and  Indians.  He  pitched  his 
tent  half  a  league  above  Pontiac's  camp,  in  a  meadow  one  league  above  the  fort.  The 
Detroit  Indians  went  to  him  to  greet  him  on  the  part  of  their  chiefs ;  they  met  with  a 
cold  reception,  and  were  told  that  about  noon  he  and  his  people  would  go  to  Pontiac 
and  hold  a  council.  Upon  tliis,  Pontiac  ordered  the  Indians  of  every  tribe  to  remain 
on  their  mats  all  the  day,  to  listen  to  the  words  sent  by  the  chief  of  the  Saulteurs 
through  his  son.  While  the  Indians  were  preparing  for  the  council,  there  came  to  the 
village  of  the  Hurons,  about  ten,  two  canoes  containing  some  of  the  Shawanous  Indians 
and  some  Loups  (Lenape  Indians ')  from  Belle  Riviei-e,'  who  came  to  sec  what  was 
going  on.  On  their  arrival  thoy  learnt  that  Nouchkamek  was  come,  and  also  the 
place  of  his  camp.  They  did  not  laud,  but  wont  to  him  to  hold  a  council  on  tlie 
present  occiu-rences.  Two  or  three  French  settlers  were  called  to  give  information  on 
all  that  had  taken  place  since  the  first  attack  of  the  fort  by  the  Indians,  as  also  on  all 
that  Pontiac  had  done.  After  this  they  were  sent  home.  About  two  P.  M.,  Kcnon- 
chamek,  followed  by  his  people,  by  the  Shawanous  and  Lenajx>s,  came  to  Pontiac's 
camp  to  hold  a  council  according  to  the  message  he  had  sent.  On  his  arrival  at  the 
camp,  all  the  chiefs  assembled,  and  formed  according  to  the  custom  a  circle,  observing 
silence.  When  every  one  was  seated,  Kenouchamek  arose,  and  thus  began  in  the 
name  of  his  father,  addressing  his  sfieech  to  Pontiac : 

"  While  at  home,  brothers,  we  were  told  that  you  made  war  in  a  manner  very 
different  from  ours.  We  also  undertook  to  expel  the  English  from  our  lands,  and  we 
accomplished  our  enterprise,  but  without  drinking  their  blooil.  Instead  of  taking  them 
as  you  do,  we  seized  them  while  they  were  playing  at  ball,  and  knew  nothing  of  our 
designs.     Our  brothers  the  French  even  knew  nothing  of  them.     The  English,  0!i  our 


'  Henry  R.  Schoolcmft's  Algic  Ilcsonrciics. 

'  The  French  explorers  called  the  Ohio  La  Belle  Riviere. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY 


285 


attacking  them,  surrendered  themselves  prisoners,  mid  re  by  us  sent  to  their  father 
at  Montreal,  without  our  injuring  them.  The  soldiers  wished  to  defend  their  chiefs : 
we  slew  them,  but  only  during  the  action.  No  injury  was  done  by  us  to  the  French 
as  by  you ;  on  the  contrary,  we  entrusted  them  with  our  prizes.  But  you  !  You  have 
made  prisoners  on  the  lake  and  river ;  and  when  they  were  brought  to  your  camp,  you 
murdered  them,  drank  their  blood,  and  ate  their  flesh.  Is  the  flesh  of  men  fit  for 
food  ?  You  should  eat  only  the  flesh  of  deer,  and  other  animals  placed  on  the  earth 
by  the  master  of  life.  Besides,  while  you  were  waging  war  against  the  English,  yor 
were  injuring  the  French  by  killing  their  cattle  and  eating  their  provisions ;  and  when 
they  i-efused  to  supply  you,  you  ordered  your  people  to  plunder  their  property.  Our 
conduct  has  been  very  different ;  we  did  not  depend  on  the  French  for  our  provisions. 
We  took  care  when  we  formed  the  design  of  expelling  the  English,  to  collect  provisions 
for  ourselves,  our  wives  and  children.  You  should  have  done  the  same.  You  should 
not  have  exjKJsed  yourself  as  you  have  to  the  reproaches  of  our  great  father  the  king 
of  France,  when  he  comes.  You  expect  him,  say  you  ;  so  do  we.  He  will  be  pleased 
with  us,  but  not  with  you." 

Pontiac,  at  this  discourse,  was  like  a  child  surprised  in  a  fault,  who,  having  no 
excuse  to  give,  knows  not  what  to  say.  When  Kinouchamek  had  finished  speaking, 
the  chief  of  the  Chats  (Shawnecs)  commenced  thus  in  the  name  of  his  tribe  and 
Lenapes : 

"  Brothers,  we  also  e.xpelled  the  English,  because  we  were  ordered  to  do  so  by  the 
master  of  life,  through  our  brother  the  Lenape.  But  the  master  of  life  forbade  our 
injuring  the  French,  which  you  have  done.  Is  that  done  in  accordance  with  the 
message  and  wampum-belts  we  have  sent  you.  Inquire  of  our  brothers  the  Lenapes 
about  the  message  which  they  received  from  the  master  of  life.  It  is  very  well  to  slay 
during  the  combat,  but  not  when  it  is  over,  and  you  have  made  prisoners.  You  should 
not  eat  the  llesh  of  men.  You  should  not  drink  their  blood.  As  you  arc  French  like 
ourselves,  inquire  of  our  brothers  the  French  if,  after  they  have  been  to  war,  made 
prisoners,  and  brought  them  home,  they  kill  them  ?  They  do  not.  They  keep  them, 
and  give  them  in  exchange  for  their  jwople,  taken  prisoners  by  their  enemies.  We  see 
your  motives  for  acting  in  this  manner  towards  our  brothers  the  French.  You  did  not 
commence  this  war  in  the  right  way,  and  are  vexed  not  to  have  the  English  garrison 
in  your  ^wwer,  and  wish  our  brothers  the  French  to  feel  your  anger.  We  intended  to 
come  and  assist  you,  but  we  will  not  do  it,  for  you  will  accuse  us  with  all  the  wrongs 
done  by  you  and  your  people  to  our  brothers  the  French,  and  we  do  not  wish  for  any 
difliculties  with  our  Great  Father." 

During  this  council,  and  for  some  time  after  it,  not  a  word  was  uttered  by  Pontiac, 
who  was  conscious  of  being  in  the  wrong;  so  tliat  Kenouchamek,  the  Chats,  and 
Lenai)es  went  away  without  being  answered.  They  returned  to  their  camp  to  tak(! 
repose. 


I 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


-t.  i, 


About  three  in  the  afternoon,  news  was  brought  of  the  defeat  of  the  English 
at  Misamies  (Miami)  and  Vouilla  (  )  by  the  IndianR  of  those  places. 

About  seven  in  the  evening,  they  heard  that  a  large  party  of*******  gone 
down  to  Turkey  Island,  opposite  the  place  where  the  barge  had  anchored.  The  crew, 
seeing  many  people  in  the  island,  fearing  le.st  some  attempt  might  be  made  to  take  it, 
raised  the  anchor,  and  withdrew  to  *****,  to  wait  for  a  favorable  wind  to  ascend 
the  river  without  risk. 

June  20th.  Monday,  Jime  20th.  About  ten  in  the  morning,  the  Indians  came 
and  fired  several  shots  at  the  fort,  on  the  northeast  side.  After  this,  the  officers 
perceived  the  Indians  coming  fearlessly  along  the  highway.  To  stop  this  boldness, 
they  made  a  port-hole  on  that  side,  that  a  cannon  might  fire  towards  the  place  where 
the  suburb  was,  and  thus  stop  the  Indians.  About  four,  news  was  brought  in  the  fort 
that  the  fort  of  the  Presque  Isle  (Peninsula)  and  riviere  aux  Ikeufs  (formerly  built 
by  the  French  and  since  three  years  in  the  possession  of  the  English)  had  been  taken 
by  the  Indians. 

Marginal  note.  —  Departure  of  Father  du  Jouais ;  council  between  him  and  Pontiao 
for  the  liberty  of  the  English. 

June  21st.  Tuesday,  June  21st.  Daybreak,  a  great  movement  was  observed  on 
the  part  of  the  Indians,  who  pas.sed  back  and  forth  behind  the  fort,  uttering  cries,  as 
if  they  were  going  alx)ut  some  enterprise.  This  caused  the  English  to  examine  them, 
and  keep  on  their  gu.ard  during  the  whole  day.  They  tried  to  find  out  the  reason  of 
all  this.  They  learnt  it  during  the  following  night  from  Mr.  Baby,  who  came  about 
two  in  the  morning,  and  told  the  commander  that  several  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
south  coast,  on  the  banks  of  the  river,  had  mentioned  to  him  their  having  seen  the 
barge,  which  appeared  well-laden  and  full  of  people.  Of  this  the  Indians  had  received 
the  earliest  and  fullest  information,  which  had  caused  their  motions.  Upon  this 
rccitfil  of  Mr.  Baby,  the  commander  again  ordered  that  two  shots  should  be  fired 
towards  the  southwest,  as  a  signal  for  the  barge. 

Marginal  note.  —  Answer  to  the  jireccding  connctl, 

June  22d.  Wednesday,  June  22d.  The  Indians,  who,  as  I  have  mentioned  it 
above,  had  heard  of  the  approach  of  the  barge,  did  not  come  near  the  fort.  The 
garrison  improved  this  time  in  destroying  the  enclosures  and  cutting  down  the  fruit- 
trees,  and  removing  from  the  neighlwrhood  of  the  fort  every  thing  that  might  serve 
to  shelter  even  one  single  Indian.  In  the  course  of  the  da}-,  the  capture  of  the  Presque 
Isle  was  confirmed,  as  the  Indians  were  seen  returning  from  this  expedition.  They 
'were  very  numerous,  and  brought  by  land  their  prisoners,  in  the  numlwr  of  which 
were  the  commander  of  that  fort  and  a  woman  :  these  two  were  given  to  the  Hurons. 

About  three,  the  commander  was  apprised  of  the  cargo  of  the  barge,  and  the 
numlier  of  people  it  contained.  At  four,  the  commissary  and  judge  made  their  fourth 
visit  to  the  houses  to  obtain  provisions. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


287 


Maigiiiiil  note.  —  Departure  of  Kenouchiimek  for  Michiliinnckiiiae. 

June  23(1.  Thui-sday,  June  23d.  The  Indians  did  not  come  to  fire  at  the  fort, 
being  engaged  in  their  project  of  taking  the  barge,  which  was  at  the  head  of  the  lake. 
A  great  number  of  them  passed  behind  the  fort  very  early  in  the  morning.  They 
went  to  join  those  who  had  left  two  days  before.  They  all  took  a  station  on  Turkey 
Island,  which  fonns  a  little  strait,  the  river  being  very  narrow  at  that  place.  The 
Indians  in  the  island  made  an  intrenchment  with  trunks  of  trees  which  they  cut  down 
and  laid  on  the  bank,  towards  the  place  where  the  barge  was  to  pass.  They  also 
built  a  bank  with  earth  and  bush ;  so  that,  if  they  were  discovered,  they  might  have 
nothing  to  fear  from  the  cannon-shot.  Thus  sheltered,  they  watched  the  passing  of 
the  barge.  About  six  in  the  morning,  the  wind  appearing  favorable  to  go  up  the 
river,  the  crew  of  the  barge  wished  to  improve  it,  and  raised  the  anclior.  When 
opposite  the  island,  the  wind  having  gone  down,  they  were  obliged  to  cast  anchor,  as 
they  knew  nothing  of  the  trap  laid  for  them.  The  Indians  deferred  their  attack  until 
night.  The  crew,  however,  who  knew  well  that  they  could  not  arrive  at  the  fort 
without  being  attacked,  kept  a  good  watch,  determined  to  sell  their  lives  dearly.  The 
Indians  in  their  intrenchmcnts,  who,  since  the  time  the  barge  had  anchored  opposite 
them,  had  not  stopt  examining  it,  perceiving  only  twelve  or  fifteen  men,  thought  they 
might  attack  it  without  risk.  It  conttiined,  however,  seventy-two  men;  the  commander 
having  during  the  day  concealed  sixty  of  them  in  the  hold,  thinking  that  the  Indians, 
who  wei-e  always  wandering  about  those  parts,  seeing  only  twelve  men,  would  attempt 
to  capture  the  barge :  this  proved  to  be  the  case.  Between  eight  and  nine  in  the 
evening,  the  Indians  entered  their  canoes,  to  surround  the  barge  and  take  it  hy  storm. 
A  sentinel,  watching  on  the  quarter-deck,  perceived  them  at  a  distance,  rowing  slowly, 
for  fear  of  being  heard.  lie  gave  notice  of  it  to  the  captain  of  the  barge,  wlio  brought, 
without  noise,  all  his  people  on  deck,  and  placed  them  around  behind  the  gunwale 
with  arms  in  their  hands ;  the  camions  were  loaded  in  silence ;  they  were  told  to  await 
the  signal,  which  was  to  be  a  stroke  with  the  hammer  on  the  *  *  *.  They  suffered  the 
canoes  to  come  within  gun-shot.  The  Indians,  pleased  with  the  silence  which  reigned 
in  the  barge,  believed  it  contained  only  twelve  men ;  but  they  were  soon  undeceived ; 
for,  when  they  were  within  gun-shot,  the  signal  was  made,  and  the  discharge  of  the 
cannon  and  musketry  took  place  in  such  good  order,  that  the  Indians  were  glad  to 
return  to  their  intrenchmcnts :  they  wont  back  more  quickly  than  they  had  come. 
They  had  fifteen  men  killed,  and  the  same  number  wounded.  They  did  not  again 
attempt  to  approach  the  barge,  but  fired  at  it  during  the  whole  night,  and  wounded 
two  of  the  crew.  There  being  no  wind,  the  next  day  the  barge  returned  to  the  lake, 
to  await  a  better  wind. 

June  24th.  Friday,  June  24th,  the  fort  was  pretty  quiet  the  whole  day.  The 
Indians  were  engaged  in  their  design  of  taking  the  liarge,  and  forgot  the  fort  for  some 
time.     There  remained  but  a  few  loiterers,  two  of  whom  came  near  enough  to  be  seen. 


288 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


.•\Si 


Twenty  iiu'ii  iuid  Olio  olTicer  were  «ent  out  to  take  tlieiii.  Tlie  Iiuiiiuis  weiiig  them, 
mitl  thinking  they  wci-e  sent  for,  fired  their  guns  and  ran  away,  and  the  English  came 
biick  witliout  eflecting  any  tiling, 

June  25th.  Saturday,  June  25th,  the  weather  was  unsettled,  and  nothing  was  done 
on  either  side. 

June  2Gth.  Sunday,  June  26th,  .'<cveral  soldiei-s  who  had,  as  was  the  custom,  been 
watching  on  the  bastion  during  the  night,  mentioned  to  the  commander  that  they  had 
seen  two  Indians  enter  a  house  ncur  the  fort  at  a  distance  of  eight  arpents.  Where- 
uiMjn,  at  four  in  the  morning,  the  connnander  ordered  Captain  Hopkins  and  twenty-four 
men  of  his  company  to  invest  that  house  and  take  them  prisoners.  When  the  soldiers 
arrived  at  the  house,  they  only  found  the  person  who  had  charge  of  it.  They  searched 
the  house,  thinking  that  the  Indians  might  be  concealed.  They  only  found  two  sows 
with  young.  They  took  them  and  brought  them  to  the  fort.  This  prize  was  better 
than  the  one  they  hoped  to  seize.  The  same  day,  about  ten,  a  Mr.  *  *  *  *  *, 
8ervant.s  who  had  tied  their  master's  horses  one  ar[)ent  from  the  fort,  were  seen 
at  a  distance  by  two  Indians.  These  came  stealthily  through  the  grass,  Avhich 
was  very  tall,  cut  the  cords,  and  took  away  the  two  horses,  which  belonged  to 
two  officers. 

.June  27th.  Monday,  June  27tli,  the  Indians,  according  to  their  custom,  wandered 
around  the  fort  during  the  whole  day,  but  without  firing.  Mr.  Gammulin,  who,  since 
Mr.  Campbell  and  M'Dougall  were  prisoners  in  Pontiac's  camp,  had  paid  them  a  visit 
every  other  day,  and  sometimes  every  da}',  returned  this  day  about  three,  and  brought 
to  the  commander  a  letter  which  Pontiac  had  dictated,  and  Mr.  Cainpbeh  lad  written. 
This  letter  i-cquired  the  commander  and  his  people  to  leave  the  fort  immediately,  as 
Pontiac  expected,  w'thin  ten  days,  Kenouchamek,  high  chief  of  the  Saultcurs,  with 
eight  hundred  of  his  tribe,  for  whom  he  could  not  be  answerable.  That  on  their 
arrival  they  would  take  the  fort  by  storm.  The  commander  replied  that  he  was  ready 
for  them  and  for  Kin,  and  that  he  cared  not  for  them.  This  answer  did  not  jdease 
Pontiac  nor  his  Indians,  but  this  gave  no  concern  to  the  English. 

About  eight  in  the  evening  they  learnt  indirectly  that  the  barge  had  raised  the 
anchor  and  was  ascending  the  river. 

June  28th.  Tuesday,  June  28tli,  the  party  of  Indians  who  had  gone  down  the 
river  to  take  the  barge,  having  fortunately  failed  in  their  enterprise,  came  back,  and 
as  they  passed  the  fort,  fired  a  salute,  which  hurt  nobody.  The  Ilurons  arrived  at 
their  village.  About  four  in  the  afternoon,  news  was  brought  that  the  liarge  had 
weighed  anchor;  this  was  the  case.  The  wind  liaving  turned  to  the  S.  W.,  they 
improved  the  opportunity,  and  came  as  far  as  the  river  Rouge,  one  league  below  the 
fort.  The  wind  then  failing,  the}  cast  anchor  a  little  below.  The  barge  was  seen 
from  the  fort.  Alx)ut  seven,  two  cannon-shots  were  fired  from  the  fort,  but  the  barge 
did  not  reply.     This  gave  room  to  think  that  the  Indians  had  taken  it  i*.  n  ."CwOnd 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


289 


attempt.     This  was  said  oiwnly  in  the  fort  by  the  judge.     The  officers  nevertheless 
IKjrformed  a  concert  of  instruments  facing  the  place  where  it  was  anchored. 

June  29th.  Wednesday,  June  29th,  it  being  St.  Peter's-day,  the  Indians  did  not 
fire  at  the  fort ;  part  of  them  were  sleeping.  Others  went  to  the  houses  of  the  settlers 
to  make  up  for  their  useless  trouble.  At  *  *  *  *  in  the  afternoon  they  heard  behind 
the  fort  about  twenty  death-cries ;  these  came  from  the  Indians  who  were  returning 
from  the  capture  of  the  fort  of  Presque  Isle.  During  the  whole  of  this  day  the  barge 
kept  its  station,  there  being  no  wind. 

June  30th.  Thursday,  June  30th,  The  Indians  were  quiet  all  this  day,  expecting, 
as  they  said,  a  reinforcement.  AIjotI  six  in  the  morning  they  were  heard  uttering 
their  death-cries  and  several  cries  of  joy ;  but  the  meaning  of  those  cries  was  unknown. 
Tlie  wind  arising  from  the  S.  W.,  the  crew  of  the  barge  weighed  anchor  to  improve  it. 
Passing  Ijefore  the  Huron  village,  they  saw  the  Indians  with  their  anns  crossed  upon 
their  breasts,  wrapped  in  their  blankets,  at  the  doors  of  their  cabins.  The  barge  sent 
them  a  few  grape-shot  and  balls ;  these  wounded  a  few  of  them,  and  made  them  enter 
their  cabins.  Some  of  them  took  their  guns  and  fired  at  the  barge  imtil  it  arrived 
l)efore  the  fort,  which  it  reached  without  accident  at  four  P.  M.  Tlie  barge  contained 
the  thirty-five  men  and  the  officer  who  fled  towards  Sandusky,  as  I  said  above.  This 
officer  landed  and  brought  letters  to  the  commander.  These  letters  mentioned  the 
conclusion  of  peace.  Canada  was  to  Ijelong  to  the  English.  All  the  expenses  incurred 
in  Canada  since  the  commencement  of  the  war,  were  to  be  paid  by  his  Britannic 
Majesty. 

July  1st.  Friday,  July  1st.  The  Indians,  who  contiinied  wandering  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  fort  and  settlement,  having  frightened  the  cattle,  one  herd  came  to  the  fort ;  it 
consisted  of  three  oxen,  three  cows,  and  two  calves,  and  belonged  to  Mr.  Curllerier. 
Mr.  St.  Martin,  the  interpreter  of  the  Ilurons,  who,  since  the  commencement  *  *  *  * 
had  abandoned  his  house,  which  was  built  at  a  distance  of  six  arpents  from  the  fort, 
in  a  southwesterly  direction,  because  the  Indians  concealed  themselves  behind  it  to 
ca  *  *  *  *  caused  the  English  to  fire  on  it,  and  he  did  not  feel  secure  on  the  part  of  the 
English  or  Indians ;  he  had  gone  to  Father  Potier's,  there  to  remain  imtil  the  end  of 
the  war;  but  having  had,  on  the  preceding  day,  a  conversation  with  a  Huron,  on  whom 
he  could  depend,  he  learnt  from  him  that  the  Indians  wished  the  French  to  take  arms 
against  the  English,  and  having  not  wished  to  do  so,  came  and  asked  leave  to  withdraw 
into  the  fort ;  his  request  was  granted.  He  came  with  his  mother,  his  mother-in-law, 
and  all  his  *  *  *  *  he  remained  one  day  with  Mr.  La  Butte,  and  went  afterwards  to 
Mr.  Bellastres. 

July  2d.     Saturday,  July  2d.     Mr.  M'Dougal,  who  had  left  the  fort  in  company 

with  Mr.  Campbell,  and  who  had  been  detained  prisoner,  escaped  with  three  other 

English  prisoners.     They  entered  the  fort  about  three  in  the  morning.     As  they  were 

on  the  iwint  of  leaving,  they  made  their  endeavors  to  bring  Mr.  Campbell  with  them, 

Pt.  II.  — 37 


I 


I 


i; 


890 


TOPICAL  HISTORY. 


but  in  vain.  He  wished  much  to  follow  them,  but  being  very  phort-nightetl,  he  feared 
that  in  attempting  to  escape  he  might  fall  in  with  another  party  of  Indians,  and  come 
to  an  untimely  end,  and  he  had  no  wish  to  die  before  his  time. 

At  five  in  the  morning,  an  officer  and  twenty  soldiers  went  out  to  destroy  the 
inclosure  of  Mr.  St.  Martin's  farm,  and  also  to  cut  down  the  wheat  which  concealed 
the  Indians.  These  latter,  seeing  that  their  hiding  places  were  being  destroyed,  came 
in  a  determinate  manner  to  attack  the  English,  who  re-entered  the  fort  more  quickly 
than  they  had  left  it.  The  Indians  fired  at  the  fort  during  the  whole  day,  without 
causing  any  injury.  The  garrison  kept  good  watch  during  the  whole  day,  and  placed 
four  sentinels  on  platforms  outside  the  fort,  on  the  brow  of  the  hill  behind  it.  Since 
this  time,  four  sentinels  were  placed  on  the  platform  day  and  night.  The  garrison 
and  new-comers  unloaded  the  barge,  and  convoyed  the  cargo  to  the  storehouse. 

About  seven,  P.  M.,  it  was  reported  in  the  fort,  that  the  Indians  had  called  on  all 
the  settlers,  and  brought  to  their  camp  all  the  old  men  and  heads  of  families,  to  be 
present  at  a  council  they  were  to  hold,  in  order  to  oblige  the  French  to  take  arms 
against  the  English.  They  learnt  during  the  night,  that  the  Indians,  when  the 
council  mentioned  above  was  over,  had  sent  the  heads  of  families  and  old  men 
uninjured. 

*  *  *  *  vexed  at  the  fortunate  arrival  of  the  barge,  and  tliat  in  spite  of  his 
precautions  and  those  of  his  people,  the  provisions  and  ammunition  had  reached  the 
English,  resolved  to  cause  the  settlers  to  take  up  arms,  and  to  accomplish  this  he 
invited  tlie  old  men  and  heads  of  fiimilies  to  come  to  the  camp  on  business  which 
concerned  them.  When  they  had  all  arrived,  Pontiac  began  to  speak,  according  to 
custom,  addressing  himself  to  all  the  French  and  *  *  *  *  a  war-belt  in  the  middle  of 
the  council.  Brothers,  said  he,  I  am  growing  weary  of  seeing  the  vermin  on  our 
lands :  such  I  suppose  is  also  the  case  with  you.  I  think  you  wish  for  their  expulsion 
as  much  as  I  do.  We  ought  to  try  to  remove  these  troublesome  people.  I  have 
already  told  you,  and  I  repeat  that  I  commenced  this  war  on  your  account  as  much  as 
on  ours,  and  that  I  knew  what  I  was  doing  *  *  *  *  I  know,  I  say,  what  I  am  about, 
and  during  the  present  year,  however  numerous  they  may  be,  they  shall  be  expelled 
Canada.  The  master  of  life  commands  it,  and  we  must  do  his  bidding.  Should  you, 
who  know  him  better  than  we  do,  try  to  appease  his  will?  Hitherto  I  have  said 
nothing,  hoping  you  would  offer  no  interruption  to  our  designs.  I  have  not  asked  you 
to  join,  because  I  did  not  know  you  would  assist  them  against  us.  You  will  probably 
say  that  you  are  not  on  their  side.  That  I  know,  but  are  you  doing  nothing  against 
us  when  you  tell  them  all  that  we  do,  and  all  that  we  say  ?  *  *  *  *  now  you  have  a 
choice  to  make ;  you  must  be  French,  as  we  are,  or  English  like  them.  If  you  are 
French,  accept  this  belt  for  yourselves  or  your  young  jjeople,  that  they  may  join  us. 
If  you  are  English,  we  declare  war  against  you.  This  would  be  a  sad  alternative  for 
us,  you  being,  as  well  as  we,  the  children  of  our  Great  Father.     It  would  grieve  us  to 


TOPICAL    niSTORT. 


801 


wage  war  against  our  brothers  on  account  of  such  dogs.  It  would  give  us  great 
concern  to  fall  on  you,  as  we  are  all  French.  I'^  9  :^hould  do  it,  we  should  no  longer 
be  so.  The  interests  we  defend  are  those  of  our  i..ihers,  yours  and  our  own.  Give  us 
an  answer,  brothers,  wo  listen  to  you ;  look  at  this  belt,  which  is  intended  for  you  or 
your  young  people. 

One  of  the  most  resjiected  among  the  French,  who  had  mistrusted  Pontiac's  design, 
and  had  taken  with  him  in  the  council  the  copy  of  the  capitulation  of  Montreal  and 
Detroit,  arose,  and  thus  spake  in  the  name  of  all  the  others,  holding  in  his  hand  that 
copy,  and  addressing  the  Indians :  —  My  brothers,  your  wishes  arc  known  to  us ;  when 
you  declared  war  against  the  English,  we  foresaw  that  you  would  desire  us  to  join 
with  you  against  them.  We  do  not  for  one  moment  hesitate  in  following  you,  but 
you  must  in  the  first  place  loosen  the  bonds  which  our  father  and  the  father  of  the 
English  have  placed  uix)n  our  anns.  These  bonds  prevent  our  taking  your  belt.  Do 
you  think,  brothers,  that  we  do  not  grieve  in  seeing  you  take  oi'r  interests,  without 
being  able  to  assist  you  ?  Our  grief  is  great.  Do  you  not  recollect  that  which  we  told 
you  in  our  last  council  held  on  this  subject  ?  The  king  of  France,  in  giving  the  lands 
to  the  king  of  England,  forbade  our  fighting  against  his  children,  and  ordered  us  to 
consider  them  as  our  brothers,  and  the  king  of  England  as  our  father.  You  may  think 
that  we  say  this  through  ill-will ;  not  so.  Our  common  father  has  acquainted  us  with 
his  will,  by  sending  us  this  his  writing.  lie  commands  us  to  remain  on  our  mats 
until  his  arrival,  because  he  wishes  himself  to  luibind  us.  Without  considering  all 
this,  you  say  that  if  we  do  not  take  your  belt,  you  will  make  war  against  us.  Our 
father  has  forbidden  our  fighting,  when  our  brothera  *  *  *  *  war.  Although  you  call 
us  English,  we  shall  not  fight  against  you  ;  but  French  as  we  are  *  *  *  *  always  been. 
We  feel  surprised,  brothers,  you  have  *  *  *  *  when  our  father  left  the  place,  what  did 
you  promise  him  ?  *  *  *  *  us  our  wives  and  children,  and  that  you  would  attend  to 
our  welfare.  What  injury  have  we  done  you  ?  Is  it  on  account  of  *  *  *  *  Did  you 
not  promise  our  father  that  you  would  wait  for  him  ?  Have  you  done  so  ?  You  say 
you  are  fighting  for  him ;  wait  for  him  as  *  *  *  *  and  when  he  comes,  he  will  unbind 
us ;  we  will  join  you,  and  all  will  do  his  will.     Reply  in  your  turn,  my  brothera. 

Pontiac,  who  was  impelled  by  a  band  of  French  volunteers,  who,  having  no  fixed 
place  of  residence,  had  raised  the  mask  and  cared  for  nothing,  replied  they  should  do 
as  he  did,  and  if  the  old  men  did  not,  the  young  people  should. 

The  French  then,  closely  pressed  by  Pontiac,  asked  for  one  day's  delay,  at  the  end 
of  which  they  would  all  come  and  give  him  an  answer.  One  of  the  chiefs  of  the 
volunteers,  thinking  himself  perfectly  secure  if  he  joined  Pontiac,  rose  from  his  seat, 
and  taking  up  the  belt,  said,  in  add.essing  the  Indians :  Brothers,  I  and  my  young 
people  have  broken  our  bonds  and  accept  your  belt.  We  are  ready  to  follow  you.  We 
will  go  and  seek  our  young  people  to  join  us.  We  shall  find  some.  We  shall  soon  be 
in  possession  of  the  fort  and  all  it  contains.     Such  a  mean  speech,  made  by  people 


N 


SM 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


who  were  void  of  courage  and  honor,  vexed  all  the  old  men  who  had  been  called  to 
the  council.  After  having  asked  one  day  to  consider  on  the  matter,  they  asked 
Pontiac's  leave  to  withdraw.  Having  shaken  hands  with  all  the  chiefs,  each  French- 
man went  home,  displeased  with  having  been  witness  to  such  a  mean  action,  which 
could  not  fail  .'<iM)ner  or  later  to  bring  blame  on  all  the  French.  Those  who  had 
accepted  the  l)elt  renniined  in  the  camp,  well  aware  that  after  the  conduct  of  which 
they  iiad  been  guilty,  no  one  would  receive  them.  This  council  commenced  at  *  *  *  * 
and  ended  at  eight;  so  that  the  day  Ix'ing  too  far  gone  to  *  *  *  *  other  Indians. 

July  3d.  *  *  *  *  July  M.  The  Indians  employed  all  this  day  in  a  feast  *  *  *  *  to 
treat  their  new  warriors.  The  commander,  who  had  learned  in  the  morning  what 
Inxd  taken  place  on  the  pivceding  day,  onlered  the  judge  to  demand  the  axes  and  picks 
of  all  the  French  who  were  in  the  fort,  and  to  *  *  *  *  those  who  had  arms,  and  tho.sc 
who  had  none  *  *  *  *  of  all  to  ser\'e  in  case  of  need.  About  two  in  the  *  *  *  *  twenty 
men  of  the  garris<in  to  take  down  a  fence  *  *  *  *  a  fruit^garden.  The  trees  were  cut 
down,  and  the  posts  of  the  fence  taken  up  and  burnt  with  the  trees,  and  they  cleared  the 
ground,  *  *  *  *  l)olonged  to  Mr.  Csesar  Bourgeois  of  the  fort.  *  *  *  *  day.  Tlje  judge 
was  ordered  by  the  commander  to  as.semble  all  the  French  who  were  in  the  fon.  before 
the  door  of  the  church,  to  reml  to  them  an  account  of  the  conclusion  of  pease.  This 
being  done,  an  instrumental  concert  took  place,  and  lasted  one  hour. 

An  inhabitant  of  the  fort,  who  unfortunately  had  a  stm  in  the  nuinlx>r  of  the 
calhilintn,  having  by  his  remonstrances  convinced  his  son  of  his  fault,  and  that  of  his 
friends,  the  son  left  the  troop  and  took  with  him  the  lx?lt  which  he  gave  to  his  father, 
that  he  might  return  it  to  Pontiac.  The  father  went  early  in  the  morning  to  Pontiac, 
who  had  a  great  regard  for  him,  and  thus  addrcs.sed  him.  You  are  a  chief,  and  I  have 
hitherto  known  you  as  a  sensible  man ;  you  appear  no  longer  *«(/,  when  you  believe 
these  young  people ;  in  a  short  time,  instead  of  assisting  you  they  will  betray  you, 
and  will  jjerhaps  give  you  up  to  the  English.  You,  who  command  so  many  men, 
suffer  yourself  to  be  commanded  by  i^ople  who  have  no  sense,  and  who,  instead  of 
assisting  you  in  taking  the  fort,  will  be  the  first  to  run  away  *  *  *  *  you  *  *  *  *  who 
have  always  despised  a  man  who  placed  himself  •  *  *  *  saying  that  he  was  a  bid 
fellow ;  and  now  *  *  *  *  have  you  lost  your  wits  ?  Why  place  *  *  *  *  like  you, 
young  people  who  have  no  sense  *  *  *  "  and  come  and  cry  to  get  off  from  what  they 
have  promised  *  *  *  *  subject  with  you  because  |ierhaps  tliey  will  kill  you  *  *  *  *  are 
men,  and  that  you  need  not  lose  *  *  *  *  make  use  of  these  young  people.  What 
obligations  will  be  due  to  you  *  *  *  *  come  when  he  knows  that  you  have  compelled 
the  *  *  *  *  to  take  arms  *  *  *  •  ^yill  say  to  you.  You  have  not  driven  away  the 
English,  the  French  dune  that  but  you  have  merely  *  *  ♦  *  take  no  notice  of  you, 
thus,  Pontiac  believe  me,  take  back  your  belt,  sent  by  my  son,  and  think  well  of  what 
I  have  told  you. 

Pontiac,  who,  though  an  Indian,  did  not  lack  wit  *  *  *  *  na  well  as  his  Ottawas 


TOPICAL  History. 


•  *  *  *  attontivcly  what  the  Frenchmnn  hml  told  him,  ♦  *  '  are  riphf  my 
brothor.  I  tliiuik  you  for  your  lulvico ;  iiiul  takiiij;  tlie  bt'lt,  th»'V  |  ''tl,  uiic  l<  n  to 
the  eiiinp,  uud  tlie  other  to  return  home  *•'•**  to  trouble  tb«'  rciicli  ixi  hoajfi-r 
nlxnit  takinj;  up  nriiiH.  The  Stiulteuiti,  I'oux,  and  the  wicked  band  of  lluronn, 
threatened,  however,  several  times  the  French  with  war,  as  I  bIuiU  mention 
hereafter. 

The  Ilurons  of  the  wicked  band,  who  were  never  of  any  service  to  the  French  or 
English,  knowiii}?  that  Pontiac,  contenting  himself  with  the  volunteers,  had  determined 
not  to  troul)le  tlie  French  any  more  aJKnit  joining  him,  went  with  the  Poux  and 
Saulteurs  to  endeavor  to  oblige  the  Fivnch  to  join  with  them,  tlireatening  them  with 
war,  and  taking  away  their  young  people  in  spite  of  their  parents.  This  caused  a 
gix>at  commotion  among  the  French,  as  they  wished  to  remain  neutral.  But  fearing 
lest  the  Indians  might  efl'ect  their  threats,  tliey  t(M)k  arms  among  themselves,  to  guard 
the  roads  for  fear  of  a  surprise.  Those  Indians,  .seeing  the  French  on  the  watch,  did 
not  dare  attack  them,  but  revenged  tliemselves  on  the  stray  cattle.  Mr.  Peter 
Beauine,  whose  farm  is  opposite  the  fort,  across  the  river,  fearing  that  the  storm 
might  fall  upon  him,  came  and  asked  leave  to  withdraw  into  the  fort,  which  was 
granted. 

*  *  *  *  Keaume,  who,  during  the  preceding  night,  had  obtained  leave  to  come  to 
the  fort  witii  all  his  family,  crossed  the  river  at  dawn  ''■'  *  *  *  furniture,  luggage,  and 
animals,  and  took  up  his  quarters  in  a  bouse  of  Mr.  Di'tpiindre's,  which  was  then 
vacant.      The  commander  *   *   *    *  ^\^^,  Indians  with  some  volunteers  had  opened 

*  *  *  *  night,  behind  Mr.  Baby's  house,  at  a  distance  of  *  *  *  *  ari)ents  from  the 
fort,  in  a  north  westerly  direction ;  on  this  reiwrt  the  commander  *  *  *  •'=  to  iill  the 
nocturnal  work  of  the  Indians  *  *  *  *,  Mr.  Ilay,  an  ofiicer  in  the  rojal  American 
troops,  went  out  *  *  *  *  ty  men  to  go  and  reconnoitre  *  *  *  *  the  commander's 
orders.  The  party  who  were  not  *  *  *  *  the  Indians  were  concealed,  advanced 
speedily  *  *  *  *  they  had  just  come  to  the  place  *  *  *  *  discovered  and  attacked 
them  without  wounding  them  *  *  *  *  face   animated   his   people   by   his   example 

*  *  *  *  to  the  enemy,  and  fell  on  them  with  his  people.  The  fire  *  •  •  •  victory 
balanced.  The  commander,  hearing  the  rejiort  of  muskets  upon  the  rampart  *  *  »  * 
the  action,  and  fearing  the  approach  of  a  larger  number  of  Indians  *  *  *  *  friends 
and  consequently  his  party  would  be  too  *  *  *  *  bold  sent  immediately  relief  to  Mr. 
Ilay.  Mr.  Hopkins,  at  the  head  of  forty  soldiers,  and  some  Frenchmen  of  the  fort, 
went  at  full  sjjeed.  The  Indians  held  *  *  *  *  first  Ix'cause  they  were  intrenched ; 
but  when  the  succor  arrived,  they  found  themselves  too  few.  The  volunteers  were 
the  fii*st  to  decamp.  The  Indians  contended  some  time  with  the  English  for  the 
possession  of  the  place.  Mr.  Hopkins,  seeing  the  obstinacy  of  the  Indians,  nuule 
a  circuit  to  take  the  Indians  in  flank,  while  his  friends  attacked  them  in  front.  This 
mana'uvre  succeeded.     The  Indians  abandoned  their  retreat.     The  English  pursued 


tM 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


them,  and  killed  two  of  their  number;  one  of  them  was  Hoalpcd  by  an  English  ooldior 
who  had  been  a  prisoner  among  the  Indians.  One  soldier  was  slightly  wounded  in 
the  head  by  the  blow  from  the  butt-end  of  a  gun,  which  he  had  received  from  one  of 
the  Indians  who  was  ailenvards  killed ;  as  this  soldier  had  killed  him,  he  took  all  his 
silver  ornaments  to  pay  himself  for  his  wound.  After  the  Indians  were  put  to  flight, 
their  trench  was  fdled  up,  and  all  the  neighboring  fences  burned.  The  exjiedition 
being  over,  the  troops  re-entered  the  fort  with  the  French.  The  commander  called 
these  on  the  military  square  to  thank  them  for  liaving  assisted  his  soldiers,  inquired 
if  all  the  French  were  provided  with  arms,  and  ordered  some  to  be  given  to  those  who 
had  none ;  he  also  ordered  those  which  had  arms  that  wanted  repairing,  to  carry  them 
to  the  royal  stores,  to  have  them  repaired  at  the  king's  expense,  and  that  he  tvishcd  to 
give  them  the  choice  of  going  out  as  volunteers,  when  they  thought  proper,  or  to 
select  an  officer  to  command  them  in  case  of  need.  The  French  chose  Mr.  Sterling 
for  their  commander,  and  altogether  went  with  an  officer  *  *  *  *  the  judge  who  told 
him  of  the  choice  which  the  militia  had  made  of  him  for  their  commander,  and  at  the 
same  time  *  *  *  *  captain  of  the  militia.  That  worthy  man  thanked  *  *  »  ♦  their 
choice,  and  told  them  that  he  hoped  when  opportunity  *  *  *  *  room  to  be  displeased 
with  their  choice.  Every  one  *  *  *  *  pleased  and  determined  to  do  his  duty  *  *  ♦  * 
under  such  a  chief. 

About  four  in  the  afternoon,  an  officer  who  had  *  *  *  *  from  Sandusky,  and  taken 
prisoner  by  the  Indians  *  *  *  *  ran  away  as  fast  as  he  coidd,  from  a  French  house  in 
which  his  wife  *  *  *  *  placed  him  to  conceal  him.  They  were  told  by  him,  that  the 
Indian  who  had  been  killed  and  scalped  was  a  chief  of  the  Saidteurs  and  nephew  of 
*  *  *  *  chief  of  the  Saulteurs  of  Saginaw,  and  that  this  (hvassa  (?)  having  learnt 
that  his  nephew  was  slain,  went  •  •  •  •  whom  he  abused  and  asked  him  for  Mr. 
Campbell.  You  like  those  bad  people  so  well,  said  he,  that  you  take  care  of  tliem :  I 
will  have  him  now,  give  him  to  me.  Pontiac  suffered  Owassa  to  take  Mr.  Campbell 
to  his  camp,  where  he  was  stripped  by  his  young  people,  and  then  killed  with  war- 
clubs.  When  he  was  killed,  they  threw  him  into  the  river,  and  the  body  floated  as 
far  •  *  •  *  where  the  French  had  brought  him  when  he  left,  the  fort,  before  Mr. 
Cuillerie's  house,  where  he  was  buried. 

About  six  in  the  evening,  powder  and  balls  were  given,  by  Mr.  Sterling,  to  the 
French  militia. 

July  5th.  Tuesday,  July  5th.  The  Indians  did  not  trouble  the  fort ;  they  went 
to  the  settlers,  and  took  all  the  axes  and  picks  which  they  could  catch,  and  carried 
them  to  some  blacksmiths,  to  have  them  mended.  These  refused  to  work  for  them, 
saying  their  forger  was  in  the  fort.  On  this  day,  the  chief  of  the  volunteers  who  had 
joined  the  Indians  undertook  to  engage  in  his  party  the  children  of  the  settlers,  to  aid 
him  in  taking  or  burning  one  of  the  barges.  To  effect  this,  he  went  to  those  houses 
where  he  knew  there  were  young  people,  to  induce  them  to  join  him ;  but  he  could 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


S96 


not  HU(;ce(>il ;  uiiil  ivhuIvikI  on  OHcnping  tu  UlinoiH,  an  Huiiie  uf  tlit>  si'ttlci'H  thivatoiicd  to 
give  him  up  t4)  the  commander,  who  would  not  have  spared  him,  but  rewarded  him 
according  to  liis  deserts. 

July  6th.  WednoHday,  July  0th.  The  Indians,  who  for  some  days  had  formed  the 
design  of  *****  *  the  large  barge,  which  annoyed  them  on  the  highway  and 
prevented  their  approaching  the  fort  in  that  direction,  **»**•  li^y  to  bring  it 
about,  they  went  to  several  of  the  French  to  find  out  the  way  they  could  manage  it. 
The  settlers  told  them  they  did  not  know,  when  the  Indians  went  away. 

*  *  *  *  July.  The  Indians  did  not  trouble  the  fort.  *****  g^y-e  them  some 
occupation  in  their  camp,  in  the  following  manner  :*****  in  the  morning,  a  light 
southwest  breeze  sprung  up ;  this  appeared  *****  the  English  in  the  design  they 
had  formed  to  go  and  pay  a  visit  *******  l^s  camp  with  the  large  barge.  As 
they  were  getting  ready  to  start,  the  wind  went  down,  and  anchor  was  cast,  to  wait 
for  a  favorable  breeze,  which  was  not  long.  *  *  *  eleven  o'clock,  it  having  increased, 
they  weighed  anchor  for  a  second  time,  and  went  up  the  river,  opposite  Pontiac's 
camp,  where  they  stopjK'd,  and  saluted  it  with  balls  and  grenades,  without  sparing 
*****  neither  he  nor  his  people  e.\i)ected  such  a  visit,  left  the  shore  and  their 
goods,  which  were  damaged  by  the  balls  and  bombs.  This  diversion  lasted  from  noon 
**•**.  The  barge  had  cast  anchor  until  four,  when  she  returned  to  her  station. 
During  all  this,  not  one  Indian  was  wounded. 

While  one  part  of  the  English  were  thus  destroying  Pontiac's  camp,  the  Poux  came, 
with  Mr.  Gammulin,  to  sue  for  iwace.  It  was  granted  them,  on  condition  that  they 
should  remain  neutral  and  return  all  the  prisoners.  They  promised,  but  did  not  keep 
their  word. 

On  this  day,  the  Iavo  bands  of  Ilurons  held  a  council  about  coming  to  the  fort  and 
making  peace  with  the  commander.  Marginal  note  partly  destroyed —  ***♦*» 
Indians,  having  seen  that  ********  jji  the  camp,  before  Mr.  *  *  *  *  their 
prisoners  escaping  *  *  *  *  Mr.  Marsac's. 

July  8th.  Friday,  July  8th.  The  commander,  who  intended  to  send  the  barge 
back  to  Niagara,  ordered  that,  in  order  to  procure  ballast,  they  should  demolish  an  old 
building,  which  had  formerly  been  raised  as  a  powder-house,  to  obtain  the  stones. 
This  was  done,  during  the  forenoon,  by  the  French  and  the  English  soldiers. 

About  two  P.  M.,  the  Hurons  came  to  parley  with  the  commander,  as  they  had 
agreed  in  the  council  on  the  preceding  day.  The  commander  caused  them  to  be 
admitted,  and  a  council  was  held  on  the  military  square,  ******  to  make  peace 
with  the  English.  The  English  replied,  that  if  they  were  willing  to  return  all  the 
prisoners  and  merchandise,  and  remain  quiet  on  their  mats,  that  all  should  ***** 
and  what  had  pas.sed  forgotten.  They  replied,  that  they  would  return  to  their  village 
and  speak  with  their  other  brothers,  and  make  them  agree  to  the  conditions.  They 
went  away  fully  resolved  to  do  that  which  was  required  of  them,  and  promising  to 


296 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


■1  ■■! 


return  tho  next  day.  About  five,  the  Ponx  came,  with  Mr.  Gamraehn,  to  promise  the 
restitution  of  the  English  prisoners  who  were  in  the  village,  on  condition  of  obtaining 
their  friends  who  were  in  the  fort. 

About  six,  the  Ottawas  concealed  themselves  behind  Mr.  Beaubien's  house,  and  fired 
for  *  *  *  *  at  the  large  barge,  which  returned  their  fire,  but  without  injuring  them. 
On  this  day,  Mr.  Maisonville  arrived  with  *****  brandy,  lead,  salt,  and  packages, 
and  reached  *  *  *  *  with  much  trouble. 

July  9th.  Saturday,  July  9th.  The  Ottawas  and  Saulteurs  formed  the  design  of 
burning  the  barge,  while  at  anchor,  if  possible.  To  effect  this,  *****  to  make  a 
small  fire-boat  to  send  adrift  on  the  river,  *****  barge,  when  finished.  They 
were  two  days  about  this,  during  which  time  they  did  not  trouble  the  fort.  About 
four,  the  Hurons  came,  as  they  had  promised  on  the  preceding  day,  and  brought  with 
them  seven  prisoners.  The  commander  of  the  Presque  Isle,  a  woman,  and  child,  were 
in  the  number.  They  gave  them  to  the  commander,  and  asked  for  peace.  lie  replied, 
that  they  must  return  all  the  goods  they  had  taken  from  the  merchants,  even  to  the 
last  needle,  and  that  afterwards  peace  would  be  granted.  They  went  away,  promising 
to  return  all  the  merchandise  they  had  in  their  village. 

About  seven,  the  commander  was  told  that  the  Indians  were  about  setting  fire  to 
the  fort  with  arrows,  and  had  joined  together  small  fire-boats  to  burn  the  two  barges 
during  the  night.  They  indeed  spared  no  trouble  to  execute  their  design  of  burning 
the  barges,  but  could  not  succeed. 

July  10th.  Sunday,  July  10th,  the  Indians,  who  had  spent  two  days  in  making 
their  preparations  to  burn  the  barges,  sent  their  work  about  two  in  the  morning. 
Their  work  consisted  of  two  boats  fastened  together  with  white  wood-bark,  and  filled 
with  dry  split  wood  with  *  *  *  *  the  whole  of  which  was  ignited.  The  boats  drifted 
on  the  shore  about  one  arpent  from  the  barges,  without  causing  these  the  slightest 
injury.  Thus  the  labor  of  the  Indians  became  useless,  and  their  time  was  lost.  The 
Indians  seeing  this,  commenced  another  fire-boat,  and  did  not  trouble  the  fort  this 
day. 

At  nine  in  the  evening  the  commander  was  told  by  some  Frenchman  that  surely 
the  Indians  intended  setting  the  *  *  *  *  on  fire  favored  by  darkness,  a  thinp:  which 
perhaps  *  *  *  *  very  often  these  newsmongers  were  *  *  *  *  to  be  well  received,  often 
supposed  *  *  *  •  and  framed  some  falsehood,  which  they  came  and  mentioned  to  the 
oflicers.  These  often,  instead  of  thanking  them,  laughed  at  them.  However,  as  truth 
will  sometimes  be  found  in  a  number  of  falsehoods,  the  commander  ordered  imme- 
diately *  *  *  *  Frenchmen  and  four  soldiers  to  go  and  bivouac  at  a  short  distance 
from  the  fort  at  each  corner.  These  were  told  to  fire  if  they  perceived  any  thing,  and 
to  withdraw  under  the  fort  after  having  fired. 

July  11th.  Monday,  July  llth,  the  Indians  who  were  busy  about  an  undertaking 
nearly  similar  to  the  other,  did  not  trouble  the  fort  during  the  whole  of  this  day. 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


297 


About  ten  in  the  morning  the  Ilnrons  came  and  performed  their  promise,  bringing 
back  all  the  goods  which  had  been  taken  from  the  merchants  on  the  lake  and  river, 
and  peace  was  made  between  them  and  the  English. 

About  six,  a  Frenchman  who  dwelt  out  of  the  fort  came  and  told  the  commander 
that  the  st^cond  fne-1)oat  wa.s  ready,  and  that  they  intended  to  send  it  during  the 
night.     This  infornnition  was  correct. 

July  12th.  Tuesday,  July  12th,  at  one  in  the  morning,  the  Indians  sent  off  their 
fire-lwat,  with  us  miwh  success  as  the  first  time.  Two  cannon-shots  were  fired  from 
the  fort ;  these  dispersed  the  Indians,  who  were  seated  on  the  highway  towards  the 
S.  W.  They  had  come  on  the  biink  of  the  river  to  admire  the  effect  of  their  works. 
Two  shots  were  sent  from  the  barge  on  the  fire-boat ;  these  broke  it,  and  thus  destroyed 
the  lalwr  of  the  Indians. 

About  ten,  the  Poux  came,  according  to  their  promise,  and  brought  three  English 
prisoners  that  *  •  *  *  might  be  granted  them.  They  asked  for  tlieir  man.  The 
commander  replied  that  when  they  had  returned  all  the  prisoners  that  were  in  their 
village,  their  man  would  be  given  them,  and  all  should  be  concluded.  The^'  promised 
to  come  in  the  afternoon.  About  three,  the  barge  which  had  come  from  Niagara  took 
its  departure,  with  orders  to  bring  provisions  and  soldiers.  Alwut  the  same  time  the 
Poux  returned  according  to  their  promise,  and  brought  with  them  seven  prisoners,  and 
asked  the  commander  for  their  comrade.  As  he  was  going  to  lie  given  up  to  them, 
one  Jacqucmane  (Jackman)  a  prisoner  formerly  given  to  the  Poux  as  a  present, 
and  just  returned  by  them,  said  to  the  commander  in  English,  that  the  Poux  had 
still  *  *  *  *  their  village.  This  made  the  commander  change  his  mind  and  retain 
his  prisoner,  telling  the  Poux  to  bring  back  *  *  •  *  and  thej'  should  have  what  they 
wanted.  They  looked  at  each  other,  and  formed  the  design  at  all  hazards  to  kill  the 
commander  and  the  officers  who  accompanied  him.  An  occurrence  prevented  this. 
An  Ottawa  having  entered  the  fort  with  them,  was  recognized  by  Mr.  M'Dougal, 
arrested,  and  put  into  prison  under  a  safe  guard.  Tiiis  frightened  the  Poux,  who, 
though  displeased  in  not  obtaining  what  they  wanted,  withdrew,  determined  in  taking 
revenge  the  prcrcdiiKj  (ensuing)  night,  [nuit  pi-dci^dente,  original.] 

July  13th.  Wednesday,  July  13th,  the  Indians  having  perceived  that  sentinels 
were  placed  out  of  the  fort,  to  detect  them  in  their  nightly  visits  around  the  fort, 
resolved  on  taking  revenge  for  the  refusal  they  had  incurred  on  the  preceding  day. 
To  effect  this,  they  came  during  the  night  to  discover  them ;  they  fired  on  them,  and 
wounded  severely  a  French  sentinel  who  was  stationed  on  the  south-west  side.  The 
day  was  tolerably  quiet  with  regard  to  the  fort.  On  this  same  day  at  noon  the  Ilurons 
asked  for  a  secret  council.  A  lady  wished  to  be  admitted,  but  on  the  desire  of  the 
Indians  she  was  requested  to  leave. 

July  14th.  The  Frenchman  who  had  been  wounded  on  the  Wednesday  morning, 
died  al)out  the  same  hour  as  he  liad  been  wounded.  He  was  interred  *  *  *  *  that 
Pt.  II.  — 38 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


those  out  of  the  fort  might  not  know  that  a  person  had  been  killed.  Notwith- 
standing the  precaution  taken  to  conceal  his  death,  the  French  and  Indians  found 
it  out. 

July  15th.     Friday,  15th.     Nothing  occurred  deserving  attention. 

July  16th.  Saturday,  July  16th.  A  slave,  belonging  to  Mr.  Beaubien,  came  *  *  * 
sent  by  his  master,  to  claim  and  demand  *****  which,  having  been  frightened  by 
the  Indians,  had  taken  refuge.  *****.  The  slave  was  arrested  and  confined,  it 
being  said  that  he  had  been  seen  firing  with  the  Indians  on  the  English  and 
barges. 

July  17th.  Sunday,  July  17th.  Several  persons,  who  knew  the  slave  to  be  a 
worthy  man,  and  who  had  known  him  since  the  commencement  of  tlie  war,  came  to 
the  mass  in  the  fort,  and  undertook  to  justify  him,  and  obtain  his  ri'lease.  But  this 
favor  *****  other  witnesses  *****  in  the  evening,  Mr.  Gammelin  came  to 
the  fort  with  two  men  *****  Indians  intended  to  attack  the  French  settlers,  and 
asked  for  arms  and  ammunition.  These  were  granted.  They  were  advised  to  be  on 
their  guard,  and  to  desire  the  settlers  to  be  on  theirs ;  and  that,  at  the  first  shot  fired 
on  the  coasts,  troops  would  be  sent  to  assist  the  settlers.  The  commander  oixlered  all 
the  French  in  the  fort  to  stay  up  during  the  whole  night,  that  they  might  assist  the 
settlers.  But,  fortunately,  they  spent  a  quiet  night,  as  the  worst  of  it  was  their 
watching. 

July  18th.  Monday,  July  18th.  The  gates  of  the  fort,  until  this  day,  had  been 
kept  shut,  for  the  greater  security  of  the  fort,  and  through  fear  of  a  surprise  on  the 
part  of  the  Indians.  This  was  inconvenient  for  the  oiFicers,  who  had  to  cause  them  to 
be  opened  when  wanted,  as  also  to  those  who  wished  to  go  out,  and  who,  fearing  a 
refusal,  or  disliking  to  trouble  them,  did  not  like  to  ask  for  their  being  opened.  The 
commander,  having  been  made  aware  of  these  difficulties,  ordered,  to  put  a  stop  to  them, 
that  the  gate  facing  the  river  should  be  oi^ened  for  the  public  wants,  from  nine  in  the 
morning  until  six  in  the  evening ;  and  that  two  sentinels  should  be  placed  on  each 
side :  these  were  ordered  to  suffer  no  Frenchman  to  carry  any  thing  out  of  the  fort, 
but  to  suffer  all  who  came  to  the  gate  to  enter,  —  excepting,  however,  the  Indians. 
These  latter,  it  is  true,  did  not  dare  come  nearer  than  fifteen  arpents,  and  this  with 
many  precautions. 

During  this  day,  the  Indians  did  not  approach  the  fort.  At  *  *  *  they  came,  and 
told  the  commander  that  the  Indians  (Ottawas)  had  commenced  a  work  which 
appeared  to  merit  attention,  and  about  which  they  were  very  busy :  this  was  to  be 
composed  of  dry  wood,  placed  on  the  barge,  and  bum  it.  But  much  time  was 
necessarily  to  pass  before  it  could  execute  what  it  was  intended  to  do. 

About  nine  in  the  evening,  the  Saulteurs  came,  and  fired  on  the  barge,  which 
returned  their  fire.  After  these  discharges,  the  Indians  mmj  nhuse  to  the  crew,  among 
whom  was  an  Englishman,  who  had  been  a  prisoner  with  the  Ottawas  and  was 


i^'^ 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


tolerably  conversant  with  the  Saulteur  language.     lie  gave  the  Indians  an  answer  in 
their  own  way. 

July  19th.  Tuesday,  July  19th.  About  two  P.  M.  there  came,  behind  Mr. 
Beaubien's  *  *  *  fifteen  arpents  from  the  fort,  about  twelve  Indians,  who  commenced 
firing  on  the  fort.  Tiiey  were  seen,  and  two  cannon-shots  and  bombs  sent  them ;  one 
of  them  fell  on  an  apple-tree,  on  which  six  Indians  were  perched.  This  quickly  put 
them  to  flight.  They  left  the  field,  and  went  to  the  camp.  There  they  remained  the 
whole  of  the  day. 

July  20th.  Wednesday,  July  20th.  The  commander  heard  again  of  the  work 
of  the  Indians.  He  was  told  again  that  the  Indians  intended  to  bar  the  river,  in 
order  to  burn  the  barge,  which  had  remained  *  *  *  *  and  prevented  their  approaching 
the  fort.  But  this  work  was  but  commenced,  and  it  would  take  eight  days  more  to 
complete  it,  although  they  had  been  working  at  it  four  days.  They  did  not  intend  to 
fire  at  the  fort  until  it  was  completed.  The  connnander,  hearing  this,  and  wishing  to 
improve  his  leisure  by  sheltering  his  barge  from  the  fire  with  which  it  was  threatened, 
ordered  that  two  of  the  boats  .should  be  provided  witli  a  double  bidwark  of  oak,  each 
one  inch  thick ;  and  that  the  side-planks  should  be  made  one  foot  and  a  half  higher, 
and  lined,  as  well  as  the  bottom ;  so  that  the  men,  standing  in  their  boats,  might 
have  nothing  to  fear  from  the  fire  of  the  Indians.  He  caused  to  be  placed,  in  the 
front  of  each  of  these  Ixiats,  a  cannon,  on  a  movable  frame,  which  might  fire  on  three 
sides.  This  was  tried,  in  the  middle  of  the  river  before  the  fort,  uid  answered  all 
expectations. 

July  21st.  Thursday,  July  21st.  The  Indians,  occupied  with  their  projects, 
worked  at  their  fire-boats  as  assiduously  as  if  they  had  been  well-paid.  They  took 
no  rest;  hardly  did  they  allow  themselves  time  to  take  a  meal. 

The  two  boats  being  prepared,  the  commander  finding,  from  the  information  he  iiad 
received  of  the  progress  of  the  Indians'  work,  that  he  had  some  time  to  spare  for  new 
precautions,  he  ordered  four  boarding-grapples  to  be  made,  two  for  each  boat ;  one  of 
these  grapples  to  be  of  iron,  and  about  fifteen  feet  long,  and  this  and  the  other  were 
to  be  fastened  to  a  cable  ten  fathoms  long.  The  boats,  rigged  in  this  manner,  were  to 
go  and  meet  the  fire-boats.  They  were  to  throw  one  of  their  grappling-irons  upon  it; 
the  other  grapple  or  half-anchor  was  to  be  thrown  into  the  water.  By  this  manoeuvre 
they  were  to  stop  the  fire-lwats,  and  save  the  barge  from  the  danger  with  which  it 
had  been  so  long  threatened,  and  alst)  render  the  work  of  the  Indians  useless. 
During  this  time,  the  barge  wiw  to  weigh  anchor,  and  go  nearer  the  fort ;  and  the 
cable  and  irons  were  to  prevent  the  fire-lwat  from  approaching  it.  *  ♦  *  ♦  evening, 
there  was  a  report  that  the  Ilurons  of  the  wicked  band  had  resolved  to  attack  the 
settlers  of  the  S.  W.  coast  during  the  night.  This  caused  them  to  Iw  on  the  watch ; 
but,  fortunately,  the  report  was  found  to  be  without  foundation. 

July  22d.     Friday,  July  22d.     This  day  was  quiet  on  both  sides.     A  report  was 


800 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


II      ■:' 


spread  by  an  Abenaqui  Indian  who  they  said  had  recently  arrived  from  Montreal. 
This  stated  that  a  French  fleet  was  coming  to  Canada  to  retake  it.  This  rejwrt  died 
in  its  birth,  there  being  nothing  to  confirm  it.  Although  it  proved  false,  it  animated 
Pontiac,  his  band,  and  the  Saulteurs,  who  had  *  *  *  *  foolish  undertaking  *  *  *  * 
fire-boat,  the  making  of  which  *  *  *  *  wish  to  finish  it. 

About  *  *  *  *  a  man  in  the  employ  of  Mr.  Beaume  wishing  to  cross  the 
river  on  his  master's  business.  As  he  had  reached  the  middle,  the  Indians  made 
several  discharges  at  him.  These  made  him  return  with  more  sjieed  than  he 
had  gone. 

Alx)ut  ten  in  the  evening,  as  the  sentinels  were  on  the  watch,  two  random  shots 
were  fired. 

July  23d.  Saturday,  23d.  Nothing  happened  this  day.  Alwut  two  in  the  after- 
noon, the  inhabitants  of  the  fort  heard  in  the  direction  of  the  Huron  village  several 
discharges  of  musketry,  as  a  salute  on  the  arrival  of  some  persons.  The  English 
thought  it  w.as  something  concerning  them,  but  they  found  a  short  time  after  that  it 
was  on  the  account  of  the  arrival  of  Andre,  a  Huron  of  Lorette,  who  had  arrived 
with  *  *  *  *  Lena|je  chief  of  Belle  river,  and  that  *  *  *  *  Detroit  in  *  *  *  * 

July  24th.  Sunday,  July  24th.  The  Indians,  who  were  more  anxious  *  *  *  * 
barge  worked  faithfully  tc  accomplish  their  design  *  **  *  *  was  finished.  The  com- 
mander, who  wished  to  interrupt  their  work,  ordered  a  reconnoitring  party  to  go  on 
the  river  in  the  boats  descriljed  above.  This  was  done.  About  ten,  three  officers  at 
the  head  of  sixty  men  well  armed,  went  into  the  boats  and  a  barge,  and  went  up  the 
river  to  find  out  the  place  where  the  Indians  were  at  work.  The  Indians,  seeing  these 
boats  in  the  distance,  thought  them  a  prey  coming  within  their  grasp.  They  left  their 
work,  and  went,  twenty  in  number,  with  their  arms,  in  two  canoes,  to  come  and  meet 
the  three  boats.  The  crew  suffered  them  to  come  within  gun-shot.  The  Indians, 
unacquainted  with  the  construction  of  these  Iwats,  advanced  making  cries  of  joy, 
thinking  the  boats  were  in  their  power.  They  were  soon  undeceived ;  for  the  com- 
mander of  the  boats,  seeing  they  were  near  enough  to  give  effect  to  all  the  shots, 
ordered  his  people  to  fire  immediately  with  the  muskets  and  cannons.  The  Indians, 
who  did  not  expect  this  salute,  went  away  quickly  and  fired  from  the  shore  on  the 
boats,  and  slightly  wounded  one  man  on  the  head ;  a  ball  piereed  his  hat,  and  took 
away  a  tuft  of  his  hair. 

The  boats  and  barge  returned  to  the  fort  about  noon,  not  having  been  able  to 
discover  the  retreat  of  the  Indians,  or  the  place  of  their  work.  The  Indians  escorted 
them  on  the  shore  as  far  as  Mr.  Chauvin's,  thirty  arpcnts  from  the  fort.  The  barge 
having  sent  them  some  cannon-shots,  they  went  away  unharmed ;  tlie  ball,  however, 
entered  the  house,  which  it  damaged  much,  and  wounded  dangerously  two  Indians, 
one  in  the  arm  and  the  other  in  the  thigh ;  the  latter  died  a  few  days  aftenvards. 

About  one  P.  M.,  the  Ottawa  and  Saulteur  chiefs  went  to  the  Huron  village  according 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


301 


to  the  request  of  the  Eric'  and  Lenape  chiefs,  who  early  in  the  morning  had  sum- 
moned thetn  to  the  council. 

Aljout  three,  the  two  hoats  and  barge,  with  the  same  crew,  were  sent  by  the  com- 
mander to  the  same  place  as  on  the  morning,  to  attempt  the  discovery  of  the  place  in 
which  the  Indians  were  at  work ;  they  did  not  succeed.  The  Indians  fired  at  them 
from  the  shore,  and  escorted  them  as  they  had  done  in  the  morning.  The  boats  and 
barge  fired  at  them,  but  without  effect,  as  the  Indians  were  concealed  behind  the 
fences.     The  boats  and  barge  returned  to  the  fort  about  six. 

About  ten  in  the  evening  the  Ottawas  fired  a  few  random  shots  at  the  fort. 

July  25th.  Monday,  July  25th.  The  Ottawas,  engaged  with  the  council  which 
was  to  take  place  on  the  preceding  day,  but  which  was  deferred  until  this  day,  forgot 
the  fort,  to  go  according  to  the  request  of  the  Erie'  and  Lenaiie  chiefs  to  the  Huron 
village.  Two  inhabitants  of  the  fort  who  some  time  ago  had  to  go  to  the  north  coast 
on  business,  but  had  lx;cn  detained  by  Pontiac,  returned  this  day  and  said  that  the 
celebrated  fire-boat  had  been  entirely  given  up  by  means  of  two  Frenchmen  who 
*  *  *  *  the  Indians  that  the  two  boats  which  they  had  seen  *  *  *  *  to  *  *  *  *  the 
fire-boat  burning  the  barge,  and  that  they  contained  *  *  *  *  with  anchor  to  fasten  it 
in  the  middle  of  the  river,  and  that  thus  their  work  was  useless,  and  could  never 
succeed.  This  disconcerted  them  so  much  that  they  abandoned  entirely  their  foolish 
enterprise. 

About  ten,  news  was  brought  in  the  fort  of  the  return  of  Messrs.  Jacques  Godfroy 
and  Mesnilchene,  who  had  been  sent  to  Illinois.    This  news  Avas  confirmed  the  next  day. 

July  2Gth.  Tuesday,  July  2Gth.  It  being  St.  Ann's  day,  they  learnt  early  in  the 
morning  that  the  messengers  sent  by  Pontiac,  head-chief  of  all  the  nations  of  the 
north,  to  Mr.  De  L<5on,  commander  of  Illinois,  had  returned  the  preceding  evening. 
On  this  rejwrt,  there  circulated  among  the  French  of  the  fort  several  reports,  which 
contained  no  truth,  and  were  immediately  contradicted.  The  principal  of  these 
stated  that  the  Illinois  tribes  strongly  recommended  to  the  Detroit  tribes  that  no 
injury  should  be  done  to  the  French  on  the  coasts,  or  those  of  the  fort,  unless  they 
took  the  part  of  the  English. 

A  great  council  took  place  on  this  day  among  the  Hurons,  the  Erics',  and  Lenapes, 
the  Ottawas  and  Poux,  at  the  end  of  the  council.  Pontiac,  in  his  quality  of  chief  of 
all  the  nations  of  the  north,  ornamented  with  the  war-belt,  and  holding  the  tomahawk, 
sang  the  war-song  against  the  English,  inviting  all  the  chiefs  in  the  council  to  imitate 
him,  telling  them  that  he  had  been  commanded  by  the  master  of  life  to  make  continual 
war  on  the  English,  and  not  to  spare  them,  that  the  place  must  be  free  on  the  arrival 
of  his  Great  Father  in  the  autumn.  All  the  other  chiefs  followed  his  example,  and 
sang  war-songs  with  their  Indians.  At  the  end  of  the  council,  according  to  the  report 
of  several  French  settlers  who  were  present,  the  Erie'  chief  said :  Brothers,  we  must 


m 


[  Chats.  —  S.] 


.!         I 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 

remember  that  the  French  are  our  brothers,  and  be  careful  not  to  injure  them, 
unless  they  take  the  part  of  the  English ;  for  if  we  did,  our  father  would  be  angry 
with  us. 

July  27th.  Wednesday,  July  27th.  This  day  was  employed  by  the  Indians  in 
singing  the  war-song.  Each  tribe  sang  it  in  their  village  with  their  chief.  They 
tried  to  concert  new  measures  to  take  the  fort,  but  all  this  was  to  no  purpose.  About 
two  P.  M.,  Andre,  Huron  of  Lorette,  who  had  been  suspected  by  the  English  with 
having  meddled  in  these  ^-evolutions,  and  even  of  haA  "ng  been  tiie  first  mover  of  them, 
came  to  the  fort  to  justify  himself  and  prove  his  innocence.  About  six  they  came 
and  told  the  English  that  the  Indians  intended  to  set  fire  to  the  two  platforms  which 
were  on  the  hillock  behind  the  fort,  and  on  each  of  which  were  daily  placed  four 
sentinels  *  *  *  *.  Nothing  was  done  by  the  Indians  this  day.  They  ordered  the 
inhabitants  not  to  visit  the  fort,  and  sent  word  to  the  inmates  of  the  fort  not  to  visit 
the  coasts,  under  pretext  of  not  wishing  the  design  they  had  made  of  taking  the  fort 
by  storm,  to  be  discovered. 

July  29th.  *  *  *  *^  jjjiy  29th.  During  the  night  the  fog  had  been  so  dense  that 
it  was  impossible  to  see  *  *  *  *  paces  ahead ;  at  day-break  it  decreased  a  little  *  *  *  * 
about  five  in  the  morning  they  saw  unexpectedly  on  the  river,  to  the  right  of  the 
river  Eouge,  a  large  number  of  barges.  This  caused  a  little  alarm  in  the  fort,  as  they 
thought  this  was  an  Indian  party  coming  to  join  the  Indians  in  this  place.  The 
English  did  not  know  that  these  barges  came  to  assist  them,  although  they  expected 
assistance.  To  find  out  what  they  were,  they  fired  a  shot  towards  the  S.  W. ;  the 
barges  returned  the  salute,  being  provided  with  four  small  cannon  in  front,  and  two 
six-jjound  mortars.  Upon  this  the  commander,  followed  by  Mr.  Hopkins,  two  officers, 
and  ten  soldiers,  entered  one  of  the  boats  I  have  mentioned,  and  Avent  to  reconnoitre 
the  barges.  They  were  twenty-two  in  number,  and  contained  two  hundred  and  eighty 
regulars  and  si.x  gimners.  At  the  head  of  these  was  an  aid-de-camp  of  General  Amers, 
(Amherst.)  The  barges  passing  before  the  Huron  and  Poux  villages,  were  saluted  by 
several  discharges  of  musketry  on  the  part  of  those  two  tribes.  Fifteen  were  severely 
wounded  .n  the  body ;  two  of  these  died.  Others  were  wounded  slightly  in  the  arms 
and  hands.  These  barges  had  been  guided  from  Niagara  to  the  fort  by  Mr.  Laselle,  a 
merchant  of  Montreal,  who  traded  in  these  two  posts. 

As  there  were  no  barracks  to  lodge  these  soldiers,  they  were  quartered  on  the 
inhabitants  until  otherwise  provided  for,  according  to  the  size  of  the  dwellings.  This 
was  done  punctually.  These  soldiers,  on  passing  Sandusky,  had  frightened  some 
Indians  who  had  encamped  in  the  vicinity  of  the  village.  Seeing  so  many  people, 
they  were  afraid,  and  left  their  cabins,  which  were  plundered  and  burnt  by  the  English, 
who  tore  up  their  corn.  When  these  soldiers  had  arrived,  it  was  reported  in  the  fort 
that  four  hundred  English  soldiers  were  coming  from  the  north.  This,  however,  waa 
not  the  case. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


808 


July  30th.  Saturday,  July  30th.  Tlie  commander  ordered  that  several  caiioea, 
which  were  aground  near  the  shore,  should  be  repaired,  to  be  used  if  needed.  In  the 
evening,  according  to  custom,  all  the  soldiers  repaired  on  the  military  square  to  be 
inspected.  All  the  old  and  new  officers  were  there.  It  was  resolved  that  on  the 
following  night  a  sally  should  be  made  by  about  three  hundred  men,  headed  by  the 
aid-de-camp,  commander  of  the  newly-arrived  troops. 

This  detachment  was  to  go  to  Pontiac's  camp,  and  *  *  *  *  Indians,  and  oblige  them 
to  make  peace  *  *  *  *  ammunition  was  distributed,  and  the  soldiers  were  ordered  to 
be  ready  at  the  first  call  for  the  sally,  which  was  to  take  phice  the  next  night. 

This  bame  day,  at  two,  the  Ilurons,  who  had  heard  that  a  sally  was  to  be  made, 
made  a  feint  to  abandon  their  village,  and  burnt  at  Montreal  point,  in  sight  of  the  fort, 
old  canoes  and  useless  articles,  and  embarked  their  squaws  and  children,  and  even 
dogs,  and  went  down  as  if  they  had  been  going  to  their  winter-quarters.  Several 
Frenchmen  believed  it,  and  even  came  and  mentioned  it  to  the  English,  who  thought 
so  too,  without,  however,  wishing  to  venture  to  go  to  the  village,  mistrusting  some 
trick  on  the  part  of  the  Indians.  This  was  the  case  :  the  Hurons,  having  gone  down 
the  river  out  of  sight  of  the  houses,  had  landed  in  the  Avoods,  concealing  their  wives, 
children  and  goods ;  they  had  come  through  the  woods  opposite  the  village,  expecting 
the  English  would  come  to  their  village,  as  they  had  been  told.  This  did  not  take 
place.  The  Ilurons,  however,  remained  two  days  in  their  ambuscade.  They  then 
returned  to  their  village. 

July  31st.  Sunday,  July  31st.  About  two  in  the  morning,  according  to  the  order 
issued  by  the  aid-de-camp,  every  one  named  for  the  detachment  was  ready.  They 
were  lightly  clothed,  having  only  their  vest,  ammunition,  and  arms,  on  leaving  the 
fort.  Tliey  took  their  way  towards  Pontiac's  camp,  which  was  then  one  league  from 
the  fort,  on  the  north,  at  a  place  named  Pointe-a-Cai-dinal.  The  English,  unfortunately, 
had  confided  their  design  to  some  French  in  the  fort,  who  had  mentioned  it  in 
confidence  to  some  of  the  settlers.  Through  these  confidences,  the  Indians  found  it 
out,  and  kept  on  their  guard,  and  not  to  be  taken  unawares.  They  concealed  tlieir 
wives  and  children  out  of  the  camp,  where  they  only  left  their  old  men,  as  they  knew 
the  hour  appointed  for  the  departure  of  the  Englisli.  Thoy  came  to  meet  them,  in 
two  bands.  One  of  those  came,  two  hundred  and  fifty  men  in  number,  through  the 
woods  along  the  clearings,  and  concealed  themselves  on  Mr.  Chauvin's  farm,  twenty 
arpents  from  the  fort.  The  other  band,  comprising  one  hundred  and  sixty  men,  came 
and  placed  themselves  on  Mr.  Baptiste  Meloche's  farm,  where  they  had  fonnorly 
encamped,  and  made  entrenchments  which  were  ball-proof.  They  there  awaited  the 
English.  These,  not  knowing  that  the  Indians  were  aware  of  their  design,  were 
advancing  siieedily  and  without  any  order.  The  Indians,  much  favored  by  the  moon, 
perceiving  them  in  the  distance,  and  observing  the  route  which  they  t(X)k,  went,  sixty 
in  number,  into  Mr.  Francois  Meloche's  garden,  behind  the  posts  opiwsite  the  bridge. 


304 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


li^  .., 


When  the  Indians  saw  tliat  tlie  head  of  the  detachment  had  passed  a  little  the  middle 
of  the  hridge,  they  fired.  This  surprised  the  English,  who,  without  making  any 
manoeuvre 


******* 


The  rest  of  the  manuscript  is  missing.  It  has  been,  manifestly,  torn  off  for  waste- 
paper,  by  some  one  who  did  not  know  its  importance. 

The  disastrous  result  of  this  sortie  is  given  in  the  following  letter,  copied  from  the 
Gates  Papers,  Avhich  are  found  in  the  library  of  the  New  York  Historical  Society, 
fi"om  which  it  has  been  kindly  furnished : 

Detroit,  August  Sfli,  176.3. 

Sir  :  Enclosed  you  have  a  letter,  which  was  forwarded  of  that  date,  under  cover 
to  your  friend  Capt.  Dalzell,  who  received  it  on  Lake  Erie,  on  his  way  here,  where  he 
arrived  on  the  29th  July.  We  were  agreeably  surprised  at  his  appearance,  as  he  had 
under  his  command  twent3-four  battoes,  with  a  detachment  of  one  captain  and  eight 
subalterns  of  the  Fifty-fifth  regiment ;  one  captain  and  thirty-nine  men  of  the  Eightieth, 
and  Major  Rogers  and  his  brother  and  twenty  men  of  the  Yorkers.  They  were  lucky 
enough  not  to  be  discovered  'till  they  got  within  a  mile  of  the  fort,  when  they  were 
attacked  by  a  few  Indians,  on  both  sides  of  the  river,  without  any  hurt,  but  wounding 
seventeen  men.  But,  alas,  our  joy,  on  this  occasion,  only  lasted  'till  the  night  of  the 
31st,  when  Capt.  Dalzell  prevailed  upon  Major  Gladwin  to  attack  the  enemy,  -ilthough 
entirely  contrary  to  the  Major's  opinion,  as  well  as  that  of  two  Frenchmen,  (the  only 
two  in  this  place  whoso  intelligence  might  be  depended  upon,  and  who  well  knew  the 
disposition  of  the  enemy,  and  the  difficulty  of  surprising  them  in  their  camp,  and  who 
told  him  the  disaffected  French  would  apprise  the  Indians  of  any  attempt  against 
them.)  Notwithstanding  thereof,  he  still  insisted  that  no  time  was  to  be  lost,  and 
that  they  might  be  surprised  in  their  camp  at  break  of  day,  and  entirely  put  to  rout. 
In  consequence  of  that,  and  other  natural  arguments  he  made  use  of  in  his  earnest 
solicitation.  Major  Gladwin  agreed  to  give  him  the  command ;  and  at  three  o'clock  in 
the  morning,  marched,  with  two  hundred  and  fifty  men,  to  surprise  Pontiac,  the  Indian 
chief,  and  his  tribes,  consisting  of  four  hundred  men,  in  their  camp. 

We  imagined  our  plan  was  concocted  with  the  greatest  secresy,  yet  it  seems  the 
enemy  were  advised  thereof  by  the  French,  as  four  hundred  of  them  had  fortified 
themselves  in  a  pass  within  two  miles  of  the  fort,  and  being  on  our  march  by 
platoons,  about  twenty  yards  from  the  enemy  they  fired  a  full  discharge,  by  which  our 
commandant  was  wounded.  This  created  some  confusion  in  the  route,  it  being  then 
dark;  however,  we  soon  recovered  from  our  disorder,  and  marching  on  a  little,  the 
enemy  gave  way,  but  it  was  so  dark  they  could  not  be  seen  :  soon  after,  they  whooped 
on  our  left,  when  we  understood  they  wanted  to  attack  our  rear  at  the  same  time,  their 
chiefs  talking  loud  in  the  route,  animating  their  young  men  to  courage,  in  order  to 
bring  us  on,  that  they  might,  by  that  means,  have  the  more  time  to  get  in  our  rear. 


■ 


TOPICAL   HISTORY.  305 

where  tlicy  knew  mnnj  strong  stoccadcd  orchards  niul  picqiioted  fences  were,  which 
would  enable  them  to  cut  oft'  our  retreat  from  tlie  fort ;  but  dayliglit  approacliiug,  and 
discovring  their  designs,  it  was  thought  advisable  to  retiiv,  and  tliat  iK'ing  done  in 
good  order  for  half  a  mile,  to  a  place  where  the  enemy  had  got  round  our  left,  where 
they  were  in  possession  of  breastworks  made  up  of  a  farmer's  fire-wood,  and  garden 
fences  very  close  and  strong,  besides  a  cellar  dug  for  a  new  house,  from  which 
they  attacked  us  very  smartly,  brought  on  an  engagement  which  lasted  for 
an  hour,  at  least,  where  Captain  Dalzell  exiH)Hed  himself  very  much,  and  the 
enemy,  soon  distinguishing  him  by  his  extraordinary  bravery,  killed  him.  Captain 
Grey,  who  succeeded  him,  rushed  forward  and  drove  them  oft'  from  some  of 
their  strongholds,  and  was  immediately  dangerously  wounded.  The  troops  then 
engaged,  took  possession  of  a  house,  and  firing  at  the  renuiining  enemy  a  long 
time,  under  the  command  of  Major  Rogers,  who  had  sent  word  by  Lieutenant 
Bean,  of  the  Queen's  company,  to  Captain  Grant,  of  the  eightieth  regiment,  who  was 
then  in  possession  of  a  very  strong  orchard  within  eighty  or  a  hundred  ^ards  of  him, 
that  he  could  not  retire  until  the  row  galleys  came  to  cover  his  retreat.  At  the  same 
time.  Lieutenant  McDougal  of  our  battalion,  who  acted  as  adjutant  for  the  party, 
acquainted  Captain  Grant  that  the  command  then  devolved  on  him ;  whereupon  he 
sent  an  officer  and  thirty  men  to  reinforce  Major  Rogers,  and  drive  a  party  of  Indians 
which  annoyed  Major  Rogers'  and  Captain  Grant's  post;  and  that  Ix'ing  done,  and 
some  Indians  killed,  Captain  Grant  put  an  officer  and  thirty  men  into  the  orchard 
where  he  Avas  posted,  and  officers,  or  sergeants  and  corporals,  with  small  parties,  in 
all  the  enclosures  from  them  to  the  fort,  and  sent  to  acquaint  Major  Rogers  to  come  off", 
that  all  the  places  of  strength  from  him  to  the  fort  were  secured,  and  his  retreat  safe, 
as  Captain  Grant  had  sent  an  officer  and  twenty  men  to  take  possession  of  a  barn  on 
a  rising  ground,  which  eff'ectually  prevented  the  enem}'  from  advancing  farther.  Soon 
after,  Lieutenant  Brown  had  returned  with  a  row  galley  from  the  fort,  where  he  had 
been  sent  by  Captain  Dalzell  with  the  killed  and  wounded  men,  and  also  to  renew  a 
gun,  the  one  he  had  having  bursted.  The  row  galley  now  arrived,  and  was  instantly 
ortlered  to  cover  Major  Rogers'  retreat.  Every  thing  being  done  to  secure  that,  soon 
after  Lieutenant  Abbot  of  the  artillery  likewise  returned  from  the  fort  with  another 
row  galley,  which  had  carried  Captain  Grey  and  Lieutenant  Brown,  with  some 
wounded  men,  to  the  fort,  was  also  ordered  to  cover  Major  Rogers'  retreat,  which  gave 
him  an  opportunity  of  joining  the  party  already  mentioned,  about  eighty  or  one 
hundred  yards  distant  from  him,  and  so  on  successfully,  until  the  whole  were  collected 
in  their  march,  and  came  to  the  fort  at  8  o'clock,  in  very  good  order. 

Our  loss  is  Captain  Dalzell  killed ;  and  his  not  being  observed  when  he  fell,  his  body 

was  left  in  the  hands  of  the  savages,  which  I  was  heartily  sorry  for.    Lieutenants  Brown 

and  Luke  were  wounded,  and  thirteen  men  killed  and  twenty-eight  Avounded,  of  the 

Fifty-fifth  regiment.   One  man  of  the  Sixtieth  regiment  killed,  and  six  wounded.    Two 

Tt.  IL— 39 


806 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


men  of  the  light  infantry  kilh-d  and  three  wonndctl;  with  two  of  the  Queen's  eonipany 
killed,  and  one  wounded.  The  enemy's  lo.ss  eannot  be  a.seertained,  as  tliey  alwa}^ 
conceal  that  from  every  body.  It  is  believed  to  be  seven  killed  and  a  dozen  wounded ; 
and  if  the  inhabitants  knew  any  thing  else  to  the  disadvantage  of  the  savages,  they 
are  tcx)  much  interested  to  reveal  it. 

I  herewith  send  you  Captain  Campbell's  account.  lie  wrote  me,  when  prisoner,  to 
take  his  papers  which  are  now  in  my  hands,  and  shall  forward  them  to  yon  as  soon 
as  I  hear  from  jou.  The  snbject  contained  in  this  and  the  enclosed  letter  is  as 
disagreeable  to  write  or  repeat  as  it  can  jiossibly  Imj  for  you  to  read.  I  beg  leave  to 
participate  with  yon  in  jour  present  distress,  and  believe  me  to  be,  with  greatest 
sincerity,  Sir, 

Your  most  ol)edient  and  faithful  servant, 

Jamks  McDonald. 
Doctor  Cami-uell.' 

The  result  of  this  sortie  affords  another  evidence  of  that  disregard  of  due  precaution 
and  resjiect  to  Indian  customs  and  vigilance  which  led  General  Braddock,  five  years 
earlier,  in  the  plenitude  of  the  pride  of  European  discipline,  to  hurl  a  brave  and  well 
appointed  army  into  the  unknown  defiles  of  an  Indian  ambuscade,  where  mere  advan- 
tages of  position  render  num1)ers  and  discipline  nseless.  Dalzell  re-enacted  this  folly  on 
a  smaller  scene.  The  actual  loss  of  the  sallying  party  under  him  is  shown  to  have 
been  less  than  popular  tradition  at  "  otroit  depicts  it  to  have  been,  but  its  effects  were 
most  disastrous  to  the  beleaguered  fort ;  nor  was  that  fortress  finally  extricated,  and 
restored  to  the  full  liberty  of  action,  witiiout  the  fear  of  Pontiac  and  his  myrmidons, 
till  the  next  year,  17G4. 

The  fate  of  this  bold  origin  d  chief  is  striking.  Having  failed  in  Michigan,  he 
tran.sferred  the  scene  of  his  ojwrations  to  Illinois,  where  a  similar  course  of  conduct  and 
policy  marked  his  movements.  He  excited  the  natives  to  resist  the  surrender  of  the 
French  posts,  under  the  treaty,  to  the  British  authority.  We  are  indebted  to  Mr. 
Nicollet'  for  collecting  and  preserving  the  traditions  of  the  old  and  most  respected 
inhabitants  of  St.  Louis  on  this  subject.     He  says:  — 

"  In  the  meanwhile,  the  second  year  after  the  signature  of  the  treaty  of  peace  had 
elapsed,  and  the  British  had  not  yet  been  able  to  take  possession  of  Illinois.  This 
was  owing  to  the  opposition  made  by  several  Indi.an  tribes,  who,  as  alluded  to  above, 
had  refused  to  abide  by  tlie  treaty,  and  were  waging  a  most  cruel  war  against  the 
British.  These  tribes  had  formed  a  confederacy  under  the  command  of  Pontiac,  a 
bold  warrior,  who  had  already  become  celebrated  for  his  prowess  and  his  devoted 
attachment  to  France  during  the  whole  of  the  war,  which  the  latter  had  carried  on 


'  New  York  Hist.  Soc,  G^itos  I'aiKTS. 


Report  on  the  Ilydrograpliical  Rasin  of  the  Mississippi  Valley. 


i 


i  \ 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


307 


iigaiiist  Oroat  Britiiin,  in  Atnorica.  The  coiifiHlorated  Indiiiii  army  was  composed  of 
Iliirons,  Miaiuis,  Cliippinvas,  Ottawiis,  Pottawatomie's,  Missouriaiis.  &r.  &i'.  Tlie  name 
of  Pontiac  was  the  terror  of  the  whole  ro^tion  ol'  tlie  hiiies,  and,  by  his  bands,  he 
effectnally  interrupted  the  British  intereoin-se  with  the  rest  of  the  nations  that  had 
remained  friendly  to  the  government.  The  taking  of  Fort  Michilimaekinac,  the 
attempt  at  Detroit,  and  the  attack  upon  the  scluK)ner  Gladwin  on  Lake  Michigan,'  are 
memorable  events,  evincing  a  spirit  of  cunning  and  daring  highly  characteristic  of  the 
genius  of  the  Red  man. 

"In  the  winter  of  1704-5,  Pontiac,  whilst  engaged  in  liis  acts  of  depredation,  learned 
that  an  armed  British  force  was  about  to  start  from  New  Orleans,  to  take  possession 
of  the  left  bank  of  the  Mississipjji.  He  immediately  proceeded  to  the  neighlxjrhood 
of  Fort  Chartres,  accompanied  b}-  four  lunidred  warriors,  to  opjiose  this  occupation  of 
the  country ;  and  finding  there  some  Illinois  Indians  who  had  |)laced  themselves  imder 
the  protection  of  the  French  garrison,  he  projwsed  to  them  to  join  him.  But  these 
people,  disheartened  by  recent  cdainities,  and,  as  it  were,  foredcxjmed  to  a  final 
extinction,  were  unwilling  to  assume  a  hostile  attitude  towards  their  now  rulers,  frojn 
whom  interest,  if  not  generosity,  would  lead  them  to  expect  the  same  j  rotection  which 
they  were  then  receiving.  To  this  refusal  Pontiac  replied,  with  characteristic  energy, 
'  Hesitate  not,  or  I  destroy  yon  with  the  same  rapidity  that  fire  destroys  the  grass  of 
the  prairie.  Listen,  and  recollect  that  these  are  Pontiac's  words.'  Having  then 
despatched  scouts  upon  the  Mi.s.sissippi  and  the  Ohio,  he  hastened  with  some  of  his 
warriors  to  Fort  Chartres,  where  ho  addressed  Mr.  St.  Angc  do  Bellerive  in  the 
following  terms.  '  Father,  we  have  long  wished  to  see  thee,  to  shako  hands  with 
thee,  and,  whilst  smoking  the  calumet  of  peace,  to  recall  the  battles  in  which  we 
fought  together  against  the  misguided  Indians  and  the  English  dogs.  I  love  the 
French,  and  I  have  come  here  with  my  warriors  to  avenge  their  wrongs,'  &c.  &c. 
Mr.  do  St.  Ange  was  a  Canadian  officer  of  great  bravery  and  too  nuich  honor  to  be 
seduced  by  this  lang.iage.  Besides,  ho  knew  too  well  the  Indian  character  to  lose 
sight  of  the  fact  that  the  love  of  plunder  was  probably  at  bottom  a  stronger  induce- 
ment for  Pontiac  than  his  love  for  the  French.  This  visit,  which  was  terminated 
by  an  exchange  of  civilities,  might  nevertheless  have  brought  difficulties  upon  the 
small  garrison  at  Fort  Chartres.  But  news  arrived  that  the  Indians  of  Lower 
Louisiana  had  attacked  the  British  expedition  some  miles  below  Natchez,  and 
repulsed  it. 

"  Pontiac  became  then  loss  active  in  guarding  the  rivers ;  and,  as  he  believed  that 
the  occupation  of  the  coinitry  had  been  retarded  again,  ho  and  his  party  were  about 
to  retire  altogether.  During  the  time,  however,  that  the  news  took  to  arrive,  the 
British  had  succeeded  in  getting  up  another  expedition  on  the  Ohio;  and  Captain 

'  [  Not  so.    Detroit  river.  —  S.] 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


Storlinp,  at  the  licad  of  a  company  of  Scots,  arrived  unexpectodly  in  the  Hinnnier  of 
17G0,  taking  poawsnion  of  the  fort  before  the  Indiann  had  time  to  ofler  any  resiMtanco. 
At  this  news  Pontiac  raved,'Hwcaring  that  before  he  left  the  country  he  would  retake 
the  fort,  and  bear  away  Captain  Sterling's  scalp.  But  the  intervention  of  Mr.  St. 
Ange  and  Mr.  Laclede  put  an  end  to  these  savage  threats.  Pontiac  returned  to  tlic 
north,  made  peace  with  the  British,  from  whom  he  received  a  pension,  and  seemed  to 
have  buried  all  animosity  against  them.  But,  by  his  restless  spirit,  he  soon  aroused 
new  suspicions;  and,  we  are  informed  hy  Captain  Jonathan  Carver,  that  Pontine, 
having  gone  in  the  year  17G7  to  hold  a  council  in  the  Illinois  country,  an  Indian,  wiio 
was  either  commissioned  by  one  of  the  English  governors,  or  instigated  hy  the  love  he 
bore  the  English  nation,  attended  him  as  a  spy ;  and  being  convince<l  from  the  speech 
of  Pontiac  made  in  the  council,  that  he  still  retained  his  former  prejudice  against  those 
for  whom  he  now  professed  friendship,  he  plunged  his  knife  into  his  heart  as  soon  as 
he  had  done  speaking,  and  laid  him  dead  on  the  spot. 

"Captain  Carver  travelled  through  the  northern  n'gion,  but  was  never  south  of  the 
Prairie-tlu-Chien ;  so  that  his  information  is  probably  incorrect.  The  celel)rity  of 
Pontiac,  as  well  as  the  distinguished  part  he  took  in  the  Indian  wars  of  the  West,  will 
justify  me,  therefore,  for  introducing  here  a  somewhat  diflerent  statement  of  the 
manner  of  his  death,  as  I  have  it  from  two  of  the  most  respectable  living  authorities 
of  the  day  —  Colonel  Pierre  Chouteau,  of  St.  Louis,  and  Colonel  Pierre  Menard,  of 
Kaskaskia.  It  is  as  follows :  Pontiac's  last  residence  was  in  St.  Louis.  One  day  he 
came  to  Mr.  de  St.  Auge,  and  told  him,  that  he  was  going  to  pay  a  visit  to  the 
Kaskaskia  Indians.  Mr.  dc  St.  Ange  endeavored  to  dissuade  him  from  it,  rcminding 
him  of  the  little  friendship  that  existed  between  him  and  the  British.  Pontiac's 
answer  was,  "  Captain,  I  am  a  man :  I  know  how  to  fight.  I  have  always  fought 
openly.  They  will  not  murder  mo ;  and  if  any  one  attacks  me  as  a  brave  man,  I  am 
his  match."  He  w^ent  off;  was  feasted ;  got  drunk ;  and  retired  into  the  wood,  to 
sing  his  medicine-songs.  In  the  mean  while,  an  English  merchant,  named  Williamson, 
bribed  a  Kaskaskia  Indian  with  a  barrel  of  rum,  and  the  promise  of  a  greater  reward, 
if  he  could  succeed  in  killing  Pontiac.  He  was  struck  with  a  nakamngon,  (war-club,) 
and  his  skull  fractured,  which  caused  his  death.  This  murder,  which  roused  the 
vengeance  of  all  the  Indian  tribes  friendly  to  Pontiac,  brought  about  the  successive 
wars,  and  almost  total  extermination  of  the  Illinois  nation. 

"  Pontiac  was  a  remarkably  well-looking  man ;  nice  in  his  person,  and  full  of  taste  in 
his  dress,  and  in  the  arrangement  of  his  exterior  ornaments.  His  complexion  is  said 
to  have  approached  that  of  the  whites.  His  origin  is  still  uncertain :  for  some  have 
supposed  him  to  belong  to  the  tribe  of  Ottowas ;  others,  to  the  Miamis,  &c. ;  but 
Colonel  P.  Chouteau,  senior,  who  knew  him  well,  is  of  opinion  that  he  was  a 
Nipissing." ' 


'  Parkman. 


'[He  was  an  Otto-Chippewa.  —  S.] 


TOPICAL  HISTORY. 


3.    Anacoana. 


BY    REV.    HAMILTON    W.    P1ER80N. 


309 


The  accompanying  song  woh  prcHcnted  to  me  )»y  William  S.  Simoniso,  Esq.,  of  Port 
au  Prince,  a  native  of  Charleston,  South  Carolina,  but  for  many  years  a  resident  of 
Ilayti,  and  one  of  her  first  lawyers.  In  my  travels  upon  the  island,  I  have  met  with 
nothing  else  that  profes.scd  to  be  a  relic  of  the  language  or  music  of  its  aboriginal 
inhabitants.  As  to  the  authenticity  of  this  song,  I  have  neither  the  knowledge  of 
music,  nor  other  means  of  investigation,  that  would  enable  me  to  give  an  intelligent 
opinion  upon  the  subject;  I  therefore  submit  it  as  it  came  to  me. 

No  one  familiar  with  Irving's  "  Life  of  Columbus"  can  fail  to  be  interested  in  any 
thing  that  claims  to  he  the  product  of  the  mind  of  the  gifted  and  lx?autiful  Anacoana. 
No  portions  of  tha*.  inimitable  work  exceed  in  interest  the  passages  that  detail  her 
character  and  virtuos,  her  kindnesses  to  the  whites,  and  her  unhappy  fate.  I  cannot 
forlx;ar  presenting  a  few  of  these  passages  in  this  connexion,  though  the  author's 
work  must  be  consulted  to  obtain  her  full  history. 

"  While  Columbus  was  in  Spain,  his  brother,  Don  Bartholomew,  administered  the 
affairs  of  the  island,  as  adelantado.  Uix)n  the  discovery  of  imjwrtant  gold-mines,  on 
the  south  side  of  the  island,  he  established  a  fortress  upon  the  bank  of  the  river 
Oyema,  which  was  first  called  Isabella,  but  after\vard8  St.  Domingo,  and  was  the  origin 
of  the  city  which  still  bears  that  name."  ..."  No  sooner  was  the  fortress  completed 
than  he  left  in  it  a  garrison  of  twenty  men,  and  with  the  rest  of  his  forces  set  out  on 
an  exiK'dition  to  visit  the  dominions  of  Behechio,  one  of  the  principal  chieftains  of  the 
island.  This  cacique,  as  has  already  been  mentioned,  reigned  over  Xaragua,  a  province 
comprising  almost  the  whole  coast  at  the  west  end  of  the  island,  including  Cape 
Tibuen,  and  extending  along  the  south  side  as  far  as  Point  Aguida  or  the  small  island 
of  Beata.  It  was  one  of  the  most  populous  and  fertile  districts,  with  a  delightful 
climate ;  and  its  inhabitants  were  softer  and  more  graceful  in  their  manners  than  the 
rest  of  the  islanders. 

"  With  this  cacique  resided  Anacoana,  widow  of  the  late  formidable  Caonabo.  She 
was  sister  to  Beheshio,  and  had  taken  refuge  Avith  her  brother,  after  the  capture  of  her 
husband.  She  was  one  of  the  most  beautiful  females  of  the  island ;  her  name  in  the 
Indian  language  signified  '  The  Golden  Flower.'  She  possessed  a  genius  superior  to 
the  generality  of  her  race,  and  was  said  to  excel  in  composing  those  little  legendary 
ballads,  or  areytos,  which  the  natives  chanted  as  they  perfonned  tlii'ir  national  dances. 
All  the  Spanish  writers  agree  in  describing  her  as  iwssessing  a  natural  dignity  and 
grace,  hardly  to  be  credited  in  her  ignorant  and  savage  condition.     Notwithstanding 


I 


i) 


hi  I 


[•-( 


■■4 


i 


1 


810 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


the  ruin  with  which  her  husband  had  been  overwhehned  by  the  hostiUty  of  the  white 
men,  slie  apiwai-s  to  have  entertained  no  vindictive  feelings  towards  them.  She  knew 
that  he  had  provoked  their  vengeance  by  his  own  vohmtary  warfare.  She  regarded 
the  Spaniards  with  admiration,  as  ahnost  superliuman  beings;  and  her  intelhgent 
mind  perceived  the  futility  and  imiwlicy  of  any  attempts  to  resist  their  superiority 
in  arts  and  anns.  Having  great  influence  over  her  brother  Beheshio,  she  counselled 
him  to  take  warning  by  the  fate  of  her  husband,  and  to  conciliate  the  friendship  of 
the  Spaniards ;  and  it  is  supposed  that  a  knowledge  of  the  friendly  sentiments  and 
powerful  influence  of  this  princess,  in  a  great  measure  prompted  the  Adelantado  to  his 
present  expedition." 

"  The  Spaniards  Imd  heard  many  accounts  of  the  soft  and  delightful  regions  of 
Xaraqua,  in  one  part  of  which  some  of  the  Indian  traditions  placed  their  Elysinn- 
fields.  They  had  heard  much  also  of  the  beauty  and  urbanity  of  the  inhabitants ;  the 
mode  of  their  reception  was  calculated  to  confimi  their  favorable  prej^ssessions.  As 
they  approached  the  place,  thirty  females  of  the  cacique's  household  came  forth  to 
meet  them,  singing  their  areytos,  or  traditionary  ballads,  and  dancing,  and  waving 
palm-branches.  The  married  females  wore  aprons  of  embroidered  cotton,  reaching 
half-way  to  the  knee ;  the  young  women  were  entirely  naked,  with  merely  a  fillet 
round  the  forehead,  their  hair  falling  upon  their  shoulders.  They  were  Ijcauti  fully 
proportioned,  their  skin  smooth,  and  their  complexions  of  a  clear  and  agreeable  brown. 
According  to  old  Peter  Martjr,  the  Spaniards,  when  they  beheld  thoni  issuing  forth 
from  their  green  woods,  almost  imagined  they  beheld  the  fabled  dryads,  or  native 
nymphs  and  fairies  of  the  foimtains,  sung  by  the  ancient  poets.  When  they  came 
before  Don  Bartholomew,  they  knelt,  and  gracefully  presented  him  the  green 
branches." 

"  After  these  came  the  female  cacique  Anacoana,  reclining  in  a  kind  of  light  litter, 
borne  by  six  Indians.  Like  the  other  females,  she  had  no  other  covering  than  an 
apron  of  various-colored  cotton.  She  wore  round  her  head  a  fragrant  garland  of  red 
and  white  flower.«,  and  wreaths  of  the  same  round  her  neck  and  arms.  She  received 
the  Adelantado  and  his  followers  with  that  natural  grace  and  courtesy  for  which  she 
was  celebrated,  manifesting  no  hostility  towards  them  for  the  fate  her  husl)and  lijvd 
received  at  their  hands ;  on  the  contrary,  she  seemed  from  the  first  to  conceive  for 
them  great  admiration  and  sincere  friendship. 

"  For  two  days  they  remained  with  the  hospitable  Beheshio,  entertained  with  various 
games  and  festivities,  &c." 

At  a  subsequent  iwriod  in  the  history  of  the  island,  Avando  was  sent  by  Ferdinand 
to  administer  its  afliiirs.  It  is  a  dark  page  that  history  records  during  his  reign.  The 
disasters  of  the  beautiful  province  of  Xaragua,  the  seat  of  hospitality,  the  n-fuge  of 
the  suflering  Spaniards;  and  the  fate  of  the  female  cacique  Anacoana,  once  the  pride 
of  the  island,  and  the  generous  friend  of  the  white  man. 


TOPICAL    HISTORY. 


311 


Belieshio,  tlie  ancient  cacique  of  tliis  province,  being  dead,  Anacoana  his  sister  had 
succeeded  to  the  government.  The  marked  partiality  which  she  had  once  manifested 
ft)r  the  Spaniards  had  been  greatly  weakened  by  the  general  misery  they  had  produced 
in  her  country,  and  by  the  brutal  profligacy  exhibited  in  her  immediate  dominions  by 
the  followers  of  Roldan.' 

The  Inditans  of  this  province  were  universally  represented  as  a  more  intelligent, 
polite,  and  generous,  spirited  race  than  any  others  of  the  island.  They  were  the  more 
prane  to  feel  and  resent  the  overbearing  and  insulting  treatment  to  which  they  worn 
subjected.  Quarrels  sometimes  took  place  between  the  caciques  and  their  oppressors. 
These  were  immediately  reported  to  the  governor  as  dangerous  mutinies,  and  maguiOed 
into  a  rebellious  resistance  to  the  authority  of  the  government.  Complaints  of  this 
kind  were  continually  pouring  in  upon  Avando,  until  he  was  persuaded  that  there 
was  a  deej>laid  conspiracy  among  the  Indians  of  this  province  to  rise  upon  the 
Spaniards.  Avando  immediately  set  out  for  Xaragua,  at  the  head  of  three 
hundred  foot-soldier.s,  armed  with  swords,  anpiebusses,  and  cross-bows,  rnd  seventy 
horsemen  with  cuira.sses,  buckler.s,  and  lances.  lie  pretended  that  he  was  going 
on  a  mere  visit  of  friendship  to  Anacoana,  and  to  malve  arrangements  about  the 
payment  of  tribute. 

Anacoana,  in  her  innocency,  unconscious  of  his  designs,  gave  him  the  same  formal 
and  cordial  reception  that  she  had  given  the  Adelantado.  When  all  her  people  were 
assembled,  and  in  the  midst  of  their  national  songs,  dances,  and  games,  a  conceited 
signal  was  given  by  Avando ;  a  trumpet  was  sounded,  and  at  once  the  house  in  which 
Anacoana  and  all  the  principal  caciques  were  assembled  was  surrounded  by  soldiery, 
and  no  one  was  permitted  to  escape.  They  entered,  and  seizing  upon  the  eacicpies, 
bound  them  to  the  posts  that  supported  the  roof.  Anacoana  was  led  forth  a  prisoner. 
The  unhappy  caciques  were  then  put  to  horrible  tortures,  until  some  of  them,  in  tlie 
e.\tremity  of  anguish,  were  made  to  accuse  the  queen  and  themselves  of  the  plot  with 
which  they  were  charged.  When  this  cruel  mockery  of  judicial  forms  had  been 
executed,  instead  cf  preserving  them  for  after  examination,  fire  was  set  to  the  house, 
and  all  the  cacitiues  perished  miserably  in  the  flames. 

While  these  barbarities  were  practised  upon  the  chieftains,  a  horrible  massacre  tcKik 
place  among  the  populace.  No  mercy  was  shown  to  any  sex  or  age.  It  was  a  savage 
and  indiscriminate  butchery.  Humanity  turns  with  horror  from  such  atrocities,  and 
would  fain  discredit  them;  but  they  are  circiunstantially  and  minutely  recorded  by 
the  venerable  Bishop  Lis  Casas,  who  was  resident  in  tlie  island  at  tlie  time,  and 
conversant  with  the  principal  actors  in  this  tragedy.  As  to  the  princess  Anacoana, 
she  was  carried  in  chains  to  San  Domingo.  The  mockery  of  a  trial  was  given  her,  in 
which  she  was  found  guilty,  on  the  confessions  which  had  been  wrung  by  torture  from 


|! 


WusliingtuD  Irving'H  Culuiiibus. 


I 


812 


TOPICAL   HISTORY. 


her  subjects,  and  the  testimony  of  their  butchers ;  and  she  was  ignominiously  hanged 
in  the  presence  of  the  people  whom  she  hod  so  long  and  so  signally  befriended. 

"  Such,"  says  Irving,  in  concluding  the  account  from  which  these  extracts  are  taken, 
"  is  the  tragical  story  of  the  delightful  region  of  Xaragua  and  its  amiable  and  hospi- 
table people.  A  place  which  the  Europeans,  by  their  own  account,  found  a  perfect 
paradise,  but  which,  by  their  vile  passions,  they  filled  with  horror  and  desolation." 

Nothing  is  more  prominently  preserved  by  popular  tradition  than  the  name, 
beauties,  and  misfortunes  of  Anacoana,  the  Carib  Queen.  The  following  chant,  in 
her  praise,  is  given  on  the  authority  of  the  gentleman  named  by  Mr.  Peirson  in 
the  introduction  of  these  remarks.  The  repetitious  character  of  the  music  is 
an  aboriginal  trait,  though  it  rises  to  a  strain  superior  to  that  of  the  United  States 
tribes. 


gl^lgiii^ll^^^^l 


zi^Sl^iP^E^^^gE^ 


Aya  bomba  ya  bombai  (Bis) 
Lamassam  Anorcoana  (Bis) 
Van  van  tavana  dogai  (Bis) 
Aya  bomba  ya  bombai  (Bis) 
Lamassam  Ano-coona      (Bis) 


VIII.    PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF   THE 
AMERICAN  INDIANS.   A. 


I 


(in,'!) 


Pt.  ii._4n 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE    AMERICAN 

INDIANS. 


BT    DB.    SAMUEL    QEOROE    MORTON. 


V<M/<M'>Mrv^MMMA'V«n««MMn^«M 


SYNOPSIS. 

I.     Physical  Characteristics: 

a.  Ostcological  Character. 

b.  Facial  Angle. 

c.  Stature. 

d.  Fossil  Remains  of  the  American  Race. 

e.  Complexion. 
/.  Hair. 

g.  Eyes. 

h.  Artificial  Modifications  of  the  Skull: 

1.  The  Natchez. 

2.  The  Choctaws. 
8.  The  Waxaws. 

4.  The  Muskogees  or  Creeks. 

5.  The  Catawbas. 

6.  Attacapas. 

7.  Nootka- Columbians. 

8.  Peruvians. 

t.  Volume  of  the  Brain: 

1.  Mexicans. 

2.  The  Barbarous  Tribes. 


(ni:,) 


'f 


a 


316 


rUYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE 

II.     Adiiiuuiiurctncnts   of   Cruiiiu   of  the  Piiiieipiil  Groups  of   Indians  of   the 
United  States.     By  Mr.  J.  S.  Phillips. 

a.  Iroquois. 

b.  Algonquin. 

c.  Appalachian. 

d.  Dacota. 

e.  ShoshoDce. 
/.  Orcgonian. 


il    iV 


I.    PHYSICAL    CHARACTERISTICS. 


syf- 


R'  !         t 


It  is  iiii  adage  among  travellers  in  America,  that  he  who  has  seen  one  tribe  of 
Indians  lias  seen  all ;  so  closely  do  the  individuals  of  this  race  resemble  each  other, 
notwithstanding  their  immense  geographical  distribution,  and  those  differences  of 
climate,  which  cmbrsice  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold.  The  Fuegian,  in  his  dreary 
climate  .and  barren  soil,  has  the  same  general  cast  of  lineaments,  though  in  an  exag- 
gerated degree,  as  the  Indians  of  the  tropical  plains ;  and  these  also  resemble  the  tribes 
inhabiting  the  region  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  those  of  the  great  Valley  of  the 
Mississippi,  and  those  again  which  skirt  the  Eskimaux  on  the  north.  All  possess, 
though  in  various  degrees,  the  long,  lank,  black  hair,  the  heavy  brow,  the  dull  and 
sleepy  e^e,  the  full  and  compressed  lips,  and  the  salient  but  dilated  nose. 

These  traits,  moreover,  are  equ.ally  common  in  savage  and  in  civilized  life ;  they 
are  seen  equally  in  those  hordes  which  inhabit  the  margins  of  rivers  and  feed  mainly 
on  fish,  and  in  the  forest-tribes  that  subsist  by  the  chase. 


a.      OSTEOLOGICAL    CHARACTERS. 


|.. 


A  simil.ar  ccmformity  of  organization  is  not  less  obvious  in  the  cranial  structure 
of  these  people.  The  Indian  skull  is  of  a  decidedly  rounded  form.  The  occipital 
portion  is  flattened  in  the  upward  direction;  and  the  transverse  diameter,  as 
measured  between  the  parietal  bones,  is  remarkaljly  wide,  and  often  exceeds  the 
longitudinal  line.  The  forehead  is  low  and  receding,  and  rarely  arched  as  in  the 
other  races;  a  feature  that  is  regarded  by  Humboldt,  Lund,  .and  other  naturalists, 
as  characteristic  of  the  American  race,  and  serving  to  distinguish  it  even  from 
the  Mongolian.     Tlie   cheek-bones   are   high,  but  not  much  expanded;    the  whole 


fi    t 


A  M  E  11 1  C  A  N    I  N  D  I  A  N  S . 


817 


iiiiixilliiry  iv;j;i<)ii  i.s  .silieut  and  pomlorous,  with  tt-etli  ol'  ii  conospoiidin;^  (*i/,o  and 
xini-uliuly  lico  iVoni  decay.  The  orhits  are  lar-ie  and  nqiiaml,  tlie  nasal  orifice  wide, 
and  the  bones  that  protect  it  arched  and  expanded.  Tiie  lower  iw  massive,  and  wide 
between  the  condyles ;  but,  notwithstanding  the  prominent  position  of  the  face,  the 
teeth  are  for  the  most  p.art  vertical. 

I  have  had  opportunities  for  comparing  upwards  of  four  hundred  crania  of  tribes 
inhabiting  almost  every  region  of  North  and  South  America,  and  have  foimd  the 
preceding  characteristics,  in  greater  or  less  degree,  to  pervade  them  all.  This  remark 
is  equally  applicable  to  the  ancient  and  modern  nations  of  our  continent ;  for  the 
(ddest  skulls  from  the  Peruv-<n  cemeteries,  the  tombs  of  Mexico  and  the  mounds  of 
this  country,  are  of  the  raai'  general  type  as  the  most  savage  existing  tribes. 

This  law  of  organization  hsis  some  exceptions ;  for  we  find  a  more  elongated  form 
among  the  Missouri  tribes,  and  especially  among  the  Mandans,  Minctaries,  Kickarces, 
Assinaboins,  Otoes,  Crows,  Blackfeet,  and  some  proximate  tribes,  and  also  among  the 
iliflerent  sections  of  the  Lenape  nation  west  of  the  Mississippi.  The  same  exception 
appears  to  o))tain  among  the  Inxjuois  and  Cherokecs,  and  shows  itself  in  a  greater 
fulness  of  the  occipital  region,  and  a  less  inter-parietal  diameter.  Yet  even  among 
these  tribes,  and  all  others  I  have  been  able  to  compare,  the  typical  rounded  form, 
although  not  in  preponderance,  is  by  no  means  unfreqnent. 


b.     Facial    Angle. 

In  my  C'ntitld  Americana'  I  have  examined  this  subject  in  detail,  both  with  respect 
to  the  savage  and  the  civilized  nations,  and  have  ascertained  that  the  mean  of  one 
hundred  and  thirty-eight  skulls  is  within  a  fraction  of  seventy-five  degrees.  Thi.s 
measurement  is  confirmed  ))y  all  my  subsequent  experiments ;  and  having  pcrlbrmed 
these  with  my  own  hands,  I  submit  the  above  result  in  the  belief  that  it  will  stand 
the  test  of  all  future  observation. 

Since  the  European  angle  presents  an  average  of  80°,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
American  falls  five  degrees  below  it ;  and  I  have  reason  to  suppose  that  the  latter 
measurement  does  not  exceed  that  of  the  negro  race  of  Africa;  althougli  on  this  point 
I  am  not  yet  prepared  to  speak  with  precision.  The  modification  of  the  facial  angle 
resulting  from  artificial  distortions  of  the  skull,  will  be  noticed  in  another  place. 


c.     Stature. 


'I 


M 


When  submitted  to  the  test  of  anatomical  examination,  the  reputed  giant  and  dwarf 
races  of  America  prove  to  be  the  mere  inventions  of  ignorance  or  imposition.     Some 

'  Page  250. 


I 


1 

i 

II 

l> 


u 


', 


818 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE 


of  tlie  tribes  of  Patagonia  embrace  a  remarkable  number  of  tall  men,  and  perhaps  their 
average  .^titure  exceeds  that  of  any  other  of  the  affiliated  nations.  But  the  obser- 
vations of  the  naturalists  who  have  been  associated  with  the  modern  Exploring 
ExiM3ditions,  have  proved  that  much  that  is  recorded  of  these  people  by  the  early 
voyagers  is  fanciful  and  inaccurate ;  and  that  neither  among  the  dead  or  the  living 
races  of  this  continent,  is  therQ  any  evidence  of  a  tribe  or  community  of  giants.  The 
error  has  arisen  from  hasty  inferences  on  the  part  of  unpractised  observers. 

Whole  tribes  which  possess  a  comparatively  low  stature,  exist  in  South  America. 
Among  these  are  the  Powrys  and  Coroados  of  Brazil,  and  the  Chaymas  of  the  upi)cr 
Orinoco.  I  know  of  no  analogous  examples  in  North  America ;  yet  Bartram  asserts 
that  at  the  time  of  his  sojourn  among  the  Creeks,  the  women  of  that  nation  were 
seldom  above  five  feet  high,  although  the  men  were  tall,  and  of  athletic  proportions. 
He  adds  that  the  same  remarks  would  in  a  degree  apply  to  the  Choctaws  and 
Cliickasaws,  the  confederates  of  the  Creeks.  A  similar  disparity  in  the  stature  of  the 
men  and  women  has  also  been  observed  in  many  of  the  Missouri  tribes. 

So  much  has  been  asserted  with  respect  to  the  supposed  pygmies  of  the  Valley  of 
the  Mississippi,  that  I  gladly  take  this  occasion  to  correct  some  prevailing  misconcep- 
tions on  that  subject. 

It  had  long  been  asserted  that  these  remains  pertained  to  real  dwarfs,  whose  stature 
never  exceeded  four  feet,  and  was  often  much  within  that  measure.  Fortunately  I 
succeeded  in  obtaining  the  greater  part  of  one  of  them,  which  was  obtained  by  Dr. 
M'Call  from  a  "  Pygmy  Cemetery,"  near  the  Cumberland  Mountain,  in  White  county, 
Tennessee.  These  relics  were  kindly  sent  me  by  Dr.  M'Call  at  the  instance  of  the 
late  Dr.  Troost,  of  Nashville. 

The  former  gentleman,  in  a  letter  addressed  to  me,  makes  the  following  remarks  from 
a  personal  observation  of  the  facts  connected  with  the  disinterment  of  these  remains : 

"  The  coffins  are  from  eighteen  to  twenty-four  inches  in  length,  by  eighteen  inches 
deep,  and  fifteen  wide.  They  are  made  of  six  pieces  of  undressed  sandstone  or 
limestone,  in  which  the  bodies  are  placed  with  their  shoulders  and  heads  elevated 
against  the  eastern  end,  and  the  knees  raised  towards  the  face,  so  as  to  put  the  corpse 
in  a  reclined  or  sitting  posture.  The  right  arm  rested  on  an  earthen  pot  of  about  two 
pints  in  capacity,  without  legs,  but  Avith  lateral  projections  for  being  lifted.  With 
tliese  pots,  in  some  graves  are  found  basins  and  trays  of  pipe-clay  and  comminuted 
shells  mixed,  and  no  one  of  these  repositories  is  without  cooking-utensils. 

"  In  one  of  the  graves  was  found  a  complete  skull,  and  an  os  femoris,  but  most  of 
the  other  bones  were  broken  in  removing  them.  This  is  said  to  be  the  largest  skeleton 
ever  found  in  any  of  these  burying-grounds.  It  has  the  cranium  very  flat  and  broad, 
with  very  projecting  front-teeth,  and  appears  to  have  pertained  to  an  individual  not 
over  twelve  or  fourteen  years  old."' 


Sec  Jour.  Acad.  Nat.  Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  Vol.  VIU. 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


31it 


The  bones  sent  me  with  this  letter  indicate  a  very  juvenile  siilyect.  For  exiimplo, 
many  of  the  deciduous  or  fii-st  teeth  yet  remain,  while  the  only  teeth  of  the  second 
teeth  which  have  ap^Kiared  alxjve  the  jaw,  are  the  first  molars  and  the  incisors,  which, 
as  every  anatomist  knows,  make  their  first  appearance  alwut  the  ei^htli  year.  Of  the 
other  permanent  teeth,  some  have  no  portion  complete  but  the  crown,  and  are  yet 
contained  within  the  maxillary  bones.  The  presence  of  the  new  incisors,  isolated 
from  the  cuspidati  which  have  not  appeared,  obviously  gave  rise  to  Dr.  M'Call's 
remark  respecting  the  "very  projecting  frontrtceth,"  but  which,  however,  are  perfectly 
naturid  in  jrasition  and  proiwrtion.  The  cranial  bones  are  thin,  and  readily  separable 
at  the  sutures ;  nor  does  the  "  flat  and  broad"  configuration  of  the  cranium  differ  from 
what  is  usual  in  the  aboriginal  American  race.  The  long  bones  have  tlieir  extremities 
separated  by  epipleyses;  and  every  fact  connected  with  these  remains  is  strictly 
characteristic  of  early  childhood,  or  about  the  eighth  year  of  life.  Even  the  recumlxnit 
or  sitting  posture,  as  we  shall  hereafter  see,  has  been  observed  in,. the  aboriginal 
cemeteries  from  Cape  Horn  to  Canada;  and  the  utensils  found  with  them  are  the 
same  in  form  and  composition  with  those  taken  from  the  graves  of  the  Indians 
everywhere. 

Tliese  facts  are  to  me  an  additional  and  convincing  proof  of  what  I  have  never 
doul)ted,  viz.:  that  the  asserted  Pygmies  of  the  western  country  were  mere  children, 
who,  for  reasons  not  precisely  known,  but  which  appear  also  to  influence  some 
communities  of  even  our  own  race,  were  buried  apart  from  the  adult  people  of 
their  tribe. 


d.    Fossil  Remains  of  the  American  Race. 

It  is  also  necessary  to  advert  to  the  discoveries  of  Dr.  Lund  among  the  tone-caves 
of  Minas  Gerdas,  in  Brazil.  This  distinguished  traveller  has  found  the  remains  of 
man  in  these  caverns,  associated  with  those  of  extinct  genera  and  s^jecies  of  animals ; 
and  the  attendant  circumstances  lead  to  the  reasonable  conclusion,  that  they  were 
contemporaneous  inhabitants  of  the  region  in  which  they  are  found.  Yet  even  here 
the  form  of  the  skull  differs  in  nothing  from  the  acknowledged  tyjie,  unless  it  be  in 
the  still  greater  depression  of  the  forehead,  and  a  peculiarity  of  form  in  the  teeth. 
With  respect  to  the  latter,  Dr.  Lund  describes  the  incisors  as  having  an  oval  surface, 
of  which  the  axis  is  antero-iwsterior,  in  place  of  the  sharp  and  chisel-like  edge  of 
ordinary  teeth  of  the  same  class.  He  assures  us  that  he  found  it  equally  in  the  young 
and  the  aged,  and  is  confident  that  it  is  not  the  result  of  attrition,  as  is  manifestly  the 
case  in  those  Egyptian  heads  in  which  Prof.  Blumenbach  noticed  an  analagous 
peculiarity.  I  am  not  prepared  to  question  an  opinion  which  I  have  not  been  able  to 
test   by  j)ersonal   observation,    but   it    is    obvious,    that   if   such    differences    exist, 


■J' 


I 


% 


sso 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE 


indoi)oiulcntly  of  art  or  accident,  they  arc  nt  least  specific,  and  co;iReqiiently  of  tlie 
hifrliost  interest  in  Etlinolofry.' 

The  head  of  the  celebrated  Omululoii^  Skeleton  forms  no  exception  to  the  tyi)e  of 
the  race.  The  skeleton  itself,  which  is  in  a  semi-fossil  state,  is  preserved  in  the 
British  ^luseuni,  hut  wants  the  cranium ;  which,  however,  is  supposed  to  \)e  recovered 
in  the  one  found  by  M.  L'llerniinier  in  Guadaloupe,  and  brought  by  him  to  Charleston, 
South  Carolina.  Dr.  Moultrie,  who  has  described  this  very  interesting  relic,  makes 
the  following  ol)servations  : — "  Compared  with  the  cranium  of  a  Peruvian  presented 
to  Prof.  IIol brook  by  Dr.  Morton,  in  the  Museum  of  the  State  of  South  Carolina,  the 
craniological  similarity  manifested  between  them  is  too  striking  to  permit  us  to 
question  their  national  idenity.  There  is  in  both  the  same  coronal  elevation,  occipital 
compression,  and  lateral  pnituberance  accompanied  with  frontal  depression,  which 
mark  the  American  variety  in  general."' 


m 


e.    Complexion. 

The  American  aborigines  have  Ixjen  aptly  called  the  Brown  Race;  for,  notwith- 
standing .some  variations,  the  vast  multitude  conforms  to  this  color,  and  all  other 
tints  are  but  exceptions  to  a  rule.  Yet  these  exceptions  are  very  remarkalile,  and 
ajipear  to  Ixf  wholly  independent  of  atmospheric  influences.  Among  the  darkest 
tribes  are  the  (Jharruas,  who  are  represented  as  almost  black ;  and  y*'t  tliev  inhabit 
the  southern  shores  of  the  Rio  de  la  Plata,  in  the  fiftieth  degree  of  .xouth  latitiuU'.  7\n 
analogous  phenomenon  is  seen  in  .>fonie  ('alifornia  trilies,  which  are  aw  dark  a.^  tiic 
Charruas,  witliout  the  ojH'r.ation  of  any  known  local  agencies  to  account  for  this 
exceptional  colour ;  for  these  people  range  h<"tv,ven  the  thirty-second  and  the  fortiefb 
degrees  of  north  latitude.  Among  the  numln'rless  tril)es  which  are  geographically 
intermediate  Ix^tween  the  Charruas  and  Californian.s,  we  find  some  equally  paradoxical 
appearances ;  for  Humboldt  has  remarked  that  the  Indians  of  the  Ijurning  plains  of 
the  Equinoxial  region  are  not  darker  than  those  inhabiting  the  mountains  of  the 
temperate  zone.  The  Batocudys  of  Brazil,  and  the  Borroas  of  Chili,  are  examples  of 
a  comparatively  fair  tint ;  and  Ave  are  told  that  among  the  islanders  of  St.  Catharine's, 
on  the  coast  of  California,  young  persons  have  a  fine  mixture  of  red  and  white  in  their 
complexions,  thus  presenting  a  singular  contrast  to  the  tribes  of  the  adjacent  main 
land. 

When  Bartram  the  naturalist  travelled  among  the  Cherokees,  a  hundred  years  ago. 


'  See  a  communieation  from  Dr.  Lund,  in  the  Memoirs  of  the  Society  of  Northern  Antiquaries  for  1844 ;  and 
also  Lieutenant  J.  G.  Strain's  letter  to  me,  in  the  proceedings  of  the  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  of  I'hiladel- 
phia  for  1844. 

'  Sillinian's  Amer.  Jour,  of  Science,  XXXII,  p.  364. 


g 

J 


i 


iff 


■ 

V't 

V 

^■i 

mi 

V   ■      . 

^^B^ffi^'  '  m 

i: ' 

::i 

^fflf-    ^L   • 

::ii|.i;;  ^1   ^ 

'W 

r.' 

Ib 

\i 

iH 

*: 

AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


321 


he  described  the  men  as  liaving  a  lighter  and  more  olive  complexion  than  the 
contiguous  Muskogee  tribes ;  and  he  adds  that  some  of  their  joung  girls  were  nearly 
as  fair  and  blooming  as  Eurojiean  women.  Might  there  not  then  be,  as  thei'e  certainly 
has  been  since,  some  exotic  mixture  to  account  for  this  phenomenon  ? 

Yet  the  complexion  of  the  Mandans  who  inhabit  the  upper  Missouri  region  is  yet 
more  enigmatical.  The  proverbial  fairness  of  tliese  people  has  probably  given  rise  to 
the  fable  of  the  Welsh  Indians  of  America,  and,  in  the  imaginations  of  some  writers, 
they  are  the  remains  of  Prince  Madoe's  army.  But  the  Mandans  are  not  only 
remarkable  for  their  comparatively  fair  complexions,  but  also  for  the  various  tints  that 
gradually  merge  into  the  characteristic  cinnamon  hue  of  their  race. 

"  There  are  many  of  these  people,"  says  Catlin,  "  whose  complexions  appear  as  light 
as  half-breeds ;  and  among  women,  particularly,  there  are  many  whose  skins  are  almost 
white,  with  the  most  pleasing  symmetry  and  perfection  of  features,  with  hazel,  with 
grey,  and  with  blue  eyes."  Lewis  and  Clark,  and  all  subsequent  travellers,  agree  on 
this  point,  though  not  to  the  extent  to  which  Mr.  Catlin's  observations  have  gone ;  and 
in  this  remarkable  example,  also,  the  phenomenon  has  been  conjectured  to  be  the 
result  of  remote  though  unrecorded  associations  with  Europeans. 

The  people  of  Nootka  are  also  comparatively  fair  when  deprived  of  their  accumulated 
fdth ;  and  one  of  the  lightest  complexioned  Indians  I  have  ever  seen  was  a  Chenouk 
lx)y  from  Oregon,  who  was  not  darker  than  an  Italian  peasant. 


/.    Hair. 

Among  the  interesting  discoveries  of  Mr.  Browne,  in  the  application  of  the  micro- 
scope to  this  tissue,  is  the  invariably  cylindrical  form  of  the  hair  in  all  American 
natives,  from  the  most  ancient  to  the  most  recent  tribes.  It  thus  presents  a  contrast 
to  the  hair  in  the  Caucasian  group  of  races,  in  which  it  is  oval,  and  also  to  the  negro 
nations,  in  which  it  is  eccentrically  elliptical.'  The  texture  is  equally  uniform,  being 
proverbially  long,  lank,  and  coarse ;  nor  are  these  characteristics  altei-ed  by  the  vastly 
diversified  climates  inhabited  by  the  people  of  this  race.  They  are  the  same  in  Terra 
del  Fuego  and  under  the  equator,  in  the  mountains  and  on  the  plains ;  so  that  if 
climate  or  temperature  had  any  influence  in  producing  those  remarkable  varieties  of 
the  hair  so  familiar  among  other  races,  we  ought  certainly  to  find  them  here.  Such, 
however,  is  not  the  case ;  for  no  native  tribe,  from  Cape  Horn  to  Canada,  is  characterized 
by  either  Avoolly  or  frizzled  locks. 

Mr.  Catlin  states  that  the  hair  of  the  Mandans  of  Missouri  "  is  generally  as  fine  and 
soft  a^  silk ;"  and  he  speaks  of  seeing  among  them  individuals  with  hazel,  grey,  and 

'  Seo  n  communication  on  this  subject  by  Peter  A.  Browne,  Esq.,  in  the  proceedings  of  the  Acad,  of  Nat. 
Sciences  of  Philadelphia,  for  January  and  February,  1851. 

Tt.  it.— 41 


*    *'9 

i  L 

i'  'I 


322 


PHYSICAL  TYPE  OF  THE 


'if' I' 


blue  eyes.  Yet  tlie  same  traveller  adds  the  extraordinary  fact,  that  there  are  among 
them  "  many  of  both  sexes,  and  of  every  age,  from  infancy  to  manhood  and  old  age, 
with  hair  of  a  bright  silvery  grey,  and,  in  some  instances,  almost  iierfectly  white. 

"  This  singular  and  eccentric  apjicarance  is  much  oftener  seen  among  the  women 
than  among  the  men ;  for  many  of  the  latter  who  have  it  seem  ashamed  of  it,  and 
artfully  conceal  it  by  tilling  their  hair  with  glue  and  black  and  red  earth.  The  women, 
on  the  other  hand,  seem  proud  of  it,  and  display  it  often  in  an  almost  incredil)le 
profusion,  which  spreads  itself  over  their  shoulders,  and  falls  as  low  as  the  knee.  I 
have  ascertained,  on  a  careful  inquiry,  that  about  one  in  ten  or  twelve  of  the  whole 
tribe  are  what  the  French  call  cheveux  grin,  or  grey  hairs ;  and  that  this  strange  and 
unaccountable  phenomenon  is  not  the  result  of  disease  or  habit,  but  that  it  is  unques- 
tionably an  hereditary  character,  which  runs  in  families,  and  indicates  no  inecpuility 
in  disposition  or  intellect ;  and  by  passing  this  hair  through  my  hands,  as  I  often  have, 
I  have  found  it  uniformly  to  be  as  coarse  and  harsh  as  a  horse's  mane." ' 

We  must  be  permitted  to  differ  with  this  intelligent  traveller  on  the  physiological 
proposition,  for  nothing  but  a  morbid  state  of  the  hair  could  permit  it  to  present  the 
two  extremes  above  noticed ;  from  the  softness  of  silk,  for  example,  to  the  coarseness 
of  horse-hair.  The  grey  color,  at  least  in  the  early  ))eriods  of  life,  is  probably  connected 
with  some  conditi<m  of  albini.sm  ;  and  that  also  is  certainly  a  preternatural  condition, 
which  is  wholly  unlike  the  uniform  texture  of  the  hair  in  every  other  division  of  this 
widely  distributed  race.  Perhaps,  therefore,  all  the  peculiarities  of  the  Mandans  m.ay  be 
explained  on  the  supposition  that  an  albino  variety  has  largely  intermixed  with  the 
normal  members  of  the  tribe;  thus  giving  rise,  as  in  many  other  instances  in  tlie 
aninuil  economj',  to  strange  developments  from  tlie  blending  of  incongruous  elements. 

Other  exceptions  are  seen  among  the  Athapascans  or  Chepewyans,  who  inhabit  the 
slope  of  tiie  Rocky  Mountains  yet  further  north.  Mackenzie  describes  their  hair  as  of 
a  dark  brown  color,  inclining  to  black ;  but  in  proof  that  this  peculiarity  is  not  due  to 
clinnite,  we  may  cite  the  Knistenaux,  or  copper-colored  tribe  contiguous  to  the  Atha- 
pa.soans  on  the  south,  and  whose  hair  has  the  characteristic  blackness  of  the  race ;  and 
again,  to  the  north  of  them  all,  are  the  Eskimaux,  in  whom  it  is  uniformly  as  sable  as 
coal  itself 

The  aboriginal  Americans  might  be  relatively  staled  a  beardless  race.  A  small  tuft 
on  the  point  of  the  chin  is  all  that  is  usually  observed  among  them;  and  this  being 
assiduously  eradicated  by  most  of  the  tribes,  has  given  rise  to  a  once  prevalent  opinion 
that  they  are  literally  destitute  of  Ijeard.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  occasionally  met 
with;  as  among  the  Clmpunnish  Indians  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  and  among 
the  Chippewyans  and  Slave  and  Dog-ribbed  tribes  of  the  northern  part  of  the  continent. 
This  renuirk  is  also  true  of  the  Californians,  and  also  of  some  yet  more  southern 


Catlii 


ll 


j:^ 


III 


i 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


323 


nations.  The  extirpation  of  tlie  Ix^ard  appearw  to  Ije  a  conventional  usage  of  nearly 
all  the  multitiulinous  tribes  of  this  people.  The  rea.son  is  not  evident,  excepting  that 
the  beard  is  not  regarded  as  an  ornament ;  and  perhaps  it  is  not  more  singular  that 
they  should  pluck  it  out  by  the  roots,  than  that  more  civilized  nations  should  shave  it 
off  every  day. 

g.    The  Eyes. 

The  Indian  has  a  low,  bushy  brow,  beneath  which  a  dull,  sleepy,  half-closed  eye 
seems  to  mark  the  ferocious  passions  that  are  dormant  within.  The  acute  angles  of 
the  eyes  seldom  present  the  obliquity  so  common  in  the  Malfiys  and  Mongolians.  The 
color  of  the  eye  is  almost  uniformly  a  tint  between  black  and  grey ;  but  even  in  young 
persons  it  seldom  lias  the  brightness,  or  expresses  tlie  vivacity,  so  common  in  the  more 
civilized  races. 

This  sameness  of  organization  amongst  such  multitudinous  tribes  seems  to  prove,  in 
tlie  geographical  sense,  the  origin  of  one  to  have  been  equally  the  o'-Jgin  of  all.  The 
various  demi-civilized  nations  are  to  this  day  represented  by  their  li  eal  descendants, 
who  inhabit  the  same  ancestral  seats,  yet  differ  in  no  physical  respect  from  the  wild 
and  uncultivated  Indians.  And  with  respect  to  the  royal  personages,  and  others  of  the 
privileged  class,  there  is  ample  evidence  to  prove  that  they  belonged  to  the  same 
indigenous  stock,  and  possessed  no  distinctive  traits,  excepting  of  a  social  or  political 
character. 

The  observations  of  Molina  and  Humboldt  are  sometimes  quoted  in  disproof  of  this 
pervading  unifoiinity  of  physical  character.  Molina  remarks  that  the  difference 
between  the  inhabitants  of  Chili  and  a  Peruvian  is  as  great  as  between  an  Italian  and 
a  German ;  to  which  Humboldt  adds,  that  the  American  race  embraces  natives  whose 
features  differ  as  essentially  from  one  another  as  those  of  the  Circassians,  Moors,  and 
Persians.  But  let  us  not  forget  that  all  these  people  belong  to  the  same  group  of  races, 
with  which  they  are  readily  identified,  notwithstanding  certain  marked  differences  of 
feature  and  complexion ;  and  the  American  nations  present  a  precisely  parallel  example. 


!  \ 


? 


I 


h.    Artificial  Modifications  op  the  Skull. 

The  practice  of  moulding  the  head  into  a  variety  of  fanciful  forms,  was  once 
prevalent  among  many  of  our  aboriginal  tribes.  I  have  elsewhere '  enlarged  on  this 
singular  usage  in  Mexico  and  Peru,  in  the  Charib  islands,  in  Oregon,  and  among  some 
tribes  that  formerly  skirted  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.     The  acciuisition,  however,  of  some 

'  Crania  Americana. 


11 


MJ 


::  \ 


".' 


-•»''ii 


824 


PHYSICAL  TYPE   OF  THE 


additional  materials,  has  induced  me  to  recur  to  a  custom  which  is  yet  extensively 
practised  within  the  limits  of  tlie  United  States.  Within  these  limits,  it  is  now 
restricted  to  a  few  cognate  tribes  on  the  coast  of  the  Pacific,  but  was  formerly  in  use 
on  both  sides  of  the  lower  Mississippi,  as  tlie  following  enumeration  will  show. 


1.  The  Natchez.  —  These  extraordinary  jwople,  who  were  finally  exterminated 
by  the  French,  A.  D.  1730,  had  flattened  the  heads  of  their  children  from  immemorial 
time.  De  Soto  and  his  companions  were  witnesses  of  this  remarkable  fact  diu'ing 
their  invasion  of  Florida;  and  the  historian  of  that  expedition  describes  the  deformity 
as  consisting  of  an  upward  elongation  of  the  cranium,  until  it  terminated  in  a  point 
or  edge ; '  and  Du  Pratz,  writing  nearly  two  centuries  later,  gives  a  more  circumstantial 
account  of  the  process.' 

Yet  who,  in  our  day,  would  have  credited  these  statements,  if  they  were  sustained 
by  no  corrolx)rative  evidence  ?  I'et  the  burial-places  of  this  singular  people  afford  the 
indubitable  evidence  of  a  usage  which  was  equally  prevalent  in  Mexico  and  Peru ;  for, 
in  those  countries,  some  tribes  moulded  the  heads  of  their  children  in  a  precisely 
similar  manner. 


1 


2.  The  (  'hcct.^ws.  —  These  Indians  were  of  a  totally  different  stock  from  the 
Natchez,  and  often  at  war  with  them ;  yet  tlie  two  nations  adopted  the  same 
conventional  form  of  the  head.  Adair  briefly  describes  the  mode  of  accomplishing 
this  fancied  ornament ;  but  Bartram  is  more  explicit  in  his  description.  "  The 
Choctaws  are  called  by  the  traders  Fhifs,  or  Fkit-hcads,  all  the  males  having  the  fore 
and  hind  parts  of  their  skulls  flattened  or  compressed,  which  is  effected  in  the 
following  manner :  As  soon  as  the  child  is  born,  the  nurse  provides  a  cradle  or 
wooden  case,  where  the  head  reposes,  being  fashioned  like  a  brick-mould.  In  this 
part  of  the  machine  the  little  boy  is  fixed,  a  bag  of  sand  being  laid  on  his  forehead, 
wliich,  by  continual  gentle  compressure,  gives  the  forehead  somewhat  the  form  of  a 
brick  from  the  temples  upwards,  and  by  these  means  they  have  high  and  lofty 
foreheads,  sloping  off'  backwards.' 

It  is  a  curious  fact  that  among  these  people  tue  flattening  process  was  a  distinction 
reserved  for  the  male  sex ;  which  we  shall  hereafter  see  was  also  the  case  among  the 
old  Aymara  tribes  of  Upper  Peru. 


3.  The  Waxsaws. — This   nation,  which   has   long  teen   extinct,   had   a  similar 
custom.     Lawson*  thus  describes  it.     "They  use  a  roll,  which  is  placed  on  the  babe's 

'  Garcilaso  de  la  Vega,  Hist,  do  la  Florida,  Lib.  IV.  Chap.  13. 
2  Hist,  of  Louisiana,  p.  323.  '  Travels,  p.  517. 

*  Hist,  of  Carolina,  p.  33,  and  Crania  Americana,  p.  1(52. 


AMERICAN   INDIANS. 


325 


forehead,  it  being  laid  with  its  back  on  a  fliit  board,  and  swaddled  down  hard  thereon, 
from  one  end  of  this  engine  to  the  other.  The  instrninent  in  a  sort  of  preps,  that  is 
let  ont  and  in,  more  or  less,  according  to  the  discretion  of  the  nurse,  in  which  they 
make  the  cliild's  head  flat.  It  makes  the  eyes  stand  a  prodigious  way  asunder,  and 
the  hair  hangs  over  the  forehead  like  the  caves  of  a  house,  which  seems  very 
frightful." 

4.  The  MtrsKOOEE.?,  or  Creeks. — These  people  were  originally  connected  with  the 
Choctaws  into  a  single  great  nation ;  and  some  of  the  Creek  trilK?s  on  the  Gulf  of 
Mexico  are  known  to  have  flattened  the  heads  of  their  chiiilren,'  although  I  can  find 
no  notice  of  the  fact  in  any  history  of  these  triljes. 

5.  The  Catawba  tribe  once  occupied  the  banks  of  the  Santee  river,  some  distance 


alMJve  its  mouth, 
speaking. 


They,  also,  are  said  to  have  practised  the  custom  of  which  we  are 


6.  The  Attacapas,  Indians  living  on  the  western  shore  of  the  Mississippi,  are  placed 
by  some  writers  in  the  same  category. 

7.  The  Nootka-Coi.umbiaxs  are  so  designated  by  Dr.  Scouler,  of  Dublin,  because  of 
the  affinity  of  their  languages,  customs,  and  physical  characters.  They  comprehend  the 
tribes  of  Quadra  and  Vancouver's  Island,  and  the  adjacent  inlets  down  to  the  Columbia 
river  and  the  northern  part  of  New  Califor»r;<».  The  practice  of  flattening  the  head 
is  universal  among  these  people,  who  thus  possess  the  country  between  Salmon  river, 
in  latitude  53°  30'  north,  to  the  Umpqua  river,  in  the  latitude  of  46°.* 

"  These  tribes  have  a  great  similarity  in  their  habits,  language,  and  appearance ; 
and  their  method  of  flattening  the  head  is  extremel}'  simple,  and  does  not  appear  to 
be  attended  with  any  disagreeable  consequences  to  the  health  of  the  child.  As  soon 
as  the  infant  is  born,  the  head  is  frequently  and  gently  compressed  with  the  hand,  and 
this  is  continued  for  three  or  four  days.  The  child  is  then  placed  in  a  box  or  cradle, 
which  is  rendered  comfortable  by  spreading  moss,  or  a  kind  of  tow  made  from  the 
bark  of  the  cypress,  over  it.  The  occiput  of  the  child  rests  on  a  board  at  the  upper 
part  of  the  box,  and  is  supported  by  tow  or  moss ;  another  board  is  then  brought  over 
the  forehead,  and  tied  firmly  down  on  the  head  of  the  infiint.  The  child  is  seldom 
taken  from  the  cradle,  and  the  compression  is  continued  till  it  is  able  to  walk.  A 
child  alwut  three  years  old  presents  a  most  hideous  appearance :  the  compression, 
acting  chiefly  on  the  forehead  and  occiput,  reverses  the  natural  proportion  of  the 

'  See  Plate. 

*  Observations  on  the  Indigenous  Tribes  of  tbc  North-West  Coast  of  America.  By  John  Seouler,  51.  D., 
F.L.S.    P.  9.    The  most  northern  of  these  Flat-head  tribes  is  the  IIautzuk. 


n 


>i 


326 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF   THE 


i:     1. 


i    I      f 


n 


n\ 


head,  and  causes  it  to  assume  the  form  of  a  wedge.  Tlie  eyeballs  project  very  much, 
and  the  individual  ever  after  has  the  eyes  direrted  upwards."  ' 

Among  these  trilKVs,  we  may  enumerate  the  Nootkans,  Chenouks,  Clatsaps, 
Killemooks,  Cliekitatf*,  Kalapooyalis,  and  many  others.' 

Tlie  apparatus,  described  by  Dr.  Scouler,  for  the  purpose  of  producing  this  distortion, 
differs  nothing  (though  some  little  in  form)  from  the  cradle  brought  me  from  Oregon 
by  my  friend  the  late  Dr.  Townsend,  and  figured  in  the  Crania  Americana.' 

8.  Peruvians.  —  I  have  remarked  that  if  we  had  no  other  evidence  of  this  strange 
custom  than  the  relation  of  travellers,  we  might  be  disposed  to  deny  it  altogether,  and 
attribute  the  resulting  deformities  "  not  to  art,  but  to  some  original  and  congenital 
peculiarity."  Such  has  been  the  opinion  of  Pentland,  Tiedemann,  Tcliudi,  and  Knox, 
i-cspecting  the  Peruvian  skulls  of  this  class;  and,  at  the  time  of  publishing  my  Crania 
Americana,*  I  adopted  the  same  views.  The  acquisition,  however,  of  a  very  extended 
series  of  crania  from  the  Peruvian  tombs  caused  me  to  change  my  opinion  on  this  point. 

I  at  fu"st  found  it  difficult  to  conceive  that  the  original  rounded  skull  of  the 
Indian  could  be  changed  into  this  fantastic  form ;  and  was  led  to  supix).<ie  that  the 
latter  wa.s  an  artificial  elongation  of  a  head  remarkable  for  its  natural  length  and 
narrowness.  I  even  supposed  that  the  long-headed  Peruvians  were  a  more  ancient 
people  than  the  Inca  tribes,  and  distinguished  from  them  by  their  cranial  configuration. 
In  this  opinion  I  was  mislaken.  Abundant  means  of  observaticm  and  comparison 
have  since  convinced  me,  that  all  these  variously-formed  heads  were  originally  of  the 
same  rounded-shape,  which  is  characteristic  of  the  Aboriginal  race  from  Cape  Horn  to 
Canada,  and  that  art  alone  has  caused  the  diversities  among  tiiem. 

The  simple  forms  were  easily  accom pi  islied;  but  the  very  elongated,  narrow,  and 
symmetrical  variety  required  more  ingenuity.  A  fine  series  of  the  heads,  recently  sent 
me  by  my  friends  Mr.  W.  A.  Foster  and  Dr.  Oakford,  now  in  Peru,  has  enabled  me  to 
decide  this  question  conclusively. 

It  is  evident  that  the  forehead  was  pressed  downwards  and  backwards  by  a 
compress,  (probably  a  folded  cloth,)  — or  sometimes  by  two  compresses,  one  on  each 
side  of  the  frontal  suture ;  a  fact  that  explains  the  cause  of  the  ridge  which  usually 
replaces  that  suture  from  the  root  of  the  nose  to  the  coronal  tract.  To  keep  these 
compresses  in  pl.ace,  a  bandage  was  carried  over  them,  from  the  base  of  the  occiput 
over  the  forehead;  and  thof.  in  order  to  confine  the  lateral  portions  of  the  skull,  the 
same  bandage  was  continued  by  another  turn  over  the  top  of  the  head,  immediately 
behind  the  coronal  suture,  probably  with  an  intervening  compress ;  and  the  bandaging 
was  repeated  upon  these  parts  until  they  were  immovably  confined  in  their  desired 
position. 

'  Idem  ID  Zoolng.  Journal,  Vol.  IV.  p.  306. 

'  Skulls  of  all  these  tribes,  excepting  the  Nootkan.i,  are  figured  in  the  Crania  Americana. 

"  P.  -204.  *  1'.  !IK. 


AMERICAN    INlJlANS. 


;J27 


Every  one  who  is  aoqiiaintod  with  the  pliiihlc  condition  of  the  cranial  Immks  at  birtli, 
will  readily  conceive  how  eflectiially  this  apparatus  would  mould  the  liead  in  the 
elongated  or  cylindrical  form;  for,  while  it  prevents  the  foreliea<l  from  ri.-'infr,  and  tlie 
sides  of  the  head  from  expanding,  it  allows  the  occipital  region  an  entire  freedom  of 
growtii ;  and  thus,  without  sensibly  diminishing  the  volume  of  the  brain,  merely  foni's 
it  into  a  new  though  unnatural  direction,  while  it  preserves,  at  the  same  time,  ii 
ivmarkalde  symmetry  of  the  whole  structure.  The 
annexed  outline  of  one  of  these  skulls,  will  further 
illustrate  my  meaning;  merely  premising  that  the 
course  of  the  bandages  (represented  by  dotted 
lines)  is  distinctly  marked  on  the  skull  itself  by 
a  corresjKHiding  depression  of  the  bony  structure, 
excepting  on  the  forehead,  where  the  action  of  a 
firm  compress  has  left  a  plane  surface.' 

My  matured  opinion  on  this  subject  is  most  fully  corrolwrated  by  the  personal 
researches  of  M.  Aleide  D'Orbigny.  This  distinguished  traveller  and  naturalist  visited 
the  table-land  of  the  Andes,  once  inhabited  by  the  ancient  Peruvians,  and  from  his 
researches  I  derive  the  following  conclusive  facts. 

1.  The  descendants  of  the  ancient  Peruvians  yet  inhabit  the  land  of  their 
ancestors,  and  Ijear  the  name  of  Aymaras,  which  was  probably  their  primitiv« 
designation. 

2.  The  modern  Aymaras  resemble  the  surrounding  Quichua  or  Peruvian  nations  in 
color,  figure,  features,  expression,  shape  of  the  head,  (which  they  have  ceased  to  nioidd 
into  artificial  fonns,)  and,  in  fact,  in  every  thing  that  relates  to  physical  conformation 
and  social  customs.  Their  languages  differ,  but  even  here  there  is  a  resemblance 
which  proves  a  common  origin. 

3.  On  examining  the  tombs  of  the  ancient  Aymaras,  in  the  environs  of  the  lake 
Titicaca,  M.  D'Orbigny  remarked  that  those  which  contained  the  compressed  and 
elongated  skulls,  contained  also  a  greater  number  that  were  not  flattened ;  whence  he 
infers  that  the  deformity  was  not  natural,  or  characteristic  of  the  nation,  but  the 
result  of  mechanical  compression. 

4.  It  was  also  remarked  that  those  skulls  which  were  tlattened  were  uniformly  those 
of  men,  while  the  heads  of  the  women  always  retained  the  natural  shape, — the  squared 
or  spheroidal  form,  which  is  characteristic  of  the  American  race,  and  especially  of  the 
Peruvians. 

5.  The  most  elongated  heads  were  found  in  the  largest  and  finest  tombs ;  showing 
that  defonnity  was  a  mark  of  distinction  among  these  people. 


J 


'  Sec  ray  Illustrated  System  of  Human  Anatomy,  p.  76. 


i      i 


328 


PHYSICAL    TYl'E    OF    THE 


G.  Tlio  resoarelies  of  M.  D'Orbignj'  confinn  the  statements  made  at  distant  intervals  of 
time  by  Pedro  do  Cieza,  Garcilaao  de  la  Vega,  and  Mr.  Pentland,  and  prove  conclusively, 
what  I  have  never  doubted,  that  these  people  were  the  architects  of  their  own 
tombs  and  temples;  and  not,  as  some  suppose,  intruders  who  had  usurped  the 
civilization,  and  appropriated  the  ingenuity,  of  an  antecedent  and  more  intellectual 
race.' 

"  The  ancient  «kulls  of  Titicaca,"  observes  Dr.  Scouler,  "  do  not  exhibit  a  greater 
amount  of  deformity  than  the  artificially  flattened  skulls  of  the  Nootkans  and 
(Jhonouks ;"  and  to  this  fact  we  may  add  the  personal  observations  of  Cieza  and 
Ciarcilaso  de  la  Vega,  and  the  abundant  collateral  testimony  of  Torqucmad.a,  Aguirre, 
and  various  later  historians.'  It  will  hereafter  be  shown  that  the  aljorigines  of  North 
and  South  America  moulded  the  heads  of  their  children,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  same 
unnatural  and  diverse  forms,  of  which  four  are  particularly  conspicuous. 

1.  The  conical  head. 

2.  The  symmetrically-elongated  form. 

3.  The  irrcgulai'ly  compiossed  and  expanded  form. 

4.  The  quadrangular  form. 

Strange  a.s  these  forms  are,  and  contrary  to  all  our  preconceived  ideas,  they  are 
not  more  so  than  two  physiological  truths  that  have  been  satisfactorily  established  in 
connexion  Avith  tli'in;  viz.,  that  the  process  by  which  they  are  produced  neither 
diminishes  the  natural  volume  of  the  brain,  nor  appreciably  affects  the  moral  or  mental 
character  of  the  individual. 


r? 


i.    Volume  of  the  Buain. 

On  former  occasions,  when  treating  of  the  American  aborigines,  I  have  divided  them 
into  t\\o  great  families,  the  Toltccan  nations  and  the  harharoiis  d-ifics.  The  latter 
designation  is  sufficiently  expressive.  The  former  one  includes  the  demi-civilizcd 
nations  of  Peru,  Bogota,  and  Mexico.  This  classification  is  manifestly  arbitrary ;  but 
e\ery  attempt  to  separate  these  families  into  natural  and  suljordinate  groups  has 
hitherto  been  signally  defective.'  Much  time  and  investigation  will  be  requisite  for  tliis 
purpose ;  for  which  an  admissible  basis  has  been  .already  furnished  by  the  researches 
of  M.  D'Orliigny  in  South,  and  Mr.  Gallatin  in  North  America. 

My  collection  embraces  410  skulls,  derived  from  sixty-four  different  nations  and 
tribes  of  Indians,  in  which  the  two  great  divisions  are  represented  in  nearly  equal 


'  L'lloinnic  Amcricain,  Tome  I,  p.  306.  I  corrected  my  error  before  I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing  M. 
D'Orbigny's  very  interesting  work.  Amer.  Jour,  of  Science,  vol.  xxxviii,  No.  2.  Jour.  Acnd.  Nat.  Sciences 
of  I'liiladelpliia,  vol.  viii ;  and  again  in  my  Distinctive  C'liuracteristics  of  the  Aboriginal  Race  of  America,  p.  0. 

'  Vide  Crania  Americana,  p.  116,  et  acq. 

'  [  And  must  ever  continue  to  be,  until  the  test  of  generic  groups  of  language  be  applied.  —  S.] 


f 


?'i 


§ 


f.  I 


I.  I! 


\y 


mu 


y; 


I 


I  1 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


329 


proportions,  i ;  he  following  details  will  show.  It  is  necessary  to  premise,  however, 
of  this  numbfc  of  crania,  338  is  the  number  measured ;  the  residue  either  pertaining 
to  individuals  under  the  prescribed  age,  or  being  so  nmch  broken  as  to  be  unavailing 
for  this  purpose . 

The  Tolt£can  family.  Of  213  skulls  of  Mexicans  and  Peruvians,  201  belong  to  the 
latter  people,  and  have  been  presented  to  me  by  Dr.  Ruschenberger,  _'r.  Oakford,  and 
Mr.  William  A.  Foster.  The  latter  gentleman  visited,  on  my  behalf,  the  cemeteries 
of  Pisco,  Pachacamac,  and  Arica,  which  have  been  but  little  used  since  the  Spanish 
conquest,  and  contain  the  remains  of  the  aboriginal  inhabitants  of  various  epochs  of 
time. 

Ilerrera  informs  us  that  Pachacamac  was  sacred  to  priests,  nobles,  and  other  persons 
of  distinction ;  and  there  is  ample  evidence  that  Arica  and  Pisco,  though  free  to  all 
classes,  were  among  the  most  favored  cemeteries  of  Peru.  It  is  of  some  importance  to 
the  present  inquiry,  that  nearly  one-half  of  this  series  of  Peruvian  crania  was  obtained 
at  Pachacamac ;  whence  the  inference  that  they  belonged  to  the  most  intellectual  and 
cultivated  portion  of  the  Peruvian  nation  ;  for  in  Peru  leai'ning  of  every  kind  was  an 
exclusive  privilege  of  the  ruling  caste. 

When  we  consider  the  institutions  of  the  old  Peruvians,  their  comparatively 
advanced  civilization,  their  tombs  and  temples,  moinitain  roads  and  monolithic  gate- 
ways, together  with  their  kn  wledge  of  certain  ornamental  arts,  it  is  surprising  to  find 
that  thiy  possessed  a  brain  no  larger  than  the  Hottentot  and  New  Hollander,  and  far 
below  that  of  the  barbarous  hcrdos  of  their  own  race.  For  on  measuring  155  crania, 
nearly  all  derived  from  the  sepulchres  just  mentioned,  they  give  but  75  cubic  inches 
for  the  average  bulk  of  the  brain.  Of  the  whole  number,  one  only  attains  the  capacity 
of  101  cubic  inches,  and  the  minimum  sinks  to  58 ;  the  smallest  in  the  whole  series 
of  641  measured  crania.  It  is  important  fin-ther  to  remark,  that  the  sexes  are  nearly 
equally  represented ;  viz.,  80  men  and  75  women. 

1.  The  Mexican.s.  —  It  is  customary  to  regard  Mexico  as  the  primitive  hive  of  the 
Toltecan  race,  and  consequently  the  centre  of  the  indigenous  ciA'ilization  of  this 
continent.  And  such  appears  to  be  the  fact,  provided  Central  America  is  included  in 
Mexico.  From  these  regions  were  probably  derived  the  arts  and  institutions  of  Bogota 
and  Peru,  as  well  as  those  of  the  ancient  valley  of  the  Mississippi ; '  but  whetiier  the 
latter  preceded  or  followed  in  the  order  of  development  is  yet  an  unsettled  question. 
But  a  strikingly  cognate  relation,  mental,  moral,  and  physical,  appears  to  have 
characterized  all  these  nations,  which  are  in  turn  blended  by  imperceptible  degrees 
with  the  surrounding  barbarous  tribes. 

The  occupation  of  Mexico  by  successive  though  alTiliated  races,  renders  it  difficult 
and  almost  impossible  to  designate  the  true  Toltecan  crania,  excepting  in  the  instance 

'  See  tbo  work  of  Mr.  Squier  and  Dr.  ]i:ivis  ou  the  Monuments  of  the  MisHissippi  Valley. 

Pr.  II.  — 42 


i 


i 


in, 
m 


lu 


380 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE 


)1  CI     !  I 


)■> 


r'lf   (• 


of  six  skulls  most  obligingly  sent  me  by  Don  Gomez  de  la  Cortina,  of  the  city  of 
Mexico,  and  a  seventh  for  which  I  am  indebted  to  Baron  Von  Gerolt.  Of  fifteen  others 
my  information  is  less  precise ;  yet  the  circumstances  under  which  they  were  obtained 
seem  to  warrant  their  being  classed  in  the  Toltecan  series. 

The  largest  of  these  crania  measures  92  cubic  inches ;  the  smallest  67 ;  and  the 
mean  of  thcni  all  is  79,  or  fiye  cubic  inches  above  the  Peruvian  average.  The  propor- 
tion of  male  and  female  skulls  is  12  to  10. 

2.  The  Barbarous  Tribes.  —  The  demi-civilized  communities,  as  we  have  just 
remarked,  were  hemmed  in  by  sav.age  tribes.  Garcilaso  de  la  Vega,  in  formci  times, 
and  D'Orbigny  and  Von  Tchudi  in  our  own  day,  have  given  a  vivid  picture  of  the 
ferocious  hordes  that  skirt  the  Peruvians  on  the  East.  Thus  also  Mexico  continues  to 
suffer  from  the  incursions  of  the  Apaches  and  Comanclies — people  who  personify  t'  o 
remorseless  demon  of  cruelty. 

The  skulls  in  my  possession  of  this  series  have  been  collected  over  the  vast  region 
extending  from  Canada  to  Auracania,  and  from  ocean  to  ocean ;  and  I  include  among 
them  all  the  skulls  from  the  tumuli  of  the  Valley  of  the  Mississippi  and  other  parts 
of  North  America.  These  remains  cori-esiKjnd  so  entirely  with  those  of  the  Nomadic 
Indians  that  I  have  not  been  able  to  separate  them  with  any  practictd  purpose  in  an 
inquiry  like  the  present.  The  aborigines  of  the  present  day  continue  to  bury  their 
dead  in  the  old  mounds ;  and  when  we  consider  the  long  period  of  time  that  must 
have  elapsed  since  the  real  mound-builders  to(jk  their  departure  or  became  extinct,  we 
can  hardly  expect  to  find  and  much  less  to  identify  their  remains.  It  is  sufficient  to 
add  that  every  skull  I  have  yet  seen  from  the  moiuids,  caves,  and  graves  of  this 
country,  confonns  in  all  its  essential  characters  to  the  typical  form  of  the  American 
race. 

Of  211  crania  derived  from  the  various  sources  enumerated  in  this  section,  101  have 
been  measured,  with  the  following  results ;  the  largest  cranium  gives  104  cubic  inches, 
the  smallest  70 ;  and  the  mean  of  them  all  is  84.  There  is  a  disparity,  however,  in 
the  male  and  female  heads,  for  the  former  are  9G  in  number,  the  latter  only  05. 

We  have  here  the  surprising  fact  that  the  brain  of  the  Indian  in  his  savage  state  is 
far  larger  than  that  of  the  old  demi-civilized  Peruvian,  or  of  the  ancient  Mexican 
tribes.  How  are  we  to  explain  tliis  remarkable  disparity  between  civilization  and 
barbarism?  The  largest  Peruvian  brain  measures  101  cubic  inches;  an  untamed 
Shawnee  rises  to  104 ;  and  the  average  difference  between  the  Peruvian  and  the 
savage  is  nine  cubic  inches  in  favor  of  the  latter.  Sometlung  may  be  attributed  to  a 
primitive  difference  of  stock ;  but  more,  perhaps,  to  the  contrasted  activity  of  the 
brain  in  tiie  two  races. 

We  know  that  the  government  of  the  Incas  was  of  the  kind  called  paternal,  and 
their  subjects,  in  the  moral  and  intellectual  sense,  were  children,  who  seem  neither  to 


II 


I 


CI.    I), 


I'll  I,  r  M  II  1  ,\  IM  V  I-  II 


Ill 

[I  i 


'■■t'  I; 
hi   * 


'!|f 


t  i 


I 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


881 


have  thought  nor  acted  except  at  the  dictation  of  a  master.  Theirs  was  an  absolute 
obedience  that  knew  no  limit.  Like  the  Bengalees,  they  made  good  soldiers  in  their 
native  wars,  not  from  any  principle  of  va' .  ir,  but  from  the  mere  sense  of  passive 
obedience  to  their  superiors. 

But  the  condition  of  the  savage  is  wholly  different.  His  life  is  a  sleepless  vigilance, 
a  perpetual  stratagem ;  and  his  brain,  always  in  a  state  of  activity,  should  be  larger 
than  that  of  the  docile  Peruvian,  even  though  it  ceased  to  grow  tifter  adult  age.  The 
indomitable  barbarians  who  yet  inhabit  the  base  of  the  Andes  on  the  eastern  margin  of 
Peru,  may  yet  prove  to  have  a  much  larger  brain  than  their  feebler  neighbors,  whose 
remains  we  have  examined  from  the  graves  of  Pachacamac,  Pisco,  and  Arica. 

If,  in  conclusion  of  this  part  of  our  subject,  we  consider  the  collective  races  of 
America,  civilized  and  savage,  we  shall  find,  as  shown  in  the  Table,  that  the  average 
volume  of  the  brain,  as  measured  in  the  whole  series  of  338  crania,  is  only  79  cubic 
inches. 


II. 


ADMEASUREMENTS  OF  CRANIA  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 
GROUPS  OF  INDIANS  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


BY     J.     8.     PUIT.LIPS. 


The  completion  of  the  preceding  paper  having  been  prevented  by  the  untimely 
death  of  its  lamented  author,  at  the  instance  of  Mr.  Schoolciaft,  the  following  table 
has  been  compiled  from  the  measurements  registered  in  Dr.  Morton's  manuscript 
catalogue  of  his  collection,  together  with  those  of  the  crania  brought  by  the  United 
States  Exploring  Expedition,  and  some  others  in  the  Morton  collection,  now  first 
measured  to  complete  this  table,  which  contains  the  results  of  the  measurement  of 
the  facial  angle  and  internal  capacity  of  every  accessible  Indian  cranium  known  to 
tlio  author. 

Tiii.s  table  lias  been  arranged  in  Races,  grouped  according  to  affiliation  of  language, 
as  pointed  out  by  Mr.  S.,  and  the  resulting  averages  present  a  number  of  facts  which 
appear  to  be  well  worthy  of  notice. 

Faci.vl  Anglk. — This  measurement  varies  so  little  in  this  extensive  series,  that  the 
greater  number  would  be  found  to  range  within  a  very  few  degrees  of  the  common 
average,  76  s  degrees ;  the  lowest  in  the  series  being  70,  and  the  highest  86  degrees ; 
there  not  being  in  the  whole  number  more  than  6  or  7  crania  over  80°,  and  very  few 
below  73°.  The  average  angle  of  the  different  great  groups  is  strikingly  similar, 
scarcely  any  of  them  varying  from  the  common  average  more  than  1§  degrees;  from 
all  which  it  may  be  assumed  that  the  average  facial  angle  of  the  barbai-ous  tribes  of 
North  America  is  70S  degrees.  (The  crania  artificially  moulded  are  not  included  in 
this  average.) 


ja 


'ill 
if 


332 


PHYSICAL  TYPE  OF  THE 


Internal  Capacity.  —  While  the  facial  angle  in  the  different  groups  varies  so  little 
from  the  common  average,  we  find  the  measure  of  the  internal  capacity  differing  very 
materially  from  the  mean. 

Hitherto  our  aborigines  have  been  only  divided  into  the  barbarous  and  semi- 
barbarous,  or  into  some  similar  classification  of  no  more  value  in  ethnology.  This  is 
jM-'rliaps  the  first  attempt  to  group  them,  on  a  large  scale,  into  families  according  to 
language ;  and  the  result  of  the  meaaurcment  of  the  volume  of  the  brain  is  strikingly 
ill  accordance  with  the  ascertained  character  of  the  different  groups  thus  constituted. 

a.    Iroquois. 

The  number  of  crania  of  this  interesting  group  that  could  be  obtained  for  measure- 
ment was  but  ten;  yet  in  this  small  number  most  of  the  important  tribes  are 
represented.  The  average  internal  capacity  of  the  cranium  in  this  group  is  about  8i 
inches  higher  than  in  the  lowest  types,  and  4i  inches  higher  than  the  average; 
being  88  i  cubic  inches.  This  result  is  strikingly  in  keeping  with  the  fact,  that  they 
were  so  completely  the  master-spirits  of  the  land,  that  at  the  time  of  the  first 
settlement  of  tliis  country  by  the  white  race,  they  were  so  rapidly  subduing  the  other 
tribes  and  nations  around  them,  that  if  their  career  of  conquest  had  not  been  cut 
short  by  the  Anglo-Saxon  predominance,  they  bid  fair  to  have  conquered  all  within 
their  reach. 

h.  c.    Algonqitin  and  Appalachian. 


m 


These  two  groups  give  the  same  average  internal  capacity,  viz.  83  i  inches,  exactly 
the  mean,  while  the  range  of  measurements  does  not  vary  very  much  in  the  two 
groups,  extending  from  about  70  to  100  cubic  inches. 

The  average  internal  capacity  of  the  cranium  of  these  two  races,  approaching  so 
nearly  the  common  average,  agrees  well  with  their  character,  they  both  presenting  a 
fair  medium  specimen  of  the  barbarous  tribes  of  North  America, 


d.    Dacota. 

The  tribes  grouped  together  under  this  name  average  11  cubic  inches  higher  than 
the  two  last,  viz.  85  inches ;  and  these  appear  to  possess  more  force  of  character  and 
more  of  the  imtameable  violence  which  fonns  the  most  characteristic  feature  in  our 
barbarous  tribes.' 


'  Plate  62  is  an  accurate  drawing  of  the  head  of  a  Winnebago,  one  of  the  tribes  affiliated  to  Dacotos  by 
language. 


.1? 


:■:'■  ft 


M 


! 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


888 


e.    S II  o  s  n  0  N  E  E  3. 

The  Shoshonces  exhibit  the  same  volume  of  brain  with  the  Orcgonians,  and  though 
not  affiliated  by  language,  are  of  a  grade  not  much,  if  any,  superior  to  them. 

/.    Oregonians. 

The  lowest  measurements  of  the  internal  capacity  occur  among  the  tribes  west  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  the  average  being  only  801  cubic  inches,  and  the  artificially 
compressed  crania  80  inches ;  and  this  small  difference  may  be  owing  to  the  small 
number  of  heads  that  have  been  measured  not  giving  a  fair  average. 

These  people  are  known  to  be  the  lowest  type  of  all  the  North  American  tribes, 
and  the  volume  of  the  brain,  about  4  inches  less  than  the  average,  and  8  iiicbes  less 
than  the  Iroquois,  is  strictly  in  accordance  with  their  degraded  character. 

Plates  61  and  08  furnish  fair  specimens  of  the  unaltered  crania  of  the  Orogonian 
group.  The  similarity  of  outline  between  Plate  61,  a  Chenook,  and  Plate  02,  a 
Winnebago,  is  very  ng. 

It  is  also  remark,  .  ■  that  no  effect  of  consequence  should  be  produced  on  the 
volume  of  brain  by  a  pressure  capable  of  so  greatly  distorting  its  bony  case. ' 


The  average  volume  of  the  brain  in  the  barbarous  tribes  is  shown  to  be  from 
83 i  to  84  cubic  inches,  while  that  in  the  Mexicans  is  but  79,  and  in  the  Peruvians 
only  75 ;  thus  exhibiting  the  apparent  anomaly  of  barbarous  and  uncivilizable  tribes 
possessing  larger  brains  than  races  capable  of  considerable  progress  in  civilization. 

This  discrepancy  deserves  more  investigation  than  time  permits  at  present ;  but  the 
following  views  of  the  subject  may  make  it  appear  less  anomalous. 

The  prevailing  features  in  the  character  of  the  North  American  savage  are,  stoicism, 
a  severe  cruelty,  excessive  watchfulness,  and  that  coarse  brutality  which  results  from 
the  entire  preponderance  of  the  animal  projiensities.  These  so  outweigh  the  intellectual 
portion  of  the  character,  that  it  is  completely  subordinate,  making  the  Indian  what 
we  see  him,  a  most  unintellcctual  and  uncivilizable  man. 

The  intellectual  lobe  of  the  brain  of  these  people,  if  not  borne  down  by  such 
overpowering  animal  propensities  and  passions,  would  doubtless  have  been  capable  of 
much  greater  efforts  than  any  we  are  acquainted  with,  and  have  enabled  these 
barbarous  tribes  to  make  some  progress  in  civilization.  This  appears  to  be  the  cerebral 
difference  between  the  Mexicans  and  Peruvians  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  barbarous 
tribes  of  North  America  on  the  other. 

'  This  extraordinary  distortion  is  admirably  illustrated  in  Plates  59,  60,  63,  64,  6."),  66,  and  67. 

Faeiil  Anfle.  InlBrDll  Capacit,. 

Plates  59  and  60,  front  and  side  views  of  same  bead,    70  J 95 

"    63,  from  Columbia  River 75 80 

«    64      "  "  76 85 

"    65      "  "  77 77 

"    66  and  67,  front  and  side  views  of  same  head, 73 71 


IT 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


IX) 

I  I.I 
1.25 


US  ^ 

lU 
Ul 
lU 
lU 

u 


■4.0 


25 
2.2 

2.0 


U  11.6 


—    6" 


FhotogF^)hic 

^Sciences 

CorporaBon 


\ 


4 


^ 


•s? 


v> 


^.\ 


v\ 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WnSTIR.N.Y.  USIO 

(7I«)  172-4903 


'^ 


) 


4^ 


^ 


mestrwrnm 


1 

L 

1 

f 

■ 

'1 

ll 

1 

H 


r  V 


II    ,i 


884 


PHYSICAL    TYPE    OF    THE 


The  intellectual  lobe  of  tlic  brain  in  the  two  former  is  at  least  as  large  as  in  the 
latter,  the  ililTeR'nce  in  volume  Ix'ing  chiefly  confined  to  the  occipital  and  basal  [jortions 
of  the  ence[)halon ;  so  that  the  intellectual  and  moral  qualities  of  the  Mexicans  and 
Peruvians  (at  least  as  large  if  not  larger  than  those  of  the  other  gnjup)  are  left  more 
free  to  act,  Ixjing  not  so  sulwrdinate  to  the  proi^nsities  and  violent  passions. 

This  view  of  the  subject  is  in  accordance  with  the  history  of  these  two  divisions, 
Harbarous  and  Civilizable. 

When  the  former  were  assailed  by  the  European  settlers  they  fought  desi)erately, 
1)ut  rather  with  the  cunning  and  ferocity  of  the  lower  animals  than  with  the  system 
and  courage  of  men ;  they  could  not  be  subjugated,  and  were  either  extcrmiiuited,  or 
continued  to  retire  into  the  forcst,  when  they  could  no  longer  maintain  their  ground. 
Had  their  intei'cct  been  in  proiwrtion  to  their  other  qualities,  they  would  have  been 
most  formidable  enemies. 

With  the  Mexicans  and  Peruvians,  the  case  has  been  the  very  reverse.  The 
original  inhabitants  of  Mexico  were  entirely  subjugated  by  the  Aztecs,  who  ap^x-ar  to 
have  been  a  small  tribe  in  comparison  with  the  Mexicans ;  and  then  they  were  all 
conquered  and  completely  enslaved  by  a  mere  handful  of  Spanianls;  although  the 
M((xicana  had  the  advantage  over  the  barbarous  tribes  of  concerted  action,  some 
discipline,  and  preiwration,  in  which  the  latter  were  greatly  deficient. 

The  Mexicans,  with  smaller  brains,  were  evidently  inferior  in  resolution,  in  attack 
and  defence,  and  the  more  manly  traits  of  character,  to  the  barban)us  races,  who 
contested  every  inch  of  ground  until  they  were  entirely  outnumljcred. 

And  at  the  present  time,  the  Camanches  and  Apaches,  though  a  part  of  the  great 
Shoshonee  division,'  one  of  the  lowest  of  the  races  of  North  America,  arc  continually 
plundering  and  destroying  the  Indians  of  northern  Mexico,  who  scarcely  attempt 
resistance. 

Viewed  in  this  light,  the  apparent  contradiction  of  a  race  with  a  smaller  brain  being 
superior  to  trijjes  with  larger  brains  is  so  far  explained,  that  the  volume  and  distribu- 
tion of  their  respective  brains  appears  to  be  in  accordance  with  such  facts  in  their 
history  as  have  come  to  our  knowledge. 


\ 

I 
( 

i, 

w 

j 

JHiilf 
mil 

( 


AMERICAN    INDIANS. 


335 


CRANIAL  ADMEASUREMENTS  OF  AMERICAN   INDIANS. 


OREOONIANS. 

UNALTERED   BV   ART. 

Chcnnok 

From  Culuiubia  river 


Average 

Two  lowest  in  series 

Two  highest  in  scries 

CRANIA   ALTERED   BY   ART, 

From  Oregon  and  California  . 
Two  lowest  in  scries 

Two  highest  in  series 

SlIOSHONEES 

Ijowest  measurements 
Highest  " 

ALGONQUIN 

Chippewa 
Cotonay 
Illinois  .... 
I^nape  .... 
Massasauga 

Miiisi 

Mcnomonee 

Miami  . 

Natiek 

Naumkeag 

Narragansctt 

Ottignmie 

Ottawa 

Pottawatomie 

Quinipiao 

Sauk 

Shawnee 

Average 

Two  lowest  in  series 

Two  highest  in  series 

APPALACHIAN 

Cherokee 
Choctaw 
Euchee 

Tlascalan  [Aztec] 
Muskogee 


Miccosaukie 
Seminole  . . 


Average 

Two  lowest  in  series . 


Two  highest  in  series . 

DACOTA. 

Assincboin 

Dacota 

Otomio 

Minctari 

Maiidan 

O.siigc 

Otoe 


I'uwnce  . , . 
Kickarcc . , . 
AVinut'bago. 


Average 

Two  lowest  in  scries . 


Two  highest  in  scries . 


Cayuga . 
Huron  . , 
Iroquois  . 
Mingo  . , 
Mohawk  , 
Oneida  . . 


IROQUOIS. 


Average 

Two  lowest  in  scries 

Two  highest  in  scries 

SUMMARY. 

Oregonian  

Crania  altered  by  art 

Shoshonces    

Algonipiin 

Appalachian  

Dacota 

Iroquois 


Average  of  the  whole 


No.  (if  rm-i  ATpmffif  I  AviTntca 
nin  in.'a-  fHi'tiil  1  tiili-riinl 
Rure.1.         m.iilii.    |  mimi'ily. 


18 


1 
1 

4 
4 
4 
2 
3 
2 

3 

2 


74 

88i 

831 

74 

7!) 

i»7 

97 


101 
!I0 

78 
8t>i 

ml 

87 

8t( 

7:ii 

78 

89 

85 
7(5 
7« 
04 
101 


0,1 

81 
0(5 
80 
84 
05 

KSi 

77 

so 

05 

102i 


80 
80 
81 

81)  jj 
831 
85 


m 


The  average  of  76}  degrees  facial  angle  is  taken,  excluding  the  flat  heads.  The  three  lowest  types  being  mea- 
sured separately  for  illustration,  when  two  at  least  of  them  should  be  united  for  the  common  average,  makes  the 
average  lower  than  it  really  is ;  and  as  Dr.  Morton's  average  was  taken  without  including  so  many  of  these  lower 
types,  he  not  having  measured  the  crania,  the  common  average  may  be  safely  fixed  at  83}  to  84  cubic  inches. 


It 


It 


IX.    LANGUAGE.    A 


(  »•!'  ) 


Pt.  II.— 43 


) 


LANGUAGE. 


SYNOPSIS. 


I.  Indian  Languages  of  the  United  States.     By  II.  R.  Schoolcraft. 
II.  Plan  of  Thought  of  the  American  Languages.     By  Dr.  Francis  Leiber. 

III.  Essay  on  the  Grammatical  Structure  of  the  Algonquin  Language.     By  II.  R.  Schoolcraft. 

IV.  Remarks  on  the  Principles  of  the  Cherokee  Language,     By  Rev.  S.  N.  Worcester. 

V.  Reply  to  Philological  Inquiries   in   relation  to  the  Ojibwa  Language  of  Lake  Superior. 

By  Rev.  Sherman  Hall.' 
VI.  Vocabularies. 

I.  Algonquin  Group:  — 

a.  1.  Ojibwa  of  Sault  Stc  Marie. 

2.  Ojibwa  of  Grand  Traverse  Bay. 

3.  Ojibwa  of  Saginaw. 

4.  Ojibwa  of  Michilimackinac. 

b.  Miami. 

e.  Menomoneo. 

d.  Shawnee. 

e.  Delaware. 
Sub-division  — 

Natic,  or  Massachusetts  dialect.     Vol.  I.,  p.  288. 
II.  Iroquois  Group :  — 

a.  Mohawk. 

b.  Oneida. 

c.  Onondaga. 

d.  Cayuga. 

e.  Seneca.' 

/.  Tuscarora.' 

g.  Wyandot.' 

III.  Appalachian  Group: — ' 

a.  Muscogee  East.' 
Muscogee  West.' 

b.  Choctaw.' 

c.  Seminole.' 


'  Deferred  to  Part  III. 


( 339 ) 


MO 


I.ANGl'AGl.'. 

IV.  Diicota  (ir(>u|i: — ' 

(I.   Dacota.' 

h.  Wiiiiipbago.' 

e,  Iowa.' 

(/.  0»nj»o.' 
V.  Shoshonci'  (iroup:  — 

a.  Conmiu'li(M'. 
Miitci'llanctms  Vociilniliiric!* :  — 

Satsika,  or  Itlackfi'i't. 

Ciisliiia.     CalifurMia. 

CuRtanox.     Califuriiia. 

I)io;;uiii>!*.     LowiT  ('alifiiriiia,  alitr,  p.  104. 

CiK'liaii  or  Yiima.     llio  tVilurailo,  anti',  p.  118. 

Clioyonnc,  or  Cliawai.' 

Snake.     Vol.  I.,  p.  210.' 


1.     INDIAN    LANGUAGES    OF   THE    UNITED    STATES. 


;l     i 


No  toi)ic  lias,  fmin  tlie  first,  fxcitt'd  a  (U-t'iK-r  curiosity  aiiionji  tlio  Icariifd  tliaii  tlio 
Ainericaii  lanjriiagcs.  Tlio  clisciis.si()n  of  tiii-ir  priufipli's  lias,  liowi'vor,  prot'i'i'tlt'd 
gonorally  from  writers  of  tlu'on'tical  views,  wlio,  liowovi-r  imbued  witii  tlie  true  spirit 
of  pliilosopliy  and  leariiinj:,  have  not  tliemsi-lves  iK'eii  practically  acijiiainted  with  the 
dialects,  and  have,  iiioivover,  In-eii  limited  to  narrow  or  imprecise  examples.  A 
IK'oplu  who  are  iwrpetually  speakinfr  of  thin^rs  in  their  concrete  nnd  pi-oss  relations, 
could  not  be  exjK'cted  to  disj'ourse  analytically,  or  to  utter  elementary  names  or 
phrn.'<es;  nor  could  great  certainty  of  forms  Ik;  relied  on,  when  it  is  known  that  the 
vocabularies  and  examples  of  these  forest  tongues  have  Ix-en  committed  to  pajH'r  either 
by  travellers  wholly  or  measurably  ignorant  of  the  languages,  or  else  by  native  inter- 
preters, who,  however  well-vei-sed  with  the  a))original  tongues,  have  3  et  lieen  too  ignorant 
of  the  principles  of  grammatical  structure  to  give  the  pivcise  equivalent  of  words  in 
English,  French,  Spanish,  or  German, —  the  four  principal  modern  languagen  in  which, 
during  the  settlement  of  America,  it  has  been  attempted. 

The  attention  of  the  author  was  first  called  to  this  particular,  and  the  subject  of  the 
languages  generally,  in  1822,  on  his  entering  the  Indian  country  in  an  ofllicial  capacity, 
when  he  commenced,  with  excellent  inter[)reters,  the  study  of  the  Algonquin  and  its 
dialects;  and  he  soon  felt  a  zeal  in  the  pursuit,  and  in  the  philosophy  of  languages 
generally,  which  has  absorljed  much  of  his  time. 


I,  A  N<;  I  .\(i  !•; 


:!n 


III  1^17.  ••ll(irl>  wvvv  iiiiMlr.  Miiilcr  (lie  iiii>|iii'f^  "I'  iIm-  ;:<>\<'|'iiiii<'|ii.  tu  iaii'ihI   ilif-c 
ini|iiii'i('H  to  (itluT  )'iiMi|)i«  of  tlic  Iciiiliii^  HtiM-k)*  nl'  tlir  I'liilnl  Sliitvs.     S'Xfral  viiliiiil)li' 


iiifiiKiirs  liiivt'  iK'fii   n'<Ti\fil.  Ill  aiivwcr 


to    til 


i-<|iii^iti<iii.  iVotii   |M>i'<))ii>i  ill  Miriiiiis 


(|iiai°t<'rs  III'  till'  rnitcil  Stiitc.x.  who  Iiiinc  iiiailc  tin*  Iniliaii  laiiv'na^.'o  llicir  ^tiiilv  ;  ami 
a  larp'  coiU'ction  ol'  ori^iiiial  \'<N'al)iilai'irs,  and  iiiiiiu'riral  ami  p'M;:rii|i|iiral  t<'l'lll^'.  lia.'< 
Ih-cii  inailt'. 

A  I'oininciK-i'iiiciit  to  put  tlifxi-  |iliilolo;.'ii'al  ii-corilH  in  |ii'iiit.  Uitli  |M'i>oiial  ami 
roiiiiiiniiiratt'il,  in  iiiailc  in  the  |ii-i-><«-iit  volunic,  wliit-li  will  Ik'  continiii-d  in  llic  I'littuv 
parts  of  till'**'  in<|niri('H,  ax  tiiiic  and  fonvcnii'iici'  will  |MTniit  :  tlic  tojiic  itsrH"  luin^' 


Olll'   w 


liii'li,  more  than  aiiv  otlicr,  ap|N>ai's  siiitfd   to  tliiDW  liuht  on  the  oIimiik*  or 


L'ln 


and  liictory  of  the  tiiU-s.  Of  tin*  part  of  tlicw  iiivf-'lijration.M  whirh  arc  |iri>oiial, 
it  is  pro|M-r  to  add,  that  iioiu'  ol'  tlic  oli^crvatioiis  on  tlu-  Alv'om|iiiii  and  its  tlialcrts  ' 
have,  hcrrtoliirc.  Utii  roininuiiit'att'd.  •■xccptiii;:  tlir  oliscrxatiuns  on  llu'  ^iianiniaticMl 
^<trll('tllr('    <■*'    the    Chippewa    noun,    which    wci-c    traiir'latcd    liv    Mr.    |)ii|ioiiccaii    li.i 

examples  whii'li  were 


also  some 


the  National  liiMitiitc  of  France.  I  think,  in  IS' 
siihseipii'iitlv  inserted  in  thi"  North  American  Keview.  These  have  received  com- 
niendatioiis  which  were  decided  enonjrh  to  Hatter  the  hiLdiest  aniliition,  had  the 
latter  U'cn  limited  to  a  casual  lalior,  or  the  coinmendations  themselves  |)roceeded 
I'roin  individuals  who  ha<l  not  lacked  the  advantages  of  jiersonal  inipiirv  into  the 
Huhject  on   the  s|Mit. 

Nothinfj  could,  apparently,  Ik-  farther  ifniovetl  from  the  analytical  class  of  lan;ruaj:cs 
than  the  various  dialects  sjHiki'U  liy  the  American  Indians;  who  invarialily  express 
their  iileas  ofohjects  and  actions  pivcisely  as  the\  are  presented  to  their  eyes  and  lars, 
that  is,  in  their  c<)ni|Hiund  assot-iations.  A  jn-rson  and  an  act  are  ever  assiK-iated,  in 
tlu'ir  forms  of  syntax,  w  ith  the  ohject  of  the  action.  To  love  and  to  hate  aix>,  therefore, 
never  heanl  in  their  analytical  Ibrins.  This  combination  of  the  action  of  the  speaker 
with  the  oltjects  is  universal.  The  substantive,  which  a|i|M'ars  to  have  In'tii  fr«'nerally 
anterior  in  aire  to  tin'  verl».  comes  under  the  same  rule  as  the  veil);  ami  the  adjective, 
which  is  ri'(juiii'd  to  perl'orin  the  same  oHice  of  limitation,  is  also,  within  its  range, 
characterized  by  this  transitive  principle. 

It  will  In-  sullicient  to  state  this  principle  of  the  Indian  .syntax,  to  denote  a  peculiar 
plan  of  thought,  to  which  attention  has  been  called.      It  apjx'ars  to  Ijo  tlie  result,  in 


'  Tlic  chief  of  those  are : 
Chippewa  or  Ojibwa 
Oltowtt 
I'ottawottaiuio 

Fox 
.Suuk 

MenomoDoe 
Mnski>;i) 


Kcnistcno  or  Crce 
Kicknpoo 
Illinois : 

I'curio 

Kuskaskia 
Miami 
Woa 


PinnknshQ 

Shawnee 

Delaware 

Muii.sev 

.^luhegan 

Stoekhridgc,  &c. 


i', 
.^'1 


.♦'*^,   ,.. 


842 


LANGUAGE. 


i    d 


till'  iniiid,  of  a  cimkIo  and  primitive  age.  AnalyHiH,  goiioralizution,  loliiioinent,  come  from 
matured  retloctioii.  Tlie  mind  that  criticises,  adopts  or  rejects.  Redundancies  are 
dropped,  defects  supplied,  and  elegancies  intnxluced,  as  languages  are  applied  to 
lettei's,  arts,  and  sciences.  Tlie  Indian,  on  the  contrary',  ajipears  to  have  adhered 
to  his  original  motles  of  distinction ;  piling  up  syllaltle  on  svllahle,  till  his  forms  are 
infinitely  multiplied,  and  his  actual  vocabulary  has  become  a  formidaltle  mass  of 
aggregated  sounds.  The  antiquity  of  the  race  derives,  indeed,  a  strong  support  from 
this  consideration  of  the  originality  of  granunatical  structure. 

That  the  plan  itself  is  homogenous — that  it  proceeds  fnmi  a  peculiar  view  of  the 
use  of  words,  in  their  concrcte  forms,  and  from  a  synthesis  of  tlie  same  kind  and 
jiower,  appears  to  me  to  be  a  fact  established  by  investigation.  The  attempt  is, 
perpetually,  to  speak  of  objects  in  groups.  It  is  a  simi)le  plan  of  thought,  however 
curiously  carried  out,  and  every  other  purpose  is  made  to  give  way  to  it.  There  are 
heaps  of  syllables  clustered,  as  it  were,  on  a  polysyllabic  stem,  brt  lothing  diver.*<e, 
in  its  grammatical  ratiocination — or  that  leads  the  mind  to  douht  the  oneness  of 
its  synthesis,  however  varied  the  mode  of  accomplishing  its  end.s,  cr  crude  and 
redundant  in  some  of  its  forms.  The  devel()i)nieut  of  this  plan  may  be  said  to  be 
recondite,  creating  the  idea  of  many  plans  of  thought ;  l)ut  there  is,  in  fact,  oidy 
one  generic  scheme,  tending  to  denote  compound  expression.  It  is  a  fixed  theor}'  of 
language,  built  on  radices,  which  have  the  singular  property'  of  retaining  the  meaning 
of  their  original,  incremental  syllables  or  vowelic  meanings,  under  every  varied  aspect 
of  the  compounds.  Not  only  pronouns,  verbs,  and  substantives,  are  thus  denoted 
and  detected  by  the  etymologist,  but  adjectives  and  prepositiims  are  at  once  identified, 
and  the  fragtncnts  of  words  are  perceived  to  be  CTuploycd  as  the  common  woof  or 
filling  of  the  primitive  grammatical  web.  The  term  "  encapsulated"  structure,  which 
is  employed  by  an  acute  and  learned  correspondent,  in  one  of  the  following  papers, 
conveys,  in  a  striking  and  happy  manner,  the  mode  of  compound  structure  which 
the  words  assume.  They  are,  indeed,  clustered  or  botryoidal  —  thought  exfoliating 
thought,  as  capsule  within  capsule  or  box  within  box. 

Gesenius  says  "  that  languages,  in  their  earlier  epochs  and,  as  it  were,  in  their 
youthful  vigor,  generally  exhibit  a  strong  tendency  to  the  development  of  forms;  but, 
in  their  later  periods,  this  tendency  continually  diminishes  in  force,  and  it  becomes 
necessary  to  resort  to  the  constructions  of  syntax."  '  It  is  also  to  be  inferred,  that  the 
use  of  the  common  gender  —  he,  as  denoting  he  and  she  —  of  the  same  word  for  youmj 
man  and  young  looman,  as  it  is  found  in  the  Pentateuch,  is  an  indicatiim  of  the 
antiquity  and  crudity  of  early  languages,  particularly  of  those  of  the  Semitic 
stock.' 

It  will  not   escape   the   observer,  that    this   anti-sexual  character  of  the  Indian 


'  Ili'lircw  Grainniar,  p.  8,  Intro. 


'  Hebrew  (Jraninmr,  T.  J.  Coimnt,  p.  ".'i. 


LANGUAGE. 


343 


pronoun  he,  and  the  exact  identity  of  the  words  for  ynuutjer  hrutJicr  and  j/nuiii/er  sister, 
is,  at  this  day,  a  stronjr  peculiarity  of  all  the  groups  of  Indian  languages  of  the  United 
States,  which  havj  Iteen  examined,  except  the  Inxjuois,  which  has  duplicate  forms  for 
these  terms,  founded  on  the  distinction  of  sex ;  this  sonorous  tongue  has,  also,  the 
advantage  of  a  dual  —  two  refinements,  which  entitle  it  to  l)e  distinguished  as  the 
Greek  of  our  harharous  tongues. 

From  tiie  examination  of  vocahularies  and  grannnatical  forms,  the  trihes  who 
occupied  the  United  States  eivst  of  tiie  Rocky  Mountains,  at  the  respective  eras  of  the 
discovery,  may  Ije  groui^d  into  seven  principal  ethnological  families,  namely : 

1.  Algonquins. 

2.  InKpiois. 

o.  Appalachians. 

4.  Dacotas. 

0.  Shoshonees. 

<).  Achala(|ues  (Clierokees.) 

7.  Natchez. 
This  classification  does  net  include  the  small  trihes  of  Texas,  who  may  1k>, 
provisionally,  referred  to  as  Texanos.  The  leading  stock  of  that  State  —  the  Niliini, 
or  Comanche,  is  Siioshouee,  belonging  to  tlie  same  grouj)  as  the  Snakes  of  the 
Rocky  Mountains  and  their  congeners.  Neither  does  it  embrace  the  small  tri))C  of  the 
Chawai,  better  known  as  Cheyeiuies,  —  a  people  who  originated  north  of  the  sources 
of  the  Jlississipi)!,  —  who  apjwar,  by  their  numerals  and  some  imperfect  vocabularies, 
to  have  claims  to  in(lei)endent  consideration  ;  nor  the  Catawbas  and  Woccons.  From 
partial  vocabularies  furnished  the  late  Mr.  Gallatin,  some  yeai-s  since,  l)y  tradei-s  at 
Fort  Union  on  the  Missouri,  which  aiv  however  not  fully  sustained  l»y  a  vocabulary  of 
Mr.  Moncrevie,  herewith  submitted,  the  large  tribe  of  the  Black-feet  are,  to  our 
surprise,  denoted  to  be,  although  remotely,  of  the  Algonquin  stock ;  while  their  char 
racter,  their  alleged  I'erocity,  and  their  cranial  indices,  given  herewith  in  VIII.  A.,  far 
more,  assimilate  them  to  the  Dacota,  or  most  barbarous  iiimily  of  the  Prairie  tril)es. 
The  Catawbas  have  heretofore  occupied  an  anomalous  position  in  our  Indian 
languages,  and  have,  apparently-,  oflered  grounds  for  a  separate  group.  It  appears, 
however,  froiii'  a  nuuuiscript  document,  recently  obtained  by  Mr.  Thomas  from  the 
Oflice  of  the  Secretary  of  State  of  South  Carolina,  that  the  tribe  originated  in  the 
north,  and  is  not  to  Ix'  cou'-idered  indigenous  to  that  State.  They  fled,  according  to 
this  authority,  from  the  region  of  the  lakes,  under  the  fury  of  their  enemies ;  and, 
after  entering  into  a  league  with  the  Clierokees,  encountered,  together  with  that  trilx', 
the  undying  hatred  of  the  Irocpiois. 

We  have  no  vocabulary  of  tlie  ancient  Erics ;  but  it  is  inferable,  from  the  French 
missionary  records,  that  they  were  a  cognate  tribe  of  the  Iroquois  group  —  that  they 
formed  a  "neutrality,"  as  between  the  French  and  Algonquins,  on  the  one  side,  and 


844 


LANGUAGE. 


.(A 


the  Iroquois  on  the  other;  that  this  Erie  lengiio  embraced  several  other  tril)es,  as  the 
Anthistes,  Kakwas,  &c. ;  and  that,  when  the  final  struggle  came,  they  fell,  or  Hed,  and 
disappeared,  before  the  conquering  power  of  the  more  perfectly  confederated  and 
pi'cdominating  Iroquois.  The  hint,  thus  furnished  by  this  document,  for  making 
a  philological  inquiry,  may  throw  light  on  this  obscure  point  of  our  Indian  history. 
No  definite  allinuation  can  be  made  respecting  it,  however,  and  the  language  cannot, 
consequently,  be  grouped,  until  this  prior  investigation  has  been  made. 

From  traditions  recently  recorded  by  Mr.  Pickett,'  the  Cherokees,  whose  traditions 
have  heretofore  been  silent  as  to  their  origin,  ajipear  to  have  anciently  dwelt  in  the 
north,  probably  higher  up  the  Mississippi  A'alley,  whence  they  would  seem  to  have  been 
expelled  and  replaced  by  the  AUegans  or  Iroquois.  But  whatever  was  their  ancient 
history,  their  language,  as  at  present  understood,  vindicates  its  claim  to  a  peculiarity 
in  its  scheme  of  vowels  and  ccmsonauts,^  while  its  structure  coincides,  generally,  with 
the  American  aboriginal  plan  of  thought.  It  u.ses  the  fragmentary  pronouns  in 
connexion  with  the  verbs ;  one  of  the  striking  peculiarities  of  this  class  of  language. 

The  term  "  Mobilian"  was  needlessly,  and  with  a  lamentable,  but,  (considering  the 
epoch,)  excusable  ignorance  of  the  languages,  introduced  by  Du  Pratz,  and  it  may  l)e 
summniiiy  disposed  of  The  Mobilians  of  this  writer  were  pure  Clioctaws.  The 
Chickasaws  are  of  the  same  stock.  There  is  no  evidence  whatever,  that  the  Alaljanias 
spoke  any  but  a  dialect  of  the  same  generic  language.  A  similar  remark  applies, 
with  equal  force,  to  the  numerous  sulvtribes  and  bands,  who  are  referred  to  by  various 
names  in  this  southern  area;  l)ut  who  all  eventually  fell  into  either  the  Appalachian 
or  Muscogee  sul>group  of  languages,  the  affinities  Ix'twecn  which  permit  them  to  be 
all  merged  under  the  general  name  of  Appalachians. 

Under  this  term  must  also  be  included  the  Vamases  of  South  Carolina;  and 
perhaps,  though  with  less  probability,  some  others  of  the  ancient  southern  coast  tribes 
of  that  State.  It  is  uncertain  whether  the  term  Chickorean,'  which  was  applied  by 
early  navigators  to  the  trilws  of  tiie  norlhern  Gtonjin  ami  Caioliiia  Ailuufh;  cmist/i, 
had  respect  to  a  language  dift'ering  from  the  known  Cherokee  and  "  Apalachites"  or 
Muscogee  generally.  And  if  the  Catawbas  1x3  withdrawn  from  the  proposed  family,* 
agreeaoly  to  a  preceding  ol)servation,  there  is  no  element  to  found  this  group  upon, 
unless  we  are  compelled  to  do  so  by  examples  of  a  i)eculiar  character  and  idiom 
in  the  e.xtinct  dialects  of  the  Cheraws,  Waxsaws,  and  Kershaws.  Admitting  the 
radices  of  Cher,  Ker,  and  Wax,  in  these  words,  to  be  characteristic  of  peculiar  traits, 
the  tcnnination  in  aw  is  clearly  an  Algonquin  syllable,  and  carries  the  idea  of  people. 
And  we  should  Ix!  limited,  in  the  inquiries,  to  the  differing  bands  of  the  Santees, 
Oconees,  Waterees,  and  Pedees. 

'  History  of  Alubaiim.  '  Vide  Cluirokce  Alphabet,  VI.  B. 

'  Carrol's  Historical  Collections  of  SoutL  Carolina.     2  vols.  8vo,  N.  Y.  *  Vidu  I,  U.  page  35. 


LANGUAGE. 


345 


Another  question  in  the  classification  of  our  Indian  languages  arises  from  the  two 
small  tribes  of  the  Natchez  and  Utchees,  the  remnants  of  which  have  coalesced  with 
the  Muskogces.  We  may  suppose  that  there  was  some  ancient  alliance,  to  lead  their 
minds  to  the  act;  if  not,  some  remote  affinitj;  but,  in  the  present  state  of  our 
inquiries,  they  must  lie  separately  grouiied. 

The  languages  of  New  Mexico,  California,  and  Oregon,  require  several  new  groups ; 
but  the  labour  cannot  be  satisfactorily  attempted  until  our  collection  of  vocabularies 
and  grammars  is  more  complete. 


Pt.  II. 


11 


11.  PLAN  OF  TIIOUGIIT  OF  THE  AMERICAN   LANGUAGES. 

iiY   KRAxris  i.f.iuf.k,   i,r,.i).,    mem.  op  the  fr.  inst. 

Tlio  jHM'cc'ptivc  organs  carrv  specific  imnfros — iiimgcs  of  tilings  in  oV  their  thousand, 
yet,  for  the  single  case,  peculiarly  coinhinecl  relations,  to  the  mind.  Wc  never  see  a 
man,  or  a  horse,  but  we  see  a  man  with  hrown  hair,  calm  expression,  sitting,  one  leg 
over  the  other,  reading,  black  pants,  near  a  sopha,  &c.,  &c. ;  or  a  sjiecific  horse  so  or  so, 
in  its  thousand  relations  to  the  world  around.  Now  it  is  clear,  that  if  each  thing  in 
nil  its  individual  relations,  and  each  action  with  <ill  its  peculiarities,  had  its  own  name, 
or  its  own  word,  no  hinguag*^  would  be  possible,  because  the  object  of  language  is  to 
arrive,  by  skilful  combinations  tA'  /:ninni  signs,  at  the  (expression  of  something  unknown 
to  the  hearer,  (the  idea  to  be  conveyed)  ;  but,  in  the  case  tiuit  I  suppo.^e,  each  thing 
and  action  would  have  its  own  word;  and  as  each  singular  thing  or  precise  action  has 
never  existed  iH-lbre,  (for  I  still  speak  of  totalities.)  tiie  hearer  could  not  know  this 
word.  Hemember  that  nothing  in  the  world  is  in  one  moment  the  same  it  was  the 
moment  iM^'ore,  if  we  speak,  as  1  now  do.  of  n/l  relations.  A  piece  of  rock  will  l)e 
shone  ujxui  l)v  the  sun.  or  rained  upon,  or  hwiked  upon  by  luo  or  by  you,  and  in  each 
case  that  rock  and  its  totality  is  another;  the /'■/»</'■.  as  comprehended  by  the  e_\(>  as 
one  thing,  is  a  difliM-ent  thing  every  moment,  lu  <ine  word,  the  world  consists  of 
realitit'fi.  and  not  al)stractions ;  l)ut  realities  are  aKva_\s  •  indiviiluali/ed  entities. 
Ahfitruilhni  tlierefore  becomes  necessary  fur  the  very  possiliility  of  language.  II'  1  say, 
the  horne  in  iiii/  sUihle  in  hroini,  I  put  together  nothing  but  abstractions,  in  order  to 
entrench  the  idea  or  thing  to  be  expre.s.^ed.  Ifinxv,  stuhh,  hrmni,  /.«,  nii/,  are  all 
abstractions.  I  never  saw  hmini,  or  c.risfrinr,  or  »*//,  or  sfuhk;  but  I  have  .seen  millions 
of  brown  things,  thousands  of  individual  horses,  nuuiy  stables,  have  often  thought  of 
things  iK'longing  to  me,  and  urn  all  the  time  jierceiving  things  that  arr,  crixt, —  I  am 
surrounded  by  existences,  and  am  myself  one. 

On  the  other  hand,  imagine  that  this  process  of  abstraction  is  carried  on  ad  infinitum. 
We  have  the  word  ridimj.  This  is  an  abstraction,  still  it  means  the  comprehensive 
idea  of  hwomotion  on  the  back  of  an  animal.  The  French  have  no  such  word,  and 
must  say  munter  d,  chcvnl.  Suppose  they  had  no  word  for  chccul,  but  were  obliged  to 
say  (he  ueiijhing  animah,  suppose  they  had  no  word  lor  neigliing,  nor  for  animal,  but 
were  obliged  to  describe  neighing,  and  to  say  for  animal,  breathing  thing;  suppose  n(» 
separate  words  existed  for  either,  hut  that  you  must  put  together  other  words  more 

(340) 


••>•«•*#*•>*■*»» 


LANGUAGE. 


347 


gonoializinjf  still  to  iinivc  at  the  ideas  of  thiiif^-breathing,  do  n't  yon  soo  that  a;j:iiiii 
lanf:;iiii<it'  oOidd  be  reduced  to  zero,  to  nothing,  to  an  impossibility,  as  nnieh  as  in  the 
previous  case  of  infinite  individualization  ?  All  language,  therefore,  plays  between 
these  two  jMjles;  every  language  inclines  more  to  the  one  or  the  other;  all  human 
sjieech  re(|uires  tlie  one  <»/«/  the  other.  Tone,  vividness,  energy,  brevity',  point-blank 
shots  with  words,  require  individualizing  words,  words  which  throw  a  volume  of 
associated  ideas,  an  idea  with  a  hundred  adjunct  relations,  like  a  shell  shot  into  the 
soul  of  the  hearer.  Refinement,  definition,  intentional  dilution,  transparency,  philo- 
sophical di.xquisition,  on  the  other  hand,  re([uire  generalizing  words. 

When  I  Ijecame  acquainted  with  the  Indian  languages,  I  was  led  to  this  whole 
meditation,  and  I  found  that  two  terms  were  necessary  to  indicate  these  two  different 
charactei"s.  I  found  that  the  Indians  often  say  in  one  word  that  for  which  we  req\iire 
ten ;  I  then  reflected  that  the  Greek  language,  especially  its  verb,  frequently  does  the 
same;  1  remembeivd  that  the  San.scrit  has  the  same  tendency  witii  our  Indian 
languages,  that  is,  to  Ibnn  or  to  use  single  words  which  to  us  ai)pear  like  clu.-ters  of 
gra[)es.  On  the  other  hand,  I  saw  that  the  French  often  are  obliged  to  use  half  a 
dozen  of  words  where  we  require  but  one.  I  discovered,  moreover,  that  as  nuni  begins 
with  itercciciiKj  totalities,  and  then  generalizes  in  his  «/<'/«/,  so  do  children  and  early 
nations  show  the  strongest  tendency  to  form  and  use  individualizing  words  —  bunch 
worth,  words  which,  indeed,  express  a  main  idea,  but  along  with  it  a  hundred  other 
ideas,  Avhich,  so  long  as  you  wish  to  express  that  one  idea  with  those  hundred  adjunct 
ideas,  are  excellent, — as  excellent  as  a  carpenter's  word,  e.  g.,  lulze,  but  which  becomes 
cundjersome  and  ruinous  .so  soon  as  you  wish  to  express  something  more  general,  as 
udze  would  be,  were  there  no  such  words  as  instrument,  shaqi-tool,  handle,  flat,  &c., 
&c.,  and  you  were  still  obliged,  each  time  that  you  wished  to  express  the  idea  of 
hatchet,  to  use  the  term  «</;.('.  These  adhesions  are  the  greatest  trouble  to  our 
missionaries. 

I  found  that  William  von  Humboldt  called  these  bunch  u-on/s  of  the  Indians 
n<j(jlutlnnt'utnn  (in-gluings),  and  Viu\nn\ci>i\\\  imJijsi/iithctic  (man}'  compound)  :  but  I  saw, 
at  once,  that  this  was  beginning  at  the  wrong  end ;  for  these  names  indicate  that  that 
which  has  Ix'en  separated  is  put  together,  as  if  man  Ijcgan  with  analysis,  while,  in  fact, 
he  ends  with  it.  And  I  saw,  moreover,  that  there  are  three  different  kinds  of  bunch 
words.  Tliis  very  word  has  the  same  defect,  but  jon  will  let  it  pass  for  the  present. 
I  use  it  merely  epistolarily  or  conversationally.  There  are  such  words  which  express 
what  noio  to  uh  expresses  a  bunch  of  ideas  by  one  striking  word  ;  others,  b^-  a  variety 
of  inflections,  re-dnplications,  changes  of  vowels,  and  other  transmutations;  and  others, 
again,  which  express  clusters  of  ideas  by  real  synthesis,  with  more  or  less  changes  of 
the  eleinents.  For  all  these  three  classes  I  wanted  one  term,  and  I  formed  the  word 
holophniMlc,  from  »>^i)f,  undivided,  entire,  and  <ffa.tu,  to  say,  express,  utter  forth.  For 
the  opposite,  I  .selected  the  term  analytical.     Holophrastic  and  anal3tical,  used  in  this 


11 


848 


LANGUAGE. 


Ii!      I 


l:     ': 


i 


fuimoxion,  luv,  of  eoiirfo,  but  ivlativo  tonus.  Tlie  (jiifsstion  i.s  alnuit  inoro  or  li'.xs.  No 
laiij^uagi',  as  I  liavo  »liuwn,  can  bo  wholly  holoplirastir,  none  wholly  analytical ;  but  I 
believe  men  like  yourselves  will  sustain  me,  when  I  say  that  these,  or  any  similar  ones, 
were  necessary  in  general  philolog}-,  and  that  neither  agglutination  nor  polysynthosis 
expre.-^sed  what  we  needed  to  express. 

You  have  seen  those  sets  of  Ik)xc»,  where  one  is  put  into  another,  to  save  room  in 
transj)osing  them.  These  sets  furnish  indeed  the  image  of  some  words  of  the  American 
Indians,  or  of  Sanscrit.  Theiv  is  occasionally  a  real  process  of  en-capsulation  (of 
Ixixing  Ik)X  within  lx)x) — a  term  which  would  in  fact  appear  better  to  me  than 
agglutination,  because  the  latter  indicates  merely  an  incivment  from  without  which  is 
not  always  the  case  by  any  means.  But  whether  we  take  en-capsulation,  (from 
capxula,  a  l)ox,  or  little  box,)  or  agglutination  or  polysyntliesis,  we  .still  cannot  dispense 
with  a  term  which  refers  to  the  imnnbiy  of  the  word,  considered  in  a  philosophical 
IMMiit  of  view,  and  not  to  the  purely  etymological  process,  which  is  but  a  means,  and  a 
late  one,  to  indicate  the  duster-thought  b}'  the  hohijthruHtic  iionl.  I  »ay  a  hifc  one; 
because,  before  30U  agglutinate  or  en-capsidate,  ycm  must  have  the  separate  elements, 
and  these  elements  arc  the  results  of  analy.sis  or  generalization,  while  holophrasm  is 
the  iK'gimiing.  Were  it  not  so,  we  would  have  al)S()lute  terms  for  abstractions  or 
generalities,  as  direct  for  the  meaning  they  strive  to  convey  ns  rul>a-dub  is  for 
drumming,  or  moaning  for  what  it  signifies,  or  flanh  for  sudden  bright-passing  light ; 
while  the  fact  is  that  all  tenus  for  abstractions  are  faded  metaphors,  and  these 
generally  express  but  very  lamely  what  they  are  intended  to  convey  —  so  much  so, 
that  there  is  no  absolute  language  except  in  mathematics ;  I  mean  absolute  so  far  as 
the  thought  to  Ix)  expressed  is  concerned.  As  to  the  etymology  of  mathematical 
terms,  they  are  likewise  but  faded  metaphors,  or  terms  Htrij)ped  of  their  original 
physical  meaning. 

Once  more,  holophrasm  relates  to  the  great  logic  of  the  human  mind  cast  into 
utterance;  en-capsulation,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  grammar  only. 

One  of  the  leading  topics  of  Bradford's  American  Antiquities  is  the  hypothesis 
that  the  American  red  race  is  of  Mongolian  origin,  and  reached  this  continent  by  the 
islands  of  the  Pacific.  He  adduces  many  facts  in  supjwrt  of  this  supposition,  sullicient 
to  an'?.st  the  attention  of  the  reflecting  reader.  Among  other  things  he  mentions  the 
great  grammatical  similarity  of  all  American  idioms,  and  those  spoken  by  the  Islanders 
of  the  South  Pacific  Ocean.  It  is  with  regard  to  tlii.s  point  that  I  believe  an  additional 
fivct  may  be  mentioned. 

In  a  letter  to  the  Honorable  Albert  Gallatin  on  the  Study  of  the  Ancient  Languages, 
printed  alx)ut  six  years  ago'  in  the  Southern  Literary  Messenger,  then  published  by 
Mr.  White  in  Richmond,  Virginia,  I  said  that  the  American  languages  distinguished 


1843. 


hvi„. 


LANUUAUE. 


ai'J 


tlii'iiisL'lves,  iimon<^  other  thinj^s,  by  ii  slr«)ii}i  itrovalt'iici'  of  fm/itji/ini'ilw  wofdi^,  as  I 
took  tlie  lilxTty  of  calling  thciii.  I  know  that  h(ilo[)hra.xtic  is  a  n-hitivo  term,  yet 
when  we  apply  it  to  «uch  words  which  express  an  assenihlage  of  ideas,  or  a  connexion 
of  two  ideas,  which  must  appear  even  to  the  least  analytic  or  generalizing  mind  as 
different  ideas,  or  which  in  very  many  cases  express  by  one  word,  ideas,  which 
nevertheless  the  same  language  in  other  cases  expresses  hy  dillerent  words,  the  term 
holophrastic  will  be  of  sufficient  distinctness  to  divide  languages  into  holophrastie  and 
aiudytical  ones.  If  you  should  think  it  worth  your  while  to  read  the  letter  to  Mr. 
Gallatin,  you  will  find  the  reason  why  I  i)refened  to  call  those  Avords  holophrastic, 
and  have  not  followed  Mr.  Williiim  de  IlumUddt,  who  called  a  part  of  them  at  least 
agglutinated  words. 

Now,  we  do  not  only  find  the  holophrastic  character  prevailing  in  our  Indian 
languages,  as  may  be  seen  from  a  very  neat  article  written  by  my  friend  Mr.  John 
Pickering  of  IJoston,  for  the  sixth  volume  of  my  Americana,  but  also  in  the  languages 
of  the  Islands  of  the  Indian  Archipelago.  In  llolden's  Narnitive,  Boston,  183G,  page 
135,  et  seq.,  we  find  for  instance  that,  in  the  language  of  Lord  North's  Island,  the 
numeral  one  is  i/uJit ;  if,  however,  they  count  cocoanuts,  mn'  is  srxj;  and  if  they  count 
fish,  one  is  expres.sed  by  the  word  nccmnl. 

Going  farther  back,  to  Asia,  we  find  in  Father  Sangermano's  Description  of  tlic 
Burmese  Empire,  translated  by  William  Tandy,  I).  D.,  and  published  by  the  London 
Oriental  Translation  Fund,  Rome,  IS:').'),  on  page  139,  instances  of  the  holophrastic 
character  of  the  Burmese  language,  almost  identical  with  those  which  Mr.  Pickering 
gives  on  page  08!),  of  vol.  vi.  of  the  Americana,  of  the  Cherokee  and  many  other 
American  idioms.  >Sangermano  says :  "  So  that  for  to  wash  the  hands  they  use  one 
word;  but  to  wash  the  face  recpiires  another;  the  word  for  to  wash  linen  with  soap 
is  diflerent  from  the  one  signifying  to  wash  it  simply  with  water;  and  to  wa.sh  the 
body,  the  dishe.s,  &c.,  are  all  difierent  phrases,  each  exi)ressing  the  action  to  wash  by  a 
difierent  verb." 

I  am  well  aware  that  the  Sanscrit,  and  possil)ly  *///  very  ancient  languages,  express 
a  great  variety  of  modifications  of  the  original  idea  —  all  of  which  »''e  express  by 
several  words  —  h\  one  word  only,  as  indeed  the  Greek  and  Latin  \erbs  alone  furnish 
numerous  exami)les ;  l)ut  it  is  to  be  oliserved  that  these  words,  which  express  what 
appears  to  our  analytic  minds  a  whole  duster  of  ideas,  are  either  compounds  or 
agglutinations,  or  modifications  of  the  original  idea  expressed  by  grammatical  modifi- 
cations of  the  original  word,  and  m<n'eover  relate  to  meanings  modified  by  the 
additional  ideas  of  number,  degree,  time,  action,  condition,  intensity,  rei)etition,  desire, 
imprecation,  relation,  &c. ;  (in  general  they  relate  to  what  is  called  in  philosophy  the 
categos,)  but  not  to  the  connexion  of  two  or  more  ideas  of  distinct  ohjertx. 

It  has  appeared  to  me  that  this  connnon  feature  of  all  these  languages,  which 
nevertheless  is  so  peculiar,  may  deserve  attention  and  invite  farther  research. 


IHRI- 

r 

I^H  rl ' 

1 

Urn 

1. 

J: 

HI 

*i 

i^H^I ' 

It 

MlM 

h.4 


III.    AN   ESSAY  ON  THE  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 
OF    THE  ALGONQUIN    LANGUAGE. 


BY  HENRY  R.   SCHOOLCRAFT. 


(361) 


SYNOPSIS. 


§  1.  Introductory  Remarks :  Progress  of  Inquiry  respecting  the  Study  of  the  American 
Languages:     Scheme  of  Annotation. 

§  2.     Observations  on  the  Substantive  —  its  Char^'os  and  Inflections. 

§  3.     Further  remarks  on  the  character  and  flexibility  of  the  Substantive. 

§  4.  Nature  ond  Principles  of  the  Adjective  —  its  pseudo-substantive  character  and  varied 
forms. 

§  5.     Principles  of  the  Pronoun  —  its  coalescont  character  and  different  forms. 

§  6.  The  Verb  —  its  fixed  classes  of  conjugation,  adaptivenes.s,  and  tendency  to  absorb,  in 
its  principles  of  forming  compounds,  all  the  other  parts  of  speech. 

§  7.  Further  considerations  on  the  extreme  flexibility  of  the  Verb,  and  its  capacities  for 
expressing  the  various  wants  and  phenomena  of  tho  barbarous  state. 

§  8.  Non-existence  of  auxiliary  Verbs.  Considerations  on  the  existence  of  a  substantive- 
verb  in  the  Algonquin.  Distinctions  which  characterize  the  Language.  Duplicate 
radices  to  express  the  classes  of  matter  and  being. 


(862) 


i 


AN    ESSAY 


GRAMMATICAL    STRUCTUllE 


ALGONQUIN    LANGUAGE. 


§  1.  Introductory  Remarks:  Progress  op  Inquiry  respecting 
THE  Study  op  the  American  Languages:  Articilate 
Sounds,  and  Scheme  op  Annotation  employed  in  the 
PRESENT    Paper. 

It  is  within  lato  years  only,  that  the  diHcuswion  of  the  American  languages  has 
excited  the  lixed  attention  of  Americans.  The  causes  of  this  neglect  it  would  be 
foreign  to  my  purpose  to  detail ;  but  it  is  believed  they  may  Ixj  sufliciently  found  in 
the  political  necessities  which  have  incessantly  absorbed  the  public  attention  from  the 
first  planting  of  the  colonies,  to  the  close  of  the  American  Revolution,  and  up  to  the 
commencement  of  the  19th  century.  The  great  work  of  reclaiming  a  wilderness ;  of 
protecting  feeble  and  extended  settlements  from  the  effects  of  Indian  wars ;  and  the 
great  practical  duties  of  providing  and  establishing  a  government  on  solid  foundations, 
were  calculated  to  give  a  strictly  utilitarian  character  to  the  intellectual  exertions  of 
those  early  times,  which  left  but  little  room  for  the  investigation  of  abstract  branches 
of  science,  or  the  cultivation  of  belle  lettres.  Other  reasons  may  have  existed ;  but 
these  causes  may  be  said  to  have  abated  in  their  force,  with  the  first  quarter  of  the 
present  century ;  and  he  must  have  been  an  indifferent  observer  of  the  progress  of 
philological  inquiries  withhi  late  years,  on  this  side  of  the  Atlantic,  who  has  not 
Pt.  U.  —  45  (303J 


1 


N 


854 


L  A  N  (J  U  A  0  E . 


h. 


d  ii 


i\ 


pcrccivi'tl  tliiit  till-  (Miriviit  of  iiitclltrtiiali/.iitiim  <>ii  this  topic  i.x  frriMitlv  clianjrrd.  uikI 
is  rapiilly  cliaiiiriiifr. 

lMiilol(>;ry  !■<  not.  ]H'i'liups,  oiio  of  tlu'  oailicst  topic!*  to  ciiira^'c  flic  rcscarclicn.  cillicr 
of  11  lixcd  or  expatriated  people.  Ami  the  inti-ii'st  wliicli  ha?*  lieeii  recently  excited 
nt  lioine  in  a  few  minds,  on  the  aln^ripinal  lanjrnn^'cs  of  this  continent,  innst  1h'  attri- 
liiitcd  to  the  unusual  attractions  which  thoy  present,  as  new  prohleins  of  the  uKwle  of 
thdii.uht.  Those  individuals  wlio  have  directed  their  iuijuiries  most  successfully  to 
tiu'  suliject,  have  manifestly  laliored  under  great  disadvautafri's,  from  the  paucity  and 
incompleteness  of  their  materials;  the  vague  and  unsatisfactory  nature  of  some  of 
them,  and  the  gn'iit  want  of  uniformity  in  the  orthography,  and  conserpiently  generid 
comparative  value  t)f  all.  Under  these  adverse  circumstance."*,  it  is  less  a  nuitter  of 
Hurprise,  that,  without  such  ade(piafe  data,  .so  little  has  In-en  done  towards  the 
det«-rniination  and  classification  of  tiie  Indian  languages,  as  that,  with  so  slender  an 
ncrunudation  of  facts,  any  valuahle  results  at  all  should  have  lieen  ohtained. 

It  is  rather,  theivfore,  to  supply,  as  far  as  nmy  bo,  some  of  the  deficiencies  referred 
to,  Iiy  contributing  to  the  stiH'k  of  nuiti'rials  for  generalization,  than  to  apply  tho 
results  to  the  general  pinposes  of  philology,  (for  which  great  experience  and  conside- 
ration are  required,)  that  these  renuirks  are  commenced.  And  it  is  felt,  that  even  in 
this  tasiv,  some  apology  may  1k'  deemed  necessary  for  entering  on  a  topic,  which,  it 
may  he  thought,  others  are  more  eminently  fiualidi'd  to  discuss.  It  is  no  want  of 
respect  for  the  talents  of  men  removed  I'rom  the  sphere  of  personal  observation  ii]ioii 
Indian  manners  and  languages;  nor  is  it  the  want  of  having  duly  estimated  the  lalK)r, 
the  caution,  learning,  and  peculiar  dilllculties  which  a  successful  investigation  of  tho 
pubject  presupposes,  that  induces  the  writer  to  lay  the  pre.^^ent  papers  before  the  jjublic. 

He  may  plead,  in  his  behalf,  tho  force  of  circumstances,  which,  during  a  period  of 
npwards  of  thirty  3ears,  have  placed  him  in  the  extreme  solitude  of  the  forest,  in 
contact  with  the  alK)rigines,  under  auspices  extremely  favorable  to  the  ac»iuisition 
of  their  languages,  and  to  the  collection  and  examination  of  facts  and  nuiterials 
elucidating  their  history  and  condition,  j)ast  and  present.  The  nundier  of  journeys 
which  ho  has  performed  through  the  portions  of  country,  embracing  in  longitude  the 
whole  extent  of  the  Mississippi  Valley,  and  the  continental  region  to  the  Kocky 
Mountains  and  the  Ita,sca  summit;  the  public  treaties  he  ha.s  attended  and  made, 
under  the  auspices  of  the  United  States  government,  with  tho  Indian  tribes,  and  the 
situation  he  has  fdled  as  the  ollicial  organ  of  communication  between  the  government 
and  tho  Indians  on  the  northwestern  frontiers,  have  opened  sources  of  information  of 
which  the  assertion  may  1)0  ventured,  it  is  iK'lieved,  witlumt  presumption,  that  he  haa 
neither  wanted  opportnnies,  disfjosition,  nor  assiduity  to  avail  himself. 

Tho  incpiiries  which  have  been  addressed  to  him,  while  on  the  fnmticrs,  by 
distinguished  and  learned  individuals,  who  have  made  tho  Indian  languages  a  stud}-, 
or  by  persons  of  enlarged  views  in  the  service  of  the  United  States  government,  and 


L  A  N  U  I*  A  (J  E . 


.\r,:t 


% 


tlit>  iiiciiioii's  ami  <N-(ar<i((iiiil  |iii|ici'h  wliicli  lie  liitx  ilniwn  ii|i  to  .^ati^fN  iImm' iiii|iiiiifs, 
lia\«'  soiiirtiiiios  .Hcrvt'il  to  inf<|iin'  IVi'sli  anior.  or  to  ilirt'ct  it  to  new  olijiTt.i.  I'mlrr 
•  •vi'rv  ur*|H'(  t  lilt'  Kiilijcct  liUM  Im'*'1i  iiilcri'sliii^'.  It  lias  at  vaiions  iktmhU.  wliilc  it 
\in>i  r<tiinitlat('(l  Icai'iiiii^',  tuniisliol  tlit>  liopo  ot'  tli.xcovcrv.  the  cliariii  ol°  novcllv,  ami 
tlio  aiiiii>(  fiii'iit  of  solitmlc. 

'I'lint-I  has  eiiiil/lril  jjiiii  to  text  liis  remarks  at  various  jNiints,  to  coiiiiiari'  one  iilimii 
witli  uiiotlii-r,  anil  to  jH-rct^iv*'  aiialo«,'it's  in  the  ftviiiolojrv  niul  syntax  of  a  very 
coiisiiK-ralilc  nnnilicr  of  diak-cts  and  lanfrnajrt's,  wliicli  imlucc  a  Itrlicl"  tiiat  the  parent 
lanfrna;:('s  in  the  I  iiited  States  are  lew  and  4iiite  analojrous  in  tiieir  ^reiieral  principles. 

lit  the  several  narratives  and  aeeoinits  of  travels  which  he  has  pnlilished,  he  has 
refrniiit'd,  in  ti  frreat  dofjire,  Iroiu  the  «liseimsion  of  tin-  snliject.  While  jreoirraphy, 
^reolo^'v,  and  natnral  liistory  were  en^rossiii^  to|iics.  it  did  not  appear  that  the  Indian 
huifrna.uces  could  he  advantajreonsly  tri'ated;  and.  in  castinj-  a  retrospect  over  the  li>l 
of  travellers  who  had  visited  the  frontiers,  it  was  evident  that  they  had  nut  furnished 
the  highest  models  lor  imitation.  Jk'sidcs,  the  topic  had  none  of  the  elements  of 
general  jiopnlarity,  and,  thoui.'h  deeply  interesting-  to  a  few  mimls.  it  will  he  no 
injustice  to  American  leaders,  to  say,  that   this  interest   was  liniiti'd. 

1  have  deemed  this  much  necessary  to  satisly  [lulilic  curiosity,  and  to  justifv ,  perlia|)s, 
graiuiiuitical  positions,  whii'h,  if  they  are  sometimes  stated  with  much  conlidenee.  art- 
tilt'  tVHiilt  of  full  eoiivictioii.s,  mature  iiKjuiiy,  and  ample  up|H)rtunities. 

Not  to  rejrard  what  has  heen  done  on  this  sulijecl  in  past  times,  would  U-  to  limit 
very  much  the  view  of  what  remains  to  he  done  at  pri'sent.  The  first  translations 
which  weiv  made  into  the  Intlian  tongues,  on  this  continent,  were  undertaki'ii  as  helps 
to  the  introduction  of  Christianity  among  the  trihes.  This  was  commenced  at  very 
early  periods.  The  most  considerahle  and  known  en()rt  of  this  kind  at  an  early  day, 
in  North  America,  was  made  in  Massachusetts. 

Ill  UiS."),  the  Rev.  .loliii  Kliot,  (who  is  styled,  from  his  venerable  age  niid  eminent 
st'i'vices.  The  Indian  AiKistlo,  hy  his  coiitennKH'aries,)  puhlished  at  Cainhridge  a  revised 
and  complete  translation  of  the  entire  IJihle,  in  the  [irincipal  Indian  tongue.  This  is 
believed  to  have  heen  the  greatest  literary  lalwr  in  the  de[iartiiieiit  of  the  translation 
into  the  aboriginal  languages,  which  has  ever  been  accomplished  on  this  continent. 
It  gave  a  great  impetus  to  the  .subject;  and  Cotton  iMather,  in  his  letter  to  Dr. 
Lcusden,  Hebrew  Professor  in  the  University  of  Utrecht,  of  July  12,  1087,  sjwaks  of 
it  in  the  highest  terms.  Prior  to  this  time,  namely,  in  lOlil,  Kliot  had  pnblished  a 
translation  of  the  New  Testament,  and  in  10G;>  the  Old  Testament  in  this  language. 
He  also  published  a  grammar. 

We  arc  informed  by  Mr.  Du  Ponceau,'  that  about  the  year  17GG,  more  than  a 
century  after  Eliot's  translation,  two  eminent  pliilosoiihers  of  France,  M.  Maupertiiis 
and  M.  Turgot,  each  published  a  treatise  on  the  origin  of  languages. 

'  Truiislalions  of  tlie  Hist,  and  Literary  Cuininittcc  of  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  p.  370. 


356 


LANGUAGE. 


f 


Mauiwrtiiis,  iii  his  essay,  t(X)k  great  pains  to  sliow  tliu  importance  of  studying  tliu 
languages  of  even  the  niosL  distant  and  barbarous  nations,  "because,"  is  his  expression, 
"  we  may  chance  to  find  some  tliat  are  formed  on  new  j'lnns  of  ideas."  Turgot,  who 
had  acquired  considerable  distinction  as  a  statesnian,  instead  of  approving  this,  tried 
to  turn  it  into  lidicule,  by  the  remark  that  he  could  not  understand  what  was  meant 
by  "  plans  of  ideas."  A  new  idea  was  at  least  thrown  out  to  the  philological  world 
by  Maupertius,  which  has  been  the  cause  of  thought  to  grammarians  ever  since. 

Germany,  however,  but  not  France,  pursued  this  investigation.  In  an  inquiry 
whether  America  was  peopled  from  the  old  continent,'  Professor  Vater  of  Leipsic,  who 
had  received  some  examples  of  the  Lenno  Lenapee  from  Moravian  Brethren,  in  Penn- 
sylvania, was  struck  with  the  richness  of  their  grannnatical  forms,  and  on  comparing 
them  with  Eliot's  Bible  of  1G85,  perceived  the  same  philological  phenomena. 

Professor  Rudiger  has  published  vocabularies  of  the  languages  of  the  world,  as  far 
as  known,  and  among  tliem  gives  some  of  our  Indian  dialects.  It  appears  from  these 
that  the  Swedes,  while  they  occupied  Delaware,  compiled  a  catechism  in  the  Lenno 
Lenapee,  which  was  published  at  Stockholm  in  1000.  These  ap^iear  to  be  the 
earliest  traces  of  inquiry  into  the  principles  of  American  philology. 

In  1703,  the  Empress  Catherine  of  Ru.ssia  directed  the  collection  of  vocabularies  in 
all  the  barbarous  dialects  of  that  P]mpire ;  a  literary  lalx)r  in  which  it  is  said  she  per- 
sonally engaged  with  great  zeal,  and  was  also  assisted  by  various  learned  men.  The 
results  ofthe.se  investigations  were  published  at  Paris  in  1715,  and  doubtless  helped  to 
fi.K  the  attention  of  philosophers  on  the  then  but  little  (niderstiKid  phenomena  of  language. 

Mr.  Jefferson,  in  his  Notes  on  Virginia,  viewed  the  existence  of  the  Indians  here  as 
an  anomaly  in  history.  This  work  was  written,  I  believe,  in  1778.  His  mind  was 
turned  to  the  subject  of  the  Indian  languages  as  the  readiest  solution  of  Indian  history, 
and  he  gathered  a  collection  of  vocabularies,  which  it  is  said  lie  designed  to  digest 
and  publish.  For  this  purpose,  Mr.  Gallatin  infonned  me,  he  took  his  materials  along 
with  him  to  Virginia,  after  his  election  to  the  Presidency,  in  1801,  that  he  might 
employ  the  leisure  of  his  summer  retreat  in  examining  them ;  but,  in  crossing  the 
Rappahannock,  he  had  left  the  conduct  of  his  baggage  to  negro  servants,  through 
whose  carelessness  the  house  in  which  they  were  t(X)k  fire,  and  all  his  manuscripts 
were  consumed.  He  had  not  the  heart  to  commence  his  work  anew,  and,  with  the 
exception  of  the  speech  of  Logan,  which  had  been  published  with  his  Notes  on  Virginia, 
and  his  just  opinions  of  the  importance  of  the  languages,  this  is  all  that  remains 
of  his  well-directed  inquiries.  In  his  Notes,  L(mdon  edition,  1787,  he  observes:  "A 
knowledge  of  their  several  languages  would  be  the  most  certain  evidence  of  their 
derivation  that  could  be  produced.  In  fact,  it  is  the  best  proof  of  the  aflinity  of 
nations  which  ever  can  be  referred  to.  How  many  ages  have  elapsed  since  the 
English,  the  Dutch,  the  Germans,  the  Swis ,,  the  Norwegians,  the  Danes,  and  Swedes, 

'  Mithridi\tc8. 


■  I'    ^i 


LAN(.i  L  AliE. 


have  wiHUatod  from  tlicir  coimnon  stock !  Yet,  how  lUiiiiy  nioie  iiui.st  elapse  before 
the  proofs  of  their  common  origin,  which  exist  in  their  several  hinguajres,  will 
disappear!  It  is  to  bo  lamented  then,  very  much  to  be  hunented,  that  we  have 
siiflered  so  many  of  the  Indian  tribes  already  to  disappear,  without  our  having 
previously  collected,  and  deposited  in  the  records  of  literature,  the  general  rudiments, 
lit  least,  of  the  languages  they  spoke.  Were  vocabularies  formed  of  all  the  languages 
spoken  in  North  and  South  America,  preserving  their  appellations  for  the  most 
connnon  objects  in  nature  —  of  those  which  nuist  be  present  to  every  nation,  barbarous 
or  civilized,  with  the  inflections  of  their  nouns  and  ver1)s,  their  principles  of  regimen 
and  concord,  and  these  deposited  in  all  the  public  libraries,  it  would  furnish 
opportunities,  to  those  skilled  in  the  languages  of  the  old  world,  to  compare  them  with 
these,  now  or  at  any  future  time,  and  hence  'o  construct  the  best  evidence  of  the 
derivation  of  this  part  of  the  human  race." 

Volney,  in  his  View  of  the  United  States,  reflecting  the  opinions  of  Maupertius  and 
other  philosophers  of  Europe,  expres.sed  his  sense  of  the  iin[)()rtance  of  collecting 
vocabularies,  and  grammars  of  the  Indian  tongues ;  and  declared  tlie  work  to  be  m\c 
that  should  engage  the  notice  of  government. 

The  importance  of  studying  the  languages,  as  a  guide  to  history,  appears  to  have 
been  realized  by  Dr.  Benjamin  Smith  Barton,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, whose  work  on  the  languages  called  the  attention  of  American  philologists 
distinctly,  but  vainly,  it  is  Ixdieved,  to  the  subject. 

This  was  followed  by  Dr.  Elias  Boudinot's  "•  Star  in  the  West,"  which  revived  the 
ancient  idea  of  Clrotius,  of  the  Indians  being  the  "  Lost  Tkihks,"  or  descendants  of 
Israel.  PVeling  as  a  Christian  philosopher  on  this  head,  he  appears  to  have  pursued 
the  inquiry,  rather  as  an  historical  and  practical,  than  a  purely  scientific  question. 

In  1810,  the  American  Philosophical  Society  turned  its  attention  to  the  American 
languages,  and  directed  tiie  late  Peter  S.  Duponceau  to  open  a  ct)rrespondence  with 
the  Kev.  John  lleckewelder  on  the  sulyect.  This  forms  an  era  in  the  home-inquiries 
on  American  philolog}-.  The  results,  in  which  we  are  greatly  indebted  to  Mr. 
Duponceau's  learning,  were  laid  before  the  Historical  Connnittee  of  that  society,  and 
were  published  at  Philadelphia,  in  a  separate  volume  of  their  Transactions,  in  1819. 

Amongst  the  materials  received  by  the  American  Philosophical  Society,  was  a 
grannniir  of  the  Lenno  Lenape,  or  Delaware  language,  l)y  Mr.  Zeisberger.  This, 
together  with  the  correspondence,  opened  up  a  new  field  of  inquiry.  The  vnl)  was 
found  to  be  particularly  rich  and  varied  in  its  inflections  and  forms.  The  "transitions," 
as  they  have  since  been  called,  offered  a  new  feature  to  the  mind.  "  I  am  inclined  to 
))elievc,"  says  Mr.  Duponceau,  "  that  these  forms  are  peculiar  to  this  part  of  the  world, 
and  that  they  do  not  exist  in  the  languages  of  the  old  hemisphere."  Trans,  p.  370. 
He  was  led  to  admire  the  rich  and  varied  forms  of  the  Delaware  language.  "  If,"  said 
he,  '•  this  language  was  cultivated  and  {lolished,  as  those  of  Europe  have  been,  and  if 


'1  : 

'  1     i 

Bit' ' 

i 

h 

:•! 

h'\ ' 

ffj    ■ 

irR'i 

;> ; 

358 


LANGUAGE. 


■^1 


the  Delaware's  had  a  Homer  and  Virgil  among  them,  it  in  iinposs^iljle  to  say,  with  such  an 
instrument  among  them,  how  far  the  langu.age  could  be  carried.  The  Greek  has  Ix^en 
admired  for  its  comiwundi?,  but  what  are  they  to  tlio.se  of  the  Indians!"  p.  415.  The 
conception  of  Maupertius  of  '"  new  plans  of  ideas,"  .seemed  to  be  realized  in  the  Lenno 
Leuape.  In  considering  this  subject,  he  finally  denominated  the  American  languages 
jyolysynthdw,  (many-syntheses,)  a  term  which  they  have  since  borne  among  philologists. 

It  appears  from  the  transactions  of  the  American  Anticpuirian  Society,  that  the 
Honorable  Albert  Gallatin  furnished  vocabularies  of  the  Indian  languages  to  IJaron 
Alexander  Humboldt  in  lS2o.  These  were  subsecjuently  enlarged,  and  formed  the 
basis,  as  he  has  indicated,  of  his  Sy.voi'Sis  of  the  tribes,  published  by  that  .society  in 
18;JG.     (Vide  Archa>ologia  Americana,  Vol.  II.,  p.  1.) 

The  writer's  attention  was  first  called  to  the  sultject  in  1822,  when  he  went  to  reside 
in  the  capacity  of  Agent  of  Indian  Aflairs — a  semi-diplomatic  office,  at  Sault  Ste. 
Max-ie,  at  the  foot  of  the  basin  of  Lake  Superior.  The  advantages  of  this  jwsition, 
and  his  opportunities  generally  for  investigating  the  languages,  have  been  stated  in 
the  preceding  pages.  The  observations  in  the  following  paper  on  the  substantive, 
were  published  in  IS.U.  (Vide  A[)pendix  to  Expedition  to  Ita.sca  Lake.)  They  were 
suhserpiently  translated  into  French  by  Mr.  Duponceau,  and  submitted  to  the  National 
Institute  of  France.  In  1844,  the  remarks  on  the  Pronoun  were  published  in  the 
Miscellaii}'  entited  Oneota.     The  entire  Essay  is  now  subnutted. 

All  the  examples  of  Indian  lexicography  are  taken  from  the  Ojibwa,  the  mother 
language  of  the  Algonrpiins,  the  principles  of  which  have  been  so  long  and  so  justly 
the  theme  of  French  eulogy.  The  word  Ojibwa,  and  its  anglicized  form,  Chippewa, 
appears  to  have  been  developed  since  the  term  Algonquin,  in  its  generic  sense,  was 
applied  to  the  people  living  at  Lake  Nepissing,  (who  are  hence  often  called  Niper- 
cinians,)  on  the  ancient  portage,  from  the  Outawais,  or  Grand  river,  leading  to  the 
waters  fiowing  into  Lake  Huron,  near  LiirCloche.  From  this  sunnnit  they  were  traced 
by  early  writers  into  the  valley  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  where,  in  contradistinction  to 
the  Irocpiois,  who  lived  on  the  southern  shores,  they  were  called  Algoncjuens  or 
Algonquins,  a  term  of  doubtful  etymolog}',  but  which  seems  to  mean  Ihiple  of  the 
other  or  ojijtosite  shore.     (Ethnological  Researches,  Part  I.,  p.  'itOO.) 

Those  bands  which  were  found  living  at  the  Sault-de-Ste-Marie,  on  the  outlet  of 
Lake  Superior,  were  called  Smilteaiir,  or  people  of  the  Sault.  Others  who  were 
encountered  at  the  Mississagie  River,  on  the  north  shore  of  Lake  Huron,  were  called 
Mississagies,  or  people  of  the  wide-mouthed  stream.  There  was,  however,  no  appre- 
ciable or  stated  diflerence  of  dialect  or  language  noticed,  such  as  nmrks  the  Ottawa, 
Pottawattomie,  Kenisteno,  Menomonie,  and  the  dialects  of  various  other  tribes,  who 
yet  all  employ,  with  slight  dilTerence.s,  the  Algonquin  vocabulary  and  syntax. 

Taking  it  then  as  the  original  mother  language,  and  regarding  the  deviations  from 
it  as  dialectic,  it  becomes  important  to  inouire  what  are  its  primary  .sounds.     For  this 


LAK 


AGE. 


359 


purpose  I  have  constructed  a  table  of  tli    syllables  employed  by  them  in  the  formation 
of  words,  which,  although  probably  incomplete,  will  facilitate  the  inquiry. 

ELEMENTARY  SYLLABLES  FOUNDED  ON  THE  PRIMARY  VOWEL  SOUNDS. 


AI  as  A  in  Fate  (1). 

A  as  in  Father  (2). 

A  as  in  Fall  (3). 

A  as  in  Hat  (4). 

Only  ultered  with  a  Coriioujiiit  following. 

Aib     Bai 

Alib     Bah 

Aub     Bau 

Ab 

Aid     Dai 

Ahd     Dah 

Aud    Dau 

Ad 

Aig     Gai 

Ahg    Gah 

Aug    Gau 

Ag 

Aih     Ilai 

Ah        Ilah 

Auh     Hau 

Ah 

Aik     Kai 

Ahj      Jah 

Auj     Jau 

Aj 

Ail     Lai 

Ahk     Kah 

Auk     Kau 

Ak 

Ai.j     Jai 

Ahl     Lah 

Aul     Lau 

Al 

Aim    Jlai 

Ahra    Mah 

Aura    Mau 

Am 

Ain     Nai 

Ahn     Nah 

Ann     Nau 

An 

Aip     I'ai 

Ahp     Pah 

Aup     Pau 

Ap 

Ais     Sai 

Ahs     Sah 

Aus     Pau 

As 

Ait     Tai 

Aht     Tah 

Aut     Tau 

At 

Aiw    Wai 

Ahw    AVah 

Auw    Wau 

Au 

Aiz     Yai 

Ahz     Zah 

Auz     Yau 

Az 

Aizh  Zhni 

Auzh   Zhau 

EE  as  in  Mc  (1). 

E  as  in  Met  (2). 

I  as  in  Fine  (1). 
Bi 

I  as  iu  Pin  (2). 

Ecb     Bee 

Eb 

Di 

Tb 

Ecd     Dee 

Ed 

Oi 

Id 

Eeg    Gee 

Eg 

Hi 

h 

Ecli     He 

Eh 

Ji 

ih 

Eej     Jee 

Ej 

Ei 

li 

Eel      Leo 

Ek 

Li 

Ik 

Eek     Kee 

El 

Hi 

11 

Eeni    Mce 

Em 

Nl 

Im 

Ecn     Nee 

En 

Pi 

In 

Ecp     I'ee 

Ep 

8i 

Ip 

Ecs     See 

Eg 

Ti 

l8 

Eot     Tee 

Et 

wi 

It 

Eew     Wee 

Ew 

Yi 

Iw 

Ecz     Zoo 

Ez 

Zi 

Iz 

0  as  in  Note  (1). 

0  as  in  Move  (2). 

0  as  in  Not  (4). 

Bo 

Cob     Boo 

Ob 

U  as  in  But. 

Do 

Ood     Doo 

Od 

Ub 

Go 

Oog    Goo 

Og 

Ud 

Ho 

Ooh    IIoo 

Oh 

Ug 

Jo 

Ooj     Joo 

Oj 

Uh 

Kg 

Ook     Koo 

Ok 

Uj 

Lo 

Ool     Loo 

01 

Uk 

Mo 

Oom   Moo 

Cm 

Ul 

No 

Oon    Noo 

On 

Urn 

Po 

Oop    Poo 

Op 

Ua 

So 

Oos     Soo 

08 

Up 

To 

Oot     Too 

Ok 

Us 

Wo 

Oow    Woo 

Ow 

Ut 

Yo 

Ooy     Yoo 

Oy 

Uz 

Zo 

Ooz     Zoo 

Oz 

Each  of  the  17  primary  syllables  may  be  changed  fifteen  times,  showing  the  possible  number  of  ulcmcntary 
syllables  which  arc  cmplnyed  to  be  255  —  a  fact,  significant  of  the  capacity  of  the  language. 


860 


LANGUAGE, 


MS! 

1  1 

f^ 

Efli 

lifl 

J 

ihK 

.1 
i 

HjM 

t 

IUb^^kI 

i 

HI] 

1 
1 

Wh 

\ 

^hH 

^i 

nil 

m  * 

'4 

Mil 

1  1 

f 


The  language,  it  will  be  perceived,  possesses  all  the  vowel  sounds,  as  heard  in  far, 
fate,  fall ;  met,  meet ;  shine,  pin ;  not,  note,  move ;  put,  nut.  It  has  two  labials, 
b  and  p;  five  dentals,  d,  t,  s,  z,  and  j,  or  g,  soft;  two  nasals,  m  and  n;  and  two 
primary  gutturals,  k  and  g,  hard.  The  letters  f,  r,  v,  are  wanting.  The  sound  of  x 
is  also  believed  to  be  wanting  in  all  the  Algonquin  dialects  but  the  Delaware  and 
the  old  Mohegan  of  the  Hudson  valley,  in  which  it  is  fully  heard,  as  in  Coxackie. 
The  letter  1  is  heard  in  t!ie  Delaware,  Sac  and  Fox,  and  Shawnee  dialects,  where  it 
is  the  transmutative  of  n.  The  sound  of  r,  which  is  observed  frequently  in  the 
ancient  annotation  of  geographical  terms  in  the  Powhatanic  and  Abinakie  dialects, 
and  a  few  of  the  earlier  Algonquin  vocabidaries  of  New  France  and  New  Jersey,  is 
merely  dropped  in  the  attempts  to  pronounce  foreign  words;  or  is  Ix^lieved,  in  most 
eases,  as  employed  by  authors  in  the  ancient  geographical  terminolog}',  to  represent  the 
.sound  of  ah.  To  the  Normans  who  came  to  ('anada,  and  to  the  English  cavaliers  of 
Virginia,  the  sound  appears  also  to  have  often  taken  the  form  of  ar.  The  transmuta- 
tive consonants  are  p  lor  f,  n  for  b,  and  b  for  v.  The  letter  x  is  uttered  as  if  written 
egs.  The  most  common  change  in  the  consonantal  sounds^,  is  that  which  exi.sts 
reciprocally  tx'tween  p  and  b.     Part  of  this,  however,  is  the  rcsult  of  tense. 

These  changes  occur  with  regularity  in  the  conjugations  of  the  verbs.  Words 
commencing  with  b  in  the  first  and  second  persons,  are  rendered  p  in  the  third.  Thus 
nim  bemaudiz,  I  live ;  ke  benuiudiz,  thou  livest,  are  changed  to  pinuiudi/zi,  he  lives. 
When  a  word  commencing  with  a  vowel  has  the  pronoun  prefi.xed,  it  takes  a  consonant 
before  it;  thus  oxtn'ii,  a  stone,  is  rendered  in  the  possessive,  nin  dosseem,  my  stone; 
(ih,  a  shell,  ke  daisim,  thy  shell.  The  same  rule  obtair.s,  if  an  adjective  is  prefixed. 
Thus  addik,  a  rein-deer,  is  changed  by  tlie  prefix  of  male,  to  iaid)a  waddik,  a  male 
reindeer. 

When  vowels  succeed  each  other,  without  tlie  intervention  of  a  consonant,  their 
sounds  are  broad,  as  in  penjiee,  (within,)  i-au,  (to  be.)  To  this  observation  the 
vowel  i  permits  another  to  Ix^  added,  that  when  followed  by  a  consonant,  it  has 
uniformly  the  short  sound  of  i,  in  pin.  The  sound  of  th,  as  heard  in  this,  that,  (the 
th  or  p.  of  the  Scandinavians,)  appears  to  be  confined  nearly  to  a  certain  dialect  of  the 
Algonquin,  namely,  the  Shawnee  —  a  trilje  whose  history  connects  them  directl}-, 
agreeably  to  their  own  traditions,  and  concurrent  fact.s,  with  the  extreme  .southern 
bounds  of  the  United  States.  Tliere  is  also  an  unmistakeable  trace  of  it  in  the 
ancient  New  York  t^pe  of  the  Mohegan  —  a  tril)e  between  whom  and  the  Shawnees, 
there  is,  agreeably  to  the  traditions  of  Metoxon,  a  close  ancient  affinity.  The 
nasal  sounds  are  frequent.  That  of  n  is  heard  in  moKz  (moose),  and  in  the  diminutive 
termination  (ifis.  By  the  use  of  this  diminutive,  annemoosh,  a  dog;  muk  woh,  a 
Ijcar,  Ijecome  annemoijs,  a  little  dog;  muk-iiys,  a  cub.  Ng,  as  in  Vuujer,  is  found 
in  annung,  (a  star.)  The  nasal  sound  of  m  appears  in  m'eew  (enough,)  and  its  full 
sound  as  in  minnls,  (an  Island,)   minnekwii.   (lie  drinks.)     The  letter  }•  Is  heard  as 


.:i-0»'J. 


LANGUAGE. 


361 


a  consonant  in  yo,  'nyaii,  and  tyau;  tlie  two  former  feminine,  and  the  latter  a 
maseuline  exclamation ;  but  is  never  required  as  a  vowel  sound.  Tho.se  dialects 
have  been  denoted,  which  employ  the  letters  b,  r,  and  x ;  and  the  unusual  combina- 
tion of  th ;  but  no  examples  are  proposed  to  be  exhibited  from  either  of  the.«e 
excepted  dialects.  The  distinctive  sounds,  indeed,  fioin  which  the  Aljronquin,  in 
its  entire  breadth  of  dialects  throu{5hout  the  land,  is  to  Ix;  excepted,  are  those  of 
the  letters  f  and  v. 

Thus  an  alphabet  of  five  vowels  and  thirteen  consonants  is  capable  of  expressing, 
either  simply  or  in  combination,  every  full  soiuid  of  the  Ojibwa  or  Algonquin  language; 
and  it  is  from  this  that  the  examples  will  be  exclusively  drawn.  In  this  estimate  of 
primary  sounds,  the  letters  c,  and  q,  and  y,  as  representing  a  vowel  sound,  are  entirely 
rejected.     The  soft  of  c  is  s,  the  hard  sound  k.     Tlie  sound  of  g  is  always  that  of  k. 

With  the  sulyect  thus  simplified,  I  have  been  induced  to  adopt  a  system  of  alpha- 
betical notation  diflerent,  in  some  resi)ects,  from  what  I  should  have  proposed  without 
tiiis  previous  information.  This  system  is,  in  fact,  the  result  of  practice  rather  than 
of  theory,  and  has  been  altered  to  suit  the  expressicm  of  new  or  unusual  combinations 
of  sounds,  as  they  were  presented  to  me  in  the  course  of  my  inquiries.  A  practical 
method,  as  little  removed  as  the  exact  preservation  of  the  sounds  would  permit  from 
common  usage,  appeared  to  claim  preference.  To  this  end,  I  have  introduced  no  new- 
character  of  notation,  and  have  attempted  no  new  combinations  of  existing  ones. 
Without  attending  to  the  foreign  powers  of  the  Roman  letters,  I  found  the  English 
al[)habet  adequate  to  the  representation  of  every  distinct  .sound.  It  was  only  necessary 
to  reject  its  redundancie.«,  and  to  determine  the  precise  powers  of  the  vowels,  and  of 
such  of  its  cousoniuits  as  were  required.  The  cedilla  is  used  to  denote  the  nasal 
sounds ;  and  the  diivresis  to  mark  the  long  sounds  of  the  vowels  in  cases  where  they 
could  not  be  otherwise  indicated  by  the  establishment  of  a  general  rule.  Every  vocal 
lieculiarity  I  have  not  attempted,  however,  to  preserve.  There  are  several  semi-tones, 
both  nasal  and  guttural,  for  which  no  certain  character  exists;  and  it  appeared  to  me 
that  more  would  be  lost  than  gained  by  endeavoring  to  convey  nice  distinctions,  which, 
after  all,  the  most  critical  student  might  find  it  difficult  to  pronounce  :  but  I  indulge 
the  hope,  that  no  characteristic  or  distinctly  audible  sound  has  been  neglected  or 
omitted.  Walker's  key  to  English  pronunciation  being  in  general  use,  it  appeared 
expedient  to  subjoin,  that  one  system  may  be  converted  into  the  other. 

It  is  desirable,  as  the  Indians  are  to  be  taught  to  read  English  books  and  English 
bibles,  and  to  learn  English  history,  philosophy,  poetry,  and  literature,  that  they  employ 
the  English  system  of  orthography,  after  it  is  pruned  of  its  redundancies,  and  the  inex- 
actitude that  would  result  to  Indian  e  i-s  from  the  use  of  its  homophonous  vowels  and 
consonantal  combinations ;  and  that  such  a  scheme  of  orthograpliy  should  be  pursued  in 
their  elemental  teaching  that  they  may  not,  at  a  certain  point  on  their  path  to 
knowledge,  he  necessitated  to  unlearn  the  system  of  their  school-bo}'  days.  For, 
Pt.  it.— 40 


n 


r  :.  • 


LANGUAGE. 

however  it  may  apixsar  to  subserve  the  purjxwes  of  elementary  philology,  by  exhibiting 
new  plana  of  annotation,  the  English  must  be  the  language  of  civilization  to  them,  if 
they  can  ever  learn  one ;  and,  most  assuredly,  the  English  race  will  not  tread  back  its 
steps  in  orthography  to  suit  the  sounds  of  barbarous  dialects,  however  precisely  or 
elegantly  expressed. 

It  is  believed,  also,  that  its  homophones  can  Ije  so  limited,  defined,  and  expressed,  as 
not  only  to  subserve  this  practical  jjurpose,  but  fulfd  the  higher  uses  of  scientific 
philology.  The  foundation  of  English  orthography  is  laid  in  the  letter  A, — the  common 
English  sound  of  A,  as  heard  in  fate.  To  mark  this,  the  diphthongal  sound  of  ai  will 
be  invariably  used.  Its  second  sound,  as  heard  in  father,  is  expressed  by  the  sound  of 
ah ; '  its  third  sound,  as  heard  in  law,  by  au.  The  short  sound  of  a,  as  heard  in  hat, 
(No.  4)  will  be,  by  a  law  of  utterance  in  the  Algonquin,  always  followed  by  a  consonant, 
or  placed  between  two  cinisonants,  as  in  ad-ik,  a  reindeer,  appah-pe-win,  a  r'  air.  This 
attention  to  the  syllabication  will  accurately  and  invariably  disjwse  of  the  foui  admitted 
sounds  of  A. 

The  next  vowel  e,  is  uniforndy  long,  its  heard  in  me,  whether  preceding  or  following 
a  consonant,  or  placed  between  two  consonants.  It  is  written  ee,  when  under  the 
accent.     The  short  sound  of  e  is  marked  with  a  short  accent. 

The  sound  of  i  in  this  language  is  governed  by  the  rule  which  gives  it  the  long 
sound  of  i,  as  heard  in  pine,  when  uttered  by  itself,  or  preceded  by  the  letters  k,  g,  or 
n.  In  all  other  positions  in  the  syllable,  as  when  preceded  by  a  consonant,  or  when 
placed  between  two  consonants,  it  is  short,  and  ha.s  the  und  of  i  in  pin,  as  heard  in 
the  term  An-o-ki-win,  work,  labor. 

The  sound  of  tiie  vowel  o  follows  a  law  of  utterance,  which  makes  it  iniiformly 
broau  and  full,  as  o  in  note,  and  oa  in  moan,  when  standing  as  an  indeixMident 
syllable,  as  in  o-miJ-de,  a  bottle ;  or  when  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  under  the 
accent,  as  in  To-tosh,  a  female  breast ;  Ah-mii,  a  l)ee ;  Kiin,  snow.  The  sound  of  oo 
as  heard  in  pool,  and  of  ue,  as  in  glue,  due,  is  rejiresented  by  oo.  The  short  sound 
of  o,  as  in  not,  is  followed  uniformly  by  a  consonant,  as  Ot-tiirwa. 

The  vowel  u,  as  heard  in  rule,  is  expressed  by  oo,  as  above  stated ;  leaving  this 
latter  to  stand  uniformly  for  its  short  sound,  as  u  in  nut.  No  instance  is  known  of  the 
sound  of  this  word  in  the  language,  as  heard  in  consuetude,  dew,  &c. 

Diphthongal  sounds  are  heard  in  limited  classes  of  words,  ending  in  ia,  io,  and  ou. 
The  most  uncommon  sounds  of  this  character  are  those  formed  of  ia,  in  connexion 
with  the  sound  of  w,  as  heard  in  Shezh-o-daiw,  a  shore ;  and  in  the  change  of  nouns 
indefinite  to  verbs  indicative  in  the  third  jierson,  as  in  the  change  from  Moneda,  a 
spirit,  to  ne-monedouw,  I  am  a  spirit. 

'  This  is  believed  to  be  one  of  the  Himplcst,  ensicst,  and  most  natural  of  artic-''pte  words.  It  is  uttered  the 
first  thiug  by  infants.  The  next  is  the  mixed  sound  of  goo;  and  the  two,  pm  togiifLor,  Ah  !  goo!  form  often, 
if  not  generally,  the  first  attempt  to  talk  to  their  niolhcrs 


'( 


>«2»i:n 


LANGUAGE. 


8G3 


The  nasal  sounds,  which  atound  in  tlic  hmgiinj^c,  are  chiefly  confined  to  the  letter  n, 
and  the  combination  ng.  The  guttnrals  are  mostly  formed  by  the  letters  gh  and  kh. 
The  hard  sound  of  g,  final,  which  is  a  characteristic  of  the  language,  can  be 
appreciated  by  the  English  orthoepist,  by  supposing  it  to  be  followed  by  a  half 
utterance  of  k,  as  in  the  attempt  to  pronounce  gk. 

The  combinations  of  ch,  sh,  and  zh,  are  common,  as  are  also  those  of  bw,  dw,  g^v, 
and  hw.  The  scheme  of  these  simple  and  philosophical  laws  of  utterance  of 
articulate  sounds,  may  bo  exhibited  as  follows : 


Syllabical   Scheme  of  Vowels  and  Dh'TUONGS. 


Wilkir'i  Eer. 


Ai.  To  express  the  sound  of  a,  in  fate 1 

Ah.  To  express  the  sound  of  a,  in  father 2 

Au.  To  express  the  sound  of  a,  in  fall,  of  au,  in  auction,  and  aw,  in  law     S 

A.  To  express  the  sound  of  a,  in  hat 4 

EE.  To  express  the  sound  of  e,  in  me,  and  ee,  in  feel  ....         1 

E.  To  express  the  sound  of  e,  in  met 2 

I.  When  uttered  as  a  syllable,  or  when  preceded  by  the 
express  the  sound  of  i,  in  pine      .... 

I.  In  all  other  positi;)ns  in  the  syllable  to  express  the  mi 
O.  To  express  the  broad  and  full  sound  of  o,  in  note,  oa,  in  moan,  when 
standing  as  an  independent  syllable,  or  when  under  accent  and  preceded 
by  a  consonant       ..........         1 

Oo.  To  express  the  sound  of  oo,  in  jwol,  of  ue,  in  glue,  of  o,  in  move,  and  of  u, 

in  rule 2 

O.  When  followed  by  a  consonant,  to  express  the  sound  of  o,  in  not         .        4 
U.  To  express  tlie  sound  of  u,  in  nut,  and  of  i,  in  bird       ...        2 


letters  k,  g,  or  n,  to 
nd  of  i,  in  pin  . 


Mixed  Sounds. 


la.  The  sound  of  ia,  in  media. 

Oi.  The  sound  of  oi,  in  voice. 
Aiw.  In  converting  verbs  indicative  into  different  moods. 
Ouw.  "  "  "  " 

Eow.  "  "  "  " 

Ih.  The  sound  of  i,  suddenly  stopi^d  off. 
Ooh.  The  sound  of  oo,  suddenly  stopped  off. 
Uh.  The  sound  of  u,  roughly  aspirated. 
Ugh.         "  "  " 

Ch.  As  in  English. 


864 


LANGUAGE. 


;^i^f!  I  -'^ 


Sh. 

As  in  English. 

Zh. 

«         « 

Bw. 

As  in  bwoin. 

Gw. 

As  in  Gwiuk.     Just. 

IIw. 

As  in  Mohwa.     A  wolf. 

Kw 

As  in  Wewukwun.     A  hat 

Mw.  As  in  Ava-niwa. 
Ny.  As  in  nyau. 

Tshw.  As  in  Tshwe  —  tshwees  ke  wa.     A  .^nipc. 
The  letters  C,  F,  Q,  V,  and  Y  as  a  vowel,  are  rejected  for  rea.«ons  expressed. 

§2.  Obsehvation's  ox  the  Substantive:  —  1.  The  Provision  of  the 
Language  for  indicating  the  Grammatical  avant  of  Gender. 
— Its  General  and  Comi'rehensive  Character.  —  The  Divi- 
sion of  Words  into  Animate  and  Inanimate  Classes.  —  2. 
Number — its  recondite  forms,  arising  from  the  terminal 
vowel  in  the  word. — 3.  The  Grammatical  Forms  avhich 
indicate  Possession,  and  enable  the  Speaker  to  distinguish 
the  Objective  Person. 

Most  of  the  researches  which  have  Iwen  directed  to  the  Indian  langiiages,  have 
resulted  in  elucidating  the  principles  governing  the  use  of  the  verb,  which  has  been 
proved  to  be  full  and  varied  in  its  intlections.  p]ithor  less  attention  has  been  paid  to 
the  other  parts  of  speech,  or  results  le.'«s  suited  to  create  high  expectations  of  their 
flexibility  and  powers,  have  been  attained.  The  Indian  verb  has  thus  been  made  to 
stand  out,  as  it  were,  in  bold  relief,  as  a  shield  to  defects  in  the  substantive  and  its 
accessories,  and  as,  in  fact,  compensating  by  its  multiform  appendages  of  prefix  and 
suffix  —  by  its  tensal,  its  pronominal,  its  substantive,  its  adjective,  and  its  adverbial 
terminations;  for  conjectured  barrenness  and  rigidity  in  all  other  parts  of  siH?ech. 
Nothing  could  be  farther  from  the  truth,  although  the  verb,  when  it  comes  to  be 
considered,  will  be  shown  to  possess  a  degree  of  alHuence  in  its  fonns  which  is  truly 
surprising.  Intluenced  by  this  reflection,  I  shall  defer,  in  the  present  inquiry,  the 
remarks  I  intend  offering  on  this  part  of  speech  until  I  have  considered  the  substantive 
and  its  more  important  adjuncts. 

Palpable  objects,  to  which  the  idea  of  sense  strongly  attaches,  and  the  actions  or 
conditions  which  determine  the  relation  of  one  object  to  another,  are  j)erhaps  the 
first  points  to  demand  attention  in  the  plans  of  languages.  And  they  have  certainly 
imprinted  themselves  very  strongly,  with  all  their  materiality  of  thought,  and  with  all 
their  local,  and  exclusive,  and  personal  peculiarities,  upon  the  Indian.  The  noun  and 
the  verb  not  only  thus  constitute  the  principal  elements  of  speech,  as  in  all  languages. 


ri 


LANGUAGE. 


865 


l)iit  tlipy  eoiitimio  to  perform  their  first  ofliccti,  with  less  direct  aid  from  the  auxiliary 
j)arts  of  npeeeh,  tlian  would  apfK"  •>  l)c  reconcilable  with  a  clear  expression  of  the 
circumstances  of  time  and  place,  mii.dK!r  and  i)erson,  ((uality  and  quantity,  action  and 
repose,  and  tiie  other  accidents  on  which  their  definite  employment  dejjends.  Ihit  to 
enable  the  substantive  and  attril)utives  to  perfonn  these  complex  ollices,  they  are 
provide<l  witii  inliexions,  and  undergo  changes  and  modifications,  by  which  words  and 
phrases  become  very  concrete  in  their  meaning,  and  are  lengtiiened  out  to  apjiear 
formidable  to  the  eye.  Hence  the  polysyllabic,  and  the  descrii)tive  character  of  the 
language,  so  composite  in  its  aspect  and  in  its  forms. 

To  utter  succinctly,  anil  in  as  few  words  as  possiljle,  the  prominent  ideas  resting  upon 
the  mind  of  the  speaker,  api)ears  to  have  Ik'cu  the  paramount  object  with  the  fu'st 
speakers  of  the  language.  Hence  concentratitm  became  a  leading  feature;  and  the 
pronoun,  the  adjective,  the  adverb,  and  the  preposition,  however  they  may  lie 
disjunctively  em|>loyed  in  certain  cases,  are  chit-lly  usefid  as  furnishing  materials  to 
the  speaker,  to  be  worked  up  into  the  complicated  texture  of  the  verb  and  tiic 
.substantive.  Nothing,  in  fact,  can  l)e  more  unlike  than  the  language,  viewed  iii  its 
original  elementary  state  —  in  a  vocabulary,  for  instance,  of  its  primitive  words,  so  far 
as  such  a  vocabulary  can  now  Ix?  formed,  and  the  same  language  as  heard  under  its  oral, 
amalgamated  form.  Its  transpositions  may  be  likened  to  a  pictin-e,  in  which  the  Cf)pal, 
the  carmine,  and  the  white  lead,  are  no  longer  recognised  as  distinct  substances,  but 
each  of  which  has  contributed  its  share  towards  the  full  efl'ect.  It  is  the  painter  only 
who  possesses  the  principle  by  which  one  element  has  been  curtailed,  another 
augmented,  and  all,  however  seemingly  discordant,  nuide  to  coalesce. 

Such  a  language  may  be  expected  to  abound  in  derivatives  and  compounds;  to 
afford  rules  for  giving  verbs  subst.antive,  and  substantives  verbid  (pialities;  to  ctmcen- 
trate  the  meaning  of  words  upon  a  few  syllables,  or  upon  a  single  letter  or  alphabetical 
sign;  and  t(j  supply  modes  of  contraction  and  augmentation,  and,  if  I  may  so  say. 
shortcuts;  and  bypaths  to  meanings  which  are  erpially  novel  and  interesting.  To 
arrive  at  its  primitives,  we  must  pursue  an  intricate  thread,  where  analogy  is  often  the 
only  guide.  We  nuist  divest  words  of  those  accunudatetl  syllables  or  particles,  which, 
like  the  molecules  of  material  matter,  are  clustered  around  the  primitives.  It  is  only 
after  a  process  of  this  kind,  that  the  I'Uixcu'i,?:  of  combination,  that  secret  wire  which 
moves  the  whole  machinery,  can  be  searched  for  with  a  reasonable  prospect  of  success. 
The  labor  of  analysis  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  important  which  the  subject 
presents.  And  it  is  a  lalwr  which  it  will  be  expedient  to  keep  constantly  in  view, 
initil  we  have  separately  considered  the  several  parts  of  speech,  and  the  grammatical 
laws  by  which  the  hui'^uage  is  held  together;  and  thus  established  principles  and 
provided  materials,  wherewith  we  may  the  more  successfully  labor. 

1.  In  a  general  survey  of  the  language  as  it  is  spoken,  and  as  it  must  be  written, 
there  is  j)erhaps  no  feature  which  obtrudes  itself  so  constantly  to  view,  as  the  principle 


i 


3GG 


LANGUAGE. 


I  , 


H^ 


\ 


wliioh  Hoparatos  all  words,  of  whatever  clenoinination,  into  nniniateH  aiul  innniinateH, 
as  they  are  applied  to  objects  in  the  animal,  vegetable,  or  mineral  kingdom.  This 
principle  has  been  grafted  upon  most  words*,  and  carries  its  distinctions  throughout  the 
syntax.  It  is  tiie  gender  of  the  language ;  but  a  gender  of  so  unlraunded  a  sco[)c,  as 
to  merge  in  it  the  common  distinctions  of  a  masculine  and  feminine,  and  to  give  a 
two-fold  cluiracter  to  the  parts  of  siK'ech.  The  concords  which  it  recjuires,  and  the 
double  inilections  it  provides,  will  1)0  mentioned  in  their  appropriate  jjlaces.  It  will 
be  sulKcient  here  to  observe,  that  animate  nouns  require  animate  verbs  for  their 
nominatives,  animate  adjectives  to  express  their  (jualities,  and  animate  demonstrative 
pronouns  to  mark  the  distinctions  of  jwrson.  Thus,  if  wo  say,  I  see  a  man,  I  see  a 
hou.se,  the  termination  of  the  verb  must  Ix'  changed.  What  was  in  the  first  instance 
waulM-'-mau,  is  altered  to  waulj-end-aun.  Waub  is  here  the  infinitive,  but  the  i"oot  of 
this  verbis  still  more  remote.  If  the  cpiestion  occur.  Is  it  a  good  num?  or  a  gowl 
house?  the  adjective,  which,  in  the  inanimate  form  is  onishish-e,  is,  in  the  animate, 
oni.shish-in.  If  the  (juestion  be  i)ut.  Is  it  this  man  ?  or  this  houne  ?  the  pronoun  this, 
which  is  maubum  in  the  animate,  is  changed  to  maundun  in  th'-  inanimate. 

Nouns  animate  embrace  the  tribes  of  quadrupeds,  ))inls,  fi>-hes,  insects,  reptiles, 
crustacii>,  the  sun,  and  moon,  and  stars,  thunder  and  lightning ,  for  these  are  personified, 
and  whatever  cither  pos.sesses  animal  life,  or  is  endowed,  by  the  i)eculiar  opinions  and 
superstitions  of  the  Indians,  with  it.  In  the  vegetal)le  kingdom,  their  number  is 
comparatively  limited,  Ix'ing  chietly  confined  to  trees,  and  those  only  while  they  are 
referred  to  as  whole  boilies,  and  to  the  various  species  of  fruits,  seeds,  and  esculents. 
It  is  at  the  option  of  the  speaker  to  emidoy  nouns  either  as  animates  or  inanimates ; 
but  it  is  a  choice  never  resorted  to,  except  in  conformity  w  ith  stated  rules.  These 
conventional  exceptions  are  not  numerous,  and  Uie  more  prominent  of  them  may  be 
recited.  The  cause  of  the  exceptions  it  is  not  always  easy  to  perceive.  It  may, 
however,  generally  be  traced  to  a  particular  respect  paid  to  certain  inanimate  bodies, 
either  from  their  real  or  fancied  properties,  the  uses  to  which  they  are  applied,  or  the 
ceremonies  to  which  they  are  dedicated.  A  stone,  which  is  the  altar  of  sacrifice  to 
their  manitoes;  a  Ikjw,  so  necessary  in  the  chase;  a  feather,  the  honored  sign  of 
martial  prowess ;  a  kettle,  so  valuable  in  the  household ;  a  pil^e,  by  which  friendships 
are  .sealed  and  treaties  ratified ;  a  drum,  used  in  their  sacred  and  festive  dances ;  a 
medal,  the  mark  of  authority;  vermilion,  the  appropriate  paint  of  the  warrior; 
wampum,  by  which  messages  are  conveyed,  and  covenants  renieml)ered.  These  are 
among  the  objects,  in  themselves  inanimates,  which  require  the  application  of  animate 
verbs,  pronouns,  and  adjectives,  and  are  thereby  transferred  to  the  animate  class. 

It  is  to  be  remarked,  however,  that  the  names  for  animals  are  only  employed  as 
animates,  while  the  objects  are  referred  to  as  whole  and  complete  sjiecies ;  but  the 
gender  must  be  changed  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  speak  of  separate  members. 
Man,  woman,  father,  mother,  are  separate  nouns  so  long  as  the  individuals  are  meant; 


II  fi 


LANC.  \    \GR. 


;?<)7 


but  hand,  f(K»t,  heiul,  eye,  oar,  tonj^iie,  arc  iiianiin  -.  IJiick  ni  aiiiiiiuU-  noun 
wliilo  his  entire  carcase  is  referredto,  whether  li\  ii  i  deiiii :  !■  n«"ek,  Imck.  heart, 
windpipe,  take  the  inaninuite  form.  In  like  manner.  ■  i .  wan.  d.  ivi>.  sire  di.xtin;j;nislied 
as  animate.s ;  hnt  l)eak,  wing,  tail,  are  arranged  with  inaniniatcH.  M(  oak,  pine,  ash,  arc 
animate ;  branch,  leaf,  root,  inanimates. 

Reci])rt»cal  exceptions,  however,  exist  to  this  rule,  the  reasons  for  wliich,  a.s  in 
the  former  instance,  may  generally  1h.>  sought  either  in  {K-culiar  opinions  of  the  Indians, 
or  in  the  peculiar  (jualitics  or  uses  of  the  objects.  Tlius,  the  talons  of  tiie  eagle,  and 
the  claws  of  the  Ijcar  and  of  other  animals,  which  furnish  ornaments  for  the  neck,  sue 
invariably  spoken  of  under  the  animate  form.  The  h<x)fs  and  horns  of  all  (piadrupeds, 
which  are  applied  to  various  economical  and  mystic  purposes ;  the  castorinu  of  the 
licaver,  and  the  nails  of  man,  are  similarly  situated.  Tlie  vegetable  creation  also 
furnishes  .some  exceptions  of  this  nature ;  such  are  the  names  for  the  outer  bark  of  all 
trees,  (except  the  birch,)  and  the  branches,  the  roots,  and  the  resin  of  tlie  spruce  and 
its  congeners. 

In  a  language  which  considers  all  nature  as  separated  into  two  da.sses  of  bodies, 
characterized  by  the  presence  or  absence  of  life,  neuter  nouns  will  scarcely  be  looked 
for,  although  such  may  exist  without  my  knowledge.  Neuters  are  found  amongst  the 
verbs  and  the  adjectives,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  they  render  the  nouns  to  which 
they  are  api)lied  neuters,  in  the  sense  we  attach  to  that  term.  The  subject,  in  all  its 
bearings,  is  interesting,  and  a  full  and  minute  description  of  it  would  prol)al)ly  elicit 
new  light  respecting  some  doubtful  points  in  the  language,  and  contribute  something 
towards  a  curious  collateral  topic,  —  the  history  of  Indian  opinions.  I  have  stated  the 
principle  broadly,  without  fdling  up  the  suliject  of  exceptions  as  fully  as  it  is  in  my 
pow'er,  and  without  following  its  bearings  upon  points,  wliidi  will  nK>re  properly  come 
\uider  discussion  at  other  stages  of  the  inquiry.  A  suflicient  outline,  it  is  believed,  has 
been  given,  and  having  thus  met  at  the  threshold  a  principle  dcei)iy  laid  at  the 
foundation  of  the  language,  and  one  which  will  be  jxTiietually  recurring,  I  shall 
proceed  to  enumerate  some  other  prominent  features  of  the  substantive. 


2.  No  language  is  perhaps  so  defective  as  to  be  totally  without  number.  But  there 
arc  probably  few  which  furnish  .so  many  modes  of  indicating  it  as  the  Algonquin. 
There  are  as  many  modes  of  forming  the  plural  as  there  are  vowel  sounds,  yet  there 
is  no  distinction  between  a  limited  and  unlimited  substantive  plural ;  although  there 
is,  in  the  pronoun,  an  inclusive  and  an  exclusiv?:  plural.  Whether  we  say  man  or 
men,  two  men  or  twenty  men,  the  singidar  inin-c,  and  the  plural  inincwng,  remain 
the  same.  But  if  we  say  wc,  or  us,  or  our  men,  (who  are  present,)  or  we,  us,  or  our 
Indians,  (in  general,)  the  plural  we,  and  us,  and  our  —  for  they  arc  rendered  by  the 
same  form  —  .idniit  of  a  change  to  indicate  whether  the  objective  pers(m  or  pei-sons 
be  1XCI.UDKD  or  excmdkd.     This  principle,  of  which  full  examples  will  be  given  under 


868 


LANGUAGE. 


tlio  npprupriiiti'  IkmuI,  loriiis  a  »iii>jle  nml  aiioiiialoiiH  instaiico  of  tlio  iiso  of  particular 
plurals.  Ami  it  carries  its  distinctions,  hv  means  of  tlie  pronouns,  separable  and 
inseparal)le,  into  tlic  verbs  and  sniistantives,  creatinj;  the  necessity  of  double  conjuj;a- 
tions  and  double  declensions,  in  the  plural  tonus  of  the  first  person.  Thus,  the  term 
for  Oiu'  Father,  which,  in  the  inclusive  forni,  is  Kosinann,  in,  in  tho  exclusive, 
Nosinaun. 

The  particular  plural,  which  is  thus,  by  the  transfonninfr  power  of  the  lanjruiifre, 
carried  from  the  jtronoini  into  the  texture  of  the  verb  and  sui)stiintive,  is  not  limited 
to  any  fixed  number  of  persons  or  objects:  it  is  not  a  dual,  but  arises  from  the  opera- 
tions of  the  verb.  The  general  plural  is  variously  made.  But  the  plurals  makinj^ 
inflections  take  upon  them.selves  an  additional  jxjwer  or  sign,  by  which  substantives 
are  distiu;ruisln'd  into  animates  and  inanimates.  Without  this  additional  power,  all 
nouns  plural  would  end  in  the  vowels  a,  e.  i,  o.  u.  Hut  to  mark  the  jrender,  the  letter 
g  is  added  to  animates,  and  the  letter  n  to  inanimates,  inakiuj;  the  plurals  of  the  first 
fla.ss  terminate  in  ng,  ccg,  ig,  og,  ng,  and  of  the  second  cla.ss  in  an,  ecu,  in,  on,  un. 
Ten  modes  of  forming  the  plural  are  thus  provided,  five  of  which  are  animate,  and 
five  inanimate  plurals.  A  strong  and  clear  line  of  distinction  is  thus  drawn  between 
the  two  ela.s.ses  of  words,  so  unerring  indeed  in  its  application,  that  it  is  only  necessary 
to  incpiiro  how  the  plural  is  formed  to  determine  whether  it  belong  to  one  or  the  other 
class.  The  distinctions  which  we  have  cndeavoretl  to  convey  will  perhai)s  \jv  more 
clearly  perceived  by  adding  examples  of  the  use  of  each  of  the  })lnrals. 

Animatk    Pluual. 


a.  Ojibwa a  Chippewa. 

e.  Ojee a  Fly. 

i.  Kosenaim Our  Father  (in.) 

o.  Ahmo a  Bee. 

n.  Ais a  Shell. 


Ojibwaig Cliippowas. 

Oj-eeg Flies. 

Kosenaun-ig     ....  Our  Fathers  (in.) 

Ahm-og Ik'cs. 

Ais-ng Shells. 


i 


1  f 


Inanimate    Plukal. 

a.  Shkoda Firo.  Ishkodain Fii-cs. 

0.  Wadop Alder.  Wadoi)-een Aldera. 

i.  Adetaig Fruit.  Adetaig-in Fruits. 

o.  Nodin Wind.  Nodin-on Winds. 

u.  Meen Berry.  Moen-un Berries. 

Where  a  noun  tenninatcs  with  a  vowel  in  the  .singular,  the  addition  of  the  g,  or  n, 
shows  at  once  both  the  plural  and  the  gender.  In  other  instances,  as  in  peena,  a 
jiartridge;  seebe,  a  river;  it  requires  a  consonant  to  precede  the  plunil  vowel,  in 


J  ! 


LAN(J  U  A(JE. 


ronforiiiity  with  II  rule  piwioiisly  ftiitc'd.  TIiiih.  |H't'iiiii  is  n-iidcrcd  |M'('imi-\vn^';  iiiul 
HtM'lM',  .si'fl)c'-\viiii.  WIkto  tilt'  iiiiiiM  .linjruliir  tcriniiiatcM  in  llic  l)n>ii(l  iii.xtfiul  ol'  tlic 
loii;^  mmiikI  of  n,  us  in  o^riiiinii,  a  cliict';  islipatiiiiiii,  a  liiii,  tlii>  plural  is  o^riiii-aii::.  islipa- 
tinaiiii.  Hut  these  are  iiieri!  iiHMlilicutioiis  nl'  two  of  the  alK)ve  i'orins.  aixl  are  In  no 
means  entitled  to  lie  considered  as  additioiuil  plurals. 

Coinparativt'ly    lew    siihstuntives   are    witliout   nunilier.      The    followin;;   may 
enumerated  : 


be 


Missun' Firp-w(Kxl. 

I'inj^wi Aslics. 

Mejini Food. 

Kon Snow. 

Mislikwo Blootl. 

I'kkukknzha  ....  Coals. 


U.ssaiinuu Tobacco. 

Naij^ow Sand. 

Akiouii Mist. 

Kimmiwun Rain. 

Ossoakumiif Moss. 

Unitchemin Peas. 


Others  may  Iw  found,  and,  indeed,  a  few  others  are  known.  Hut  it  is  loss  an 
object,  in  this  enumeratiim,  to  pursue  exceptions  into  their  miimtest  ramifications, 
thiin  to  sketch  broad  rules,  apjilicable,  if  not  to  every  word,  to  at  least  a  majority  of 
words  in  the  laiif^ua^o. 

There  is,  however,  one  exception  from  the  general  use  of  number,  so  peculiar  in 
it.self,  that  not  to  point  it  out  would  Ix'  an  unpardonable  remissness,  in  giving  the 
outlines  of  a  language,  in  which  it  is  an  object  neither  to  extenuate  faults  nor  to 
over-rate  lj<'auties.  This  exception  consists  in  the  want  of  numlxT  in  the  third 
I'KR.soN'  of  the  declensions  of  animate  nouns,  and  the  conjugation  of  animate  verbs. 
Not,  that  such  words  are  destitute  of  number,  in  their  simple  forms,  or  wlien  used 
under  eircumstances  retpiiring  no  change  of  these  simple  forms  —  no  prefixes  ami  no 
inilections.  But  it  will  be  seen,  at  a  glance,  how  very  limited  such  an  application  of 
words  must  be,  in  a  transpositive  language. 

Thus,  mong  and  gang  (loon  and  jiorcupine)  take  the  plural  inflection,  wug, 
liecoming  mong-wug  and  gaug-wug  (loons  and  porcupines.)  So,  in  their  pronominal 
declension  — 


My  l(X)n Ne  monsj  oom 

Thy  loon Ke  mong  oom 

My  porcupine  .    .   .  Ne  gang  oom 

Thy  porcupine    .    .  Ke  gang  oom 


My  loons Ne  mong  oom  ug 

Thy  loons Ke  mong  oom  ug 

My  porcupines .    .    .  Ne  gang  oom  ug 

Thy  porcupines    .    .  Ke  gang  oom  ug 


But  his  loon  or  loons,  (o  mong  oom  un,)  his  porcupine  or  porcupines,  (o  gang  oom 
un,)  are  without  number.  The  rule  applies  equally  to  the  class  of  words  in  which  the 
pronouns  are  inseparable.  Thus,  my  father  and  thy  father,  nos  and  kos,  become  my 
fathers  and  thy  fathers  by  the  numerical  inflection  ug,  forming  nosug  and  kosug.  But 
osun,  his  father  or  fathers,  is  vague,  and  does  not  indicate  whether  there  be  one  father 
or  twenty  fathers.  The  inflection  un  merely  denotes  the  object.  The  rule  also 
applies  equally  to  sentence-s,  in  which  th^  noun  is  governed  by  or  governs  the  verb. 
Pt.  TI.  — 47 


^.^ 


w 


070  LANGUAGE. 

Whether  wc  say,  I  saw  a  bear  —  iiingc  waubumaii  imikwah,  or  a  bear  saw  me  — 
mukwah  niiige  waubuniig,  the  noun  itself  undergoes  no  change,  and  its  number  is 
definite.  But  oge  waubum-aun  muk-wun,  he  saw  bear,  is  indefinite,  although  both 
the  verb  and  the  noun  have  changed  their  endings ;  and,  if  the  narrator  does  not 
subsequently  determine  the  number,  the  hearer  is  either  left  in  doubt,  or  must  resolve 
it  by  a  question.  In  fine,  the  whole  acts  of  the  third  person  are  thus  rendered 
(luestionable.  This  want  of  precision,  which  would  seem  to  l)e  fraught  with  so  nuich 
confusion,  appears  to  be  obviated  in  practice  by  the  employment  of  adjectives,  by 
numerical  inflections  in  the  relative  words  of  the  sentence,  by  the  use  of  the 
indefinite  article,  paizhik,  or  by  demonstrative  pronouns.  Thus,  pai/hik  nnikwuN  oge 
waubiunAiN  conveys,  with  certainty,  the  information  —  he  saw  A  bear.  But  in  this 
sentence  both  the  noun  and  the  verb  retain  the  objective  inflections,  as  in  the  former 
instances.  These  inflections  are  not  uniformly  un,  but  sometimes  ecu,  as  in  ogeen,  his 
mother ;  and  sometimes  on,  as  in  odakeek-on,  his  kettle :  in  all  which  instances, 
however,  the  number  is  left  indeterminate.  It  may  hence  be  observed,  and  it  is  a 
remark  which  we  shall  presently  ha\e  occasion  to  corroborate,  that  the  plural 
inflection  to  inanimate  nouns  (which  have  no  objective  form)  becomes  the  objective 
inflection  to  animate  nouns,  which  have  no  number  in  the  third  person. 


3.  This  leads  us  to  the  consideration  of  the  mode  of  forming  possessives,  the  existence 
of  which,  when  it  shall  have  been  indicated  by  full  examples,  will  present  to  the  mind 
of  the  inquirer  one  of  those  tautologies  in  grammatical  forms  which,  without  imparting 
additional  precision,  appear  to  clothe  the  language  with  accumulated  verbiage.  Tlie 
strong  tendency  to  combination  and  amalgamation  existing  in  the  language,  renders  it 
diflTicult,  in  fact,  to  discuss  the  principles  of  it  in  that  elementary  form  which  could  be 
wished.  In  the  analysis  of  words  and  forms,  we  are  constantly  led  from  the  central 
point  of  discussion.  To  recur,  however,  from  these  collateral  iniravellings  to  the  main 
thread  of  inquiry  at  a.s  short  and  frequent  intervals  as  [)ossible,  and  thus  to  preserve 
the  chain  of  conclusions  and  proof,  is  so  important  that,  without  keeping  the  object 
distinctly  in  view,  I  should  despair  of  conveying  any  clear  impressions  of  those 
grammatical  features  which  impart  to  the  language  its  jwculiar  diaracter. 

It  has  been  remarked  that  the  distinctions  of  number  .are  founded  upon  a  modification 
of  the  five  vowel  sounds.  Possessives  are  likewise  founded  upon  the  basis  of  tli  e  vowel 
sounds.  There  are  five  declensions  of  the  noun  to  mark  the  possessive,  ending,  in  tlie 
possessive,  in  am,  eem,  im,  om,  um,  oom.  Where  the  nominative  ends  with  a  vowel, 
the  possessive  is  made  by  abiding  the  letter  m,  as  in  maimai,  a  woodcock,  nc  maimaim, 
my  woodcock,  &c.  Where  the  nominative  ends  in  a  consonant,  as  in  ais,  a  shell,  the 
full  possessive  inflection  is  required,  making  nin  dais-im,  my  shell.  In  the  latter  fi)rm, 
the  con.sonant  d  is  interposed  between  the  pronoun  and  noini,  and  sounded  with  the 
noun,  in  conformity  with  a  general  rule.    Where  the  nominative  ends  in  the  broad,  in 


LANGUAGE. 


;5T1 


lieu  of  the  loiif?  sound  of  a,  as  in  oginiau,  a  chief,  the  possessive  is  aiim.  The  soinid 
of  i,  in  the  third  decK>nsion,  is  that  of  i  in  pin,  and  the  sound  of  u.  in  the  fifth  declen- 
sion, is  that  of  u  in  bull.     The  latter  will  he  uniformly  represented  l»y  oo. 

The  possessive  declensions  run  throughout  both  the  animate  and  inaninuite  classes 
of  nouns,  with  some  exceptions  in  the  latter,  as  knife,  bowl,  paddle,  &c. 
Inanimate  nouns  are  thus  declined  : 

Nomiiialhr,      Ishkodai,  Fire. 

My,  Nin  Dishkod-aim 
Thy,  Ke  Dishkod-aim 
His,  O  Dishkod-aim 
Pimesslve.    ■{   Our,  Ke  Dishkod-aim-inun  (in.) 
"     Ne  Dishkod-aim-inun  (ex.) 
Your,  Ke  Dishkml-aim-iwau 
Their,  0  Dishkod-aim-iwau 
Those  words  Avliich  fm'm  exceptions  from  this  declension  take  the  separable  pronouns 
before  them,  as  follows : 

Mokomahn a  knife 

Ne  mokomahn    ....    my  knife 
Ke  mokomahn    ....   thy  knife 

O  mokomahn his  knife,  &c. 

Animate  substantives  are  declined  precisely  in  the  same  manner  as  inanimate, 
except  in  the  third  person,  which  takes  to  the  possessive  inflections,  aim,  eeni,  im,  oin, 
oom,  the  objective  particle  ini,  denotinjr  the  compound  inflection  of  this  person,  both  in 
the  singular  and  plural,  to  be  aimun,  eenum,  imun,  omun,  oonnui,  and  the  variation 
of  the  first  vowel  sound,  aumun.  Thus,  to  furnish  an  example  of  the  second  declen- 
sion, pczhiki,  a  bison,  changes  its  form  to  nim  bezhiic-im,  my  bison,  ke  bizhik-im,  thy 
bison,  0  bizhik-imun,  his  bison  or  bisons. 

The  cause  of  this  doid)le  inflection  in  the  third  person  may  be  left  for  future  inquiry. 
But  we  may  a<ld  further  examples  in  aid  of  it.  We  cannot  simply  say,  the  chief  has 
killed  a  bear;  or,  to  reverse  the  object  upon  which  the  energy  of  the  verb  is  exerted, 
the  bear  has  killed  a  chief;  but  nnist  say,  ogimau  ogi  nissaiN  mukwux,  literally,  Ciiikf 
HE  HAS  Kir.r.Ki)  him  bkau;  or,  mukwah  ogi  nissauN  ogimarx,  Beau  he  has  killed  him 
nuEF.  Here  the  verb  and  the  noun  are  both  objective  in  rx,  which  is  sounded  aun, 
whei-e  it  comes  after  the  broad  mnm\  of  a,  as  in  missaun,  f)bjective  of  the  verb  to  kill. 
If  we  confer  the  powers  of  the  English  possessive  ('s)  upon  the  inflections  aim,  eem, 
im,  om,  oom,  and  aum,  respectively,  and  the  meaning  of  him,  and,  of  course,  he,  her, 
hi.s,  hers,  they,  theirs,  (as  there  is  no  declension  of  the  primonn,  and  no  nundjer  to 
the  third  person,)  upon  the  objective  particle  un,  we  shall  then  translate  the  alwve 
expressicm,  o  bizhik  —  eemnn,  his  bison's  —  his.  If  we  reject  this  meaning,  as  I  think 
wo  should,  the  sentence  would  read,  literally,  his  bison  —  him:  a  mere  tautology. 


872 


LANGUAGE. 


It  is  truo,  it  may  be  remarked,  that  the  noun  possessed  has  a  corresiwnding 
termination,  or  pronominal  correspondence  with  the  pronoim  possessor;  also  a  final 
termination,  indicative  of  its  being  the  object  on  which  the  verb  exerts  its  influence ; 
a  mode  of  cjq)ression  which,  so  far  as  relates  to  the  possessive,  would  be  deemed 
superfluous  in  modern  languages,  but  may  have  some  analogy  in  the  Latin  accusatives 
am,  um,  em. 

It  is  a  constant  and  unremitting  aim  in  the  Indian  languages,  to  distinguish  the  actor 
from  the  object ;  partly  by  prefixes,  and  partly  by  inseparable  suffixes.  That  the 
termiuivtitm  ux  is  one  of  these  in.separable  particles,  and  that  its  office,  wliile  it 
confounds  the  numljer  of  the  third  person,  is  to  designate  the  object,  appears  probable, 
from  the  fact  that  it  retains  its  connexion  with  the  noun,  whether  the  latter  follow 
or  precede  the  verb,  or  whatever  its  {wsition  in  the  sentence  may  be. 

Thus  we  can,  without  any  i)erplexity  in  the  meaning,  say,  Waimittigozhiwug  ogi 
SAGi.\c\  PoxTi.\c-ux ;  Frenchmen  they  did  love  Pontiac  him.  Or  to  reverse  it, 
PoNTi.\c-iN  WAiMiTTiGoziinvLG  OGI  SAGiAUN ;  literally,  Pontiac  he  did  Frenchmen  he 
loved.  The  termination  un,  in  lx)th  instances,  clearly  determines  the  object  beloved. 
So  in  the  following  instance,  Saguxosihg  ogi  .sagiavx  Tecumseii-ux ;  Engli.shmen 
they  did  love  Tecuniseh,  or  Teci'mseii-ux  SAGUNOsiiirr,  ogi  sagiaun;  Tecumseh,  he 
did  Englishmen  he  loved. 

In  tracing  the  operation  of  this  rule  through  the  doublings  of  the  language,  it  is 
necessary  to  distinguish  every  modification  of  .^ound,  whether  it  is  accompanied,  or  not 
accompanied,  by  a  modification  of  the  sense.  The  particle  un,  which  thus  marks  the 
THIRD  PERSox  .\XD  PERSoxs,  is  sometimes  pronounced  wrx,  and  sometimes  yun,  as  the 
euphony  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  suffixed  may  require.  But  not  the  slightest 
change  is  thereby  made  in  its  meaning. 

Waubojecg  ogi  meegaun-aun  naudowaisi-wun. 

Waubojeeg  fought  his  enemies.  Literally;  lie  did  fight  them,  his  enemy  or 
enemies. 

0  saugi-aun  inini-wun. 

lie  or  she  loves  a  man.     Literally;  He  or  she  loves  him,  man  or  men. 

Kego-yun  waindji  pimmaudizziwaud. 

They  subsist  on  fish.     Literally ;  Fish  or  fishes,  they  upon  them,  they  live. 

Ontwa  o  sagiaun  odi-yun. 

Ontwa  loves  his  dog.     Literally;  He  loves  him,  his  dog  or  doga. 

In  these  sentences  the  letters  w  and  y  are  introduced  before  the  inflection  un,  merely 
for  euphony's  sake,  and  to  enable  the  speaker  to  utter  the  final  vowel  of  the 
substantive,  and  the  inflective  vowel,  without  placing  Ijoth  under  the  accent.  It  is  to 
be  remarked  in  these  examples,  that  the  verb  has  a  corresponding  inflection  with  the 
noun,  indicated  by  the  final  consonant  n,  as  in  sagiau-n,  objective  of  the  verb  to  love. 
This  is  merely  a  modification  of  un,  where  it  is  requisite  to  employ  it  after  broad  a, 


LANGUAGE. 


373 


(aw,)  and  it  is  applicable  to  nouns  as  well  as  ver))s,  whenever  tliey  end  in  that  sound. 
Thus,  in  the  phrase,  he  saw  a  chief,  0  waubumau-n  0  giinau-n,  both  noun  and  verb 
torniinate  in  n.  It  is  immaterial  to  the  sense  which  precedes.  And  this  leads  to  the 
conclusion  which  we  are,  in  some  measure,  compelled  to  state  in  anticipation  of  our 
remarks  on  the  verb;  that  verbs  must  not  only  agree  with  their  nominatives  in  number, 
person,  and  gkndkh,  (we  use  the  latter  tenn  for  want  of  a  more  appropriate  one,)  but 
also  with  their  objectives.  Hence  the  objective  sign  n,  in  the  aljove  examples. 
Sometimes  this  sign  is  removed  from  the  ending  of  the  verb,  to  make  room  for  the 
plural  of  the  nominative  person,  and  is  subjoined  to  the  latter.     Thus  — 

O  sagiau  (wau)  n. 

They  love  them,  (him  or  them.) 

In  this  phrase  the  interposed  syllable  (wau)  is,  apparently,  the  plural  —  it  is  a 
I'ellective  plural  of  uk  —  the  latter  being  indicated  as  usual  by  tlie  sign  0.  It  has 
been  observed  above,  that  the  deficiency  in  number,  in  the  third  person,  is  sometimes 
supplied  "  by  numerical  inflections  in  the  relative  words  of  the  sentence,"  and  this 
interposed  particle  (wau)  affords  an  instance  in  point.  The  number  of  the  nominative 
pronoun  appears  to  be  thus  rendered  precise,  but  the  objective  is  still  indefinite. 

When  two  nouns  are  used  without  a  verb  in  the  sentence,  or  when  two  nouns 
compose  the  whole  matter  uttered,  being  in  the  third  person,  both  have  the  full 
objective  inflection.     Thus, 

Os  — (un.)     Odi— (yun.) 

His  father's  dog.     Literally  his  father — his  dog  or  dogs. 

There  are  certain  words,  however,  which  will  not  admit  the  objective  in  een,  or  on. 

O  waubunuui  —  (u.)     Assin  —  (een.) 

He  sees  the  stone.     Literally,  he  sees  him  —  stone  or  stones. 

O  wauliumau  -  (n)  mittig  o  mizh  -  (een.)     Literally, 
He  sees  hiin,  tree  or  trees.     (An  oak  tree.) 

Omittig  wab  (ecu,)  gyai  o  bikwuk  -  (on.) 

His  bow  and  his  arrows.     Literally,  his  bow  him,  and  his  arrows  him  or  them. 

Odya  I  wau  |  wau  (n,)  akkik-(on.) 

They  pos.sess  a  kettle.     Literally,  they  own  them,  kettle  or  kettles. 

The  syllable  wau,  in  the  verb  of  the  last  example,  included  between  bars  (instead 
of  parentheses,)  is  the  reflective  plural  tiiky,  pointed  out  in  a  preceding  instance. 
I  shall  conclude  these  remarks  with  full  examples  of  each  pronominal  declension, 
a.  First  declension,  forming  the  first  and  second  persons  in  aim,  and  the  third  in 

AIMUN. 

Pinai,  a  partridge. 
.*inai-wug,  partridges. 


Noiuinad 


iiutttce.  <    ,^. 
(  Pi: 


374 


LANGUAGE. 


t.l 


I 


'4 


M 


\ii' 


Ist  and  2d  Person. 


Sd  Person 


■{ 


Nominative. 


■{ 


Ist  and  2d  Person. 


Sd  Person. 


'  My.     Nim  Bin-aim. 
Thy.     Ke  Biu-aim. 
Our.     Kc  Bin-aim  inaun.     Inclii.  plu. 
Our.     Ne  Bin-aiminaun.     Exclu.  plu. 
Your.     Ke  Bin-aim  wau. 
His.     O  Bin-aim,  (un.) 
Their.     0  Bin-aim  wau  (n.) 
e.  Second  declension,  forming  the  first  and  second  persons  in  EEsr,  and  the  third  in 

EEMUN. 

Ossin,  a  stone. 

Ossineen,  stones. 

My.     Nin  Dossin-eem. 

Thy.     Ke  Dossin-eem. 

Our.     Ke  Dossin-eeminaun.  (in.) 

Our.     Ne  Dossin-eeminaun.  (ex.) 
,  Your.     Ke  Dossin-eemewau. 
(  His.     O  Dossin-eem  (un.) 
I  Their.     O  Dossin-eemewau  (n.) 
i.  Third  ucclcnsion,  forming  the  first  and  second  persons  in  IM,  and  the  third  in 

IMDN. 

f  Ais,  a  shell. 
nnative.  {    ..  ,    „ 

(  Aisug,  shells. 

My.     Nil!  Dais-im. 

Ke  Dais-im. 

Ke  Dais-iminaun.  (in.) 

Ne  Dais-iminaun.  (ex.) 

Ke  Dais-iminau. 

O  Dais-im,  (un.) 

Their.     O  Dais-imewau,  (n.) 

o.  Fourth  declension,  forming  the  first  and  second  persons  in  OM,  and  the  third  in 

OMUN. 

Mouido,  a  Spirit. 

Monidog,  Spirits. 

My.     Ne  Monid-om. 

Thy.     Ke  Monid-om. 

Our.     Ke  Monid-ominaun.  (in.) 

Our.     Ne  Monid-ominaun.  (ex.) 

Your.     Ke  Monid-omiwau. 
f  His.     O  Monid-om.  (un.) 
\  Their.     0  Monid-omewau.   (n.) 


Nominatict 


1«<  and  2d  Person. 


Sd  Person. 


Nomituxiive. 


ive.  i 


1st  and  2d  Pirson. 


3d  Pen 


m 


LANGUAGE. 


375 


Nominative 


ice.  I 


Ist  and  2il  Person. 


3d  Ihrson. 


u,  (oo.)    Fifth  declension,  forming  tlie  first  and  second  persons  in  oom,  nnd  the  third 
in  OOMUN. 

Moz,  a  Moose. 
Mozug,  Moose,  (plu.) 
My.     Ne  Moz-oom. 
Tliy.     Ke-moz-oom. 
Our.     Ke  Moz-oominaun.  (in.) 
Our.     Ne  Moz-oominaun.  (ex.) 
Your.     Ke  Moz-oomiwau. 
f  His.     O  Moz-oom.  (un.) 
\  Their.     O  Moz-oomiwau.  (n.) 

aw.     Additional  declension,  required  when  the  noun  ends  in  the  broad,  instead  of 
the  long  sound  of  a,  forming  the  possessive  in  Au.v,  and  the  objective  in  aumun. 

Ogimau,  a  Chief, 
^iniaug,  Chiefs. 
My.     Ne  Dogim  aum. 
Thy.     Ke  Dogim  aum. 
Our.     Ke  Dogim  auminaun.  (in.) 
Our.     Ne  Dogim  auminaun.   (ex.) 
^  Your.     Ke  Dogim  aumiwau. 

f  His.     0  Dogim  aum.  (un.) 

I.  i  .  °    _  ^      ' 

{  Their.     O  Dogim  aumiwau.   (n.) 
The  abbreviations  in  and  ex,  in  these  declensions,  mark  the  inclusive  and  exclusive 

form  of  the  pronoun  plural.     The  inflection  of  the  third  person,  as  it  is  superadded  to 

the  first  and  second,  is  included  between  parentheses,  that  the  eye,  unaccustomed  to 

these  extended  forms,  may  readily  detect  it. 

Where  the  inseparable,  instead  of  the  separable  pronoun  is  employed,  the  possessive 

inflection  of  the  first  and  second  person  is  dispensed  with,  although  the  inflection  of 

the  third  is  still  retained. 


Nominative. 


f  Ogi 
lOgi 


let  and  2d  I\rson. 


Sd  Person. 


Nob  .  .  . 
Ko8  .  .  . 
Os-un  .  . 
Nos-inaun 
Kos-inaun 
Kos-iwau 
Os-iwaun  . 


Os:   Father. 
Singular.  S.  Plural. 

.   My  father.  Nos-ug My  fathers. 

.   Thy  father.  Kos-ug Thy  fathers. 

.   His  father,  (s.  &  p.)  Os-un His  fathers,  (s.  &  p.) 

.   Our  father,  (ex.)  Nos-inaun  ig  .   .  Our  fathers,  (ex.) 

•   Our  father,  (in.)  Kos-inaun  ig  .   .  Our  fathers,  (in.) 

.    Your  father.  Kos-iwaug  ,    .   .  Your  fathers. 

.    Tiieir  father,  (s.  &  p.)  Os-iwan   ....  Tiieir  fatlicrs,  (s.  &  p.) 


11 


'j.i 


i^ 


376  LANGUAGE. 

The  word  ilog,  and  this  word  uloue,  is  declined  in  the  following  manner  :  — 

Anninioosh :    a  Dog. 
S.   Singular.  S.  Plural. 

Nin  Di     My  dog.  Nin  Di-ng    ....   My  dogs. 

Ke  Di Thy  dog.  Ki  Di-ng Tliy  dogs. 

0  Di-nn His  dog  or  dogs.  O  Di-uii His  dogs,  &c. 

Ki  Di-inaun    .   .   .   Our  dog.  (in.)  Ki  Di-inaunig    .    .   Onr  dogs,  (in.) 

Ni  Di-inann     .    .    .    Our  dog.  (ex.)  Ni  Di-inaunig     .    .    Our  dogs,  (ex.) 

Ki  Di-iwau  ....    Your  dog.  Ki  Di-iwaug   .    .    .    Your  dogs. 

O  Di-iwaun     .    .    .    Their  dog,  &c.  O  Di-iwaun     .    .    .    Their  dogs,  &c. 

The  word  di,  which  sni)i)lies  this  declension,  is  derived  from  indyiaum,  mine  — 
pronoun  an  —  a  derivative  fonn  of  the  word,  which  is,  however,  exclusively  restricted, 
in  its  meaning,  to  the  dog.  If  the  expression  nin  di,  or  n'  di,  is  sometimes  applied  to 
the  horse,  it  is  because  it  is  thereby  intended  to  call  him,  my  dog,  from  his  being  in  a 
state  of  f-ervitude  similar  to  that  of  the  dog.  It  must  bo  borne  in  mind,  as  connected 
with  this  sulyect,  that  the  dog,  in  high  northern  latitudes,  and  even  as  far  south  as 
42  degrees,  is  both  a  beast  of  draught  and  of  burden.  He  is  compelled,  during  the 
winter  season,  to  draw  the  odauban,  or  Indian  sleigh ;  and  sometimes  to  support  the 
burden  upon  his  back,  by  means  of  a  kind  of  drag  constructed  of  slender  poles. 

A  review  of  the  facts  which  have  been  brought  together  respecting  the  substantive 
will  show  that  the  separable  or  inseparable  pronouns,  under  the  form  of  prefixes,  arc 
throughout  required.  It  will  also  indicate,  that  the  inflections  of  the  first  and  second 
pensons,  which  occupy  the  place  of  possessives,  find  thoise  of  the  third  person,  i"e.sembling 
objectives,  pertfiin  to  words  which  are  either  primitives  or  denote  but  a  single  object; 
as  moose,  fire.  There  is,  however,  another  class  of  substantives,  or  substantive 
exprcssion.s,  and  an  extensive  class  —  for  it  embraces  a  gre.at  portion  of  the  compound 
descriptive  terms  —  in  the  use  of  which  no  pronominal  prefixes  are  required.  The 
distinctions  of  person  are,  exclusively,  supplied  by  pronominal  suffixes.  Of  this 
character  are  the  words  descriptive  of  country,  place  of  dwelling,  field  of  battle,  place 
of  employment,  &c.  The  following  examples  will  furnish  the  inflections  applicable  to 
this  entire  class  of  words :  — 

Aindaud :    Home,  or  place  of  dwelling. 
S.   Singular.  S.   Plural. 

Aindau-yaun   .   .    My  home.  Aindau-^aun-in   .   .   .   My  homes. 

Aindau-ynn     .    .   Thy  home.  Aindau-yun-in     .   .   .   Thy  homes. 

Aindau-d  ....   His  home.  Aindau-jin His  homes. 

Aindau-yaimg .   .   Our  home,   (ex.)  Aindau-yaung-in     .    .   Our  homes,   (ex.) 

Aindau-yung   .   .   Our  home,  (in.)  Aindau-yung-in  .   .   .   Our  homes,   (in.) 

Aindau-yaig     .    .    Your  home.  Aindau-yaig-in     .    .    .    Your  homes. 

Aindau-waud  .   .   Their  home.  Aindau-waudjin  .   .   .   Tlieir  homes. 


LANGUAGE. 


377 


§3.       FUKTHER    ReMAUKS   OX    THE    SUBSTAXTIVE:    1.    LoCAL,    2.    DlMIMTIVE. 

3.  Dekooative.  4.  Texsal   Inflections.     Mode   in   wiiirii   the 

LATTER  are  E.MI'LOYED  TO  DENOTE  THE  DECEASE  OK  InDIVIDTALS, 
AND   TO    INDICATE   THE  PaST   AND  FuTURE  SEASONS.       T).  RESTRICTED 

OR  Sexial  Terms.  0.  Conversion  ok  the  Substantive  into  a 
Verb,  and  the  Reciprocal  Character  ok  the  Verb,  hy  which 
IT  IS  converted  into  a  Substantive.  7.  Derivative  and  Com- 
pound Substantives.  Summary  ok  the  Properties  ok  this 
Part  ok  Speech. 

In  the  view  which  has  been  taken  of  the  substantive,  it  has  been  deemed  proper  to 
exclude  several  topics,  which,  from  their  pecuHarities,  it  was  believed,  could  be  more 
satisfactorily  discussed  in  a  separate  form.  Of  this  character  are  those  modifications 
of  the  substantive  by  which  locality,  diminution,  a  defective  quality,  and  the  past 
tense  are  expressed ;  by  which  various  adjective  and  adverbial  significations  are  given ; 
and,  finally,  the  substantives  themselves  converted  into  verbs.  Such  are,  also,  the 
mode  of  indicating  the  masculine  and  feminine,  (both  merged,  as  we  have  shown,  in 
the  animate  class,)  and  tho.se  words  which  are  of  a  strictly  sexual  character,  or  are 
restricted  in  their  use  either  to  males  or  females.  Not  less  interesting  is  the  manner 
of  forming  derivatives,  and  of  conferring  upon  the  derivatives  so  formed  a  personality, 
distinguished  as  either  animate  or  inanimate,  at  the  option  of  the  speaker. 

Much  of  the  flexibility  of  the  substantive  is  derived  from  these  properties,  and  they 
undoubtedly  add  greatly  to  the  figurative  character  of  the  language.  Some  of  them 
have  been  thought  analogous  to  case,  particularly  that  inflection  of  the  noun  which 
indicates  the  locality  of  the  object:  but  if  so,  then  there  would  be  equally  strong 
reasons  for  establishing  an  aihective,  and  an  adverbial,  as  well  as  a  local  case,  and  a 
plurality  of  forms  in  each.  But  it  is  believed  that  no  such  necessity  exists.  There  is 
no  regular  declension  of  these  forms,  and  they  are  all  used  under  limitations  and 
restrictions  incompatible  with  the  true  principles  of  case. 

It  is  under  this  view  of  the  subject  that  the  discussion  of  these  forms  has  been 
transferred  to  a  separate  paper,  together  with  the  other  accidents  of  the  substantive, 
just  adverted  to  and  reserved;  and  in  now  proceeding  to  express  the  conclusions  at 
which  we  have  arrived  touching  these  points,  it  will  be  an  object  so  to  compress  and 
arrange  the  materials  before  us  as  to  present,  within  a  small  compass,  the  leading  facts 
and  examples  upon  which  each  separate  position  depends. 


ti 


1.  That  quality  of  the  noun  which,  in  the  shape  of  an  inflection,  denotes  the  relative 
situation  of  the  object  by  the  contiguous  position  of  some  accessory  object,  is  expressed, 
in  the  English  language,  by  the  prepositions  in,  into,  at,  or  on.     In  the  Indian,  they 
Pt.  II.  — 48 


B    !■ 


11: 


378 

LANGUAGE. 

are 

denoted  by 

nn  inflection. 

Thus  the  phrase,  In 

tlie  box 

is 

rendered,  in 

the  Indian, 

by 

one  word, 

mukukoong. 

Of  this  word,  mukuk 

simply 

is 

box. 

The 

termination 

OONG  denoting 

the  locality, 

not  of  the  box,  but  of  the 

obj 

ect  sought  after.      The 

h    ' 


•iil      It 


expression  appears  to  be  precise,  although  there  is  no  definite  article  in  the  language. 

The  substantive  takes  this  form  most  commonly  after  a  question  has  Iwen  put,  as 
Anendi  ne  mokomahn-ais  ?  where  is  my  penknife  ?  Mukukoong,  (in  the  box,)  addo- 
powin-ing,  (on  the  table,)  are  definite  replies  to  this  question.  But  the  form  is  net 
restricted  to  this  relation.  Chimauning  n'guh  poz,  I  shall  embark  in  the  canoe; 
waki-e-gun  n'guh  izhau,  I  shall  go  into  the  house,  is  perfectly  correct,  though  some- 
what formal  expressions,  when  the  canoe  or  the  house  is  present  to  the  speaker's  view. 

The  meaning  of  these  inflections  has  been  restricted  to  in,  into,  at,  and  on  ;  but 
they  are  the  more  appropriate  forms  of  expressing  the  tlu'ee  first  senses,  there  being 
other  modes,  besides  these,  of  expressing  the  preposition  on.  These  modes  consist  in 
the  use  of  prepositions,  and  will  be  explained  under  that  head.  The  choice  of  the  one 
or  the  other  is,  however,  with  the  speaker.  Generally,  the  inflection  is  employed  when 
there  is  some  circumstance  or  condition  of  the  noun  either  concealed,  or  not  fully 
apparent.  Thus,  muzziniegun-ing  is  the  appropriate  term  for  in  the  book,  and  mat 
also  be  used  to  signify  on  the  book.  But  if  it  is  meant  only  to  signify  on  the  book, 
something  visible  being  referred  to,  the  preposition  ogidj  would  be  used,  that  word 
indicating,  with  certainty,  on,  and  never  in.  Wakiegun-ii.^  ".dicates  with  clearness, 
IN  THE  HOUSE ;  but  if  it  is  necessary  to  say  on  the  house,  and  it  be  meant,  at  the  same 
time,  to  exclude  any  reference  to  the  interior,  the  expression  would  be  changed  to  ogidj 

WAKIEGCN. 

It  will  be  proper  further  to  remark  in  this  place,  in  the  way  of  limitation,  that  there 
is  also  a  separate  preposition  signifying  in  ;  it  is  peenj.  But  tlie  use  of  this  word  does 
not,  in  all  cases,  supersede  the  necessity  of  inflecting  the  noun.  Thus,  the  expression 
pendigain  is  literally  walk  in,  or  enter.  But  if  it  is  intended  to  say,  walk  in  the 
house,  the  local,  and  not  the  simple  form  of  house,  must  be  used ;  and  the  expression 
is  Pendigain  wakiegun-ing.  Enter  in  the  house, — the  verbal  form  which  this  preposition 
peenj  puts  on  having  no  allusion  to  the  act  of  walking,  but  merely  implying  position. 

The  local  inflection,  which  in  the  above  examples  is  ing  and  oong,  is  further  changed 
to  AiNG  and  EENG,  as  the  ear  may  direct,  changes  which  are  governed  chiefly  by  the 
terminal  vowel  of  the  noun.  Examples  will  best  indicate  the  rule,  as  well  as  the 
exceptions  to  it. 

Simple  Form.  Local  Form. 

a.  First  Inflection  in  AiNG. 

Ishkodai Fire.  Ishkod-aing     .   .   In,  or  on,  the  fire. 

Muscodai Prairie.  Muskod-aing   .   .   In,      "      the  prairie. 

Mukkuddai   ....   Powder.  Mukkud-aing  .   .   In,      "      the  powder. 

Pimmedai Grease.  Pimmid-aing   .   .    In,      "      the  grease. 


:   .t 


mr 


LANGUAGE. 


379 


e.  Second  Inflection  in  EENG.' 

Sebe River.  Selxeng In,  or  on,  the  river. 

Nebe Water.  Nob-eeng In,      "      the  water. 

Miskwe Blood.  Miskw-ceng  ....  In,      "      the  blood. 

Unneb Elm.  Unneb-ceng  ....  In,      "      the  elm. 


Kon 
Meen 


i.   Third  Inflcctioti  in  ING. 

Snow.  Kon-ing In,  or  on,  the  snow. 

Berry.  Meen-ing In,      "      the  berry. 


Chiman-ing  .   .    . 

.    In, 

(( 

the  canoe. 

Muzzini  egun-ing 

.    In, 

« 

the  book. 

lection  in  CONG. 

Azhebik-oong   .   . 

.    In, 

or  on 

,  the  rock. 

Gezhig-oong  .   .   . 

.   In, 

« 

the  sky. 

Kimmiwun-oong  . 

.   In, 

ii 

the  rain. 

Akkik-oong  .   .    . 

.   In, 

u 

the  kettle. 

Chimaun Canoe. 

Muzzini  egun  ....   Book. 

o.  Fourth 

Azhibik Rock. 

Gezhig Sky. 

Kimmiwun Rain. 

Akkik Kettle. 

Throw  it  in  the  fire. 

1.  Puggidon  ishkod-aing. 
Go  into  the  prairie. 

2.  Muskodaing  izhan. 
He  is  in  the  elm. 

3.  Unnib-eeng  iau. 

It  is  on  the  water. 

4.  Neb-ceng  attai. 

Put  it  on  the  table. 

5.  Addopowin-ing  atton. 
Look  in  the  book. 

G.  Enaubin  muzzini  egun-ing. 
You  stand  in  the  rain. 

7.  Kimmiwun-oong  ke  nebaw. 
What  have  you  in  that  box. 

8.  Waigonain  aitaig  mukuk-oong. 
Put  it  in  the  kettle. 

9.  Akkik-oong  atton,  or  Podav/ain. 

My  bow  is  not  in  the  lodge ;  neither  is  it  in  the  canoe,  nor  on  the  rock. 
10.  Kauwin   pindig    iause    ne   mittigwaub;    kauwiuh   gia   chemaun-iNG; 
kauwen  gia  ouzhebik-oong. 

*  The  double  vowel  is  here  employed  to  indicate  the  long  sound  of  £  under  accent. 


iH.r 


I; 


380  LANGUAGE. 

An  attentive  inspection  of  these  examplea  will  show,  that  the  local  form  iXTtuins 
either  to  such  nouns  of  the  animate  class  as  are  in  their  nature  inanimates,  or  at  most 
possessed  of  vegetable  life.  And  here  another  conclusion  presses  uixm  us,  that  where 
these  local  terminations,  in  all  their  variety,  are  added  to  the  names  of  animated 
beings,  when  such  names  arc  the  nominatives  of  adjectives  or  adjective  nouns,  these 
words  are  converted  into  terms  of  qualification,  indicating  LIKE,  rkskmiu.ixg,  equal. 
Thus  if  we  wish  to  say  to  a  boy,  he  is  like  a  man,  the  expression  is,  Inin-ing  i/zhenau- 
gozzi ;  or  if  to  a  man,  ho  is  like  a  Ix-ar,  mukkoong  izzhinaugozzi ;  or  to  a  bear,  he  is 
like  a  horse,  Paibaizhikogauzh-ing  izzhinangozzi.  In  all  these  expressions  the  word 
izzm  is  combined  with  the  pronominal  inflection  an  (or  nau)  and  the  animate  termi- 
nation Gozzi.  And  the  inflection  of  the  nominative  is  merely  an  adjective  correspond- 
ence with  izziii  —  a  tenn  indicative  of  the  general  qualities  of  persons  or  animated 
beings.  Where  a  comparison  is  instituted  or  a  resemblance  pointed  out  between 
inanimate  instead  of  animate  objects,  the  inflection  GOZZi  is  changed  to  gwud,  render- 
ing the  expression  which  was,  in  the  animate  form,  izzhinaGOZZi ;  in  the  inanimate 
form,  izzhinacwuD. 

There  is  another  variation  of  the  local  form  of  the  noun  in  addition  to  those  above 
instanced,  indicative  of  locality  in  a  more  general  sense.  It  is  formed  by  oxg  or  nong, 
frequent  terminations  in  geographical  names.  Thus,  from  Ojibwai,  (Chippewa),  is 
formed  OjibwaiNOXG,  Place  of  the  Chippewas;  from  Wamittigozhiwug,  Frenchmen, 
is  fonned  WamittigozhixoxG,  Place  of  Frenchmen ;  from  Ishpatinii,  hill,  Ishpatinong, 
Place  of  the  hill,  &c.  The  termination  ixg  is  also  sometimes  employed  in  this  more 
general  sense,  as  in  the  following  names  of  places :  — 

MonomonikauniXG In  the  place  of  wild  rice. 

MoningwunikaimixG    ....    In  the  place  of  sparrows. 

OngwashaugooshiXG In  the  place  of  the  fallen  tree,  &c. 

2.  The  diminutive  forms  of  the  noun  are  indicated  by  ais,  ees,  os,  and  aus,  as  the 
final  vowel  of  the  word  may  require.  Thus,  Ojibwai,  a  Chippewa,  becomes  Ojibwais, 
a  little  Chippewa;  inin'e,  a  man,  inin-ees,  a  little  man;  amik,  a  beaver,  amik-os, 
a  young  beaver ;  ogimau,  a  chief,  ogim-aus,  a  little  chief,  or  a  chief  of  little  authority. 
Further  examples  may  be  added. 

Liflectmi  in  Ais. 

smrLE  FORM.  DimnnTiTK  roRV. 

A  woman ....  EekAva Eekwaz-ais. 

A  partridge   .     .     .  Pina Pe-nais. 

A  woodcock  .     .     .  Mama Ma-mais. 

An  island ....  Minnis Minnis-ais. 

A  grape     ....  Shomin Shomin-ais. 

A  knife     ....  Mokomahn     ....  Mokomahn-ais. 


i-  f- 


LANGUAGE. 


381 


Lijlix'lion  ill 

EES. 

SIMPLE    rORM, 

niMixrTiVK  roRH 

A  stone     .     .     . 

.     Ossin     .     .     . 

Ossin-ees. 

A  river     .     .     . 

.     Sebi.     .     .     . 

.     Selxes. 

A  pigeon  .     .     . 

.     Omeme .     .     . 

.     Omem-ces. 

A  bison     .     .     . 

.     Pezliiki.     .     . 

.     Pezhik-ees. 

A  potatoe .     .     . 

.     Opin      .     .     . 

.     Opin-ces. 

A  bird  .... 

.     Penaisi  .     .     . 

.     Penaish-ces. 

Inflection  in 

OS. 

A  moose    . 

Moz  .... 

Moz-os. 

An  otter    .     .     . 

.     Negik    .     .     . 

.     Negik-os. 

A  reindeer 

.     Addik   .     .     . 

Addik-os. 

An  elk.     .     .     . 

.     Mushkos    .     . 

.     Mushkos-os. 

A  hare      .     .     . 

.     \VauI)os     .     . 

.     Waiibos-oH. 

A  box  .... 

.     Mukuk.     .     . 

.     Mukuk-os. 

i  II 


Inflection  in  AUS. 

A  bass Ogau Og-aus. 

A  medal    ....     Shoniau Shoni-aus. 

A  lx)wl      ....     Onaugun Onaug-auns. 

A  bed Nibaugun Nibaug-auns. 

A  gun Paushkizzigun     .     .     .     Pausslikizzig-ans, 

A  house    ....     Wakiegun Wakieg-ans. 

In  the  four  la.st  examples,  the  letter  n  of  the  diminutive  retains  its  full  sound. 
The  use  of  diminutives  has  a  tendency  to  give  conciseness  to  the  language.  As  far 
as  the>'  «an  l)e  employed,  they  supersede  the  use  of  adjectives,  or  prevent  the  repetition 
of  them ;  and  they  enable  the  speaker  to  give  a  turn  to  the  expression  which  is  often 
very  successfully  employed  in  producing  ridicule  or  contempt.  When  applied  to  the 
tribes  of  animals,  or  to  inorganic  objects,  their  meaning,  however,  is  very  nearly  limited 
to  an  inferiority  in  size  or  age.  Thus,  in  the  above  examples,  jwizhik-ees  signifies  a 
calf,  omen-ees,  a  young  pigeon,  and  ossin-ees,  a  pebble,  &c.  But  inin-ees  and  ogim-aus 
are  connected  with  the  idea  of  mentsil  or  conventional  as  well  as  bodily  inferiority. 

1.  I  saw  a  little  chief  standing  upon  a  small  island,  with  an  inferior  medal  about 
his  neck. 

Ogimaus  n'gi  waubumau  nebowid  minnisain-sing  onaubikawaun  shoniasun. 

2.  Yamoyden  threw  at  a  young  pigeon. 
Ogi  pukkitaiwun  omeneesun  Yamoyden. 

3.  A  buffldo  calf  stood  in  a  small  stream. 
Pezhikees  ki  nelxjwi  sibecsing. 


I. 


88t 


LANOUAOE. 


4.  The  little  man  fired  at  a  young  niuuiw. 
Ininocs  ogi  pauMliki/.waun  inozusiui. 

5.  Several  diniinutive  Icxjking  bass  were  lying  in  a  small  bowl  upon  a  little  table. 
Ad(lo])<)winaising  attai  onaugauns  abl)iwad  ogausug. 

Some  of  these  sentences  afford  instances  of  the  use,  at  the  same  time,  of  both  the 
local  and  diminutive  inflections.  Thus  the  wonl  minnisainsing  .signifies,  literally, 
IN  THE  LITTLE  ISLAND;  seelwes  iug,  IN  TitE  LITTLE  STREAM;  addopowinais  ing,  ox  THE 

SMALL   TABLE. 


■I-   -I 

il 


3.  The  preceding  forms  are  not  the  only  ones  by  which  adjective  qualities  are 
conferred  upon  the  substantive.  The  syllable  isii,  when  added  to  a  noun,  indicates  a 
bad  or  dreaded  quality,  or  conveys  the  idea  of  iminrfection  or  decay.  The  sound  of 
this  intleetion  is  .'<ometimes  changed  to  eesh,  oosh,  or  aush.  Thus,  chimaun,  a  canoe, 
Ijecomea  chimaiuiish,  a  bad  canoe;  eckwai,  a  woman,  eckwaiwish,  a  bad  woman; 
nebi,  water,  becomes  neljcesh,  strong  water;  mittig,  a  tree,  beotmies  mittigoosh,  a 
decayed  tree;  akkik,  a  kettle,  akkikoosh,  a  worn-out  kettle.  By  a  further  change, 
weljced,  a  t<Kith,  lx*comes  welx-edau-sh,  a  decayed  or  aching  t(K)th,  &c.  Throughout 
these  changes  the  final  sound  of  sii  is  retained,  so  that  this  sound  alone,  at  the  end  of 
a  word,  is  indicative  of  a  faulty  quality. 

In  a  language  in  which  the  expressions  bad  dog  and  faint  heart  are  the  sujierlative 
terms  of  reproach,  and  in  which  there  are  few  words  to  indicate  the  modifications 
between  positively  good  and  positively  bad,  it  must  appear  evident,  that  adjective 
inflections  of  this  kind  must  be  convenient,  and  sometimes  necessary,  modes  of 
expression.  They  furnish  a  means  of  conveying  censure  and  dislike,  which,  though 
often  mild,  is  sometimes  severe.  Thus,  if  one  person  has  had  occasion  to  refuse  the 
offered  hand  of  another  —  for  it  must  be  borne  in  mind,  that  the  Indians  are  now  a 
hand-shaking  people,  as  well  as  the  Europeans  —  the  implacable  party  has  it  at  his 
option,  in  referring  to  the  circumstance,  to  use  the  a<ljective  form  of  hand,  not 
ONiNDJ,  but  oninJEESii,  which  would  be  deemed  contemptuous  in  a  high  degree.  So 
also,  instead  of  odauwai  winii,  a  trader,  or  man  who  sells,  the  word  may  be  changed 
to  odauwai  wininiwisn,  implying  a  bad  or  dishonest  trader.  I*  is  seldom  that  a  more 
jjointed  or  positive  mode  of  expressing  personal  disapprobation  or  dislike  is  required ; 
for,  generally  speaking,  more  is  implied  by  these  modes  than  is  actually  expressed. 

The  following  examples  are  drawn  from  the  inorganic  as  well  as  organic  creation, 
embracing  the  two  classes  of  nouns,  that  the  operation  of  these  foiTOs  may  be  fully 
perceived :  — 


A  bowl 
A  house 


Inflection  in  ISH. 
SIMPLE   FORM. 

Onaugun    .     .     .     . 


Wakiagun 


ADJECTIVE   FORM. 

Onaugun-ish. 
Wakiegun-ish. 


A  \n[Hi 
A  boy 
A  iiiiin     . 
Water       . 

A    HtOllO      . 

A  potiitoc 
A  tly  .  . 
A  bow 

An  otter  . 
A  boiivcr 
A  reiiuleor 
A  kettle  . 
All  axe    . 

A  foot  . 
An  arm  . 
An  ear  . 
A  luH)f  . 
A  rush-mat 


OH«in-ee,sh. 
Opin-c'CMii. 
()-j.'esIl. 
Mittigwaiilv-ccuh. 


LANCJUAOE. 

SIMI'I.E   FOKM.  AI)JK( TIVK    KOUM. 

Opwiuigiwi       ....  Opwaiigiin-isli. 

Kwewezain      ....  KweweziiiH-iKli. 

Inino Ininiw-isb. 

Nebi Nel)-i.sb. 

Iiijfirtion  in  EE.^n. 

Os.iin 

Opin 

Ojec 

Mittigwaub     .     .     . 

LijUctmi  ill  (xiSH. 

Negik Ncfrik-oosli. 

Abmik Ahmik-oo.sh. 

Addik A(l<lik-oosh. 

Akkeek Akkc'ek-<K)sli. 

Wagatikwut    ....  Wagaukwut-uosh. 

JiijUctiun  in  AUSii. 

Ozid 0/id-aiisb. 

Oiiik Onik-ansb. 

Otowug Otowiig-aiisb. 

Wnnnussid      ....  Wunnus.xid-aush. 

Appukwa Appiikw-aiisb. 


Mi 


Those  forms  in  ish  cannot  Ix;  said,  strictly,  to  Ik;  without  analogy  in  the  English,  in 
which  the  limited  number  of  words  terminating  in  isu,  as  saltish,  blackish,  furnish  a 
correspondence  in  soinid  with  the  first  adjective  form. 

It  may  subserve  the  purposes  of  generalization  to  add,  as  the  result  of  the  foregoing 
inquiries,  that  substantives  have  a  diminutive  form,  made  in  ais,  ees,  os,  or  aus ;  n 
derogative  form,  made  in  ish,  eesh,  oosh,  or  aush ;  and  a  local  form,  made  in  aing, 
ceng,  ing,  or  ong.  By  a  principle  of  accretion,  the  second  and  third  may  be  added  to 
the  first  form,  and  the  third  to  the  second. 

Example. 

Kinai'bik. 

"     ens,      implying    Little  serpent. 


Serpent, 

s. 

s,  diminutive 

in 

s,  derogative 

(( 

s,  local 

« 

8,  dim.  and  der. 

tc 

s,  dim.  and  lo. 

(t 

s,  dim.  der.  and  lo. 

ti 

ish, 

Bad  serpent. 

ing, 

In  (the)  serpent. 

onsish 

Little  bad  serpent. 

onsing 

In  (the)  little  serpent. 

onsishing 

In  (the)  little  l)ad  .serpent. 

;    i 


:\'' 


384  LANGUAGE. 

4.  More  attontion  has,  perhaps,  been  be.stowed  upon  these  points  than  their 
importance  denianded,  l)ut  in  giving  anything  like  a  comprehensive  sketch  of  the 
substantive,  they  could  not  be  omitted ;  and  if  mentioned  at  all,  it  became  necessary 
to  pursue  them  through  their  various  changes  and  limitations.  Another  reason  has 
presented  itself.  In  treating  of  an  unwritten  language,  of  which  others  are  to  judge 
chiefly  from  examples,  it  appeared  desirable  that  the  positions  advanced  should  be 
accompanied  by  the  data  u\wn  which  they  respectively  rest;  at  least  l)y  so  much  of  the 
data  employed,  as  to  enable  philologists  to  appreciate  the  justice,  or  detect  the  fallacy 
of  our  conclusions.  To  the  few  who  take  any  interest  in  the  subject  at  all,  minuteness 
will  not  seem  tedious,  and  the  examples  will  be  regarded  with  deep  interest. 

Although  we  have  already  devoted  much  space  to  these  lesser  points  of  inquiry, 
it  will  be  necessary  now  to  point  out  other  inflections  and  modifications  of  the 
substantive,  to  clear  it  from  obscurities,  that  we  may  go  into  the  discussion  of  the 
other  parts  of  speech  unencumbered. 

Of  these  remiiining  forms,  none  is  more  interesting  than  that  whicli  enables  the 
speaker,  by  a  simple  inflection,  to  denote,  without  directly  stating  it,  that  the  individual 
named  has  ceased  to  exist.     This  delicate  mode  of  conveying  melancholy  intelligence, 
or  alluding  to  the  dead,  is  eflected  by  placing  the  object  in  the  pa.st  tense. 
Aiekid-opun  aieko  Garrangularbun. 
So  the  deceased  Garrangula  spoke. 

The  syllabic  HUN,  in  this  sentence,  added  to  the  nouii,  and  oi'iN  added  to  the  verb, 
place  bt)th  in  the  past  tense.  And  although  the  death  of  the  Indian  orator  is  not 
mentioned,  that  fact  would  be  invariably  inferred. 

Names  which  do  not  terminate  in  a  vowel  sound,  require  a  vowel  prefixed  to  the 
tensal  inflection,  rendering  it  obun  or  edun.  Inanimate,  as  well  as  animate  nouns,  take 
these  inflections. 

P  K  E  S  E  N  T .  P  A  S  T    F  O  K  M . 

Tecmnseh Tecumsi-bun. 

Tammany Temmani-bun. 

Skenandoah Skenandoarbun. 

Nos,  (my  father) Nos-ebun. 

Pontiac Pontiac-il)un. 

Wanb  Ojeeg Waub  Ojecg-ibun. 

Tarhc Tarhi-bun. 

Mittig,  (a  tree) Mittig-obun. 

Akkik,  (a  kettle) Akkik-obun. 

Moz,  (a  moose) Mo/xibini. 

By  prefixing  the  particle  TAii  to  these  words,  and  changing  the  inflection  of  the 

aninnite  nouns  to  Ewi,  and  that  of  the  inanimate  to  iwuN,  they  are  rendered  future. 
Thus,  Tab  Pontiac-iwi,  Tah  mittig-iwun,  &c. 


k***"    V, 


LANGUAGE. 


885 


Tlio  immort  for  tlio  .seasons  only  come  under  tlie  operation  of  these  rules  when 
Kpeaking  of  the  year  l^'fore  the  hist,  or  the  year  after  the  next.  The  hist,  and  the 
ensuing  season,  arc  indicated  as  follows. 


Present.  Last. 

Spring  ....   Seegwun    ....  Seegwuii-oong  . 

Summer    .    .    .    Neebin Neebin-oong 

Autumn    .    .    .    Tahgwaugi    .    .    .  Tahgwaug-oong 
Winter     .    .   .   Peebon  .   .    . 


Next. 
Segwung. 
Neebing. 
Tahgwaugiji 


Peel)onoong Peeboug. 


I  spent  last  winter  in  hunting : 
Ninge  nunda-wainjigai  peebonoong. 
I  shall  go  to  Detroit  next  spring: 
Ninjah  izhau  Wauwiiiu  tunong  seegwung. 


5.  Sexual  nouns.  The  mode  of  indicating  the  masculine  and  feminine  having 
been  omitti'd  in  the  preceding  chapter,  as  not  being  essential  to  any  concordance 
■with  the  verb  or  adjective,  nevertheless  marks  a  striking  peculiarity  of  the  language 
—  the  exclusive  use  of  certain  words  by  one  or  the  other  sex.  After  having  appeared 
to  the  speakers  or  founders  of  the  language  a  distinction  not  necessary  to  be  engrafted 
in  the  syntax,  there  are  yet  a  limited  number  of  words  to  which  the  idea  of  sex  so  , 
strongly  attiches,  that  it  would  be  deemed  the  height  of  impropriety  in  a  female  to 
use  the  masculine,  and  in  a  male  to  use  the  feminine  exprcssions. 

Of  this  nature  are  the  words  nee.ii  and  nixdongwai,  both  signifying  my  friend;  but 
the  former  is  appropriated  to  males,  and  the  latter  to  females.  A  Chippewa  cannot, 
therefore,  say  to  a  I'emale,  my  friend ;  nor  a  Cliippewa  woman  to  a  male,  my  friend. 
Such  an  interchange  of  tlie  tenns  would  imply  arrogance  or  indelicac}'.  Nearly  the 
whole  of  their  interjections  —  and  they  aixi  numerous  —  are  also  thus  exclusively 
appr()|)riated ;  and  no  greater  breacli  of  propriety  in  speech  could  be  committed,  than 
a  woinau's  uttering  the  masculine  exclamation  of  surprise,  TiAu!  or  a  man's  descending 
to  the  corresponding  female  interjection,  n'yau  ! 

The  word  neenimosuai,  my  cousin,  on  the  contrary,  can  only  be  applied,  like 
hus1)and  and  wife,  by  a  male  to  a  female,  or  a  female  to  a  male.  If  a  male  wishes  to 
express  this  relation  of  a  male,  the  term  is  neetowis;  and  the  corresponding  female 
term  neendoxcwoosiiai. 

Their  terms  for  uncle  and  aunt  are  also  of  a  two-fold  character,  though  not  restricted 
lilve  the  preceding  in  their  use.  Neemishomai,  is  my  uncle  by  the  father's  side ; 
neezhishai,  my  uncle  by  the  mother's  side.  Neezigwoos,  is  my  paternal  aunt; 
neewishai,  my  maternal  aunt. 

There  an>,  also,  exclusive  words  to  designate  elder  brother  and  younger  brother ; 
but,  what  would  not  be  expected,  after  the  foregoing  examples,  they  are  indiscrimi- 
Pt.  ir._49 


380  LANGUAGE. 

iiately  ajjplied  to  younger  bi-othcra  and  si.stei's.  Neengai,  is  my  elder  brother,  and 
neeniissal,  my  elder  sister;  neeshemai,  my  younger  brother,  or  younger  sister,  and 
may  be  applied  to  any  brother  or  sister  except  the  eldest. 

The  number  of  masculines  and  feminines  and  of  words  to  which  the  idea  of  sex  is 
inseparably  attached,  in  the  usual  acceptation,  is  limited.  The  following  may  be 
enumerated :  — 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

Tnin'i A  man.  Ekwai' A  woman. 

Kwee'  wizais    .   A  boy.  Ekwa'  zais  ....  A  girl. 

Oskinahwai   .    .   A  young  man.  Oskineegekwai   .   .  A  young  woman. 

Akiwaizi    .   .    .   An  old  man.  Mindimo'  ea   .   .   .  An  old  woman. 

Nofsai My  father.  Nin  gah My  mother. 

Ningwis     .    .    .    My  son.  Nin  diinis    ....  My  daughter. 

Ni  ningwun  .    .   My  son-in-law.  Nis  sim My  daughter-in-law. 

Ni  nabaim     .    .    My  husband.  Nimindiinoiniish    .  My  wife. 

Nimieshomiss    .   My  grandfather.  Nokoniiss     ....  My  grandmother. 

Ogimau  ....   A  chief  OgemaukwJl    ...  A  chiefess. 

Addik     ....   A  reindeer.  Neetshauni      ...  A  doe. 

Annimoosh     .    .    A  dog.  Kiskisshai    ....  A  bitch. 

The  se.x  of  the  brute  creation  is  most  connnonly  denoted  by  prefixing  the  worda 
lAUBA,  male,  and  noziia,  female. 

6.  Reciprocal  changes  of  the  noun.  The  pronominal  particles  with  which  verbs  as 
well  as  substantives  are  generally  encumbered,  and  the  habit  of  using  them  in 
particular  and  resti'icted  senses,  leaves  but  little  occasion  for  the  employment  of  either 
the  present  or  past  infinitive.  Most  verbs  arc  transitivos.  A  Chippewa  does  not  say, 
I  love,  without  indicating,  by  an  inflection  of  the  verb,  the  object  beloved ;  and  thus 
the  expression  is  constantly,  I  love  him,  or  her,  &c.  Neither  does  the  infinitive  appear 
to  be,  generally,  the  ultimate  form  of  the  verb. 

In  changing  their  nouns  into  verbs,  it  will  not,  therefore,  be  expected  that  the 
change  should  uniformly  result  in  the  infinitive,  for  which  there  is  ko  little  use ;  but  in 
such  of  the  personal  forms  of  the  various  moods  as  circumstances  may  require.  Most 
commonly,  the  third  person  singular  of  the  indicative,  and  the  second  person  singidar  of 
the  imperative,  are  the  simplest  aspects  under  which  the  verb  appears ;  and  hence  these 
forms  have  been  sometimes  mistaken  for  the  ultimate  of  these  moods,  and  thus  reported. 
There  are  some  instances,  however,  in  which  the  infinitive  is  employed.  Thus,  although 
an  Indian  cannot  say  I  love,  thou  lovest,  &c.,  without  employing  the  objective  fonns  of 
the  verb  to  love,  yet  he  can  say  I  laugh,  I  cry,  &c.,  expressions  in  which,  the  action 
being  confined  to  the  speaker  himself,  there  is  no  transition  demanded.  And  in  all 
similar  instances,  the  present  infinitive,  witli  the  proper  pronoun  prefixed,  is  employed. 


LANGUAGE. 


887 


There  are  several  modes  of  transforming  a  substantive  into  a  verb.     The  following 
examples  will  supply  the  rules,  so  far  as  is  known,  which  govern  these  cliangcs :  — 


Chcniaun,  a  canoe  . 
Paushkizzigun,  a  gun 
.Tecsedicgun,  a  broom 
Weedjeeagun,  a  lielper 

OjibwUi,  a  Chippewa 


Indicative. 
Chemai,  he  paddles  . 
Paushkizzigai,  he  fires 
Jeesidiegai,  he  sweeps 
Weedokagai,  he  helps 
f  Ojibwamoo,  he  speaks  ] 


I  M  !■  E  K  A  T  I  V  E . 

Chiniain,  paddle  thou. 

Pauwlikizzigain,  fire  thou. 

Jeesidyigain,  sweep  thou. 

Weedjoei-wain,  help  thou, 
f  Ojibwamoon,  speak  thou 
(  Chippewa. 


'  1  Chippewa. 

Another  class  of  nouns  is  converted  into  the  first  person,  indicative,  in  the  fol 
lowinff  manner:  — 


Monido  .     .     . 

.     A  spirit. 

Ne  monidouw . 

I  (am)  a  spirit. 

Wassaiau    .     . 

.     Light. 

Ne  wassaiauw . 

I  (am)  light. 

Ishkodai      .     . 

.     Fire. 

Nin  dishkodaiw    . 

I  (am)  fire. 

Weendigo    .     . 

.     A  monster. 

Ne  weendigouw    . 

I  (am)  a  monster. 

Addik     .     .     . 

.     A  deer. 

Nin  daddikoow     . 

I  (am)  a  deer. 

Wakiegun   . 

.     A  house. 

Ni  wakicguniw    . 

I  (am)  a  house. 

Pinggwi  .     . 

.     Dust,  ashes. 

Nim  Binggwiew  . 

I  (am)  dust,  &c. 

The  word  am,  included  in  parentheses,  is  not  in  the  original,  unless  we  may  supiwse 
the  terminals  ouw,  auw,  iew,  oow,  to  be  derivatives  from  law.  The.^e  changes  are 
reciprocated  by  the  verb,  which,  as  often  as  occasion  requires,  is  made  to  put  on  a 
substantive  form.  The  particle  win,  added  to  the  indicative  of  the  verb,  converts  it 
into  a  substantive.     Thus  — 


Keegido     .     . 

He  speaks. 

Keegidowin     .     . 

Speecli. 

Paushkizzigai 

He  fires. 

Paushkizzigaiwin 

Ammunition. 

Agindasoo .     . 

He  counts. 

Agindassoowin    . 

Numbers. 

Wahyiazhiggai   . 

He  cheats. 

Wahyiazhiggaiwin 

Fraud. 

Minnikwai     . 

He  drinks. 

Minnikwaiwin     . 

Drink. 

Kubbaslii  .     .     . 

He  encamps. 

Kubbaisliiwin .     . 

An  encampment 

Megauzoo .     .     . 

He  fights. 

Megauzoowin  .     . 

A  fight. 

Ojecngai    .     . 

He  kisses. 

Ojeendiwin     .     . 

A  kiss. 

Annoki     .     . 

He  works. 

Annokiwin      .     . 

Work. 

Paupi   .     .     . 

He  laughs. 

Paupiwin   .     .     . 

Laughter. 

Pemaudizzi    . 

.     He  lives. 

Pomiiudaiziwin    . 

.     Life. 

Onwaibi     .     . 

.     He  rests. 

Onwaibiwin    .     . 

.     Rest. 

Annamiau 

He  prays. 

Annamiauwin 

Prayer. 

Nebau  .     .     . 

He  sleeps. 

Nebauwin  .     .     . 

Sleep. 

Odauwai    .     . 

He  trades. 

Odauwaiwin   .     . 

Trade. 

^1 


888 


LANGUAGE. 


Adjectives  are  likewise  thus  turned  into  substantives :  — 


li  ''•  :■ 


Keozhaiwaudizzi 
Minwaindum  . 
Keezhaizhawizzi 
Kittimaugizzi  . 
Aukkoossi  .     . 
Kittimishki 
Nishkaudizzi   . 
Baikaudizzi 


He  generous. 
He  happy. 
He  industrious. 
He  poor. 
He  sick. 
He  lazy. 
He  angry. 
She  chaste. 


Keezhaiwaudizziwin 
Minwaindumowin 
Keezhaizhawizziwin 
Kittimaugizziwin  . 
Aukkoossiwin  .     . 
Kittimishkiwin     . 
Nishkaudizziwin  . 
Baikaudizziwin     . 


Genero..ity. 

Happiness. 

Industry. 

Poverty. 

Sickness. 

Laziness. 

Anger. 

Chastity. 


In  order  to  place  the  substantives  thus  formed  in  the  third  person,  corresponding 
with  the  indicative  from  which  they  were  changed,  it  is  necessary  only  to  prefix  the 
proper  pronoun.     Thus,  Ogeezhaiwadizziwin,  his  generosity,  &c. 

7.  Compound  substantives.  The  preceding  examples  have  been  given  promiscuously 
from  the  various  classes  of  words,  primitive  and  derivative,  simple  and  compound.  Some 
of  these  words  express  but  a  single  idea,  as  nos,  father  —  gah,  mother,  moz,  a  moose 
—  kaug,  a  porcupine  —  mong,  a  lfK)n  —  and  appear  to  be  incapable  of  further  division. 
All  such  words  may  be  considered  as  primitives,  although  some  of  them  may  be 
contractions  of  dissyllabic  roots.  There  are  also  among  the  primiti ,  "=■  a  number  of 
dissyllables,  and  possibly  some  trisyllables,  which,  in  the  present  state  of  our  analytical 
knowledge  of  the  language,  may  be  deemed  both  simple  and  primitive.  Such  are 
neebi,  water ;  ossin,  a  stone ;  goezis,  the  sun ;  nodin,  wind.  But  it  may  be  premised, 
as  a  principle  which  our  investigations  have  rendered  probable,  that  all  poly.syllabic 
words,  all  words  of  three  syllables,  so  far  as  examined,  and  most  words  of  two 
syllables,  are  compounds. 

The  application  of  a  syntax,  formed  with  a  view  to  facilitate  the  rapid  conveyance 
of  ideas  by  consolidation,  may,  it  is  presumable,  have  early  led  to  the  coalescence  of 
words,  by  which  all  the  relations  of  object  and  action,  time  and  person,  were  expressed. 
And  in  a  language  which  is  only  spoken,  and  not  written,  the  primitives  would  soon 
become  obscured  and  lost  in  the  multiform  appendages  of  time  and  person,  and  the 
recondite  connexion  of  actor  and  object.  And  this  process  of  amalgamation  would  be 
a  progressive  one.  The  terms  that  sufficed  in  the  condition  of  the  simplest  state  of 
nature,  or  in  a  given  latitude,  would  vary  with  their  varying  habits,  institutions  and 
migrations.  The  introduction  of  new  objects  and  new  ideas  would  recjuire  the 
invention  of  new  words,  or  what  is  much  more  probable,  existing  terms  would  be 
modified  or  compounded  to  suit  the  occasion.  No  one  who  has  paid  much  attention 
to  the  subject,  can  have  escaped  noticing  a  confirmation  of  this  opinion  in  the  extreme 
readiness  of  nur  western  Indians  to  bestow,  on  the  instant,  names,  and  appropriate 
names,  on  any  new  object  presented  to  them.  A  readiness  not  attributable  to  their 
having  at  command  a  stock  of  generic  poly.syllables  —  for  these  it  would  Ikj  very 


LANGUAGE. 


389 


awkward  to  wield  —  but  as  appears  more  probable,  to  the  powers  of  the  syntax,  which 
permits  the  resolution  of  new  compounds  from  existing  roots,  and  often  concentrates, 
as  remarked  in  another  place,  the  entire  sense  of  the  parent  words  upon  a  single 
syllable,  and  sometimes  upon  a  single  letter. 

Thus  it  is  evident  that  the  Chippewas  possessed  names  for  a  living  tree  mitttg,  and 
a  string  aiaub,  before  they  named  the  bow  mittigwaub  —  the  latter  being  compounded 
under  one  of  the  simplest  rules  from  the  two  former.  It  is  further  manifest  that  they 
had  named  earth  Akki,  and  aubik  (any  solid,  stony  or  metallic  mass),  before  they 
bestowed  an  appellation  upon  the  kettle,  akkeek,  or  akkik,  the  latter  being  derivatives 
from  the  former.  In  process  of  time  these  compounds  became  the  bases  of  other 
compounds,  and  thus  the  language  became  loaded  with  double  and  triple,  and  rpiad- 
ruple  compounds,  concrete  in  their  meaning,  and  formal  in  their  utterance. 

When  the  introduction  of  the  metals  took  place,  it  became  necessary  to  distinguish 
the  clay  from  the  iron  pot,  and  the  iron  from  the  copper  kettle.  The  original  com- 
pound, akkeek,  retained  its  first  meaning,  admitting  the  adjective  noun  piwaubik 
(itself  a  compound)  iron,  when  aj^plied  to  a  vesf  .1  of  that  kind,  making  piwaubik 
akkeek,  iron  kettle.  But  a  new  combination  took  place  to  designate  the  copper  kettle, 
MiSKWAUKEEK,  rcd-mctal  kettle ;  and  another  expression  to  denote  the  brass  kettle, 
OZAWAUBIK  AKKEEK,  yellow-mctal  kettle.  The  former  is  made  up  from  miskowaubik, 
copper  (literally  REi)-METAL  —  from  miskwa,  red,  and  aubik,  the  generic  above  men- 
tioned) and  AKKEEK,  kettle.  Ozawaubik,  brass,  is  from  ozawau,  yellow,  and  the 
generic  aubik  —  the  term  akkeek  being  added  in  its  separate  form.  It  may,  however, 
be  used  in  its  connected  form  of  wukkeek,  making  the  compound  expression  ozaw aubik 

WUKKEEK. 

In  naming  the  horse,  paibaizhikiigazhi,  i.  e.  the  animal  with  solid  hoofs,  they  haiO 
seized  upon  the  feature  which  most  strikingly  distinguished  the  horse  from  the  cleft- 
footed  animals,  which  were  the  only  species  known  to  them  at  the  period  of  the 
discovery.  And  the  word  itself  alTords  an  example  at  once,  both  of  their  powers  of 
concentration,  and  brief,  jet  accurate  description,  which  it  may  be  worth  while  to 
analjze.  Paizhik  is  one,  and  is  also  used  as  the  indefinite  article  —  the  only  article 
the  language  possesses.  This  word  is  further  used  in  an  adjective  sense,  figuratively, 
indicating  united,  solid,  undivided.  And  it  acquires  a  plural  signification  by  doubling, 
or  repeating  the  first  syllable,  with  a  slight  variation  of  the  second.  Thus,  Pai-baizhik 
denotes  not  one  or  an,  but  several ;  and  when  thus  used  in  the  context,  renders  the 
noun  governed  plural.  Oskuzh  is  the  nail,  claw,  or  horny  part  of  the  foot  of  beasts, 
and  supplies  the  first  substantive  member  of  the  compound  GAUzii.  The  final  vowel 
is  from  AiiWAisi,  a  beast ;  and  the  marked  o,  an  inseparable  connective,  the  oflice  of 
which  is  to  make  the  two  members  coalesce  and  harmonize.  The  expression  thus 
formed  becomes  a  substantive,  specific  in  its  application.  It  may  be  rendered  plural 
like  the  primitive  nouns,  may  be  converted  into  a  verb,  has  its  diminutive,  derogative 


'  ^1 


i.  i, 


890  LANGUAGE. 

and   local   form,   and,   in   short,  is   subject   to  all   the  modifications  of  other  sub- 
stantives. 

Most  of  the  modem  nouns  are  of  this  complex  character.  And  they  appear  to  have 
been  invented  to  designate  objects,  many  of  which  were  necessarily  unknown  to  the 
Indians  in  the  primitive  ages  of  their  existence.  Others,  like  their  names  for  a  copper- 
kettle  and  a  horse,  above  mentioned,  can  date  their  origin  no  farther  back  than  the 
period  of  the  discovery.  Of  this  number  of  na.scent  words  are  most  of  their  names 
for  those  distilled  or  artificial  liquors  for  which  they  are  indebted  to  Europeans.  Their 
name  for  water,  neebi,  for  the  fat  of  animals,  weenin,  for  oil  or  grease,  pimmidai,  for 
broth,  NAUBOB,  and  for  blood,  miskwi,  belong  to  a  very  remote  era,  although  all  but  the 
first  api^ear  to  bo  compounds.  Their  names  for  the  tinctures  or  extracts  derived  from 
the  forest,  and  u.scd  as  dyes  or  medicines,  or  merely  as  agreeable  drinks,  are  mostly 
founded  upon  the  basis  of  the  word  aubo,  a  liquid,  although  this  word  is  never  used 
alone.     Thus  — 

Shomin-aubo   .   .    .   Wine   .    .    .    From  Shomin,  a  grape;  iibo,  a  liquor. 

Ishkodaiw-aubo  .    .   Spirits.    .    .    From  Ishkodai,  fire,  &c. 

Mishiniin-aubo    .    .   Cider   .   .    .   From  Mishimin,  an  apple,  &c. 

Totosh-aubo    .   .   .   Milk    .   .    .   From  Tiitiish,  the  female  breast,  &c. 

Shiew-aubo  ....    Vinegar  .    .   From  Sheewun,  sour,  &c. 

Annibeesh-aubo  .   .   Tea  ....   From  Annibeshun,  leaves,  &c. 

Ozhibicgun-aubo .    .   Ink  ....   From  Ozhibiegai,  he  writes,  &c. 

In  like  manner  their  names  for  the  various  implements  and  utensils  of  civilized 
life,  are  based  upon  the  word  jeegun,  one  of  those  primitives  which,  although  never 
disjunctively  used,  denotes,  in  its  modified  forms,  the  various  senses  implied  by  our 
words  instrument,  contrivance,  machine,  &c.  And,  by  prefixing  to  this  generic  a 
substantive,  verb,  or  adjective,  or  parts  of  one  or  each,  an  entire  new  class  of  words  is 
formed.     In  these  combinations  the  vowels  e  and  o  are  sometimes  used  as  connectives. 

Keeshkebu-jeegun   .   .   A  saw From  Keezhkeezhun,  v.  a.  to  cut. 

Seesebo-jeegun     ...   A  file From  Seese,  to  rub  off,  &c.  [&c. 

Wassakooiien-jeegun  .   A  candle From  Wa-ssakood.a,  bright ;  biskoona,  flame, 

Beesebo-jeegun     ...   A  coffee-mill    .   .    .  From  Beesau,  fine  grains,  &c. 

Minnikwad-jeegun  .   .   A  drinking-vessel   .  From  Minnekwai,  he  drinks,  &c. 

Tashkcebod-jecgun  .   .    A  saw-mill  ....  From  Tau.shkii,  to  split,  &c. 

Mudwaiabeed-jeegun  .   A  violin From  Mudwllwai,  sound ;  iiiilb,  a  string,  &c. 

Sometimes  this  termination  is  shortened  into  gun,  as  in  the  following  instances :  — 

Onaugun A  dish. 

Tikkiuau-gun A  cradle. 

Nebau-gun A  bed. 

Puddukkie-gun A  fork. 


i 


T-r* 


LANGUAGE.  801 

Piiggiiumaii-yiin A  war-club. 

Opwau-gim A  pipe. 

Wassaitshic-gun A  window. 

Wakkic-gun A  house. 

Podaliwau-gun A  fire-place. 

Shcemau-gun A  lance. 

Another  class  of  derivatives  is  formed  from  wian,  indicating,  generally,  an  undressed 
skin.     Thus — 

Muk-wian    ....   A  bear-skin    ....  From  Mukwah,  a  bear,  and  wyaun,  a  skin. 

Wazhuak-w''       .   .   A  muskrat-skin     .   .  From  Wazhusk,  a  muskrat,  &c. 

Wabos-win     .    .    .    A  rabbit-.skin     .    .    .  From  Wabos,  a  rabbit,  &c. 

Negik-wian  ....   An  otter-skin    .    .    .  From  Ncgik,  an  otter,  &c. 

Ojegi-wian    ....   A  fisher-skin     .   .   .  From  Qjoeg,  a  fisher,  &c. 

Wabizhais-ewian  .    .   A  marten-skin  .   .   .  From  Wabizhais,  a  marten,  &c. 

Wabiwyan,  a  blanket,  and  bubbuggiwyan,  a  shirt,  are  also  formed  from  this  root. 
As  the  termination  wian  is  chiefly  restricted  to  undressed  skins,  or  peltries,  that  of 
WAiGiN  is,  in  like  manner,  generally  applied  to  dressed  skins,  or  to  cloths.     Thus — 

Monido-waigin    ....    Blue  cloth,  strouds   .    .  From  Monido,  spirit,  &c. 

Misk-waigin Red  cloth From  Miskwa,  red,  &c. 

Nondii-waigin     ....    Scarlet. 

Beezhiki-waigin  ....    A  buffixlo-robe    ....  From  Peezhiki,  a  buffalo,  &c. 

Addik-waigin A  cariboo-skin  ....  From  Addik,  a  cariboo,  &c. 

Ozhauwushk-waigin  .   .   Green  cloth From  Ozhawushkwa,  green. 

An  interesting  class  of  substantives  is  derived  from  the  third  person  singular  of  the 
present  indicative  of  the  verb,  by  changing  the  vowel  sound  of  the  first  syllable,  and 
adding  the  letter  d  to  that  of  the  last,  making  the  terminations  in  aid,  ad,  ced,  id,  ood. 
Thus,  Pimmoossa,  he  walks,  becomes  pamoossad,  a  walker. 
AID — Munnissai  .   .   .   He  chops.  Manissaid  ...  A  chopper. 

Ozhibcigai  ...    lie  writes.  Wazhibcigaid .    .  A  writer. 

Nundowainjeegai  lie  hunts.  Nundowainjeegaid  A  hunter. 

AD  —  Neebau    ....   He  sleeps.  Nabaud  ....  A  sleeper.        [net. 

Kwaubahwa  .    .   He  fishes  with  scoop-net.   Kwiaubahwaid  .  A  fisher  with  scoop- 

Puggidowau  .   .   He  fishes  with  seine.  Paugidowald  .   .  A  fisher  with  seine. 

EED — Annokee     .   .   .   He  Avorks.  Anokeed  ....  A  worker. 

Jeessake .   .   .   .   He  juggles.  Jossa'-eed  .    .    .A  juggler. 

Munnigohee   .   .   He  pulls  bark.  Mainigobced  .   .  A  bark-puller. 

ID  —  Neemi He  dances.  Naumid  ....  A  dancer. 

Wccsinni    .   .    .   He  eats,  Waussinid  .    .   .  An  cater. 

Pinuiudizzi ...   lie  lives.  Paiinaudizzid  .   .  A  living  being. 


>'  )l 


LANGUAGE. 


h' 


rni 


OOD — Nuf^timoo    .   .    .   lie  sings.  Naigumood  .   .   .  A  niiigor. 

Keegido  ....    He  speaks.  Kaugidood  ...  A  speaker. 

Keewoniinoo  .    .   lie  lies.  Kauwunimood    .  A  liar. 

This  class  of  words  is  rendered  plural  in  IG  —  a  termination  which,  after  d  final  in 
the  singular,  has  a  soft  pronunciation,  as  if  written  jig.  Thus,  naumid,  a  dancer,  is 
sounded  naumidjig,  dancers. 

The  derogative  form  is  given  to  these  generic  substantives  by  introducing  ish,  or 
simply  sh,  in  place  of  the  d,  and  changing  the  latter  to  kid,  making  the  terminations 
in  ai,  aishkid,  in  au,  aushkid,  in  e,  eeshkid,  in  i,  ishkid,  and  in  oo,  ooshkid.  Thus, 
naindowainjeegaid,  a  hunter,  is  changed  to  naindowainjeegaishkid,  a  bad  or  unprofit- 
able hunter.  Naibaud,  a  sleeper,  is  changed  to  naibaushkid,  a  sluggard.  Jossakeed, 
a  juggler,  to  jossakccshkid,  a  vicious  juggler.  Wausinnid,  an  eater,  to  waussinishkid, 
a  gormandizer.  Kaugidood,  a  speaker,  kaugidooshkid,  a  babbler.  And  in  these  cases 
the  plural  is  added  to  the  last  educed  form,  making  kaugidooshkidjig,  babblers,  &c. 

The  word  nittii,  on  the  contrary,  prefixed  to  these  expressions,  renders  them  com- 
plimentary. For  instance,  nitta  nalgumood,  is  a  fine  singer;  nitta  kagidood,  a  ready 
speaker,  &c. 

Flexible  as  the  substantive  has  been  shown  to  be,  there  are  other  forms  of 
combination  that  have  not  been  adverted  to  —  forms  by  which  it  is  made  to  coalesce 
with  the  verb,  the  adjective,  and  the  preposition,  producing  a  numerous  class  of 
comiTOund  expressions.  But  it  is  deemed  most  proper  to  defer  the  discussion  of  these 
forms  until  we  reach  their  several  appropriate  beads. 

Enough  has  been  exhibited  to  demonstrate  its  prominent  grammatical  rules.  It  is 
not  only  apparent  that  the  substantive  possesses  number  and  gender,  but  it  also 
undergoes  peculiar  modifications  to  express  locality  and  diminution,  to  denote  adjective 
qualities,  and  to  indicate  tense.  It  exhibits  some  curious  traits  connected  with  the 
mode  of  denoting  the  masculine  and  feminine.  It  is  modified  to  express  person,  and 
to  distinguish  living  from  inanimate  masses.  It  is  rendered  possessive  by  a  peculiiir 
inflection,  and  provides  particles,  imder  the  shape  either  of  prefixes  or  suffixes, 
separable  or  inseparable,  by  which  the  actor  is  distinguished  from  the  object  —  and 
all  this,  without  changing  its  proixjr  substantive  character,  without  putting  on  the 
aspect  of  a  pseudo  adjective,  or  a  pseudo  verb.  Its  changes  to  produce  compounds 
are,  however,  its  most  interesting,  its  most  characteristic  trait.  Syllable  is  heaped 
upon  syllable,  Avord  upon  word,  and  derivative  upon  derivative,  until  its  vocabulary  is 
crowded  with  long  and  pompous  phrases,  most  formidable  to  the  eye. 

So  completely  transpositive  do  the  words  appear,  that,  like  chessmen  on  a  board, 
their  elementarv  syllables  can  be  changed,  at  the  will  of  the  player,  to  form  new 
combinations  to  meet  new  contingencies,  so  long  as  they  are  changed  in  accordance 
with  certain  general  principles  and  conventional  rules;  in  the  application  of  which, 
however,  much  depends  upon  the  will  or  skill  of  the  player.    What  is  most  surprising. 


LANGUAGE. 


893 


all  thcHe  changes  and  combinations,  all  those  (jualifieations  of  the  object,  and  distinc- 
tions of  the  person,  the  time,  and  the  place,  do  not  supersede  the  use  of  adjectives, 
and  pronouns,  and  verbs,  and  other  parts  of  speech,  which  arc  here  woven  into  the 
texture  of  the  noun,  in  their  elementary  and  disjunctive  forms. 


§4.   Observations  on  the  Adjective:  — 


1.  Its  Distinction  into  two  Classes,  denoted  by  the  Presence  or  Absence  of  ViUdi/y. 
Examples  of  the  Animates  and  Inanimates.  Mwle  nf  their  Conntctiun  with 
Subsiantices.  How  Pronouns  are  applied  to  these  Derivatives,  and  the  Manner 
of  Forming  Compound  Terms  from  Adjective  Bases,  to  describe  the  various  natural 
phenomena.  The  Apiplicution  of  these  Principles  in  common  conversation  and  in 
the  description  of  natural  and  artificial  objects.  2.  Comparison.  '6.  Pjsidve  and 
Negative  Forms.  4.  Adjectives  always  preserve  the  Distinction  of  Number. 
5.  Numerals,  Arithmetical  Capacity  of  the  Language.  The  Unit  exists  in 
Duplicate. 


i 


1.  It  has  been  remarked,  that  the  distinction  of  words  into  animates  and  inanimates 
is  a  principle  intimately  inter\voven  throughout  the  structure  of  the  language.  It  is, 
in  fiict,  so  deeply  imprinted  upon  its  grammatical  forms,  and  is  so  jwrpetually 
recurring,  that  it  may  be  looked  upon,  not  only  as  forming  a  striking  peculiarity  of  the 
language,  but  as  constituting  the  fundamental  principle  of  its  structure,  from  which 
all  other  rules  have  derived  their  limits,  and  to  which  they  have  been  made  to 
conform.  No  class  of  words  appears  to  have  escaped  its  impress.  Whatever  concords 
other  laws  impose,  they  all  agree,  and  are  made  subservient  in  the  establishment 
of  this. 

It  might  appear  to  be  a  useless  distinction  in  the  adjective,  when  the  substantive  is 
thus  marked ;  but  it  will  be  recollected  that  it  is  in  the  plural  of  the  substantive  only, 
that  the  distinction  is  marked.  And  we  shall  presently  have  occasion  to  show,  that 
redundancy  of  forms  is,  to  a  considerable  extent,  obviated  in  practice. 

For  the  origin  of  the  principle  itself,  we  need  look  only  to  nature,  which  endows 
animate  bodies  with  animate  properties  and  qualities,  and  vice  versa.  But  it  is  due  to 
the  progenitors  of  the  tribes  who  speak  this  language,  to  have  invented  one  set  of 
adjective  symbols  to  express  the  ideas  peculiarly  appropriate  to  the  former,  and 
another  set  applicable  exclusively  to  the  latter.  And  to  have  given  the  words  good 
and  bad,  black  and  white,  -  reat  and  small,  handsome  and  ugly,  such  modifications  as 
Pt.  II.  — 50 


i-*r 


p 


^  ll 


394 


h  A  N  Ci  U  A  0  E . 


■  !li- 


niv  pnictioiillv  coinix'tont  to  imliciito  tlio  j;('iu'r;il  iiatinv  of  tlio  dliji'ot.s  ivfcnvd  to, 
whether  providotl  with,  or  (K-.'^titute  of,  tlie  vital  i)riiu-ii>U\  And  not  only  so,  hut  hy 
tlic  figurative  use  of  these  forms,  to  exalt  inanimate  masses  into  the  ehiss  of  living 
beings,  or  to  strip  the  latter  of  the  proiK-rties  of  life  —  a  principle  of  much  imjiortance 
to  their  pnhlic  s{)eakers. 

Tliis  distinction  is  shown  in  the  followinj^  examples,  in  which  it  will  I)e  oltserved 
that  the  intlection  izzi  generally  denotes  the  personal,  and  Ai',  ix,  and  wi'i»,  the 
impersonid  forms. 

A  D  J  .    I  N  A  N  I  M  A  T  E  .  A  D  J  .     A  N  I  M  A  T  K . 

Bad Monaud-ud Monaud-izzi. 

Ugly Gushkoonaug-wud      .     .     .     Gushkoonaug-ozzi. 

Beautiful     .     .     .     Bishegaindaug-wud    .     .     .     Bishegaindaug-oozzi. 

Strong    ....     Song-mi Song-ozzi. 

Soft Nok-un Nok-ozzi. 

Hard Mushkow-au Mushkow-izzi. 

Smooth  ....     Shoiskw-au  .     .     .     .     .     .     Shoisk-<K)zzi. 

Black      ....     Mukkuddaw-au     ....     Mukkuddaw-izzi. 

White     ....     Waubishk-au Wauhishk-izzi. 

Yellow    ....     Ozahw-au Ozahw-izzi. 

Red Miskw-au Miskw-izzi. 

Blue Ozhahwushkw-au  ....     Oshahwushkw-izzi. 

Sour Sheew-un Sheew-izzi. 

Sweet     ....     Weeshkob-un Weeshob-izzi. 

Light      ....     Naung-un Naung-izzi. 

It  is  not,  however,  in  all  cases,  by  mere  modifications  of  the  adjective,  that  these 
distinctions  are  expressed.  Words  totally  different  in  sound,  and  evidently  derived 
fi-om  radically  different  roots,  are  in  some  few  instances  employed,  as  in  the  following 
examples. 

Adj.   Inanimate. 
Good     ....     Onishcshin     . 

Bad Monaudud 

Large    ....     Mitshau    .     . 

Small    ....     Pungee Uggaushi. 

Old Geekau Gitizzi. 

It  may  be  remarked  of  these  forms,  that  although  the  impersonal  will,  in  some 
instances,  take  the  personal  inflections,  the  rule  is  not  reciprocated ;  and  minno,  and 
mindiddo,  and  gitizzi,  and  all  words  similarly  situated,  remain  unchangeably  animates. 
The  word  pimgee  is  limited  to  the  expression  of  quantity;  and  its  corresjiondent, 
uggaushi,  to  size  or  quality.  Kisheda,  (hot)  is  restricted  to  the  heat  of  a  fire; 
Keezhauta,  to  the  heat  of  the  sun.     There  is  still  a  third  term  to  indicate  the  natural 


Adj.  Animate. 
.     .     Minno. 
.     .     Mudjee. 
.     .     Mindiddo. 


LANGUAGE. 


305 


heut  of  the  IkkI^  Kr/zizoo.  MitMlmu  (Inrj^c)  is  gcnorally  applied  to  countries,  lakes, 
rivers*,  &e.;  iniiiiliildo,  to  the  Ijody ;  niul  gitshee,  iiulisciiminiitely.  Onishishin,  niul  it8 
correspondent  Oni.shi.sii«ha,  signify  handsome  or  fair,  as  well  as  good.  Kwonaiiilj  (aa) 
and  Kwonaiidjewun  (ai)  mean,  strictly,  handsome,  and  imply  nothing  further.  Minno 
is  the  approi)riate  jKirsonal  term  for  good.  Mudjee  and  Monaudud  may  reciprocally 
change  genders;  the  first  by  tlie  addition  of  i-E-E,  and  the  seconil  liy  altering  id  to  izzi. 

Distinctions  of  this  kind  are  of  considerable  importance  in  a  practical  point  of  view, 
and  their  observance  or  neglect  are  noticed  with  scrupulous  exactness  by  the  Indians, 
The  want  of  inanimate  forms  to  such  words  as  happy,  sorrowful,  brave,  sick,  &e., 
creates  no  confusion,  as  inanimate  nouns  cannot,  strictly  s|)eaking,  take  uiM)n  them- 
selves such  qualities.  And  when  they  do  —  as  they  sometimes  do,  by  one  of  those 
extravagant  figures  of  speech  which  are  used  in  tiieir  tales  of  translbrmations,  tlic 
animate  forms  answer  all  purposes.  For,  in  these  tales,  the  whole  nmterial  creation 
may  be  clothed  with  animation.  The  rule,  as  exhibited  in  practice,  is  limited,  with 
suflicient  accuracy,  to  the  boundaries  prescribed  by  nature. 

To  avoid  a  repetition  of  forms,  were  the  noun  and  the  adjective  both  to  Ik?  employed 
iu  their  usual  relation,  the  latter  is  endowed  with  a  pronominal  or  substantive  inllec- 
tion.  And  the  use  of  the  noun  in  its  separate  form  is  thus  wholly  superseded.  Thus, 
onishishin  (ai)  and  onishishsha  (aa)  Ijecome  wanishishing,  that  which  is  go<Kl,  or  fair; 
and  wanishishid,  he  who  is  good  or  fair.  The  following  examples  will  exhibit  this 
rule,  under  each  of  its  forms:  — 

Compound,  on  Noun-Adjectives,  Animate. 

Black Mukkuddaw-izzi Makuddaw-izzid. 

White Waubishk-izzi Wiaubishk-izzid. 

Yellow Ozahw-izzi Wazauw-izzid. 

Red Miskw-izzi JVIashk-oozid. 

Strong Song-izzi Swon-izzid. 

Compound,  ou  Noun-Adjectives,  Inanimate. 

Black Mukkuddaw-au Makuddaw-aug. 

White Waubishk-au Wiaubishk-aug. 

Yellow Ozahw-au Wazhauw-aug. 

Red Miskw-au Maiskw-aug. 

The  animate  forms  in  these  examples  will  be  recognized  as  exhibiting  a  fnrtl\>r 
extension  of  the  rule,  mentioned  in  a  preceding  pai)er,  by  which  substantives  are 
formed  from  the  indicative  of  the  verb  by  a  pemiutation  of  the  vowels.  And  these 
forma  are  likewise  rendered  plural  in  the  manner  there  mentioned.  They  also  undergo 
changes  to  indicate  the  various  iwrsons.  For  instance,  onishisha  is  thus  declined  to 
mark  the  person:  — 


896 


LANGUAGE. 


WoniHiiiHh-oyaiin     ....  I  (am)  good,  or  fiiir. 

Waiii.><hiHh-eyiin       ....  Thou  (art)  good,  or  fair. 

Wnnishisli-id lie  (i.s)  gotnl  or  fair. 

Wanishish-oyaiing  ....  We  (arc)  gocnl  or  fair,  (ox.) 

WaiUMliish-eynng     ....  We  (aiv)  giHMl  or  fair,  (in.) 

Wani^luHliH'yaig      ....  Ye  (an-)  good  or  fair. 

WaniwhiMli-idjig They  (are)  good  or  fair. 


II  Ji,    ! 


i.  l»l 


The  inanimate  forms,  being  without  person,  arc  simply  rendered  phiral  by  in, 
changing  maiskwaiig  to  maiskwaiig-in.  &c.  &c.  Tlie  verbal  signification  wiiich  these 
forms  assume,  as  indicated  in  the  words  am,  art,  is,  arc,  is  to  be  sought  in  the  pcrmu- 
tative  change  of  the  first  s^llaldc.  Tlius,  o  is  changed  to  wa,  muk  to  mauk,  waub  to 
wi-aub,  ozau  to  wauzau,  misk  to  niaisk,  &c.  Tlic  pronoun,  as  is  usual  in  the  double 
compounds,  is  fonncd  wholly  by  the  inflections  eyaun,  eyun,  &c. 

The  strong  tendency  of  the  adjective  to  assume  a  personal  or  pronomico-substantive 
form,  leads  to  the  einployment  of  many  words  in  a  particular  or  exclusive  sense. 
And  in  any  future  practical  attempts  with  the  language,  it  will  lx>  found  greatly  to 
facilitate  its  acquisition,  if  the  adjectives  an*  arranged  in  distinct  cla.«ses,  separated  by 
this  characteristic  principle  of  their  application.  The  examples  we  have  given  are 
chiefly  those  which  may  be  considered  strictly  animate  or  inaninuite,  admit  of  double 
forms,  and  are  of  general  use.  Many  of  tlie  examples  recorded  in  the  original 
manuscripts  employed  in  these  in(|uiries  are  of  a  more  concrete  character,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  a  more  limited  use.  Thus,  shangwewe  is  a  weak  ptisoii,  iiokaugunuue,  n 
weak  drink,  nokaugwud,  a  weak  or  soft  piece  of  wood.  Sussagau  is  tine,  hut  can  only 
be  applied  to  personal  appearance;  beesau  indicates  fine  grains.  Keewushkwa  is 
giddy ;  and  keewushkwalK'c,  giddy  with  drink,  both  lx?ing  restricted  to  the  third 
person.  Songun  and  songizzi  are  the  personal  and  impersonal  I'ornis  of  strong,  as 
given  above.  But  mushkowaugumme  is  strong  drink.  In  like  niiiiiiier  the  two  words 
for  hard,  as  above,  are  restricted  to  solid  substances.  Sunnuhgud  is  hard  (to  endure.) 
Waindud  is  easy  (to  perform.)  SangediUi  is  bravo ;  shaugediiil  cowardly ;  kcezhinz- 
howozzi,  active;  kizheekau,  swift;  onaunegoozzi,  lively;  minwaindiun,  happy;  gush- 
kaindum,  .sorrowful ;  but  all  these  forms  are  confined  to  the  third  person  of  the  indi- 
cative, singidar,  Pibbigwun  is  a  rough  or  knotted  substance.  Pubbiggoozzi,  a  rough 
person.  Kesnwau  is  sharp.  Keenaubikud,  a  sharp  knife,  or  stone.  Keezhawbikeda, 
is  hot  metal,  n  hot  stove,  &c.  Keezbaugummeda,  is  hot  water.  Wubudjeetan,  is 
useful,  a  useful  thing.  Wauweeug,  is  frivolous — any  thing  frivolous  in  word  or  deed. 
Tubbushish,  appears  to  be  a  general  term  for  low.  Ishpimming,  is  high  in  the  air. 
Ishpau,  is  applied  to  any  high  fixture,  as  a  house,  &c.  Ishpaubikau,  is  a  high  rock. 
Taushkaubikau,  a  .split  rock. 

These  combinations  and  limitations  meet  the  inquirer  at  every  step.     They  are  the 


LANGUAGE. 


no7 


current  phnisoH  of  the  liiiigtiago.  Tlu'y  proseiit  short,  ready,  ami  ofton  iKMiutifiil  modes 
ofexpreiHioii.  And,  as  tliey  shed  lij;ht  Iwith  upon  tlie  idiom  and  genius  of  tlie  hinguiige, 
1  siiall  not  seruple  to  add  further  examples  and  ilhistrations.  Ask  a  Cliipiiewa  thu 
name  for  rock,  and  lie  will  answer  aizhkisik.  Tiic  generic  iniiM)rt  of  auhik  lias  been 
explained.  A.sk  him  the  name  for  red  rock,  and  he  will  answer  miskwaubik,  —  for 
white  riK'k,  and  he  will  answer  waubauhik,  —  for  hhu'k  rock,  nud\kuddawaul)ik, — 
for  yeUow  rcK'k,  o/,ahwaul)ik,  —  for  green  rock,  ozahwnshkwauhik,  —  for  bright  rock, 
wassayaul)ik,  —  for  smooth  rock,  shoishkwaubik,  &c. ;  compounds  in  which  the  words 
iH'd,  white,  black,  yellow,  &c.,  unite  with  aubik.  Pursue  this  inc^uiry,  and  the 
following  forms  will  be  elicited:  — 


Miskwanbik-ud  .  . 
Wanhaubik-ud  .  . 
Mukk  iiddawji  id>ik-ud 
()/,ak\  nibik  id  .  . 
M'assayaul>iU-ud  .  . 
Sh(jiskwaubik-ud  . 


I  M  r  E  R  s  o  N  A  1.. 

.    .   .   .   Tt  (is)  a  red  rock. 

.    ...    It  (is)  a  white  rock. 

,    It  (is)  a  black  rock. 

,    It  (is)  a  yellow  rock. 

,   It  'is)  a  bright  rock. 

It  (is)  a  sm(X)th  rock. 


Miskwa  .••:!  i:i\  .  . 
Waul)a"l)ik-i,'i  .  . 
Mukkuddawaubik-izzi 
()zahwaubik-izzi  .  . 
Wassayaulyik-iz'zi  .  . 
Shoiskwaubik-izzi     . 


Iek  .SOX  a  l. 

.    .    .    ir  lis)  a  red  rock. 

.    .    .    ile  (is)  a  white  rock. 

lie  (is)  a  biiic'.   rock. 

lie  (is)  a  3'oU.)W  rock. 

He  (is)  a  bright  rock. 

He  (is)  a  smooth  rock. 

Add  BIX  to  these  ternis,  and  they  are  made  to  have  passed  awii\',  —  i)refix  TAii  to 
them,  and  their  futu^^'  appearance  is  indicated.  The  word  "  is"  in  the  translations, 
although  marked  with  parentheses,  is  not  deemed  to  be  whftUy  gratuitous.  There  is, 
strictly  speaking,  an  idea  of  existence  given  to  these  compounds,  by  the  particle  au,  in 
aubik,  which  seems  to  be,  indirectly,  a  derivative  from  that  great  and  fundamental 
root  of  the  Language  —  iau.  Bik  is,  apparently,  the  radix  of  the  expri*ssion  for 
"  rock." 

Let  this  mode  of  interrogation  be  cmtinued,  and  xtoiuled  to  other  adjectives,  or 
the  same  luljectives  applied  to  other  objects,  and  results  e(piMlly  legubir  and  numerous 
■will  lie  obtained.  Minnis,  we  shall  be  told,  is  an  island  ;  miskominnis,  a  red  island ; 
iMitivkuddaminnis,  a  black  island;  waubcminnis,  a  white  island,  &c.  Annokwut  is  a 
cloud ;  miskwaunakwut,  a  red  cloud ;  mukkuddawukwut,  a  black  cloud ;  waubahn- 
okwut,  a  white  cloud ;  ozahwushkwahnokwut,  a  blue  cloud,  &c.  Net  be  is  the  specific 
term  for  water,  but  is  not  generally  used  in  combination  with  the  adjective.     The 


I 


398 


LANGUAGE. 


!;ll*'l!  \ 


lit 


word  guma,  like  auho,  appears  to  be  a  generic  term  for  water,  or  potable  lionids. 
Hence  the  following  terms :  — 


Gitshee   .   .   . 

Great  . 

.   Gitshig  guma  .   .   . 

Great  water. 

Nokun    .   .   . 

Weak  . 

.   Nokau  guma  .   .   . 

Weak  drink. 

Muslikowau  . 

Strong  . 

.   Mus<hkowau  guma . 

Strong  drink. 

Weeshkobun . 

Sweet  . 

.   Weeshkobau  guma . 

Sweet  drink. 

Shewun  .    .   . 

Sour     . 

.    Sliewau  guma    .   . 

Sour  drink. 

Weesugun  . 

Bitter  . 

.   Weesugau  guma    . 

Bitter  drink. 

Minno     .   . 

Good    . 

.   Minwau  guma    .   . 

Good  drink. 

Monaudud  . 

Bad      . 

.   Mahnau  guma   .    . 

Bad  drink. 

Miskwau    . 

Red      . 

.    Miskwau  guma  .   . 

Red  drink. 

Ozahwa  .    . 

Yellow    . 

.   Ozaliwau  guma  .   . 

Yellow  drink 

Weenun  .    .   . 

Dirty  .    . 

.   Weenau  guma    .    . 

Dirty  water. 

Pecnud    .    . 

Clean  .   . 

.   Peenau  guma .   .   . 

Clean  water. 

From  minno  and  from  n)onaudud,  good  and  bad,  are  derived  the  following  terms:  — 
Minnopogwud,  it  tastes  well ;  ininnopogooz/.i,  he  tastes  well ;  mauzhepogwud,  it  tastes 
bad  ;  mauzhepogoozzi,  he  t.astes  bad ;  minnomaugwud,  it  smells  good ;  minnouuuigoozzi, 
he  smells  good;  mauzhemaugwud,  it  smells  bad;  mauzhcmaugoozzi,  he  smells  bad. 
The  inflections,  gwnd  and  izzi,  here  employed,  are  clearly  indicative,  as  in  other 
combinations,  of  the  words  H  and  him. 

Baimwa  is  sound.  Baimwawii,  the  passing  sound.  Minwilwii,  a  pleasant  sound. 
Maunwilwa,  a  disagreeable  sound.  Mudwayaushkau,  the  sound  of  waves  dashing  on 
the  shore.  Mudwayaunnemud,  the  sound  of  winds.  Mudwayaukooshkau,  the  sound 
of  falling  trees.  Mudwiikuniigiskin,  the  sound  of  a  person  falling  upon  the  earth. 
jMudwaysin,  the  sound  of  any  inanimate  nuiss  falling  on  the  earth.  These  examples 
might  be  cmitinued  ixd  in'initum.  Every  niodilicati(m  of  circumstances,  almost  every 
])eculiarity  of  thought,  is  expressed  by  some  modification  of  the  orthography.  Enough 
has  been  given  to  prove  that  the  adjective  combines  itself  with  the  substantive,  the 
verb,  and  tho  pronoun ;  that  the  combinations  thus  produced  are  numerous,  afford 
concentrateu  modes  of  conveying  ideas,  and  oftentimes  happy  terms  of  expression. 
Numerous  and  pi-evalent  as  these  forms  are,  they  do  not,  however,  preclude  the  use  of 
adjectives  in  their  simple  forms.  The  use  of  the  one  or  the  other  appears  to  be 
generally  at  the  option  of  the  speaker.  In  most  cases,  brevity  or  euphony  dictates  the 
choice.  Usage  results  from  tho  application  of  these  principles.  There  may  Ik;  rules 
resting  upon  a  broader  basis,  but  if  so,  they  do  not  appear  to  be  very  obvious.  Pei'haps 
the  simple  adjectives  are  oftcncr  employed  before  verbs  and  nouns,  in  the  first  and 
second  persons  singular. 

Ningee  minno  neebau  nabun     ....     I  have  slept  well. 
Ningee  minno  weesin I  have  eaten  a  good  meal. 


LANGUAGE.  30!) 

Niii'ft'e  iiiiuno  pimiuooswa I  liiive  walked  well,  or  a  gooil  (li.staiici'. 

Kiigiit  ininnu  gee/.liigud It  (is)  a  very  pleasant  day. 

Kwaiiandj  ningodalis I  have  a  handsome  garment. 

Ke  minno  iau  null  ? Arc  you  well  V 

Aimeende  ain  deyun  ? What  alls  you  ? 

Kcezhamoncdo  aupiidush  shawaineniik   .  God  prosper  you. 

Aupadush  sha\vaiiidaug(K)zzeyuii    .     .     .  Good  luok  attend  you. 

Aupadush  nau  kinwaiir/.h  pimmaudizziyun  May  you  live  long. 

Onauneegoozzin Bo  (thou)  cheerful. 

Ne  niinwaindum  waubumenaun     ...  I  (am)  glad  to  see  you. 

Kwanaudj  kweeweezaifis A  pretty  boy. 

Kagat  songsediiil lie  (is)  a  brave  man. 

Kagat  onishishsha She  (is)  handsome. 

Gitshee  kinozee He  (is)  very  tall. 

Uggausau  bawizzi She  (is)  slender. 

Gitshee  sussaigau He  (is)  fine  dressed. 

Bishegaindaugoozziwug  meegwunug    .     .  They  (are)  beautiful  feathers, 

Ke  daukoozzinuh ? Arc  you  sick? 

Monaudud  maundun  muskeekee    .     .     .  This  (is)  bad  medicine. 

Monaudud  aindauyun My  place  of  dwelling  (is)  bad. 

Aindauyaiui  mitshau My  place  of  dwelling  (is)  large. 

Ne  mittigwaul)  onisbishsha My  bow  (is)  good. 

Ne  bikwukon  monaududon But  my  arrows  (arc)  bad. 

Ne  niinwaindaun  appaukoozzcgun  ...  I  love  mild  or  mixed  tobacco. 

Kauweekau   neezbika  ussamau   ne  sug- )  „      ,  ,  .  • 

>  But  1  never  smoke  pure  tobacco, 
guswaunausee.  j 

Monaudud  maishkowauguniig   ....     Strong  drink  (is)  bad. 

Kceguhgee  baudjcegonaun It  makes  us  foolish. 

Gitshee  monedo  necbe  ogee  ozheton    .     .     The  Great  Spirit  made  water. 

Inineewug  dush  ween  ishkodawau bo  ogee  )  , 

,  ,  >  But  man  made  whiskey  (nrc-liquor). 

ozhetonahwaun.  j 

These  expressions  arc  put  down  promiscuously,  embracing  verbs  and  nouns  as  they 
presented  themselves,  and  without  any  effort  to  supjiort  the  opinion — which  may  or 
may  not  be  correct  —  that  the  elementary  forms  of  the  adjective  arc  most  commonly 
required  before  verbs  and  nouns  in  the  first  and  second  persons.  The  Jlnglish  expres- 
sion is  thrown  into  Indian  in  the  most  natural  manner,  and,  of  course,  without  always 
giving  adjective  for  adjective,  or  noun  for  noun.  Thus,  God  is  rendered,  not  "  Monedo" 
but  '"  Geezha  monedo,"  mkkciful  si'IRIT  ;  good  luck  is  rendered  by  the  compound  phrase 
"  shawaindaugozzeyun,"  indicating,  in  a  very  general  sense,  the  influence  of  ktndne.'js 
OH  BENEVOLENCE  ON  SUCCESS  IN  LIFE;  " songediiil"  is,  alone,  A  khave  man,  and  the  word 


I 


h 


\l 


400 


LANGUAGE. 


"  kilgilt"  prefixed  is  a»  adverb.  In  the  expression  "  mild  tobacco,"  the  adjective  is 
entirely  dispensed  with  in  the  Indian,  the  sense  being  suilicientlj  rendered  by  the 
compound  noun  "  appaukoozzegun,"  which  always  means  the  Indian  weed,  or  smoking 
mixture.  "  Ussamau,"  on  the  contrary,  without  the  adjective  signifies  "pure  tobacco." 
"  Bikwukon"  signifies  blunt,  or  blunt-headed  arrows.  Assowaun  is  the  barbed  arrow. 
Kwiinand  kwceweczains  means,  not  simply  "  pretty  boy,"  but  pretty  little  boy,  and 
there  is  no  mode  of  using  the  word  boy  but  in  this  diminutive  form,  —  the  word 
itself  being  a  derivative  from  ke-we-we  (wife)  with  the  regular  diminution  in  ains. 
Onaunecgoozzin  embraces  the  pronoun,  verb,  and  adjective,  be  thou  cheerful.  In  the 
last  phrase  of  the  examples,  "  man"  is  rendered  men  (inincewug)  in  the  translation,  as 
the  term  max  cainiot  be  employed  in  the  general  plural  sense  it  conveys  in  this 
connection  in  the  original.  The  word  "  whiskey"  is  rendered  by  the  compound  phrase 
ishkodawaulM),  literally  fire-liquor,  a  generic  for  all  kinds  of  ardent  spirits. 

These  oljservations  on  the  literal  terms  will  convey  some  conception  of  the  difference 
between  the  two  idioms,  although,  from  the  limited  nature  and  object  of  the  examples, 
tliey  will  not  indicate  the  full  extent  of  this  difference.  In  giving  any  thing  like  the 
spirit  of  the  original,  much  greater  deviations  in  the  written  forms  must  appear.  And 
in  fact,  not  only  the  structure  of  the  language,  but  the  mode  and  order  of  thought  of 
the  Indians,  is  .so  essentially  different,  that  any  attempts  to  preserve  the  English  idiom, 
to  give  letter  for  letter,  and  word  for  woixl,  must  go  far  to  render  the  translation 
wholly  spiritless. 


2.  Varied  as  the  adjective  is  in  its  changes,  it  has  no  comparative  inflection.  A 
Chippewa  cannot  say,  that  one  substance  is  hotter  or  colder  than  another;  or  of  two  or 
more  substances  unequally  heated,  that  this  or  that  is  the  hottest  or  coldest,  without 
employing  adverbs  or  accessory  .adjectives.  And  it  is  accordingly  by  adverbs  and 
accessary  adjectives,  that  the  degrees  of  comparison  ai'e  expressed. 

Pemmaudizziwin  is  a  very  general  substantive  expressitm,  indicating  the  tenor  of 
BEING  OR  LIFE.  Izzlicwabozziwin  is  a  term  near  akin  to  it,  but  more  appropriately 
applied  to  the  acts,  conduct,  manner,  op  personal  deportment  of  life.  Hence  the 
expressions :  — 


Nem  bimonaud-izziwin 
Ke  bimmaud-izziwin    . 
0  pimmaud-izziwin 
Nin  dozhewJib-ozziwin 
Ke  dizhewiib-izziwin    . 
0  IzzhewUb-izziwin 


.  .  My  tenor  of  life. 

.  .  Thy  tenor  of  life. 

.  .  It  is  tenor  of  life,  &c. 

.  .  My  personal  deportment. 

.  .  Thy  personal  deportment. 

.  .  His  personal  dejwrtment,  &c. 

To  form  the  positive  degree  of  comparison  from  these  terms,  minno,  good,  and 
mudjee,  bad,  are  introduced  between  the  pronoun  and  verb,  giving  rise  to  some 
permutations  of  the  vowels  and  consonants,  which  affect  the  sound  only.     Thus:  — 


LANGUAGE. 


401 


Ne  minno  pimmaud-izziwin  . 
Ke  minno  pimmaud-izziwin  . 
Minno  pimmaud-izziwin    .     . 
Ne  mudjee  pimmaud-izziwin 
Ke  mudjee  pimmaud-izziwin 
Mudjee  pimmaud-izziwin  .     . 


My  good  tenor  of  life. 
Thy  good  tenor  of  life. 
His  good  tenor  of  life. 
My  bad  tenor  of  life. 
Thy  bad  tenor  of  life. 
His  bad  tenor  of  life. 


To  place  these  forms  in  the  comparative  degree,  nahwudj,  more,  is  prefixed  to  the 
adjective ;  and  the  superlative  is  denoted  by  mahmowee,  an  adverb,  or  an  adjective,  as 
it  is  variously  applied,  but  the  meaning  of  which  is,  in  this  connexion,  most.  The 
degrees  of  comparison  may  therefore  be  set  down  as  follows :  — 


Ihaitive.  Kisheda        .     . 
Comp.     Nahwudj  kisheda 
Super.     Mahmowee  kisheda 

Your  manner  of  life  is  good 
Your  manner  of  life  is  better 
Your  manner  of  life  is  best 
His  manner  of  life  is  best  . 
Little  Turtle  was  brave  .  . 
Tecumseh  was  braver  .  . 
Pontiac  was  bravest    .     .     . 


Hot,  (restricted  to  the  heat  of  a  fire.) 
More  hot. 
Most  hot. 

Ke  dizzhewabizziwin  onishishin. 

Ke  dizzhewJibizziwinnahwudj  onishishin. 

Ke  dizzhewabizziwinmahwowe^  onishishin. 

Odizzhewabizziwinmahmowee  onishishinin. 

Mikkonakons  songedaa  bun. 

Tecumseh  nalnvudj  songedaa  bun. 

Pontiac  mahwoweo  songedaa  bun. 


3.  The  adjective  assumes  a  negative  form  when  it  is  preceded  by  the  adverb.  Thus 
the  phrase  songedaa,  he  is  brave,  is  changed  to  Kahween  songediiasEE,  he  is  not  brave. 

Positive.  Negative. 

Neebwaukah   .   .   .  He  is  wise.  Kahween  neebwaukah-see.  He  is  not  wise. 

Kwonaudjewee   .   .  She  is  handsome.  Kahween   kwonaudjewee-see.    She    is  not 

handsome. 

Oskineegee  ....  He  is  young.  Kahween  oskinecgee-see,  He  is  not  young. 

Shaugweewce  .   .    .  He  is  feeble.  Kahween  shaugweewee-see,  He  is  not  feeble. 

Geekkau He  is  old.  Kahween  geekkau-see.  He  is  not  old. 

Mushkowizzi  .   .   .  He  is  strong.  Kahween  mushkowizzi-see.  He  is  not  strong. 

From  this  rule  the  indeclinable  adjectives  —  by  which  is  meant  those  adjectives 
which  do  not  put  on  the  personal  and  impersonal  forms  by  inflection,  but  consist  of 
radically  different  roots  —  form  exceptions. 

Are  you  sick  ? Ke  dahkoozzi  nuh  ? 

Are  you  not  sick  ? Kahween  ke  dahkoozzi-see  ? 

I  am  happy Ne  minwaindum. 

Pt.  H.  — 51 


402  LANGUAGE. 

I  am  unhappy Kahween  nc  minwuinduz-see. 

His  manner  of  life  is  bad  ....   Mudjee  ozzhewabizzi. 

His  manner  of  life  is  not  bad   .   .   Kahween  mudjee-izzhewabizzi-see. 

It  is  large Mitshau  muggud. 

It  is  not  large Kahween  mitshau-seenon. 

In  these  examples,  the  declinable  adjectives  are  rendered  negative  in  aee.  The 
indeclinable  remain  as  simple  adjuncts  to  the  verbs,  and  the  latter  put  on  the 
negative  form. 


4.  In  the  hints  and  remarks  which  have  now  been  furnished  respecting  the 
adjective,  its  powers  and  inflections  have  been  shown  to  run  parallel  with  those  of  the 
substantive,  in  its  separation  into  animates  and  inanimates,  —  in  having  the  pronominal 
inflections,  —  in  taking  an  inflection  for  tense,  (a  topic,  which,  by  the  way,  has  been 
very  cursorily  passed  over,)  and  in  their  numerous  m  ^Aiucations  to  form  the  com- 
pounds. This  parallelism  has  also  been  intimated  to  hold  good  with  respect  to 
number — a  subject  deeply  interesting  in  itself,  as  it  has  its  analogy  only  in  the 
ancient  languages,  and  it  was  therefore  deemed  best  to  defer  giving  examples  till 
they  could  be  introduced  without  abstracting  the  attention  from  other  points  of 
discussion. 

Minno  and  mudjee,  good  and  bad,  being  of  the  limited  number  of  personal  adjectives, 
which  modem  usage  permits  being  applied,  although  often  improperly  applied,  to 
inanimate  objects,  they,  as  well  as  a  few  other  adjectives,  foim  exceptions  to  the  use 
of  number.  Whether  we  say,  a  good  man  or  a  bad  man,  good  men  or  bad  men,  the 
words  minno  and  mudjee  remain  the  same.  But  all  the  declinable  and  coalescing 
adjectives  —  adjectives  which  join  on,  and,  as  it  were,  melt  into  the  body  of  the 
substantive,  take  the  usual  plural  inflections,  and  are  governed  by  the  same  rules,  in 
regard  to  their  use,  as  the  substantive  —  personal  adjectives  requiring  personal 
plurals,  &c. 

Adjectives  Animate. 

Singular. 

Onishishewe  mishemin Good  apple. 

Kwonaudjewe  eckwa     Handsome  woman. 

Songedaa  inine Brave  man. 

Bishegaindaugoozzi  penasee Beautiful  bird. 

Ozahwizzi  ahmo Yellow  bee. 

Plural. 

Onishishewe-wug  mishemin-ug    ....   Good  apples. 
Kwonaudjewe-wug  eekwii-wug     ....   Handsome  women. 


LANGUAGE.  408 

Songediltl-wiig  inine-wug Brave  men. 

Bishegnindaugoozzi-wug  pcenasee-wug   .   Beautiful  birds. 
Ozahwozzi-wug  ahra-og Yellow   bees. 

Adjectives,  Inanimate. 

Sitigidar. 

Onisliishln  mittig Good  tree. 

Kwonaudj  chemaun Handsome  canoe. 

Mouaudud  isbkoda Bad  fire. 

Weeshkobun  aidetaig Sweei;  fruit. 

Plural 

Onisbisbin-tin  mittig-on Good  trees. 

Kwonaudjewun-on  tobeinaun-un    .   .   .  Handsome  canoes. 

Monaudud-on  isbkod-iin Bad  fires. 

Wecshkobun-on  aidetaig-in      Sweet  fruits. 

Peculiar  circumstances  are  supposed  to  exist  in  o  ior  to  render  tbe  use  of  tbi 
adjective,  in  tbis  connexion  witb  tbe  noun,  necessary  and  propei.  But  in  ordinary 
instances,  as  tbe  narration  of  events,  tbe  noun  would  precede  tbe  adjective,  and 
oftentimes,  particularly  wbere  a  second  allusion  to  objects  previously  named  became 
necessary,  tlie  compound  expressions  would  be  used.  Tims,  instead  of  saying  tbe 
yellow  bee,  waizaliwozzid  would  distinctly  convey  tbe  idea  of  tbat  insect,  had  tlie 
specks  been  before  named.  Under  similar  circumstances,  kainwaukoozzid,  .agausbeid, 
songaiwnemud,  musbkowawnemud,  would  respectively  signify  a  tall  tree,  a  small  fly,  a 
strong  wind,  a  hard  wind.  And  tbese  terms  would  become  plural  in  jig,  wbich,  as 
before  mentioned,  is  a  mere  modification  of  IG,  one  of  the  five  general  animate  plural 
inflections  of  tbe  language. 

Kagat  wabwinaudj  abbenajeeug,  is  an  expression  indicating  they  are  very  handsome 
chUdren.  Bubbeeweezbeewug  monetosug,  denotes  small  insects.  Minno  neewugizzi,  is 
good-tempered,  (be  good-tempered.)  Mawsbininewug  izzi,  is  bad-tempered,  both  having 
their  plural  in  icuff.  Nin  nuneenabwaindum,  I  am  lonesome.  Nin  nun  eenabwain- 
dawmin.  We  (excluding  you)  are  lonesome.  Waweea,  is  a  term  gen^^  ...lly  used  to 
express  the  adjective  sense  of  round.  Kwi,  is  the  scalp.  (Weenikwi,  his  scalp.) 
Hence,  weewukwon,  bat;  waweewukwonid,  a  wearer  of  tbe  hat;  and  its  plural, 
waweewukwonidjig,  wearers  of  hats — tbe  usual  term  applied  to  Europeans,  or  white 
men  generally.  These  examples  go  to  prove,  tbat  under  every  form  in  wbich  tbe 
adjective  can  be  traced,  whether  m  its  simplest  or  most  compound  state,  it  is 
susceptible  of  number. 

5.  Tbe  numerals  of  tbe  language  are  converted  into  adverbs  by  tbe  inflection  ing, 
making  one,  once,  &c.     Tbe  unit  exists  in  duplicate. 


I 


I 


I 


>A' 


AIM  t" 


» 


SI  !■ 

ir 


m 


% 


404  LANGUAGE. 

Pazliik :  Biizlilk     .     One,  general  unit     ..).,,.  -. 

.         >  Aubeding  ....     Once. 
Inguot      ....     One,  arithmetical  unit       j 

Necsli      ....  Two Neeshing  ....  Twice. 

Niswee     ....  Three Nissing      ....  Thrice. 

Neewin     ....  Four Neewing    ....  Four  times. 

Nauuin     ....  Five Nauning    ....  Five  times. 

N'goodwaswa     .     .  Six N'goodwautshing     .  Six  times. 

Nee.»hwauswa     .     .  Seven Neeshwautshing      .  Seven  times. 

Shwauswe     .     .     .  Eight Shwautshing  .     .     .  Eight  times. 

Shongusswe   .     .     .  Nine Shongutshing      .     .  Nine  times. 

Medauswa     .     .     .  Ten Mcedaushing  .     .     .  Ten  times. 

These  decimal  inflections  can  be  carried  as  high  as  they  can  compute  numbers. 
After  reaching  ten,  they  repeat,  ten  and  one,  ten  and  two,  &c.  to  twenty.  Twenty  is 
a  comiwund  signifying  two  tens,  c'  irty,  three  tens,  &c.,  a  mode  which  is  carried  up  to 
one  hundred,  nirgoodwauk.  Wauk  then  becomes  the  word  of  denomination,  com- 
bining with  the  names  of  the  digits,  until  they  reach  a  thousand.  Medauswauk, 
literally  TEN  hundred.  Here  the  terms  twice,  thrice,  &c.  are  prefixed  to  medauswauk, 
till  reaching  ten  thousand.  Medautch  medauswauk,  called  by  the  more  southerly 
bands,  iiingoodwak  dushing  ningoodwak,  one  hundred  times  one  hundred.  This  is 
the  probable  extent  of  certain  computation  with  the  masses. 

The  count,  however,  is  carried  on,  by  placing  before  the  term  for  ten  thousand, 
clipped  of  a  member,  the  term  ningoodwauk  dusching,  that  is,  one  hundred  times, 
rendering  the  expression,  literally  and  clearly,  one  hundred  thousand.  In  this 
juxtaposition  of  words,  the  mental  operation  is  clear. 

Educated  men,  speaking  the  Indian  language,  perceive  no  difficulty  in  carrying 
forward  the  numeration  to  one  million,  and  even  a  billion,  the  term  for  the  latter  of 
which  is  MEDAUSWAUK — medauswauk — OSHE  medauswauk — that  is,  thousand  thou- 
sand by  one  thousand. 

We  have  indicated  how  far  it  is  thought  the  masses  can  realize  this  scheme,  but 
regard  this  doubtful  in  relation  to  any  fixed  sum  of  money. 

Tlie  terms  first,  nittum,'  and  last,  isiikwaudj,  are  freely  and  definitely  used  in 
conversation. 

'  I  found  the  first  word  in  the  Hebrew  bible  (bcrcsbith')  had  its  equivalent  in  this  tongue  in  the  term 
Wi-aisli-kiiJ.  The  nieani.ig  of  this  is  exactly  the  same,  but  the  examples  will  serve  to  show  how  widely  the 
two  languages  generally  differ  in  their  sounds  of  derivative  words. 


m 


LANGUAGE. 


405 


§5.    Nature  and  Principles  of  the  Pronoun:  — 


1.  Its  distinction  Into  pre/onnadve  and  auh/ormative  classes.  Personal  Pronouns.  The 
distinction  of  an  inclusive  and  exclusive  form  in  the  number  of  the  first  person 
plural.  2.  Modifications  of  the  j)ersonal  pronouns  to  imply  existence,  indict- 
dtudity,  jMssession,  otonership,  position,  and  other  accidents.  3.  Declension  of 
pronouns  to  answer  the  imrpcse  of  the  auxiliary  verbs.  4.  Suhfor  mat  ices,  how 
employed  to  mark  the  j^rsons.  5.  Relative  pronouns  cotisidered ;  their  applica- 
tion to  the  causative  verbs.  G.  Demonstrative  2^1'onouns ;  their  separation  into 
two  classes,  animates  ami  inanimates.  Examples  of  their  use.  7.  Generic 
conclusions. 


1.  Pronouns  are  buried,  if  we  may  so  say,  in  the  structure  of  the  verb.  In  tracing 
them  back,  to  their  primitive  forms,  through  the  almost  infinite  variety  of  modifications 
which  they  assume  in  connexion  with  the  verb,  substantive,  and  adjective,  it  will 
facilitate  analysis  to  group  them  into  preformative  and  subfomiative  classes ;  terms  which 
have  alreatly  l)tH'ii  made  use  of,  and  which  include  li.  0  pronominal  prefixes  and  suffixes. 
They  admit  of  the  further  distinction  of  separable  and  inseparable.  By  separable  is 
intended  those  forms  which  have  a  meaning  by  themselves,  and  are  thus  distinguished 
from  the  inflective  and  subformative  pronouns,  and  pi'onominal  particles ;  significant 
only  in  connexion  with  another  word. 

Of  the  first  class  are  the  personal  pronouns  Nee  (I),  Kee  (Thou),  and  Wee,  or  O, 
(He  or  she.)      They   are  declined,  to  form   the   plural  persons,   in   the  following 
manner :  — 
I  .   .   .   .  Nee.     Mine  or  my  .   Neen.     We,  I  and  you  or  ye  .   .  Keen  owind.  (in.) 

Our "        " 

We,  I,  and  not  you  or  ye  Neen  owind.  (ex.) 

Our "         « 

Thou   .   .   Kee.     Thine  or  thy .   Keen.     Ye Keen  owau. 

Your "        " 

He  or  she  Wee  or  0.  His  or  hers .   Ween.    They Ween  owau. 

Their "        " 

Here  the  plural  of  the  possessive  mine,  or  my,  in  the  inclusive,  is  made  by  k  the 
pronominal  sign  of  the  second  peraon,  and  the  usual  substantive  inflection  in  win,  with 
a  terminal  d.  The  letter  o  is  a  mere  connective,  without  meaning.  The  exclusive 
form  diflers  from  it  solely  in  having  the  pronominal  sign  of  the  first  person  in  the 
initial  syllable. 


! 


4U6 


LANGUAGE. 


The  second  person  is  rendered  plural  by  the  particle  Au,  instead  of  wm.  This 
particle  appears  to  be  derivative  from  the  verb  ieau,  and  is  a  general  personal  plural. 
The  pronominal  sign  of  the  third  person,  w,  prefixed  to  it,  is  governed  by  that  of  the 
eecond  person  K. 

Tlie  third  person  has  its  plural  in  the  common  sign  of  w,  in  the  first  and  third  syllable. 

The  double  plural  of  the  first  person,  of  which  both  the  rule  and  examples  have 
Ix'en  incidentally  given  in  the  remarks  on  the  substantive,  is  one  of  those  peculiarities 
of  the  language,  which  may,  perhcaps,  serve  to  aid  in  a  comparison  of  it  with  other 
dialects,  kindred  and  foreign.  As  a  mere  conventional  agreement  for  denoting  whether 
the  person  addressed  be  included  or  excluded,  it  may  be  regarded  as  an  advantage  to 
the  language.  It  enables  the  speaker,  by  the  change  of  a  single  consonant  in  the  first 
syllable,  to  make  a  full  and  clear  discrimination,  and  relieves  the  narration  from  doubts 
and  ambiguity,  where  doubts  and  ambiguity  would  otherwise  often  exist.  On  the 
other  hand,  by  accumulating  distinctions,  it  loads  the  memory  with  grammatical  fonns, 
and  opens  a  door  for  improprieties  of  speech.  We  are  not  aware  of  any  inconveniences 
in  the  use  of  a  general  plural.  But  in  the  Indian  it  would  produce  confusion.  And 
it  is,  perhaps,  to  that  cautious  desire  of  personal  discrimination  which  is  so  apparent 
in  tlie  structure  of  the  language,  that  we  should  look  for  the  reason  of  the  duplicate 
forms  of  this  word.  Once  established,  however,  and  both  the  distinction  and  the 
necessity  of  a  constant  and  strict  attention  to  it,  are  very  obvious  and  striking.  How 
shall  he  address  the  deity?  If  he  say,  "ouu  father  who  art  in  heaven,"  the  inclusive 
form  of  "our"  makes  the  Almighty  one  of  the  family.  If  he  use  the  exclusive 
form,  it  throws  him  out  of  the  family,  and  may  embrace  every  living  being  but  the 
deity.  This  question  occasioned  a  good  deal  of  discussion  while  it  was  considered 
as  a  purely  philological  question,  and  led  to  the  discovery  that  there  was  a  general 
term  for  father,  which  avoided  the  difficulty.  The  term  WAiiSEMiGOYCN,  signifying 
FATHER  OF  ALL,  or  Uuivei-sal  Father,  seemed  precisely  the  word  wanted ;  but  it  was 
throwing  the  object  in  so  general  a  relation,  that  philosophy  only  appeared  satisfied 
with  it. 

In  practice,  however,  I  found  the  question  to  be  cut  short  by  natives  mIio  had 
embriiced  Christianity.  It  has  appeared  to  them,  that  by  the  use  of  either  of  the 
foregoing  tenns,  the  Deity  would  be  thrown  into  too  remote  and  general  a  relation 
to  them ;  and  I  observed  that  in  prayer  they  placed  him  at  the  head  of  tlie  family, 
and  invariably  addressed  him  by  the  concrete  term  of  NiJSA,  my  father,  6s  being  the 
radix  for  father. 

The  other  personal  pronouns  undergo  some  peculiar  changes,  when  employed  as 
preformatives  before  nouns  and  verbs,  which  it  is  important  to  remark.  In  compound 
words  the  mere  signs  of  the  first  and  second  pronouns,  n  and  k,  arc  employed.  The 
use  of  WEEN  is  limited,  and  the  third  person,  singular  and  plural,  is  generally  indicated 
by  the  sign,  o. 


LANUUAtJE.  40T 

2.  Tlie  particle  suil,  added  to  the  complete  forms  of  the  disjunctive  pronouiiH, 
imparts  a  verbal  seuso  to  them,  and  appears,  in  this  instance,  to  be  a  succedaneum  for 
the  substantive  verb.  Thus,  neen,  I,  becomes  neensuh,  it  is  I.  Keen,  thou,  becomes 
keensuh,  it  is  thou ;  and  ween,  he  or  she ;  weensuh,  it  is  he  or  she.  This  particle  may 
be  also  added  to  the  plural  forms. 

Kcenowind  suh  .     .     .     .  It  is  we  (in.) 

Neenowind  suh  ....  It  is  we  (ex.) 

Keenowau  suh  ....  It  is  ye  or  you. 

Weenowau  suh  ....  It  is  they. 

If  the  word  aitah  be  substituted  for  suii,  a  set  of  adverbial  phrases  is  formed. 

Neen  aitah     .     .     Mine  only.  Neen  aitah  wind  .  We,  us,  or  ours  (ex.) 

Keen  aitah     .     .     Thine  only.  Keen  aitah  wind  .  We,  us,  or  ours  (in.) 

Keen  aitah  wau  .  .  Ye,  you,  or  yours. 

Ween  aitah    .     .     His  or  hers  only.     Ween  aitah  wau  .  They,  them,  theirs,  &c. 

In  like  manner  nittum  first,  and  isiikwaudj  last,  give  rise  to  the  following  arrange- 
ment of  the  pronoun :  — 

Nee  nittum I  first. 

Kee  nittum You  or  thou  first. 

Woe  nittum He  or  she  first. 

Kee  nittum  ewind We  first  (in.) 

Nee  nittum  o»rind We  first  (ex.) 

Kee  nittum  ewau Ye  or  you  first. 

Wee  nittum  ewau They  first. 

ISHKWAUDJ. 

Nee  nishkwaudj I  last. 

Kee  nishkwaudj Thou  last. 

Wee  nishkwaudj He  or  she  last. 

Keenowind  ishkwaudj We  last  (in.) 

Needowind  ishkwaudj We  last  (ex.) 

Keenowau  ishkwaudj Ye  or  you  last. 

Weenowau  ishkwaudj They  last. 

The  disjimctive  fonns  of  the  pronoun  are  also  sometimes  preserved  before  verbs  and 
adjectives. 

NeEZHIKA.      I  ALONE.    (AN.) 

Nee  neezhika I  alone. 

Kee  neezhika Thou  alone. 

Wee  neezhika He  or  she  alone. 


I 


] 


408 


LANGUAGE. 


Kecnowiml  neozhika We,  or  U8,  or  Gin's  alone  (in.) 

Neenowlnd  neczhika We,  U8,  or  ours  alone  (ex.) 

Keenowau  ncezhika Ye,  or  you,  or  yours  alone. 

Weenowau  ncezhika They,  them,  or  theirs  alone. 

To  give  these  expressions  a  verbal  form,  the  verb  lEAU,  with  its  pronominal  modifi- 
cations, must  be  superadded.     For  instance,  I  AM  alone,  &c.  is  thus  rendered  :  — 

Nee  ncezhika  nindicau   ...     I  am  alone     .     .     .     Plural,  aumin. 
Kee  neezhika  keedieau  .     .     .     Thou  art  alone  .     .         "         aum. 
Wee  neezhika  iieau    ....     He  or  she  is  alone  "        wug. 

In  the  subjoined  examples,  the  noun  ow,  body,  is  changed  to  a  verb,  by  the  intro- 
duction of  the  broad  vowel  AU,  changing  ow  to  Auw,  which  last  takes  the  letter  d 
before  it  when  the  pronoun  is  prefixed. 

I  am  a  man Nee  nin  dauw. 

Thou  art  a  man  ....     Keen  ke  dauw. 
He  is  a  man Ween  ah  weeh. 


Ke  dauw  M'cmin. 
Ne  dauw  we  min. 
Ke  dauw  min. 
Weenawau  ah  wee  wug. 


We  are  men  (in.)  .  , 

We  are  men  (ex.)  .  , 

Ye  are  men     .     .  .  , 

They  are  men      .  .  , 

In  the  translation  of  these  expressions  "  man"  is  used  as  synonymous  with  person. 
If  the  specific  term  inine  had  been  introduced  in  the  original,  the  meaning  thereby 
conveyed  would  be,  in  this  particular  connexion,  I  am  a  man,  with  respect  to  courage, 
&c.,  in  opposition  to  effeminacy.  It  would  not  be  simply  declarative  of  corporeal 
existence,  but  of  existence  in  a  particular  state  or  condition. 

In  the  following  phrases,  the  modified  forms,  or  the  signs  only,  of  the  pronouns 
are  used :  — 

Ne'  debaindaun    .     .     . 
Ke  debaindaun     .     .     . 


0  debaindaun  .     .     . 
Ne'  debaindaum-in   . 
Ke  debaindaun-in 
Ke  debaindaum-«wau 
0  debaindaum-ewau 


I  own  it. 

Thou  ownst  it. 
He  or  she  owns  it. 
We  own  it  (ex.) 
We  own  it  (in.) 
Ye  own  it. 
They  own  it. 


These  examples  are  cited  as  exhibiting  the  manner  in  which  the  prefixed  and  pre- 
formative  pronouns  are  employed,  both  in  their  full  and  contracted  forms.  To  denote 
possession,  nouns  specifying  the  things  possessed  are  required  to  be  named ;  and,  what 
would  not  be  anticipated,  had  not  full  examples  of  this  s^iecies  of  declension  been  given 
in  another  place,  the  purposes  of  distinction  are  not  effected  by  a  simple  change  of  the 


LANGUAGE. 


409 


pronoun,  oh  I  to  mine,  &c.,  but  by  n  si  iiforinntivc  inflection  of  the  noun,  which  is  tliuH 
mmle  to  have  a  reflective  ojwration  upon  the  pronoun-speaker.  It  is  believed  that 
sufficient  examples  of  this  rule,  in  all  the  modifications  of  inflection,  have  been  given 
under  the  head  of  the  substantive.  But  as  the  substantives  employed  to  elicit  these 
modifications  were  exclusively  specific  in  their  meaning,  it  may  be  projwr  here,  in 
further  illustration  of  an  important  principle,  to  present  a  generic  substantive,  under 
these  compound  forms. 

I  have  selected  for  this  purpose  one  of  the  primitives.  —  Ie-au'  is  the  abstract  term 
for  existing  matter.  It  is  in  the  animate  form.  Its  inanimate  corri'spondent  is  ie-ee'. 
These  are  two  imirartant  roots ;  and  they  are  found,  in  combination,  in  a  very  great 
number  of  derivative  ords.  It  will  be  sufficient  here,  to  show  their  connexion 
with  the  pronoun  in  the  production  of  a  cla-ss  of  terms  in  very  general  use. 


Possess!  ce. 
Ohkctive. 


Mine,  Animate  Fokms. 
Sinfjular. 


Nin  die  aum   .   .   Mine. 

Ke  die  aum     .   .   Thine. 

O  die  aumun  .   .   His  or  hers. 


Plural 

Nin  die  auminiiun 
Ke  die  auminaun 
Ke  die  aumewau  . 
O  die  aumewaun  . 


.  Ours  (ex.) 

.  Ours  (in.) 

.  Yours. 

.  Theirs. 


Mine,  Inanimate  Forms. 


Singular. 

Plural 

r   Nin  die  eem    .   .   Mine. 

Nin  die  eeminaun 

Ours  (ex.) 

Possessive. 

Ke  die  eeminaum 

Ours  (in.) 

I   Ke  die  eem     .   .   Thine. 

Ke  die  eemewau  . 

Yours. 

Objective. 

0  die  eera    .   .   .   His  or 

hers. 

0  die  eemewau     . 

Theirs. 

In  these  forms  the  noun  is  singular  throughout.  To  render  it  plural,  as  well  as  the 
pronoun,  the  appropriate  general  plurals,  cg  and  un,  or  IG  and  in,  must  be  super- 
added. But  it  must  be  borne  in  mind,  in  making  these  additions,  "that  the  plural 
inflection  to  inanimate  nouns  (which  have  no  objective  case)  forms  the  objective  case 
to  animates,  which  have  no  number  in  the  third  pereon."  The  particle  UN,  therefore, 
which  is  the  appropriate  plural  for  the  inanimate  nouns  in  these  examples,  is  only  the 
objective  mark  of  the  animate. 

The  plural  of  I  is  naun  ;  the  plural  of  thou  and  he,  wau.  But,  as  these  inflections 
would  not  coalesce  smoothly  with  the  possessive  inflections,  the  connective  vowels, 
I  and  E,  are  prefixed,  making  the  plural  of  I,  inaun,  and  of  thou,  ewau. 

If  we  strike  from  these  declensions  the  radix,  ie,  leaving  its  animate  and  inanimate 
Ibrms,  AU  and  ee,  and  adding  the  plural  of  the  noun,  we  shall  then,  —  taking  the 
Pt.  II.  — 52 


410 


LANGUAGP 


B^^ 


I  i 


ANIMATE  tleclciiHioii  OS  an  iiiHtancc  —  have  the  foil  v,  ;.,si   Fo  .-.lulf.  of  the  pronominal 
dcclensiona :  — 


Objective 

Plural 

Objective 

Pronoun, 

Place  of 

Po88C8sivO 

Inficction 

Connective 

Inflection 

Inflection 

Plural  of 

8iiigutar. 

the  Noun. 

luBcction. 

to  the  Noun 
singular. 

Vowel. 

of  tbo 

Pronoun. 

uf  tbo  Noun 
plural. 

tbe  Noun. 

Ne    .   .   . 

— 

aum 

— 

i 

naun 

— 

ig- 

Ke   .   .   . 

— 

aum 

— 

c 

Avau 

— 

g- 

0.   .   .   . 

— 

aum 

un. 

0.   .  .  . 

— 

aum 

— 

e 

wan 

n. 

To  render  the  formula  of  general  use,  six  vnriation8  (five  in  addition  to  the  alxne) 
of  the  ixjssessive  inflocticm  are  rc((uirod,  corresponding  to  the  si.\  cla.ssesof  8ul)stanliveH, 
whereby  aum  would  l)e  ohangod  to  aim,  cem,  im,  om,  and  oom,  conformably  to  the 
examples  of  the  vowel  sounds  heretofore  given  in  tri'ating  of  the  substantive.  The 
objective  inflection  would  also  l)e  sometimes  changed  to  een,  and  sometimes  to  oan. 

3.  Having  thus  indicated  the  mo<lc  of  distinguishing  the  person,  number,  '.■elation, 
and  gender  —  or  Avhat  is  deemed  its  technical  equivalent,  i.  e.,  the  mutations  words 
undergo,  not  to  mark  the  distinctions  of  sex,  but  the  presence  or  absence  of  A'itamtv, 
I  shall  now  advert  to  the  inflections  \vhich  the  pronouns  take  for  tense,  or  rather,  to 
form  the  auxiliary  verbs,  have,  had,  shall,  will,  may,  &c., — a  very  curious  and  important 
principle,  and  one  which  clearly  demonstrates  that  this  part  of  speech  has  not  escaped 
the  transforming  genius  of  the  language.  Not  only  are  the  three  great  modifications  of 
time  accurately  marked  in  the  verbal  forms  of  the  Chippcwas,  but,  by  the  inflection 
of  the  pronoun,  they  are  enabled  to  indicate  some  of  the  oblique  tenses,  and  thereby 
to  conjugate  their  verbs  with  accura<!y  and  precision. 

The  particle  gee  (G  hard),  added  to  the  first,  second,  and  third  persons  singular  of 
the  present  tense,  changes  them  to  the  perfect  past,  rendering  I,  thou,  he,  I  did — have 
■ — or  had,  Thou  didst — ha.st — or  hadst,  He  or  she  did — have — or  had.  If  gah  \ye 
substituted  for  gee,  the  first  future  tense  is  formed,  and  the  perfect  past  added  to  the 
first  future  forms  the  conditional  future.  As  the  eye  may  prove  an  auxiliary  in  the 
comprehension  of  forms  wliich  are  not  familiar,  the  following  tabular  arrangement  of 
them  is  presented  :  — 

First  Person — I. 

Nin  gee I  did — have — had. 

Nin  gah I  shall — Avill. 

Ningahgee.     .     ,     .     I  shall  have — will  have. 


^^W 


LANGUAGE. 


411 


Second  l\;n<tm  —  Tiiou. 

Ke  gee Tlioii  didxt — hast — hadst. 

Ke  gah Thou  «halt — wilt. 

Ke  gah  gee  ....     Thou  rihalt  liave — wilt  have. 

Third  I^rson — He  or  SiiE. 
Ogee lie  or  hIic  did — have — had. 


lie  or  she  did — have — had. 

He  or  Hhe  shall  have — will  have. 


0  gah 

0  gah  gee     .     .     . 

The  present  and  imperfect  tense  of  the  potential  mood  is  formed  by  D.\r,  and  the 
perfect  by  gee  suflRxcd,  as  in  other  instances. 


First  H'rson  —  I. 


Nin  dau  .     . 
Nin  dau  gee. 


Ke  dau    . 
Ke  dau  gee 


I  may — can,  &c. 

I  may  have — can  have,  &c. 


Second  Ihirson — Tiiou. 
.     Thou  mayst — canst,  &c. 


Thou  mayst  have — canst  have,  &c. 


Third  Ikraon — He  or  She. 

0  dau He  or  she  may — can,  &c. 

0  dau  gee     ....     He  or  she  may  have — can  have,  &c. 

In  conjugating  the  verbs  through  the  plural  ixjrsons,  the  singular  terms  for  the 
pronoun  remain,  and  they  are  rendered  plural  by  a  retrosixjctive  action  of  the 
pronominal  inflections  of  the  verb.  In  this  manner,  the  pronoun-verb  au.\iliary  has 
a  general  application,  and  the  necessity  of  double  forms  is  avoided. 

4.  The  preceding  observations  are  confined  to  the  pre-formative  or  prefixed 
pronouns.     The  inseparable  suffi.xed  or  sub-formative  are  as  follows:  — 


Yaun 

.     .    My. 

Yun  . 

.     .     Thy. 

Id  or  d 

.     .     His  or  hers. 

Yaung 

.     .     Our  (ex.) 

Yung 

.     .     Our  (in.) 

Yaig. 

.     .     Your. 

Waud 

.     .     Their. 

412 


LANGUAGE. 


These  pronouns  are  exclusively  employed  as  suffixes ;  and  as  suffixes  to  the  descrip- 
tive substantives,  adjectives,  and  verbs.  Both  the  rule  and  examples  have  been  stated 
under  the  head  of  the  substantive  and  adjective.  Their  application  to  the  verb  will 
be  shown  aa  we  proceed. 

5.  Relative  Pronouns.  In  a  language  which  provides  for  the  distinctions  of  person, 
by  particles  prefixed  or  suffixed  to  the  verb,  it  will  scarcely  be  expected  that  separate 
and  independent  relative  pronouns  should  e.xist :  or  if  such  are  to  be  found,  their  use 
as  separate  parts  of  speech  must,  it  will  have  been  anticipated,  be  quite  limited ; 
limited  to  simple  interrogatory  forms  of  expression,  and  not  applicable  to  the  indicative 
or  declaratory.  Such  will  be  found  to  be  the  fact,  in  the  language  under  review.  And 
it  will  be  perceived  from  the  subjoined  examples,  that  in  all  instances  requiring  the 
relative  pronou)'  who,  other  than  the  simple  interrogatory  forms,  this  relation  is 
indicated  by  the  inflections  of  the  verb  or  adjective,  &c.  Nor  does  there  appear  to  be 
any  declension  of  the  separate  pronoun,  corresponding  to  whose  and  whom. 

Tlie  word  auwanain  may  be  said  to  be  uniforndy  employed  in  the  sense  of  who, 
under  the  limitations  we  have  mentioned.     For  instance :  — 

Who  is  there?  .     . 


Who  spoke?      .     . 
Who  told  you?      . 
Who  are  you?  .     . 
Who  sent  you? 
Who  is  your  father? 
Who  did  it?      .     . 
Whose  dog  is  it?  . 
Whose  pipe  is  that? 
Whose  lodge  is  it? 
Whom  do  you  seek? 
Whom  have  you  here? 


Ahwauain  c-mah  ai-aud? 
Ahwanaiu  kau  keogidood? 
Ahwauain  kau  weendumoak? 
Ahwauain  iau  we  yun? 
Ahwanaiu  waynonik  ? 
Ahwauain  kos? 
Ahwanaiu  kau  todung? 
Aliwanain  wai  dyid  ? 
Anwanain  dcipwaugunid  en-en  ? 
Ahwauain  wai  weegewomid? 
Ahwanaiu  nain  dau  Avau  bumud? 
Ahwauain  oh  omau  Ai  au  waud? 


Not  the  slightest  variation  is  made  in  these  phrases,  between  who,  whose,  and  whom. 

Should  we  wish  to  change  the  interrogative,  and  to  say,  he  who  is  there ;  he  who 
spoke ;  he  Avho  told  you,  &c.,  the  separable  personal  pronoun  ween  (he)  must  be  used 
in  lieu  of  the  relative,  and  the  following  forms  will  be  elicited :  — 


Ween,  kau  unniinik 
Ween,  kau  geedood  .     . 
Ween,  Ai-aud  e-mali 
Ween,  kau  weendumoak 
Ween,  kau  to  dung.     . 


He  (who)  sent  you. 

He  (wlio)  spoke. 

He  (who)  is  there. 

He  (who)  told  you. 

He  (who)  did  it,  &c. 


If  we  object  that  in  these  forms  there  is  no  longer  the  relative  pronoun  who,  the 


':U: 


-^H 


LANGUAGE.  413 

sense  being  simply,  he  sent  you,  he  spoke,  &c.,  it  is  replied,  that  if  it  be  intended  to  say 
only,  he  sent  you,  &c.,  and  not  he  who  sent  you,  &c.,  the  following  forms  are  used: — 

Ke  gee  unnonig      ...  He  (sent)  you. 

AinniJzhid He  (sent)  me. 

Ainnonaud He  (sent)  him,  &c. 

leau  e-mau He  is  there. 

Ke  geedo He  spoke. 

Ke  gee  weendumaug  .     .  He  told  you. 

Ke  to  dum He  did  it. 

We  reply  to  this  answer  of  the  native  speaker,  that  the  particle  KAu  prefixed  to  a 
verb,  denotes  the  past  tense;  that  in  the  former  series  of  terms  in  which  this  particle 
appears,  the  verbs  are  in  the  perfect  indicative ;  and  in  the  latter  form  thoy  are  in  the 
present  indicative,  marking  the  difference  only  between  sent  and  send,  spoke  and 
SPEAK,  &c.  And  that  there  is  absolutely  no  relative  pronoun  in  either  series  of  terms. 
We  further  observe  that  the  personal  pronoun  ween,  prefixed  to  the  first  set  of  terms, 
may  be  prefixed,  with  equal  propriety,  to  the  second  set ;  and  that  its  use  or  disuse  is 
perfectly  optional  with  the  speaker,  as  he  may  wish  to  give  additional  energy  or 
empbiisis  to  the  expression. 

We  now  wish  to  apply  the  principle  thus  elicited,  to  verbs  causative,  and  to  other 
compound  terms ;  to  the  adjective  verbs,  for  instance ;  and  to  the  other  verbal 
compound  expressions  in  which  the  objective  and  the  nominative  persons  are  incor- 
porated as  a  part  of  the  verb,  and  are  not  prefixes  to  it.  Tlis  may  be  shown  in  the 
causative  verb,  to  make  happy. 

Mainwaindiimeid     .     .  .  He  (who)  makes  me  happy. 

Mainwaindumeik     .     .  .  He  (who)  makes  thee  liappy. 

Mainwaindumeaud  .     .  .  lie  (who)  makes  iiiM  happy. 

Mainwaiiidumeinung    .  .  He  (who)  makes  us  happy,  (in.) 

Mainwaindumeyaug     .  .  He  (who)  makes  us  happy,  (ex.) 

Mainwaindiimeinaig     ,  .  He  (who)  makes  ye  or  you  happy. 

Mainwaindumeigowaud  .  He  (who)  makes  them  hai)py. 
And  so  the  forms  might  be  continued  throughout  all  the  objective  persons — 

Mainwaindumegun  .     .  .  Tiiou  (wlio)  niakest  me  happy,  &r. 

The  basis  of  these  compounds  is  minno,  good,  and  ai.ndum,  the  mind.  Hence  min- 
waindum,  he  happy.  The  adjective  in  this  connexion  cannot  be  translated  "  good," 
but  its  effect  ujwn  the  noun  is  to  denote  that  stite  of  tli  >  mind  which  is  at  rest  with 
itself.  The  first  change  from  this  simple  c  nnpound  is  to  give  the  adjective  a  verbal 
form;  and  this  is  effected  by  a  permutation  of  the  \owels  of  the  first  syllable  —  a 
rule  of  very  extensive  application — and  by  which,  in  the  present  instance,  the  phni.se 
he  happy  is  changed  to  he  makes  happy,  (muinwaindum.)     The  next  step  is  to  add 


;('■■■ 


^  m  ■ 

K  ■ 

'  i-U        !'ll 

mmi 

i 

w 

■■i 

i 

<*,-,' 


4U 


LANGUAGE. 


the  suffix  ijersonal  pronouns,  id,  ik,  aud,  &c.,  rendering  the  expressions  he  makes  me 
happy,  &c.  But  in  adding  these  increments,  the  vowel  e  is  thrown  between  the 
adjective  verb  and  the  pronoun  suffixed,  making  the  expression,  not  niainwainduniyun, 
but  mainwaindumeyun.  Generally  the  vowel  o,  in  this  situation,  is  a  connective,  or 
introduced  merely  for  the  sake  of  euphony.  And  those  who  maintain  that  it  is  liere 
employed  as  a  personal  pronoun,  and  that  the  relative  wuo  is  implied  by  the  final 
inflection,  overlook  the  inevitable  inference,  that  if  the  marked  e  stands  for  me  in  the 
first  phrase,  it  must  stand  for  thee  in  the  second,  ue  in  the  third,  rs  in  the  fourth,  &c. 
As  to  the  meaning  and  office  of  the  final  inflections  id,  ik,  &c.,  Avhatever  they  may  in 
an  involuted  sense  imply,  it  is  quite  clear,  by  turning  to  the  list  of  suffixed  personal 
pronouns,  and  animate  plurals,  tliat  they  mark  the  persons  I,  thou,  he,  &c.;  we,  ye, 
they,  &c. 

Take,  for  example,  minwaindiuneigowaud.  lie  (who)  makes  them  happy.  Of  this 
compotuul,  minwaindum,  us  before  shown,  signifies  he  makes  iiappv.  But  as  the  verb 
is  in  the  singular  number,  it  implies  that  but  one  person  is  made  happy,  and  the 
suffixed  personal  pronouns  singular  mark  the  distinctior  'tween  me,  thee,  and  he, 
or  him. 

Minwaindum-e-ig  is  the  verb  plural,  and  implies  that  several  2)ersons  are  made 
happy ;  and,  in  like  manner,  the  suflixed  personal  pronouns  plural  mark  the  distinc- 
tions between  we,  ye,  they,  &c.  For  it  is  a  rule  of  the  language,  that  a  strict 
concordance  must  exist  between  the  num})er  of  the  verb  and  the  number  of  the 
pronoun.  The  termination  of  the  verb  consecpiently  always  indicates  wliether  there 
1)0  one  or  many  olyects,  to  which  its  energy  is  directed.  And  as  animate  verbs  can 
]ni  applied  only  to  animate  olyeets,  tlie  numerical  inflections  of  the  verb  are  under- 
stood to  mark  the  nunil)ei'  of  persons.  But  this  number  is  indiscriminate,  and  leaves 
the  sense  vague,  until  the  pronominal  sufli-xes  are  superadded.  Those  who,  therefore, 
contend  for  the  sense  of  tbe  relative  pronoun  "who"  being  given  in  the  last-mentioned 
piirase,  and  all  phrases  similarly  formed  by  a  succedaneum,  contend  for  sometliing  like 
the  following  form  of  translation;  —  He  makes  them  happy  —  him;  or  him  (who)  he 
makes  them  happy. 

The  equivalent  for  what,  is  Waigonain. 

What  do  you  want?     ....  Waigonain  wau  iauyun. 

What  have  you  lost?   .     ,     .     .  Waigonain  kau  wanetiiyun. 

What  do  you  liKjk  for?     .     .     .  Waigonain  nain  dahwaubundahmun. 

What  is  this? Waigonain  cwinain  nuumdun. 

What  will  you  have?   ....  Waigonain  kau  iauyun. 

Wliat  detained  you  ?     .     .     .     .  Waigonain  kau  ocmdahme  egiiyun. 

What  are  you  making?      .     .     .  Waigonain  wai/hetiiyun. 

Wliat  have  you  there?      .     .     .  Waigonain  e-mau  iauyun. 


LANGUAGE. 

The  use  of  this  pronoun,  like  that  of  the  preceding,  appears  to  bo  confined  to  simple 
n  terrogative  forms.  The  word  auxeen,  which  sometimes  supplies  its  place,  or  is  used 
fi  r  want  of  the  pronoun  wnicii,  is  an  adverb,  and  has  considerable  latitude  of  meaning. 
Most  commonly  it  may  be  considered  as  the  equivalent  for  iif)W  —  in  what  manner,  or 
fit  what  time. 

What  do  you  say  ? Auneen  akeedii}  un. 

What  do  you  call  this ?      ....     Auneen  aizheneekaudduuun  maimdun  (i.) 

What  ails  you  ? Auneen  ain  deyun. 

What  is  your  name  ? Auneen  dizheekauzoyun. 

Wliichdoyoumean?  this  or  that  (an.)  Auneen  ah-ow  ainud  woh-ow  gamau  ewaidde. 
Which  do  you  mean?  this  or  that  (in.)  Auneen  eh-eu  ewaidumun  oh-oo  gamau  ewaidde. 
Which  boy  do  you  mean  "i       .     .     .     Auneen  ah-ow-ainud. 

By  adding  to  this  word  the  particle  de,  it  is  converted  into  an  adverb  of  place,  and 
may  be  rendered  where. 

Where  do  you  dwell  ? Auneende  aindauyun. 

Where  is  your  son  ? Auneende  kc  gwiss. 

Where  did  3'ou  see  him?   ....  Auucende  ke  wau})innud. 

Where  did  you  see  it  ? Auneende  ke  waubumdununi. 

W^hcre  are  3'Ob  going  ? Auneende  azhauyun. 

Where  did  you  come  from  ?    .     .     .  Auneende  ka  oonjeebauyun. 

Where  is  your  pipe  ? Auneende  ke  dtipwaugun. 

Where  is  your  gun  ? Aiuieende  ke  l)aushkizzigun. 

By  a  still  further  modification,  it  is  rendered  an  adverb  of  incpiiry  of  the  cause  or 
motive. 

Auneeshweeu  eh  eu  (o  (hiniuii. 
Auneeshween  cli  eu  ekeedoyun. 
Auneeshween  nishkaudizzeyun. 
Auneeshween  wee  nialijuwyun. 
Aunoeshwcen  mahjiniseewun. 
Auneeshween  ke  pei-zhauyun 
Weendumowishin  auneeshween. 
Aunoeshwcen  eh-eu  izzhewaibuk  (in.) 
Auneeshween  ke  pukketaiwud. 


Wh}'  do  3C)U  do  so ?  . 
Why  do  you  say  so  ? 
Why  are  you  angry  ?     .     .     . 
Wliy  will  you  depart  ?  .     .     . 
Why  will  you  not  depart? 
Why  have  jou  come  ?  .     .     . 

Tell  me  why  ? 

Wherefore  is  it  so  ?  . 
Wherelbre  did  you  strike  him  ? 


0.  Demonstrative  pronouns  ai 
as  follows :  — 


c  either  animate  or  inanimate,  and  may  be  arranged 


A  M  >f  .V  T  E  . 


This 


(  Mau-bum  (impersonal) 
1  Woh-ow  (personal)  .     . 


I N  .\  X  I  M  A  T  e  . 
Maun-dun  (inanimate  proper). 
01   .)o  (inanimate  and  conventional). 


u 


I  r-i  1 


( li 


t 


1         .;  ^. 


416  LANGUAGE. 

That    .  Ah-ow Eh-eu. 

These  .  Mau-mig Mau-min. 

J  Ig-eu  (personal) In-eu  (inanimate  proper) . 

1  0-goo  impersonal) 0-noo  (inanimate  conventional) . 

These  words  are  not  always  used  merely  to  ascertain  the  object,  but  often,  perhaps 
ahmijs,  when  ♦he  object  is  present  to  the  sight,  have  a  substantive  meaning,  and  are 
used  without  the  noun.  It  creates  no  uncertainty,  if  a  man  be  standing  at  some 
distance,  to  say,  Ah-ow,  or  if  a  canoe  be  lying  at  some  distance,  to  say,  Eh-eu ;  the 
meaning  is  clearly,  that  ^Krsou,  or  that  canoe,  whether  the  noun  be  added  or  not.  Or 
if  there  be  two  animate  objects  standing  together,  or  two  inanimate  objects  l^ing 
together,  the  words  maumig  (a)  or  maumin  (i),  if  they  be  near,  or  ig-eu  (a),  or  in-eu 
(i),  if  they  be  distant,  are  equally  expressive  of  the  materiality  of  the  ol  "octs,  as  well 
as  their  relative  position.  Under  other  circumstances,  the  noun  would  bj  required,  a^ 
where  two  animate  objects  of  diverse  character,  a  man  and  a  horse,  for  instance,  were 
standing  near  each  other ;  or  a  canoe  and  a  package  of  goods  were  lying  near  each 
other.  And,  in  fact,  under  all  circumstances,  the  noun  may  be  used  after  the  demon- 
strative pronoun,  without  violating  any  rule  of  grammar,  although  not  without  the 
imputation,  in  many  instances,  of  being  over  formal  and  unnccesmri/i/  minute.  What 
is  deemed  redundant,  however,  in  oral  use,  and  amongst  a  people  who  supply  much  by 
sight  and  gesticulation,  becomes  quite  necessary  in  writing  the  language ;  and  in  the 
following  sentences  the  substantive  is  properly  employed  after  the  pronoun. 

This  dog  is  very  lean Gitshee  bukaukuddoozo  woh-ow  annemoosh. 

These  dogs  are  very  lean  ....  Gitshee  bukaukuddoozowug  o-goo  anncmooshug. 

Those  dogs  are  fat Ig-eu  annemooshug  ween  in-ecwug. 

That  dog  is  fat Ah-ow  annemoosh  ween  in-oo. 

This  is  a  handsome  knife  ....  Gagait  onishishin  maundun  mokomahn. 

These  are  handsome  knives   .     .     .  Gagait  wahwinaudj  o-noo  mokomahnun. 

Those  are  bad  knives Monaududon  in-euwaidde  mokomahnun. 

Give  me  that  spear Meezhishin  eh-eu  ahnitt. 

Give  me  those  spears Meezhishin  in-en  unnewaidde  ahnitteen. 

That  is  a  fine  boy Gagait  kwonaudj  ah-ow  kweewezains. 

Those  an;  fine  lx)y8 Gagait  wahwinaudj  ig-euwaidde  kweewezaiiisug. 

This  boy  is  larger  than  that  .     .     .  Nahwudj  mindiddo  wah-ou  kweewezains  t,.  aidde 

dush. 

That  is  what  I  wanted      ....  Meeh-eu  Avaweauyaumbaun. 

ThI '  is  the  very  thing  I  wanted      .  Mee-suh  oh-oj  wau  iauyaumbaun. 

In  some  of  these  expression!',  the  pronoun  combines  with  an  adjective,  as  in  the 
compound  words,  ineuwaidde,  and  igeuwaidde,  those  yonder  (in.)  and  those  yonder 


LANGUAGE, 


417 


(in.)      Compounds  which  exliibit  the  I'nll  pronoun   in  coalescence  with   the  adverb 
EWAIDDE,  yonder. 


7.  Generic  conchxsions.  —  The  Algonquin  language  in  in  a  peculiar  sense  a  language 
of  pronouns.  Originally  there  appear  to  have  been  but  three  terms,  answering  to  the 
three  person.?,  I,  thou  or  you,  and  he  or  she.  By  these  terms,  the  speaker  or  actor  is 
(!lear'y  distinguished ;  but  they  convey  no  idea  of  sex,  the  word  for  the  third  person 
in  which  we  should  suspect  it,  being  strictly  epicene.  In  a  class  of  languages  strongly 
transitive,  the  purposes  of  precision  required  another  class  of  pronouns,  which  should 
be  suffixed  to  the  end  of  verbs,  to  render  the  object  of  the  action  as  certain  as  the 
actor  is.  The  language  being  without  auxiliary  verbs,  their  place  is  supplied  by  the 
tensal  syllables,  ge,  gah,  and  guh,  which  have  extended  the  original  monosyllables 
into  trisyllables.  This  is  the  first  step  on  the  poly.'^yllaljical  ladder.  To  make  the 
suffixed  or  objective  pronouns,  they  appear  to  liave  availed  themselves  of  a  principle 
which  they  had  already  applied  to  nouns  —  namely,  the  principle  of  indicating,  by  the 
letters  g  or  n  added  to  the  plural  terms,  the  two  great  divisions  of  creation,  on  which 
the  whole  grammatical  structure  is  built  —  namely,  the  genderic  clas.ses  of  living  or 
inert  matter.  As  these  alphabetical  signs,  g  and  n,  could  be  applied  to  the  five 
terminal  vowel  sounds  of  all  nouns  and  all  verb.s,  (for  they  must,  to  be  made  plural  or 
conjugated,  be  provided  with  terminal  vowels,  where  they  do  not,  when  used  disjunc- 
tively, exist,)  there  is  naturally  a  set  of  five  vital  or  animate  and  five  non-vital  or 
inanimate  plurals.  Ten  classes  of  nouns  and  ten  classes  of  verl)s  are  thus  formed. 
But  as  the  long  vowels  in  an  and  oan  require  three  more  varieties  of  numerical 
inflection  in  each  of  these  vowels,  the  respective  number  of  plur<al  tenns  is  eight,  and 
the  total  sixteen  —  sixteen  modes  of  making  the  plural,  and  sixteen  conjugations  for 
the  verb.  This  is  productive  of  a  variety  of  terminal  sounds,  and  appears  at  the  first 
glance  to  be  confused,  but  the  principle  is  simple  and  ea.«ily  remembered ;  so  easily, 
that  a  child  need  never  mistake  it.  The  terminal  g  or  n  of  each  word  denotes  in  all 
poi-itions,  the  tv.o  great  genderic  classes  of  nature,  which  are  the  cardinal  points  of  the 
irrpniiiiiir. 

Allusion  is  had  particularly  to  the  Algonquin  language  in  this  observation,  in  which 
this  priijciple  prevails  without  laiowing  certainly  how  far  it  obtains  in  the  other  Indian 
languages  of  North  and  South  America. 

Agreeably  to  data  furnished  in  the  preceding  pages,  the  regular  plurals  are 
respectively  ag,  eg,  ig,  og,  ug,  and  ain,  een,  in,  on,  un,  with  the  additional  aug,  eeg,  and 
oag,  in  the  vital,  and  aun,  een,  and  oan,  for  the  long  vowels,  in  the  non-vital  class. 
But  two  ideas  are  gained  by  these  thirty-two  numerical  inflections,  namely,  that  the 
objects  are  vital  or  non-vital. 

In  I*]nglish,  all  this  purpose  is  answered  by  the  simple  letter  s,  or,  where  euphony 
requires  it,  es;  in  Latin  by  a  single  vowel  or  dii>hthong;  and  in  Hebrew,  in  all  direct 
Pt.  11.  — OC 


418 


LANGUAGE. 


cases,  by  the  syllable  im.  So  much  ground  is  travelled  over  by  the  Indian  to  get  his 
plurals.  The  pure  verbs,  the  noun-verbs,  the  adjective  verbs,  and  the  projiositional, 
adverbial,  and  compound  terms  and  declensions,  are  made  plural  precisely  as  the  nouns, 
regard  being  always  had  to  the  principle  of  euphony,  in  throwing  away  or  adding  a 
letter,  or  giving  precedence  to  an  adjective  inflection.  The  suffixed  pronouns  are 
required  to  be  put  at  the  end  of  these  plurals,  where  they  will  not  always  coalesce 
without  inserting  them  before  the  sign  of  the  epicene  or  anti-epicene. 

These  suffixed  plural  inflections,  as  before  indicated,  are  yaun,  yun,  id,  or  simply  d. 
I,  you,  he,  she ;  which  are  changed  to  plurals  personal  by  the  usual  inflections  of  the 
letter  g,  mailing  them  yaung,  we,  us,  our  (ex.) ;  yung,  we,  us,  our  (in.),  and  yaig  for 
ye.     The  vital  particle  are,  is  placed  before  d  for  the  pronoun  they. 

But  the  speaker  is  not  confined  to  these,  as  the  pronouns  are  made  plural  precisely 
as  the  nouns :  he  may  employ,  for  distinction's  sake,  ^he  numerical  inflections  aig,  aug, 
eeg,  ig,  og,  oog,  ug,  to  express  the  various  senses  of  we  (bis),  they,  them,  and  us,  ours, 
theirs.  These  fourteen  suffixed  pronouns  eniiMu  the  si>eaker  to  designate  tlie  (ibjectivc 
transitive  persons,  and  to  designate  the  reliex  action  in  the  first  plural,  which  is 
uniform. 

Tlie  anti-epicene  suffixed  pronouns  lor  the  same  perscms,  are  ain,  cen,  in,  on,  aun, 
un,  aim,  eem,  im,  om,  oam,  um;  with  such  changes  in  their  adjustment  as  usage  and 
the  juxtaposition  of  consonants  have  produced. 


§6.     Principles  of  tue   VEhn:  — 


'i       !< 


Imlinn  mode  of  grouphig  uleas.  2.  Concrete  diameter  of  tcorih.  3.  Niimher  of 
2yrimary  smmh  of  the  language.  4.  lis  radicaUy  vwno»yUahic  character.  5.  The 
language  lauwjnthetic.  0.  Primary  suumh.  7.  Nature  throtcn  into  two  great 
cJasses,  merging  the  principle  of  gciuler.  Its  rules.  8.  Type  of  barbaric  grammars. 
Verbs  epicene  and  anti^piccne.  Five  conjugations  in  each  class,  formed  by  the 
jive  epicene  and  jive  anti- jpiceiie  vowels.     9.  Breadth  of  this  rule  of  classes. 


I   '• 


1.  The  power  of  analysis  is  not  a  faculty  of  the  Indian  mind.  It  considers  pheno- 
mena in  the  gross.  The  sky,  to  which  the  hunter's  eyes  are  directed,  is  not  regarded 
as  filled  with  the  elements,  air  and  vajwur,  light  and  heat,  clouds  and  sunshine  only, 
but  with  corerote  iiiinges  of  the  effects  of  these,  upon  each  other.  The  river, 
which  pursues  .is  way  through  ;bo  forests,  is  not  simply  regarded  as  a  diannel  of 
water  moving  rnjiidly  or  slowly,  deep  or  shallow,  dark  or  bright.  The  rays  of  light 
are  not  described  as  elementary  pencils;  but  pencils  flashing  upon,  or  reflected  from 
objects  on  the  earth's  surface.     An  animal  is  described  as  possessing  some  peculiar 


1 1 


LANGUAGE. 


419 


properties,  as  black  or  wliite;  or  gifted  witli  peculiar  looks  or  powers,  whether  flying 
ill  the  air,  living  14)011  tlie  cart'-,  or  Hwiuuning  in  tlie  waters.  Sounds  are  described  as 
proceeding  lioiii  the  force  of  winds,  from  a  tree,  stone,  or  man  falling  on  the  earth 
from  a  stroke  of  thunder;  or  a  murmuring  of  leaves  or  waters. 


2.  These  images,  or  ideas,  are  thrown  upon  the  Indian  mind  in  their  concrete 
forms,  and  the  first  attempt  is,  to  express  the  phenomena  by  combined  phrases,  which 
shall  embrace  syllabical  increments  or  alphalx.>tical  signs  of  all  the  phenomena. 
Hence  the  terms  of  the  language  are  compound  and  iM)lysjllabical.  They  aim  to  paint 
ideas.  To  do  this,  however,  recpiires  a  very  exact  knowledge  of  the  primary  elements 
of  utterance.  The  ear  must  analyze  each  sound,  and  recognise  its  distinctive  meanings 
in  words  and  terms,  wherever  they  occur,  and  whatever  may  be  the  juxtaposition  of 
syllables. 

3.  It  has  been  indicated,  that,  witli  tiie  five  vowel,  there  are  but  thirteen  simple 
consonantal  sounds;  that  tlie  numl)er  of  primary  syllaliles  is  seventeen,  and  that 
the  number  of  possible  changes,  which  these  can  be  made  to  undergo,  i^  two  hundred 
and  fifty-five.  With  respect  to  this,  we  may  perhaps  re(iuiie  further  scrutiny-, 
and  it  is,  therefore,  but  approximate  in  its  character.  All  that  is  contended  for.  in 
tills  respect,  is,  that  the  number  of  syllabical  sounds  is  fl.xed,  and  that  it  cannot  be 
exceeded,  with  the  natural  powers  of  utterance.  Whatever  be  the  actual  number,  the 
child  soon  learns  to  know  them,  together  with  the  principles  by  which  they  must  be 
used.  The  speaker  gives,  at  all  times,  the  same  meaning  to  the  same  syllable  or 
phrase,  allowing  lor  the  throwing  away  of  superlluous  consonants,  when  they  come 
together,  or  for  the  insertion  of  them,  when  the  same  want  of  euphony  requires  them 
to  be  interposed  between  vowels  in  the  compounds. 

4.  It  is  found  that  the  primary  words,  wiieii  dissected  from  their  a])pen(lages.  ai-o 
chiefly  monosyllabic.  Many  of  the  words  of  its  vocabulary  still  retain  their  character 
of  elementary  brevity,  as  ais,  a  shell ;  meeii,  a  berry ;  nioug,  a  loim ;  kaug,  a 
porcuj  ine ;  waub,  to  see ;  biiz,  to  embark ;  peezh,  to  bring ;  paup,  to  laugh ;  oomb,  to 
lift,  niiiz,  a  moose;  wauzli,  a  lair;  wauk,  a  fish-roe.  The  Indian  ear  is  very  nice 
in  discriminating  tlie  pronominal  and  teiisal  prefixes  and  the  various  inflections  for 
number,  person,  place,  and  other  accidents,  which  conceal  the  radix  both  from  the 
eye  and  ear  of  the  uninitiated,  and  also  in  detecting  the  least  error  in  its  principles 
of  unity. 


: 


'!£  :iH 


5.  The  language  appears  to  be  altogether  sui  generis.  There  is  nothing  that  baa 
the  a.spect  of  behig  foreign  or  borrowed  —  notliing  that  .seems  like  tlie  jiutting  together 
of  two  plans  of  thought ;  nor  the  tracing  of  roots  to  diverse  .sources.    The  requirements 


,1! 


420 


LANGUAGE. 


of  its  etymology  nre  so  plain,  that  they  cannot  be  mistaken.  Tlie  prramniatical 
concords  are  too  simple  and  imique  to  admit  of  doubt.  It«  principles  are  homogeneous 
and  philosophical :  they  are,  at  all  times,  true  to  certain  laws  of  utterance,  of  combi- 
nation, and  of  concords.  The  plan  of  thought,  or  synthesis,  is  a  unity :  it  is  uniform, 
unique,  and  simple. 


?  n 


0.  A  whoop,  a  shout,  or  a  hiss,  a  cackle,  a  guttural  expulsion  of  the  breath,  or  any 
other  modification  of  human  sounds,  aided  by  genelluction,  may  stand,  conventionally 
or  symbolically,  for  an  act  or  expression  of  passion  or  feeling.  But  the  moment  an 
Algonquin  undertakes  articulate  utterance,  by  which  language  is  to  be  represented,  he 
employs  vowel  sounds,  compelled,  ius  they  often  are,  to  l)e  loaded  down  with  consonantal 
appendages  difficult  of  utterance.  Tiiat  he  should  found  his  grammar  on  these  vowel 
sounds,  with  such  concords  only  as  are  supplied  by  the  distinctions  of  the  grand 
phenomena  of  organic  and  inorganic  life  around  him,  is  niitural ;  and  it  should  excite 
no  surprise,  if,  in  carrying  out  these  principles,  he  is  found  to  have  developed 
philosophical  rules  which  have  escaped  other  nations. 

In  this  inquiry,  it  is  not  asked  wlicre  the  language  was  first  spoken,  whether  in 
Asia,  Polynesia,  or  America.  That  topic  is  ulterior  in  its  importance.  Wherever 
situated,  he  was  evidently  surrounded  by  the  great  phenomena  of  wood.s,  waters, 
organic  life,  skies,  and  meteoric  displays.  He  was  in  a  vast  wilderne.«s  of  plains  and 
forests  —  not  in  pent-up  cities,  witli  their  thousand  intellectual  artificialities.  This 
is  clear  from  the  phenomena  of  language  alone. 

Complete  utterance,  in  the  organs  of  human  speech,  finds  vent  only  in  the 
independent  open  vowel  sounds  —  a,  e,  i,  o,  u.  These  sounds  may  each  run  through 
a  scale,  and  are  still  independent ;  but  they  require  to  be  propped  up  by  consonants 
the  moment  the  half-utterances  or  short  vowel  sounds  are  to  be  expressed.  The  Red 
man  has  done  this  by  an  oral  system,  which  he  has  no  books  to  explain,  and  which  he 
is  too  ignorant  of  the  laws  of  orthographical  utterance  implanted  in  his  ear,  to  describe. 
Languages  cannot  be  spoken  of  as  inventions.  No  nation  invents  a  language,  at  leavst, 
not  in  any  recognisable  compass  of  years.  They  are  a  gift,  or  proceed  to  alter  them- 
selves very  slowly  by  the  natural  laws  of  articulation.  To  comprehend  the  principles 
of  the.se  American  languages,  it  will  facilitate  comparison  to  suppose  that  the  Indian 
mind  kept  ever  before  it  the  two  grand  kingdoms  of  organic  and  inorganic  matter,  or 
the  world  of  vital  beings  and  inert  objects.  This  principle  has  already  been  indicated, 
in  the  considerations  brought  Ibrward  on  the  substantive,  the  adjective,  and  the 
])ronoun ;  but  it  is  not  to  be  over-rated  in  its  importance,  in  relation  to  the  verb: 
for  the  whole  language  is  brought  to  this  test,  and,  whatever  functions  other  parts  of 
speech  perform,  they  find  the  fulfilment  of  their  powers  in  the  verb. 


iil  ij 


In  viewing  the  mass  of  images  and  ideas  floating  before  the  Indian  mind,  the 


LANGUAGE. 


481 


first  and  most  generic  grammatical  law  which  it  proposed  as  necessary  to  hoth  speaker 
and  hearer,  at  all  times,  was  the  weparation  of  all  the  phenomena  of  nature  and  art 
into  two  grand  classes,  which  have  l)eon  called  animates  and  inanimates.  In  forming 
these,  the  animal  kingdom  is  obliged  to  surrender  its  proud  claim  to  distinction  above 
vegetable  life ;  and,  what  wc  should  not,  i\  priori,  expect  from  barbarism,  even  man 
is  compelled  to  sink  his  sexuality,  and  take  his  place,  in  the  grammatical  scale,  beside 
the  bi.son,  the  wolf,  and  the  Ijear.     Gender  is  sunk  in  vitality,  or  mere  animation. 

To  ell'ect  this  purpose  of  grammatical  concord,  two  ctmsonantal  signs  are  employed 
as  terminal  letters,  in  designating  the  plurals  of  the  respective  classes,  namely,  G  and 
N  —  the  former  of  which,  added  to  the  terminal  vowel  of  the  word,  renders  it  organic, 
and  the  latter  inorganic.  These  terms  correspond  to  the  words  ei)icine  and  anti-e])icine. 
If  the  word,  in  either  class,  does  not  terminate  in  a  vowel  in  the  singular,  but  a 
con.'»onant,  a  vowel  is  required  to  bo  added,  and  then  tiie  rule  carried  out.  This 
principle  lias  been  so  fully  illustrated,  in  the  olwervations  on  the  substantive,  and  is  so 
regular  and  distinctive,  that  it  forms  the  primary  integer  to  grammatical  order  in  the 
language.  Not  only  all  the  nouns,  Ijiit  all  the  verbs,  obey  it.  IJy  it,  both  are  formed 
into  ton  classes,  which  terminate  respectively  in  jlig,  eeg,  ig,  iig,  iig,  or  iin,  (in,  in,  iin,  (in. 

By  adopting  the  epicine  principle,  the  distinction  of  masculine  and  feminine  is  lost 
in  a  higher  law  of  concord,  while  the  anti<'picine  corresponds  to  the  neuter  in  otiicr 
languages.  How  far  this  principle  prevails  in  the  Indian  languages  of  America  caimot 
be  certainly'  aflirmed  from  the  incompleteness  of  our  materials.  It  is  absolute,  under 
all  circumstances,  in  the  various  tongues  of  the  Algonquin  stock ;  and  it  is  l)y  far  the 
most  characteristic  jirinciple  which  has  been  developed,  differing  as  it  does  from  all 
the  known  modern,  and  (so  far  as  investigated  in  relation  to  this  principle)  ancient 
languages.  The  Hebrew,  to  which  reference  has  so  often  been  made  from  the  time 
of  Grotius,  as  the  probable  parent  language  of  the  American  stock.s,  whatever  other 
analogies  it  nuvy  offer,  has  nothing  of  this  kind.  It  has  been  carefully  studied,  and 
the  residt  is,  that  so  far  as  its  modern  compounds  can  now  be  traced,  the  distinctions 
of  masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter,  arc  preserved.  During  the  epoch  of  the  Pentateuch, 
Gcsenius  has  shown,  that  the  pronoun  hk  included  she,  and  that  the  term  for  young 
man  and  young  woman  was  the  same.  It  therefore  becomes  important  to  philolog}', 
hi  seeking  grammatical  forms  in  order  to  illustrate  the  topic  of  origin,  to  direct  its 
investigations  to  this  point. 


8.  It  is  not  alone  in  these  two  great  clas.ses  of  words,  which  lifive  been  called  the 
epicene  and  the  anti-epicene,  that  the  simple  and  primary  vowel  sounds  are  relied  on 
for  principles  of  synthesis  and  concord.  The  vocalic  rules  pervade  the  grammar. 
The  wiiole  stock  of  verbs  in  the  Indian  vocabulary  is  grouped  into  five  epicine  and 
five  classes  of  anti-epicine  conjugations.  The  conjugations  embrace  not  only  the 
natural  verbs  in  common  nse,  but  they  provide  for  all  the  nouns  and  noun-adjectives 


422 


LANGUAGE. 


V    \ 


of  every  possible  kind ;  for  these,  it  must  Ixj  reinembei'ed,  can  all  be  coiiverteil,  under 
the  plastic  rules  of  the  language,  into  verbs. 

With  a  formidable  display  of  vocal  terms  ami  inlloctive  forms,  thei-e  is,  tiierefore,  a 
very  simple  principle  to  unravel  the  lexicography,  namely,  fidelity  to  the  meaning  of 
primary  and  vowelic  sounds.  If  we  compare  this  principle  to  a  thread,  parts  of  which 
are  white,  black,  green,  blue,  and  yellow,  the  wiiitc  "nay  stand  as  the  syml)ol  of  five 
vowelic  classes  of  wonls  in  a ;  the  black  in  b ;  the  green  in  c ;  the  blue  in  d ;  and  the 
yellow  in  c.  It  creates  no  confusion  to  the  eye  to  add,  that  there  is  a  fdament  of  red 
running  through  the  whole  stries  of  colored  strands,  wliereby  five  additional  distinc- 
tions aro  made,  nniking  ten  in  all.  These  represent  the  two  givat  classes  of  sounds 
of  the  AlgoiKpiin  granuuar,  denoting  what  has  lieen  called  the  epicene  and  anti-epicene 
scheme. 

Let  me  not  be  misappreliended.  The  vowel  .sounds  are  fii"st  taken  as  guides  to  the 
Indian  ear  in  forming  plurals,  making  two  quintuplicate  classes,  the  first  ending  in  the 
epicene  g,  ami  the  second  in  the  anti-i'picenc  n.  The  decimal  plurals  then  become  the 
rule  for  forming  the  same  number  of  conjugations  for  active  verbs.  If  we  would  know 
to  what  class  of  conjugations  a  word  belongs,  we  nuist  inquire  how  the  plural  is  made. 
It  will  be  recollected  that  all  verbs,  like  all  substantives,  either  terminate  in  a  vowel 
sound,  or,  where  they  do  not,  that  a  vowel  sound  nuist  be  added  in  making  the  plural, 
in  order  that  it  may  serve  as  a  coalescent  for  the  epicene  g,  or  the  anti-epicene  n. 
Thus  man,  inine,  is  i-endere<l  men,  ininewug,  not  by  adding  the  simple  epicene  plnral 
ug,  but  l)y  tiirowing  a  w  JK'fore  it,  making  the  plural  in  wug.  So  j)aupe,  to  laugh,  is 
rendered  jjlural  in  wug,  and  not  ug;  whilst  minnis,  an  i.sland,  scIkmis,  a  brook,  and  all 
words  ending  in  a  consonant,  take  the  regular  anti-i'piiene  plural  in  un.  The  rule 
that  in  syllabication  a  vowel  should  follow  a  con.somvnt,  is  indeed  univer.»*al.  It  is 
equally  so  that  a  shoit  vowel  precedes  a  consonant,  or  is  placed  between  two  conso- 
nants, and  that  a  long  vowel  follows  it,  or  makes  a  .syllal)le  when  standing  by  itself. 
Such  is  the  power  of  vowels  and  consonant.s,  as  heard  in  Mi.ss-is-sippi,  and  Mau-me, 
I-o-wa,  Pe-o-ri-a,  and  Wis-con-sin.  These  principles  were  referred  to,  in  forming  the 
practical  scheme  of  notation  herein  adopted. 

The  arrangement  of  tiic  vowelic  classes  is  so  inqwrtant  to  any  correct  view  of  the 
grammer  of  the  language,  and  is,  at  the  same  time,  so  regular,  euphonious,  and 
philosophical,  that  it  will  inq)re.ss  it  the  better  on  the  mind,  by  presenting  a  tabular 
view  of  it. 

ConnESPONDiNG  Classes  op  Verbs. 

Eincene  Suhstautives. 


PLl'RAL   INFLECTION. 

1. 

Words 

ending  in 

a     .     . 

.     .     .     ag. 

2. 

(( 

a          a 

e     .     . 

...     eg. 

3. 

« 

«          « 

i     .     . 

...     iff. 

i 


l-i 


V  .V'i^. 


LANGUAGE. 


423 


4. 

Words  ending 

in            o 

. 

•     .     «g. 

6. 

« 

K 

«             u 

.     .     . 

.     .     iig. 

Aitti-epicene  Subatandcca 

rmnAi.  isfi.ectio.i. 

1. 

Words  ending 

in            a 

.     .     tin. 

2. 

ti 

a 

"             e 

.     .    en. 

3. 

« 

(I 

i 

.     .     ill. 

4. 

« 

a 

o 

•     .     iin. 

5. 

« 

« 

u 

Epircne    T 

'^crhs. 

.     .     iin. 

CLAMS   ny   rdlJlOATIIIlI 

1. 

Verbs 

ending 

in  ti  or  ilg 

, 

.     .     in  class  a. 

o 

a 

« 

"    c  or  iig 

•     •     • 

"        c. 

3. 

11 

(( 

"    i  or  ig 

•     •     • 

"        i. 

4. 

(I 

(( 

"    o  or  iig 

•     •     • 

o. 

5. 

(( 

<( 

"    ii  or  iig 
Anti-epiccnc 

.     .        "        u. 

Vcrha. 

CLASS   or  CONJirGATlOV, 

1. 

Verbs  ending 

in  ii  or  iin 

.     .     in  class  a. 

2. 

« 

« 

"    ij  or  en 

"        e. 

3. 

« 

« 

"    i  or  in 

"        i. 

4. 

« 

« 

"    o  or  on 

"        o. 

6. 

« 

(( 

"    ii  or  iin 

"        u. 

I- 


; 


§7.    The  Algonquin  Language  founded  on  Radices:  — 

Verba  derlced  from  sulstantlvcs.  iDjinUirrn.  Wunl-ljuihlin^  chtntckr  of  the  sijtifax. 
Its  analyms,  Li  ivhat  sense  it  maj  he  devincd  "  lujijlut'mntvd."  Nouns  precede 
Verbs.  Examples  of  the  verbs  to  eat,  to  run,  to  walk,  to  burn,  to  strike. 
Declension  of  the  jircfixed  pronoun  to  form  moods.  Omjuijation  of  the  verb  to  love 
a  person.  Its  root.  Generic  classes  of  nut u re.  A  trail  of  concealment  of 
cJutracter,   impressed  on  the  forms  of  the  Indian  lamjuage. 

The  Algonquin  language  is  founded  on  roots  or  primary  elements  having  a  meaning 
by  themselves.  As  waub,  to  see,  paup,  to  laugh,  wa,  to  move  in  space,  bwa,  a  voice. 
The  theory  of  its  orthography  is  to  employ  these  primary  sounds  in  combination,  and 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.25 


us 


140 


^ 


'/ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporaition 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WIBSTIR,N.Y.  MSM 

(716)S7a-4S03 


<f^ 


.V 


^ 


%%^ 

^i^. 
V 


5^ 


iV 


424 


LANGUAOE. 


not  iw  (lisjiiiiftivc!  floiiu'iits,  wliirli  has  orifriiinU'il  a  i»laii  of  (lioiiglit  iiiid  coiu-onls  quite 
pocnliar.  It  in  i-vidi'iit  that  such  jmrticU's  as  ak,  l»o,  go,  wort"  invostod  with  generic 
meanings,  U'foiv  tliey  assumed  their  coiiprctc  fonns  of  ak-o,  earth;  ne-l»e,  water; 
ge-zis,  skv.  Siil)stantives  apiK-ar  to  have  hoen  anterior  to  verhs,  for  tlie  latter  are 
generally  fonnded  on  them,  as  eheniai,  to  paddle,  fnnn  cheniaun,  a  canoe.  Bnt  this 
may  relate  to  the  modern  class  of  verhs,  as  we  ixMvcive  in  the  same  manner,  pansh- 
kiz-/.e-ga,  to  fire,  made  from  paush-kiz-ze-giM),  a  gnn,  nnisket,  or  rifle.  In  the  more 
ancient  class  of  verlw,  such  as  strike,  pnk-c-tai,  wc  may  snpiwso,  however,  that  the 
word  war-clul),  pnk-e-tai-e-gun,  was  formed  from  the  verb  to  strike,  for  it  is  literally 
descrilx'd  as  a  striking  implement.  Pnk-c-tai,  in  this  word,  denotes  the  act  of  striking. 
Gun  is  from  je-gun,  a  generic  for  implements  or  instruments.  Bnt  puk-o-tai  is 
transitive,  and  denotes  the  striking  of  some  person  or  thing,  and  cannot  be  said 
infinitively.  The  true  radi.x  or  infinitive,  apj^ars  to  Ix"  paked.  Verbs  active  in  the 
thiril  person,  end  in  Ai.  Here  we  obtain  a  rule,  puketai,  chemai,  paushkizzegai,  &c. 
strike,  paddle,  fire,  &c.  Without  attention  to  this  theory  of  radices,  and  to  the  woixl- 
building  principle  of  the  language, —  to  this  constant  capacity  of  incremental  extension, 
and  to  the  mode  of  doubling,  triplicating,  and  quadruplicating  ideas,  it  is  inqxjssible  to 
analyze  it,  —  tt)  trace  its  comi)ounds  to  their  embryotic  roots,  and  to  seize  upon  those 
principles  of  thought  and  utterance,  by  attention  to  which,  there  has  been  erected  in 
the  forests  of  America,  one  of  the  most  ixilysyllabic  and  completely  transpositivc 
modes  of  communicating  thought  that  exists.  We  shall  endeavor  to  bring  the 
Algonquin  languages  to  this  test. 

The  anatomist  woidd  never  arrive  at  a  clear  description  of  the  human  system,  "so 
fearfully  and  wonderfully  made,"  if  he  did  not  examine  lx)ne  by  lx)ne,  arter}'  by  artery, 
vein  by  vein,  and  nerve  by  nerve.  The  system  becomes  wonderful  because  it  is  so 
exact, — so  comi)licated,  and  yet  capable  of  Ix'ing  so  jxTfectly  traced  by  its  physiological 
oi-der.  Something  of  this  species  of  patience  and  regard  to  appreciate  the  order  of 
structure  is  required  in  sitting  down  to  unravel  the  threads  of  a  language  which 
hits,  (syntactically',  jwrhaps,)  been  called  "agglutinated"  by  an  eminent  linguist.' 
If  by  agglutinati<m  be  meant  accretion,  and  the  adhesive  principle  be  its  syntax,  the 
term  is  certainly  appropriate ;  bnt  for  a  mass  of  words  or  syllables  to  be  aggregated,  or 
stuck  together  without  a  prijiciple  of  order,  is  to  suppose  an  anomaly  in  languages. 
Barbarians  often  stick  syllables  together  in  very  imgainl}'  forms,  and  with  many 
redundancies  and  inelegancies  and  faults,  but  not  without  precise,  and  often  painfully 
precise,  meanings. 

Such  is  the  tendency  of  the  whole  transpositivc  system  common  to  the  Algonquin 
language.  Whatever  is  agglutinated  in  the  material  world  requires  gluten  to  attach 
piece  to  piece,  and  its  analogy  in  the  intellectual  process  of  sticking  syllable  to  syllable. 


'  Mr.  William  von  Humboldt. 


LANGUAGE. 


426 


and  word  to  word,  m  the  accretive  principle ;  atid  tliia  syllabical  gluten  is  precisely 
that  to  which  the  closest  attention  is  required  to  trace  its  syntax. 

Waub  is,  apparently,  the  radix  of  the  verb,  to  see,  and  of  the  word,  light.  Waubun 
is  the  ea«t,  or  sunlight,  and  inferentially,  place  of  light.  Aub  is  the  name  of  the  eye- 
ball, hence  ai-aub,  to  eye,  or  to  see  with  the  eye-ball.  Waub,  it.self,  npi^ears  to  be  a 
compound  of  aub  and  the  letter  w,  which  is  the  sign  of  the  third  person.  Waubuno 
is  a  member  of  a  society  of  men,  so  called  because  they  continue  their  orgies  till 
daylight.  The  simplest  concrete  forms  of  the  verb,  to  see,  are  therefore  as  follows :  — 
Ne  waub,  I  see,  Ke  waub,  thou  seest,  or  you  see  (sing.),  O  waub,  he  or  she  sees.  But 
all  this  is  vague  to  the  Indian  mind,  and  indefinite  in  relation  to  the  general  use  of  the 
verb,  until  the  transitive  inflection  is  added,  whereby  the  class  of  objects  on  which  the 
action  takes  place  is  shoAvn. 

This  principle  was  pointed  out,  in  174G,  by  the  Rev.  David  Bniineixl,  the  celebrated 
missionar}'.  "  The  most  successful  method,"  he  observes,  "'  which  I  liave  taken  for 
instructing  myself  in  the  Indian  languages,  is  to  translate  English  discourses,  by  the 
lielp  of  an  interpreter  or  Iwo,  into  their  language,  as  near  verbatim  as  the  sense  will 
admit  of,  and  to  observe  strictly  how  they  use  words,  and  what  construction  they  will 
bear  in  various  cases,  aud  thus  to  gain  some  acquaintance  with  the  root  from  whence 
particular  words  proceed,  and  to  see  how  they  are  thence  varied  and  divei*sified.  But 
here  occurs  a  very  great  difliculty;  for  the  interpreters,  being  unlearned,  and 
unacquainted  with  the  rules  of  language,  it  is  impossible,  sometimes,  to  know  by  them 
what  part  of  siicech  some  particular  word  is  of,  whether  noun,  verb,  or  imrdcipJe,  for 
they  seem  to  use  participles,  sometimes,  where  we  should  use  nouns,  and,  sometimes, 
where  we  should  use  verbs  in  the  English  language. 

"  But  I  have,  notwithstanding  many  difficulties,  gained  some  acquaintance  with  the 
grounds  of  the  Delaware  language,  and  have  learned  most  of  the  deficta  in  it,  so  that 
I  know  what  English  words  can,  and  what  cannot  be,  translated  into  it.  I  have  also 
gained  some  acquaintance  with  the  particular  phraseologies,  as  well  as  peculiarities  of 
their  language,  one  of  which  I  cannot  but  mention.  Their  language  does  not  admit 
of  their  sjieaking  any  word  denoting  relation,  such  as  father,  son,  &c.,  ahmhiiehj  ;  that 
is,  without  prefixing  a  pronoun  jwssessive  to  it,  such  as  my,  thy,  his,  &c.  Hence,  they 
cannot  be  baptized  in  the  name  of  the  father,  and  the  son,  &c.,  but  they  may  be 
baptized  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ,  and  his  father,  &c." ' 

This  is  a  grammatical  truth  equally  applicable  to  all  the  American  languages  that 
have  been  examined ;  and  it  seems  closely  akin  to  another,  namely,  that  all  active 
verbs  are  likewise  precluded  from  being  used  in  what  Brainerd  denotes  an  ubeolute 
sense,  but  must  be  varied  by  a  particle  put  at  their  ends,  to  denote  the  object  on  which 
they  act.     Hence,  this  class  of  verbs  are  all  tranaitke. 


■  Works  of  Jonathan  Edwards,  vol.  x.,  p.  322. 


Pt.  II.  — 54 


■  * 

n 


426 


LANGUAGE. 


The  Indian  idiom  in  often  forced,  in  translntion,  by  following  scrupulouRly  the 
order  of  English  thought.  I  bcc  a  man,  Nc  wau  bum  au  pai-zhik-in-in-e ;  I  sec  a 
houHC,  Ne  wau  bun  daini-pai  zhik  wa-ki-c-gun. 

Here  the  English  order  of  thought  is  clearly  and  precisely  expressed,  word  for  word, 
in  the  Indian.  But  this  is  not  the  natural  Indian  mode  of  thought,  which  requires 
tiie  object  generally  to  precede  the  verb — as  inine  ne  wau  bum  au.  Man,  I  see  liim. 
Wall  kie-gun,  ne  ne  wau  bun  daun.  House,  I  see  it.  The  word  pai  zhik  is  not 
required  at  all,  being  the  denomination  for  one,  and  not  properly  an  article.  The 
verb  see,  also  gives  information  which,  as  above  denoted,  is  not  required  by  the  English 
word,  namely,  that  the  object  seen  is  of  the  epicene  or  anti-epicene  (neuter)  class.  For 
this  purpose  the  particle  au  liaa  been  already  stated  to  be  used  in  the  first  class  of 
words,  which  is  changed  to  daun  in  the  second,  with  a  corresiK)nding  change  in  the 
letters  m  and  n.  To  sjieak  of  man,  or  house,  without  designating  the  number,  is  to 
speak  of  one  man,  or  one  house ;  and  the  Indian  so  understands  it.  The  use  of  the 
word  pai-zhik  is  therefore  unnecessary. 

Take  another  radix : 

JMiz,  to  embark:  He  or  she  embarks.  Tiiis  is  the  simplest  form  in  which  flic  word 
occurs  colloquially.  But  it  will  at  once  Ix;  iierceivcd  to  Iw  a  compound.  O/li  .ii)iH'ai"s 
to  be  the  root  of  every  s[x?cic8  of  contrivance  designed  to  float  on  water,  wliitb  has 
been  made  by  hands.  The  hitter  idea  is  incori^rated  in  the  word,  and  appears  to  be 
derived  from  ozheau,  to  make,  (v.  ep.)  ozheton  (v.  anti-ep.)  Hence,  ozheaud  maker, 
(ep.)  which  is  changed  to  wazheaud,  the  maker. 

I   Emuakk.  —  Indicative, 

1.  Nim  .    ,     .     .    Biiz. 

2.  Kc    ,     ,     ,     .     Boz, 

3.  Pii  zi, 

4.  (in.)    Nim  ,     .     .     .     Bo  zi  min, 

5.  (ex.)  Ke    .    .     .    .     Bo  zi  min. 
G,  Ke    ....    Bo  zim, 

7,  Pi)  zi  wug. 

Ozh  apfieara  to  be  the  root  of  the  name  for  a  vessel,  (artificial.)  Wa  mit  ig  ozli, 
the  jieople  of  the  wooden-made  vessel — this  is  the  Algonquin  term  for  a  Frenchman. 
Ozh-cau,  is  the  verb  to  make  :  in  this  tenn  ozh,  is  the  nautical  object  on  which  work 
has  Ijcen  bestowed.  Mitig,  trees,  or  timbers,  and  wa,  a  plural  phrase,  indicative  of 
Iiersons. 

I 

I  love      .    .     . 

I  love  a  pei'son 

I  love  a  thing . 


Ne, 

Ne  saug. 
Nc  saug-e-au. 
Ne  saug-e-toue. 


I 


LANGUAGE. 


427 


Thus  action  procoetla  from  the  (irHt  iiorson,  and  Ih  iiuniedlHtoly  rcnderi'd  trnnnitive. 
The  tcnna  au  and  tone,  U8  huiv  employed,  denote  the  two  givat  classes  of  epicene 
and  anti-epicene  nature.' 

Saug  is  thus  seen  to  be  the  rudi.\  of  the  verb  to  love. 

£kid,  to  HiMiak ;  enaik,  to  think ;  naud,  to  bring ;  shingaili,  to  hate.  Persons  and 
objects  immediately  convert  these  radices  into  i)oly.sylIables. 

1.  Nin  de  kid.     I  say. 

2.  Nen  dc  nain  dum.     I  think. 

3.  Fetch  some  water.     Tngah!  nelx^  naudin.     Literally,  Ho!  water  bring. 

4.  I  hate  my  enemy.   Ne,  shing  ai  ne  man,  nan  do  wai  see.   Literally,  I  hate  him — 

my  enemy.     (Singular.) 
6.  I  love  my  friend.     Ne,  saugeau,  nedje  ke  waizee.     Literally,  I  love  him  —  my 

friend.     (Singular.) 
Adjectives,  in  like  manner,  are  converted  into  iK)lyHyllabic  phrases :    Min,  good ; 
ittau,  able. 

6.  They   were  good   men,   and   able   hunters.      Minno   ininewuneeg,   gia  nittau, 

keoo.ssaubuneeg.     Literally,  ff^A  men  they,  and  able  hunters,  they. 
The  existence,  or  being  of  a  iwrson  or  thing,  is  some  term  derivative  fixjm  the  woi-d 

lEAU. 

7.  Have  you  any  meat?     Weos,  kedianuh?     Meat  have  you? 

8.  I  am  a  living  Ix-ing.     Nin,  di-e-au.     I  am  a  living  iK'r,s<m. 

These  examples  will  show  the  tendency  of  the  langiuige  to  accretion  ;  but  they  must 
not  lead  the  inquirer  away  fi-om  the  track  of  construction  and  conjugation :  for  it  is 
still  seen,  that,  in  the  latter,  the  root  of  the  verb  undergoes  no  changes  except  such  as 
are  necessary  in  the  euphonious  adjustment  of  the  class  of  prefixed  and  sutlixed 
pronouns  —  and  the  formidable  array  of  syllables  ari«»H  fmm  the  simple  rule  of 
rendering  the  verb  plural  when  the  noini  or  pronoun  is  pliu'al. 

1.  It  is  require'd  that  all  active  and  transitive  verbs  should  Ijc  prenominally  varied 
to  suit  the  jierson  and  tejise  cf  the  prefixed  pronoun.  Nothing  happens,  therefore,  in 
this  process,  that  does  not  take  place  in  every  grammatical  language  under  the  sun ; 
and,  what  is  perceived  every  day  in  our  own  language,  namely,  the  number  of  the 
pronoun  or  noun  and  of  the  verb  must  agree. 

Examples: — To  Eat;  to  Run;  to  Walk;  to  Burn;  to  Strike. 

I  eat Nee  wo  sin. 

Thou  catcst Kc  we  sin. 


'  The  e  final  in  touo  is  silent,  and  intended  here  provisionally,  as  in  English,  to  give  the  hroad  sound  to  o. 


428  LANGUAGE. 

He  eats We  sin  na. 

We  cat Ke  we  sa  ne  min. 

Ye  or  you  eat Ke  we  sa  min. 

They  eat We  sin  na  wug. 

I  have  eat Ningee  we  sin. 

I  shall  eat Ningtih  we  sin. 

I  was  eating Ne  we  sin  n'^  waw  bun. 

It  was  eat Ke  me  jim. 

I  run Ne  pirn  e  but  to. 

Thou  runnest Ke  pirn  e  but  to. 

He  runs Pim  e  but  to. 

We  run Ke  pim  e  but  to  min. 

Ye  or  you  run Ke  pim  e  but  torn. 

They  run Pim  e  but  to  wug. 

To  walk Pim  mos  saing. 

I  walk Nee  pim  mos  sa. 

Thou  walkest Ke  pim  mos  sa. 

He  walks Pim  mos  sai. 

We  walk Ke  pim  mos  say  min. 

Ye  or  you  walk     ....  Ke  pim  mos  saim. 

They  walk Pim  mos  say  wug. 

I  did  walk Ningee  pim  mos  say. 

Thou  didst  walk    ....  Kegec  pim  mos  say. 

He  did  walk Ke  pim  mos  say. 

We  did  walk Kcgee  pim  mos  say  min. 

Ye  or  you  did  walk  .     .     .  Kegcc  pim  mos  saim. 

They  did  walk      .     .     .     .  Ke  pim  mos  say  wug. 

I  shall  walk Ningee  pim  mos  say. 

Thou  shalt  walk   ....  Kegah  pim  mos  say. 

He  shall  walk Tali  pim  mos  say. 

We  shall  walk Kegah  pim  mos  say  min. 

Ye  or  you  shall  walk     .     .  Kegah  pim  mos  saim. 

They  shall  walk    ....  Tali  pim  mos  say  wug. 

Walking Pim  mos  saing. 

To  bum Chaw  ge  zoong. 

I  bum Ne  chaw  giz. 

Thou  bumest Ke  chaw  giz. 


LANflUAOE. 


4t» 


lie  burns  .  . 
Wo  burn  .  . 
Yc  or  you  bum 
They  bum    .     . 


I  did  bum  .  .  . 
Tliou  didHt  bum  . 
He  did  bum  .  . 
We  did  burn  .  . 
Ye  or  you  did  bum 
Tliey  did  burn 

I  shall  burn  .  . 
Thou  shalt  burn  . 
lie  shall  burn  .  . 
We  shall  burn  .  . 
Ye  or  you  shall  bum 
They  shall  bum 


Burn  him      .     .  . 

Bum  them    .     .  . 

I  am  burned      .  . 

Thou  art  burned  . 

lie  is  burned     .  . 

We  are  burned .  . 
Ye  or  you  are  bumed 

They  are  burned  . 

I  shall  be  burned  . 
Thou  shalt  be  bumed 
lie  shall  Ijc  burned 
We  shall  be  burned 
Ye  or  you  shall  Ije  bumed 
They  shall  be  bumed 


I  strike  him  .  .  . 
Thou  strikest  her  .  . 
He  strikes  him .  .  . 
We  strike  him  .  .  . 
Ye  or  you  strike  him 
They  strike  him    .     . 


Chaw  gie  zo. 
Ke  chaw  gie  zo  min. 
Kc  chaw  gie  ziim. 
Chaw  gie  zo  wug. 

Ningee  chaw  gie. 
Kegce  chaw  gie. 
Kegcc  chaw  gie  zo. 
Kegce  chaw  gc  zo  min. 
Kegce  chaw  gie  ziim. 
Kegce  chaw  gie  zo  wug. 

Ningah  chaw  gie. 
Ki'gah  chaw  gie. 
Tab  chaw  gie  zo. 
Kcgah  chaw  gie  zo  min. 
Kegah  chaw  gie  ziim. 
Tah  chaw  gie  zo  wug. 

Chaw  gie. 
Chaw  gie  zook. 
Nin  chaw  gie. 
Ke  chaw  gie. 
Chaw  gie  zo. 
Ke  chaw  giz  zo  min. 
Kegce  chaw  gie  ziim. 
Kc  chaw  giz  zo  wug. 

Ningcc  chaw  gie  zo  go. 
Kegah  chaw  gie  zo  giim. 
Tah  chaw  giz  wall. 
Kegah  chaw  gie  zo  go  min. 
Kegah  chaw  giz  zo  giim. 
Tah  chaw  giz  waw  wug. 

Ne  buk  ke  tay  way. 
Ke  buk  ke  tay  way. 
0  buk  ke  tay  way. 
Ke  buk  ke  tay  way  nau. 
Ke  buk  ke  tay  way  wug. 
O  buk  ke  tay  way  waun. 


LANGUAGE. 


' 


^ 


I  struck  her.  . 
IIo  struck  her  . 
We  struck  her  . 
They  struck  her 

I  shall  strike  you 
Thou  shalt  strike  them 


Ningoe  huk  ke  tay  wau. 
Ogee  buk  ke  tay  waun. 
Kegi'e  buk  ke  tay  waw  waun. 
Ogee  buk  ke  tay  waw  waun. 

Kcgah  buk  ke  tay  un. 
Kegah  buk  ko  tay  waug. 


It  will  be  perceived  in  these  conjugations,  that  the  pronoun  prefix,  in  the  absence 
of  auxiliary  verbs,  is  declined  for  tense,  and  the  moals  are  hereby  esta)jli.xlied.  To 
show  this  point,  the  following  tal)le  of  the  pronominal  changes  is  exhibited:  — 

Indicative  Mood — First  Ikraou. 

Ne' I. 

Nin-ge I  did — was. 

Nin-gah I  shall — I  will — have. 

Niu-gah-gee I  shall  have — will  have. 

Imperative  Mood  —  First  I\raon. 
Nin-guh I^t  me. 

Pbtential  Mood. 

Nin-dali I  may — I  can. 

Nin-dah-ge I  might  —  I  could. 

Indicative  —  Second  firson, 

Ke Thou. 

Ke-ge Tiiou  didst — hiulst. 

Ke-gah Thou  shalt — wilt. 

Ke-gah-gee Thou  shalt  have — wilt  have. 

Imperative  —  Second  Ilrson. 
Ke-guh Thou. 

Potential  —  Second  Person. 

Ke-dau Thou  mayest — canst. 

Ke^au-gee Thou  mightcst  have — could  have. 

Indicative  —  Third  R^aon. 

O  (pron.  sin  epicene) ...     He  or  she. 

0-ge He  or  she  hath — have,  had. 

'  The  sound  of  e,  in  the  pronominal  conjugations,  is  uniformly  long. 


LANGUAGE.  431 

0-gnh He  or  she  nliall  or  will. 

0-giih-gc lie  or  she  ahull  have,  &c. 

Imperative  —  Third  firson. 

(Mau Ho  or  she  shall  or  will. 

0-(lau-ge He  or  she  may  have,  can  have. 

There  is  a  subjunctive  inotnl,  fornieil  by  prefixing  tlie  wonl  Kishpin  to  the  several 
fonns,  but  not  in  anywise  altering  them.  The  inti-oductiim  of  the  purtii-le  .ske  at  the 
end  of  the  verb,  renders  the  conjugation  throughout,  negative.  It  has  the  same  effect 
that  the  woixl  not  would  have  in  English  verbs,  if  placed  after  the  several  persons  and 
voices ;  and  its  display  in  fonns  would  seem  to  be  equally  formidable  and  useless  to  the 
leanier,  whose  ear  will  readily  recognise  the  particle  of  negation  in  the  Indian, 
wherever  it  occurs. 

It  will  l)c  jH'rceived  that  the  imperfect  tense,  in  this  declension  of  the  pronoinis,  is 
formed  by  adding  ge  to  the  present.  That  the  first  future  changes  ge  to  gali,  and  that 
the  second  future  is  made  by  adding  the  imfK-rfect  to  the  fii-st  future.  There  is  but 
one  voice,  guli,  in  the  imi)erative.  The  potential  is  made  in  dab,  in  the  present,  with 
the  addition  of  ge  for  the  imi)erfect.  But  that  we  may  judge  of  the  forms,  and  in 
order  not  to  anticipate  observations  prior  to  the  introduction  of  the  proper  data,  on 
which  they  are  ba.sed,  it  will  Ijc  suitable  at  this  jioint  to  submit  a  full  c.injugation  of 
one  of  the  active  verbs,  through  all  its  voices.  It  will  be  observed  in  the  pronominal 
declensions,  that  in  the  first  person,  ne,  the  long  vowel  e  is  invariably  changed  to 
the  short  i,  (as  in  pin,)  in  forming  the  second  person ;  a  rule  which,  as  stated  in  the 
scheme  of  annotation,  requires  this  sound  to  be  followed  invariably  by  a  consonant. 
Thus  ne  is  changed  to  nin,  with  no  other  object  but  preserving  a  proper  euphony  in 
the  sentence  in  jtixtaiKJsition. 


First  Ei-icene  Conjug/tion  in  A. 

Saug  :   TO  Love.  —  (A  as  •>    fall.) 

Indicative — Pirneul  Tcme. 

San  geau I  love  a  person. 

Ne  saugeau I  love  a  jwrson. 

Ke  saugeau Thou  lovest  a  person. 

O  saugeau lie  or  she  loves  a  person. 

Nenowind  saugeau We  (excluding  you)  love  a  person. 

Kenowind  saugeau We  (including  you)  love  a  person. 

Kenawau  saugeau Ye  or  you  love  a  person. 

Kenowau  saugeau They  love  a  jierson. 


482  LANGUAGE. 

Imjter/ivf  Trnne. 

Niii  gi-e  Hniigcnu-biin I  liavc  IovchI  a  pcrwMi. 

Kct'gu  8augeRu-buii Thou  lm»t  loved  a  [kthoh. 

Ogt^  Hiuigiui-liun He  or  nlie  lias  loved  ii  {K^rran. 

Neenowind  Hniigenu  inin  nu  bun  .     .  We  (in.)  linve  lovwl  n  ixtwhi. 

Keenowind  xuugenu  min  au  bun .     .  We  (ex.)  have  loved  a  ixroon. 

Kenowau  saugcau  wau  bun    .     .     .  lie  or  you  have  loved  a  )H>r8on. 

Wenawau  naugeau  wau  ban  en  e  bun  They  have  loved  a  person. 

Firiit  Future  Tense. 

I  nhall  or  will  love  a  |)cr8on. 
Thou  Hhalt  or  wilt  love  a  jKTHon. 
lie  or  she  shall  or  will  love  a  i)erson. 
We  (in.)  shall  or  will  love  a  jierson. 
We  (ex.)  shall  or  will  love  a  prson. 
Ye  or  you  shall  or  will  love  a  {wrson. 
They  shall  or  will  love  a  person. 


Ningah  sangeau  .  .  . 
Kegah  saugeau  .  .  . 
Ogah  saugeau  .... 
Nenowind  saugeau-naun 
Kenowind  saugeau-naun 
Kenowau  saugeau-wun  . 
Wenowau  saugeau  waiin 


Second  Future  Teitee. 

Ninpabgc  saugcau-bun I  shall  have  loved  a  person. 

Kegahgee  saugeau-bun Thou  shalt  have  loved  a  jierson. 

Ogahgee  saugeau-bun He  or  she  shall  have  loved  a  jx^rson. 

Nenowind  saugeau  niin  au  bun   .     .  We  (in.)  shall  have  lovetl  a  jK'rson. 

Kenowind  saugeau  min  au  bun  .     .  We  (ex.)  shall  have  loved  a  person. 

Kenawau  saugeau  wau  min  au  bun .  Ye  or  you  shall  have  loved  a  person. 

Wenowau  saugeau  wau  min  au  bun  .  They  shall  have  loved  a  person. 

Imperative  Mood. 

Ningah  sageau-binuh Let  me  love  a  person. 

Sageau-binuh Love  thou  a  jwrson. 

Kegah  sageau-binuh Let  him  love  a  person. 

Ninge  sageau-dau  binuh     ....  Let  us  (in.)  love  a  person. 

Kege  sageau-dau  binuh Let  us  (ex.)  love  a  person. 

Saugeik  binuh Love  ye  or  you  a  person. 

Ogah  saugeau  waun  binuh      .     .     .  Let  them  love  a  person. 

Potential  Mood — Prewnt  Tense. 

Nindau  saugeau I  may  or  can  love  a  person. 

Kedau  saugeau Thou  mayest  or  canst  love  a  person. 


LANGUAGE.  433 

Oilaii  Hiuigi'iiu IIu  or  hIic  may  or  ciiii  lovt!  a  jk-ixoii. 

Nohow iiul  Haiigvmi  imuii     ....  Wc  (in.)  may  or  can  love  a  ihtshju. 

Keiiowiiid  KUiigeaii  naun    ....  Wo  (ex.)  may  or  can  lovo  a  ])c-r8on. 

Kvnowau  saiigeau  wan Ye  or  you  may  or  can  love  a  iM>r8on. 

Weenowaii  Hatigeau  waun  ....  Tliey  may  or  can  love  a  |)crm)n. 

Rr/cct  Tense. 

N'nvlangc  onngi'au  bun I  may  or  can  have  loved  a  iH'rson. 

Kcihtnge  Haiigeau  bun Thou  maycHt  or  canst  have  loved  a  imtsou. 

Odaujre  8a>igcan  bun  ecn    ....  lie  or  she  may  or  can  have  loved  a  ihthoii. 

Nenowind  Haugeau  min  au  bun   .     .  We  (in.)  may  or  can  have  loved  a  iwrnon. 

Kcnowind  naugeau  min  au  bun  .     .  We  (ex.)  may  or  can  have  loved  a  perHon. 

Kenowau  Kaugeau  wau  bun    .     .     .  Ye  or  }'ou  may  or  can  have  lovi'd  a  iK'rs4jn. 

Wenowau  Haugeau  wau  bun   .     .     .  Tiiey  may  or  can  have  lo\ed  u  jK-rson. 

Subjunctive  Mood  —  Present  Tense. 

Kishpin  ne  naugcaug If  I  love  a  ik'I-hom. 

Kishpin  ke  miugeaud If  thou  love  a  (lerson. 

Kixhpin  o  saugeaud If  he  or  »he  love  a  jierson. 

Kislipin  nenowind  naugeung  ...  If  we  (in.)  love  a  ))er)<on. 

Kixbpin  kenowind  Haugeung  ...  If  we  (ex.)  love  a  ikmcou. 

Kishi)in  keenowau  Haugeaig    ...  If  yc  or  30U  love  a  iH'rson. 

Kislipin  weenowau  naugcauwaud     .  If  they  love  a  jiorson. 

The  other  tenses  of  the  indicative  mood  all  adnut  of  this  san>e  pivfixed  term, 
Kislipin,  the  Algonquin  if.  It  will  not  fail  to  be  observed,  that  the  radix,  Saug,  is 
unbroken.  All  the  changes  arc  pronominal.  There  is  no  change  in  the  radical  verb 
it«?lf,  (the  change  in  ik,  in  the  plural  of  the  third  ircrson  of  the  imiwrative,  being 
explicable  on  other  principles).  It  maintains  its  integrity  of  fonn  tlin)ugIiout.  While 
the  ix^rsonal  pronoun  prefix  is  constantly  declined  for  tense,  there  is  a  parallel  declension 
of  the  suffixed  pronouns  of  the  verb,  for  the  various  objective  persons.  The  infinitive 
can  only  Ix;  iiiferivd.  It  is  clearly  traced  in  the  word  saug.  The  inflection  eau, 
meaning  a  living  iwrson,  is  manifestly  derivative  from  the  generic  verb  lEAU  —  a 
word  which  appears  to  lie  at  the  foundation,  or  at  least  to  found  often,  the  entire  class 
of  epicene  verbs.  The  term  eau  is  made  to  carry  the  various  senses  of  person,  being, 
life,  man,  in  a  variety  of  compound  phrases,  and  appears  to  be  the  ready  resource  of 
the  language  when  siieaking  of  any  of  the  organic  classes  of  the  emotions  of  life.  Its 
epicene  character  iwrmits  it  to  be  applied,  not  only  to  men,  without  relation  to 
sexuality,  but  to  all  the  class  of  quadrui^ds,  birds,  fishes,  and  whatever  is  invested  with 
the  proprties  of  life  or  being.  In  this  manner,  it  becomes  unnecessary,  in  the  course  of 
the  narrative,  to  mention  the  specific  names  of  Ijeasts  or  birds,  or  human  subjects,  the 
Pt.  11.-5.3 


ii 


4.'i4 


I,AN(i(IA«iK. 


iii«Ti*  ilcHi;{iiiiti<>ii  of  tliu  griiiiil  vital  (livittimi  (if  natiiiv  to  wliicli  tlio^'  Ih'Ioiik  bt'iiif^ 
•U'ciikmI  Hutliciciit,  ami  tliii*  Im  iiiuHt  ooiiiinoiil}'  iloiu>  in  tlic  iiitlfotioii  can,  or  Hiiiiplu  uii. 
(Ml  tlic  niiitrarv,  wliat  iUh'h  imt  Ih'Ioii^  to  tlii.x  clasH  of  vital  «>l)ji>ctH,  hut  iH  appropriate 
to  tlic  };raiul  iiivit«ion  of  iiiorpinic  liti>,  is  as  readily  ivt'orroil  to  by  tlu>  anti-<>pi(-«>ne  vorb 
IKK,  wbieli,  tiumt  oi'tcii,  is  iK>iioti><l  by  the  long  hoiiikI  oI'  KK,  or  Hiinplo  K.  TIii'ho  arc 
i'avorito  nitNli'i*  of  allusion  by  tliu  IiuliaiiH,  ami  it  iH  rcnuirkabli*,  to  the  nttvutivo 
obwrvor,  how  gn-at  a  iK-jrri'f  of  n'K|Minsibility  he  avoitln  liy  it,  in  tho  dcwription  of 
|R-rM)Mal  matti'rM  involving;  blanu*.  It  is  noxt  to  ini|M>r<r<iblu  to  induco  an  Indian  to  nttiT 
lM>rsonal  nuini's;  the  utnioxt  he  will  do,  if  a  iM'i'son  ini[)licatcd  is  present,  is  to  niovo 
his  lips,  without  s|H>aking,  in  the  direction  of  the  (lerHon.' 

This  dis|N)sition  of  the  Indian  mind  to  doubt  or  eonoeahuent,  the  habitual  want  of 
frankness  of  utterance,  and  the  assumption  of  the  res|Minsi))ility  «>f  aKserlion,  has  lM>en 
snp|)osed  impro|HM'ly  to  form  a  ]H>enliar  nxNHl,  for  whieh  the  term  ihihiUilirc  \n\»  lx>en 
suggested.  These  douliling  phrases  aiv  all  formed  fn)m  the  simple  radix  uliulutii,  or 
uind,  mind,  and  imply  meditation  or  n'wrve  of  expivssion.'  As  well  might  we  say, 
that  the  language  retjuires  an  interrogative  ukmhI,  which  is  made  by  placing  the  particle 
tiiih  ni\or  eiu'h  conjugation,  In-cause  this  particle  asks  a  (piestion.  So  the  intrwluctiou 
of  the  fragment  of  an  adjective  or  an  adverb  into  com|M)und  verbs  might  Ih'  pleaded 
Ofl  creating  the  necessity  for  new  ukmhIs  in  an  almost  endless  series:  but  to  what 
pnqMise  would  these  forms  Ih;  exhibited,  exc«'pt  to  spread  over  (piiivs  of  pa^)er  with 
verbal  forms  of  no  jK-rtinence  to  the  grammar. 

The  phra.st>s  1  love  jn-rhaps,  I  hear  you  ill,  or  imiK'rfectly,  I  sec  yon  painfidly,  and 
the  like,  may  Ik;  conjugated  in  the  Indian,  through  every  mood,  tense,  an<l  voice, 
precisi'ly  as  they  can  be  in  English,  and  with  the  same  uselessness  of  grannnatical 
display.' 


'  I  onco  row  an  Indian  (a  man  under  a  rcligioii.s  sense  of  obligation)  in  a  court  of  justice,  under  oath,  whom 
tho  court  tried  vuinly  to  nialcc  identify  the  individual  against  whom  he  had  unwittingly  uttered  a  charge  out  of 
court ;  but  tho  utmost  that  could  be  got  from  him  wok  the  pu.'<liing  out  of  the  lips  towards  the  person. 

•  natagn's  grammar  of  the  Otchipwee. 

'  This  verbal  phenomenon  may  be  viewc<I  agn-cably  to  the  missionary,  Mr.  Baragn,  as  one  of  the  direct  cfTects 
of  the  long  abuse  of  truth,  by  the  savage  mind. 

"  This  dubitative  is  peculiar,"  he  remarks,  with  severity  and  unjust  harshness,  "  to  the  Indian  mind,  and  in 
siinie  rcspcvtH  ))eani  testimony  to  the  fact,  that  the  habit  of  lying  is  a  strong  trait  of  Indian  character.  licing 
aware  of  this  habit  themselves,  they  much  mistrust  others ;  and  consequently  when  something  is  related  as 
narrated  to  an  Indian  by  his  fellow  Indian,  or  other  men,  be  will  indeed  remember  tho  narration,  but  with  tho 
idea  of  possibly  being  imposed  on ;  and  give  the  hearer  to  understand  that  tho  narrative  may  not  be  true  in  all 
its  parts."  p.  90.  Between  this  mental  precaution  and  the  habit  of  lying  there  is  a  wide  difference.  Naube- 
suh,  It  may  be  so,  is  the  expression  which  is  usually  applied  to  doubtful  narrations  of  this  kind,  and  it  is  used 
in  the  double  sense  of  doubt  and  irony;  but  always,  so  far  as  observed,  with  just  discrimination. 


LAN(iUA(iK. 


4n.'i 


§8.  Non-existence  of  Auxiliary   Veriis:  — 

CoiiMulcnttioiiH  on  ilus  exMknce  of  a  tiiil»ilanlir>:  vcrh  of  litmUd  iixc  In  l/ir  Ali/i>ni/nln 
lantjnaijc.  I}iMind'u>n  Mii/ijHmud  to  lie  etttiiUlx/nil  In  tin-  /nmjiKii/t'  futirim  the 
ijnvsluni  of  the  vxlMcnci:  itf  I'AssioN  anil  Ihr  ixlxtincf  <>/  timk.  I '»/•/>  J'ar  the  latter 
reittrieted  to  the.  tIejKtrtmint/t  a/  (inhinile  nntltir.  lit  nninh  r/xirt  reMftrituKj 
inoryanic  mutter.  Fnll  eDnJnijtitlnns  of  Ixith  verlm  throntjh  thr  ininHlH  and  ti  nuen 
of  tiwi  Ch!j>2>iii.a  i/rannnar.  'JVannlatlon  of  t/ie  third  reme  <./'  the  Jirnt  elmpt)  r  if 
Qencnis. 

It  hoH  Ir'1'11  hIidwii  that  the  AlfroiKjiiiii  lanjriiiiirt^  lias  no  auxiliary  v«'rlis,  niiil  tliat 
tlio  past  mill  future  tt-iiwH  aii'  t'xcliisivtiy  (li'imtrd  \\\  tciisal  snUixcs  to  tlu'  ciim'iit 
verl)s.  Time  is  alwayn  to  Iw  iimK'rMt<H)il  as  jircscnt ;  hut  llii-re  is  no  inllcctioii  to 
denote  the  present  tense.  A  people  who  are  per|K'tnally  sayinL'.  in  tlieir  eoUtKiniiil 
intereoni'se,  "  I  siek ;  I  well ;  I  jrlad ;  I  sorry,"  have  natin-ally  liecn  supposed  to  have 
no  word  in  their  hin<^na<^e  to  denote  tlie  possession  or  htpse  ol"  existiMiee,  ahstraet  or 
eonerete.  Vi-t  this  would  convey  a  wronj?  inii)ri'ssion  of  the  capacities  of  tiie 
hinguaf^e. 

The  liahit  of  thus  spealvinjr  is  iniivei'sul,  it  is  thoufrht,  in  rehition  to  every  I'Assion 
of  the  human  heart;  its  h)ves,  its  liates,  its  sorrows;  hut  tlie  mind  dcx-s  not  ap|H'ar  to 
l»e  thus  hinited  in  its  ahility  to  expivss  tiie  eone«'ptions  of  iK-in-r.  The  niytiiolo<ry  of 
the  i)eo|>Ie  is  one  whieli  creates  ii  frecpient  necessity  of  s|H'al\in^  of  s|iiritual  and 
immaterial  existences,  which  an»  8up[M)sed  to  inliahit  the  sky  and  tiie  air,  and  which 
arc  invested  hy  them  with  the  jHjwers  of  iiuqiity  and  iMMATKHiAi.iTy.  Altiioiifrh  tliese 
creations  are  thou<;ht  to  1)C  often  manili-st  to  the  eye,  and  are  typilie<l  in  clouds, 
rainl)ows,  lightnings,  thunder,  and  a  thousauil  varying  phenomena  on  the  earth 
connected  with  the  exhihition  of  light  anil  shade,  fliey  are  also  clothed  with  the 
power  of  ixvisiiiii.iTV.  Their  materiality  as  phenomena  of  the  heavens  is  changed 
in  a  moment  to  spirituality.  The  Indian  mythology  could  not  e.vist  without  this 
theory.  The  Great  Spirit  is  snpposvd  to  inhaltit  the  heavens,  and  to  walk  "on  the 
wings  of  the  wind."  Nohoily  can  hear  an  Indian  Meda,  Proiihet,  or  Jo.ssikecd  sfwak 
on  the  great  phenomena  amund  him,  without  iH>rceiving  this.  And  the  impression  of 
his  notions  of  spiritual  existence  hccomes  ah.solute  when  we  see  him  kneel  down  and 
lift  up  his  voice  in  prater.  NosA  okiiigong  aiikyix  showaiximkcovix.  My  Father  in 
heaven  dwelling,  take  i)ity  on  us.  This  is  not  addres.sed  to  the  father  of  a  lodge,  hut 
to  the  Father  of  Light. 

The  participal  form  of  the  verh  Am,  to  ahide,  namely,  abiyun,  ahiding,  is  the  equi- 
valent tenn  for  "  who  art"  in  the  Lord's  prayer. 


t; 


489  LANGUAGE. 

Momo  is  the  verb  to  take,  as  contrardistinguishcd  from  odaupin :  it  signifies  the 
taking  by  unseen  or  spiritual  hands,  and  hence,  perhaps,  the  word  moneto,  a  spirit  or 
god.  Neither  of  these  words  appears,  however,  to  embrace  roots  implying  existence,  or 
disconnected  from  the  materiality  of  human  life.  The  vocabulary  furnishes  another 
word,  when  it  becomes  necessary,  it  would  seem,  for  the  speaker  to  drop  the  region  of 
passion,  (where  his  expressions  are  perpetually  without  a  primary  or  auxiliary  verb,) 
and  to  describe  the  immaterial  creation,  or  boundaries  of  space.  For  this,  the  terms 
in  use  are  drawn  from  a  verb  whose  trinal  root  is  lEAu.  The  vowels  in  this  word  are 
long,  with  less  stress  of  voice  on  the  second  than  the  first  and  third,  yet  not  reducing 
the  sound  to  short  e.  The  first  is  the  i  in  pine,  and  the  third  is  uniformly  broad,  as  a 
in  fall,  and  is  expressed  in  the  combinations  of  the  language  by  an  and  aw.  The 
latter  is  indeed  the  great  particle  of  universal  existence,  as  well  as  of  possession  and 
vitality.  Is  not  this  the  case  with  the  verb  for  existence  in  the  Hebrew  ?  Constantly 
speaking,  us  that  language  docs,  of  personal  emotions,  without  a  verb  to  denote  per- 
sonal existence,  and  yet  employing  one,  when  the  great  truths  of  eternal  existence  are 
involved.  To  what  extent  the  sense  of  existence  is  indicated  in  the  Algonquin  verb 
ieiiu,  distinct  from  its  operation  on  created  bodies,  we  shall  not  in  this  place  inquire, 
while  it  may  tend  to  advance  the  study  by  furnishing  some  examples  of  its  use. 

Who  is  there Wnhow,  Ieiiu. 

He  who  is  there    ....     Ween,  ai-aud  emau. 

He  is  there Ieiiu  emau. 

Be  still     .......     Pizaun,  leilun. 

He  is Ke  d'ieiiu. 

I  am Ieiiu. 

The  whole  conjugation  of  this  verb  may  be  exhibited,  aa  it  is  employed  by  the 
Chippewas. 

Ieau,  to  be,   (v.  a.)  —  Indicative  Mood. 
1.    Present  Tense. 
Singular — 1.  Nindiau I  am,  do,  have. 

2.  Keediau Thou  art,  dost,  hast. 

3.  lau He  or  she  is. 

Phiral — 1.  Keediau-min We  are,  (including  the  person  spoken  to.) 

Nindiau-min We  are,  (excluding  the  person  spoken  to.) 

2.  Keediau-m Ye  are. 

3.  lau-wug They  are. 

2.   Imperfect  Tense. 
Singular — 1.  Ningeeiau-bun     ....     I  was,  did,  had. 

2.  Keegeeiau-bun    ....     Thou  wast,  &c. 

3.  Keeiau-bun He  or  she  was. 


LANGUAGE. 


437 


Plural — 1.  Koogooiau-min    ....  We  were,  (in.) 

Ningceiau-min     ....  We  were,  (ex.) 

Keegeeiaii-m Ye  were. 

Keeiau-wug They  were. 

3.    Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 

Nhigeeiau-naubun    ...  I  have  been  or  had  been. 

Keegeeiau-naubun   .     .     .  Thou  hast  been,  &c. 

Keeiau-bun lie  or  she  hath,  or  has  been. 

Keegeeiau-niinaubun    .     .  We  have  l)een  (in.) 

Ningeeiau-niinaubun    .     .  We  have  Iwen  (ex.) 

.  Ye  have  Iwen. 

.  They  have  Ijeen. 

4.  Firat  Future. 

Ninguhiau I  shall  or  will  Ix;. 

Keegiihiau Thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 

Tahiau He  or  she  shall  or  will  be. 

Kecguhiau-min    ....  We  shall  or  will  be  (in.) 

Ninguhiau-min    ....  We  shall  or  will  Ije  (ex.) 

Keeguhiau-m Ye  shall  or  will  be. 

Tahiau-wug They  shall  or  will  be. 

5.  Second  Future. 


2_ 
3. 

Singtdar — 1. 
2. 

3. 
Phtral—1. 

2. 
3. 

Singular — 1. 
o 

3. 
Plural— 1. 

2. 
3. 


Keegeeiaum-waubun 
Keeiau-bunoij'    .     . 


Singtdar — 1. 

2. 

3. 

Plural— \. 

2. 
3. 


Ninguhgce  iau  naubun 
Kecguhgee  iau-naubun 
Tahgee  iau-bun  .     .     .     . 
Keeguhgee  iau-minaubun 
Ninguhgce  iau-minaubun 
Keguhgee  iaum-waubun    , 
Tahgeeiau-buneeg    .     .     . 


I  shall  have  been. 
Thou  wilt  have  been. 
He  or  she  will  have  been. 
We  shah  have  been  (in.) 
We  shall  have  been  (ex.) 
Ye  or  you  will  liave  been. 
They  will  have  Ijeen. 


Interrogative    Moon. 
(I  introduce  this  mood  because  I  find  a  peculiar  tenuiuatiou  for  it,  in  the  inflection 
>:un.) 


I 


1 


Singtdar — 1.  Nindiau-nuh 
2.  Kcediau-nuh 


Plural— I. 


lau-nuh     .     . 
Keediau-minuh 
Neediau-minuh 
Keediau-m-nuh 


3.  lauwug-nuh 


Present   Tense. 

.  Am  I? 

.  Art  thou? 

.  Is  he,  or  she? 

.  Are  we?  (in.) 

.  Are  we?  (ex.) 

.  Are  ye,  or  you? 

.  Are  they? 


438 


LANGUAGE. 


h 


2.  Imperfect  Teme. 

Singular — 1.  Neendiaun-aubunuh     .     .     Was  I? 

2.  Kccdiaun-aubunuh  .     . 

3.  lau-bunuh      .... 
Plural — 1.  Keediau-niinaubunuh  . 

Nccndiau-niiraaubunuh 

2.  Kecdiau-waubunuh 

3.  laubuneog-nuh    .     .     . 


Wast  thou? 
Was  he,  or  she? 
Were  we?  (in.) 
Were  we?  (ex.) 
Were  ye? 
Were  they? 

3.  Ikrfect  and  Pluperfect  Tenses. 


Singular — 1.  Ningeeiau-naubunuh 

2.  Keegceiau-naubuuuh 

3.  Keeiau-bunuli      .     . 
Plural — 1.  Keegceiau-minaubunul 

Ningceiau-minaubunuh 

2.  Kcegeciauni-waubunul] 

3.  Keeiau-buneegonuh 


4.  F, 


Singular — 1.  Ninguhiau-nuli   . 

2.  Keeguhiau-nuh   . 

3.  Tahiau-nuh    .     . 
Plural — 1.  Keehiaii-minuh   . 

Ninguhiau-minuh 

2.  Keoguhiaum-nuh 

3.  Tahiau-wiignuh  . 


Have,  or  had  I  been? 
Hast  thou  been? 
lias,  or  had  he,  or  she  been? 
Have  we  been  (in.)  or  had? 
Have  we  been  (ex.)  or  had? 
Have  or  had  ye  been? 
Have  they  been? 


rat  Future  Tense. 

Sliall  or  will  I  be? 
Wilt  or  shalt  thou  be? 
Shall,  or  will  he  or  she  be? 
Shall  or  will  we  be?  (in.) 
Shall  or  will  we  be?  (ex.) 
Shall  or  will  ye  or  you  be? 
Shall  or  Avill  they  be? 


Singular 


-1.  Ninguhgeeiau-naubunuh 


2.  Keeguhgeeiau-naubunuh  . 

3.  Tahgeeiau->unuh     .     .     . 
Plural — 1 .  Keeguhgeciau-minaubunuh 

Ninguhgeciau-minaubunuh 

2.  Keeguhgeeiaum-waubunuh 

3.  Tahgcciau-buneegenuh 


Second  Future  Tense. 

Shall  I  have  been? 
Wilt  thou  have  been? 
Will  he  or  she  have  been? 
Shall  or  will  we  have  been?  (in.) 
Shall  or  will  we  have  been?  (ex.) 
Will  ye  have  been? 
Will  they  have  been? 


Imperative   Mood. 

Singular — 1.  Ningudiau-binuh     .     .     .     Let  me  be. 

2.  laun-binuli Be  thou,  or  do  thou  be. 

3.  Tahiau-binuh      ....     Let  him  or  her  be. 


I 


LANGUAGE. 

Plural — 1.  laiulaii-binuh Lot  ii8  bo.  (in.) 

Ningiili  iamin-binuh Lot  ua  be.  (ox.) 

2.  lauyuek-bmuh Be  ye,  or  do  ya  be. 

3.  Tahiauwug-binuh Let  them  be. 

Potential   Mood. 
1.  Present  Tense, 

Singular — 1.  Nindau-iau I  may,  or  can  be. 

2.  Keedau-iau Thoii  muyest,  or  canst  be. 

3.  Tahiaii He  or  she  may,  or  can  be. 

Plural — 1.  Keedaii-iaumin We  may  or  can  Ik;,  (in.) 

Nindau-iaumin ^Yc  may  or  can  lie.  (ox.) 

2.  Kocdaii  iau-m Ye  or  you  may  or  can  be. 

3.  Tahiau-wug They  may  or  can  be. 


439 


2.  Imjwr/ect  Tense. 


Singular — 1.  Nindauiau,  koossamau 

2.  Kcodauiau,  koo.ssamau 

3.  Tahiaii,  koos.silmau       .     . 
Pbtrnl — 1 .  Keedauiau-min-koossiimau 

Neendaiiiau-min-koossamau 

2.  Kecdauiaum,  koossiimau  . 

3.  Tahiau-wug,  koossiimau    . 


I  miglit,  could,  would,  or  should  Ije. 
Thou  niightst,  couldst,  wouldst,  or 
Iloor she might,&c. be.  [.shouldstbe. 
We  might,  &c.  Ijc.  (in.) 
We  might,  &c.  Ijo.  (ex.) 
Ye  might,  &c.  Ije. 
They  might,  &c.  be. 


3.  Perfect  and  Phiperfect  Tenses. 


I  may,  can,  might,  &c.  have  been. 
Thou  mayost,  canst,  &c.  have  lx;en. 
He  or  she  may,  &c.  have  been. 
We  may,  &c.  have  l)ccn.  (in.) 


Singular — 1.  Nindaugce-iaubun,  koossamau    .     . 

2.  Koedahgce-iainiaubun,  koossamau  . 

3.  Tabgce-iaubun,  koossamau    .     .     . 
Plural — 1.  Koedaugci'iauminaubun,  koo.ssamau 

Nindaugeoiauminawbun,  koossamau    Wo  may,  &c.  have  been,  (ex.) 

2.  Kcodaugceiaum-waubun,  koossamau    Ye  may,  &c.  have  Ijoon. 

3.  Tahgeeiaubuneeg,  kossamau      .     .     They  may,  &c.  have  been. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 
1.     P-esent  Tense. 

Singular — 1.  Kishpin  iau-yaun If  I  be. 

2.  Kishpin  iau-yun If  thou  be. 

3.  Kishpin  iaud If  he  or  she  be. 


■! 


»•* 


440 


LANGUAGE. 


Plural.  —  1.  Kishpin  iau-yun  (in.) If  \vc  be. 

Kishpin  iau-yong  (ex.)      .     .     .     .  If  we  be. 

2.  Kisbpin  iau-yaig If  ye  or  you  be. 

3.  Kisbpin  iau  waud If  they  be. 

2.     Imperfect  Tense. 
iSiiti/itlar. — 1.  Kishpin  we  iau-yaun If  I  were. 

2.  Kishpin  we  iau-yun If  thou  wert. 

3.  Kishpin  we  iaud If  he  or  she  wcrc. 

Plural.  —  1.  Kishpin  we  iauyung If  we  were. 

Kishpin  we  inu  yaung If  Ave  were. 

2.  Kishpin  we  iau  yaig If  ye  or  you  were. 

3.  Kishpin  we  iau  waud If  they  were. 

(The  three  following  tenses  of  this  mood  arc  conjugated,  because  I  find  terminations 
of  the  verb  expressing  them  different  from  the  like  tenses  of  the  Indicative.) 

3.     I\rfect  Tense  and  Pluperfect. 
HAVE  OR  HAD. 

Singular. — 1.  Ki.sbpin  iauyaumbaun If  I  have  been. 

2.  Kishpin  iauyumbun If  thou  hast  been. 

3.  Kishpin  iaupun If  he  or  she  hath  or  has,  been. 

Plural.  —  1.  Kishpin  iauyung-ebun If  we  have  been. 

Kishpin  iauyaung-ebun     .     .     .     .     If  we  have  been. 

2.  Kishpin  iau-yaig-ebun If  ye  or  you  have  l)ecn. 

3.  Kishpin  iau-waupun If  they  have  been. 

4.     First  Future. 

SHALL  OR  WILL. 

.     If  I  shall  or  will  Ije. 
.     If  thou  shalt  or  wilt  be. 


Singular. — 1.  Kishpin  we  iau  yaun  baun 

2.  Kishpin  we  iau  yun  bun  . 

3.  Ki.sbpin  we  iau  pun     .     . 
Plural.  —  1.  Kishpin  we  iau  yung  ebun 

Kishpin  we  iau  yaung  ebun 

2.  Kishpin  we  iau  yaig  ebun 

3.  Kishpin  we  iau  Maupun    . 


If  he  or  she  shall  or  Avill  be. 
If  we  shall  or  will  be  (in.) 
If  we  shall  or  will  be  (ex.) 
If  ye  or  you  shall  or  will  be. 
K  they  shall  or  will  be. 


5.     Second  Future  Tense. 


SHALL  OR  WILL  HAVE  BEEN. 

Singular. — 1 .  Kishpin  keeiau  yaumbaun     ...     If  I  shall  have  been. 

2.  Kishpin  keeiau  yumbun    .     .     . 

3.  Kishpin  keeiau-pun  .         ... 


If  thou  wilt  have  been. 
If  he  will  have  been. 


LANGUAGE. 

Plural.  —  1.  Ki»liijin  keeiau  yuug  obiin     ...  If  we  shall  have  been  (in.) 

Kishpin  keeiau  yauug  tibun  ...  If  we  phall  have  Ijeen  (ex.) 

2.  Kishpin  keeiau  yaig  ebun      ...  If  ye  or  you  will  have  been. 

3.  Kishpin  keeiau-waupun    ....  If  they  will  have  been. 

Infinitive  Mood. 

Present  T.—lau To  be. 

I\rfecl  T. — laubun To  have  been. 

Participles. 

Present  T. — laung Being. 

Perfect  T. — laung  ebun    .     .     .     Been. 
Compound  P'rfcd. — Keeiaung-ebun    .     .     Having  been.' 


441 


Xtta, 

ro  be,    (v.  i.) 

Indicative  Mood. 

Pres. 

7'.— Atta 

It  is. 

Im. 

r.— Atta-bun    .     . 

It  was. 

nrf. 

7".— Kee  atta-bun  . 

It  has  been. 

F.F. 

T:— Tab  atta    .     . 

It  shall  or  will  be. 

S.F. 

T. — Tahgee  attorwun 

It  shall  or  will  have  been. 

Pres. 

T. — Atta-wun  .    . 

They  are. 

Im. 

T. — Atta-buneen   . 

They  were. 

Per. 

T. — Kee  atta  buneen 

.     They  have  been. 

F.F. 

7!— Tall  atta  wun 

They  shall  or  will  be. 

S.F. 

T. — Tahgee  atta  bun  een 

They  shall  or  will  have  been. 

I  N  T  E  R  R  (>  G 

ATivE  Mood. 

Pres. 

Tl— Attaruuh    .... 

Is  it? 

Int. 

T. — Kec-atta-nuh  .     .     . 

Was  it? 

Rr. 

T. — Kee-attarbunuh    .     . 

Has  it  been  ? 

F.F. 

7!— Tah-attarnuh  .     .     . 

Shall  or  will  it  be? 

S.F. 

T. — Tahgee  attarbunuh  . 

Shall  or  will  it  have  been? 

Pres. 

T. — Atta  wunuh   .     .     . 

Are  they  ? 

Int. 

T. — Kee  atta  buneenuh  . 

Were  they? 

Rr. 

T. — Kee  atta  buneenuh  . 

Have  they  been  ? 

F.F. 

T.—Tah  atta  wunuh .     . 

Shall  or  will  they  be  ? 

S.F. 

T. — Tahgee  atta  bun  ecnuh 

Shall  or  will  they  have  been  ? 

'  This  verb  was  furnished  to  the  pages  of  the  North  American  Review,  twenty-five  years  ago. 

Pt.  II.  — 5G 


I'll 


i  -  M 


t' 


442  LAN(JUA(j1E. 

Imi'euative  Mood. 

Sing. — Poan  ctoan      ....     Let  it  be. 
Plu. — Poou  ctoan  inicu .     .     .     Let  them  be. 

Potential  Mood.  —  Singular. 
PrtHent  T. — Tiih  atta  koosUraau  ...     It  may  be. 
Rr/ect   T. — Taligec  atta  koosilmau  .     .     It  may  have  been. 

Pluml 
Present  T. — Tah  atta-wun  koosamau    .     Tliey  may  be. 
Pjrfivt    T. — Tahgce  atttv-wun  koossamaii    They  may  have  been. 

Subjunctive  Mood. 
Sing. — Prcs.  T. — Kii<hpin  attaig  .     .     .     If  it  Ix?. 
Imper.  T. — Kishpin  attaig-ebim     .     If  it  was. 
I\;rf.  T. — Kishpin  kee  attaig-obun   If  it  has  been. 
F.  F.  T. — Kishpin  wee  attaig.    .     If  it  shall  Ijc. 
S.  F.  T. — Kishpin  kee  attaig-i'bun    If  it  shall  have  l)ccn. 
This  conjugation  is  rendered  plural  by  i.mki',  them,  after  each  of  the  above. 

Infinitive  Mood. 

Present  Tense.  —  Atta To  Ijc. 

Pbrfeet    Tense. — Attabun  ....     To  have  been. 

Participles. 

Attaig Being. 

Attaig  ebun Been. 

"  And  God  said,  l^et  there  Ije  light,  and  there  was  light."  This  sublime  passage  is 
rendered  thus :  Appe  dush,  geezhtl,  Monedo,  aikodood,  tah  waasai-yau !  ke  wi-iaussai, 
du.sh  !     Literally,  And  then,  merciful  Spirit,  he  said.  Let  light  be,  and  light  was. 

Wa.s-sai-au,  is  the  substantive  form  of  light,  or  shining  light,  which  is  converted  to 
a  substantive  verb  indicative  by  the  particle  au,  and  is  changed  back  from  the 
indicative  to  the  imperative  by  the  prefixed  but  independent  particle,  tah.  Intransitive 
verbs  which  are  thus  comiwunded,  do  not  require  this  pai  tide,  however,  when  placed 
in  the  imperative  mood,  which  is  made  simply  by  the  inflection  ai.  Thus,  puk-et^ai, 
to  strike ;  che-mai,  to  paddle ;  paush-kiz-zeg-ai,  to  fire ;  the  term  iausai  is  changed 
from  the  imperative  to  the  indicative  by  a  duplication  of  the  initial  vowel  after  w. 
Thus  icau-sai,  living  light  or  created  light,  is  rendered  wi-ica-si,  with  the  particle  ke 
(which  is  not  here  a  pronoun,)  for  past  tense,  and  dush,  a  tensal  parallel  for  time  j  thus 
completing  the  perfect  sense  of  the  term,  "  light  was." 

These  conclusions  seem  to  be  inevitable,  from  an  analysis  of  the  terms,  and  are 
suggested  to  philologists  with  deference. 


IV.  REMARKS  ON  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  CHEROKEE. 
IN  ANSWER  TO  QUESTIONS  TRANSMITTED  UNDER 
THE  DIRECTION  OF  THE  BUREAU  OF  INDIAN 
AFFAIRS. 


BY   REV.    S.    A.    WORCESTER. 


Cherokee  Language. 

The  following  answers  to  inquiries  respecting  the  Clierokee  langnnge  are  written  in 
much  haste,  yet  have  cost  much  time  and  labor.  There  are  many  blots  and  erasures, 
but  I  cannot  take  time  to  transcribe.  Many  blots  are  owing  to  my  Ix'ing  in  the  habit 
of  using  the  Cherokee  character,  and  so  beginning  to  write  words  in  that  character 
before  I  was  aware. 

I  have  used  Pickering's  Alphabet,  modified  to  suit  the  language. 

a  as  \  in  fatiiek  —  short  as  A  in  rival. 

e  "  A  "  hate  —  short  as  e  in  met. 

i  "  I  "  riQLE  —  short  as  I  in  PIT. 

o  "  o  "  note,  but  approaching  to  Aw  in  law. 

u  "  00"  .MOON — short  as  u  in  i'ull. 

V  "  u  "  BUT,  nasalized,  much  as  if  followed  by  the  French  nasal  n. 

g  between  hard  G  and  k. 

«  iC  J         «  .(       ij     a     If 

Other  consonants  as  in  English.  Where  I  have  used  t  before  1,  and  before  or  after 
s,  in  many  cases  d  would  be  more  .accurate;  but  few  English  ears  can  make  the 
distinction.  The  same  is  true  respecting  k  in  the  same  circumstances.  G  in  most 
instances  would  be  more  accurate.  No  doubt  I  have  made  errors  in  other  cases  by 
using  k  or  t  for  g  or  d,  and  vice  versa,  for  my  ear  does  not  distinguish.  Other  errors,  no 
doubt,  one  well  versed  in  the  language  would  detect.     I  have  done  as  well  as  I  could. 

I  have  num1x;red  my  answers  to  particular  questions  under  each  general  question, 
as  if  the  general  question  were  marked  (1),  and  the  particular  questions  (2),  (3),  &c. 
It  will  be  necessary  to  count,  to  see  to  which  particular  each  answer  relates. 

My  principal  Cherokee  assistant  has  been  the  Rev.  Stephen  Foreman. 

Two  points  before  a  syllable,  below  the  line, .  indicate  that  the  vowel  sound  of  that 
syllable  is  scarcely  to  be  heard. 

Aspirates  I  have  sometimes  expressed  by  the  letter  h,  and  sometimes  by  an  '  before 
an  aspirated  consonant. 

(443) 


Sounila 

—  Vowels . 

u 

« 

u 

« 

tt 

M 

u 

(» 

u 

« 

a 

Consonants 

■ 


I 


/ 


444 


LANGUAGE. 


QuKSTiox  ;5l.j.  I  am  not  acquainted  with  the  most  ancient  languageM,  except  a  little 
only  with  the  Hebrew.  The  principles  of  the  Chemkee  corres^wnd  more  with  that 
than  witli  modern  Euroiwan  languages,  or  with  Greek  and  Latin.  Yet  the  correspond- 
ence is  slight,  scarcely,  perhaps,  extending  beyond  the  fact,  that  the  grammatical  forms 
of  verbs  are  made  in  part  by  rRONOMiNAL  prefixks.  The  changes  of  termination  have 
no  reference  to  jierson,  subject,  or  object.      It  is  manifestly  not  derived  from  the 

Ilebrow,    MEJUDIEE. 

310.  (I.)  Yes,  especially  verbs.  (2.)  Not  very.  (3.)  If  by  the  root  of  a  word 
be  understowl  those  syllables  which  are  not  changed  by  inllection,  there  are  in 
Cherokee  verbs,  rai-ely  three,  sometimes  two,  often  one,  sometimes  none.  Whoever 
can  (ell  what  is  the  root  of  some  Cherokee  verbs,  can  do  more  than  I.     (4.)  No. 


317.  (2.)  Verbs  are  not  comiK)unded  with  substantives.  (3,  4,  5.)  It  is  not  a 
coalescence  of  distinct  words,  but  the  expression  of  idea,s  by  syllables,  or  by  consonants 
constituting  a  part  of  the  verb,  which  in  other  languages  arc  expix'ssed  by  separate 
words.     (C.)  See  322. 

318.  (1.)  Pronouns,  prej^sitions,  and  adverbs,  that  is  the  korce  of  such.  (2.)  Yes. 
The  longest  word  I  have  found  is,  Wi-ni-do-di-ge-gi-nti-li-sko-to-ta-no-ne-li-di-se-sti. 
Syllables  17.  Translation  —  "They  will  by  that  time  have  nearly  done  granting 
[favors]  from  a  distance  to  thee  and  to  me." 

Analysis. 

Wi  conveys  the  idea  of  distance. 

Ni  by  that  time. 

Do  denotes   that  the  favors   are   confen-ed  on  each  person  separately,  not  both 

collectively. 
Di  piiu-ality  of  things  granted. 
Ge  plurality  and  third  person  of  agents  —  they. 
Gi-NA  duality  and  second  person  of  recipients  —  thee  and  me. 
Li-SKO-TO,  radical. 
Ta  is  DI  in  the  simplest  form  of  the  verb,  variously  intlected  in  different  tenses  and 

relations. 
No,  completion  —  done  granting. 
Ne,  sign  of  the  dative  —  to  or  for. 
Li-Di,  nearly. 

Se-stt,  sign  of  future  tense. 

I  will  not  vouch  for  the  entire  accuracy  of  this  analysis.  It  is  an  approximation  — 
pretty  close,  I  believe. 


-i   <■ 


ii  ^ 


LANGUAGE. 


44r) 


319.  (2.)  Nouns  sij^nifying  persoiiH  have  inflections  denoting  jwrson  and  nunilxT. 
(3.)  Differently  in  different  jwrsons,  but  by  ehanges  in  prefixes.  (4.)  Ye.x,  in  first  und 
second  persons.  (5.)  Inclusive  and  exclusive  in  first  and  secontl  iH-nsons.  (C.)  Changes 
in  initials  to  denote  ixTsonality. 

320.  (1.)  There  are  a  few  nouns,  such  aa  man,  l)oy,  which  arc  in  their  natine 
masculine;  and  woman,  girl,  &c.,  feminine.  And  there  are  adjectives  signilying  male 
and  female.  Otherwise  there  is  no  distinction  of  gender.  None  by  infiections.  (2.) 
Person  and  number.  ('■].)  No.  (5.)  Verbs  have  inllections  which  denote  whether 
the  oiUECT  Ije  animate  or  inanimate. 

321.  (I.)  Personal  nouns  change  to  denote  number  and  person.  Other  sul)stantives 
have  no  inllection.  (2.)  No.  (.j.)  I  think  not.  (4.)  Kitlier.  The  noun  oftener 
precedes;  but  that  word  is  placed  first  which  is  most  prominent  in  tlie  mind  of  the 
speaker.  If  there  is  emphasis  on  the  verb,  it  naturally  takes  the  first  i)lace.  (V) 
Food  civk  mk,  usually,  unless  the  verb  has  empha.sjs.  But  either  is  g(M)d.  ((>.)  Nouns 
may  perhaps  be  said  to  become  verbs  by  preli.xing  a  verbal  initial,  as  So-<iui-li,  a  hor.xe. 
Tai->o-(pii-li,  I  am  a  horse.  [See  322.  (D.)]  Some  adjectives  have  ten.-fes.  U-tsa-ta, 
there  is  much ;  u-tsiv-to-gi,  there  was  much ;  u-tsa-te-sti,  there  will  be  much. 

322.  (I.)  An  immen.se  field.  (2.)  No.  (3.)  By  changes  in  the  initial  syllal)les. 
(4.)  Best  .seen  in  the  siK'cimens  of  conjugation.  (•>.)  How  many  modes  I  caimot  tell, 
nor  decide  M'hat  forms  should  lie  called  modes,  and  what  regarded  as  new  derivative 
verbs.  Ten.ses  I  count  18.  Voices,  active  and  passive;  and,  if  the  reciprocal  or 
mutual  form  is  to  Ixj  regarded  aa  another  voice,  middle.  Toi-ge-yu,  I  love  him ; 
V-gi-ge-yu,  I  am  loved ;  A-fpiarila-gc-yn,  I  love  myself;  de-gi-na-<hi-ge-yu,  thou  and  I 
love  each  other. 

(C.)  Difterent  forms  are  u.sed  in  affirmation  and  negation.  In  the  latter  the  syllable 
yi,  or  the  letter  y,  is  prefixed. 

(7.)  There  is  a  Ibrm  which  is  used  in  most  ca.ses  where  the  infinitive  is  used  in 
other  languages,  but  it  has  numljer  and  person.  There  is  also  a  form  more  strictly 
infinitive,  but  it  seldom  occui-s. 

(8.)   Yes. 

(9.)  No;  except  a.s  in  321  (G)  :  and,  indeed,  I  think  this  can  hardly  be  called 
transforming  the  nouns  into  verbs.  It  is  simply  denoting  person  and  number  hy  the 
same  prefixes  which  are  attached  to  verbs.  Tsi-so-qui-li,  la  horse,  rather  than  I  am  a 
horse. 

(10.)  Iliirue-ga,  he  siwaks,  Kn-ne-gi,  speaker.  A-li-ski-ha,  he  dances,  arli-ski-ski,  a 
dancer.     A-tlo-'yi-ha,  he  cries,  A-tlo-'yi-hi,  a  crier. 

(11.)  To  conjugate  even  one  woukl  require,  perhaps,  months  of  constant  study,  and 
make  a  volume.     I  will  give  a  few  siwcimens. 


ti 


\ 


I/ 


440 


LANGUAGE. 


fr  i^' 


If 


Tenses. 

Gorlo-i-ha I  am  tying  [an  inanimate  thing]. 

Ga-lo-i-ho-i     .     .     .     .  I  tie  [sometimes]. 

Ga-lo-i-ho-gi  ....  I  was  tying. 

Garlo-i-be-i     ....  I  was  tying. 

Ga-lo-i-he-sti  ....  I  shall  l)c  tying. 

Ga-lo-tsa I  have  [just]  tied. 


V-gii-l(>-tsa  .  . 
A-qim-lo-lo  .  . 
A-fiuttrlo-lo-i  .  . 
A-ciiift-Ki-lo-gi 
A-qua-lo-le-i  .  . 
A-«iua-lo-lc-sti 
Da-ga-K>-li  .  . 
Di-ga-lo-li-so-i 
Dorga-lo-li-so-gc  . 
Di-ga-k>li-se-i 
Di-ga-lo-li-.se-sti  . 
A-<iuarlo-li-(li .  . 
A-qua-lo-li-<li-so-i 
A-<iua-lo-li-<li-so-gi 
A-qu!i-lol  i-<l  i-se-i 
A-ciua-lo-li-ili-sc-sti 
A-qua-lo-li-tle-na 


(nearly  the  same.) 

I  have  tied  [at  some  former  time]. 

I  have  sometimes  tied. 

I  tied. 


.     I  shall  have  tied. 

.     I  shall  or  will  tie. 

.     I  am  sometimes  expecting  to  tie. 

>  I  was  exiK-cting  to  tie  [quasi — I  was — will  tic.] 

.     I  shall  Ixj  exiwcting  to  tic. 

.     I  am  alK)ut  to  tie,  nearly  ready  to  tie. 

.     I  am  [sometime.'*]  alxjut  to  tie. 

>  I  was  al)out  to  tie. 

.     I  shall  be  about  to  tie. 

.     I  am  on  the  point  of  tying. 

In  those  past  tenses  which  have  two  forms,  the  first  denotes  that  the  sjwaker  was  a 
jxjrsonal  witness  of  what  he  relates,  and  the  second  that  he  is  relating  what  he  has 
learned  from  others.  Of  course,  the  second  form  can  be  used  in  the  first  iwrsou  only 
in  relation  to  acts  done  luiconsciou.sly. 

Eoeh  of  these  tenses  is  declined  throughout  all  jiersons  and  numbers. 

CiiEKOKEE  Verbs. 

Pi^rmiw  ami  Numhers. 

Ga-lo-i-ha I  am  tying  [it]. 

Ha-lo-i-ha Thou  art  tying  [it]. 

Ga-'lo-i-ha He  is  tying  [it]. 

'  Ka-lo-i-ha He  is  tying  [it]. 

'  Two  forms  will  be  observed  where  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  of  the  third  person.  The  second  of  these  forma 
implies  the  presence  of  the  person  or  persons  spoken  of,  and  an  intention  on  the  part  of  the  speaker  that  he  or 
they  shall  hear  what  is  said  of  them. 


li 


LANGUAGE. 


447 


I-na-l(>-i-hii    . 
()-!<tiv-It)-i-La  . 
Stii-lo-i-lia     . 
I-dii-Io-i-ha    . 
O-tsarlo-i-lm  . 
I-tHO-lo-l-ha  . 
A-no-loi-ha  . 
Da-na-lo-i-ha 
Dc-gn-lo-i-ha 
Dc-horlo-i-ha 
De-ga-'lo-i-ha 
Do-ka-'loi-ha 
Dc-na-lo-i-lm 
Do-8tarlo-i-ha 
De-sta-loi-ha 
De-da-lo-i-ha 
Do-tsft-l()-i-lia 
Do-tsa-loi-ha 
Dii-nii-lo-i-lia . 
'  De-<la-na-lo-i-ha 
S(iiia-lo-i-lia  . 
A-qua  lo-i-ha 
Ta-qua  lo-i-ha 
Ski-na  lo-i-ha 
Ski-ya  lo-i-ha 
Gfwjua  lo-i-ha 
Kp-qua  lo-i-ha 
Go-yarlo-i-ha 
Tisa  lo-i-ha  . 
» Ti-tsa  lo-i-ha 
Stoya  lo-i-ha 
I-tso-ya  lo-i-ha 
Ge-tsa  lo-i-ha 
'  Ke-tsa  lo-i-ha 
Tsi-ya-lo-i-ha 
'  Ka-lo-i-ha     . 


Thou  and  I  are  tying  [it]. 

lie  and  I  are  tying       " 

You  two  are  tying        " 

Ye  and  I  are  tying        " 

They  and  I  are  tying   " 

Yo  (more  than  two)  are  tying  [it]. 

They  are  tying  [it]. 

Thoy  are  tying  [it]. 

I  am  tying  [them,  inanimate]. 

Thou  art  tying  [them,  inanimate]. 

He  is  tying  "  " 

lie  is  tying  "  " 

Thou  and  I  are  tying  [them,  inanimate]. 

He  and  I  are  tying  "  '• 

Yc  two  are  t}  ing  "  " 

Ye  and  I  are  tying  "  " 

They  and  I  are  tying       "  " 

Ye  (more  than  two)  are  tying  [them,  inan.] 

They  are  tying  [them,  inan.] 

Tliey  are  tying      " 

Thou  art  tying  me. 

He  is  tyuig  me. 

He  is  tying  me. 

Ye  two  arc  tying  me. 

Ye  [more  than  two]  are  tying  mc. 

They  are  tying  me. 

Thoy  are  tying  me. 

I  am  tying  thee. 

He  is  tying  thee. 

He  is  tying  thee. 

We  two  are  tying  tliee. 

We  are  tying  thee. 

They  are  tying  thee. 

They  are  tying  thee. 

I  am  tying  him. 

I  am  tying  him. 


y 


'  See  note  on  p.  446. 

*  Implying  that  the  person  or  persons  tying  are  to  hoar. 

'  Implying  that  the  person  or  persons  tied  are  to  hear. 


LANGUAGE. 


] 


] 


mm. 


(iii-l(>-i-lia     .     .     . 

'  Tii-lo-i-ha J-  Ho  Ih  tying  liim. 

'  Ta-nii-l<)-i-hrt  or  to-loi-hn 

K-uii-li>i-lia ) 

•Ti-mv-Icvi-lm }  Thou  ami  I  arc  tying  him. 

0-Hta-I(H-lift 1 

.m     A    1    •!  flic  nnil  I  iiiv  tying 

F^sta  li>-i-lia      .     . 
•Ti-»ta  l(vi-lia     .     . 

I<kla  l()-i-ha  .     .     . 
"Ti-tla  l()-i-i»a     .     . 

0-tsa  1(>-i-ha      .     . 
•To-tsa  loi-litt    .     . 

E-t»<a  lo-i-ha 

'  Ti-tsa  lo-i-ha 

A-na  l(M-lia 

'Go-wa  lo-i-ha 

'  Ko-wa  lo-i-ha 

'  Ta-gu-na-lo-i-ka  or  ttviia-lo-i-ha 

fli-na-lo-i-ha    .     .     dc-gi-na-lo-i-ha 

'  Ti-gi-na-lo-i-ha  de-ti-gi-no-lo-i- 

Ge-gi-iia-k>-i-ha    .     dc-go-gi-no-lo-i-ha    1  _,  .       ,  .  , 

.  ^,     .       ,    . ,  ,   ,      .       ...       >  riicy  are  tying  hnn  ana  me. 

'  Kc-gi-na-lo-i-ha    .     dc-kc-gi-narlo-i-ha    ) 

In  these  just  al)ove,  and  in  all  that  follow,  the  left  hand  form  implies  that  the 

persons  tied  are  tied  fot/ctlicr;  the  right  hand  form,  that  each  is  tied  scpurnteli/. 


>  You  two  are  tying  him. 

>  Ye  and  I  are  tying  him. 

'  >  They  and  I  are  tying  him. 

•         •  •    / 

'  >  Ye  arc  tying  him. 


They  arc  tying  him. 


la  .    .  1 
■i-ha   .  i 


He  is  tying  him  and  me. 


Skina-w-i-ha   . 
0-gi-na-w  i-ha 


'  To-gi-na-w-i-ha 

Ski-na-w-i-ha  . 

Ski-ja-w-i-ha  . 

Go-gi-na-w-i-ha 
'  Ko-gi-narW-i-ha 

Sto-ya-lo-i-ha  . 

Sta-lo-i-ha  .  . 
'  Ti-storlo-i-ha  . 


1 


.     de-ski-na-w-i-ha 

.     dc-o-gi-na-w-i-ha 

or  do-gi-norw-i-ha 

.    de-to-gi-na-w-i-ha 

.     dc-ski-na-w-i-ha 

.     de-ski-ya-w-i-ha 

.     do-gogi-na-w-i-ha  .1 

,  ,   ,      .  . ,       >  They  are  tvmg  him  and  me 

.  '  de-ko-gi-norW-i-ha .  j 

.     de-sto-ya-lo-i-ha     .     I  am  tying  you  two. 

.    de-storlo-i-ha    ..■)„. 

,,.,,.,  >  He  IS  tying  you  two. 

.     de-ti-storlo-i-ha .     .  (  J    ^  j 


Thou  art  tying  him  and  me. 

He  is  tying  him  and  me. 

Ye  two  arc  tying  him  and  mc. 
Ye  are  tying  him  and  me. 


■  Sec  note  (2),  p.  447.  '  Sec  note  (3),  p.  447. 

'  Go-wa-lo-i-ha  implies  tbat  the  person  tied  is  the  leading  subject  of  discourse,  and  might  be  rendered : 
he  is  being  tied  by  them.    Also,  the  next  form. 


M  ' 


rl 


\m 


L  A  N  (J  U  A  (".  E . 


44» 


Sto-yn-lo-i-lia 

l-ts<)-ya-l()-i-Fiii 

OL'-Htii-lo-i-lia  . 
'  Ko-Hta-lo-i-lm  . 

I-gUrlu-i-lia .  . 
'  Ti-j?iv-l(>-i-ha    . 

Oi'-ga-It>-i-lift  . 
'  Ko-ga-l<)-i-lia    . 

Ski-ya-lo-i-hft  . 

0-gnrU>-i-lia 
'  Tt>-garlo-i-lia    . 

Ski-ya-lt)-i-lia  . 

Go-ga-Io-i-lia  . 
'  Ko-ga-lo-i-lia    . 

I-tso-ya-loi-ha 

I-t.s!irl(>-i-lia 

•  Ti-tsa-Io-i-ha    . 
I-tH(»-ya-l(>-i-lia 
Gt'-tsa-l()-i-lia  . 

'  Ke-tsa-lo-i-ha  . 
Ga-twi-ya-lo-i-lia 

•  Ka-tsa-lo-i-lia  . 
Go-lii-ynrlo-i-ha 
Or  Ki-ya-loi-lia 

'  Ge-ta-li>-i-ha    . 

Dc-ga-lo-i-ha    . 

'  De-ka-lo-i-ha    . 

•  Du-iia-lo-i-ha  . 
Ge-na-li>-i-lia    . 

'  Ke-na-lo-i-ha    . 

Go-stiirlo-i-lia  . 
'  Ko-stiV-lo-i-ha  . 

Gc-Htarlo-i-ha  . 
'  Ke-sta-lo-i-ha  . 

Ge-darlo-i-ha  . 
'  Ke-da-lo-i-ha   . 

Go-tsa-loi-ha  . 
'  Ko-tsarlo-i-ha  . 


(lo-dlo-ya-lfvi-lia    . 

di'-(H(i-\  ;i-l(H-lia     . 

fif-go-sta-lo-i  lia 

dc-kf  tta-lo-i-ha    . 

(le-ga-lo-i-lia 

(|(-ti-ga-Io-i-Iia  .     . 

di'-gi'-ga-l(Hi-lia 

de-kc-garl()-i-lia 

dc-Mki-ya-U)-i-lia    . 

do-t)-ga-l(>-i-lia  . 

de-t(>-ga-l()-i-lia .     . 

do-.ski-}iirU)-i-lia     . 

de-go-ga-lo-i-ha 

de-ko-ga-l()-i-lia 

dc-t.xo-ya-lo-i-lia     . 

di'-tsa-lo-i-lia    .     . 

dc'-ti-t.Ha-lo-i-lia 

di'-t.M<)-ya-l(>-i-ha     . 

de-g('-tsa-l()-i-Iia 

ik'-kf-tt*a-lo-i-lia     . 

di'-ga-t.xi-yivlo-i-ha. 

de-ka-tsa-lo-i-lia     . 

do-ge-lii-ya-li)-i-ha . 

or  du-ki-}'ivlo-i-Iia . 

dc-ge-tarlo-i-ha 

de-ga-lo-i-ha 

de-ka-loi-ha     . 

dt'-dsi-na-l(>-i-lia 

dc-gc-narlo-i-lia 

de-kc-na-lo-i-lia 

de-go-sta-lo-i-lia 

de-ko-sta-lo-i-ha 

do-ge-sta-lo-i-ha 

dc-ke-sta-lo-i-ha 

do-gc-da-lo-i-ha 

de-ko-darlo-i-ha 

de-go-tsarlo-i-ha 

de-ko-tsarlo-i-ha 


Ilf  and  I  ari>  tying  yon  two. 
Tlicy  and  I  art'  tying  you  two. 

>  They  arc  tying  you  two. 

>  lie  ia  tyuig  you  (plural)  and  me. 

>  Tlii'y  are  tying  you  and  inc. 
Thou  art  tying  tliom  and  nie. 

>  IIu  is  tying  thorn  and  inc. 

Yc  (two  or  more)  are  tying  tliem  and  me, 

>  They  are  t^  ing  them  and  me. 

I  am  tying  you  (more  than  two.) 
^  lie  is  tying  you. 

We  (two  or  more)  are  tying  you. 
•  They  are  tying  you. 

>  I  am  tying  tiiem. 
>Thou  art  tying  them. 

>IIe  is  tying  them. 

>  Tliou  and  I  are  tying  tnem. 

>  lie  and  I  are  tying  them. 

>  Yc  two  are  tying  them. 

>  Ye  and  I  are  tying  them. 

>  They  and  I  arc  tying  them. 


I 

t 


i.1 


'  See  Doto  (2)  p.  447. 

Pt.  II.  — 57 


•  See  note  (3)  p.  447. 


N  1 


f 


450 

Ge-tso-loi-ha   . 
'  Ke-tsa-lo-i-hii  . 
Da-na-lo-i-ha    . 
Go-wa-no-lo-I-ha 
* '  Ko-wariio-lo-i-iia 
Dc-darnarloi-ha 


LANGUAGE. 


de-ge-tsa-lo-i-ha 
de-ke-tsorlo-i-lia 
de-Orna-lo-i-ha .  . 
de-go-wa-n  arlo-i-ha 
de-ko-wa-narlo-i-ha 
de-da-na-lo-i-ha     . 


:} 


Yft. 


■  They  are  tying  them. 


Modifications  by  Prefixes. 
The  syllables  ni,  yi,  wi,  di,  dropping  or  changing  the  vowel  according  to  circum- 
stances, or  two  or  three  of  them  together,  may  be  prefixed  to  the  verb,  modifying  its 
meaning.     And  the  verb  thus  modified  is  varied  through  numbers,  persons,  and  tenses, 
like  the  simple  form. 

.     I  am  tying. 

.     I  am  in  the  mean  time  tying. 

.     If  I  be  tying. 

.     I  am  not  tying. 

.     I  am  tying  on  the  other  side. 

.     I  am  tying  on  this  side. 


Ga-w-i-ha      .     .     . 

Ni-ga-lo-i-ha .     .     . 

Yi-ga-lo-i-ha .     .     . 

Ka-yi-ga-lo-i-ha 

Wi-ga-lo-i-ha     .     . 

Di-gOrlo-i-ha .     .     . 

Yi-ni-ga-lo-i-ha  .     . 

Wi-ni-ga-lo-i-lia Combining  the  preceding      These  pivfixef 

Yi-ni-di-ga-lo-i-ha precede  the  personal  prefixes. 

Yi-wi-ni-ga-lo-i-ha  . 
Modifications  by  changes  in  termination,  may  perhaps  be  termed  "Conjugations." 

Garlo-i-ha I  am  tying.  • 

Ga-lo-sti-ha I  am  tying  with,  (as  a  string,  &c.) 

Tsi-ya-lo-e-ha I  am  tying  for  him. 

Ga-lo-le-ga-ha I  am  going  to  tie.     I  go  and  tie. 

Garlo-li-hi-ha I  am  coming  to  tie.     I  come  and  tie. 

Ga-lo-li-do-ha I  go  about  tying,  (in  various  places.) 

Garlo-li-lo-a I  tie  (am  tying)  over  and  over  again. 

Ga-lo-i-si-ha I  tie  it  anew. 

Ga-lo-o-ho-ska I  am  completing  the  tying. 

Each  of  tliese  forms  is  conjugated  regularly  tlimngh  number,  person,  mode  and  tense. 

Pusaive    Voire. 

V-qua-lo-i-ha I  am  being  tied. 

E-tsa-lo-i-ha Thou  art. 

A-ga-lo-i-ha He  is,  &c. 

Thus  through  number,  person,  mode  and  ten.se. 


'  See  note  (.'?),  p.  448. 


LANGUAGE. 


4.51 


Reciprocal  Forms.   {MUhlle  Voice.) 
[A-qufirSo]  (myself)  Gardarlo-i-ha       I  am  tying  myself. 

De-narda-lo-i-ha Thou  and  I  are  tying  each  other,  &c.  &c. 

The  same  form  is  used  to  denote  the  act  of  tying  without  specifying  the  object 

Ga-da-lo-i-ha,  I  am  tying  [something  or  other.] 

Imperative  Mode. 
Gttrlo-tsa  or  wi-ga-lo-tsa,  let  me  tie ;  ha-lo-tsa,  tie  [thou],  &c.  &c. 
Ga-lo-lo-ha,  let  me  tie;  ha-lo-lo-ha,  tie  [thou]  [at  some  future  time.] 

Subjunctive    Mode. 

Most  of  the  indicative  forms,  perhaps  all,  except  those  ending  in  e-sti,  become 
subjunctive  by  prefixing  yi  [with  variations]  and  throwing  back  the  principal  accent. 
Those  in  e-sti  by  throwing  back  the  accent  simply. 

Ga-lo-i-ha,  I  tie;  yi-garlo-i-ha,  if  I  tie. 

Garlo-i-he-sti,  I  shall  be  tying. 

Ga-lo-i-he-sti,  If,  or  when  I  shall  tie. 

Potential    Mode. 
Yi-ga-lo-tsa,  I  can  tie. 

Go-quarlo-sti,  I  can  tie.     A  shade  of  diflerence  in  meaning. 

Another  Mode  —  A-qua-lo-sti.     I  am  to  tie  —  It  belongs  to  me  to  tie. 

Verb  with  Relative  Pronoun. 

The  syllable  tsi,  [modified  by  circumstances,]  is  prefixed  to  verbs  in  the  indicative 
mode,  with  the  power  of  a  relative  pronoun. 

Ga-lo-i-ha,  I  am  tying ;  a-yo,  I ;  tsi-ga-lo-i-ha,  who  am  tying. 

Verbal  Nbnns. 

The  Agent.     Ga-lo-i-hi,  I  a  tier;  giirlo-i-hi,  a  tier;  u-lo-lo-hi,  one  who  has  tied,  &c. 
The  Object.    Ka-lo-lo-hi,  what  has  been  tied. 

Ga-lo-lo-hi,  what  I  have  tied. 

Ga-lo-i-to,  a  tied  thing,  &c.  &c. 
The  Instrument.     Givlo-sto-di,  something  to  tie  with. 
The  Act.     Ga-lo-i-ho-i,  my  tying. 

A-qua-lo-lo-i,  my  having  tied,  &c.  &c. 

Adjective   Verb. 
A-qua-lo-thi-sa-ta,  I  am  apt  to  tie. 

"    «  "  "  "  to-i,  «  "    «     "    "  [on  such  or  such  occasion.] 
"    «   «  "  "  to-gi,  I  was  apt  to  tie. 
"    "  "  "   "  te-sti,  I  shall  be  apt  to  tie. 


ii 


W> 


462 


LANGUAGE. 


Infinitive    Mode. 

A-qunrlo-sti-yi,  nie  to  tio,  for  example. 
A-quo-lo-sti-j  i,  utiili,  he  wants  me  to  tie  it. 

I  think  there  is  an  infinitive  which  lacks  numbers  and  persons,  but  it  is  seldom 
used,  and  I  cannot  now  recall  it. 

323.  (1.)  Not  exactly  so.  But  see  on.  (2.)  No  such  variations  in  tkrmixation. 
But  see.  (3.)  Yes.  But  some  adjectives  have  personal  prefixes,  like  those  of  ver1}s, 
and  WITH  those  prefixes  can  only  be  applied  to  persons ;  or,  in  the  third  person,  to 
animals,  exclusive  of  insects,  &c.  A  few  plurals  distinguish  objects  of  a  solid  form 
from  those  of  a  difierent  shape. 

0-sto,  good. 

Go-sto,  I  [am]  good. 

Ho-sto,  thou  good. 

PI.  A-no-sto,  good,  [persons,  animals,  or  things  of  a  sound  or  solid  shiijic.] 

PI.  Tso  sto,  good  [things  of  other  than  solid  shape].  (4.)  No.  (5.)  By  U-tli,  more, 
followed,  in  the  comparative  degree,  by  e-ska,  than.  When  e-ska  is  wanting,  the 
superlative  is  understood.     (G.)  See  (5.)     No  want  of  precision.     (7.)   No.     (8.)  Yes. 

324.  (2.)  No  relative.     That  relation  is  expressed  by  an  iuHection  of  the  verb. 
Two  personal  pronouns,  A-j-o,  first  person,  all  numbers,  and  ni-hi,  second  person,  all 

numbers.  They  partake  of  a  demonstrative  signification,  being  used  only  or  chiefiy 
when  emphatic ;  and  in  the  third  person  only  the  demonstrative  is  used. 

Two  demonstrative,  Ili-a,  this  or  these,  Nii-ski-or,  simply  na,  that  or  those. 

Also  possessive  and  interrogative  pronouns. 

(8.)  No.  (4.)  No  distinction  of  number.  These  answers,  except  as  to  gender,  do 
not  relate  to  pronominal  prefixes. 

(5.)  Only  in  pronominal  prefixes. 

(6.)  I  do  not  understand  this  question.  In  our  addresses  to  the  Deity  we  never 
have  occasion  to  include  him  with  ourselves  in  the  first  person.  If  we  say  "  we,"  of 
course  we  mean  "  we  who  are  addressing  Thee,"  and  as  He  is  not  included  among  those 
who  address  Ilim,  or  those  on  whose  behalf  He  is  addressed,  conseipiently  the  ejcchtsicc 
form  must  always  be  used.' 

325.  (1.)  No  variations  for  tense.  The  pronouns  signifj  ing  self  may  be  considered 
as  one  pronoun  with  all  numbers  and  persons,  distinguished  by  varying  initial  syllables. 
The  possessive  pronouns  vary  to  denote  the  number  and  person  of  the  possessor,  and 
the  numlier,  and,  to  some  extent,  the  person  of  the  object  possessed.  A(pia-tse-li,  it 
mine,  Di-quartse-li,  they  mine,  Tsi-ya-tse-li,  he  mine,  U-tse-li,  his,  [one  thing],  Tsu- 
tse-H,  his  [things],  Go-ya-tse-li,  thou  mine,  &c. 


'  Tliis  is  not  so  in  the  .\lgonquin.     Sec  p.  400. 


llh 


LAN  (J  'JAGE. 


453 


Pronominal  syllablcH  of  \tnbB,  &c.,  both  subject  and  ob^  ot  are  i)ix'fixed,  ntctr 
niijjijceil. 

32G.  No.  The  relations  expressed  by  them  in  other  hvnguagos  arc  expressed,  in 
Cherokee,  by  the  significancy  of  the  vcrl),  inflections  of  the  verb,  the  use  of  separate 
verbs,  adverbs,  &c.  In  the  water  is  expressed,  in  some  cases,  by  a  change  in  the 
termination  of  the  noun.  A-ma',  water,  A-nio-hi,  in  the  water.  By  the  rock,  near  the 
rock,  Na-ii,  adverb.  On  the  tree  by  the  verb  in  connexion  :  e.  g.,  U-ki  la,  he  is 
perched,  he  stands  up  on  something ;  then  add  the  word  tree,  and  the  sense  is  clearly 
expressed.  In  translating  from  another  language,  however,  especially  scripture,  the 
want  of  prepositions  is  an  inconvenience. 

327.  Besides  other  adverbs,  all  such  adjectives  as  in  English  would  l)e  formed  into 
.adverbs  by  adding  ly  are  used  also  as  adverbs  in  Cherokee;  i.  e.,  tiiey  qualily  verbs  as 
Avell  as  nouns.  (3.)  No  such  difference.  In  "  stand  up"  and  "  lie  down,"  up  and  down 
are  implied  in  the  meaning  of  the  verb.  "  Tliere"  is  expressed  by  a  separate  adverb. 
(4.)  V-v  is  yes,  and  Tla-v-tla,  Tla-kno,  V-tlarkno,  each  is  no.  Tla  is  no,  and  the 
other  syllables,  at  least  v,  add  emphasis. 

328.  No  article.     Supplied  by  the  demonstrative  pronoun  when  necessary. 

329.  I  know  not  but  conjunctions  are  nearly  as  immerous  as  in  English.  Ami,  a-lo 
and  hno,  the  latter  of  which  is  used  only  as  a  suffix,  like  the  Latin  que.  Nvr,  tld  a-lo 
and  not.  NelUwr,  nor,  would  be  tla-a-le  tla,  not  and  not.  But,  a-se-hno,  a-se-ski-ni, 
Urti-na,  and  others.     The  phrase  ''chronological  conjunctions"  I  do  not  understand.' 

330.  I  have  not  noticed  any  particular  redundancy  in  exclamations,  nor  any  thing 
transitive,  or  much  that  is  anomalous  in  their  character.  Some  few  are  peculiar  to 
women.     No  difference  in  "lo"  from  the  object  referred  to. 

331.  There  is  a  verb  of  existence.  It  is  used  to  denote  simple  existence,  or  place 
of  existence,  but  never  miKle  of  existence,  character,  &c.  We  say,  U-ne-la-n^-hi  K-iiA, 
there  is  a  God,  or  U-nc-la-no-hi  go-lo-la-di  E-iiA,  God  dwells  iu  heaven.  But  if  we 
would  say  God  is  this,  or  that,  or  such,  we  cannot  use  the  same  verb. 

There  is  also  an  impersonal  verb,  i-gi,  used  in  some  cases,  signifying  (V  i«  —  used 
only  in  the  present  tense;  another,  also  impersonal,  verb,  used  in  the  past  tense, 
ge-srt-gi,  it  ivas  [so  or  so],  and  future,  ge-se-«ti,  it  tcUl  he  [so  or  so].  That  used  in  the 
present,  and  that  used  in  the  past  and  future  tenses,  seem  to  be  of  different  roots. 

Of  the  radi.v  \KV  I  know  nothing. 

A  Cherokee  says,  /  am  ski;  in  a  single  verb  —  a-gi-tlo-ga;  /  am  nrll,  simply  an 

'  In  tlio  Algnmiuin,  ap  pk  is  a  oonjimolinn  of  time. 


\ 


454 


LANGUAGE. 


ailji'ctive  —  do-hi,  lidding  the  pmnoun  I,  if  nccofsary  —  do-hi  a-yo,  "ny//  /" — am  Ijoiiig 
implied.  Iain  ylatl,  is,  I  ri'joicc,  in  one  word;  or  I  feel  well,  verb  and  adverb.  I  am 
norry  —  I  feel  badly.  I  use  the  word  feel,  here,  to  denote  internal  emotions,  not 
sensation. 

332.  Tsi-sa-la-di-ha,  I  lift  him ;  ^-gi-sd-lardi-ha,  I  am  lifted ;  a-gi-sarlo-di-ha,  he  lifts  me. 
Tsi-ya-l(vi-ha  (tsi-yo-ni-lo-i-ha),  I  tie  him ;  a-quiirlo-i-ha,  he  ties  me ;  {Mpia-lp-i-ha,  I 

am  tied;  a-ga-lo-i-ha  (a-go-ni-ha),  he  is  tied. 

Tsi-yivni-ha,  I  strike  him ;  tW£uo-ui-ha,  he  strikes  me ;  {(-(juc^vni-lia,  I  am  struck. 

333.  No. 

334.  No. —  There  are  several  verbs,  such  as  give,  bring,  &c.,  which  denote  the  form 
of  the  object  given,  &c.,  such  as  animal,  round  (including  all  things  in  Avhich  length, 
breadth,  and  thickness  approximate  to  equality),  long,  flexible,  liquid.  E.  g.,  wc-sa 
e-ski-ka-si,  give  me  the  cat ;  np-ya  e-sko-si,  give  me  a  stone ;  ka-na-sta  k-ski-di-si,  give 
me  a  rod ;  a-knu-wo  E-SKI-N9-SI,  give  me  cloth,  [this  form  is  applied  also  to  an  animal, 
iclicn  dead,']  a-md  E-SKi-NE-iifvsi,  give  me  water. 

335.  I  cannot  think  of  any  such. 

33G.  Yo-no  e-ha,  n  bear  exists;  tsi-yo-no,  I  am  a  bear. 

So-qui-li  e-ha,  a  horse  exists ;  tsi-so-fjui-li,  I  am  a  horse. 

U-no-la-no-hi  e-ha,  a  God  exists. 

U-ne-larnr)-hi  na-ski,  a  God  [is]  he. 

A-qua-ne-la-no-hi  a-yo,  a  God  [am]  I.  —  The  name  of  God  is  a  verbal  noun,  and 
therefore  cannot  be  changed  into  a  verb  by  verbal  prefix,  having  that  already.  In 
saying,  /  am  a  Gud,  we  use  no  verb,  but  change  the  name  from  third  to  first  i^erson, 
and  add  the  pronoun  /.     He  k  a  Owl,  add  the  demonstrative  pronoun  na-ski. 

337.  Nothing  of  all  this  in  Cherokee,  unless  what  I  have  noted  under  334  be 
analogous  to  it. 

338.  None. 

339.  "  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  nomiiiiitlvc  in  number  and  person,"  in 
Cherokee  AS  ix  Exgllsii.  For  in  p]nglish  walks  is  singular,  and  walk  in  the  third 
person  is  plural,  if  properly  considered  as  elements  of  agreement. 

341.  No. 

342.  A  very  few  interjections. 

The  word  o-gi-lo,  my  sister,  denotes  the  mutual  relation  of  sisters  to  each  other, 
and  can  of  course  be  used  by  women  only ;  and  v-gi-ni-li,  my  elder  brother ;  v-gi-no-tli, 
my  yoimger  brotlier,  with  their  varied  forms,  denote  the  relation  of  brother  to  brother. 


LANGUAGE. 


4r,5 


and  so  are  used  by  men  only ;  while  v-gi-do  denotes  the  relation  of  brother  and  sistei", 
and  so  in  the  mouth  of  a  man  means  my  sister,  and  in  the  mouth  of  a  woman  my 
brotlier. 

343.  Genesis,  Matthew,  Luke,  John,  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  Thessalonians,  Timothy, 
and  the  Epistles  of  John  and  James,  have  been  printed  in  Cherokee,  with  other  small 
portions  of  scripture.  The  Baptist  Mission  may  perhaps  have  recently  printed  one  or 
two  other  whole  books.  In  some  of  these,  at  least,  I  think  a  good  degree  of  accuracy 
has  been  attained.  The  epistles,  especially  some  of  Paul's,  are  by  no  means  as  easy 
to  translate  as  narrative. 

We  have  endeavored  to  express  the  sense  of  the  original  in  good  Cherokee,  rather 
than  to  translate  word  for  word,  which  indeed  is  an  impossibility,  though  much  may 
Ije  lost  by  attempting  it. 

Tiie  Cherokee  word  lor  maid  does  not  of  itself  necessarily  denote  virginity,  but 
recpiires  an  adjective  to  (pialify  it. 

344.  The  language  is  well  enough  adapted  to  history,  except  the  awkwardness 
with  which  alone  mtmy  foreign  names  can  be  imitated. 

I  do  not  know  that  there  was  any  thing  in  the  language  which  could  well  be  termed 
poetry,  previously  to  the  translation  and  composition  of  Christian  hymns.  In  these 
there  is  no  rhyme,  but  meastn-e  only.  Rhyme  cannot  be  appreciated.  But  the 
language  is  well  adapted  to  lyric  compositions ;  and  it  is  vastly  easier  to  sing  Cherokee 
words  so  as  tt)  be  understood,  than  English.  In  regard  to  most  branches  of  litkuature, 
as  distinct  from  science,  I  suppose  there  would  be  no  great  difficulty.  Many  branches 
of  science  would  introduce  many  new  terms,  which  would  create  a  difficulty.  Yet  the 
Cherokees  have  a  pretty  good  knack  at  coining  names  out  of  the  verbs  of  their  own 
language,  making  verbal  nouns  expressive  of  the  use  or  of  some  i)rominent  attribute 
of  the  thing  to  be  named.  Names  of  things,  too,  may  be  borrowed  from  other 
languages,  though  it  is  in  fact  done  only  to  a  very  limited  extent. 


Our  Father 

Who  art  in  heaven      .     .     . 

Hallowed 

Be 

Thy  name 

Thy  kingdom 

Come  [make  its  appearance] 

Thy  will 

lie  done  [take  place]   .     .     . 

[Here]  on  earth 

Ah  it  is  done 


0-gi-do-<la. 

garlo  ^a-di-e-hi. 

ga-lo-quodi-yu. 

gc-se-sti. 

de-tsa-<lo-v-i. 

tsa-gowi-yu-hi-ge-so. 

wi-ga-na-nu-gs-i. 

hivda-n(vte-sko. 

wi-ni-gi-li-sta. 

Orhwi  e-lo-hi. 

niirski-va  tsi-ni-ga-li-sti. 


r^ 


i^ 


■i 


456 


LANGUAGE. 


In  heaven   . 
Our  food 
Daily .     .     . 
Give  to  us  . 
This  day     . 
Forgive  us  . 
Our  debts    . 
As  wo  forgive 
Our  debtors 
And  do  not 
Lead  us  into 
Temptation  . 
But  deliver  us  from 
Evil 


I  ought  not  to  have  used  hyphens, 
more  room  than  fairly  belongs  to  it, 


gnrlo-la-di. 

o-garli-sta-yo-di. 

ni-dardo-dflrqui-so. 

ski-v-si. 

go-hi-i-ga. 

di-ge-ski-v-si-quo. 

de-ski-dw-go-i. 

narski-ya-tsi-di-ga-yo-tsi-nc-ho. 

tso-tsi-du-gi. 

a-le-tlc-sti. 

Avi-di-ski-ya-di-no-sta-no. 

u-diirle-na-sti-yi. 

ski-y-da-lc-gi-skc-sti-quo-shi-ni. 

w-yo-ge-so-i. 


as  it  makes  the  Cherokee  seem  to  take  much 
In  printing  in  the  Cherokee  character,  the 
Cherokee  occupies  much  less  space  than  the  English  in  type  of  the  same  size ;  but  if 
we  used  the  Roman  character,  it  would  occupy  much  more,  on  account  of  its  poly- 
syllabic character.  I  doubt  whether  two  dozen  monasyllablcs  can  be  found  in  the 
language. 

345.  (1.)  Not  very.  (2.)  See  344.  (3.)  There  are  no  labials  except  m,  a  d  that 
apjiears  to  be  modern,  w  having  been  formerly  used  instead.  The  sound  of  j  and  of 
ch,  are  not  expressed ;  as  or  ts  instead.  R  is  not  used  by  the  majority  of  Cherokees, 
though  a  rolling  r  seems  to  have  been  the  original  sound  instead  of  1.  Those  who  use 
r  do  not  use  1,  except  as  dialects  are  confounded.  V  is  not  used,  nor  z ;  w  and  s 
instead.     The  number  of  consonant  sounds  is  not  great. 

346.  See  310.  I  cannot  see  ground  in  the  Cherokee  language  for  the  suspicion 
expressed  in  346. 


VOCABULARIES 


Pt.  11.  — 58 


(457) 


458 


LANGUAGE. 


.SP 


•a 


a 


I 


so   a 


§>M 


•s-sl'a  §5!  |.&ii  g.s 


eo    2 


«>  ^ 


US  a  M 


O"     g      O" 


a  u> 


s 


■<  w  (5  w  w  < 


!z5S!;^;z;S!i;z;;z;!?i 


^ 


05 

I— H 
P5 


m 


o 


g  » 


cr    » 


ii     I     $     i 

I  I  s  -s 


1 


a    -ia 


J 


o  a  3 

3    fc    g 


o 


c? 


CD 


a   s 


"  •->    u     »  3     S  a 

a  J3    P.   2  2,    ,,  3 

3  3   j3    a  o*    §  «r 

S  S  ^  H  H   a  H 


•»     J3 


S    B 


■§   •§ 


J 


•a 


•=  * 


^   g   S)|-|   toll 


O     .3      V      O 


<!!«!;2;!z;^!zi!z;2;^;'< 


^ 


g> 


1 


1 


•a    S 


S      5d  v5)      S      "> 


3      * 


g    .3 


£> 


»  ^ 


& 


.M    'S    .S 


»   .5 


^SwWwW<5t?;g;z;ui;z;>5sz;5z;p 


r5 


;S 


a    ^    ^ 


a    -z  % 


-s  ^ 


a   b 


a  b  ^  sT 


60  S 


a  5, 


<Sp£Bc>:££gm^ 


pq 


LANGUAGE. 


459 


460 


LANGUAGE. 


ii  H 


i 


I 


I  :.' 


5S 


S', 


I 


6  J 


1 5- 


3  a     u 

-a      &>  i 

8)    y'    3     q 


Shi* 


a 
a 

si 
-3  a,' 


•—  S  -  "       J3        »-  ~     .—        .-.       ^ 


I& 

"2 

a 

a 

§ 

d 
-1 

^ 

3    3 

g 

^ 

i 

bO 

1 

d 

a 

« 

a  B 

U 

a> 

d 

3 

« 

1 

to 

M 

1 

J 
^ 

a 
8 

a 
1 

o 

^ 

3 

60 

u 

s 

II 

e9 

3 

(5 

o 

^ 

a* 

a 

fc 


•3 


5    o 


s  §. 


i-  s 


.  I 


fc<i  u:  o  s  o  o  I* 


u 

>• 
a 

H 

O 

< 

b 

o 


o 
< 
5s 
ea 

§ 


3  tn 

1  I. 

rt  to 

■^  ea 

a  e 

§)  - 

o  2 

j3  a 

-^  -a 

J3  " 


O       3 

■a  u: 


1 

S3 

a 


a 


a 

o 


3 

a 
ft 

t 

a 

3 

a 

>1 

a 

a 

1 

O 

u 

1 

1 

o 

I -I 

^  ft 

^  5 

to  -M 

S  » 


a 

3 


.a 

3 


"2 

*i3 

o 

fcO 

_B 

a    M 
w   a   ^    ^ 

«  <1  O  p: 


a 


r2 

'  i  s  ^ 

I  a.  a=t 


a 


a 

§  a 


ij      V      V      :3 

<    W    S    Ph 


ic 
o    3 

<;    1*    fn 


a  - 

>  3 

c3  a 

a  ^ 

8  g 

O  o 


W  O  S 

J  J  i 

»   »  » 


1 


a 
g> 

a 


^ 


a  w)  a 


ja    ^« 


Is  i  i|i  If  ^i  ri-r; 


a 
to 

U3 


-a    J< 


-     i''    J 


c1 

a 

j<  - 


a 
1^ 


1 


B 
3 


?.  s»-<pJSSmfi 


p;    ^    !?    O    !«    1« 


to 


^    .a 


a 


a 

•s 

3 


to 


S?;   ■<  PQ  S  P<  <1 


9     ^ 

_    to  "a    «    g 
1-   -=   ^   ^   ^ 


«3 

a 
a 


M   K    >• 


«         7. 

a    Ji 


02    03 


a     A 
I    I 


1-;  a 


n 


1  « 

oa   < 


^S 


a 


•S    g  -a 

to  •'*   ^ 

3  3-5^ 

>5   5?i   5. 


.2"  — 


I 


LANGUAGE. 


4tJl 


& 


I 


l!    * 


8      Si      m 


a  ^  ^  I  I 


>r,   vj 


<   S   K   f^i   (3   ^ 


a  ^  j4 


■«     «     a     2    -^     9    J< 


C    I?    P5    O 


?!  u*  ea  c  ,11 


?   fe  ^   ">  S.  £, 


5, 


B    Si. 


^   ^ 


t<:  £ 


8  JJ 


&0     ^ 


<  S  ^  &  &  <  ;?, 


& 


& 


& 


i  -^ 


S, 


■s  ^  _ 

.ja    ja     s4     u 


^   ^    j5    13   ja 


i^      ^       ^j      tod      ^rt       .S*         ™      ■'^         '-' 


a> 


I      §      I     I 

Pl,    Ph    crj   ?^ 


^ 


_a    ^      ^ 


"       S       ? 


j3    .a 


fe  T  ^ 


<iu:Q<it^i!;«CL;u;o2;<!U5&;s 


•^ 


•a 


S. 


fe  ^  J 


«   « 


IS     J3     '^       — 


&    g 


PhSmS<A,OhSWEh 


ta^   ■"   JS 


"fee  S 


^  -e 


<5<!SSpq«i;-i^ 


•Sd 


g> 


•So 


-a  -S 


PM  S  ^3  d*  O 


M  60  J< 

2  -2  :a  -i  ;s 

:s,  Is.  rS  c  ^ 

C  O  O  •<  O 


•  -   SP  "  -3   «   rt   "   3 


«S   *^ 


(i^O^aiH^UajWM 


J  2  S,  ,1  I 
S  W  S  ps  ^ 


I  1^ 


»   to  60  >> 


•?.  ^„  t5  e 


■V  '5  ^ 


^  -c 


!z;  ij 


S  ^  S  g  K 


'■f: 


4(i2 


LANGUAGE. 


m 


S     a    --B 


g> 


g, 


I 

Hi 


8  J 


C"   J<     -g 


■a 


I|J5 


!•   J 


11.: 


•a  '-5 


^  s 


-I 

.a   S 


i'.  H  ft, 


g> 


o  U  c^ 
B  -«  1« 
»    £    S 


1 


J  a>J  a>.f  s  B  i  J  i  f  s. 


J  .8  .i 


a  s  $  ^ 


5-     o 


l-^i 


fcH6!i!;^;iS|SU!-<!o 


Ji  « 


«   a   s 


t  J 


$ 


li^ 


p. 


$ 


So 


•s 


.S    & 


I 


3> 


g> 


ja   .« 


•a 
:3  :^  ^ 


ii 


liC.    CO    PL|    ft, 


-a     o     <u     V    i5    J3    js    f." 


6>J 


=3    * 


Jz;  H  ft   W  ^  p:   < 


^  il 


:s ;°  i 


■bo 


'■as 


ii     fl 


tgSaE-fiamcoSH; 


-  8  j< 


►^  p: 


3> 


?5  H  S 


6  ^ 


i  I 


s  :s 


fe  .^ 


SP  §  &> 


<j  ^  ^  ?S  ^  H  « 


.a  >  -C 


"3  S  j»  „  5  a  •"  > 


I  3  3  ^  ^  I  ^  ^  ri  5  J 


J>  W  S  Ph  f»,  S 


(§  3 


cc  Ph  in 


LANOUAGE. 


4(ja 


I 

1 


1      § 

S    2    ^ 


09 


I 


CD 


•S.  -g    S 


•  I      li 

a  & 


s   § 


*   r"  ^  JT  ;^,  5   i^    ^ 


«J0S(-»S0o<JJ5?!<!0?I 


=i 


5^    S    t5    <    S    S 


«    _2     i»    ,*'    ja    »**     V 

titf    c/j    ?%    I?    *1    ^    S^ 


-^  IS  !?  K 


•8 


a   a 


^     K 


i  ft  a  a 
8   !! 


a   s 


I 


^  a  .a  s 


•s.  I  s 


a  ji 


OP^c^OSRSOub?!;/; 


1 

8  1  - 


g> 


ft  -a 


•5 


§   g   s 

^  -s  •§ 

•a  ^   ♦. 


^  -s 


•3  ^ 


^  s 


a   ft 


^     .a      eg 

?^     -**    -=• 


e> 


S',  S-<!00<S2!;-<0 


J3     j« 


:! 


^  s>. 


S  ;S 


o  s 


I  9  'S  3 


■a  := 


s  o  ^  >-> 


Z    3    E 


s, 


a    ^    M   M 
^  -S  'f  if 


%  'a   i 

ft  a,-^ 


a  f  I 


M  !-a 


—    S    -^    -a    ^    Li 
1^.    li",    w'    X    »»■    ^ 


I!  .S   1   .S    i! 


^   S   <  >'.  5^  ?! 


Jr    a 


■So 


■s   ^    :^   -s   -^   M 

«    o   ■«    "   -^     3 

R  O  O  S  c«   « 


■bB 


t»|iSh^OStSOA^H?^Wm 


^  "  s 


(ft      *^ 

a     ^ 

OS  n 


s> 


•5  .? 


<   is   S5    «1   <5   S   g 


1 


:    ''a 

is 

-/ 

•>- 

ft 

3 

ft 

III 


^U)P=SU)^S?g 


to  . 


•r     S»     "-1     r>     "S 


.     p.     ....    1 

I    E"  J  J  j   I  .N  ;i  J    I  I 


►3  A 


O  W 


r 


464 


LANGUAGE. 


3. 


J3     ^ 


i^     ^ 


& 


M     3 


& 


r -^  J  a 


■2    Sj 


■<3  a 


J 


s    -S 


«     .M      B 


S  o  ^ 


O   f.   P,   S 


^  ,"  tl  (S  5 


P-i    I*    |S    <   Es   11, 


3 


o    to   to 


S..6 


s,  3  -a 


to    3    ^ 


to  .^ 


."   J2    "   ^    » 


-   "  -g 


^OS5   5^.   ?F;<1<lpSfiR;?SOfS!<', 


."    "5 


I 


I  ^  ^ 

°  s  s 

o  rt  rt 

zj  ^  ^ 

g  s  g 

s  ?=  ^ 


3) 


S.  & 


s  -« 


a 


5     B? 


P^  Pi  $!; 


<  w 


^  ;£ 


£    >rs 


fr    ^     3    .a     g 


S    O    S    O    P=    -^ 


§3 


■3 


& 


I JJ 


S) 


^  -5    ^ 


JJ   .3 


•a 


3> 


Ij  s 


■5   ^ 


I  j  .2 


<  ^  R 


n      3      4J      c      4j 


?;  IS  R 


c 


&;: 


■B        to 


to  J 
s     ^a 

.a    . 

■3   I 

o  ss 


•3 
O4 


pa  I* 


■5   riS 

3 


»  :b 


^  & 


e. 


^ 
Zi^ 


?^       l,'3 

01  .-i 


•s   to 

I  a 
a  -rt 


■"       w      .-J      ;i)     ^"      ■■•       Q     '^^    ,_•-       =N 

?^   ?,   R  V.   iS   R   <1  «5   IS   p. 


■i  >  ^ 

3  '^  „«  :§  .2 


va 


3 


M   O   6f 


p^  I 

•ii 

1 

1 

ll-i'' 

jitr 

1 

m\. 

■!'; 

|IJ|ii>1|jl^|l.i|=-ss 


H     "o      to   'S 

o    ^^     o     ^ 

&M    P    P    X' 


:2i 


J)     M    •£    .a    jd 

S     P     a     S     ° 
B  h^  p^  S  S 


»;       rt       O 
U4     ?=!     S 


I 


LANGUAGE. 


46,1 


c     o     i« 


a  .a 


JS     -3 


So 


-a    -Q     ij. 


^    -    ^    -^ 

•T*       ^       CO       r*^ 


ccotw;^SPQcOco?50S<IPH!S?5000tsS^?SiSo 


.5    3 


S  c  P=; 


I  g  -3. 

•<  o  o 


M 


» 

J 


H      M       >V< 
S      »^      » 


a  fe  ^ 

a  "^  o 

o  o  -a 

(1(  E-l  CO 


-a  -a 


a,  . 

to    HI 


a 


?  fc  s  ra 

S  "^  a  "^ 

-?  u  c 

o  p  t* 

O  a;  <l  Cl, 


^   »"   t^    ."^    .^ 
S',   ;-   (S   tr.   Ph 


-a  rs 

to    > 


j<  ^  :g 

^     i>     a"     «"     "S 
03    W     pL,    IL,     lA 


4-^^ 


3  ° 


■to 


?%  O   W  o 


2 


O  t  ,-g 
J3  3  O 
m     H    H 


5)    ^ 


^    i   2    s 

>     >^     a 
J     to  o 


is 
to 


PhISsoo^',  ScCisfioS 


.2 


o  s  ^  p; 


^■^ 


o  :0 


g    13 


Pr.  II.  — 5U 


R  is  < 


n  K  P^ 


•" 

<D 

;-; 

a 

B 

5 

1 

o 

fe 

£ 

W    P    Ch 


r^    ^N    ^^ 


tl)  to 

-a  J 

ja  -a    "3 

a  .-3     ^, 

w  w  (2 


fS    S    O    G 


S?. 


-=   J2   iS 


•a 

-3 


O   W   O 


to   a 


6    "^     .fe      o      o      n 
O    M    ^    C    fi    M 


•c    S 

;ii  i£  Ph 


1 
1 


.3 


5  S  is  H  i  f^  p§ 


466 


LANGUAGE. 


I  i4  ■ 


i'^ 


1 

' 

if 

W 

& 


s  •« 


,S   a 


a  -g  . 

£0   5) 


^ 


4 


t    B 


ti-^t 


<a    ja     rt    ja     o    k? 


§ 


a  'S 


US(i;ofiS^!2;<!zi<1WpSO!2; 


S  1, 


"3     J3       ^ 


i5i    <u  ja   K,    el 

K    fr,    U    p    (1. 


■S     o 


to  4!  ,y 


■2  -o 


to  ^ 

O       O       s 


o  S- 


5 


o  -3 


Ol       ^       «       2 

^    a  .a  -^ 


;z;0!?;WWSkS'.   W:?'^© 


g> 


So 


•a    ji    ^ 


o<  s   o.  a. 


—      2      o    13      * 


.2  ^    I  g  I    I  I  ^  ;3 


M  ^ 


§1 
c.     « 

s    .a 


«  fc 


a    .a     9    j3 


°   •=   J3    -S   -9   -5 


{<!fifeWfit<i!z;<5Sr,   <1Ulg<!?; 


^   O   i5    ^   fS 


^    •*   sS 


(3   J 


fs    -a    -5 


& 


5    o  .3 


M  .a 


S     :»    ^^    .y 


»    s?    > 


S   W   C-O 


a.  J 


n 


ai 


6, 


w  ^ 


M   S   &   !<5 


&3 


.2     § 


J^     rt     cu     3    ;:3 


SSNUJtsiO-«1Sts3 


M  .S* 


w  6 


s   fc 


-b  re  :e    *   ^ 


60  ^ 


fe      » 


&)! 


tsssoooou-sSoo 


S       60     3 


^     J    ^      60 


j2  ^  s  .a 


o  -a  5= 


moaPHOPHi/jllSpMajWlSWrtOWt^tfai 


5  J  2 


^  o  pS 


LANGUAGE. 


467 


00 


1      I 


S) 


■s  a 


I 


B    04 


§}  S) 


^   ^     ^     ^     U     a     a     a 


£  -5    i*    fc 


If       o      ^ 


U5   >^ 


ly  .-  —  ^ 

u:  ^  o  <! 


& 


5)  -Eb 


W  O  O  <    <1 


g  ^ 


s. 


-a  -s 


-S     S    .2 


»       iJ        ^       53 

i-  a  a  s 


-a    J. 


I 


^     ,U     U3     pU 

S£    S    ii    S 


e 

^ 

1 

c 

1 

J 

'T 

J 

J 

! 

5 

1 

a 

^     o 


»    &    » 


o6fiWt;;^UJW:^p:!Scgp:?;«?:F:W«t«;;2;SS 


?f   <!  <1   < 


.S^     B 


■o   .5 


.2 


a     o   .g    5     ^-^ 


S   .S 


-2   js   -5   .a 


a, 


,&! 


.^.  -2   •=• 


"  ^  ►>!   ,i: 


-s 


3 


IL 


b2^^ 


P         c«        ■^ 


:i.      -^ 


1 


WoS2;fe!?;U)W 


O        ,^       C3      -^  I      •«  •  ; 


pj  w 


»   g  it  -g 


:£     * 


>  >  i_ 


>  > 


fe:^USp:pJsc«^!2;SS<!woo>S'>g 


CO    X'    Ph    CO    PQ 


_3   ^   O  ^  -^ 


M    H 


>H     [S     &S 


H    H 


a>  I'  v  s 

■M         W  Vj  VJ  W 

ej     c  c-  o  g 

^    ja  .a  .i:  ^ 

H    E^  H  H  H 


1J    1 


J 


,1 


468 


LANGUAGE. 


1 


I- 

o    o 


'-'  0-3 

<  -Ji  .S 

fc:  3    ° 

B  !S     3 

o 


•<) 
se 
■<! 
o 
■< 
w 

h 

O 

•< 
St 

B 


:?i2^ 


a, 


J    J3 


,   to 

I     3 


3   S 


to  & 


^  S 
to  go  « 

■5  •=  ja 
<D     S     rt 


3     C"    3     3 
a)    a    3    eg  .g 


S) 


fl     oj    S  "5    *j 


p:^^^^;i:^^p:^^^t2sw«;s^^-.jj2ofSSi^s 


a 

60 

^^ 

0 

0  0 

s 

0 

0 

=^  ^ 

0 

■^ 

fcC 

S3  ^ 

.£> 

N 

•s 

3  a 

B; 

0 

0 

s 

1^ 

.J3 
03 

w  <; 


a 


o 

O 

«<; 

n 


J3      0 


.a    o 
■5    £0 


-  3 


a    a 


o    to 


» 


ja 

S  .a 
3     s 


to 


o    rs 


a    to 


to 


□     V)     ra 

E-a     iSrsaj-g.a-OopI 

fe    BJJ3J    o    "j:    g-M    '"ja 

-"  k3  J^  U    «    «    =5  .=5  .=5  .=5  >2  -a    «    ti    a    =1    « 


a    a 
-a  ^rt 


s  .a 


a    »    & 


It 


■4  a 


to 


0  J= 


a  s  a,^ 


J3    43 


W-«!p:^^^^<;S^;^pJ 


S  ^  -a  j3 


,Sf  a 


to    «      C3 


CO  S 

.5  ja 


•-^ 
o    3  -a 

to    (>>    3 

to  "-»   o 


^■i    S..a 


a 

to 


to 

■-3 


to 


<!  W  ^  ^  ?5 


(i,ia,w«w««>:s-^S<6uJom 


.a  j3 


to^ 
.5  a 
a  «> 
Eb-g 

to  p^  a 
a  a; 


wS  >  ,« 


U  OQ  O  S  IS  H  52; 


(*:»;* 


-a  g  -^ 

c  -"  i"  8  f-  =  J 

to  a    d  ja  'c„  to 
'    =-  I  I 


Ui 


^ 


'.    s 


ft  '3  'a  ■ 


-   C  ^  J  J 


^   ^  J  -a 


ta    k, 


t  "2  -o 


'a  I  .«"5 

ja    o  ■§    "> 


to '3 


to  a    :^     e4 


M  O  M 


g  -3   o 


"to 


5     3     =     S 


2  "S  ~  5  "^ 

«  H  w  c  £  m 


LANGUAGE. 


469 


CO 

:5 

e 

1 

^-> 

Ml 

i. 

^ 

Ci 

^^ 

rS 

1 
■a 

ji 

^ 

60 

a 

■*3   ''"^ 

Pn 

^ 

1 

.6 

:£ 

ti)  s 

II 

.1" 

a 

3 

60 

□ 

_ 

60 

a 

'a 

J2 

a 

a 

to 

a 

a 

s 

to  a 

11 

WJ 

1 

to 

a 
"3 

1 

1 

o 

a 

to 

a 
13 

3 

a 

3 

1 

«    a 

C     3 

i 

'•5 

3 

^ 

? 

^ 

s 

3 

a 

3 

-a 

13 

8 

a 

1 

u 
.a 
11 

g 

^ 

u 

J 

a 

6^ 

o 

^ 

g,S 

a 

C3 

P 

^ 

<v 

S 

a 

S 

■§ 

a 

c. 

« 

u    o 

C) 

-> 

11 

« 

111 

o 

1) 

o     « 

i> 

CI 

V 

o 

OJ 

« 

4) 

(1) 

o 

O) 

n 

J 

^    J3 

.2 

^ 

J3 

.2 

J3 

^ 

j3  -a 

.r: 

^ 

^ 

.d 

,«: 

j3 

J3 

.:a 

^ 

u 

ZJ  u 

'^ 

^ 

U 

C-' 

^ 

U 

u 

O  O 

O 

U 

O 

U 

U 

O 

o 

O 

o 

u 

a  60 

•3  .2 

s.  a  a  e 
.«  g  J  J  .«  * 


<f  a  a. 


^  S?;  ii.  JS 


o    c    - 

1^  i?;  P 


3     rt 

3    " 


9 


o 


,y       w.       CJ       o 

,  -<  i?;  :^,  U3  &. 


■^  -^    S    «    £ 
0)     3     S     a     S 

a  5  ^  J    a 


H  0^ 
3  2 
60  H 


o 


S    i?  e    o    ^ 
^  ffi  ti  1^  "I 


S5  P'h 


o     =- 

S.8 
^1 


6C    O 

•5    g- 


^   fe  ?. 


3 


Ui  S 


«»  t:  ^ 


!■§ 


l^^3 


a  !?;  «  HH  S?; 


bn 

s 

a 

3 

a 

o- 

S 

s 

o 

^ 

id 

u  «  a  o 


to  to  to 

a     c     c    ■ 


lb&2 

O      U      0) 

J3    J    ^ 

out 


to  to 

.5  i 

M  s  a 


Eo- 


ns 
a 


60. 


a    60  o.  << 


ja    g 

3      3 


a 

60  ■§     |0    60' 

i  M-§  §  • 


a    a 


3     <U      O 

^    a    c 


to    60 


J=    J=    J    J    — 

u  O  U  "    -- 


OJ     u     cj     cj 


")    :     i    to 


^  —  ^^^t^aJlJa 


O  U  « 


U^      .^      ^H     ''-■ 

S  P?  i«=i  o 


'1 


.S    ""3 

«a  Oh 


^  e. 


>    to 


^1 


a.i 


o  '3 

J.  -a 


S  (S  >^  t<S  ^  -^ 


-«  -s. 


-M   s  ^ 


2  ^ 

^-^    3 


o     Si     o   "3 
-^   ^0  .       .      -M 


.id 

to 

s 


^  I?,  !?;  H  i5  ft  ?= 


?^l 


a 


3     3^ 
rt     ea     « 

a    HH    Uj 


to 

a 
3 


o 


^  5  ^  ^  » 


S.-S 


a  -=5  ^ 


fcJD  "tfi    nc3    ^o    -^    ^ 


■St"  .Si! 


o    o    o    o    o    o    o 


2    >. 


o    o    « 


HHE-it-HHHE-iHE-iHE-iHHHHE-iHHHHHE-iWQf^OH^iWHH 


f  ■! 


ni« 


jidU 


i 

ft; 


470 


LANGUAGE. 


a   -^ 


-   .3 


2  ^ 


•-i  :3  -a 


o     a   s 


S    W    Hi    t-j    d,    |«!    (KJ 


S)  ^ 


t 


»   ^   S   ^ 


S  ? 


J  k 


!z;S5S5;2;»S5;z:tz;<SpJS£s>.;^^tE^^^ 


-3    - 


4i 


St     » 


JS     S     -^ 


a 


u    .u     ^ 


-3  3   S.  •s 


^  J 


s  3 


4J 


■S  -^  ^   ■'' 
,S   4J    ^  -S    -3  iS 


'u    ^     a    ,S 


s  s  s 

^  >»   ^ 


i  J   J   .H 


^  •S  i3 


fe>   i 


is    -S 


S     S 


>.    c    ^   j« 


-S   2 


Ul 


» 
^ 

w 


& 


s 


Js 


W  Ui  tS  |i<  J?;  ?-.  55 


1  -f  -«  J  S 

g     o  &  g  g 

!>  I  i  i  f 

igj       C)  V  CJ  ^ 

?!;!?;  S^  STh  o 


S    .. 


•a 
a 


3 


(S    <   g   ^  1^   O 


a    «^ 
.t    "S 


fe   *•   s 

Is 


B    5^ 


^ 


c      s      _      ..      _ 

i»   P   f5   CO    •<    •< 


g 

■if       ^" 


a 
5 


^     tu 

O       0) 


=  s 


^  «  W  ^  p:  ^ 


fe     O; 


pa  w' 


LANGUAGE. 


4V1 


Kp    to 


tu  -S   -2 


r**  -    -s   c  &.  .o  -s 

I?    K    ^    O    O    !^,    H 


-M   ^ 


Z    6 


4; 


o    t2 


o    "O 


&:   ><   O   P=    ^   S 


'0  ^ 


•3   ^  -s 

"    ?)    S 
■s   -s  ^ 


ccao><;pst^cS 


=    ^    3    tH 


S5    W    IS    S^    <i    -<^    O 


-rj       S       rf       *      - 
^     ^     J       ^     ^ 


S" 


a    B 


z 


.-     is 


7-     '»     -^ 


Ss    ^ 


4JJ.)     a-ii     a,-3Sj.     Cj^ 


fsbboibboc 


:«  j<i 


^0000000000C00SS<5iS-<0'-<0 


O     J3 


4J     •-'    ^-* 

.«     J=     J5 

>,  .5   .5 


rt      «  rt 

a    .:«  a 

t^   E^  t^   ■="   s^   = 

rt      rt  ca    j3    j3    ^ 

<,    li^i  S    O    O    O 


a 

1=^       L»,       t^ 

O  <i  <^  o 


:     2     S     §    J 


« 


rt 


O  S 


VI      m      ^      o 
>>    >-,  -a    -^ 

S    S    I*   O 


«    -a 
S    O 


i    ^ 


o     m 


J4 


S    O   O   S   ^ 


II 


O  O  S  c 


^     j3     Jj     J3     ^ 


I  § 

si: 

V     is 


S  -2 


W  >?;  El  d,  ;?; 


W 


§   a 


& 


a  5 


fi  M   W 


J    3  ^ 


M    -o 


fe 

■fi 

fe 

a 

Cl 

0 

M 

H 

w 

W 

is 

a 
a 


fin    !?;    <5 


o 

1-^ 


O  ?! 


.&■  -a 


a  -3 


M  ;2;  < 


pqWf^;^;MmH5;?;b.Wpi,HWpqSS?=w5S> 


•u       -n      w      — 

.2   ^  :i2    2 

OT    fJH    CO     WJ 


472 


LANGUAGE. 


to  -^     tu 


1i      « 


J<    J     a,    3 


a    .a    J 


a     to 


B.    43 


•jj  »  Hi  xt  a  ii^  <  e^ 


a    a 

-3     .3 

H    H 


•3 

,5; 
is 


^    -rt    ^ 


•:5       -     _=     -3 


a  J 

■3     2 


M       to     3     -=     -5        «         » 

-g  .^  :i    S    S    I    I 
fS  t«j  s  p;  s  ^   I 


.3 


3    i« 


■2  J 

-a    _a    J4 


^     S 

g  •£ 


o  ^    ^ 


E.:i5 


-a    i3   -^   tS    -3    13   ^   >^ 
t/j   W  02  K   oj  »   ■<  O 


-n  -n     .3      o      iZ, 

a  a   it  -^  i; 

o  o 

O  O 


•a 


i 


» 


o     J3     -? 


J3 


3   :5  TS  ^ 


O  O  I',  s?; 


^  u:  hj  /H  ph 


-  ja  :3  ;3 


s   s 


■S    .3    -.3 

-s  -  i 

■S3    .g-    2 


S> 


ohSSKOUSWWo 


t^   -a    ■^ 


S^, 


I 


o 

i-  a 

>»    3 

«     cr 

O   >^ 


u 


^  a 

J3 


S 


o    -a 


fs  o  ^;  ^5  W  o 


b    _g    .a    '3 


< 


o 

s 


>>   ^   fc> 


b  ft  c  w  s  w 


ic 


s. 


o      en      CL.   .a 


-lOSjiiWW-slfHSSfriiii-alS^ 


I    ^^^ 


i  ^ 

=  .9 
5.  « 

a     " 


:5  «5 


a 

.a 
a 

-a 


a  a 
«  i 


5    <u 

a  a 


U:i 


J    8  "S  J 
S  P  1-^  o 


w  w  ■< 


?3 

a 
a 
•a 

s   g   - 

c9      3     ffi 
H    Ph    <i 


Et 


=  'J  =  J 

c  u;  fe  fi 


s  -a 


Ui 


fe    =    » 


a 


a 

43 

«     S     «J    .a    J 
'-    H    t>l<    U    W 


-a     <<    u    ^ 
K    M    ^    O 


P-( 


to 

a 


PM 


1    S- 


I-?  o  oj  pa  oj  s  fi 


L  A  N  G  U  A  G  E . 


473 


■2 

J    .rt 
Is    ^ 


e 
.a 

■  rS 


i<  w 


a 


it    ° 

c 
-3     -^ 


to  -^ 

S   -= 


to  ^      fc 

-=   -^   -2 


c  2 


* 

_      3 

-<=       £3 


t!Wri«iujfioe"^^(5»a 


w^Jt/jSr,   ShSWWx 


s,  v:  i<j 


.3 


^    J     Ss 


•§ 

(s 


fc=    -S 


^ 

^ 


—    "!=:?. 


M    •;j    -*    ^    J 


.1^     =* 


!s     t: 


«      =      o 
S    'is    'g 


t=    ■= 


^4 


o     is 


-     ^       B 


Ui  £  ^  s  ^  ^ 


o     -3     »-        rt     - 

u:  H  p=  Ph  ui 


3       o 


■3 

■2  ^ 


u;  « 


c      "      P 


b  -^ 


o    *: 


JS    ^ 


-g  -g  •«  "i. 

S'  ^  i?  5? 

fc<;  u:  u:  e5 


5    s 


a 
S-  3 


J3       C 


■"     e 
c    c  .d 


=    -=    -^ 


rt     -c 


.-       *j       t;       c;       M 

fS   ps  W   R  i?; 


s>;  <  h^ 


o 
S 

« 

rt 
n 


to 


B    -S 


^       B       fe 


rt 


tf 


u:  (£  hS  «  fi  o 


p. 


i 


I'T.   I 


r.— 


B 
B       S 

3     ^ 


B 
o 

c"  J,     a  "-I 

V  >^  js  .S 

J3  "      rt  n 

a.  ;?;  t-  i1h 


■2  ^ 
S5   ^ 


S  >■ 

^  rt' 

'^  B 

o  B 


=  s 


f?  K  u;  u:  ^ 


o     is 


a.   h^   <. 


Ph    K 


B    ^ 


E 
C 
P. 


u      B      rt 
rt     —      C 


Ss    — 
to    o 


is 

5 


^.    S    E^ 


fr,  5^.  t/,  e,  o  ;:^  ^ 


GO 


■     I     I?   &"    S>  fo 

(±,  */;  h5  e  s  s  ?;  <;  K  ^^  rjr 


s  -c 


E 

s 


to 


3    -S 

J3       S       B       S 

s  ^-   .£P  ^   "rt    \ 


<  is  ^  ^  S 


474 


LANIJUAGK. 


*0' 


!'/•■■ 


is 


:S 


£ 


a  w  s  i< 


_M         to      Q        ^ 

^  S  '^  ^  £ 


^  ^  M 


% 


■E, 


to  a 


»  -5  J 


I 


s  -^ 


•i    ^    .2."  -    1    f 


a    t 


5<  - 


«   t^   :3   ^   J2   ^ 


s    M    ja 


:   e 

■i 

M 

a 

1    1  1 

1  i  1 

>^    a.  ,M 

«     '?,      a: 

.5 

1 

o 

J 

'a 

O 

J 

Si 

a 
!s 

c 

,J 

c 

k 

is 

a 
1 

c 

c 

"a 

i 

B.  M 


.^     - 


»5   S   ^   W 


«    ^    ;=    -a     «     -    _.     .-     -    _ 


5     S    3    Jl 

-a      i^      /;      w      c 

>  ^  ;?  i-  i,  >2 


-e    -«    —    -5 


is   s   a   » 


■a   -2 


'^  i 

rt      5      «      X      "      rt 


fe     s 


c/j?%oS-<ohu; 


2  >3  «  a  t-  » 


4i 


9    s- 


a    ^ 


s    -2     ?^ 


Sz;  S  <j  tij  « 


S. 


CS 

.4 


>.-g      ^-g      0<J      %.M 


>•   "   .a    H 


^    3     =    -a    J: 


s    -B 


.-"^       t-      ^ 


-^     ?? 


&*       «      •^ 


■^ 


^-IKOOSOPSSSCOOS 


^   ;2   ;5     « 


P     EC 
o    ^ 


hi- 

o 
is 


t£     ^ 


e 

to 

^ 

■i 

s. 

^ 

« 

a. 

rt 

» 

fS 

(S 

^    8  I    S  -^ 

|s  HH  w  oQ  p.; 


s   ^  i 

P4    CC     I/} 


a 
•J 
—  a 

"3   3     o 

» N-l      WM 


^ 
» 

^ 


^     S 

(1.    h 


J5 


■r   g   a 


£3 

O 


u;  h3  o 


a 

a 

& 

o 

.s 

1 

1 1 


a. 


^ 

ic 

»/! 

!e 

S 

o 

rt 

o 

S 

« 

Spq^SKKKo^ilh^a 


-n   5r   -: 


rt    hS 


I  .f 

|1<    H    P^ 


L  A  N  (J  U  A  G  E. 


3  I 


so 


«    to  -=» 

•So 


> 


~     o 


60 


a  X  H 


"  I  i3  ■"*  -^  1  ir 

,g  :3  '=  :3  ^  °  -i 

!=-    £  -2  a  8-3-3 

>',   ;^  ^  »j  ?•   ij  J 


I. 

n 

-8 


.5    -=    'S 


3       I       d 

u:  s  ?■ 


j3 

is 


-I" 


■5    H 


is 


•8 


-    '^ 


^ 
rt 

!« 
^ 


—    -"     —      o 


?;  >H  ^^ 


^  :3  ^  o 

"Si 

s,  >'.  ;s  o 


fS    K 


s 


t^     -^     -*.     /-^ 

*   c/j   C   O 


•3     is     ^ 

,M     "^       -" 

<  >^  ^ 


CI       v 

S    3 


■^  :S  -^  ^ 
3  *j 


.K!       -       C     -= 


i: 
a, 


fS    ",   <I   O 


t< 


>,    j<      m 


a    3 


R  6  s: 


u; 


-a     >> 


■^    ja    j3     c     « 
O   1^.   !«.    H   O 


4)       "'       -     j( 


■S       2 


i'    S     o 


Ji    .5     a 

»     a     I 
S     »     g 


^ 


W    «^ 


S 


a 

^  i 


4  S 


a 
'a, 

O 


rt     -     ^ 


» 


IS 

c 

o 

^ 

^ 

rt 

J^ 

^ 

■Ji 

>> 

i« 

JS 

-< 

s 

Cm     C 


W    W     h3 


.24 

o 
-a 

□ 

If 

& 

o 

^ 

rt 

5 

-s 

^ 

.3 

o 

« 

2 

KB 

_   J  .£  is  -s  J 


&,    o.  j: 
^    ^    '^ 

3 

H 


-    2 


3       g,     » 

es      o      2 
.U      S 


a 


-   s 


13    .a     c>    >, 

f=  ^2  :^  fS 


5    5    5 


U5    &<    Ph   Cu    pS    H 


S 
o 

y,  ■^  ^ 


""     a 
o   ;a 


:_i     »L^     < 


oi  J   S   C  K  J^i 


t?  E  «  ;5  s  w  fri 


n 


476 


LANGUAGE. 


•a 


i  -a  I :!  8 


4i 


«  7-  ■"  -J* 

S    -3    t    .S 


=    •«    •=    ^   ."    ■." 

ao  t-  s^  '.<  S'. 


1-^ 


.w     i>     !t 


^    -A 


;£?;5fR{<:?=?:?=-^&^ 


S. 


J  1^^ 


!z;  <  ?.   ■<   C 


V4  >^  '^ 
<.  O  a. 


b  p:  w 


at*:?; 


^  .=  ^ 


fc  -f 


>>  i^  ■=  s  -^  ^ 


;  s 

^ 

u: 

!% 

? 

r 

i* 

? 

ps 

M 

J4 

^ 

C 

i 

^ 

8 

.a 

.a 

t 

C 

^ 

■=3 

c 

fr  s 

i    &   - 

5 

^ 

fu 

^ 

_    j: 


*    ~ 


s   ^   5 


n      e      o       c?       = 

^4       taN       1.^        I-M        — 

»^.    <-,   St    r*.    a. 


«    -5   ^ 


-     °     i   -^   -S    3    2 
■S   .|    ^  £.    i»   .S    a 

>?   .2   I   .5   5   5   :2 


(iY.  ujc^Ph?;  ?;iiit4o< 


IP  *  ^ 


^  g 


te     fe     S     S    ■"     5 

c^  ;2  p:  ,:;!?;  p: 


6    fe 


g    B 


*      B. 


p-a.t*;!?',   H5pps„^fc< 


Up 


»  p; 


r?   i    I    ,S 


c      =.     « 

,^     -;■     h-* 


M     •£      -M     Ji 


S   ^    t   ^    i    to 

fc--        ^N         L—        h-t        ta*         ^ 


cu  4i 


1  i 


ir       '^      *-_^      .f       w^    i_l       ""^      ~      ^H     ^     •--     hii^     ^H       ^^     b^     k^       "—     -c       "^       ^^       fc^i     •—     ij. 

C&.FSC.a;Si-iP.SSpL,SSpHt5Ci:c,Kfc^t-a.^JP^ 


LANGUAGE. 


4T7 


o 


a 


O     JZ. 

j:     -     2  C     a    -V 

^    'I   ~    J   js    -i   r'   ri    .=   "^ 


s 

^ 


3    3^ 


K   a 


'* 


7, 

a  o  P- 


2    o 


-   <*  O-  x    -   S  ?: 


•3    S 


a 

o  ^ 


■3  " 

o  -2 

~  .3 

J  — 


o 


Ui 


^  .9  jj,  M  -^  M   i,  %  ~  ^  *~r  n 

.-"     -        ^     ~     ^  -'!'.=     ~     .3       i       rS     -^ 


<  £ 


■^     -■   -5 


a   t? 


^   § 


8 
I  -i  J 


» 


^    ^    fi    r^, 


u      ^    — 


5j  s 


■2   J4     a. 
3     3     i 


it     iL 


CJ 

ft 

si 

B 


:   -9 

1     i 

w        ; 

j<     5 

ft 

S      ~     -*       B       J 
"^    -f    J     -g     .C 


-5    .2 

'2     ~ 

S     s    ^ 


<-.  H  cj  <-.  <  w  i,  Sh  ?-  i^  f ,  e-  i^,  /^  •<  >',  i^.  ti 


I  -3 


o      S. 
B       O 


■i     -3      -5 

2   s  -i 


fS   =0  W  «  h3 


E-1    ?f    Ph 


S  s:  -<: 


»    H    b 


="    J    J    :=     S     = 
O    «    ?    O    ft 


1) 

Zi  '. 

ft  ft 

ft  g 

=  "6 


o     -^       ft 


rt     v-     --^i 


vj?H?-i?-i?H^wp:; 


I! 


S,  J  "S 


b    ft 


»f 


h 


l< 


478 


LANGUAGE. 


M    a 


.a     cu  -0) 


-d      •"      ;5 


•s  = 


P=i3w!^^o9oSs^:^ 


3    ^        £   -' 

3         _      •!><       'w       ,—      __         _ 


-s   f 


S   -a 


5   .5   -=   —   -=   _ 


^   >^ 


S     bo   E    to 


E   •,= 


-=   •£ 


"       **      ^1 

—     -    ^    J    j: 


:    o 

.2 

^    "a 
1    •= 

it 

:   J3 

'e 

is 

c 
S 

a 

r 

J 

5; 

j: 
S 

t 

I 

-R 

1 

i3     !5     "S      S    rr 


&    •  = 


.S      fe 


!?;;?■.  c 


<,  ?,  U)  (i<  o  s  s 


js  ^  u,  ;5  tr  ^  r>  > 


E.  ? 


«       V    -TT 


>»    -^ 


fe     ^       "     ^       «     ^ 


g       § 


wooKb^H^f',  H^^fsWpM 


.«   1^  -3 


5  ;5  >2 


>,  -S  -2 


fe    fe    2  ~ 


&>  ^ 


i?  «• 


B    -?     c     >,  .a 


§    -5 


s   S-  a 


I. 


2    ^ 


!?;  &r.  c 


k,        K_     <«      ,_i:       /;        "     1.—     ."       C3        rt       C3       w     t.        1.  w     t"       ra 


n,  ^  p^  ;?,  u;  ;<: 


^1 

c3  (£ 


n      to 


-2     n 
^     to 

=     to 


..       M       D       ei 


O       O       "^ 


W     O 


C 

a 


-      ^ 


k     A    .=3    n«     -5 


it    5 


I 


di   s:   5^,    SS    fi  »:;   fi 


!^  ti  ;;^  ^  W  ps 


02    (i^,     ft| 


g    §  g  J  "S    I 
oj  pa  p;  p:  Pd  c 


—    w 


g    S 


jj 


X     !/. 


-3 
C 


C    pq 


to  ;= 


A    s  3 


^         M 

b  s 


a 
o 
CO 


LANGUAGE. 


479 


^    a 


4i  -o 


^    « 


M  .1"  :S   S   ^ 


-M    -T!    -^ 


p;  ^,  W  ;z;  S?;  >?;  !z;  ;?.  t',  pc  ^  ;?,  ^, 


O     ^      -B     t''     „ 


3~    ^  ri    if   ■^.   -^   ri 


-2    S> 


!?;?.  t5<j-^M-<iwS«(i;o 


-8 


^ 

^ 


g  «  4j 


is     ^      ^ 

•2  -2   ^ 


u    s 


E^ps 


1^4 


^        5^        w        w        -*/        y       ^        ^ 

^  Ui  f:^  fi-  ^  Ui  ^  ^ 


g    £ 
a    a 


A! 


tc    ,3 


S   :3 


~   2  :g 


•3    '3     ^ 


o 


-3 
.4 


W  W   tH   >,   Iz;   ;^,   o  ;?<   5^.   ;?; 


°    ~     o 
■"    :2   — . 

;<r,    >r,    H   En    "^    - 


J3     ^ 


3       ° 


is 


S. 


■a   -9 


a 


is       fl 


.s  >:  J 

<<   P-   cc 


■—'     —     ►--     ►> 

cc   t/j   !^,   » 


?:  M  W  O   <1 


S 


p   XI 

fe>  'I 


s   s 

o     o 

^     J3 


<     <     <     <     < 


<    <.    !^ 


a 


is     e     i! 


is    -5 


J3 

o 


6=     fe 

g    ^ 


fe      ^ 


S    &    g    5 


J      ^ 


^^    ^      rt 


-  -  ,^  w  ^  ,y  —  "        ►-'  CJ  O  C 


O   O  W   W  O  O 


K   O 


is 

o 


w 


^     Is    ^ 

O       ^       c3 

w  ri  w 


lyj  p^  cS  S 


3       ^        /-N      ,-^ 

'^   a    a    d 

1-1        M        (-«      _"5 


=1 
o 

-  -2 


•    -5    lS    ^    ^     6    ."^ 
t-i    H    HI    OJ     H    t«    r- 


■a    -a    ^    ^ 


P^Ht-iHHHE-iHH 


:;3    r^    '-- 


si 


^'i    P^    H 


•il! 


480 


LANGUAGE. 


in' 


bO 


5. 

u     -s 


A   S,    -i 


•a 


SI.    ° 

3     ,J< 


<     2 


«  ^  •"    s 

;**  ;5  S  ■« 

Pk    «    H    H 


d    S   ^ 


o 


C*   J3 


H  '<    O    iJ 


S 

-3 

^     o     o 

W    «    H 


■g     .§ 

^  ,3 


P 

a 


5    -s      3     „ 

:!  i  3->| 

<5  W  B   ^ 


a   .a 


g    S 


a    S    a 
Pk    S    S 


_  -fl 

■M  ^ 

.O  o 

^  m 

a  ^ 


I    . 

o   2 

W  h;  <1 


o     -3 

1-^    Pk 


m 


H 


-3 


t  = 


o     'S 


■^   M 


J3 
a 


-M  O        J 


i*        (1,       <       ^ 


•^        -        i 


-a 
'to 


fe  -s 


-5.   S   1   I   I   J 

oj   as   w   E-i   1^   <i 


3     -S     ^ 

4i    s  ^ 


1 


S     S     SJ 
^    •"    ^ 

2     ^     i- 


O  fi  £  cc  pq  fe   iS 


o 


2    g 


o 


^  o 


p     t^    a 
W   <!   W 


o      a 

s  ^ 

s  -g 


P     "^ 

kS  -5  -9  -S 

W       <1      hH      U 


■s 

C>         C3  O 

^    ^  ^ 

fL,  <  w 


p 
o 

S 


o 


p 
o 


■/J 


c  .a 


^.     p 

(£    W    S    «    ^ 


.2 

e    p 


is  :=   - 


t^       !2       K* 

<,    <    ^ 


g-J2 


is 


a 


!>>     tfl 


n 
>> 

I   - 

tS         (A 

^  J 


^  a 


: 

g 

Sag 

O   S 


p 
p    " 

^    -a     X 
S    <    -fl 


a 


g 

^ 


!s 

rt  -^ 

p  « 

a  N 

-="     o    js  p 

W   J5    S  O 


£0  .s. 


— >     :    5 

p 


o 

fc 

c 
B    ^ 

I       «j  tn  u      "^ 

c      «      >»    o     o      c>      o 

H    >H    P5    >^    >^    Ph    ^< 


'H    ^ 


2     S 


►:3www<JhJft« 


J  .s 


bU    Is 

.9   a 


S,    a   -S 

fii       S3       <U 

fS  M  R 


S    5    s  3  ^ 


TS  t:  t: 
a  ;-  ;- 
1^    pS    5= 


S   a 

-a    -3 


■5    g 


=    -«    r-     c 


x>',    0>=^;Hi5Ch5MHHHHHH 


=1 

o 


iSBI  fif^'" 


LANGUAGE. 


481 


a   " 

"     o 


.5 

S  '? 

IS  2 

g  -o 


is 

a 
■a  d 


a 

3 


J  J 
h3  t^ 


3 


a 

9 


s   -o 


7S       ^    ^^ 


M      M 


<  -li  w  o  W  :?; 


us  S5 


o 


C3 


'^  a 

a   o  ■"  -a  a  s 

o     S  o  '^  -^  '^ 

g  ;?,  !<5  W  Slh  S 


^  s 


■°  S  -a 

a  .n  ^ 

a  t^  o 

to  c  a 


■g     ^ 
is    ^ 

J8 


oj  IS  k;  f-  t', 


-^ ._   -,   a 
!?;  cj  ;?;  <1 


1^  ■< 


t-.  "^ 


W 


a 


fe    ^ 


!>-§ 


^     J3 


•S^aja     «jja     feja 
«     m     "5    ."i     '5     '5     rt     m 


a    .J3 


s   a 


p<   a    a 

o  o  o 


Cm    P.  ja 
t->  ja    .H 


i       ^ 

-a     g 


M    J3    ^    M 


a 

-a 


S-  a  -^  H5  -M 


c  o  o  o  o  o  s 


li- 
fe ^ 


•^ 


HHE-iHHHHHHH 


3  •=  "«  .> 


Pt.  II.  — CI 


to 

=-   .5 

to      M 

e2 


3   i 


to  •.= 


H    H    H    K    O    hJ 


C    o 


1 1 


482 


LANGUAGE. 


B  i 

^ 

III 

mm 

i 

<   s 


< 

o 
o 


2  .1 

4  -3 


.a 


n  o 

f)  .a 

ic  .'£ 

w  o 


I  1^  J 

•I   «   S  " 
S  ps  a  J 


g 


■^       g      c, 


o 


P-i 

O 

OQ 


c? 


!?;  o 


;?;  M   -sj 


So 


J 


*  *  s 

to    U)   ^ 


o      7^    p- 


h4     O     Ul     h^     ><     Hi 


a   9 


J?,  o 


»   ^ 


o     o     «     « 
«    'rH     l3    W 


a 


C3 


O 
60 


a   o   o 

''     rt     a 


.a 

"     a 


a 

o 

a 


H 


a     a    •-    -a    -g    "^ 


.a 

e3 


60 

a 


w  6 


-^  ^ 


^3^ 


"  -s  ■« 

"S    a    £i. 


h5   H   H?   cc   S   O  O 


S    S 
-2    S 


J3   -a 


r!<s   .M   "a 


£>   !?^   2-1 


<D       eS       ei 
(-.     >^     tJ, 


w«>:9e-iHmU5-'1«10 


w  a 


a  c  "S 

2  o  5 

a  a  60 

o  o  o 


3  :3 


o  o  o 


O   C   >H 


o  o  o 


-8 


I  ^  ^  f2  ^" 


-  •£« 


!  rl. 


c  a  ;| 


-  sp  ■3  S;  »y  -s  -2 


3  la  .3  ^  t; 

J^     Li.     ^.     ^     r^ 


Cr'h3CiH(«=iHHt^r/3 


<S 


p5  oa  •^  ""I  B  B  f»i 


LANGUAGE. 


483 


3 


1 


-S 


^    S 


•9    3 


a     ^    -^ 


-a     2    ja 


-3   ^ 


ooooooooooooo 


& 


fe  g 


"    -s     ^ 


ja   J< 


oooooooooo6<!ooo>5o 


*^  a 

O  W  O  O 


.a      .     "    ^     a     -     to 

02   <1  C   C   O  C    C 


•2     rt    2     rt    J: 


^   -s    i' 


wwoooooMooocV-otSooooo 


fc     ^ 


S) 


9     o     to    ;—    ^ 


H    5 


60   o   ja 


E-iOOOEhOOOOOC 


t>H     >H 


oooooo><o 


•i 


fe   e 


g    &j  -s 


O   >H   o 


WJ      1^ 


o  o 


,.S    IP 
"3     a 

O   O 


■a   .ix 
O   O 


o       "= 


O  O  O   O 


to     to     m 

o  o  o 


d  o  <i  o  o  o 


1    &■£ 


^   ^   1.2 


to  -J 
.5    '3 


to   i 


^     .Id 

to 

O  O 


f 0   8 


J3    M 
to    to 

o  o  o 


j3      ^ 


e  "^ 


CJ 

.a 

fc 

1 

"3 

to 

a 

o 

O 

O 

,g««'>?.   ^^^(§;^^-^tSg^^^^-^g^ 


I 


K  «  K 


O  K 


§13-3 
;j  fc;  ^  pq  p; 


;tl 


;! 


4,i 


h 


484 


LANGUAGE. 


A  ■[. 


*ii 


?  43  a 

m  to  ^  H  j3 

—  tS  !«  O  « 

O  O  !*  «  O 


•3 

S 

a 

o 

a 

a 

3 

3 

W 

Ui 

?:  a 


3      " 
S     3 

i4  Ui 


a 

TJ 


— >     3    J<l 

Ui  <  < 


a 


V     5 

a   -a 
3     a 


■i 


< 
o 

o 
>> 


c9 


:=,:=,»     to 


St    5 

=3     "    — 


■r>  "tn 


it 

1*     ii 


0OO0O0h^^»^H<0-«10 


rt      o 
a     a 

Ui  Ui 


s 

.a 
o 

'u 

'S 

-  -^  -2 

— ^   tu  2 


9) 

n3 

•:  g 

a 
% 

J4 

•     o 

e 

o     o 

•< 
o 
u 

X 

o 


•s  1 

■§  I  J  B, 

U)   te  ^  a 

O   O  O  O 


to    to 

3       3 

2    5 


>,     (->   -To 

.a    ^     = 
o     c     c 

BO"" 

Fo    Tc    & 

O   C   O 


•^      tn 

a     o 

3      rt 


» 
^ 


c 
rs 


a 


r} 


—  3    -a 

—  o     = 

C       3       „ 


O       3       3  •-        "       3 


to    £ 
2     & 

o     '' 


■fo    - 

O   O 


•  -   .E 


O   Ui 


c 

H 


>•   cS 


fc    -/:    as 


K   (S 


43     a 

43     f 
«     o 


2  6 


«    W 


to  5 


p:,<moui<>^<<ui<uiUiUi 


?s   fa   w 


Ui 


•2    -S    - 


p;?sx""<c«faf5 


=  .5  =  ^  J 


&•  — 


■a. 

5 


Jm      '^ 


g 


K    ce   »».   O   fc   wj 


fc      rt    -«    J 


■2    g 


ti3     m 


So 


Ui   <  i4  <  Ui   Ui  Ui 


'^   M   2 


fe   -a 


S    5 


uj  <:  ;^  ti!  H 


<  o  o 


^  & 

-  &. 


=«  » 


;5   —    o    5 


w  -1  u: 


e3     •— »     -"     "— ■ 


o  c  t<; 


2    S    U    3    s    <=    ^    I" 


LANGUAGE. 


& 


I 


Se     is    J    ja 


3    -3    J 


1 


a 


« 


<i  <;  o 


-«1    H    E-i    S    O 


owwa;oc«<^S 


eg  O 


«   ^    to  -S 


5     « 


^    .a    j3    ja 
^  W  f= 


3       _     _ 

^    rS    -3 


>H  W  W  ?:  H  C  ;-i 


g  s  s 


■3    tu  3    -^    o 


rt      rt      t)j 


■a  -?, 


*     S    ■*    ,a 


_-     ,      o 


0    to 


OWWWOK*^,    fcH 


.!*>  :S 


O     l>H 


to     60     >,   J 


To  - 


-1^    ^     /^ 


^  ^  ^   ^  £  s 


b  so 


-==  —  -a    E 


2  '-  i 


& 


■a 


to    to   a    ja 

s     a     3     o 

u;  Uj  u:  ui 


—  .a  « 


w  «  «  us 


u;  c  K  rt 


£     So 


rt      «      B    -P, 
W    <!    W    M 


to  g   a 


485 


•a 


M 


t 


■v 


-11 


'>. 


i-!Oa.P3xSPH;SfriiyjajS3aiSa2fi>?;K!M 


—     .X^     ri       ® 


•O     -3     IC      S 


<•    N^   t«^   <•<    W    1-4   a;    !/j 


«!    PJ 


486 


LANGUAGE. 


1 


a 

a 
c 


S 
3 

o 
•V 

a 
a 


.a 

a 


a 
o 
w 

a 

j3 


_    * 

o  o  o 


O  « 


u: 


J3 

* 

.s 

a 
s 

a 
a 

it 

5 

o 

a 

1 

o 

0  dug  wun  zhi  ag 
Kuh  ha  go 

ja 

a 
o 

o 
a 

d 

1 

a 

1i 

1 

!? 

S5 

1 

s 

a 

3 

a 

s 
a 

O 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 
a 

C3 

0 

5 

ja 

X 

'5 

a 

^ 

1 

0 

a 
0 

"a 

0 

0 

fe 

5 

rt 

!4 

0 

a 
o 


0:2:=, 

000 


»  a 

o  « 

^     o  ea 

a 


w 


a     >. 


ooo«wu:ooE^o 


.a 

a 

6»J  "^      e    "El.     rt     -^     -^     — '      "       d 

a«y'_g«.2g''j- 
•2    2 

cs      e;      "      "      ij      a      "'      B      <*     e!      a 


a 


•«! 

S 

ST. 

o 


3 


.-    a 


■n 
J2    5 


a 


-•     « 

a 


a 

g  S 

to  .2 

d  Is 


d 

o 

J     d     a    "O 


d      d 

a     a 


a     a^^"^"  pfiO     *-"a     a     « 


S   c 


o     £    .2 
§    ■«     a 


rH    O    >i    r" 


a 
a    .a 

1|  8 

-     2  "^   T=    -a 

M   a  g     a   J 

a   ^  a     §   -a 


■3 


=  :^1 


.to    _ 

5)    a 


s^aoassaa 


a 


a 


-I 


a 
£ 


•^    a 


~    ■«     c     Eo    a 


to  .2 

o  o 


a     a    •"   J 
a     a     d     o 

u:  ui  ^  ;>i 


1-. 


rH    tH    bS    O    O 


3     to 
Sot. 

w  :s   g 

.y  .a 


•3     § 


K   P   ,ii   W 


vj   1-3   P^ 


a 


s  =  a 
."  S  wS 
K*  W  S 


PM     F:^ 


?1   B   hS  cc 


to 

a 
a 

o 
a 

2 
.a 

.2     '^ 
d     fe   "a 

a     a     S 
O    t<j    US 


8  J: 


ja 

a 

a 

i! 

s 

.a 

|£ 

a 

0 

^ 

Ui 

fi  -« 


is    —> 
to  -2 


•C  .2  -C 
a  to  a 
UJ   O   « 


a 

a 

US 


s. 


a 
O 


a 
O 


a 
O 


'S   1   I 

aj      o      =2 

J  C5  S 


LANGUAGE. 


4S7 


.a 


o  o  o 


s 


Ui 


-    ._     o     «     o    •« 

o  «  «  w  a  o 


o  w  o 


c  o 


:=.  Ai3 


060 


tH  O 


^  -a 

^  o 

a  a 

"  o 


a 


^   O  I 


d 


UJ 


t^ 


M 


^    §  -E    s; 


^  «  M  S  CO  pq  H 


to    a 

o    .S 
h4    ^ 


O 


•S 


3    » 


■B   -a    ^ 


■S   -? 


6s     Se 


oMWbooooo 


«     vrf     3     c     •*    —    —     o 

jSgMotDC-O 

oowoooo<ic 


s     „ 
^   -«    -a 


e  i 


to     o 

O    H 


To  -  -'  :- 

K    <   O   ir, 


J3 
to 

E 


C3 

is 


S 

B 


0000 


-s 


c  o 


o      ^ 


O     tH 


^<;  o 


rs  -B   a 


|spMcciiiO<iwp;S>-!fi;ce>'.  Hi^Ert 


-a    rs    tJ 
s    i:   J3    t!   :=   ^"   ^ 

K^     ,-     M     ■:»•      C;     r-r      rT 


■>] 


i 


■\ 


w 


488 


LANliUAUE. 


.1 


i! 

n 

I 

it 

/,  ■; : 

t'.]  ■  I 


e 
o 


u 
tr, 
O 


US 


a 

■d     to 


I 


J3 

O  h! 


■a 

J3 

o 


M     o 

O  »j 


J 


a     1 


J1 


g 


■a   o  e  -f  j^   o 

fe   ^  -a   j3   ja    to 
!/j   oj  B   H   H  O 


a 
O 


o      :    B 


8)  g 

— '     a 


O  O  O   O  O  <!  ?: 


a 

S      3 

"IS     n 

«     « 
W   O 


■a 

a 

a 


to   « 


■w     a 

.pH      o 


o  o  >H  h;  o 


to 

O 


3 


'O     "     o 

1-5   1-5   H   a.    ■ 


•3 
£    g 

■"      3 


&^  S  o  <: 


o 


» 
M 


a 


O 

a 
<1 


a  n  'a 

_  is  3  8  1 

'9  "TS  -a  _ 

J  a  1  3  ^ 

T3  .4»  fJ  5  o 

41  ^  O  Ci  4) 

!?■,  W  W  E^  ^ 


& 


» 


a 


3 

g       O  ^ 

B      CJ  " 

«     ^  a 

-a  -«  ;g 

S     o  o 


W    W    ti!    H    H 


:a  a. 


:/l         to       3 

W  ;«  o 


3 


a 
•a 


i5   .2    to   a    r. 


b   P^   pL,    p;   p    p3 


a    4,j    g    ii     M 

o    —    ,5     ^      o 

p;  w  ?=;  c  s^ 


sSOflSe-a^-g^tpt-is 


(=,    c/l   3   1-5    P^ 


s 


LANGUAGE. 


489 


rt   (3   a  -a   »   o    § 
M  O  o  o  o  o  t<< 


.a 

.t. 

V 

3  •«  -a 

Jl 

o 

«   -a     * 

to  J 

a 

•a 

Z  " 

ja 

M 

a 

o    •-     it 

JS  -s 

^ 

i 

J3    ^  ' 

O   H 

55 

M 

oa   H  H 

v: 


400 


LANGUAGE. 


: 


i   '■ 


\ 


m 


•s  -s  ^ 
•a  s   g 


S3 

c  o 


H    H 


8 

.a 

3 

o 


a 


u:  >^  u: 


•a 


^^ 


■a 


<    5= 


f 

a 


•a  -S  1  ^ 
S  o  t<i 


•< 

a 
u 

o 


43 


.a     9 
<   « 


M 
o 


o 


Mi. 


M 

S 

•■—I 

t 

■3 

§ 

o 

$5 

o 

SB 


t 


.2 


JA 
►^ 


(i4    E-i 


I  g 


C   O 


o  >-< 


o  o 


QJ 


.a 


u; 


EC 


**  5  g  2  -a 
■c  -  o  ._  a 
ft  (^   W   S5  US 


rt  a 


a 

Z  -c  a. 

o  c  ^ 


a     -^J      o 

1^    «     a 
C   l#   O 


s  ri I 

<!   O  O  O 


Jill 

§      B      B      '■ 
— .    S     s     rt 

O   Ui   «   t<5 


a 


hi      o 

W  U5 


a 


a    M 
O   O 


S     a     ^ 

e  -a  ; 

o  o  u; 


•a  ^ 

<  o 


3  r" 


to  —^ 

3  ■« 

P.  —     a 

tS  ^    J 


«     o 

.     on       >• 
SI 


tC      <k      (^      X 


3   M      . 

S  J  -s 

&:   K    K 


«    kh    O 


cc  cc  I? 


to 

all 

O    rH    C5 


d  R 


to  \s 


LANGUAGE. 


I'.il 


S 

i 


-a 

•i  1  -s  J 

o  S  O  &  o 


^1 

X      a 

6  if 


& 


o  o 


ja 


ja 

BO 


•a 


2  3 


<1   O   us   O   O   H    O 


.^f 


g 

.    -§    1   ^ 


•Eb 


to 
is 


<3    .=    .''    ."    .=    ." 

iJ    fH    ^    ^    kh    »« 


W     >H     ^     H     f« 


I  :i  I  ^  I  ° 

p,   ij;  C  o  n  cu 


a 


^  »  d  a  ^, 
w  <  w  c  i4 


-a   _rt     B 

ills? 


W       ii<       KH       •«;      B-i 


3  ^^ 


>< 


(U         Q^      *j        *- 

CC    Ph    X    PS 


►^^  «   <! 


3      ^ 


ic 


.=        M      .= 


c2 


\l 


ii    I 


4U2 


LANGUAGE. 


1 1  a 


f  ■■'    ( 


*4       O  c4 


■< 


O 


a 
o 

s 


t3 
O 


2     e. 


S5    W 


to  _o 
to 


■a 


i-H    H    a.    W    Eh    H 


■3     S     ft    -3     § 
«    g    ^    ^3 

<  a  Ui  <!  e5 


.a 


a 

g   ^ 
ft     ° 

.-.      B      <U      ** 

tz;  H'  »  H 


ft 

c 


K    r«    Eh 


o  fS 


S  -3 


o 


60 


V     a     a     00    ~     5,    •- 

M  I?;  !?;  <;  H  H  w 


5 

o  a 

J  i   3 

a  -  -5    cs 

-^  o  >^  W 


5 


& 


"    a    "  o  o  -3 

^  ^  ^  S  S  ^  "ao 

S    =    °  !  "^ 

w  o  o  ■<  o  >^  w 


5P  .3 


to 
3    S 


S   3     B    ■S 


-3 
§ 

pel 


5 

a 


S 

a 


B     S    -a 

.  e  ■s  - 

PC    H    >5   O 


s  e 


o    -a    .g      : 

•5    -    g    S 
»-;    B5    tH    H 


LANGUAGE. 


493 


:l 


M 
g. 
H 


a 
J) 


s 

3 

a 

M 
V 

a 


s  3 

-a     a 
t   Si 


>>    ^    1*. 


HWWtHK-i«lMW 


o     rt 
to     £0 


w  t^  ps  r-i  >H  ?: 


(-1 


a  ^^ 


e 
o 


•a 

a    ^ 

o     o 

>1   t-. 


MHHHMHCiqn 


■3  ^  S  ^  .5 
o  o  o  o  o 
H    H    H    H    H 


^  e  u 

o     o     o 
H    H    H 


o      o 
H    H 


■a  -a  ^ 

•3  -S  ^ 

o  o  o 

H  H  H 


H3      rt 
-t-i 

5    o 
a    ° 

o       ^ 

.a 


3       ■> 

c"  -a 


■2     ^ 


^  M   e3   f: 


o     o 


is 

1-1 

a 


a 


to 


a 

O         ;^  C3 

cs     cs     "  rt 

W    W  H  W 


I,"  a 

to    3  tJ 

o     o  o 

H    H  H 


13 

a 
o 


(s 

a 

§0 


•c 


a 

o 

Cj 


X; 


to 


•2  ,a  =   a 


•a     a 


to    ,^ 

.2   ^ 


o     o    1^ 


O       O       O       O       -        ^       *,       fc,       ._.        -      ^_       .- 

HHHHWfii-:iUH;-^Ki-< 


494 


LANGUAGE. 


ill. 


i- 


I*    f 


^1 


m- 


(^ 

h^ 
t3 

PP 
-el 

O 
o 

m 
o 


•<1 
2: 
m 

CO 


a 
o 


.2 

s 


^  -3 


.9 

a 


o 


^s 


.^       g       g       ^     .2       3 

s  I-;  o  pLi  1-3  iz;  *^ 


.id 
.2 

"3 


o  -5    ° 

O       O       B 

p:  S  o 


o 


a  en 

V.         <y       o  S 

-  -a    -  S 

-  1^    P^  VJ 


a    .a   J3     o 


a 


o 


C9 

a 

.2     S 

3   a 


L     o    ^     (i^    a 


3 
02 


J!    _ 
«1    < 


--       >=■        l-H 


]  J  J  :  S  J 

SKUHOI-Jh^O 


o 


1^'     X    .3 


0 


M  c 


"x  '^   s°  g 

c      at     g    .w 

c  P  -<  S 


-U      C<     » 


c 

<: 


.a 


S, 


la     S. 

o     >-, 


•a 
a 


-1.11 

O  W   ;z; 


03 

a 

3 
o 


s  a 

;r  kS  ►S  :^  r  .2  j«    °   s   s 


o 


S 


•9    "S     « 
"    i2     g 


St    *• 


o     2. 


HS?;>^!^>'.   f^!^!?; 


e-  -a 


\J  63  53  .-^ 

H    Pn    P^    ^ 


a 


S   J    ^ 


a 


>  ^5 


r.      ^     ^^     U* 
HH     C^     hH     F- 


W3 


(S 


M   K 


-!  <i  a 


3    a 


LANGUAGE. 


£ 


495 


S 


^ 


J 


5?i 


w  W  a  H  «  H  S 


a  -3 


H    ><    P    « 


o     es     rt 


S  ^5  ^  H 


(S 


a 

^ 


Si    ^ 


•o    —     >% 

T     J^     kS      ,=J     .-T      O     i-H       o 


O       t) 


H  w  o  p;  H 


o 

O 


i~f   K   O  U 


i 
o 


a  g.  •-  :s  £. 

.«  3  2  -s  £0  g  to :: 

S  ;z;  6 


o  e  s 
3  ij  J  a  £, 

El    rt    fS    Ph    h^ 


1^    O 


-4-1 

o 

M 

_S 

U 

a 

n 

l-H 

2 

o 

h- H 

H 

<i 

OJ 

o  p:  ?^  t?;  ;^  >?; 


a 


-w     F^      .*j       f5       O 

6  o  o  h5  S  o  ^ 


I'M 

^  si 


o  o  c  o  ►^  a 


8    "   ^ 


O   oj    C 


;z5 


H  <;  H 


el      d 


3       o       o       o       o     t_^ 

a   g    S    S§    H    ^ 


o.    a,    a,    o. 

J5    -a    ^    a    -a 


;£hh5?,    J>;j^^;^E^ 


U3   H 


w  !?; 


-3 

a 


a  ^    i  ^ 


bo  1  «  i 


O   t» 


CC     Ph     (1< 


H    S    ?P    1=1 


2. 


hj  ps  x  ?;  S 


496 


LANGUAGE. 


o 

H 
U 


f 


'! 


,  u 


§    8 


a     a     S 
a    o   i^ 


3  " 


U    C> 


5?1 


03 


a 
o 


o 
< 


§1 


=      3 

K   S 


«   fi 


a 

3     S 

o  ^ 


.a 

s 


<   •<   O  O  cc 


o 


P<   H    H   Ph 


M       2 

s  d 


.9 


■«     S     o     i 

a  K  <  K 


§   -   -£ 


(-1 

0     a 


^ 


a 


s  -^ 


^     »     5 

j3    o    a, 

Ph     PL|     Ph 


!2;  S  S  iz; 


S  |5  c3  »S  ^ 


^i^ 


3     g,    **     S 

<*  tB  o  ?; 


s  -1, 

"     o  "3 

3      «  C 

M   O  O 


a  3  a  o 
a  .a  a  0 
.eg     a     a     a 


wwww^^w^^(2w 


.S     a 


J      I      1      - 

s  n  hS  ; 


a 

o 


o 


w    «« 


(S  &: 


!2i  ^ 


W   U!   <   «   ^ 


CO    ■< 


a 
I?! 


» 


°     a 

:s  3 

a    ._ 
o"    « 


a 


K     VJ    <•     O 


pH      OS 


LANGUAGE. 


497 


S 


ill! 


si    S 


(In    OQ    O 


8 

n3 


13 

a 

C3 


a  -3 


:a    -«    — 

O  Ai   H 


s 

Eh 


><   «   K 


s?; 


3 


<  ^  <  o 


5%    O    H 


t<d 


a      3    I." 


60 

to  n  .b  o 

<i)  o  ^  fc- 

r^  U  K  » 


o 


a 


S  "3   a   s 


a 


§"  a 


t?  H  hi 


s^ 


S 


Pt.  II.  — G3 


S  ^  eS 


'   ffl 


en 
**         ^  :rj 


3    3? 


(-r»        It»         — "  -J  ^         '"^        —J  J  O  *-•  tJ  fc-  L- 


E-i    H    Eh 


03     Jo 


P^     rt 


r^    CO 


S 
3 
.a 


«  iz;  ^ 


.« 

.« 

^o 

a 

3 

3 

-1 

t/j 

OJ 

MJ 

C/J 

2    & 


Eh    H    K-i    H 


to    >> 


w  <,  ^  K  I-; 


to    S 

•i  i 

a,    3 


c 
S     3 


•<      I?      K"      ^ 


ia  ,/ 


m 


498 


LANGUAGE. 


4 


w 


n  u 


» 


^6 


J    E 


5  e 


^  ^<  ^^  »  ^.  ^^  S  £  c  o  o 


B  r 


5    5 


■3    S 


60     S 


t;iOfiH(a<a!OOOWO^; 


S, 


K   ti 


W  fS 


^ 


n  ph 


-B   -S 


I  I  rr 


to    S 


J4  S    S  -B. 


K  e  (S 


K    <1    = 


■s  s   a   E  a 


c   c   c 


,2     t"     ^ 
S     S    CQ 


cc   a.   S   S  S 


n 


^   s 


HJHrttcKEpI^iiK 


rt    -y 


p    —    -^ 


O      '■1    '"    j3 

fc  ?;  O  te 


5  o«  a  "?  ? 


pH     O.     !/. 


<,   p,   ;ii   <,   p;   k2  Kj   W  K   o 


>ii  h5   O  ?5 


i!M 


LANGUAGE. 


499 


1 


I 


a     2 


^  a 


3    E 


a 


<i    <,    re-t    r^    f^    rf^ 


a 


Ui 


c    S     S     ^     •      :   ji   -g 


s    » 


"  9)  O  3 

a  -i:  =  o 

"  .2  a  rt 

.^  ^^  ^^  1^^ 

i;^  i^  <■,  ri^ 


>!0     f 


s 


&  -5 


'a 


&<    c 


S     6= 


Eh    Ph 


( 


02     h^l 


p;  o 


^  >  -2  J 

H    fS    fe    « 


liM- 


500 


LANGUAGE. 


^x        & 


u  M 


I   a 

o    a 
^  -8 


H  m 


to  J«     '^3 


.^      ^      § 


S-  a 


5  ■&.  s 


OOOufXiUS-tJiMtiJCcB-^O^i-H 


i. 

c 

0 

J 

^ 

s 

rt     o     >"     ^      "^      o 
H    >i    S    <    W    H 


g.    s».   c" 


O      *-       tn 

C5    S    E 


<  6  &  ,^  o 


c;>  H  d,  c 


_«    M   -t; 


•  ■^      o    ^ 


to  "5 


M    ■£   ^    J4     5    £ 


HjKH;&,?;fi,fqfip;p;ws>cii;FJ(=i!^w,5'f2sse?^s^fta6 


,1- ^  %Mi-B 


.2     'u 


LANGUAGE. 


501 


■^ 


S   ^   ja 
H    X    in 


-2         3    & 


g    2 


— «     a 

"     o  .. 

cu  s     o 

H  pq  ;1h  p:; 


4 
I 


li 


s, 


■'*      3 


a 

■2 


§    a 


;^ 


3 


H    H    Oi    k5 


g    "5 


>» 

s 


w 


"2    £0 


o 


;?. 


K.  M        .in  to 

P  -1  m  K 


t; 


c  « 


i»     o     ^ 

?H       ;i,       ».. 


.i<! 


O 

o 


fe     S    .S    ^. 


Ch    ^ 


^     _     _     rt     e     -    J3     =     J:    k; 


602 


LANGUAGE. 


V  h 


«ffi 


i 


9 


•§ 


^   ^     a   S    a 


s. 


B    sj     «i 


X,     O 


E    E    g 


s   a   E   s   a  "a 


©      5     *s 


<1  C   e  6   tJ  O  S 


"S   a   =   :2  -5 

*      1-"     *     h-l 


1 


O  CO  •<   O 


S-   c  ""     s, 

^  H  <  -<J 


■a 

•2     P. 


D       =       w       O       "       n       ra 

ij  o  i-H  o  ?%  J?;  ?; 


■i!      S 


S  s 


rt      K      n 


<!  (i,   -I 


<,    H 


O   PH    !-i   Ul 


o  h;  o 


g  ^ 


W    IK 


OQ    03 


Se3     jy 
t)     Pi 


."    s  ;;: 


©  rr  J2 


ooPlP^t/jpiPfBiKlcpQ^HO 


&:   5 


-s 


P*i   o  p;   S   t->   -al 


^    >-,   -^ 


LANGUAGE. 


M.\ 


^   .9 


8    g   ._ 
»     I    ic 

B   u  "4  02  O 


s  a 


1 

■g-3    i   i  -1 

^     ^       O       «       - 


t^    E-,    ~    S    S 


>^    E-i 


oa   ^ 


2  -2  a  a   a 

.2     -C      =      3      3 

>^  u  s  K  n 


H 


H    <    CO 


H  I?; 


U>    t) 


S  O  K  tz;  P  w 


3     __2     ^    ..-^ 


.=  «,      ^w' 


S- 


"=    .£     o     it 


Ch  .s    il 


QoSa.aipHC«PQf-;HSKH>< 


-a    ^    _T 
c_.    rri    rv 


HHHHHHH^ 


?H    ?^    f-    K- 


I  ! 


LAN»;(-A(JE. 


SOS 


^1  A  ^ 


■o   ■¥     „"    S     „ 

W     ft     S     E-l     3 


•a    fe 


P   a  5 

O   O   -"I 


■g   ja     o   •-     3    3     i/(    ^ 


s   a 


-^  4.°<i  e5 


H    E-i    H 


^     g    -« 


a  t-  tH  ui  IS  B  s! 


»    1^    ^1    H 


^    g 


-«   -£, 


Pt.  II._G4 


-S 


■M    -3 


^  X  ^,  i^ 


2  s?^ 


c    S 


S.  5i 


.rt    »S 


El    ►-    ><    >< 


c  i  3 


=    g 


^    t:    *C    ,« 


hhhe:;^^^^^^ 


E^HHHKftHJC.E5t-Sw 


-   a 


w  U 


506 


LANGUAGE. 


■i 

1 

if; 

1 

|i- 

1 

i 

r  I- 

^'': 

1 

1 

1 

im 

1 

1' 

ll 

1' 

i^i  ^  n 

I: 


NOTES  TO  VOCABULARIES. 


COSTANOS. 

TiiK  tril)o»  (if  Iiulians  upon  tin;  Hay  of  San  FranriHcn,  and  wlio  wore,  after  its  cslaMisIiiiioiif,  iiiulcr  tlic 
suptTvisiou  of  the  mission  of  Dolores,  were  live  iu  iiuiiibor:  tlie  .'l!t-w(ish-tc.i,  Ol-hotifs,  (ealloil,  in  lr<iianisli, 
Costaiios,  or  Indians  of  tlio  Oojist,)  Al-tnh-mns,  Ro-mi>-nnns,  and  Tu-lo-mns.  There  wore,  in  acklition  to  tliesc, 
n  few  small  tribes,  but  all  upon  the  laud  extending  from  the  entrance  to  the  head  of  San  Francisco  Uav,  spoke 
the  same  language. 

At  the  time  of  the  establi.Oiment  of  the  mission  these  tribes  were  quite  numerous. 

The  information  contained  in  this  was  obtained  from  an  aged  Iinliati  at  the  mission  of  Dolores,  named  Pedro 
Alcantara,  lie  is  a  native  of  the  Ilomonan  tribe,  and  was  a  boy  when  the  mission  was  founded ;  which,  according 
to  llumbolt,  was  in  1770.  The  language  of  these  Indians  appears  to  be  entirely  irregular,  and  governed  by  no 
rules  or  analogies. 

'  Tliey  had  no  name  for  any  of  these,  knew  nothing  of  their  origin,  nor  had  they  any  tradition  in  regard  to  it. 
They  knew  only  they  were  born,  and  that  they  would  die. 

*  The  sliin,  or  lower  part  of  the  kg.  "  All  the  bones  of  the  foot  arc  thus  named. 

*  Knife  made  of  stone. 

'  A  sort  of  raft  made  of  "  tule,"  cr  rush ;  the  only  boats  used  by  these  Indians. 

^  The  only  clothing  worn  by  these  tribes  was  the  breceh-clout ;  usually  made  of  rabbit  or  niuskrat  skins. 

'  The  "  large  stars,"  or  planets ;  the  small  and  nebulous  stars  were  called  5Iooch-mooch-miss. 

*  Ijiterally,  sun-set.  °  For  the  seasons  there  were  no  names.  '"  Shc-ka — Dust. 
'  AH  the  metals  were  called  by  the  name  of  K-rcck  —  Stone.  "  Had  none. 

"  These  Inrlians  knew  nothing  of  agriculture,  but  subsisted  by  hunting  and  fishing. 

'*  Hiead  made  of  acorns. 

'■'  The  establishment  of  tlio  mi.^sions,  in  which  these  Indians  havo  been  taught  the  Spanish  language,  is 
sufficient  reason  why  the  names  of  animals  introduced  by  the  missionaries  should  be  only  known  by  the  Indians 
iu  Spanish. 

CUSIINA. 

This  language  was  obtained,  in  general,  from  the  tribe  "  Cush-na,"  on  the  mountains  of  the  So\ith  Yuba.  It 
is,  however,  common  to  most  of  the  tribes  inhabiting  the  upper  portion  of  the  Sacramento  ^' alley. 

I  have  found  great  difficulty  in  getting  at  the  true  meaning  of  many  of  the  words.  For  instance,  in  sjieaking 
of  the  arm  —  they  call  it  "yim"  o.  mus-e-wah  —  it  is  difficult  to  ascertain  whether  they  mean  the  whole  arm  by 
one  of  the  terms ;  if  so,  which  term,  or  whether  they  mean  the  upper  or  lower  part  of  the  arm :  so  with  the  leg, 
fingers,  &e  I  have  never  foimd  an  interpreter  who  understood  much  more  than  enough  of  their  language  to 
trade  with  them  or  do  common  business  with  them.  I  have  found  several  who  professed  to  understand  the 
language,  but  none  who  really  did.  I  have  therefore  had  to  obtain  this  language  as  I  best  could,  and  of  course 
expect  some  of  it  is  imperfect.  I  havo  some  blanks,  and  shall  endeavor  to  corrixt  any  errors  iu  this  as  rapidly 
as  possible. 


W,  », 'i        f\ 


LANGUAGE. 


J07 


WORDS    AND     S  i:  N  T  E  N  C  E  S. 


Kycwinkcrs "Bok  bok" 

Eyebrow Wis  con 

Jiittlc  boy IIu  c  no 

To  sweat Loop  kit 

Forcbcad Tchim 

Elbow "Puc  eus  CU3" 

Belly "Cur  do" 

Shawl L;iu  CO 

Smoke "Shook" 

Stone-coal "Cot" 

Wild  onion "Wob  ro" 

Pine  seed "Ton  c" 

Peppermint "'Ilcsh  ah" 

Lean "Do  lah" 

Kaecoon "Och" 

Mouse "()  oss;iy" 

Stiuk "Toe  taw" 

To  sleep "Au  co" 

Expressions  of  surprise  or  astonishment 

To  labor,  travel,  or  any  effort  or  exertion 


Pood Sum  mack 

To  gamble "Hali" 

Dead "BIulu" 

To  cut "Ho  0  na' 

To  shoot 


f  "  Darco,' 
I  "  Niir  wa 


or 
r  wa  bah" 

This lied  dam 

This  place lied  da  da 

Where  Ilab  mode 

What  is  it lies  hah 

What  do  you  say Ha  zem 

Give Wa  ma 

Give  it  to  me,  or  hand  it  to  me ...  To  po 

Take  it :Mip 

Come  hero O  lop  pa 

To  buy IVe.alde 

Lazy Huek  i 

Dirt Pitch  c 


"  Ah  mo ' '  and  ' 
"Towb  hal" 


Solam  en] 


pain 


The  following  must  be  words  of  rooont  formation,  as  thoy  (•ould  not  have  known  any  thing  about  Iho  ailiolo? 
to  which  thoy  are  applied  until  recently. 


Coat Capot4i 

(iun Co  pattii 

Powder Pul  pul 

Candle Man  to  ka 

Hoards Top  la 

ISuekot  Su  wat  le 

lieads Hoito 


Paper Pap  pile 

Vest  Cliar  lac  co 

Shirt Cam  o  sa 

Hat Sonilioi 

Saw Har  so 

Ox  horu Mo 


N  U  M  D  K  U  S . 


Tiiis  is  the  extent  to  which  many  of  the  tribes  can  count.     After  this  they  count  by  teii.s.     If  they  wi.sli  to 
count  lifty,  they  count  five  tens;  if  one  hui-.difd,  ten  tens,  &c. 


One Wic  tcm 

Two Pan  im 

Three Sap  u  im 

Four Tchu  im 

Five Mark  um 


Six Tum  bum 

Seven Tap  u  ini 

Eiglit Pont  chiin 

Nine Pol  lom 

Ten Matcli  im 


PUOPER     NAMES     OF    A     FEW     INDIVIDUALS     OP    TUB    T  lU  It  K     "C II  SUN  A." 

Ma  hi  CO  Gsh  da  In  aces 

Coo  die  pe 


Colin,  thc'r  chief 
Cam  mu  la 

Hock  la 


Put  sha 


Pan  tu 

She  col 


Mou  ac  0  no 
Com  o  liii 


ll* 


'  I 


f  ^ 


508 


LANGUAGE. 


Wo  mo  te  Wis  o  ma  Lu  wassio  Mat  tuck 

Sar  rap  pa  Horn  pella  Whco  lock  On  em  po  lo 

Yap  pa  Penne  wato  Draper  Oo  can  no 

Mo  a  wa  i  Ca  bote  lum  Ya  cbu  no  Will  yo 

Sbcn  do 
'  In  none  of  the  tribes  of  the  Sacramento  have  I  found  a  single  individual  who  seems  to  bavc  the  least  idea 
of  cither  God,  angel,  or  Devil. 

'  Know  nothing  about  it;  do  not  scalp  their  slain. 

'  Penis,  "Tche  km;"  Testicles,  "Su-ig,"  or  "Su  wig;"  Female's  penis,  "Pus  scy;"  the  act  of  connexion, 
"In  week ;"  Female's  Breast  or  Teats,  "  Min  ney." 

*  To  sit  down.  '  Know  nothing  about  it. 

*  Nothing  known  of  these  things  in  the  Indian  language. 

'  The  females  alone  wear  them.  Tlie  males  are  entirely  naked,  unless  where  foreigners  have  con)e  around 
tbera  and  given  them  old  shirts,  &e. 

'  The  whole  of  the  stars,  "  I'u  eu  li  les  ta." 

°  In  some  tribes  "Shu,"  others  ".Shushu,"  and  others  Coyote. 

'°  Had  neither  hog  nor  horse  in  California  before  the  establishment  of  the  missions. 

"  No  cows,  but  milk  is  "  Lee  chce." 

NoTK. — The  vocabularies  of  the  various  groups  of  tribes  in  the  United  States  are  in  an  adv.anced  state  jf 
preparation;  and  their  publication  will  be  resumed  in  succeeding  volumes,  and  continued  until  they  are 
complete. 


t"' 


y !   i> 


U 


X.    STATE   O:^    INDIAN   ART.     A. 


609  1 


II 


(If 


ir 


r. 


:^' 


SYNOPSIS. 


I.  Ancient  Art.     (Vide  Antiquities,  vol.  I,  p.  70. 
ir.  MoJern  Art. 

a.  Existing  Handicraft  Skill. 

1.  Pipe  Sculpture. 

2.  Ornamented  Pipe-stems. 
8.  Canoes  of  Bark. 

4.  War-clubs  and  Hatchets. 

T).  Cradle. 

C.  Musical  Instruments. 

7.  Various  Domestic  Arts. 

8.  Apccun. 

9.  Muskrat  Spear. 

10.  Dressiiig  Skins. 

11.  Forest  Embroidered  Sheaths  and  Cases. 

12.  Wooden  Implements:  Ball  Sticks. 


r  ♦  : 


(610) 


II.    MODERN    ART. 


a.    EXISTING    HANDICRAFT    SKILL. 


1.     Pipe  Sculpture. 


AiiT,  ill  the  Iiuliivn  mind,  .appears  to  have  had  its  germ  in  the  peculiar  species  of 
sculpture  which  is  evinced  in  the  stone  carvings  of  their  ancient  smoking  pipes.  The 
ancient  forms  of  these  arc  shown,  by  the  disclosures  of  their  graves  and  altar-mounds  in 
the  West,  to  have  been  very  elaborate.  The  specimens  figured  by  Mr.  S<piier  from  the 
Scioto  Valley,  evince  a  very  close  observ.ation  of  the  peculiar  and  distinguishing 
traits  of  various  species  of  carnivorous  birds,  quadrupeds,  and  reptiles.  The  imitative 
l\iculty  appears  to  be  very  strong  in  the  Indian,  in  all  periods  of  his  histor}-,  and  has 
been  brought  out  with  much  skill,  in  connexion  with  this  verj-  striking  habit.  Wc 
observe  a  similar,  but  not,  in  this  instance,  a  superior  degree  of  skill,  to  have  existed 
among  the  Toltecs,  Aztecs,  and  native  Peruvians.  Their  ardor  seems  to  have  been 
(IrMwn  oft",  in  n  measure,  from  the  pine-sculpture,  to  pottery,  architecture,  picture- 
writing,  and  perhaps  pure  hirroglyphics,  while  the  United  States  tril)es  continued 
to  devote  their  highest  skill  to  pipe-sculpture. 

M\.  Jiwbank'  1k\s  o[,;'ued  tlif  discussion  of  the  existence  of  ancient  art  on  this 
continent,  in  a  manner  tha'  curries  us  backward  to  the  earliest  traces  of  mechanical 
skill  in  the  human  fiimily ;  at  the  same  time  we  are  led  to  perceive  from  his  investi- 
gations, how  scanty  and  inadequate  our  materials  are  upon  the  subject.  The  distaft' 
is  apparently  of  the  same  early  age  as  the  potters'  wheel,  the  art  of  cutting  gems  by 
whirling  disks  of  stone,  and  the  reed  blow-pipe,  without  the  last  of  which,  it  is 
impossible  to  conceive  of  the  art  of  soldering,  or  any  branch  of  antique  metallurgy. 
These  three  processes  are,  manifestly,  antediluvian  arts,  being  directly  or  indirectly 


Patont  Oniee  .^opnrt  for  ISSO.     Wnsliington    1851. 


(511) 


I 


I 


512 


STATE   OF   INDIAN  ART. 


mentioned  in  Genesis,  and  tliej  would  be  reproduced,  at  the  earliest  periods,  among 
the  Noachian  arts. 

We  expect  to  illustrate,  in  the  progress  of  this  work,  the  manner  in  which  the 
Moquis  and  Navahoos  form  the  thread  for  their  processes  of  weaving,  and  to  detail 
the  arts  which  are  employed  by  the  females  of  our  barbaric  western  and  northern 
tribes,  in  making  their  pecidiar  fabrics. 

We  have  figured  in  the  preceding  volume  several  antiquities,  collected  from  a  wide 
range  of  territory ;  which  denote,  at  the  same  time,  the  art  of  the  natives  in  several 
fabrics,  and  the  existence  of  an  extensive  branch  of  exchange.  First  among  these 
fabrics  in  the  ancient  and  modern  i)eriod,  is  the  art  of  Pipe  Sculpture.  For  this 
])urpo.se  the  westorn  tribes  employ  various  species  of  soft  and  fissile  stones,  such  as 
scrpontincs,  steatites,  gypsum,  gritstone,  &c.  The  red  stratified  mineral  deposit,  found 
at  the  Cotcau  des  Prairie,  and  on  the  Ked-cedar  fork  of  the  Chippewa  river,  which  is 
pojiularly  known  as  "pipe-stone,"  is  extensively  used  by  the  Indians  of  the  present 
'la\  fur  this  purpose.  This  mineral  has  been  analyzed  by  D''.  Juckson.  and  called 
r;i'i.iiiiie.  Figures  1,  2,  .3,  4,  5,  G,  7,  8  and  0,  Plate  09,  exhibit  various  forms  of  this 
i.rti'  le.  which  have  been  observed  among  the  Dixcotas.  In  Plato  70,  Fijruros  1,  2,  3, 
'.ve  observe  the  same  capacity  of  imitation  in  the  tribes  of  California.  No.  I  is, 
liovtver,  a  group  in  wood,  brought  from  that  coast  Ijy  the  United  States  Exploring 
Espuditiou.     Figures  4  and  5  are  Cherokee,  0  .Scuiinole,  and  7  Chippewa. 


2  .       0  R  N  A  M  E  N  T  F  0    P  I  P  K  -  S  T  E  M  S  . 

The  Ii.diau  pipe  has  a  flat  wooden  stem,  about  three  feet  and  a  half  1«  ng,  which  is 
elaborately  and  t.astcfully  ornamented  with  native  pigments,  dyed  porcDine-quills, 
birds'  feathers,  colored  hair,  or  pendent  feathers.  Specimens  of  these  are  exhi))ited  in 
Phite  71,  Nos.  1,  2,  .3,  4.  5,  0,  7,  8.  l),  TO,  11.  In  figure  G,  which  is  a  plain  fiat  stem, 
the  object  is  to  excite  wonder  how  the  pitli  of  the  wood  sliould  not  interfere  with  the 
quadrangular  perforations.  This  is  accomplished  by  tracing  a  waving  channel  on  two 
corresponding  thin,  flat  pieces,  Mhich  are  afterwards  glued  together,  and  the  line  of 
junction  concealed  with  paint.  Sometimes,  luvveve ',  this  stem  is  made  from  a  single 
piece,  having  a  crool:od  pitli. 

No.  10  represents  liie  Ciiip])ewa  and  Dacota  pipe-stem,  ornamented  with  the  scalp  of 
the  male  duck's  ht;ad,  and  having  five  pendent  feathers,  with  the  quill  ornamented 
with  thin  split.--  worked  with  porcupine.  This  is  called  the  peace  pipe.  No.  11  is  the 
simplest  kim'  of  stem. 


3 .    Canoes  of  B a k is , 

Another  oliject  which  has  stimulated  the  ingenuity  of  tlu!  norfiiern  Indians,  is  bark 
canoes.     These  are  made  from  the  rind  of  tiie  l)etula  jjapyracea.  from  wliich  it  is 


j 

^  n 


B'    1 


(, 


if 


ill  f 

"■ir  ;' 


l!fl| 


I  . 


»      .1    ■! 

■il    . 


i    i  ■  ,        '  ' 


ft 


'•1 


t1 


i 


i:  f. 


■ 


i  ji 


;i 


'  1 


I  I 


f'lli 

1    :          ; 

(       ; 

M 

!'    'I 

Wl 

iml 

Ill 

i 

11 

IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


lis 


^/^^ 


»*%^I^ 


4^ 


^4^ 

V 


1.0 


1.1 


itt  Ui2   i2.2 
£?   Ufi    12.0 

u 


1.25  HI  1.4 


HiotDgra^Jiic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WBT  MAIN  STMIT 

WMSTM,N.Y.  149M 

(716)  ■72-4903 


'i 


fTir~r 


HI    H  ?.       ■':   T   K   1)1  .3 


,u'.r.    L'-y    Lifi'trr     -i  r    iuvamp-    »     '       !'in;.Ai,« 


i 


I 
i 


j 


i 


C  M  I'i  t  -Z 


I'l'iii.i.-iilKli    III    1,11'I'IV      :1'1  .  CK,,;,"!'.' 


STATE   OF   INDIAN   ART. 


.113 


ppclotl  in  liii'fiP  rolls.  Tlioso  rolls  niT  brought  to  (ho  jilnce  wlicro  tlio  cjiiuic  is  to  be 
constnictt'd.  A  frame,  which  is  called  gabarie  bv  the  Canadiaii  Frem-h.  is  then 
siispeniU'd  hy  four  stout  jKJsts.  This  indicates  the  inner  form  and  length  of  the  ve.-'.'<el. 
Gunwales  are  then  constructed  of  cedar  wood,  wliich  sustain  ribs  of  tlie  same  material, 
that  are  arranged  closely  from  its  Iwws  to  its  stern.  (Fig.  .'5,  Plate  72.)  The  next 
process  is  to  sheathe  the  ribs  with  thin.  Hat,  luid  ilexible  pieces  of  cedar,  placed 
lon;.;itudinally.  The  sheathing  of  bark  is  then  adjusted,  and  sewed  together  l)y  means 
of  a  S(pnire-bladed  awl,  and  thread  comjM>sed  of  the  fd)rons  r<M»ts  ol"  (he  ci-dar.  <'alleil 
watab,  which  are  soaked  in  hot  water.  The  seams  aiv  then  pitched  with  Ijoilcd  and 
l)repared  gum,  fmm  the  pitch  pine,  which  is  payed  on  wi(h  a  small  swab.  The  Ijow 
and  s(<'rn,  wliich  are  ri'curved,  are  usuidly  decorated  wi(h  figuit's  of  animals,  or  o(her 
jMctographic  devices.  This  art  of  canoi>-building  of  bark  is  |K'culiar  (o  the  Algoixpiins, 
who  evince  skill  and  taste  in  the  construction.  There  arc  canoes  of  all  lengths,  from 
a  hunting  «:an<.K'  of  two  fathoms  (12  feet),  nuuiaged  by  (wo  p-r.-'ons.  to  i\iv  <<i not  >h' 
iiKiitiT,  (he  largest  known  («»  the  fiu'  trade,  which  is  ibirty-six  leet  long,  and  re(|uiivs 
Iburteen  paddles.  The  lightness  of  this  vessel  is  one  of  its  peculiar  properties  — 
a  canoe  of  the  Ibnner  kind  Ix'ing  ivadily  carried  by  one  pcr.-on. 

Figures  1,  2,  ;>,  4,  Plate  72,  exhibit  this  fabric  in  various  |K)sitii>ns  and  conditions. 
Fig.  5  exhibits  (he  ordinary  wooden  cau(X>,  made  I'roin  an  entire  trunk,  such  as  is 
employed  by  the  more  southerly  and  wes(erly  trilK's. 


4.    Wak-€i. UBS  AND  Hatchets. 

The  various  six'cies  of  war-clubs  used  by  the  western  trik's  a(  the  ])resent  time,  are 
depicted  in  Figures  ],  2,  3,  4,  "),  0,  7,  S,  Plate  73;  and  1,  2,  "),  tl,  7,  Plate  74.  Figs. 
3  and  4  exhibit  the  forms  of  two  siwcies  of  hatchet. 


5.    Ckaole. 

The  construction  of  the  Indian  cradle  is  the  subject  of  considerable  care  and 
ingenuity.  The  olyeet  is  to  .spread  (he  spine  of  (he  child,  while  i(  is  tender,  on  a 
stout  flat  surface,  and  enclose  it  with  wraj)pings,  to  prevent  hurt  or  accident  in  a 
forest  life,  subject  to  ju'riK'tual  danger.  To  do  this,  the  child  is  deprived  of  all  nu)ti()n. 
It  is  lM)und  down  with  a  band,  and  its  head  protected  by  a  wcKxlen  hooi»,  Fig.  2, 
Plate  15;  and  it  thus  learns  its  first  lesson  of  that  endurance  inse[)arable  IWmu  the 
hunter  and  warrior  life.  This  subject  has  been  mentioned  under  (he  head  of  iMainiers 
and  Cus(oms,  and  is  re-introduced  here  to  exhibit  the  mode  in  which  the  skull  is 
distorted.  Figures  3,  4,  Plate  15. 
Pt.  II.  — (35 


il 


614 


STATE    OF    INDIAN    ART. 


6.    Musical   Instruments. 

Plate  75  exhibits  the  various  musical  instruments  of  our  western  Indians.  Nos. 
1,  2,  3,  depict  the  heavy  and  light  drums  used  in  war,  religious  ceremonies,  and 
amusements.  The  gourd-rattle,  the  she-slle-g^vun  of  the  Alg(m(iuins,  is  shown  in 
Figs.  5,  6,  7,  8,  the  latter  of  which  is  distinguisheil  as  the  turtle-shell  rattle.'  In 
No.  7.  the  war-dance  rattle  is  shown,  which  is  mode  by  angidar  pieces  of  deers'  hoofs, 
Busjiended  to  a  stick. 

The  pib-lxj-gwun,  or  pipe,  (8  and  9,)  consists  of  semi-cylindrical  pieces  of  ceihir, 
glued  together.  Oflen  they  are  further  bound  together  by  rings  of  i»ewtcr.  The 
Chippcwos  frequently  draw  a  snake's  skin  over  the  cedar  tube.  It  is  blown  as  a 
flageolet,  and  has  five,  si.\,  or  seven  key-holes.' 

In  keeping  time  in  their  songs  and  dances,  a  point  in  which  the  Indians  are  very 
precise,  a  notched  stick  is  sometimes  drawn  on  a  resisting  medium,  being  supported  by 
a  reversed  pan  (Fig.  11,  Plate  75)  or  the  shell  of  u  gourd. 


7.     Various    Domestic    Arts. 

In  the  adaptation  of  implements  to  the  state  of  the  forest-arts,  the  Indians 
exhibit  much  ingenuity.  Bone,  horn,  stone,  and  native  cop[jer,  which  in  the 
ancient  state  of  the  tribes  were  relied  on  to  give  point  and  edge  to  implements 
requiring  hardness,  have  been  suixTscded  unifonnly  among  all  the  tribes  on  the 
frontiers  by  the  use  of  iron.  Knives,  siiears,  axes,  awls,  needles,  looking-glasses, 
tweezers,  and  a  variety  of  u.seful  fabrics,  are  as  well  known  to  the  trade,  with  even  the 
remotest  tribes,  as  guns,  traps,  kettles,  ilints,  and  guniwwder.  The  tendency  of 
opinion  in  the  entire  race,  as  a  race,  is  to  resist  the  introducticm  of  any  £uro])ean  arts 
which  require  conformity  with  plans  of  civic  labor.  We  now  see  some  adaptations  very 
ingeniously  made  to  facilitate  the  forest-arts,  which  were  laboriously  or  clumsily 
lierformed  at  the  discovery  of  America.  The  currier's  knife  and  block  are  not  intro- 
duced in  dressing  skins,  but  a  species  of  adze  (Figs.  6,  7,  8,  Plate  7(5)  is  resorted  to 
for  removing  the  liair.  The  ice-chisel  (Fig.  11,  idem)  is  a  vast  improvement  for  the 
application  of  manual  strength  and  efficiency  on  the  native  aisiikun,  which  it 
supplants.  Even  the  whip,  where  horses  are  possessed  by  the  prairie  tribes,  is 
modified  to  a  lash  adjusted  to  the  Indian  arm,  as  in  Figs.  1,  2,  3,  Plate  77. 

'  This  rattle  is  fastened  to  the  leg  just  below  the  knee.     The  motion  of  the  dancer  causes  it  to  rattle. 
'  The  Dacotas  make  this  instrument  from  a  single  piece, 


i 


!' 


t 

jif 


3 

# 


"-^^^^ 


■^*6' 


W  A  H     <:  L  U  ii  i 


^ioQ^^QO&S>eti^o&^^^^\ 


>y  A  h    '■:>  J.  ))  :i;  -s 


I  i:ii..i,  HK.r    ivi     I  :i  I IM  ••   rr.    ;i   •mi 


^..^m 


z^OiSL 


mm 


MM 


STATE    OF    INDIAN  ART. 


8.    Apecun. 


515 


Horses,  which  are  observed  to  be  an  element  of  civilization  in  all  the  tribes 
where  they  are  introduced,  have  not  become  so  general  in  any  of  the  more  favoi-ed 
bands  as  to  relieve  woman  from  her  toils  by  the  ancient  apecun,  or  carrying  strap. 
This  bodge  of  a  degraded  state,  the  test  of  barbarism,  is  still  common  among  them, 
particularly  as  respects  the  forest  tribes.     Fig.  10,  Plate  76. 


9.    MusKRAT    Spear. 

(Figs.  1  and  2,  Plate  76,)  arc  strong  iron  spears,  used  in  the  winter  season  for 
spearing  muskrats,  (see  Plate  5,  Figs.  3,  4,  5,  and  9,)  varying  somewhat  from  the  fish- 
spear  used  by  the  north-western  tribes.  Figs.  3  and  4  are  used  for  spearing  fish  from 
a  canoe ;  see  Plate  8.  Fig.  5  is  a  short  spear  used  for  spearing  fish  in  winter  through 
a  hole  in  the  ice ;  see  Plate  6.  Fig.  9  has  a  very  slender  spear,  usually  a  fish-hook 
etraightened  out,  attached  to  an  arrow.  This  is  fastened  to  the  bow  by  a  string.  Boys 
and  young  men  shoot  this  arrow  into  the  fish,  through  holes  in  the  ice,  or  along  the 
shore,  (see  Plate  7,)  and  draw  them  in  by  means  of  the  string  attached  to  the  bow. 


10.    Dressing   Skins. 

All  the  native  arts  depending  on  the  dressed  skins  of  the  bison  or  deer,  are 
practised  with  a  degree  of  ingenuity  which  demonstrates  that  woman,  however  long 
she  may  have  been  parted  from  civilized  society,  and  subjected  to  hardship  and 
degradation,  retains  many  of  the  domestic  arts,  even  in  her  lowest  state,  and  is  prone 
to  rise  to  her  original  dignity.  She  provides  the  hunter,  who  has  determined  her 
condition  in  woods  and  forests,  with  many  little  conveniences  which  serve  to  reconcile 
him  to  want  and  hardship,  and  do  much  to  make  amends  to  him  for  his  dreary  lot. 


11.    Forest    Embroidered   Sheaths   and   Gases. 

His  knife-sheath,  (Figs.  4,  5,  6,  Plate  77,)  is  ingeniously  ornamented.  His  looking- 
glass  (Fig.  7)  is  imbedded  in  wood,  and  provided  with  a  sheath,  to  carry  it  conve- 
niently with  his  personal  paraphernalia.  His  choice  feather  of  honor  is  furnished  with 
a  wooden  case,  (Fig.  9,)  and  his  garments  provided  with  fringes  and  beads,  by  the  use 
of  a  little  hand-loom,  (Fig.  8,  idem,)  which  appears  to  be  the  unforgotten  germ  of  the 


JlG 


STATE    OF    INDIAN    ART. 


weaver's  art,  in  a  former  state  of  society.  This  contrivance  is  formed  by  the  knife 
from  a  solid  piece  of  wood.  It  embraces  a  reed  of  eighteen  strands,  which  i)ermits  a 
small  shuttle  to  be  passed  between  the  warp  and  woof 

12.    Wooden  Implements:  Ball  Sticks. 

The  ordinary  domestic  implements  which  are  fabricated  from  wootl  are  depicted  in 
Figs.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  G,  7,  Plate  78.  Figs.  8  and  9  are  instruments  employed  by  youth 
in  playing  a  game  on  the  snow  which  is  supposed  to  represent  the  motions  of  the 
serpent.     Nos.  10  and  11  are  ball  sticks. 


>^5-ill 


Mil 


f  J 1'  JJ    "  y  y.  A  H  .'J .  i-i  A  I  i.'.  A  f J  :i  >: ,  ■"  k  j  ri    o  a  /,  a  .'j  £  i',  3  > 
jf-?,   rMjt  r.Kji   /\rjL'  D  ij  i,uj K ri  .:5-rjiA.H. 


I   -    I-.  1   II- Hi 


1  ...  i\  ."  ■:  !    CM  W  1!      s-     ■■     run  '.'  • 


hr ! 


Pintell 


L 


-  «  U"-         II.  i 


I 


/Mr: 


H« 


;V;j,'f 


/A  ^tr 


N. 


\. 


I 


J     'J 


glia^Hj 


:'ii--- •  1.  ■    l-..!l: 


.' !  r.-t  1  t,;   r  i.ii-  .r    i 


ivj  fj  I.  ..■■:  IW 


I    1      'IC  '       111 


XI.    FUTURE   PROSrECTS.    A. 


(517) 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


SYNOPSIS. 

I.  Importiinco  of  the  Pastoral  Stnte  on  Races  of  Men.     By  II.  R.  Schoolcraft. 
II.  Moiin!4  of  Melioration.     By  John  Johnston,  Es(|. 

III.  Moral  Questions  relative  to  Practical  Plans  for  Educating;  and  Civilizing  the  Aborigines. 

By  Rev.  D.  Lowry. 

IV.  Present  Geographical  Position,  Number,  and  Means  of  the  Iroquois.     By  W.  P.  Angel, 

Esq. 


'W^OMAA^^^^^^^^^WW^A^^^ 


1.  IMPORTANCE  OF  THE  PASTORAL  STATE  ON  RACES 

OF  MEN. 

The  cotulitiun  mid  future  prospects  of  the  Indian  tribes  of  tlie  United  States  present 
questions  of  tlie  liij^hest  moral  interest  to  the  government  and  jK-ople.  In  many 
resjwcts  the  mon  and  his  prosiK'cts  are  alike  peculiar.  The  history  of  the  world  lias 
not  had  its  exact  parallel. 

Other  races  of  hunter-men,  brought  into  civilization,  had  an  intermediate  tyj)e, 
namely,  the  pastoral,  between  the  hunter  and  the  civil  state.  The  wildest  Arab  trilx's, 
the  nomades  of  Asia,  had  the  camel,  horse,  cow,  goat  or  sheep ;  but  our  Indian  trilios 
had  no  dome.stic  animals  when  the  continent  was  discovered.  They  had  formed  no 
manners  resulting  from  such  cares  and  discriminating  duties ;  and  the  ferocity  of  their 
character  was  not  in  the  least  meliorated  by  this  imp<jrtant  class  of  rights  and  duties. 
Nor,  80  far  as  tradition  extends,  does  it  appear  to  have  been  thus  meliorated  in  the 
remotest  times  gone  by. 

The  Indian's  golden  age  has  ever  been  the  age  of  hunting.  To  this  period  all  the 
reminiscences  of  the  elders  point  as  the  age  of  aboriginal  prosperity  and  smierlative 
happiness. 

Agriculture  was  recognised  in  the  cultivation  of  limited  fields  of  the  zea  maize ;  but 
this  was  not  a  reputable  labor,  and  the  supply  of  food  relied  on,  from  all  sources,  was 
so  essentially  of  sijontaneous  growth,  that  it  repressed  the  power  of  reproduction.     At 

(51») 


520 


FUTURE   rilOSPECTS. 


any  rate,  a  very  sparse  population  spread  over  immense  areas  renowned  for  their 
natural  fertility  and  resources.  There  is  reason  to  l)olieve  that  the  native  population 
but  little  exceeded  half  a  million  on  the  same  area  that  has  now  twenty-two  millions 
of  the  descendants  of  a  European  race.  But  the  question  of  numbers  has  little  to  do 
in  ascertaining  tiie  great  duties  Iwfore  us.  It  has  been  well  said,  in  an  official  paper, 
"  These  rennianls  of  the  people  who  preceded  us  in  the  occupation  of  this  country,  and 
Avho  have  yielded  to  our  destiny  and  their  own,  although  greatly  reduced  in  their 
numbers,  have  yet  claims  upon  the  United  States  which  their  citizens  seem  disposed 
neither  to  deny  or  conceal.  Differences  of  opinion  exist  concerning  the  extent  and 
nature  of  the  aid  which  shall  bo  offered  to  them,  and  of  the  interference  it  is  proper  to 
exert  in  their  conduct  and  affairs :  and  it  is  not  easy  to  foresee  how  these  difhculties 
arc  to  bo  reconciled,  nor  to  devise  a  plan  which  shall  neither  attempt  too  much  nor  too 
little,  but  which  shall  preserve  a  practical  medium  between  their  habits  and  circum- 
stances, and  jjolitical  state  of  improvement,  of  which  we  furnish  them  an  example. 
These  difliculties  are  inherent  in  the  subject  itself  Tiie  situation  of  the  Indians,  and 
the  operation  of  the  settlement  and  improvement  of  the  country  upcm  them,  are 
without  a  parallel  in  the  progiwss  of  human  society."' 

Within  the  last  half  century,  and  since  our  population  has  been  freely  poured  into 
the  Mississippi  V^alley,  from  the  eastern  banks  of  which,  as  a  consequence,  they  have 
1)een  displaced,  these  difficulties  have,  in  part,  received  a  solution.  Hunting,  which, 
before  the  discovery  of  America,  was  pursued  as  a  means  of  manly  and  adventurous 
annisement,  while  it  su])plied  them,  essentially,  fmid  and  raiment,  has  entirely  failed  in 
relation  to  these  jjortions  of  the  ceded  coiuitry.  The  wide  areas  which  were  required 
to  support  an  Indian  in  a  state  of  nature,  left  the  trilx^s  with  inuneiise  surplus  territories, 
which,  when  game  failed,  were  no  longer  valuable  for  hunting,  and  which  they  could 
not,  by  any  means,  if  ever  so  industrious,  employ  for  agriculturc.  The  consequence  was 
the  cession  of  these  surplus  and  exhausted  areas  to  the  government  for  annuities,  while 
the  tribes  retained  oidy  enough  arable  land  to  answer  the  purposes  of  cultivation,  or 
retired  into  remoter  regions,  where  the  chase  could  still  be  followed.  A  contest  of 
races  now  ensued.  The  struggle  between  civilization  and  barbarism,  which  had  existed, 
from  the  first,  eastward  of  the  AUeghanies,  was  renewed  on  a  wider  field  west.  Habits 
so  utterly  opposed  as  the  lan'opean  and  the  Indian,  produced  a  condition  of  society  full 
of  difficulties,  and  adverse  to  each.  History  is  replete  with  such  conflicts  of  manners 
and  opinions ;  but  the  result,  however  protracted,  is  seen  to  be  the  saftie. 

The  higher  type  of  race  is  sure  ever  to  prevail,  and  the  history  of  America  has 
disclosed  no  new  fact  on  the  subject.  Labor,  law,  and  arts,  must  triumph,  and  they 
have  triumphed  in  America  as  in  Europe.  This  conclusion  has  been  vindicated  by  the 
settiement  of  the  Mississippi  Valley.     The  Indian  tribes,  quailing  before  the  higher 


'  Doc.  117,  House  of  Rep.,  2d  session,  SOth  Congress. 


FUTURE   PROSrECTS. 


521 


type  of  race,  have  separated  themselves  into  two  distinct  classes,  founded  on  the 
adoption  or  neglect  of  the  principles  of  labor  and  letters.  Those  who  have  embraced 
labor  have  already  been  colonized,  in  large  mosses,  where  the  industrial  arts  and 
freedom  from  conflicting  laws  could  be  most  advantageously  followed,  and  submitted 
to  the  superior  claims  of  civilization ;  and  they  may  be  regarded  as  reclaimed  tribes. 
The  uncolonized  tribes  are  still  nomadic,  and  pursue  the  business  of  hunting,  with 
little  or  no  permanent  advantage  from  the  long  years  of  civic  precepts  and  examples 
which  have  surrounded  them.  While,  to  every  rational  man  who  regards  the  wonderful 
problem  of  their  stubborn  resistance  to  civilization,  the  only  question,  while  this  resist- 
ance lasts,  is  one  purely  relative  to  the  time  of  their  destruction  and  extermination. 
If  the  pastoral  state  could  be  introduced  among  the  prairie  tribes,  and  they  could  be 
kept  at  peace,  the  best  results  might  be  anticipated.  •*• 

It  must  be  evident  that  the  policy  which  is  appropriate  to  tlie  hunter  trilws,  requires 
modifications,  when  it  comes  to  be  applied  to  the  industrial  and  partially  educated  and 
reclaimed  tribes,  who  have  frames  of  government,  and  codes  of  laws,  adapted  to 
nascent  communities,  to  rely  on. 

Important  questions,  respecting  their  numbers,  annuities,  and  the  expenses  of 
managing  Indian  affairs,  cost  and  sale  of  lands,  &c.,  for  a  series  of  years,  are  exhibited 
under  the  head  of  Statistics  and  Population  in  the  present  volume.  Attention  is 
invited  to  these  details,  and  particularly  to  the  fact  that  out  of  upwards  of  eighty-five 
millions  of  dollars  awarded  to  them  in  treaties,  since  the  organization  of  the  present 
constitution,  but  little  over  two  millions  has  been  retained  and  vested  in  public  funds, 
and  this  is  exclusively  the  property  of  the  colonized  tribes. 


Pt.  II.  — 06 


2.    MEANS   OF    AMELIORATION. 

The  follow  'ng  letters  were  addressed  by  Mr.  Johnston  to  the  late  Colonel  Trimble, 
United  States  Senator  from  the  State  of  Ohio,  —  a  gentleman  of  the  most  elevated 
views  and  feelings,  who  felt  a  great  interest  in  the  condition  and  future  prospects  of  the 
Indian  tribes,  and  who  intended  to  use  his  official  influence  in  pro^wsing  some  plan  for 
their  improvement.  For  the  purpose  of  the  better  learning  their  condition,  he  visited 
the  scenes  of  their  principal  residence,  in  the  area  of  the  Lakes,  in  the  year  1821,  and 
extended  his  visit  to  the  SauU,  or  Falls  of  St.  Mary's,  at  the  foot  of  Lake  Superior. 

The  writer  of  the  sketches  had  become  intimately  acquainted  with  their  manners  and 
customs,  condition,  and  languages,  having  allied  himself  to  the  daughter  of  one  of  their 
most  influential  chiefs,  and  resided  a  great  many  years  among  them,  at  that  remote 
point.  His  knowledge  of  their  condition  was  founded  wholly  on  the  basis  of  actual 
observation  and  experience,  and  his  judgment  upon  the  points  he  brings  into  discussion 
is  unimpeachable.  He  does  not  take  too  severe  a  view  of  the  evils  of  intoxication,  as 
existing  at  the  actual  points  on  the  frontiers,  where  the  civilized  and  savage  state  come 
into  immediate  contact,  nor  of  the  evil  tendencies  of  the  Canadian  and  mixed  blood 
population,  who  are  without  the  restraining  influences  of  law  and  religion. 

With  all  this  advantage  of  observation,  the  remedy  which  he  holds  out,  namely, 
"missions  and  schools,"  recommends  itself  to  the  judgment  of  all  judicious  observers; 
and  the  suggestion  he  makes  of  appealing  to  the  jiopular  election  of  chiefs,  with  the  view 
of  setting  up  the  framework  of  a  native  government,  under  the  tutelage  and  protection 
of  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States,  denotes  that  he  had  contemplated  the  problem 
of  the  deep  evils  and  anarchy  of  the  savage  state  and  its  remedy,  with  the  eye  of  an 
enlightened  philanthropist.  H.  R.  S. 


Letter   I. 

St.  Maiija  Falls,  Jan.  24,  1822. 

Sib: — As  you  did  me  the  honor  of  desiring  I  should  write  to  you  on  the  subject  of 
Indian  amelioration,  I  sit  down  with  pleasure  to  obey  your  commands,  though  not 
without  hesitation,  from  a  sense  of  my  inability  to  throw  any  new  light  on  a  subject 
you  have  already  so  thoroughly  investigated.     From  my  long  residence  in  this  place, 


FUTURK    PROSPECT; 


523 


I  have  acquired  some  knowledge  of  Indian  life  and  m,..iners,  their  habits  and  pro- 
pensities, and  their  susceptibility  to  improvement  and  instruction.  Within  these 
thirty  years,  there  has  been  a  great  falling  ofl'  in  the  industry,  integrity,  and  hospi- 
tality of  the  Indians,  which  I  impute  chiefly  to  the  facility  with  Avhich  they  procure 
the  means  of  intoxication.  After  spending  four  or  five  months  in  one  continued  scene 
of  the  most  brutal  excess,  they  become  so  enervated  as  not  to  be  able  to  pursue  their 
winter  avocations  of  hunting  and  fishing,  so  that  many  of  them  die  from  disease  and 
want,  and  many  more  in  the  midst  of  their  revels.  And  yet  so  inveterate  is  the 
propensity,  that  neither  the  prosjjcct  of  starvation,  nor  the  example  of  the  numerous 
deaths  that  take  place  every  summer,  can  in  the  least  deter  them.  So  far  from  it, 
they  make  the  death  of  their  friends  an  excuse  for  plunging  deeper  into  crime.  There- 
fore I  deem  it  impossible  to  reclaim  them  unless  every  species  of  spirituous  liquor  is 
completely  shut  out  from  them,  both  by  your  goveruTnent  and  ours,  and  that  so 
ofTectually  that  no  evasion  can  take  place,  iior  no  subterfuge  screen  the  transgressors 
of  the  law  from  infamy. 

The  late  Earl  of  Selkirk  put  a  istring  of  questions  to  nie,  when  in  London  in  1810, 
nearly  similar  to  those  you  did  me  the  honor  of  making  last  September,  and  I 
remember  having  answered  his  Lordship  nearly  in  the  same  manner  I  am  now  doing. 
But  unfortunately  for  the  cause  of  huma.ity,  the  interest  of  the  then  North-we.st 
Company  prevailed,  and  the  measure  was  given  up. 

If  now  that  the  most  friendly  understanding  has  taken  place  between  the  British 
government  and  that  of  the  United  States,  they  were  jointly  to  enact  laws  to  the 
utter  exclusion  of  spirituous  liquors  from  these  outskirts  of  their  dominions,  and  unite 
in  establishing  missions  and  .schools  along  a  line  that  must  ever  remain  in  some  degree 
indefinite,  from  the  nature  of  the  country-  and  the  impossibility  of  fixing  the  Indians 
to  any  given  spot  on  a  territory  they  so  naturally  and  justly  think  all  their  own,  I 
have  the  presumption  to  think  it  would  redound  to  the  interest  and  honor  of  both 
nations,  and  would  Ijc  less  than  the  dust  in  the  balance  compared  to  the  expense  of 
disputing  the  right  or  even  drawing  the  lines  through  a  barren  wilderness  and  inhos- 
pitable clime. 

The  Indians,  when  young,  are  gay,  sprightly,  and  acute,  and  are  perfectly  capable 
of  being  instructed,  and  consequently  improved;  and  their  parents,  whose  natural 
affections  are  now  sometimes  drowned  in  the  stupor  of  brutifying  excess,  would  soon 
be  taught  to  exult  in  the  elevation  of  their  offspring,  from  the  misery  and  helplessness 
of  the  savage  state  (as  it  now  is)  to  that  of  civilized  man. 

But  when  once  enlightened  by  the  fiiintcst  ray  from  the  fountain  of  light,  truth  and 
love,  what  would  be  their  raptures  in  contemplating  that  happiness  here,  and  the 
assurance  of  its  continuance  and  increase  to  all  eternity? 

The  beaver  and  other  furred  animals  are  no  longer  so  numerous  in  this  country  as 
to  furnish  the  Indians  the  necessaries  of  life ;  but  were  they  even  partially  to  cultivate 


624 


FUTURE  PROSPECTS. 


the  spots  of  land  capable  of  it,  habits  of  industrj'  and  frugality  would,  (when  once 
established,)  ensure  their  continuance,  from  their  good  effects ;  nor  are  they  so  stupid 
as  not  to  appreciate  the  comforts  of  life,  when  once  instructed  in  the  means  of  obtaining 
them. 

The  Canadians  and  half-bloods  all  over  the  country  are  very  numerous,  and  from 
want  of  instruction  are,  if  possible,  more  the  slaves  of  sensuality  than  the  Indians 
themselves.  In  fact  they  know  not  what  is  meant  by  morality  or  religion,  and  from 
the  idea  that  they  are  good  Catholics,  would  make  the  task  of  reforming  thorn  arduous 
indeed,  for  the  prejudices  attendant  on  ignorance  are  ever  the  most  difficult  to  be 
conquered. 

In  case  you  follow  up  the  truly  judicious  and  humane  plan  you  were  so  good  as  to 
sketch  to  me  last  Autumn,  I  beg  leave  to  offer  every  assistance  in  my  jiowor,  and  as 
the  first  object  of  a  missionary  must  be  the  acquirement  of  the  language,  I  can  promise 
for  my  wife  and  children,  that  they  will  cheerfully  facilitate  his  efforts  to  the  utmost 
of  their  abilities. 

I  received  from  his  excellency,  Governor  Cass,  a  printed  list  of  queries  respecting 
the  Indians,  which  I  regret  much  not  having  yet  been  able  to  answer,  owing  to  the 
deplorable  ill  state  of  my  eldest  daughter's  health,  as  on  her  perfect  knowledge  of  the 
language  I  must  chiefly  rely  for  correct  information. 

My  family  are  deeply  interested  in  your  success,  and  join  me  in  sincere  good  wishes 
for  your  health  and  happiness,  whilst  I  have  the  honor  to  remain, 

Most  respectfully. 

Your  very  humble  and  obedient  servant. 

John  Jounston. 

Letter  II. 

St.  Mary'8  Rilh,  Feb.  3(/,  1822. 

Sir  :  —  The  more  I  reflect  on  the  present  state  of  the  Indian  population  of  this 
country,  the  more  am  I  convinced,  that  as  long  as  they  remain  in  their  present 
uncivilized  and  insubordinate  condition,  it  will  be  a  M-ork  of  groat  difficulty  and  labor 
to  excite  any  number  of  them  to  listen  to  the  truths  of  the  gospel,  or  become  so  far 
stationary  as  to  cultivate  the  soil  to  any  substantial  purpose  or  effect.  I  therefore 
moat  humbly  submit  to  those  who  have  the  jiower  and  inclination  to  assist  them,  and 
the  information  and  knowledge  requisite  to  legislate  in  an  affair  of  such  extreme 
delicacy,  and  where  the  greatest  prudence  and  precaution  must  be  taken,  not  to  appear 
to  infringe  on  their  natural  rights ;  that  a  council  should  be  held  in  the  summer,  when 
the  assembled  tribe  is  the  most  numerous,  and  every  means  of  persuasion  employed 
to  induce  them  to  freely  elect  a  chief  or  civil  magistrate,  to  whom  the  now  nominal 
chiefs  would  be  subonlinate,  and  who,  holding  his  power  from  the  general  suffrage, 
could  neither  be  opposed  or  displaced,  but  by  the  power  of  those  by  whom  he  was 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


525 


nominated :  that  a  few  clear  and  explicit  rules  should  he  laid  down  for  their  civil 
polity,  in  their  new  and  emancipated  state,  and  whenever  their  ancient  manners  or 
customs  are  found  to  have  a  pure  moral  for  their  base,  that  they  should  be  incorpo- 
rated into  the  new  code,  as  far  as  practicable,  which  Avould  be  a  strong  inducement 
to  their  adoption  of  the  constitution  contemplated :  the  United  States  to  confer  honors 
and  rewards  on  the  magistrate,  as  holding  his  rank  and  power  under  their  guarantee 
and  protection,  and  according  to  his  firmness  and  integrity  in  office ;  also  aiTording 
him  the  means  of  rewarding  the  minor  chiefs  or  head-men,  according  to  merit. 

Could  this  plan  be  even  partially  accomplished,  we  might  look  fonvard  with  hope 
and  confidence  that  finally  the  religion  of  truth,  order,  and  peace,  would  be  adopted, 
and  its  promoters  receive  the  sweet  consolation  of  having,  by  Divine  permission, 
conferred  the  greatest  gift  that  heaven  has,  as  yet,  bestowed  on  mortals,  or  that  man 
can  grant  his  fellow-man  —  civil  and  religious  liberty. 

I  trust  this  farther  intrusion  on  your  time  and  patience  will  find  excuse  in  the 
motive ;  for,  though  the  scheme  should  be  considered  as  altogether  Utopian,  my  ardent 
wishes  for  the  improvement  and  happiness  of  the  Indians  must  ever  be  the  same :  and 
my  hoiie  that,  through  the  medium  of  religion  and  humanity,  the  bands  of  confidence 
and  friendship  might  be  every  day  drawn  closer  between  two  nations  so  worthy  of 
taking  the  lead  in  every  thing  that  is  great  and  good. 

I  have  the  honor  to  remain  your  very  humble  and  obedient  ser^■ant, 

John  Jounston. 


3.  MORAL  QUESTIONS  RELATIVE  TO  PRACTICAL  PLANS 
FOR  EDUCATING  AND  CIVILIZING  THE  ABORI- 
GINES. 

BY  REV.    D.    LOWRT. 

Winnebago  School,  Feb.  15//t,  1848. 

Sir  :  —  You  have  herewith  a  partial  reply  to  ^-our  call  in  July  last  for  information 
respecting  the  aborigines  of  our  country.  I  shall  continue  my  remarks  on  other 
questions  propounded  as  the  claims  of  other  duties  will  permit,  and  transmit  them 
from  time  to  time. 

I  regret  that  this  communication  has  been  delayed  so  long,  but  my  daily  duties  in 
school,  in  connection  with  the  labor  of  preparing  to  preach  every  Sabbath,  covers 
nearly  the  whole  of  my  time. 

Most  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

D.  LowRT. 

Indian    Trade. 

95.  That  our  commerce  with  the  Indian  tribes  has  at  least  in  some  degree  tended 
to  promote  the  cause  of  improvement,  is  unquestionable ;  for  through  this  medium 
chiefly  have  they  become  acquainted  with  and  attached  to  many  of  those  articles 
consumed  by  the  whites  as  necessaries  of  life,  which  are  at  first  to  the  Indian  luxuries 
which  he  is  enabled  with  his  surplus  skins  or  money  to  purchase,  and  his  attention  is 
readily  drawn  to  the  habits  which  procure  those  luxuries  in  abundance.  And  the 
more  of  the  articles  of  food,  clothing,  &c.,  consumed  by  the  whites  we  can  introduce 
among  the  Indians,  excepting  of  course  those  whose  tendency  is  debasing,  the  more 
readily  can  we  convince  them  of  the  propriety  and  benefit  of  a  corresponding  change 
in  their  habits. 

That  a  well-regulated  commerce  has  this  effect  cannot  be  doubted ;  and  though  our 
trade  with  them  may  and  does  throw  obstacles  in  the  way  of  Indian  civilization  in 
some  instances,  yet  these  counteracting  influences  can  be  easily  removed,  and  our 
government  is  doing  much  at  this  moment  to  obliterate  them. 

The  trade  for  the  skins  and  furs  is  very  simple  in  its  operation.     The  Indian  takes 

(526) 


iiH.TJJ.|i|lg"^^g( 


FUTURE    rilOSPECTS. 


527 


hin  pack  after  returninf;  from  a  hunt  to  the  trader  with  whom  he  is  accustomed  to 
deal,  and  is  paid  for  them  in  goods  or  credited  on  account,  if  he  sliould  owe  a  debt  to 
his  trader,  at  their  value  in  the  fur-market,  less  say  fifteen  per  cent.,  the  expense  of 
taking  them  to  the  market. 

As  a  general  thing,  the  only  criterion  of  the  present  value  of  furs  is  the  latest 
intelligence  he  may  have  received  of  a  sale  in  London,  where  furs  are  offered  for  sale 
on  a  certain  day  in  each  month,  or  jierhaps  not  so  often ;  for  the  value  of  furs  is 
seldom  affected  except  on  one  or  two  articles,  by  the  consumption  in  this  country. 
The  markets  of  New  York,  Philadelphia,  &c.,  can  be  supplied  by  the  skin-traders  in 
the  Eastern  States,  so  that  the  Indian  trader  has  to  depend  upon  selling  his  furs  for 
the  most  part  in  London ;  and  there  the  sale  of  skins  is  controlled  by  a  monopoly,  so 
that  the  business  is  at  l)est  a  precarious  one. 

One  year  the  trader  who  has  a  large  amoinit  of  furs  ma}'  realize  ton  thousand  dollars 
beyond  his  expectation,  and  the  next  year  lose  that  amount,  according  as  their  value 
may  have  in  the  spring,  when  he  gets  them  to  market,  advanced  beyond  or  depreciated 
below  the  rates  indicated  by  the  sales  in  the  fall  previous. 

The  principal  trading-posts  with  the  Winnebagoes  are  near  their  sub-agency  on  the 
neutral  ground.  As  to  the  chances  of  profit  or  loss,  judging  from  the  number  who 
enter  and  leave  the  trade  every  year,  we  may  f\iirly  infer  that  it  is  not  of  late  years 
as  profitable  as  it  may  have  been  formerly.  This  change  has  been  brought  about  by  a 
variety  of  causes,  but  they  are  chiefly  to  be  found  in  the  confirmed  habits  of  drinking 
among  the  Indians,  in  consequence  of  which  they  do  not  pursue  their  hunts  with  their 
former  industry,  and  are  less  scrupulous  about  paying  their  debts.  The  whiskey-dealer 
on  the  line  reaps  a  rich  harvest  from  their  improvidence  and  dissipation;  but  the 
licenced  trade  in  the  interior  of  their  country  is  far  less  profitable  than  formerly. 


96.  The  Indians  are  shrewd  close  traders,  so  far  as  a  comparison  of  prices  is 
concerned.  For  instance,  they  will  dispute  about  the  price  of  an  article,  while  at  the 
same  time  they  will  purchase  five  times  as  much  as  they  can  make  use  of,  or  need. 
They  would  be  generally  honest  and  prompt  in  paying  their  debts  but  for  the  excesses 
they  are  tempted  to  run  into  by  their  wasteful  and  intemperate  habits,  and  a  too 
numerous  competition  in  the  trade.  An  Indian  gets  a  credit  of  hi.s  trader,  and  goes 
to  his  hunt  or  field,  and  at  his  return  to  the  agency,  especially  about  the  time  of  the 
annuity  payments,  he  meets  some  ten  or  twenty  now  traders,  all  flattering  the 
Indian,  and  giving  him  unlimited  amounts  of  credit.  The  Indian  know  s  that  these 
men  do  not  intend  to  remain  (at  any  rate  a  large  majority  of  them)  during  the  year, 
takes  the  goods  that  ai'e  so  temptingly  and  urgently  offered  him  on  credit,  often  to  a 
much  larger  amount  than  that  of  their  hunts  and  annuities  combined,  and  conse- 
quently must  cheat.  Some  of  his  creditors,  and  it  is  almost  uniformly  those  upon 
whom  he  expects  to  draw  for  favors  in  future,  may  be  paid,  and  the  new  trade  is 


528 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


\ 


neglected.  This  state  of  things  renders  the  trade  so  precarious,  that  the  Indians 
themselves  are  often  the  sufferers,  being  unable  to  get  trusted  for  supplies  when  they 
are  in  times  of  the  greatest  need. 

The  Indians  waste  their  skins  and  money,  when  they  liave  them  in  their  possession, 
buying  articles  that  are  useless  or  worse,  until  they  are  all  gone,  and  are  often,  two 
days  after  an  annuity-payment,  as  entirely  destitute  of  the  means  of  living  through 
the  year  as  they  were  previous  to  the  payment. 

A  prudent  trader,  even  when  he  is  certain  of  meeting  no  obstacle  in  collecting,  will 
not  credit  an  Indian  for  an  article  which  he  haa  reason  to  believe  will  be  of  no  service 
to  him  or  that  he  does  not  need.  A  whiskey-trader  on  the  line  never  trusts  an  Indian 
for  a  pint  of  whiskey,  and  licensed  traders  in  their  country  do  not  trust  them  for 
trinkets  or  wampum,  unless  for  some  extraordinary  or  ceremonial  occasion. 

In  view  of  the  above  facts,  it  is  inferred  that  a  system  of  trade  that  would  protect  a 
sufficient  amount  of  trading-capital  for  the  district  to  secure  to  the  Indians  a 
certainty  of  assistance  in  time  of  want,  at  a  fair  profit,  would  be  most  beneficial. 

The  Indian  trade,  it  may  be  urged,  will,  like  any  other,  correct  its  own  evils.  It 
will  do  so,  so  far  as  the  traders  are  concerned,  but  without  reference  to  the  good  of  the 
Indians.  The  trade  will  be  reduced  to  a  cash  one  entirely,  and  the  Indians,  tempted 
by  the  cheapness  of  goods  resulting  from  a  numerous  comi)etition  and  urged  by  their 
o\<nfi  notorious  improvidence,  will  squander  their  money  for  ornaments  or  whiskey,  and 
suffer  for  the  remainder  of  the  year.  The  traders  withdraw  their  capital  into  other 
branches  of  business,  until  another  annuity-payment  rolls  round,  or  if  one  or  two 
remain  with  the  Indians,  they  are  deterred  from  assisting  them  in  time  of  want ;  and 
the  consequence  is  that  many  of  them  beg,  starve,  and  steal,  through  the  winter. 

The  Indian  trade,  it  is  true,  is  less  expensive  and  more  safe,  carried  on  in  this  way, 
than  any  other ;  but  is  far  less  beneficial  to  the  Indians  than  it  might  be  rendered. 


98.  The  trader  who  lives  permanently  near  the  Indians  is  taxed  heavily  for  objects 
of  charity.  When  an  Indian  dies,  who  has  dealt  principally  at  his  house,  he  is 
expected  to  furnish  a  shroud,  and  often  the  goods  or  a  portion  of  them  for  the  funeral 
ceremony. 

100.  The  different  races  of  animals,  of  course,  are  diminished  by  the  hunter.  In 
the  Winnebago  country,  the  beaver  is  found  nearer  civilized  habitations  than  the 
buffalo,  though  they  are  not  far  apart,  and  it  is  believed  that  this  is  the  case 
elsewhere. 

101.  Indian  lands,  when  stripped  of  their  furs,  are  of  course  of  little  value  to  the 
Indians  so  long  as  they  remain  in  the  savage  state ;  but  in  connexion  with  this  subject 
arises  the  question  as  to  their  ultimate  destruction  —  for  it  is  evident  that  in  a  few 


B      ■> 


FUTURE  PROSPECTS. 


629 


years  they  will  exhaust  the  country  of  game,  and  in  less  than  ten  years  there  will  not 
ramain  unoccupied  country  between  the  two  oc  i  sufficient  to  subsist  our  present 
Indian  population ;  and  they  must  before  that  time  adopt  the  habits  of  the  civilized  man 
or  perish.  It  is,  of  course,  too  late  now  to  correct  the  error,  if  one  has  been  committed 
by  our  government,  inasmuch  as  the  Indians  are  all  now  moved  west  of  the  Mississippi 
river,  and  will  soon  meet  the  tide  rolling  eastward  from  the  Pacific. 

That  oftrrepeated  and  gloomy  prophecy,  that  they  are  a  doomed  people,  will  be 
fulfilled,  or  they  must  be  civilized.  Then  do  we  not  hasten  their  supposed  destiny  by 
driving  them  from  the  heart  of  civilization,  and  keeping  them  upon  the  frontier. 
The  philanthropist  and  missionary  find,  in  this  system  of  continually  changing  the 
location  of  the  Indians  from  year  to  year  as  our  frontier  advances  westward,  obstacles 
insurmountable  to  human  efforts. 

The  temptation  to  the  Indian,  even  if  he  should  have  made  some  progress  in 
improvement,  and  been  "almost  pcrattaded"  to  be  a  civilized  man,  af*er  his  old  location 
had  failed  to  afford  him  subsistence  by  the  chase  —  at  his  new  home  universally 
abandons  his  semi-formed  habits,  and  yields  to  the  temptation  offered  by  a  fresh 
hunting-country  to  return  to  a  hunter's  life.  And  the  missionary  or  agent  of  the 
government  not  only  loses  the  assistance  given  him  in  his  benevolent  and  arduous 
task,  by  the  example  of  that  good  order  which  reigns  in  the  older  settlements, 
resulting  from  the  operation  of  wholesome  laws,  but  the  dark  mind  of  his  pupil  is 
brought  in  contact  with,  and  under  the  mighty  influence  of  all  the  vice  and  depravity 
of  that  filthy  scum  of  civilization  which  everywhere  floats  upon  its  border.  Dis. 
heartening  and  hopeless  is  his  task,  so  long  as  we  keep  the  Indians  moving  —  place 
them  beyond  this  influence  as  far  as  we  will,  and  like  hungry  wolves  upon  the  path 
of  the  wearied  fawn,  it  will  follow  them  up. 

In  keeping  the  Indians  continually  in  a  new  country,  we  do  but  perpetuate  their 
savage  habits  and  hasten  their  doom,  by  rendering  them  an  easy  prey  to  the  avarice 
and  cupidity  of  a  pack  of  rapacious  wolves,  who,  unfit  to  live  in  orderly 
communities,  and  outcasts  from  every  society  where  law  is  known,  hover  upon  the 
Indian  line. 

Facts  are  believed  to  be  the  most  reliable  arguments  on  this  point,  and  they  exhibit 
to  us  examples  of  the  best  farmers  in  the  State  of  New  York,  among  the  Indian  tribes 
Avho  have  been  suffered  to  remain  at  their  old  homes,  while  the  corrupting,  and  to  the 
red  man  especially,  destructive  vices  of  the  frontier  floated  out  beyond  them;  and 
uniformly,  where  the  efforts  to  civilize  Indians  have  been  successful,  they  have  been 
surrounded  and  aided  by  the  influence  and  example  of  Bible  and  law  observing 
communities. 

Habits  rooted  for  centuries,  and  environed  by  that  iron  wall  of  darkness  and 
superstition,  cannot  be  changed,  except  by  necessity.     Mere  instruction  or  argument 
will  never  demolish  it.    Necessity  must  do  it.     Keep  the  Indians  then  on  their  old 
Pt.  II.— 67 


580 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


worn-out  liiinting-groundH  —  surround  them  by  scttlemontH,  and  wo  fumiHii  pliiliin- 
thmpy  with  this  great  lever:  the  savage  hunter  is  forced  to  become  a  tiller  of  the  soil, 
and  the  Avay  is  opened  to  the  introduction  of  the  arts  and  sciences.  The  benign 
influences  of  Christianity  are  brought  to  bear  upon  him,  and  the  superstitious  savage 
becomes  an  enlightened  man  and  a  Christian. 

But,  as  remarked  above,  the  Indians  who  still  retain  their  wild  habits,  are  oil 
removed  west  of  the  Mississippi,  and  all  that  remains  for  our  government  to  do,  is  now 
being  done.  The  withering  influence  that  keeps  pace  with  the  border  line,  nnint  Ixi 
counteracted  and  restrained  hy  the  presence  of  energetic  laws. 

That  foe  to  which  the  Indian  so  soon  capitulates,  must  be  conquered  and  driven 
from  their  country,  and  the  red  man's  doom  may  yet  be  averted,  and  he  take  a 
position  with  intelligent  beings,  assigned  by  heaven. 

104.  The  moral  and  physical  evils  resulting  from  the  trade  with  the  Indians,  which 
is  sanctioned  by  our  present  laws,  have  been  referred  to  in  the  answer  to  (95.)  The 
evils  of  the  whiskey  trade  are  notorious,  and  are  incalculable.  Every  other  obstacU^  to 
Indian  improvement  is  in  some  manner  connected  with  this  one,  and  it  is  indec  d  the 
most  potent  and  effectual  instrument  of  woe  and  destruction  that  diabolical  ingenuity 
could  invent.  The  physical  evils  flowing  from  the  licensed  trade,  as  it  has  been 
permitted  heretofore,  are  to  be  found,  for  the  most  part,  in  the  suffering  and  want 
produced  by  the  encouragement  which  it  gives  to  the  prodigality  and  improvidence  of 
the  savage,  who,  not  able  to  spend  his  money  when  he  is  in  need,  is  tempted  to 
squander  the  whole  of  it  within  twenty-four  hours  afler  its  reception  upon  toys  and 
useless  trinkets.  The  risk  is  too  great  for  the  trader  to  trust  hii.i  for  goods  or  provi- 
sions when  he  needs  them,  and  he  and  his  family  must  starve  or  steal,  while  he  has 
ample  means  coming  to  him  from  the  government,  if  they  could  be  judiciously  antici- 
pated by  him,  to  subsist  and  clothe  them  comfortably  through  the  year.  And  to  this 
cause  —  want  —  may  be  referred  a  large  majority  of  the  depredations  upon  the  stock 
of  the  frontier  farms,  of  which  complaints  are  every  year  made  to  the  government. 

It  is  believed  that  the  introduction  of  gunpowder  and  fire-arms  among  the  Indiana 
has  produced  the  same  result  that  it  has  been  found  to  produce  upon  civilized  warfare, 
rendering  it  less  frequent  and  bloody. 

It  is  not  known  that  any  definite  influence  upon  their  civilization  can  be  traced  to 
its  introduction. 

"  Finally,  can  this  trade  be  placed  upon  better  principles,  and  what  are  they  ?" 

It  may  appear  presumptuous  to  suggest  an  entire  change  in  the  laws  which  have 
been  adopted  for  the  government  of  the  Indian  trade.  But  the  errors  which  have 
crept  into  those  laws  are  such  os  time  and  experience  alone  could  point  out,  and  it  is 
impossible  for  the  Avisest  legislation  to  foresee  the  effects  that  may  result  among  a 
people  so  little  understood  from  a  law  good  in  its  operation  upon  society  elsewhere. 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


It  is  intended,  no  doubt,  in  posting  laws  for  the  protection  ol"  th  nornnt  sfl^  itfc, 
and  for  the  regulation  of  our  Indian  trade  and  intercourse,  to  e.\t  •  all  iiiiHgi.|H»r 
persons  from  any  connexion  with  tiio  Indians;  and  that  the  iieraous  cnrrving  <»»«  the 
trade,  as  well  as  the  manner  in  which  it  is  conducted,  should,  so  far  as  practicable,  be 
rendered  auxiliary  to  the  cause  of  civilization  and  moral  improvement.  The  errors  in 
the  present  system  have  been  attended  to  above,  and  it  has  been  shown  that  it  fails  to 
render  that  assistance  to  the  Indians  which  might  be  rendered. 

To  suffer  the  Indians  to  anticipate  their  annuities  upon  the  national  (tribal)  credit, 
without  any  check  upon  either  the  trader  or  the  Indians,  has  been  found  to  oik'u  wide 
the  door  to  fraud  and  corruption,  and  it  has  been  very  properly  prohibited  by  law. 

The  Indians,  having  no  accountant  themselves,  may  Ix)  imjxised  upon  as  to  the 
amount  of  their  debt ;  and  even  if  the  chiefs  were  aware  of  the  fraud,  they  may  lie 
induced  in  many  instances  to  become  parties  in  the  imposition  upon  their  own  people. 
Though  the  Indians  were  by  this  system  often  enabled  to  supply  their  wants  in 
anticipation  of  their  coming  annuities,  and  thus  have  less  money  to  spend  for  whiskey, 
the  system  was  a  bad  one,  and  it  needed  correction. 

The  alternative  mlopted  has  been  to  distribute  the  annuity  pro  rata  to  individuals 
or  families,  paying  no  regard  to  any  debts  that  may  have  been  incurred  or  obligations 
entered  into  by  the  chiefs  of  the  tribe ;  and  it  is  confidently  believed  that  this  system 
may  be  so  modified  as  to  make  the  annuities  from  the  government  comfortably  clothe 
and  feed  the  Indians  through  the  year,  and  render  them  as  efficient  an  instrument  of 
happiness  and  improvement  as  the  misuse  now  made  of  them  is  the  cause  of  woe  and 
degradation  and  destruction. 

A  modification  of  the  present  Indian  regulations,  something  like  the  following,  is 
suggested  by  many  years'  observation  and  intimate  connexion  with  the  Indians  of 
the  north :  — 

The  agents  or  sub-agents  should  nominate  to  the  Indian  Department  such  persons 
of  unexceptionable  moral  character  as  may  apply  for  license  to  trade  with  the  Indians, 
until  a  sufficient  number  are  licensed  to  satisfy  the  wants  of  the  trade,  with  sufficient 
capital  to  carry  it  on  and  iio  more. 

It  should  be  made  the  duty  of  each  person  to  whom  license  is  granted  to  do  every 
thing  in  his  power  to  forward  the  efforts  making  by  the  government  to  civilize  the 
Indians,  and  likewise  to  use  every  effort  to  prevent  the  introduction  or  traffic  in  ardent 
spirits  in  tlie  tribe. 

Each  trader  should  receive  his  license  to  trade  at  such  points  in  the  tribe  or  tribes, 
within  the  agency  or  sub-agency,  as  the  agent  or  sub-agent  should  designate,  upon 
condition  of  his  paying  five  hundred  dollars,  which  sum  should  go  to  constitute  a 
national  contingent  fund  for  the  benefit  of  the  tribe  or  tribes  included  in  the  agency  or 
sub-agency. 

In  addition  to  paying  the  sum  above  mentioned,  the  applicant  for  license  should  bo 


:     \ 


Mi 


FUTURE   PROSPECTS. 


n>quired  to  give  bond,  an  heretofore,  with  security  approved  by  the  judge  of  the  district 
where  he  may  have  resided.  And  any  act  in  violation  of  the  regulations  of  the  Indian 
Department,  or  in  any  manner  directly  or  indirectly  opposing  the  efforts  to  civilize  the 
Indians  and  promote  the  cause  of  education  among  them,  should  subject  him  to  a 
forfeiture  of  license  and  a  penalty  of  two  thousand  dollars ;  and  any  oct  of  this  nature, 
by  agent  or  employee,  or  of  any  other  person,  by  direction  of  a  trader,  should  subject 
him  to  the  same  consequences  as  though  the  act  were  done  by  liimself. 

The  agent  or  sub-agent  should  be  required  to  take  a  correct  roll  of  the  Indians 
within  his  agency  or  sub-agency  at  the  commencement  of  their  fiscal  year,  getting  the 
names  of  the  heads  as  well  as  the  number  of  each  family,  so  as  to  ascertain  the  precise 
distributive  share  of  each  individual  of  the  money  due  the  tribe  from  the  government 
at  the  next  payment. 

The  agent  or  sub-agent,  either  alone  or  in  connexion  with  two  of  the  army-officers 
of  the  nearest  military  post,  who  may  be  detailed  for  this  object  by  the  commanding 
officer,  should  form  a  council  to  examine  the  traders'  invoices,  and  fix  upon  them  a 
tariff  of  prices  at  which  the  goods  should  be  sold  to  the  Indians.  A  copy  and  list  of 
prices  should  be  kept  by  the  agent,  and  a  copy  given  by  him  to  the  traders ;  and  any 
violation  of  said  tariff  should  subject  the  trader  to  a  forfeiture  of  his  license  upon 
conviction  before  the  authority  empowered  to  revoke  licenses. 

It  should  be  the  duty  of  the  agent,  when  an  Indian  needs  any  article,  to  give  him 
an  order  which  should  be  payable,  by  either  of  the  traders  to  whom  the  Indian  should 
choose  to  take  it,  in  the  article  or  articles  specified ;  and  the  agent  or  sub-agent  should 
by  no  means  be  authorized  to  give  an  Indian  or  family  such  orders  to  an  amount 
exceeding  that  of  the  distributive  share  belonging  to  him  or  them  of  the  annuities  due 
from  the  government  at  the  first  ensuing  payment,  aa  shown  on  the  roll. 

The  agent  or  sub-agent  should  keep  a  correct  account  with  the  individual  Indians 
or  heads  of  families  of  the  orders  thus  given,  so  that  he  may  be  able  to  tell,  at  any 
time,  how  much  of  his  annuity  each  may  have  taken  up  in  this  way. 

The  traders  shall  be  required  to  fill  such  orders  of  the  agent  or  sub-agent  when 
presented  by  the  Indiana  in  favor  of  whom  they  may  he  dratcn,  and  keep  an  accurate 
account  of  their  own,  corresponding  with  the  one  kept  by  the  agent ;  and  upon  his 
presenting  these  orders  at  the  annuity  payment,  they  shall  be  paid  by  the  Indian 
disbursing  officer  out  of  the  amounts  due  the  several  Indians  from  the  government, 
and  the  balance  shall  be  paid  to  the  Indians  severally  in  hand,  provided  that  the 
agent  or  sub-agent  shall  by  no  means  cancel  these  orders  when  presented  by  any  one 
other  than  a  licensed  trader  within  his  agency  or  sub-agency. 

The  agent  or  sub-agent  shall  be  permitted  to  select  and  appoint  a  person  suitable  for 
a  clerk,  to  assist  him  in  keeping  the  Indian  accounts,  who  should  be  paid  $600  out  of 
the  national  contingent  fund  provided  as  above. 

The  balance  of  said  contingent  fund  should  be  applicable  to  any  national  purpose 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


683 


(losirod  by  the  cliicfn  and  approved  of  by  the  ngciit  of  tbo  triln',  and  the  bulanoe  that 
iiii^'lit  ri'inuiii  on  band  at  the  end  of  tlie  year  should  be  added  to  the  education  funda 
for  the  tribe. 

The  objectH  which  it  itt  confidently  lK>Iicvcd  would  be  attained  by  a  change  in  the 
Indian  laws  in  unison  with  the  alxivo  HUggcstions,  are  the  following:  — 

The  Indians  woid<l  lje  amply  provided  for,  both  in  food  and  clothing,  throughout  the 
year,  and,  getting  their  supplies  at  times  when  they  need  them,  would  not  be  apt  to 
diH|M)sc  of  them  for  whiskey,  and  having  used  up  their  annuities,  would  have  but  little 
money  to  siwnd  in  this  way.  The  whiskey-traders,  getting  no  money  in  exchange  for 
their  liquor,  would  be  compelled,  in  a  great  measure,  to  almndon  the  business,  for  they 
could  not  even  buy  their  old  blankets  and  trinkets  with  the  prospect  of  turning  them 
back  again  upon  the  Indians  for  cash. 

At  present,  a  large  business  is  carried  on  in  this  way.  When  the  Indian  has  no 
money,  ho  leaves  a  blanket  or  other  article,  to  three  or  four  times  the  amount  of  the 
whiskey,  until  he  can  bring  the  money,  and  redeem  it  after  tlic  annuity  payment. 

The  temptation  to  commit  depredations  ufxin  the  settlements  will  be  removed  in 
proportion  as  the  wants  of  the  Indians  arc  supplied,  and  thus  a  fruitful  cause  of 
dilTiculties  ujwn  the  frontier  will  be  removed. 

The  Indians,  no  longer  goaded  by  hunger  to  pursue  the  deer  for  subsistence,  will 
gradually  abandon  their  roving  habits,  and  settle  down  in  permanent  villages  near 
their  agency,  where  the  efforts  to  improve  them  can  be  more  effectually  employed ;  and 
that  very  prodigality  and  thoughtlessness  of  the  futvire  may  be  so  guarded  by  this 
system  as  to  induce  them  to  purchase  agricultural  implements  and  household  furniture 
as  they  may  happen  to  need  these  articles  during  the  year :  for  it  is  known,  to  any  one 
acquainted  with  the  trade,  that  an  Indian  will  purchase  anything  that  may  serve  his 
convenience  or  pleasure  at  the  moment,  if  he  can  do  it  on  credit;  and  it  is  believed 
that,  if  the  Indians  could  anticipate  their  annuities,  ploughs,  wagons,  harnesses,  and, 
where  they  are  permanently  settled,  household  furniture,  &c.,  &c.,  would  take  the  place 
of  wampum,  beads,  and  tinsel  trinkets,  for  which  they  now  squander  their  money. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  plan  suggested  is  similar  to  the  one  in  operation  in  the 
army,  so  far  as  the  security  for  the  trader's  debts,  as  well  as  the  check  upon  hia  prices, 
are  concerned. 

There  is  no  influence  exerted  among  the  Indians  so  potent  and  universal  as  that 
wielded  by  the  Indian  traders ;  but  the  operation  of  the  plan  suggested  would  not  only 
curtail  their  number,  but  would  wrest  that  influence  from  them  by  making  the  Indians 
immediately  dependent  upon  the  government  officer  for  favors  in  time  of  need.  And 
here  lies  the  Avhole  secret  of  the  trader's  mighty  influence,  viz.,  in  his  ability  to  relieve 
the  Indian  when  he  is  in  want. 

Instead  of  the  Indians  and  traders  being  both  arrayed  against  the  government,  as 
heretofore,  we  shall  have  them  both  dependent,  the  one  for  protection,  and  the  other 


684 


FUTURE   PROSPECTS. 


for  assistance,  upon  the  government,  and  it  will  be  rendered  the  interest  of  both  to 
yield  to  its  wishes. 

It  is  believed  that  from  the  success  of  this  scheme  there  would  result  a  willingness, 
on  the  part  of  the  Indians,  to  receive  goods  in  exchange  for  lands  which  may  bo 
purchased  hereafter,  and  gradually  that  the  Indians  may  be  induced  to  change  those 
treaties  already  made,  so  as  to  receive  goods  instead  of  money.  No  argument  of  the 
government  or  its  officers  can  ever  have  the  same  weight  with  the  prejudiced  mind 
of  the  Indian  as  tangible  facts,  and  the  operation  of  the  plan  alluded  to  cannot  fail  to 
demonstrate  the  advantage  of  receiving  goods  judiciously  selected,  and  at  such  times 
as  they  are  needed. 

The  change  suggested  would  render  the  duties  of  the  agents  and  sub-agents  more 
arduous,  ))ut  it  is  believed  that  a  graduation  of  the  amounts  paid  to  them  at  present 
would  sufficiently  remunerate  them.  Under  existing  laws,  the  agents  receive  $1500 
annually,  and  the  sub-agents,  though  they  have  the  same  duties,  and,  in  some 
instances,  more,  receive  but  $750.     The  salaries  of  each  should  be  fixed  at  $1200. 

It  is  urged,  in  conclusion,  that  the  trade,  modified  as  above  suggested,  will,  it  is  most 
confidently  believed,  promote  the  happiness  of  the  Indians,  and  instead  of  distracting 
their  minds,  and  arraying  them  against  every  effort  to  Ijcnefit  or  improve  them,  that  it 
may  be  converted  into  a  most  potent  auxiliary  to  the  humane  efibrts  of  the  government 
to  elevate  their  condition. 


Present   Condition   and   Future   Prospects. 


258.  The  fact  that  our  use  of  iron,  articles  of  food,  manner  of  cooking,  wearing 
apparel,  &c.,  &c.,  have,  to  a  considerable  extent,  been  introduced  among  the  Indians 
with  whom  we  have  had  intercourse,  proves  that  their  original  manners,  customs,  and 
opinions,  "have  been  greatly  modified"  since  their  acquaintance  with  the  whites. 
These  changes  have  all  been  witnessed  among  the  Winnebagoes,  with  many  others 
equally  beneficial. 

In  efforts  to  improve  the  condition  of  the  aborigines  of  our  country  the  same  "  modes 
of  treatment  and  policy"  which  would  be  necessary  for  its  in  their  situation  should  be 
a<lopted  for  them ;  for  they  are  human  beings  like  ourselves,  and  liable  to  be  affected 
by  the  same  causes  which  operate  upon  us.  To  the  Christian  religion,  the  influence 
of  schools  and  colleges,  and  common  industry,  ice  are  indebted  for  our  national 
character :  no  other  causes  can  elevate  and  save  the  Indian.  As  to  the  l;sst  means  or 
"  policy"  for  introducing  these  blessings  among  them,  perhaps  no  one  system  would  be 
equally  successful  among  all  the  tril>e8.  My  opinion  is,  that  those  sent  either  by  the 
government  or  the  church  to  labor  for  the  benefit  of  savages,  should  have  full  liberty 
to  adopt  such  plans,  and  modify  them,  as  circumstances  and  experience  might  require. 
No  one  thinks  of  trammelling  a  general  in  command  of  an  army  with  specific  laws  to 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


535 


govern  Iiiiii  in  the  field  of  battle.  Mind  is  more  difficult  to  conquer  than  botly,  and  he 
wlio  would  mould  the  former  should,  like  the  officer  in  the  fieKl,  be  allowed  to  exerci.se 
some  discretion  as  to  the  plans  to  be  adopted.  To  elevate  the  condition  of  the  Red 
man,  our  chief  concern  is  with  miml  and  heart.  To  exert  an  influence  upon  these 
much  often  depends  upon  little  things,  and  a  thousand  opportunities  for  making  favor- 
able impressions  will  occur  which  can  never  be  anticipated  or  provided  for  by 
instructions  drawn  up  a  thousand  miles  from  the  Indian  country.  Ijet  competent 
persons  then  be  employed  to  labor  with  and  operate  ujion  the  Indians,  —  persons  of 
integrity  and  conscience,  and  having  full  liberty  to  avail  themselves  of  all  the 
advantages  which  experience  and  observation  can  affi)rd. 

Such  has  been  the  unsettled  state  of  the  Winnebagoes  since  the  commencement  of 
their  school  and  farm,  that  no  mode  of  treatment  or  policy  adopted  could  be  fairly 
tested  by  its  practical  effijctd  upon  the  nation.  Many  of  them  have  applied  for  aid 
in  building  houses  to  live  in;  but  in  view  of  their  expected  removal,  no  such 
assistance  has  been  affiirded. 

259.  No  beneficial  eflbcts,  either  "physical  or  intellectual,"  are  perceived  by  an 
"intennixture"  of  European  blood  with  the  Indian.  I  should  suppose  about  one 
eighth  of  the  Winnebagoes  possess  more  or  less  white  blood. 

2G0.  The  numerical  strength  of  this  trii)c  is  advancing,  and  has  been  since  they 
removed  across  the  Mississippi  river. 

202.  A  visible  change  in  the  cleanliness,  both  as  regards  the  "  costume "  and  person 
of  the  Winnebagoes,  has  taken  place  within  the  last  fifteen  years. 

203.  Females  still  perform  field  lal)or,  though  not  without  the  aid  of  the  men,  as 
heretofore.  The  wife  of  a  chief  observed,  not  long  since,  that  it  was  not  now  thought 
a  disgrace  for  a  man  to  work. 


204.  The  Christian  religion  exerts  but  a  feeble  infiucncc  upon  this  tribe;  indeed  it 
may  be  said  that  Christian  teachers  have  never  been  introduced  among  them  for  the 
purpose  of  preaching  the  gospel.  When  I  first  entered  their  school,  no  interpreter 
could  be  had  to  translate  religious  instruction,  and  before  any  of  the  children  learned 
the  English  language  in  the  institution,  I  was  requested  by  the  government  to  take 
charge  of  their  agency.  This  withdi-cw  me  from  the  school,  and  filled  my  hands  with 
other  business,  though  I  preached  every  sabbath  to  the  white  community  belonging 
to  the  establishment.  On  accepting  the  agency,  I  resolved  to  appoint  persons  from 
the  difierent  churches  of  the  country,  to  teach  in  the  school,  labor  on  the  farm,  and 
have  an  eye  to  the  religious  improvement  of  the  Indians.    The  object  in  selecting  from 


I  i 


j 


FUTURE  PROSPECTS. 

the  different  denominations  was  to  enlist  the  sympathies  of  each,  and  to  give 
satisfaction  to  all.  The  persons  thus  selected  were  formed  into  a  religious  association 
before  the  Indians,  called  "  The  Church  in  the  Wilderness."  Never  have  I  seen  more 
harmony  in  a  Christian  community,  and  the  deepest  solicitude  seemed  to  be  felt  for  the 
Indians.  Many  of  the  children  of  the  school  became  interested  on  the  subject  of 
religion,  and  the  prospect  of  influencing  their  tribe  was  most  encouraging.  But,  in 
the  midst  of  these  favorable  cirv;umstances,  I  was  removed  from  office,  and  an  attempt 
made  by  my  successor  to  place  the  whole  concern  on  a  sectarian  footing.  Against  this 
course  the  Indians  themselves,  connected  with  the  school,  remonstrated ;  but  the  plan 
previously  adopted  for  religious  operations  was  broken  up,  and  the  interest  on  the 
subject  of  religion  among  the  children,  passed  away. 

Since  my  return  as  superintendent  of  the  school,  I  have  not  deemed  it  expedient 
to  resume  the  organization  of  a  church,  but  have  preached  every  sabbath  to  the  white 
community  and  to  the  Indians  understanding  the  English  language,  as  they  were 
disposed  to  attend.  We  never  can  succeed,  however,  in  introducing  the  Christian 
religion  among  the  savages  without  employing  Christians  to  do  it.  I  am  aware  that 
it  is  a  delicate  matter  for  government  to  act  on  this  subject ;  and,  to  prevent  all  cause 
for  the  charge  of  partiality,  it  was  my  policy,  as  before  stated,  to  employ  professors  of 
religion  belonging  to  diffijrent  churches,  with  the  understanding,  however,  that  they 
could  associate  in  the  capacity  of  one  church  before  the  Indians.  This  policy  I  would 
earnestly  recommend  noio.  It  is  the  only  plan  that  can  be  adopted,  under  the 
auspices  of  government,  that  would  not  be  liable  to  objections  by  some  religious 
denomination.  To  place  the  school  and  farm  in  charge  of  any  one  denomination,  and 
to  exclude  the  rest,  would  give  oflence.  To  divide  the  funds  among  several  Christian 
parties,  and  suffer  them  to  go  before  the  Indians  with  their  denominational  distinctions 
and  predilections,  would  greatly  retard,  if  not  defeat,  the  object  intended.  But  form 
one  Christian  community  before  the  Indian,  drawn  from  the  different  churches,  and 
3'ou  have  the  good  feelings  of  all,  and,  at  the  same  time  exclude  those  petty  distinc- 
tions of  SECTS,  so  injurious  to  religion  among  the  whites.  I  repeat,  this  plan  is 
practicable,  for  I  have  tried  it. 

I  am  not  without  solicitude  on  this  subject.  Government  has  placed  me  among 
the  Indians  with  the  expectation  that  I  will  improve  their  morals :  this  I  cannot  do 
without  introducing  among  them  the  Christian  religion,  and  to  succeed  in  this,  I  need 
the  example  and  aid  of  all  in  the  employ  of  the  department. 

The  task  of  converting  savages  to  Christianity  is  by  no  means  an  eaay  one.  Think 
of  the  slow  progress  of  religion  among  our  own  people,  with  all  the  facilities  enjoyed ; 
yet  the  obstacles  among  us,  opposing  the  gospel,  are  not  half  so  numerous  as  among 
the  Indians,  while  the  means  of  grace  among  the  whites,  perhaps,  can  never  be  mode 
fully  to  bear  upon  the  Lidians.  To  convert  our  own  people,  we  have  only  to  overcome 
the  objections  of  a  depraved  heart  to  the  holiness  of  the  gospel ;  but  to  convert  the  red 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


537 


man,  we  must  first  convince  him  that  his  own  religion  is  false,  and  that  oura  is  true. 
This  being  done,  we  must  still  encounter  the  corruptions  of  the  human  heart.  The 
white  man  who  haa  no  religion  is  convinced,  in  judgment,  that  the  Christian  religion  is 
true,  and  yet  for  years  rejects  it,  notwithstanding  all  the  Bibles  and  other  books  and 
religious  privileges  surrounding  him.  In  view  of  this  fact,  what  can  we  hope  from 
the  Indians,  with  the  public  means  employed  for  their  conversion  ?  Yet  embrace  the 
Christian  religion  tlwy  must,  or  perish ;  for  it  is  one  of  the  solemn  records  of  inspiration, 
that  *-the  nations  and  kingdoms  that  will  not  serve  God  shall  perish." 

265,  An  effort  is  now  being  made,  with  a  prospect  of  most  pleasing  success,  to 
induce  the  children  of  the  school  to  sign  a  temperance  pledge.  But  few  refuse.  The 
cause  which  operates  upon  the  minds  of  Indians,  leading  to  intemperance,  is  simply  a 
love  of  excitement  —  the  same  that  operates  upon  white  men.  To  reclaim  the  Indians 
from  the  sin  of  drunkenness,  the  same  means  should  be  used  which  prove  successful 
with  the  whites.  It  is  not  known  that  any  further  legislation  on  the  part  of  Congress 
would  be  of  service  in  checking  this  vice.  The  late  law,  rendering  the  Indians 
competent  witnesses  against  whiskey-sellers,  will  do  much  good.  It  is  very  desirable 
that  the  States  bordering  on  the  Indian  country  should  pass  a  similar  law.  If  the 
change  proposed  in  the  system  of  trade  should  be  adopted,  I  would  have  high  hopes 
from  that  quarter. 


Pt.  II.  — 68 


4.    PRESENT  GEOGRAPHICAL  POSITION,  NUMBERS,  AND 
MEANS,  OF  THE  IROQUOIS. 

BY    W.    P.    ANOEI.,    ESQ. 


New  York  SrB-AGENCT,  EllicottviUe,  January,  1848. 

Sir  :  —  In  pursuance  of  the  instructions  of  the  Department  communicated  to  me  in 
May  last,  I  have  procured  the  census  and  statistics  of  the  several  tribes  of  the 
Iroquois  within  the  limits  of  this  State,  so  far  as  the  same  was  practicable,  and  here- 
with transmit  the  returns  to  you. 

As  there  are  some  matters  of  general  interest  which  the  tables  do  not  exhibit,  I  have 
deemed  it  proper  to  present  tnem  in  this  communication. 

The  Senegas. 

The  Senecas  are,  at  present,  by  far  the  most  numerous  branch  of  the  Iroquois.  They 
now  occupy  their  Reservations  in  Western  New  York,  and  a  small  party  are  still 
located  upon  the  lands  of  the  Corn-planter,  in  Warren  county,  Pennsylvania. 

The  Alleghany  Reservation,  belonging  to  the  Senecas,  is  situated  wholly  within  the 
county  of  Cattaraugus,  upon  both  sides  of  the  Alleghany  river,  averaging  about  one 
mile  in  width,  and  extending  about  forty  miles  up  the  said  river  from  the  Pennsylvania 
line.  An  accurate  survey,  made  for  the  Indians  a  few  years  since,  gives  something 
over  33,000  acres  as  the  area  of  this  Reservation.  It  embraces  almost  the  entire 
extent  of  the  level  lands  bordering  upon  the  river,  and  a  considerable  portion  of  all 
that  is  susceptible  of  cultivation  in  the  valley.  The  bed  of  the  river  is  very  much 
depressed,  and  the  lands  on  either  side  reach  a  great  elevation,  and  except  at  occasional 
intervals,  where  small  streams  find  their  way  through  the  hills  to  the  river,  are  so 
steep  and  precipitous  as  to  forbid  all  attempts  at  settlement  and  cultivation.  The 
lands  of  the  Indians  were  formerly  covered  with  an  extensive  growth  of  white  pine 
timber,  which  has  been  the  object  of  the  cupidity  of  the  whites  ever  since  the  settle- 
ment of  the  country. 

The  removal  and  sale  of  this  timber  have  heretofore  afforded  to  the  Indians  a 
considerable  means  of  subsistence,  and  as  it  has  always  commanded  a  ready  sale  and 

(588) 


FUTURE  PROSPECTS. 


539 


fair  price,  they  have  rehed  upon  it  to  the  neglect  of  agricultural  pursuits.  The  soil  is 
generally  of  good  quality,  producing  readily  large  quantities  of  com  and  other  spring 
crops.  Winter  wheat  is  not  generally  successful,  though  I  apprehend  this  is  owing 
more  to  the  climate  than  to  the  incapacity  of  the  soil  to  produce  it.  The  more  hardy 
kinds  of  fruit  are  produced  in  limited  quantities,  and,  with  proper  attention,  might  be 
greatly  increased.  The  Indians  have  two  large  saw-mills  upon  the  river,  which  they 
rent  to  white  people,  and  which  yield  them  an  annual  revenue  of  about  six  hundred 
dollars.  Other  premises  are  also  leased  by  individuals  for  ferries,  and  for  depositing 
and  rafting  lumber,  and  the  entire  amount  of  rents  paid  for  all  these  purposes  must 
reach  very  near  the  amount  of  two  thousand  dollars  per  annum.  The  Indians  upon 
this  reservation,  with  few  exceptions,  live  in  circumstances  of  comfort,  and  some  have 
accumulated  a  considerable  amount  of  property.  They  may  be  said  to  be  advancing 
steadily  in  their  eflTorts  at  social  improvement,  and  nothing  is  wanting  but  proper 
encouragement  and  protection  to  render  them  prosperous,  and  place  them  beyond  the 
reach  of  want.  The  present  population  of  this  reservation  consists  of  about  eight 
hundred  Senecas,  one  hundred  Onondagas,  thirty  Cayugas,  and  twenty  Oneidas. 

The  Cattaraugus  reservation,  also  the  property  of  the  Senecas,  is  situated  mostly  in 
the  county  of  Erie,  on  the  Cattaraugus  Creek,  and  extending  from  Lake  Erie  inland 
about  thirteen  miles.  It  embraces  about  thirty  thousand  acres,  with  a  level  surface, 
and  a  soil  equal  in  richness  and  fertility  to  any  tract  of  land  of  equal  extent  within 
the  limits  of  the  State. 

Considerable  attention  has  been  paid  by  the  Indians  on  this  reservation  to  agricul- 
tural pursuits,  and  a  very  great  number  exhibit  evidences  of  prosperity,  and  even 
wealth,  in  the  appearance  of  their  houses,  barns,  fields,  and  crops,  and  stocks  of  cattle, 
that  would  suffer  nothing  in  comparison  with  a  white  population  of  equal  extent  in 
any  of  the  interior  counties. 

Many  of  them  have  of  late  paid  considerable  attention  to  improving  their  dwellings ; 
and  on  passing  through  the  principal  thoroughfare  of  this  reservation,  a  stranger  would 
scarcely  be  reminded  of  the  presence  of  an  Indian  population.  Large  frame  houses 
painted  white,  and  in  many  instances  furnished  with  green  window-blinds,  comfortable 
barns,  and  extensive  and  well-fenced  fields,  would  be  presented  to  his  view  in  as  rapid 
succession  as  in  any  other  farming  community.  It  is  true  that  this  state  of  prosperity 
is  not  universal.  As  in  all  communities  within  the  reach  of  ardent  spirits,  there  are 
to  be  found  some  who  are  idle  and  dissolute ;  and  there  is  still  another  class  here  who 
occupy  the  remote  portions  of  the  reservation,  whose  pride  and  prejudice  still  cause 
them  to  regard  the  pursuit  of  agriculture  as  a  condition  of  servitude  and  degradation. 
Yet  the  prosperity  that  universally  attends  those  who  are  diligent  in  the  cultivation 
of  the  soil  is  fast  overcoming  this  feeling ;  and  the  example  of  the  thriving  and  pros- 
perous, with  their  comfortable  houses,  furniture  and  clothing,  well-filled  granaries,  and 
their  horses  and  cattle,  is  operating  powerfully  upon  the  judgment  of  the  proud  hunter 


540 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


I'     < 


to  the  removing  of  his  prejudice,  and  stimulating  liini  to  undertake  the  improvement 
of  his  own  condition.  In  the  progress  and  prosperity  of  this  people  the  friends  of 
humanity  have  every  encouragement  to  persevere  in  the  task  of  reclaiming  them  from 
their  original  state  of  ignorance  and  barbarity. 

The  lands  they  inhabit  are  capable  of  producing  in  profusion  all  the  necessaries  and 
many  of  the  luxuries  of  life,  and  they  only  need  to  be  made  acquainted  with  the 
science  of  agriculture  to  Ixicome  an  important  branch  of  the  producing  ix)pulation  of 
this  section  of  the  State. 

They  have  now  upon  their  reservation  two  churches,  one  council-house,  several 
school-houses,  and  one  saw-mill  u^jon  the  Cattaraugus  creek.  Many  of  the  Indians 
residing  here  have  received  a  good  English  education ;  two  have  regularly  studied 
the  profession  of  the  law,  and  one  is  a  regularly  licensed  physician,  who  practises 
among  his  people,  and  each  of  whom  is  a  valuable  and  useful  man.  The  population 
of  this  reservation  consists,  in  round  numbers,  of  about  twelve  hundred  Senecas,  thirty 
Onondagas,  and  one  hundred  and  seven  Cayugas. 

The  Tonewanta  Reservation,  also  occupied  by  the  Senecas,  but  which  is  now  claimed 
by  the  Ogden  Company,  under  the  treaty  of  1842,  is  situated  on  the  Tonewanta  creek, 
in  the  county  of  Genesee,  and  comprises  about  fifteen  thousand  acres.  It  is  in  the 
midst  of  a  rich  wheat-growing  country,  of  a  level  surface  and  good  soil.  Any  of  the 
crops  common  to  this  latitude  are  readily  produced,  and  as  the  land  is  easy  of  cultiva- 
tion, the  band  find  no  difficulty  in  supplying  their  wants,  while  many  families  annually 
raise  a  surplus  for  sale.  There  is  a  saw-mill  on  this  reservation,  but  the  possession  is 
in  constant  dispute  between  the  Indians  and  Ogden  Company,  and  neither  is  able  to 
derive  any  considerable  benefit  from  it.  The  progress  of  this  band  of  Senecas  in 
moral  and  mental  improvement  is  materially  retarded  by  their  unhappy  difficulties 
with  the  Company,  though  the  necessity  they  feel  resting  upon  them  to  sustain  them- 
selves and  meet  the  expenses  of  the  controversy,  has  already  stimulated  them  to 
considerable  activity  in  all  the  departments  of  productive  industry.  Upon  the  issue 
of  the  contest  this  stimulus  will  undoubtedly  be  turned  to  good  account,  in  the  benefit 
they  will  derive  from  the  results  of  their  experience,  and  the  demonstration  of  the 
success  that  has  followed  their  eflforts  to  make  the  cultivation  of  the  soil  minister  to 
their  comfort  and  wants.  The  present  population  of  this  reservation  consists  of  about 
six  hundred  and  seventy-five  Senecas,  nine  Cayugas,  and  six  Onondagas,  including  one 
of  their  chiefs. 

The  TuscARORA  tribe  occupy  a  reservation  in  the  county  of  Niagara,  about  three 
miles  easterly  from  Lewiston,  and  seven  miles  northeasterly  from  Niagara  Falls.  The 
reservation  is  one  mile  wide  and  three  miles  long.  By  the  treaty  of  1838,  the  Ogden 
Company  purchased  this  reservation,  but,  owing  to  some  disagreement  with  the  Indians 
in  relation  to  the  valuation  of  the  improvements,  the  contract  remains  unexecuted,  and 
the  Indians  retain  the  occupancy  of  the  lands.     Adjoining  this  reservation  on  the 


FUTURE    PROSPECTS. 


541 


south,  tl»oy  also  own  and  occupy  five  thousand  acres,  which  they  purchased  of  the 
llolhind  Company  and  hold  in  fee.  Both  tracts  are  good  quality  of  wheat  lands,  and 
the  raising  of  winter  wlicat  is  the  principal  object  of  cultivation.  One  of  their  chiefs, 
Mr.  John  Mountpleasant,  informed  me  that  one  thousand  bushels  of  wheat  were  raised 
on  his  farm  the  past  season,  eight  hundred  of  which  he  raised  himself,  and  two  hundi-ed 
were  raised  upon  lands  which  he  rented  to  others  upon  shares.  Another  of  their  chiefs, 
Mr.  V/illiam  Chew,  informed  me  that  at  harvest  time,  last  sununer,  he  still  had  in  his 
barn  three  hundred  bushels  of  wheat  of  the  crop  of  the  previous  year.  The  principal 
chief  of  this  tribe,  William  Mountpleasant,  is  a  wealthy  man,  living  in  a  fine  stone 
house,  and  besides  the  farm  which  he  occupies  himself,  rents  to  white  jxiople  some 
three  hundred  acres  of  improved  lands,  from  which  he  receives  a  large  amount  of  rent. 
These  are  by  no  means  solitary  cases,  and  I  mention  them  as  exhibiting  gratifying 
evidence  of  the  progress  this  band  arc  making  in  husbandry  and  improvement.  In 
this  band,  I  found  not  a  single  person  who  now  adheres  to  their  ancient  superstitions, 
the  entire  mass  professing  or  acknowledging  the  Christian  religion.  They  are  sober, 
temjjcrate  and  industriou.s,  and  in  the  scale  of  social  improvement  occupy  a  high  place 
among  their  alwriginal  brethren  of  the  State.  They  have  one  meeting-house,  which 
they  also  occupy  for  a  council-house,  and  one  school-house.  The  present  population 
of  the  Tuscaroras  is  alx)ut  three  hundred,  with  whom  also  reside  about  twenty 
Onon.dagas. 

The  OxoxDAGAS  occupy  a  reservation  in  the  county  of  Onondaga,  about  six  miles 
south  of  Syracuse.  This  reservation  contains  seven  thousand  acres.  It  is  situated 
pi'incipally  in  the  Onondaga  Valley,  and  the  soil  is  of  the  best  quality  and  well  adapted 
to  agricultural  purposes.  Wheat  and  corn  are  easily  produced,  and  many  kinds  of 
fruit  are  already  cultivated  to  a  considerable  extent.  The  Onondagas  also  own  a  saw- 
mill, from  which,  together  with  some  portion  of  their  lands,  which  they  rent  to  others, 
they  derive  a  large  revenue.  They  are  generally  industrious  and  in  comfortable 
circumstances,  though  their  proximity  to  a  populous  village,  and  their  facility  for 
pi-ocuring  intoxicating  drinks,  is  manifest  in  the  conduct  of  many,  who  indulge  in 
idleness  and  dissipation.  They  have  a  council-house,  school-house,  and  meeting-house, 
with  an  organized  church  and  a  temperance  society.  The  chiefs  and  principal  men 
arc  making  considerable  efforts  to  suppress  intemperance  among  them,  with  gratifying 
success.     The  present  population  at  Onondaga  is  about  two  hundred  and  .seventy. 

The  OxEiDAS  are  located  some  two  miles  south  of  Oneida  Castle,  in  the  counties  of 
Oneida  and  Madison.  There  are  but  a  few  families  remaining  there,  who  own  and 
occupy  their  farms  in  severalty.  Their  lands  are  good  farming  lands,  and  are 
generally  Avell-fenced,  and  under  a  good  state  of  cultivation.  They  have  a  meeting- 
house, in  which  they  also  hold  their  councils ;  and  a  school-house,  in  which  a  school  is 
sustained  by  the  Missionary  Society,  a  principal  portion  of  the  time.  Their  present 
number  is  alrout  two  hundred. 


Hi 


542 


FUTURE  PROSPECTS. 


The  St.  Regi.s  band  occupy  lands  in  the  northwest  comer  of  the  county  of  Franklin, 
N.  Y.,  and  in  Canada,  and  upon  the  islands  of  the  St.  Regis  river,  where  the  boundary  line 
between  Canada  and  the  United  States  reaches  the  St.  Lawrence.  This  line  divides 
their  village,  leaving  the  principal  part  of  the  population  in  Canada.  Indians  of  this 
band,  who  acknowledge  the  jurisdiction  of  the  United  States,  and  receive  annuities 
from  the  State  of  New  York,  are  on  either  side  of  the  line,  and  improve  lands  both  in 
Canada  and  New  York.  The  same  is  the  case  with  that  portion  of  the  band  who  are 
subject  to  the  jurisdiction  of  the  British  Government,  and  who  now  number  about  600 
souls.  It  was  impossible  to  ascertain  the  quantity  of  land  under  their  control.  It  is 
mostly  of  good  quality,  and  bears  com  and  other  spring  crops  in  abundance.  These 
Indians  all  profess  to  be  believers  in  the  Christian  religion,  and  many  of  them  are 
members  of  the  Catholic  Church  located  in  Canada,  and  employ  a  priest,  who  resides 
among  them.  They  have  a  good  school-house,  built  with  funds  furnished  by  the  State, 
in  which  a  school  is  regularly  maintained.  They  are  generally  sober  and  industrious, 
with  occasional  instances  of  intemperate  drinkers.  The  number  under  the  jurisdiction 
of  the  United  States,  or  who  belong  to  what  is  known  among  them  as  the  American 
Party,  is  now  about  four  hundred  and  sixty. 

The  number  of  Indians  from  Canada,  or  from  tribes  not  belonging  to  the  Iroquois, 
now  living  in  New  York,  is  not  as  gi-eat  as  is  usually  supposed.  Upon  this  subject  the 
New  York  Indians  are  jealous  and  sensitive,  and  will  not  permit  the  intrusion  among 
them  of  Indians  who  are  not  entitled  to  partake  of  their  annuities,  or  occupy  their 
lands.  The  few  that  have  been  found  living  here  are  mostly  connected  by  marriage 
with  the  local  bands,  and  are  allowed  to  remain  as  a  matter  of  favor. 

There  are  yet  remaining  on  the  eastern  extremity  of  Long  Island,  a  few  of  the  old 
Montauk  tribe,  who  live  principally  by  fishing  and  following  the  sea.  In  the  town  of 
Southampton,  Suflfolk  county,  there  are  about  fifteen,  and  twenty  in  the  town  of 
Easthampton,  of  the  full  blood.  They  have  but  little  property,  and  seldom  anything 
beyond  a  temporary  supply  for  their  present  wants. 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

W.  G.  Angel,  Sub-Agmt. 

Hon.  Wm.  Medill, 

Commiasioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  Washington. 


Xn.  STATISTICS  AND  POPULATION  B. 


(US) 


SYNOPSIS. 

I.  Period  of  1850.     Official  Report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  AfTairs  for  ISfjO. 

A.  Statement  of  tlio  amount  of  investments  for  the  Indian  tribes  in  stocks  drawing 

interest. 

B.  Statement  of  interest  appropriated  by  Congress  for  the  several  tribes,  of  which  the 

government  is  trustee,  in  lieu  of  investments. 

C.  Estimate  of  the  current  expenses  of  the  Indian  Bureau  at  the  seat  of  government. 

D.  Estimate  of  the  funds  required  during  the  fiscal  year  (1st  July,  1851,  to  30th  June, 

1852)  for  the  payment  of  annuities  and  fulfilling  treaty  stipulations  with  the  Indian 
tribes. 

E.  Estimates  for  sums  required,  during  the  present  year,  (to  June  SOtli,  1851,)  for  the 

seivicc  of  tho  department. 
XL     Period  of  1820.     Letter  of  Hon.  W.  II.  Crawford,  Secretary  of  tho  Treasury,  1820. 

A.  Annuities  due  to  Indian  tribes  in  1820. 

B.  Appropriations  and  expenditures  *br  tho  survey  ond  sale  of  public  lands. 

C.  Schedule  of  sales  before  the  organization  of  public  land-offices. 

D.  Statement  of  the  amount  of  sales,  from  the  opening  of  the  land-offices  to  the  30th 

September,  1819. 

E.  Estimate  of  the  number  ov  acres  of  public  lands  which  have  been  surveyed  and  sold, 

and  the  number  which  riMnain  unsold,  30th  September,  1819. 

F.  Estimate  of  the  quantity  of  land  purchased  from  the  Indians  to  15th  October,  1820. 
in.     Topic  of  lands  purchased  from  the  Indians.     Message  of  tho  President,  1840. 

A.  Statement  of  purchases  of  land  mad?  frn>n  each  tribe  since  the  establishment  of  tho 

present  federal  government,  chronologically  arranged. 

B.  List  of  tribes,  alp'iabetically  arranged,  who  have  ceded  territory,  since  the  establish- 

ment of  the  present  government. 

C.  Aggregates  of  lands,  compensations,  exchanges,  and  names  of  tribes,  from  the  origin 

of  the  government  to  1840. 
Appendix  to  Statistics.     Population  of  the  United  States  —  Tenth  Census. 


(644) 


:  i 
I 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


Skventy-kive  years  liavc  i-liipsi-d  since  tlic  United  States,  with  the  assumption  of 
sovereignty  in  1770,  In'gan  the  nianuffenient  of  the  diflieult  and  complicated  siihject  of 
Indian  Aft'airs.  In  taking  up  this  topic,  with  the  view  of  exhibiting  the  several  classes 
of  statistical  facts  which  belong  to  its  consideration  on  an  enlarged  basis,  it  is  deemed 
proper,  as  a  starting  point,  to  introduce  it  with  tlu  Annual  Reiwrt  of  the  Commissioner 
of  Indian  AH'airs  for  iS.jO.  This  paiti'r  denotes,  with  clearness,  after  a  brief  view  of 
the  current  tnuisactions  with  the  several  tribes,  the  amount  of  their  vested  fund  [A] ; 
the  interest  annually  payable  thereon  [li]  ;  the  current  official  expenses  of  the  Bureau 
[C]  ;  the  current  expenses  of  tlie  Department  at  large,  and  the  payment  of  annuities 
and  expenses  of  fuHilling  treaty  stipulaticms  for  the  fiscal  year  commencing  1st  July, 
1851  [D]  ;  and  the  estimates  of  the  special  sums  asked  from  Congress  to  complete  the 
fiscal  obligations  of  the  office  for  the  year  ending  30th  June,  1851  [E]. 

From  these  data,  which  exhibit  the  point  of  exiKsnditure  at  which  the  Department 
now  (1850)  stands,  a  vie  .•  of  the  same  classes  of  facts,  as  completely  as  they  have  been 
obtained,  is  thrown  back  for  a  period  of  thirty  years,  when  the  whole  annual  sum 
asked  for,  by  Mr.  Crawford,  for  treaty  expenditures,  was  but  $152,575.  The  same  class 
of  payments,  including  special  estimates  resulting  from  the  operation  of  former  treaties, 
stands  now  at  $2,299,272  G5.  This  is  wholly  exclusive  of  the  current  expenses  of  the 
Department,  which  amount  to  $121,500.  Notliing  could  more  conclusively  show  the 
progress  of  this  branch  of  the  public  business,  since  the  Indian  area  of  the  Mississippi 
Valley  began  to  enter  freely  as  an  element  in  the  estimates,  than  the  liberal  sums  which 
have  been  paid  to  the  Indian  tribes  for  th«'ir  lands;  the  exact  and  punctual  manner  in 
which  their  funds  have  been  managed,  and  the  continually  expanding  importance  of 
this  department.  It  is  a  documentary  history  of  our  dealings  with  the  Indian  tribes, 
Avhich  will  outlive  all  accusation ;  and  must  serve  to  convince  the  world,  that  they 
have  been  treated,  under  every  question  of  the  conflicting  trii)licate  jurisdiction, 
lx)tween  tiiemselvks,  the  States,  and  the  United  States,  with  justice,  a  high  regard 
Pt.  1I._C9  ^-^^') 


646 


STATISTICS   AND   POTULATION. 


fur  their  naturnl  rijrlitH,  and  a  tlogreo  of  patifiit  magnaiiiinity,  Ik'voiuI  the  alM)rij,'iiu'H 
of  any  jn'ople  whoso  liiftory  has  Iktii  preservoil. 

The  iMjlicy  of  a  removal  of  tlie  tiilK-s  from  positions  within  the  limits  of  the  States, 
where  they  not  only  felt  the  conflicts  of  jurisdiction,  but  their  e.\|)osure  to  annihilation 
iK'canic  evident;  nnd  the  policy  of  their  removal  to  the  west  of  the  Mississippi  river, 
where  they  could  concentrate  in  masses  under  their  own  laws,  and  colonize  under  the 
protection  of  the  government;  were  hrougli  forward  and  suhmitted  to  Congress  in 
1S25,  by  President  Monroe.  Under  this  system,  many  fragments  of  tribes  have  been 
i-escued  from  destruction ;  others,  arrested  in  a  course  of  rapid  de|K)pulatIon ;  and  entire 
tribes  transferred  to  scenes  of  fertile  territory  and  prosixjrity,  where  they  have 
advanced  in  all  the  elements  of  civilization.  The  statistics  ladonging  to  this  topic  arc 
submitted  in  tlieir  order,  and  will  continue  to  l)e  exhibited  in  the  progress  of  the  work. 

The  quantity  of  land  sold  by  the  trilx's ;  the  prices  paid  for  them ;  the  application 
of  the  amounts  in  annuities,  or  otherwise;  and  the  general  eflects  of  the  disposition  of 
their  surplus  domain,  and  their  concentration  on  smaller,  but  ample  tracts,  constitute 
another  branch  of  their  statistics,  the  publication  of  which  is  now  coinmcnccd. 

Connected  with  these  olyects  of  deep  statistical  value,  aro  the  data  showing  their 
varying  population  from  the  earliest  dates. 

II.  R.  S. 


I.    PElllOl)    OF    1850. 


I.    OFFICIAL    REPORT    OF    THE    COMMISSIONER    OF 

INDIAN    AFFAIRS. 


DkI'AUTMKNT   ok   the   IxTKHUtll, 
Office  IiitUan  Affairs,  Xovniihvr  27(/i,  1S50. 

Sir:  —  Before  prooooding  to  submit  for  yoiu  nonsidcration  a  general  view  of  our 
Indian  affairs  and  relations  during  tlie  last  twelve  months,  I  would  respectfully  refer 
to  the  accompanying  re[x)rts  of  the  snixjrintendents,  agents,  and  missionaries,  in  the 
Indian  country,  for  moi-e  particular  information  in  relation  to  local  operations,  and 
the  condition  of  the  various  tribes,  than  can  bo  fitly  enibodied  in  a  report  of  this 
description. 

Among  the  less  remote  trilx>s,  with  which  we  have  fixed  and  defined  relations,  and 
which,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  have  felt  the  controlling  and  meliorating  effects  of 
the  jMjlicy  and  measures  of  the  government,  for  preserving  i)eace  among  them  and 
improving  their  condition,  an  unusual  degree  of  order  and  quietude  has  prevailed.  It 
is  gratifying  to  know,  that  amongst  this  class,  comprising  a  large  jKirtitm  of  the  red 
race  within  our  widely  extended  borders,  there  probably  has  never,  during  the  same 
period  of  time,  l)cen  so  few  occurrences  of  a  painful  nature.  All  have  Ixkmi  peaceful 
towards  our  citizens,  while,  with  the  exception  of  tlie  Sioux  and  Chippewas,  they  have 
preserved  a  state  of  peace  and  harmony  among  themselves.  These  two  tribes  arc 
hereditary  enemies,  and  scarcely  a  year  passes  without  scenes  of  bloody  strife  between 
them.  From  their  remoteness  and  scattered  condition,  it  is  difficult  to  exercise  any 
effective  restraint  over  them,  while  their  proximity  to  each  other  afford.s  them  frequent 
opportunities  for  indulging  their  vengeful  and  vindictive  feelings.  Each  tribe  seems 
to  be  constantly  on  the  watch  for  occasions  to  attack  Aveaker  parties  of  the  other,  when 
an  indiscriminate  massacre  of  men,  women,  and  children,  is  the  lamentable  result. 

(547) 


648 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


I        *■ 


During  the  last  spring,  niiitiml  aggressions  of  an  aggravated  character  threatened  to 
involve  tliese  trilx-s  in  a  general  war;  hut  the  acting  superintendent,  Governor  Ramsey, 
aided  ami  assisted  hy  the  connnanding  ollicer  at  Fort  Snelling,  promptly  interposed, 
and  hy  timely  and  judicious  eflorts  j)revented  such  a  catastrophe. 

Such  occurrences  are  not  only  revolting  to  Inunanity,  but  they  foster  that  insatiable 
jiassion  for  war,  which,  in  combination  with  love  of  the  chase,  is  the  prominent 
characteristic  feature  of  our  wilder  triljcs,  and  presents  a  formidable  obstacle  in  the 
way  of  their  civilization  and  improvement.  We  know  not  yet  to  what  extent  these 
important  objects  may  be  accomplished ;  but  the  present  and  improving  condition  of 
some  of  our  semi-civilized  tribes  aflfords  ample  encouragement  for  further  and  more 
extended  effort.  p]xpericnce,  however,  has  conclusively  shown  that  there  is  but  one 
course  of  policj',  by  which  the  great  work  of  regenerating  tlie  Indian  race  may  be 
effected. 

In  the  application  of  this  policy  to  our  wilder  tril»e8,  it  is  indispensably  necessary 
that  they  be  placed  in  iMisitions  were  they  can  be  controlled,  and  finally  compelled,  by 
stern  necessity,  to  resort  to  agricultural  lalx)r  or  starve.  Considering,  as  the  untutored 
Indian  does,  that  labor  is  a  degradation,  and  that  there  is  nothing  worthy  of  his 
ambition  but  prowess  in  war,  success  in  the  chase,  and  eloquence  in  council,  it  is  only 
under  such  circumstances  that  his  haughty  pride  can  Ix'  subdued,  and  his  wild  energies 
trained  to  the  more  ennobling  pursuits  of  civilized  life.  There  should  I)e  assigned  to 
each  trilte,  for  a  permanent  home,  a  country  adajjted  to  agriculture,  of  limited  extent 
and  well-defnied  boinidaries,  within  which  all,  with  wcasional  exceptions,  should  l)e 
comiwUed  constantly  to  renuiin  until  such  time  as  their  general  improvement  and 
good  conduct  may  supersede  the  necessity  of  such  restrictions.  In  the  mean  time,  the 
government  should  cause  them  to  )x'  supplied  with  stock,  agricultural  implements,  and 
useful  materials  for  clothing ;  encourage  and  assist  them  in  the  erection  of  comfortable 
dwellings,  and  secure  to  them  the  means  and  facilities  of  education,  intellectual,  moral, 
and  religious.  The  application  of  their  own  funds  to  such  puqioses  would  be  far  better 
for  them  than  the  present  system  of  paying  their  annuities  in  money,  which  does 
substantial  good  to  but  few,  while  to  the  great  majority  it  only  furnishes  the  means 
and  incentive  to  vicious  and  depraving  indulgence,  terminating  in  uestitution  and 
misery,  and  too  frequently  in  premature  deatli. 

The  time  is  at  hand  for  the  practical  application  of  the  foregoing  views  to  the  Sionx 
and  ChipiMJwas,  as  well  as  to  some  of  the  more  northern  trilx's  on  the  borders  of 
Missouri  and  Iowa.  Congress  ha«  made  an  appropriation  for  negotiations  with  the 
Sioux  for  a  jiortion  of  their  lands,  which  should,  as  far  as  practicable,  be  conducted  on 
the  principles  laid  down  in  the  instructions  given  to  the  commissioners  appointed  for 
that  purpose  last  year,  and  which  were  comnuinicated  with  the  Annual  Report  of  my 
predecessor.  Those  instructions  contemplated  the  purchase  of  a  large  extent  of  their 
territory,  and  their  concentration  within  narrower  limits  upon  lands  remote  from  the 


STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION. 


549 


white  settlements  and  the  Chippcwas  —  olgects  of  primary  importance  in  view  of  the 
general  }K)liey  already  stated. 

Since  the  treaties  of  1S37  and  1842,  with  the  Chippewas,  a  considerable  portion  of 

those  Indians  have  continued,  by  siilTerance,  to  reside  on  the  ceded  lands  cast  of  the 

Mississippi  river,  in  Wisconsin  and  Minnesota,  where  they  have  for  sonic  years  been 

brought  into  injurious  contact  with  our  rapidly  advancing  and  increasing  population  in 

that  quarter.     Ilavinsi  ample  facilities  for  procuring  ardent  spirits,  they  have  become 

much  injured  and  corrupted  by  unrestrained  indulgence  in  the  use  of  that  accursed 

element  of  evil.     To  remedy  this  unfortunate  state  of  things,  it  was  determinad  at  r.n 

early  period  of  the  present  year,  to  have  these  Indians  removed  northward  to  the 

country  belonging  to  their  tribe.     Measures  for  this  purpose  were  accordingly  adopted ; 

but,  in  consequence  of  the  very  late  period  at  which  the  appropriation  requisite  to 

meet  the  necessary"  expenses  was  made,  only  a  small  nuniljer  have   as  yet  been 

removed.     Their  entire  removal,  however,  will  not  sufliciently  relieve  our  citizens 

from  annoyance  by  them,  as  they  will  for  some  time  have  the  disposition,  and  be  near 

enough,  to  return  with  facility  to  their  old  haunts  and  hunting-grounds.     Nor  will  the 

situation  of  the  Chippewas,  generally,  then  be  such  as  their  well-ljeing  requires.     They 

own  a  vast  extent  of  territory  on  each  side  of  the  Mississippi,  over  which  they  will  be 

scattered,  following  the  chase  and  indulging  in  their  vagrant  Ihabits,  until  the  wild 

products  of  the  country,  on  which  they  depend  for  a  subsistence,  are  exhausted,  and 

they  arc  brought  to  a  state  of  destitution  and  want.     Efforts  should  therefore  be  made, ' 

at  as  early  a  period  as  practicable,  to  concentrate  them  within  proper  limits,  where, 

with  some  additional  means  beyond  those  already  provided,  effective  arrangements 

could  Ix^  nuide  to  introduce  among  them  a  system  of  education,  and  the  practice  of 

.agriculture  and  the  simpler  mechanic  arts.     The  best  portion  of  their  country  for  this 

purpose  is  west  of  the  Mississippi  river ;  but  it  is  not  owned  by  the  whole  tribe  in 

connnon  —  a  considerable  part  of  it  being  the  exclusive  property  of  particular  bands, 

who  are  not  ))arties  to  any  of  our  treaties,  and  receive  no  annuities  or  other  material 

aid  from  the  United  States.     This  circumstance  not  only  excites  dissatisfaction  with 

the  government,  but  produces  nracli  jealousy  and  bad  feeling  towards  the  rest  of  the 

tribe,  which  may  hereafter  lead  to  serious  difficulty  ;  and  as  the  game  on  which  they 

mainly  depend  for  tlie  means  of  living  must  soon  fail  them,  the  government  will  be 

under  the  necessity  of  interposing  to  save  them  from  starvation.     A  wise  forecast  and 

the  dictates  of  a  benevoleii  t  policy  alike  suggest  that  timely  measures  be  taken  to  avert 

so  disastrous  a  result.     This  may  easily  be  done,  and  at  a  moderate  expense  compared 

with  the  importance  of  the  objects  to  be  accomplished. 

In  order  to  enable  the  department  to  carry  out  these  views  in  reference  to  the  whole 
Chippewa  tribe,  I  respectfully  recommend  that  Congress  be  asked  for  an  appropriation 
at  the  ensuing  session,  to  defray  the  expense  of  negotiating  a  joint  treaty  with  the 
different  bands,  for  the  purpose  of  acquiring  so  much  of  their  country  on  the  cast  side 


5o0 


STATISTICS   AND  rOPULATION. 


of  the  Mississippi  as  we  may  require  for  a  long  time  to  come ;  to  provide  that  the 
whole  of  their  remaining  lands,  together  with  their  present  and  future  means,  shall  be 
the  common  property  of  the  whole  tribe,  so  that  all  will  be  placed  upon  an  equal 
footing;  and  that  as  large  a  pro^wrtion  of  their  funds  as  practicable  shall  be  set  apart 
and  applied  in  such  a  manner  as  will  secure  their  comfort,  and  most  rapidly  advance 
them  in  civilization  and  prosperity.  With  such  arrangements  for  this  tribe,  and  the 
adoption  of  a  like  policy  towards  the  Winnebagocs,  now  located  in  their  vicinity  on 
the  west  side  of  the  Mississippi,  and  the  Menomonees,  soon  to  be  removed  there,  the 
Avhole  face  of  our  Indian  relations  in  that  quarter  would  in  a  few  years  present  an 
entire  and  gratifying  change.  We  should  soon  witness  in  this,  our  northern  colony  of 
Indians,  those  evidences  of  general  improvement  now  becoming  clearly  manifest  among 
a  number  of  our  colonized  tribes  in  the  southwest ;  and  which  present,  to  the  mind  of 
the  philanthropist  and  the  Christian,  encouraging  assurance  of  the  practicability  of 
regenerating  the  red  race  of  our  country,  and  elevating  them  to  a  position,  moral  and 
social,  similar,  if  not  equal,  to  our  own.  There  are  two  evils  in  the  section  of  country 
referred  to,  operating  injuriously  ujwn  the  welfare  and  interests  of  the  Indians  in  that 
quarter,  and  our  citizens  engaged  in  trade  among  them,  which  require  prompt  atten- 
tion, and  which  must  be  suppressed  before  our  Indian  relations  there  can  be  placed 
upon  a  safe  and  satisfactory  footing.  These  are,  first,  the  immense  annual  destruction 
of  the  buffalo  and  other  game  by  the  half-breeds  from  the  British  side  of  the  line, 
generally  in  the  employment  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company ;  and,  secondly,  the  intro- 
duction of  ardent  spirits  among  our  Indians  by  the  traders  of  that  company.  The 
embarrassment  and  injury  to  our  Indians  resulting  from  the  devastation  of  game  by 
these  foreign  depredators  have  justly  occasioned  much  dissatisfaction  among  them, 
and,  if  not  soon  checked,  serious  difficulties  may  well  be  apprehended.  The  introduc- 
tion of  ardent  spirits  among  the  Indians,  by  the  persons  referred  to,  is  not  only  an 
aggravated  evil,  but  is  derogatory  to  the  authority  and  dignity  of  this  government. 

Our  laws  and  regulations  prohibit  the  introduction  of  spirituous  liquor  among  the 
Indians,  as  well  as  the  ingress  of  foreigners  into  their  country  for  purposes  of  trade,  or 
indeed  for  any  purpose,  without  permission  from  the  proper  authorities.  A  strict 
compliance  with  these  laws  and  regulations  is  required  of  our  traders,  while  the  traders 
of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  in  contemptuous  disreganl  of  them,  frcquently  come 
over  on  our  side  of  the  line,  and,  through  the  nefarious  means  of  ardent  spirits,  carry 
on  a  corrupting  traffic  with  the  Indians,  injurious  alike  to  them  and  to  our  licensed 
and  bonded  traders.  Suitable  measures  should  be  promptly  adopted  to  put  a  stop  to 
these  abuses  ;  for  which  purpose,  the  establishment  of  a  military  post  and  an  Indian 
agency  in  Lhat  quarter  will  be  indispensable  ;  and,  in  the  present  state  of  affaii-s,  this 
cannot  be  done  at  too  early  a  period. 

It  was  expected  that  the  Menomonees,  for  whom  a  location  has  been  provided 
between  the  Wiiniebagoes  and  Chippewas,  would  be  removed  this  year;  but  before 


STATISTICS    AND    POTULATION. 


551 


the  exploration  of  their  new  country  by  a  party  of  these  Indians  had  been  completed, 
the  season  was  too  far  advanced  for  the  tribe  to  emigrate  before  the  approach  of 
winter.  The  President,  tl.Lix'fore,  in  a  just  spirit  of  humanity,  gave  them  permission 
to  rcniain  in  Wisconsin  until  the  first  day  of  June  next. 

The  Stockbridge  and  Munsee  Indians,  residing  in  Wisconsin,  having,  in  1848,  ceded 
all  their  lands  to  the  government,  are  expected  to  settle  somewhere  in  the  same  region 
of  country.  The  treaty  which  provides  for  their  removal  stipidatcs  that,  in  the  selec- 
tion of  a  country  for  their  future  residence,  they  shall  be  consulted ;  and  they  liavc 
expressed  a  preference  ft)r  a  site  in  the  vicinity  of  the  St.  Peters  river.  As  soon  as  a 
suitable  location  can  Ije  found  for  them,  and  their  removal  effected,  Wisconsin,  like 
most  of  the  other  States,  will  be  relieved  substantially  of  the  evils  of  an  Indian 
population. 

As  usual  with  the  Winnebagocs,  in  whatever  situation  placed,  a  considerable  number 
of  them  have  been  restless  and  discontented  in  their  new  location  on  the  Upper  Missis- 
sippi, to  which  they  were  removed  in  the  year  1848.  This  has  arisen  less  from  any 
well-grounded  objection  to  the  country,  than  from  their  own  reckless  disjiosition  and 
vagrant  habits,  together,  ijossibl}',  with  an  omission  on  the  part  of  the  government  to 
do  all  that  might  have  been  done  for  their  comfortable  settlement  in  their  new  home. 
There  was  considerable  difficulty  in  eflecting  their  removal ;  and  a  portion  of  them, 
eluding  the  agent  of  the  government  charged  with  the  superintendence  of  their 
emigration,  remained  behind.  These,  with  others  who  returned  to  their  old  haunts  in 
Iowa  and  Wisconsin,  gave  serious  annoyance  to  our  citizens  by  their  threatening 
conduct  and  actual  depredations.  Tlie  white  population  became  more  or  less  alarmed, 
and  strong  representations  were  made  to  the  government  of  the  necessity  for  their 
immediate  removal.  The  urgency  appearing  to  be  great,  there  was  but  little  time  to 
make  the  necessary  arrangements  for  the  purpose.  A  resort  to  military  force  was 
considered  inexpedient,  as  it  might  have  tended  to  exasperate  their  feelings  and 
lead  to  actual  hostilities.  And  it  was  gi-eatly  to  be  desired,  that  they  should  Ije 
taken  to  their  country  under  circumstances  calculated  to  all.ay  their  discontent,  and 
dispose  them  to  remain. 

My  predecessor,  therefore,  with  the  concurrence  and  approbation  of  the  head  of  the 
department,  entered  into  a  contract  with  a  gentleman,  recommended  for  his  high 
character  and  great  influence  o\cr  these  Indians,  to  remove  them  in  a  kind  and 
judicious  manner,  and  to  make  suitable  and  satisfactory  arrangements  for  their  com- 
fortable and  permanent  settlement.  It  appears  tiiat  the  measure  has  thus  far  been 
attended  with  corresjxjnding  results,  and  that  the  contractor  is  entitled  to  credit  for  his 
energy  and  success  in  the  prosecution  of  his  undertaking. 

In  examining  the  reports  of  my  predecessors  for  several  years,  I  find  a  measure  of 
policy  strongly  urged  with  reference  to  the  tribes  located  on  the  borders  of  our  Western 
States,  in  which  I  fully  ccmcur.     It  is,  by  a  partial  change  in  their  relative  positions, 


STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION. 


to  throw  open  a  wide  extent  of  country  for  the  spread  of  otir  population  westward,  so 
as  to  save  tliem  from  being  swept  away  by  the  mighty  and  advancing  current  of 
civilization,  which  has  already  engulphed  a  large  jwrtion  of  this  hapless  race.  To  a 
large  majority  of  those  that  have  been  removed  there  from  the  States,  we  are  under 
obligations  of  the  highest  character,  enjoined  alike  by  contract  and  conscience,  to 
secure  to  them  their  present  liomes  and  possessions  for  ever ;  and,  ere  it  be  too  late, 
wo  should  make  all  the  arrangements  necessary  and  proper  to  a  faithful  discharge  of 
this  solemn  duty. 

Below  the  most  southern  of  our  colonized  tribes,  we  have  an  ample  outlet  to  the 
southwest ;  but  another  of  higher  latitude  is  required,  leading  more  directly  towards 
our  remote  western  possessions.  A  beginning  will  be  made  in  carrying  this  measure 
of  policy  and  humanity  into  effect  by  the  purchase,  as  contemplated,  from  the  Sioux 
of  a  large  portion  of  their  country ;  and  it  may  be  fully  consummated  by  the  removal 
of  a  few  tribes  between  the  Sioux  territory  and  the  Kansas  river,  with  whom  we  have 
no  treaty  stipulations,  guarantying  in  perpetuity  their  present  jrossessions.  Suitable 
locations  may  be  found  for  tliem  south  of  that  river,  where,  secure  in  comfortable  and 
permanent  homes,  they  would  be  stimulated  by  the  salutary  influence  and  example  of 
neighboring  and  more  enlightened  tribes. 

That  the  border  tribes  in  question  are  in  danger  of  ultimate  extinction  from  the 
causes  indicated,  must  be  evident  to  every  well-informed  and  reflecting  mind ;  and  it 
is  equally  clear  that  the  adoption  of  the  policy  recommended,  is  the  only  practicable 
means  of  averting  the  melancholy  fate  with  which  they  are  threatened.  If  they 
remain  as  they  are,  many  years  will  not  elapse  before  they  will  be  over-run  and  exter- 
minated ;  or,  uprooted  and  broken-spirited,  be  driven  forth  towards  the  setting  sun  to 
perish  amidst  savage  enemies  on  the  plains,  or  the  sterile  and  inhospitable  regions  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains.  Such  a  catastrophe  would  be  an  abiding  reproach  to  our 
government  and  people,  especially  when  it  is  considered  that  these  Indians,  if  properly 
established,  protected,  and  cherished,  may  at  no  distant  day  become  intelligent,  moral, 
and  Christian  communities,  fully  understanding  and  appreciating  the  principles  and 
blessings  of  our  free  institutions,  and  entitled  to  equal  participation  in  the  rights, 
privileges,  Jind  immunities  of  American  citizens. 

It  is  among  the  tribes  of  our  Southern  colony  that  we  find  the  most  sati.sfactory  and 
encouraging  evidences  of  material  advancement  in  civilization  ;  and  we  need  no  better 
vindication  of  the  wisdom  and  humanity  of  our  Indian  policy,  thus  far,  than  the 
gratifying  results  among  a  number  of  these  tribes.  Surrounded  in  the  States  where 
they  formerly  resided  by  a  white  population  continually  pressing  upon  them,  and 
without  the  natural  enterprise  and  energy,  or  the  intellectual  culture,  requisite  to 
enable  them  to  contend  with  a  superior  race  in  any  of  those  employments  and  pursuits 
upon  which  the  dignity  and  happiness  of  man  depend  —  discouraged  and  depressed  by 
their  inferior  and  helpless  condition,  they,  with  a  fatal  and  ruinous  facility,  adopted 


STATISTICS   AND  POPULATION. 


5r)3 


only  the  vices  of  the  white  man,  and  were  fast  wasting  away.  In  a  few  years,  they 
would  have  become  extinct,  and,  like  other  once  numerous  and  powerful  trilx's,  their 
names  would  have  been  preserved  only  in  the  records  of  history.  Removed  from  this 
unfortunate  and  to  them  unnatural  position ;  placed  where  they  have  the  assurance 
and  guarantee  of  permanent  homes ;  where  they  are,  in  a  great  measure,  free  from 
those  influences  arising  out  of  a  close  contact  with  a  white  iwpulation,  so  injurious  and 
fatal  to  them  in  their  untutored  state ;  and  where  the  elements  of  civiiizati<m  could  be 
steadily  and  systematically  introduced  among  them  —  they  are  gradually  increasing  in 
numbers  and  rapidly  advancing  in  prosperity. 

Several  of  these  tribes  have  already  abandoned  their  original  and  crude  fonns  of 
government,  and  adopted  others,  fashioned  more  or  less  after  the  model  of  our  own  — 
having  regularly  established  constitutions  of  republican  character,  and  written  laws 
adapted  to  their  peculiar  state  of  affairs,  with  proper  and  responsible  officers  to  carry 
them  into  execution.  The}  are  adopting  agricultural  and  mechanical  pursuits ;  and, 
through  the  efforts  of  the  government  and  of  various  Christian  societies,  having  lx;come 
impressed  with  the  necessity  and  advantages  of  education,  they  are  making  highly 
commendable  exertions  to  disseminate  more  generally  its  blessings  among  them. 

In  addition  to  the  means  furnished  by  government  and  liberally  provided  l)y 
missionary  associations,  they  make  large  appropriations  from  their  own  funds  towards 
the  establishment  and  support  of  manual-labor  schools,  which  have  been  found  efficient 
auxiliaries  in  imparting  to  them  a  knowledge  of  letters,  agriculture,  and  mechanic 
arts,  and  of  advancing  them  in  civilization  and  Christianity.  During  the  few  \ears 
that  institutions  of  this  description  have  been  in  operation,  they  have  done  much 
towards  the  accomplishment  of  these  great  objects ;  and,  had  they  effected  nothing 
more  than  to  excite  the  desire  for  instruction  now  existing  among  a  number  of  the 
tribes,  the  expenditure  th  •  v  have  cccasioned  would  not  have  been  in  vain.  Introtluced, 
however,  as  an  experiment,  we  were  liable  to  errors  in  regard  to  them,  which 
experience  alone  could  develope  ;  and  after  much  reflection,  I  am  satisfied  that  there 
are  defects  in  the  system  as  at  present  organized,  which  must  Ix;  remedied  in  order  to 
ensure  its  full  degree  of  officii  -icy  and  usefulness.  In  my  judgment,  confirmed  by  the 
experience  of  others,  the  great  error  connnitted  has  Ixien  in  establishing  most  of  the 
institutions  upon  too  large  a  scale.  In  consequence  of  the  heavy  expenditures  required 
to  establish  and  maintain  them,  they  are  necessarily  limited  in  number,  and  so  wide 
apart  as  to  be  at  an  inconvenient  distance  from  the  great  majority  of  those  for  whose 
benefit  they  are  intended.  Hence,  the  advantages  and  benefits  of  the  schools  arc 
confined  almost  entirely  to  the  neighborhoods  within  which  they  are  respectively 
located ;  for  the  Indians  at  a  distance  being  naturally  averse  to  having  their  children 
taken  so  far  from  their  homes,  it  often  happens  that  the  full  complement  of  scholars 
cannot  be  obtained.  Besides,  the  congregation  of  large  numbers  of  Indian  children, 
by  affording  them  more  unrestricted  opiwrtunities  of  indulging  in  the  use  of  their  own 
Pt.  11.  — 70 


t 


li    (' 


f 


|!    1 


554 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


language,  seriously  interferes  with  their  acquisition  of  the  English  tongue,  a  knowledge 
of  which  is  generally  a  pre-requisite  to  their  civilization.  By  diminishing  the  size  and 
expense  of  these  institutions,  they  could  he  multiplied  and  extended  ;  there  would  ho 
less  difliculty  in  obtaining  the  desired  number  of  resident  pupils ;  while  othei-s  in  the 
vicinity  could  be  taught  as  day-scholars,  and  the  benefits  of  a  practical  education  be 
thus  more  widely  diflused. 

The  only  considera])le  number  of  Indians  who  have  retained  any  portion  of  their 
original  possessions,  and  survived  the  jjcrils  of  immediate  ccmtact  with  a  white 
))opulation,  fast  thickening  around  them,  are  those  remaining  in  the  State  of  New 
York,  comprising  a  mere  renuiant  of  the  once  numerous  and  jwwerful  Iroquois,  or 
"  Six  Nations."  After  rapidly  dimini.*ihing  for  many  years,  they  seem  at  length  to 
have  reached  the  lowest  point  in  their  declining  fortunes.  Having  been  placed  by  the 
humane  legislation  of  the  State  in  a  situation  similar  to  that  of  our  colonized  tribes, 
they  present  the  interesting  spectacle  of  a  once  barbarous  people  in  a  state  of  rapid 
transition  to  civilization  and  prosperity.  A  striking  indication  of  their  progress  is  the 
imjwrtant  change  the^'  have  made  in  their  civil  polity.  Impre.»<sed  with  the  disad- 
vantages of  their  ancient  and  irresponsible  oligarchical  form  of  government,  and  its 
tendency  to  retard  their  advancement,  a  majority  succeeded,  in  1848,  in  effecting 
an  entire  revolution.  Having  formally  assembled  in  convention,  they  adopted  a 
republican  constitution,  and  their  government  and  affairs  are  now  well  conducted  on 
principles  similar  to  those  on  which  ours  are  administered.  There  are  still,  however, 
individuals  among  them,  who,  from  their  connection  with  the  old  system,  are  opposed 
to  the  new  order  of  things ;  but,  as  the  object  of  the.^e  malcontents  is  to  regain  their 
lost  power,  rather  than  to  promote  the  public  good,  no  encouragement  has  been  given 
to  them  either  by  the  State  of  New  York  or  the  general  government. 

It  is  much  to  be  regretted  that  no  appropriation  was  made  at  the  last  session  of 
Congress  for  negotiating  treaties  with  the  wild  tribes  of  the  great  western  prairies. 
These  Indians  have  long  held  undisputed  possession  of  this  extensive  region,  and 
regarding  it  as  their  own,  they  consider  themselves  entitled  to  comiwnsation,  not  only 
for  the  right  of  way  through  their  territory,  but  for  the  great  and  injurious  destruction 
of  game,  grass,  and  timber,  committed  by  our  troops  and  emigrants.  They  have 
hitherto  been  kept  quiet  and  jjeaceable  by  reiterated  promises  that  the  government 
would  act  generou.sly  towards  them ;  and  considerations  of  economy,  justice,  and 
humanity,  recjuire  that  these  promi.ses  should  be  promptly  fulfilled.  They  would, 
doubtless,  Ije  contented  with  a  very  moderate  remuneration,  which  should  he  made  in 
goods,  stock  animals,  agricultural  implements,  and  other  useful  articles. 

As  a  further  measure  for  securing  the  friendship  and  good  conduct  of  these  Indians, 
it  is  earnestly  recommended  that  a  delegation  of  their  principal  and  most  influential 
men  be  brought  in  for  the  purpose  of  visiting  some  of  our  larger  cities  and  more 
densely  populated  portions  of  country.     These  delegates  would  thus  be  impressed  with 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


sss 


an  idea  of  the  great  suiieriority  of  our  stivngth,  which,  being  imparted  to  their  people, 
would  have  a  powerful  and  most  salutary  intluence  upon  them. 

Our  information  in  regard  to  the  Indians  in  Oivgon  and  California  is  extremely 
limited;  but  the  deficiency,  it  is  hoped,  will  shortly  be  supplied  by  the  agents  and 
commissioners  provided  for  at  the  la.st  session  of  Congress.  Goi)ies  of  the  instructions 
given  to  these  officers  are  herewith  submitted,  together  with  a  reirort  from  General 
Lane,  late  governor  and  acting  superintendent  of  Indian  affairs  in  Oregon,  containing 
the  latest  official  information,  in  jiossession  of  the  office,  respecting  the  Indians  in 
that  far  distant  ix'gion,  and  received  too  late  to  accompany  the  Annual  KejTOrt  of 
last  year. 

After  the  three  agents  autl^ri/.  d  by  Congress  for  the  Indians  in  California  were 
apjwinted,  it  was  found  that  no  appropriation  had  been  made  for  their  salaries  and  the 
necessary  expenses  of  their  agencies.  Their  functions  as  agents  were  therefore 
suspended;  but,  sis  there  was  an  appropriation  for  negotiating  treaties  with  the  Indians 
in  that  State,  they  were  constituted  commissioners  for  that  purpose.  They  will  thus 
have  an  opportunity  of  acquiring  information  useful  to  them  as  agents,  and  be  on 
the  spot  to  enter  ujion  their  duties  in  that  capacity  when  the  requisite  appropriations 
shall  have  been  made. 

Commissioners  have,  also,  been  aj)p()inted  for  the  highly  important  purpose  of 
negotiating  treaties  with  the  various  Indian  tribes  adjacent  to  the  line  between  the 
United  States  and  Mexico.  They  are  expected  to  accompany  the  Ixjundary 
commission,  and  are  charged  with  the  duty  of  collecting  all  such  statistical  and 
other  information  concerning  those  Indians  as  may  aid  the  department  in  adopting 
the  proper  policy  and  measures  for  their  government,  and  to  carry  out  in  good  faith 
the  stipulations  of  our  recent  treaty  with  the  Mexican  republic. 

The  ruinous  conditi<m  of  our  Indian  affiiirs  in  New  Mexico  demands  the  immediate 
attention  of  Congress.  In  no  section  of  the  country  arc  prompt  and  efficient  measures 
for  restraining  the  Indians  more  imperiously  lequired  than  in  this  territory,  where  an 
extraordinary  state  of  things  exists,  which,  so  long  as  it  continues,  will  be  a  reproach 
to  the  government. 

There  are  over  thirty  thousand  Indians  within  its  limits,  the  greater  portion  of 
which,  having  never  been  subjected  to  any  salutary  restraint,  are  extremely  wild  and 
intractable.  For  many  years  they  have  been  in  the  constant  habit  of  making 
extensive  forays,  not  only  within  the  territory  itself,  but  in  the  adjoining  provinces 
of  Mexico  —  plundering  and  murdering  the  inhabitants,  and  carrying  off  large 
quantities  of  stock,  besides  numerous  captives,  whom  they  have  subjected  t  slavery 
and  treated  with  great  barbarity  and  cruelty.  Humanity  shudders  in  view  of  the 
horrible  fate  of  such  of  their  female  captives  as  possess  qualities  to  excite  their 
fiendish  and  brutal  passions.  Our  citizens  have  suffered  severely  from  their  outrages 
within  the  last  two  years,  of  which  their  attack  last  fall  upon  Mr.  White's  party, 


"1 


1  } 


i" 


!  it 

in 


fi66 


STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION. 


I 


wiii'iC  travL'lliii}^  to  .Siiiita  Fe,  is  one  of  many  instanccH.  They  murdered  the  whole 
party,  (nine  or  icn  in  number,)  except  his  wife,  child,  and  servant,  whom  they  carried 
off.  Our  only  Indian  agent  in  the  territory,  who  is  stationed  at  Santa  Fe,  on  hearing 
of  the  lamentable  occurrence,  promptly  made  every  effort  in  his  power  to  rescnc  the 
captives  and  bring  the  Indians  to  punishment.  The  military  officers  in  the  territory, 
also,  made  commendable  exertions  for  the  same  purjxjse ;  but,  unfortunately,  with  no 
other  result  than  the  discovery  of  the  dead  body  of  Mrs.  White,  whicli  was  foimd  by  a 
military  party  in  pursuit  of  some  Indians  supposed  to  have  her  in  their  jmssessiou. 
It  was  evident  that  she  had  just  Ijeen  murdered,  as  the  body  was  still  warm.  The 
sad  duty  of  interring  the  coqi.se  was  performed  by  the  military  with  becoming  decency 
and  respect.  Proiwr  efforts  have  lieen  continued  to  rescue  the  child  and  servant,  but  as 
yet  without  success.  Renewed  instructions  have  recently  lieen  given,  directing  a  large 
reward  to  Ije  offered,  which,  it  is  hoiied,  will  lead  to  a  favorable  result.  But  their 
atrocities  and  aggivssions  are  committed,  not  only  upon  our  citizens,  but  ujion  the 
Pueblo  Indians,  an  interesting  semi-civilized  people,  living  in  towns  or  villages  called 
pHchlm;  whence  they  derive  their  name.  Before  the  country  came  into  our  possession, 
they  were  in  the  habit  of  repairing  the  injuries  they  sustniued  by  retaliation  and 
reprisals  upon  their  enemies,  but  frnm  this  they  are  now  recpiired  to  desist ;  and  thus, 
the  duty  is  more  strongly  imposed  upon  us  of  affording  them  adequate  protection. 
The  interference  of  the  government  is  requiivd,  also,  to  secure  them  against  violations 
of  their  rights  of  person  and  projH'rty  by  unprincipled  white  men,  from  whose 
cupidity  and  lawlessness,  thoy  are  continually  subject  to  grievous  annoyance  and 
oppression. 

To  prevent  serious  disputes  between  the.se  Indians  and  the  white  inhabitants,  it  is 
es.sentially  necessary  that  commissioners  Ije  appointed  to  ascertain  and  define  the 
boundaries  of  their  lands,  Avhich  they  claim  to  hold  under  grants  from  Spain  and 
Mexico ;  and  to  negotiate  treaties  with  them  for  the  purpose  of  establishing  proper 
relations  between  them  and  the  government  and  citizens  of  the  United  States. 
It  is  believed  that  by  pursuing  a  wise  and  liberal  policy  towards  them  —  which 
their  peculiar  situation  indicates  and  invites  —  they  will  in  a  few  years  be 
fitted  to  become  citizens,  and  being  industrious,  moral,  and  exemplary  in  their 
habits,  will  constitute  a  valuable  portion  of  the  population  of  the  territory.  For  a 
brief  period,  however,  they  will  require  agents  to  regulate  their  intercoui-se  and 
manage  their  relations  with  the  other  Indians  and  the  whites.  The  same  commis- 
sioners could  be  charged  with  the  farther  duty  of  entering  into  the  necessary 
conventional  arrangements  with  the  wild  tribes  of  the  territory.  To  manage  these 
Indians  properly,  they  also  must  have  agents ;  and,  in  order  to  break  up  their  practice 
of  committing  depredations  and  taking  captives,  the}'  should  be  placed  in  situations 
where  a  proper  vigilance  and  control  can  be  exercised  over  them.  Their  forays  into 
the  Mexican  territory  can  only  be  prevented  by  locating  them  at  a  considerable 


STATISTICS  AND   POPULATION. 


657 


(1i8tancc  from  the  Iwundary  line,  and  the  establishing  of  military  posts  to  prevent 
them  from  crossing  it.  The  boundaries  of  the  country  allotted  to  the  several  tribes 
respectively  should  be  clearly  defined,  and  they  should  not  be  allowed  to  go  beyond 
them  without  special  permission.  Thus  situated  and  restrained,  a  portion  of  them 
would  need  the  assistance  of  the  government,  until  brought  to  apply  themselves  to 
husbandry  for  the  means  of  subsistence,  instead  of  depending  on  plunder  and  the 
chase.  Tiie  adoption  of  this  or  some  other  efficient  system  of  measures  would  involve 
an  expense  far  less  than  the  amount  for  which  the  government  will  othenvise  'ix'come 
liable  on  account  of  the  just  claims  of  our  citizens  and  those  of  Mexico  for  sjjoliations 
committed  by  these  Indians,  while  it  would  obviate  the  serious  evils  that  must  result 
from  the  settlement  and  improvement  of  the  country  being  greatly  retarded.  An 
obligation  of  the  highest  character  rests  upon  us,  to  redeem  the  captives  among  the 
Indians  in  New  Mexico,  represented  to  Ix;  numerous ;  and  liberal  appropriations  will 
have  to  be  made  for  that  purpose. 

For  interesting  and  more  particular  information  respecting  our  Indian  affairs  in  this 
territory,  and  especially  in  relation  to  the  agency  and  organization  required  for  their 
proper  management,  I  respectfully  refer  to  the  accompanying  letter  (No.  33)  from  the 
Hon.  II.  N.  Smith  and  the  rejiort  from  agent  Calhoun. 

We  know  but  little  of  the  Indians  in  Utah,  beyond  the  fact  that  they  are  generally 
peaceable  in  their  disposition  and  easily  controlled ;  but  further  and  full  information 
as  to  their  peculiar  condition  and  wants  may  soon  be  expected  from  the  agent 
recently  sent  among  them.  I  therefore  refrain,  for  the  present,  from  making  any 
recommendation  in  regard  to  them,  except  that  our  trade  and  intercourse  laws  be 
extended  over  them. 

Our  Indian  relations  in  Texas  remain  in  the  awkward  and  embarrassing  state  set 
forth  in  the  Annual  Reports  from  this  office  for  the  last  five  years,  and  particularly  in 
that  of  my  immediate  predece8,sor.  The  laws  providing  for  the  regulation  of  trade 
and  intercourse  with  the  Indian  tribes  are  not  in  force  in  Texas ;  nor  can  they,  I 
apprehend,  be  extended  there  without  the  consent  of  that  State.  Thus,  while  an 
unfortunate  state  of  things  exists  in  Texas,  similar  to  that  in  New  Mexico,  and 
requiring  in  general  the  same  remedial  measures,  we  have  not  the  power  to  put  them 
in  full  and  complete  operation.  The  constitution,  it  is  true,  gives  to  Congress  the 
jiower  to  regulate  commerce  with  the  Indian  tribes;  but  that  it  can  be  rightfully 
exercised  in  such  manner  as  to  punisli  the  citizens  of  that  State  for  trespassing  on 
lands  occupied  by  the  Indians,  or  trading  with  them,  unless  licensed  by  the 
government,  is  a  proposition  that  may  well  be  controverted.  What  is  required,  in 
regard  to  the  Indians  in  Texas,  is  full  and  absolute  authority  to  assign  to  them  a 
suitable  country,  remote  from  the  white  population,  for  their  exclusive  occupancy  and 
use,  where  we  can  make  our  own  arrangements  for  regulating  trade  and  intercourse 
with  them,  and  adopt  other  measures  for  th""r  gradual  civilization  and  improvement. 


.i? 


558 


STATISTICS  AND  POPULATION. 


With  this  view,  T  rcsportfuUy  8upn;ost  that  a  rommiscioiicr  or  conuiiissionors  be 
iipjMjiiitoil  to  confer  with  the  proper  luithorities  of  TexiiH  on  this  important  sul)jeet, 
for  the  purpose  of  effecting  tlie  conventional  arrangements  imlis|)eniKable  to  n 
satisfactory  adjustment  of  our  Indian  affairs  in  that  State. 

Tliis  measure,  I  submit,  would  be  fully  justified,  if  recommended  alone  by  tho 
consideration  that  it  would  probably  result  in  curtailing  the  immense  and  compara- 
tively useless  expense  to  which  the  government  is  now  subjected  in  maintaining  the 
large  military  force  deemed  necessary  for  the  protection  and  defence  of  the  citizens  of 
Texas. 

The  arrangements  adopted  'nst  year  for  the  removal  of  the  Seminole  Indians  in 
Florida  to  the  country  occupied  by  their  brethren  west  of  the  Mississippi,  failed  of 
entire  success;  only  a  jKirticm  were  removed,  and  a  niunlx'r  still  remain  within  the 
district  temporarily  assigned  them,  on  the  gulf-side  of  the  peninsula.  These  continue, 
as  heretofore,  in  charge  of  the  military,  and  this  department  has  no  control  or 
jurisdiction  over  them. 

Notwithstanding  the  efforts  that  have  been  made,  and  the  heavy  expense  incurred, 
during  the  last  six  years,  to  effect  the  removal  of  the  Choctaws  remaining  in 
Mississippi,  a  considerable  numlxr  still  continue  indisposed  to  migrate  to  the  country 
provided  for  the  tribe  west  of  the  State  of  Arkansas.  Anxiety  is  felt  that  the  State 
of  Mississippi  shall  be  speedily  relieved  of  this  incmnbrance,  and  the  Indians 
transferred  to  more  comfortable  homes  among  their  brethren,  where  they  would  be 
comparatively  prosperous  and  happy.  In  view  of  past  results,  it  is  evident  that  more 
efficient  measures  are  necessary  to  accomplish  their  removal.  These,  it  is  hoped,  may 
be  devised  and  put  into  successful  operation  at  an  early  day. 

Conceding  the  general  wisdom  and  justice  of  the  policy,  adopted  in  1847,  of  paying 
the  annuities  to  the  Indians  on  the  jwr  capita  principle,  in  my  judgment,  there  are 
material  objections  to  the  manner  in  which  it  has  been  practically  applied.  The 
regulation  on  this  subject  provides  that  a  portion  of  the  annuities  may  be  set  apart  by 
the  Indians  for  national  and  charitable  purposes.  These  purposes,  however,  have 
never  been  particularly  defined  ;  rules  are  not  prescribed  for  determining  the  amounts 
to  be  provided  for  them,  nor  have  measures  Ijeen  taken  to  encourage  the  Indians  to 
make  so  wise  and  beneficial  a  disposition  of  their  funds.  They  naturally  desire  to 
receive  individual!}'  the  full  amount  of  their  respective  shares,  and,  consequentl}-,  their 
entire  annuities  have  been  distributed  equally  among  them.  However  fair  and 
equitable  this  mode  of  payment  may  appear,  it  is  not  altogether  just  to  the  chiefs,  nor 
consistent  with  sound  policy.  It  is  through  the  medium  of  the  chiefs  that  the 
government  holds  intercourse  and  dealings  with  the  tribes,  in  the  transaction  of  their 
more  important  business,  and  it  is  not  unreasonable  that  they  should  expect  more 
from  the  government  than  the  common  Indians  receive,  in  consideration  of  their 
station  and  the  services  they  perform.     But,  according  to  the  present  mode  of  pacing 


i  i 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


660 


their  niiiiuitieH,  the  Tiidiniis  iiiv  all  ami  aUku  plaood  on  a  comiiion  lovi-l ;  and.  as  no 
disniniiiiation  is  made  in  favor  of  the  rhiofs,  thoir  intlnonco  in  not  only  diininislicd, 
but  a  ficlinjrof  oontenipt  for  frovcrnnu'iital  authority  in  general  is  extensively  inspired. 
Evils  of  no  ordinary  magnitude  are  tlnis  pnxluced,  which,  it  is  Ixdieved,  nniy  ho 
remedied  by  a  proper  exercise  of  the  discretionary  iM)\ver  over  this  subject  vested  in 
the  President  and  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior. 

Tlic  greatest  difliculty  which  the  government  and  individuals  have  to  contend  with 
in  their  efforts  to  ameliorate  the  condition  of  om*  Indians,  is  their  strong  and 
nncontrollable  appetite  for  ardent  spirits,  and  the  facility  with  which  they  can  still  Ik; 
procured,  notwithstanding  the  stringency  of  our  laws  and  the  strenuous  efforts  of  the 
agents  and  military  to  prevent  its  intrtKluction  among  them.  It  is  a  deplorable  fact 
that  there  are  many  pt'rsons  engaged  in  the  villanous  business  of  smuggling  li<pior 
into  the  Indian  country,  while  others,  less  daring,  but  equally  depraved,  are  stationed 
near  their  borders  for  the  purpose  of  carrying  on  an  unholy  traffic  with  them.  The 
States  within  which  these  miscreants  talio  refuge  should  be  invoked  to  put  an  effectual 
stop  to  their  abominations. 

The  W(H"k  of  collecting  and  digesting  statistical  iind  other  infonnation  illustrati\e 
of  the  history,  condition,  and  futiu'e  prospects,  of  the  Indian  trilx's,  has  been 
uiu'emittingly  prosecuted,  and  the  results,  it  is  believed,  Avill  not  only  be  of  mucli 
general  interest,  but  highly  useful  to  the  department  in  the  administration  of  our 
Indian  affairs.  Tiie  first  part  of  the.se  investigations  is  in  press,  and  will  be  laid 
before  Congress  at  an  early  period  of  the  ensuing  session. 

A  striking  disparity  exists  l)etween  the  financial  estimates  of  this  offict;,  submitted 
to  Congress  at  the  conunencement  of  the  last  session,  and  those  i)repared  for  submission 
at  the  conunencement  of  the  next.  The  latter  exceed  the  former  by  a  very  large 
amount,  and,  to  prevent  misconception,  a  brief  explanation  mny  be  necessary. 

Estimates  are  divided  into  two  classes,  technically  called  rajiihtr  and  fjufiul.  The 
first  class  relates  exclusively  to  objects  of  fixed  aiul  permanent  character,  and  to 
appropriations  therefor,  to  bo  expended  within  the  ensuing  fiscal  year;  the  latter,  to 
temporary  and  miscellaneous  objects,  and  to  appropriations  therefor,  to  be  expendid 
within  the  currei\t  as  well  as  the  fiscal  year.  Heretofore  the  practice  has  been  to 
submit  the  regular  estimates  alone  at  the  opening  of  Congress,  and  the  special  estimates 
from  time  to  time  during  the  progress  of  the  .session.  But  in  preparing  the  estimates 
for  the  present  year,  care  has  been  taken,  pursuant  to  your  instructions,  to  make  them 
so  full  and  comprehensive  .as  to  embrace  both  classes  in  one  general  estimate,  thereljy, 
as  far  as  practicable,  placing  before  Congress,  at  a  single  view,  and  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  session,  every  object,  of  whatever  character,  for  which  an  appropriation 
nuiy  1)0  required.  Hence  the  estimates  of  tlie  present  year,  thus  aggregated  and 
condjined,  exceed  the  regular  estimates  of  the  last  81,423,033  49,  and  yet  they  fall 
short  of  tlie  actual  appropriations,  at  the  recent  session,  on  Indian  account,  some 


II 


t 


CGO 


STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION. 


IjV 


$18,000  —  while  tlie  regular  estimateH  of  Iti-st  year  exceed  the  corresixmding  claws  in 
the  present  general  estimate  $4,.1i)0,  —  the  tlifference  being  occaHioned  hy  the  onuHMion 
of  sundry  items  and  the  reduction  of  otherH. 

Great  care  has  also  been  taken  to  make  the  explanatory  remarks  accompanying  the 
estimates  conformable  to  law.  They  succincitly,  but  clearly,  exhibit  the  grounds  on 
which  the  several  items  are  respectively  founded;  and,  although  the  aggregate  is 
large,  it  cannot,  in  my  judgment,  be  materially  diminished  without  detriment  to  the 
public  service. 

The  present  force  of  this  olTice  is  less  than  in  former  years,  and  inadequate  to  the 
prompt  discharge  of  its  greatly  augmented  and  increasing  duties.  An  additional 
number  of  clerks  and  a  thorough  reorganization  of  the  department  are  indisi)en8ably 
neces.sary.  But  as  a  full  and  satisfactory  exposition  of  the  measures  requiri>d  in  this 
connection  would  involve  elaborate  detail,  they  will  form  the  subject  of  a  special 
communication. 

Respectfully  submitted, 


Hon.  A.  H.  II.  Stuart, 

Seo-ctary  of  the  Interior. 


L.   LEA, 

Commissioner. 


~~     1 

S2 

11 

pi 

3     ^-  i 

^m 

en 
o 

«ii 

l^^44E24    t    4    4 

dec 
•a      -a      -a 

.          W    ■           . 

C/J 

_  H 

'|..<|Ulllt 

S            8      1 

1-. 

1 

H          H 

^ 

...       _H 

ninii  |»i|l«Hl 

►jcodood        d       d       d        6       ©        d 
"T  Ts -o -a  ~j  ^ -o      -a      -o      -a      TS      "o      13 

d            e  d  c 

d        do       d 

-.111  -\  I-.U.MIM 

-o           -o  -a  T 

■o      -a  -o      na 

H 

"Ml    ""l.tt 

'.t|l(ll{Mlf 
N|    H.1JJ1I11 

•■111  *■•"!.« 

h 

> 

y 

i 

:^^3^is  3 1  ^ 

^-  H   1 

^      S'l      tj 

^      ^^1 

-^   3J^  1 

f^^5«S?        5        *?        6        6        ?        6 

d             dec 

»       1  1      4 

o 

a7^ 

-o      •=      -a 

TJ               -o  -3  -C 

^     gi    ' 

< 

^1 

,jj 

O" 

•;•; 

pi 

i 

S 

: 

—•      o 

M  : 

:      ••? 

H-t 

'• 

1- 

\ 

■n      cT 

•  t 

■  CI 

C) 

fcj 

-.5 

CI 

XI 

•  co 

PS 

o 

5| 
MS 

1 

1^ 

§§§§  isS 

1  ^' 

s 

f 

t 

c 

It: 

f 

CI        1- 

o 

■s 

O  2 

co" 

S 

5S    8 

CI  O        CI 

CO 

i 

s 

CI   : 
1-  : 

v>  s 

:?|   : 

:      iS 

i 

U  ; 

-f        o 

^ 

s 

5l. 

ss 

^ 

\ 

*        • 

gsi-SSgS 

CI       ^«       •— 

O        !«        M 

X 
X 

O          5C 

o 

2 

J 

s 

^ 

5    -g  ! 

Isi 

O  O  »  tC  O  -.3  O 

--        1-        ii: 

l-- 

s  s 

*5 

O  -i 

'■C 

=  o      -f         ! 

Cm 

c  =  o  -t-f  'r.  lO 

■ra      o      o- 

CO 

in  1 

11 

;c  m      e         , 

o 

9  1  a 

I-  tft  O         X  o  »rt 

»        M        K 

^ 

t      oc 

CO 

•— ^ 

l  =  ° 

-f  5t  lO      eo  (Ti 

1-      1-1      e 

cs 

r^ 

«»p^  -< 

.It 

:S 

•IC 

i   s 

w    ; 

.           .ui 

O 

•  CJ 

*  1— 1 

•CI       o 

CO      • 

U-i 

:  cs 

;  CI 

:  X)      o 

:  1- 

:s 

.  oo 

.  1- 

;  =     © 

"1,   • 

•  "-L 

<! 

•  OJ 

•CI 

•  O        CI 

•^    • 

•            •  CI 

^ll 

•>n 

•  cs 

•  X/ 

•M 

•  t.- 

•  i-H 

j: 

to 

■        • 

■           • 

O  =  C  55  OO  O 

to         M        C5 

O 

O        -f 

,_, 

!=■   CO 

cc 

"?®    r 

H 

N 

o  =  o  r;  o  o  o 

•»»•        00        cs 

o 

o      in 

1^ 

o  o 

o 

■n  X      1- 

=  i 

^  o  ^  ^-  o  x>  o 

O        1^        .- 

1- 

O        ift 

!0 

s  o 

•V* 

-"  o       ■^ 

!i 

=  c.  =.  -o  o  «  o 

lO       CJ       c 

I.-; 

O        Cl 

uO 

o  1- 

; 

K 
S 

S'^ 

O  C  ^  1  -  o  —  o_ 

X      1-      c- 

'^ 

O         i.C 

ir: 

—  I- 

n- 

r:  o      1- 

=  ^ 

-c'  o  o      -f  —  s~ 

o      ^      c 

X.          iS 

in 

^5 

E-2 

-.  '-•^  O         to  -f  rH 

TO      CI      ■:'. 

o 

< 

«»TI  r5 

^^ 

1  1 

3 
X 

-}a80i3ad)«u 

U^  O  .-  O  -J  miC 

M^t 

t; 

lO      in      :o 

to          o  in  ;3 

O       ^  '«       ?o 

lis 

Iii|.ll1 

—  -^ 

a                OS 

2?          2  H 

J2j    Jli2; 

H 

ii^S'rls'.i    s^=^^2-^^i 

cc2      ;|a:ix 

i         41^ 

v:«     b|^/ 

(25 

UJ^-<15;5^? 

',  <- 

:    :su)    s 

&         £ii     t 

>s  <  U 

:^«s         |l 

^1 

l|2 

i      i|i 

— '      J> 

a 

H 

1                 Icl 

I            kit 

?       ^ 

o           a    ' 
5           c   ?, 

en 

ii 

^                          :s  »  B 

c                  J  it  S 

3      §  3a 

^ 

jfi  i« 

o                               c; 

O 

►S     u 

03 

Pt.  II.  —  71 


661 


■'     ■ 







«s 

ire 

«^ 

[ 

OS 

6 
CO 

o 

1^1 
Hi 

iff 

■:■> 

-JO 

s                1 

i                 ^ 

00 

p-t 

f. 

1 

6       6         1 

13        13            1 

o 

.i'5 

>» 

fr»> 

i^ 

^ 

H 

■E  n'  1* 

CC 

sis 

£i 

2 

2 

h 

H 

E- 

i 

H 

H 

H 

J 

< 

inun  i.-nc'Hl 

■^        6   6 

ocoooood 

6   6        6        6        6         II 

-.M'<*nw.u,Mtn 

"r     -^  -3 

rs        n3        "^        'O        "^        'B        13        '^ 

13-3      TJ      'O      -a         II 

H 
fc5 

0I|1    ,u.Kiw 

H 

HI  ■Jd.Uftllll 

!^        do 

o        a       ©^'^       3.2.2 

i-J               J3 

"^  °       c9      .2      .2 

H 

-"U  •"■^i|A\ 

^       '='= 

'O        ►^        'O        "         »-—         K^        'w        *w 

Iff                         '^      !> 

^;'0       ^       -^       n= 

i   . 

y, 

cE 

d 
a 

Ui 

■SsA 

•?        6   6 

6 

66666666 

6  6       6       6        6         II 

o 

c  V"* 

1       -' 

•13 

TJ'O'O'a'TSTJ'Bra 

•r:  13       i: 

TS         13            11 

o 

o 

is- 

CK 

•< 

e-Ji 

o 

• 

t 

0( 

■  -J 

QC 

f  » 

o 

CO 

:  '^ 

CO 

^ 

is . 

O 

ire 

o 

'.  m 

o 

<; 

i*  i 

o 

4 

1- 

(^ 

1 

?-x 

ire 

;  Si 

1- 

1— 1 
Q 

1  =  5 
II 

-t~ 

1— 1 

1- 

01 

•  CO 

£ 

"    1 

^ 

*.         o  1- 

1- 

o      ire 

1- 

"o 

C 

o 

oc 

CO 

OC 

cc 

c 

01 

C3 

1- 

O  OO 

cc 

O        t-        (T 

CO 

O 

1^ 

•^ 

r-t 

o  c 

-* 

CO 

CD 

O 

•tiT-s 

C'  ^ 

c? 

o      to      1- 

o 

^ 

c- 

-f 

f— 1 

O  c: 

CO 

CO 

(^ 

-  £  3 

cr.  Tl 

o       — 

o 

01 

^ 

1-       c 

O 

CO  c 

o 

oc 

^ 

c  j;i 

oc  ^- 

I- 

o^      a; 

1- 

-t 

CO 

o_ 

t^c 

-f 

^ 

1- 

n-  rw 

C    ~  "o 

ire'i- 

cc" 

ckT      r- 

o 

ire 

CO 

c- 

of 

ire"  CO 

cc 

oc 

co" 

E  * 

t— 1 

1- 

0 

01 

1- 

r^ 

ig 

<8 

„ 

o 

. 

i£ 

1 

1- 

•  0 

1 

rH 

^u 

o 
o 

l_ 

3 

o 

o 

01 

Ol 

CO 

invest: 

«;  1  5  i 

(il 

.y 

5 

J 

ire 

co" 

o 

01 

co~ 

.^._      __^ 

"o~ 

"~Tre 

O         C 

c: 

1' 

C: 

1" 

(T 

52  ~ 

o  o 

t— 

-1- 

CO 

c  o 

o 

O        ij 

C 

o 

O         00         CC 

CI 

oc 

-t 

CO 

■* 

1 

1^1 

O  iS 

CI 

O         IT 

ir 

o 

o      ire 

CC 

o 

oc 

oc 

ire 

Ol 

b 

O  00 

x. 

o      c 

c: 

o 

ire 

cr 

ire  yi 

c- 

CO 

o 

Is 

Ot  CO 

1— t 

o 

1™ 

Ol 

CO 

ire 

Ol 

QC   1— 

co" 

e: 

c- 

00 

t3 

o 

-1 

^l?l 

•  -^ 

.    f-H          1     1 

o 

c 

3 

•  1^ 

.  CO 

I^ 

o 

o 

:  -<" 

•  CO 

r-H 

o 

II 

;  oc 

•ire 

CO 

'If 

o 

^ 

.  o 

•  "^„ 

co_ 

< 

Iff 

^ 

r 

4 

.  1- 

•  01 

l-H 

£1 

•  I— 1 

l-H 

j= 

c  o 

■^ 

o      tr 

o 

o 

o 

cc 

QC 

o 

o  o 

1- 

1- 

l- 

H 

N 

o  o 

o 

o      c 

c; 

o 

c 

CO 

OC 

T-H 

o  o 

o 

o 

•t 

c  2 

o  o 

l-H 

O       C: 

(^ 

-*• 

c 

1^ 

f 

I-H 

o  o 

OO 

cc 

-f 

^ 
O 

o  o 

■^ 

o      -n 

-t 

I.H 

Ol 

o  o 

CO 

OO 

1- 

c*-; 

c_o_ 

o_ 

o      ir 

1- 

-t 

c 

r" 

1-^ 

co__ 

o  o 

CO 

co__ 

'<< 

3  o 

c - 

o~i-^ 

ci" 

o"      I- 

(T 

•*' 

1- 

CO 

CC 

l-H 

i-Tco 

CO 

CO 

I"" 

H 

1—1 

" 

0 

01 

1^ 

r^ 

rH 

P3 

l-lrl 

..w 

1^ 

*1ll.)JJ<>ila}U}| 

ira      ire  ire 

o 

■re      c; 

in 

CO      ire 

ire 

CO 

CO 

ire  CO 

ire 

CO 

o 

~iiir 

i  CO 

li^ 

§c 

ic.  1 

o  0 

i^^ 

"li 

J  5 

a 
goi 

a 
§1- 

c  *  _-3 

—  -I< 

~  -t 

—  -f      i 

—  -t 

—  -*< 

"  -t 

—  -fi 

H 

E5  5-^ 

1    g.l'^s 

St»SS 

oiSS 

r/  '»         e 

'^^      £ 

•/Ji 

m'^ 

^iS 

II 

'/5 

x5 

v:s 

i?l- 

ui    us;^ 

-1 

s& 

U' 

D        u: 

LJ 

!_) 

'hJ 

Ui? 

_P__ 

D 

Ui 

•^1 

:  ^ 

; 

o  : 

[4 

J.S 

.  -a 

• 

« 

H 

5|^ 

:=" 

.2 

1  : 

•< 

■  'S 

s 

«  I 

H 
c« 

i  1  ( 

1 
1 

|i 

l« 

t;::^ 

U1 









502 


VI 


m 


;w 


^•■72 


H 


M' 


H 


£2 

-S 

■-;3 

1^ 

—  o 

^. 

s 

l5f 

1— 

o      o 

-f         CO 

CO 

« 

d 

13 

1—1 

a      CO 

l-S         r-l 

If? 

d 

00         QO 

i  1-  d  . 

CC         00 
^         &»           . 

1?.    <     s> 

Hi 

>^ 

>^      >»      >> 

t*»    > 

>»       t>* 

-  «  » 

rt 

c; 

rt         c 

K 

« 

gia 

2 

£ 

£1 

2       £ 

^ 

J 

H                        H 

H 

H 

H 

_.H_J- 

H 

H 

-p<>)tl)'H 

aj 

niun  (►.h!-«k( 

•^-3         TJ 

d 

c 

o 

c 

d 

6        6        6        6 

o 

o 

d 

-.Jpsj  l^v.tj.tillj 

■3 

■c 

ra 

-3 

•3 

-3        -3        -3        -3 

•3 

•3 

-3 

.1111  iu-mvv 

H 

mI(|U.Ch.I 
ri]  iK.u.iiii! 

d 

C 

1 

^ 

d 

d        d        d        d 

C 

O 

d 

■3 

f 

•3 

•O        -3        '3        -3 

■3 

•3 

ra 

a  ^ 

ft)  a 

a 

-■i-S 

=?  d        c 

d 

o 

o 

C 

d 

d        c 

d         d 

C 

O 

o 

tl~' 

■=  -T3         T= 

-3 

"a 

"3 

-3 

-3 

F3           r- 

-O        -3 

13 

-3 

■3 

a 

If" 

C) 

•/. 

-H             O 

1- 

C 

O 

•  (X         CI 

C 

-f 

1  C'j 

* 

1.-5               O 

Tl 

ut 

.  ■^        ,x 

-t< 

-t 

1  ■'- 

1? . 

• 

1.-;           o 

-1" 

._^ 

:  to    o 

1- 

cc 

~* 

t-  !! 

o          o 

-r 

.  f         CK 

•/J 

1.11 

-t           o 

^ 

.  i- 

O 

cr. 

1  ***■ 

=r        o~     cT 

,- 

O" 

•  cT     lis      oo 

?- 

V 

y, 

•  X 

li  a 

■ra 

-<5 

1  TI 

« 

ox 

c 

M 

-t 

-.O 

tr 

O        i.'i 

is. 

o-*      c 

O 

1- 

1- 

©         1- 

'S'?! 

O  1-       c 

00 

-t 

._- 

O         O         C5 

=.!! 

o  z       -t 

r- 

TC           1- 

=  -t      oc 

o_ 

-t 

'"'v      -; 

=  io 

Try."    M 

1' 

X 

B  5 

X  (M         P- 

o 

CI 

O                       r^ 

•<  0 

_  „ 

*» 

L- 

— 

'-X) 

1^ 

ire 

C5          1- 

C 

c_ 

.•=M 

o 

M 

1' 

■        CI 

f         -t 

i-C 

t* 

'       t:  <-  i  'C 

— 

X 

O        'tl 

^ 

c 

c 

•^ 

1        i'f-=J 

..-^      1-. 

^         i^ 

cr 

ex 

£i  r  3  i- 
<  =  a  «- 

*' 

r         If: 

^ 

f— 1 

'v       '^ 

-!<" 

c; 

■/ 

a 

1           5  S*- 

_    ^ 

-   "" 

<s 

(^ 

1* 

o  - 

.  •     1-       -. 

■=^  O         C: 

o 

o 

5         CI         O 

^\ 

*   O         lit 

-t 

c 

o 

CC         1-        — 

k 

o  -t"       or 

c 

1- 

X 

1-         'X 

u 

=   B  - 

— ^..o       c: 

* 

C." 

~t 

^ 

o 

%  =  ' 

-t'l-T 

CI 

'"' 

M                     rn 

1 

"1 

■          o 

X. 

t£ 

>      «o 

CC 

:': 

r— 

c^ 

^T 

Js 

•.y 

3           o 

c 

ur 

>      I-l 

c 

>      -t 

-t 

-t 

re 

'  1?:. 

c 

^ 

— . 

-f 

■■      e- 

C 

o 

sf 

o 

I_; 

o 

^            *' 

lit 

CI 

s 

X 

"L 

■^ 

"          X 

<X 

cc 

j^&i 

(^ 

i.-^" 

r     in 

l- 

i- 

5 

J 

•  ! 

<               iC 

l^r 

e 
•2 

j: 

^   —           w 

-t 

c 

^ 

^ 

•+      1- 

1      N 

=  o      ■= 

X 

1^ 

^ 

t      C-. 

3 

1             c  ; 

c:  :r        C 

o 

o 

C^ 

i.C        o 

■^ 

=  =•      c 

o 

c 

"^        CI 

!^ 

;         c  ^ 

—  o        1^ 

c 

- 

'--V 

.       cy 

'•"v       '^., 

1 

3   3 

!              1- 

CI  x>       ?<■ 

cT 

1 

r        -fT 

c 

i-T     .x" 

< 

X   71         t- 

-f 

CI 

<; 

Hoi 

•)«A)a.)J.)HitI 

in  m      If 

s      «o 

If 

tf 

If 

i      CO 

«o      « 

)      >ra      CO 

ir 

IT 

>r 

5 

H 

i  ""J-s»'" 

rt.-  s" 

_- 

£ 

o" 

£3 

a 

a       a 

a        a 

c" 

a 

q" 

?I5I 

-    I'M 

•  —  -r 

3c 
-^  -t 

•  3  CI 

■    —    -f 

S2iS% 

1    ?  «    c  1^ 

C M 

i? 

Ji; 

i:? 

y.  ■/!■ '" 

to 

■':- 

to     to 

.  v.  i  X  * 

to      to 

c/;2 

'i- 

to 

s 

^1 

1:^ 

•  a 

P 

w 

J. 2 

'   ii 

H 

X-i 

tfj 

•  "^ 

:3 

H 

e-|  J 

*  *-  S 

"2  = 
c  £■" 

o 

=  ■5 

rt  .=1 

^1 

li 

S 

to 

-    rt 
M 

6 

■  3 


1JI 


5  -M  a 


^i  S^   =    ^ 


^-  ■— '  ■i:'   f'  *  ' 


C6:3 


1 

st  day 
2.     To 
Indian 

1 

op 

c 
c 

C 

•2 

1 

o    o    oo    o      o      o    o    o            o 
o    p    oo    o      o      o    o    o            o 

O      1-     to  .*     Ol        11         dl     O     CI                  o 
CO     r-l     r-l  rH     1<        Cl        ,-,     (j)     rH                  C| 

CI 

L.  LEA,  Commissioner. 
Office  Indian  Jiffairs,  November  27M,  1850. 

c. 

Estimate  of  Funds  required  for  the  fiscal  year,  commencing  the  fir 
of  July,  18i>l,  and  terminating  the  thirtieth  day  of  June,  185 
wit :    Office  Expenses,  Compensation  to  the  Commissioner  of 
Affairs,  and  to  the  Clerks  and  Messengers  in  the  Office  of  the  C 

1^? 

o    c    CO    OCO    o  aa          occ      j 
o    c    CO    oco    ooo      occ      s 

O      1-     O  1<     »»<        CI         CI     O  C  C        CCIOO         £ 

orr-r-rHr-         ^         rH—l-ire         rH                       Q 

1 

£ 

o. 

i 

s 

< 

0 

c 
o 

f^-^'^^    -  ■  - ,  ■  ■„■■■■. 

1836,  May  9 

uses  of  the  ofiGce,  to  wit : 

inding,  and  stationery- 

g                "O       tJ        p 

a                      DOB 

"="      S    .."    .'^'o"co 
■2  <?<  j3  o  X.  »      C-.  '^  *'  J  cs 
?^  8  i>,'E  t^  do  ^  to^  2  s». 

1  OC  1-  O  OC  <C  OC  «C  OC'  00  1^  o 

t  —  -fco-Hco-rco-i'-H-i.co 

cocooocooooocooooocoooo 

■  S 

il 

— 

Commissioner 

Chief  clerk 

One  clerk 
One  clerk 

Three  clerks 

Two  clerks 

One  clerk 
Two  clerks 

Two  messengers 
I'ontingent  expe 
Hlank  books,  I 

i 
1 

1— 'CO-f^HCO'.HrHrHrHCO-t^H          r.4 

& 

£ 

•a 

-c  c  I-  r^  «o  1-  00  w  00  -i  -f  1-  o  1^ 
:d  -t  c  CI  -t  CI  00  CI  'C  -r  o  CI  CI  CI 

i.C  -f  CI        -t         CI         CI  -f  CI 

e 

-fcooocoxsoirtocotouo      o 

f 

i 
* 

5 

io 

Statement  exhibiting  the  Annual  Interest  appropriated  by  Congress  to 
pay  the  following   Tribes  of  Indians,  in  lieu  of  investing  the  sum  of 
money  provided  by  treaties  and  laws  in  stocks. 

< 
> 

aa 

i 

< 

f 

OC 

c 

i 
1 

c 
> 

e 

Resolution  of  the  Senate,  May 

27,  1836. 
Treaty,  September  29,  1837. 

Treaty,  October  21,  1837. 

Treaties,  November   1,  1837, 

and  October  13,  1846. 
f  Treaties,  October  21,  1837, 
I      and  October  11,  1842. 

Resolution  of  the  Senate,  Ja- 
nuary 19,  1838. 

Do.        do.        do.      do. 

Treaty,  November  23,  1838. 

Treaty,  May  20, 1842,  and  law 
of  Congress,  June  27, 1846. 

Treaty,  January  14,  1846. 

Treaty,  June  5,  1846. 

Treaty,  September  27,  1830,  i 
and  Uws  of  1842  and  1845. 

Department  of  the  Interior, 

Office  Indian  .affairs,  JVovember  2~th,  1850. 

1 

MJ)U|  J 

■paiHIJd 
n«niiii« 
0  junouiv 

12,000 

15,000 

8.770 
59,250 

50,000 
7,S75 

3,456 

17,.500 

3,750 

10,000 
32,150 
43,600 

■n 

in 

in" 

■JUO. 

jod  ami 

UT  o      in      in  lO        lo    iQ      in  in  in      m  m  in 

-^1  p<tp[-vuj 

*inani 

846,080 
200,000 

300,000 

175,400 
1,185,000 

1,000,000 
157,500 

69,120 

350,000 

75,000 

200,000 
»M3,000 
872,000 

1— 1 

CI 

BS 

O 

s 
< 
•< 

Chippewas  and  da  was 

Sioux  of  Mississippi 
Sacs  and  Foxes  of  Mis- 
souri   

Winnebatrops 

O     M     S 

CO     i5 

I 

Creeks  

Kanza.s 

en 

'i 

CI 

£ 

i 

2. 

____«_____^__^_^^_^.^__^.^___^__ 

1 

564 


M 


P^ 


H 


02 


5  »« 


b    e 


:S    S 


o    s 


a  "^ 

1.5  r« 


o    Si, 
CO    « 


.h"« 


^  s 


.'fe. 


a    sj 


"^ 


^ 


<     M 


CO        l-H  I-H 


o  o  o  o  o  o 
oo  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o  o  o 
o  o  o  o  o  o 


O  O  O  O  O 

o  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o  o 
o  o  o  o  o 

If?  irt  1^  »^  o 


©  o  o  o  ooo 

o  o  o  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o  c  o  o 

o  o  o  o  o  o  o 

uT  »ra  if7  »o  "C  »c  o 

^-  (M  T-^  rH  i-H  1-H  ;0 


OS  j3  s-i  lo  m 

O    «    «    C3  ^ 


h,l-5 


3  J3 


S  S  o. 

^^    3    3    «J 
I*  l-S  1-5  1/3 


^        ^  '^ 


-f  I-  O  O  O  f 

CC  C?  -t  ^  lO  cc 

Gc  -ic  ac  :>o  00  oo 


«(-        «« 


1-5  1-5 


03  S 


i§ 


.pi  E 


iS'C 

c  3  g     M  g 

ill  li 


to  " 


1 


«s 


S  3 


«  s      tr«a 


a  S  .2  3  a 

«  3  b  m 


rf.    a    a         3    aj  J3    C  J  J       i3  ,=u       c 


c  to     c  ci     ^ 


&p 


.r   'K'SiS  3-^  c 


>>■? 


&•!»         £>>» 


■  3  «  T  • 
S'S^'S  £  S  S 


'  CO  I— t  *t  rH 


O  M  O  I-  r-l 
CO  O  11  51  f 
I—  I— I  PH 


I—       f— t  f-(         CC  00 


1"      to  to       -t  ■ 


s- 


&  3- 


3      W~        ■=  : 

^         3  -  rt 


!/3  Ph 


565 


U' 


J 


f/)! 


w 


18.34. 
iw  30 
leag't. 
vv  law 
1834. 

->                     o—  « 

"  T  f  ■"  u 

, 

£    - 

•3-S         l-^l 

s.S'^-ii 

I— 1 

>» 

tL-^-^^s^ 

00 

ii        -Si 

■sl-s 

^ 

.a  - 

S"'-?'-' 

o 

CO 

b 

Wt»                    a-K 

CK— — 

o 

O       O 

.    , 

o                           ... 

o 

o 

o      o 

o 

o 

o 

o      o 

irs 

1-, 

■^ 

^ 

o 

o      = 

-l< 

-f 

W 

CO        o 

-r 

-r 

C5 

O        (W 

-t< 

5^ 

I'- 

r-t 

w^ 

P 

to 

•    •                       • 

d^ 

o    o    o  o    o    o    o 

c 

ocooo^oo 

c  c  o  =  o  o    o 

i-s 

o    o    o  o    o    o    o 

o 

ooooocoo 

c-  o  oo  o  o    o 

B 

o    o    o  o    o    o    o 

O  C'  O  O  S  lO  o  o 

o  oooo  o    o 

O 

o    o    o  o    o    o    o 

O  —  iC  O  >(C  CI  O  CI 

O  O  O  O  -f  I--      CO 

5 

O    O    CI  o    o    o    o 

o 

C  '.3  r-  iC  1-         ;C  CO 

ire  c:  O'  o  3C  CI    o 

;«^ 

-; 

O     ri      r-i  Ct      C4     CO      1-1 

c; 

CO             o 

i-i  CO  r  O                  1-1 

tr> 

CI  rH 

1— 1 
o 

w 

< 

(» 

d 

I 

k 

1 

1           Si:; 

GO                                            CO 

l-H 

6  Nov.  1805 
18  Oct.  1820 
20  Jan.  1825 
0  Jan.  1825 
27  Sept.  1830 
27  Sept.  1830 
18  Oct.  1820 
20  Jan.  1S25 

^^    .  tj  . 

•   "  c   5   c 

CI 

CO 
CO 

r-1 
-3 

?5 
CI 

o 
'Si 

1    ^^     ^     1    f 

■-<  £>£'•'  S-*:^.    >, 

>. .    >^  >^  >i 

rt   *-"   ^    r:   ^ 

£i  g  i:  £!  £i 

1 

w 

< 

i..  .it 

^ 

h*^ 

rt    fcj    s    S    r3 

1— I 

■V                            -3     -rl 

l! 

IS  CO  O  -O  i.C  -H  •S  t3 

•5  Ts  ■£  ■£  •£ 

CO 

s 

H 

^ 

t                               -f      CO 

^ 

CI  —  —  CI  —  CI  --s  — 

-f  TI  -^  v..  V" 

1—1 

r— *—  iS    • ,— ^— , 

^ 

^   'B 

'r> 

« 

?2 

a  vi  o 

•      • 

1 

O 
Q 

fe"? 

e-2  i 
13  "a -g 

o 

3  a 

o 

_3 

b4 

■fc 

s 

l-H 

.1 

<5  g 

a 

2  SJ  a 
I.  M  S 

t 

"I 

1 

•   c 

.1 

t 

liJ  : 

'«  'a 

gJ 
5  ^ 

a 
s 
o 
5 
<1 

s 
a 
a 

3 

.S 

> 

s 

■*        i: 

:: 

-> 

0  chief  15ob 
nuity  for  ed 
0  three  distr 
0  one  Wayn 
ovision  for  b 
.,  for  shop . 

> 

■» 

>.  =  .2  •-  S 
£    /•■  t,  a   : 

;25 

^     -£     P    ^     ^ 

e* 

"      i^  ^  x^     '^^. 

*-»                        *-    tS     O  *2 

O 

Tenth  of  t 
farmers 

Tenth  of  t 

provisio 

Fifth  of  fi 

Fifth  of  f 

C 

c 
t 

Pennanen 

Life  annu 
Pennanen 
Life  annu 

Permanen 
Iron,  stee' 

e            ^   r   -^   ^   S 
c             .H   s    -    -  .^ 

§—  s  a  =  ?J 

!h           e-.«  hi  fi- 

t^ 

Ttl           ■*  -f  -1<            -1<  CO 

CI  CO  o  CI  ire  --  o  o 

ll  ci  -f  cb  qc  cc  CO 

r^  i-H          l-H  CI 

l-H 

H 

<y 

CI         CI  CI  CI         O  CI 

C-.  JO  «r:  i.c  irr  ac  ci  ci 

o  C-.  i»  1-  1-  1-  » 

O         (T!  ^.Ci         O  O 

Ci  ^"  CC  >C0  CO  CO  •— '  •— ' 

CO  o  J.  tr  /:  v.  -.3 

<1 

a- 

CI  CI  CI  CO  CO  CI  CI 

CI  CO  CI  CI  CO 

3 

1^      t^  t^  t~ 

<              b-  t-  l~-  t-  t-  1^  l^  1-- 

w  1-  w  1~  1-  1-  1- 

1«^ 

GO 

H 

to                                1^ 

f 

^      & 

& 

M 

^           ?" 

0 

i        ^ 

f 

w 

ir 

5 

^         h 

9 

1       ^ 

"S 

'ft                                ly 

tl 

13                      Wl 

.)                    QJ 

i     i- 

i 

3            3-   ^   ^   ^   s    ::   :j 

9 

i 

3           2 

3 

t»                   (1( 

t/ 

3             02 

!» 

5117 


H 


f^ 


a    p^ 


P3 


03 


fC4 


H 


CO 


608 


i-O 
00 


» 


H 


i  ^ 


3!  M 


■^  J  §* 

o   >.'■'  _   .  . 

a  -o  a  a  ^ 


-3     :g 


o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o 

O  11  11  I- 

O  I-  Ct  I- 


o  o  o  o 

o  o  oo 

O  CO© 

O  O  lO  o 

©  in  I1 11 


OO  p-i  2  ^  ^ 


^' 


02 


(^ 


w 


S 


Pt.  II.  —  72 


1  3 

4  s 


S,    1 


f*     .     1— ' 

oil  o 


^^    5  i  '^ 


c-:s; 


tuM 


;i    X  II  -^ 


=  56 


'©      -s 


-i  eS 


rt       t-    n    « 


J      ^  lO      J3 


.^=« 


~      -g    -3  -r  -^ 


3©    O 


£^.2  ^.2^-2 
'S  .a  •*!  .22  "^  .-3 


4 

g  • 

•-0 

u   • 

o 
.  to 

"S.  : 

.  f— « 

to    • 

*  Cm 

a     * 

•    O 

■c    • 

•    " 

3      • 

-3      • 

u 

o,   ■ 

•    O. 

•   « 

■a    • 

C*-i        • 

.  « 

t:  : 

:  a 

^  • 

&■  ; 

3       . 

.  > 

:  ^ 

■s  s 

e  c-3 


a  S  u 
in 


fe    O 


5^ 


S5 


^  ^_-Z^'^l-  a  - -a  ='  Si's  - 


qj     OJ     U     <U     3 

•s  B  if  3  a 


CI                    r'i  M 

I— I W hH 


E  S  g  C  . 


3> 


i-a 


i^O    3-; 


» 


■^  ir;  o  >*      m  m  to 


1— iF-ti— IT-I         ^N©r-t        f-^ 

©oios©      c:  "ncii      © 

CO  T^  rH  CO         T™*  ^  ^^         CO 


r-  b-t-  t- 


rH  f-  -i-  so 


51J9 


t 


li' 


w 


^n 


1 

ax 

CI 

CI 

<M 

51 

Cl 

■* 

-tlM< 

M"n  -*  •* 

■t  C)-l<  1< 

■* 

i 

1- 

o 

i 

§ 

i 

s 

s 

CO 

CI  ^ 

CO  CO 

o  e  c:  C5 
CO  CO  -71  <ri 

^  -^t  CO  CO 

i-H  -J  C!  O 

m  O  1-01 

I-.  t-H  iM 

1 

IS 

t^ 

l"- 

1^ 

1- 

t- 

t- 

1- 

l~l^ 

t-  r^  1^  t^ 

t^  1-  t~  1^ 

t- 

J 


^ 


a 

s 

3 


670 


00                  «| 

MM                          S. 

&  '  ^  :i'H  ^M  t"  ^ 

•* 

i-H 

£         1  0"  J  1  0  ^    ^ 

1— ( 

*i                 Ph           *!     Sh           ♦J         >.    " 

W  6-. 

o 

CO 

^          -^  'J  — '  :2     £2 

,"-=» 

§ 

g 

'■     0 

g 

•i< 

0 

.     0 

o 

'^ 

a: 

-f 

•     irt 

S5 

W 

H 

-t 

CC 

•     <^. 

C! 

>^ 

t- 

oT 

'     iC 

w 

CJ 

U? 

.     C) 

» 

St 

§ 

■ 

Zi 

8 

§  g  s  s 

g   go   g     0     0     0     g 

i 

g         ggS 

^ 

^ 

o 

0      0      0      © 

0000         0         0         0         0 

<- 

0      oc  0 

a 

3 

c 

0000 

<-. 

■  .-5         <=<=<=> 

S 

c 

0        0         M        C 

0    CI  -t    I—       to      0      CI       c 

c 

-r      w  =  01 

;<5 

•< 

o 
;? 

r- 

»n      CO               HI 

CI                                              1- 

>" 

CO      c  CI ^ 

CI 

1— 1 

Q 

an 

^. 

.... 

0 

._*^, 

^ 

CI 

^ 

i 

s     g 

P^ 

J 

« 

^H 

J 

g      g"  - 

« 

1 

a 

S*     -•       3       s 

.  ..   g   .    .    .    . 

' 

<1 

a 

1 

0  >.  ^ 

3 

9       '" 

•Sec      >> 
3  to      13  3     3 

9."    b 

W 

•< 

t4 

i" 

I-H 

1    r> 

,,—_*---,—     '      — .  —      .--^-.  '--'-.  --^ 

— ^ 

/— '^-^— -\  *  -i  £ 

1 

•a 

a 
§ 
S 

P5 

Ft 

2 

2 

S  :  $  : 

0 

.^^i  :^  :^  -.^  :'3 

g^:  ;!  = 

3 
ft 

O 
Q 

1— 1 
P 

J 
1 

c 

< 

c 
1 

> 

to 

Cm 

to 
'C 

3 

■o 

■3 

a 

r  physicians  so  long 

ir  reservations 

ments  for  the  purcha 

a* 

.2 

i 

"                   "             "      for  100  barrels  of 

"                   "             «      for  500  fish  barre 

Three  blacksmiths  and  a.ssistimts  for  twenty  ye 

and  during  the  pleasure  of  Congress 

Iron,  steel,  &c.,  for  shops,  for  twenty  years  and  d 

ing  the  pleasure  of  Congress 

Gunsmith  at  Maekiuac  for  twenty  years  and  d 

ing  the  pleasure  of  Congress 

Iron,  steel,  &c.,  for  shop,  for  twenty  ye.'i-s  and  d 

ing  the  pleasure  of  Congress 

Two  farmers  and   assistants   (during  pleasure 

!" 

SliO.liO,  being  the  valuati 
of  land  .set  apart  by  trca 

)r  education  purposes  . . . 

instalments  as  annuity  . . 
fir  two  smiths'  cstablisfin 

stalmcnt  for  pay  of  two  m 

B 

d 

c 
eg 

? 
1 

c 
* 
1 

s 

a 

S,S.S    • 

1 

^a 

Q 

P 
o 

s 

>> 

a 
0 

:i"s 

0% 

Vaccine  medicine  and 
the  Indians  remain 

Seventeenth  of  twenty 
of  provisions 

Seventeenth  of  twenty 
fi500  Ihs.  tob:ii-fc)  . 

President) 

Two  mechanics 

Interest  at  5  per  cent, 
of  tiftj--four  sections 
of  •2d  June  1825,  f 

Fourteenth  of  twenty 

it                   tt 

"        fifteenth  in 

1 

■<J 

T)H            •^           -ll            Tfl 

•^      -!l<  ■«*  1-      t-      1-      r-      I- 

1^                               CI  CI  Cl 

4 

1^ 

•     CI         CI         CI        CI 

CI      ci  CI  to      eo      eo      m      co 

CO                         000 

n 

0       0       CJ       0 

C5         0  —.  35         0          0         C5         0 

0                       l-l-l- 

<! 

i 

— 

1 

-f      f      i<      -r 

-i>      -f-r-r      -r      -r      -i>      -i" 

*t*                               1.1  I.*  0 

h- 1 

;3 

»- 

■    t^      1-      t-      1- 

r-      i^  1- 1-      j^      1^      i-      r~ 

I' 

1^  t^  1- 

H 

j! 

'•0 

%> 

c» 

( 

! 

M 

H 

^ 
3 

1 

j 

i 

1 

1 

i 
3 

571 


0 

1 

eo 

1          ^    ■ 

' 

• 

s       ^y 

1—1 

■S         T- 

1.0 

.a           la  a 

00 

1-H 

■5            S'"' 

o 

62       (£ 

S 

^ 

g 

s 

g 

1 

f 

^ 

8 

00 

f-1 

g 

« 

oe 

S 

_   3 

gg       g 

g 

ggggggggggg 

'W 

t  g  gggg 

•i 

o  o            o 

c 

ssgggiiggfg 

t^ 

0    0    0  c  0  = 

O 

1 

Sm             o. 

g 

Sz; 

^ 

F- 1 

i-T     TicT     o'o'     cT-f 

of 

eP         i-T 

^  rH       <ri  -H 

N 

^ 

1^  ^ 

?:? 

■y. 

i" 

^ 

1    So'    —  ^  2 

P3 

I 

u 

3 

y 

2 

0    *i                  a* 

^  .J  —  -  0 

a 

•  Ct  -M  Tl        11  -Il        'M  -ri 

1-     ^                        01 

1 
1 

l-l-                 ? 

>.        ■s'ir'i^i'     iMr     i^i^ 

«?? 

>>    >%                 >> 

5| 

2 

^m  11 II, 

53  X 

1 1_  J 

*^ 

si....^ 

li 

■3 

t 

3     a 
E»      U 

"9 

si           s 

-3-3                      -3 

i 

il 

O 

^_c^ 

-r 

'7 

-f  cc« 

'M  _  71  TO  ^ r?  «___ 

Ol    _ 

«0_OI_                     0 

1 

i 

-t-9 

) 

o 
S 

'3 

11  i 

>> 

■3 

a 

a 

'A 

•    3 

•J 

11 

tij-5   ."  i 

1 

(2 

£ 

s 

o 

a   d     • 

S 

c   0 

D     a 

PS 

a 
P5 

,1 
•1 

a 
s 
•< 

c 

2 

1 
1 

oil 

•3 

:     2-1 

'           IX    3 

s 

1 

.2 
1 

1. 

%- 

.2 

a 

J 

ity  instalments  a.s  a 
nty  instalments  as 

!fs 

■n 

C 
0 

1 

B 

>^ 

S 

li 

—  .a 

g-g, 

a  a 

lie  pleasure  of  Con 
n  for  blacksiiiitli  ar 
n  f(ir  iron,  steel,  &( 
be  pleasure  of  Con 

Amount  1 

>^ 

a>^              >^                  .;i-^2-aao.= 

V 

c    0 

M 

CJ 

.■S                J  .-s  o  o  g  fe  j: 
33--:     03&0'*-"" 

^ 

;!i  '7 

tC'x  '7    SD                    II 

3  ^ 

'E. 

©  *  = 

a  T-  T  c 

o 

fl  " 

.§ 

"^  i 

t«^ 

'i'i 

"C   c   0  ■  = 

a 

c 

a                .«jflt^,]c^o-** 

c 

C    £. 

?5     t     t.     - 

^ 

S 

•3  ■*= 

?■ 

*           i:,^  °.a  »^  >. 

-fl 

£.a,„^  co.^ 

S  c 

■t- 

B    B    ^    S    =    B    C 

p 

a 

3  "^ 

c 

a               '3  c  "5  'g  ■S  a  '3 

B 

<u 

i 

Permane 

Life  anni 
Permane 
Nineteen 
Life  anni 
Nineteen 
[Seventee 
Life  anui 

CJ 

CJ    CJ  ,        C     iJ    0    c 

o 

•< 

1 

1 

a 
0 

iiJiiil 

fc-      U      QJ      =      fc.      U      - 

1 



.^i?- 

s            ■* 

c 

1          Tji  eo  M  cic-i  di  D5  »:  CO  «  M 

01 

CO  CO      eo  CO  eo  oi               j 

H 
H 

1 

^  _ 

<               00 

:£ 

-J  -^  >c  i^  oc'  o  C-.  c.  ire  11  CO 

Ol 

Iff  »      ts  :=  -.c  Qc 

u^  C 

>          -t* 

c 

•re  T-«  oc  —  -« 11 1-  1-  C-.  CO  CO 

-1" 

w  ^      c:  c.  ;:  •- 

<           -i< 

■-i^cocoeocococof-* 

-* 

01        01  0101  cr 

i 

«-  r- 

i~ 

t^ 

h- 

1-  i-  i~      i~.  t^  r-                1  1 

i«5 

> 

1 

1 

H 

S) 

& 

to               &               §3 

cc 

M 

7 

1       M       M 

1 

W 

* 

i 

1 

7 
! 

1  1          1 

2  M              Oi 

L — _ . , . _^ 1 

572 


CO 


CO 


H 


a 

PJ 

05 


» 


» 


ta  J  .^  J 


s: 


o  o  o  o  o  c 


Tl  Tl  Tl  -M  i 


71  II  C  — 


1 1—  ^^  ^^  I— I 

i-  s   u  a 

.  ^A  1  •■'J  '-5 

:  - '?  =  ? 

71  £":•  .1 


•z   C  %  .    -z  ^    -     ?•» 


O  = 


c;  ti 


:: 


-a  ■"'       -e 


r-2 


•.71  =^  lU 


■e  t; 


n^ 

-s      1 

*       * 

*    * 

\ 

Ifr 

%•% 

§-1 

:^ 

-  o 

X    -n 

>^-^ 

41 

0 

1 

r 

\ 

11 

2  3i 

-^ 

.-'-a 

.w> 

• 

d   *- 

1 

X 
^ 

II 

o 

§ 

^  ft* 

o 

c    i 

11 

s 

^ 

-  i^ 

^ 

l-^ 

c 

C 

a  s 

-    ^ 

:1 

» 

'>>_! 

S.-5 


3  g  d  a  -  =  s  s 


a,     I1.2.SN 


K  J 


o)  s-i  CI  CI  e<  ■f  1 . 


<  i-4- 


CG 


00         OO  «  1—  >-l  O  I—  I- 
^         "  —  11  'M  Tl  O  II 

M       CO  CO  to  CO  sc  -t 


01  Ol  01  01  ' 


1"^  ICO  O  O 


t-  (^  I-  l^  1^  I- 


I-  I-  I-  1-  I- 


jc^o  Ob 


S.  ^• 


-  ^ 


11  I 


573 


w 


M 


P^ 


H 


■s.a 


U^ 


3     1b^ 


CC^ 


»  * ■*,  «c 


ft    n  *t« 


4 

o 

'/i 

3 

3 

^ 

.'< 

rA 

>>    • 

:  s 

S 

*^ 

*2  : 

•3 

^ 

u 

:;2 

a 

;3 

a 

§  • 

a  • 

"3 

a 

1  : 

a     ; 

•  f^ 

S> 

F 

r:>  • 

i^ 

.a 

o 

o 

o 

1.  -  -t 

^^ 

-a  o 

:  ^,  5 

%  ? 

S.S. 


Vi 


;, ^_ 

.  **^ 

^i  ■• 

w  &.  • 

c 

SJ 

S'-^ 

^  *-   . 

tl": 

s  'c   : 

^•3 

<D-3      . 

J3      -     • 

u    3     . 

•22     ; 

o  "3     • 

>    .s  a  • 

:::>■«    ! 

1 

£  S   : 

cc 


il         a-H 


e  "  fe  ■ 


H       .3 


"  I  S  " 


«.■  I- 1- 1- 


I- 1^  t~  i~ 


eo  rH 


t-  r-  r-  h- 


674 


p< 


u 


H 


S    Ph 


M 


f^ 


•S'S  ■a 


M  CI  ll 


ft"     i!  s 
?5    .-t^ 


S      25 
•a    ^-3 


-=  —  -i 
„  c  a. 


3  «yi. 


c£=^ 


".2 


•I".,    i 


1 


-      ?1 


'  -f!      I-  •< 


rt    rt    n  -i 


jJ         £    2i 


«ri         TS  '^  tS  -M  '^ 


'A      ^      , 


i;  t/s 


JO 


^  >^    >^         >^  >>      >» 


?i 


fl      ::      n    :1 


.^    -a^ 


2  -  •- 


s--y 


■  -    P    O    iA    "B 


•^1 


a-z 


o-s 


-3  2^ 


a  i!.2 


«  o  3 


S  2  o  J   .  e  g 


•B&s 


«  *t3    ^  ■ 


:=  —  "S  c  ^ 


-2   o 

•rS       La 


^•2  .Si; 


^1 


.*=i.<^.2.2.2««.2t2  .,r' 


rt  i2.n 


^   ^   •-    wj«  '2  5 


O  I-  C  V.    I-O  , 


3  !.l  ::  -5.  S 


e  e 


■S  = 


?  *tr ' 


.■t:  -jr       a 


32 


KJS 


I .-     §  i ::  ^     ir-B  i- 


pa       hSSi       £1.34 


-s        c  -5   o 


^•= 


ci  - 


»  ic  is       EC  rs 


OSOCCCt        <HOT(M(M>OMCi;M-rU5 


CO  CO        rH  ^  CO 


'  I-  -1"      -f  rs 


Cl-t         ri-MTIrt         CO  —  OTCOIl-f-^-r  —  Tl 


Ol  1-  71  Tl  I-  Tl  01  Tl  I-  1- 

cocococococococotoco 


I-  1^      1^  t-  t^ 


f_  ,^      o  o  o  o 

'      *  I— I  p^  p^  r^ 


.  I-  I-  I-  1^  1^  I-  l~  t^  t^ 


I 


h 


t3:3 


h3o 


?       !3 


a    5 


j)i.'> 


E. 

SPECIAL   ESTIMATE   OF   FUNDS 

Required  for  the  service  of  the  Indian   Department  within  the  present  fiscal  year  ending 

mh  June,  1851. 


OIJccls. 


1.  For  fulfilling  treaty  with  the  Wyandnts,  viz.,  invostiiicnt  in  United 
States  stock  —  per  1st  article  treaty  1st  April,  1850 

Payment  of  debts,  itc.  —  per  1st  aiticle  treaty  1st  April  1S50 

Kxpcnso  of  negotiations,  &c.  —  per  2d  article  treaty  1st  April,  1850. 

2.  For  fulfilling  treaty  with  the  Utflhs,  viz.,  purchase  of  presents, 
agricultural  implements,  &c. —  per  8th  article  treaty  30th  Dee.  1840 

Expenses  of  designating  boundaries  —  per  7th  article  treaty  80th 
December,  1840 

3.  For  fulfilling  treaty  with  tlic  Nuviijocs,  viz.,  purchase  of  presents, 
agricultural  implements,  &c.  —  per  10th  article  treaty  0th  Septem- 
ber, 1840....... 

Expense  of  designating  boundaries  —  per  0th  article  treaty  0th  Sep- 
tember, 1840 

4.  For  arrearages  of  compensation  (from  1st  October,  1850,  to  30th 
June,  1^51)  of  three  Indian  agents  for  the  Indian  tribes  of  Cali- 
fornia—  per  act  28tli  September,  1850 

5.  For  expenses  of  holding  treaties  with  the  various  Indian  tribes  of 
California,  in  addition  to  the  appropriation  for  the  same  object  made 
30th  Sejitember,  1850 ." 

0.  For  expenses  of  removal  and  subsistence  of  the  Chippewas  of  Lake  ' 
Superior  and  the  Mississippi,  from  the  lands  ceded  under  the  trea- 
ties of  "iOtli  .July,  1S!!7,  and  4th  October,  1842,  in  addition  to  the 
appropriation  for  the  same  object  made  30th  September,  1850 .... 

7.  For  expenses  of  the  removal  of  the  sub-ageney  for  the  Chippewas 
of  Lake  .Superior  and  he  Mississippi  from  the  old  site  at  La  Pointe 
to  the  new  one  at  Sandy  Lake,  including  the  erection  r'  the 
necessary  buildings  at  the  latter  place 

8.  For  cnnipensation  and  expenses  of  the  committee  of  Old  Settler 
parly  of  Clierokees,  their  clerks,  &c.,  for  services  rendered  in  jiur- 
suauce  of  the  provision  contained  in  the  5th  article  of  the  treaty  of 
17lh  August,  1840,  in  addition  to  the  appropriation  made  30th 
September,  1850 

9.  For  this  sum  to  enable  the  Department  to  ^ati.sfy  the  claims  of  the 
Creek  Indians  for  mills  stipulated  to  be  furni.«hed  under  the  3d 
section  of  the  treaty  of  15th  November,  1827,  and  5th  article  of 
the  treaty  of  14th  February,  1  s.'i3 

10.  For  compensation  to  the  three  special  agents  and  the  necessary 
interiireters  for  the  Indian  tribes  of  Texas,  including  the  purchase 
of  presents,  authorized  by  the  act  of  30th  September,  l85tl 

11.  For  expenses  of  holding  treaties  with  the  wild  tribes  of  the  Prai- 
rie, and  for  bringing  on  delegations  to  the  seat  of  government .... 

12.  For  collecting  and  compiling  the  necessary  information,  construct- 
ing, engraving  and  printing  maps,  showing  the  Indian  country  and 
the  position  of  the  lands  of  the  different  Indian  tribes  within  the 
limits  of  the  United  States 


8100,000 

85,000 

2,000 


10,000 
8,000 


10,000 
8,000 


6,750 


r5,000 


25,000 


3,000 


1,500 


5,400 


15,000 


200,000 


10,000 


»187,000 
18,000 

18,000 

0,750 

75,000 

25,000 

3,000 

1,500 

5,400 

15,000 
200,000 

10,000 
~"g76 


Jli  [CONTINUED.] 

SPECIAL  ESTIMATE   OF   FUNDS,   &c. 


Otfjects. 


13.  For  interest  on  the  amounts  iiwurded  (^lioctaw  claimants  under 
the  14th  article  of  the  treaty  of  Dancing  Rabbit  Creek,  of  27th 
September,  1830,  for  lands  on  which  they  resided,  but  which  it  is 
impossible  to  give  them,  and  in  lieu  of  the  scrip  that  has  been 
awarded  under  the  act  of  23d  August,  1842,  not  deliverable  East, 
by  the  3d  section  of  the  said  law,  per  act  of  3d  March,  1845,  for 
the  half  year  ending  30th  June,  1852 

14.  For  expenses  of  the  removal  and  subsistence  of  Choctaws  from 
the  State  of  Mississippi  to  the  Choctaw  country  west  of  that  river, 
in  addition  to  former  appropriations  for  the  same  object 

15.  For  payment  to  the  Winnebago  Indians  of  this  sum  erroneously 
charged  against  the  fund  of  810,000,  set  apart  (out  of  the  consider- 
ation to  be  paid  for  the  lands  ceded)  by  the  8th  clause  of  the  4th 
article  of  the  treaty  of  1st  of  November,  1837 ! 

I. 

10.  For  payment  to  the  Cherokee  nation  of  the  amount  due  under  the  1 
Uth  article  of  the  treaty  of  Gth  August,  1840,  as  ascertained  by  the! 
proper  accounting  officers,  pursuant  to  the  resolution  of  Congress  of  j 
7th  August,  1848 ] 

17.  For  the  amount  paid  to  agents  and  others  employed  by  the  govern- 1 
nient  in  carrying  out  the  provisions  of  the  treaty  with  the  Churokees  | 
of  1835-G,  and  improperly  charged  to  and  paid  out  of  the  treaty  j 
fund  as  decided  by  the  Senate 

18.  For  interest  nn  the  aggregate  amount  of  said  sums,  viz.,  8724,003 
37,  at  the  rate  of  five  per  cent,  per  annum,  according  to  the  award 
of  the  Senate  of  September  otli,  1850,  under  the  provisions  of  the 
11th  article  of  the  above-mentioned  treaty 

19.  For  the  re-appropriatiou  of  the  following  sums  (carried  to  the  sur- 
plus fund,  per  warrants  numbered  13  and  10,  and  dated  respectively 
30th  June,  1846,  and  30th  June,  1847 )  under  the  following  heads,  viz. : 

"  Fulfilling  treaties  with  Kanzas" 

"  Fulfilling  treaties  with  Wyandots" 

"  Support  of  blacksmiths,  &c.,  for  Osages" 

"  Payment  of  claims  for  Osage  depredations" 

"  Purchase  of  cows  and  calves  for  Osages" 

20.  For  continuing  the  collection,  and  for  publishing  the  stati.'.tics  and 
other  information,  authorized  by  the  act  of  3d  JIarch,  1847,  and 
subsequent  acts 

For  supplying  deficiency  in  the  amount  appropriated  at  the  last  session 
for  the  same  object 

21.  For  the  expenses  of  an  agent  to  collect  information  to  enable  the 
Department  to  execute  the  law  of  Congress  providing  for  the  per 
capita  payment  to  Cherokecs  under  the  treaty  of  1835-6,  so  far  as 
relates  to  those  Indians  cast  of  tho  Mii  issippi 

22.  For  the  removal  and  sub.-.istence  of  Indians 

23.  For  liriuidated  balance  found  due  the  Creek  Indians  for  losses 
sustained  during  the  lust  war  with  Great  Britain  by  that  portion  of 
the  tribe  that  wius  friendly  to  and  co-operated  with  the  United  States, 
in  i.ocordance  with  the  promise  of  the  government,  and  pursuant  to 
the  report  of  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  to  the  Committee 
on  Indian  Affairs  of  the  Senate  of  May,  1850 


Office  Indi.vn  Affairs,  Nov.  7th,  1850. 

"ptTii.  — tT 


21,800 


20,000 


0,228  28 


627,603  95 


96,999  42 


8,707  21 

355  28 

0,500  ,59 

14,375  50 

312  10 


21,800 


20,000 


6,228  28 


724,003  37 


30,256  74 


19,301 


],.500 
52,510  37 


110,417  90 


81  ,.551, .327  60 


L.  LEA,  Cunimii'sioner. 
'577 


) 


n 


578 


STATISTICS   AND   TOrULATION. 


E.  —  Ileeaj)itulation, 

Amount  required  for  current  expenses $121,500 

<<             "        fur  annuities,  &c 747,945 

«             "        for  additional  items 1,551,327  66 

812,420,722  60 

Office  Indian  Affairs,  November  7th,  1850. 

L.  LEA,  Commissioner. 


li 


EXPLANATIONS   TO   GENERAL  ESTIMATE. 

(A.)  The  items  for  pay  of  superintendents  and  agents  are  greater  by  816,000  than  for  the  same  objects  the 
past  year,  owing  to  the  employment  of  one  additional  superintendent  and  six  agents,  authorized  by  the  acts  of  5th 
of  June  and  28th  September,  1850. 

(U.)  Item  increased  8750  over  estimate  of  last  year,  one  additional  sub-ngent  being  employed  within  the  State 
of  Talifornia,  under  the  discretionary  power  vested  in  the  President  in  the  5th  section  of  the  act  of  30th  June, 
18ii4,  organizing  the  Indian  Department. 

(C.)  Item  increased  8;!,500  over  estimate  of  last  year,  additional  interpreters  being  necessary  for  ew 

agencies  established. 

(D.)  Item  additional  to  the  estimate  of  last  year,  because  of  there  being  tlicn  a  euflicient  balance  on  hand  from 
previous  appropriations.  The  extension  of  our  Indian  relations  in  California,  Oregon,  New  flexico,  and  Texas, 
makes  the  appropriation  asked  for  necessary. 

(E.)  Items  for  tlic  Choctaws  less  by  832,500  than  tlie  estimate  of  last  year;  that  ainount,  being  for  annuity 
and  education,  having  expired  by  limitation  with  the  appropriation  for  the  fiscal  year  1850-51. 

(F.)  Items  for  the  Scminolcs  less  by  81,000  than  for  the  last  year;  that  amount,  being  for  agricultural  imple- 
ments, having  expired  by  limitation. 

(G.)  Item  for  the  Menomonees  less  by  8000  than  for  the  last  year;  that  amount,  being  for  pay  of  miller,  not 
required,  the  Indians  not  removing  to  their  new  homes  as  was  expected. 

(II.)  Item  for  the  Quapaws  less  by  8240  than  for  last  ye.jr,  that  amount  being  for  an  arrearage  due  to  the 
assistant  smith  for  the  previous  year,  viz.,  1849-50. 

(I.)  Item  for  the  Stoekbridges  less  by  82,000  than  for  last  year,  it  not  being  required;  the  payment  of  this 
annuity  being  conditioned  on  the  removal  of  the  tribe,  which  has  not  yet  taken  place. 

(K.)  Items  for  the  Senceas  less  by  8100  than  for  last  year;  that  sum  being  for  the  purchase  of  supplies  for 
smith-shop,  being  reduced  in  consequence  of  the  re-establishment  of  the  shop  for  the  Senceas  and  Shawnces, 
ai'thorized  by  the  act  of  30th  September,  1850. 

EXPLANATIONS  TO   SPECIAL  ESTIMATE. 

Items  1,  2  and  3  are  now  items  under  treaties  ratified  at  the  close  of  the  last  session  of  Congress. 

4.  —  No  appropriation  having  been  made  at  the  last  session  for  the  payment  of  the  salaries  for  the  California 
agents  autliorizcd  by  the  act  of  28th  of  September  last,  the  amount  asked  for  is  to  cover  a  deficiency  for  that 
object  arising  within  the  fiscal  year  1850-51. 

5.  —  It  wa.s  originally  estimated  by  the  Department  that  the  .miount  required  for  holding  treaties  with  the 
Indian  tribes  of  California  woidd  be  8100,000,  and  that  sum  was  solicited  at  tlie  last  session.  Congress,  how- 
ever, appropriated  but  825,000;  a  sum  wholly  insufficient  'n  the  judgmoi  t  of  this  offi.-e,  to  cflfeet  the  objects 
contemplated.  As  the  views  previously  entertained  on  this  subject  have  umlorgone  no  change,  but,  on  the  con- 
trary, have  been  mucli  strengthened  by  information  subsequently  derived  from  reliable  sources,  tho  application  is 
renewed,  and  an  aprropriation  of  the  difierenco,  it  is  hoped,  will  be  made. 


STATISTICS   AND   TOPULATION. 


679 


6.  —  In  the  cxpliination  j^.v  i\  to  a  similar  item  tor  the  same  object  at  tlic  late  session,  it  was  stated  that  tlio 
amount  then  asked  for  (and  w  :  :!•  was  appropriated),  825,000,  was  based  on  the  best  data  then  in  the  possession 
of  the  Dt'paiiiiient,  and  on  part  al  information  received  from  the  (iovernor  and  Superintendent  of  Indian  AtTuirs 
for  Minnesota  Territory ;  and  tl;  :it  that  office  had  been  written  to  fur  further  information  as  to  the  sum  requisite ; 
and  if,  when  received,  it  should  be  such  as  to  render  a  change  in  the  amount  asked  for  necessary,  it  would  be 
communicated.  The  communijatioim  received  from  Governor  Kanisey  on  the  subject  exhibit  an  amount  far 
beyond  that  entertained  by  tlie  Department  for  the  aecomplislimont  of  the  object,  and  it  is  even  greatc  ban  it  is 
now  thought  can  be  requisite.  The  Department  has  therefore  fixed  the  amount  at  8"jr),000,  which,  added  to  that 
appropriated  by  the  act  of  !JOth  September  last,  makes  the  sum  of  850,000  for  the  purpose. 

7.  —  This  is  nn  expense  rendered  necessary  by  the  removal  of  the  sub-agency,  in  view  of  the  removal  of  i!'e 
Indians,  and  is  one-half  less  than  the  amount  reported  as  necessary  by  the  sub-agent. 

8.  —  It  was  found  on  an  examination  of  the  report  of  the  committee,  that  errors  had  crept  into  it,  and,  on 
representations  made  to  the  Department  by  those  interested,  it  was  deemed  proper  to  direct  that  tlie  Board  .should 
be  again  convened,  and  a  revision  be  made  of  their  previous  acts.  It  is  to  cover  the  expense  of  this  second 
Bitting  of  the  Hoard  that  the  amount  is  solicited. 

9.  —  Tlie  treaty  of  1S27  with  the  Creeks  sets  apart  the  sum  of  82,000  for  the  erection  of  four  horse-mills  — 
that  of  1833  stipulates  for  the  erection  of  four  railway  mills,  for  grinding  corn.  Neither  of  these  provisions  ha.i, 
it  appears  on  examination,  been  carried  out,  exeeiit  to  the  extent  of  building  one  mill,  at  a  cost  of  8000.  For 
the  erection  of  the  four  mills  under  the  treaty  of  ls;i3,  it  is  estimated  81000  will  be  rcfjuircd.  In  order,  there- 
fore, to  satisfy  these  claims,  an  appropriation  of  the  amount  end)raced  in  the  estimate  will  bo  necessary. 

10.  —  As  a  temporary  arrangement,  until  Congress  could  legislate  upon  the  subject,  appropriations  have  from 
time  to  time  been  made  for  keeping  up  an  agency  among  the  Texas  Indians,  and  at  the  last  session  two  others 
were  added.  It  is  proposed  to  continue  the  arrangement,  as  no  legislation  has  yet  been  had,  placing  our  Indian 
relations  in  that  State  on  a  more  permanent  ba.^is. 

11.  —  This  item  formed  tlie  sulyect  of  a  spe  !al  estimate  to  Congress  at  its  late  sessidu,  was  passed  by  the 
Senate,  and  its  eonsidoratiim  by  the  proper  committees  in  the  House  was  postponed  until  the  next  scssimi  —  tlie 
season  having  so  far  advanced,  that  nothing  coidd  '  o  effected.  IJelieving  the  attainment  of  the  objects  enntem- 
platcd  to  be  of  great,  if  not  vital  importance  to  the  peace  of  the  frontier,  the  subject  is  again  respectfully  sub- 
mitted, reference  being  had  to  the  communications  that  accompanied  the  previous  application. 

I'J.  —  Like  the  foregoing,  this  item  was  endiraced  in  the  estimates  of  last  year,  and  its  consideration  by  the 
proper  committees  postponed.  It  is,  therefore,  re-submitted  with  the  same  explanation  that  accompanied  it  last 
year,  which  is  in  the  following  words:  "The  constant  endjarrassments  to  which  the  Department  and  the  Indian 
conmiittees  in  Congress  arc  subjected,  for  the  want  of  proper  maps,  showing  the  country  inhabited  by  the  different 
Indian  tribes,  and  the  position  of  their  lands,  has  induced  the  submission  to  Congress  for  its  favorable  considera- 
tion of  an  item  which,  though  eonjeetund  in  amount,  will,  it  is  believed,  be  required  to  accomplish  the  work  in 
a  satisfactory  manner.  It  is  dc.-igned  to  place  the  work  under  the  direction  of  the  Topographital  Iturcau;  and 
the  maps  to  endiraco  an  extent  of  country  running  from  the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  Ocean." 

13. — The  appropriation  made  at  the  late  session  covers  the  interest  due  to  the  1st  January,  'l^o-J.  In  order 
to  make  the  appropriation  conform  to  the  fiscal  year,  the  amount  required  for  the  last  half  of  the  year  is  endiraced 
in  the  present  estimate. 

14. — The  favorable  reports  from  the  emigrating  agents  induce  the  belief  that  the  remnant  of  the  trilie  yet  in 
Jlissi.ssippi  will  soon  remove  West;  and  that  there  may  be  no  impediment  in  the  way  fi.r  the  want  of  funds  to 
meet  the  expense,  this  further  sum,  it  is  deemed  essential,  should  be  placed  at  the  disposal  of  the  IVpiirlnient. 

15.  —  As  explanatory  of  this  item,  a  copy  of  the  communication  from  the  then  Commissioner  of  Tiulian  Affairs 
to  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  dated  'Jd  March,  1S50,  is  herewith  submitted,  marked  A. 

The  Secretary,  it  will  be  perceived  by  his  eiidoi'soment  on  that  paper,  opened  the  case  and  referred  it  back  fnr 
the  reconsideration  of  Commissioner  Hrown,  who  decided  that  the  charges  against  the  fund  of  the  Imliaus  were 
erroneous,  and  that  they  were  entitled  to  be  reimbursed  the  amount.  Ui\der  this  decision,  an  appropriation  of 
the  sum  asked  for  is  necessary  to  satisfy  the  demand. 

It),  17,  and  18.  —  A  reference  to  the  accompanying  printed  copy,  marked  15 — of  the  report  of  the  Commiltco 
on  Indian  Affairs  of  the  Senate,  made  August  8th  last,  to  which  is  appended  that  of  the  accouving  olEccrs,  dated 


580  STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION. 

3d  December  previous  —  will  explain,  with  sufficient  distinctness,  the  fairness  of  these  items,  and  the  propriety 
of  the  requisite  appropriations  being  made. 

10. — These  amounts  were  carried  to  the  surplus  fund;  but  having  since  ascertained  that  they  are  needed  to 
meet  objects  for  whicii  they  were  originally  made,  re- appropriations  are  solicited. 

The  objects  to  which  these  sums  arc  applied  are  as  follows,  \iz. : 

That  for  the  Kanzas  to  agricultural  assistance,  being  balances  of  appropriations  made  under  the  4th  article 
of  the  treaty  of  30th  June,  1825. 

That  for  the  Wyandot''  for  unpaid  claims  for  improvements  arising  under  the  5th  article  of  the  treaty  of  17th 
March,  1842 ;  and  those  for  the  Osagos,  for  tht  objects  expressed,  arising  under  the  2d  article  of  the  treaty  of 
11th  January,  1839. 

20. — These  sums,  as  stated  in  the  estimate,  are  required  for  continuing  the  collection,  and  for  publishing  the 
statistics  and  other  information  authorized  by  the  Act  of  March  3d,  1847,  and  subsequent  acts.  The  second  item 
being  a  deficiency  in  the  amount  appropriated  30th  September  last,  for  the  fiscal  year  ending  30th  June,  1851 ; 
the  first  being  the  amount  rcffuired  for  the  year  1851-52,  as  follows;  — 

Salary  of  person  charged  with  tlic  work 81,600 

Copyist 720 

Drawing  materials  for  draughtsmen,  and  for  travelling  expenses  in  visiting  objects  connected  with  the 

StatLstics,  kc 480 

Engraving  and  printing  drawings,  liliioi^raphs,  and  maps  for  the  second  part  of  the  work 8,000 

Printing,  stereotyping,  paper,  presswork,  and  binding  for  the  same  (1200)  copies 4,500 

815,300 
21. — The  object  to  bo  accomplished  is  fully  expres.-!ed  in  the  item.     It  is  to  ascertain  what  Cherokees  are  east 
of  the  Mississippi  river,  who  arc  outillcd  to  participate  in  the  per  capita  payments  to  be  made  under  the  treaty 
of  1835-3(1. 

22.  —  This  sum  is  requirc<l  in  order  to  settle  the  claim  adjudicated  by  the  accounting  officers  of  the  Treasury 
in  favor  of  'he  Chickasaw  nation  of  Indians,  for  losses,  &c.,  on  provisions  purchased  in  1837  —  thus : 

Whole  amount  allowed 8112,042  f.O 

Amount  paid  out  of  appro./riiition  for  removal  and  subsistence  of  Indians 58,124  14 

Amount  in  the  Treasury  applicable 1,408  48       50,532  02 

Balance  required 852,510  37 

23.  —  As  explanatory  of  this  item,  see  copy  of  report  herewith,  and  accompanying  documents  marked  C,  from 
the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affiiirs  to  the  Chairman  of  the  Committee  on  Indian  Affiiirs  of  the  Senate,  dated 
May  10th,  1850. 


11.    PERIOD    OF    1820. 


I.    OFFICIAL    LETTER    FROM    THE    SECRETARY    OF 

THE    TREASURY. 


Treasury  Department, 

mh  Nuvember,  1820. 

Sir:  —  In  obedience  to  a  resolution  of  the  Senate  of  the  United  State?,  of  the 
3d  of  Api'ih  1820,  directing  that  the  Secrctary  of  the  Treasury  "cause  to  be  prepared 
and  hiid  before  the  Senate,  at  the  commencement  of  the  next  session  of  Congress, 
a  statement  of  money  annually  appropriated,  and  paid,  since  the  Declaration  of 
Independence,  for  purchasing  from  the  Indians,  surveying,  and  selling,  the  public 
lands;  showing,  as  near  as  may  be,  the  quantities  of  land  which  have  been  purchased; 
the  numl)er  of  acres  which  have  been  surveyed,  the  number  sold,  and  the  numlior 
which  remain  unsold  ;  the  amount  of  sales,  the  amount  of  forfeitures,  the  sums  piiid 
by  purchasers,  and  t!ie  sums  due  from  purchasers,  and  from  receivers  in  each  land- 
district,"  1  have  the  honor  to  sulnnit  the  inclosed  letter  of  the  Register  of  the  Treasury, 
with  tlie  documents  to  which  it  refers,  (marked  from  A  to  F,  inclusive,)  which  contain 
the  several  statements  required  by  the  resolution. 

I  remain,  with  respect. 

Your  most  obedient  servant, 

WM.   H.   CRAWFORD. 
The  Hon.  John  Gaillard, 

President  pro  tern,  of  t?ie  Senate. 


(BSl) 


r 


i 


082 


STATISTICS    AND    POPULATION. 


II.     OFFICIAL    LETTER    OF    THE    REGISTER    OF    THE 

TREASURY. 

Treasury  Department, 
Register's  Office,  8<A  Nocemler,  1820. 

Sir: — I  have  the  honour  to  transmit  certain  statements,  whicli  have  been  formed 
by  the  Commissioner  of  the  General  Land-Office,  under  your  instructions ;  also,  by  tlie 
Second  Auditor  and  the  Register  of  the  Treasury,  for  the  purpose  of  complying  with  a 
resolution  of  the  Senate  of  the  United  States,  passed  the  3d  of  April,  1820. 

The  Sci<)ud  Auditor  of  the  Treasury,  in  his  statement,  marked  A,  shows  the 
sum:-  A\hi(;h  have  been  paid,  and  remain  to  lie  paid,  under  trcatic.  made  with 
the   Indian   tribes,   to   indemnify  them   for   their  cessions  of  lands  to  the  United 

States,  I'lid  otherwise,  amounting  to  ...     , $2,542,010  00 

tatto  !cat  B  exhibits  the  annual  appropriations  made  by  law  on 
fliv.;.  ..t  of  the  surveys  of  public  lands,  from  the  4th  of  March,  178l», 
to  the  .ul  of  December,  amounting  to $1,802,140  22 

From  wliich  are  deducted  so  much  thereof  carried 
to  suri>lus  fund 125,051  14 


The  payments  for  the  surveys  of  land,  from  the  Declaration  of 
Independence  to  the  4th  of  March,  1789,  were 


1,670,489  00 

24,227  00 

$4,243,032  00 


Statement  C  shows  the  n  mount  of  land  sold,  before  t'le  opening  of  the  land-offices, 
and  comprises  a  period  from  the  Declaration  of  Independenoo  to  that  time,  amounting, 

in  acres,  to 1,536,552 

in  money  or  publl'    debt      .......  $1,944,244  00 

Statements  D  ;'.ud  E  show  the  total  amount 
of  lands  sold,  i'c  the  several  land-oli'cc?,  from 
their  institution  to  30th  Sept.,  1819,      .     .     .     18,001 ,930  sold  for    44,054,452  00 


Total  sales, Acres,     20,138,482 


$45,998,090  00 


— t>l 


STATISTICS   AND   POPULATION.  583 

The  said  statements  also  exhibit — 

The  total  amount  of  lands  surveyed,  in  the  several  land-ofTice 

districts,  at Acres,  72,805,092 

Whereof  sold, «  18,001,930 

To  be  sold, «  54,203,162 

And  that  there  have  been  sur\'eyed  for  military  bounties,  Acres,  12,315,360 

Of  the  sales  made  to  the  30th  September,  1819,  there  had  been 

paid  by  purchasers, $22,229,180  00 

And  remain  to  be  paid, 22,000,057  00 


The  Commissioner  of  the  General  Land-Office,  in  his  statement  marked  F,  estimates 
tlio  whole  amount  purchased  from  the  Indians,  under  the  various  treaties  and  cessions, 
at  one  hundred  ninety-one  millions,  nine  hundred  seventy-eight  thousand,  five  hundred 
and  thirty-six  acres.  This  statement  exhibits  the  date  of  the  treaties,  and  the  places 
where  held,  the  tribes  with  whom  made ;  the  estimated  number  of  acres  ceded  by 
each  tribe,  with  remarks  in  relation  to  the  cessions. 
I  have  the  honor  to  be,  sir, 
With  great  respect. 

Your  most  obed't  and  most  humble  servant, 

JOSEPH  NOURSE. 
Hon.  Wjr.  II.  Crawford, 

Secretary  of  the  Treasury. 


'v 


1  1 

J-s 

-4n 

-«            .«l 



'a 

£2 

M              C 

to  n 

s 

M 

SO           e^ 

<DO- 

l« 

1' 

cc  c 

IS    2P 

§§  = 

§§?? 

<? 

c 

g 

©'c'© 

©  c;  -1  eo               .1- 

'•''» 

.5  ^ 

r- 

©  «:  © 

PI             T- 

» 

ire 

[Li 

o  o              o      o  c 

©   ©   © 

©  ©  ©  c 
©  ©  ©  © 

© 

•ti  *i^ 

CO                o       ©  u- 

t« 

s   2 

irt  s- 

lO      io_ 

©©  p-  © 

»f^ 

»(•_ 

ft   » 

|S 

•^ 

«ccc  c 

ec'ir     c 

1— 

1— 

^   1 

PI        (7 

£ 

i. 

-*• 

rHrt 

Mn 

1  §" 

li 

CO 

S 

r^ 

-w  a. 

??§        1? 

g 

©s 

§ 

§ 

-1^ 

if 

ec  o              cc      © 

CC  >0                       OO         1(5 

1- 

IS 

f 

ir. 

©, 

PH 

CI 

Ofr 

e<5 

©  I<5 

eo 

« 

©  ec 

eo 

-?  2 

il 

cc 

(3 

©  ©  ec 

eo 

•^    s 

i  ' 

ec 

©  ©  ec 

eo 

CO 

3    a 

^1 

X 

1 

c  ©  ec 
©"pp-ec 

^ 

ire" 

M 

c  S 

o 

S      « 

It 

S3 

I-^ 

"Ji      ec 

e§ 

>> 

^ 

1— I 
0 

g"^ 

1 

1 

a 

c 

C 

^ 

Treaties  with  India 
Htals  or  2>resent  value 

1 
1 

9 

d 

s 

i 

* 
a 

1 

■3 

i 

A. 

F  ALL  AN 

before  the  3d  Augus 
•ecember,  annually . 

just,  annually 

fovember,  annnally  . 

•a 

3  - 
S    • 

o  ■* 

eptember,  annually . 

uly,  annually 

eptember,  annually . 

►ctober,  annually . . . 
)efore  the  1st  Augua 

>    O 

K      2-1 

1 

< 

» 
^ 

a^j 

1-5  W        O 

^ 

H 

s  ^ 

O  V. 

-a 

l-H 

-a  'C  -.1 

iS  ©      o 

e 
C 

^  fs; 

M 

^H 

ci  m  1-1 

—  <M        .  < 

^ 

H 
M 

1 
1 . 

QC 

© 
(51 

00 

<i 

'C  ^ 

"3  J 

r- 

PH 

H 

"^1 

g| 

c. 

c 

H 

s  ^ 

1- 

^ 

£ 

C 

<1 

CO                         11 

c 

CO 

.J. 

3 

^ 

.«j 

■u  ,<U 

•w 

=■    a 

a 

a 

c 

gS 

a       « 

C 

a 

a 

a 

«       t 

'i                       c 

a  ^ 

fc  a 

1^1              IMf 
1       g               1  g  fel 

5 

G 

c 

CuC 

CU        Eh 

&<H&<fc. 

ft. 

"^ 

o      c 

©  © 

©      ©  ©  c 

©       ©  ©  ©  © 

©      c 

^ 

l_l 

c  © 

©      c 

©  »c 

lO       ©  ©  o 

©       ©  ©  ©  © 

©      © 

o 

•   a. 

o"Sa 

lO  ec 

00       u- 

>o_       ©_©_© 

C>,          ©   ©^PH  © 

pp      ir: 

u^ 

B     a 
^     9 

•S   » 

'I' 

•<t"     ^"eo  o 

lo      co'im"     c 

■re       r- 

f-H 

e    V 

pi               pH         (5 

eo 

s 

1 

c 

i 

N 

«2 

.,  ►<* 

l£ 

u 

*n 

s 

» 

^2 

^ 

4J 

a 

a 

'A 

1 

1 

■» 

i. 

.s 

u 

m          ^    IT 

O     PC 

1 

a 

l_ -  -                                                                                                                                                         , 

584 






'^n      04n 

ff4n      MM      *4n            cwi-^n                                   t«t-4n 

tm       cm   1      n  ! 

t 

S?    S 

fC 

u 

Si 

!C  CO                                        O  CO 

ts 

55 

1^ 

<C 

C£ 

•i  CO                            tr  CO 

o  1 

S??i:i 

= 

^ 

!t 

CO 

CO 

g  ;-2  n  §  g           g  ^ 

;= 

!;^ 

s  ' 

"t,"^®.- 

^ 

2 

CO 

o_  5^  CO  =    o_                2^  co__ 

5 

** 

S,| 

g  a 

O 

oc 

o'-ico'='   o"                afco" 

•--I 

rH 

O         CO  O                                     rH 

rH 

-3| 
-  -*i 

1 

^r-l         rH 

rH 

lj 

ss?s 

g 

~i 

g 

gssg  §        is 

^ 

^"i^ 

§ 

CI 

=» 

•* 

^ 

,    "" 

o_-)<  o,®    CO                 c  It 

Co"       ofo"                                rn" 

at 

1     ^ 

£ 

1      1 

1       ej«   t  -Hrt    1 

^ 

e*fl    . 

e«fl       ran       p*fl             c<w-Hrt 

■.'in    • 

c* 

1! 

t; 

o 

CO 

o  CO 

CO     • 

to 

O 

CO 

^ 

O 

« 

o 

CO 

CO 

oco 

o  -^  CO 

O     • 

CO 

o 
S 

CO 
CO 

hH 

;o    -o 

CO 

O  -J  CO 

s_  ■ 

^■x 

— H 

Q 

■•*»  :o_ 

c 

-.3 

tr 

CO 

O  S0.J5 

-  S- 1  "'1 1 

1  ^ 

1*^  ,  ^— ' 

o 

O 

-     «c 

a. 

o'Sm 

^"   '. 

«: 

CO 

;^; 

'  i 

CO 

rH 

f-H 

m      CO 

rH 

*"• 

g 

1— 1 
o 

1 

»      . 

a» 

J 

,*fl-<«         ?M 

.       .                                                           .  .4C3 

ffWS 

CO  CO 

O 

CO 

«0 

H 

c-s 

CO  CO 

CO  CO 
CO  CO 

o 

2    2 

CO 

CO 
CO 

:0 

r/2 

58 

CC  00 

CO 

W 

•1 

Iff  co" 

CO  3& 

9 

O      iC 

CO 

5 

H 

5  " 

»^ 

i5 

rH 

~' 

^ 

f^ 

«. 

H 

J 

"I.     :|| 

•/2 

-5 

1 

Q 

R 

I 

3 
i 

^1 

Ui 

>^ 

.    ir-     ^> 

^               i-.i^ 

«            III 

s 

H 

'3 

a 

1 

> 

_> 

^     :S 

3 

1      'i; 

•1                 §1 

i^     "^ 

p 

HH 

"J 

'r 

S 

a               r- 

3                             3    -T* 

'f 

p 

1 

* 

HI 

-  5  c 

3 
n 

;3 

c 
'- 

r 

C                3       3                          C    U 

3 

a 

■f 

<1 

W 
»*H 

a 

a 

-3 

1 

s 

a  -     J    a             a\ 

1"=     1 

HH 

i 

>'. -:  J3 

^ 

/^ 

;*r 

5^          O    !<?;                 a:  < 

•r" 

u, 

H 

■? 

-.  _—     ' 

y 

^ 

^ 

^ 

■^         '£   *£              ~  ~ 

J 

-fc. 

C 

C 

■?  ■■=  r" 

n= 

C 

c 

o         ■^    5               o.S> 

■<^ 

ri  «  0 

CO 

rH                01      rH                           Ol  01 

C 

^^  :r 

JO 

c  ;; 

X     ;> 

i) 

W 

fi 

<— 4 

iJ 

i3 

.'s  :  i 

01 

eq 

ll 

^'  ;-! 

■tJ          • 

r 

— 

•  o 

o    : 

■40 

^ 

_^ 

_^ 

-«                                 .03                                  ■«      0> 

_^ 

0 

c 

c 

t 

c 

c                   S                    c  "s 

c 

c 

^ 

fl 

-A     a»     ry 

c 

c 

& 

ii               m     —                        o  — 

c 

CJ 

<< 

"  J 

t-    c    t- 

c 

c 

c 

c 

«  -    -     ?       ^                      5    i" 

c 

fl 

; 

■b  S 

:5    n    - 

r 

e 

« 

c 

e 

e3 

{^ 

=  ■3 

'^  a  .- 

"»                 f 

1 

£ 

§             =,      3                      t   3 

1 

: 

3 

<3 

c 

M 

w 

^Zt^ 

S- 

c 

t 

-■^ 

c 

o      1 

C  1=  =  c 

lo      c 

c 

c 

c 

c  o  o  o    o 

©         C  ■= 

o      o 

c 

o 

l-H 

*  ^— .  —  ,— 

1  o       c 

c 

c 

c  =  c  o    o 

o      o 

c 

o 

c'sl 

1  >rt      ^ 

-^ 

c 

iT 

C  -f  =•  O      CO 

1-       o^oi 

tl^       o 

c 

S     a 

-=  a 

-Tr-'co-c 

<K.  —         — 

"  l'4~ 

co"     of  S  ,^ 

rr          rH 

^       »- 

r^ 

J 

•   t-H 

s?; 

E-i 

E 

■  (A 

g 

Im 

5?; 
<1 

3 

1 

.2 

:    ^ 

i 

a 

1 

'.  ^  -a 
*   o   n 

;  rf 

:     s 

i 

7 

! 

i  s 

'■    c 

3       1 

h 

5       H 

J         ■*: 

1 

:  3  ** 

ff 

:  9» 
'■£ 

^    3 

■;  o 

i 

e 

i-  i 

3             5 

!           3 

a 

! 

>?; 

o 

V 

'  & 

4         <:. 

\       Zj                                            kX 

i 

y    c 

^ 

Pt.  11—71 


" 



v^MMn                im^m                ««•»«:••« 

NR>«it«lMn                       Hn«4nf««Nr*    1  p««       1  1 

t 

s 

CO  :e 
cc  3 

S 

SI          SSItg 

S  CO  0  0 

SISSS 

CO 

CO 

•3. 

SI 

1?          §  IS  :|  g 

S  Si  s  :5 
5j  ?f  2 1 

Sf  5  S  5 

u 

CO  —  —  -^ 

cc 

( 

1- 

^•"3 

t 

«c 

"J2                 tC':-'S'- 

«c  «  -^  -r 

«.  ^-r  r- 

•0 

3 

1— 

CQ                     p^  »-i  rH  ij 

r-«  ^^  Ft  rl 

^l 

*^ 

?! 

„  _'* 

l! 

0 

§s 

1                     Ifll 

§f  §  ? 

§:?:?§ 

1 

•a 

•X. 

I*  "S 

C  X  w^  C^                  ir;  ^  1  ;  *  ^^ 

M   C    9 

ac 

«t< 

"ef              i-T     f-'— 

in 

1  s 

0~ 

i-H 

« 

cc 

^ 

s? 

< 

1| 

•*0         *-lc^nm                         ««-<«                        ••Ps-*^ 

§?    ??;§          eSi          5§il 

Sit 

3           TiSiiS    i? 

ft 

e  it; 

Si 

--  -J 

^ 

M               er  M 

'^  CO 

P 

^*  —  —  *-^ 

--^ 

1! 

i-i'i 

:■>                 cc  ct 

ec  '.7 

c:  -z  -z  -z 

H 

c 

M 

CO                  tj  cc 

(C  cc 

o:_— _— ^ir 

ff.? 

^                    •■    — 

f- 

aC'-C 

c^ 

"co"                  w~«" 

cr  M 

Cfct'Tj-'t-l 

c/^ 

>. 

"3  3 

<c 

f— 

CO                       1—  rl 

0 

i-^  F^ 

f— ( 

f: 

O 

l^ 

Uf 

et> 

0 

0 

^ 

H 

5S 

0 
0 

-J 

^ 

M 

i 

« 

0 

0 

f- 

•,0 

0 

H 

-t 

to 

1-1 

o7 

Et 

0 

^ 

._i» 

06 

,"  " 

Oi 

1 

Q 

i 

H 

_>. 

_>^ 

>>^ 

>>i> 

s^ 

d 

^ 

'3 

15 

3 

^ 

3 

11. 

11. 

1 

u 

1— 1 

a 

s 

c  > 

■»                 > 

.a                t^  =  = 

lL  =     i3 

t^      a 

U) 

c  3 

a               ^  3  a 

-=^  S  a 

—     s 

•A 

H 

8 

u 

B 

X 

s 
■0 

1i 
11 

C 
u 

r 

•■3               -S  rt  n 

1     ill 

III 

1. :- 

H 

1 

X 

•< 

J               ■"'■=•5  ■£ 

<^^^ 

<  -  J 

Vi    *-* 

&: 

c  t: 

^ 

S               "a  1^  c;  i~ 

1'  •.  -t 

^  ,-  0 

Ct  TC 

n                cc-  11  — 

c? 

^  11  ■; 

CC  'M  CO 

cj 

CI 

c-3 

■/. 

W 

c3 

—  a 

I— 1 

hJ 

&• 
0 

M 

C5 

<1 

«1 

i 

-w 

•*j            -^j 

-*J              -w 

^ 

a 

C3 

E 

a           c 

a            = 

fl 

<1 

l^ 

0         en    & 

a       C  c 

i.  ii 

0 
p 

!l 

rt  2 

c 

3                      rt  a     rt    e 

rt  ;-   :j   :2 

1^4 

g 

E     -1 

g 

CJ 

Q. 

«u       >r*    - 

«       iC   aj 

jy 

^ 

oi 

ft 

a,     IS- 

cl,   Sa. 

(Ih 

. 

^ 

c  c: 

c=         C 

C'       0       C  C:  =  C 

0        c  0  0  c 

0        c  <:  0  c: 

0 

=  i   • 

0 

0  c 

0      c 

0       0       0  0  C  ■= 

0        c  0  0  c 

0        c  If:  1.-:  <= 

0 

H- 1 

?  =  i 

<= 

iC  c 

UO        C 

^0_       <=_       C_Qtj  =_■.- 

co_        o_^x  O.C 

CC             Ut  ■?!  CI  r- 

c  S-— 

-<  c 

(K 

•^ 

in"     I- 

"ct     m"     p^     i-Ti- 

-r        ^      pH  I- 

co" 

f-i 

1 

1         1 

d 

«3 

<3 

s 

? 

,£ 

< 

5 
s 

1 

' 

n 

^ 

9 

• 

a 
< 

1 

0 
s 

i 

c 
c 
E 

8 

1 

c 

r 

? 

- 

3 

|.   .  . 

■3 

■C 

*^ 

Id 

'o 

y. 

P 

a 

1                    0 

u 

M 



>«G 


CO 


cc 


W 


e  ^ 


*^  S 


1^ 


1^ 


■i    -3      0?      w 


QC         ^         ^ 


u 


s  ^ 


s   s   § 


g 


s 


<5    t 


A 


•s    ■a    ■a 


o  ::; 


M  !  li 


M 


Sf3S     J? 

|S  3  3  5  ;^ 
of  —  "3  5  ■/- 


5  ^  = 
o  3  S  Ti  o 


;5.-s 


-4n 

to   e^  TO 
O   CO  :o 

c- 

CO 

CO 

«c  o  CO  :o  o 

c^ 

CO 

•  O  CO  CO  o 

CO 

to  e  CO  CO  o 

00 

1-M 

to  w  Ot  CO  o 

■3 

1< 

CI 

SS    jl 


B       i      a 


3- 


-■S 


c  o  c  c  o 


c  o  c  c  c 

C  ■.t  i  S  1.0. 

>r:  01 1-1  CO  oc; 


,  id.^    •£    ■« 


:  3  --  ' 


--=  = 


c;  .i  _3  .C  _3  .S  _3  . 

•=  J    S'S    ""m    S""^ 
£    w  j3     «  <D  a> 


<!      fl 


S  ::    3 


^-    =    — 


g- 


"687 


i^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


■i^  lU    122 

£   L°    12.0 

u 


u 


i'-2^  r-^  1'-* 

< 

6"     

► 

Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


^ 


m 


\ 


^^ 


¥<^;^ 


'^Jif> 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WEBSTIR.N.Y.  14SS0 

(7l6)t72-4S03 


°^"^^ 
^ 


588 


i 


\ 


B. 

Statement  of  Approprialiont  and  Erpenditurct  on  account  of  the  Surveys  of  Public  Laiuh, 

from  the  4th  March,  1789,  to  the  'ilst  December,  1819;  furnMid  in  pursuance  of  a  Jteto- 

lution  of  the  Senate  of  the  United  State*,  of  the  3i  April,  1820. 

Apprnprl»> 
tlouK. 

Amount  npprt>priHteil. 

Amount  mrrii-I  lo 
iiur|iluit  luiiil. 

Balance  orai)pro|>rlation. 

KxiK'iiilituren. 

Amount  i'X|N'Iii|«<(I. 

17117 

»2(-,000 

8.:7,O00 

1797 

85,9f)4  20 

1708 

10,000 

10,000 

1798 

0,tm  4t) 

1799 

11,519 

e.5,731  41 

5,780  59 

1799 

12,7t)9  93 

ISOO 

4,000 

4,00t) 

1800 

11,910  94 

1«01 

28,200 

2S,200 

1801 

17,723  27 

1S02 

42,190  90 

42,490  90 

1802 

18,3S«  3ti 

1803 

29,743 

500 

29,243 

1803 

18,091  74 

1804 

55,900 

13,150  50 

42,449  50 

1804 

27,438  05 

1H05 

9(i,400 

725  20 

95,074  80 

1805 

1)9,187  02 

IKOC. 

140,400 

2,942  17 

143,457  83 

1800 

10«,S!»5  02 

1S07 

79,580 

3,494  18 

7I>,0S5  82 

1807 

98,115  59 

1S08 

0O,H74 

2,315  04 

5s,.528  90 

1808 

73,229  39 

11     1S09 

34,040 

29,711  28 

4,928  72 

1809 

52,903  01 

1     islO 

30,400 

70J  00 

3.5,095  34 

1810 

64,:!50  99 

!      1811 

14(i,900 

303  30 

140,530  70 

1811 

85,031  49 

1H12 

5S,020 

401   10 

.57, til 8  90 

1812 

40,431  71 

ISl.J 

7O,5()0 

13,793  91 

5ti,7(iO  09 

1813 

3.><,370  01 

1S14 

(i7,000 

25,03s  tin 

41,9til  31 

1814 

33,770  94 

1815 

39,700 

20,174  70 

13,525  30 

1815 

47,083  98 

IHKJ 

175,700 

!  50 

175,.').50 

1810 

113,099  47 

1817 

22S,-J00  .32 

1-5 

228,141  32 

1817 

232,408  43 

1818 

177,541 

177..i41 

1818 

175,034  51 

1819 

175,300 

175,300 

1819 

237,418  49 

1,585,223  10 

Balance  unexpended  on 

1     91,205  98 
81,070,4S!)  08 

the  31st  Dec.  1819 

81,802,140  22 

8125,051  14 

81,t;70,489  08 

Treaslry  Department,  RtgitUr's  Ofice,  .VoremLer  8,  1820. 

JOSEPH  NOURSE,  Register. 

c. 

Schedule  in  relation  to  the  Sales  of  Public  Lands,  bifore  the  Land  Offices  were  opened. 

Years. 

To  whom  Mid. 

A<Te«. 

LatiiU  rpTcrtod. 

Total  fhim  aaloa. 

1787 

SunJry  persons  at  vendue  in 

AetM. 

Anutii  ). 

the  city  of  New  York 

72,974 

35,457 

829,782  65 

8117,108  22 

9ti4,285 

500,0t)0  00 
70,455  38 

1778 

John  Clevcs  Pyinmcs 

Conimonwealtli  of  Pennsylva. 
Sales  at  Pittsburg  and  Pbilad. 

248,540 

1780 
1790 

202,187 

48,500 

1,5.!G,552 

151,fi40  25 
105,040  20 

(  Specie  or  public 
{      debt. 

8944,244  11 

Treasury  Department,  Register's  Office,  J>rovember  8,  1820. 

JOSEPH  NOURSE,  Register. 

590 


« 

s 

:* 

=0 

»»♦           MN  »♦*  Hf*                            -*»  -^X  -^1  n-  -^^ 

.«* 

w 

jif!  r-  1-  fh      «  -i  X  «  ;■.  —  1 1-  "i  r.  -r  —  I- 

n       1 

^ 

•^ 

0 

i'5 

j-r  •-•  r:  ??      ?c  r.  -r  «e  »  o  C-.  X  1-  -ri  •»  11  -i 

f  1-  If;  'rt  5      1^  -»•  •^  t  X  -<  us  c.  1  -  —  ?:  ^i  =■ 
i— f?      iS              CO      •*  >«      OS  II  t  X  1- ..•? 

X 

ca 

uc 

•I 

a 

* 

x^ 

8 

£ 

Q 

1-^ 

3 

^ 

'^5' 

i 

-*•                                           ,4»-»*.*i                      M*        rmrm-^ 

1' 

< 

^^ 

I 

r  i-  i  '^  T  ?  « s'  V  '"^  n  -  -  '~  ' '  ^  '  *  •*-  - 

5.-:  iiT  -r  —  ■ri  o  -M  .-  —  r  '^  X  —  r.  —  5  =  r". 

5 

hJ 

~s  *? 

1- 

1 1   , 

•=  •^: 

t  -f  1-  :r  -J  -T  c  c  r.  =  -/  -r  vr  1  -  r.  r.  =  •;  = 

O 

S,-? 

'^•'v'l  =. '•:'". '-1*1 '■"  -.'•".''.  ~.>-.~,~'.''.'z. 

0" 

<                          p^' 

1^^ 

1=  c";  fi  n'-^  4,^.^ '-  •■-'  '-^ = ^/^'  £'|!-.|^' 

s 

1-  t  "^  0  1.7  o 
tx  i_7  -t  71  X  -J 

3     Q 

ir 

n 

cc   1 

if  if  Jl'i^f-t  x" 

••.    ^w 

i 

!•  -^ 

nH  •** -*t -*T -^t  HM -*♦                          n«        •*! 

r»t 

P^ 

C   ^ 

o  -ri  C-.  ■-:  =  -c  —  ri  71  -^  -c  x  x  .-:  ;■:  71  x  r. 

-« 

o 

II 

i 

X  I*  "^  •*  1-  •*  »*  ii  X  -r  -T  •  "^  '"  -t  /.  ^  '— 

1.-:  X)  f  w  -^  1^  c  t-  X  -M  1-  0  1-  r:  —  X  ■-:  71 
71  71  'C  X  -c  :7  -.  X  —  X  71  /   z.  :7  ;7  "C  -c  r. 

0 

M 

j> 

x_  =;,  7  n  -  x_  —  c^  •  I T  '^  L  —. ' ":  — ,  t  "''^ ' "  -.  "^ 

H 

a 

**      H 

3 

'a  C  :7  77  77  '7  —   /    ~  7  ^  "i  7^  0  -t  r7  —  1  - 

fi 

»-3 
<1 

1 

i 

71  -.  '- '■■\77^77_-t  :7_  :7  71  7)        '.'.  :7  ~^  X  •7_— _^ 

*'i-'''jr-t''>-'''i->"— '•-<                 !-<'    if"' 

4i 

CO 

1^ 

erj 

.  o 

^   1 

t 

—T-^M          -*t^N-^M           -*<                                                              n«  -*I 

r»f 

M   H 

i 

•^  1.7  -^  c  ■-  1  -  '7  X  1-  -r  X  1(7  "C  X  r:  .-7  ■■:  o 

r.    X   -r  71  C   C   I-  X  —  r.  '7  C  •7  1-   X  -T  71  \D 

5 

>^ 

C-:  ^^ 

1 

X 

"  : 

'I'-i 

^H 

1- 

.d 

o 
•«1 

0 

C_  7  J  >\  l~  — ^  :7  Tv  "_  -c,  ;i  =_  77  7 1  x^  —  ■'t^  -r  — _ 

3^^f7l^7i^"''"'^'"'           ^"''IH''7i7'l 

1-^ 

■^r 

•  ?■ ""  I; 

a 

1 

i 

1  ":^: 

E.2  S.3 

?-  S 

H 

2. 

— IM        -w                                                 -^N        p:^-+t-*f 

«^ 

N^ 

X  r;  r:  'C  *  c  *  ^^  1-  —  '7  T  t.  t^  x  -t-  71  -+ 

— ^ 

H 

,5j 
•fit       ■^ 

1 

X   »  1  -  c  1-  71  C-  *.  »   X-   X    /.   •  -^  »*  C  :7  '-7 

■/j 

~  —  /^  —  —  ^  -5 

^       tj 

•A 

0  C   •-  il  '7  —  X  0  1  -  -I-  —  t7  '7  —  1  -  -c  —  -r 

Tl 

«*-                    "* 

O       -w 

1  -  -t  w  X    r:  71  1  -  ^;  ~.  '7  t7  •—  C    ^    X    l_7  ^    ~.' 

0  B  7j  -a  •"  I  0 

b 

CO  a:; 

0 

■^ 

C    rt    n    es  •-  •* 
tu 

O 

1 
? 

jt  ^  S  i~  r-  X  -t  c_  — _^ X  r-  ~  x"  —  ;:_^  71  ^  -.r 

*£ 

c   -3 

s 

0 

>5 

?   "3 

^       9 

< 

*"  if  m'iC  — 71' 71*71''^'"               >->'  1— '7f  if  x'-r 

0 

71 
X 

^3  ,. 

!S 

in^ 

^ 

0 

ta 

w 

s  § 

6 

•g 

H 

Sf 

u" 

0. 

<1 

^^ 

0 

1 

tZJ 

1 

1 

0 
s 

< 

2! 

0 

s  » 

* 

•  8   • 

nJ 

1-^ 

s 

II 
•c  ^ 

41 

ll 

B 

9 

:5i 

■5K  =  2 

u 

s 

h' 


fllil 


j'i 


K 

Ettiinate  of  the  number  of  Acres  of  I'uhlw  Lamh  which  have  been  turveijcd,  the  number-  gold, 
and  the  number  which  remained  unsold  on  the  'Mth  Sejitember,  1S19, pursuant  to  a  Jtesulu- 
tioH  of  the  Senate,  dated  3(i  of  April,  1820. 


Murietta 

Cliilieotlio 

Slo'.  Viivillc 

('iiR'iniiiiti 

Zuiicsvillc 

Wonstvr 

Dvlawaro 

l'i(|ua 

VincciiiieH   

•Tefforsiinviilc 

Tcrru  Haute 

liroiikville 

SImwnri'town 

Ku:-kaskia 

Kdwartlsvillc 

I'alestiiiu 

Vund.'iliii 

Detiiiit 

>St.  Louis 

Franklin 

West  of  Pearl  river 

Kiust  of  Pearl  river 

Iluntsvillc 

Cal.aha    

Tuscaloosa ,  . 

( 'oiioeali 

OpclousaH 

New  Orleans 

('upc  Girardeau 

Arkansas 

Davidsonvillc,  Lawrence  Co.  . . , 
In  Ohio,  prior  to  the  year  1797 . 


NiimlKT  of  acrea  nurTpywI. 


Numbvr  of  Bcru  aolil. 


5711,000 
2,ll.'S,4!S0 

i,o:ii"),atio 

:i,70!»,4-IO 

i.sm.xso 

1,244,100 

(<i'iL',480 
»i!tl,2o0 

5,f);i2,r)O0 

2,S<;2,!t20 

7(>l,i>00 

70!»,00(» 

3,018,240 

2,18S,XOO 

2,(i2ri,!M;o 

3!»1,(;ko 
1,105,920 
2,078,(W0 
0,777,700 
3,SOI,600 
!!,7S7,H40 
5,25:i,12(» 
5,4<iO,4SO 
!!,S!t3,700 
3,525,120 
0!t,120 
1,42S,4K0 

53S,240 

1,405,440 

1,359,300 

none  for  sale 

1,53(!,552 


Surveyed 72,805,092 

Sold 18,001,930 


Unsold 54,203,102* 


15<i,035 
1,02(>,030 
l,44(i,018 
2,733,088 
880,295 
889,514 
none 
none 
1,380,771 
1,218,757 
none 
none 
502,290 
407,027 
394,730 
none 
none 
58,450 
470,990 
002,434 
1,124,280 
951,131 
1,427,407 
1,208,319 
none 
none 
none 
none 
none 
none 
none 
1,530,552 


18,001,930 


*  But  subject  to  various  private  claims  and  reservations  for  schools,  &c. 


Estimate  of  Lands  surveyed  for  Military  Bounties. 


In  Ohio  for  bounties  to  soldiers  of  the  Revolution 
In  Illinois         do               do.  do. 

In  ^lissouri      do.  do.  do. 

Id  Arkansas     do.  do.  do. 


Survoyed. 


1,380,000 

5,7tiO,O0O 

837,700 

4,337,000 


Rt>niainln{t  un- 
IcH'atwI. 


87,500 
2,41 1,520 ) 
348,440  J 
the  whole 


The  lots  being  too  large  or 
too  small,  or  otherwise  unfit 
for  bounties. 


NoTB.  The  estimate  of  lands  surveyed,  includes  all  surveys  received  to  this  day. 
"         "        of  lands  sold,  includes  all  sold  up  to  30th  September,  1810. 

Oenkhai.  Land  Office,  Oct.  15,  1820.  JOSIAH  MEIGS. 


fM 


m 


\A 


■ji 


04 


•Jl 


r< 


Pm 


U 


H 


H 


J  1 


*;    ^ 


-     II 

•fl  .-'3 


<2 


i  i 


-2  -r.i:  -3 


«  ^  -3     jl 


2  -  ■"  S 


s.? 


i  -^         s 


i>^   i 


'.J     ^ 


S 


8 


4      ^ 


^         ^       II 


00  ^^        i-» 


J3       2-0-0 
G      O 


a     ^ 


•2ii 


*     .-r. 


02        I5-        ;5- 


1   l.il'a    i 


1. 


us    IS 


i    - 


00         rl         i-H  n 


--        ■§ 


u  a  to, 


-2  a  ..-g-^J  i 


.9     ~  bu    .  CO 

«5    3    S    3 


t5l 


^< 


^^  a__^j  ?  —  3^  5:-;  5^ 


:?  -e 


'^  «  ^  o  I-  :-  »-  :r  ^  :-  '^  *»  t  'ri  ■=  :?  c  ?t  •  =  c;   o  -r  ^  71  ^  rr       ^  :i 

©CQta      t>      >-      >  C      >-      &^      >•       &t,      X      V-  -y.         I 

. 1 


I'T.  II.  —  75 


593 


tft 


M 


H 


CO 


5-    "^ 


tH 


» 


w 


M 


^   ;    s 


ryj 


•sj     § 

S"^     'a 

£.9      r° 

•"a        iT 

V  a  ■/,  "' 
•5  3.5i 


^  t 


a     '-^      g 


iH  9 


,S  J3  ja 


t^  ? 


11    s 


15^ 


C'C      *:s      -ri« 


s  * 


§ojiC 


5  o  =  - 


-■a.ts" 


^H 


£  e 


?»!     »     e 


a  S  " 


£  "-9        2 
'W'  ^  1  f  I 


EH«^ 


s  e 


a  it 


a  o 


a ;; 


n  3  "  e  S  »t: 


|2 


^  s 


w '3  a      -a 
•c=         «2 


-SS  aig 


'    -1 


•irii   ^ 


«J 


SJ  a-s 


g  ."^^J 


I 


5;= 


■■2.1' 


S '^^'j'  a  S 


06-1 


'  3        . 


.=  3 


fj  I 


^  a  .i 


HH 


eg 


I- I- 1-1- 


"9  a  -a  a  ■ 


-1<  if5         O 


§ 


SC  1-1 


d)    M  o    CJ    o    S 

a>   V  o   V   a>   ^ 

S  2  £  e  £^5 

ja  d  ^  ^  .a  j3 


I 


ft       EC 


1(5      :  '5      :  o  '-s  '-^ 

<»  »        •  r-  »-  '  - 


5  3      3  5      3 

8  8      8  8      8 

.a  ^     ^  ^      .a 


s=> 


3       ^ 


^  ^t-H    -^  lO  " 


ja      j3  _-0  S  _-  _'2  03  -I  o  '"  rj  a 


•-sL: 


•3      ■a  a'O  s 


SM- 


-  fi 


§.! 


s:- 


M  spsu  so 


.y  a 


z     a 


•H  >. 


S     S  3 -a-  a -a  I-. 


•  Hi*  "3-^ 


:-  Si  ^  S"?  ^       a 


!^ 


^^s 


.a  <M  J3  '71  , 


»0      gjSf; 


Oci 


ffifs 


P  ,o  ^  ^ 


(t.C>4 


594 


!». 

tx   to 

-?  -a 

3 
1 

<5 

§ 

^  a 

?! 

■£.-a 

S" 

a 

•r  0 

tc.i 

.S  1 

i-3 

1 

< 
•3 

1,? 

Ck 


Uj        CC^  CO        UiVi 


■i  ^  ^  tin 


u 


aiS 


! 


595 


i, 
i 


III.    TOPIC   OF    LANDS  PURCHASED  FROM 

THE    INDIANS. 


MESSAGE  FKOM  THE  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES, 
TRANSMITTING,  IN  GOMPLIANGE  WITH  A  RESOLUTION 
OF  THE  SENATE,  A  STATEMENT  SHOWING  THE  PUR- 
CHASES  OF  INDIAN  LANDS  SINCE  THE  ESTABLISHMENT 
OF   THE   PRESENT   FEDERAL  GOVERNMENT. 

To  THE  Skxate  of  the  United  States:  — 

I  tiansinit  lierewith,  in  reply  t(»  tho  ivsulution  of  tlie  Senate  of  11th  March  last, 
a  report  from  tlic  Secretary  of  War,  accompanied  hy  a  commimication  and  other 
documents  Imm  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Aflairs. 

M.  VAN   BUREN. 

Washington,  July  20th,  1840. 


War  Department,  Ju/i/  20//»,  1840. 
Sir  :  I  have  the  honour  to  lay  hefore  you  for  transmission,  if  approved,  to  the 
Senate,  in  reply  to  the  resolution  adopted  by  that  Ixxly  on  the  11th  March  last, 
requesting  to  l)e  furnished  with  a  statement  of  the  purchases  of  Indian  lands  since  the 
establishment  of  the  present  Federal  Government,  a  rt'iwrt  from  the  Commissioner  of 
Indian  Affairs  and  the  accompanying  statements. 

Very  ivsiiectfully,  your  most  obedient  servant, 

J.  R.  POINSETT. 
The  President  of  the  (Tidied  States. 

( S9(! ) 


STATISTICS   AND  POPULATION. 


r.'t? 


1 


Wak  Dki'autmknt, 
Offlee  IniUitn  Affairx,  July  2i)lh,  1S40. 

Slit:  I  liiivo  the  honor  to  Hiiltinit  hort'with,  in  reply  to  the  n-Hohitioii  of  the  S-iinte 
of  tlio  11th  Mnn-h,  n'<iuoHting  the  ProKideiit  "to  cniiwf  to  Ikj  <>oiniiuinirati>(l  to  the 
Stniite  II  (letiiiled  eiiroiioloj^ietil  Htuteiiieiit  of  the  piirchm^eH  of  hind  niiule  from  encli 
Indian  trilH>,  within  tiie  liniitH  of  the  United  Staten,  Htnce  the  e^«tn)lli^4hnlent  of  the 
pri'wnt  Federal  Ooverninent,"  &c.,  thii-e  Htiifenieiits,  marked  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3,  whieh 
fnrniHh  tiie  informiition  with  as  much  aeeiniu  v  as  it  eonid  In>  roHeeted  within  tlie 
time  allowed. 

For  the  jierifMl  U'tween  4th  Mareh,  IS'JO,  and  0th  May,  IS;{(),  the  stateuHMit 
whieh  aeoompanied  the  Ainuial  Report  of  this  Oflice  for  18157  has  lx;en  ndoptctl,  with 
tho  exeeption  that  it  has  In'en  drawn  out  into  greater  detail,  ('oniputations  have 
been  made  of  the  eost  of  the  tix'aties  made  In'tore  and  since  that  jH>riod,  which  arc  as 
correct  a»  it  has  lM>en  |)o."sil)l(>  to  make  them.  In  making  these  calcnlatioiiK,  the 
aggji'gates  designated  in  the  statement  (H)  which  a(!Companied  my  rejMirt  to  yon  "f 
tho  2d  Fehrnarv,  lS."i9,  npon  the  resolntion  of  Ww  llonse  of  Representatives  of  the 
14th  of  .Taniiarv  of  that  year,  have  In-en  assumeil  in  all  ca.ies,  except  where  they  have 
been  fonnd  to  Iw  erroneons. 

\'ery  respect fnlly,  your  most  olK'dient  servant, 

T.  IIAIITLKY  CUAWFORD. 

Hon.  J.  R.  PoixsETT,  St'crelan/  n/  War. 


U4 


f 


1-3      S 


W2     tt 


04 


w    "^ 


c/3 


55S 


ss 


-.ii 


t 


3  i  I 


2  S  s  ;  ;  3: 2  'S' « 

o'  CI    i":f  "f  {I  ;c  >rt  x' 


xzS'zvz    ZX^X^XXZ    X    zx 

S    X 

i  X  5  ^  X  X  ,-  X  5  X  y  J  2  :^  .J  X  X 
4i  4  2  5 -1      ':i  — •^■r.rf*      Mil 

11 


S  S  il55§i§2gSSSSIS5SiSgSSSS    8S 


—    C  c  c  -r  < 


1-  '^i- 


x'x';;x   x^s   x,%x   X 


X  Ti  ^  ■?  I  5 


=>    11    t  -M  —  -:)  «  irt  X 


1-1  1"  4( 


irt  I-  t  -r      »-  ■ 


5?§§g| 

c:-r.■^' X  3. 


s 


©  »  s  o  © 

tS  11  "C  t  x 
»"  W  CC  »  11 


M  .2  ^  -♦ 


g?. 


.  S  .S  5  =i  5 


"t,  ~v '  "V  "t  'v  "^. '"»  "t.  "t. '  T  ~  '-i.  —-  "^  *'■- ' 


>00©-t©©©00 

>©©i-c=.-r  =  x© 


S  i  2  ?  = 


©  X  vr  II  y.    It  e  c  ©  X  n 

II  -J  I-  i.i  II  c  'rt  c  f  II — 


,1  .1  _  •..  w.  .1  r;  I-  X  -t  X 

-  -r  I  ^  -t  ©  'C  'J  >ii  M  X  ^* 


x^vi^x  ©,r;,©^X__©^>(^__r-_^ 

—'if        if  X  if  sT-^r^-tir        l-Tl- 


i  ©  i  -i  »  —  r.  c 


.1    S  ©  n  -^  •-  CI 


»-i  '^<  ka 


*  3. 


t-   J   n  J  js  ;-3 


•t^  —  II  CI  M  -f  -f  ic  ic  1(5  lO  i.T  »  h-  'X  — .  ffl  t  -2  -r  r^  00  OC  TC  ix  ac  (X  cs  •.  ~ 

r.  =  ©©©©©©©©©©©©©  i  —  '-  —  '-  —  —  —  —  —  ■-"-"•-  — 

I-  X    X  »  X   X  X  (X'  QC  QC    X  X  X   3C  X   X)  GC  OC  00  X    X  «  »  X  ■»  OC  OO  «  ex    X 


s. 


■!  s 
II 

si 

.    9 

li 


.2 
lb 


& 


a  .S 

II 
^? 

a    ® 
—    a; 


Its 


w 


I 


H 


bi 


t^ 


in 


M 


W 


c« 


Eel 


!-.Vl 


i£ 


§    SiSSSSiiStSiiiSi? 


-  -  ?i  =t.  i  - 


£      L-  5  -3  i 


if    ?? 


:  3  1-  —  5  ••; 
:  11  -ji  r.  -^  -. 

E  M  -f  t  Tl  1- 

5  -  5  1-  .'■: 

?rIS^='i 

T.  z  ::  I-  t 

-r  ^.       •-  x> 

1 

as 

s 


sot-—; 

5  -ji  -I  c.  • 

i  :';  /.  -r  ' 


;  r  5  ?•  ?•  ? 


lS    C     —    1-1       —       t   •-     —    —   t   11  I  -  —   ■—  —   -        - 

—  1-1  CO  l-r-M  —  l-ri         «  — 


I  —  ■—  I  -  r.  rr  I  -  x 


S   f  i-55. 


SIS 


-  s  * 


■■\ 


^  ■-  ~.\   oi 


=  rr 


g  2 


c  a    o    c  c  = 
c  s     /     c  '■  X 


S  ?J  U 1 7.  ?  i  ?i  S 


t\ 


'^  « 


fl  5-3- 


»  5 


s  a 


•c 


g. 


"   3   = 
■S    H    !e  - 


•^^  'a  i    ^ 


O  C  I*  U  C  fe  X  O'er  i< 


•=  * 


t 


I 

?  -S  - 

S      3        - 

•2  El 


«  s  & 


rt   £  ■^  ,  2    33  "^  ^  ■  -■  ■  s  "T*   c    S 


oo 

^__ 

O 

W  -»•  M* 

>(? 

iC 

If? 

.. 

1-^ 

r— 

nr 

ir 

_ 

^ 

^ 

r- 

.— 1 

^N 

t\ 

Tl 

'Tl 

Tl 

'Tl  Tl 

•ri 

Tl 

Tl 

""■I 

""1 

"■1 

-1^ 

oc 

X 

Ot 

X 

X 

r-1 

QC  X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

». 

X 

X 

f— « 

X 

f— • 

X 

X 

X 

—     =     <3     O 
?^  <  J  •< 

O  -a    >.  "^ 


5lt!) 


i 

g  2  S  c  5  e  o  o  e  = 

O'~000=  =   =  =  00 

1 

000=2 '--"''"^=  -  ="MTi-f  =  o  =  -^  =  =  r.  0 

<< 

*   ^  0  =    5  -/.  f  —  CI  "T   X    =    =   -^   X    Tl  =  -C  =   I-  '.T  CI   1.    - 

u 

^mk 

0. -^  "V'^v  "t-,  •  •  -f  —  -T.  I-—  =  r  -f  r.  =  -^  'f:  =  —  CI  CI  0 

•s 

C.  —  CI  l--1"'ilC   -'  A   S  ~  ^r'  ~>  :•  -f  iC'-C  -y  C  f  "C  -T  C"  C  r -I-"  I-" 

4 

0  —  -c  -r  CI  A  -c  ■-:  =  U-.  •-  :c  ,-  ^  -f  :c  -r  :z  T.  -r.  t  —  ci 
*^'-"          ci-p-i<      .- —^     cir^i-o_     ?i  CI      r- -o^ 

o 

Q 

c 

'O                                                       pn"           ci"      co"                           I- 

1^ 

a 

0»                                                                                                         -« 

o 

< 

L 

s 

o 

0000-C  00000000000=000000 

0 

c  ■** 

l-^    .-~',    ■"*    *,    ^     —     .— ■     .~.     .— .     -^    <^   ^c    .^    — i^    ^^    .■>.    .^    ^    »^    .^    .—1    ^fc    ■».,  ^fc 

pA 

34 

2SS§i';:?ZJ^??gii'>'?;S5§;^S?i5i 

•0 

B  5 

.     i 

D 

8* 

o_  c  j,  =V  o_  c_ -^  — _ -t . .c  C-.  1  -  ^  o_  0  o_  c:_^  o_^ -r  . .c^  c, --"^  c  1  c  1, -c 

^  if 

■— "ic" o'l.-f-f  •?;■". c"-rcc  c 'C-cT-f -r  o"o'o'"r-ri.c'"-r"o~cf -i-''- 

Q 

1  = 

;;  N  N      CI  X  CI  r.  X  .rt  M  1-  —  .—  -•  «  -t  CI  ~.  cc  -"I"  —  1  - 

J 

c  2 

x__                  CI  -*  '.-5  CI          i-i          1"  1-  ©_     CI  rt      1-.  v:_^ 

W 

a  a 

->"                                                                 eo                       r-T 

0 

O 
< 

< 

CO 

•*3 

Sa 

00000 

•  000 

■  ^  ,^ 

00 

'0 

'0 

'0 

1  '1 

00000 

-■^     ^^    -^ 

S  0 

0  0 

0 

0 

0 

b 

« 

•0  c  0 

=  9* 

0  0 

^      1 

-^ 

0  0  5  5  0 
0  t  0  i.c  -r 

:  ci  c  S 

=  = 

ij 

Cl 

§ 

2 

1    ? 

w" 

2  c 

iT'iS-S-rT 

. 'ic  -r  Cl 

0  -r 

CO 

0" 

0" 

-  .-1 

-r  1-  CI  -t< 

:  ;c  0  Cl 

Ti  5 

c  0 

Cl 

i.C 

Ii 

•3-B 

•          »"• 

p_  *■ 

CIO_^ 
Cl 

Cl 

H 

> 

•    •         •         •    ' 

*'*^    m! 

(2   s 

< 

ll 

0  0000      0  3  w      — '  0      00          0      0          0 

0  -^ 

WH 

1 1 

w  CI  X  0  CI      .  0   0   X       .00      .  0  -C      .         55      .0      .         0 

g*s 

Q 
1— 1 

X  — _,  CI,  c,  r:   i  — „  c  1^  =_  0  =  o_,  0  o_  x__  ii      10,  0)  o_^  cj      0  c 

a: 

o^'-'—'-f      g  x"— 'x'  3  •^'  x'  5  o'cc  ?  3  cf  c  — '  S  3  0"  = 

»    3 

Is 

SSL    "^    "^    jft>«                ^vv     «« ■      ^^     ^^        V     i^^     ■  ^4      ^^    «^    ^^      ^"^                          ^     ^^       ^^              #«h       ^ 

0} 

i 

1— 1 

tl 

— -                                                                                  Cl"                                             uc" 

3 

C   " 

■5 

i 

1 

—         <s 

< 

^ 

or=i-=c  =  cocooo=  =  ooroo          co 

's 

O 

I 

c  6  X  ^  =  5  5  .  c  =  -:r  r!  0  —  =  5  0  ?  0  3  0           =  - 

"^ 

M 

^ 

ot)  0  Cl  0  •—  =  0  -c  1-  c:  f-  X  'C  0  -^  c  CI  CI  CI  0  u  u  -t  — 

fe 

1 

s 

CI  to  0  t  "  =  "  CI  tc  -.       -f       -c  —  0  Cl  ?c  re  -.            0 

^                   c.-:oi--i      0      ,-xi--f      c               -^ 

ft 

Q 

0"                        K— 'cf                  Cl"            cf'-'o"       t"                  i.c" 

s 

?5 

g 

^ 

s 

O 

,4 

CO 

g 

M 

.3    a 

C/2 

2 

.2  - 

<1 

3 

•3-3 

HH 

3 

b   CU 

O 

J 

s 

"2  >§ 

i::^ 

J3 

3 

"S  - 

•c 

1 

1 

c 

:iJ 

—  »-•_? 

3:i    -  '= 

j 

"i 

3 

1 

■a 

51 

H 

ja 

=    -    c  ^^ 

-0 

a 

ft 

9 

1 

O 

H 

1/ 

CO 

a  _J 

1 

S'  g  =  3  3  ■/]  _ 
=  1  5  £  ?  -2  1 

illlil 

s  ;l,  5,  i,  -/i « ;^ 

2   n         V 

1  1  a^  ft 

T 

ft 

0 

Ji 

41 

0.1 

11 

W  i-H 

a   u 

§ 

^ 

Cl  CI  Cl  Cl  Cl  CI  M  M  «C  TC  CO  M  M  CC  TC  M  OT  OT  -f  -f  -f  -f  irC  in 

CO  ?C  OC  CC  TC  TC  tC  ?C  CC  7C  CC  ??  TC  TC  TC  TC  ?C  CC  ?C  TC  ?C  CC  CC  ?C 

H 

(X    X    X.   X-  X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X   X    X    X   X 

S 

"S 

1 

COO 


« 


o 


s    a 


Ct* 


H 


Pc< 


cfi 


21. 
It 


S^^ 


.^1 


5  « 


O  O  O  O  O 

<=  o  o  o  o 

C  O  O  O  C5 
«S  O  C  O  I- 
»-'7  Xi  M*  X'  71 


ooooooooooooococoo 
<5~3^c;  ooooooscooocco 
50  if^fcTcf  ffr-t"o'"Qo"e<5~«»r'W"a.''o'o'"i- o  ■c' 


ei  o  f-(  (?i 


eo  C-.  o  f-  c  I-  c  ?7 

l-l  <M  30  C  M  O  M 


o  o  o  o  o 

o  o  o  o  o 

O  O  ©  O  S5 

tc  O  O  O  I 


OOOOOOOOOOwOO'COOOO 


cc  ^  o  o  I*  ic  I-  -t  'O  »^  t-N  X'  ^^  o  o  o  r^  o  o  '^  S  2  T 


«l  O  -!■ 


W  C<  M  O  CI  11  -t  O  X  M  «  ir:  (/_  o  O  I-  C-  "O 


<M  O  F"  1 


Ot  C  C  I  -  C  1  -  = 

i-i  II  X  C  Jt  l- 


oc^cooooooooooooooooccoo©o 
^  X  -r  o  -f  11  o  ■=  Ti  -t  o  •,;  '^  X  iji  c  -^  xj  c  ■—  o  c;  o  o  = 
>.i  ii_x__o^ii^;i_H-t_c-^o_c:_^i.i_^ir;  o  «  t  ic  x  o  o  o  ~  S  5  ■£ 

1  r  "^  os"  o"  1  r  x"  cT  o  r-T  cc"  ■^'' 1  r  if  ■1""' -f  o"  if  cr" -i"  xT  cT  cT  o' cT  I - 


H  10  rl  X 


11  lo  o  c  c  ic  o  I- 

H  H  O  O  II  C  i-i 


1 

r 

44 

1 

a 

g 
CO 

T 

o 

1 

1 

c 

o 

I 

>> 

s 

;2 

t 

[)    • 

o    c  "^    "    fc 


55 


oc^ 


P  wS,o 


CO    S    t-H  3    en 


ta-<    •"  n    MM    fr"    '"^       n    Li»    taM 

^3h  cof?.  oaiaj|?K=i 


iO"Oin;s«05005C«C'.o«rocri-i--i-i^t— ^-^-xa^xxm 

CCCITICICICCCICOCICOCCCCCCCOdCOCICICICICCCItCC'rcO 
X   X  X   X.    X  X  X'  X    X  X  X  Xj  X  X)  X_  X  X  X  X  X  X.  X   X    X  X 


Pt.  ir.  —  7G 


COl 


1. 

ss         s     s           s             s           s         ssss 

4 

IS             SS                i                   g                S             -Sfl 

3^0 

i3 

~\                *l        ®*                    "»•                        ^-                    '"                '*=.=.- 

p*^ 

51 

m'  to'                    e?           «                          ^                              tc                          'y'                    Ci  ::  -r  t 

=   •*   S. 

,^ 

*-  3D                     rt           *o                         ei                              CI                          ;:                     s 

•^2   8 

1 

J__ 

^                           ^             ©^                           o                                 o                             1=                       cv 

«      M            -              «-            a          ?; 

s 

■.    s  s 

ll 

=  c  s  ©      c 

e  s 

©  o           © 

©      ©      © 

9    ©      © 



99© 

'  i3  1 

a 

i  s  =  ©     = 

©s       « 

C          ©         © 

©   ©     © 

C    =    ©   © 

■s 

"^■•s    ■ 

S  ^   £   3         C. 

©  3                © 

«      ©         C-. 

9    S  —  9 

III 

•  3  =  ° 

S 

©   ©                © 

©           ©           X 

-     9       ei» 

=  5  *  i 

~  5* 

=  7  1  §       ff^ 

*i;  ©             c 

©          ^_        CI 

?  J-  o 

w 

Si^ 

— '  •-  ^  .»*       — ' 

?r© 

e*  -r            ©' 

cT      ©"      — 

ci    x'       x 

9'  /."  ci  Ci* 

.-:  -fl-'  f 

'■  ^  g 

2» 

•  E 

—   X  -T  O         91 

St  -r 

C  >■')             ■- 

»-.         ri         «■! 

—      £• 

CI  r:  -r  9 

u  -5   S 

li 

tf>                            1- 

© 

•t                      CO 

If 

,1  8 

^11 

ti 

©  © 

© 

9 

3 

:  9 

- 

:  9  9  9  © 

,<*, 

cr-  = 

© 

© 

: » 

:  ©  9  9  9 

s 

Im 

r  = 

R 

s 

9 

© 

:  9 

e 

•  it  -  -  - 

-.% 

© 

?l 

© 

© 

;  ©_^ 

•  '^_  H  =_  5 

1                «    *S 

-s 

5^1 

-1 

X* 

io 

X 

X 

;  ©  e-r  -t  ^ 

^    ! 

^ 

Tc  w 

<fr 

.-^ 

© 

I  t- 

Cl 

:  1-^ 

s 

*i 

©* 

pf 

■■ 

:  *^ 

CI 

:cl 

5  ^  s 

si" 
0  g 

it 

o  e  ©  ©      © 

_  * 

o  ©          o 

o      e      e 

O      9         e 

9   9   9   9 

999 

£ 

c  =  ©  ©      © 

©  ©  e  s      c. 

=  = 
s  © 

e  ©           c 
©  ©           © 

©       e      © 

5  S     r; 

©  ©  © 

^ 

©           ©          X 

£  «'  ci  — 

9  s  5 

i  s 

1 

-  =  w 
£^1 

©  E  =  ©       e\ 
i-i  s  —  .--T      — 

ri  ©' 

5,  rj  ?%*  £ 

©  —           ©' 

©          X          CI 

?r    34*    -f 

CI       9   •-   ^. 

cJ    r.        x' 

:t'  -r  ■^ 

<^ 

-  -  5 

—  X  -»  «       e  1 

f,  — 

©  -»■           »- 

^     ©      t- 

©       1- 

CI  ©  •»  (C 

S       4) 

H' 

W                         51 

^                      X 

«      t\ 

^i-       x^ 

at    0, 

tD 

M* 

" 

cI 

•3   "9 

S9 

s 

s 

S 

;s 

© 
© 

§ 

im 

© 

© 

© 
© 

:  9 

:  9 

s 

e 
e 

»3  "■s 

mi 

© 
©~ 

X 

fix 

■  X 

•  ©' 

© 
©' 

©, 

t  . 

iy> 

: 

>rt 

Cl 

J3    0 

Ifs 

13 

?:_ 

X 

-  i}-3 

•» 

1 

5i.r 

©~' 

© 

- 

©       © 

© 

-  ' 

Z" 

T§l 

02 

7 

© 
3 

S 

© 

©       © 

©       © 
©       c 
<I       ©__ 

© 

© 

9 

1x1 

» 

■=ii; 

©" 

5 

?i 

,^ 

i; 

x" 

||     1 

>  - 

CI 
© 

1^ 

C"! 

•-'» 

n 

5 

^k 

© 

g 

2 

e 

£ 

?l 

© 

9 

j      to          »      ' 

1    "^ 

^    fe 

mi 

"^ 

7. 

y. 

©* 

£ 

O 

t 

l' 

^1 

..-? 

s    1 

Eh 

^ 

V-^ 

©                    © 

e 

O         © 

CI  9 

©      © 

'?  1 

1-^ 

^« 

^t: 

1:       .5|,, 

®         «         © 

H          ^  E 

1^, 

]?i 

Hi 

fc 

C   f  ^ 

^■i 

..<  ..-?• 

'T         — 

-*    t  •* 

'« 

u 

»— 

5 

h 

^'  = 

:^ 

X 

s 

%    '• 

= 

1   -3    9    = 

i- 

~- 

x 

T        ■ 

"^ 

©'  .--r  x' » 

-    .  4 

■c 

"i 

c 

•A 

Ti 

/       I 

© 

©       r:  r- 
1-      9^  s 

■    |i 

K 

- 

«* 

-t       ci  c 

■J^ 

< 

Cl 

a 

Es 

•   ■ 

a   .2 

•^ 

1 

n 

©  s  ©  ©  ©  c 

©  c 

^  •  _  »  ^ 

©       ©       © 

©  9  ©  © 

©  9  C 

?l  S   S  s   s  -»■ 

5  = 

5  7  ^  fi  © 

X        ©        ec 

CI  ©  CI  1  S 

=  X  ci  © 

©  ©  = 

4)     -^ 

"  I-  f-  ""J-  ^-  !- 

■C  -r 

■»  5-1  «■;  r:  — ^ 

X          ©          © 

51  t-  t-  9    9 

X  -t  —  = 

1-  -r  1 

-     rt 

fe  J 

i.V  ?i 

x"         ©'         -T* 

—  rc*  ci  c  9* 

-r  ci  —  x" 

..-*  x'  at 

■   ■^'C  ij 

c'^ 

' "  c  c  ©  -3  V, 

-r  ei 

—       «       c 

•-  '.-l  -P  9   3» 

X   t^  CI  CI 

r:  r" 

©_  ?l  rt  ifl  X 

ft   T 

X  r:_^          © 
1*  V          »» 

-r      •—      ^ 

F-*              -*               Ifl* 

«=.  •'•  -.  •-. '-. 
ei      ^  -*  I'. 

Cl  ^,  Cl  - 

■4  t* .—'  »rt 

©  = 
e-i  c 

-  !    1 

*< 

e 

»« 

y. 

=       ** 

-^-^ 

!-:««(C3i«a      iflrs      »~aie«30          <o      ©       ««      ■-.im.ii©—      -^©xc-i      ©«-i 

1    i 
s 

ii 

«M©—  —  M         ©M         ©  —  MMM               F-         «         Ct         ©©-CIM         —  MMW         MCS 

4 

is 

XXXatXOC         OCX)         XCO«.X0D               (K         ce         OD         axaCXX         XXXX         XX3 

.s 

J 

s  ; 

"3     • 

1 

a 

2 

1 

Ii 

^   1. 

« 

4 
1 

4 
1 

«   : 

5  • 

» 

e 

1 

t3 

■o 

TS       \ 

^■1 

C              g 

1 

1 

S 

3 

3 

51 

3  ; 

i: « % 

•o 

1? 

3 

c'icSS'S       ! 

-1 

til 

J 

w«i                                  ^c.a.a        : 

i-e 

?£SS     »»      3  333  3     a-=S.r3-r.     ...,,; 

J:  Sf? 

tn  i. 

^ 
S 

fn^uso        SS        k!Kkk»        fe«t»2ki>       »»»»»                               t  ^  *^ 

iiim  II  mil  fiiiri  mu  ^i^^  iii 

i^K 

C    "W      *» 

-* 

— 

■- 

'» 

^ 

^ 

C 

. 

<;. 

^ 

U 

U 

;j 

^ 

^^•^ 

c. 

^ 

;. 

(^ 

1- 

602 


i 

sososs              «           o                   e               o           ■=               o  =  ==           9 

S   =    =  =   -==                     O                O                             »                      »                O                      C=.   =    =                3 

-# 

-^__-.__,                      —                ,,                            ,_                      _                __                      ^-__                ,, 

=  s 

=   =.  ~   =  3   x:                    O              »                         =                    O              -*                    o  "   Ti  Z              b 

i  2 

-.=.-;=;=. '1             '-'■.          '"i                 *-              ■*          — .             -:— -1*^.         "•- 

ti 

'■'  i-i  ft  S  i-  .'-1                      go                O                            «                      3                X                       (,  ^  ^  "                — 

t 

i-ii-i^oi                    e-io                              -^^c^ 

* 

«                                           ^                                                           Cl 

a 

5  = 

sosee3s9= 

9  e 

o  o  «  c 

o  e  e 

s  e 

e  e 

«  9  «  e  o 

S  O  C   S   S  C  9 

s 

£-2 

scs=.sceec 

s  e 

sees 

SCO 

c  c 

c  s  c  c  = 

C  O  C   3  C  S  S 

'ST., 

£S   =  =   =   £S£e 

1-  3 

<=  l~  =  c 



c  c 

s  — 

—  ----, 

—   3  1-  ■"  Ci  ^-  C 

M 

-  s  ■■:  s  e  X  s  c.  s 

X  — 

O  M  C  X 

c  c  c 

C.  '~ 

s  ri  rl  —  —  Ti  o 

-  «? 

C  S  tl  s  s  <  -  <^  s  t 

<&  — 

(O  -r  c  1= 

c  c  -r 

.^^3 

H  =  i 

t^  ■/  —  «*  »i"  •  1  e-i"  t"  ffj 

>n  e 

cT  V^  1- 

1-^  ?i 

1-  ■^' 

c*  ;  i  to  "1*  -• 

~.  ?■!  r-r  d"  »"  «  1-^ 

.^ 

cfi" 

>-«  ffl  o  ^  o       •nf. 

X  tl 

X  r:  =  St 

<e      r: 

^  ^^ 

tc  = 

h*;  c  X  to  '.T  s* 

ll 

9i  to 

M  <-:  y*  t^ 

Tr 

'^  ^           w 

e-i  „  ^  te  ^ 

J 

1 

i^ 

c  o  s  e  <=  s 

:    :  e    : 

s    :   :   * 

:  9    : 

:  o    ' 

:  o        : 

:  s  e  e  = 

s  c^  c  =  =  => 

*    :    : 

:  ®    : 

:=s 

:  9 

?  ^  s  c    : 

• 

^!4 

S  S  S  C   =    =1 

•    '  s 

, 

•  c 

■  o 

—  s:  c  e 

■  ?i  •  ■ 

^ 

V 

=    S  ■-)  =  C    X 

:   :  o 

n    :    :    : 

s     • 

;  -»• 

*.  tf  ■  ■  ■ 

otj 

!=  =  n  c;  =  1- 

:   :  x_  • 

^.    : 

-_— ci£    ' 

«— 

ai-f 

U-:  x*—  -i':-;  .-s* 

.*   :  xT  ■ 

5   i   : 

■s    : 

; « 

■  •• 

"'id  .-1* 

:  x'   ;    ; 

o 

"  ff*  c  ^  r: 

•   •  w   ■ 

i  =5    " 

•  1 

:  ^ 

■ 

et 

E^  K 

:     N   t 

s»   i   : 

:  ci^ 

:  M 

u 

ici" 

a 
■3 

=«====c;o 

e  o 

c  c  o  o 

o  o  o 

«  o 

e  c 

^ 

=  ©  c  =  c  =  c 

5  :    . 

o  o 

«  CO  o 

o  ©  o 

s  c 

c  s 

c  =,  c  =  5 

c  =  c  —  s  c  s 

*s 

O 

i.n 

»3SSSC:SC  =  © 

I'-  o 

c  »-  c  c 

=  c  o 

«  e 

c  — 

C  C  u*  to  CI  —  c 

o 

■=  s    . 

CSOCSX    CSC 

X   — 

=   ?l  C    X 

COS 

e  -r 

e  o 

^  ci  S  S  •£ 

Eh 

ill 

e  c_  (?i  o  s  1-  1-  c  — 
lo  x"  —  *c  fi  -n*  fri  -f  fi 

■*T  X  s  to 
I-^  1-"  x'  .o 

c  s  to 
=  ^'  ci 

•rt  cT 

I*  c  ■^ 

c:  cJ  o"  V  t' 

CI  rt  C  —  T  >-*.  SO 

-a 

l-H 

^  N  e  ^  «      »n  1- 

X  IM 

—  —  c  ?: 

«o       — 

c« 

I':  c 

-«•«  1- w  S»   X 

o 

gs" 

e-i  (C 

c:  e^  c-i  M 

e^ 

—  f^ 

1-.  —  T  O  M 

« 

<■§ 

c-r 

is 

:5 

:§ 

i~ 

S 

r 

o 

s 

5 

3 

w 

^'ii 

:  c 

5 

c 

9 

k 

o 

01 

m 

c^ 

a; 

o 

a 

H 

i  f' 

:  c" 
:  -^ 

ri" 

-i 

li 

c" 

:3 

y-  "  - 

; "" 

:  ^ 

— 

CI 

a 

Q 

<   5 

f 

S    • 

W 

l^t. 

:  » 

e 

c  e 

o       c  c 

2 

=>      c  c  c  =.  c  s    : 

"o 

: » 

o 

c  c 

s        e=  o 

o    : 

c       c  c  c  =  c  s     ; 

3 

Q 

Lj-S 

:  ? 

o 

S2 

i    t§ 

c  i 

? 

1  llllii  i 

a 

J  ^55 

>.  5 

CI    !S 

■/        ^-,  Ct 

1 

■^    : 

X 

W 

:  =' 

*S 

r:'  '— 

— '       e  i  r:' 

Cl        -» 

I 

^'   : 

=*      cT  1^  ci  o  — 'ci*    ; 

1 
1 

B 

p 

'•A 

w 

o 

2 

P 

i 

|i 

:  c^ 
:   :  X 

-0_ 

^. 

§ 

5    ■    : 

1  s 

1 

p 

o 

:    :  ?r 

!  g 

o 

ca 

•< 

o       e  = 

e  » 

c 

c  e 

_ 

o      o 

C  3  ■=  =  c  o 

i=,.  =  S|ll 

s.    ^.Ss. 

r  :   CI 

1=^11 

X  c;  s  X  —  X   s 

as 

CI 

S^*       «"J^' 

y.      -■ 

1 

"?. 

>-,      ;«:= 

=^  -  -^  *-*-  ^  Z 

B 

is 

c  ^  c 

=:  = 

:    : « 

o 

o 

•* 

^ 

=      <= 

®    i   i 

?" 

w 

.--:  CI 

.      .  (O 

CJ 

CI 

*l 

O                  X 

£    :    : 

w  k  ^ 

—  (J  — 

X  r^ 

•    •  ^. 

•\ 

o^ 

r>^ 

C-                CI 

;   -^ 

j::^ 

ci  I-*  ;f 

if  "" 

:    :  12 

X 

"S 

^*2 

-■  =  =;5 

i  \  \ 

w 

•■":  ci  ~ 

X. 

ri 

c 

CI                  X 

c-i    :    : 

^^ 

.-^M 

x" 

:    i*'*^ 

I-C 

to 

"4 

«s 

cT          *o 

cf  :   : 

1 

» 
H 

<~ 

-1* 

.i!f 

•^ 

t 

n 

SB 

see  Seseoo 

o  » 

e  o  e  e 

-t  o  « 

*- = 

'c  e  = 

e  =  « 

e  s  o  e  o  e  9 

u 

X   C   C    (E  'J^  PI  -t  tl  C 

■^  c  =   c  -:  -■  '■'  ",  = 
C)  1-  -t  c  — ■  ^  X  r;  X 

£  Ei 

CI  c  c  5 

t  S    X 

X  --0  c 

to  X  c-i  =  to  e  X 

Pm 

C   "T 

Vz  ~  i  '■" 

-r  c  -i 

=i'  ci  C-; 

?:?! 

i  ^-  -- 

CI  —  c 

e  =  '-2  -'  = 

1-  CI  1-  =  -1  C  CI 
3-;  1-  C   to'  to  1-  — ' 

H 

■=  .5 

o.  ta 

*~_ 

1-  U-:  «  jc  —        M  1-  -r 

C   X 

'•z  r;  r. 

^  h 

C  re  r-.  rr  CI  It 

O 
Eh 

:•» 

^c 

X              M  N 

«  £  CI  — 

CI  rt  CI 
C  1-  .f? 

X  c  •— 

*c'  CI 

—  1-  O  --I  «vl' 

1 

•^    ;.. 

ti-.  =t  r 

rc  C-:  3s  Si  M       e-i  h-       X  I'. »-  Ci       oc  x  o       m  re       c  —  to       -t  —  x  ■'!  .-^       x  i-  ffi  r:  r:  ^:  '■-: 

csMricrtc  —  r?       r?M        — wr-M       e^M       ecr:        ei?irc        rcrt  —  sn        —  ftrirtr7r::t 

cc 

x^ 

'*   X  X  X   X   ■/,  X  X  X        ex  X        a   X  X  «(        <X  X  X)        <x  x         x  x  x         x   x    x  x   x.        x  x  X   X  X  X   X 

H-l 

!  - 

i   : 

9} 

IS 

5  t; 

c   2 

a 

B 

tt 

?     - 

\A 

?      B 

4   • 

/■= 

-  1 

e 

s : 
H 

»■:  « 
111 

■    :    ;  o 

t: 

1 

3 

i 

2 

1 

-    'i 

:  t„  (»   Ih        ' 

1 

^      -TI 

C    C    B 

oi  tf  ta 

315  :=      i- 

•  c        •    • 

:  0  o  0    : 

= ■? 

K 

1 

!    :  rt 

r  a  Id 

< 
a 

H 
li 

^  o 
:  e 

3 

ii 

1 

u 

1 
5C 

il 

^5 

= 

S3 
5o 

c 

< 

1 

e 
t 

1 

■  T 

32 

;  5 

'i 

t 

5 
5    ■ 

i 

- 

1 
■ 

it 

;  jn 
S.J 

E  E  E 

3 

2- 

^1 

603 


sss 


CI  F- 


«♦  -f   T,    S 


et  (C  'It  (, 


;  s  ■-=  c  c  ® 
■  =  -sec. 


s'  t-  "P  *i  s         .o  n*  —  sT  ; 

eC  —  "^  "^  ..n         :?.  e=  —  S  e 


111 


k"   I.':- 


Eh     ii 


3 

-  — 

—   ; 

3      •      * 

^  ei 

ffl 

tt  F-< 


H   H 


If  J 


S-W  lis 


l< 


-II 


»S 


»2 

P5 


^m4       m  w  *■  >: 


H-        I 


:s 


C)  ^ 


5 1  ?  t » •!: 


■  •£  cc  te  tc  ^  t-  r«  i»  I-* 


03 


-X  x  a.  »-*:«.  X  r.  x.  r.  r.  x 


:  r?       ^  !■!  r 


K  "*t       -*  !-  I-  «       -r  —  'T  ei  r?       ^  —  *i  x  X  o 


(T   X  «  X 


cc  X.  X  X  x; 


cr.  X  X  X  «,  'X 


H  i'i  1  i  i  1 1 1 1  i'i 

-Kart  =  rta«a^cS^       E.  —  E. 


,_    .Q    M    ^  ^ 


i3§ 


■  .•  it  »   Sc 

r  d  a  d 


V,  7.  •/.  7.  7. 


1     '.    w 

1 

i 

Si 


f/.  7.  7.  'A  P  I? 


G04 


ex 


OS 


W      5 

X     I 
W     i 


m 


M 


^ 


m 


£  3  •! 

lif 

SS 


SBt 


.& 


:l^ 


a 


•  I-  c  =  c  w  =  i!T  w  c  -y.  =  c  =■ 


(X  I-  ■rt  O  O  C  C  O  -M  ■: 


C  I  -  y.   I  -  I  - 


«;  X  C-.  ec  ■ 


't^f-'—'—  'i\  'f:  -I-  '■■t  —       " 

p^  CI  o  —  ic  y-  c  -c      o 

P^        l-t  r-  Ci  Tl        o 


OC  --i 


c.  CO  I-  o  c  =  o  =  I.":  c  ^  X.  o  ~.  o 

C  I- .C  C  C:_^C^C^<=  TIC^S  I-  X  l-C^ 

■ST  ix  •^"  -.<i  »f  f'  o  x'  r^  sr"  CI  ic  x"  ■rr  ■.-? 

iC  a.  Xj  1-1  51  C  i-i  CO  CI  'C  o 

«C  CI  I-  rl  CI  c:  CI 


i-l  l-i.C  CI 


c  »o 


O  t£   =    X-    S", 


«.!^. 


CI  O        -l< 


-^  PH  to 


O  O  O  O  O  : 


>  O  C  O        C  O  !=■  =■  o 


c  -c  c  c  X  c  ~  e  ic  CI  ■_ 
»-_  t,  "t- '  -  "t.  "t  "t  ■-.  ^  *  '-.  ~:  ^. 
or  -t-  -c  ire"  x'  x'  cf  I  -'  ~r  £  '-'  >—  ~' 


MO         p- 


cc  cc  I-  »f: 


3  £  =  ' 


■IJ 


<!c3 


^  Se 


S.        S.5 


ill.H  s 

O     3j     CJ     SJ     4)     Cj  ^^  •■"  * 

^,    63    rt    rt    rt    rt  .-    e3    'i 

^  &  fc  It  (E  l«;s;3  j 

>>i    -•    >«    (4    -^    f-*  r^  ■— *  r 


:o 


a.^  ^j3j3^^^„_ 


■a  d   C  ^  ^ 


a>   D   5j  _i 


uuupei=iCQUbU;t>£;<:^:^c> 


o-  S  .a  ma 
«  =  a  Si  § 

■^  §.2  5^^ 
"  -5  ~  >S 


005 






a       SS  ^ 

q 



*t 

lI 
[ 

CO 

1  i'l                      J 

1 

eq 

j«-                                                           s 

L 

M 
Eh 

O 
03 

M 

a 
■< 
* 
u 

ntity  of  merchandise 
fied  in  the  treaty. 
>  not  defined  in  su< 
admit  of  tic  area  ( 
.crtaiued. 

inber  not  known, 
roceeds  of  sale:'  of  39 

X 

„  ^4  i 

- 1                         i  s-^ 

"«1 

=  1                                                  S!      |J 

iZ5 

ISjSJi                                                ^     'g'S 

•<    a 

fi      ->5 

e     •« 

u 

•c 

> 

^ 

Oi-H        OO        OOi?IO-.»-.0  0'JIOOCCOC 

o  c 

tj 

I 

t  m      ire  T 

o  c  CO  ire  1-  ire  o  «  If:  o  o  o  o  X  D- 

o  o 

ti 

<-^S5         ^  7 

•r  —  o,cv5-.  —  o  r-  t  i.^o  o  ;c  ill 

o  ire 

^ 

ij 

C'o        CI 

t;-*  .-.'-*, C';ro'i-ri-i.re"ire'"c~M"ire'-.3      o  -.r 

xT 

H 

«0-1<               rl                     SI  O  >H  0?         C<J  'tl  71  11  O         r- O        CI 

X) 

o 

r- 

O 

o 

1"    ■ 

CI 

H        1-1              C»             rH        m 

Xj 

-«1 

< 

■it 

C"—        OO        OOCIOtC-.TOlMOOOOOTIO        CC 

M 

h^ 

^ 

s  s 

t  lO         ".TC 

1      o  o  'C  ire  1  -  ire  o  o?  ire  o  1.-:  o  o  x  x 

O 

•w 

Si^ 

f  -f>        r-  r 

<r  ^  C  c:  c  — ^o  1-  X  ire  X  o^o_-t  J3      o  ir 

-f 

o 

„  •■ 

""if 

-t  C3         C  ? 

ire"  •»!■■" -t"  1  -  ire' 1  r  o"  1  -  o  1  re" -f  o' T  r  a' -.r 

o  c; 

••** 

M  i.O         -f  •- 

r->  C-.  1  -  to  :o  ^  r?  cr.  ^  o  -t  ire  -c      r-  i- 

M 

M 

5 
s 

III 

«t>-C               1-1                           l-i-iM         M  —  Iti-iO         •.;? 

«r                               1-5      i-T                      i-T     m" 

11 

1—1 

u 

<  ** 

« 

'iif 

OO 

i    8 

•  o  o  o 

o 

•o 

•  o  ©  o 

o 

& 

"i 

o  o 

o 

12 

=■  <=■  ..- 

o 

w. 

o 

i-ire_ 

x- 

■  iT,  £  ?- 

•.o_ 

•  '^^  "v  '' 

1^ 

p 

te 

2.5  S 

ic"|.^ 

:  o'lTiP 

.  o" 

,r^  ScC 

1 

H 

1^ 

z-- 

-    X.  11 

.  11 11 1-1 

11 
IP 

r1 

•    «r 

lO 

OJ 

.a 

'^ 

!Sj 

Sg 

•^  o 

o      ooo               o      o      ccc 

n 

1 

l»    w 

•r      o  o  11                «      11      ex  -^  y 

rs 

'^>*-l 

irt  o 

c       corr                11.  —  ,11-t-t 

X 

W 

ill 

c-lT       S 

£  O'  ire  X.   a           —  a  x   a  •—  C".  — 

a 

-!•" 

Pi 

M  1-1         S3 

O  O  11  S-.    §  3     S     O     C  11    O         111-           C    3 

X 

■1 

"''^   1 

;zi 

ts;r-.ii     ;^^          'tS?;'-S!;     o,i 

>^ 

-.o^ 

v^ 

t  2  c 

•-.                         51 

x" 

t^ 

d  8 

'Jl 

o 

s 

!«- 

1 

1^  C 

ooooeooooooo      oc 

<r.  = 

o 

—  c 

tx  ■—  c  X  '.r  11  o  o  «:■  -t  «  o      o  oc 
11  — .o^-.o  ire  i.re^o  o  -r 'i  -  o^     o^x 

c;  o 

1- 

if 

c  -t 

t  -t 

M 

M 

■- 1 

ire':r"o''ir«rcro~«ririroro'~    ^'i 

'     x*o 

to" 

(X  e^ 

•a  -c 

tr  1  -  to  ?r  X  -c  o  i.re  c:  ei  1-  o  «  -f  co 

O  M 

to 

o 

e 

_ 

<X   O  .-  X  1-  O  O  11  '.O  O        O         CI  X 

x__c: 

X 

e- 

eoct     i-i-'i-o'-.o      f"     ire"     o"-»t 

i--"i-- 

iP 

J5 

d 

ire  1-1  r-H  rH                                  1—1 

T-i 

-11 
-11 

<i 

/; 

h3 

•    a! 

[^ 

•    1 

o 

a 

M 

eS 

1 

3 
■S 

1 

1: 

:    1 

•     Hi 

o 

.a 
1 
a 

4 

4 

0 

P3 
O 

c 

•a 

1 

C 

Ottoes  and  Mi: 
i  Pawnees  . 

9 
1 

Piankeshaws  . 
Piankeshaws  a: 
Pottawatomies 

Quapaws  . 

Sacs  and  Foxe 
Sacs,  Foxes,  ai 
i  Sacs,  Foxes,  S 
Sbawnces,  and 
Suminoles  . . . 

73 

§  : 

a  s 

1 

ll 

.H  S 

(So 
II 

1 

606 


APPENDIX  TO  STATISTICS. 


POPULATION   OF   THE  UNITED   STATES. 

SEVENTH    CENSUS. 


Alabuiiia 

Arkansas 

California 

Connecticut 

Dclawaio 

j  Florida 

j  Georgia    

i  Indiana 

;  Illinois 

j  Iowa 

I  Kentucky 

{  Louisiana 

j  Maine 

j  Massachusetts  .  . , 

I  Maryland 

I  Mississippi 

Michigan   

Missouri 

New  Hampshire  . 

New  York 

New  .Jersey 

North  Carolinaf  . 

Ohio 

Pennsylvania  .  ,  , 

Rhode  Islanil  .  .  , 

South  Carolina  . . 

Tennessee 

Texas 

Vermont    

Virginia 

Wisconsin 


Wliito 

Prijuiliitinn. 


Frpp  rnlornl 

i'lipullltli'tl. 


Tkhritorif.s. 
District  of  (,'olumbia 

Jlinnesota 

New  Jlcxico 

Oregon 

Utah 


42(!,r)15 
12t),(|-l 

3r>!i,is9 

71,-JS2 
47,120 
5l:i,(is.3 
98:i,t!84 
8r)3,()5<» 
101, S30 
770,001 
i!r)4,271 
r)Sl,!);20 
98r),4!IS 
41S,70;! 
2!)l,r):!0 

a»;i,ir)() 

r>!l2,17(i 

317,;!.')4 

3,04-->,r)74 

4()0,2S3 

r..V2,477 

1,0-)  1,1 01 

2,2uS,480 

144,012 

274,77:') 

707,310 

]:W,131 

.11 2,75(1 

804,140 

30;i,()00 

10,517,885 

38,027 

0,102 

61,032 

20,000 

t25,000 


2,250 

.587 

1,800 

7,415 

17,057 

020 

2,5S0 

5,1((0 

5,230 

202 

9,007 

15,085 

1,312 

8,773 

73,043 

X08 

2,517 

2,007 

477 

47,448 

22,200 

27,271 

25,030 

53,201 

3,543 

8,700 

0,2S0 

020 

710 

53,000 

020 


Tolftl  Frpp. 


428,705 
102,058 
100,800 
370,004 
80,239 
48,040 
515,000 
088,734 
858,208 
192,122 
770,728 
200,050 
5S3,232 
004,271 
402,700 
202,434 
305,703 
.504,843 
317,S31 
3,000,022 
4s,'i,552 
5S0,458 
1,077,031 
2,31 1,0s  I 
147,555 
2S3,544 
773,500 
134,057 
313,400 
04H,055 
304,220 


itnttvu  PupulHtion. 


342,S04 
4ti,082 


2,2S0 

30,341 

302,000 


221,708 
230,WO7 


SO,SOO 
300,410 

"8*0*280 


110 
288,412 


384.025 

240,510 

53,340 

'473,626 


034,501 
100,848 
H)0,HOO 
370,004 
90,012 
71,0.50 
733,448 
0S8,734 
858,208 
102,122 
012,7x8 
4(18,440 
.5X3,232 
004,271 
.540,586 
472,085 
302,703 
648,410 
317,831 

3,000,022 
488,023 
753,.505 

1,077,031 

2,311,081 
147,555 
314,499 
023,310 
100,0(>4 
313,400 

1,231,870 
304,226 


409,200 
9,973 


10,027,0X5 

48,000 
0,102 
01,031 
20,000 
25,000 


3,175,002 
3,087 


10,008,730  I  410,173  I  20,087,000  i  3,170,5X0 


21,832,021 


No.  of 
lti>|irt<ii. 


FrartlnnK. 


4 
1 
1 

8 
11 

0 
2 

10 
4 
6 

11 


33 
5 
8 

21 


10 
2 
3 

13 
3 


*72,280 

3,444 

*74,(JO(( 

•89,408 


*77,534 
51,714 

20,0SO 

4,71S 

*75,470 

33,032 

21,020 

*57,251 

*78,070 

4,175 

20,x!ir) 
*X0,204 

30,725 
*91,55X 

20,113 

3,8X0 

9,2X0 

*02,x:!:! 

*53,S53 

45,0s!» 
*x0,002 
*72i3(!2 

32,300 

13,744 

23,120. 


233 


RKC.\PITULATION. 


Free  States  

Slaveholding  States  .  . . 
District  and  Territories 


Tnliil  Fri>o 
Pi'ltuliitioii. 


R<>]>r(>Ni>iititt[vo 
I'liiuihition. 


13,.533,328 

0,303,758 

100,824 


110 

3,17.5,783 
3,087 


13,533,300 
8,209,220 


20,087,000  i     3,170,589     |     21,832,025 


Total  Free  Population 20,087,000 

Total  Slaves 3,170'589 


Ratio  of  Representation 


23,207,408 
03,702 


„r^o-7-,'w ."?'?',",",'''  "'I"-"""'"''-'  popolntion  bIvp|.,  m  thi-  np»rp«t  npproxImBl.-  rnllo  for  2.1.1  nii-ml^rji.  riho  numlH-r  fixcl  l.v  Irw.1  i,  rnllo 
TP,;.  si  r;.  »M      H  f    ""  ""'y,--^'  inoml».r«-l™Th,jr  llio  n.ni,iiMl,i,t  1:1  tn  1«  a.,..it.n„l  lo  the  Stntfj  hHVIng  tho  lars«t  rwiduary  lraoliu„«. 

1 1  !■  Sliili'j  whlrli  thus  ,miii  a  mumljer  uro  de:il|!nat«l  hi  the  above  liiblf  l.y  u  *.  I  so  "  j 

t  lilrludliig  710  liiUiuiiK.  ' 


11---.—- 


{  Kfitlmntcfl. 


(•ill-) 


NOTE. 

The  prepared  statistics  of  population,  including  the  ancient  periods  of  Indian 
population  in  America,  which  are  referred  to  in  my  report  of  August  14  th,  are 
crowded  out  of  this  volume,  and  are  necessarily  deferred  until  the  next. 


The  figures  introduced  at  the  head  of  paragraphs  by  Rev.  Mr.  Worcester,  in  §  IX. 
A. ;  by  Rev.  Mr.  Lowry,  in  §  XI.  A. ;  and  by  Mr.  Prescott,  in  §  V.  B.,  refer  to  tho 
order  of  the  topics  of  inquiry  mentioned  in  the  original  circular  of  "Historical 
Inquiries,"  &c.  issued  by  the  department  of  Indian  Affairs  in  1847,  and  printed  at 
the  end  of  Part  I. 


(608) 


